FR QB Black&White

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(QUESTION BANK)
dOWNLOAD mOBILE aPPLICATION:
JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION

(SEARCH PLAYSTORE)
BY CA PRATIK JAGATI
APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (PLAYSTORE)
WEB SITE : WWW.PRATIKJAGATI.COM
EMAIL: JAGATIDIGITAL@GMAIL.COM
PhONE : 7002630110/9864047095
ANDROID
MOBILE APP-
APP JAGATIDIGITAL
: JAGATI DIGITALEDUCATION
EDUCATION(JAGATI
(SEARCH PLAY STORE)
DIGITAL EDUCATION)
UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
index (Part 1)
Sl no. chaPter name Page no.

1 IND AS 16 Property, Plant & Equipment (1-19)
2 IND AS 38 Intangible Assets (20-31)
3 Accounting & Reporting of Financial Instruments
Financial Instruments: Scope & Definations (32-34)
Classification & Measurment of Financial Assets & Financial Liabilities (35-53)
Financial Instruments: Equity & Financial Liabilities (54-62)
Derivatives and Embedded Derivatives (63-72)
Recognition & Derecognition of Financial Instruments (73-77)
Comprehensive Illustrations (78-96)
Financial Instruments: RTP/MTP/Past Papers (97-123)
4 IND AS 103 Business Combination and Corporate Restructuring (124-185)
5 Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements of Group Entities
IND AS 110 Consolidated Financial Statements (Consolidation Procedure for Subsidiaries) (186-230)
IND AS 111 Joint Arrangements (231-238)
IND AS 28 Investment in Associates & Joint Venture (239-248)
IND AS 27 Separate Financial Statements 249
Test Your Knowledge (Question & Answers) (250-271)
RTP/MTP/Past Papers (272-292)
6 IND AS 21 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates (293-304)
7 IND AS 2 Inventories (305-316)
8 IND AS 40 Investment Property (317-324)
9 IND AS 105 Non Current Assets Held for Sale & Discounted Operations (325-334)
10 IND AS 23 Borrowing Cost (335-346)
11 IND AS 24 Related Party Disclosures (347-356)
12 IND AS 116 Leases (357-390)
13 IND AS 10 Events after Reporting Period (391-400)
14 IND AS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates & Errors (401-413)
15 IND AS 113 Fair Value Measurment (414-421)
16 IND AS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities & Contingent Assets (422-434)
17 Index Part 2 435
index (Part 2)
Sl no. chaPter name Page no.

1 IND AS 36 Impairment of Assets (1-33)
2 IND AS 19 Employee Benefits (34-59)
3 IND AS 33 Earning Per Share (60-79)
4 IND AS 7 Statement of Cash flows (80-99)
5 IND AS 12 Income Taxes (100-129)
6 IND AS 102 Share Based Payment (130-149)
7 IND AS 108 Operating Sagments (150-161)
8 IND AS 34 Interim Financial Reporting (162-169)
9 IND AS 115 Revenue from Contracts with Customers (170-220)
10 IND AS 20 Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance (221-228)
11 IND AS 41 Agriculture (229-237)
12 Analysis of Financial Statemets (238-264)
13 IND AS 1 Presentaion of Financial Statements (265-280)
14 Framework for Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements (281-282)
15 IND AS 101 First-time Adoption of IND AS (283-318)
16 Corporate Socilal Responsibility (319-326)
17 Integrated Reporting (327-330)
ANDROID
MOBILE APP-
APP JAGATIDIGITAL
: JAGATI DIGITALEDUCATION
EDUCATION(JAGATI
(SEARCH PLAY STORE)
DIGITAL EDUCATION)
CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 16 – PROPERTY, PLANT & EQUIPMENT
Illustration 1 - Deferred Payment Credit
On 1st April, 20X1, an item of property is offered for sale at ₹ 10 million, with payment terms being three
equal installments of ₹ 33,33,333 over a two- year period (payments are made on 1st April, 20X1,
31st March, 20X2 and 31st March, 20X3). Implicit interest rate of 5.36 percent p.a. Show how the
property will be recorded in accordance with Ind AS 16 and also pass necessary journal entries.
Solution:
Ind AS 16 requires that the cost of an item of PPE is the cash price equivalent at the recognition date.
Hence, the purchaser that takes up the deferred payment terms will recognise the acquisition of the
asset as follows:
On 1st April, 20X1 (₹) (₹)
Property, Plant and Equipment (W.N. 1) Dr. 95,00,000
To Bank A/c 33,33,333
To Accounts Payable (W.N. 2) 61,66,667
(Initial recognition of property)
On 31st March, 20X2
Interest Expense (W.N. 2) Dr. 3,30,533
Accounts payable (W.N. Dr. 30,02,800
To Bank A/c 33,33,333
(Recognition of interest expense and payment of second
installment)
On 31st March, 20X3
Interest Expense (W.N. 2) Dr. 1,69,467
Accounts payable (W.N. Dr. 31,63,867
To Bank A/c 33,33,334
(Recognition of interest expense and payment of second
installment)
Working Notes:
1. Calculation of cash price equivalent at initial recognition
Year Payment Discounting factor @ 5.36% Present value
1.4.20X1 33,33,333 1.000 33,33,333
31.3.20X2 33,33,333 0.949 31,63,333
31.3.20X3 33,33,334 0.901 30,03,334
Initial date cash price equivalent 1,00,00,000 95,00,000
2. Calculation of interest expenses
Year Opening Interest @ 5.36% Total paymentat year Principal amount Closingbalance
balance (a) (b) = (a) x5.36% beginning (c) in theinstalment (e) = (a) -(d)
(d)=(c)–(b)
1.4.20X1 95,00,000 - 33,33,333 33,33,333 61,66,667
31.3.20X2 61,66,667 3,30,533 33,33,333 30,02,800 31,63,867
31.3.20X3 31,63,867 1,69,467* 33,33,334 31,63,867 Nil
*Difference of ₹ 116 [(31,63,867 x 5.36%) – (33,33,334 - 31,63,867)] is due to approximation.
Illustration 2 – Exchange of Assets
Pluto Ltd owns land and building which are carried in its balance sheet at an aggregate carrying amount
of ₹ 10 million. The fair value of such asset is ₹ 15 million. It exchanges the land and building for a private
jet, which has a fair value of ₹ 20 million, and pays additional ₹ 3 million in cash.
Show the necessary treatment as per Ind AS 16 and pass journal entry for the transaction.
Solution
Provided that the transaction has commercial substance, the entity should recognise the private jet at a
cost of ₹ 18 million (being ₹ 15 million plus 3 million cash) and should recognise a profit on disposal of
the land and building of ₹ 5 million, calculated as follow:
(₹ 000)
Recognition of fair value of asset acquired (15,000 + 3,000) 18,000
Less: Carrying amount of land and building disposed (10,000)
Cash Paid (3,000)
Profit on exchange of assets 5,000
MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)
CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The required journal entry is therefore as follow:
Property, Plant and Equipment (Private Jet) Dr. 18,000
To Property, Plant and Equipment (Land and Building) 10,000
To Cash 3,000
To Profit on exchange of assets 5,000
Illustration 3: Accumulated depreciation at the date of revaluation
Jupiter Ltd. has an item of property, plant and equipment with an initial cost of ₹ 100,000. At the date of
revaluation accumulated depreciation amounted to ₹ 55,000. The fair value of asset, by reference to
transactions in similar assets, is assessed to be ₹ 65,000.
Find out the entries to be passed?
Solution
Method – I: Depreciation Elimination Approach
Accumulated depreciation Dr. 55,000
To Asset Cost 55,000
Asset Cost Dr. 20,000
To Revaluation reserve 20,000
The net result is that the asset has a carrying amount of ₹ 65,000 (100,000 – 55,000 + 20,000).
Method – II: Restatement Approach
Carrying amount (100,000 – 55,000) = 45,000
Fair value (revalued amount) 65,000
Surplus 20,000
% of surplus to the carrying amount (20,000 / 45,000) 44.44%
Entries to be Made:
Asset (1,00,000 x 44.44%) Dr. 44,444
To Accumulated Depreciation (55,000 x 44.44%) 24,444
To Revaluation Reserve 20,000
(Being the entry to increase both the original cost and the accumulated depreciation by 44.44%)
Illustration 4: Revaluation model for entire class
Venus Ltd. is a large manufacturing group. It owns a considerable number of industrial buildings, such as
factories and warehouses, and office buildings in several capital cities. The industrial buildings are located
in industrial zones whereas the office buildings are in central business districts of the cities. Venus’s Ltd.
management wants to apply the Ind AS 16 revaluation model to subsequent measurement of the office
buildings but continue to apply the historical cost model to the industrial buildings. Is this acceptable under
Ind AS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment?
Solution
Venus's Ltd. management can apply the revaluation model only to the office buildings.
The office buildings can be clearly distinguished from the industrial buildings in terms of their
function, their nature and their general location.
Ind AS 16 permits assets to be revalued on a class-by-class basis.
The different characteristics of the buildings enable them to be classified as different PPE classes. The
different measurement models can therefore be applied to these classes for subsequent measurement. All
properties within the class of office buildings must therefore be carried at revalued amount. Separate
disclosure of the two classes must be given in accordance withpara 73 of Ind AS 16.
Illustration 5: Utilisation of Revaluation Surplus
An item of PPE was purchased for ₹ 9,00,000 on 1st April, 20X1. It is estimated to have a useful life of
10 years and is depreciated on a straight-line basis. On 1st April, 20X3, the asset is revalued to ₹
9,60,000. The useful life remains unchanged as ten years. Ignore impact of deferred taxes. Show the
necessary treatment as per Ind AS 16 to calculate depreciation and revaluation surplus for 20X3-20X4.
Solution
Calculation of Additional Depreciation: (₹)
Actual depreciation for 20X3-20X4 based on revalued amount (9,60,000/8) 1,20,000
Depreciation for 20X3-20X4 based on historical cost (9,00,000/10) (90,000)
Additional Depreciation 30,000
In the profit or loss for 20X3-20X4, a depreciation expense of ₹ 1,20,000 will be charged. A reserve
transfer, which will be shown in the statement of changes in equity, may be undertaken as follows:
Revaluation surplus Dr. 30,000
To Retained earnings
30,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The closing balance on the revaluation surplus on 31st March, 20X4 will therefore be as follows:
Balance arising on revaluation (9,60,000 – 7,20,000) 2,40,000
Transfer to retained earnings (30,000)
2,10,000
Illustration 6: Revision of Useful Life
An asset which cost ₹10,000 was estimated to have a useful life of 10 years and residual value ₹ 2000.
After two years, useful life was revised to 4 remaining years. Calculate the depreciation charge for the
years 1,2,3.
Solution: ₹
Year-1 Year-2 Year-3
Cost 10,000 10,000 10,000
Less: AccumulatedDepreciation (800) (1,600) (3,200)
Carrying Amount 9,200 8,400 6,800
Charges for year 10,000 - 2,000 = 800 10,000 - 2,000 = 800 8,400-2,000 =1,600
10 10 4
Illustration 7: Change in Depreciation Method
An entity acquired an asset 3 years ago at a cost of ₹ 5 million. The depreciation method adopted for the
asset was 10 percent reducing balance method.
At the end of Year 3, the entity estimates that the remaining useful life of the asset is 8 years and determines
to adopt straight –line method from that date so as to reflect the revised estimated pattern of recovery of
economic benefits.
Show the necessary treatment in accordance of Ind AS 16. Calculate the depreciation charge for respective
years.
Solution
Change in Depreciation Method shall be accounted for as a change in an accounting estimate in
accordance of Ind AS 8 and hence will have a prospective effect.
Depreciation Charges for year 1 to 11 will be as follows:
Year 1 ₹ 500,000
Year 2 ₹ 450,000
Year 3 ₹ 405,000
Year 4 to Year 11 (refer W.N.) ₹ 455,625 p.a
Working Note:
Year Opening balance of asset (a) Depreciation @10% on (a) Closing balance of asset (c) =
(a)-(b)
1 50,00,000 5,00,000 45,00,000
2 45,00,000 4,50,000 40,50,000
3 40,50,000 4,05,000 36,45,000
Year 3 onwards method of depreciation has been changed from reducing balance method to straight
line method for which it is assessed that the remaining useful life is 8 years. Hence revised
depreciation would be calculated as follows:
Revised depreciation as per straight line method
= (Carrying amount as at the end of the 3rd year – Residual value) / Remaining useful life
= 36,45,000/8 years = ₹4,55,625 per annum (for year 4 to year 11).
Illustration 8 (MTP MAR 2018)
MS Ltd. has acquired a heavy machinery at a cost of ₹ 1,00,00,000 (with no breakdown of the component
parts). The estimated useful life is 10 years. At the end of the sixth year, one of the major components, the
turbine requires replacement, as further maintenance is uneconomical. The remainder of the machine is
perfect and is expected to last for the next four years. The cost of a new turbine is ₹ 45,00,000. The
discount rate assumed is 5%. Can the cost of the new turbine be recognised as an asset, and, if so,
what treatment should be used?
Solution
The new turbine will produce economic benefits to MS Ltd., and the cost is measurable. Hence, the
item should be recognised as an asset. The original invoice for the machine did not specify the
cost of the turbine; however, the cost of the replacement ₹ 45,00,000 can be used as an indication
(usually by discounting) of the likely cost, six years previously.
If an appropriate discount rate is 5% per annum, ₹ 45,00,000 discounted back six years amounts to ₹
33,57,900 [₹ 45,00,000/ (1.05)6], i.e., the approximate cost of turbine before 6 years.
The current carrying amount of the turbine which is required to be replaced of ₹ 13,43,160 would be
derecognised from the books of account, (i.e., Original Cost ₹ 33,57,900 as reduced by accumulated

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
depreciation for past 6 years ₹ 20,14,740, assuming depreciation is charged on straight-line basis.)
The cost of the new turbine, ₹ 45,00,000 would be added to the cost of machine, resulting in a revision
of carrying amount of machine to ₹ 71,56,840. (i.e., ₹ 40,00,000* – ₹ 13,43,160 + ₹ 45,00,000).
*Original cost of machine ₹ 1,00,00,000 reduced by accumulated depreciation (till the end of 6 years) ₹
60,00,000.
Illustration 9
On 1st April, 20X1, XYZ Ltd. acquired a machine under the following terms:
List price of machine ₹80,00,000
Import duty 5,00,000
Delivery fees 1,00,000
Electrical installation costs 10,00,000
Pre-production testing 4,00,000
Purchase of a five-year maintenance contract with vendor 7,00,000
In addition to the above information XYZ Ltd. was granted a trade discount of 10% on the initial list price of
the asset and a settlement discount of 5%, if payment for the machine was received within one month of
purchase. XYZ Ltd. paid for the plant on 20th April, 20X1. At what cost the asset will be recognized?
Solution
In accordance with Ind AS 16, all costs required to bring an asset to its present location and condition
for its intended use should be capitalised. Therefore, the initial purchase price of the asset should be:
₹
List price 80,00,000
Less: Trade discount (10%) (8,00,000)
72,00,000
Import duty 5,00,000
Delivery fees 1,00,000
Electrical installation costs 10,00,000
Pre-production testing 4,00,000
st
Total amount to be capitalised at 1 April, 20X1 92,00,000
Maintenance contract is a separate contract to get service, therefore, the maintenance contract cost of ₹
7,00,000 should be taken as a prepaid expense and charged to the profit or loss over a period of 5 years.
In addition, the settlement discount received of ₹ 3,60,000 (₹ 72,00,000 x 5%) is to be shown as other
income in the profit or loss.
Illustration 10
The term of an operating lease allows a tenant, XYZ Ltd. to tailor the property to meet its specific needs
by building an additional internal wall, but on condition that the tenant returns the property at the end of the
lease in its original state. This will entail dismantling the internal wall. XYZ Ltd. incurs a cost of ₹
25,00,000 on building the wall and present value of estimated cost to dismantle the wall is ₹ 10,00,000. At
what value should the leasehold improvements be capitalised in the books of XYZ Ltd.
Solution: The leasehold improvement is not only the cost of building the wall, but also the cost of
restoring the property at the end of the lease. As such both costs i.e., ₹ 35,00,000 are capitalised
when the internal wall is built and will be recognised in profit and loss over the useful life of the asset
(generally the lease term) as a part of depreciation charge.
Illustration 11
X Limited started construction on a building for its own use on 1st April, 20X0. The following costs are
incurred:
₹
Purchase price of land 30,00,000
Stamp duty & legal fee 2,00,000
Architect fee 2,00,000
Site preparation 50,000
Materials 10,00,000
Direct labour cost 4,00,000
General overheads 1,00,000
Other relevant information: Material costing ₹ 1,00,000 had been spoiled and therefore wasted and a
further ₹ 1,50,000 was spent on account of faulty design work. As a result of these problems, work on
the building was stopped for two weeks during November, 20X0 and it is estimated that ₹ 22,000 of the
labour cost relate to that period. The building was completed on 1st January, 20X1 and brought in use
1st April, 20X1. X Limited had taken a loan of ₹ 40,00,000 on 1st April, 20X0 for construction of the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
building. The loan carried an interest rate of 8% per annum and is repayable on 1st April, 20X2. Calculate
the cost of the building that will be included in tangible non-current asset as an addition?
Solution: Only those costs which are directly attributable to bringing the asset into working condition
for its intended use should be included. Administration and general costs cannot be included. Cost of
abnormal amount of wasted material/ labor or other resources is not included as per para 22 of Ind
AS 16. Here, the cost of spoilt materials and faulty designs are assumed to be abnormal costs. Also,
it is assumed that the wastages and labor charges incurred are abnormal in nature. Hence, same are
also not included in the cost of PPE.
Amount to be included in Property, Plant and Equipment (PPE)
₹
Purchase price of land 30,00,000
Stamp duty & legal fee 2,00,000
Architect fee 2,00,000
Site preparation 50,000
Material (10,00,000 – 2,50,000) 7,50,000
Direct labour cost (4,00,000 – 22,000) 3,78,000
General overheads Nil
Interest* Nil
Total to be capitalized 45,78,000
* Assuming that period for Construction of building is not a substantial period (i.e., 9 months) here,
borrowing cost are not eligible for capitalisation.
Illustration 12
XYZ Ltd. purchased an asset on 1st January, 20X0, for ₹ 1,00,000 and the asset had an estimated useful
life of ten years and a residual value of nil. The company has charged depreciation using the straight-line
method at ₹ 10,000 per annum. On 1st January, 20X4, the management of XYZ Ltd. Reviews the
estimated life and decides that the asset will probably be useful for a further four years and, therefore, the
total life is revised toeight years. How should the asset be accounted for remaining years?
Solution
Change in useful economic life of an asset is change in accounting estimate, which is to be applied
prospectively, i.e., the depreciation charge will need to be recalculated. On 1st January, 20X4, when
the asset’s net book value is ₹ 60,000. The company should amend the annual provision fordepreciation
to charge the unamortised cost (namely, ₹ 60,000) over the revised remaining life of fouryears.
Consequently, it should charge depreciation for the next four years at ₹ 15,000 per annum Illustration
13
On 1st April, 20X1, Sun ltd purchased some land for ₹ 10 million (including legal costs of ₹ 1 million)
in order to construct a new factory. Construction work commenced on 1st May, 20X1. Sun ltd incurred the
following costs in relation with its construction:
– Preparation and levelling of the land –₹ 3,00,000.
– Purchase of materials for the construction – ₹ 6·08 million in total.
– Employment costs of the construction workers – ₹ 2,00,000 per month.
– Overhead costs incurred directly on the construction of the factory – ₹ 1,00,000 per month.
– Ongoing overhead costs allocated to the construction project using the company’s
normal overhead allocation model – ₹ 50,000 per month.
– Income received during the temporary use of the factory premise as a car park
during the construction period – ₹ 50,000.
– Cost of relocating employees to work at the new factory – ₹ 3,00,000.
– Costs of the opening ceremony on 31st January, 20X1 – ₹ 150,000
The factory was completed on 30th November, 20X1 (which is considered as substantial period of time as
per Ind AS 23) and production began on 1st February, 20X2. The overall useful life of the factory building
was estimated at 40 years from the date of completion. However, it is estimated that the roof will need to be
replaced 20 years after the date of completion and that the cost of replacing the roof at current prices would be
30% of the total cost of the building.
At the end of the 40-year period, Sun Ltd has a legally enforceable obligation to demolish the factory and
restore the site to its original condition. The directors estimate that the cost of demolition in 40 years’ time
(based on prices prevailing at that time) will be ₹ 20 million. An annual risk adjusted discount rate which is
appropriate to this project is 8%. The present value of ₹ 1 payable in 40 years’ time at an annual discount
rate of 8% is ₹ 0.046.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The construction of the factory was partly financed by a loan of ₹ 17·5 million taken out on 1st April,
20X1. The loan was at an annual rate of interest of 6%. Sun Ltd received investment income of ₹ 100,000
on the temporary investment of the proceeds.
Required: Compute the carrying amount of the factory in the Balance Sheet of Sun Ltd at 31st March,
20X2. Youshould explain your treatment of all the amounts referred to in this part in your answer.
Solution
Computation of the cost of the factory
Description Included in Explanation
P.P.E.₹’000
Purchase of land 10,000 Both the purchase of the land and the
associated legal costs are direct costs of
constructing the factory.
Preparation and levelling 300 A direct cost of constructing the factory
Materials 6,080 A direct cost of constructing the factory
Employment costs of 1400 A direct cost of constructing the factory
construction workers for a seven-month period
Direct overhead costs 700 A direct cost of constructing the factory for
a seven-month period
Allocated overhead costs Nil Not a direct cost of construction
Income from use as a car park Nil Not essential to the construction so
recognised directly in profit or loss
Relocation costs Nil Not a direct cost of construction
Opening ceremony Nil Not a direct cost of construction
Finance costs 612.50 Capitalise the interest cost incurred in a
seven- month period (purchase of land
would not trigger off capitalisation since
land is not a qualifying asset. Infact, the
construction started from 1st May, 20X1)
Investment income on temporary (100) offset against the amount capitalised
investment of the loan proceeds
Demolition cost recognised as a 920 Where an obligation must recognise as
provision part of the initial cost
Total 19,912.50
Computation of accumulated depreciation
Total depreciable amount 9,912.50 All of the net finance cost of 512.50 (612.50 –
100) has been allocated to the depreciable
amount. Also, acceptable to reduce by
allocating a portion to the non-depreciable
land element principle
Depreciation must be in two parts:
Depreciation of roof component 49.56 9,912.50 x 30% x 1/20x4/12
Depreciation of remainder 57.82 9,912.50 x 70% x 1/40 x 4/12
Total depreciation 107.38
Computation of carrying amount 19,805.12 19,912.50 – 107.38
Illustration 14
H Limited purchased an item of PPE costing ₹ 100 million which has useful life of 10 years. The entity has
a contractual decommissioning and site restoration obligation, estimated at ₹ 5 million to be incurred at the
end of 10th year. The current market-based discount rate is 8%.
The company follows SLM method of depreciation. H Limited follows the Cost Model for accounting ofPPE.
(a) Determine the carrying value of an item of PPE and decommissioning liability at each year end
when There is no change in the expected decommissioning expenses, expected timing of incurring the
decommissioning expense and / or the discount rate
(b) At the end of Year 4, the entity expects that the estimated cash outflow on account of
decommissioning and site restoration to be incurred at the end of the useful life of the asset will be ₹ 8
million (in place of ₹ 5 million, estimated in the past).
Determine in case (b), how H Limited need to account for the changes in the decommissioning liability?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
The present value of such decommissioning and site restoration obligation at the end of 10th year is ₹
2.32 million [being 5 / (1.08)10]. H Limited will recognise the present value of decommissioning liability
of ₹ 2.32 million as an addition to cost of PPE and will also recognize a corresponding
decommissioning liability. Further, the entity will recognise the unwinding of discount as finance
charge.
(a) The following table shows the relevant computations, if there is no change in the expected
decommissioning expenses, expected timing of incurring the decommissioning expense and / or
the discount rate: (₹ in million)
Year Opening Depreciation Carrying Amount of Opening Unwinding of Closing
Amount Charge(onSLM) PPE at the end of Decommissio- Interest @8% Decommissioning
ofPPE For 10 Years the year ning Liability Liability
1 102.32 10.23 92.08 2.32 0.19 2.50
2 92.08 10.23 81.85 2.50 0.20 2.70
3 81.85 10.23 71.62 2.70 0.22 2.92
4 71.62 10.23 61.39 2.92 0.23 3.15
5 61.39 10.23 51.16 3.15 0.25 3.40
6 51.16 10.23 40.93 3.40 0.27 3.68
7 40.93 10.23 30.69 3.68 0.29 3.97
8 30.69 10.23 20.46 3.97 0.32 4.29
9 20.46 10.23 10.23 4.29 0.34 4.63
10 10.23 10.23 - 4.63 0.37 5.00
Total 102.32 2.68
(a) The changes to the estimate of expected decommissioning obligation:
 The present value of the decommissioning liability at the end of Year 4 works out to
be ₹ 5.04 million [being 8 / (1.08)6].
 As against this, the carrying amount of decommissioning liability at the end of Year
4 is ₹ 3.15 million (as computed above).
 The changes in the decommissioning liability of ₹ 1.89 million (being ₹ 5.04 million
less ₹ 3.15 million) shall be added to the cost of the asset in the current period and
the related provision for decommissioning liability is also adjusted.
The journal entry will be:
PPE Dr. ₹ 1.89 million
To Provision for decommissioning liability ₹ 1.89 million
Year Opening Depreciation Carrying Amount of Opening Unwinding of Closing
Amount ChargeSLM-10 PPE at end ofthe Decommissioning Interest @8% Decommissioning
ofPPE Years year Liability Liability
5 63.28 10.55 52.73 5.04 0.40 5.44
6 52.73 10.55 42.19 5.44 0.44 5.88
7 42.19 10.55 31.64 5.88 0.47 6.35
8 31.64 10.55 21.09 6.35 0.51 6.86
9 21.09 10.55 10.55 6.86 0.55 7.41
1 10.55 10.55 - 7.41 0.59 8.00
0
Total 63.28 2.96
The following table shows the calculations for years 5 - 10:
Note that in the above table:
 Opening amount of PPE at the beginning of Year 5 is computed as ₹ 63.28 million (being
carrying amount of ₹ 61.39 million at the end of Year 4 plus increase of ₹ 1.89 million arising
due to increase in the present value of the decommissioning liability at the end of Year 4).
 The revised carrying amount of PPE (at ₹ 63.28 million) at the beginning of Year 5 will be
depreciated over the balance 6 years of the useful life).
 Opening decommissioning liability at the beginning of Year 5 is computed as ₹ 5.04 million
(being carrying amount of ₹ 3.15 million at the end of Year 4 plus increase of ₹ 1.89 million).
Since the entity has adjusted the increase in the decommissioning liability against the carrying
amount of PPE, it needs to evaluate whether the new carrying amount (in this case, ₹ 63.28 million) is
recoverable. If not, it will give rise to impairment loss, to be accounted for under IndAS 36.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
ABC Ltd. is installing a new plant at its production facility. It has incurred these costs:
1. Cost of the plant (cost per supplier’s invoice plus taxes) ₹ 25,00,000
2. Initial delivery and handling costs ₹ 2,00,000
3. Cost of site preparation ₹ 6,00,000
4. Consultants used for advice on the acquisition of the plant ₹ 7,00,000
5. Interest charges paid to supplier of plant for deferred credit ₹ 2,00,000
6. Net present value of estimated dismantling costs to be incurred after 7 years ₹ 3,00,000
7. Operating losses before commercial production ₹ 4,00,000
Please advise ABC Ltd. on the costs that can be capitalized in accordance with Ind AS 16.
Solution:
According to Ind AS 16, these costs can be capitalized:
1. Cost of the plant ₹ 25,00,000
2. Initial delivery and handling costs ₹ 2,00,000
3. Cost of site preparation ₹ 6,00,000
4. Consultants’ fees ₹ 7,00,000
5. Net present value of estimated dismantling costs to be incurred after 7 ₹ 3,00,000
years
₹ 43,00,000
Note: Interest charges paid on “Deferred credit terms” to the supplier of the plant (not a qualifying
asset) of ₹ 2,00,000 and operating losses before commercial production amounting to ₹ 4,00,000 are not
regarded as directly attributable costs and thus cannot be capitalized. They should be written off to the
Statement of Profit and Loss in the period they are incurred.
Question 02:
A Ltd. has an item of property, plant and equipment with an initial cost of ₹ 1,00,000. At the date of
revaluation, accumulated depreciation amounted to ₹ 55,000. The fair value of the asset, by reference to
transactions in similar assets, is assessed to be ₹ 65,000.
Pass Journal Entries with regard to Revaluation?
Solution: The entries to be passed would be:
Accumulated depreciation Dr. 55,000

To Asset A/c 55,000
(Being elimination of accumulated depreciation against the cost of
the asset)
Asset A/c Dr 20,000
To Revaluation Surplus 20,000
(Being increase of net asset value to Fairvalue)
Note: The net result is that the asset has a carrying amount of ₹ 65,000 [1,00,000 – 55,000 + 20,000.]
Question 03
B Ltd. owns an asset with an original cost of ₹ 2,00,000. On acquisition, management determined that the
useful life was 10 years and the residual value would be ₹ 20,000. The asset is now 8 years old, and
during this time there have been no revisions to the assessed residual value.
At the end of year 8, management has reviewed the useful life and residual value and has determined that the
useful life can be extended to 12 years in view of the maintenance program adopted by the company. As a
result, the residual value will reduce to ₹ 10,000.
How would the above changes in estimates be accounted by B Ltd.?
Solution:
Calculation of accumulated depreciation till 8th year
Depreciable amount {Cost less residual value} =₹2,00,000–₹20,000 = ₹ 1,80,000.
Annual depreciation = Depreciable amount/Useful life =1,80,000/10 = ₹ 18,000
Accumulated depreciation = 18,000 x No. of years (8) = ₹ 1,44,000.
Calculation of carrying amount at the end of the 8th year
The asset has a carrying amount of ₹ 56,000 at the end of year 8 [i.e., ₹ 2,00,000 – ₹ 1,44,000]
Accounting of the changes in estimates
Revision of the useful life to 12 years results in a remaining useful life of 4 years (i.e., 12 years– 8
years).

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The revised depreciable amount is ₹ 46,000 (₹ 56,000 – ₹ 10,000)
Thus, depreciation should be charged in future i.e., from 9th year onwards at ₹ 11,500 per annum (₹ 46,000
/ 4 years).
Question 04:
X Ltd. has a machine which got damaged due to fire as on 31st January, 20X1. The carrying amount of
machine was ₹ 1,00,000 on that date. X Ltd. sold the damaged asset as scrap for ₹ 10,000. X Ltd. has
insured the same asset against damage. As on 31st March, 20X1, the compensation proceeds was still in
process but the insurance company has confirmed the claim. Compensation of ₹ 50,000 is receivable from
the insurance company. How X Ltd. will account for the above transaction?
Solution:
As per para 66 of Ind AS 16, impairment or losses of items of property, plant and equipment and
related claims for or payments of compensation from third parties are separate economic events and
should be accounted for separately.
X Ltd. should account for the above transaction as given below:
At the time of sale of scrap machine, X Ltd. should write off the carrying amount of asset from booksof
account and provide a loss of ₹ 90,000. (i.e., carrying amount of ₹ 1,00,000 – realised amount of ₹ 10,000)
As on 31st March, 20X1, X Ltd. should recognise income of ₹ 50,000 against the compensation
receivable in its profit or loss.
Question 05:
An entity has a nuclear power plant and a related decommissioning liability. The nuclear power plant started
operating on 1st April, 2XX1. The plant has a useful life of 40 years. Its initial cost was ₹ 1,20,000 which
included an amount for decommissioning costs of ₹ 10,000, which represented ₹ 70,400 in estimated cash
flows payable in 40 years discounted at a risk-adjusted rate of 5 per cent. The entity’s financial year ends on
31st March. On March, 2X11, the net present value of the decommissioning liability has decreased by ₹
8,000. The discount rate has not yet changed.
How the entity will account for the above changes in decommissioning liability in the year 2X11, if it
adopts cost model?
Solution:
On 31st March, 2X11, the plant is 10 years old. Accumulated depreciation is ₹ 30,000 (₹ 120,000 x10 /
40 years). Due to unwinding of discount @ 5% over the 10 years, the amount of decommissioning liability
has increased from ₹ 10,000 to ₹ 16,300 (approx.).
On 31st March, 2X11, the discount rate has not changed. However, the entity estimates that, as a
result of technological advances, the net present value of the decommissioning liability has decreased
by ₹ 8,000. Accordingly, the entity adjusts the decommissioning liability from ₹ 16,300 to ₹ 8,300. On
this date, the entity passes the following journal entry to reflect the change:
Provision for decommissioning liability Dr. 8,000
To Asset 8,000
Following this adjustment, the carrying amount of the asset is ₹ 82,000 (₹ 1,20,000 – ₹ 8,000 – ₹ 30,000),
which will be depreciated over the remaining 30 years of the asset’s life giving a depreciation expense for
the next year of ₹ 2,733 (₹ 82,000 / 30). The next year’s finance cost for unwinding of discount will be ₹
415 (₹ 8,300 × 5 per cent)
Question 06: (MTP: OCTOBER, 2019), (MTP: MARCH, 2019)
An entity has a nuclear power plant and a related decommissioning liability. The nuclear power plant
started operating on 1st April, 20X1. The plant has a useful life of 40 years. Its initial cost was ₹ 1,20,000.
This included an amount for decommissioning costs of ₹ 10,000, which represented ₹ 70,400 in estimated
cash flows payable in 40 years discounted at a risk- adjusted rate of 5 per cent. The entity’s financial year
ends on 31st March. Assume that a market-based discounted cash flow valuation of ₹ 1,15,000is obtained at
31st March, 20X4. This valuation is after deduction of an allowance of ₹ 11,600 for decommissioning costs,
which represents no change to the original estimate, after the unwinding of three years’ discount. On 31st
March, 20X5, the entity estimates that, as a result of technological advances, the present value of the
decommissioning liability has decreased by ₹ 5,000. The entity decides that a full valuation of the asset
is needed at 31st March, 20X5, in order to ensure that the carrying amount does not differ materially from
fair value. The asset is now valued at ₹ 1,07,000, which is net of an allowance for the reduced
decommissioning obligation.
How the entity will account for the above changes in decommissioning liability if it adopts revaluation model?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
At 31st March, 20X4: ₹
Asset at valuation (1) 1,26,600
Accumulated depreciation Nil
Decommissioning liability (11,600)
Net assets 1,15,000
Retained earnings (2) (10,600)
Revaluation surplus (3) 15,600
Notes:
(1) When accounting for revalued assets to which decommissioning liabilities attach, it is
important to understand the basis of the valuation obtained. For example:
a. if an asset is valued on a discounted-cash flow basis, some valuers may value the asset
without deducting any allowance for decommissioning costs (a ‘gross’ valuation), whereas others may
value the asset after deducting an allowance for decommissioning costs (a ‘net’ valuation), because
an entity acquiring the asset will generally also assume the decommissioning obligation. For
financial reporting purposes, the decommissioning obligation is recognised as a separate liability, and
is not deducted from the asset. Accordingly, if the asset is valued on a net basis, it is necessary to
adjust the valuation obtained by adding back the allowance for the liability, so that the liability is not
counted twice.
b. if an asset is valued on a depreciated replacement cost basis, the valuation obtained may not
include an amount for the decommissioning component of the asset. If it does not, an appropriate
amount will need to be added to the valuation to reflect the depreciated replacement cost of that
component.
Since, the asset is valued on a net basis, it is necessary to adjust the valuation obtained by adding
back the allowance for the liability. Valuation obtained of ₹ 1,15,000 plus decommissioning costs of ₹
11,600, allowed for in the valuation but recognised as a separate liability = ₹ 1,26,600.
(2) Three years’ depreciation on original cost ₹ 1,20,000 × 3/40 = ₹ 9,000 plus cumulative discounton
₹ 10,000 at 5 per cent compound = ₹ 1,600; total ₹ 10,600.
(3) Revalued amount ₹ 1,26,600 less previous net book value of ₹ 1,11,000 (cost ₹ 120,000 less
Accumulated depreciation ₹ 9,000).
The depreciation expense for 20X4-20X5 is therefore ₹ 3,420 (₹ 1,26,600 x 1 / 37) and the discount
expense for 20X5 is ₹ 600. On 31st March, 20X5, the decommissioning liability (before any adjustment)
is ₹ 12,200. However, as per estimate of the entity, the present value of thedecommissioning liability has
decreased by ₹ 5,000. Accordingly, the entity adjusts the decommissioning liability from ₹ 12,200 to ₹
7,200.
The whole of this adjustment is taken to revaluation surplus, because it does not exceed the carrying
amount that would have been recognised had the asset been carried under the cost model. If it had
done, the excess would have been taken to profit or loss. The entity makes the following journal entry
to reflect the change:
Provision for decommissioning liability Dr. 5,000
To Revaluation surplus 5,000
st
As at 31 March, 20X5, the entity revalued its asset at ₹ 1,07,000, which is net of an allowance of ₹
7,200 for the reduced decommissioning obligation that should be recognised as a separate liability.
The valuation of the asset for financial reporting purposes, before deducting this allowance, is
therefore ₹ 1,14,200. The following additional journal entry is needed:
Notes:
₹ ₹
Accumulated depreciation (1) Dr. 3,420
To Asset at valuation 3,420
Revaluation surplus (2) Dr. 8,980
To Asset at valuation (3) 8,980
(1) Eliminating accumulated depreciation of ₹3,420 in accordance with the entity’s accounting policy.
(2) The debit is to revaluation surplus because the deficit arising on the revaluation does not exceed
the credit balance existing in the revaluation surplus in respect of the asset.
Previous valuation (before allowance for decommissioning costs) ₹ 1,26,600, less cumulativedepreciation
₹ 3,420, less new valuation (before allowance for decommissioning costs) ₹ 1,14,200.
Following this valuation, the amounts included in the balance sheet are:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Asset at valuation 1,14,200
Accumulated depreciation Nil
Decommissioning liability (7,200)
Net assets 1,07,000
Retained earnings (1) (14,620)
Revaluation surplus (2) 11,620
Notes:
(1) ₹ 10,600 at 31st March, 20X4, plus depreciation expense of ₹ 3,420 and discount expense of ₹ 600
= ₹ 14,620. ₹ 15,600 at 31st March, 20X4, plus ₹ 5,000 arising on the decrease in the liability, less
₹ 8,980 deficit on revaluation = ₹ 11,620.
Question 07: (RTP: M A Y, 2018)
A Ltd. purchased some Property, Plant and Equipment on 1st April, 20X1, and estimated their useful
lives for the purpose of financial statements prepared on the basis of Ind AS: Following were the original
cost, and useful life of the various components of property, plant, and equipment assessed on 1st April,
20X1:
Property, Plant and Equipment Original Cost Estimated useful life
Buildings ₹ 15,000,000 15 years
Plant and machinery ₹ 10,000,000 10 years
Furniture and fixtures ₹ 3,500,000 7 years
A Ltd. uses the straight-line method of depreciation. On 1st April, 20X4, the entity reviewed the following
useful lives of the property, plant, and equipment through an external valuation expert:
Buildings 10 years
Plant and machinery 7 years
Furniture and fixtures 5 years
There were no salvage values for the three components of the property, plant, and equipment either initially
or at the time the useful lives were revised.
Compute the impact of revaluation of useful life on the Statement of Profit and Loss for the year ending
31st March, 20X4.
Solution:
The annual depreciation charges prior to the change in useful life were
Buildings ₹ 1,50,00,000/15 = ₹ 10,00,000
Plant and machinery ₹ 1,00,00,000/10 = ₹ 10,00,000
Furniture and fixtures ₹ 35,00,000/7 = ₹ 5,00,000
Total = ₹ 25,00,000 (A)
The revised annual depreciation for the year ending 31st March, 20X4, would be
Buildings [₹1,50,00,000 – (₹10,00,000×3)]/10 ₹ 12,00,000
Plant and machinery [₹1,00,00,000 – (₹ 10,00,000 × 3)] / 7 ₹ 10,00,000
Furniture and fixtures [₹35,00,000 – (₹ 5,00,000 × 3)] / 5 ₹ 4,00,000
Total ₹ 26,00,000 (B)
The impact on Statement of Profit and Loss for the year ending 31st March, 20X4 = ₹ 26,00,000 – ₹
25,00,000 = ₹ 1,00,000
This is a change in accounting estimate which is adjusted prospectively in the period in which the
estimate is amended and, if relevant, to future periods if they are also affected. Accordingly, from 20X4-
20X5 onward, excess of ₹ 1,00,000 will be charged in the Statement of Profit and Loss every year till the
time there is any further revision.
Question 08:
Mr. X, is the financial controller of ABC Ltd., a listed entity which prepares consolidated financial statements in
accordance with Ind AS. Mr. X has recently produced the final draft of the financial statements of ABC Ltd. for
the year ended 31st March, 2018 to the managing director Mr. Y for approval. Mr. Y, who is not an accountant,
had raised following query from Mr. X after going through the draft financial statements: -
The notes to the financial statements state that plant and equipment is held under the ‘cost model’. However,
property which is owner occupied is revalued annually to fair value. Changes in fair value are sometimes
reported in profit or loss but usually in ‘other comprehensive income’. Also, the amount of depreciation charged
on plant and equipment as a percentage of it’s carrying amount is much higher than for owner occupied property.
Another note states that property owned by ABC Ltd. but rent out to others is depreciated annually and not fair
valued. Mr. Y is of the opinion that there is no consistent treatment of PPE items in the accounts. How should the
finance controller respond to the query from the managing director?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Ongoing through the query raised by the Managing Director Mr. Y, the financial controller Mr. X
explained the notes and reasons for their disclosures as follows:
The accounting treatment of the majority of tangible non-current assets is governed by Ind AS 16
‘Property, Plant and Equipment’. Ind AS 16 states that the accounting treatment of PPE is determined
on a class-by-class basis. For this purpose, property and plant would be regarded as separate
classes. Ind AS 16 requires that PPE is measured using either the cost model or the revaluation
model. This model is applied on a class-by-class basis and must be applied consistently within a class.
Ind AS 16 states that when the revaluation model applies, surpluses are recorded in other
comprehensive income, unless they are cancelling out a deficit which has previously been reported in
profit or loss, in which case it is reported in profit or loss. Where the revaluation resultsin a deficit, then
such deficits are reported in profit or loss, unless they are cancelling out a surplus which has
previously been reported in other comprehensive income, in which case they are reported in other
comprehensive income.
According to Ind AS 16, all assets having a finite useful life should be depreciated over that life. Where
property is concerned, the only depreciable element of the property is the buildings element, since
land normally has an indefinite life. The estimated useful life of a building tends to be much longer
than for plant. These two reasons together explain why the depreciation charge of a property as a
percentage of its carrying amount tends to be much lower than for plant.
Properties which are held for investment purposes are not accounted for under Ind AS 16, but under
Ind AS 40 ‘Investment Property’. As per Ind AS 40, investment properties should be accounted for
under a cost model. ABC Ltd. had applied the cost model and thus our investment properties are
treated differently from the owner-occupied property.
MTP.RTP PAST PAPER
MTP OCTOBER 2019
Question:1
A Ltd. has sold goods to B Ltd. at a consideration of Rs. 10 lakhs, receivable in three equal installments of Rs.
3,33,333 over a two-year period (ie on 1st April 2018, 31st March 2019 and31st March 2020).
The company is offering a discount of 5% (i.e., Rs. 50,000) if payment is made in full at the time of sale. The sale
agreement reflects an implicit interest rate of 5.36% p.a.
The total consideration expected to be received from such sale is Rs. 10 lakhs. Hence, the management has
recognised the revenue from sale of goods for Rs. 10 lakhs. Further, the management is of the view that there is no
difference in this aspect between Indian GAAP and Ind AS.
Analyse whether the above accounting treatment made by the accountant is in compliance with Ind AS. If not, advise
the correct treatment along with the workings for the same. (8 Marks)
Solution:
As per Ind AS 18, the revenue from sale of goods shall be recognised at the fair value of the
consideration received or receivable. The fair value of the consideration is determined by discounting
all future receipts using an imputed rate of interest where the receipt is deferred beyond normal credit
terms. The difference between the fair value and the nominal amount of the consideration is
recognised as interest revenue.
The fair value of consideration (cash price equivalent) of the sale of goods is calculated as follows: INR
Year Consideration (Installment) Present value factor Present value of consideration
Time of sale 3,33,333 - 3,33,333
st
End of 1 year 3,33,333 0.949 3,16,333
End of 2nd year 3,33,334 0.901 3,00,334
10,00,000 9,50,000
The Company that agrees for deferring the cash inflow from sale of goods will recognise the
revenue from sale of goods and finance income as follows:
Initial recognition of sale of goods INR
Cash Dr 3,33,333
Trade Receivable Dr 6,16,667
To Sale 9,50,000
Recognition of interest and receipt of second installment
Cash Dr 3,33,333
To Interest Income 33,053
To Trade Receivable 3,00,280

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Recognition of interest and payment of final installment
Cash Dr 3,33,334
To Interest Income (Balancing figure) 16,947
Balance Sheet (extracts) as at 31st March 2019 and 31st March 2020
As at Mar 31,2019 As at Mar 31, 2020
Income
Sale of Goods 9,50,000 -
Other Income (Finance income) 33,053 16,947
Statement of Profit and Loss (extracts) for the year ended 31st March 2019 and 31st March 2020
As at Mar 31,2019 As at Mar 31,2020
Assets
Current Assets
Financial Assets
Trade Receivables 3,16,387 XXX
MTP: AUGUST, 2018
Question:2
UK Ltd. has purchased a new head office property for Rs. 10 crores. The new office building has 10 floors and the
organisation structure of UK Ltd. is as follows:
Floor 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th
Use Waiting Area Admin HR Accounts Inspection MD Office Canteen Vacant
Since UK Ltd. did not need the floors 8, 9 and 10 for its business needs, it has leased out the same to a restaurant on a long- term
lease basis. The terms of the lease agreement are as follows:
- Tenure of Lease Agreement - 5 Years
- Non-Cancellable Period - 3 years
- Lease Rental-annual lease rental receivable from these floors are Rs. 10,00,000 per floor with an escalation
of 5% every year.
Based on the certificate from its architect, UK Ltd. has estimated the cost of the 3 top floors as approximately Rs. 3
crores. The remaining cost of Rs. 7 crores can be allocated as 25% towards Land and 75% towards Building.
As on 31st March, 2018, UK Ltd. obtained a valuation report from an independent valuer who has estimated the fair value of
the property at Rs. 15 crores. UK Ltd. wishes to use the cost model for measuring Property, Plant & Equipment
and the fair value model for measuring the Investment Property. UK Ltd. depreciates the building over an estimated
useful life of 50 years, with no estimated residual value.
Advise UK Ltd. on the accounting and disclosures for the above as per the applicable Ind AS.
Solution:
Ind AS 16 ‘Property, Plant and Equipment’ states that property, plant and equipment are tangible
items that are held for use in the production or supply of goods or services, for rental to others, or for
administrative purposes.
As per Ind AS 40 ‘Investment property’, investment property is a property held to earn rentals or for
capital appreciation or both, rather than for use in the production or supply of goods or services or for
administrative purposes or sale in the ordinary course of business.
Further, as per para 8 of Ind AS 40, the building owned by the entity and leased out under one or
more operating leases will be classified as investment property.
Here top three floors have been leased out for 5 years with a non-cancellable period of 3 years. The
useful life of the building is 50 years. The lease period is far less that the useful life of the building
leased out. Further, the lease rentals of three years altogether do not recover the fair value of the
floors leased i.e., 15 crore x 30% = 4.50 crore. Hence the lease is an operating lease. Therefore, the 3
floors leased out as operating lease will be classified as investment property in the books of lessor
i.e., UK Ltd.
However, for investment property, Ind AS 40 states that an entity shall adopt as its accounting policy
the cost model to all of its investment property. Ind AS 40 also requires that an entity shall disclose
the fair value of such investment property (ies). (in crore)
Total PPE (70%) Investment property(30%)
Land (25%) Building (75%)
Cost 10 1.75 5.25 3

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
FV 15 2.625 7.875 4.5
Valuation model followed Cost Cost Cost (as para 30 of Ind AS 40)
Value recognized in the 1.75 5.25 3
books
Less: Depreciation Nil (5.25/50) =0.105 (3/50) = 0.06
cr
Carrying value as on31st 1.75 5.145 2.94
March, 2018
Impairment loss No impairment loss since fair value is more than the cost
MTP APRIL 2018
Question 3
On 1st April 2017, A Ltd. assumes a decommissioning liability in a business combination. The entity is legally required to
dismantle and remove an offshore oil platform at the end of its useful life, which is estimated to be 10 years. A Ltd. uses the
expected present value technique to measure the fair value of the decommissioning liability. If A Ltd. was contractually
allowed to transfer its decommissioning liability to a market participant, it concludes that a market participant would use the
following inputs, probability-weighted as appropriate, when estimating the price, it would expect to receive:
(i) Labour costs are developed on the basis of current market place wages, adjusted for expectations of future wage
increases, required to hire contractors to dismantle and remove offshore oil platforms. A Ltd. assigns probability assessments
(based A Ltd.’s experience with fulfilling obligations of this type and its knowledge of the market) to a range of cash
flow estimates as follows:
Cash flow estimate(Rs.) Probability assessment
50,000 25%
62,500 50%
87,500 25%
(i) A Ltd. estimates allocated overhead and equipment operating costs to be 80% of expected labour costs in
consistent with the cost structure of market participants.
(i) A Ltd. estimates the compensation that a market participant would require for undertaking the activity and for
assuming the risk associated with the obligation to dismantle and remove the asset as follows:
1. A third-party contractor typically adds 20% mark-up on labour and allocated internal costs to provide a profit-
margin on the job.
2. A Ltd. estimates 5% premium of the expected cash flows, including the effect of inflation for uncertainty inherent
in locking in today’s price for a project that will not occur for 10 years.
(iv) Entity A assumes a rate of inflation of 4% over the 10-year period on the basis of available market data.
(v) The risk-free rate of interest for a 10-year maturity on 1st April, 2017 is 5 %. A Ltd. adjusts that rate by 3.5 per
cent to reflect its risk of non-performance (i.e., the risk that it will not fulfil the obligation), including its credit risk.
A Ltd. concludes that its assumptions would be used by market participants. In addition, A Ltd. does not adjust its fair value
measurement for the existence of a restriction preventing it from transferring the liability.
Measure the fair value of its decommissioning liability. Discount factor:
@ 5% for 10th year 0.6139
@ 3.5% for 10th year 0.7089
th
@ 8.5% for 10 year 0.4423
Solution
Measurement of the fair value of its decommissioning liability
Expected cashflows (Rs.) 1st April 2017
Expected labour costs (Refer W.N.) 65,625
Allocated overhead and equipment costs (0.80 × Rs. 65,625) 52,500
Contractor’s profit mark-up [0.20 × (Rs. 65,625 + Rs. 52,500)] 23,625
1,41,750
Expected cash flows before inflation adjustment
Inflation factor (4% for 10 years) on compounding 1.4802
Expected cash flows adjusted for inflation 2,09,818
Market risk premium (Rs. 2,09,818 x 5%) 10,491
Expected cash flows adjusted for market risk 2,20,309
Expected present value using discount rate of (5 +3.5) 8.5% for 10 years 97,443

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Working Note:
50,000 25% 12,500
62,500 50% 31,250
87,500 25% 21,875
65,625
MTP MARCH 2018
Question 4
MS Ltd. has acquired a heavy machinery at a cost of ₹ 1,00,00,000 (with no breakdown of the
component parts). The estimated useful life is 10 years. At the end of the sixth year, one of the
major components, the turbine requires replacement, as further maintenance is uneconomical. The
remainder of the machine is perfect and is expected to last for the next four years. The cost of a
new turbine is ₹45,00,000.
Advise a per Ind AS whether the cost of the new turbine be recognised as an asset, and, if so, what
treatment should be used. Also calculate the revised carrying amount of the machinery? Consider the
discount rate of 5% per annum. (8 Marks)
Solution
The new turbine will produce economic benefits to MS Ltd., and the cost is measurable. Hence,
the item should be recognised as an asset. The original invoice for the machine did not specify the
cost of the turbine; however, the cost of the replacement (₹ 45,00,000) can be used as an indication
(usually by discounting) of the likely cost, six years previously.
If an appropriate discount rate is 5% per annum, ₹ 45,00,000 discounted back six years amountsto
₹ 33,57,900 [₹ 45,00,000 / (1.05)6], i.e., the approximate cost of turbine before 6 years.
The current carrying amount of the turbine which is required to be replaced of ₹ 13,43,160 would be
derecognised from the books of account, (i.e., Original Cost ₹ 33,57,900 as reduced by accumulated
depreciation for past 6 years ₹ 20,14,740, assuming depreciation is charged on straight-line basis.)
The cost of the new turbine, ₹ 45,00,000 would be added to the cost of machine, resulting in a revision
of carrying amount of machine to ₹ 71,56,840. (i.e., ₹ 40,00,000* – ₹ 13,43,160 + ₹ 45,00,000).
*Original cost of machine ₹ 1,00,00,000 reduced by accumulated depreciation (t ill the end of 6 years)
₹ 60,00,000.
(RTP: M A Y, 2019, RTP: M A Y , 2020)
Question:5
Company X performed a revaluation of all of its plant and machinery at the beginning of 2018-2019.The
following information relates to one of the machinery:
Amount (‘000)
Gross carrying amount ₹ 200
Accumulated depreciation (straight-line method) ₹ 80
Net carrying amount ₹ 120
Fair value ₹ 150
The useful life of the machinery is 10 years and the company uses Straight line method of
depreciation. The revaluation was performed at the end of the 4th year.
How should the Company account for revaluation of plant and machinery and depreciation
subsequent to revaluation?
Solution:
According to paragraph 35 of Ind AS 16, when an item of property, plant and equipment is revalued,
the carrying amount of that asset is adjusted to the revalued amount. At the date of the revaluation,
the asset is treated in one of the following ways:
(a) The gross carrying amount is adjusted in a manner that is consistent with the revaluation of
the carrying amount of the asset. For example, the gross carrying amount may berestated by
reference to observable market data or it may be restated proportionately to the change in
the carrying amount. The accumulated depreciation at the date of therevaluation is adjusted
to equal the difference between the gross carrying amount and the carrying amount of the
asset after taking into account accumulated impairment losses;or
(b) The accumulated depreciation is eliminated against the gross carrying amount of the
asset.
The amount of the adjustment of accumulated depreciation forms part of the increase or decrease in
carrying amount that is accounted for in accordance with the paragraphs 39 and 40of Ind AS 16.
If the Company opts for the treatment as per option (a), then the revised carrying amount of the
machinery will be:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Gross carrying amount ₹ 250 [(200/120) x 150]
Net carrying amount ₹150
Accumulated depreciation ₹ 100 (₹ 250 – ₹ 150)
Journal Entry
Plant and Machinery A/c (Gross Block) Dr. 50
To Accumulated Depreciation ₹ 20
To Revaluation Reserve ₹ 30
If the balance of accumulated depreciation is eliminated as per option (b), then the revised carrying
amount of the machinery will be as follows:
Gross carrying amount is restated to ₹150 to reflect the fair value and Accumulateddepreciation is set at zero.
Journal entry
Accumulated Depreciation Dr. ₹ 80
To Plant and Machinery A/c (Gross Block) ₹ 80
Plant and Machinery A/c (Gross Block) Dr. ₹ 30
To Revaluation Reserve ₹ 30
Depreciation
Option (a) – Since the Gross Block has been restated, the depreciation charge will be ₹ 25 per
annum (₹ 250 / 10 years).
Option (b) – Since the Revalued amount is the revised Gross Block, the useful life to be considered is
the remaining useful life of the asset which results in the same depreciation charge of ₹ 25 per annum
as per OptionA (₹ 150 / 6 years).
RTP: N O V E M B E R , 2018
Question:6
ABC Ltd is setting up a new refinery outside the city limits. In order to facilitate the construction of the refinery
and its operations, ABC Ltd. is required to incur expenditure on the construction/development of railway siding,
road and bridge. Though ABC Ltd. incurs (or contributes to) the expenditure on the construction/development, it
will not have ownership rights on these items and they are also available for use to other entities and public at
large. Whether ABC Ltd. can capitalise expenditure incurred on these items as property, plant and equipment
(PPE)? If yes, how should these items be depreciated and presented in the financial statements of ABC Ltd. as
per Ind AS?
Solution:
Paragraph 7 of Ind AS 16 states that the cost of an item of property, plant and equipment shall be recognised as an
asset if, and only if:
(a) it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the entity; and
(b) the cost of the item can be measured reliably.
Further, paragraph 9 provides that the standard does not prescribe the unit of measure for recognition, i.e., what
constitutes an item of property, plant and equipment. Thus, judgement is required in applying the recognition criteria to
an entity’s specific circumstances.
Paragraph 16, inter alia, states that the cost of an item of property, plant and equipment comprise any costs directly attributable to
bringing the asset to the location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by
management.
In the given case, railway siding, road and bridge are required to facilitate the construction of the refinery and for its operations.
Expenditure on these items is required to be incurred in order to get future economic benefits from the project as a whole
which can be considered as the unit of measure for the purpose of capitalisation of the said expenditure even though the
company cannot restrict the access of others for using the assets individually. It is apparent that the aforesaid expenditure
is directly attributable to bringing the asset to the location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in
the manner intended by management.
In view of this, even though ABC Ltd. may not be able to recognize expenditure incurred on these assets as an individual item
of property, plant and equipment in many cases (where it cannot restrict others from using the asset), expenditure incurred may be
capitalised as a part of overall cost of the project. From this, it can be concluded that, in the extant case the expenditure incurred
on these assets, i.e., railway siding, road and bridge, should be considered as the cost of constructing the refinery and
accordingly, expenditure incurred on these items should be allocated and capitalised as part of the items of property, plant
and equipment of the refinery.
Depreciation
As per paragraph 43 and 47 of Ind AS 16, if these assets have a useful life which is different from the useful life of the item of
property, plant and equipment to which they relate, it should be depreciated separately. However, if these assets have a
useful life and the depreciation method that are the same as the useful life and the depreciation method of the item of property,
plant and equipment to which they relate, these assets may be grouped in determining the depreciation charge.
Nevertheless, if it has been included in the cost of property, plant and equipment as a directly attributable cost, it will be
depreciated over the useful lives of the said property, plant and equipment.
The useful lives of these assets should not exceed that of the asset to which it relates.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Presentation
These assets should be presented within the class of asset to which they relate.
RTP NOV 2020
QUESTION
Entity X has a warehouse which is closer to factory of Entity Y and vice versa. The factories are located in
the same vicinity. Entity X and Entity Y agree to exchange their warehouses. The carrying value of
warehouse of Entity X is ` 1,00,000 and its fair value is ` 1,25,000. It exchanges its warehouse with that of
Entity Y, the fair value of which is ` 1,20,000. It also receives cash amounting to ` 5,000. How should Entity
X account for the exchange of warehouses?
SOLUTION
Paragraph 24 of Ind AS 16, inter alia, provides that when an item of property, plant and equipment is
acquired in exchange for a non-monetary asset or assets, or a combination of monetary and non-monetary
assets, the cost of such an item of property, plant and equipment is measured at fair value unless (a) the
exchange transaction lacks commercial substance or (b) the fair value of neither the asset received nor the
asset given up is reliably measurable. If the acquired item is not measured at fair value, its cost is
measured at the carrying amount of the asset given up.
Further as per paragraph 25 of Ind AS 16, an entity determines whether an exchange transaction has
commercial substance by considering the extent to which its future cash flows are expected to change as a
result of the transaction. An exchange transaction has commercial substance if:
(a) the configuration (risk, timing and amount) of the cash flows of the asset received differs from the
configuration of the cash flows of the asset transferred; or
(b) the entity-specific value of the portion of the entity’s operations affected by the transaction changes as a
result of the exchange; and
(c) the difference in (a) or (b) is significant relative to the fair value of the assets exchanged. In the given
case, the transaction lacks commercial substance as the company’s cash flows are not expected to
significantly change as a result of the exchange because the factories are located in the same vicinity i.e. it
is in the same position as it was before the transaction.
RTP: M A Y , 2021
Question:7
An entity has the following items of property, plant and equipment:
 Property A — a vacant plot of land on which it intends to construct its new administrationheadquarters;
 Property B — a plot of land that it operates as a landfill site;
 Property C — a plot of land on which its existing administration headquarters are built;
 Property D — a plot of land on which its direct sales office is built;
 Properties E1–E10 — ten separate retail outlets and the land on which they are built;
 Equipment A — computer systems at its headquarters and direct sales office that are integrated with the point of sale
computer systems in the retail outlets;
 Equipment B — point of sale computer systems in each of its retail outlets;
 Furniture and fittings in its administrative headquarters and its sales office;
 Shop fixtures and fittings in its retail outlets.
How many classes of property, plant and equipment must the entity disclose?
Solution:
To answer this question one must make a materiality judgement.
A class of assets is defined as a grouping of assets of a similar nature and use in an entity’s operations. The nature of
land without a building is different to the nature of land with a building.
Consequently, land without a building is a separate class of asset from land and buildings. Furthermore, the nature
and use of land operated as a landfill site is different from vacant land. Hence, theentity should disclose Property A separately.
The entity must apply judgement to determine whether the entity’s retail outlets are sufficiently different in nature and use
from its office buildings, and thus constitute a separate class of land and buildings.
The computer equipment is integrated across the organisation and would probably be classified as a single separate class
of asset.
Furniture and fittings used for administrative purposes could be sufficiently different to shop fixtures and fittings in retail
outlets. Hence, they should be classified in two separate classes of assets.
PAST QUESTION PAPERS (WITH SOLUTION)

QUESTION 01: (NOVEMBER 2018)
On 1st April, 2017 Good Time Limited purchased some land for ₹ 1.5 crore (including legal cost of ₹ 10
lakhs) for the purpose of constructing a new factory. Construction work commenced on 1st May, 2017.
Good Time Limited incurred the following costs in relation to its construction.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
₹
Preparation and levelling of the land 4,40,000
Purchase of materials for the construction 92,00,000
Employment costs of the construction workers (per month) 1,45,000
Overhead costs incurred directly on the construction of the factory (per month) 1,25,000
Ongoing overhead costs allocated to the construction project (using the company’s 75,000
normal overhead allocation model) per month
Costs of relocating employees to work at new factory 3,25,000
Costs of the opening ceremony on 1st January, 2018 2,50,000
Income received during the temporary use of the factory premises as a storeduring 60,000
the construction period.
The construction of the factory was completed on 31st December, 2017 and production began on 1st
February, 2018. The overall useful life of the factory building was estimated at 40 years from the date of
completion. However, it is estimated that the roof will need to be replaced 20 years after the date of
completion and that the cost of replacing the roof at current prices would be 25% of the total cost of the
building.
At the end of the 40 years period, Good Time Limited has a legally enforceable obligation to demolish the
factory and restore the site to its original condition. The company estimates that the cost of demolition in
40 years’ time (based on price prevailing at that time) will be ₹ 3 crore. The annual risk adjusted discount
rate which is appropriate to this project is 8%. The present value of ₹ 1 payable in 40 years’ time at an
annual discount rate of 8% is 0.046.
The construction of the factory was partly financed. by a loan of ₹ 1.4 crore taken out on 1st April, 2017.
The loan was at an annual rate of interest of 9%. During the period 1st April, 2017 to 30th September, 2017
(when the loan proceeds had been fully utilized to finance the construction), Good Time Limited
received investment income of ₹ 1,25,000 on the temporary investment of the proceeds.
You are required to compute the cost of the factory and the carrying amount of the factory in the Balance
Sheet of Good Time Limited as at 31st March, 2018. (8 Marks)
SOLUTION:
Computation of the cost of the factory
₹
Purchase of land 1,50,00,000
Preparation and levelling 4,40,000
Materials 92,00,000
Employment costs of construction workers (1,45,000 x 8 months) 11,60,000
Direct overhead costs (1,25,000 x 8 months) 10,00,000
Allocated overhead costs Nil
Income from use of a factory as a store Nil
Relocation costs Nil
Cost of the opening ceremony Nil
Finance costs 9,45,000
Investment income on temporary investment of the loan proceeds (1,25,000)
Demolition cost recognised as a provision (3,00,00,000 x 0.046) 13,80,000
Total 2,90,00,000
Computation of carrying amount of the factory as at 31st March, 2018
Land(Non- Factory
depreciable (Depreciable
asset) asset)
Cost of the asset (Total cost2,90,00,000) 1,50,00,000 1,40,00,000
Less: Depreciation
On Land Nil
On Factory
Depreciation on roof component (1,40,00,000 ×
25% × 1/20 x 3/12) 43,750
Depreciation on remaining factory (1,40,00,000 ×
75% × 1/40 × 3/12) 65,625 (1,09,375)
Carrying amount of depreciable asset i.e., factory

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
1,50,00,000 1,38,90,625
Total cost 2,88,90,625
Note:
1. Interest cost has been capitalised based on nine-month period. This is because, purchase of land
would trigger off capitalisation.
2. All of the net finance cost of ₹ 8,20,000 (₹ 9,45,000 - ₹ 1,25,000) has been allocated to the depreciable
asset i.e Factory. Alternatively, it can be allocated proportionately between land and factory.
M Ltd. is setting up a new factory outside the Delhi city limits. In order to facilitate the construction of the factory and its
operations, M Ltd. is required to incur expenditure on the construction/ development of electric-substation. Though M Ltd. incurs (or
contributes to) the expenditure on the construction/development, it will not have ownership rights on these items and they are also
available for use to other entities and public at large. Whether M Ltd. can capitalise expenditure incurred on these items as property,
plant and equipment (PPE)? If yes, then how should these items be depreciated and presented in the financial statements of M Ltd.
as per Ind AS? (8 Marks)
SOLUTION:
As per Ind AS 16, the cost of an item of property, plant and equipment shall be recognised as an asset if, and only if:
(a) it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the entity; and
(b) the cost of the item can be measured reliably.
Further, Ind AS 16 does not prescribe the unit of measure for recognition, i.e., what constitutes an item of property, plant
and equipment. Thus, judgement is required in applying the recognition criteria to an entity’s specific circumstances.
Ind AS 16, further, states that the cost of an item of property, plant and equipment comprise any costs directly attributable to
bringing the asset to the location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by
management. In the given case, electric-substation is required to facilitate the construction of the refinery and for its
operations. Expenditure on these items is required to be incurred in order to get future economic benefits from the
project as a whole which can be considered as the unit of measure for the purpose of capitalisation of the said
expenditure even though the company cannot restrict the access of others for using the assets individually. It is apparent that
the aforesaid expenditure is directly attributable to bringing the asset to the location and condition necessary for it to be
capable of operating in the manner intended by management.
In view of this, even though M Ltd. may not be able to recognise expenditure incurred on electric-substation as an individual
item of property, plant and equipment in many cases (where it cannot restrict others from using the asset), expenditure
incurred may be capitalised as a part of overall cost of the project.
From this, it can be concluded that, in the extant case the expenditure incurred on electric- substation should be considered as
the cost of constructing the factory and accordingly, expenditure incurred on electric-substation should be allocated and
capitalised as part of the items of property, plant and equipment of the factory.
Depreciation
As per Ind AS 16, each part of an item of property, plant and equipment with a cost that is significant in relation to the
total cost of the item shall be depreciated separately.
Further, Ind AS 16 provides that, if these assets have a useful life which is different from the useful life of the item
of property, plant and equipment to which they relate, it should be depreciated separately. However, if these assets
have a useful life and the depreciation method that are the same as the useful life and the depreciation method of the
item of property, plant and equipment to which they relate, these assets may be grouped in determining the depreciation
charge. Nevertheless, if it has been included in the cost of property, plant and equipment as a directly attributable cost,
it will be depreciated over the useful lives of the said property, plant and equipment.
The useful lives of electric-substation should not exceed that of the asset to which it relates.
Presentation
Electric-substation should be presented within the class of asset to which they relate i.e., factory.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 38 - INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Illustration 1: Identifiability
Sun Ltd has an expertise in the consulting business. In years gone by, the Company gained a 30%
market share for its services business and intends to recognise it as an intangible asset. Is the action by
Company justified?
Solution
Market share does not meet the definition of intangible assets as is not identifiable i.e., it is neither
separable and nor has arisen from contractual or legal rights.
Illustration 2: Control
Company XYZ ltd has provided training to its staff on various new topics like GST, Ind AS etc. to ensure
the compliance as per the required law. Can the company recognise such cost of staff training as intangible asset?
Solution
It is clear that the company will obtain the economic benefits from the work performed by the staff as it
increases their efficiency. But it does not have control over them because staff could choose to resign
the company at any time.
Hence the company lacks the ability to restrict the access of others to those benefits. Therefore, the staff
training cost does not meet the definition of an intangible asset.
Illustration 3: Identifiability of Intangible assets
Pluto Ltd. intends to open a new retail store in a new location in the next few weeks. Pluto Ltd has spent a
substantial sum on a series of television advertisements to promote this new store. The Company has paid
an amount of ₹ 800,000 for advertisements before 31st March, 20X1. ₹ 700,000 of this sum relates to
advertisements shown before 31st March, 20X1 and ₹ 100,000 to advertisements shown in April, 20X1.
Since 31st March, 20X1, the Company has paid for further advertisements costing ₹ 400,000.
Pluto Ltd is of view that such costs can be carried forward as intangible assets. Since market research
indicatesthat this new store is likely to be highly successful. Please explain and justify the treatment of the
above costs inthe financial statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X1.
Solution
Under Ind AS 38 – Intangible Assets – intangible assets can only be recognised if they are
identifiable and have a cost which can be reliably measured.
These criteria are very difficult to satisfy for internally developed intangibles.
For these reasons, Ind AS 38 specifically prohibits recognising advertising expenditure as an
intangible asset. The issue of how successful the store is likely to be does not affect this prohibition.
Therefore, such costs should be recognised as expenses.
However, the costs would be recognised on accrual basis. Therefore, of the advertisements paid
for before 31st March, 20X1, ₹ 7,00,000 would be recognised as an expense and ₹ 1,00,000 as a pre-
payment in the year ended 31st March, 20X1. The ₹ 4,00,000 cost of advertisements paid for since 31st
March,20X1 would be charged as expenses in the year ended 31st March, 20X2.
Illustration 4: Separate Acquisition
Venus India Private Ltd acquired a software for its internal use costing ₹ 10,00,000. The amount payable
for the software was ₹ 600,000 immediately and ₹ 400,000 in one year time. The other expenditure
incurred were: -
Purchase tax: ₹ 1,00,000
Entry Tax: 10% (recoverable later from tax department) Legal fees: ₹ 87,000 Consultancy fees for
implementation: ₹ 1,20,000 Cost of capital of the company is 10%.
Calculate the cost of the software on initial recognition using the principles of Ind AS 38 Intangible Assets.
Solution
Particulars Amount in ₹
Cash paid 600,000
Deferred consideration (₹ 400,000/1.1) 3,63,636
Purchase Tax 1,00,000
Entry tax (not to be considered as it is a refundable tax) -
Legal fees 87,000
Consultancy fees for implementation 1,20,000
Total cost to be capitalised 12,70,636
Illustration 5: Business Combination
On 31st March, 20X1, Earth India Ltd. paid ₹ 50,00,000 for a 100% interest in Sun India Ltd. At that date
Sun Ltd.’s net assets had a fair value of ₹ 30,00,000. In addition, Sun Ltd. also held the following rights:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
 Trade Mark named “GRAND” – valued at ₹ 180,000 using a discounted cash flow
technique.
 Sole distribution rights to an electronic product; future cash flows from which are estimated to
be ₹ 150,000 per annum for the next 6 years.
10% is considered an appropriate discount rate.
The 6-year, 10% annuity factor is 4.36.
Calculate goodwill and other Intangible assets arising on acquisition.
Solution
Particulars Amount Amount
Purchase Consideration (A) 50,00,000
Net Asset acquired 30,00,000
Trade Mark 1,80,000
Distribution Rights (1,50,000 x 4.36) 6,54,000
Total (B) (38,34,000)
Goodwill on Acquisition 11,66,000
Illustration 6: Exchange of Asset
Sun Ltd acquired a software from Earth Ltd. in exchange for a telecommunication license. The
telecommunication license is carried at ₹ 5,00,000 in the books of Sun Ltd. The Software is carried at ₹
10,000 in the books of the Earth Ltd which is not the fair value.
Advise journal entries in the following situations in the books of Sun Ltd and Earth Ltd:
1. Fair value of software is ₹ 5,20,000 and fair value of telecommunication license is ₹ 5,00,000.
2. Fair Value of Software is not measurable. However similar Telecommunication license is
transacted byanother company at ₹ 4,90,000.
3. Neither Fair Value of Software nor Telecommunication license could be reliably measured.
Solution
₹ in ‘000
Situation Sun Ltd. Earth Ltd.
1 Software Dr. 500 Telecommunication license Dr. 520
To Telecommunication license 500 To Software 10
To Profit on Exchange Nil To Profit on Exchange 510
Loss on Exchange Dr. 10 To Software 10
To Telecommunication license 500 To Profit on Exchange 480
Note: The company may first recognise
Impairment loss and then reccord an entry.
The effect is the same as impairment loss will
also be charged to Income Statement.
To Telecommunication license 500 To Software 10
Illustration 7
Venus Ltd. is preparing its accounts for the year ended 31st March, 20X2 and is unsure how to treat the
following items.
1. Company has completed a big marketing and advertising campaign costing ₹ 2,40,000. The finance
director had authorised this campaign on the basis that it would create ₹ 5,00,000 of additional
profits over the nextthree years.
2. A new product was developed during the year. The expenditure aggregated ₹ 1,50,000 of which ₹
1,00,000 was incurred prior to 30th September, 20X1, the date on which it became clear that the
product was technically viable. The new product will be launched in the next four months and
its recoverable amount is estimated at ₹ 70,000.
3. Staff participated in a training programme which cost the company ₹ 300,000. The training
organisation had made a presentation to the directors of Baxter outlining that incremental profits to
the business over the next twelve months would be ₹ 500,000.
What amounts should appear as assets in Venus Ltd. Balance sheet as at 31st March, 20X2?
Solution
The treatment in Venus Ltd’s balance sheet as at 31st March, 20X2 will be as follows:
1. Marketing and advertising campaign: no asset will be recognised because it is not possible to
identify future economic benefits that are attributable only to this campaign. All of the
expenditure should be expensed in the statement of profit and loss account.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
2. New product: development expenditure appearing in the statement of financial position will be
valued at ₹ 50,000. The expenditure prior to the date on which the product becomes
technically feasible is recognised in the statement of profit and loss account as an expense.
3. Training programme: no intangible asset will be recognised, because staff are not under the
control of Venus Ltd. and when staff leave the benefits of the training, whatever they may be,
also leave.
Illustration 8: Development Phase
Expenditure on a new production process in 20X1-20X2:
1st April to 31st December 2,700
st st
1 January to 31 March 900
3,600
The production process met the intangible asset recognition criteria for development on1st January,20X2.
The amount estimated to be recoverable from the process is ₹ 1,000.
Expenditure incurred for development of the process in FY 20X2-20X3 is ₹ 6,000. Asset was brought into
useon 31st March, 20X3 and is expected to be useful for 6 years.
What is the carrying amount of the intangible asset at 31st March, 20X2 and 31st March, 20X3. Also
determine the charge to profit or loss for 20X1-20X2?
At 31st March, 20X4, the amount estimated to be recoverable from the process is ₹ 5,000.
What is the carrying amount of the intangible asset at 31st March, 20X4 and the charge to profit or loss
for 20X3-20X4 on account of impairment loss?
Solution
1. Expenditure to be transferred to profit or loss in 20X1-20X2 ₹
Total Expenditure 3,600
Less: Expenditure during development phase (900)
Expenditure to be transferred to profit or loss 2,700
2. Carrying amount of intangible asset on 31st March, 20X2
Expenditure during Development Phase will be capitalized ₹ 900
(Recoverable amount is higher being ₹1,000, hence no impairment)
3. Carrying amount of intangible asset on 31st March, 20X3
Carrying amount of intangible asset on 31st March, 20X2 ₹ 900
Add: Further expenditure during development phase 6,000
Total capital expenditure on development phase 6,900
4. Expenditure to be charged to profit or loss in 20X3-20X4
Opening balance of Intangible Asset 6,900
Add: Amortisation for the year (6,900 / 6) (1,150)
Carrying amount of intangible asset 5,750
Less: Recoverable Amount (5,000)
Amount charged to profit or loss (Impairment Loss) 750
st
5. Carrying Amount of Intangible Asset on 31 March, 20X4
Value of Intangible Asset will be recoverable amount i.e., ₹ 5,000
Illustration 9 : Revaluation Model
1. Saturn Ltd. acquired an intangible asset on 31st March, 20X1 for ₹ 1,00,000. The asset was revalued
at ₹ 1,20,000 on 31st March, 20X2 and ₹ 85,000 on 31st March, 20X3.
2. Jupiter Ltd. acquired an intangible asset on 31st March, 20X1 for ₹ 1,00,000. The asset was
revalued
At ₹ 85,000 on 31st March, 20X2 and at ₹ 1,05,000 on 31st March, 20X3.
Assuming that the year-end for both companies is 31st March, and that they both use the revaluation model,
show how each of these transactions should be dealt with in the financial statements. Explain the treatment
for revaluation of intangible asset. Ignore computation of amortization on them for ease of understanding.
Solution:
Saturn Ltd.
₹ 20,000 revaluation increase on 31st March, 20X2 should be credited to the revaluation reserve and
recognised in other comprehensive income. ₹ 20,000 of the revaluation decrease on 31st March,
20X3 should be debited to revaluation reserve and remaining ₹ 15,000 should be recognised as
anexpense.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Jupiter Ltd.
₹ 15,000 revaluation decrease on 31st March, 20X2 should be recognised as an expense in the
Statement of Profit and loss. ₹ 15,000 out of the ₹ 20,000 increase on 31st March, 20X3 should
be recognised as income. The remaining ₹ 5,000 should be credited to revaluation reserve and
recognised in other comprehensive income.
Note: The above amount will be different if amortization of intangible asset is taken into consideration.
Illustration 10
X Limited engaged in the business of manufacturing fertilisers entered into a technical collaboration agreement
with a foreign company Y Limited. As a result, Y Limited would provide the technical know-how enabling X
Limited to manufacture fertiliser in a more efficient way. X Limited paid
₹ 10,00,00,000 for the use of know-how for a period of 5 years. X Limited estimates the production of
fertiliser as follows:
Year (In metric tons)
1 50,000
2 70,000
3 1,00,000
4 1,20,000
5 1,10,000
At the end of the 1st year, it achieved its targeted production. At the end of 2nd year, 65,000 metric tons of
fertiliser was being manufactured, and X Limited considered to revise the estimates for the next 3 years.
The revised figures are 85,000, 1,05,000 and 1,15,000 metric tons for year 3, 4 & 5 respectively.
How will X Limited amortise the technical know-how fees as per Ind AS 38?
Solution
Based on the above data, it may be suitable for X Ltd. to use unit of production method for
amortisation of technical know-how. The total estimated unit to be produced 4,50,00 MT. The
technical know-how will be amortised on the basis of the ratio of yearly production to total production.
The first- year charge should be a proportion of 50,000/4,50,000 on ₹ 10,00,00,000 = ₹ 1,11,11,111.
At the end of 2nd year, as per revised estimate the total number of units to be produced in future
are 3,70,000 MT (ie 65,000 + 85,000 + 1,05,000 + 1,15,000).
The amortisation for second year will be 65,000 / 3,70,000 on (10,00,00,000 – 1,11,11,111) ie1,56,15,615.
Amortisation for remaining years (unless the estimates are again revised) :
Year 3 = 85,000 / 3,70,000 on (10,00,00,000 – 1,11,11,111) i.e., ₹ 2,04,20,420
Year 4 = 1,05,000 / 3,70,000 on (10,00,00,000 – 1,11,11,111) i.e., ₹ 2,52,25,225
Year 5 = 1,15,000 / 3,70,000 on (10,00,00,000 – 1,11,11,111) i.e., ₹ 2,76,27,629
Illustration 11
X Ltd. purchased a patent right on 1st April, 20X1, for ₹ 3,00,000; which has a legal life of 15 years.
However, due to the competitive nature of the product, the management estimates a useful life of only 5
years. Straight- line amortisation is determined by the management to be the best method. As at 1st April,
20X2, management is uncertain that the process can actually be made economically feasible, and decides to
write down the patent to an estimated market value of ₹ 1,50,000 and decides to amortise over 2 years. As
at 1st April, 20X3, having perfected the related production process, the asset is now appraised at a value of
₹ 3,00,000. Furthermore, the estimated useful life is now believed to be 4 more years. Determine the value
of intangible asset at the end of each financial year?
Solution
Value as on 31st March, 20X2
Original cost ₹ 3,00,000
Less: amortisation (₹ 60,000)
Net Value ₹ 2,40,000
st
Value as on 31 March, 20X3
On 1st April, 20X2, the impairment is recorded by writing down the asset to the estimated value
of ₹ 1,50,000, which necessitates a ₹ 90,000 charge to profit & loss (carrying value, ₹ 2,40,000 less
fairvalue ₹ 1,50,000).
Amortisation provided for the financial year 20X2-20X3 is ₹ 75,000 (₹ 1,50,000/2)
Net value is = ₹ 1,50,000 – ₹ 75,000 = ₹ 75,000.
Value as on 31st March, 20X4
As of 1st April, 20X3, the carrying value of the patent is ₹ 75,000.
Revalued amount of patent is ₹ 3,00,000.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Out of total revaluation gain of ₹ 2,25,000, ₹ 90,000 will be charged to profit & loss and balanceamount
of ₹ 1,35,000 (₹ 2,25,000 – ₹ 90,000) will be credited to revaluation reserve.
Amortisation provided for the financial year 20X3-20X4 is ₹ 75,000 (₹ 3,00,000/4)Net
value is = ₹ 3,00,000 – ₹ 75,000 = ₹ 2,25,000.
Similarly, Value as on March 31, 20X5 = ₹ 2,25,000 – ₹75,000 = ₹ 1,50,000Value
as on March 31, 20X6 = ₹1,50,000 – ₹75,000 = ₹ 75,000
Value as on March 31,20X5 = ₹ 75,000 – ₹75,000 = ₹ Nil
Illustration 12
X Pharmaceutical Ltd. seeks your opinion in respect of following accounting transactions:
1. Acquired a 4-year license to manufacture a specialised drug at a cost of ₹ 1,00,00,000 at the start of the
year.Production commenced immediately.
2. Also purchased another company at the start of year. As part of that acquisition, X Pharmacy Ltd. acquired
a brand with a fair value of ₹ 3,00,00,000 based on sales revenue. The life of the brand is estimated at 15
years.
3. Spent ₹ 1,00,00,000 on an advertising campaign during the first six months. Subsequent sales have shown
a significant improvement and it is expected this will continue for 3 years.
4. It has commenced developing a new drug ‘Drug-A’. The project cost would be ₹ 10,00,00,000. Clinical trial
proved successful and such drug is expected to generate revenue over the next 5 years.
Cost incurred (accumulated) till 31st March, 20X1 is ₹ 5,00,00,000.
Balance cost incurred during the financial year 20X1-20X2 is ₹ 5,00,00,000.
5. It has also commenced developing another drug ‘Drug B’. It has incurred ₹ 50,00,000 towards research
expenses till 31st March, 20X2. The technological feasibility has not yet been established.
How the above transactions will be accounted for in the books of account of X Pharmaceutical Ltd?
Solution
X Pharmaceutical Ltd. is advised as under:
1. It should recognise the drug license as an intangible asset, because it is a separate external
purchase, separately identifiable asset and considered successful in respect of feasibility and probable
future cash inflows.
The drug license should be recorded at ₹ 1,00,00,000.
2. It should recognise the brand as an intangible asset because it is purchased as part of acquisition and
it is separately identifiable. The brand should be amortised over a period of 15 years.
The brand will be recorded at ₹ 3,00,00,000.
3. The advertisement expenses of ₹ 1,00,00,000 should be expensed off.
4. The development cost incurred during the financial year 20X1-20X2 should be capitalised.
Cost of intangible asset (Drug A) as on 31st March, 20X2
Opening cost ₹ 5,00,00,000
Development cost ₹ 5,00,00,000
Total cost ₹10,00,00,000
5. Research expenses of ₹ 50,00,000 incurred for developing ‘Drug B’ should be expensed off since
technological feasibility has not yet established.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
X Ltd. is engaged in the business of publishing Journals. They acquired 100% stake in Y Ltd., a company
in the same industry. X Ltd. paid purchase consideration of ₹ 10,00,00,000 and fair value of net assets acquired
is ₹ 8,50,00,000. The purchase consideration includes payment for the following as well:
(a) ₹ 30,00,000 for obtaining the skilled staff of Y Ltd.
(b) ₹ 50,00,000 by way of payment towards ‘Non-compete Fee’ so as to restrict Y Ltd. to compete
in the same line of business for next 5 years.
However, the above items (a) and (b) are not forming part of the net assets acquired of ₹ 8,50,00,000. How should
the above transactions be accounted for by X Ltd?
Solution:
X Ltd. should recognise an intangible asset in respect of the consideration paid towards ‘Non- Compete Fee’.
However, amount paid for obtaining skilled staff amounting to ₹ 30,00,000 does not meet the definition of
intangible asset since X Ltd. has not established any right over the resource and the same should be
expensed. The entity has insufficient control over the expected future economic benefits arising from the
team of skilled staff.
Therefore, ₹ 50,00,000 will be separately recognised as an intangible asset, whereas amount paid for
obtaining skilled staff does not meet the recognition criteria for being identified as a separate intangibleasset.
However, since it is acquired as part of a business combination, it forms part of the goodwill recognised at
the acquisition date.
The value of goodwill would be ₹ 1,00,00,000 (₹ 1,50,00,000 – ₹ 50,00,000).

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Question 02:
X Ltd. purchased a franchise from a restaurant chain at a cost of ₹ 1,00,00,000 and the franchise has 10
years life. In addition, the franchise agreement mentions that the franchisee would also pay the franchisor
royalty as apercentage of sales made. Can the franchise rights be treated as an intangible asset under Ind
AS 38?
Solution:
The franchise rights meet the identification criterion of an intangible asset since it arises from the
contractual rights. It is acquired separately and its cost can be measured reliably. In addition, X Ltd.
will have future economic benefits and control over them from the franchise rights.
X Ltd. should recognise the franchise right as intangible asset and amortise it over 10 years. Royalty
asa percentage of sales paid to the franchisor would be a charge to the profit and loss in the books of
the X Ltd.
Question 03:
An entity regularly places advertisements in newspapers advertising its products and includes a reply slip
that informs individuals replying to the advertisement that the entity may pass on the individual’s details to
other sellers of similar products, unless the individual ticks a box in the advertisement.
Over a period of time the entity has assembled a list of customers’ names and addresses. The list is
provided to other entities for a fee. The entity would like to recognise an asset in respect of the expected
future economic benefits to be derived from the list. Can the customer list be treated as an intangible asset
under Ind AS 38?
Solution:
In this situation, the entity has no legal rights to the customer relationship, but exchange transactions
have taken place that evidence separability of the asset and the control that the entity is able to
exercise over the asset. Therefore, the list is an intangible asset.
However, the entity may not recognise the asset because the cost of generating the customer list
internally cannot be distinguished from the cost of developing the business as a whole. It does not
meet the conditions specified to recognize an internally generated intangible asset.
Question 04:
A software company X Ltd. is developing new software for the telecom industry. It employs 100 employs
engineers trained in that particular discipline who are engaged in the development of the software. X Ltd.
feels that it has an excellent HR policy and does not expect any of its employees to leave in the near future.
It wants torecognise these set of engineers as a human resources asset in the form of an intangible asset.
What would be your advice to X Ltd?
Solution:
Although, without doubt the skill sets of the employees make them extremely valuable to the company,
however it does not have control over them. Merely having good HR policies wouldnot make them
eligible to be recognised as an intangible asset.
Question 05:
X Ltd. has acquired a telecom license from Government to operate mobile telephony in two states of India.
Canthe cost of acquisition be capitalised as an intangible asset under Ind AS 38?
Solution:
Cost of acquisition of the telecom license can be capitalised as an intangible asset under the head
Licenses, as it will lead to future economic benefits for X Ltd.
Question 06:
X Ltd. purchased a standardised finance software at a list price of ₹ 30,00,000 and paid ₹ 50,000
towards purchase tax which is non-refundable. In addition to this, the entity was granted a trade discount of
5% on the initial list price. X Ltd. incurred cost of ₹ 7,00,000 towards customisation of the software for its
intended use. X Ltd. also purchased a 5-year maintenance contract with the vendor company of ₹ 2,00,000.
At what cost the intangible asset will be recognised?
Solution:
In accordance with Ind AS 38, the cost of a separately acquired intangible asset is its purchases price
and non-refundable purchase taxes, after deducting trade discounts and rebates and any directly
attributable cost of preparing the asset for its intended use.
Therefore, the initial cost of the asset should be:
List price 30,00,000
Less: Trade discount (5%) (1,50,000)
28,50,000
Non-refundable purchase tax 50,000
Customisation cost 7,00,000
Total cost 36,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The maintenance contract of ₹ 2,00,000 is an expense and therefore should be taken as a prepaid-
expense and charged to profit and loss over a period of 5 years.
Question 07:
X Limited in a business combination, purchased the net assets of Y Limited for ₹ 4,00,000 on 31st
March,20X1. The assets and liabilities position of Y Limited just before the acquisition is as follows:
Assets Cost (in ₹)
Property, Plant & Equipment 1,00,000
Intangible asset 1 20,000
Cash & Bank 1,30,000
Liabilities
Trade payable 50,000
The fair market value of the PPE, intangible asset 1 and intangible asset 2 is available and they are
₹ 1,50,000, ₹ 30,000 and ₹ 70,000 respectively. How would X Limited account for the net assets
acquired from Y Limited?
Solution:
X Limited will account for the assets acquired from Y Limited in following manner:
Assets Amount (₹)
Property, plant and equipment 1,50,000
Goodwill 70,000
Cash & Bank 1,30,000
Liabilities
Trade payable 50,000
Note 1- Goodwill is the difference between fair value of net assets acquired and purchase consideration
paid when is calculated as follow:
Goodwill = ₹ 4,00,000 – ₹ (1,50,000 + 70,000 + 30,000 + 1,30,000 – 50,000) = ₹ 70,000.
Question 08:
X Ltd. acquired Y Ltd. on 30th April, 20X1. The purchase consideration is ₹ 50,00,000. The fair value of the
tangible assets is ₹ 45,00,000. The company estimates the fair value of “in-process research projects” at ₹
10,00,000. No other Intangible asset is acquired by X Ltd. in the transaction. Further, cost incurred by X
Ltd. in relation to that research project is as follows:
a) ₹ 5,00,000 – as research expenses
b) ₹ 2,00,000 – to establish technological feasibility
c) ₹ 7,00,000 – for further development cost after technological feasibility is established.
At what amount the intangible asset should be measured under Ind AS 38?
Solution:
X Ltd. should initially recognise the acquired “in house research project’’ at its fair value i.e., ₹
10,00,000. Research cost of ₹ 5,00,000 and cost of ₹ 2,00,000 for establishing technical feasibility
should be charged to profit & loss. Costs incurred from the point of technological feasibility/asset
recognition criteria until the time when development costs are incurred are capitalised.
So the intangible asset should be recognised at ₹ 17,00,000 (₹ 10,00,000 + ₹ 7,00,000).
Question 09:
X Ltd. acquired a patent right of manufacturing drug from Y Ltd. In exchange X Ltd. gives its
intellectual property right to Y Ltd. Current market value of the patent and intellectual property rights are ₹
20,00,000 and
₹ 18,00,000 respectively. At what value patent right should be initially recognised in the books of X Ltd. in
following two situations?
(A) X Ltd. did not pay any cash to Y Ltd.
(B) X Ltd. pays ₹ 2,00,000 to Y Ltd.
Solution:
If an entity is able to determine reliably the fair value of either the asset received or the asset given up,
then the fair value of the asset given up is used to measure cost unless the fair value of the asset
received is more clearly evident.
The transaction at the fair value of the asset received adjusted for any cash received or paid. Therefore, in
case (a) patent is measured at ₹ 18,00,000in case (b) it is measured at ₹ 20,00,000 (18,00,000 + 2,00,000).

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Question 10:
X Garments Ltd. spent ₹ 1,00,00,000 towards promotions for a fashion show by way of various on-road
shows, contests etc.
After that event, it realised that the brand name of the entity got popular and resultantly, subsequent sales
haveshown a significant improvement. It is further expected that this hike will have an effect over the next 2-
3 years.
How the entity should account for the above cost incurred on promoting such show?
Solution:
Expenditure of ₹ 1,00,00,000 though increased future economic benefits, but it does not result increation
of an intangible asset. Such promotional cost should be expensed off.
Question 11:
An entity is developing a new production process. During 20X1-20X2, expenditure incurred was ₹ 1,000, of
which ₹ 900 was incurred before 1st March, 20X2 and ₹ 100 was incurred between 1st March, 20X2 and
31st March, 20X2. The entity is able to demonstrate that at1st March, 20X2, the production process
met the criteria for recognition as an intangible asset. The recoverable amount of the know-how embodied
in the process (including future cash outflows to complete the process before it is available for use) is
estimated to be ₹ 500. Explain the accounting treatment of expenditure incurred in 20X1-20X2 and 20X2-
20X3 as per relevant Ind AS.
During 20X2-20X3, expenditure incurred is ₹ 2,000. At the end of 20X3, the recoverable amount of the
know- how embodied in the process (including future cash outflows to complete the process before it is
available for use) is estimated to be ₹ 1,900.
Solution:
At the end of the financial year 20X2, the production process is recognised as an intangible asset at
a cost of ₹ 100 (expenditure incurred since the date when the recognition criteria were met, i.e., 1st March,
20X2). ₹ 900 expenditure incurred before 1st March, 20X2 is recognised as an expense becausethe
recognition criteria were not met until 1st March, 20X2. This expenditure does not form part of thecost of
the production process recognised in the balance sheet.
At the end of 20X3, the cost of the production process is ₹ 2,100 (₹ 100 expenditure recognised atthe
end of 20X2 plus ₹ 2,000 expenditure recognised in 20X3). The entity recognises an impairmentloss of
₹ 200 to adjust the carrying amount of the process before impairment loss (₹ 2,100) to its recoverable
amount (₹ 1,900). This impairment loss will be reversed in a subsequent period if the requirements for
the reversal of an impairment loss in Ind AS 36 are met.
Question 12: ( MTP: OCTOBER, 2020) (MAY 2019)
a. X Ltd. is engaged is developing computer software. The expenditures incurred by X Ltd. in
pursuance of its development of software is given below: Paid ₹ 2,00,000 towards salaries of the program
designers.
b. Incurred ₹ 5,00,000 towards other cost of completion of program design.
c. Incurred ₹ 2,00,000 towards cost of coding and establishing technical feasibility.
d. Paid ₹ 7,00,000 for other direct cost after establishment of technical feasibility.
e. Incurred ₹ 2,00,000 towards other testing costs.
f. A focus group of other software developers was invited to a conference for the introduction of this new
software. Cost of the conference aggregated to ₹ 70,000.
g. On 15th March, 20X1, the development phase was complete and a cash flow budget was prepared.
Net profit for the year was estimated to be equal ₹ 40,00,000. How X Ltd. should account for the above
mentioned cost?
Solution:
Costs incurred in creating computer software, should be charged to research & development
expenses when incurred until technical feasibility/asset recognition criteria have been established for
the product. Here, technical feasibility is established after completion of detailed program design.
In this case, ₹ 9,00,000 (salary cost of ₹ 2,00,000, program design cost of ₹ 5,00,000 and coding and
technical feasibility cost of ₹ 2,00,000) would be recorded as expense in Profit and Loss since it
belongsto research phase.
Cost incurred from the point of technical feasibility are capitalised as software costs. But the conference
cost of ₹ 70,000 would be expensed off.
In this situation, direct cost after establishment of technical feasibility of ₹ 7,00,000 and testing cost of ₹
2,00,000 will be capitalised.
The cost of software capitalised is = ₹ (7,00,000 + 2,00,000) = ₹ 9,00,000.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Question 13:
X Ltd. has started developing a new production process in financial year 20X1-20X2. Total expenditure
incurred till 30th September, 20X1, was ₹ 1,00,00,000. The expenditure on the development of the
production process meets the recognition criteria on 1st July, 20X1. The records of X Ltd. show that, out of
total ₹ 1,00,00,000, ₹ 70,00,000 were incurred during July to September, 20X1. X Ltd. publishes its
financial results quarterly. How X Ltd. should account for the development expenditure?
Solution:
X Ltd. should recognise the intangible asset at ₹ 70,00,000 and ₹ 30,00,000 which was already recognised
as an expense in first quarter should not be capitalised.
Question 14:
X Ltd. decides to revalue its intangible assets on 1st April, 20X1. On the date of revaluation, the intangible
assets stand at a cost of ₹ 1,00,00,000 and accumulated amortisation is₹ 40,00,000. The intangible assets
are revalued at ₹ 1,50,00,000. How should X Ltd. account for the revalued intangible assets in its books of
account?
Solution:
The intangible assets are revalued to ₹ 1,50,00,000 on an amortised replacement cost basis, which isa
150% increase from its original cost. Thereby applying the existing ratio of accumulated depreciation to
the cost the revalued gross amount would be ₹ 2,50,00,000 gross and ₹ 1,00,00,000 on amortisation.
MTP.RTP. PAST PAPER
MTP: OCTOBER, 2019
Question 01:
A Ltd. intends to open a new retail store in a new location in the next few weeks. It has spent a
substantial sum on a series of television advertisements to promote this new store. It has paid for
advertisements costing Rs. 8,00,000 before 31st March, 20X2. Rs. 7,00,000 of this sum relates to
advertisements shown before 31st March, 20X2 and Rs. 1,00,000 to advertisements shown in April,
20X2. Since 31st March, 20X2, A Ltd. has paid for further advertisements costing Rs. 4,00,000. The
accountantcharged all these costs as expenses in the year to 31 March 20X2. However, CFO of A Ltd.
does not wantto charge Rs.12,00,000 against my 20X1-20X2 profits. He believes that these costs can be
carried forward as intangible assets because the company’s market research indicates that this new store
is likely to be highly successful. (6 Marks)
Solution:
Ind AS 38 specifically prohibits recognising advertising expenditure as an intangible asset. Irrespective of success probability
in future, such expenses have to be recognized in profit or loss. Therefore, the treatment given by the accountant is correct
since such costs should be recognised as expenses.
However, the costs should be recognised on an accruals basis.
Therefore, of the advertisements paid for before 31st March, 20X2, Rs. 7,00,000 would be recognised as an expense and Rs.
1,00,000 as a pre-payment in the year ended 31st March 20X2.
Rs. 4,00,000 costs of advertisements paid for since 31st March, 20X2 would be charged as expenses in the year ended 31st
March, 20X3.
RTP: M A Y , 2020
Question:2
One of the senior engineers at XYZ has been working on a process to improve manufacturing efficiency and, consequently,
reduce manufacturing costs. This is a major project and has the full support of XYZʼ s board of directors. The senior engineer
believes that the cost reductions will exceed the project costs within twenty four months of their implementation. Regulatory testing
and health and safety approval was obtained on1 June 20X5. This removed uncertainties concerning the project, which was finally
completed on 20 April 20X6. Costs of ₹ 18,00,000, incurred during the year till 31st March 20X6, have been recognized as an
intangible asset. An offer of ₹ 7,80,000 for the new developed technology has been received by potential buyer but it has been
rejected by XYZ. Utkarsh believes that the project will be a major success and has the potential to save the company ₹
12,00,000 in perpetuity. Director of research at XYZ, Neha, who is a qualified electronic engineer, is seriously concerned about the
long term prospects of the new process and she is of the opinion that competitors would have developed new technology at
some time which would require to replace the new process within four years. She estimates that the present value of future cost
savings will be ₹ 9,60,000 over this period. After that, she thinks that there is no certainty about its future. What would be the
appropriate accounting treatment of aforesaid issue?
Solution:
Ind AS 38 ‘Intangible Assets’ requires an intangible asset to be recognised if, and only if, certain criteria are met. Regulatory
approval on 1 June 20X5 was the last criterion to be met, the other criteria have been met asfollows:
 Intention to complete the asset is apparent as it is a major project with full support from board

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
 Finance is available as resources are focused on project
 Costs can be reliably measured
 Benefits are expected to exceed costs – (in 2 years)
Amount of ₹ 15,00,000 (₹ 18,00,000 x 10/12) should be capitalised in the Balance sheet of year ending 20X5- 20X6 representing
expenditure since 1 June 20X5.
The expenditure incurred prior to 1 June 20X5 which is ₹ 3,00,000 (2/12 x ₹ 18,00,000) should be recognised as an expense,
retrospective recognition of expense as an asset is not allowed.
Ind AS 36 ‘Impairment of assets’ requires an intangible asset not yet available for use to be tested for impairment
annually.
Cash flow of ₹ 12,00,000 in perpetuity would clearly have a present value in excess of ₹ 12,00,000 and hence there would be
no impairment. However, the research director is technically qualified, so impairment tests should be based on her
estimate of a four-year remaining life and so present value of the future cost savings of
₹ 9,60,000 should be considered in that case. ₹ 9,60,000 is greater than the offer received (fair value less costs to sell) of
₹ 7,80,000and so ₹ 9,60,000 should be used as the recoverable amount. So,
the carrying amount should be consequently reduced to ₹ 9,60,000.
Calculation of Impairment loss:
Particulars Amount ₹
Carrying amount (Restated) 15,00,000
Less: Recoverable amount 9,60,000
Impairment loss 5,40,000
Impairment loss of ₹ 5,40,000 is to be recognised in the profit and loss for the year20X5-20X6. Necessary
adjusting entry to correct books of account will be:
₹ ₹
Operating expenses- Development expenditure Dr. 3,00,000
Operating expenses–Impairment loss of intangible assets Dr. 5,40,000
To Intangible assets – Development expenditure 8,40,000
RTP: NOVEMBER,2018
Question:3
A Ltd. intends to open a new retail store in a new location in the next few weeks. It has spent a substantial
sum on a series of television advertisements to promote this new store. It has paid for advertisements
costing ₹ 8,00,000 before 31st March, 2018. ₹ 7,00,000 of this sum relates to advertisements shown before
31st March, 2018 and ₹ 1,00,000 to advertisements shown in April, 2018. Since 31st March, 2018, A Ltd.
has paid for further advertisements costing ₹ 4,00,000. The accountant charged all these costs as
expenses in the year to 31 March 2018. However, CFO of A Ltd. does not want to charge ₹12,00,000
against 2017-2018 profits. He believes that these costs can be carried forward as intangible assets because
the company’s market research indicates that this new store is likely to be highly successful.
Examine and justify the treatment of these costs of ₹ 12,00,000 in the financial statements for the year ended
31st March, 2018 as per Ind AS.
Solution:
Ind AS 38 specifically prohibits recognising advertising expenditure as an intangible asset. Irrespective of success probability
in future, such expenses have to be recognized in profit or loss. Therefore, the treatment given by the accountant is correct
since such costs should be recognised as expenses.
However, the costs should be recognised on an accruals basis.
Therefore, of the advertisements paid for before 31st March, 2018, ₹ 7,00,000 would be recognised as an expense and ₹1,00,000
as a pre-payment in the year ended31st March 2018.
₹ 4,00,000 cost of advertisements paid for since 31st March, 2018 would be charged as expenses in the year ended 31st
March, 2019.
RTP: M A Y , 2021
Question:4
PQR Ltd. is a gaming developer company. Few years back, it developed a new game called 'Cloud9'. This game sold over
10,00,000 copies around the world and was extremely profitable. Due to its popularity, PQR Ltd. released a new game
in the ‘Cloud9’ series every year. The games continue to be the bestseller. Based on Management’s expectations,
estimates of cash flow projections for the ‘cloud9 videogame series’ over the next five years have been prepared. Based on
these projections, PQR Ltd. believes that cloud9 series brand should be recognised at INR 20,00,000 in its financial statement.
PQR Ltd. has also paid INR 10,00,000 to MNC Ltd. to acquire rights of another video game series called the ‘Headspace’
videogame series. The said series have huge demand in the market.
Discuss the accounting treatment of the above in the financial statements of PQR Ltd.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
 In order to determine the accounting treatment of ‘cloud9 videogame series’ and ‘Headspace’, definition of asset
and intangible asset given in Ind AS 38 may be noted:“ An asset is a resource:
• controlled by an entity as a result of past events; and
• from which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity.”
“An intangible asset is an identifiable non-monetary asset without physical substance.”
In accordance with the above, for recognising an intangible asset, an entity must be able to demonstrate that the item
satisfies the criteria of identifiability, control and existence of future economic benefits.
In order to determine whether ‘cloud9 videogame series’ meet the aforesaid conditions, following provisions of Ind AS 38
regarding Internally Generated Intangible Assets maybe noted:
As per paragraph 63 and 64 of Ind AS 38, internally generated brands, mastheads, publishing titles, customer lists and
items similar in substance should not be recognised as intangible assets. Expenditure on such items cannot be
distinguished from the cost of developing the business as a whole. Therefore, such items are not recognised as intangible
assets.
Accordingly, though the cash flow projections suggest that the cloud9 brand will lead to future economic benefits, yet the
asset has been internally generated; therefore, the Cloud9 brand cannot be recognised as intangible asset in the financial
statements.
In order to determine whether ‘Headspace’ meet the aforesaid conditions, following provisions of Ind AS 38 regarding
‘Separately acquired Intangible Assets’ should be anal used.
As per paragraphs 25 and 26 of Ind AS 38, normally, the price an entity pays to acquire separately an intangible asset will
reflect expectations about the probability that the expected future economic benefits embodied in the asset will flow to the
entity. In other words, the entity expects there to be an inflow of economic benefits, even if there is uncertainty about the
timing or the amount of the inflow. Therefore, the probability recognition criterion in paragraph 21(a) is always
considered to be satisfied for separately acquired intangible assets. In addition, the cost of a separately acquired
intangible asset can usually be measured reliably. This is particularly so when the purchase consideration is in the form
of cash or other monetary assets.
The Headspace game has been purchased for INR 10,00,000 and it is expected to generate future economic benefits to the
entity. Since Headspace game is a separately acquired asset and the future benefits are expected to flow to the entity,
therefore, an intangible asset should be recognised in respect of the ‘Headspace’ asset at its cost of INR 10,00,000. After
initial recognition, either cost model or revaluation model can be used to measure headspace intangible asset as per
guidance given in paragraphs 74-87 of Ind AS 38. In accordance with this, Headspace intangible asset should be
carried at its cost/revalued amount (as the case may be) less any accumulated amortisation and any accumulated
impairment losses.
PAST QUESTION PAPERS
JAN 2021
QUESTION
Super Sounds Limited had the following transactions during the Financial Year 2019-2020.
(i) On 1st April 2019, Super Sounds Limited purchased the net assets of Music Limited for `
13,20,000. The fair value of Music Limited's identifiable net assets was ` 10,00,000. Super
Sounds Limited is of the view that due to popularity of Music Limited's product, the life of
goodwill is 10 years.
(ii) On 4th May 2019, Super Sounds Limited purchased a Franchisee to organize musical shows
from Armaan TV for ` 80,00,000 and at an annual fee of 2% of musical shows revenue. The
Franchisee expires after 5 years. Musical shows revenue were ` 10,00,000 for financial year
2019-2020. The projected future revenues for financial year 2020-2021 is ` 25,00,000 and `
30,00,000 p.a. for remaining 3 years thereafter.
(iii) On 4th July 2019, Super Sounds Limited was granted a Copyright that had been applied for by
Music Limited. During financial year 2019-2020, Super Sound Limited incurred ` 2,50,000 on
legal cost to register the Patent and ` 7,00,000 additional cost to successfully prosecute a
copyright infringement suit against a competitor. The life of the Copyright is for 10 years.
Super Sound Limited follows an accounting policy to amortize all intangible on SLM (Straight Line
Method) basis or any appropriate basis over a maximum period permitted by relevant Ind AS, taking a
full year amortization in the year of acquisition.
You are required to prepare:
(i) A Schedule showing the intangible section in Super Sound Limited Balance Sheet as on 31st
March 2020, and
(ii) A Schedule showing the related expenses that would appear in the Statement of Profit and Loss
of Super Sound Limited for the year ended 2019-2020.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
SOLUTION
Super Sounds Limited
Balance Sheet (Extract relating to intangible asset) as at 31st March 2020
Note No
Assets
(1) Non- current asset
Intangible assets 1 69,45,000
Super Sounds Limited
Statement of Profit and Loss (Extract) for the year ended 31st March 2020
Note No
Revenue from Operations 10,00,000
Total Revenue 10,00,000
Expenses:
Amortization expenses 2 16,25,000
Other expenses 3 7,20,000
Total Expenses
Notes to Accounts (Extract)
1. Intangible Assets
Gross Block (Cost) Accumulated amortisation Net block
Opening Additions Closing Opening Additions Closing Opening Closing
balance balance balance balance balance balance
1 Goodwill* - 3,20,000 3,20,000 - - - - 3,20,000
2 (W.N.1) -
Franchise** - 80,00,000 80,00,000 - 16,00,000 16,00,000 - 64,00,000
3 (W.N.2)
Copyright 2,50,000 2,50,000 - 25,000 25,000 - 2,25,000
(W.N.3) 85,70,000 85,70,000 - 1625000 1625000 - 69,45,000
*As per Ind AS 36, irrespective of whether there is any indication of impairment, an entity shall test goodwill
acquired in a business combination for impairment annually. This implies that goodwill is not amortised
annually but is subject to annual impairment, if any.
**As per the information in the question, the limiting factor in the contract for the use is time i.e., 5 years
and not the fixed total amount of revenue to be generated. Therefore, an amortisation method that is based
on the revenue generated by an activity that includes the use of an intangible asset is inappropriate and
amortisation based on time can only be applied.
2. Amortization expenses
Franchise (W.N.2) 16,00,000
Copyright (W.N.3) 25,000 1625000
3. Other expenses
Legal cost on copyright 700000
Fee for Franchise (10,00,000 x 2%) 20000 720000
Working Notes:
(1) Goodwill on acquisition of business
Cash paid for acquiring the business 13,20,000
Less: Fair value of net assets acquired (10,00,000)
Goodwill 3,20,000
(2) Franchise 80,00,000
Less: Amortisation (over 5 years) (16,00,000)
Balance to be shown in the balance sheet 64,00,000
(3) Copyright 2,50,000
Less: Amortisation (over 10 years as per SLM) (25,000)
Balance to be shown in the balance sheet 2,25,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
NOTE: WHILE WATCHING VIDEO LECTURES ALSO REFER ADDITIONAL PDF OF FR
FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS: SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS

Illustration 1: Trade receivables
A Ltd. makes sale of goods to customers on credit of 45 days. The customers are entitled to earn a cash
discount @ 2% per annum if payment is made before 45 days and an interest @ 10% per annum is charged
for any payments made after 45 days. Company does not have a policy of selling its debtors and holds them
to collect contractual cash flows. Evaluate the financial instrument.
Solution
A financial asset is an asset where there is a contractual right to receive cash or another financial
asset from another entity.
In the above case, A Ltd. has the contractual right to receive cash /bank from its trade receivable
recorded in its books of accounts, after the expiry of credit period of 45 days or earlier after passing discounts
of 2 % per annum.
Hence trade receivables would meet the definition of financial assets.
Illustration 2: Deposits
Z Ltd. (the ‘Company’) makes sale of goods to customers on credit. Goods are carried in large containers
for delivery to the dealers’ destinations. All dealers are required to deposit a fixed amount of Rs. 10,000 as
security for the containers, which is returned only when the contract with company terminates. The deposits
carry 8% per annum which is payable only when the contract terminates. If the containers are returned by
the dealers in broken condition or any damage caused, then appropriate adjustments shall be made from the
deposits at the time of settlement. How would such deposits be treated in books of the dealers?
Solution
A financial asset is an asset where there is a contractual right to receive cash or another financial asset
from another entity.
In the above case, such security deposits are receivable in cash / bank at the end of contract period
between the dealer and the Company.
Hence they meet the definition of financial assets.
Illustration 3: Perpetual debt instruments
A Ltd. issues a bond at principal amount of CU 1000 per bond. The terms of bond require annual payments in
perpetuity at a stated interest rate of 8 per cent applied to the principal amount of CU 1000. Assuming 8 per
cent to be the market rate of interest for the instrument when it was issued, the issuer assumes a contractual
obligation to make a stream of future interest payments having a fair value (present value) of CU1,000 on
initial recognition. Evaluate the financial instrument in the hands of both the holder and the issuer.
Solution
A financial asset is an asset where there is a contractual right to receive cash or another financial asset from
another entity.
 For the Holder – There is right to receive cash in future. Hence, it will be classified as afinancial
asset
 For the Issuer – There is contractual obligation to pay cash in future. Hence, it will be classified
as afinancial liability.
Illustration 4: Creditors for sale of goods
A Ltd. (the ‘Company’) makes purchase of steel for its consumption in normal course of business. The
purchase terms provide for payment of goods at 30 days credit and interest payable @ 12% per annum for
any delays beyond the credit period. Analyse the nature of this financial instrument.
Solution
A financial liability is any liability where there is a contractual obligation to deliver cash or other financial
asset to another entity.
In the above case, A Ltd. has entered into a contractual arrangement for purchase of goods at a fixed
consideration payable to the creditor. A contractual arrangement that provides for payment in fixed
amount of cash to another entity meets the definition of financial liability.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 5: Contract for exchange on unfavorable conditions (MTP APR 2021)
A Ltd. (the ‘Company’) makes a borrowing for INR 10 lacs from RBC Bank, with bullet repayment of INR
10 lacs and an annual interest rate of 12% per annum. Now, Company defaults at the end of 5th year and
consequently, a rescheduling of the payment schedule is made beginning 6th year onwards. The Company is
required to pay INR 1,300,000 at the end of 6th year for one time settlement, in lieu of defaults in payments
made earlier.
Does the above instrument meet definition of financial liability? Please explain. Analyse the differential amount
to be exchanged for one-time settlement.
Solution
A Ltd. has entered into an arrangement wherein against the borrowing, A Ltd. has contractual obligationto
make stream of payments (including interest and principal). This meets definition of financial liability.
Let’s compute the amount required to be settled and any differential arising upon one time settlement at
the end of 6th year –
 Loan principal amount = Rs. 10,00,000
 Amount payable at the end of 6th year = Rs. 12,54,400 [10,00,000 * 1.12 x 1.12 (Interest for 5th & 6th
year in default plus principal amount)]
 One time settlement = INR 13,00,000
 Additional amount payable = Rs. 45,600
The above represents a contractual obligation to pay cash against settlement of a financial liability under
conditions that are unfavorable to A Ltd. (owing to additional amount payable in comparison to amount
that would have been paid without one time settlement). Hence, the rescheduled arrangement meets
definition of ‘financial liability’.
Illustration 6 : Preference shares with non-cumulative dividend
Silver Ltd. issued irredeemable preference shares with face value of ₹ 10 each and premium of ₹ 90. These
shares carry dividend @ 8% per annum, however dividend is paid only when Silver Ltd declares dividend
on equity shares. Analyse the nature of this instrument.
Solution
In the above case, two main characteristics of the preference shares are:
(i) Preference shares carry dividend, which is payable only when Company declares dividend on
equityshares
(ii) Preference share are irredeemable.
Analysing the definition of equity, an instrument meets definition of equity if:
(a) It contains no contractual obligation to pay cash; and
(b) Where an instrument shall be settled in own equity instruments, it’s a non-derivative contract that
will be settled only by issue of fixed number of shares or a derivative contract that will be settled by issue
of fixed number of shares for a fixed amount of cash.
In the above instrument, there is no contractual obligation on the Company to pay cash since –
(i) Face value is not redeemable (except in case of liquidation); and
(ii) Dividend is payable only if Company declares dividend on equity shares. Since dividend on equity
shares is discretionary and the Company can choose not to pay, Company has an unconditional right to
avoid payment of cash on preference shares also.
Hence preference shares meet definition of equity instrument.
Illustration 7: Non-derivative contract to be settled in own equity instruments
A Ltd. invests in compulsorily convertible preference shares (CCPS) issued by its subsidiary – B Ltd. at ₹
1,000 each (₹ 10 face value + ₹ 990 premium). Under the terms of the instrument, each CCPS is
compulsorily convertible into one equity share of B Ltd at the end of 5 years. Such CCPS carry dividend @
12% per annum, payable only when declared at the discretion of B Ltd. Evaluate this under definition of
financial instrument.
Solution
B Ltd. has issued CCPS which provide for –
(a) Conversion into fixed number of equity shares, ie, one equity share for every CCPS
(b) Non-cumulative dividends.
Applying the definition of ‘equity’ under Ind AS 32 –

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(a) There is no contractual obligation to deliver cash or other financial asset. Dividends are payable
only when declared and hence, at the discretion of the Issuer – B Ltd., thereby resulting in no contractual
obligation over B Ltd.
(b) Conversion is into a fixed number of equity shares.
Hence it meets definition of equity instrument and shall be classified as such in books of B Ltd.
Illustration 8 Settlement in variable number of shares
Target Ltd. took a borrowing from Z Ltd. for ₹ 10,00,000. Z Ltd. enters into an arrangement with Target Ltd. for
settlement of the loan against issue of a certain number of equity shares of Target Ltd. whose value equals ₹
10,00,000. For this purpose, fair value per share (to determine total number of equity shares to be issued) shall
be determined based on the market price of the shares of Target Ltd. at a future date, upon settlement of the
contract.
Evaluate this under definition of financial instrument.
Solution
In the above scenario, Target Ltd. is under an obligation to issue variable number of equity shares equal
to a total consideration of ₹ 10,00,000. Hence equity shares are used as currency for purpose of
settlement of an amount payable by Target Ltd.
Since this is variable number of shares to be issued in a non-derivative contract for fixed amount of
cash, it amounts to use of equity shares as ‘currency’ and hence this contract meets the definition of
financial liability in books of Target Ltd.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
CLASSIFICATION AND MEASUREMENT OF FINANCIAL ASSETS AND FINANCIAL LIABILITIES
Illustration 1
An entity holds investments to collect their contractual cash flows. The funding needs of the entity
are predictable and thematurity of its financial assets is matched to the entity's estimated funding
needs.
The entity performs credit risk management activities with the objective of minimising creditlosses.
In the past, sales have typically occurred when the financial assets' credit risk has increased such
that the assets no longer meet the credit criteria specified in the entity's documented investment
policy. In addition, infrequent sales have occurred as a result of unanticipated funding needs.
Reports to key management personnel focus on the credit quality of the financial assets and the
contractual return. The entity also monitors fair values of the financial assets, among other
information.
Evaluate the business model.
Solution
Although the entity considers, among other information, the financial assets' fair values from a
liquidity perspective (i.e., the cash amount that would be realised if the entity needs to sell
assets), the entity's objective is to hold the financial assets in order to collect the
contractual cash flows.
Sales would not contradict that objective if they were in response to an increase in the
assets' credit risk, for example if the assets no longer meet the credit criteria specified in
the entity's documented investment policy. Infrequent sales resulting from unanticipated
funding needs (eg in a stress case scenario) also would not contradict that objective, even
if such sales are significant in value.
Hence, the business model of the company is to collect contractual cash flows and not
realisation from sale of financial assets.
Illustration 2
An entity's business model is to purchase portfolios of financial assets, such as loans. Those
portfolios may or may not include financial assets that are credit impaired.
If payment on the loans is not made on a timely basis, the entity attempts to realise the
contractual cash flows through various means—for example, by contacting the debtor by mail,
telephone or other methods. The entity's objective is to collect the contractual cash flows and the
entity does not manage any of the loans in this portfolio with an objective of realising cash flows
by selling them.
In some cases, the entity enters into interest rate swaps to change the interest rate on particular
financial assets in a portfolio from a floating interest rate to a fixed interest rate.
Solution
The objective of the entity's business model is to hold the financial assets in order to collect the
contractual cash flows. The same analysis would apply even if the entity does not expect to
receive all of the contractual cash flows (eg some of the financial assets are credit impaired at
initial recognition).
Moreover, the fact that the entity enters into derivatives to modify the cash flows of the portfolio
does not in itself change the entity's business model.
Illustration 3
Entity B sells goods to customers on credit. Entity B typically offers customers up to 60 days
following the delivery of goods to make payment in full. Entity B collects cash in accordance with
the contractual cash flows of trade receivables and has no intention to dispose of the receivables.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
Entity’s B objective is to collect contractual cash flows from trade receivables and therefore, trade
receivables meet the business model test for the purpose of classifying the financial assets at
amortised cost.
Illustration 4
An entity anticipates capital expenditure in a few years. The entity invests its excess cash in short
and long-term financial assets so that it can fund the expenditure when the need arises. Many of
the financial assets have contractual lives that exceed the entity's anticipated investment period.
The entity will hold financial assets to collect the contractual cash flows and, when an opportunity
arises, it will sell financial assets to re-invest the cash in financial assets with a higher return. The
managers responsible for the portfolio are remunerated based on the overall return generated by
the portfolio.
Solution
The objective of the business model is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and
selling financial assets. The entity will make decisions on an ongoing basis about whether
collecting contractual cash flows or selling financial assets will maximise the return on the
portfolio until the need arises for the invested cash.
In contrast, consider an entity that anticipates a cash outflow in five years to fund capital
expenditure and invests excess cash in short-term financial assets. When the investments
mature, the entity reinvests the cash in new short-term financial assets. The entity maintains
this strategy until the funds are needed, at which time the entity uses the proceeds from the
maturing financial assets to fund the capital expenditure. Only sales that are insignificant in
value occur before maturity (unless there is an increase in credit risk). The objective of this
contrasting business model is to hold financial assets to collect contractual cash flows.
Illustration 5
An entity has a business model with the objective of originating loans to customers and
subsequently selling those loans to a securitisation vehicle. The securitisation vehicle issues
instruments to investors. The originating entity controls the securitisation vehicle and thus
consolidates it.
The securitisation vehicle collects the contractual cash flows from the loans and passes them on
to its investors. In the consolidated balance sheet, loans continue to be recognised because they
are not derecognised by the securitisation vehicle.
Solution
The entity originating loans to customers has the objective of realizing contractual cash flows
on the loan portfolio only through sale to securitisation vehicle. However, the consolidated
group originates loans withthe objective of holding them to collect the contractual cash flows.
Hence, the consolidated financial statements provide for a business model with the
objective of collectingcontractual cash flows by holding to maturity and in separate financial
statements of the entity originating loans to customers, business model isto collect cash flows to
through sale only.
Illustration 6
A financial institution holds financial assets to meet liquidity needs in a 'stress case' scenario (eg, a
run on the bank's deposits). The entity does not anticipate selling these assets except in such
scenarios. The entity monitors the creditquality of the financial assets and its objective in managing
the financial assets is to collect the contractual cash flows.
The entity evaluates the performance of the assets on the basis of interest revenue earned and credit
losses realised.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
However, the entity also monitors the fair value of the financial assets from a liquidity
perspective to ensure that the cash amount that would be realised if the entity needed to sell the
assets in a stress case scenario would be sufficient to meet the entity's liquidity needs. Periodically,
the entity makes sales that are insignificant in value to demonstrate liquidity.
Solution
The objective of the entity's business model is to hold the financial assets to collect
contractual cash flows.The analysis would not change –
- If during a previous stress case scenario, the entity had sales that were significant in
value in order tomeet its liquidity needs; or through sale only.
- Recurring sales activity that is insignificant in value is not inconsistent with holding
financial assetsto collect contractual cash flows; or
- If the entity is required by its regulator to routinely sell financial assets to demonstrate that the
assets are liquid, and the value of the assets sold is significant, the entity's business model is
not to hold financial assets to collect contractual cash flows. Whether a third party imposes the
requirement to sell the financial assets, or that activity is at the entity's discretion, is not relevant
to the analysis.
In contrast, if an entity holds financial assets to meet its everyday liquidity needs and meeting
that objective involves frequent sales that are significant in value, the objective of the entity's
business model is not to hold the financial assets to collect contractual cash flows.
Illustration 7
Instrument A is a bond with a stated maturity date. Payments of principal and interest on the
principal amount outstanding are linked to an inflation index of the currency in which the instrument
is issued. The inflation link is not leveraged and the principal is protected.
Evaluate the Contractual cash flows characteristics test
Solution
The contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest on the principal
amount outstanding. Linking payments of principal and interest on the principal amount
outstanding to an unleveragedinflation index resets the time value of money to a current level.
In other words, the interest rate on the instrument reflects 'real' interest. Thus, the interest
amounts are consideration for the time value of money on theprincipal amount outstanding.
However, if the interest payments were indexed to another variable such as the debtor's
performance (egthe debtor's net income) or an equity index, the contractual cash flows are not
payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding (unless the indexing to
the debtor's performance results in an adjustment that only compensates the holder for
changes in the credit risk of the instrument, such that contractual cash flows are solely
payments of principal and interest). That is because the contractual cash flows reflect a return
that is inconsistent with a basic lending arrangement.
Illustration 8
Instrument F is a bond that is convertible into a fixed number of equity instruments of the issuer.
Analyse the nature of cash flows.
Solution
The holder would analyse the convertible bond in its entirety. The contractual cash flows are not
payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding because they reflect a
return that is inconsistent with a basic lending arrangement; ie the return is linked to the value of
the equity of the issuer.
Illustration 9
Instrument H is a perpetual instrument but the issuer may call the instrument at any point and pay
the holder the par amount plus accrued interest due.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Instrument H pays a market interest rate but payment of interest cannot be made unless the issuer
is able to remain solvent immediately afterwards. Deferred interest does not accrue additional
interest. Analyse the nature of cash flows.
Solution
The contractual cash flows are not payments of principal and interest on the principal amount
outstanding. That is because the issuer may be required to defer interest payments and
additional interest does not accrue on those deferred interest amounts. As a result, interest
amounts are not consideration for the time value of money on the principal amount outstanding.
If interest accrued on the deferred amounts, the contractual cash flows could be payments
of principal andinterest on the principal amount outstanding.
Illustration 10
Instrument D is loan with recourse and is secured by collateral. Does the collateral affect the nature
of contractualcash flows?
Solution
The fact that a loan is collateralised (since with recourse) does not in itself affect the analysis of
whether the contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest on the
principal amount outstanding. The collateral is only a security to recover dues.
Illustration 11
Instrument G is a loan that pays an inverse floating interest rate (i.e., the interest rate has an inverse
relationship to market interest rates). Analyse the nature of cash flows.
Here, interest on the instrument has an inverse relationship to the market rate of interest.
Hence, it is unlike a basic lending arrangement which normally comprises of interest payable
on any funds lent, as a consideration for the time value of money, credit risk and profit margin
normally existing in such arrangements. This arrangement with an inverse floating interest rate
provides the lender with a return which may be higher or lower to the market rate of interest
and hence, is not necessarily a consideration for the time value of money on the principal
amount outstanding.
Thus, these do not represent contractual cash flows that are solely payments of principal
and interest on theprincipal amount outstanding.
Illustration12: Hold-to-collect’ business model test
An entity purchased a debt instrument for 1,00,000.
The instrument pays interest of 6,000 annually and has 10 years to maturity when purchased. The
entity intends to hold the asset to collect the contractual cash flows.
Evaluate the business model test.
Solution
Entity’s objective is to hold the asset to collect the contractual cash flows and not to sell the
assets before thematurity period.
Thus, the debt instrument would meet the ‘hold-to-collect’ business model test.
Illustration 13 Hold-to-collect’ business model test
An entity purchased a debt instrument for 1,00,000.
The instrument pays interest of 6,000 annually and has 10 years to maturity when purchased. The
entity intends to hold the asset to collect the contractual cash flows.
Six years have passed and the entity is suffering a liquidity crisis and needs to sell the asset to
raise funds.Evaluate the business model test.
Solution
Since the sale of financial assets was not expected on initial classification and therefore,
does not affect theclassification (i.e. there is no retrospective reclassification).
Thus, the debt instrument would still meet the ‘hold-to-collect’ business model test.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 14: SPPI or contractual cash flow test
SPPI test for loan with zero interest and no fixed repayment terms
Parent H Ltd. provides a loan to its Subsidiary S Ltd. The loan is classified as a current liability
in Subsidiary S’sfinancial statements and has the following terms:
– Interest free loan.
– No fixed repayment terms
– Repayable on demand of Parent H Ltd.
Does the loan meet the ‘SPPI’ or contractual cash flows characteristic test?
Yes. The terms for the repayment of the principal amount of the loan on demand satisfies the
criterion of SPPI.
Illustration 15 SPPI Test for loan with zero interest repayable in ten years
Parent H Ltd. provides a loan of INR 100 million to Subsidiary B. The loan has the following terms:
– No interest
– Repayable in ten years.
Solution
Yes. The terms for the repayment of the principal amount of the loan on demand satisfies the
criterion of SPPI
Illustration 16 : SPPI Test for loan with interest rate
Entity A Ltd. lends Entity B Ltd. INR 5 million for ten years, subject to the following terms:
– Interest is based on the prevailing variable market interest rate.
– Variable interest rate is capped at 10%.
– Repayable in ten years.
Solution
Contractual cash flows of both a fixed rate instrument and a floating rate instrument are
payments of principal and interest as long as the interest reflects consideration for the time
value of money and credit risk.
Therefore, a loan that contains a combination of a fixed and variable interest rate meets the
contractual cashflow characteristics test.
Illustration 17: Trade receivables – Amortised cost
H Ltd. makes sale of goods to customers on credit of 60 days. The customers are entitled to earn
a cash discount @ 5% per annum if payment is made before 60 days and an interest @ 12% per
annum is charged for any payments made after 60 days. Company does not have a policy of
selling its debtors and holds them to collect contractual cash flows.
Evaluate the financial instrument.
Solution
In the above case, since H Ltd. has a contractual right to receive cash flows from its customers
and therefore such trade receivable are financial assets for H Ltd.
Further, H Ltd. business model test to collect will satisfy as the objective is to hold its trade
receivable tocollect contractual cash flows till the end of maturity period. And such trade receivable
recorded in books represents contractual cash flows that are solely payments of principal and
interest if paid beyond creditperiod.
Hence such trade receivables are classified at amortised cost.
Illustration 18: : Security Deposits – Amortized Costs
A Ltd. (the ‘Company’) has obtained the premises from B Ltd. on lease to carry on its business.
The lease contract period is 5 years. As per the lease agreement, A Ltd. has paid security
deposits to B Ltd. amounting to ₹ 10 Lac which is refundable after the expiry of lease agreement.
How would such deposits be treated in books of the A Ltd.?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
In the above case, since A Ltd. has a contractual right to receive cash flows from its Lessor, B
Ltd. and therefore such security deposits receivable are financial assets for A Ltd.
Further, A Ltd. business model test to collect will be satisfied as the objective is to hold its security
deposits receivable to collect contractual cash flows till the end of maturity period. And such trade
receivable recorded in books represents contractual cash flows that are solely payments of
principal and interest.
Hence such security deposits receivables are classified at amortised cost.
Illustration 19: Hold-to-collect’ or ‘hold-to-collect & sell’ business model test
Entity A has surplus funds – INR 50 million
A has not yet found suitable investment opportunity so it buys medium dated (5-year maturity) high
quality government bonds in order to generate interest income.
If a suitable investment opportunity arises before the maturity date, the entity will sell the bonds
and use the proceeds for the acquisition of a business operation. It is likely that a suitable business
opportunity will be found before maturity date.
Whether the investment opportunity will meet the ‘hold-to-collect’ or ‘hold-to-collect & sell business
model test?
Solution
Government bonds would not meet the ‘hold-to-collect’ business model test because it is
considered likelythat the bonds will be sold well before their contractual maturity.
However, it is likely that such investment would meet the ‘hold-to-collect and sell’ business
model test.
Illustration 20 :
ABC Bank gave loans to a customer – Target Ltd. that carry fixed interest rate @ 10% per
annum for a 5-year term and 12% per annum for a 3-year term. Additionally, the bank charges
processing fees @1% of the principal amount borrowed. Target Ltd borrowed loans as follows:
- 10 lacs for a term of 5 years
- 8 lacs for a term of 3 years.
Compute the fair value upon initial recognition of the loan in books of Target Ltd. and how will
loan processing feebe accounted?
Solution
The loans from ABC Bank carry interest @ 10% and 12% for 5- year term and 3- year term
respectively. Additionally, there is a processing fee payable @ 1% on the principal amount on
date of transaction. It is assumed that ABC Bank charges all customers in a similar manner
and hence this is representative of the market rate of interest.
Amortised cost is computed by discounting all future cash flows at market rate of interest.
Further, any transaction fees that are an integral part of the transaction are adjusted in the
effective interest rate and recognised over the term of the instrument.
Illustration 21: Deposits carrying off-market rate of interest:
Containers Ltd provides containers for use by customers for multiple purposes. The containers are returnable at the
end of the service contract period (3 years) between Containers Ltd and its customers. In addition to the monthly
charge, there is a security deposit that each customer makes with Containers Ltd for ₹ 10,000 per container and such
deposit is refundable when the service contract terminates. Deposits do not carry any interest. Analyse the fair value
upon initial recognition in books of customers leasing containers. Market rate of interest for 3 year loan is 7% per
annum.
Solution
In the above case, lessee (ie, customers leasing the containers) make interest free deposits, which are refundable at
the end of 3 years. Now, this money if it was to lentto a third party would fetch interest @ 7% per annum.
Hence, discounting all future cash flows (ie, ₹ 10,000)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Fair value on initial recognition = 10,000 / (1+0.07)3 = 8,163. Differential on day 1 = 10,000 8,163 = 1,837
The differential on day 1 shall be treated as follows:
- Scenario 1 – If fair valuation is determined using level 1 inputs or other observable inputs, difference on
day 1 recognised in profit or loss
- Scenario 2 – If fair valuation is determined using other inputs, difference on day 1 shall be recognised in
profit or loss unless it meets definition of an asset or liability.
However, in case of security deposits level 1 fair value is not available. Therefore, in the above case, the fair
valuation is made based on unobservable inputs and hence applying scenario 2, difference can be recognised as an
asset if it meets the definition. Now, since the lessee gets to use the containers in return for making an interest free
deposit plus monthly charges, the lost interest representing day 1 difference between value of deposit and its fair
value is like ‘’prepaid lease rent’ and can be recognised as such. Prepaid rent (ROU Asset) shall be charged off to
profit or loss in a straight-lined manner as ‘lease rent’.
Illustration 22: Accounting for transaction costs on initial and subsequent measurement of a financial
asset measured at fair value with changes through other comprehensive income:
An entity acquires a financial asset for CU100 plus a purchase commission of CU2. Initially, the entity recognises
the asset at CU102. The reporting period ends one day later, when the quoted market price of the asset is CU100.
If the asset were sold, a commission of CU3
would be paid. How would transaction costs be accounted in books of the entity?
Solution
- On that date, the entity measures the asset at CU100 (without regard to the possible commission on sale) and
recognises a loss of CU2 in other comprehensive income.
- If the financial asset is measured at fair value through other comprehensive income in accordance with Ind AS
109.4.1.2A, the transaction costs are amortised to profit or loss using the effective interest method.
Illustration 23: Determining fair value upon initial measurement
The shareholders of Company C provide C with financing in the form of loan notes to enable it to acquire
investments in subsidiaries. The loan notes will be redeemed solely out of dividends received from these subsidiaries
and become redeemable only when C has sufficient funds to do so. In this context, 'sufficient funds' refers only to
dividend receipts from
subsidiaries. Analyse the initial measurement of loan notes.
Solution
In this case –
Loan notes are repayable only then C earns returns in form of dividends from subsidiaries. Hence, C cannot be
forced to obtain additional external financing or to liquidate its investments to redeem the shareholder loans.
Consequently, the loan notes are not considered payable on demand.
Accordingly –
- Loan notes shall be initially measured at their fair value (plus transaction costs), being the present value of
the expected future cash flows, discounted using a market-related rate. The amount and timing of the expected
future cash flows should be determined on the basis of the expected dividend flow from the subsidiaries. Also,
the valuation would need to take into account possible early repayments of principal and corresponding
reductions in interest expense.
- Since the loan notes are interest-free or bear lower-than-market interest, there will be a difference between
the nominal value of the loan notes - i.e. the amount granted - and their fair value on initial recognition. Because
the financing is provided by shareholders, acting in the capacity of shareholders, the resulting credit should
be reflected in equity as a shareholder contribution in C's balance sheet. Conversely, in books of
shareholders, the difference between amount invested and its fair value shall be recorded as ‘investment in C
Ltd’ being representative of the underlying relationship between shareholders and C Ltd.
Illustration 24 : Use of cost v/s fair value determination for equity instruments
Silver Ltd. has made an investment in optionally convertible preference shares (OCPS) of a Company – Bronze Ltd.
at ₹ 100 per share (face value ₹ 100 per share). Silver Ltd. has an option to convert these OCPS into equity shares in

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
the ratio of 1:1 and if such option not exercised till end of 9 years, then the shares shall be redeemable at the end
of 10 years ata premium of 20%.
Analyse the measurement of this investment in books of Silver Ltd.
Solution
The classification assessment for a financial asset is done based on two characteristics:
i. Whether the contractual cash flows comprise cash flows that are solely payments of principal and interest on
the principal outstanding
ii. Entity’s business model (BM) for managing financial assets – Whether the Company’s BM is to collect cash
flows; or a BM that involves realisation of both contractual cash flows & sale of financial assets;
In all other cases, the financial assets are measured at fair value through profit or loss.
In the above case, the Holder can realise return either through conversion or redemption at the end of 10 years,
hence it does not indicate contractual cash flows that are solely payments of principal and interest. Therefore,
such investment shall be carried at fair value through profit or loss. Accordingly, the investment shall be measured at
fair value periodically with gain/ loss recorded in profit or loss.
Illustration 25 : Accounting for assets at amortised cost
A Ltd has made a security deposit whose details are described below. Make necessary journal entries for
accounting of the deposit in the first year and last year. Assume market interest rate for a deposit for similar period
to be 12% per annum.
Particulars Details
Date of Security Deposit (Starting Date) 1-Apr-20X1
Date of Security Deposit (Finishing Date) 31-Mar-20X6
Description Lease
Total Lease Period 5 years
Discount rate 12.00%
Security deposit (A) 10,00,000
Present value factor at the 5th year 0.567427
Solution
The above security deposit is an interest free deposit redeemable at the end of lease term for ₹ 10,00,000. Hence,
this involves collection of contractual cash flows and shall be accounted at amortised cost.
Upon initial measurement –
Particulars Details
Total Lease Period (Years) 5
Present value factor of 5th year end 0.56743
Present value of deposit at beginning (B) 5,67,427
Prepaid lease payment at beginning (A-B) 4,32,573
Journal Entries
Year – 1 beginning
Security deposit A/c Dr. 5,67,427
Prepaid lease expenses Dr. 4,32,573
To Bank A/c 10,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Subsequently, every annual reporting year, interest income shall be accrued @ 12% per annum and prepaid
expenses shall be amortised on straight line basis over the lease term.
Year 1 end
Security deposit A/c (5,67,427 x 12%) Dr. 68,091
To Interest income A/c 68,091
Depreciation (4,32,573 / 5 years) Dr. 86,515
To Prepaid lease expenses 86,515
At the end of 5th year, the security deposit shall accrue ₹ 10,00,000 and prepaid lease expenses shall be fully
amortised (i.e. depreciated as per Ind AS 116, this prepaid lease rent would be shown as ROU asset). Journal entry
for realisation of security deposit –
To Interest income A/c 1,07,143
Depreciation (4,32,573 / 5 years) Dr. 86,515
To Prepaid lease expenses (ROU Asset) 86,515
Bank A/c Dr. 10,00,000
To Security deposit A/c 10,00,000
Illustration 26: Accounting for assets at FVTPL
A Ltd. invested in equity shares of C Ltd. on 15th March for ₹ 10,000. Transaction costs were ₹ 500 in addition to
the basic cost of ₹ 10,000. On 31 March, the fair value of the equity shares was ₹ 11,200 and market rate of
interest is 10% per annum for a 10-year loan. Pass necessary journal entries. Analyse the measurement principle
and pass necessary journal entries.
Solution
The above investment is in equity shares of C Ltd and hence, does not involve any contractual cash flows that are solely
payments of principal and interest. Hence, these equity shares shall be measured at fair value through profit or loss. Also, an
irrecoverable option exists to designate such investment as fair value through other comprehensive income.
Journal Entries
Upon initial recognition –
Investment in equity shares of C Ltd. Dr. 10,000
Transaction cost Dr. 500
To Bank A/c 10,500
(Being investment recognized at fair value plus transactioncosts upon
initial recognition)
Profit and Loss A/c Dr. 500
To Transaction cost 500
(Being transaction cost incurred on assets measured at FVTPL transferred
to P&L A/c)
Subsequently –
Investment in equity shares of C Ltd. Dr. 1,200
To Fair value gain on financial instruments 1,200
(Being fair value gain recognized at year end in P&L)
Fair value gain on financial instruments Dr. 1,200
To Profit and Loss A/c 1,200
(Being fair value gain transferred to P&L A/c)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 27: Accounting for assets at FVOCI
Metallics Ltd. has made an investment in equity instrument of a company – Castor Ltd. for 19% equity stake.
Significant influence not exercised. The investment was made for₹ 5,00,000 for 10,000 equity shares on 01 April
20X1. On 30 June 20X1 the fair value per equity share is ₹ 45. The Company has taken an irrevocable option to
measure such investment at fair value through other comprehensive income.
Solution
The Company has made an irrecoverable option to carry its investment at fair value through other comprehensive
income. Accordingly, the investment shall be initially recognised at fair value and all subsequent fair value gains/ losses
shall be recognised in other comprehensive income (OCI).
Journal Entries
Upon initial recognition –
Investment in equity shares of C Ltd. Dr. 5,00,000
To Bank a/c 5,00,000
(Being investment recognized at fair value plus transaction costs upon
initial recognition)
Subsequently –
Fair value loss on financial instruments Dr. 50,000
To Investment in equity shares of C Ltd. 50,000
(Being fair value loss recognised)
Fair value reserve in OCI Dr. 50,000
To Fair value loss on financial instruments 50,000
(Being fair value loss recognized in other comprehensiveincome)
Illustration 28: Accounting for assets at FVOCI
XYZ Ltd. is a company incorporated in India. It provides INR 10,00,000 interest free loan to its wholly owned
Indian subsidiary (ABC). There are no transaction costs.
How should the loan be accounted for, in the Ind AS financial statements of XYZ, ABC and consolidated
financial statements of the group?
Consider the following scenarios:
a) The loan is repayable on demand.
b) The loan is repayable after 3 years. The current market rate of interest for similar loan is 10% p.a. for both
holding and subsidiary.
c) The loan is repayable when ABC has funds to repay the loan.
Solution
Ind AS 109 requires that a financial assets and liabilities are recognized on initial recognition at its fair value, as
adjusted for the transaction cost. In accordance with Ind AS 113 Fair Value Measurement, the fair value of a
financial liability with a demand feature (e.g., a demand deposit) is not less than the amount payable on demand,
discounted from the first date that the amount could be required to be paid.
Using the guidance, the loan will be accounted for as below in various scenarios:
Scenario (a)
Since the loan is repayable on demand, it has fair value equal to cash consideration given. The parent and
subsidiary recognize financial asset and liability, respectively, at the amount of loan given. Going forward, no
interest is accrued on the loan.
Upon repayment, both the parent and the subsidiary reverse the entries made at origination.
Scenario (b)
Both parent and subsidiary recognize financial asset and liability, respectively, at fair value on initial recognition.
The difference between the loan amount and its fair value is treated as an equity contribution to the subsidiary.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
This represents a further investment by the parent in the subsidiary.
Accounting in the books of XYZ Ltd (Parent)
S No. Particulars Amount Amount
On the date of loan
1 Loan to ABC Ltd (Subsidiary) Dr. 7,51,315
Deemed Investment (Capital Contribution) in ABC Ltd Dr. 2,48,685
To Bank 10,00,000
(Being the loan is given to ABC Ltd and recognised at fair
value)
Accrual of Interest income
2 Loan to ABC Ltd Dr. 75,131
To Interest income 75,131
(Being interest income accrued) – Year 1
On repayment of loan
Bank 10,00,000
5 To Loan to ABC Ltd (Subsidiary) 10,00,000
Accounting in the books of ABC Ltd (Subsidiary)
S.No. Particulars Amount Amount
On the date of loan
1 Bank Dr. 10,00,000
To Loan from XYZ Ltd (Payable) 751,315
To Equity (Deemed Capital Contribution from ABC Ltd) 2,48,685
(Being the loan is given to ABC Ltd and recognised at Fair
value)
Accrual of Interest
2 Interest expense Dr. 75,131
(Being interest expense recognised) – Year I
(Being interest expense recognised) – Year II
(Being interest expense recognised) – Year III
On repayment of loan
5 Loan from XYZ Ltd (Payable) Dr. 10,00,000
To Bank 10,00,000
Working Notes:-
1 Computation of Present value of loan
Rate 10%
Amount of Loan 10,00,000
Year 3

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Present Value 7,51,315
2 Computation of interest for Year I
Present Value 7,51,315
Rate 10%
Period of interest - for 1 year 1
Closing value at the end of year 1 8,26,446
Interest for 1st year 75,131
3 Computation of interest for Year 2
Value of loan as at the beginning of Year 2 8,26,446
Rate 10%
Period of interest - for 2nd year 1
Interest for 2nd year 82,645
4 Computation of interest for Year 3
Value of loan as at the beginning of Year 3 9,09,091
Rate 10%
Period of interest - for 3rd year 1
Interest for 3rd year 90,909
Scenario (c)
Generally, a loan, which is repayable when funds are available, can’t be stated to be repayable on demand. Rather,
the entities need to estimate repayment date and determine its measurement accordingly. If the loan is expected
to be repaid in three years, its measurement will be the same as in scenario (b).
In the Consolidated Financial Statements (CFS), the loan and interest income/expense will get knocked-off as intra-group
transaction in all three scenarios. Hence the above accounting will not have any impact in the CFS. However, if the
loan is in foreign currency, exchange difference will continue to impact the statement of profit and loss in
accordance with the requirements of Ind AS 21.
Illustration 29 : Trade creditors at market terms
A Company purchases its raw materials from a vendor at a fixed price of ₹ 1,000 per tonne of steel. The payment
terms provide for 45 days of credit period, after which an interest of 18% per annum shall be charged. How would the
creditors be classified in books of the Company?
Solution
In the above case, creditors for purchase of steel shall be carried at amortised cost, ie, fair value of amount
payable upon initial recognition plus interest (if payment is delayed). Here, fair value upon initial recognition shall
be the price per tonne, since the transaction is at market terms between two knowledgeable parties in an arms-length
transaction and hence, the transaction price is representative of fair value.
Illustration 30
An entity is about to purchase a portfolio of fixed rate assets that will be financed by fixed rate debentures. Both
financial assets and financial liabilities are subject to the same interest rate risk that gives rise to opposite changes in
fair value that tend to offset each other. Provide your comments.
Solution
The fixed rate assets provide for contractual cash flows and based on business model of the entity, such fixed rate
assets may be classified as ‘amortised cost’ (if entity collects contractual cash flows) or fair value through other
comprehensive income (FVOCI) (if entity manages through collecting contractual cash and sale of financial assets).
In the absence of fair value option, the entity can classify the fixed rate assets as FVOCI with gains and losses on
changes in fair value recognised in other comprehensive income and fixed rate debentures at amortised cost.
However, reporting both assets and liabilities at fair value through profit and loss, ie, FVTPL corrects the
measurement inconsistency and produces more relevant information.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Hence, it may be appropriate to classify the entire group of fixed rate assets and fixed rate debentures at fair
value through profit or loss (FVTPL).
Illustration 31: Issue of borrowings with fixed rate of interest
A Ltd has made a borrowing from RBC Bank for ₹ 10,000 at a fixed interest of 10% per annum. Loan processing
fees were additionally paid for ₹ 500 and loan is payable after 5 years inbullet repayment of principal. Details
are as follows:
Particulars Details
Loan amount ₹ 10,000
Date of loan (Starting Date) 1-Apr-20X1
Date of repayment of principal amount (FinishingDate) 31-March-20X6
Interest rate 10.00%
Interest charge Interest to be charged and paid yearly
Upfront fees ₹ 500
How would loan be accounted in books of A Ltd?
Solution
The loan taken by A Ltd shall be measured at amortised cost as follows:
- Initial measurement – At transaction price less processing fees
= 10,000 – 500 = 9,500
- Subsequently – interest to be accrued using effective rate of interest as follows:
Year end Opening Interest @ Repayment of Closing
balance 11.42% interest & principal balance
1 9,500 1,085 1,000 9,585
2 9,585 1,095 1,000 9,679
3 9,679 1,105 1,000 9,785
4 9,785 1,117 1,000 9,902
5 9,902 1,098* 11,000 -
* Difference due to approximation
Computation of IRR
IRR would be the rate using which the present value of cash flow should come out to be ₹ 9,500 i.e. (₹ 10,000 less
₹ 500).
For this, we should first compute present value of cashflows using any two rates as follows:
Year Openingbalance Repayment Closing PVF @ Present PVF @ Present
end /Cashflows balance 10% Value at 13% Value at
10% rate 13% rate
1 9,500 1,000 8,500 0.909 909 0.885 885
2 8,500 1,000 7,500 0.826 826 0.783 783
3 7,500 1,000 6,500 0.751 751 0.693 693
4 6,500 1,000 5,500 0.683 683 0.613 613
5 5,500 11,000 (5,500) 0.621 6,830 0.543 5,970*
10,000 8,945
*Difference is due to approximation
Taking 10% as discount rate, present value (PV) comes out to be ₹ 10,000.
If rate is increased by 3% over a base rate of 10%, PV decreases by ₹ 1,055 (i.e. ₹ 10,000less ₹8945).
To decrease PV by ₹ 1,055, rate should be increased = 3%
To decrease PV by Re.1, rate should be increased = 3%
1,055
To decrease PV by ₹ 500, rate should be increased = 3 % X 500
1,055
= 1.42%

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
This would mean that the discount rate to get present value of cashflows equivalent to 9,500 should
be 11.42% (i.e. 10% + 1.42%).
Illustration 32: Issue of borrowings with fixed rate of interest
A Ltd has made a borrowing from RBC Bank for ₹ 10,000 at a fixed interest of 12% per annum. Loan processing fees
were additionally paid for ₹ 500 and loan is payable 4 half-yearly installments of ₹ 2,500 each. Details are as
follows:
Particulars Details
Loan amount ₹ 10,000
Date of loan (Starting Date) 1-Apr-20X1
Date of loan (Finishing Date) 31-March-20X3
Description of repayment Repayment of loan starts from 30-Sept-20X1 (To be paid half
yearly)
Installment amount ₹ 2,500
Interest rate 12.00%
Interest charge Interest to be charged quarterly
Upfront fees ₹ 500
How would loan be accounted in books of A Ltd?
Consider IRR is 16.60% p.a.
Solution
The loan taken by A Ltd shall be measured at amortised cost as follows:
- Initial measurement – At transaction price less processing fees = 10,000 – 500 = 9,500
- Subsequently – interest to be accrued using effective rate of interest as follows:
Date Amount Re- Upfront Amount Days IRR Revised Loan
of Loan payment fees of Calcula Interest Balance
paid Interest - tion computed
1-Apr-20X1 10,000 - 500 - - 9,500 - -
30-Jun-20X1 - - - 300 90 (300) 389 9,589
30-Sep-20X1 - 2500 - 300 92 (2,800) 401 7,190
31-Dec-20X1 - - - 225 92 (225) 301 7,266
31-Mar 20X2 - 2500 - 225 90 (2,725) 297 4,838
30-Jun-20X2 - - - 150 91 (150) 200 4,888
30-Sep-20X2 - 2500 - 150 92 (2,650) 204 2,442
31-Dec-20X2 - - - 75 92 (75) 102 2,473
31-Mar-20X3 - 2500 - 75 91 (2,575) 102 -
IRR 16.60%
Illustration 33 : Issue of variable number of shares against issue of CCPS
A Ltd. issued compulsorily convertible preference shares (CCPS) at ₹ 100 each (₹ 10 face value + ₹ 90 premium
per share) for ₹ 10,00,000. These are convertible into equity shares at the end of 10 years, where the number of
equity shares to be issued shall be determined based on fair value per equity share to be determined at the time of
conversion.
Evaluate if this is financial liability or equity? What if the conversion ratio was fixed at thetime of issue of such
preference shares?
Solution
i. As per Ind AS 109, non-derivative contracts which will be settled against issue of variable number of own
equity shares meet the definition of financial liability.
In this case, A Ltd. has issued CCPS which are convertible into variable number of shares. Hence, it is akin to use of
own equity shares as currency for settlement of the liability of CCPS issued. Accordingly, it meets the definition of
financial liability.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Measurement –
Initial measurement – This shall be measured at fair value on date of transaction. Since A Ltd shall give
shares worth ₹ 10 lacs at the end of 10 years which is equal to the amount borrowed on day 1, the liability is
recognised at fair value, determined by discounting future settlement of the borrowed amount. For difference arising
on day 1 between amount borrowed and that recognised as liability using level 3 inputs, it is deferred and recognised
on a systematic basis over the period of liability.
Subsequent measurement – Such liability shall be carried at fair value through profitor loss.
ii. Per Ind AS 109, a non-derivative contract that involves issue of fixed number of equity shares shall be
classified as equity.
In this case, if the conversion of CCPS was into a fixed number of equity shares at the end of 10 years, then it meets
the definition of equity and hence, shall be classified as ‘equity instrument’.
An equity instrument is carried at cost and no further adjustments made to its carrying value after initial recognition.
Illustration 34: Accounting treatment of processing fees belonging to undisbursed loan Amount
X Ltd. had taken 6-year term loan in April 20X0 from bank and paid processing fees at the time of sanction of loan.
The term loan is disbursed in different tranches from April 20X0 to April 20X6. On the date of transition to Ind AS, i.e.
1.4.20X5, it has calculated the net present value of term loan disbursed upto 31.03.20X5 by using effective interest
rate and proportionate processing fees has been adjusted in disbursed amount while calculating net present value.
What will be the accounting treatment of processing fees belonging to undisbursed term loan amount?
Solution
Processing fee is an integral part of the effective interest rate of a financial instrument and shall be included while
calculating the effective interest rate.
(a) Accounting treatment in case future drawdown is probable
It may be noted that to the extent there is evidence that it is probable that the undisbursed term loan will be drawn
down in the future, the processing fee is accounted for as a transaction cost under Ind AS 109, i.e., the fee is deferred
and deducted from the carrying value of the financial liabilities when the draw down occurs and considered in the effective
interest rate calculations.
(b) Accounting treatment in case future drawdown is not probable
If it is not probable that the undisbursed term loan will be drawn down in the future, then the fees is recognised as
an expense on a straight-line basis over the term of the loan.
Illustration 35: Accounting treatment of prepayment premium and processing fees for obtaining new loan to
prepay old loan
PQR Limited had obtained term loan from Bank A in 20X1-20X2 and paid loan processing fees and
commitment charges.
In May 20X5, PQR Ltd. has availed fresh loan from Bank B as take-over of facility i.e. the new loan is
sanctioned to pay off the old loan taken from Bank A. The company paid prepayment premium to Bank A to
clear the old term loan and paid processing fees to BankB for the new term loan.
Whether the prepayment premium and the processing fees both will be treated as transactioncost (as per Ind AS 109,
Financial Instruments) of obtaining the new loan, in the financial statements of PQR Ltd?
Solution
(a) Accounting treatment of prepayment premium
Ind AS 109, provides that if an exchange of debt instruments or modification of terms is accounted for as an
extinguishment, any costs or fees incurred are recognised as part of the gain or loss on the extinguishment in the
statement of profit and loss.
Since the original loan was prepaid, the prepayment would result in extinguishment of the original loan. The difference
between the CV of the financial liability extinguished and the consideration paid shall be recognised in profit or loss as
per Ind AS 109.
Accordingly, the prepayment premium shall be recognised as part of the gain or loss on extinguishment of the old
loan.
(b) Accounting treatment of Unamortised processing fee of old loan
Unamortised processing fee related to the old loan will also be required to be charged to the statement of profit and
loss.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(c) Accounting treatment of Processing fee for new loan
Transaction costs are “Incremental costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition, issue or disposal of a
financial asset or financial liability. An incremental cost is one that would not have been incurred if the entity had not
acquired, issued or disposed of the financial instrument.”
It is assumed that the loan processing fees solely relates to the origination of the new loan (i.e. does not represent loan
modification/renegotiation fees). Hence, the processing fees paid to avail fresh loan from Bank B will be considered
as transaction cost in the nature of origination fees of the new loan and will be included while calculating effective
interest rate as per Ind AS 109.
Illustration 36: Accounting treatment of share held as stock in trade
A share broking company is dealing in sale/purchase of shares for its own account andtherefore is having inventory
of shares purchased by it for trading.
How will these instruments be accounted for in the financial statements?
Solution
Ind AS 2, Inventories, states that this Standard applies to all inventories, except financial instruments (Ind AS 32,
Financial Instruments: Presentation and Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments).
Accordingly, the principles of recognising and measuring financial instruments are governed by Ind AS 109, its
presentation is governed by Ind AS 32 and disclosures are in accordance with Ind AS 107, Financial Instruments:
Disclosures, even if these instruments are held as stock-in trade by a company.
Further Ind AS 101, First-time Adoption of Indian Accounting Standards does not provide any transitional relief from the
application of the above standards.
Accordingly, in the given case, the relevant requirements of Ind AS 109, Ind AS 32 and Ind AS 107 shall be
applied retrospectively.
Illustration 37
Bonds for ₹ 1,00,000 reclassified as FVTPL. Fair value on reclassification is ₹ 90,000. Pass the required
journal entry.
Solution
Bonds at FVTPL Dr. 90,000
Loss on reclassification Dr. 10,000
To Bonds at amortised cost 1,00,000
Illustration 38
Bonds for ₹ 1,00,000 reclassified as FVOCI. Fair value on reclassification is ₹ 90,000. Pass the required
journal entry.
Solution
Bonds at FVOCI Dr. 90,000
OCI (Loss on reclassification) Dr. 10,000
To Bonds at amortised cost 1,00,000
Illustration 39
Bonds for ₹ 100,000 reclassified as Amortised cost. Fair value on reclassification is 90,000. Pass the required
journal entry.
Solution
Bonds at Amortised cost Dr. 90,000
To Bonds at FVTPL 1,00,000
Illustration 40
Bonds for ₹ 100,000 reclassified as FVOCI. Fair value on reclassification is ₹ 90,000. Pass the required
journal entry

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
To Bonds at FVTPL 1,00,000
Illustration 41
Bonds for ₹ 100,000 reclassified as Amortised cost. Fair value on reclassification is
₹ 90,000 and ₹ 10,000 loss was recognised in OCI till date of reclassification. Passrequired journal entry.
Solution
To OCI - Loss on reclassification 10,000
[Being loss recognized in OCI now reversed prior toreclassification]
Bonds (Amortised cost) Dr. 1,00,000
To Bonds at FVOCI 1,00,000
[Being bonds reclassified from FVOCI to Amortised cost]
Illustration 42
Bonds for ₹ 100,000 reclassified as FVTPL. Fair value on reclassification is ₹ 90,000.Pass the required
journal entry.
Solution
P&L - Loss on reclassification Dr. 10,000
To Bonds at FVTOCI 10,000
Bonds at FVTPL Dr. 90,000
To Bonds at FVOCI 90,000
Illustration 43 :12 month expected credit loss – Probability of default approach
Entity A originates a single 10- year amortising loan for CU1 million. Taking into consideration the expectations for
instruments with similar credit risk (using reasonable and supportable information that is available without undue cost
or effort), the credit risk of the borrower, and the economic outlook for the next 12 months, Entity A estimates that
the loan at initial recognition has a probability of default (PoD) of 0.5 per cent over the next 12 months. Entity A
also determines that changes in the 12-month PoD are a reasonable approximation of the changes in the lifetime PoD
for determining whether there has been a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition. Loss given
default (LGD) is estimated as 25% of the balance outstanding. Calculate loss allowance.
Solution
At reporting date, no change in 12-month POD and entity assesses that there is no significant increase in credit risk since
initial recognition – therefore lifetime ECL is not required to be recognised.
Particulars Details
Loan ₹ 1,000,000 (A)
LGD 25% (B)
PoD – 12 months 0.5% (C)
Loss allowance (for 12-months ECL) ₹ 1,250 (A*B*C)
Illustration 44: 12 month expected credit loss – Loss rate approach
Bank A originates 2,000 bullet loans with a total gross carrying amount of CU 500,000. Bank A segments its
portfolio into borrower groups (Groups X and Y) on the basis of shared credit risk characteristics at initial recognition.
Group X comprises 1,000 loans with a gross carrying amount per client of CU 200, for a total gross carrying amount
of CU 200,000. Group Y comprises 1,000 loans with a gross carrying amount per client of CU 300, for a total gross
carrying amount of CU 300,000. There are no transaction costs and the loan contracts include no options (for

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
example, prepayment or call options), premiums or discounts, points paid, or other fees. Calculate loss rate
when
Group Historic per annum average defaults Present value of observed loss assumed
X 4 CU 600
Y 2 CU 450
Solution
- Bank A measures expected credit losses on the basis of a loss rate approach for Groups X and Y. In order to
develop its loss rates, Bank A considers samples of its own historical default and loss experience for those
types of loans.
- In addition, Bank A considers forward-looking information, and updates its historical information for current
economic conditions as well as reasonable and supportable forecasts of future economic conditions.
Historically, for a population of 1,000 loans in each group, Group X's loss rates are 0.3 per cent, based on four
defaults, and historical loss rates for Group Y are 0.15 per cent, based on two defaults.
Number Estimated Total Historic Estimated Present Loss rate
of clients per client estimated per annum Total gross value of
in sample gross Gross average carrying observed
carrying carrying defaults amount at loss
amount at amount at default assumed
default default
Group A B C=A×B D E=B×D F G=F÷C
X 1,000 CU 200 CU 2,00,000 4 CU 800 CU 600 0.3%
Y 1,000 CU 300 CU 3,00,000 2 CU 600 CU 450 0.15%
Illustration 45: Life time expected credit losses (provision matrix for short term receivables)
Company M, a manufacturer, has a portfolio of trade receivables of CU 30 million in 20X1and operates only in
one geographical region. The customer base consists of a large number of small clients and the trade receivables
are categorised by common risk characteristics that are representative of the customers' abilities to pay all
amounts due in accordance with the contractual terms. The trade receivables do not have a significant financing
component in accordance with Ind AS 115. In accordance with paragraph 5.5.15 of Ind AS 109 the loss allowance for
such trade receivables is always measured at an amount equal to lifetime expected credit losses.
Please use the following information of debtors outstanding:
Gross carrying amount
Current CU 15,000,000
1–30 days past due CU 7,500,000
More than 90 days past due CU 1,000,000
CU 30,000,000
Company M uses following default rates for making provisions:
Current 1–30 days 31–60 61–90 days More than 90 days
past due days past due past due past due
Default rate 0.3% 1.6% 3.6% 6.6% 10.6%
Determine the expected credit losses for portfolio?
Solution
To determine the expected credit losses for the portfolio, Company M uses a provision matrix. The provision matrix
is based on its historical observed default rates over the expected life of the trade receivables and is adjusted for
forward-looking estimates. At every reporting date the historical observed default rates are updated and changes in
the forward-looking estimates are analysed. In this case it is forecast that economic conditions will deteriorate
over the next year.
On that basis, Company M estimates the following provision matrix:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Current 1–3days past 31–60 days 61–90 days More than 90days
due past due past due past due
Default rate 0.3% 1.6% 3.6% 6.6% 10.6%
The trade receivables from the large number of small customers amount to CU 30 million and are measured
using the provision matrix.
Gross carrying Lifetime expected credit loss
amount allowance (Gross carrying amount x
lifetime expected credit loss rate)
Current CU 15,000,000 CU 45,000
1–30 days past due CU 7,500,000 CU 120,000
More than 90 days past due CU 1,000,000 CU 106,000
CU 30,000,000 CU 580,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
UNIT 3: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS: EQUITY AND FINANCIAL LIABILITIES
Illustration 1: Redeemable preference shares with mandatory dividend
A Ltd. (issuer) issues preference shares to B Ltd (holder). Those preference shares are redeemable at the end
of 10 years from the date of issue and entitle the holder to a cumulative dividend of 15% p.a. The rate of dividend is
commensurate with the credit risk profile of the issuer.
Examine the nature of the financial instrument.
Solution
This instrument provides for mandatory fixed dividend payments and redemption by the issuer for a fixed amount
at a fixed future date. Since there is a contractual obligation to deliver cash (for both dividends and repayment of
principal) to the preference shareholder that cannot be avoided, the instrument is a financial liability in its entirety.
Illustration 2 : Redeemable debentures with discretionary dividend
X Co. Ltd. (issuer) issues debentures to Y Co. Ltd. (holder). Those debentures are redeemable at the end of 10
years from the date of issue. Interest of 15% p.a. is payable at the discretion of the
issuer. The rate of interest is commensurate with the credit risk profile of the issuer. Examine the nature of the
Solution
This instrument has two components – (1) mandatory redemption by the issuer for a fixed amount at a fixed future
date, and (2) interest payable at the discretion of the issuer.
The first component is a contractual obligation to deliver cash (for repayment of principal with or without premium, as
per terms) to the debenture holder that cannot be avoided. This component of the instrument is a financial
liability.
The second component of interest payable is discretion of the issuer and hence will be classified as equity. This
is also discussed in detailed in the compound financial instrument section (Also refer Illustration 27 in the
subsequent section).
Illustration 3: Perpetual loan with mandatory interest
P Co. Ltd. (issuer) takes a loan from Q Co. Ltd. (holder). The loan is perpetual and entitles the holder to fixed
interest of 8% p.a. Examine the nature of the financial instrument.
Solution
This instrument has two components – (1) mandatory interest by the issuer for a fixed amount at a fixed future
date, and (2) perpetual nature of the principal amount.
The first component is a contractual obligation to deliver cash (for payment of interest) to the lender that
cannot be avoided. This component of the instrument is a financial liability.
Illustration 4: Restriction on the ability of an entity to satisfy a contractual obligation
Does the lack of access to foreign currency or the need to obtain approval for payment from a regulatory
authority, will lead to contractual obligation?
Solution
Lack of access to foreign currency or the need to obtain approval for payment from a regulatory authority, does not
negate the entity's contractual obligation or the holder's contractual right under the instrument.
Illustration 5: Optionally convertible redeemable preference shares (MTP MAY 2020)
D Ltd. issues preference shares to G Ltd. The holder has an option to convert these preference shares to equity
instruments of the issuer anytime up to a period of 10 years. If the option is not exercised by the holder, the
preference shares are redeemed at the end of 10 years. Examine the nature of the financial instrument.
Solution
This instrument has two components – (1) contractual obligation that is conditional on holder exercising its
right to redeem, and (2) conversion option with the holder.
The first component is a financial liability because the entity does not have the unconditional right to avoid
delivering cash.
In the section “Compound financial instruments”, we will also analyse the other component
– the conversion option with the holder and we will explain the nature of the instrument inits entirety.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 6: Settlement alternative is non-financial obligation
LMN Ltd. issues preference shares to PQR Ltd. These preference shares are redeemable at the end of 5 years
from the date of issue.
The instrument also provides a settlement alternative to the issuer whereby it can transfer a particular
commercial building to the holder, whose value is estimated to be significantly higher
than the cash settlement amount. Examine the nature of the financial instrument.
Solution
Such preference shares are financial liability because the entity can avoid a transfer of cash or another
financial asset only by settling the non-financial obligation.
Illustration 7: Cap on amount payable on liquidation
ABC Ltd. has two classes of puttable shares – Class A shares and Class B shares. On liquidation, Class B
shareholders are entitled to a pro rata share of the entity’s residual assets up to a maximum of ₹ 10,000,000.
There is no limit to the rights of the Class A shareholders to share in the residual assets on liquidation. Examine the
nature of the financial instrument
Solution
The cap of ₹ 10,000,000 means that Class B shares do not have entitlement to a pro rata share of the residual
assets of the entity on liquidation. They cannot therefore be classified as equity.
Illustration 8: Investment manager’s share in a mutual fund
Mutual Fund X has an Investment Manager Y. At the inception of the fund, Y had invested a nominal or token amount
in units of X. Such units rank last for repayment in the event of liquidation. Accordingly, they constitute the most
subordinate class of instruments. Examine the nature of the financial instrument.
Solution
The units held by Y holders are classified as equity as they are most subordinate class of instruments and will be
entitled to residual interest.
However, the units held by other unit holders are classified as financial liability as they are not the most
subordinate class of instruments – they are entitled to pro rate share of net assets on liquidation, and their
claim has a priority over claims of Y.
It may be noted that the most subordinate class of instruments may consist of two or more legally separate types of
instruments.
Illustration 9: Differential voting rights
T Motors Ltd. has issued puttable ordinary shares and puttable ‘A’ ordinary shares whereby holders of ordinary
shares are entitled to one vote per share whereas holdersof ‘A’ ordinary shares are not entitled to any voting rights.
The holders of two classes of shares are equally entitled to receive share in net assets upon liquidation. Examine
whether the financial instrument will be classified as equity
Solution
Neither of the two classes of puttable shares can be classified as equity, as they do not have identical features due to
the difference in voting rights. It is not possible for T Motors Ltd. to achieve equity classification of the ordinary
shares by designating them as being more subordinate than the ‘A’ ordinary shares, as this does not reflect the fact
that the two classes of share are equally entitled to share in entity’s residual assets on liquidation.
Illustration 10: Conversion into a variable number of equity instruments
S Ltd. has issued a class of puttable ordinary shares to T Ltd. Besides the put option (which is consistent with
other classes of ordinary shares), T Ltd. is also entitled to convert the class of ordinary shares held by it into equity
instruments of S Ltd. whose number will vary as per the market value of S Ltd. Examine whether the financial
instrument will be classified as equity.
Solution
The shares cannot qualify for equity classification in their entirety as in addition to the put option there is also a
contractual obligation to settle the instrument in variable number of entity’s own equity instruments.
Illustration 11: Management fee contract between issuer and puttable instrument holder
P Ltd. has issued puttable ordinary shares to Q Ltd. Q Ltd. has also entered into an asset management contract with P Ltd.
whereby Q Ltd. is entitled to 50% of the profit of P Ltd.Normal commercial terms for similar contracts will entitle the service
provider to only 4%-6% of the net profits. Examine whether the financial instrument will be classified as equity.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
The puttable ordinary shares cannot qualify for equity classification as (a) in addition to the put option, there is
another contract between the issuer (P Ltd.) and holder of puttable instrument (Q Ltd.) whose cash flows are based
substantially on profit or loss of issuer, (b) whose contractual terms are not similar to a contract between a non-
instrument holder and issuer and (c) it has the effect of substantially restricting return on puttable ordinary shares
Illustration 12: Written put option on own equity instruments
On 1 January 20X1, Entity X writes a put option for 1,00,000 of its own equity shares for which it receives a
premium of ₹ 5,00,000.
Under the terms of the option, Entity X may be obliged to take delivery of 1,00,000 of its own shares in one year’s
time and to pay the option exercise price of ₹ 22,000,000. The option can only be settled through physical
delivery of the shares (gross physical settlement). Examine the nature of the financial instrument and how it will be
accounted.
Solution
This derivative involves Entity X taking delivery of a fixed number of equity shares for a fixed amount of cash.
Even though the obligation for Entity X to purchase its own equity shares for 22,000,000 is conditional on the
holder of the option exercising the option, Entity X has an obligation to deliver cash which it cannot avoid.
The accounting for financial instrument in the above illustration is as below (Ind AS 32.23):
The financial liability is recognised initially at the present value of the redemption amount, and is
reclassified from equity – In the illustration above, this would imply that a financial liability for an amount of present
value of ₹ 22,000,000, say ₹ 20,000,000 will be recognised through a debit to equity. The initial premium received (₹ 500,000)
is credited to equity.
Subsequently, the financial liability is measured in accordance with Ind AS 109. While a subsequent paragraph
will deal with measurement of financial liabilities, the financial liability of ₹ 20,000,000 in the aforementioned illustration will
be measured at amortised cost and finance cost of ₹ 2,000,000 will be recognised over the exercise period.
If the contract expires without delivery, the carrying amount of the financial liability is reclassified to equity. This
means, in case of illustration above, an amount of ₹ 22,000,000 will be reclassified from financial liability to equity.
Illustration 13: Written put option over non-controlling interests
Parent P holds a 70% controlling interest in Subsidiary S. The remaining 30% is held by Entity Z.On 1 January 20X1,
P writes an option to Z which grants Z the right to sell its shares to Parent P on 31 December 20X2 for ₹ 1,000.
Parent P receives a payment of ₹ 100 for the option. The applicable discount rate for the put liability is determined
to be 12%. State by which amount the financial instrument will be recognised and under which category.
Solution
On 1 January 20X1, the present value of the (estimated) exercise price is ₹ 797 (₹ 1,000discounted over 2 years at
12%).
Accordingly, P will recognise a financial liability of ₹ 797 and ₹ 203 ie the difference between cash paid i.e. ₹ 1000 and
the financial liability of ₹ 797 will be recognised to equity.
Illustration 14: Conversion into a number of equity instruments equivalent to a fixed value
CBA Ltd. issues convertible debentures to RQP Ltd. for a subscription amount of ₹ 100 crores. Those debentures are
convertible after 5 years into equity shares of CBA Ltd. using a predetermined formula. The formula is:
100 crores X (1 +10%) ^ 5 Fair value on date of conversion Examine the nature of the financial instrument.
Solution
Such a contract is a financial liability of the entity even though the entity can settle it by delivering its own equity
instruments. It is not an equity instrument because the entity uses a variable number of its own equity instruments as a
means to settle the contract. The underlying thought behind this conclusion is that the entity is using its own equity
instruments ‘as currency’.
Illustration 15: Conversion into a fixed number of equity instruments
DF Ltd. issues convertible debentures to JL Ltd. for a subscription amount of ₹ 100 crores. Those debentures are
convertible after 5 years into 15 crore equity shares of ₹ 10 each.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
This contract is an equity instrument because changes in the fair value of equity shares arising from market
related factors do not affect the amount of cash or other financial assets to be paidor received, or the number of
equity instruments to be received or delivered.
Illustration 16: Written option for a fixed or variable number of equity instruments
ST Ltd. purchases an option from AT Ltd. entitling the holder to subscribe to fixed number of equity shares of issuer at a
fixed exercise price of ₹ 50 per share at any time during a period of 3 months. Holder paid an initial premium of ₹ 2
per option. Examine whether the financial instrument will be classified as equity.
Solution
For the issuer AT Ltd., this option is an equity instrument as it will be settled by the exchange of a fixed amount
of cash for a fixed number of its own equity instruments.
If, on the other hand, if the exercise price of the option was variable, say benchmarked to an index or a variable,
other than the market price of equity shares of AT Ltd., the written option will be classified as a “financial liability” in
the books of the issuer, AT Ltd.
Illustration 17: Written option with multiple exercise prices
WC Ltd. writes an option in favour of GT Ltd. wherein the holder can purchase issuer’s equity instruments at prices
that fluctuate in response to the share price of issuer.
As per the terms, if the share price of issuer is less than ₹ 50 per share, option can be exercised at ₹ 40 per share.
If the share price is equal to or more than ₹ 50 per share, option can be exercised at ₹ 60 per share. Explain
the nature of the financial instrument
Solution
As the contract will be settled by delivery of fixed number of instruments for a variable amount of cash, it is a
financial liability.
Illustration 18: Share swap arrangements
Acquirer Ltd. enters into an arrangement with shareholders of Target Ltd. wherein Acquirer Ltd. will purchase
shares of Target Ltd. in a share swap arrangement against a variable amount of cash i.e. market value of
Target Ltd.’s equity shares. The share swap ratio is agreed as 1:5 i.e. 1 equity share of Acquirer Ltd. for every 5
equity shares held in Target Ltd. Examine whether the
financial instrument will be classified as equity.
Solution
Such arrangements will not meet the condition for classification as “equity instrument” since the contract will be
settled by delivery of fixed number of Acquirer Ltd.’s own equity instruments against a variable amount of cash i.e.
market value of Target Ltd.’s equity shares.
Such a contract will likely result in a derivative liability or asset for both the parties.
Illustration 19: Conversion ratio changes with time
On 1 January 20X1, NKT Ltd. subscribes to convertible preference shares of VT Ltd. The conversion ratio
varies as below:
Conversion upto 31 March 20X1: 1 equity share of VT Ltd. for each preference share held
Conversion upto 30 June 20X1: 1.5 equity share of VT Ltd. for each preference share held
Conversion upto 31 December 20X1: 2 equity share of VT Ltd. for each preference share held.
Examine whether the financial instrument will be classified as equity.
Solution
The convertible preference shares can be classified as “equity instrument” in the books of the issuer, VT Ltd. The
conversion ratio doesn’t change corresponding to any underlying variable, it only varies in response to passage of
time which is a certain event and hence fixed.
Illustration 20: Conversion ratio changes to protect rights of convertible instrument holders
On 1 January 20X1, HT Ltd. subscribes to convertible preference shares of RT Ltd. The preference shares are convertible
in the ratio of 1:1.
The terms of the instrument entitle HT Ltd. to proportionately more equity shares of RT Ltd. in case of a stock
split or bonus issue. Examine whether the financial instrument will be classified as equity.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
The convertible preference shares can be classified as “equity instrument” in the books of the issuer, RT Ltd. The
variability in the conversion ratio is only to protect the rights of the holder of convertible instrument vis-à-vis other
equity shareholders.
The conversion was always intended to be in a fixed ratio and hence the holder is exposed to the change in equity
value. The variability is brought in to maintain holder’s exposure in line with other holders.
Illustration 21: Conversion ratio changes if issuer subsequently issues shares to others at a lower price
On 1 January 20X1, PG Ltd. subscribes to convertible preference shares of BG Ltd. at ₹ 100 per preference share.
The preference shares are convertible in the ratio of 10:1 i.e. 10 equity shares for each preference share held. On
a fully diluted basis, PG Ltd. is entitled to 30% stake in BG Ltd.
If subsequent to the issuance of these convertible preference shares, BG Ltd. issues any equity instruments at a
price lower than ₹ 10 per share, conversion ratio will be changed to compensate
PG Ltd. for dilution in its stake below the expected dilution at a price of ₹ 10 per share. Examine the nature of
the financial instrument.
Solution
The convertible preference shares will be classified as “financial liability” in the books of the issuer, BG Ltd. The
variability in the conversion ratio underwrites the return on preference shares and not just protects the rights of
convertible instrument holders vis-à-vis equity shareholders.
Illustration 22: Conversion ratio is variable in a narrow range
On 1 January 20X1, NG Ltd. subscribes to convertible preference shares of AG Ltd. at ₹ 100 perpreference share.
On a fully diluted basis, NG Ltd. is entitled to 30% stake in AG Ltd.
The preference shares are convertible at fair value, subject to, NG Ltd.’s stake not going below 15% and
not going above 40%. Examine the nature of the financial instrument
Solution
The convertible preference shares will be classified as “financial liability” in the books of the issuer, AG Ltd. The
variability in the conversion ratio underwrites the return on preference shares to an extent and also restricts that
return. The preference shareholder is not entitled to residual net assets of the issuer.
In certain situations, an instrument is convertible only at the option of issuer. While such instruments provide the
issuer with an unconditional right to avoid payment of cash, it is important to understand the economic substance of
the option. It is also very important to determine whether the option is exercised by the issuer or by shareholders
acting in their capacity as instrument holders.
For example, if the convertible instrument is held by the equity shareholders of the issuer and the conversion requires
unanimous consent of all the shareholders, it would be inappropriate to consider that the issuer has an unconditional
right to avoid payment of cash. In this situation, it would be more relevant to consider the rights of the instrument
holders in their capacity as equity shareholders of the issuer.
Illustration 23: Instrument convertible only at the option of issuer XYZ Ltd. Issues optionally convertible
debentures with the following terms: The debentures carry interest at the rate of 7% p.a.
Issuer has option to either:
Convert the instrument into a fixed number of its own shares at any time, or redeem the instrument in cash at any
time. The redemption price is the fair value of the fixed number of shares into which the instrument would have
converted if it had been converted.
The holder has no conversion or redemption options.
Debentures have a tenor of 12 years and, if not converted or redeemed earlier, will be repaid incash at maturity,
including accrued interest, if any.
Solution
The issuer has the ability to convert the debentures into a fixed number of its own shares at any time. The issuer,
therefore, has the ability to avoid making a cash payment or settling the debentures in a variable number of its
own shares. Therefore, such a financial instrument is likelyto be classified as equity.
However, it must be noted that mere existence of a right to avoid payment of cash is not conclusive. The instrument is
to be accounted for as per its substance and hence it needs to be seen whether the conversion option is substantive.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
In this particular situation, the issuer will need to determine whether it is favourable to exercise the conversion
option or redemption option. In case of latter, the instrument will be classified as a financial liability (a hybrid
instrument, whose measurement is dealt with in a subsequent section).
Practical situations do arise wherein the issuer has an option or obligation to issue own equity instruments only in
particular circumstances i.e., the instrument is contingently convertible.
Illustration 24: Conversion ratio changes under independent scenarios
On 1 January 20X1, STAL Ltd. subscribes to convertible preference shares of ATAL Ltd. The preference shares
are convertible as below:
Convertible 1:1 if another strategic investor invests in the issuer within one year
Convertible 1.5:1: if an IPO is successfully completed within 2 years
Convertible 2:1: if a binding agreement for sale of majority stake by equity shareholders is entered into within 3
years
Convertible 3:1: if none of these events occur in 3 years’ time.
Examine whether the financial instrument will be classified as equity.
Solution
In this case the four events can be viewed as discrete because the achievement of each one of these can occur
independently of the other (as they relate to different periods). The arrangement can therefore be considered to be
economically equivalent to four separate contracts. The price per share and the amount of shares to be issued is
fixed in each of these discrete periods, with each event relating to a different year and therefore a separate risk.
The “fixed for fixed” test is therefore met.
The instrument is therefore classified as “equity instrument”.
Illustration 25: Conversion ratio changes under inter-dependent scenarios
On 1 January 20X1, RHT Ltd. subscribes to convertible preference shares of RDT Ltd.The preference shares are
convertible as below:
Convertible 1:1 if another strategic investor invests at an enterprise valuation (EV) of USD 100 million.
Convertible 1.5:1: if another strategic investor invests at EV of USD 150 million
Convertible 2:1: if another strategic investor invests at EV of USD 200 million Convertible 3:1: if no strategic
investment is made within a period of 3 years
Solution
The four events are interdependent because the second event cannot be met without also meeting the first event,
and the third event cannot be met unless the first two are met.
Therefore, this contract should be treated as a single instrument when applying the “fixed for fixed” test. The test is
then failed because the number of shares to be exchanged for cash are variable.
Illustration 26: Foreign currency convertible bond
Entity A issues a bond with face value of USD 100 and carrying a fixed coupon rate of 6% p.a. Each bond is
convertible into 1,000 equity shares of the issuer. Examine the nature of the financial instrument.
Solution
While the number of equity shares is fixed, the amount of cash is not. The variability in cash arises on account of
fluctuation in exchange rate of INR-USD. Such a foreign currency convertible bond (FCCB) will qualify the definition
of “financial liability”.
However, Ind AS 32.11 provides, “the equity conversion option embedded in a convertible bond denominated in
foreign currency to acquire a fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments is an equity instrument if the
exercise price is fixed in any currency.”
Accordingly, FCCB will be treated as an “equity instrument”.
Illustration 27: Redeemable debentures with discretionary dividend (continued from Illustration 2)
X Co. Ltd. (issuer) issues debentures to Y Co. Ltd. (holder). Those debentures are redeemable at the end of 10
years from the date of issue. Interest of 15% p.a. is payable at the discretion of the issuer. The rate of interest is
commensurate with the credit risk profile of the issuer. Examine the nature of the financial instrument.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
This instrument has two components – (1) mandatory redemption by the issuer for a fixed amount at a fixed future
date, and (2) interest payable at the discretion of the issuer.
The first component is a contractual obligation to deliver cash (for repayment of principal with or without premium, as
per terms) to the debenture holder that cannot be avoided. This component of the instrument is a financial
liability.
The other component, discretionary interest is an equity feature because issuer can avoid payment of cash or
another financial asset in this respect.
Therefore, this instrument is concluded to be a compound financial instrument.
Illustration 28: Perpetual loan with mandatory interest (continued from Illustration 3)
P Co. Ltd. (issuer) takes a loan from Q Co. Ltd. (holder). The loan is perpetual and entitles the holder to fixed
interest of 8% p.a. Examine the nature of the financial instrument
Solution
This instrument has two components – (1) mandatory interest by the issuer for a fixed amount at a fixed future
date, and (2) perpetual nature of the principal amount.
The first component is a contractual obligation to deliver cash (for payment of interest) to the lender that
cannot be avoided. This component of the instrument is a financial liability.
The other component, perpetual principal, is an equity feature because issuer is not required to pay cash or
another financial asset in this respect.
Therefore, this instrument is concluded to be a compound financial instrument.
Illustration 29: Optionally convertible redeemable preference shares (continued from Illustration 5)
D Ltd. issues preference shares to G Ltd. The holder has an option to convert these preference shares to equity
instruments of the issuer anytime up to a period of 10 years. If the option is not exercised by the holder, the preference
shares are redeemed at the end of 10 years. Examine the nature of the financial instrument.
Solution
This instrument has two components – (1) contractual obligation that is conditional on holder exercising its right to
redeem, and (2) conversion option with the holder.
The first component is a financial liability because the entity does not have the unconditional right to avoid
delivering cash.
The other component, conversion option with the holder, is an equity feature if the “fixed for fixed” test is satisfied. If
the conversion option does not fulfil that test, say, because the conversion ratio varies in response to an underlying
variable, it is a derivative liability.
Such an instrument is called a “hybrid instrument”.
Illustration 30: Perpetual loan with mandatory interest (continued from Illustration 3)
P Co. Ltd. (issuer) takes a loan from Q Co. Ltd. (holder) for ₹ 12 lakhs. The loan is perpetual and entitles the holder to
fixed interest of 8% p.a. The rate of interest commensurate with credit risk profile of the issuer is 12% p.a. Calculate
the value of the liability and equity components.
Solution
The values of the liability and equity components are calculated as follows:
Present value of interest payable in perpetuity (₹ 96,000 discounted at 12%) = ₹ 800,000
Therefore, equity component = fair value of compound instrument, say, ₹ 1,200,000 less financial liability component i.e. ₹
800,000 = ₹ 400,000.
In subsequent years, the profit and loss account is charged with interest of 12% on the debtinstrument.
On 1 July 20X1, D Ltd. issues preference shares to G Ltd. for a consideration of ₹ 10 lakhs. The holder has an
option to convert these preference shares to a fixed number of equity instruments of the issuer anytime up to a
period of 3 years. If the option is not exercised by the holder, the preference shares are redeemed at the end of 3
years. The preference shares carry a fixed coupon of 6% p.a. and is payable every year. The prevailing market rate
for similar preference shares, without the conversion feature, is 9% p.a.
Calculate the value of the liability and equity components.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
Present value of principal payable at the end of 3 years (₹ 10 lakhs discounted at 9% for 3 years) = ₹ 772,183
Present value of interest payable in arrears for 3 years
(₹ 60,000 discounted at 9% for each of 3 years) = ₹151,878
Total financial liability = ₹ 924,061
Therefore, equity component = fair value of compound instrument, say, ₹ 1,000,000
less financial liability component i.e. ₹ 924,061 = ₹ 75,939.
In subsequent years, the profit and loss account is charged with interest of 9% on the debtinstrument.
Illustration 32: Optionally convertible preference shares with issuer’s redemption option
D Ltd. issues preference shares to G Ltd. for a consideration of ₹ 10 lakhs. The holder has an option to convert these
preference shares to a fixed number of equity instruments of the issuer anytime up to a period of 3 years. If the option
is not exercised by the holder, the preference shares are redeemed at the end of 3 years. The preference shares carry
a coupon of RBI base rate plus 1% p.a. and is payable at the end of every year.
The prevailing market rate for similar preference shares, without the conversion feature or issuer’s redemption option, is RBI
base rate plus 4% p.a. On the date of contract, RBI base rate is 9% p.a.
Calculate the value of the liability and equity components.
Solution
Present value of principal payable at the end of 3 years (₹ 10 lakhs discounted at 13% for 3 years) = ₹ 6,93,050
Present value of interest payable in arrears for 3 years (₹ 100,000 discounted at 13% for each of 3 years) = ₹ 2,36,115
Paragraph AG 31 of Ind AS 32 states that a common form of compound financial instruments is a debt instrument with an
embedded conversion option, such as a bond convertible into ordinary shares of the issuer, and without any other
embedded derivatives features.
The liability component = Present value of principal + Present value of Interest = ₹ 6,93,050 + ₹ 2,36,115 = ₹ 9,29,165 Equity
Component = ₹ 10,00,000 – ₹ 9,29,165 = ₹ 70,835
The amortisation schedule of the instrument is set out below:
Dates Cash flows Finance cost at effective interest rate Liability Equity
1July 20X1 1,000,000 - 9,24,061 75,939
30 June 20X2 (60,000) 83,165 9,47,226 75,939
30 June 20X3 (60,000) 85,250 9,72,476 75,939
30 June 20X4 (10,60,000) 87,524 - 75,939
Assume that D Ltd. has an early redemption option to prepay the instrument at ₹ 11 lakhs and on 30 June 20X3, it
exercises that option. At 30 June 20X3, the interest rate has changed. At that time, D Ltd. could have issued a one-
year (i.e. maturity 30 June 20X4) non-convertible instrumentat 5%. Calculate the value of the liability and equity
components.
Solution
Ind AS 32 requires that the amount paid (of ₹ 11 lakhs) is split by the same method as is used in the initial recording.
However, at 30 June 20X3, the interest rate has changed. At that time, D Ltd. could have issued a one-year (i.e. maturity
30 June 20X4) non-convertible instrument at 5%.
The split will be made as below:
Particulars Amount (₹)
Present value of principal payable at 30 June 20X4 in one year’s time(₹ 10 lakhs 9,52,381
discounted at 5% for one year)
Present value of interest payable (₹ 60,000 discounted at 5% for one year) 57,142
Total liability component 10,09,523
Consideration paid 11,00,000
Residual – equity component 90,477
Accordingly, the difference between consideration allocated to liability component(₹ 10,09,523) less

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
carrying amount of financial liability on date of redemption i.e. 30 June 20X3 (₹ 9,72,476), amounting to ₹ 37,047 isrecognised
in profit or loss.
The residual i.e. consideration allocated to equity component is debited to equity.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
UNIT 4: DERIVATIVES AND EMBEDDED DERIVATIVES
Illustration 1: Prepaid interest rate swap (fixed rate payment obligation prepaid at inception)
Entity S enters into a ₹ 100 crores notional amount five-year pay-fixed, receive-variable interest rate swap with
Counterparty C.
 The interest rate of the variable part of the swap is reset on a quarterly basis to three- month Mumbai
Interbank Offer Rate (MIBOR).
 The interest rate of the fixed part of the swap is 10% p.a.
 Entity S prepays its fixed obligation under the swap of ₹ 50 crores (₹ 100 crores × 10 × 5 years) at inception,
discounted using market interest rates
 Entity S retains the right to receive interest payments on the ₹ 100 crores reset quarterly based on three-
month MIBOR over the life of the swap. Analyse.
Solution
The initial net investment in the interest rate swap is significantly less than the notionalamount on which the
variable payments under the variable leg will be calculated. The contract requires an initial net investment that is
smaller than would be required for other types of contracts that would be expected to have a similar response to
changes in market factors, such as a variable rate bond.
Therefore, the contract fulfils the condition 'no initial net investment or an initial net investment that is smaller
than would be required for other types of contracts that would be expected to have a similar response to changes
in market factors'.
Even though Entity S has no future performance obligation, the ultimate settlement of the contract is at a future date
and the value of the contract changes in response to changes in the LIBOR index. Accordingly, the contract is
regarded as a derivative contract.
Illustration 2: Prepaid pay-variable, receive-fixed interest rate swap
 Entity S enters into a ₹ 100 crores notional amount five-year pay-variable, receive-fixed interest rate swap with Counterparty C.
 The variable leg of the swap is reset on a quarterly basis to three-month MIBOR.
 The fixed interest payments under the swap are calculated as 10% of the swap's notional amount, i.e. ₹ 10
crores p.a.
 Entity S prepays its obligation under the variable leg of the swap at inception at current market rates. Say,
that amount is ₹ 36 crores.
 It retains the right to receive fixed interest payments of 10% on ₹ 100 crores every year. Analyse.
Solution
In effect, this contract results in an initial net investment of ₹ 36 crores which yields a cash inflow of ₹ 10 crores every year,
for five years. By discharging the obligation to pay variable interest rate payments, Entity S in effect provides a loan to
Counterparty C.
Therefore, all else being equal, the initial investment in the contract should equal that of other financial instruments that
consist of fixed annuities. Thus, the initial net investment in the pay-variable, receive-fixed interest rate swap is equal
to the investment required in a non- derivative contract that has a similar response to changes in market conditions.
For this reason, the instrument fails the condition 'no initial net investment or an initial net investment that is smaller
than would be required for other types of contracts that would be expected to have a similar response to changes
in market factors'. Therefore, the contract is not accounted for as a derivative contract.
Illustration 3: Prepaid forward
Entity XYZ enters into a forward contract to purchase 1 million ordinary shares of Entity T inone year
 The current market price of T is ₹ 50 per share
 The one-year forward price of T is ₹ 55 per share
 XYZ is required to prepay the forward contract at inception with a ₹ 50 million payment. Analyse.
Solution
Purchase of 1 million shares for current market price is likely to have the same response to changes in market factors
as the contract mentioned above. Accordingly, the prepaid forward contract does not meet the initial net investment
criterion of a derivative instrument.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 4:
Entity ABC Ltd., whose functional currency is Indian Rupees, sells products in France denominated in Euro. ABC
enters into a contract with an investment bank to convert Euro to Indian Rupees at a fixed exchange rate. The
contract requires ABC to remit Euro based on its sales volume in France in exchange for Indian Rupees at a
fixed exchange rate of 80.00. Is that contract a derivative?
Solution
Yes. The contract has two underlying variables (the foreign exchange rate and the volume of sales); no initial net
investment or an initial net investment that is smaller than would be required for other types of contracts that would
be expected to have a similar response to changes in market factors, and a payment provision.
Illustration 5:
The definition of a derivative requires that the instrument “is settled at a future date”. Is this criterion met even if an
option is expected not to be exercised, for example, because it is out of the money?
Solution
Yes. An option is settled upon exercise or at its maturity. Expiry at maturity is a form of settlement even
though there is no additional exchange of consideration.
Illustration 6
Silver Ltd. has purchased 100 ounces of gold on 10 March 20X1. The transaction provides for a price payable which
is equal to market value of 100 ounces of gold on 10 April 20X1 and shall be settled by issue of such number of
equity shares as is required to settle the aforementioned transaction price at ₹ 10 per share on 10 April
20X1.Whether this is classified as liability or equity? Own use exemption does not apply.
Solution
In the above scenario, there is a contract for purchase of 100 ounces of gold whose consideration varies in
response to changing value of gold. Analysing this contract as a derivative –
(a) Value of contract changes in response to change in market value of gold;
(b) There is no initial net investment
(c) It will be settled at a future date, i.e., 10 April 20X1.
Since the above criteria are met, this is a derivative contract.
Now, a derivative contract that is settled in own equity other than exchange of fixed amount of cash for fixed
number of shares is classified as ‘liability’. In this case, since the contract results in issue of variable number of
shares based on transaction price to be determined in future, hence, this shall be classified as ‘derivative financial
liability’.
Per Ind AS 109.4.2.1 – A derivative financial liability shall be carried at fair value through profit or loss.
Illustration 7 : Derivative contract:
Entity – B Ltd writes an option contract for sale of shares of Target Ltd. at a fixed price of 100 per share
to C Ltd. This option is exercisable anytime for a period of 90 days (‘American option’). Evaluate this under the
definition of financial instrument.
Solution
In the above case – B Ltd has written an option, which if exercised by C Ltd. will result in B Ltd. selling equity shares
of Target Ltd. for fixed cash of ₹ 100 per share. Such option will be exercised by C Ltd. only if the market price of
shares of Target Ltd. increases beyond 100, thereby resulting in contractual obligation over B Ltd. to settle the contract
under potential unfavorable terms.
In the above case, if the market price is already ₹ 120 which means that if option is exercised by C Ltd, then B Ltd
shall buy shares from the market at ₹ 120 per share and sell at ₹ 100, thereby resulting in a loss or exchange at
unfavorable terms to B Ltd. Hence, it meets the definition of financial liability in books of B Ltd.
The additional question that arises here is the nature of this financial liability and if it meets the definition of derivative.
A derivative is a financial instrument that meets following conditions –
(a) Its value changes in response to change in specified variable like interest rate, equity index, commodity price,
etc. If the variable is non-financial, it is not specific to party to the contract
(b) It requires no or little initial net investment
(c) It is settled at a future date.
Evaluating the above instrument, B Ltd. has written an option whose value changes based on change in market

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
price of equity share, it requires no initial net investment and is settled at a future date (anytime in 90 days).
Hence, it meets definition of derivative financial liability in booksof B Ltd.
Illustration 8: Derivative contract to be settled in own equity instruments
A Ltd. issues warrants to all existing shareholders entitling them to purchase additional equity shares of A Ltd. (with
face value of ₹ 100 per share) at an issue price of ₹ 150 per share. Evaluate whether this constitutes an equity
instrument or a financial liability?
Solution
In this case, Company A Ltd. has issued warrants entitling the shareholders to purchase equity shares of the
Company at a fixed price. Hence, it constitutes a contractual arrangement for issuance of fixed number of shares
against fixed amount of cash.
Now, evaluating this contract under definition of derivative –
(i) The value of warrant changes in response to change in value of underlying equity shares;
(ii) This involves no initial net investment
(iii) It shall be settled at a future date.
Hence, this warrant meets the definition of derivative.
Applying definition of equity under Ind AS 32, a derivative contract that will be settled by exchangeof fixed number
of equity shares for fixed amount of cash meets definition of equity instrument. The above contract is derivative
contract that will be settled by issue of fixed number of own equity instruments by A Ltd. for fixed amount of cash and
hence meets definition of equity instrument
Illustration 9
A lease contract contains a provision that rentals increase each year by ₹ 3 million. Is there an embedded
derivative in this contract?
Solution
The price adjustment feature does not meet the definition of a derivative on a stand-alone basis since its value does
not change in response to changes of some underlying. There is no underlying in this case; hence there is no
embedded derivative in the lease contract.
Illustration 10: Debt instrument with indexed repayments
Entity X issues a redeemable fixed interest rate debenture to Entity Y. Amount of interest and principal is
indexed to the value of equity instruments of Entity X.
Analyse
Solution
In the given case, the host is a fixed interest rate debt instrument. The economiccharacteristics and risks of a
debt instrument are not closely related to those of an equity instrument.
Hence, the exposure of this hybrid instrument to changes in value of equity instruments is an embedded derivative
which is required to be separated.
The response above will not change even if the interest payment and principal repayments are indexed to a
commodity index or similar underlying.
Illustration 11: Lease contracts dependent on inflation index
A lease contract, between two Indian companies of an asset in India, includes contingent lease rentals that
are dependent upon an US inflation index. Can the entity treat inflation linked features as closely related?
Solution
For inflation linked features, an embedded derivative in a lease contract is considered as closely related to the host
if it is an inflation—related index related to inflation in the entity’s own economic environment.
In this case, whilst the asset and the lessor and lessee are located in India, lease payment are linked to US
index. Hence, embedded derivative is not closely related and needs to be separated.
Illustration 12: Lease contracts dependent on inflation index
As per the contract entered between lease and lessor, lease rentals will increase by 3 million, if profit after
tax is over ₹ 200 million. Can the entity treat inflation linked features
as closely related?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
No. Whilst contingent rentals based on sales are closely related to a host lease contract,
the same is not true of contingent rentals based on profit after tax.
Illustration 13: Debt instrument with prepayment option
Entity PQR borrows ₹ 100 crores from CFDH Bank on 1 April 20X1.
Interest is payable at 12% p.a. and there is a bullet repayment of principal at the end of the term. Term of the
loan is 6 years.
The loan includes an option to prepay the loan at 1st April each year with a prepayment penalty of 3%.
There are no transaction costs.
Without the prepayment option, the interest rate quoted by bank is 11% p.a.Analyse
Solution
Step 1: Identify the host contract and embedded derivative, if any
In the given case,
 Host is a debt instrument comprising annual interest payment at 12% p.a. and bullet principal repayment at
the end of 6 years.
 Option to prepay the debt at ₹ 103 crores is an embedded derivative
Step 2: Determine the amortised cost of the host debt instrument
Whether the prepayment option is likely to be exercised or not, the amortised cost of the host debt instrument should be
calculated as present value (PV) of expected cash flows using a fair market interest rate for a debt without the
prepayment option (11% p.a. in this case). This is calculated below as ₹ 104.23 crores:
Year Cash outflow PV @ 11% p.a. Finance cost Amortised cost
₹ crores
1 12.00 10.81 11.46 103.68
2 12.00 9.74 11.41 103.09
3 12.00 8.77 11.34 102.43
4 12.00 7.90 11.27 101.70
5 12.00 7.12 11.20 100.90
6 112.00 59.88 11.10 -
104.22 67.78
Step 3: Compare the exercise price of the prepayment option with the amortised cost of the hostdebt instrument
Year Amortised cost Exercise price of prepayment option Difference
₹ Crores
1 103.68 103.00 0.7%
2 103.09 103.00 0.1%
3 102.43 103.00 -0.6%
4 101.70 103.00 -1.3%
5 100.90 103.00 -2.1%
6 - N/A
The management of Entity PQR may formulate an appropriate accounting policy to determine what constitutes
“approximately equal”. In this case, if the management determines that a difference of more than 2% will indicate that
the option's exercise price is not approximately equal to the amortised cost of the host debt instrument, it will need
to separate the embedded derivative and account for it as per principles given in the subsequent sub-section.
It may be questioned as to why an option to repay a fixed rate loan early meets the definition of embedded
derivative. Let us revisit an important phrase from the definition of embedded derivative:
“…some or all of the cash flows that otherwise would be required by the contract to be modified…” In the context
of a fixed rate debt, it may be interpreted that:
 the option affects cash flows only if exercised; and
 the cash flows of a fixed rate debt do not vary with interest rates.
However, in this context, a variation in cash flows should be interpreted as a possible change in the fair value of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
expected cash flows. Accordingly, the option's expected cash flows vary according to interest rates in a similar
way as a separate option to purchase a fixed rate debt asset at a fixed price. A fixed price option to prepay a
fixed rate loan will increase in value as interest rates decline (and vice versa).
Illustration 14: Purchase contract settled in a foreign currency (MTP APR 2018)
On 1 January 20X1, ABG Pvt. Ltd., a company incorporated in India enters into a contract to buy solar panels from
A&A Associates, a firm domiciled in UAE, for which delivery is due after 6 months i.e., on 30 June 20X1
The purchase price for solar panels is US$ 50 million.
The functional currency of ABG is Indian Rupees (₹) and of A&A is Dirhams.
The obligation to settle the contract in US Dollars has been evaluated to be an embedded derivative which is not
closely related to the host purchase contract.
Exchange rates:
1. Spot rate on 1 January 20X1: USD 1 = ₹ 60
2. Six-month forward rate on 1 January 20X1: USD 1 = ₹ 65
3. Spot rate on 30 June 20X1: USD 1 = ₹ 66Analyse
Solution
This contract comprises of two components:
 Host contract to purchase solar panels denominated in i.e., a notional payment in at 6- month forward rate (3,250
million or 325 crores)
 Forward contract to pay US Dollars and receive i.e., a notional receipt. In other words, a forward contract to sell
US Dollars at 65 per US Dollar
It may be noted that the notional payment in respect of host contract and the notional ₹ receipt in respect of
embedded derivative create an offsetting position.
Subsequently, the host contract is not accounted for until delivery. The embedded derivative is recorded at fair value
through profit or loss. This gives rise to a gain or loss on the derivative, and a corresponding derivative asset or
liability.
On delivery ABG records the inventory at the amount of the host contract (325 crores). The embedded derivative is
considered to expire. The derivative asset or liability (i.e., the cumulative gain or loss) is settled by becoming part of
the financial liability that arises on delivery.
In this case the carrying value of the currency forward at 30 June 20X1 on maturity is 50 million X (66 minus 65) = ₹5
crores (liability/loss). The loss arises because ABG has agreed to sell US Dollars at 65 per US Dollar whereas in the open
market, US Dollar can be sold at 66 per US Dollar.
No accounting entries are passed on the date of entering into purchase contract. On that date, the forward
contract has a fair value of zero (refer section “option and non-option-based derivatives” below)
Subsequently, say at 30 June 20X1, the accounting entries are as follows (all in ₹ crores):
1. Loss on derivative contract 5
To Derivative liability 5
(Being loss on currency forward)
2. Inventory 325
To Trade payables (financial liability) 325
(Being inventory recorded at forward exchange rate determined on date of contract)
3. Derivative liability 5
To Trade payables (financial liability) 5
(Being reclassification of derivative liability to trade payables upon settlement)
The effect is that the financial liability at the date of delivery is ₹ 330 crores (= ₹ 325 crores + ₹ 5 crores),
equivalent to US$ 50 million at the spot rate on 30 June 20X1.
Going forward, the financial liability is a US$ denominated financial instrument. It is retranslated at the dollar
spot rate in the normal way, until it is settled.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 15: Contracts for purchase or sale of non-financial item Key terms of contracts to buy/sell non-
financial items
Company Z is engaged in the business of importing oil seeds for further processing as well as tradingpurposes.
It enters into the following types of contracts as on 1 October 20X1:
Particulars Contract 1 Contract 2 Contract 3
Nature of Import of oil seeds from Purchase of oil seeds from Contract to sell oilseeds on the
Contract a foreign supplier a domestic producer / commodity exchange
supplier
100 MT at USD 400 per 50 MT at ₹ 30,000 per MT 50 MT at USD 450 per MT,
Quantity and rate MT to be delivered as to be delivered as on 31 maturing as on 15 January
on 31 March 20X2 January 20X2 20X2
Net settlement
clause includedin Yes Yes Yes
the contract
There have also been Yes – company Z has net Yes – these contracts are
Net settlement in several instances of the settled some of the required to be net settled with
practice for oil seeds being sold domestic purchase the exchange on thematurity
similar contracts prior to or shortly after contracts. date.
taking delivery. However, these instances Company Z enters intothese
These instances of net constitute only 1 per cent of types of derivative contracts to
settlement constitute the total domestic hedge the risks on its domestic
approximately 30 per purchase contracts invalue. oil seeds purchase contracts
cent of the value of The remaining contractsare
total import contracts. settled by taking delivery of
oil seeds whichare used
for further processing.
Company Z is required to determine if the contracts entered into for purchase and sale of oil seeds are derivatives
within the scope of lnd AS 109 or are executory contracts outside the scope of lnd AS 109.
Solution Contract 1:
The following factors indicate that this contract does not meet the 'own use’ exemption:
 The contract permits net settlement, and
 There is a past practice of a significant proportion (30 per cent in this illustration) of similar contracts being
settled on a net basis either in cash or by sale of the oil seeds prior to delivery/shortly after taking delivery.
Therefore, this contract would fall within the scope of lnd AS 109 and should be recognised as a derivative
instrument as on 1 October 20X1. The contract would be in the nature of a forward contract to buy 100 MT of oil
seeds as on 31 March 20X2 at USD 400 per MT. Company Z would have to recognise the fair value changes (based
on change in forward purchase rate) on this contract in the statement of profit and loss at each reporting date.
Contract 2
Contract 2 also permits net settlement in cash. Further, there have been some instances of similar domestic purchase
contracts being settled net in cash in the past. However, these have been infrequent in nature and insignificant in
proportion to the total value of similar contracts (i.e.1 percent in this illustration).
Company Z is in the practice of taking delivery of the oil seeds purchased under similar contracts and using them
for further processing in its plants.
This indicates that the domestic purchase contract meets the criteria for the 'own-use’ exemption and should be
considered as an executory contract.
Therefore, this contract would not fall within the scope of Ind AS 109.
Contract 3
This contract is in the nature of a derivative contract transacted on a commodity exchange and is required to be net

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
settled in cash on maturity. Therefore, this derivative contract would be covered by lnd AS 109 and required to be
classified and measured at FVTPL.
Illustration 16: Foreign currency embedded derivatives
Company A, an Indian company whose functional currency is ₹, enters into a contract to purchase machinery from an
unrelated local supplier, company B. The functional currency of company B is also ₹. However, the contract is
denominated in USD, since the machinery is sourced by company B from a US based supplier. Payment is due to
company B on delivery of the machinery.
Key terms of the contract:
Contractual features Details
Contract/order date 9 September 20X1
Delivery/payment date 31 December 20X1
Purchase price USD 1,000,000
USD/₹ Forward rate on 9 September 20X1 for 31 December 20X1maturity 67.8
USD/₹ Spot rate on 9 September 20X1 66.4
USD/₹ Forward rates for 31 December, on:
30 September 67.5
31 December (spot rate) 67.0
Company A is required to analyse if the contract for purchase of machinery (a capital asset) from company B
contains an embedded derivative and whether this should be separately accounted for on the basis of the
guidance in Ind AS 109. Also give necessary journal entries for accounting the same.
Solution
Based on the guidance above, the USD contract for purchase of machinery entered into bycompany A includes an
embedded foreign currency derivative due to the following reasons:
 The host contract is a purchase contract (non-financial in nature) that is not classified as, or measured at
FVTPL.
 The embedded foreign currency feature (requirement to settle the contract by payment of USD at a future date)
meets the definition of a stand-alone derivative – it is akin to a USD-₹ forward contract maturing on 31 December
20X1.
 USD is not the functional currency of either of the substantial parties to the contract (i.e., neither company A
nor company B).
 Machinery is not routinely denominated in USD in commercial transactions around the world. In this context, an
item or a commodity may be considered ‘routinely denominated’ in a particular currency only if such currency was
used in a large majority of similar commercial transactions around the world. For example, transactions in crude
oil are generally considered routinely denominated in USD. A transaction for acquiring machinery in this illustration
would generally not qualify for this exemption.
 USD is not a commonly used currency for domestic commercial transactions in the economic environment in which
either company A or B operate. This exemption generally applies when the business practice in a particular economic
environment is to use a more stable or liquid foreign currency (such as the USD), rather than the local currency, for
a majority of internal
 or cross-border transactions, or both. In the illustration above, companies A and B are companies operating in
India and the purchase contract is an internal/domestic transaction. USD is not a commonly used currency for
internal trade within this economic environmentand therefore the contract would not qualify for this exemption.
 Accordingly, company A is required to separate the embedded foreign currency derivative from the host
purchase contract and recognise it separately as a derivative.
 The separated embedded derivative is a forward contract entered into on 9 September 20X1, to exchange USD
10,00,000 for ₹ at the USD/₹ forward rate of 67.8 on 31 December 20X1. Since the forward exchange rate has been

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
deemed to be the market rate on the date of the contract, the embedded forward contract has a fair value of zero on
initial recognition.
 Subsequently, company A is required to measure this forward contract at its fair value, with changes in fair
value recognised in the statement of profit and loss. The following is the accounting treatment at quarter-end
and on settlement:
 Accounting treatment:
Date Particulars Amount Amount
(₹) (₹)
09-Sep-X1 On initial recognition of the forward contract
(No accounting entry recognised since initial fair value
Nil Nil
of the forward contract is considered to be nil)
30-Sep-X1 Fair value change in forward contract
Derivative asset (company B) Dr.
[(67.8-67.5) x10,00,000] 3,00,000
To Profit or loss 3,00,000
31-Dec-X1 Fair value change in forward contract
Forward contract asset (company B) Dr.
5,00,000
[{(67.8-67) x 10,00,000} - 3,00,000]
To Profit or loss 5,00,000
31-Dec-X1 Recognition of machinery acquired and on
settlement
Property, plant and equipment Dr. 6,78,00,000
(at forward rate)
8,00,000
To Forward contract asset (company B)
To Creditor (company B) / Bank 6,70,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
UNIT 5: RECOGNITION AND DERECOGNITION OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
Illustration 1: Regular way contracts: forward contracts
ST Ltd. enters into a forward contract to purchase 10 lakh shares of ABC Ltd. in a month’s time for 50 per share.
This contract is entered into with a broker, Mr. AG and not through regular trading mode in a stock exchange. The
contract requires Mr. AG to deliver the shares to ST Ltd. upon payment of agreed consideration. Shares of ABC Ltd. are
traded on a stock exchange. Regular way delivery is two days. Assess the forward contract.
Solution
In this case, the forward contract is not a regular way transaction and hence must be accounted for as a derivative i.e.
between the date of entering into the contract to the date of delivery, all fair value changes are recognised in profit or
loss.
On the other hand, if the forward contract is a regular way transaction, such fair value changes are recognised in
other comprehensive income if share of ABC Ltd. are equity instruments and not held for trading.
Illustration 2: Regular way contracts: option contracts
NKT Ltd. purchases a call option in a public market permitting it to purchase 100 shares of VT Ltd.at any time over
the next one month at a price of 1,000 per share. If NKT Ltd. exercises its option, it has 7 days to settle the
transaction according to regulation or convention in the options market. VT Ltd.’s shares are traded in an active
public market that requires two-day settlement.
Solution
In this case, the options contract is a regular way transaction as the settlement of the option is governed by regulation
or convention in the marketplace for options. Fair value changes between the trade date and settlement date are
recognised in other comprehensive income if share of VT Ltd. are equity instruments and not held for trading
by NKT Ltd.
The illustrations below explain the flow of journal entries in case of trade date accounting and settlement date
accounting for regular way purchase and sale of financial assets.
Illustration 3: Regular way purchase of financial asset
On 1 January 20X1, X Ltd. enters into a contract to purchase a financial asset for 10 lakhs, which is its fair value on
trade date. On 4 January 20X1 (settlement date), the fair value of the asset is 10.5lakhs. The amounts to be recorded
for the financial asset will depend on how it is classified and whether trade date or settlement date accounting is used.
Pass necessary journal entries.
Solution
Trade date accounting
Journal Entries in the Buyer’s Books
Dr. / Cr. Particulars Amortised Fair value Fair value
cost through P&L through OCI
1 January 20X1
Dr. Financial asset 10,00,000 10,00,000 10,00,000
Cr. Financial liability (to pay) (10,00,000) (10,00,000) (10,00,000)
4 January 20X1
Dr. Financial asset - 50,000 50,000
Dr. Financial liability (to pay) 10,00,000 10,00,000 10,00,000
Cr. Profit or loss - (50,000) -
Cr. Other comprehensive income - - (50,000)
Cr. Cash (10,00,000) (10,00,000) (10,00,000)
Settlement date accounting
Dr. / Cr. Particulars Amortised Fair value Fair value
cost through P&L through OCI
4 January 20X1
Dr. Financial asset 10,00,000 10,50,000 10,50,000
Cr. Profit or loss - (50,000) -
Cr. Other comprehensive income - - (50,000)
Cr. Cash (10,00,000) (10,00,000) (10,00,000)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The above mentioned accounting principles apply only to financial assets and Ind AS 109 does not contain any
such principles for financial liabilities.
Illustration 4: Part of a financial asset
State whether the derecognition principles will be applied or not.
i. Interest strip of an interest-bearing financial asset i.e. the part entitles its holder to interest cash flows of a
financial asset
ii. Dividend strip of an equity share i.e. the part entitles its holder to only dividends arising from an equity share
iii. Cash flows (principal and asset) upto a certain tenure or first right on a proportion ofcash flows of an
amortising financial asset. Say, the part entitles its holder to first 80% of the cash flows or cash flows for first 4
of the 6 years’ tenure.
Solution
Derecognition requirements are applied to a part of a financial asset if that part meets any of the following
three conditions:
a) The part comprises only specifically identified cash flows from a financial asset (or a group of similar
financial assets).
For example, when an entity enters into an interest rate strip whereby the counterparty obtains the right to
the interest cash flows, but not the principal cash flows from a debt instrument, derecognition principles are
applied to the interest cash flows
b) The part comprises only a fully proportionate (pro rata) share of the cash flows from a financial asset
(or a group of similar financial assets).
For example, when an entity enters into an arrangement whereby the counterparty obtains the rights to a
90 per cent share of all cash flows of a debt instrument, derecognition principles are applied to 90 per
cent of those cash flows.
c) The part comprises only a fully proportionate (pro rata) share of specifically identified cash flows
from a financial asset (or a group of similar financial assets).
For example, when an entity enters into an arrangement whereby the counterpartyobtains the rights to a 90 per cent
share of interest cash flows from a financial asset, derecognition principles are applied to 90 per cent of those
interest cash flows.
The example of a part of a financial asset at (iii) in Illustration 4 above will not qualify conditions at (b) and (c) above
since it does not represent pro rata share of all or specifically identified cash flows.
In (b) and (c) above, if there is more than one counterparty, each counterparty is not required to have a proportionate
share of the cash flows provided that the transferring entity has a fully proportionate share.
In all other cases, derecognition principles are applied to the financial asset in its entirety (or to the group of
similar financial assets in their entirety).
Illustration 5: Part of a financial asset
i. Entity Y transfers the rights to the first or the last 90 per cent of cash collections from a financial asset (or a
group of financial assets)
ii.Entity Z transfers the rights to 90 per cent of the cash flows from a group of receivables, but provides a
guarantee to compensate the buyer for any credit losses up to 8 per cent of the principal amount of the
receivables.
Solution
In the above circumstances, Entity Y and Entity Z need to apply the derecognition requirements to the
financial asset (or a group of similar financial assets) in its entirety.
Illustration 6: Proportionate “pass through” arrangement
Entity A makes a five-year interest-bearing loan (the 'original asset') of ₹ 100 crores to Entity B. Entity A settles a
Trust and transfers the loan to that Trust. The Trust issues participatory notes to an investor, Entity C, that entitle

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
the investor to the cash flows from the asset.
As per Trust’s agreement with Entity C, in exchange for a cash payment of 90 crores, Trust will pass to Entity C
90% of all principal and interest payments collected from Entity B (as, when and if collected). Trust accepts no
obligation to make any payments to Entity C other than 90% of exactly what has been received from Entity B. Trust
provides no guarantee to Entity C about the performance of the loan and has no rights to retain 90% of the cash
collected from Entity B nor any obligation to pay cash to Entity C if cash has not been received from Entity B.
Compute the amount to be dercognised.
Solution
If the three conditions are met, the proportion sold is derecognised, provided the entity has transferred substantially
all the risks and rewards of ownership. Thus, Entity A would report a loan asset of ₹ 10 crores and derecognise ₹ 90 crores.
Illustration 7: Repurchase agreements
A financial asset is sold under repurchase agreement. The repurchase price as per that agreement is (a) fixed
price or (b) sale price plus a lender's return. Let’s look at three alternate scenarios:
i. Repurchase agreement is for the same financial asset.
ii. Repurchase agreement is for substantially the same asset
iii. Repurchase agreement provides the transferee a right to substitute assets that are similar and of equal fair
value to the transferred asset at the repurchase date.
Solution
In each of these scenarios, the transferred financial asset is not derecognised because the transferor retains
substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership.
Let’s look at another scenario:
Repurchase agreement provides the transferor only a right of first refusal to repurchase the transferred asset at
fair value if the transferee subsequently sells it
In this scenario, the transferred financial asset is derecognised because the transferor has transferred substantially
all the risks and rewards of ownership.
Illustration 8: Put options on transferred financial assets
A financial asset is sold and the transferee has a put option. Let’s look at some alternatescenarios:
i. Put option is deeply in the money
ii. Put option is deeply out of the money.
Solution
In the first scenario, the transferred asset does not qualify for derecognition because the transferor has retained
substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership. However, in the second scenario, the transferor has transferred
substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership
Illustration 9: Call options on transferred financial assets
A financial asset is sold and the transferor has a call option. Let’s look at some alternate scenarios:
i. Call option is deeply in the money
ii Call option is deeply out of the money.
What it the transferor holds a call option on an asset that is readily obtainable in the market?
iii Call option is neither deeply in the money nor deeply out of the money
Solution
In the first scenario, the transferred asset does not qualify for derecognition because the transferor has
retained substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership. However, in the second scenario, the transferor has
transferred substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership.
In the third scenario, the asset is derecognised. This is because the entity (i) has neither retained nor transferred
substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, and (ii) has not retained control

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 10: Amortising interest rate swaps
An entity may transfer to a transferee a fixed rate financial asset that is paid off over time, and enter into an
amortising interest rate swap with the transferee to receive a fixed interest rate and pay a variable interest rate
based on a notional amount.
Scenarios:
i. Notional amount of the swap amortises so that it equals the principal amount of the transferred financial
asset outstanding at any point in time.
ii. Amortisation of the notional amount of the swap is not linked to the principal amount outstanding of the
transferred asset.
Solution
In the first scenario, the swap would generally result in the entity retaining substantial prepayment risk, in which case
the entity either continues to recognise all of the transferred asset or continues to recognise the transferred asset
to the extent of its continuing involvement.
Such a swap would not result in the entity retaining prepayment risk on the asset. Hence, it would not preclude
derecognition of the transferred asset provided the payments on the swap are not conditional on interest payments
being made on the transferred asset and the swap does not result in the entity retaining any other significant risks
and rewards of ownership on the transferred asset.
Illustration 11: Assignment of receivables
ST Ltd. assigns its trade receivables to AT Ltd. The carrying amount of the receivables is 10,00,000. The
consideration received in exchange of this assignment is ₹ 9,00,000. Customers have been instructed to deposit the
amounts directly in a bank account for the benefit of AT Ltd. AT Ltd. has no recourse to ST Ltd. in case of any
shortfalls in collections.
Solution
In this situation, ST Ltd. has transferred the rights to contractual cash flows and has also transferred
substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership (credit risk being the most significant risk in this situation).
Accordingly, ST Ltd. derecognises the financial asset and recognises ₹ 1,00,000, the difference between consideration
received and carrying amount, as an expense in the statement of profit or loss.
Illustration 12A: Debt factoring with recourse – continuing involvement asset
Entity C agrees with factoring company D to enter into a debt factoring arrangement. Under the terms of the
arrangement, the factoring company D agrees to pay ₹ 91.5 crores, less a servicing charge of ₹ 1.5 crores (net
proceeds of ₹ 90 crores), in exchange for 100% of the cash flows from short-term receivables.
The receivables have a face value of ₹ 100 crores and carrying amount of ₹ 95 crores.
The customers will be instructed to pay the amounts owed into a bank account of the factoring company. Entity C
also writes a guarantee to the factoring company under which it will reimburse any credit losses upto ₹ 5 crores, over
and above the expected credit losses of ₹ 5 crores. The guarantee is estimated to have a fair value of ₹ 0.5 crores.
Calculate the amount of continuing involvement asset.
Solution
In this situation, the “continuing involvement asset” will be recognised at ₹ 5 crores i.e. lower of:
i. the amount of the asset – ₹ 95 crores
ii. the guarantee amount – ₹ 5 crores
Illustration 12B: Debt factoring with recourse – associated liability
Continuing illustration 12A, calculate the amount of associated liability.
Solution
The amount of associated liability is recognised at ₹ 5.5 crores, as below:
i. the guarantee amount (i.e., 5 crores) plus
ii. the fair value of the guarantee (i.e., 0.5 crores).
iii. Illustration 12C: Debt factoring with recourse – gain or loss on derecognition

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
iv. Continuing illustration 12A and 12B, pass the necessary Journal Entry.
Solution
The journal entries passed by Entity C on the date of derecognition is as below:
Cash Dr. ₹ 90 crores
Loss on derecognition Dr. ₹ 5.5 crores
Continuing involvement asset Dr. ₹ 5 crores
To Receivables ₹ 95 crores
To Associated liability ₹ 5.5 crores
The guarantee liability of ₹ 0.5 crores shall be amortised in profit or loss over the underlying period.
Illustration 13: Renegotiation of terms of (defaulted) borrowings subsequent to the year-end
Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments requires recognition of renegotiation gain/loss subject to fulfillment of certain
conditions as mentioned in the standard. If there has been a renegotiation of terms of (defaulted) borrowings
subsequent to the year end, but before the date of approval of financial statements, then should such modification
gain/loss be recognised in the current year financial statements itself or in the next year when the terms of (defaulted)
borrowings have been renegotiated in accordance with Ind AS 109?
Solution
As per paragraph 5.4.3 of Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments, whenever contractual cash flows of a financial
instrument are renegotiated or otherwise modified and the renegotiation or modification does not result in the
derecognition of that financial asset in accordance with this Standard, an entity shall recalculate the gross carrying
amount of the financial asset and shall recognise a modification gain or loss in profit or loss.
In accordance with the above, modification gain or loss should be recognised in profit or loss in the period in
which the renegotiation has contractually taken place. Accordingly, in the given case, if the terms of the (defaulted)
borrowings have been renegotiated in the next year, then the related gain/loss should also be recognised in the
next year.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
COMPREHENSIVE ILLUSTRATIONS
Illustration 1
A Ltd. issued redeemable preference shares to a Holding Company – Z Ltd. The terms of the instrument have
been summarized below. Account for this in the books of Z Ltd.
Nature Non-cumulative redeemable preference shares
Repayment: Redeemable after 5 years
Date of Allotment: 1-Apr-20X1
Date of repayment: 31-Mar-20X6
Total period: 5.00 years
Value of preference shares issued: 100,000,000
Dividend rate 0.0001%
Market rate of interest 12% per annum
Present value factor 0.56743
Solution
Applying the guidance in Ind AS 109, a ‘financial asset’ shall be recorded at its fair value upon initial recognition.
Fair value is normally the transaction price. However, sometimes certain type of instruments may be exchanged at
off market terms (i.e., different from market terms for a similar instrument if exchanged between market participants).
For example, a long-term loan or receivable that carries no interest while similar instruments if exchanged between
market participants carry interest, then fair value for such loan receivable will be lower from its transaction price
owing to the loss of interest that the holder bears. In such cases where part of the consideration given or received is
for something other than the financial instrument, an entity shall measure the fair value of the financial instrument.
In the above case, since A Ltd has issued preference shares to its Holding Company – Z Ltd, the relationship
between the parties indicates that the difference in transaction price and fair value is akin to investment made by Z
Ltd. in its subsidiary.
Following is the table summarising the computations on initial recognition:
Market rate of interest 12%
Present value 56,742,686
Loan component 56,742,686
Investment in subsidiary 43,257,314
Subsequently, such preference shares shall be carried at amortised cost at each reporting date. The computation of
amortised cost at each reporting date has been done as follows:
Year Date Opening Asset Days Interest @ 12% Closing balance
1-Apr-20X1 56,742,686
1 31-Mar-20X2 56,742,686 365 6,809,122 63,551,808
2 31-Mar-20X3 63,551,808 365 76,26,217 71,178,025
3 31-Mar-20X4 71,178,025 365 85,41,363 79,719,388
4 31-Mar-20X5 79,719,388 365 95,66,327 89,285,715
5 31-Mar-20X6 89,285,715 365 10,714,285 100,000,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Journal Entries to be done at every reporting date
Date of transaction
Investment - Equity portion Dr. 43,257,314
Loan receivable Dr. 56,742,686
To Bank 100,000,000
Interest income - March 31, 20X2
To Interest income 6,809,122
Settlement of transaction
Bank Dr. 100,000,000
To Loan receivable 100,000,000
Illustration 2
A Limited issues ₹ 1 crore convertible bonds on 1 July 20X1. The bonds have a life of eight years and a face value
of 10 each, and they offer interest, payable at the end of each financial year, at a rate of 6 per cent annum. The
bonds are issued at their face value and each bond can be converted into one ordinary share in A Limited at any
time in the next eight years. Companies of a similar risk profile have recently issued debt with similar terms,
without the option for conversion, at a rate of 8 per cent per annum.
Required:
(a) Provide the appropriate accounting entries for initial recognition.
(b) Calculate the stream of interest expenses across the eight years of the life of the bonds.
(c) Provide the accounting entries if the holders of the bonds elect to convert the bonds toordinary shares at the
end of the third year.
Solution
(a) Applying the guidance for compound instruments, the present value of the bond is computed to identify the
liability component and then difference between the present value of these bonds & the issue price of ₹ 1crore
shall be allocated to the equity component. In determining the present value, the rate of 8 per cent will be
used, which is the interest rate paid on debt of a similar nature and risk that does not provide an option to
convert the liability to ordinary shares.
Present value of bonds at the market rate of debt
Present value of principal to be received in eight years discounted at 8%

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(10,000,000 X 0.5403) Present value of interest stream discounted at 8% for 8 years = 5,403,000
(6,00,000 X 5.7466) = 3,447,960
Total present value = 8,850,960
Equity component = 1,149,040
Total face value of convertible bonds = 10,000,000
The accounting entries will be as follows:
Dr. Amount Cr. Amount
1 July 20X1
Bank Dr. 10,000,000
To Convertible bonds (liability) 8,850,960
To Convertible bonds (equity component) 1,149,040
(Being entry to record the convertible bonds and the
recognition of the liability and equity components)
30 June 20X2
Interest expense Dr. 708,077
To Bank 600,000
To Convertible bonds (liability) 108,077
(Being entry to record the interest expense, where the
expense equals the present value of the opening liability
multiplied by the market rate of interest).
(a) The stream of interest expense is summarised below, where interest for a given year is calculated by
multiplying the present value of the liability at the beginning of the period by the market rate of
interest, this is being 8 per cent.
Date Payment Interest Increase in Total bond
expense at 8% bond liability liability
01 July 20X1 8,850,960
30 June 20X2 600,000 708,077 108,077 8,959,037
30 June 20X3 600,000 716,723 116,723 9,075,760
30 June 20X4 600,000 726,061 126,061 9,201,821
30 June 20X5 600,000 736,146 136,146 9,337,967
30 June 20X6 600,000 747,037 147,037 9,485,004
30 June 20X7 600,000 758,800 158,800 9,643,804
30 June 20X8 600,000 771,504 171,504 9,815,308
30 June 20X9 600,000 784,692* 184,692 10,000,000
*difference is due to rounding off
(b) If the holders of the bonds elect to convert the bonds to ordinary shares at the end of the third year (after
receiving their interest payments), the entries in the third year would be:
Dr. Amount Cr. Amount
30 June 20X4
To Bank 600,000
(Being entry to record interest expense for the period)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
30 June 20X4
Convertible bonds (liability) Dr. 9,201,821
Convertible bonds (equity component) Dr. 1,149,040
To Ordinary share capital A/c 10,350,861
(Being entry to record the conversion of bonds into
shares of A Limited)
Illustration 3
On 1st January 20X1, SamCo. Ltd. agreed to purchase USD ($) 20,000 from JT Bank in future on 31st December
20X1 for a rate equal to ₹ 68 per USD. SamCo. Ltd. did not pay any amount upon entering into the contract. SamCo
Ltd. is a listed company in India and prepares its financial statements on a quarterly basis.
Following the principles of recognition and measurement as laid down in Ind AS 109, you are required to record the
entries for each quarter ended till the date of actual purchase of US.
For the purposes of accounting, please use the following information representing marked to market fair value of
forward contracts at each reporting date:
As at 31st March 20X1 – ₹ (25,000)
As at 30th June 20X1 - (15,000)
As at 30th September 20X1 - 12,000
Spot rate of USD on 31st December 20X1 - ₹ 66 per USD
Solution
(i) Assessment of the arrangement using the definition of derivative included underInd AS 109
Derivative is a financial instrument or other contract within the scope of this Standard withall three of the
following characteristics:
a) its value changes in response to the change in a specified interest rate, financialinstrument price, commodity
price, foreign exchange rate, index of prices or rates, credit rating or credit index, or other variable,
provided in the case of a non-financial variable that the variable is not specific to a party to the contract
(sometimes called the 'underlying').
b) it requires no initial net investment or an initial net investment that is smaller than would be required for other
types of contracts that would be expected to have a similar response to changes in market factors.
c) it is settled at a future date.
Upon evaluation of contract in question it is noted that the contract meets the definition of a derivative as
follows:
a) the value of the contract to purchase USD at a fixed price changes in response to changes in foreign
exchange rate.
b) the initial amount paid to enter into the contract is zero. A contract which would give the holder a similar
response to foreign exchange rate changes would have required an investment of USD 20,000 on
inception.
c) the contract is settled in future
The derivative is a forward exchange contract.
As per Ind AS 109, derivatives are measured at fair value upon initial recognition and are subsequently
measured at fair value through profit and loss.
(ii) Accounting on 1st January 20X1:
As there was no consideration paid and without evidence to the contrary the fair value of the contract on the
date of inception is considered to be zero. Accordingly, no accounting entries shall be recorded on the date
of entering into the contract.
(iii) Accounting on 31st March 20X1:
Particulars Dr. Amount Cr. Amount
Profit and loss A/c Dr. 25,000
To derivative financial liability 25,000
(Being mark to market loss on forward contract recorded)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(iv) Accounting on 30th June 20X1:
The change in value of the derivative forward contract shall be recorded as a derivativefinancial liability
in the books of SamCo Ltd. by recording the following journal entry:
Derivative financial liability A/c Dr. 10,000

To Profit and loss A/c
10,000
(being partial reversal of mark to market loss on forward contract
recorded)
(v) Accounting on 30th September 20X1:
The value of the derivative forward contract shall be recorded as a derivative financial asset in the books of
Sam Co Ltd. by recording the following journal entry:
Derivative financial liability A/c Dr 15,000
Derivative financial asset A/c Dr 12,000
To Profit and loss A/c 27,000
(being gain on mark to market of forward contract booked
as derivative financial asset and reversal of derivative financial
liability)
(vi) Accounting on 31st December 20X1:
The settlement of the derivative forward contract by actual purchase of USD 20,000 shall berecorded in the books of
SamCo Ltd. by recording the following journal entry:
Bank (USD Account) @ 20,000 x 66 Dr. 13,20,000
To Bank @ 20,000 x 68 13,60,000
To Derivative financial asset A/c 12,000
(being loss on settlement of forward contract booked onactual
purchase of USD)
Illustration 4
Entity A (an ₹ functional currency entity) enters into a USD 1,000,000 sale contract on 1 January 20X1 with Entity
B (an ₹ functional currency entity) to sell equipment on 30 June 20X1.
Spot rate on 1 January 20X1: ₹/USD 45
Spot rate on 31 March 20X1: ₹/USD 57
Three-month forward rate on 31 March 20X1: ₹/USD 45
Six-month forward rate on 1 January 20X1: ₹/USD 55
Spot rate on 30 June 20X1: ₹/USD 60
Assume that this contract has an embedded derivative that is not closely related and requires separation. Please
provide detailed journal entries in the books of Entity A for accounting of such embedded derivative until sale is
actually made.
Solution
The contract should be separated using the 6- month USD/₹ forward exchange rate, as at the date of thecontract
(₹/USD = 55). The two components of the contract are therefore:
 A sale contract for ₹ 55 million
 A six-month currency forward to purchase USD 1 Million at 55
 This gives rise to a gain or loss on the derivative, and a corresponding derivative asset or liability.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
On delivery
1. Entity A records the sales at the amount of the host contract = ₹ 55 million
2. The embedded derivative is considered to expire.
3. The derivative asset or liability (i.e., the cumulative gain or loss) is settled by becoming part of the
financial asset on delivery.
4. In this case the carrying value of the currency forward at 30 June 20X1 on maturity is =
₹ (1,000,000 x 60 – 55 x 1,000,000) = ₹ 5,000,000 (profit/asset)
The table summarising the computation of gain/ loss to be recorded at every period end -
Date Transaction Sales Debtors Derivative (Profit)
Asset Loss
(Liability)
₹ ₹ ₹ ₹
1-Jan-20X1 Embedded Derivative Nil Value
31-Mar-20X1 Change in Fair Value of (10,000,000) 10,000,000
Embedded Derivatives
MTM (55-45) x1 million
30-Jun-20X1 Change in Fair Value of 15,000,000
Embedded Derivatives (15,000,000)
(60-45) x 1 million
30-Jun-20X1 Recording sales at (55,000,000) 55,000,000
forward rate
30-Jun-20X1 Embedded derivative- 5,000,000 (5,000,000)
settled against debtors
Journal Entries to be recorded at every period end
a. 01 January 20X1 – No entry to be made
b. 31 March 20X1 –
Profit and loss A/c Dr. 10,000,000
To Derivative financial liability A/c 10,000,000
(being loss on mark to market of embedded derivativebooked)
c. 30 June 20X1 –
Derivative financial asset A/c Dr. 5,000,000
Derivative financial liability A/c Dr. 10,000,000
To Profit and loss A/c 15,000,000
(being gain on embedded derivative based on spot rateat the
date of settlement booked)
d. 30 June 20X1 –
Trade receivable A/c Dr. 55,000,000
To Sales A/c 55,000,000
(being sale booked at forward rate on the date of transaction)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
e. 30 June 20X1 –
Trade receivable A/c Dr 5,000,000
To Derivative financial asset A/c 5,000,000
(being derivative asset re-classified as a part of tradereceivables,
bringing it to spot rate on the date of sale)
Illustration 5
On 1st January 20X1, SamCo. Ltd. entered into a written put option for USD ($) 20,000 with JT Corp to be
settled in future on 31st December 20X1 for a rate equal to ₹ 68 per USD at the optionof JT Corp. SamCo. Ltd. did
not receive any amount upon entering into the contract. SamCo Ltd. is a listed company in India and prepares its
financial statements on a quarterly basis.
Following the classification principles of recognition and measurement as laid down in Ind AS 109, you are required to
record the entries for each quarter ended till the date of actual purchase of USD.
For the purposes of accounting, please use the following information representing marked to market fair value of
put option contracts at each reporting date:
As at 31st March 20X1 – (25,000)
As at 30th June 20X1 - ₹ (15,000)
As at 30th September 20X1 - ₹ NIL
Spot rate of USD on 31st December 20X1 - ₹ 66 per USD
Solution
i. Assessment of the arrangement using the definition of derivative included underInd AS 109
Derivative is a financial instrument or other contract within the scope of this Standard with all three of the
a. its value changes in response to the change in a specified interest rate, financial instrument price,
commodity price, foreign exchange rate, index of prices or rates, credit rating or credit index, or other
variable, provided in the case of a non-financial variable that the variable is not specific to a party to the
contract (sometimes called the 'underlying').
b. it requires no initial net investment or an initial net investment that is smaller than would be required for other
types of contracts that would be expected to have a similar response to changes in market factors.
c. it is settled at a future date.
Upon evaluation of contract in question it is noted that the contract meets the definition of a derivative as follows:
a) the value of the contract to purchase USD at a fixed price changes in response to changes in
foreign exchange rate.
d) the initial amount received to enter into the contract is zero. A contract which would give the holder a
similar response to foreign exchange rate changes would have required an investment of USD 20,000
on inception.
e) the contract is settled in future
The derivative liability is a written put option contract.
ii. Accounting on 1st January 20X1
As there was no consideration paid and without evidence to the contrary the fair value of the contract on
the date of inception is considered to be zero. Accordingly, no accounting entries shall be recorded on the
date of entering into the contract.
iii. Accounting on 31st March 20X1
The value of the derivative put option contract shall be recorded as a derivative financial liability in the
books of SamCo Ltd. by recording the following journal entry:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
To derivative financial liability 25,000
(Being mark to market loss on the put option contract
recorded)
iv. Accounting on 30th June 20X1
The change in value of the derivative put option contract shall be recorded as a derivative financial liability
in the books of SamCo Ltd. by recording the following journal entry:
(Being partial reversal of mark to market loss on the put
option contract recorded)
v. Accounting on 30th September 20X1
The change in value of the derivative option contract shall be recorded as a zero in the books of SamCoLtd.
by recording the following journal entry:
(Being gain on mark to market of put option contractbooked to
make the value the derivative liability as zero)
vi. Accounting on 31st December 20X1
The settlement of the derivative put option contract by actual purchase of USD 20,000 shall be
recorded in the books of SamCo Ltd. upon exercise by JT Corp. by recording the following journal entry:
Bank (USD Account) @ 20,000 x 66 Dr. 13,20,000
To Bank @ 20,000 x 68 13,60,000
(being loss on settlement of put option contract bookedon
actual purchase of USD)
Illustration 6
ABC Company issued 10,000 compulsory cumulative convertible preference shares (CCCPS) as on 1 April 20X1 @
150 each. The rate of dividend is 10% payable every year. The preference shares are convertible into 5,000 equity
shares of the company at the end of 5th year from the date of allotment. When the CCCPS are issued, the prevailing
market interest rate for similar debt without conversion options is 15% per annum. Transaction cost on the date of
issuance is 2% of the value of the proceeds.
Date of Allotment 01-Apr-20X1
Date of Conversion 01-Apr-20X6
Number of Preference Shares 10,000
Face Value of Preference Shares 150
Total Proceeds 15,00,000
Rate of dividend 10%
Market Rate for Similar Instrument 15%
Transaction Cost 30,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Face value of equity share after conversion 10
Number of equity shares to be issued 5,000
Effective interest rate 15.86%
You are required to compute the liability and equity component and pass journal entries for entire term of arrangement
i.e. from the issue of preference shares till their conversion into equity shares keeping in view the provisions of
relevant Ind AS.
Solution
This is a compound financial instrument with two components – liability representing present value of future cash
outflows and balance represents equity component.
a. Computation of Liability & Equity Component
Date Particulars Cash Discount Net present
Flow Factor Value
01-Apr-20X1 0 1 0.00
31-Mar-20X2 Dividend 150,000 0.869565 130,434.75
31-Mar-20X3 Dividend 150,000 0.756144 113,421.6
31-Mar-20X4 Dividend 150,000 0.657516 98,627.4
31-Mar-20X5 Dividend 150,000 0.571753 85,762.95
31-Mar-20X6 Dividend 150,000 0.497177 74,576.55
Total Liability Component 502,823.25
Total Proceeds 1,500,000.00
Total Equity Component (Bal fig) 997,176.75
b. Allocation of transaction costs
Particulars Amount Allocation Net Amount
Liability Component 502,823 10,056 492,767
Equity Component 997,177 19,944 977,233
Total Proceeds 1,500,000 30,000 1,470,000
c. Accounting for liability at amortised cost:
- Initial accounting = Present value of cash outflows less transaction costs
- Subsequent accounting = At amortised cost, ie, initial fair value adjusted for interest and
repayments of the liability.
Assume the effective interest rate is 15.86%
Opening Interest Cash Flow Closing FinancialLiability
Financial LiabilityA B C A+B-C
01-Apr-20X1 492,767 - - 4,92,767
31-Mar-20X2 492,767 78,153 150,000 4,20,920
31-Mar-20X3 420,920 66,758 150,000 3,37,678
31-Mar-20X4 337,678 53,556 150,000 2,41,234
31-Mar-20X5 241,234 38,260 150,000 1,29,494
31-Mar-20X6 129,494 20,506 150,000 -
a. Journal Entries to be recorded for entire term of arrangement are as follows:
Date Particulars Debit Credit
01-Apr-20X1 Bank A/c Dr. 1,470,000
To Preference Shares A/c 492,767
To Equity Component of Preference sharesA/c 977,233

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(Being compulsorily convertible preference shares
issued. The same are divided into equity component
and liability component as per the calculation)
31-Mar-20X2 Preference shares A/c Dr. 150,000
To Bank A/c 150,000
(Being Dividend at the coupon rate of 10% paidto
the shareholders)
31-Mar-20X2 Finance cost A/c Dr. 78,153
(Being interest as per EIR method recorded)
To Bank A/c 150,000
(Being Dividend at the coupon rate of 10% paidto
the shareholders)
To Bank A/c 150,000
(Being Dividend at the coupon rate of 10% paid to the
shareholders)
To Bank A/c 150,000
shareholders)
To Bank A/c 150,000
shareholders)
31-Mar-20X6 Equity Component of Preference shares A/c Dr. 977,233
To Equity Share Capital A/c 50,000
To Securities Premium A/c 927,233

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(Being Preference shares converted in equity shares
and remaining equity component is recognised as
securities premium)
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
QUESTION 1
As part of staff welfare measures, Y Co Ltd. has contracted to lend to its employees sums of money at 5% per annum
rate of interest. The amounts lent are to be repaid in five equal instalments for principle along with the interest. The
market rate of interest is 10% per annumfor comparable loans. Y lent 1,600,000 to its employees on 1st January 20X1.
Following the principles of recognition and measurement as laid down in Ind AS 109, you are required to record the entries
for the year ended 31 December 20X1, for the transaction and also compute the value of loan initially to be recognised
and amortised cost for all subsequent years.
For the purpose of calculation, following discount factors at interest rate of 10% per annum may be adopted
At the end of year –
Year Present value factor
1 .909
2 .827
3 .751
4 .683
5 .620
Solution
1. (i) Calculation of initial recognition amount of loan to its employees:
Year end Cash flow Total PV factor Present value
Principal Interest @ 5%
20X1 320,000 80,000 400,000 .909 363,600
20X2 320,000 64,000 384,000 .827 317,568
20X3 320,000 48,000 368,000 .751 276,368
20X4 320,000 32,000 352,000 .683 240,416
20X5 320,000 16,000 336,000 .620 208,320
1,406,272
(ii) Calculation of amortised cost of loan to employees
Year end Amortised cost Interest to be Repayment Amortised
(opening balance) recognised (including cost (closingbalance)
interest)
20X1 1,406,272 140,627 400,000 1,146,899
20X2 1,146,899 114,690 384,000 877,589
20X3 877,589 87,759 368,000 597,348
20X4 597,348 59,735 352,000 305,083
20X5 305,083 30,917* 336,000 -
*305,083 x 10% = 30,508. Difference of ₹ 409 is due to approximation in computation.
(iii) Journal Entries to be recorded of Y Ltd. for the year ended 31 December 20X1
1 Jan 20X1 Staff loan A/c Dr. 14,06,272
Prepaid staff cost A/c* Dr. 1,93,728
[(1,600,000 – 1,406,272), Refer part (ii)]

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
To Bank A/c 16,00,000
(Being disbursement of loans to staff and
excess loan balance over present value
thereof in order to reflect the loan at its
present value booked as prepaid staff cost)
31 Dec 20X1 Staff loan A/c Dr. 1,40,627
To Interest expense A/c 1,40,627
(Being interest accrued on loans to staff)
31 Dec 20X1 Staff cost A/c Dr. 38,746
To Prepaid expense A/c 38,746
(Being interest accrued on loans to staff)
* Where the difference between the amount given by the Company to its employees and its fair value represents
another asset, then such asset shall be recognised. Accordingly, such difference is recognised as prepaid
employee cost and amortised over the period of loan.
QUESTION 2
Wheel Co. Limited has a policy of providing subsidized loans to its employees for the purpose of buying or building
houses. Mr. X, who’s executive assistant to the CEO of Wheel Co. Limited, took a loan from the Company on the
following terms:
 Principal amount: 1,000,000
 Interest rate: 4% for the first 400,000 and 7% for the next 600,000
 Start date: 1 January 20X1
 Tenure: 5 years
 Pre-payment: Full or partial pre-payment at the option of the employee
 The principal amount of loan shall be recovered in 5 equal annual instalments and willbe first
applied to 7% interest bearing principal
 The accrued interest shall be paid on an annual basis
 Mr. X must remain in service till the term of the loan ends
The market rate of a comparable loan available to Mr. X, is 12% per annum.
Following table shows the contractually expected cash flows from the loan given to Mr. X:
Inflows
Date Outflows Principal Interest Interest Principal
income 7% income 4% outstanding
1-Jan-20X1 (1,000,000) 1,000,000
31-Dec-20X1 200,000 42,000 16,000 800,000
31-Dec-20X2 200,000 28,000 16,000 600,000
31-Dec-20X3 200,000 14,000 16,000 400,000
31-Dec-20X4 200,000 - 16,000 200,000
31-Dec-20X5 200,000 - 8,000 -
Mr. S, pre-pays ₹ 200,000 on 31 December 20X2, reducing the outstanding principal as at that date to ₹ 400,000. Following
table shows the actual cash flows from the loan given to Mr. X, considering thepre-payment event on31
December 20X2: (amount in ₹)
Inflows
Date Outflows Principal Interest Interest Principal
income 7% income 4% outstanding
1-Jan-20X1 (1,000,000) 1,000,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
31-Dec-20X1 200,000 42,000 16,000 800,000
31-Dec-20X2 400,000 28,000 16,000 400,000
31-Dec-20X3 200,000 - 16,000 200,000
31-Dec-20X4 200,000 - 8,000 -
31-Dec-20X5 - - - -
Record journal entries in the books of Wheel Co. Limited considering the requirements ofInd AS 109.
Solution
As per requirement of Ind AS 109, a financial instrument is initially measured and recorded at its fair value.
Therefore, considering the market rate of interest of similar loan available to Mr. X is 12%, the fair value of the
contractual cash flows shall be as follows:
Inflows
Date Principal Interest Interest Discount PV
income 7% income 4% factor @12%
31-Dec-20X1 200,000 42,000 16,000 0.8929 2,30,357
31-Dec-20X2 200,000 28,000 16,000 0.7972 1,94,515
31-Dec-20X3 200,000 14,000 16,000 0.7118 1,63,709
31-Dec-20X4 200,000 - 16,000 0.6355 1,37,272
31-Dec-20X5 200,000 - 8,000 0.5674 1,18,025
Total (fair value) 8,43,878
Benefit to Mr. X, to be considered a part of employee cost for Wheel Co. ₹ 1,56,121.
The deemed employee cost is to be amortised over the period of loan i.e. the minimum period that Mr. X must
remain in service.
The amortization schedule of the ₹ 843,878 loan is shown in the following table:
Date Loan outstanding Total cash inflows (principal Interest @
repayment + interest 12%
1-Jan-20X1 843,878
31-Dec-20X1 687,143 258,000 101,265
31-Dec-20X2 525,600 244,000 82,457
31-Dec-20X3 358,672 230,000 63,072
31-Dec-20X4 185,713 216,000 43,041
31-Dec-20X5 (0) 208,000 22,287
a. 1 January 20X1 –
Particulars Dr.Amount (₹) Cr. Amount(₹)
Loan to employee A/c Dr. 843,879
Pre-paid employee cost A/c Dr 156,121
To Bank A/c 1,000,000
(Being loan asset recorded at initial fair value)
b. 31 December 20X1 –
Particulars Dr. Amount (₹) Cr.Amount (₹)
Bank A/c Dr. 258,000
To Interest income (profit and loss) @12% A/c 101,265
To Loan to employee A/c 156,735
(Being first instalment of repayment of loan accounted for using
the amortised cost and effective interest rate of 12%)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Employee benefit (profit and loss) A/c Dr. 31,224
To Pre-paid employee cost A/c 31,224
(Being amortization of pre-paid employee costcharged to
profit and loss as employee benefit cost)
On 31 December 20X2, due to pre-payment of a part of loan by Mr. X, the carrying value of the loan shall be re-
computed by discounting the future remaining cash flows by the original effective interest rate.
There shall be two sets of accounting entries on 31 December 20X2, first the realisation of the contractual cash flow
as shown in (c) below and then the accounting for the prepayment of ₹ 200,000 included in (d) below:
c. 31 December 20X2
Particulars Dr. Amount(₹) Cr. Amount(₹)
(Being second instalment of repayment of loanaccounted for
using the amortised cost and effective
interest rate of 12%)
Employee benefit (profit and loss) A/c Dr. 31,224
(Being amortization of pre-paid employee costcharged to profit
and loss as employee benefit cost)
Computation of new carrying value of loan to employee:
Inflows
Date Principal Interest Interest Discount PV
income 7% income 4% factor @12%
31-Dec-20X3 200,000 - 16,000 0.8929 192,857
31-Dec-20X4 200,000 - 8,000 0.7972 165,816
Total (revised carrying value) 358,673
Less: Current carrying value 525,601
Adjustment required 166,928
The difference between the amount of pre-payment and adjustment to loan shall be considered a gain, though will be
recorded as an adjustment to pre-paid employee cost, which shall be amortised over the remaining tenure of the
loan.
d. 31 December 20X2 prepayment–
Particulars Dr. Amount (₹) Cr. Amount (₹)
(Being gain to Wheel Co. Limited recorded as anadjustment
to pre-paid employee cost)
The amortisation schedule of the new carrying amount of loan shall be as follows:
Date Loan Total cash inflows (principal Interest @ 12%
outstanding repayment + interest
31-Dec-20X2 358,673
31-Dec-20X3 185,714 216,000 43,041
31-Dec-20X4 - 208,000 22,286

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Amortisation of employee benefit cost shall be as follows:
Date Balance Amortised to P&L Adjustment
1-Jan-20X1 156,121
31-Dec-20X1 124,897 31,224
31-Dec-20X2 60,601 31,224 33,072
31-Dec-20X3 30,300 30,300
31-Dec-20X4 - 30,300
e. 31 December 20X3 –
(Being third instalment of repayment of loan accounted for
using the amortised cost and effective interest rate of 12%)
Employee benefit (profit and loss) A/c Dr 30,300
30,300
To Pre-paid employee cost A/c
(Being amortization of pre-paid employee costcharged to profit
f. 31 December 20X4 –
Particulars Dr.Amount (₹) Cr. Amount(₹)
Bank A/c Dr 208,000
(Being last instalment of repayment of loan accounted forusing
the amortised cost and effective interest rate of 12%)
Employee benefit (profit and loss) A/c Dr 30,300
(Being amortization of pre-paid employee cost charged toprofit
QUESTION 3
Wheel Co. Limited borrowed 500,000,000 from a bank on 1 January 20X1. The original terms of the loan were as
follows:
 Interest rate: 11%
 Repayment of principal in 5 equal instalments
 Payment of interest annually on accrual basis
 Upfront processing fee: ₹ 5,870,096
Effective interest rate on loan: 11.50%
On 31 December 20X2, Wheel Co. Limited approached the bank citing liquidity issues in meeting the cash
flows required for immediate instalments and re-negotiated the terms of the loan with banks as follows:
 Interest rate 15%
 Repayment of outstanding principal in 10 equal instalments starting 31 December 20X3
 Payment of interest on an annual basis
Record journal entries in the books of Wheel Co. Limited till 31 December 20X3, after giving effect of the
changes in the terms of the loan on 31 December 20X2

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
On the date of initial recognition, the effective interest rate of the loan shall be computed keeping in view the
contractual cash flows and upfront processing fee paid. The following table shows the amortisation of loan based
on effective interest rate:
Date Cash flows Cash flows Amortised cost Interest @
(principal) (interest and (opening + interest – EIR(11.50%)
fee) cash flows)
1-Jan-20X1 (500,000,000) 5,870,096 494,129,904
31-Dec-20X1 100,000,000 55,000,000 395,954,843 56,824,939
31-Dec-20X2 100,000,000 44,000,000 297,489,650 45,534,807
31-Dec-20X3 100,000,000 33,000,000 198,700,959 34,211,310
31-Dec-20X4 100,000,000 22,000,000 99,551,570 22,850,610
31-Dec-20X5 100,000,000 11,000,000 (0) 11,448,430
a. 1 January 20X1 –
Particulars Dr. Amount (₹) Cr. Amount(₹)
Bank A/c Dr. 494,129,904
To Loan from bank A/c 494,129,904
(Being loan recorded at its fair value less transactioncosts on
the initial recognition date)
b. 31 December 20X1 –
Particulars Dr. Amount (₹) Cr. Amount(₹)
Loan from bank A/c Dr. 98,175,061
Interest expense (profit and loss) Dr. 56,824,939
To Bank A/c 155,000,000
(Being first instalment of loan and payment of interest
accounted for as an adjustment to the amortised cost ofloan)
c. 31 December 20X2 – Before Wheel Co. Limited approached the bank –
To Loan from bank A/c 1,534,807
To Bank A/c 44,000,000
(Being loan payment of interest recorded by theCompany
before it approached the Bank for deferment of principal)
Upon receiving the new terms of the loan, Wheel Co. Limited, re-computed the carrying value of the loan by
discounting the new cash flows with the original effective interest rate and comparing the same with the current
carrying value of the loan. As per requirements ofInd AS 109, any change of more than 10% shall be considered
a substantial modification, resulting in fresh accounting for the new loan:
Date Cash flows Interest outflow Discount PV of cash
(principal) @15% factor flows
31-Dec-20X2 (400,000,000)
31-Dec-20X3 40,000,000 60,000,000 0.8969 89,686,099
31-Dec-20X4 40,000,000 54,000,000 0.8044 75,609,805
31-Dec-20X5 40,000,000 48,000,000 0.7214 63,483,092

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
31-Dec-20X6 40,000,000 42,000,000 0.6470 53,053,542
31-Dec-20X7 40,000,000 36,000,000 0.5803 44,100,068
31-Dec-20X8 40,000,000 30,000,000 0.5204 36,429,133
31-Dec-20X9 40,000,000 24,000,000 0.4667 29,871,422
31-Dec-20Y0 40,000,000 18,000,000 0.4186 24,278,903
31-Dec-20Y1 40,000,000 12,000,000 0.3754 19,522,235
31-Dec-20Y3 40,000,000 6,000,000 0.3367 15,488,493
PV of new contractual cash flows discounted at 11.50% 451,522,791
Carrying amount of loan 397,489,650
Difference 54,033,141
Percentage of carrying amount 13.59%
Note:Calculation above done on full decimal, though in the table discount factor is limited to 4 decimals.
Considering a more than 10% change in PV of cash flows compared to the carrying value of the loan, the existing
loan shall be considered to have been extinguished and the new loan shall be accounted for as a separate financial
liability. The accounting entries for the same are included below:
d. 31 December 20X2 – accounting for extinguishment
Loan from bank (old) A/c Dr 397,489,650
Finance cost (profit and loss) Dr 2,510,350
To Loan from bank (new) A/c
400,000,000
(Being new loan accounted for at its principal amount in
absence of any transaction costs directly related to such loan
and correspondingly a de-recognition of existing loan)
e. 31 December 20X3
Loan from bank A/c Dr. 40,000,000
To Bank A/c
(Being first instalment of the new loan and payment of interest 100,000,000
accounted for as an adjustment to the amortised cost of loan)
QUESTION 4
K ltd. issued 500,000, 6% convertible debentures @ ₹ 10 each on 01 April 20X1. The debentures are due for
redemption on 31 March 20X5 at a premium of 10%, convertible into equity shares to the extent of 50% and balance
to be settled in cash to the debenture holders. The interest rate on equivalent debentures without conversion rights
was 10%.
You are required to separate the debt and equity components at the time of issue and showthe accounting entries
in Company’s books at initial recognition. The following present values of Re 1 at 6% and at 10% are provided:
Interest rate Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4
6% 0.94 0.89 0.84 0.79
10% 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.68

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
Computation of debt component of convertible debentures on 01 April 20X1
Particulars Amount
Present value of principal amount repayable after 4 years
(A) 5,000,000 x 50% x 1.10 x 0.68 (10% discount factor) 1,870,000
(B) Present value of interest [300,000 x 3.17] (4 years cumulative 10% discount 951,000
factor)
Total present value of debt component (A) + (B) 2,821,000
Issue proceeds from convertible debentures 5,000,000
Value of equity component 2,179,000
Journal entry at initial recognition
Bank A/c Dr. 5,000,000
To 6% debenture A/c (liability component) 2,821,000
To 6% debenture A/c (equity component) 2,179,000
(Being disbursement recorded at fair value)
QUESTION 5 (MTP MAR 2019)
On 1 April 20X1, an 8% convertible loan with a nominal value of ₹ 6,00,000 was issued at par. It is redeemable on
31 March 20X5 also at par. Alternatively, it may be converted into equity shares on the basis of 100 new shares for
each ₹ 200 worth of loan.
An equivalent loan without the conversion option would have carried interest at 10%. Interest of ₹ 48,000 has already
been paid and included as a finance cost. Present value rates are as follows:
Year End @ 8% @ 10%
1 0.93 0.91
2 0.86 0.83
3 0.79 0.75
4 0.73 0.68
Explain how will the Company account for the above loan notes in the financial statements for the year ended
31 March 20X2?
Solution
Step 1 There is an ‘option’ to convert the loans into equity i.e. the loan note holders do not have to accept
equity shares; they could demand repayment in the form of cash.
Ind AS 32 states that where there is an obligation to transfer economic benefits there should be a liability recognised.
On the other hand, where there is not an obligation to transfer economic benefits, a financial instrument should be
recognised as equity.
In the above illustration we have both – ‘equity’ and ‘debt’ features in the instrument. There is an obligation to pay
cash – i.e. interest at 8% per annum and a redemption amount – this is ‘financial liability’ or ‘debt component’. The
‘equity’ part of the transaction is the option to convert. So it is a compound financial instrument.
Step 2 Debt element of the financial instrument so as to recognise the liability is the present value of interest
and principal
The rate at which the same is to be discounted, is the rate of equivalent loan note without the conversion option
would have carried interest at 10%, therefore this is the rate to be used for discounting
Step 3 Calculation of the debt element of the loan note as follows: 8% Interest discounted at a rate of 10%
Present Value (6,00,000 x 8%)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
S. No Year Interest amount PVF Amount
Year 1 20X2 48,000 0.91 43,680
Year 2 20X3 48,000 0.83 39,840
Year 3 20X4 48,000 0.75 36,063
1,19,583
Year 4 20X5 648,000 0.68 4,40,640
Amount to be recognised as a liability 5,60,223
Initial proceeds (6,00,000)
Amount to be recognised as equity 39,777
* In year 4, the loan note is redeemed therefore ₹ 6,00,000 + ₹ 48,000 = ₹ 6,48,000.
Step 4 The next step is to recognise the interest component equivalent to the loan that would carry if there was no
option to cover. Therefore, the interest should be recognised at 10%. As on date ₹ 48,000 has been recognised in the
statement of profit and loss i.e. 6,00,000 x 8% but we have discounted the present value of future interest payments
and redemption amount using discount factors of 10%, so the finance charge in the statement of profit and loss must
also be recognised at the same rate i.e. for the purpose of consistency.
The additional charge to be recognised in the income statement is calculated as: Debt component of the financial
instrument ₹ 5,60,000
Interest charge (5,60,000 x 10%) ₹ 56,000
Already charged to the income statement (₹ 48,000)
Additional charge required ₹ 8,000
Journal Entries for recording additional finance cost for year ended 31 March 20X2
Finance cost A/c Dr. 8,000
To Debt component A/c 8,000
(Being interest recorded for difference between amount recorded
earlier and that to be recorded per Ind AS 32)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
RTP/MTP/PAST QUESTIONS
RTP MAY 2018 (MTP AUG 2018)
QUESTION 1
On 1st April, 20X4, Shelter Ltd. issued 5,000, 8% convertible debentures with a face value of ₹ 100
each maturing on 31st March, 20X9. The debentures are convertible into equity shares of Shelter
Ltd. at a conversion price of ₹ 105 per share. Interest is payable annually in cash. At the date of
issue, Shelter Ltd. could have issued non-convertible debt with a 5 year term bearing a coupon
interest rate of 12%. On 1st April, 20X7, the convertible debentures have a fair value of ₹ 5,25,000.
Shelter Ltd. makes a tender offer to debenture holders to repurchase the debentures for ₹ 5,25,000,
which the holders accepted. At the date of repurchase, Shelter Ltd. could have issued non-
convertible debt with a 2 year term bearing a coupon interest rate of 9%. Show accounting entries
in the books of Shelter Ltd. for recording of equity and liability component:
(i) At the time of initial recognition and
(ii) At the time of repurchase of the convertible debentures.
The following present values of ₹ 1 at 8%, 9% & 12% are supplied to you:
Interest Rate Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
8% 0.926 0.857 0.794 0.735 0.681
9% 0.917 0.842 0.772 0.708 0.650
10% 0.893 0.797 0.712 0.636 0.567
SOLUTION
At the time of initial recognition
Liability component
Present value of 5 yearly interest payments of ₹ 40,000, discounted at 12%
annuity (40,000 x 3.605) 1,44,200
Present value of ₹ 5,00,000 due at the end of 5 years, discounted at 12%,
compounded yearly (5,00,000 x 0.567) 2,83,500
4,27,700
Equity component
(₹ 5,00,000 – ₹ 4,27,700) 72,300
Total proceeds 5,00,000
Note: Since ₹ 105 is the conversion price of debentures into equity shares and not the redemption
price, the liability component is calculated @ ₹ 100 each only.
Journal Entry
Debit Credit
Bank Dr. 500000
To 8% Debentures (Liability component) 427200
To 8% Debentures (Equity component) 72300
(Being Debentures are initially recorded a fair value)
(ii)At the time of repurchase of convertible debentures
The repurchase price is allocated as follows:
Carrying Value Fair Value @ Difference
@ 12% 9%
Liability component
Present value of 2 remaining yearly interest
payments of ₹ 40,000, discounted at 12%
and 9%, respectively 67,600 70,360
Present value of ₹ 5,00,000 due in 2 years,
discounted at 12% and 9%, compounded
yearly, respectively 3,98,500 4,21,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Liability component 4,91,360 (25,260) 4,66,100 4,91,360 (25,260)
Equity component (5,25,000 - 4,91,360) 72300 33640* 38660
Total 5,38,400 5,25,000 13,400
Journal Entries
8% Debentures (Liability component) Dr. 4,66,100
Profit and loss A/c (Debt settlement expense) Dr. 25,260
To Bank A/c 4,91,360
(Being the repurchase of the liability component recognised)
8% Debentures (Equity component) Dr. 72,300
To Bank A/c 33,640
To Reserves and Surplus A/c 38,660
(Being the cash paid for the equity component recognised)
RTP NOV 2018
QUESTION 2
On 1st April 2017, A Ltd. lent ₹ 2 crores to a supplier in order to assist them with their expansion
plans. The arrangement of the loan cost the company ₹ 10 lakhs. The company has agreed not to
charge interest on this loan to help the supplier's short-term cash flow but expected the supplier to
repay ₹ 2.40 crores on 31st March 2019. As calculated by the finance team of the company, the
effective annual rate of interest on this loan is 6.9% On 28th February 2018, the company received
the information that poor economic climate has caused the supplier significant problems and in
order to help them, the company agreed to reduce the amount repayable by them on 31st March
2019 to ₹ 2.20 crores. Suggest the accounting entries as per applicable Ind AS.
SOLUTION
The loan to the supplier would be regarded as a financial asset. The relevant accounting standard
Ind AS 109 provides that financial assets are normally measured at fair value. If the financial asset
in which the only expected future cash inflows are the receipts of principal and interest and the
investor intends to collect these inflows rather than dispose of the asset to a third party, then Ind AS
109 allows the asset to be measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. If this
method is adopted, the costs of issuing the loan are included in its initial carrying value rather than
being taken to profit or loss as an immediate expense. This makes the initial carrying value ₹
2,10,00,000. Under the effective interest method, part of the finance income is recognised in the
current period rather than all in the following period when repayment is due. The income recognised
in the current period is ₹ 14,49,000 (₹ 2,10,00,000 x 6.9%) In the absence of information regarding
the financial difficulties of the supplier the financial asset at 31st March, 2018 would have been
measured at ₹ 2,24,49,000 (₹ 2,10,00,000 + 14,49,000). The information regarding financial
difficulty of the supplier is objective evidence that the financial asset suffered impairment at 31st
March 2018.
The asset is re-measured at the present value of the revised estimated future cash inflows, using
the original effective interest rate. Under the revised estimates the closing carrying amount of the
asset would be ₹ 2,05,79,981 (₹ 2,20,00,000 / 1.069). The reduction in carrying value of ₹ 18,69,019
(₹ 2,24,49,000 – 2,05,79,981) would be charged to profit or loss in the current period as an
impairment of a financial asset. Therefore, the net charge to profit or loss in respect of thecurrent
period would be ₹ 4,20,019 (18,69,019 – 14,49,000).
RTP MAY 2019 (MTP OCTOBER 2020)
QUESTION 3
KK Ltd. has granted an interest free loan of ₹ 10,00,000 to its wholly owned Indian Subsidiary YK
Ltd. There is no transaction cost attached to the said loan. The Company has not finalised any
terms and conditions including the applicable interest rates on such loans. The Board of Directors of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
the Company are evaluating various options and has requested your firm to provide your views
under Ind AS in following situations:
(i) The Loan given by KK Ltd. to its wholly owned subsidiary YK Ltd. is interest free and such
loan is repayable on demand.
(ii) The said Loan is interest free and will be repayable after 3 years from the date of granting
such loan. The current market rate of interest for similar loan is 10%. Considering the same,
the fair value of the loan at initial recognition is ₹ 8,10,150.
(iii) The said loan is interest free and will be repaid as and when the YK Ltd. has funds to repay
the Loan amount. Based on the same, KK Ltd. has requested you to suggest the
accounting treatment of the above loan in the stand-alone financial statements of KK Ltd.
and YK Ltd. and also in the consolidated financial statements of the group. Consider
interest for only one year for the above loan. Further the Company is also planning to grant
interest free loan from YK Ltd. to KK Ltd. in the subsequent period. What will be the
accounting treatment of the same under applicable Ind AS?
SOLUTION
Scenario (i)
Since the loan is repayable on demand, it has fair value equal to cash consideration given. KK Ltd.
and YK Ltd. should recognize financial asset and liability, respectively, at the amount of loan given
(assuming that loan is repayable within a year). Upon, repayment, both the entities should reverse
the entries that were made at the origination.
Journal entries in the books of KK Ltd.
At origination
Loan to YK Ltd. A/c Dr. ₹ 10,00,000
To Bank A/c ₹ 10,00,000
On repayment
Bank A/c Dr. ₹ 10,00,000
To Loan to YK Ltd. A/c ₹ 10,00,000
Journal entries in the books of YK Ltd.
At origination
Bank A/c ₹ 10,00,000
To Loan to KK Ltd. A/c Dr. ₹ 10,00,000
On repayment
Loan to KK Ltd. A/c Dr. ₹ 10,00,000
To Bank A/c ₹ 10,00,000
In the consolidated financial statements, there will be no entry in this regard since loan receivable
and loan payable will get set off.
Scenario (ii)
Applying the guidance in Ind AS 109, a ‘financial asset’ shall be recorded at its fair value upon initial
recognition. Fair value is normally the transaction price. However, sometimes certain type of
instruments may be exchanged at off market terms (ie, different from market terms for a similar
instrument if exchanged between market participants). If a long-term loan or receivable that carries
no interest while similar instruments if exchanged between market participants carry interest, then
fair value for such loan receivable will be lower from its transaction price owing to the loss of
interest that the holder bears. In such cases where part of the consideration given or received is for
something other than the financial instrument, an entity shall measure the fair value of the financial
instrument. The difference in fair value and transaction cost will treated as investment in Subsidiary
YK Ltd. Both KK Ltd. and YK Ltd. should recognise financial asset and liability, respectively, at fair
value on initial recognition, i.e., the present value of ₹ 10,00,000 payable at the end of 3 years using
discounting factor of 10%. Since the question mentions fair value of the loan at initial recognition as

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
₹ 8,10,150, the same has been considered. The difference between the loan amount and its fair
value is treated as an equity contribution to the subsidiary. This represents a further investment by
the parent in the subsidiary.
Journal entries in the books of KK Ltd. (for one year)
At origination
Loan to YK Ltd. A/c Dr. ₹ 8,10,150
Investment in YK Ltd. A/c Dr 1,89,850
To Bank A/c ₹ 10,00,000
During periods to repayment- to recognise
interest
Year 1 – Charging of Interest
Loan to YK Ltd. A/c Dr. ₹ 81,015
To Interest income A/c ₹ 81,015
Transferring of interest to Profit and Loss
Interest income A/c Dr. ₹ 81,015
To Profit and Loss A/c ₹ 81,015
On repayment
Bank A/c Dr ₹ 10,00,000
To Loan to YK Ltd. A/c ₹ 10,00,000
Note- Interest needs to be recognised in statement of profit and loss. The same cannot be
adjusted against capital contribution recognised at origination.
Journal entries in the books of YK Ltd. (for one year)
At origination
Bank A/c Dr. ₹ 10,00,000
To Loan from KK Ltd. A/c ₹ 8,10,150
During periods to repayment- to recognise
interest
Year 1 – Charging of Interest
Interest expense A/c Dr. ₹ 81,015
To Loan from KK Ltd. A/c ₹ 81,015
On Repayment
Loan to KK Ltd. Dr ₹ 10,00,000
To Bank A/c ₹ 10,00,000
RTP NOV 2019 (MTP MAR 2021)
QUESTION 4
An entity purchases a debt instrument with a fair value of ₹ 1,000 on 15th March, 20X1 and
measures the debt instrument at fair value through other comprehensive income. The instrument
has an interest rate of 5% over the contractual term of 10 years, and has a 5% effective interest
rate. At initial recognition, the entity determines that the asset is not a purchased or original credit-
impaired asset. On 31st March 20X1 (the reporting date), the fair value of the debt instrument has
decreased to ₹ 950 as a result of changes in market interest rates. The entity determines that there
has not been a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition and that ECL should be
measured at an amount equal to 12 month ECL, which amounts to ₹ 30. On 1st April 20X1, the
entity decides to sell the debt instrument for ₹ 950, which is its fair value at that date. Pass journal
entries for recognition, impairment and sale of debt instruments as per Ind AS 109. Entries relating
to interest income are not to be provided.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
SOLUTION
On Initial recognition
Debit (₹) Credit (₹)
Financial asset-FVOCI Dr. 1,000
To Cash 1,000
On Impairment of debt instrument
Impairment expense (P&L) Dr. 30
Other comprehensive income Dr. 20
To Financial asset-FVOCI 50
The cumulative loss in other comprehensive income at the reporting date was ₹ 20. That amount
consists of the total fair value change of ₹ 50 (that is, ₹ 1,000-₹ 950) offset by the change in the
accumulated impairment amount representing 12-month ECL, that was recognized (₹ 30).
On Sale of debt instrument
Cash 950
To Financial asset –FVOCI 950
Loss on sale (P&L) 20
To Other comprehensive income 20
RTP MAY 2020 (MTP MAR 2021)
QUESTION 5
XYZ issued ₹ 4,80,000 4% redeemable preference shares on 1st April 20X5 at par. Interest is paid
annually in arrears, the first payment of interest amounting ₹ 19,200 was made on 31st March 20X6
and it is debited directly to retained earnings by accountant. The preference shares are redeemable
for a cash amount of ₹ 7,20,000 on 31st March 20X8. The effective rate of interest on the
redeemable preference shares is 18% per annum. The proceeds of the issue have been recorded
within equity by accountant as this reflects the legal nature of the shares. Board of directors intends
to issue new equity shares over the next two years to build up cash resources to redeem the
preference shares. Mukesh, Accounts manager of XYZ has been told to review the accounting of
aforesaid issue. CFO has asked from Mukesh the closing balance of preference shares at the year
end. If you were Mukesh, then how much balance you would have shown to CFO on analysis of the
stated issue. Prepare necessary adjusting journal entry in the books of account, if required.
SOLUTION
The preference shares provide the holder with the right to receive a predetermined amount of
annual dividend out of profits of the company, together with a fixed amount on redemption. Whilst
the legal form is equity, the shares are in substance debt. The fixed level of dividend is interest and
the redemption amount is equivalent to the repayment of a loan. Under Ind AS 32 ‘Financial
Instruments: Presentation’ these instruments should be classified as financial liabilities because
there is a contractual obligation to deliver cash. The preference shares should be accounted for at
amortised cost using the effective interest rate of 18%.
Year 1 April, 20X5 ₹ Interest @18% ₹ Paid at 4% ₹ 31 March, 20X6 ₹
20X5-20X6 480,000 86,400 (19,200) 547,200
Accordingly, the closing balance of Preference shares at year end i.e. 31st March, 20X6 would be ₹
5,47,200. Accountant has inadvertently debited interest of ₹ 19,200 in the profit and loss. However,
the interest of ₹ 86,400 should have been debited to profit and loss as finance charge. Similarly,
amount of ₹ 5,47,200 should be included in borrowings (non-current liabilities) and consequently,
Equity should be reduced by ₹ 480,000 proceeds of issue and ₹ 67,200 (86,400 – 19,200) i.e. total
by 5,47,200. Necessary adjusting journal entry to rectify the books of accounts will be:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Preference share capital (equity) (Balance sheet) Dr. 480,000
Finance costs (Profit and loss) Dr 86,400
To Equity – Retained earnings (Balance sheet) 19200
To Preference shares (Long-term Borrowings) 547200
(Balance sheet)
RTP MAY 2021
QUESTION 6
On 1 April 20X1, Sun Limited guarantees a ₹10,00,000 loan of Subsidiary – Moon Limited, which
Bank STDK has provided to Moon Limited for three years at 8%. Interest payments are made at the
end of each year and the principal is repaid at the end of the loan term. If Sun Limited had not
issued a guarantee, Bank STDK would have charged Moon Limited an interest rate of 11%. Sun
Limited does not charge Moon Limited for providing the guarantee. On 31 March 20X2, there is 1%
probability that Moon Limited may default on the loan in the next 12 months. If Moon Limited
defaults on the loan, Sun Limited does not expect to recover any amount from Moon Limited.
On 31 March 20X3, there is 3% probability that Moon Limited may default on the loan in the next 12
months. If Moon Limited defaults on the loan, Sun Limited does not expect to recover any amount
from Moon Limited. Provide the accounting treatment of financial guarantee as per Ind AS 109 in
the books of Sun Ltd., on initial recognition and in subsequent periods till 31 March 20X3.
SOLUTION
1 April 20X1 A financial guarantee contract is initially recognised at fair value. The fair value of the
guarantee will be the present value of the difference between the net contractual cash flows
required under the loan, and the net contractual cash flows that would have been required without
the guarantee.
Particulars Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Total
(₹) (₹) (₹)
Cash flows based on interest rate of 11% (A) 110000 110000 110000 330000
Cash flows based on interest rate of 8% (B) 80000 80000 80000 240000
Interest rate differential (A-B) 30000 30000 30000 90000
Discount factor @ 11% 0.901 0.812 0.731
Interest rate differential discounted at 11% 27030 24360 21930 73320
Fair value of financial guarantee contract (at 73320
inception)
Journal Entry
Particulars Debit (₹) Credit (₹)
Investment in subsidiary Dr 73320
To Financial guarantee (liability) 73320
(Being financial guarantee initially recorded)
31 March 20X2
Subsequently at the end of the reporting period, financial guarantee is measured at the higher of:
- the amount of loss allowance; and
- the amount initially recognised less cumulative amortization, where appropriate.
At 31 March 20X2, there is 1% probability that Moon Limited may default on the loan in the next 12
from Moon Limited. The 12-month expected credit losses are therefore ₹10,000 (₹10,00,000 x 1%). The
initial amount recognised less amortisation is ₹51,385 (₹73,320 + ₹8,065 (interest accruedbased on
EIR)) – ₹30,000 (benefit of the guarantee in year 1) Refer table below. The unwoundamount is
recognised as income in the books of Sun Limited, being the benefit derived by MoonLimited not
defaulting on the loan during the period.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Year Opening balance EIR@11% Benefits Provided Closing Balance
1 73320 8065 (30000) 51385
2 51385 5625 (30000) 27037
3 27037 2963* (30000) -
The carrying amount of the financial guarantee liability after amortisation is therefore ₹ 51,385,
which is higher than the 12-month expected credit losses of ₹ 10,000. The liability is therefore
adjusted to ₹ 51,385 (the higher of the two amounts) as follows:
Financial guarantee (liability) Dr. 21935
To Profit or loss 21935
(Being financial guarantee subsequently adjusted)
31 March 20X3
At 31 March 20X3, there is 3% probability that Moon Limited will default on the loan in the next 12
from Moon Limited. The 12-month expected credit losses are therefore ₹ 30,000 (₹ 10,00,000 x 3%).
The initial amount recognised less accumulated amortisation is ₹ 27,037, which is lower than the 12-
month expected credit losses (₹ 30,000). The liability is therefore adjusted to ₹ 30,000 (the higher of
the two amounts) as follows:
Financial guarantee (liability) Dr. 21385*
To Profit or loss 21385
(Being financial guarantee subsequently adjusted)
* The carrying amount at the end of 31 March 20X2 = ₹ 51,385 less 12-month expected credit
losses of ₹ 30,000.
MTP MAR 2018
QUESTION 1
X Ltd. is engaged in manufacturing and selling of designer furniture. It sells goods on extended
credit. X Ltd. sold furniture for ₹ 40,00,000 to a customer, the payment against which was
receivable after 12 months with interest at the rate of 3% per annum. The market interest rate on
the date of transaction was 8% per annum. Calculate the revenue to be recognised by X Ltd. for the
above transactions
SOLUTION
X Ltd. should determine the fair value of revenue by calculating the present value of the cash flows
receivable. Total amount receivable = ₹ 40,00,000 x 1.03 = ₹ 41,20,000.
Present Value of receivable (Revenue) = ₹ 41,20,000/1.08 = ₹ 38,14,815.
Interest income = ₹ 41,20,000 - ₹ 38,14,815 = ₹ 3,05,185.
Therefore, on transaction date, ₹ 38,14,815 will be recognised as revenue from sale of goods and ₹
3,05,185 will be recognised as interest income receivable for the period in accordance with Ind AS
109.
MTP AUG 2018
QUESTION 2
On 1 January 2018, Entity X writes a put option for 1,00,000 of its own equity shares for which it
receives a premium of Rs. 5,00,000. Under the terms of the option, Entity X may be obliged to take
delivery of 1,00,000 of its own shares in one year’s time and to pay the option exercise price of Rs.
22,000,000. The option can only be settled through physical delivery of the shares (gross physical
settlement). Examine the nature of the financial instrument and how it will be accounted assuming
that the present value of option exercise price is Rs. 2,00,000?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
SOLUTION
This derivative involves Entity X taking delivery of a fixed number of equity shares for a fixed
amount of cash. Even though the obligation for Entity X to purchase its own equity shares for Rs.
22,000,000 is conditional on the holder of the option exercising the option, Entity X has an
obligation to deliver cash which it cannot avoid.
As per para 23 of Ind AS 32 ‘Financial Instruments: Presentation’, the accounting for financial
instrument will be as below:
• The financial liability is recognised initially at the present value of the redemption amount, and is
reclassified from equity. This would imply that a financial liability for an amount of present value of
Rs. 22,000,000, say Rs. 20,000,000 will be recognised through a debit to equity. The initial
premium received (Rs. 5,00,000) is credited to equity.
• Subsequently, the financial liability is measured in accordance with Ind AS 109. While a
subsequent paragraph will deal with measurement of financial liabilities. The financial liability of Rs.
20,000,000 will be measured at amortised cost as per Ind AS 109 and finance cost of Rs. 2,000,000
will be recognised over the exercise period.
• If the contract expires without delivery, the carrying amount of the financial liability is reclassified to
equity ie. an amount of Rs. 22,000,000 will be reclassified from financial liability to equity.
MTP OCTOBER 2019
QUESTION 3
Financial instruments: • Deferral loan Rs. 60,00,000: The deferral loan of Rs. 60,00,000 was
obtained on March 31, 20X1, for setting up a business in a backward region with a condition to
create certain defined targets for employment of local population of that region. The loan does not
carry any interest and is repayable in full at the end of 5 years. In accordance with Ind AS 109, the
discount factor on the loan is to be taken as 10%, being the incremental borrowing rate. Accordingly,
the fair value of the loan as at March 31, 20X1, is Rs. 37,25,528. The entity chooses to exercise the
option given in paragraph B11 of Ind AS 101, i.e., the entity chooses to apply the requirements of
Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments and Ind AS 20, Accounting for Government Grants and
Disclosure of Government Assistance, retrospectively as required information had been obtained at
the time of initially accounting for deferral loan.
SOLUTION
Financial instruments: As the deferral loan is a financial liability under Ind AS 109, that liability
should be recognised at its present value discounted at an appropriate discounting factor.
Consequently, the deferral loan should be recognised at Rs. 37,25,528 and the remaining Rs.
22,74,472 would be recognised as deferred government grant.
MTP APR 2021
QUESTION
Besides construction activity, Buildings & Co. Limited is also engaged in the trading of Copper. On
1st April, 20X1, it had 100 kg of copper costing Rs. 70 per kg - totalling Rs. 7000. The Company
has a scheduled delivery of these 100 kgs of copper to its customer on 30th September, 20X1 at
the rate of USD 100 on that date. To protect itself from decline in currency exchange rate (USD to
Rs.), the entity hedges its position by entering into currency futures contract for equivalent currency
units at Rs. 76 / USD. The future contract mature on 30th September, 20X1. The management
performed an assessment of hedge effectiveness and concluded that the hedging relationship
qualifies for cash flow hedge accounting. The entity determines and documents that changes in fair
value of the currency futures contract will be highly effective in offsetting variability in cash flow of
currency exchange. On 30th September, 20X1, the entity closes out its currency futures contract.
On the same day, it also sells its inventory of copper at USD 100 when the spot rate is Rs. 72 /
USD. You are required to prepare detailed working and pass necessary journal entries for the sale
of copper and the corresponding hedge instrument taken by the company. Pass the journal entries

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
as on the initial date (i.e. 1st April 20X1), first quarter end reporting (i.e. 30th June 20X1) and date
of sale of copper and settlement of forward contract (i.e. 30th September 20X1).
Assume the exchange rates as follows and yield @ 6% per annum.
Date Future price for 30th September 20X1 delivery (Rs. / USD)
1 st April, 20X1 76
30th June, 20X1 74
30th September, 20X1 71
SOLUTION
Calculation of discounting factor based on yield @ 6% p.a
Date Spot Rate at Forward Rate for 30th September Discount factor@6%
indicated date 20X1 delivery (Rs. / USD) p.a on quarter basis
1 st April, 20X1 76 0.971
30th June, 20X1 74 0.985
30th September, 72 71 1
20X1
Determination of fair value change
1 st April, 20X1 30th June, 20X1 30th September, 20X1
A Nominal value in Rs. @ Rs. 76 / 7600 7600 7600
USD
B Nominal value in USD (100 kg for 100 100 100
USD 100)
C Forward rate for 30th September, 76 74 71
20X1
D Value in Rs. (b x c) 7600 7400 7100
E Difference (a-d) 0 200 500
F Discount factor (as calculated in 0.971 0.985 1
the above table)
G Fair value (e x f) 0 197 500
H Fair value change for the period 0 197 303*
* 500 – 197= 303
Journal Entries
Date Particulars Dr Cr
1 st April, 20X1
No entry as initial fair value is zero
30th June, 20X1Future Contract Dr. 197
To Cash Flow Hedge Reserve (Other Equity)- OCI 197
(Being Change in Fair Value of Hedging Instrument
recognised in OCI accumulated in a separate
component in Equity)
30th Future Contract Dr. 303
September,2021 To Cash Flow Hedge Reserve (Other Equity) - OCI 303
(Being change in fair value of the hedging instrument
recognised in OCI)
30th Bank/Trade Receivable Dr. 7200
September,2021 To Revenue from Contracts with Customers 7,200
(Being sale of 100 kgs. of copper for USD 100
recognised at spot rate of Rs. 72 for USD 1)
30th Cash Flow Hedge Reserve (Other Equity) - OCI Dr. 500
September,2021 To Revenue from Contracts with Customers 500

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(Being fair value change in forward contract
reclassified to profit and loss and recognised in the
line item affected by the hedge item)
30th Bank / Cash Dr. 500
September,2021 To Future Contract 500
MTP OCT 2018
QUESTION
Discuss the need of hedge accounting and types of various hedges?
SOLUTION
Hedge accounting may be required due to accounting mismatches in:
• Measurement – some financial instruments (non-derivative) are not measured at fair value with
changes being recognised in the statement of profit and loss whereas all derivatives, which
commonly are used as hedging instruments, are measured at fair value
• Recognition – unsettled or forecast transactions that may be hedged are not recognised on the
balance sheet or are included in the statement of profit and loss only in a future accounting period,
whereas all derivatives are recognised at inception. Recognition mismatches include the hedge of a
contracted or expected but not yet recognised sale, purchase or financing transaction in a foreign
currency and future committed variable interest payments. Types of hedge accounting
1. Fair value hedge accounting model
• A fair value hedge seeks to offset the risk of changes in the fair value of an existing asset or
liability or an unrecognised firm commitment that may give rise to a gain or loss being recognised in
the statement of profit and loss.
• A fair value hedge is a hedge of the exposure to changes in fair value of a recognised asset or
liability or an unrecognised firm commitment, or an identified portion of such an asset, liability or
firm commitment, that is attributable to a particular risk and could affect the statement of profit and
loss.
2. Cash flow hedge accounting model
• A cash flow hedge seeks to offset certain risks of the variability of cash flows in respect of an
existing asset or liability or a highly probable forecast transaction that may be reflected in the
statement of profit and loss in a future period.
• A cash flow hedge is a hedge of the exposure to variability in cash flows that (i) is attributable to a
particular risk associated with a recognised asset or liability (such as all or some future interest
payments on variable rate debt) or a highly probable forecast transaction or a firm commitment in
respect of foreign currency and (ii) could affect the statement of profit and loss.
3. Net investment hedging
• An investor in a non-integral operation is exposed to changes in the carrying amount of the net
assets of the foreign operation (the net investment) arising from the translation of those assets into
the reporting currency of the investor
MTP OCT 2019
QUESTION
Croton Limited is engaged in the business of trading commodities. The company’s main asset are
investments in equity shares, preference shares, bonds, non-convertible debenture (NCD) and
mutual funds. The Company collects the periodical income (i.e. interest, dividend, etc.) from the
investments and regularly sells the investment in case of favouable market conditions. Such
investments have been classified as non-current investments in the financial statements. Also, the
company buys and sells equity shares of companies for earning short term profits from the stock
market.
The CFO of company classified all the non-current investments as Fair Value Through Other
Comprehensive Income (FVTOCI) and all the current investment as Fair value Through Profit and
Loss (FVTPL).

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Croton Limited raised the following queries:
(a) Can the Company classify the equity shares previously held under current investment as
FVTOCI if the company decides to hold them for more than one-year (i.e. classify it as non-
current)?
(b) The Company had classified NCDs with a maturity period of less than twelve months from the
reporting period as current. This has been classified as FVTPL by the CFO of the company. The
Company wants to know whether these NCDs can be recognized as FVTOCI?
SOLUTION
(a) It seems that the equity shares are acquired for the purpose of selling it in the near term and
therefore are held for trading. Such investments have been appropriately classified as
subsequently measured at fair value through profit or loss. Such investments in equity shares
cannot be classified as subsequently measured at fair value through other comprehensive income.
The option to measure investment in equity shares at fair value through other comprehensive
income has to be made at initial recognition. Therefore, equity shares that were held for trading
previously cannot be reclassified to fair value through other comprehensive income due to change
in business model to not held for trading.
(b) In absence of contractual terms of NCDs, it is assumed that the contractual terms give rise on
specified dates to cash flows that are solely payment of principal and interest on the principal
outstanding. The business model also includes sales of these instruments on a regular basis.
Hence, these instruments will be classified as FVTOCI. Therefore, such NCD investments shall be
classified as subsequently measured at Fair Value through Other Comprehensive Income. The
classification does not change based on whether the investment is current or non-current as the
end of the reporting period. It seems the company has previously classified these investments at
fair value through profit or loss. The company must rectify this by reclassifying as FVTOCI.
QUESTION 01: (MAY 2018) (8 Marks)
S Limited issued redeemable preference shares to its Holding Company -H Limited. The terms of the instrument have
been summarized below. Analyse the given situation, applying the guidance in Ind AS 109 'Financial Instruments',
and account for this in the books of H Limited.
Nature Non-cumulative redeemable preference shares
Repayment Redeemable after 3 years
Date of Allotment 1st April 2015
Date of Repayment 31st March 2018
Total Period 3 Years
Value of Preference Shares issued 5,00,00,000
Dividend Rate 0.0001% Per Annum
Market rate of interest 12% Per Annum
SOLUTION:
1. Analysis of the financial instrument issued by S Ltd. to its holding companyH Ltd.
Applying the guidance in Ind AS 109, a ‘financial asset’ shall be recorded at its fair value upon initial recognition.
Fair value is normally the transaction price. However, sometimes certain type of instruments may be exchanged at off
market terms (ie, different from market terms for a similar instrument if exchanged between market participants).
For example, a long-term loan or receivable that carries no interest while similar instruments if exchanged between
market participants carry interest, then fair value for such loan receivable will be lower from its transaction price
owing to the loss of interest that the holder bears. In such cases where part of the consideration given or
received is for something other than the financial instrument, an entity shall measure the fair value of the
In the above case, since S Ltd has issued preference shares to its Holding Company– H Ltd, the relationship

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
between the parties indicates that the difference in transaction price and fair value is akin to investment made
by H Ltd. in its subsidiary. This can further be substantiated by the nominal rate of dividend i.e . 0.0001% mentioned
in the terms of the instrument issued.
Computations on initial recognition: ₹
Transaction value of the Redeemable preference shares 5,00,00,000
Less: Present value of loan component @ 12% (5,00,00,000 x .7118) (3,55,90,000)
Investment in subsidiary 1,44,10,000
Subsequently, such preference shares shall be carried at amortised cost at each reporting date as follows:
Year Date Opening Balance Interest @ 12% Closing balance
st
1 April, 2015 3,55,90,000 - 3,55,90,000
1 st
31 March, 2016 3,55,90,000 42,70,800 3,98,60,800
2 st
31 March, 2017 3,98,60,800 47,83,296 4,46,44,096
3 st
31 March, 2018 4,46,44,096 53,55,904* 5,00,00,000
* ₹ 4,46,44,096 x 12% = ₹ 53,57,292.
The difference of ₹ 1,388 (₹ 53,57,292 –₹ 53,55,904) is due to approximation in present value factor.
2. In the books of H Ltd. Journal Entries to be done at every reporting date
Date Particulars Amount Amount
1 st Investment (Equity portion) . 1,44,10,000
April,2015 Redeemable PreferenceShares Dr. 3,55,90,000
To Bank 5,00,00,000
(Being initial recognition of transaction recorded)
31st Redeemable Preference Shares Dr. 42,70,800
March,2016 To Interest income
(Being interest income on loan component recognized) 42,70,800
31st Redeemable Preference Shares Dr. 47,83,296
31 st Redeemable Preference Shares Dr. 53,55,904
31st Bank Dr. 5,00,00,000
March,2018 To Redeemable Preference Shares
(Being settlement of transaction done at the end of the third 5,00,00,000
year)
On 1st January 2017, Expo Limited agreed to purchase USD ($) 40,000 from E&I Bank in future on 31st December
2017 for a rate equal to ₹ 65 per USD. Expo Limited did not pay any amount upon entering into the contract. Expo
Limited is a listed company in India and prepares its financial statements on a quarterly basis.
Using the definition of derivative included in Ind AS 109 and following the principles of recognition and measurement as
laid down in Ind AS 109, you are required to record the entries for each quarter ended till the date of actual
purchases of USD.
For the purpose of accounting, use the following information representing marked to market fair value of forward contracts at
each reporting date:
As at 31st March, 2017 ₹ (50,000)
th
As at 30 June, 2017 ₹ (30,000)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
As at 30th September, 2017 ₹ 24,000
Spot rate of USD on 31st December, 2017 ₹ 62 per USD
SOLUTION:
Assessment of the arrangement using the definition of derivative included under Ind AS 109.
Derivative is a financial instrument or other contract within the scope of this Standard with all three of the
(a) its value changes in response to the change in foreign exchange rate (emphasis laid)
(b) it requires no initial net investment or an initial net investment is smaller than would be required for other types of
contracts with similar response to changes in market factors.
(c) it is settled at a future date.
Upon evaluation of contract in question, on the basis of the definition of derivative, it is noted that the contract
meets the definition of a derivative as follows:
(a) the value of the contract to purchase USD at a fixed price changes in response to changes in foreign exchange
ate.
(b) the initial amount paid to enter into the contract is zero. A contract which would give the holder a similar response
to foreign exchange rate changes would have required an investment of USD 40,000 on inception.
(c) the contract is settled in future
The derivative is a forward exchange contract.
Accounting in each Quarter
(i) Accounting on 1st January 2017
As there was no consideration paid and without evidence to the contrary the fair value of the contract on the
date of inception is considered to be zero. Accordingly, no accounting entries shall be recorded on the date of
entering into the contract.
(ii) Accounting on 31st March 2017
Particulars Dr. (₹) Cr. (₹)
To Derivative financial liability 50,000
(Being mark to market loss on forward contract recorded)
(iii) Accounting on 30th June 2017
(Being partial reversal of mark to market loss on forward contract recorded)
(iv) Accounting on 30th September 2017
Derivative financial asset A/c Dr. 24,000
(Being gain on mark to market of forward contract booked as derivative financial
asset and reversal of derivative financial liability)
(v) Accounting on 31st December 2017
The settlement of the derivative forward contract by actual purchase of USD 40,000
Cash (USD Account) (USD 40,000 x ₹ 62) Dr. 24,80,000
Profit and loss A/c Dr. 1,44,000
To Cash (USD 40,000 x ₹ 65) 26,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
To Derivative financial asset A/c 24,000
(Being loss on settlement of forward contract booked on actual purchase of
USD)
QUESTION 03: (MAY 2018)
Ruby Ltd. has incurred USD ($) 2,00,000 in CERs registration, certification and other related costs during financial year
2015~16. This entitles the company to 1,80,000 CERs The CERs are being traded at USD 1.2 per CER in MCX
at the year end.
Pass journal entries for recognition of CERs, year-end value to be appeared in the financial statements and on the sale of
CERs in thenext year @ USD 1.2 per CER.
SOLUTION:
Journal Entries for recognition of CERs
(1) During the year 2015-2016 when CERs are granted
USD USD
Inventory (for CERs) Dr. 200,000
To Bank / Payable A/c 200,000
(2) For 2015-2016 year-end financial statements
The company shall carry out a NRV assessment by comparing the realisable value of CERs with cost of USD
200,000. Since NRV of USD 216,000 (180,000 CERs x USD 1.2) is higher than cost of USD 200,000, the
company shall continue to disclose the inventory at cost without any NRV mark-down. Therefore, no journal
entry will be passed at the year-end for change in value. However, the company have to provide
appropriate disclosure per AS 2. This inventory of CERs shall be carried forward till related CERs are sold in the
market.
(3) On sale of CERs in the financial year 2016-2017
USD USD
To Sale of CERs A/c 216,000
Profit and Loss A/c (Consumption) Dr. 200,000
To Inventory 200,000
Sale of CERs A/c Dr. 216,000
QUESTION 04: (NOVEMBER 2018) (4 Marks)
NAV Limited granted a loan of ₹ 120 lakh to OLD Limited for 5 years @ 10% p.a. which is Treasury
bond yield of equivalent maturity. But the incremental borrowing rate of OLD Limited is 12%. In this
case, the loan is granted to OLD Limited at below market rate of interest. Ind AS 109 requires that a
financial asset or financial liability is to be measured at fair value at the initial recognition. Should
the transaction price be treated as fair value? If not, find out the fair value. What is the accounting
treatment of the difference between the transactionprice and the fair value on initial recognition in
the book of NAV Ltd.? Present value factors at 12%:
Year 1 2 3 4 5
PVF 0.892 0.797 0.712 0.636 0.567
SOLUTION:
Since the loan is granted to OLD Ltd at 10% i.e below market rate of 12%. It will be considered
as loan given at off market terms. Hence the Fair value of the transaction will be lower from its
transaction price & not the transaction price.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Calculation of fair value
Year Future cash flow (in lakh) Discounting factor @ 12% Present value (in lakh)
1 12 0.892 10.704
2 12 0.797 9.564
3 12 0.712 8.544
4 12 0.636 7.632
5 120+12=132 0.567 74.844
111.288
The fair value of the transaction be ₹111.288 lakh.
Since fair value is based on level 1 input or valuation technique that uses only data from
observable markets, difference between fair value and transaction price will be recognizedin
Profit and Loss as fair value loss i.e ₹120 lakh– ₹111.288 lakh= ₹8.712 lakh.
Note: One may also calculate the above fair value by the way of annuity on interest amount rather
than separatecalculation.
Veer Limited issues convertible bonds of ₹ 75,00,000 on 1st April, 2018. The bonds have a life of
five years anda face value of ₹ 20 each, and they offer interest payable at the end of each financial
year at a rate of 4.5 per centannum. The bonds are issued at their face value and each bond can be
converted into one ordinary share in Veer Ltd at any time in the next five years. Companies of a
similar risk profile have recently issued debt at 6 per cent per annum with similar terms but without
the option for conversion.
You are required to:
(i) Provide the appropriate accounting entries for initial recognition as per the relevant Ind
AS in thebooks of the company.
(ii) Calculate the stream of interest expenses across the five years of the life of the bonds.
(iii) Provide the accounting entries if the holders of the bonds elect to convert the bonds to
ordinary shares at the end of the fourth year(8 Marks)
SOLUTION:
Present value of bonds at the market rate of debt
Present value of principal to be received in 5 years discounted
at 6% (75,00,000x 0.747) = 56,02,500
Present value of interest stream discounted at 6% for 5 years
(3,37,500 x4.212) = 14,21,550
Total present value = 70,24,050
Equity component = 4,75,950
Total face value of convertiblebond = 75,00,000
Dr. Amount (₹) Cr. Amount (₹)
1st April, 2018
Cash Dr. 75,00,000
To Convertible bonds (liability) 70,24,050
To Convertible bonds (equity component) 4,75,950
(Being entry to record the convertible bonds and the
recognitionof the liability and equity components)
31st March, 2019
Interest expense Dr. 4,21,443
To Cash 3,37,500

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(Being entry to record the interest
expense)
(ii) The stream of interest expense is summarised below, where interest for a given year is
calculated by multiplying the present value of the liability at the beginning of the period by
the market rate of interest, this is being 6 per cent.
Date Payment Interest expense at 6% Increase in bond Total bond
(e of previous year x liability (c-b) liability (eof
6%) previous year +d)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1st April, 2018 70,24,050
31st March, 2019 3,37,500 4,21,443 83,943 71,07,993
31st March, 2020 3,37,500 4,26,480 88,980 71,96,973
31st March, 2021 3,37,500 4,31,818 94,318 72,91,291
31st March, 2022 3,37,500 4,37,477 99,977 73,91,268
31st March, 2023 3,37,500 4,46,232* 1,08,732 75,00,000
* Difference is due to rounding off.
(iii) If the holders of the bond elect to convert the bonds to ordinary shares at the end of the
fourth year(after receiving their interest payments), the entries in the fourth year would be:
Dr. (₹) Cr. (₹)
st
31 March, 2022
Interest expense A/c Dr. 4,37,477
To Cash A/c 3,37,500
To Convertible bonds (liability) A/c 99,977
(Being entry to record interest expense for the period)
31st March, 2022
Convertible bonds (liability) A/c Dr. 73,91,268
4,75,950
Convertible bonds (equity component) A/c Dr. 78,67,218
To Ordinary share capital A/c
(Being entry to record the conversion of bonds
intoordinary shares of Veer Limited).
Perfect Ltd. issued 50,000 Compulsory Cumulative Convertible Preference Shares (CCCPS) as
on 1st April, 2017 @ ₹ 180 each. The rate of dividend is 10% payable at the end of every year. The
preference shares are convertible into 12,500 equity shares (Face value ₹ 10 each) of the company at
the end of 5th year from the date of allotment. When the CCCPS are issued, the prevailing market
interest rate for similar debt without conversion option is 15% per annum.
Transaction cost on the date of issuance is 2% of the value of the proceeds. Effective Interest Rate
is 15.86%. (Round off the figures to the nearest multiple of Rupee)
Discounting Factor @ 15%
Year 1 2 3 4 5
Discount 0.8696 0.7561 0.6575 0.5718 0.4971
Factor

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
You are required to compute Liability and Equity Component and Pass Journal Entries for entire
term of arrangement i.e., from the issue of Preference Shares till their conversion into Equity
Shares. Keeping in view the provisions of relevant Ind AS. (12 Marks)
SOLUTION:
This is a compound financial instrument with two components – liability representing present
valueof future cash outflows and balance represents equity component.
Total proceeds = 50,000 Shares x ₹ 180 each = 90,00,000
Dividend@ 10% = ₹ 9,00,000
• Computation of Liability & Equity Component
Date Particulars Cash Flow DiscountFactor Net present Value
01-Apr-2017 0 1 0.00
31-Mar-2018 Dividend 9,00,000 0.8696 7,82,640
31-Mar-2019 Dividend 9,00,000 0.7561 6,80,490
31-Mar-2020 Dividend 9,00,000 0.6575 5,91,750
31-Mar-2021 Dividend 9,00,000 0.5718 5,14,620
31-Mar-2022 Dividend 9,00,000 0.4971 4,47,390
Total Liability 30,16,890
Component
Total Proceeds 90,00,000
Total Equity Component 59,83,110
(Bal fig)
 Allocation of transaction costs
Particulars Amount Allocation Net Amount
a b a-b
Liability Component 30,16,890 60,338 29,56,552
Equity Component 59,83,110 1,19,662 58,63,448
Total Proceeds 90,00,000 1,80,000 88,20,000
 Accounting for liability at amortised cost
Initial accounting = Present value of cash outflows less transaction costs
Subsequent accounting = At amortised cost, ie initial fair value adjusted for interest and
repayments of the liability.
Opening Financial Interest @ Cash Flow Closing Financial
Liability (A) 15.86%(B) (Dividend payment) (C) Liability A+B-C
01-Apr-2017 29,56,552 29,56,552
31-Mar-2018 29,56,552 4,68,909 9,00,000 25,25,461
31-Mar-2019 25,25,461 4,00,538 9,00,000 20,25,999
31-Mar-2020 20,25,999 3,21,323 9,00,000 14,47,322
31-Mar-2021 14,47,322 2,29,545 9,00,000 7,76,867
31-Mar-2022 7,76,867 1,23,133* 9,00,000 -
*Difference of ₹ 78 (adjusted in the interest value of 31st March, 2022) is due to approximation of
figures in the earlier years.
Journal Entries to be recorded for entire term of arrangement are as follows:
Date Particulars Debit ₹ Credit ₹
01-Apr- Bank A/c Dr. 88,20,000
2017 To Preference Shares A/c
To Equity Component of Preference shares A/c 29,56,552

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(Being compulsorily convertible preference shares 58,63,448
issued. The same are divided into equity component
and liability
component as per the calculation)
31-Mar- Preference shares A/c Dr. 9,00,000
2018 To Bank A/c
(Being dividend at the coupon rate of10% paid to the 9,00,000
shareholders)
31-Mar- Finance cost A/c Dr. 4,68,909
(Being interest as per EIR method recorded) 4,68,909

2019 To Bank A/c
(Being dividend at the coupon rate of10% paid to the 9,00,000
shareholders)
2020 To Bank A/c
(Being dividend at the coupon rate of 10% paid to the 9,00,000
shareholders)
2021 To Bank A/c
shareholders)
2022 To Bank A/c
shareholders)
31-Mar- Equity Component of Preference shares A/c Dr. 58,63,448
2022 To Equity Share Capital A/c
To Securities Premium A/c 1,25,000
(Being preference shares converted in equity shares and 57,38,448
remaining equity component is recognised as securities
premium)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Vedika Ltd. issued 80,000 8% convertible debentures of ₹ 100 each on 1st April, 2015. The debentures are due for redemption
on 31st March, 2019 at a premium of 20%, convertible into equity shares to the extent of 50% and balance to be
settled in cash to the debenture holders. The interest rate on equivalent debentures without conversion right was
12%. The conversion to equity qualifies as fixed for fixed.
You are required to separate the debt and equity components at the time of issue and show the accounting entries in
Vedika Ltd.'s books at initial recognition only. The following present values of Rupee 1 at 8% and 12% are provided for
a period of 5 years.
Interest rate Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Years 5
8% 0.923 0.853 0.789 0.731 0.677
12% 0.887 0.788 0.701 0.625 0.557
SOLUTION:
Computation of debt component of convertible debentures on 1st April, 2015
Present value of principal amount repayable after 4 years
(A) 80,00,000 x 50% x 120% x 0.625 (12% discount factor) 30,00,000
(B) Present value of interest [8,00,000 x 80% x 3.001] (4 years cumulative 10% 19,20,640
discount factor)
Total present value of debt component (A) + (B) 49,20,640
Issue proceeds from convertible debentures 80,00,000
Value of equity component 30,79,360
Particulars Dr. Amount(₹) Cr. Amount (₹)
Bank A/c Dr. 80,00,000
To 8% Debentures A/c (liability component) 49,20,640
To 8% Debentures A/c (equity component) 30,79,360
(Being disbursement recorded at fair value)
Note: The question has been solved on the basis of the discounting factors given in the question.
Make necessary journal entries for accounting of the security deposit made by Admire Ltd., whose details are described
below. Assume market interest rate for a deposit for similar period to be 12% per annum.
Particulars Details
Date of Security Deposit (Starting Date) 1st April, 2014
Date of Security Deposit (Finishing Date) 31st March, 2019
Description Lease
Total Lease Period 5 years
Discount rate 12%
Present value factor at the 5th year 0.567427
SOLUTION:
The above security deposit is an interest free deposit redeemable at the end of lease term for ₹ 20,00,000. Hence,
this involves collection of contractual cash flows and shall be accounted at amortised cost.
Upon initial measurement
Particulars Details
Total lease period (Years) 5

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Present value annuity factor 0.567427
Present value of deposit at beginning (B) 11,34,854
Prepaid lease payment at beginning (A-B) 8,65,146
Prepaid lease expenses A/c Dr. 8,65,146
To Bank A/c 20,00,000
Subsequently, every annual reporting year, interest income shall be accrued @ 12% per annum and prepaid
expenses shall be amortised on straight line basis over the lease term.
Following table shows the amortisation of security deposit based on discount rate:
Year Opening balance (A) Interest @ 12% (B) Closing balance(A) = (A) + (B)
1 11,34,854 1,36,183 12,71,037
2 12,71,037 1,52,524 14,23,561
3 14,23,561 1,70,827 15,94,388
4 15,94,388 1,91,327 17,85,715
5 17,85,315 2,14,685* 20,00,000
*Difference is due to approximation.
Journal entries for Year 1-5
For – Year 1
Lease expense (8,65,146 / 5 years) Dr. 1,73,029
To Prepaid lease expenses 1,73,029
For – Year 2
For – Year 3
For – Year 4
For – Year 5

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Journal entry for realisation of security deposit at the end of 5 th year
Bank A/c Dr. 20,00,000 20,00,000
To Security deposit Ac
On 1 April 2020, Star Limited has advanced a housing loan of ₹ 15 lakhs to one of its employee at an
interest rateof 6% per annum which is repayable in 5 equal annual installments along with interest
at each year end. Employee is not required to give any specific performance against this benefit. The
market rate of similar loan forhousing finance by banks is 10% per annum.
The accountant of the company has recognized the staff loan in the balance sheet equivalent to the
amount of housing loan disbursed i.e. ₹ 15 lakhs. The interest income for the year is recognized at
the contracted rate in the Statement of Profit and Loss by the company i.e. ₹ 90,000 (6% of ₹ 15
lakhs).
Analyze whether the above accounting treatment made by the accountant is in compliance with the
relevant Ind AS. If not, advise the correct treatment of housing loan, interest and other expenses in
the financial statements of Star Limited for the year 2020 -2021 along with workings and applicable
Ind AS.
You are required to explain how the housing loan should be reflected in the Ind AS compliant
Balance Sheet of Star Limited on 31 March 2021. (12 Marks)
Solution:
The accounting treatment made by the accountant is not in compliance with Ind AS 109 ‘Financial
Instruments’. As per Ind AS 109, at initial recognition, an entity shall measure a financial asset or
financial liability at its fair value. The fair value of a financial instrument at initial recognition is
normally the transaction price i.e., the fair value of the consideration given or received.
After initial recognition, an entity shall measure a financial asset either at amortised cost or at
fair value through profit and loss or fair value through other comprehensive income.
Here, the loan given to employee is not at market rate. Hence, the fair value of the loan will not
be equal to its initial loan proceeds. As per Ind AS 109, a financial instrument is initially
measured and recorded in the books at its fair value. Further, interest income to be recognised
in the Statement of Profit and Loss will be the finance income recognised at effective rate of
interest i.e., @ 10% and not therate of interest charged by the company i.e., @ 6%.
The correct accounting treatment as per Ind AS 109 will be as under:
For measuring the fair value or present value of the loan at initial recognition, market rate of
interestof similar loan is considered (level 1 observable input) ie @ 10%, to discount the
cash outflows.
The fair value of the loan shall be as follows:
Date Outstanding Principal Interest Total Discount PV
loan income@ 6% inflow factor@ 10%
31 March 2021 15,00,000 3,00,000 90,000 3,90,000 0.909 3,54,510
31 March 2022 12,00,000 3,00,000 72,000 3,72,000 0.826 3,07,272
31 March 2023 9,00,000 3,00,000 54,000 3,54,000 0.751 2,65,854
31 March 2024 6,00,000 3,00,000 36,000 3,36,000 0.683 2,29,488
31 March 2025 3,00,000 3,00,000 18,000 3,18,000 0.621 1,97,478
Fair value of the loan 13,54,602

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
As per Ind AS 19, employee benefits are all forms of consideration given by an entity in
exchange for service rendered by employees or for termination of employment. Difference of
loan proceeds and present value of the loan (fair value) will be treated as prepaid employee
cost irrespective of the fact that employee is not required to give any specific performance
against this benefit. This is because employee is required to be in service of the company to
continue availing the benefits of concessional rate of interest on housing loan. Practically, once
the employee leaves the organisation, they have to repay the outstanding loan because the
company provides the loan at concessional rate of interest only to its employees.
Hence, it is an employee benefit given by the company to its employees. This deemed
employee cost of ₹ 1,45,398 (15,00,000 – 13,54,602) will be deferred and amortised over the
period of loan on straight line basis.
Calculation of amortised cost of loan to employees
Financial year Amortised cost Interest to be Repayment Amortised cost
ending on 31 (opening balance) recognize @ 10% (includinginterest) (closing
March balance)
2021 13,54,602 1,35,460 3,90,000 11,00,062
2022 11,00,062 1,10,006 3,72,000 8,38,068
2023 8,38,068 83,807 3,54,000 5,67,875
2024 5,67,875 56,788 3,36,000 2,88,663
2025 2,88,663 29,337* 3,18,000 -
* 2,88,663 x 10% = ₹ 28,866. Difference of ₹ 471 (29,337 – 28,866) is due to approximation in
computation.
Journal Entries to be recorded at every period end:
(i) On 1 April 2020
Loan to employee A/c Dr. 13,54,602
Prepaid employee cost A/c Dr. 1,45,398
To Bank A/c 15,00,000
(ii) On 31 March 2021
(₹) (₹)
Bank A/c Dr. 3,90,000
To Finance income A/c (profit and loss) @10% 1,35,460
To Loan to employee A/c 2,54,540
(Being first instalment of repayment of loan accounted for
using the amortised cost and effective interest rate @ 10%)
Employee benefit cost (profit and loss) A/c Dr. 29,080
To Prepaid employee cost A/c (1,45,398/5) 29,080
(Being amortization of pre-paid employee cost charged
toprofit and loss as employee benefit cost)
The Following housing loan balances should appear in the financial statements:
Extracts of Balance sheet of Star Ltd. as at 31 March 2021
Non-current asset
Financial asset
Loan to employee (11,00,062 – 3,72,000 + 1,10,006) 8,38,068
Other non-current asset

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Prepaid employee cost 87,238
Current asset
Financial asset
Loan to employee (3,72,000-1,10,006) 2,61,994
Other current asset
Prepaid employee cost 29,080
Deferred tax on temporary differences arising on the above-mentioned account balances
(appearing in the balance sheet) should be recognised. However, in the absence of any tax
rate in the question no deferred tax has been recognised.
On 1 April 2019, 8% convertible loan with a nominal value of ₹ 12,00,000 was issued at par by
Cargo Ltd. It is redeemable on 31 March 2023 also at par. Alternatively, it may be converted into
equity shares on the basis of 100 new shares for each ₹ 200 worth of loan.
An equivalent loan without the conversion option would have carried interest at 10%. Interest of ₹
96,000 has already been paid and included as a finance cost.
Present Value (PV) rates are as follows:
Year End @ 8% @ 10%
1 0.93 0.91
2 0.86 0.83
3 0.79 0.75
4 0.73 0.68
How will the Company present the above loan notes in the financial statements for the year ended 31
March 2020?
SOLUTION:
There are both ‘equity’ and ‘debt’ features in the instrument. An obligation to pay cash i.e.,
interest at 8% per annum and a redemption amount will be treated as ‘financial liability’ while
option to convert the loan into equity shares is the equity element in the instrument. Therefore,
convertible loan is a compound financial instrument.
Calculation of debt and equity component and amount to be recognised in the books:
S. No Year Interest amount @ 8% Discounting factor@ 10% Amount
Year 1 2020 96,000 0.91 87,360
Year 2 2021 96,000 0.83 79,680
Year 3 2022 96,000 0.75 72,000
Year 4 2023 12,96,000* 0.68 8,81,280
Amount to be recognised as a liability 11,20,320
Initial proceeds (12,00,000)
Amount to be recognised as equity 79,680
* In year 4, the loan note will be redeemed; therefore, the cash outflow would be
₹12,96,000 (₹12,00,000 + ₹96,000).
Presentation in the Financial Statements:
In Statement of Profit and Loss for the year ended on 31 March 2020
Finance cost to be recognised in the Statement of Profit and ₹1,12,032
Loss (11,20,320 x 10%)
Less: Already charged to the income statement (₹96,000)
Additional finance charge required to be recognised in the
Statement ofProfit and Loss ₹16,032

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
In Balance Sheet as at 31 March 2020
Equity and Liabilities
Equity
Other Equity (8% convertible loan) 79,680
Non-current liability
Financial liability [8% convertible loan – [(11,20,320 +1,12,032 – 11,36,352
96,000)]
Hence loan processing fees shall be reduced from the principal amount to arrive the value on
day1 upon initial recognition.
Fair value (5- year term loan) = 10,00,000 – 10,000 (1% x 10,00,000) = 9,90,000
Fair value (3- year term loan) = 8,00,000 – 8,000 (1%*8,00,000) = 7,92,000.
Now, effective interest rate shall be higher than the interest rate of 10% and 12% on 5-year
loan and 3-year loan respectively, so that the processing fees gets recognised as interest over
the respective term of loans.
JAN 2021
QUESTION
Jewels Ltd. entered into a transaction to purchase 1,000 gms of platinum on 15th January, 2020.
The transaction provides for a price payable which is equal to market value of 1,000 gms of
platinum on 15th April 2020 and shall be settled by issue of such number of equity shares as is
required to settle the aforementioned transaction, at a price of ₹ 100 per share on 15th April 2020.
Whether this is to be classified as liability or equity as on 31st March 2020 as per Ind AS 109? You
are required to explain with reasons.
SOLUTION
There is a contract for purchase of 1,000 gms of platinum whose consideration varies in response
to changing value of platinum. Analysing this contract as a derivative with all three of the following
characteristics:
(a) Value of contract changes in response to change in market value of platinum;
(b) There is no initial net investment
(c) It will be settled at a future date, i.e. 15th April 2020. Since the above criteria are met, this is a
derivative contract. Now, a derivative contract that is settled in own equity other than exchange of
fixed amount of cash for fixed number of shares is classified as ‘liability’. In this case, since the
contract results in issue of variable number of shares based on transacti on price to be determined
in future, hence, this shall be classified as ‘derivative financial liability’ as per Ind AS 109.
JAN 2021
QUESTION
Lovely Limited has a policy of providing subsidized loans to its employees for the purpose of buying
2 Wheelers and 4 Wheelers vehicle. Simran who is a Sales Executive, took a loan for a Four-
wheeler vehicle from the Company. The following were the terms of the loan:
- Principal Amount : ₹ 9,00,000
- Interest: 5% p.a. for the First ₹ 3,00,000 and 8% p.a. for the remaining amount.
- Loan disbursed date: 1st April 2017
- Loan Tenure: 3 Years
- Pre-Payment : Full or Partial payment at the option of the employee.
- Simran shall remain in service till the term of the loan ends.
- The Principal amount should be recovered in 3 equal installments at the end of each year and will
be first applied to 8% interest bearing principal.
- The accrued interest shall be paid on annual basis.
The market rate of a comparable loan available to Simran is 12% per annum. Following table shows
the expected contractual cash flows from the loan given to Simran.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Date Outflows Inflows Principal
Principal Interest Interest Outstanding
Income 8% Income 5%
01.04.2017 (9,00,000) 9,00,000
31.03.2018 3,00,000 48,000 15,000 6,00,000
31.03.2019 3,00,000 24,000 15,000 3,00,000
31.03.2020 3,00,000 15,000 -
Simran pre-pays ₹ 1,00,000 on 31st March, 2019.
Following table shows the actual cash flows from the loan, considering the prepayment on 31st
March 2019.
Date Outflows Inflows Principal
Principal Interest Interest Outstanding
Income 8% Income 5%
01.04.2017 (9,00,000) 9,00,000
31.03.2018 3,00,000 48,000 15,000 6,00,000
31.03.2019 4,00,000 24,000 15,000 2,00,000
31.03.2020 2,00,000 10,000 -
You are required to pass journal entries in the books of Lovely Limited considering the requirements
of Ind AS 109.
SOLUTION
As per requirement of Ind AS 109, a financial instrument is initially measured and recorded at its fair
value. Therefore, considering the market rate of interest of similar loan available to Simran is 12%,
the fair value of the contractual cash flows shall be as follows:
Date Inflows Total
Principal Interest Interest Inflow Discount factor PV
Income Income 5% @ 12%
8%
31.03.2018 3,00,000 48,000 15,000 3,63,000 0.893 3,24,159
31.03.2019 3,00,000 24,000 15,000 3,39,000 0.797 2,70,183
31.03.2020 3,00,000 15,000 3,15,000 0.712 2,24,280
Total(fair 8,18,622
value)
Benefit to Simran, to be considered as part of employee cost for Lovely Ltd. ₹ 81,378 (9,00,000 –
8,18,622). The deemed employee cost is to be amortised over the period of loan i.e. the minimum
period that Simran must remain in service.
The amortization schedule of the ₹ 8,18,622 loan is shown in the following table:
Date Opening outstanding Total cash inflows Interest @ 12% Closing
Loan (principal repayment outstanding Loan
+ interest
01.04.2017 8,18,622 8,18,622
31.03.2018 8,18,622 3,63,000 98,235 5,53,857
31.03.2019 5,53,857 3,39,000 66,463 2,81,320
31.03.2020 2,81,320 3,15,000 33,680* NIL
* Difference is due to approximation of discounting factor and interest amount.
Journal Entries to be recorded at every period end:
a. 1 April 2017 –
Loan to employee A/c Dr. 8,18,622
Pre-paid employee cost A/c Dr. 81,378

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
b. 31 March 2018 –
Bank A/c Dr. 3,63,000
using the amortised cost and effective interest rate of
12%)
Employee benefit A/c Dr. 27,126
(Being amortization of pre-paid employee cost charged to
profit and loss as employee benefit cost on straight line
basis)
C. On 31 March 2019, due to pre-payment of a part of loan by Simran, the carrying value of the
loan shall be re-computed by discounting the future remaining cash flows by the original effective
interest rate. There shall be two sets of accounting entries on 31 March 2019, first the realisation of
the contractual cash flow as shown below and then the accounting for the prepayment of ₹ 1,00,000
included in (d) below:
31 March 2019 –
Bank A/c Dr. 3,39,000
12%)
basis)
Computation of new carrying value of loan to employee:
Date Inflows
Principal Interest Interest Discount factor @ PV
Income 8% Income 5% 12%
31.03.2020 2,00,000 - 10,000 0.893 187530
Total (revised carrying value) 1,87,530
Less: Current carrying value (2,81,320)
Adjustment required 93,790
The difference between the amount of pre-payment and adjustment to loan shall be considered a
gain, though will be recorded as an adjustment to pre-paid employee cost, which shall be amortised
over the remaining tenure of the loan.
d. 31 March 2019 prepayment–
Bank A/c Dr. 1,00,000
(Being gain to Lovely Limited recorded as an adjustment
to pre-paid employee cost)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The amortisation schedule of the new carrying amount of loan shall be as follows:
Date Total cash Loan outstanding (principal repayment + Interest @ 12%
inflows interest)
31.03.2019 1,87,530
31.03.2020 - 2,10,000 22,470
Amortisation of employee benefit cost shall be as follows:
Date Opening Balance Amortised to P&L Adjustment Closing balance
01.04.2017 81378 81378
31.03.2018 81378 27126 54252
31.03.2019 54252 27126 6210 20916
31.03.2020 20916 20916 NIL
e. 31 March 2020 –
Bank A/c Dr. 2,10,000
12%)
basis)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
NOTE: WHILE WATCHING VIDEO LECTURES ALSO REFER ADDITIONAL PDF OF FR
INDAS103- BUSINESS COMBINATION
Example : Simple-business combination

Company X is a liquor manufacturer and has traded for a number of years. The
company produces a wide variety of liquor and employs a workforce of
machine operators, testers, and other operational, marketing and
administrative staff. It owns and operates a factory, warehouse and
machinery and holds raw material inventory and finished products.
On 1st January, 20X1, Company Y pays USD 80 million to acquire 100% of the
ordinary voting shares of Company X. No other type of shares has been issued
by Company X. On the same day, the four main executive directors of
Company Y take on the same roles in Company X.
In this case, it is clear that Company X is a business. It operates a trade with a variety of assets
that are used by its employees in a number of related activities. These assets and activities are
necessarily integrated in order to create and sell the company’s products. Company X obtains
control on 1st January, 20X1 by acquiring 100% of the voting rights.
Example :
Company D is a development stage entity that has not started revenue-
generating operations. The workforce consists mainly of research
engineers who are developing a new technology that has a pending
patent application. Negotiations to license this technology to a number of
customers are at an advanced stage. Company D requires additional funding
to complete development work and commence planned commercial
production.
The value of the identifiable net assets in Company D is ₹ 750 million.
Company A pays ₹ 600 million in exchange for 60% of the equity of Company
D (a controlling interest).
Although Company D is not yet earning revenues (an example of ‘outputs’) there are a number of
indicators that it has a sufficiently integrated set of activities and assets that are capable of being
managed to produce a return for investors. In particular, Company D:
employs specialist engineers developing the know-how and design specifications of the
technology.
is pursuing a viable plan to complete the development work and commence production.
has identified and will be able to access customers willing to buy the outputs
In addition, Company A has paid a premium (or goodwill) for its 60% interest. In the absence of
evidence to the contrary, Company D is presumed to be a business.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Example : Acquisition of an entity holding investment properties
Company A acquires 100% of the equity and voting rights of Company P, a subsidiary of a property
investment group. Company P owns three investment properties. The properties are single-
tenant industrial warehouses subject to long-term leases. The leases oblige Company P to
provide basic maintenance and security services, which have been outsourced to third party
contractors. The administration of Company P’s leases was carried out by an employee of its
former parent company on a part-time basis but this individual does not transfer to the new
owner.
In most cases, an asset or group of assets and liabilities that are capable of generating revenues,
combined with all or many of the activities necessaryto earn those revenues, would constitute a
business. However, investment property is a specific case in which earning a return for investors is
a de- fining characteristic of the asset. Accordingly, revenue generation and activities that are
specific and ancillary to an investment property and its tenancy agreements should therefore be
given a lower ‘weighting’ in assessing whether the acquiree is a business. In our view the purchase
of investment property with tenants and services that are purely ancillary to the property
and its tenancy agreements should generally be accounted for as an asset purchase.
Example : Acquisition of an entity holding investment properties
Company A acquires 100% of the equity and voting rights of Company Q, which
owns three investment properties. The properties are multi-tenant residential
condominiums subject to short- term rental agreements that oblige
Company Q to provide substantial maintenance and security services,
which are outsourced with specialist providers. Company Q has five
employees who deal directly with the tenants and with the outsourced
contractors to resolve any non-routine security or maintenance requirements.
These employees are involved in a variety of lease management tasks (eg
identification and selection of tenants; lease negotiation and rent reviews)
and marketing activities to maximise the quality of tenants and the rental
income.
In this case, Company Q consists of a group of revenue-generating assets, together with
employees and activities that clearly go beyond activities ancillary to the properties and their
tenancy agreements. The assets and activities are clearly integrated so Company Q is considered a
business.
Example : Seller retains some activities and assets
Company S is a manufacturer of a wide range of products. The company’s payroll and
accounting system is managed as a separate cost centre, supporting all the operating segments
and the head office functions.
Company A agrees to acquire the trade, assets, liabilities and workforce of
the operating segments of Company S but does not acquire the payroll and
accounting cost centre or any head office functions. Company A is a compet-
itor of Company S.
In this case, the activities and assets within the operating segments are capa-
ble of being managed as a business and so Company A accounts for the ac-
quisition as a business combination. The payroll and accounting cost centre
and administrative head office functions are typically not used to create

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
outputs and so are generally not considered an essential element in the
assessment of whether an integrated set of activities and assets is a
business.
Example : Acquisition of a shell company
Company A is a property development company with a number of
subsidiary companies, each of which holds a single development. After
completion of the development, Company A sells its equity investment
because the applicable tax rate is lower than that applicable to the sale of
the underlying property.
Company A is planning to start the development of a large new retailcomplex.
Rather than incorporating a new company, Company A acquires the
entire share capital of a ‘shell’ company.
The shell company does not contain an integrated set of activities and assets and so
does not constitute a business.
Consequently, Company A should account for the purchase of the shell
company in the same way as the incorporation of a new subsidiary.
In the consolidated financial statements, any costs incurred will beaccounted for in accordance
with their nature and applicable Ind AS.
No goodwill is recognised.
Example :
Company A and Company B operate in power industry and both entities are operating entities.
Company A has much larger scale of operations than Company B. Company B merges with
Company A such that the shareholders of Company B would receive 1 equity share of Company
A for every 1 share held in Company B. Such issue of shares would comprise 20% of the issued
share capital of the combined entity. After discharge of purchase consideration, the pre-merger
shareholders of Company A hold 80% of the capital in Company A.
In this transaction, Company A is the acquirer for the purposes of
accounting for business combination as per Ind AS 103. This is
because, by merging the entire shareholding of Company B, Company A
has acquired control over Company B. Further, the shareholders of
erstwhile Company B do not obtain control over Company A on account
of shares received as part of purchase consideration, as they hold only
20% of the paid-up capital of Company A.
Example :
Company A and Company B operate in power industry and both entities are operating entities.
Company A has much smaller scale of operations than Company B. Company B merges
Company A such that the shareholders of Company B would receive 10 equity share of
Company A for every 1 share held in Company B. Such issue of shares would comprise 70% of the
issued share capital of the combined entity. After discharge of purchase consideration, the pre-
merger shareholders of Company A hold 30% of capital of Company A. Post-acquisition, the
management of Company B would manage the operations of the combined entity.
In this transaction, Company B is the acquirer for the purposes of accounting for business

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
combination as per Ind AS 103. This is because, after merger, the shareholders of erstwhile
Company B would have a controlling interest and management of the combined entity. As such, in
substance, Company B has acquired control over Company A.
It is important to note that the Company B would be considered as an
acquirer for accounting purposes only (i.e., accounting acquirer). For
legal purposes as well as for reporting purposes, it is the Company A
that would be considered as an acquirer (i.e., legal acquirer).
Appropriate identification of an acquirer is relevant, as the net assets of the accounting acquiree
(rather than that of the accounting acquirer) are recognised at fair value.
Example :
Company A decided to spin-off two of its existing businesses (currently housed in two separate
entities, Company B and Company C). To facilitate the spin-off, Company A incorporates a new
entity (Company D) with nominal equity and appoints independent directors to the board of
Company D. Company D signs an agreement to purchase Companies B and C in cash,
conditional on obtaining sufficient funding. To fund these acquisitions, Company D issues a
prospectus offering to issue shares for cash.
At the conclusion of the transaction, Company D has owned 99% by the new investors with
Company A retaining only a 1% non-controlling interest.
In this situation, a set of new investors paid cash to obtain control of Company D in an arm’s
length transaction. Company D is then used to effect the acquisition of 100% ownership of
Companies B and C by paying cash. Company A relinquishes its control of Companies B and C
to the new owners of Company D.
Although Company D is a newly formed entity, Company D is identified as the acquirer not only
because it paid cash but also because the new owners of Company D have obtained control of
Companies B and C from Company A.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
INDAS103- BUSINESS COMBINATION
Illustration 1: Asset acquisition
An entity acquires an equipment and a patent in exchange for ₹ 1,000 crore cash and land. The
fair value of the land is ₹ 400 crore and its carrying value is ₹ 100 crore. Fair values of the
equipment and patent are estimated to be ₹ 500 crore and ₹ 1,000 crore, respectively. The
equipment and patent relate to a product that has just recently been commercialised. The market
for this product is still developing.
Assume the entity incurred no transaction costs. For ease of convenience, the tax consequences
on the gain have been ignored. How should the transaction be accounted for?
Solution:
As per paragraph 2(b) of Ind AS 103, the standard does not apply to “the acquisition of an
asset or a group of assets that does not constitute a business. In such cases the acquirer shall
identify and recognise the individual identifiable assets acquired (including those assets that
meet the definition of, and recognition criteria for, intangible assets in Ind AS 38, Intangible
Assets) and liabilities assumed. The cost of the group shall be allocated to the individual
identifiable assets and liabilities on the basis of their relative fair values at the date of purchase.
Such a transaction or event does not give rise to goodwill”. In the given case, the acquisition of
equipment and patent does not represent acquisition of a business as equipment and patent
relate to a product that has just recently been commercialised.
The cost of the asset acquisition is determined based on the fair value of the assets given,
unless the fair value of the assets received is more reliably determinable. In the given case, the
fair value measurement of the land appears more reliable than the fair value estimate of the
equipment and patent. Thus, the entity should record the acquisition of the equipment and
patent as ₹ 1,400 crore (the total fair value of the consideration transferred).
Thus, the fair value of the consideration given, i.e., ₹ 1,400 crore is allocated to the individual
assets acquired based on their relative estimated fair values. The entity should record a
gain of
₹ 300 crore for the difference between the fair value and carrying value of the land.
The equipment is recorded at its relative fair value (₹ 500 / ₹ 1,500) × ₹ 1,400 = ₹ 467 crore). The
patent is recorded at its relative fair value ((₹ 1,000 / ₹ 1,500) × ₹ 1,400 = ₹ 933 Crore).
Illustration 2
Company A is a pharmaceutical company. Since inception, the Company had been conducting in-
house research and development activities through its skilled workforce and recently obtained an
intellectual property right (IPR) in the form of patents over certain drugs. The Company’s has a
production plant that has recently obtained regulatory approvals. However, the Company has not
earned any revenue so far and does not have any customer contracts for sale of goods. Company
B acquires Company A.
Does Company A constitute a business in accordance with Ind AS 103?
Solution:
The definition of business requires existence of inputs and processes. In this case, the skilled
workforce, manufacturing plant and IPR, along with strategic and operational processes
constitutes the inputs and processes in line with the requirements of Ind AS 103.
When the said inputs and processes are applied as an integrated set, the Company A will be
capable of producing outputs; the fact that the Company A currently does not have revenue is
not relevant to the analysis of the definition of business under Ind AS 103. Basis this and
presuming that Company A would have been able to obtain access to customers that will
purchase the outputs, the present case can be said to constitute a business as per Ind AS
103.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 3
Modifying the above illustration, if Company A had revenue contracts and a sales force, such that Company B
acquires all the inputs and processes other than the sales force, then whether the definition of the business is met
in accordance with Ind AS 103.
Solution
Though the sales force has not been taken over, however, if the missing inputs (i.e., sales force) can be easily
replicated or obtained by the market participant to generate output, it may be concluded that Company A has
acquired business. Further, if Company B is also into similar line of business, then the existing sales force of the
Company B may also be relevant to mitigate the missing input. As such, the definition of business is met in
accordance with Ind AS 103.
Illustration 4: Potential voting rights
Company P Ltd., a manufacturer of textile products, acquires 40,000 equity shares of Company X
(a manufacturer of complementary products) out of 1,00,000 shares in issue. As part of the same
agreement, the Company P purchases an option to acquire an additional 25,000 shares. The
option is exercisable at any time in the next 12 months. The exercise price includes a small
premium to the market price at the transaction date.
After the above transaction, the shareholdings of Company P’s two other original shareholders are
35,000 and 25,000. Each of these shareholders also has currently exercisable options to acquire
2,000 additional shares. Assess whether control is acquired by Company P.
Solution:
In assessing whether it has obtained control over Company X, Company P should consider
not only the 40,000 shares it owns but also its option to acquire another 25,000 shares (a so-
called potential voting right). In this assessment, the specific terms and conditions of the
option agreement and other factors are considered as follows:
 the options are currently exercisable and there are no other required conditions
before such options can be exercised
 if exercised, these options would increase Company P’s ownership to a controlling
interest of over 50% before considering other shareholders’ potential voting rights
(65,000 shares out of a total of 1,25,000 shares)
 although other shareholders also have potential voting rights, if all options are exercised
Company P will still own a majority (65,000 shares out of 1,29,000 shares)
 the premium included in the exercise price makes the options out-of-the-money.
However, the fact that the premium is small and the options could confer majority
ownership indicates that the potential voting rights have economic substance.
By considering all the above factors, Company P concludes that with the acquisition of the
40,000 shares together with the potential voting rights, it has obtained control of Company X.
Illustration 05 :
Veera Limited and Zeera Limited are both in the business of manufacturing and selling of Lubricant.
Shareholders of Veera Limited and Zeera Limited agreed to join forces to benefit from lower
delivery and distribution costs. The business combination is carried out by setting up a new entity
called Meera Limited that issues 100 shares to Veera Limited shareholders
and 50 shares to Zeera Limited shareholders in exchange for the transfer of the shares in
those entities.
The number of shares reflects the relative fair values of the entities before the
combination. Also, respective company’s shareholders get the voting rights in Meera Limited based
on their respective shareholdings.
Determine the acquirer by applying the principles of Ind AS 103 ‘Business Combinations’
Solution:
As per para B15 of Ind AS 103, in a business combination effected primarily by exchanging

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
equity interests, the acquirer is usually the entity that issues its equity interests. However, in
some business combinations, commonly called ‘reverse acquisitions’, the issuing entity is the
acquiree. Other pertinent facts and circumstances shall also be considered in identifying the
acquirer in a business combination effected by exchanging equity interests, including:
The relative voting rights in the combined entity after the business combination - The acquirer
is usually the combining entity whose owners as a group retain or receive the largest portion of
the voting rights in the combined entity.
Based on above mentioned para, acquirer shall be the either of the combining entities (i.e.,
Veera Limited or Zeera Limited) whose owners as a Group retain or receive the largest portion
of the voting rights in the combined entity.
Hence in the above scenario Veera Limited shareholder gets 67% Share [(100/150) x100] and
Zeera Limited shareholder gets 33.33% share in Meera Limited. Hence Veera Limited is
acquirer as per the principles of Ind AS 103.
Illustration 6
ABC Ltd. incorporated a company Super Ltd. to acquire 100% shares of another entity Focus Ltd.
(and therefore to obtain control of the Focus Ltd.). To fund the purchase, Super Ltd. acquired a
loan from XYZ Bank at commercial interest rates. The loan funds are used by Super Ltd. to
acquire entire voting shares of Focus Ltd. at fair value in an orderly transaction. Postthe
acquisition, Super Ltd. has the ability to elect or appoint or to remove a majority of the members of
the governing body of the Focus Ltd. and also Super Ltd.’s management is in a power where it will
be able to dominate the management of the Focus Ltd. Can Super Ltd. be identified as the
acquirer in this business combination?
Solution:
Paragraph 6 of Ind AS 103 states that for each business combination, one of the combining
entities shall be identified as the acquirer.
While paragraph 7 states that the guidance in Ind AS 110 shall be used to identify the acquirer
that is the entity that obtains control of another entity called the acquiree. If a business
combination has occurred but applying the guidance in Ind AS 110 does not clearly indicate
which of the combining entities is the acquirer, the factors in paragraphs B14–B18 of Ind AS
103 shall be considered in making that determination.
Further, paragraph B15 provides that, in a business combination effected primarily by
exchanging equity interests, the acquirer is usually the entity that issues its equity interests.
However, in some business combinations, commonly called ‘reverse acquisitions’, the issuing
entity is the acquiree. Other pertinent facts and circumstances shall also be considered in
identifying the acquirer in a business combination effected by exchanging equity interests,
including:
(a) The relative voting rights in the combined entity after the business combination: The
acquirer is usually the combining entity whose owners as a group retain or receive the largest
portion of the voting rights in the combined entity. In determining which group of owners retains
or receives the largest portion of the voting rights, an entity shall consider the existence of any
unusual or special voting arrangements and options, warrants or convertible securities.
(b) The existence of a large minority voting interest in the combined entity if no other
owner or organised group of owners has a significant voting interest: The acquirer is
usually the combining entity whose single owner or organised group of owners holds the
largest minority voting interest in the combined entity.
(c) The composition of the governing body of the combined entity: The acquirer is usually
the combining entity whose owners have the ability to elect or appoint or to remove a majority
of the members of the governing body of the combined entity.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(d) The composition of the senior management of the combined entity: The acquirer is
usually the combining entity whose (former) management dominates the management of the
combined entity.
(e) The terms of the exchange of equity interests: The acquirer is usually the combining
entity that pays a premium over the pre-combination fair value of the equity interests of the
other combining entity or entities.
The key drivers of the accounting are identifying the party on whose behalf the new entity has
been formed and identifying the business acquired. In this scenario, as Super Ltd. has the
ability to elect or appoint or to remove a majority of the members of the governing body of the
Focus Ltd. and has the ability to dominate the management of the Focus Ltd. Accordingly,
Super Ltd. will be identified as the acquirer unless there are conditions to conclude to the
contrary.
Illustration 7
Can an acquiring entity account for a business combination based on a signed non-binding
letter of intent where the exchange of consideration and other conditions are expected to be
completed with 2 months?
Solution:
No. as per the requirement of the standard a non- binding Letter of Intent (LOI) does not
effectively transfer control and hence this cannot be considered as the basis for determining
the acquisition date.
Illustration 8
On 1st April, X Ltd. agrees to acquire the share of B Ltd. in an all equity deal. As per the binding
agreement X Ltd. will get the effective control on 1st April. However, the consideration will be
paid only when the
Shareholders’ approval is received. The shareholders meeting is scheduled to happen on 30th April.
If the shareholders’ approval is not received for issue of new shares, then the consideration will be
settled in cash. What is the acquisition date?
Solution:
The acquisition date in the above case is 1st April. This is because, in the above scenario,
even if the shareholders don’t approve the shares, consideration will be settled through
payment of cash.
Illustration 9: Business Combination without a Court approved scheme
ABC Ltd. acquired all the shares of XYZ Ltd. The negotiations had commenced on 1st January,
20X1 andthe agreement was finalised on 1st March, 20X1. While ABC Ltd. obtains the power
to control XYZ Ltd.'s operations on 1st March, 20X1, the agreement states that the acquisition is
effective from 1st January, 20X1 and that ABC Ltd. is entitled to all profits after that date. In
addition, the purchase price is basedon XYZ Ltd.'s net asset position as at 1st January, 20X1.
What is the date of acquisition?
Solution:
Paragraph 8 of Ind AS 103 provides that acquisition date is the date on which the acquirer
obtains control of the acquiree.
Further paragraphs 6 and 7 of Ind AS 110, Consolidated Financial Statements, inter alia, state
that an investor controls an investee when it is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from
its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through its power
over the investee. Thus, an investor controls an investee if and only if the investor has all the
following:
(a) power over the investee;
(b) exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee; and

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(c) the ability to use its power over the investee to affect the amount of the investor’sreturns.
Further, paragraph 9 of Ind AS 103 clarifies that the date on which the acquirer obtains control
of the acquiree is generally the date on which the acquirer legally transfers the consideration,
acquires the assets and assumes the liabilities of the acquiree—the closing date. However, the
acquirer might obtain control on a date that is either earlier or later than the closing date.
Therefore, in this case, notwithstanding that the price is based on the net assets as at 1st
January, 20X1and that XYZ Ltd.'s shareholders do not receive any dividends after that date,
the date of acquisition for accounting purposes will be 1st March, 20X1. It is only on 1st March,
20X1 and not 1st January, 20X1, that ABC Ltd. has the power to direct the relevant activities of
XYZ Ltd. so as to affect its returns from its involvement with XYZ Ltd. Accordingly, the date of
acquisition is 1st March, 20X1.
Illustration 10: Acquisition date- Regulatory approval
ABC Ltd. and XYZ Ltd. are manufacturers of rubber components for a particular type of
equipment. ABCLtd. makes a bid for XYZ Ltd.'s business and the Competition Commission of India
(CCI) announces that the
proposed transaction is to be scrutinised to ensure that competition laws are not breached. Even
though the contracts are made subject to the approval of the CCI, ABC Ltd. and XYZ Ltd.
mutually agree the terms of the acquisition and the purchase price before competition authority
clearance is obtained. Can the acquisition date in this situation be the date on which ABC Ltd.
and XYZ Ltd. agree the terms even though the approval of CCI is awaited (Assume that the
approval of CCI is substantive)?
Solution:
Paragraph 8 of Ind AS 103 provides that acquisition date is the date on which the acquirer
obtains control of the acquiree.
Further, paragraph 9 of Ind AS 103 clarifies that the date on which the acquirer obtains control
of the acquiree is generally the date on which the acquirer legally transfers the consideration,
acquires the assets and assumes the liabilities of the acquiree—the closing date. However, the
acquirer might obtain control on a date that is either earlier or later than the closing date.
For example, the acquisition date precedes the closing date if a written agreement provides
that the acquirer obtains control of the acquiree on a date before the closing date. An acquirer
shall consider all pertinent facts and circumstances in identifying the acquisition date. Since
CCI approval is a substantive approval for ABC Ltd. to acquire control of XYZ Ltd.’s operations,
the date of acquisition cannot be earlier than the date on which approval is obtained from CCI.
This is pertinent given that the approval from CCI is considered to be a substantive process and
accordingly, the acquisition is considered to be completed only on receipt of such approval.
Illustration 11:
On 1st April, 20X1, PQR Ltd. acquired 30% of the voting ordinary shares of XYZ Ltd. for ₹
8,000crore. PQR Ltd. accounts its investment in XYZ Ltd. using equity method as prescribed
under Ind AS 28. At 31st March, 20X2, PQR Ltd. recognised its share of the net asset changes
of XYZ Ltd. using equity accounting as follows:
(₹ in crore)
Share of profit or loss 700
Share of exchange difference in OCI 100
Share of revaluation reserve of PPE in OCI 50
st
The carrying amount of the investment in the associate on 31 March, 20X2 was therefore ₹
8,850crore (8,000 + 700 + 100 + 50).
On 1st April, 20X2, PQR Ltd. acquired the remaining 70% of XYZ Ltd. for cash ₹ 25,000 crore. The

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
following additional information is relevant at that date:
(₹ in crore)
Fair value of the 30% interest already owned 9,000
Fair value of XYZ's identifiable net assets 30,000
How should such business combination be accounted for?
Solution:
Paragraph 42 of Ind AS 103 provides that in a business combination achieved in stages, the
acquirer shall remeasure its previously held equity interest in the acquiree at its acquisition-
date fair value and recognise the resulting gain or loss, if any, in statement of profit and loss or
other comprehensive income, as appropriate. In prior reporting periods, the acquirer may have
recognized changes in the value of its equity interest in the acquiree in other comprehensive
income. If so, the amount that was recognised in other comprehensive income shall be
recognised on the same basis as would be required if the acquirer had disposed directly of the
previously held equity interest.
Applying the above, PQR Ltd. records the following entry in its consolidated financial
statements:
(₹ in crore)
Debit Credit
Identifiable net assets of XYZ Ltd. Dr. 30,000
Goodwill (W.N.1) Dr. 4,000
Foreign currency translation reserve Dr. 100
PPE revaluation reserve Dr. 50
To Cash 25,000
To Investment in associate -XYZ Ltd. 8,850
To Retained earnings (W.N.2) 50
To Gain on previously held interest in XYZ 250
recognised in Profit or loss (W.N.3)
(To recognise acquisition of XYZ Ltd.)
Working Notes:
1. Calculation of Goodwill
₹ in crore
Cash consideration 25,000
Add: Fair value of previously held equity interest in XYZ Ltd. 9,000
Total consideration 34,000
Less: Fair value of identifiable net assets acquired (30,000)
Goodwill 4,000
2. The credit to retained earnings represents the reversal of the unrealized gain of ₹ 50
crore in Other Comprehensive Income related to the revaluation of property, plant and
equipment. In accordance with Ind AS 16, this amount is not reclassified to profit or loss.
3. The gain on the previously held equity interest in XYZ Ltd. is calculated as follows: ₹
₹ in crore
st
Fair Value of 30% interest in XYZ Ltd. at 1 April, 20X2 9,000
Carrying amount of interest in XYZ Ltd. at 1st April, 20X2 (8,850)
150
Unrealised gain previously recognised in OCI 100
Gain on previously held interest in XYZ Ltd. recognised in profit or loss 250
Illustration 12: Business Combination Achieved by Contract Alone
Sita Ltd and Beta Ltd decides to combine together for forming a Dual Listed Corporation (DLC).

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
As per their shareholder’s agreement, both the parties will retain original listing and Board of DLC
will be comprised of 10 members out of which 6 members will be of Sita Ltd and remaining 4 board
members will be ofBeta Ltd.
The fair value of Sita Ltd is ₹ 100 crores and fair value of Beta Ltd is ₹ 80 crores. The fair value of
net identifiable assets of Beta Limited is ₹ 70 crores. Assume non-controlling Interest (NCI) to be
measured at fairvalue.
You are required to determine the goodwill to be recognised on acquisition.
Solution:
Sita Ltd has more Board members and thereby have majority control in DLC. Therefore, Sita
Ltdis identified as acquirer and Beta Ltd as acquiree.
Since no consideration has been transferred, the goodwill needs to be calculated as the
differenceof Part A and Part B:
Part A:
1) Consideration paid by Acquirer. - Nil
2) Controlling Interest in Acquiree – ₹ 80 crores
3) Acquirer’s previously held interest - Nil
Part B:
Fair value of net identifiable asset – ₹ 70 crores
Goodwill is recognised as ₹ 10 crores (80 – 70 crores) in business combination achieved through
contract alone when NCI is measured at fair value.
Illustration 13
Should stamp duty paid on acquisition of land pursuant to a business combination be capitalised
to the cost of the asset or should it be treated as an acquisition related cost and accordingly be
expensed off?
Solution
As per Ind AS 103, the acquisition-related costs incurred by an acquirer to effect a business
combination are not part of the consideration transferred.
Paragraph 53 of Ind AS 103 states that, acquisition-related costs are costs the acquirer incurs
to effect a business combination. Those costs include finder’s fees; advisory, legal, accounting,
valuation and other professional or consulting fees; general administrative costs, including the
costs of maintaining an internal acquisitions department; and costs of registering and issuing
debt and equity securities. The acquirer shall account for acquisition related costs as expenses
in the periods in which the costs are incurred and the services are received, with one
exception.
Note: The costs to issue debt or equity securities shall be recognised in accordance withInd
AS 32 and Ind AS 109.
The stamp duty payable for transfer of assets in connection with the business combination is an
acquisition-related cost as described under paragraph 53 of Ind AS 103. Stamp duty is a cost
incurred by the acquirer in order to effect the business combination and it is not part of the fair
value exchange between the buyer and seller for the business. In such cases, the stamp duty is
incurred to acquire the ownership rights in land in order to complete the process of transfer of
assets as part of the overall business combination transaction but it does not represent
consideration paid to gain control over business from the sellers.
It may be noted that the accounting treatment of stamp duty incurred for separate acquisition of
an item of property, plant and equipment (i.e., not as part of business combination) differs
under Ind AS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment. Unlike Ind AS 16, the acquisition
accounting as per Ind AS 103 requires assets and liabilities acquired in a business combination
to be measured at fair value. While incurred in connection with a business combination, stamp
duty does not increase the future economic benefits from the net assets comprising the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
business (which would be recognised at fair value) and hence cannot be capitalised. The
examples of costs given in paragraph 53 is only an inclusive list; they are only indicative and
do not preclude any other cost to be considered as acquisition-related cost. In the given case,
the transfer of land and the related stamp duty is required to be accounted as part of the
business combination transaction as per requirements of Ind AS 103 and not as a separate
transaction under Ind AS.
Accordingly, stamp duty incurred in relation to land acquired as part of a business combination
transaction are required to be recognised as an expense in the period in which the acquisition
is completed and given effect to in the financial statements of the acquirer.
Illustration 14
ABC Ltd. acquires PQR Ltd. on 30th June, 20X1. The assets acquired from PQR Ltd. include an
intangible asset that comprises wireless spectrum license. For this intangible asset, ABC Ltd. is
required to make an additional one-time payment to the regulator in PQR’s jurisdiction in order for
the rights to be transferred for its use. Whether such additional payment to the regulator is an
acquisition-related cost?
Solution
As per Ind AS 103, the acquisition-related costs incurred by an acquirer to effect a business
combination are not part of the consideration transferred.
Paragraph 53 of Ind AS 103 states that, acquisition-related costs are costs the acquirer incurs to
effect a business combination. Those costs include finder’s fees; advisory, legal, accounting,
valuation and other professional or consulting fees; general administrative costs, including the
costs of maintaining an internal acquisitions department; and costs of registering and issuing
debtand equity securities. The acquirer shall account for acquisition-related costs as expenses in
the periods in which the costs are incurred and the services are received, with one exception.
The costs to issue debt or equity securities shall be recognised in accordance with Ind AS 32 and
Ind AS 109.
The payment to the regulator represents a transaction cost and will be regarded as acquisition
related cost incurred to effect the business combination. Applying the requirements of para 53 of
Ind AS 103, it should be expensed as it is incurred. Transfer of rights in the instant case cannot
be construed to be separate from the business combination because the transfer of the rights
to ABC Ltd. is an integral part of the business combination itself.
It may be noted that had the right been acquired separately (i.e., not as part of business
combination), the transaction cost is required to be capitalised as part of the intangible asset
as per the requirements of Ind AS 38, Intangible Assets.
Illustration 15
ABC Ltd. acquired a beverage company PQR Ltd. from XYZ Ltd. At the time of the acquisition,
PQR Ltd. is the defendant in a court case whereby certain customers of PQR Ltd. have alleged
that its products contain pesticides in excess of the permissible levels that have caused them
health damage.
PQR Ltd. is being sued for damages of ₹ 2 crore. XYZ Ltd. has indemnified ABC Ltd. for the
losses, if any, due to the case for amount up to ₹ 1 crore. The fair value of the contingent liability
for the court case is ₹70 lakh.
How should ABC Ltd. account for the contingent liability and the indemnification asset? What if the
fair value of the liability is ₹ 1.2 crore instead of ₹ 70 lakh.
Solution:
In the current scenario, ABC Ltd. measures the identifiable liability of entity PQR Ltd. at ₹ 70
lakh and also recognises a corresponding indemnification asset of ₹ 70 lakhs on its
consolidated balance sheet. The net impact on goodwill from the recognition of the contingent

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
liability and associated indemnification asset is nil.
However, in the case where the liability’s fair value is more than ₹ 1 crore ie. ₹ 1.2 crore, the
indemnification asset will be limited to ₹ 1 crore only.
Illustration 16
ABC Ltd. pays ₹ 50 crore to acquire PQR Ltd. from XYZ Ltd. PQR Ltd. manufactured products
containing fiber glass and has been named in 10 class actions concerning the effects of these fiber
glass. XYZ Ltd. agrees to indemnify ABC Ltd. for the adverse results of any court cases up to an
amount of ₹ 10 crore. The class actions have not specified amounts of damages and past
experience suggests that claims may be up to ₹ 1 crore each, but that they are often settled for
small amounts.
ABC Ltd. makes an assessment of the court cases and decides that due to the potential variance
in outcomes, the contingent liability cannot be measured reliably and accordingly no amount is
recognised in respect of the court cases. How should indemnification asset be accounted for?
Solution:
Since no liability is recognised in the given case, ABC Ltd. Will also not recognise an
indemnification asset as part of the business combination accounting.
Illustration 17
Company A, FMCG company acquires an online e-commerce company E, with the intention to
start its retail business. The e-commerce company has over the period have 10 million registered
users. However, the e- commerce company E does not have any intention to sale the customer list.
Should this customer list be recordedas an intangible in a business combination?
Solution:
In this situation the customer database does not give rise to legal or contractual right.
Accordingly, the assessment of its separability will be assessed. The database can be useful to
other players and Company E has the ability to transfer this to them. Accordingly, the intention
not to transfer will not affect the assessment whether to record this as an intangible or not.
Hence customer list should be recorded as an intangible in a business combination.
Illustration 18
ABC Ltd. a pharmaceutical group acquires XYZ Ltd. another pharmaceutical business. XYZ Ltd.
has incurred significant research costs in connection with two new drugs that have been undergoing
clinical trials. Out of the two drugs, one drug has not been granted necessary regulatory
approvals. However, ABC Ltd. expects that approval will be given within two years. The other drug
has recently received regulatory approval. The drugs’ revenue-earning potential was one of the
principal reasons why entity ABC Ltd. decided to acquire entity XYZ Ltd. Whether the research
and development on either of the drugs be recognised as an intangible asset in the
books of ABC Ltd.?
Solution:
Ind AS 38, Intangible Assets provides explicit guidance on recognition of acquired in-process
research and development. Paragraph 21 of Ind AS 38 provides guidance regarding general
recognition conditions which require it to be probable that expected future economic benefits
will flow to the entity before an intangible asset can be recognised and for the cost to be
measured reliably.
As per paragraph 33 of Ind AS 38, both of the standard's general recognition criteria, i.e.,
probability of benefits and reliable measurement, are always considered to be satisfied for
intangible assets acquired in a business combination.
The fair value of an intangible asset reflects expectations about the probability of these
benefits, despite uncertainty about the timing or the amount of the inflow. There will be
sufficient information to measure the fair value of the asset reliably if it is separable or arises
from contractual or other legal rights. If there is a range of possible outcomes with different

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
probabilities, this uncertainty is taken into account in the measurement of the asset's fair value.
Paragraph 34 of Ind AS 38, provides that in accordance with this Standard and Ind AS 103, an
acquirer recognises at the acquisition date, separately from goodwill, an intangible asset of the
acquiree, irrespective of whether the asset had been recognised by the acquiree before the
business combination.
This means that the acquirer recognises as an asset separately from goodwill an in-process
research and development project of the acquiree if the project meets the definition of an
intangible asset. An acquiree’s in-process research and development project meets the
definitionof an intangible asset when it:
(a) meets the definition of an asset; and
(b) is identifiable, i.e., is separable or arises from contractual or other legal rights. In
accordance with above,
(i) The fair value of the first drug reflects the probability and the timing of the regulatory
approval being obtained. As per the standard, the recognition criterion of probable future
economic benefits is considered to be satisfied in respect of the asset acquired accordingly an
asset is recognised. Subsequent expenditure on an in-process research or development
project acquired separately is to be dealt with in accordance with paragraph 43 of Ind AS 38.
(ii) The rights to the second drug also meet the recognition criteria in Ind AS 8 and are
recognised. The approval means it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to ABC
Ltd. This will be reflected in the fair value assigned to the intangible asset.
Thus, recognising in-process research and development as an asset on acquisition applies
different criteria to those that are required for internal projects. The research costs of internal R&D
projects may under no circumstances be capitalised as an intangible asset. It may be pertinent
to note that entities will be required to recognise on acquisition some research and development
expenditure that they would not have been able to recognise if it had been an internal project.
Although the amount attributed to the project is accounted for as an asset, Ind AS 38 requires that
any subsequent expenditure incurred after the acquisition of the project is to be accounted for in
accordance with paragraphs 54 to 62 of Ind AS 38.
Illustration 19
Vadapav Ltd. is a successful company has number of own stores across India and also offers
franchisee to other companies. Efficient Ltd. is one of the franchisee of Vadapav Ltd. and is and
operates number of store in south India. Vadapav Ltd. decided to acquire Efficient Ltd due to its
huge distribution network and accordingly purchased the outstanding shares on 1st April, 20X2. On
the acquisition date, Vadapav Ltd. determinesthat the license agreement reflects current
market terms.
Solution
Vadapav will record the franchisee right as an intangible asset (reacquired right) while doing
purchase price allocation and since it is at market terms no gain or loss will be recorded on
settlement.
Illustration 20
ABC Ltd. acquires PQR Ltd. for a consideration of ₹ 1 crore. Four years ago, ABC Ltd. had
granted a ten- year license allowing PQR Ltd. to operate in Europe. The cost of the license
was ₹ 2,50,000. The contract allows either party to terminate the franchise at a cost of the
unexpired initial fee plus 20%. At the date of acquisition, the settlement amount is ₹ 1,80,000 [(₹
2,50,000 x 6/10) + 20%].
ABC Ltd. has acquired PQR Ltd., because it sees high potential in the European market and
wishes to exploit it. ABC Ltd. calculates that under current economic conditions and at current
prices it could granta six-year franchise for a price of ₹ 4,50,000.
How is the license accounted for as part of the business combination?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Paragraph B51 of Ind AS 103 provides that “the acquirer and acquiree may have a relationship
that existed before they contemplated the business combination, referred to here as a ‘pre-
existing relationship’. A pre-existing relationship between the acquirer and acquiree may be
contractual (for example, vendor and customer or licensor and licensee) or non-contractual
(for example,plaintiff and defendant).”
Further, paragraph B52 of Ind AS 103 provides that “if the business combination in effect settles
a pre- existing relationship, the acquirer recognises a gain or loss, measured as follows:
(a) for a pre-existing non-contractual relationship (such as a lawsuit), fair value.
(b) for a pre-existing contractual relationship, the lesser of (i) and (ii):
(i) the amount by which the contract is favourable or unfavourable from the perspective of
the acquirer when compared with terms for current market transactions for the same or similar
items. (An unfavourable contract is a contract that is unfavourable in terms of current market
terms. It is not necessarily an onerous contract in which the unavoidable costs of meeting the
obligations under the contract exceed the economic benefits expected to be received under it.)
(ii) the amount of any stated settlement provisions in the contract available to the
counterparty to whom the contract is unfavourable.
If (ii) is less than (i), the difference is included as part of the business combination
accounting.
The amount of gain or loss recognised may depend in part on whether the acquirer had
previously recognised a related asset or liability, and the reported gain or loss therefore may
differ from the amount calculated by applying the above requirements.”
Based on the above in the instant case, the license is recognised at ₹ 4,50,000, the fair value at
market rates of a license based on the remaining contractual life.
The gain or loss on settlement of the contract is the lower of:
• ₹ 3,00,000, which is the amount by which the right is unfavorable to ABC Ltd. compared to
market terms. This is the difference between the amount that ABC Ltd. could receive for
granting a similar right, ₹ 4,50,000, compared to the carrying value (or the unamortised value) that it
was granted for, ₹ 1,50,000 (2,50,000 X 6/10).
• ₹ 1,80,000, which is the amount that ABC Ltd. would have to pay to terminate the right
at the date of acquisition.
The loss on settlement of the contract is ₹ 1,80,000. Therefore, out of the ₹ 1 crore paid, ₹ 98.2
lakh is accounted for as consideration for the business combination and ₹ 1,80,000 is accounted for
separately as a settlement loss on the re-acquired right.
Illustration 21
On 1st January, 20X1, A Ltd. acquires 80 per cent of the equity interests of B Ltd. in exchange
for cash of ₹ 15 crore. The former owners of B Ltd. were required to dispose off their investments
in B Ltd. by a specified date, and accordingly they did not have sufficient time to find potential
buyers. A qualified valuation professional hired by the management of A Ltd. measures the
identifiable net assets acquired, in accordance with the requirements of Ind AS 103, at ₹ 20 crore
and the fair value of the 20 per cent non- controlling interest in B Ltd. at ₹ 4.2 crore. How should A
Ltd. recognise the above bargain purchase?
Solution
The amount of B Ltd.'s identifiable net assets i.e., ₹ 20 crore exceeds the fair value of the
consideration transferred plus the fair value of the non-controlling interest in B Ltd. i.e., ₹ 19.2 crore.
Therefore, A Ltd. should review the procedures it used to identify and measure the net assets
acquired and the fair value of non-controlling interest in B Ltd. and the consideration transferred.
After the review, A Ltd. decides that the procedures and resulting measures were appropriate.
A Ltd. measures the gain on its purchase of the 80 per cent interest at ₹ 80 lakh, as the difference

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
between the amount of the identifiable net assets which is ₹ 20 crore and the sum of purchase
consideration and fair value of non-controlling interest, which is ₹ 19.2 crore (cash consideration of
₹ 15 crore and fair value of non-controlling interest of ₹ 4.2 crore). Assuming there exists clear
evidence of the underlying reasons for classifying the business combination as a bargain purchase,
the gain on bargain purchase of 80 per cent interest calculated at ₹ 80 lakh, which will be
recognised in other comprehensive income on the acquisition date and accumulated the same
in equity as capital reserve.
If the acquirer chose to measure the non-controlling interest in B Ltd. on the basis of its
proportionate share of identifiable net assets of the acquiree, the recognised amount of the non-
controlling interest would be ₹ 4 crore (₹ 20 crore × 0.20). The gain on the bargain purchase then
wouldbe ₹ 1 crore (₹ 20 crore – (₹ 15 crore + ₹ 4 crore)).
Illustration 22
Entity X acquired 100% shareholding of Entity Y on 1st April, 20X1 and had complete the
preliminary purchase price allocation and accordingly recorded net assets of ₹ 100 million against
the purchase consideration of 150 million. Entity Y had significant carry forward losses on which
deferred tax asset was not recorded due to lack of convincing evidence on the acquisition date.
However, on 31st March, 20X2, Entity Y won a significant contract which is expected to generate
enough taxable income to recoup the losses. Accordingly, the deferred tax asset was recorded on
the carry forward losses on 31st March, 20X2. Whether the aforesaid losses can be adjusted with
the Goodwill recorded based on the preliminary purchase price allocation?
Solution:
No, as per the requirement of Ind AS 103, changes to the net assets are allowed which results
from the discovery of a fact which existed on the acquisition date. However, change of facts
resulting in recognition and de-recognition of assets and liabilities after the acquisition date will
be accounted in accordance with other Ind AS. In the above scenario deferred tax asset was
not eligible for recognition on the acquisition date and accordingly the new contract on 31st
March, 20X2 will tantamount to change of estimate and accordingly will not impact the
Goodwill amount.
Illustration 23
ABC Ltd. acquires XYZ Ltd. in a business combination on 15th January, 20X1. Few days
before the date of acquisition, one of XYZ Ltd.'s customers had claimed that certain amounts
were due by XYZ Ltd. underpenalty clauses for completion delays included in the contract.
ABC Ltd. evaluates the dispute based on the information available at the date of acquisition and
concludes that XYZ Ltd. was responsible for at least some of the delays in completing the contract.
Based on the evaluation, ABC Ltd. recognises ₹ 1 crore towards this liability which is its best
estimate of the fair value of the liability to the customer based on the information available at the
date of acquisition.
In October, 20X1 (within the measurement period), the customer presents additional information as
per which ABC Ltd. concludes the fair value of liability on the date of acquisition to be ₹ 2crore.
ABC Ltd. continues to receive and evaluate information related to the claim after October, 20X1. Its
evaluation doesn’t change till February, 20X2 (i.e. after the measurement period), when it
concludes that the fair value of the liability for the claim at the date of acquisition is ₹ 1.9 crore. ABC
Ltd. determines that the amount that would be recognised with respect to the claim under Ind AS 37,
Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets as at February, 20X2 is ₹ 2.2 crore.
How should the adjustment to the provisional amounts be made in the financial statements during
and after the measurement period?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
The consolidated financial statements of ABC Ltd. for the year ended 31st March, 20X1 should
include ₹ 1 crore towards the contingent liability in relation to the customer claim.
When the customer presents additional information in support of its claim, the incremental
liability of ₹ 1 crore (₹ 2 crore – ₹ 1 crore) will be adjusted as a part of acquisition accounting asit
is within the measurement period. In its financial statements for the year ending on 31st March,
20X2, ABC Ltd. will disclose the amounts and explanations of the adjustments to the provisional
values recognized during the current reporting period. Therefore, it will disclose that the
comparative information for the year ending on 31st March, 20X1 is adjusted retrospectively to
increase the fair value of the item of liability at the acquisition date by ₹ 1 crore, resulting in a
corresponding increase in goodwill.
The information resulting in the decrease in the estimated fair value of the liability for the claim
in February, 20X2 was obtained after the measurement period. Accordingly, the decrease is
not recognised as an adjustment to the acquisition accounting. If the amount determined in
accordance with Ind AS 37 subsequently exceeds the previous estimate of the fair value of the
liability, then ABC Ltd. recognises an increase in the liability. As the change has occurred after
the end of the measurement period, the increase in the liability amounting to ₹ 20 lakh (₹ 2.2
crore – ₹ 2 crore) is recognised in profit or loss.
Illustration 24
Progressive Ltd is being sued by Regressive Ltd for an infringement of its Patent. At 31stMarch,
20X2,Progressive Ltd recognised a ₹ 10 million liability related to this litigation.
On 30th July, 20X2, Progressive Ltd acquired the entire equity of Regressive Ltd for ₹ 500 million.
Onthat date, the estimated fair value of the expected settlement of the litigation is ₹ 20 million.
Solution:
In the above scenario the litigation is in substance settled with the business combination
transaction and accordingly the ₹ 20 million being the fair value of the litigation liability will be
considered as paid for settling the litigation claim and will be not included in the business
combination. Accordingly, the purchase price will reduce by 20 million and the difference
between 20 and 10 will be recorded in income statement of the Progressive limited as loss on
settlement of the litigation.
Illustration 25
KKV Ltd acquires a 100% interest in VIVA Ltd, a company owned by a single shareholder who
is alsothe KMP in the Company, for a cash payment of USD 20 million and a contingent payment
of USD 2 million. The terms of the agreement provide for payment 2 years after the acquisition if the
following conditions are met:
the EBIDTA margins of the Company after 2 years post acquisition is 21%.
the former shareholder continues to be employed with VIVA Ltd for at least 2 years after the
acquisition. No part of the contingent payment will be paid if the former shareholder does not
complete the 2- year employment period.
Solution:
In the above scenario the former shareholder is required to continue in employment and the
contingent consideration will be forfeited if the employment is terminated or if he resigns.
Accordingly, only USD 20 million is considered as purchase consideration and the contingent
consideration is accounted as employee cost and will be accounted as per the other Ind AS.
Illustration 26: Contingent consideration- Payments to employees who are former owners
ofacquiree
ABC Ltd. acquires all of the outstanding shares of XYZ Ltd. in a business combination. XYZ
Ltd. had three shareholders with equal shareholdings, two of whom were also senior-level

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
employees of XYZ Ltd. and would continue as employee post acquisition of shares by ABC Ltd.
The employee shareholders each will receive ₹ 60,00,000 plus an additional payment of
₹1,50,00,000 to 2,00,00,000 based on a multiple of earnings over the next two years. The non-
employee shareholders each receive ₹ 1,00,00,000.
The additional payment of each of these employee shareholders will be forfeited if they leave the
employment of XYZ Ltd. at any time during the two years following its acquisition by ABC Ltd. The
salary received by them is considered reasonable remuneration for their services.
How much amount is attributable to post combination services?
Solution:
Paragraph B55 (a) of Ind AS 103 provides an indication that a contingent consideration
arrangement in which the payments are automatically forfeited if employment terminates is
remuneration for post-combination services.
Arrangements in which the contingent payments are not affected by employment termination
may indicate that the contingent payments are additional consideration rather than
remuneration.
In accordance with the above, in the instant case, the additional consideration of ₹ 1,50,00,000 to
₹2,00,00,000 represents compensation for post-combination services, as the same
represents that part of the payment which is forfeited if the former shareholder does not remain
in the employment of XYZ Ltd. for two years following the acquisition - i.e., only ₹ 60,00,000 is
attributed to consideration in exchange for the acquired business.
Illustration 27
Green Ltd acquired Pollution Ltd. as a part of the arrangement Green Ltd had to replace the
Pollution Ltd.’s existing equity-settled award. The original awards specify a vesting period of five
years. At the acquisition date, Pollution Ltd employees have already rendered two years of
service.
As required, Green Ltd replaced the original awards with its own share-based payment awards
(replacement award). Under the replacement awards, the vesting period is reduced to 2-year (from the
acquisition date).
The value (market-based measure) of the awards at the acquisition date are as follows:
• original awards: ₹ 500
• replacement awards: ₹ 600.
As of the acquisition date, all awards are expected to vest.
Solution:
Pre-Combination period
The value of the replacement awards will have to be allocated between the pre-combination and
post combination period. As of the acquisition date, the fair value of the original award (₹ 500)
will be multiplied by the service rendered up to acquisition date (2 years) divided by greater of
original vesting period (5 years) or new vesting period (4 years). Accordingly, 500 x 2/5= 200 will
be considered as pre-combination service and will be included in the purchase consideration.
Post- Combination period
The fair value of the award on the acquisition date is 600 which means the difference between the
replacement award which is 600 and the amount allocated to pre-combination period (200) is 400
which will be now recorded over the remaining vesting period which is 2 years as an employee
compensation cost.
Illustration 28
P a real estate company acquires Q another construction company which has an existing equity
settled share-based payment scheme. The awards vest after 5 years of employee service. At the
acquisition date, Company Q’s employees have rendered 2 years of service. None of the awards
are vested at the acquisition date. P did not replace the existing share-based payment scheme but

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
reduced the remaining vesting period from 3 years to 2 years. Company P determines that the market-
based measure of the award at the acquisition date is ₹ 500 (based on measurement principles and
conditions at the acquisition date as per Ind AS 102).
Solution
The market-based measure or the fair value of the award on the acquisition date of 500 is
allocated NCI and post combination employee compensation expense. The portion allocable to
pre- combination period is 500 x 2/5 = 200 which will be included in pre-combination period
and is allocated to NCI on the acquisition date. The amount is computed based on original
vesting period.
The remaining expense which is 500-200= 300 is accounted over the remaining vesting period
of 2years as compensation expenses.
Illustration 29
Classic Ltd. acquires 60% of the ordinary shares of Natural Ltd. a private entity, for ₹ 97.5
crore. The fair value of its identifiable net assets is ₹ 150 crore. The fair value of the 40% of the
ordinary shares owned by non-controlling shareholders is ₹ 65 crore. Carrying amount of Natural
Ltd.’s net assets is ₹ 120 crore.
How will the non-controlling interest be measured?
Solution
Paragraph 19 of Ind AS 103 states that for each business combination, the acquirer shall
measure at the acquisition date components of non-controlling interest in the acquiree that are
present ownership interests and entitle their holders to a proportionate share of the entity’s net
assets in the event of liquidation at either:
(a) fair value; or
(b) the present ownership instruments’ proportionate share in the recognised amounts of the
acquiree’s identifiable net assets.
All other components of non-controlling interests shall be measured at their acquisition-date
fairvalues, unless another measurement basis is required by Ind AS.
In accordance with above, non-controlling interests will be measured in either of the following
manner:
(a) Non-controlling interests are measured at fair value
Under this method, goodwill represents the difference between the fair value of Natural Ltd.
and the fair value of its identifiable net assets.
Thus, Classic Ltd. will recognise the business combination as follows:
(₹in crores)
Identifiable net assets at fair value Dr 150
Goodwill* Dr 12.5
To Non-controlling interest 65
To Investment in Natural Ltd. 97.5
*Note: Goodwill is calculated as 97.5+65-150 = 12.5 or 162.5-150 = 12.5
(b) Non-controlling interests are measured at proportionate share of identifiable net
assets
Under this method, goodwill represents the difference between the total of the consideration
transferred less the fair value of the acquirer’s share of net assets acquired and liabilities
assumed. The non-controlling interests that are present ownership interests and entitle their
holders to a proportionate share of the Natural Ltd 's net assets in the event of liquidation (i.e.,
the ordinary shares) are measured at the non-controlling interest's proportionate share of the
identifiable net assets of Natural Ltd.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Thus, Classic will recognise the business combination as follows: (₹in Crores)
Identifiable net assets at fair value Dr 150
Goodwill* Dr 7.5
To Non-controlling interest (40% x 150) Cr 60
To Investment in Natural Ltd. Cr 97.5
*Note: Goodwill is calculated as 97.5+60-150 = 7.5 or 97.5- (150 x 60%) = 7.5
Illustration 30
Company X, the ultimate parent of a large number of subsidiaries, reorganises the retail segment of
its business to consolidate all of its retail businesses in a single entity. Under the reorganisation,
Company Z (a subsidiary and the biggest retail company in the group) acquires Company X’s
shareholdings in its one operating subsidiary, Company Y by issuing its own shares to Company
X. After the transaction, Company X will directly control the operating and financial policies of
Companies Y.
Before-Reorganisation
Company X
Company Y Company Z Company M Other subsidiaries
After- Reorganisation
Company X
Other subs Company Z
Company Y
Solution:
In this situation, Company Z pays consideration to Company X to obtain control of Company Y.
The transaction meets the definition of a business combination. Prior to the reorganisation, each
of theparties are controlled by Company X. After the reorganisation, although Company Y is
now owned by Company Z, all two companies are still ultimately owned and controlled by
Company X. From the perspective of Company X, there has been no change as a result of the
reorganisation. This transaction therefore meets the definition of a common control
combination and is within the scope of Ind AS 103.
Illustration 31
ABC Ltd. and XYZ Ltd. are owned by four shareholders B, C, D and E, each of whom holds 25% of
the shares in each company. Shareholders B, C and D have entered into a shareholders' agreement in
terms of governance of ABC Ltd. and XYZ Ltd. due to which they exercise joint control.
Whether ABC Ltd. and XYZ Ltd. are under common control?
Solution:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Appendix C to Ind AS 103 defines common control business combination as a business
combination involving entities or businesses in which all the combining entities or businesses
are ultimately controlled by the same party or parties both before and after the business
combination, and that control is not transitory.
As per paragraphs 6 and 7 of Appendix C to Ind AS 103, an entity can be controlled by an
individual, or by a group of individuals acting together under a contractual arrangement, and
that individual or group of individuals may not be subject to the financial reporting requirements
of Ind AS. Therefore, it is not necessary for combining entities to be included as part of the
same consolidated financial statements for a business combination to be regarded as one
having entities under common control. Also, a group of individuals are regarded as controlling
an entity when, as a result of contractual arrangements, they collectively have the power to
govern its financial and operating policies so as to obtain benefits from its activities, and
that ultimate collective power is not transitory.
In the instant case, both ABC Ltd. and XYZ Ltd. are jointly controlled by group of individuals (B,
C and D) as a result of contractual arrangement. Therefore, in the current scenario, ABC Ltd.
and XYZ Ltd. are considered to be under common control.
Illustration 32
ABC Ltd. and XYZ Ltd. are owned by four shareholders B, C, D and E, each of whom holds 25%
of the shares in each company. However, there are no agreements between any of the
shareholders that they will exercise their voting power jointly.
Whether ABC Ltd. and XYZ Ltd. are under common control?
Solution
Appendix C to Ind AS 103 defines ‘Common control business combination’ as business
Further as per paragraphs 6 and 7 of Appendix C to Ind AS 103, an entity can be controlled by
an individual, or by a group of individuals acting together under a contractual arrangement, and
that individual or group of individuals may not be subject to the financial reporting requirements
of Ind AS. Therefore, it is not necessary for combining entities to be included as part of the
same consolidated financial statements for a control. Also, a group of individuals are
regarded as controlling an entity when, as a result of contractual arrangements, they
collectively have the power to govern its financial and operating policies so as to obtain
benefits from its activities, and that ultimate collective power is not transitory.
In the present case, there is no contractual arrangement between the shareholders who exercise
control collectively over either company. Thus, ABC Ltd. and XYZ Ltd. are not considered to
be under common control even if there is an established pattern of voting together.
Illustration 33
ABC Ltd. had a subsidiary, namely, X Ltd. which was acquired on 1st April, 2XX0. ABC Ltd.
acquires all of the shares of Y Ltd. on 1st April, 2X17. ABC Ltd. transfers the shares in Y Ltd. to
X Ltd. on 2nd April, 2X17. How should the above transfer of Y Ltd. into X Ltd. be accounted for
in the consolidated financial statements of X Ltd.?
Before Intermediate:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Appendix C to Ind AS 103 defines common control business combination as business
As per paragraph 7 of Appendix C to Ind AS 103, a group of individuals are regarded as
controlling an entity when, as a result of contractual arrangements, they collectively have the
power to govern its financial and operating policies so as to obtain benefits from its activities,
and that ultimate collective power is not transitory.
The term ‘transitory’ has been included as part of Appendix C to Ind AS 103.
The word ‘transitory’ has been included in the common control definition to ensure that
acquisition accounting applies to those transactions that look as though they are combinations
involving entities under common control, but which in fact represent genuine substantive
business combinations with unrelated parties.
Based on above, if the intermediate step had been omitted and instead X Ltd. had been the
ABC group's vehicle for the acquisition of Y Ltd. - i.e., going straight to the 'after' position - then
X Ltd. would have been identified as the acquirer.
Considering X Ltd. and Y Ltd. are under common control (with common parent), it might seem that
acquisition accounting is not required because of the specific requirement for common control
business combination. However, X Ltd. should be identified as the acquirer and should account for
its combination with Y Ltd. using acquisition accounting. This is because X Ltd. would have applied
acquisition accounting for Y Ltd. if X Ltd. had acquired Y Ltd directly rather than through ABC Ltd.
Acquisition accounting cannot be avoided in the financial statements of X Ltd. simply by placing X
Ltd. and Y Ltd. under the common control ABC Ltd shortly before the transaction.
Illustration 34
How will the financial statement of the prior periods be restated under common control in the
following scenarios:
a) Common Control period extends beyond the start of comparative period
XYZ Ltd acquired PQR Ltd in a common control transaction on 1 October 20X9. The year-end
of XYZ Ltd is 31 March. Both XYZ Ltd and PQR Ltd have been controlled by shareholders
since their incorporation.
b) Common Control period started in the comparative period
ABC Ltd acquired DEF Ltd in a common control transaction on 1 October 20X9. The year- end of
ABC Ltd is 31 March. Both ABC Ltd and DEF Ltd are controlled by shareholder A. A made
investment in ABC Ltd in 20X0 and made investment in DEF Ltd on 1 October 20X8.
Solution:
Paragraph 9(iii) of Appendix C to Ind AS 103 states that the financial information in the
financial statements in respect of prior periods should be restated as if the business
combination had occurred from the beginning of the preceding period in the financial
statements, irrespective of the actual date of the combination. However, if business
combination had occurred after that date, the prior period information shall be restated only
from that date.
(a) In accordance with Paragraph 9(iii) above, the entity will be required to restate its financial
statements as if the business combination had occurred from the beginning of the
preceding period in the financial statements, accordingly in the present case XYZ Ltd will
have to restate its comparatives for the financial year 20X8-20X9 as if the acquisition had
occurred before 1 April 20X8. Additionally, the results of current year of PQR Ltd will be
required to include XYZ's financial statements for the period from 1 April 20X9 to 30
September 20X9.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(b) In accordance with paragraph 9(iii) above, ABC Ltd will have to restate its comparatives
for the financial year ended 20X8-20X9 as if the acquisition had occurred on 1 October
20X8, but not earlier. Additionally, the results of current year of DEF Ltd will be required to
include the financial statements of ABC Ltd for the period from 1 April 20X9 to 1 October
20X9.
Illustration 35
Entity A owns 100% equity shares of entity B since 01.04.20X1. Entity A arranges loan funding from
a financial institution in a new wholly-owned subsidiary called “Entity C”. The loan is used by Entity
C to acquire 100% shareholding in entity B, for cash consideration of ₹ 2,00,000. Entity A applies
Ind AS 103 to account for common control transactions and Entity C will adopt the same policy. Fair
Value of Net identifiable Assets is ₹ 1,50,000 and Carrying Value of Net Identifiable Assets is ₹
1,00,000.
How will Entity C apply acquisition accounting in its consolidated financial statements?
Solution:
As per para 2 of appendix C of Ind AS 103, Common control business combination means a
business combination involving entities or businesses in which all the combining entities or
businesses are ultimately controlled by the same party or parties both before and after the
business combination, and that control is not transitory.
In the above scenario, the Entity A controls Entity B before and after the acquisition. After
acquisition, entity A controls entity B through entity C.
As per para 8 of appendix C of Ind AS 103, Business combinations involving entities or
businesses under common control shall be accounted for using the pooling of interest method.
As per para 9(i) of appendix C of Ind AS 103, the pooling of interest method is considered to
involve the assets and liabilities of the combining entities are reflected at their carrying
amounts.
Based on the above analysis, Entity C cannot be the acquirer. Entity A has created Entity C
and is the seller, so Entity C has effectively been formed and issued shares to effect the
business combination. Entity C is not a business and the transaction between entity B and
Entity C is not a business combination. It is a reorganisation of entity B. As a result, entity B’s
assets and liabilities are included in Entity C consolidated financial statements at their pre-
combination carrying amounts without a fair value uplift.
Illustration 36
Enterprise Ltd. has 2 divisions Laptops and Mobiles. Division Laptops has been making constant
profitswhile division Mobiles has been invariably suffering losses.
On 31st March, 20X2, the division-wise draft extract of the Balance Sheet was: (₹in crores)
Laptops Mobiles Total
Property, Plant and Equipment cost 250 500 750
Depreciation (225) (400) (625)
Net Property, Plant and Equipment (A) 25 100 125
Current assets: 200 500 700
Less: Current liabilities (25) (400) (425)
(B) 175 100 275
Total (A+B) 200 200 400
Financed by:
Loan funds - 300 300
Capital : Equity ₹ 10 each 25 - 25
Surplus 175 (100) 75
200 200 400

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Division Mobiles along with its assets and liabilities was sold for ₹ 25 crores to Turnaround Ltd. a new
company, who allotted 1 crore equity shares of ₹ 10 each at a premium of ₹ 15 per share to the
members of Enterprise Ltd. in full settlement of the consideration, in proportion to their shareholding in
the company. Oneof the members of the Enterprise Ltd. was holding 52% shareholding of the Company.
Assuming that there are no other transactions, you are asked to:
(i) Pass journal entries in the books of Enterprise Ltd.
(ii) Prepare the Balance Sheet of Enterprise Ltd. after the entries in (i).
(iii) Prepare the Balance Sheet of Turnaround Ltd.
Solution:
Journal of Enterprise Ltd. (₹ in crores)
Dr. Cr.
300
Loan Funds Dr. 400
Current Liabilities Dr.
400
Provision for Depreciation Dr.
To Property, Plant and Equipment
500
To Current Assets
500
To Capital Reserve
(Being division Mobiles along with its assets and liabilities
100
soldto Turnaround Ltd. For ₹ 25 crores)
Notes:
(1) Any other alternative set of entries, with the same net effect on various accounts, may be given by
the students.
(2) In the given scenario, this demerger will meet the definition of common control transaction.
Accordingly, the transfer of assets and liabilities will be derecognised and recognised as per
book value and the resultant loss or gain will be recorded as capital reserve in the books of
demerged entity (Enterprise Ltd.)
Enterprise Ltd.
Balance Sheet after reconstruction (₹ in crores)
ASSETS Note No. Amount
Non-current assets
Property, Plant and Equipment 25
Current assets
Other current assets 200
225
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
Equity
Equity share capital (of face value of ₹ 10 each)Other 25
equity (Surplus)
1 175
Liabilities
Current liabilities
Current liabilities 25
225
Notes to Accounts:
(₹ in crores)
1 Other Equity
Surplus (175-100) 75
Add: Capital Reserve 100
175

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Notes to Accounts: Consequent on transfer of Division Mobiles to newly incorporated company
Turnaround Ltd., the members of the company have been allotted 1 crore equity shares of ₹ 10 each
at a premium of ₹ 15 per share of Turnaround Ltd. In full settlement of the consideration in proportion to
their shareholding in the company,
Balance Sheet of Turnaround Ltd. (₹ in crores)
Non-current assets
Current assets
600
Equity
Equity share capital (of face value of ₹ 10 each) 1 10
Other equity (Surplus) 2 (110)
Liabilities
Non-Current liabilities
Financial Liabilities
Borrowings 300
Current liabilities
600
Notes to Accounts
1 Share Capital:
Issued and Paid-up Capital
1 crore Equity shares of ₹ 10 each fully paid up 10
(All the above shares have been issued for consideration other
than cash, to themembers of Enterprise Ltd. on takeover of division
Mobiles from Enterprise Ltd.)
2 Other Equity:
Securities Premium 15
Capital reserve [25 - (600 - 700)] (125)
(110)
Working Note:
In the given case, since both the entities are under common control, this will be accounted as
follows:
A) All assets and liabilities will be recorded at book value
B) Identity of reserves to be maintained.
C) No goodwill will be recorded.
D) Securities issued will be recorded as per the nominal value.
Illustration 37
Maxi Mini Ltd. has 2 divisions - Maxi and Mini. The draft information of assets and liabilities as
at 31st October 20X2 was as under.
Maxi division Mini division Total
(in crores)
Property, Plant and Equipment
Depreciation (500) (100) (600)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
W.D.V. (A) 100 200 300
Current assets 400 300 700
Less: Current liabilities (100) (100) (200)
(B) 300 200 500
Total (A+B) 400 400 800
Financed by : – 100 100
Loan funds (A)
(secured by a charge on property, plant
and equipment)
Own funds:
Equity capital 50
(fully paid up ₹ 10 per share)
Other Equity 650
(B) ? ? 700
Total (A+B) 400 400 800
It is decided to form a new company Mini Ltd. to take over the assets and liabilities of Mini division.
Accordingly, Mini Ltd. was incorporated to take over at Balance Sheet figures, the assets and
liabilities of that division. Mini Ltd. is to allot 5 crore equity shares of ₹ 10 each in the company to
the members of Maxi Mini Ltd. in full settlement of the consideration. The members of Maxi Mini Ltd.
are therefore to become members of Mini Ltd. as well without having to make any further investment.
(a) You are asked to pass journal entries in relation to the above in the books of Maxi Mini
Ltd. and Mini Ltd. Also show the Balance Sheets of the 2 companies as on the morning
of 1st November, 20X2, showing corresponding previous year’s figures.
(b) The directors of the 2 companies ask you to find out the net asset value of equity shares
pre and post demerger.
(c) Comment on the impact of demerger on “share holders wealth”.
Solution:
Demerged Company: Mini Division of “Maxi Mini Ltd” Resulting Company: “Mini Ltd.”
(a) Journal of Maxi Mini Ltd. (Demerged Company)
(₹ in crores)
Dr. Cr.
Current liabilities A/c Dr. 100
Loan fund (secured) A/c Dr. 100
Provision for depreciation A/c Dr. 100
Loss on reconstruction (Balancing figure) Dr. 300
To Property, Plant and Equipment A/c 300
To Current assets A/c 300
(Being the assets and liabilities of Mini division taken out
of the books on transfer of the division to MIni Ltd., the
consideration being allotment to the members of the company
of one eqity share of ₹ 10 each of that company at par for
every share held in the company vide scheme of reorganisation)
Note: Any other alternatives set of entries, with the same net effect on various accounts, may
be given by the students. In the absence of additional information on fair value of the assets
transferred it has been assumed that the group of shareholders control both the demerged and
the resultant entity. It is expected that students should evaluate all reorganization from common
control parameters and aptly highlight the assumptions in the note while solving the question.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Journal of Mini Ltd.
(₹ in crores)
Dr. Cr.
Property, Plant and Equipment (300-100) A/c Dr. 200
Current assets A/c Dr. 300
To Current Liabilities A/c 100
To Secured loan funds A/c 100
To Equity share capital A/c 50
To Capital reserve 250
(Being the assets and liabilities of Mini division of Maxi
Mini Ltd. taken over and allotment of 5 crores equity
shares of ₹ 10 each at part as fully paid up to the
members of Maxi Mini Ltd.)
Maxi Mini Ltd.
Balance Sheet as at 1st November, 20X2(₹ in crore)
ASSETS Note After Before
No. Reconstruction Reconstruction
Non-current assets
Property, Plant and Equipment 2 100 300
Current assets 400 700
Other current assets 500 1,000
Equity
Equity share capital (of face value of ₹10 each)
Other equity 50 50
Liabilities 1
Non-current liabilities 350 650
Financial liabilities
Borrowings
Current liabilities - 100
Current liabilities 100 200
500 1,000
Notes to Accounts:
After Before
Reconstruction Reconstruction
1. Other Equity
Other Equity 650 650
Less: Loss on reconstruction (300) –
350 650
2. Property, Plant and Equipment 600 900
Less: Depreciation (500) (600)
100 300
Notes to Accounts: Consequent on reconstruction of the company and transfer of Mini division
to newly incorporated company Mini Ltd., the members of the company have been allotted 5

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
crores equity shares of ₹ 10 each at part of Mini Ltd. The demerged entity and the resultant entity
are common control and accordingly the transaction has been accounted at book values of the
assets transferred in both the entity.
Mini Ltd.
Balance Sheet as at 1st November, 20X2
(₹ in crore)
ASSETS NoteNo After reconstruction
Non-current assets
Current assets
500
Equity
Equity share capital (of face value of ₹ 10 each) 1 50
Other equity (capital reserve) 250
Liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Borrowings 100
Current liabilities
500
Notes to Account
(₹in crores)
1. Share Capital:
Issued and paid up :
5 crores Equity shares of ₹ 10 each fully paid up 50
(All the above shares have been issued for consideration other than cash, to
themembers of Maxi Mini Ltd., on takeover of Mini division from Maxi Mini
Ltd.)
(b) Net asset value of an equity share
(c) Demerger into two companies has had no impact on “net asset value” of shareholding.
Pre- demerger, it was ₹ 140 per share. After demerger, it is ₹ 80 plus ₹ 60 i.e. ₹ 140 per original share.
It is only yield valuation that is expected to change because of separate focusing on two
distinctbusinesses whereby profitability is likely to improve on account of demerger.
Illustration 38 (MTP: October, 2019)
AX Ltd. and BX Ltd. amalgamated from 1st January, 20X2. A new Company ABX Ltd. with
shares of ₹10 each was formed to take over the businesses of the existing companies.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Summarized Balance Sheet as on 31-12-20X2
(₹ in '000)
ASSETS Note No. AX Ltd BX Ltd
Non-current assets
Property, Plant and Equipment 8,500 7,500
Financial assets
Investment 1,050 550
Current assets
Inventory 1,250 2,750
Trade receivables 1,800 4,000
Cash and Cash equivalent 450 400
13,050 15,200
Equity
Equity share capital (of face value of ₹ 10 each) 6,000 7,000
Other equity 3,050 2,700
Liabilities 1
Borrowings (12% Debentures) 3,000 4,000
Current liabilities
Trade payables 1,000 1,500
13,050 15,200
Note:
1. Other equity AX Ltd BX Ltd
General Reserve 1,500 2,000
Profit & Loss 1,000 500
Investment Allowance Reserve 500 100
Export Profit Reserve 50 100
3,050 2,700
ABX Ltd. issued requisite number of shares to discharge the claims of the equity shareholders of
the transferor companies. Also the new debentures were issued in exchange of the old series of
both the companies.
Assets AX Ltd. BX Ltd. (‘000)
(‘000)
Fair value of the business 11,000 14,000
Solution:
(a) (Assumption: Common control transaction)
1. Calculation of Purchase Consideration
AX Ltd. BX Ltd.
₹ ’000 ₹ ’000
Assets taken over:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Investment 10,50 5,50
Cash & Cash equivalent 4,50 4,00
Gross Assets 130,50 152,00
Less : Liabilities
12% Debentures 30,00 40,00
Trade payables 10,00 (40,00) 15,00 (55,00)
Net Assets taken over 90,50 97,00
Less: Other Equity:
General Reserve 15,00 20,00
P & L A/c 10,00 5,00
Investment Allowance Reserve 5,00 1,00
Export Profit Reserve 50 (30,50) 1,00 (27,00)
Purchase Consideration 60,00 70,00
Total Purchase Consideration = 130,00 (60,00 of AX Ltd. & 70,00 of BX Ltd.)
2. Discharge of Purchase Consideration No. of shares to be issued to AX Ltd =
Net Assets taken over of AX Ltd. X purchase Consideration
Net Assets taken over of AX Ltd. and BX Ltd.
No. of shares to be issued to BX Ltd =
Net Assets taken over of BX Ltd. x Purchase Consideration
Net Assets taken over of AX Ltd. and BX Ltd.
AX Ltd.(₹ ’000) BX Ltd.(₹ ’000)
90,50
130,00 × = 6,27,500
62,75
187,50
* Equity shares of ₹ 10 each
97,00
130,00 × = 6,72,500
187,50 67,25
Equity shares of ₹ 10 each
Balance Sheet of ABX Ltd. as on 1.1.20X2
(₹ in '000)
Non-current assets
Property, Plant and Equipment 16,000
Financial assets
1,600
Investments
Current assets
Inventory 4,000
Trade receivable 5,800
Cash and Cash equivalent 850
28,250
Equity
Equity share capital (of face value of ₹ 10 each) 1 13,000
Other equity 2 5,750
Liabilities

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Borrowings 3 7,000
Current liabilities
2,500
Trade payable
28,250
(*The total purchase consideration is to be discharged by ABX Ltd. in such a way that the rights of
theshareholders of AX Ltd. and BX Ltd. remain unaltered in the future profits of ABX Ltd.)
Notes to Accounts
(₹000) (₹000)
1. Share Capital
13,00,000 Equity Shares of ₹ 10 each 130,00
2. Other Equity
General Reserve (15,00 + 20,00) 35,00
Profit & Loss (10,00 + 5,00)
15,00
Investment Allowance Reserve (5,00 + 1,00)
6,00
Export Profit Reserve (50 + 1,00)
1,50 57,50
Long Term Borrowings
3. 12% Debentures
70,00
(b) Assuming BX Ltd is a larger entity and their management will take the control of the
entity ABX Ltd.
In this case BX Ltd. and AX Ltd. are not under common control and hence accounting
prescribed under Ind AS 103 for business combination will be applied. A question arises hereis
who is the accounting acquirer ABX Ltd which is issuing the shares or AX Ltd. or BX Ltd. As
per the accounting guidance provided in Ind AS 103, sometimes the legal acquirer may not be
the accounting acquirer. In the given scenario although ABX Ltd. is issuing the shares but BX
Ltd. post- merger will have control and is bigger in size which is aclear indicator that BX Ltd.
will be an accounting acquirer. This can be justified by the following table:
(In ‘000s)
AX Ltd. BX Ltd.
Fair Value 11,000 14,000
Value per share 10 10
No. of shares 1,100 1,400
i.e., Total No. of shares in ABX Ltd. = 2,500 thousand shares
Thus, % Held by each Company in Combined Entity 44% 56%
Note: It is a case of Reverse Acquisition.
Accordingly, BX Ltd. assets will be recorded at historical cost in the merged financialstatements.
(1) Calculation of Purchase Consideration (All figures are in thousands)
We need to calculate the number of shares to be issued by BX Ltd. to AX Ltd. to maintain
the same percentage i.e., 56%:
Thus, 700 thousand shares of BX Ltd. (given in the balance sheet) represents 56%. This
meansthat total no. of shares would be 1,250 thousand shares ie 700 thousandshares / 56%.
This implies BX Ltd. would need to issue 550 thousand shares (1,250 less 700) to AX Ltd.
Purchase Consideration = 550 thousand shares x ₹ 20 per share (ie. 14,000 thousand /
700thousandshares) = ₹ 11,000 thousand.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Balance Sheet of ABX Ltd. as on 1.1.20X2
(₹ in '000)
Non-current assets
Goodwill (Refer Working Note) 900
Property, Plant and Equipment (9500+7500) 17,000
Financial assets
Investment (1050+550) 1,600
Current assets
Inventory (1300+2750) 4,050
Trade receivables (1800+4000) 5,800
Cash and Cash equivalent (450+400) 850
30,200
Notes to Accounts
(₹ 000) (₹ 000)
1. Share Capital
1,250,000 Equity Shares of ₹ 10 each (700,000 to BX
1,25,00
Ltd and 550,000 as computed above to AX LTD)
Other Equity
2. General reserve of BX Ltd 20,00
P&L of BX Ltd 5,00
Export Profit Reserve of BX Ltd 1,00
Investment Allowance Reserve of BX 1,00
3. LtdSecurity Premium (550 shares x 10) 5,500 8,200
Long Term Borrowings
12% Debentures 70,00
Working Note:
Goodwill Computation:
ASSETS (₹ in 000s)
Property, Plant and Equipment 9,500

Investment 1,050
Inventory 1,300
Trade Receivable 1,800
Cash & Cash Equivalent 450
Total Assets 14,100
Less : Liabilities:
Borrowings 3,000
Trade Payable 1,000
Net Assets 10,100
Purchase Consideration 11,000
Goodwill 900

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 39:
On 9th April, 20X2, Shyam Ltd. a listed company started to negotiate with Ram Ltd, which is an
unlisted company about the possibility of merger. On 10th May, 20X2, the board of directors of
Shyam Ltd. authorized their management to pursue the merger with Ram Ltd. On 15th May, 20X2,
management of Shyam Ltd. offered management of Ram Ltd. 12,000 shares of Shyam Ltd. against
their total share outstanding. On 31st May, 20X2, the board of directors of Ram Ltd accepted the
offer subject to shareholder’s vote. On 2nd June, 20X2 both the companies jointly made a press
release about the proposed merger.
On 10th June, 20X2, the shareholders of Ram Ltd approved the terms of the merger. On 15th
June, the shares were allotted to the shareholders of Ram Ltd.
The market price of the shares of Shyam Ltd was as follows:
Date Price per share
9th April 70
10th May 75
15th May 60
31st May 70
2nd June 80
10th June 85
15th June 90
What is the acquisition date and what is purchase consideration in the above scenario?
Solution:
As per paragraph 8 of Ind AS 103, the acquirer shall identify the acquisition date, which is the
date on which it obtains control of the aquiree. In the above scenario, the acquisition date will the
date on which the shares were allotted to the shareholders of Ram Ltd. Although the shareholder
approval was obtained on 10th June, 20X2 but the shares were issued only on 15th June, 20X2.
Accordingly, the purchase consideration will be on the basis of ₹ 90 ie. the market price on that date.
Hence total purchase consideration would be ₹10,80,000 (i.e., 12,000 shares x ₹ 90).
Illustration 40 (MTP MAY 2019)
The balance sheet of Professional Ltd. and Dynamic Ltd. as of 31st March, 20X2 is given below:
(₹ in lakhs)
Assets Professional Ltd Dynamic Ltd
Non-Current Assets:
Property, plant and equipment 300 500
Investment 400 100
Current assets:
Inventories 250 150
Financial assets
Trade receivables 450 300
Cash and cash equivalents 200 100
Others 400 230
Total 2,000 1,380
Equity Share capital- Equity shares of ₹100
Each of Dynamic Ltd. and ₹ 10 each of
Professional Ltd. 500 400

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Non-Current liabilities:
Long term borrowings 250 200
Long term provisions 50 70
Deferred tax 40 35
Current Liabilities:
Short term borrowings 100 150
Trade payables 250 300
Total 2,000 1,380
Other information
(a) Professional Ltd. acquired 70% shares of Dynamic Ltd. on 1st April, 20X2 by issuing its own
shares in the ratio of 1 share of Professional Ltd. for every 2 shares of Dynamic Ltd. The fair
value of the shares of Professional Ltd was ₹ 40 per share.
(b) The fair value exercise resulted in the following: (all nos in Lakh)
i. Fair value of PPE on 1st April, 20X2 was ₹ 350 lakhs.
ii. Professional Ltd also agreed to pay an additional payment as consideration that is
higher of 35 lakhs and 25% of any excess profits in the first year, after acquisition, over its
profits in the preceding 12 months made by Dynamic Ltd. This additional amount will be
due after 2 years. Dynamic Ltd has earned ₹ 10 lakh profit in the preceding year and expects
to earn another ₹ 20 Lakh.
(a) In addition to above, Professional Ltd also had agreed to pay one of the founder
share holder a payment of ₹20 lakh provided he stays with the Company for two year
after the acquisition.
(b) Dynamic Ltd had certain equity settled share-based payment award (original award)
which got replaced by the new awards issued by Professional Ltd. As per the
original term the vesting period was 4 years and as of the acquisition date the
employees of Dynamic Ltd have already served 2 years of service. As per the
replaced awards the vesting period has been reduced to one year (one year from
the acquisition date). The fair value of the award on the acquisition date was as
follows:
1. Original award- ₹ ₹ 5 lakh
2. Replacement award-₹ ₹ 8 lakh.
(c) Dynamic Ltd had a lawsuit pending with a customer who had made a claim of ₹ 50
lakh. Management reliably estimated the fair value of the liability to be ₹ 5 lakh.
(d) The applicable tax rate for both entities is 30%.
You are required to prepare opening consolidated balance sheet of Professional Ltd as on 1st April, 20X2.
Assume 10% discount rate.
Solution:
Consolidated Balance Sheet of Professional Ltd as on 1st April, 20X2 (₹ in Lakhs)
Amount
Assets
Non-Current Assets:
Property, plant and equipment 650
Investment 500
Current assets:
Inventories 400

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Financial assets:
Trade receivables 750
Cash and cash equivalents 300
Others 630
Total 3,230
Equity
Share capital- Equity shares of ₹ 100 each 514
Other Equity 1,128.62
NCI 154.95
Long term borrowings 450
Long term provisions (50+70+28.93) 148.93
Deferred tax 28.5
Short term borrowings 250
Trade payables 550
Provision for Law suit Damages 5
Total 3,230
Notes:
a. Fair value adjustment- As per Ind AS 103, the acquirer is required to record the assets
and liabilities at their respective fair value. Accordingly, the PPE will be recorded at ₹ 350 lakhs.
b. The value of replacement award is allocated between consideration transferred and post
combination expense. The portion attributable to purchase consideration is determined
based on the fair value of the replacement award for the service rendered till the date of
the acquisition. Accordingly, 2.5 (5 x 2/4) is considered as a part of purchase
consideration and is credited to Professional Ltd equity as this will be settled in its own
equity. The balance of 2.5 will be recorded as employee expense in the books of Dynamic
Ltd over the remaining life, which is 1 year in this scenario.
c. There is a difference between contingent consideration and deferred consideration. In the
given case 35 is the minimum payment to be paid after 2 years and accordingly will be
considered as deferred consideration. The other element is if company meet certain
target then they will get 25% of that or 35 whichever is higher. In the given case since the
minimum what is expected to be paid the fair value of the contingent consideration has
been considered as zero. The impact of time value on deferred consideration has been
given @ 10%.
d. The additional consideration of ₹ 20 lakhs to be paid to the founder shareholder is
contingent to him/her continuing in employment and hence this will be considered as
employee compensation and will be recorded as post combination expenses in the income
statement of Dynamic Ltd.
Working Notes:
1. Computation for Purchase consideration
Particulars Amount
Share capital of Dynamic Ltd 4,00,00,000
Number of shares 4,00,000
Shares to be issued 2:1 2,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Fair value ₹ per share 40
₹ in lakhs
PC (2,00,000 x 70% x ₹ 40 per share) (A) 56.00
Deferred consideration after discounting ₹ 35 lakhs for
2 years @ 10% (B) 28.93
Replacement award Market based measure of the
acquiree award (5) x ratio of the portion of the vesting
Period completed (2) / greater of the total vesting
period (3) or the original vesting period (4) of the 2.5
acquiree award ie (5 x 2 /4) (C)
PC in lakhs (A+B+C) 87.43
2. Allocation of Purchase price
Particulars Book Fair FV adjustment
value (A) value (B) (A-B)
Property, plant and equipment 500 350 (150)
Investment 100 100 -
Inventories 150 150 -
Financial assets: -
Trade receivables 300 300 -
Cash and cash equivalents 100 100 -
Others 230 230
Less: Long term borrowings (200) (200) -
Long term provisions (70) (70) -
Deferred tax (35) (35) -
Short term borrowings (150) (150) -
Trade payables (300) (300) -
Contingent liability - (5) (5)
Net assets (X) 625 470 (155)
Deferred tax Asset on FV adjustment
(155 x 30%) (Y) 46.50 155
Net assets (X+Y) 516.5
Non-controlling interest (516.50 x 30%) 154.95
rounded off
Capital Reserve (Net assets – NCI – PC) 274.12
Purchase consideration (PC) 87.43
3. Computation of consolidated amounts of Consolidated financial statements
Professional Dynamic Ltd. PPA Total
Ltd. (pre-acquisition) Allocation
Assets
Non-Current Assets:
Property, plant and equipment 300 500 (150) 650
Investment 400 100 500
Current assets:
Inventories 250 150 400
Financial assets:
Trade receivables 450 300 750
Cash and cash equivalents 200 100 300
Others 400 230 630
Total 2,000 1,380 (150) 3230

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Equity
Share capital Equity shares of ₹ 100 each
Shares allotted to Dynamic Ltd. 500
(2,00,000 x 70% x ₹ 10 per share) 14 514
Other Equity 810 318.62 1128.62
Replacement award 2.5 2.5
Security Premium (2,00,000 shares x 70% x ₹ 30) 42 42
Capital Reserve 274.12 274.12
Non-controlling interest 0 154.95 154.95
Financial liabilities 250 200 450
Long term borrowings
Long term provisions 50 70 28.93 148.93
Deferred tax 40 35 (46.5) 28.5
Financial liabilities 100 150 250
Short term borrowings
Trade payable 250 300 0 550
Liability for lawsuit damages 5 5
Total 2,000 755 475 3230
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01: (NOV 2020)
Company A and Company B are in power business. Company A holds 25% of equity shares of
Company B. On 1st November, Company A obtains control of Company B when it acquires a
further 65% of Company B’s shares, thereby resulting in a total holding of 90%. The acquisition
had the following features:
 Consideration: Company A transfers cash of ₹ 59,00,000 and issues 1,00,000 shares on
1st November.The market price of Company A’s shares on the date of issue is ₹ 10per share.
 Contingent consideration: Company A agrees to pay additional consideration of
₹ 7,00,000 if the cumulative profits of Company B exceed ₹ 70,00,000 over the next two years. At
the acquisition date, it is not considered probable that the extra consideration will be paid. The fair
value of the contingent consideration is determined to be
₹ 3,00,000 at the acquisition date.
 Transaction costs: Company A pays acquisition-related costs of ₹ 1,00,000.
 Non-controlling interests (NCI): The fair value of the NCI is determined to be ₹
7,50,000 at the acquisition date based on market prices. Company A elects to measure non-
controlling interest at fair value for this transaction.
 Previously held non-controlling equity interest: Company A has owned 25% of the
shares in Company B for several years. At 1st November, the investment is included in
Company A’s consolidated balance sheets at ₹ 6,00,000, accounted for using the equity
method; the fair value is ₹ 20,00,000.
The fair value of Company B’s net identifiable assets at 1st November is ₹ 60,00,000, determined
Determine the accounting under acquisition method for the business combination by Company A.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Identify the acquirer
In this case, Company A has paid cash consideration to shareholders of Company B. Further,
the shares issued to Company B pursuant to the acquisition do not transfer control of
Company A to erstwhile shareholders of Company B. Therefore, Company A is the acquirer
and Company B is the acquiree.
Determine acquisition date
As the control over the business of Company B is transferred to Company A on 1st November,
that date is considered as the acquisition date.
Determine the purchase consideration
The purchase consideration in this case will comprise the following:
Cash consideration 59,00,000
Equity shares issued (1,00,000 x 10 i.e., at fair value) 10,00,000
Contingent consideration (at fair value) 3,00,000
Fair value of previously held interest 20,00,000
As such, the total purchase consideration is ₹ 92,00,000.
Acquisition cost incurred by and on behalf of the Company A for acquisition of Company B
should be recognised in the Statement of profit and loss. As such, an amount of ₹ 1,00,000
should be recognised in Statement of profit and loss.
Determine fair value of identifiable assets and liabilities
The fair value of identifiable net assets is determined at ₹ 60,00,000.
Measure NCI
The management has decided to recognise the NCI at its fair value. As such, the NCI will be
recognised at ₹7,50,000.
Re-measure previously held interests in case business combination is achieved in stages
In this case, the control has been acquired in stages i.e., before acquisition to control, the
Company A exercised significant influence over Company B. As such, the previously held
interest should be measured at fair value and the difference between the fair value and the
carrying amount as at the acquisition date should be recognised in Statement of Profit and
Loss. As such, an amount of
₹ 14,00,000 (i.e., 20,00,000 less 6,00,000) will be recognised in Statement of profit and loss.
Determination of goodwill or gain on bargain purchase Goodwill should be calculated as
follows:
Total consideration 92,00,000

Recognised amount of any non-controlling interest 7,50,000
Less: Fair value of Company B’s net identifiable assets (60,00,000)
Goodwill 39,50,000
Question 02: (MTP MAR 2018)
On 31st December, 20X1, Entity A issues 2.5 shares in exchange for each ordinary share of
Entity B. All of Entity B’s shareholders exchange their shares in Entity B. Therefore, Entity A issues
150 ordinary shares in exchange for all 60 ordinary shares of Entity B.
The fair value of each ordinary share of Entity B at 31st December, 20X1 is ₹ 40. The quoted
market priceof Entity A’s ordinary shares at that date is ₹ 16.
The fair values of Entity A’s identifiable assets and liabilities at 31st December, 20X1 are the same
as their carrying amounts, except that the fair value of Entity A’s non- current assets at 31st
December, 20X1 is ₹ 1,500.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The balance sheets of Entity A and Entity B immediately before the business combination are:
Entity A(legal parent, Entity B(legal subsidiary,
accounting acquiree) accounting acquirer)
Current assets 500 700
Non-current assets 1,300 3,000
Total assets 1,800 3,700
Non-current liabilities 400 1,100
Total liabilities 700 1,700
Shareholders’ equity
Retained earnings 800 1,400
Issued equity
100 ordinary shares 300
60 ordinary shares 600
Total shareholders’ equity 1,100 2,000
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity 1,800 3,700
Assume that Entity B’s earnings for the annual period ended 31st March, 20X1 were ₹ 600 and that
the consolidated earnings for the annual period ended 31st March, 20X2 were ₹ 800. Assume
also that there was no change in the number of ordinary shares issued by Entity B during the
annual period ended 31st March, 20X1 and during the period from 1st January, 20X1 to the date
of the reverse acquisition on 31st December, 20X1.
Calculate the fair value of the consideration transferred measure goodwill and prepare consolidated
balance sheet as on 31st December, 20X1.
Solution:
Identifying the acquirer
As a result of Entity A issuing 150 ordinary shares, Entity B’s shareholders own 60 per cent of
the issued shares of the combined entity (i.e., 150 of the 250 total issued shares). The
remaining 40 per cent are owned by Entity A’s shareholders. Thus, the transaction is
determined to be a reverse acquisition in which Entity B is identified as the accounting acquirer
while Entity A is the legal acquirer.
Calculating the fair value of the consideration transferred
If the business combination had taken the form of Entity B issuing additional ordinary shares to
Entity A’s shareholders in exchange for their ordinary shares in Entity A, Entity B would have had to
issue 40 shares for the ratio of ownership interest in the combined entity to be the same. Entity B’s
shareholders would then own 60 of the 100 issued shares of Entity B —60 per cent of the
combined entity. As a result, the fair value of the consideration effectively transferred by Entity B
and the group’s interest in Entity A is ₹ 1,600 (40 shares with a fair value per share of ₹40).
The fair value of the consideration effectively transferred should be based on the most reliable
measure. Here, the quoted market price of Entity A’s shares provides a more reliable basis for
measuring the consideration effectively transferred than the estimated fair value of the shares
in Entity B, and the consideration is measured using the market price of Entity A’s 100 shares
with a fair value per share of ₹16.
Measuring goodwill
Goodwill is measured as the excess of the fair value of the consideration effectively
transferred (the group’s interest in Entity A) over the net amount of Entity A’s recognised
identifiable assets and liabilities, as follows:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
₹ ₹
Consideration effectively transferred 1,600
Net recognised values of Entity A’s identifiable assets and liabilities
Current assets 500
Non-current assets 1,500
Current liabilities (300)
Non-current liabilities (400) (1,300)
Goodwill 300
st
Consolidated balance sheet at 31 December, 20X1
The consolidated balance sheet immediately after the business combination is:
₹
Current assets [700 + 500] 1,200
Non-current assets [3,000 + 1,500] 4,500
Goodwill 300
Total assets 6,000
Current liabilities [600 + 300] 900
Non-current liabilities [1,100 + 400] 1,500
Total liabilities 2,400
Shareholders’ equity
Issued equity 250 ordinary shares [600 + 1,600] 2,200
Retained earnings 1,400
Total shareholders’ equity 3,600
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity 6,000
The amount recognised as issued equity interests in the consolidated financial statements (₹ 2,200)
is determined by adding the issued equity of the legal subsidiary immediately before the business
combination (600) and the fair value of the consideration effectively transferred (₹ 1,600). However,
the equity structure appearing in the consolidated financial statements (i.e., the number and
type of equity interests issued) must reflect the equity structure of the legal parent, including the
equity interests issued by the legal parent to effect the combination.
Question 3
Scenario 1: New information on the fair value of an acquired loan
Bank F acquires Bank E in a business combination in October, 20X1. The loan by Bank E to
Borrower B is recognised at its provisionally determined fair value. In December 20X1, F receives
Borrower B’s financial statements for the year ended 30th September, 20X1, which indicate
significant decrease in Borrower B’s income from operations. Basis this, the fair value of the loan to
B at the acquisition date is determined to be less than the amount recognised earlier on a
provisional basis.
Scenario 2: Decrease in fair value of acquired loan resulting from an event occurring during the
measurement period.
Bank F acquires Bank E in a business combination in October, 20X1. The loan by Bank E to
Borrower B is recognised at its provisionally determined fair value. In December 20X1, F receives
information that Borrower B has lost its major customer earlier that month and this is expected to
have a significant negative effect on B’s operations.
Comment on the treatment done by Bank F.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Scenario 1: The new information obtained by F subsequent to the acquisition relates to facts and
circumstances that existed at the acquisition date. Accordingly, an adjustment (i.e., decrease) to in
the provisional amount should be recognised for loan to B with a corresponding increase in
goodwill.
Scenario 2: Basis this, the fair value of the loan to B will be less than the amount recognised
earlier at the acquisition date. The new information resulting in the change in the estimated fair
value of the loan to B does not relate to facts and circumstances that existed at the acquisition date,
but rather is due to a new event i.e., the loss of a major customer subsequent to the acquisition
date. Therefore, based on the new information, F should determine and recognise an allowance for
loss on the loan in accordance with Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments: Recognition and
Measurement, with a corresponding charge to profit or loss; goodwill is not adjusted.
Question 04:
Company A acquired 90% equity interest in Company B on 1st April, 20X1 for a consideration of
₹ 85 crores in a distress sale. Company B did not have any instrument recognised in equity. The
Company appointed a registered valuer with whose assistance, the Company valued the fair
value of NCI and the fair value identifiable net assets at ₹ 15 crores and ₹ 100 crores
respectively.
Find the value at which NCI has to be shown in the financial statements.
Solution:
In this case, Company A has the option to measure NCI as follows:
Option 1: Measure NCI at fair value i.e., ₹ 15 crores as derived by the valuer;
Option 2: Measure NCI as proportion of fair value of identifiable net assets i.e., ₹ 10 crores (100
crores x 10%)
Question 05:
On 1st April, 20X1, Company A acquired 5% of the equity share capital of Company B for 1,00,000. A
accounts for its investment in B at Fair Value through OCI (FVOCI) under Ind AS 109, Financial
Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. At 31st March, 20X2, A carried its investment in B at fair
value and reported an unrealised gain of ₹ 5,000 in other comprehensive income, which was presented
as a separate component of equity. On 1st April, 20X2, A obtains control of B by acquiring the remaining
95 percent of B.
Comment on the treatment to be done based on the facts given in the question.
Solution:
At the acquisition date A recognises the gain of ₹ 5,000 in OCI as the gain or loss is not allowed
to be recycled to income statement as per the requirement of Ind AS 109. A’s investment in B
would be at fair value and therefore does not require remeasurement as a result of the
business combination. The fair value of the 5 percent investment (1,05,000) plus the fair value
of the consideration for the 95 percent newly acquired interest is included in the acquisition
accounting.
Question 06:
Company A acquires 70 percent of Company S on 1st January, 20X1 for consideration transferred
of ₹ 5 million. Company A intends to recognise the NCI at proportionate share of fair value of
identifiable net assets. With the assistance of a suitably qualified valuation professional, A
measures the identifiable net assets of B at ₹ 10 million. A performs a review and determines that
the business combination did not include any transactions that should be accounted for separately
from the business combination.
State whether the procedures followed by A and the resulting measurements are appropriate or not.
Also calculate the bargain purchase gain in the process

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
The amount of B’s identifiable net assets exceeds the fair value of the consideration
transferred plus the fair value of the NCI in B, resulting in an initial indication of a gain on a
bargain purchase. Accordingly, A reviews the procedures it used to identify and measure the
identifiable net assets acquired, to measure the fair value of both the NCI and the
consideration transferred, and to identify transactions that were not part of the business
combination.
Following that review, A concludes that the procedures followed and the resulting
measurements were appropriate.
(₹ )
Identifiable net assets 1,00,00,000
Less: Consideration transferred (50,00,000)
NCI (10 million x 30%) (30,00,000)
Gain on bargain purchase 20,00,000
Question 07:
Entity A and entity B provide construction services in India. Entity A is owned by a group of
individuals, none of whom has control and does not have a collective control agreement. Entity B is
owned by a single individual, Mr. Ram. The owners of entities A and B have decided to combine
their businesses. The consideration will be settled in shares of entity B. Entity B issues new shares,
amounting to 40% of its issued share capital, to its controlling shareholder, Mr. Ram. Mr. Ram then
transfers the shares to the owners of entity A in exchange for their interest in entity A. At this point
Mr. Ram controls both entities A and B, owning 100% of entity A and 71.42% of entity B. Mr.
Ram had a controlling interest in both entity A and entity B before and after the contribution. Is
the combination of entities A and B a combination of entitiesunder common control?
Solution:
No. This is not a business combination of entities under common control. Mr. Ram’s control of
both entities before the business combination was transitory. The substance of the transaction
is that entity B has obtained control of entity A. Entity B accounts for this transaction as a
business combination under Ind AS 103 using acquisition accounting.
Question 08:
On 1 April 20X1, Alpha Ltd. acquires 80 percent of the equity interest of Beta Pvt. Ltd. in exchange
for cash of
₹ 300. Due to legal compulsion, Beta Pvt. Ltd. had to dispose of their investments by a specified
date. Therefore, they did not have sufficient time to market Beta Pvt. Ltd. to multiple potential
buyers. The management of Alpha Ltd. initially measures the separately recognizable identifiable
assets acquired and the liabilities assumed as of the acquisition date in accordance with the
requirement of Ind AS 103. The identifiable assets are measured at ₹ 500 and the liabilities
assumed are measured at ₹ 100. Alpha Ltd. engages on independent consultant, who determined
that the fair value of 20 per cent non-controlling interestin Beta Pvt. Ltd. is ₹84.
Alpha Ltd. reviewed the procedures it used to identify and measure the assets acquired and
liabilities assumed and to measure the fair value of both the non-controlling interest in Beta Pvt. Ltd.
and the consideration transferred. After the review, it decided that the procedures and resulting
measures were appropriate.
Calculate the gain or loss on acquisition of Beta Pvt. Ltd. and also show the journal entries for
accounting of its acquisition. Also calculate the value of the non-controlling interest in Beta Pvt.
Ltd. onthe basis of proportionate interest method, if alternatively applied?
Solution:
The amount of Beta Pvt. Ltd. identifiable net assets [₹ 400, calculated as ₹ 500 - ₹ 100) exceeds thefair
value of the consideration transferred plus the fair value of the non-controlling interest in Beta

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Pvt. Ltd. [₹ 384 calculated as 300 + 84]. Alpha Ltd. measures the gain on its purchase of the 80
per cent interest as follows:
₹ in lakh
Amount of the identifiable net assets acquired (₹500 - ₹100) 400
Less: Fair value of the consideration transferred for Alpha Ltd. 300
80 per cent interest in Beta Pvt. Ltd. 84 (384)
Add: Fair value of non-controlling interest in Beta Pvt. Ltd. 16
Gain on bargain purchase of 80 per cent interest
Journal Entry
₹in lakhs ₹in lakhs
Identifiable assets acquired Dr. 500
To Cash 300
To Liabilities assumed 100
To OCI/Equity-Gain on the bargain purchase 16
To Equity-non controlling interest in Beta Pvt Ltd. 84
If the acquirer chose to measure the non-controlling interest in Beta Pvt. Ltd. on the basis of its
proportionate interest in the identifiable net assets of the acquire, the recognized amount of the non-
controlling interest would be ₹ 80 (₹ 400 x 0.20). The gain on the bargain purchase then would be
₹20 (₹400- (₹300 + ₹80)
Question 09: (MTP: May , 2020)
ABC Ltd. prepares consolidated financial statements up to 31st March each year. On
1st July 20X1, ABC Ltd. acquired 75% of the equity shares of JKL Ltd. and gained control of JKL
Ltd. the issued shares of JKL Ltd. is 1,20,00,000 equity shares. Details of the purchase
consideration are as follows:
- On 1st July, 20X1, ABC Ltd. issued two shares for every three shares acquired in JKL Ltd.
On 1st July, 20X1, the market value of an equity share in ABC Ltd. was ₹ 6.50 and
the market value of an equity share in JKL Ltd. was ₹ 6.
- On 30th June, 20X2, ABC Ltd. will make a cash payment of ₹ 71,50,000 to the former
shareholders of JKL Ltd. who sold their shares to ABC Ltd. on 1st July, 20X1. On 1st July,
20X1, ABC Ltd. would have to pay interest at an annual rate of 10% on borrowings.
- On 30th June, 20X3, ABC Ltd. may make a cash payment of ₹ 3,00,00,000 to the former
shareholders of JKL Ltd. who sold their shares to ABC Ltd. on 1st July, 20X1. This
payment is contingent upon the revenues of ABC Ltd. growing by 15% over the two-year
period from 1st July, 20X1 to 30th June, 20X3. On 1st July, 20X1, the fair value of this
contingent consideration was ₹ 2,50,00,000. On 31st March, 20X2, the fair value of the
contingent consideration was ₹ 2,20,00,000.
On 1st July, 20X1, the carrying values of the identifiable net assets of JKL Ltd. in the books of
that company was ₹ 6,00,00,000. On 1st July, 20X1, the fair values of these net assets was ₹
7,00,00,000. The rate of deferred tax to apply to temporary differences is 20%.
During the nine months ended on 31st March, 20X2, JKL Ltd. had a poorer than expected operating
performance. Therefore, on 31st March, 20X2 it was necessary for ABC Ltd. to recognise an
impairment of the goodwill arising on acquisition of JKL Ltd., amounting to 10% of its total
computed value.
Compute the impairment of goodwill in the consolidated financial statements of ABC Ltd. under both
the methods permitted by Ind AS 103 for the initial computation of the non- controlling interest in
JKL Ltd. at the acquisition date.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Computation of goodwill impairment
NCI at fair value NCI at of net
assets
₹in ‘000 ₹in ‘000
Cost of investment
Share exchange (12,000 x 75% x 2/3 x ₹6.50) 39,000 39,000
Deferred consideration (7,150 / 1.10) 6,500 6,500
Contingent consideration 25,000 25,000
Non-controlling interest at date of acquisition:
Fair value – 3000 x ₹6 18,000
% of net assets – 68,000 (Refer W.N.) x 25% 17,000
Net assets on the acquisition date (Refer W.N.) (68,000) (68,000)
Goodwill on acquisition 20,500 19,500
Impairment @ 10% 2,050 1,950
Working Note:
Net assets on the acquisition date ₹ ’000
Fair value at acquisition date 70,000
Deferred tax on fair value adjustments [20% x (70,000 – 60,000)] (2,000)
68,000
Question 10: (MTP:OCT,2019) (RTP MAY,2019) (MTP APR 2018)
How should contingent consideration payable in relation to a business combination be accounted
for on initial recognition and at the subsequent measurement as per Ind AS in the following
cases:
On 1 April 20X1, A Ltd. acquires 100% interest in B Ltd. As per the terms of agreement
thepurchase consideration is payable in the following 2 tranches:
a. an immediate issuance of 10 lakhs shares of A Ltd. having face value of INR 10 per share;
b. a further issuance of 2 lakhs shares after one year if the profit before interest and tax of B
Ltd.for the first year following acquisition exceeds INR 1 crore.
i. The fair value of the shares of A Ltd. on the date of acquisition is INR 20 per
share. Further, the management has estimated that on the date of acquisition,
the fair value of contingent consideration is ₹ 25 lakhs.
ii. During the year ended 31 March 20X2, the profit before interest and tax of B
Ltd. exceeded ₹ 1 crore. As on 31 March 20X2, the fair value of shares of A Ltd.
is ₹25 per share.
iii. Continuing with the fact pattern in (a) above except for:
c. The number of shares to be issued after one year is not fixed.
d. Rather, A Ltd. agreed to issue variable number of shares having a fair value equal to ₹ 40
lakhs after one year, if the profit before interest and tax for the first year following
acquisition exceeds ₹ 1 crore. A Ltd. issued shares with ₹ 40 lakhs after a year.
Solution:
Paragraph 37 of Ind AS 103, inter alia, provides that the consideration transferred in a
business combination should be measured at fair value, which should be calculated as the
sum of (a) the acquisition-date fair values of the assets transferred by the acquirer, (b) the
liabilities incurred by the acquirer to former owners of the acquiree and (c) the equity
interests issued by the acquirer.
Further, paragraph 39 of Ind AS 103 provides that the consideration the acquirer transfers in
exchange for the acquiree includes any asset or liability resulting from a contingent
consideration arrangement. The acquirer shall recognize the acquisition-date fair value of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
contingent consideration as part of the consideration transferred in exchange for the
acquiree.
With respect to contingent consideration, obligations of an acquirer under contingent
consideration arrangements are classified as equity or a liability in accordance with Ind AS 32
or other applicable Ind AS, i.e., for the rare case of non-financial contingent consideration.
Paragraph 40 provides that the acquirer shall classify an obligation to pay contingent
consideration that meets the definition of a financial instrument as a financial liability or as
equity on the basis of the definitions of an equity instrument and a financial liability in
paragraph 11 of Ind AS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation. The acquirer shall classify as
an asset a right to the return of previously transferred consideration if specified conditions are
met. Paragraph 58 of Ind AS 103 provides guidance on the subsequent accounting for
contingent consideration.
(i) In the given case the amount of purchase consideration to be recognized on initial
recognition shall be as follows:
₹
Fair value of shares issued (10,00,000 x ₹20) 2,00,00,000
Fair value of contingent consideration 25,00,000
Total purchase consideration 2,25,00,000
Subsequent measurement of contingent consideration payable for business combination
In general, an equity instrument is any contract that evidences a residual interest in the
assets of an entity after deducting all of its liabilities. Ind AS 32 describes an equity
instrument as onethat meets both of the following conditions:
(a) There is no contractual obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset to another
party, or to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another party under
potentially unfavorable conditions (for the issuer of the instrument).
(b) If the instrument will or may be settled in the issuer's own equity instruments, then it is:
(i) a non-derivative that comprises an obligation for the issuer to deliver a fixed
number of its own equity instruments; or
(ii) a derivative that will be settled only by the issuer exchanging a fixed amount of
cash or other financial assets for a fixed number of its own equity instruments.
In the given case, given that the acquirer has an obligation to issue fixed number of shares on
fulfilment of the contingency, the contingent consideration will be classified as equity as per the
requirements of Ind AS 32.
As per paragraph 58 of Ind AS 103, contingent consideration classified as equity should not be
re- measured and its subsequent settlement should be accounted for within equity.
Here, the obligation to pay contingent consideration amounting to ₹25,00,000 is recognized asa
partof equity and therefore not re-measured subsequently or on issuance of shares.
(ii) The amount of purchase consideration to be recognized on initial recognition is shall
be as follows:
₹
Fair value of shares issued (10,00,000 x ₹20) 2,00,00,000
Fair value of contingent consideration 25,00,000
Total purchase consideration 2,25,00,000
Subsequent measurement of contingent consideration payable for business combination
The contingent consideration will be classified as liability as per Ind AS 32.
As per paragraph 58 of Ind AS 103, contingent consideration not classified as equity should be
measured at fair value at each reporting date and changes in fair value should be recognized
in profit or loss.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
As at 31 March 20X2, (being the date of settlement of contingent consideration), the liability
would be measured at its fair value and the resulting loss of ₹15,00,000(₹ 40,00,000 – ₹ 25,00,000)
shouldbe recognized in the profit or loss for the period. A Ltd. would recognize issuance of 160,000
(₹40,00,000/25) shares at a premium of ₹15 per share.
Question 11: (RTP MAY 2019) (NOV 2019)
As part of its business expansion strategy, KK Ltd. is in process of setting up a pharma
intermediates business which is at very initial stage. For this purpose, KK Ltd. has acquired on
1st April, 20X1, 100% shares of ABR Ltd. that manufactures pharma intermediates. The purchase
consideration for the same was by way of a share exchange valued at ₹ 35 crores. The fair value
of ABR Ltd.' s net assets was ₹ 15 crores, but does not include:
(i) A patent owned by ABR Ltd. for an established successful intermediate drug that
has a remaininglife of 8 years. A consultant has estimated the value of this patent to be
₹ 10 crores. However, the outcome of clinical trials for the same are awaited. If the trials
are successful, the value of the drug would fetch the estimated ₹ 15 crores.
(ii) ABR Ltd. has developed and patented a new drug which has been approved for
clinical use. The cost of developing the drug was ₹12 crores. Based on early
assessment of its sales success, the valuer has estimated its market value at ₹ 20 crores.
(iii) ABR Ltd.'s manufacturing facilities have received a favourable inspection by a
government department.As a result of this, the Company has been granted an exclusive
five-year license to manufacture and distribute a new vaccine. Although the license has
no direct cost to the Company, its directors believe that obtaining the license is a
valuable asset which assures guaranteed sales and the value for the same is
estimated at ₹10 crores.
KK Ltd. has requested you to suggest the accounting treatment of the above transaction under
applicable Ind AS. ·
Solution:
As per para 13 of Ind AS 103 ‘Business Combination’, the acquirer's application of the
recognition principle and conditions may result in recognising some assets and liabilities that
the acquiree had not previously recognised as assets and liabilities in its financial statements.
This may be the case when the asset is developed by the entity internally and charged the
related costs to expense.
Based on the above, the company can recognise following Intangible assets while determining
Goodwill / Bargain Purchase for the transaction:
(i) Patent owned by ABR Ltd.: The patent owned will be recognised at fair value by KKLtd.
even though it was not recognised by ABR Ltd. in its financial statements. The patent will be
amortised over the remaining useful life of the asset i.e. 8 years. Since the company is awaiting the
outcome of the trials, the value of the patent cannot be estimated at ₹15 crore and the extra ₹ 5
crore should only be disclosed as a Contingent Asset and not recognised.
(ii) Patent internally developed by ABR Ltd.: As per para 18 of Ind AS 103 ‘Business
Combination’, the acquirer shall measure the identifiable assets acquired and the liabilities
assumed at their acquisition date fair values. Since the patent developed has been
approved for clinical use, it is an identifiable asset, hence the same will be measured at fair
value ie ₹20 crore on the acquisition date.
(iii) Grant of Licence to ABR Ltd. by the Government: As regards to the five-year license,
applying para 18 of Ind AS 103, grant asset will be recognised at fair value on the acquisition date
by KK Ltd. On acquisition date, the fair value of the license is Rs. 10 crores. However, since the
question does not mention about the fair value of the identifiable liability with respect to grant of
license for the acquirer, it is assumed that no conditions with respect to compliance of grant

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(if any) have been passed to the acquirer. Hence, the fair value of the liability with respect to
grant, for acquirer would be nil. Only, the grant asset (license) would be recognised at ₹ 10 crore
in the books of acquirer KK Ltd.
Hence the revised working would be as follows:
₹
Fair value of net assets of ABR Ltd. 15 crores
Add: Patent (10 + 20) 30 crores
Add: License 10 crores
Less: Grant for License (Nil)
55 crores
Purchase Consideration (35 crores)
Bargain purchase 20crore
Question 12: (MTP: March, 2019)
H Ltd. acquired equity shares of S Ltd., a listed company, in two tranches as mentioned in the
below table:
Date Equity stake purchased Remarks
st
1 November, 20X6 15% The shares were purchased based on
1st January, 20X7 45% the quoted price on the stock exchange
on therelevant dates.
Both the above-mentioned companies have Rupees as their functional currency. Consequently, H
Ltd. acquired control over S Ltd. on 1st January, 20X7. Following is the Balance Sheet of S Ltd. as
on that date:
Particulars Carrying value(₹ in crore) Fair value(₹ in crore)
ASSETS:
Non-current assets
A. Property, plant and equipment 40.0 90.0
B. Intangible assets 20.0 30.0
C. Financial assets
- Investments 100.0 350.0
Current assets
A.Inventories 20.0 20.0
B.Financial assets
-Trade receivables 20.0 20.0
- Cash held in functional currency 4.0 4.5
C. Other current assets
Non-current asset held for sale 4.0 4.5
TOTAL ASSETS 208
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES:
Equity
(a) Share capital (face value ₹ 100) 12.0 50.4
(b) Other equity 141.0 Not applicable
(a) Financial liabilities
- Borrowings 20.0 20.0
Current liabilities
(a) Financial liabilities

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
- Trade payables 28.0 28.0
(b) Provision for warranties 3.0 3.0
(c) Current tax liabilities 4.0 4.0
TOTAL EQUITY AND LIABILITIES 208.0
Other information:
Property, plant and equipment in the above Balance Sheet include leasehold motor vehicles
having carrying value of ₹ 1 crore and fair value of ₹ 1.2 crore. The date of inception of the lease
was 1st April, 20X0. On the inception of the lease, S Ltd. had correctly classified the lease
as a finance lease. However, if facts and circumstances as on 1st April, 20X7 are considered,
the lease would be classified as an operating lease.
Following is the statement of contingent liabilities of S Ltd. as on 1st January, 20X7:
Particulars Fair value (₹in crore) Remarks
Law suit filed by a customer 0.5 It is not probable that an outflow of
for aclaim of ₹2 crore resources embodying economic benefits
will be required to settle
the claim.
Any amount which would be paid inrespect
of law suit will be tax deductible.
Income tax demand of ₹ 7 2.0 It is not probable that an outflow of
crore raised by tax authorities; resources embodying economic benefits
S Ltd. has challenged the will be required to settle the claim.
demand in the court.
In relation to the above-mentioned contingent liabilities, S Ltd. has given an indemnification
undertakingto H Ltd. up to a maximum of ₹1 crore.
₹ 1 crore represents the acquisition date fair value of the indemnification undertaking.
Any amount which would be received in respect of the above undertaking shall not be taxable.
The tax bases of the assets and liabilities of S Ltd. is equal to their respective carrying values
being recognised in its Balance Sheet.
Carrying value of non-current asset held for sale of ₹ 4 crore represents its fair value less cost to
sell in accordance with the relevant Ind AS.
In consideration of the additional stake purchased by H Ltd. on 1st January, 20X7, it has
issued to the selling shareholders of S Ltd. 1 equity share of H Ltd. for every 2 shares held in S Ltd.
Fair value of equity shares of H Ltd. as on 1st January, 20X7 is ₹ 10,000 per share.
On 1st January, 20X7, H Ltd. has paid ₹ 50 crore in cash to the selling shareholders of S Ltd.
Additionally, on 31st March, 20X9, H Ltd. will pay ₹ 30 crore to the selling shareholders of S
Ltd. if return on equity of S Ltd. for the year ended 31st March, 20X9 is more than 25% per annum.
H Ltd. has estimated the fair value of this obligation as on 1st January, 20X7 and 31st March,
20X7 as ₹ 22 crore and ₹ 23 crore respectively. The change in fair value of the obligation is
attributable to the change in facts and circumstances after the acquisition date. Quoted price of
equity shares of S Ltd. as on various dates is as follows:
As on November, 20X6 ₹ 350 per share
As on 1st January, 20X7 ₹ 395 per share
As on 31st March, 20X7 ₹ 420 per share
On 31 May, 20X7, H Ltd. learned that certain customer relationships existing as on 1st
st
January, 20X7, which met the recognition criteria of an intangible asset as on that date, were not
considered during the accounting of business combination for the year ended 31st March, 20X7.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The fair value of such customer relationships as on 1st January, 20X7 was ₹ 3.5 crore
(assume that there are no temporary differences associated with customer relations;
consequently, there is no impact of income taxes on customer relations).
On 31st May, 20X7 itself, H Ltd. further learned that due to additional customer relationships being
developed during the period 1st January, 20X7 to 31st March, 20X7, the fair value of such
customer relationships has increased to ₹ 4 crore as on 31st March, 20X7.
On 31st December, 20X7, H Ltd. has established that it has obtained all the information necessary
for the accounting of the business combination and that more information is not obtainable.
H Ltd. and S Ltd. are not related parties and follow Ind AS for financial reporting. Income tax rate
applicable is 30%.
You are required to provide your detailed responses to the following, along with reasoning and
computation notes:
What should be the goodwill or bargain purchase gain to be recognised by H Ltd. in its financial
statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X7. For this purpose, measure non- controlling
interest using proportionate share of the fair value of the identifiable net assets of S Ltd.
i) Will the amount of non-controlling interest, goodwill, or bargain purchase gain so recognised in
above change subsequent to 31st March, 20X7? If yes, provide relevant journal entries.
ii) What should be the accounting treatment of the contingent consideration as on31st March,
20X7?
Solution:
I) As an only exception to the principle of classification or designation of assets as they
exist at the acquisition date is that for lease contract and insurance contracts
classification which will be based on the basis of the conditions existing at inception
and not on acquisition date.
Therefore, H Ltd. would be required to retain the original lease classification of the lease
arrangements and thereby recognise the lease arrangements as finance lease.
II) The requirements in Ind AS 37 ‘Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets’,
do not apply in determining which contingent liabilities to recognise as of the
acquisition date as per Ind AS 103 ‘Business Combination’. Instead, the acquirer shall
recognise as of the acquisition date a contingent liability assumed in a business
combination if it is a present obligation that arises from past events and its fair value can
be measured reliably. Therefore, contrary to Ind AS 37, the acquirer recognises a
contingent liability assumed in a business combination at the acquisition date even if it is
not probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required
to settle the obligation. Hence H Ltd. will recognize contingent liability of ₹ 2.5 cr.
Since S Ltd. has indemnified for ₹ 1 cr., H Ltd. shall recognise an indemnification asset
at the same time for ₹1 cr.As per the information given in the question, this indemnified
asset is not taxable. Hence, its tax base will be equal to its carrying amount. No
deferred tax will arise on it.
III) As per Ind AS 103, non-current assets held for sale should be measured at fair value less
cost to sell in accordance with Ind AS 105 ‘Non-current Assets Held for Sale and
Discontinued Operations’. Therefore, its carrying value as per balance sheet has been
considered in the calculation of net assets.
IV) Any equity interest in S Ltd. held by H Ltd. immediately before obtaining control over
S Ltd. is adjusted to acquisition-date fair value. Any resulting gain or loss is recognised in
the profit or loss of H Ltd.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Calculation of purchase consideration as per Ind AS 103: (₹ in lakh)
Investment in S Ltd.
st
On 1 Nov. 20X6 15% [(12/100) x 395 x 15%] 7.11
On 1st Jan. 20X7 45%
Own equity given 10,000 x 12% x 45% x 1/2 270
Cash 50
Contingent consideration 22
349.11
Calculation of deferred tax on assets and liabilities acquired as part of the business
combination,including current tax and goodwill.
Item (₹ in crore)
Book Fair Tax Taxable Deferred tax
value value base (deductible) assets
temporary (liability)
difference @ 30%
Property, plant and equipment 40 90 40 50 (15)
Intangible assets 20 30 20 10 (3)
Investments 100 350 100 250 (75)
Inventories 20 20 20 - -
Trade receivables 20 20 20 - -
Cash held in functional 4 4 4 - -
currency
Non-current asset held for sale 4 4 4 - -
Indemnified asset - 1 1 - -
Borrowings 20 20 20 - -
Trade payables 28 28 28 - -
Provision for warranties 3 3 3 - -
Current tax liabilities 4 4 4 - -
Contingent liability 0.5 - (0.5) 0.15
Deferred tax Liability (92.85)
 Calculation of identifiable net assets acquired
₹in crore ₹in crore
Property, plant and equipment 90
Intangible assets 30
Investments 350
Inventories 20
Cash held in functional currency 4
Non-current asset held for sale 4
Indemnified asset 1
Total asset 519
Less: Borrowings 20
Trade payables 28
Provision for warranties 3
Current tax liabilities 4
Contingent liability (2 + 0.5) 2.50
Deferred tax liability (W.N.2) 92.85 (150.35)
Net identifiable assets 368.65

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Calculation of NCI by proportionate share of net assets
Net identifiable assets of S Ltd. on 1.1.20X7 (Refer W.N.3) = 372.85 crore
NCI on 1.1.20X7 = 368.65 crore x 40% = 147.46 crore
Calculation of Goodwill as per Ind AS 103:
Goodwill on 1.1.20X7 = Purchase consideration + NCI – Net assets
= 349.11 + 147.46 – 368.65
= 127.92 crore
As per para 45 of Ind AS 103 ‘Business Combination’, if the initial accounting for a business
combination is incomplete by the end of the reporting period in which the combination occurs,
the acquirer shall report in its financial statements provisional amounts for the items for which
the accounting is incomplete.
During the measurement period, the acquirer shall retrospectively adjust the provisional
amounts recognised at the acquisition date to reflect new information obtained about facts and
circumstances that existed as of the acquisition date and, if known, would have affected the
measurement of the amounts recognised as of that date.
During the measurement period, the acquirer shall also recognise additional assets or liabilities
if new information is obtained about facts and circumstances that existed as of the acquisition
date and, if known, would have resulted in the recognition of those assets and liabilities as of
that date.
The measurement period ends as soon as the acquirer receives the information it was seeking
aboutfacts and circumstances that existed as of the acquisition date or learns that more information
is not obtainable. However, the measurement period shall not exceed one year from the
acquisition date.
Further, as per para 46 of Ind AS 103, the measurement period is the period after the acquisition
date during which the acquirer may adjust the provisional amounts recognised for a business
combination. The measurement period provides the acquirer with a reasonable time to obtain the
information necessary to identify and measure the following as of the acquisition date in
accordance with the requirements of this Ind AS:
(a) the identifiable assets acquired, liabilities assumed and any non-controlling interest inthe
acquiree;
(b); and
C) the resulting goodwill or gain on a bargain purchase.
Para 48 states that the acquirer recognises an increase (decrease) in the provisional amount
recognised for an identifiable asset (liability) by means of a decrease (increase) in goodwill.
Para 49 states that during the measurement period, the acquirer shall recognise adjustments to the
provisional amounts as if the accounting for the business combination had been completed at the
acquisition date.
Para 50 states that after the measurement period ends, the acquirer shall revise the accounting for
a business combination only to correct an error in accordance with Ind AS 8 ‘Accounting Policies,
Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors’.
On 31st December, 20X7, H Ltd. has established that it has obtained all the information
necessary for the accounting of the business combination and the more information is not
obtainable. Therefore, the measurement period for acquisition of S Ltd. ends on 31st December,
20X7.
On 31st May, 20X7 (ie within the measurement period), H Ltd. learned that certain customer
relationships existing as on 1st January, 20X7 which met the recognition criteria of an
intangible asset as on that date were not considered during the accounting of business

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
combination for the year ended 31st March, 20X7. Therefore, H Ltd. shall account for the
acquisition date fair value of customer relations existing on 1st January, 20X7 as an
identifiable intangible asset. The corresponding adjustment shall be made in the amount of
goodwill.
Accordingly, the amount of goodwill will be changed due to identification of new asset from
retrospective date for changes in fair value of assets and liabilities earlier recognised on
provisional amount (subject to meeting the condition above for measurement period). NCI
changes would impact the consolidated retained earnings (parent’s share). Also, NCI will be
increased or decreased based on the profit during the post-acquisition period.
Journal entry
Customer relationship Dr. 3.5 crore
To NCI 1.4 crore
To Goodwill 2.1 crore
However, the increase in the value of customer relations after the acquisition date shall not be
accounted by H Ltd., as the customer relations developed after 1st January, 20X7 represents
internally generated intangible assets which are not eligible for recognition on the balance
sheet.
© Since the contingent considerations payable by H Ltd is not classified as equity and is within
the scope of Ind AS 109 ‘Financial Instruments’, the changes in the fair value shall be recognised
in profit or loss. Change in Fair value of contingent consideration (23- 22) ₹1 crore will be
recognized in the Statement of Profit and Loss.
RTP, MTP, PAST PAPERS
MTP: August, 2018
In March 2018, Pharma Ltd. acquires Dorman Ltd. in a business combination for a total cost of Rs. 12,000 lakhs. At that
time Dorman Ltd.'s assets and liabilities are as follows:
Item Rs. in lakhs
Assets
Cash 780
Receivables (net) 5,200
Plant and equipment 7,000
Deferred tax asset 360
Liabilities
Payables 1,050
Borrowings 4,900
Employee entitlement liabilities 900
Deferred tax liability 300
The plant and equipment has a fair value of Rs. 8,000 lakhs and a tax written down value of Rs. 6,000 lakhs.
The receivables are short-term trade receivables net of a doubtful debts allowance of Rs. 300 lakhs.Bad
debts are deductible for tax purposes when written off against the allowance account by Dorman Ltd.
Employee benefit liabilities are deductible for tax when paid.
Dorman Ltd. owns a popular brand name that meets the recognition criteria for intangible assets under Ind AS
103 'Business Combinations’. Independent valuers have attributed a fair value of Rs. 4.300 lakhs for the brand.
However, the brand does not have any cost for tax purposes and no tax deductions are available for the same.
The tax rate of 30% can be considered for all items. Assume that unless other-wise stated, all items have a fair value
and tax base equal to their carrying amounts at the acquisition date.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(i) Calculate deferred tax assets and liabilities arising from the business combination
(do not offset deferred tax assets and liabilities)
(ii) Calculate the goodwill that should be accounted on consolidation.
Solution:
Breakdown of assets and liabilities acquired as part of the business combination, including
deferred taxes and goodwill.
Item Rs. In lakhs
Book Fair value Tax Taxable Deferred
value base (deductible) tax asset
temporary (liability)@
difference 30%
Cash 780 7801) 780 1) - -
Receivables 5,200 5,2001) 5,5003) (300) 90
Plant and equipment 7,000 8,0002) 6,0004) 2,000 (600)
Brands 4,300 2) -5) 4,300 (1,290)
Goodwill (Balancing figure) 2,100 9)
Deferred tax asset 360 3,607)
Total assets 20,740
Payables (1,050) (1,050) 1) (1,050) 1)
Borrowings (4,900) (4,900)1) (4,900)1)
Employee Entitlement liabilities (900) (900)1) -6) (900) 270
Deferred tax liability (300) (1,890)8)
Total liabilities (8,740)
Consideration paid 12,000
Notes:
(1) This amount has been derived from Dorman Ltd.'s Balance Sheet as it is stated that
'unless otherwise stated, all items have a fair value and tax base equal to their carrying
amounts in Dorman Ltd.'s Balance Sheet at the acquisition date’.
(2) Stated fair value in the fact pattern (different to the carrying amount in Dorman Ltd.'s
Balance Sheet at the acquisition date).
(3) Because bad debts are only deductible when written off against the allowance account
by Dorman Ltd. the tax base of the receivables is their gross value, i.e., (Rs. 5,200 +
Rs. 300)lakhs allowance account.
(4) Tax written down value of the plant and equipment as stated in the fact pattern.
(5) As the brand name does not have a cost for tax purposes and no tax deduction is
available in relation to it, its tax base is nil.
(6) As the employee entitlement liabilities are only deductible for tax purposes when paid,
their tax base is nil.
(7) The aggregate deferred tax asset is Rs. 360 lakhs, comprised of Rs.90 lakhs in relation
to the receivables and Rs.270 lakhs in relation to the employee entitlement liabilities.
(8) The aggregate deferred tax liability is Rs. 1,890 lakhs calculated as follows:
Rs. In lakhs DTL amount in Dorman Deferred tax impact Total DTL in Pharma
Ltd.’s Balance Sheet offair value Ltd’s consolidated
adjustments financial statements
Plant and equipment 300 ([7,000-6,000] × 30%) 300 ([1,000 × 30%) 600

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Brand names 0 1,290 (4,300 × 30%) 1,290
TOTAL 300 1,590 1,890
Goodwill is effectively the 'balancing item' in the equation, applying the requirements of lnd AS
103, para 32. The consideration transferred is Rs. 12,000 lakhs and the net of the acquisition
date amounts of the identifiable assets acquired and the liabilities assumed measured in
accordance with Ind AS 103, including the deferred tax assets
RTP MAY 2021
QUESTION
Bima Ltd. acquired 65% of shares on 1 June, 20X1 in Nafa Ltd. which is engaged in production of
components of machinery. Nafa Ltd. has 1,00,000 equity shares of ₹ 10 each. The quoted market
price of shares of Nafa Ltd. was ₹ 12 on the date of acquisition. The fair value of Nafa Ltd.'s
identifiable net assets as on 1 June, 20X1 was ₹ 80,00,000. Bima Ltd. wired ₹ 50,00,000 in cash
and issued 50,000 equity shares as purchase consideration on the date of acquisition. The quoted
market price of shares of Bima Ltd. on the date of issue was ₹ 25 per share. Bima Ltd. also agrees
to pay additional consideration of ₹ 15,00,000, if the cumulative profit earned by Nafa Ltd. exceeds
₹ 1 crore over the next three years. On the date of acquisition, Nafa Ltd. assessed and determined
that it is considered probable that the extra consideration will be paid. The fair value of this
consideration on the date of acquisition is ₹ 9,80,000. Nafa Ltd. incurred ₹ 1,50,000 in relation to the
acquisition. It measures Non-controlling interest at fair value. How will the acquisition of NafaLtd.
be accounted by Bima Ltd., under Ind AS 103? Prepare detailed workings and pass the necessary
journal entry.
SOLUTION
Computation of Goodwill / Capital reserve on consolidation as per Ind AS 103
Particulars
Cost of investment:
Share exchange (50,000 x 25) 12,50,000
Cash consideration 50,00,000
Contingent consideration 9,80,000
Consideration transferred at date of acquisition [A] 72,30,000
Fair value of non-controlling interest at date of acquisition [B] (1,00,000 x 35% 4,20,000
x 12)
Total [C] = [A] + [B] 76,50,000
Net assets acquired at date of acquisition [D] (80,00,000)
Capital Reserve [D] – [C] 3,50,000
In a business combination, acquisition-related costs (including stamp duty) are expensed in the
period in which such costs are incurred and are not included as part of the consideration transferred.
Therefore, ₹ 1,50,000 incurred by Nafa Ltd. in relation to acquisition, will be ignored by Bima Ltd.
Journal entry at the date of acquisition by Bima Limited as per Ind AS 103:
Identifiable net assets Dr. 80,00,000

To Equity share capital (50,000 x 10) 5,00,000
To Securities Premium (50,000 x 15) 7,50,000
To Cash 50,00,000
To Provision for contingent consideration to Nafa Ltd. 9,80,000
To Non-controlling Interest 4,20,000
To Capital Reserve 3,50,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
RTP MAY 2021
QUESTION
Monsoon Limited acquired, on 30 September, 20X2, 70% of the share capital of Mark Limited, an
entity registered as company in Germany. The functional currency of Monsoon Limited is Indian
Rupee and its financial year ends on 31 March, 20X3. The fair value of the net assets of Mark
Limited was 23 million EURO and the purchase consideration paid is 17.5 million EURO on 30
September, 20X2. The exchange rates as on 30 September, 20X2 was ₹ 82 per EURO and at 31
March, 20X3 was ₹ 84 per EURO. On acquisition of Mark limited, what is the value at which the
goodwill / capital reserve has to be recognized in the financial statements of Monsoon Limited as on
31 March 20X3?
SOLUTION
Para 47 of Ind AS 21 requires that goodwill arose on business combination shall be expressed in
the functional currency of the foreign operation and shall be translated at the closing rate in
accordance with paragraphs 39 and 42.
In this case, the amount of goodwill will be as follows:
Net identifiable asset Dr. ₹ 23 million
Goodwill (bal. fig.) Dr. ₹ 1.4 million
To Bank (Purchase consideration) ₹ 17.5 million
To NCI (23 x 30%) ₹ 6.9 million
Thus, goodwill on reporting date in the books of Monsoon Limited would be = 1.4 million EURO x ₹
84 = ₹ 117.6 million
MAY 2018
QUESTION 1
Moon Ltd. acquires 75% of Star Limited on 1st April, 2017 for consideration transferred ₹ 60 lakh.
Moon Limited intends to recognize the Non-Controlling Interest (NCI) at proportionate share of fair
value of identifiable assets. With the assistance of a suitably qualified valuation professional, Moon
Limited measures the identifiable net assets of Star.Limited at ₹ 90 lakh. Moon Limited performs a
review and determines that the business combination did not include any transactions that should
be accounted for separately from the business combination. State whether the procedures followed
by Moon Limited and the resulting measurements are appropriate or not. Also calculate the bargain
purchase gain in the process. .
SOLUTION
The amount of Star Ltd.’s identifiable net assets exceeds the fair value of the consideration
transferred plus the fair value of the NCI in Star Ltd.’s, resulting in an initial indication of a gain on a
bargain purchase. Accordingly, Moon Ltd. reviews the procedures it used to identify and measure
the identifiable net assets acquired, to measure the fair value of both the NCI and the consideration
transferred, and to identify transactions that were not part of the business combination. Following
that review, Moon Ltd. can conclude that the procedures followed and the resulting measurements
were appropriate.
Identifiable net assets 90,00,000
Less: Consideration transferred (60,00,000)
NCI (90,00,000 x 25%) (22,50,000)
Gain on bargain purchase 7,50,000
MAY 2019
QUESTION 2
Deepak Ltd., an automobile group acquires 25% of the voting ordinary shares of Shaun Ltd.,
another automobile business, by paying, ₹ 4,320 crore on 01.04.2017. Deepak Ltd. accounts its

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
investment in Shaun Ltd. using equity method as prescribed under Ind AS 28. At 31.03.2018,
Deepak Ltd. recognised its share of the net asset changes of Shaun Ltd. using equity accounting as
follows:
(₹ in crore)
Share of Profit or Loss 378
Share of Exchange difference in OCI 54
Share of Revaluation Reserve of PPE in OCI 27
The carrying amount of the investment in the associate on 31.03.2018 was therefore ₹ 4,779 crore
(4,320 + 378 + 54 + 27). On 01.04.2018, Deepak Ltd. acquired remaining 75% of Shaun Ltd. for
cash ₹ 13,500 crore. Fair value of the 25% interest already owned was ₹ 4,860 crore and fair valueof
Shaun Ltd.' s identifiable net assets was ₹ 16,200 crore as on 01.04.2018. How should such
business combination be accounted for in accordance with the applicable Ind AS?
SOLUTION
Paragraph 42 of Ind AS 103 provides that in a business combination achieved in stages, the
acquirer shall remeasure its previously held equity interest in the acquiree at its acquisition-date fair
value and recognise the resulting gain or loss, if any, in profit or loss or other comprehensive
income, as appropriate. In prior reporting periods, the acquirer may have recognized changes in the
value of its equity interest in the acquiree in other comprehensive income. If so, the amount that
was recognised in other comprehensive income shall be recognised on the same basis as would be
required if the acquirer had disposed of directly the previously held equity interest.
Applying the above, Deepak Ltd. records the following entry in its consolidated financial statements:
(₹ in crore)
Debit Credit
Identifiable net assets of SHAUN Ltd. Dr. 16,200
Goodwill (W.N.1) Dr. 2,160
Foreign currency translation reserve Dr. 54
PPE revaluation reserve Dr. 27
To Cash 13,500
To Investment in associate – SHAUN Ltd. 4779
To Retained earnings (W.N.2) 27
To Gain on previously held interest in SHAUN 135
recognised in Profit or loss (W.N.3)
(To recognise acquisition of SHAUN Ltd.)
Working Notes:
1. Calculation of Goodwill
₹ in crore
Cash consideration 13500
Add: Fair value of previously held equity interest in SHAUN Ltd. 4860
Total consideration 18360
Less: Fair value of identifiable net assets acquired (16200)
Goodwill 2160
2. The credit to retained earnings represents the reversal of the unrealized gain of ₹ 27
crore in Other Comprehensive Income related to the revaluation of property, plant and
equipment. In accordance with Ind AS 16, this amount is not reclassified to profit or loss.
3. The gain on the previously held equity interest in SHAUN Ltd. is calculated as follows: ₹
₹ in crore
Fair Value of 25 % interest in SHAUN Ltd. at 1st April, 20X8 4860

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Carrying amount of interest in SHAUN Ltd. at 1st April, 20X8 (4779)
81
Unrealised gain previously recognised in OCI 54
Gain on previously held interest in SHAUN Ltd. recognised in profit or 135
loss
NOV 2019
QUESTION 3
Parent A holds 100% in its subsidiary B. Parent A had acquired B, 10 years back and had decided
to account for the acquisition under the purchase method using fair values of the subsidiary B in its
consolidated financial statements. During the current year, A decides to merge B with itself. For the
purpose of this proposed merger, what values of B should be used for accounting under the Ind AS?
SOLUTION
The acquisition of B Ltd. by A Ltd. is business combination under common control. In such a
situation, pooling of interest method should be applied. However, B Ltd. is 100% subsidiary of A Ltd.
and A Ltd. in its Consolidated financial statements use to give the carrying values of assets and
liabilities of B Ltd. at fair value (as per acquisition under purchase method). Hence the carrying
value for the purpose of pooling of interest method will be the values given in Consolidated financial
statements and not in Separate financial statements. In other words, since B Ltd. is merging with A
Ltd. (i.e. parent) nothing has changed and the transaction only means that the assets, liabilities and
reserves of B Ltd. which were appearing in the consolidated financial statements of Group A
immediately before the merger would now be a part of the separate financial statements of A Ltd.
Accordingly, it would be appropriate to recognise the carrying value of the assets, liabilities and
reserves pertaining to B Ltd as appearing in the consolidated financial statements of A Ltd.
NOV 2019 ( MTP APR 2021)
QUESTION 4
The Balance Sheet of David Ltd. and Parker Ltd. as of 31st March, 2019 is given below
ASSETS Note No. X Ltd Y Ltd
Non-current assets
Property, Plant and Equipment 400 600
Financial assets
Investment 300 200
Current assets
Inventories 300 100
Cash and Cash equivalents 150 200
Others 300 300
1850 1600
Equity
Share capital -l Equity shares of ₹ 100 each for 500 400
Parker Ltd. & ₹ 10 each for David Limited
Other Equity 1 700 275
Liabilities

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Long term borrowings 200 300
Deferred tax 20 55
Current liabilities
Short term borrowings 130 170
1850 1600
Other Information :
(i) David Ltd. acquired 70% shares of Parker Ltd. on 1st April, 2019·by issuing its own shares
in the ratio of 1 share of David Ltd. for every 2 shares of Parker Ltd. The fair value of the
shares of David Ltd. was ₹ 50 per share.
(ii) The fair value exercise resulted in the following :
(1) Fair value of property, plant and equipment (PPE) on 1st April, 2019 was ₹ 450 lakh.
(2) David Ltd. agreed to pay an additional payment as consideration that is higher of ₹ 30
lakh
and 25% of any excess profits in the first year after acquisition, over its profits in the
preceding 12 months made by Parker Ltd. This additional amount will be due after 3
years. Parker Ltd. has earned ₹ 20 lakh profit in the preceding year and expects to earn
another ₹ 10 lakh.
(3) In addition to above, David Ltd. also has agreed to pay one of the founder shareholder-
Director a payment of ₹ 25 lakh provided he stays with the Company for two years after
the acquisition.
(4) Parker Ltd. had certain equity settled share-based payment award (original award)
which got replaced by the new awards issued by David Ltd. As per the original term,
the vesting period was 4 years and as of the acquisition date the employees of Parker
Ltd. have already served 2 years of service. As per the replaced awards, the vesting
period has been reduced to one year (one year from the acquisition date). The fair
value of the award on the acquisition date was as follows:
Original award - ₹ 6 lakh
Replacement award - ₹ 9 lakh
(5) Parker Ltd. had a lawsuit pending with a customer who had made a claim of ₹ 35 lakh.
Management reliably estimated the fair value of the liability to be ₹ 10 lakh.
(6) The applicable tax rate for both entities is 40%. You are required to prepare opening
consolidated balance sheet of David Ltd. as on 1 st April, 2019 along with workings.
Assume discount rate of 8%.
SOLUTION
Consolidated Balance Sheet of David Ltd as on 1stApril, 2019 (₹ in lakh)
Non-current assets
Investment 500
Current assets
Inventories 400
Financial Assets:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Cash and Cash equivalents 350
Others 600
3300
Equity
Equity share capital (of face value of INR 10 each) 1 514
Other equity 2 1067.49
Non Controlling Interest 173.70
Financial liabilities:
Long term borrowings 500
Long term provisions (100+80+23.81) 203.81
Deferred tax 11
Current liabilities:
Financial liabilities:
Short term borrowings 300
Trade payables 520
Provision for law suit damages 10
3300
Working Notes:
a) Fair value adjustment- As per Ind AS 103, the acquirer is required to record the assets and
liabilities at their respective fair value. Accordingly, the PPE will be recorded at ₹ 450 lakh.
b) The value of replacement award is allocated between consideration transferred and post
combination expense. The portion attributable to purchase consideration is determined based on
the fair value of the replacement award for the service rendered till the date of the acquisition.
Accordingly, ₹ 3 lakh (6 x 2/4) is considered as a part of purchase consideration and is credited to
David Ltd equity as this will be settled in its own equity. The balance of ₹ 3 lakh will be recorded as
employee expense in the books of Parker Ltd over the remaining life, which is 1 year in this
scenario.
C) There is a difference between contingent consideration and deferred consideration. In the given
case, ₹ 30 lakh is the minimum payment to be paid after 3 years and accordingly will be considered
as deferred consideration. The other element is if company meet certain target then they will get
25% of that or ₹ 30 lakh whichever is higher. In the given case, since the criteria is the minimum
what is expected to be paid, the fair value of the contingent consideration has been considered as
zero. The impact of time value on deferred consideration has been given @ 8%.
d) The additional consideration of ₹ 25 lakh to be paid to the founder shareholder is contingent to
him/her continuing in employment and hence this will be considered as employee compensation
and will be recorded as post combination expenses in the income statement of Parker Ltd.
Working Notes:
Computation of Purchase Consideration ( ₹ in lakh)
Particulars Amount
Share capital of Parker Ltd 4,00,00,000
Number of shares 4,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Shares to be issued 2:1 2,00,000
Fair value ₹ per share 50
₹ in lakhs
PC (2,00,000 x 70% x ₹ 50 per share) (A) 70.00
Deferred consideration after discounting ₹ 30 lakhs for 3
years @ 8% (B) 23.81
Replacement award Market based measure of the
acquiree award (6) x ratio of the portion of the vesting period
completed (2) / greater of the total vesting period (3) or the
original vesting period (4) of the acquiree award ie (6 x 2/4)
(C) 3.00
PC in lakhs (A+B+C) 96.81
1. Allocation of Purchase price
Particulars Book value Fair value FV
(A) (B) adjustment
(A-B)
Property, plant and equipment 600 400 (200)
Investment 200 200 -
Inventories 100 100 -
Financial assets: -
Trade receivables 200 200 -
Cash and cash equivalents 200 200 -
Others 300 300
Less: Long term borrowings (300) (300) -
Long term provisions (80) (80) -
Deferred tax (55) (55) -
Short term borrowings (170) (170) -
Trade payables (320) (320) -
Contingent liability - (10) (10)
Net assets (X) 675 515 (160)
Deferred tax Asset on FV
adjustment(160 x 40%) (Y) 64 160
Net assets (X+Y) 579
Non-controlling interest (579 x 30%) 173.70
rounded off
Capital Reserve (Net assets – NCI – 308.49
PC)
Purchase consideration (PC) 96.81
Computation of consolidated amounts of Consolidated financial statements
David Ltd. Parker Ltd. PPA Total
(pre-acquisition) Allocation
Assets
Non-Current Assets:
Property, plant and equipment 400 600 (150) 850

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Investment 300 200 500
Current assets:
Financial assets:
Others 300 300 600
Equity
Share capital Equity shares of ₹ 100 500
each
Shares allotted to Parker Ltd.
(2,00,000 x 70% x ₹ 10 per share) 14 514
Replacement award 3 3
Security Premium (2,00,000 56 56
shares x 70% x ₹ 40)
Capital Reserve 308.49 308.49
Non-controlling interest 0 173.70 173.70
Long term borrowings 200 300 500
Long term provisions 100 80 23.81 203.81
Deferred tax 20 55 (64) 11
Short term borrowings 130 170 300
Trade payable 200 320 0 520
Liability for lawsuit damages 10 10
Total 1850 925 525 3300
NOV 2020
QUESTION
On 1st April 2019, Big Limited acquired a 35 interest in Dig Limited and achieved a significant
influence. The cost of the investment was ₹ 3,00,000. Dig Limited has net assets of ₹ 5,50,000 as
on 1st April 2019. The fair value of those net assets is ₹ 6,50,000, since the fair value of property,
plant and equipment is ₹ 1,00,000 higher than its book value. This property, plant and equipment
have a remaining useful life of 8 years. For the financial year 2019-2020, Dig Limited earned a profit
(after tax) of ₹ 1,00,000 and paid a dividend of ₹ 11,000 out of these profits. Dig Ltd. has also
recognized the loss of ₹ 15,000, that arose from re-measurement of defined benefit directly in
'Other Comprehensive Income'. Calculate Big Ltd.'s interest in Dig Ltd. as at the year ended 31st
March 2020 under the relevant method.
SOLUTION
Calculation of Big Ltd.’s interest in Dig Ltd at the year ended 31st March, 2020 as per Equity
method:
Cost of investment (35%) 300000

Share in profit after adjustment (Refer Working Note) 30625
Dividend received by Big Ltd from Dig Ltd (35% x ₹ 11,000) (3850)
Big Ltd.’s share of loss in OCI w.r.t Dig Ltd.’s loss from remeasurement of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
defined benefit liability (35% x ₹ 15,000) (5250)
Big Ltd.’s interest in Dig Ltd at the end of the year 321525
Working Note: Computation of Share in profit after adjustment
Big Ltd.’s share of Dig Ltd.’s after tax profit (35% x ₹ 1,00,000) 35,000
Less: Big Ltd.’s share of depreciation based on fair value (35% x ₹ 12,500) (4375)
Share in profit after adjustment 30625

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
INDAS110: CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Illustration 1: Exception to prepare consolidated financial statements
Scenario A:
Following is the structure of a group headed by Company X:
COMPANY X
100%
COMPANY A
100% 100%
COMPANY B COMPANY C
Company X is a listed entity in India and prepares consolidated financial statements as per the requirements of Ind
AS. Company A is an unlisted entity and it is not in the process of listing any of its instruments in public market.
Company X does not object to Company A not preparing consolidated financial statements. Whether Company A is
required to prepare consolidated financial statements as per the requirements of Ind AS 110?
Scenario B:
Assume the same facts as per Scenario A except, Company X is a foreign entity and is listed in stock exchange of a
foreign country and it prepares its financial statements as per the generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP)
applicable to that country. Will your answer be different in this case?
Scenario C:
Assume the same facts as per Scenario A except, 100% of the investment in Company A is held by Mr. X (an
individual) instead of Company X. Will your answer be different in this case?
Solution:
Scenario A:
In this case, Company A satisfies all the conditions for not preparing consolidated financial statements i.e. it is not a
listed entity nor it is in the process of listing, the parent of Company A prepares consolidated financial statements as
per Ind AS which is available for public use and parent of Company A does not object Company A not preparing
consolidated financial statements.
Hence, Company A is not required to prepare consolidated financial statements
Scenario B:
In this case, the consolidated financial statements of parent of Company A are not prepared under Ind AS. Hence
Company A cannot avail the exemption from preparation of consolidated financial statements.
Scenario C:
In this case, Mr. X (an individual) would not be preparing its financial statements as per the requirements of Ind AS
which is available for public use.
Hence Company A cannot avail the exemption from preparation of consolidated financial statements.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 2: Exception to prepare consolidated financial statements
Scenario A:
Following is the structure of a group headed by Company A.
COMPANY A
100% 60%
COMPANY B COMPANY C 100%

COMPANY X
Company A is a listed entity in India and prepares consolidated financial statements as per the requirements of Ind
AS. Company C is an unlisted entity and it is not in the process of listing any of its instruments in public market.
60% of the equity share capital of Company C is held by Company A and balance 40% equity share capital is held
by other outside investors. Company A does not object to Company C not preparing consolidated financial
statements. Whether Company C is required to prepare consolidated financial statements as per the requirements of
Ind AS 110?
Scenario B:
Assume the same facts as per Scenario A except, the balance 40% of the equity share capital of Company C is held
by Company B.
State whether C Limited is required to inform its other owner B Limited (owning 40%) of its intention to not
prepare consolidated financial statements as mentioned in paragraph 4(a)(i)?
Solution:
Scenario A:
Company C is a partly owned subsidiary of Company A. In such case, Company C should inform the other 40%
equity shareholders about Company C not preparing consolidated financial statements and if they do not object then
only Company C can avail the exemption from preparing consolidated financial statements.
Scenario B:
In this scenario, Company C is 100% held by Company A (60% direct investment and 40% investment through
Company B). Hence, Company C is not required to inform to Company B of not preparing consolidated financial
statements and can avail the exemption from preparing the consolidated financial statements.
Illustration 3: Different investors have ability to direct different relevant activities
A Ltd. and B Ltd. have formed a new entity AB Ltd. for constructing and selling a scheme of
residential units consisting of 100 units. Construction of the residential units will be done by A Ltd.
and it will take all the necessary decision related to the construction activity. B Ltd. will do the
marketing and selling related activities for the units and it will take all the necessary decisions
related to marketing and selling. Based on above, who has the power over AB Ltd.?
Solution:
In this case, both the investors A Ltd. and B Ltd. have the rights to unilaterally direct different
relevant activities of AB Ltd. Here, investors shall determine which activities can most
significantly affect the returns of the investee and the investor having the ability to direct those
activities would be considered to have power over the investee. Hence, if the investors
conclude that the construction related activities would most significantly affect the returns of AB
Ltd. then A Ltd. would be said to have power over AB Ltd. On the other hand, if it is
concluded that marketing and selling related activities would most significantly affect the
returns of AB Ltd. then B Ltd. would be said to have power over AB Ltd.
Illustration 4: Determining the relevant activities
A Ltd. is an asset manager of a venture capital fund i.e., Fund X. Out of the total outstanding
units of the fund, 10% units are held by A Ltd. and balance 90% units are held by other investors.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Majority of the unitholders of the fund have right to appoint a committee which will manage the day-
to-day administrative activities of the fund. However, the decisions related to the investments /
divestments to be done by Fund X is taken by asset manager i.e. A Ltd. Based on above, who has
power over Fund X?
Solution:
In this case, A Ltd. is able to direct the activities that can most significantly affect the returns of
Fund X. Hence A Ltd. has power over the investee. However, this does not mean that A Ltd.
Has control over the fund and consideration will have to be given to other elements of control
evaluation as well i.e., exposure to variable returns and link between power and exposure to
variable returns.
Illustration 5(i): Current ability to direct the relevant activities
An investment vehicle (the investee) is created and financed with a debt instrument held by an
investor (the debt investor) and equity instruments held by a number of other investors. The equity
tranche is designed to absorb the first losses and to receive any residual return from the investee.
One of the equity investors who holds 30 per cent of the equity is also the asset manager.
The investee uses its proceeds to purchase a portfolio of financial assets, exposing the investee to
the credit riskassociated with the possible default of principal and interest payments of the assets. The
transaction is marketedto the debt investor as an investment with minimal exposure to the credit risk
associated with the possible default of the assets in the portfolio because of the nature of these
assets and because the equity tranche is designed to absorb the first losses of the investee.
The returns of the investee are significantly affected by the management of the investee’s asset portfolio,
which includes decisions about the selection, acquisition and disposal of the assets within portfolio
guidelines and the management upon default of any portfolio assets. All those activities are
managed by the asset manager until defaults reach a specified proportion of the portfolio value (ie
when the value of the portfolio is such that the equity tranche of the investee has been consumed).
From that time, a third-party trustee manages the assets according to the instructions of the debt
investor.
Based on the above, who has power over the investment vehicle?
Solution:
Managing the investee’s asset portfolio is the relevant activity of the investee.
The asset manager has the ability to direct the relevant activities until defaulted assets reach
the specified proportion of the portfolio value; the debt investor has the ability to direct the
relevant activities when the value of defaulted assets surpasses that specified proportion of the
portfolio value.
The asset manager and the debt investor each need to determine whether they are able to
direct the activities that most significantly affect the investee’s returns, including considering
the purpose and design of the investee as well as each party’s exposure to variability of
returns.
Illustration 5(ii): Voting rights are substantive or not
Scenario A:
Following is the voting power holding pattern of B Ltd.
 10% voting power held by A Ltd.
 90% voting power held by 9 other investor each holding 10%
All the investors have entered into a management agreement whereby they have granted the decision-
making powers related to the relevant activities of B Ltd. to A Ltd. for a period of 5 years.
After 2 years of the agreement, the investors holding 90% of the voting powers have some disputes
with A Ltd. and they want to take back the decision-making rights from A Ltd. This can be done by
passing a resolution with majority of the investors voting in favour of the removal of rights from A
Ltd. However, as per the termination clause of the management agreement, B Ltd. will have to pay
a huge penalty to A Ltd. for terminating the agreement before its stated term.
Whether the rights held by investors holding 90% voting power are substantive?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Scenario B:
Assume the same facts as per Scenario A except, there is no penalty required to be paid by B Ltd.
for termination of agreement before its stated term. However, instead of all other investors, there
are only 4 investors holding total 40% voting power that have disputes with A Ltd. and want to take
back decision- making rights from A Ltd.
Whether the rights held by investors holding 40% voting power are substantive?
Solution:
Scenario A:
If the investors holding 90% of the voting power exercise their right to terminate the
management agreement, then it will result in B Ltd. having to pay huge penalty which will affect
the returns of B Ltd. This is a barrier that prevents such investors from exercising their rights
and hence such rights are not substantive.
Scenario B:
To take back the decision-making rights from A Ltd., investors holding majority of the voting
power need to vote in favour of removal of rights from A Ltd. However, the investors having
disputes with A Ltd. do not have majority voting power and hence the rights held by them are
not substantive.
Illustration 6: Potential voting rights are substantive or not
Scenario A:
An investor is holding 30% of the voting power in ABC Ltd. The investor has been granted an option
to purchase 30% more voting power from other investors. However, the exercise price of the option
is too high compared to the current market price of ABC Ltd. because ABC Ltd. is incurring
losses since last 2 years and it is expected to continue to incur losses in future period as well.
Whether the right held by the investor to exercise purchase option is substantive?
Scenario B:
Assume the same facts as per Scenario A except, the option price is in line with the current market
price of ABC Ltd. and ABC Ltd. is making profits. However, the option can be exercised in next 1
month only and the investor is not in a position to arrange for the require amount in 1 months’ time to
exercise the option. Whether the right held by the investor to exercise purchase option is substantive?
Scenario C:
Assume the same facts as per Scenario A except, ABC Ltd. is making profits. However, the current
market price of ABC Ltd. is not known since the ABC Ltd. is a relatively new company, business of
the company is unique and there are no other companies in the market doing similar business.
Hence the investor is not sure whether to exercise the purchase option. Whether the right held by
the investor to exercise purchase option is substantive?
Solution:
Scenario A:
The right to exercise purchase option is not substantive since the option exercise price is too
high as compared to current market price of ABC Ltd.
Scenario B:
The right to exercise purchase option is not substantive since the time period for the investor to
arrange for the requisite amount for exercising the option is too narrow.
Scenario C:
The right to exercise purchase option is not substantive. This is because the investor is not
able to obtain information about the market value of ABC Ltd. which is necessary in order to
compare the option exercise price with market price so that it can decide whether the exercise
of purchase option would be beneficial or not.
Illustration 7: Removal rights are substantive or not
A venture capital fund is managed by an asset manager who has right to take the investment and
divestments decisions related to the fund corpus. The asset manager is also holding some stake in
the fund. The other investors of the fund have right to remove the asset manager.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
However, in the present scenario, there is absence of other managers who are willing or able to
provide specialised services that the current asset manager is providing and purchase the stake
that the current asset manager is holding in the fund. Whether the removal rights available with other
investors are substantive?
Solution:
If the other investors exercise their removal rights, then it will impact the operations of the fund
and ultimately the returns of the fund since there is no substitute of the current asset manager
available who can manage the corpus of the fund. Hence the removal rights held by other
investors are not substantive.
Illustration 8: Protective rights of a franchisor
ABC Ltd. is a manufacturer of branded garments and is the owner of Brand X. PQR Ltd. has
entered into a franchise agreement with ABC Ltd. to allow PQR Ltd. to set up a retail outlet to sell
the products of Brand X.
As per the agreement, PQR Ltd. will set up the retail outlet from its own funds, decide the capital
structure of the entity, hire employees and their remuneration, select vendors for acquiring capital
items, etc. However, ABC Ltd. will give certain operating guidelines like the interior of the retail
outlet, uniform of the employees and other such guidelines to protect the brand name of ABC Ltd.
Whether the rights held by ABC Ltd. protective or substantive?
Solution:
The activities that most significantly affect the returns of PQR Ltd. are the funding and capital
structure of PQR Ltd., hiring of employees and their remuneration, vendors for capital items,
etc. which are exercisable by PQR Ltd. Further, the retails outlet is being set up by PQR Ltd.
Without any financial support from ABC Ltd. The rights available with ABC Ltd. are to protect
the brand name of ABC Ltd. and such rights do not affect the ability of PQR Ltd. to take
decisions about relevant activities. Hence, the rights held by ABC Ltd. are protective rights.
Illustration 9: Voting rights of investor are sufficient to give it power
An investor holds 45% of the voting rights of an investee. The remaining voting rights are held by
thousands of shareholders, none individually holding more than 1% of the voting rights. None of the
shareholders has any arrangements to consult any of the others or make collective decisions.
Whether the investor holding 45% voting right have power over the investee?
Solution:
On the basis of the absolute size of its holding by the investor and the relative size of the
voting rights held by other shareholders, it is more likely that the investor would have power
over the investee.
Illustration 10: Voting rights of investor are sufficient to give it power
ABC Ltd. holds 40% of the voting rights of XYZ Ltd. The remaining voting rights are held by 6
other shareholders, each individually holding 10% each. Whether the investor holding 40% voting
right have powerover the investee?
Solution:
In this case, it is less likely that ABC Ltd. will have power over XYZ Ltd. since the size of the
number of shareholders required to outvote ABC Ltd. is not so high. Additional facts and
circumstances should also be considered to determine whether ABC Ltd. has power or not.
Illustration 11: Voting patterns at previous shareholders’ meetings
An investor holds 35% of the voting rights of an investee. Three other shareholders each hold 5% of the
voting rights of the investee. The remaining voting rights are held by numerous other shareholders, none
individually holding more than 1% of the voting rights. None of the shareholders has arrangements to
consult any of the others or make collective decisions. Decisions about the relevant activities of the
investee require the approval of a majority of votes cast at relevant shareholders’ meetings—75% of
the voting rights of the investee have been cast at recent relevant shareholders’ meetings.
Whether the investor’s voting rights are sufficient to give it power to direct the relevant activities of
the investee?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
In this case, the active participation of the other shareholders at recent shareholders’ meetings
indicates that the investor would not have the practical ability to direct the relevant activities
unilaterally, regardless of whether the investor has directed the relevant activities because a
sufficient number of other shareholders voted in the same way as the investor.
Investor A and two other investors each hold a third of the voting rights of an investee. The
investee’s business activity is closely related to investor A. In addition to its equity instruments,
investor A also holds debt instruments that are convertible into ordinary shares of the investee at
any time for a fixed price. The conversion rights are substantive. If the debt were converted,
investor A would hold 60% of the voting rights of the investee. Investor A would benefit from
realising synergies if the debt instruments were converted into ordinary shares. Whether investor A
has power over the investee?
Solution:
Investor A has power over the investee because it holds voting rights of the investee together
with substantive potential voting rights that give it the current ability to direct the relevant
activities.
Illustration 13: Purpose and design of the investee
PQR Ltd. has entered into a contract with a state government to construct a power plant and
distribute the electricity generated from the plant to the households of the state. For this, PQR Ltd.
has set up a new entity XYZ Ltd. PQR Ltd. was involved in the design of XYZ Ltd. The decisions
related to the relevant activities of XYZ Ltd. i.e., how much electricity to generate or the price at
which units of electricity to be sold to customers, etc. are not determined by the voting rights.
Whether PQR Ltd. has power over XYZ Ltd.?
Solution:
PQR Ltd. was involved in the design of XYZ Ltd. Accordingly, its involvement in the design may
indicate that the investor had the opportunity to obtain rights that are sufficient to give it power
over the investee. However, being involved in the design of XYZ Ltd. alone is not sufficient to
give PQR Ltd. control over XYZ Ltd. and hence other facts and circumstances, such as other
contractual arrangements, should also be considered.
Illustration 14: Rights contingent upon future events
An investee’s only business activity, as specified in its founding documents, is to purchase
receivables andservice them on a day-to-day basis for its investors. Following is the relevant fact pattern:
 The servicing on a day-to-day basis includes the collection and passing on of principal and
interestpayments as they fall due.
 Upon default of a receivable the investee automatically puts the receivable to an investor as
agreedseparately in an agreement between the investee and the investor.
 The only relevant activity is managing the receivables upon default because it is the only
activity that can significantly affect the investee’s returns.
 Managing the receivables before default is not a relevant activity because the activities
before default are predetermined and amount only to collecting cash flows as they fall due and
passing them on to investors.
Whether the investor has power over the investee?
Solution:
In this question, the design of the investee ensures that the investor has decision-making
power only in case of default of a receivable. The terms of the agreement between investee
and investor are integral to the overall transaction and the establishment of the investee.
Therefore, the terms of the agreement together with the founding documents of the investee
lead to the conclusion that the investor has power over the investee even though the investor
takes ownership of the receivables only upon default and manages the defaulted receivables
outside the legal boundaries of the investee.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 15: Commitment to ensure that an investee operates as designed
A Ltd. is a manufacturer of pharmaceutical products. A Ltd. has invested in share capital of B Ltd.
which is a manufacturer of packing material for pharmaceutical products. A Ltd.’s requirements of
packing materials for its products are entirely supplied by B Ltd. A Ltd. is not purchasing the
packing materials from any other vendors because the materials supplied by other vendors are of
inferior quality. Whether A Ltd. has power over B Ltd.?
Solution:
A Ltd. would be the most affected by the operations of B Ltd. since it is dependent on B Ltd. for
the supply of packing materials. Therefore A Ltd. would be committed to ensure that B Ltd.
operatesas designed. This can be an indicator of A Ltd. having power over B Ltd. But it has
to considerother facts and circumstances as well to conclude whether it control B Ltd. or not.
Illustration 16: Link between power and returns
A decision maker (fund manager) establishes, markets and manages a publicly traded, regulated
fund according to narrowly defined parameters set out in the investment mandate as required by its
local laws and regulations. The fund was marketed to investors as an investment in a diversified
portfolio of equity securities of publicly traded entities. Following is the relevant fact pattern related
to fund manager:
 Within the defined parameters, the fund manager has discretion about the assets in which to
invest.
 The fund manager has made a 10% pro rata investment in the fund and receives a market-
based fee for its services equal to 1% of the net asset value of the fund.
 The fees are commensurate with the services provided.
 The fund manager does not have any obligation to fund losses beyond its 10% investment.
The fund is not required to establish, and has not established, an independent board of directors.
The investors do not hold any substantive rights that would affect the decision-making authority of
the fund manager but can redeem their interests within particular limits set by the fund.
Whether the fund manager controls the fund?
Solution:
Although operating within the parameters set out in the investment mandate and in
accordance with
the regulatory requirements, the fund manager has decision-making rights that give it the
current ability to direct the relevant activities of the fund—the investors do not hold substantive
rights that could affect the fund manager’s decision-making authority. The fund manager
receives a market- based fee for its services that is commensurate with the services provided
and has also made a pro rata investment in the fund. The remuneration and its investment
expose the fund manager to variability of returns from the activities of the fund without creating
exposure that is of such significance that itindicates that the fund manager is a principal.
In this case, consideration of the fund manager’s exposure to variability of returns from the
fund together with its decision-making authority within restricted parameters indicates that the
fund manager is an agent. Thus, the fund manager concludes that it does not control the fund.
A decision maker establishes, markets and manages a fund that provides investment opportunities
to a number of investors. The decision maker (fund manager) must make decisions in the best
interests of all investors and in accordance with the fund’s governing agreements. Nonetheless, the
fund manager has wide decision-making discretion. The fund manager receives a market- based
fee for its services equal to 1% of assets under managementand 20% of all the fund’s profits if a
specified profit level is achieved. The fees are commensurate with the services provided.
Although it must make decisions in the best interests of all investors, the fund manager has
extensive decision- making authority to direct the relevant activities of the fund. The fund manager
is paid fixed and performance- related fees that are commensurate with the services provided. In
addition, the remuneration aligns the interests of the fund manager with those of the other

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
investors to increase the value of the fund, without creating exposure to variability of returns from
the activities of the fund that is of such significance that the remuneration, when considered in
isolation, indicates that the fund manager is a principal.
The above fact pattern and analysis applies to various scenarios described below. Each scenario is
considered in isolation. Determine whether the fund manager control the fund?
Scenario A
The fund manager also has a 2% investment in the fund that aligns its interests with those of the
other investors. The fund manager does not have any obligation to fund losses beyond its 2%
investment. The investors can remove the fund manager by a simple majority vote, but only for
breach of contract.
Scenario B
The fund manager has a more substantial pro rata investment in the fund but does not have any
obligation to fund losses beyond that investment. The investors can remove the fund manager by a
simple majority vote, but only for breach of contract.
Scenario C
The fund manager has a 20% pro rata investment in the fund but does not have any obligation to
fund losses beyond its 20% investment. The fund has a board of directors, all of whose members
are independent of the fund manager and are appointed by the other investors. The board
appoints the fund manager annually. If the board decided not to renew the fund manager’s contract,
the services performed by the fund manager could be performed by other managers in the industry.
Solution:
Scenario A
The fund manager’s 2% investment increases its exposure to variability of returns from the
activities of the fund without creating exposure that is of such significance that it indicates that
the fund manager is a principal. The other investors’ rights to remove the fund manager are
considered to be protective rights because they are exercisable only for breach of contract. In
this example, although the fund manager has extensive decision-making authority and is
exposed to variability of returns from its interest and remuneration, the fund manager’s
exposure indicates that the fund manager is an agent. Thus, the fund manager concludes that
it does not control the fund.
Scenario B
In this scenario, the other investors’ rights to remove the fund manager are considered to be
protective rights because they are exercisable only for breach of contract. Although the fund
manager is paid fixed and performance-related fees that are commensurate with the services
provided, the combination of the fund manager’s investment together with its remuneration
could create exposure to variability of returns from the activities of the fund that is of such
significance that it indicates that the fund manager is a principal. The greater the magnitude of,
and variability associated with, the fund manager’s economic interests (considering its
remuneration and other interests in aggregate), the more emphasis the fund manager would
place on those economic interests in the analysis, and the more likely the fund manager is a
principal.
For example, having considered its remuneration and the other factors, the fund manager might
consider a 20% investment to be sufficient to conclude that it controls the fund. However, in
different circumstances (i.e., if the remuneration or other factors are different), control may
arise when the level of investment is different.
Scenario C
Although the fund manager is paid fixed and performance-related fees that are commensurate
with the services provided, the combination of the fund manager’s 20% investment together with its
remuneration creates exposure to variability of returns from the activities of the fund that is of such
significance that it indicates that the fund manager is a principal. However, the investors have
substantive rights to remove the fund manager—the board of directors provides a mechanism to

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
ensure that the investors can remove the fund manager if they decide to do so.
In this scenario, the fund manager places greater emphasis on the substantive removal rights
in the analysis. Thus, although the fund manager has extensive decision-making authority and
is exposed to variability of returns of the fund from its remuneration and investment, the
substantive rights held by the other investors indicate that the fund manager is an agent. Thus,
the fund manager concludes that it does not control the fund.
An investee is created to purchase a portfolio of fixed rate asset-backed securities, funded by fixed
rate debt instruments and equity instruments. The equity instruments are designed to provide first
loss protection to the debt investors and receive any residual returns of the investee.
The transaction was marketed to potential debt investors as an investment in a portfolio of asset-
backed securities with exposure to the credit risk associated with the possible default of the
issuers of the asset-
backed securities in the portfolio and to the interest rate risk associated with the management of the
portfolio.
On formation, the equity instruments represent 10% of the value of the assets purchased. A
decision maker (the asset manager) manages the active asset portfolio by making investment
decisions within the parameters set out in the investee’s prospectus. For those services, the asset
manager receives a market-based fixed fee (i.e. 1% of assets under management) and
performance-related fees (i.e. 10% of profits) if the investee’s profits exceed a specified level. The
fees are commensurate with the services provided. The asset manager holds 35% of the equity in
the investee. The remaining 65% of the equity, and all the debt instruments, are held by a large
number of widely dispersed unrelated third-party investors. The asset manager can be removed,
without cause, by a simple majority decision of the other investors.
Does the asset manager control the investee?
Solution:
The asset manager is paid fixed and performance-related fees that are commensurate with the
services provided. The remuneration aligns the interests of the fund manager with those of
the other investors to increase the value of the fund. The asset manager has exposure to
variability of returns from the activities of the fund because it holds 35% of the equity and
from its remuneration.
Although operating within the parameters set out in the investee’s prospectus, the asset
manager has the current ability to make investment decisions that significantly affect the
investee’s returns - the removal rights held by the other investors receive little weighting in the
analysis because those rights are held by a large number of widely dispersed investors. In this
example, the asset manager places greater emphasis on its exposure to variability of returns of
the fund from its equity interest, which is subordinate to the debt instruments. Holding 35% of
the equity creates subordinated exposure to losses and rights to returns of the investee, which
are of such significance that it indicates that the asset manager is a principal. Thus, the asset
manager concludes that it controls the investee.
A decision maker (the sponsor) sponsors a fund, which issues short-term debt instruments to
unrelated third- party investors. The transaction was marketed to potential investors as an
investment in a portfolio of highly rated medium-term assets with minimal exposure to the credit
risk associated with the possible default by the issuers of the assets in the portfolio. Various
transferors sell high quality medium-term asset portfolios to the fund. Each transferor services the
portfolio of assets that it sells to the fund and manages receivables on default for a market-based
servicing fee. Each transferor also provides first loss protection against credit losses from its asset
portfolio through over-collateralisation of the assets transferred to the fund. The sponsor establishes
the terms of the fund and manages the operations of the fund for a market- based fee. The fee is
commensurate with the services provided. The sponsor approves the sellers permitted to sell to

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
the fund, approves the assets to be purchased by the fund and makes decisions about the funding
of the fund. The sponsor must act in the best interests of all investors. The sponsor is entitled to
any residual return of the fund and also provides credit enhancement and liquidity facilities to
the fund. The credit enhancement provided by the sponsor absorbs losses of up to 5% of all of
the fund’s assets, after losses are absorbed by the transferors. The liquidity facilities are not
advanced against defaulted assets. The investors do not hold substantive rights that could affect the
decision-making authority of the sponsor. Whether the sponsor has control over the fund?
Solution:
Even though the sponsor is paid a market-based fee for its services that is commensurate with
the services provided, the sponsor has exposure to variability of returns from the activities of
the fund because of its rights to any residual returns of the fund and the provision of credit
enhancement and liquidity facilities (i.e., the fund is exposed to liquidity risk by using short-term
debt instruments to fund medium-term assets). Even though each of the transferors has
decision- making rights that affect the value of the assets of the fund, the sponsor has
extensive decision- making authority that gives it the current ability to direct the activities that
most significantly affect the fund’s returns (i.e. the sponsor established the terms of the fund,
has the right to make decisions about the assets (approving the assets purchased and the
transferors of those assets) and the funding of the fund (for which new investment must be
found on a regular basis)). The right to residual returns of the fund and the provision of credit
enhancement and liquidity facilities exposes the sponsor to variability of returns from the
activities of the fund that is different from that of the other investors. Accordingly, that exposure
indicates that the sponsor is a principal and thus the sponsor concludes that it controls the fund.
The sponsor’s obligation to act in the best interest of all investors does not prevent the sponsor
from being a principal.
INVESTMENT ENTITIES - QUESTIONS
Illustration 20: Business purpose of an investment entity
An asset manager has set up and investment fund for the purpose of acquiring capital contributions
from various investors (by issuing them units in the fund) and investing those contributions in the
equity share capital of various entities for the purpose of earning capital appreciation on those
investments. Following is the existing structure of the fund.*
Apart from the investments in various entities, the investment fund also provides its investee the
strategic advisory services so that it can result in increase in the capital appreciation from
investments in thoseinvestees. It also provides its investees financial support in the form of loan
to provide them with funds for
acquiring capital assets. The investment fund does not hold such investments for a period longer
than 5 years. The investment fund measures and evaluate the performance of the investments on
fair value basis.
Whether the investment fund can be treated as an investment entity?
* Various Investors
Investment Fund
Strategic Advisory Services
and Financial Support
Investment in equity shares of
various entities
Solution:
Out of the three elements of the definition of an investment entity, the investment fund fulfils the two
elements very clearly i.e., it obtains fund from more than one investor for providing investment
management services and measures and evaluates its investments on fair value basis.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The typical characteristics of an investment entity are also present in the structure of the
investment fund i.e., more than one investment, more than one investor, investors are
unrelated and investment fund issues units in the fund to the investors.
With respect to the business objective of the investment fund, the objective is to earn capital
appreciation from its investments. The strategic advisory services and financial support
provided to investees are extended with the intention of earning higher capital appreciation from
the investees.
However, judgement should to be applied that these do not represent substantial business
activity or a separate substantial source of income for the investment fund. If the investment
fund concludes that these services and financial support to investees are not substantial
business activity and substantial source of income for the investment fund, then only the
investment fundcan be treated as an investment entity.
Illustration 21: Exit strategies of an investment entity
ABC Ltd. Is established with primary objective of investing in the equity shares of various entities
across various industries based on the detailed research about each industry and entities within
that industry being done by the investment manager of the company.
The investment manager decides the timing as to when the investments should be made
considering the current market situation. Sometimes, the investment manager decides to invest the
idle funds into short-term to medium-term debt instruments with fixed maturity. The exit strategies
are in place for the investments done in equity shares but the same is not there for investments
done in debt instruments.
Determine whether the entity fulfils the exit strategy condition of being classified as investment entity?
Solution:
The exit strategies are in place for investments done in equity shares. But not in place for
investments done in debt instruments. However, it should be noted that the debt instruments
have fixed maturity period and they cannot be held for indefinite period. Hence, there is no
need for having exit strategies for such instruments. Accordingly, the exit strategy condition is
fulfilled for being classified as investment entity.
Illustration 22: Earnings from investments of an investment entity
PQR Ltd. Is established with primary objective of investing in the equity shares of various
pharmaceutical companies which are involved in the research and development of medicine for a
critical illness. DEF Ltd. Is a follow subsidiary of PQR Ltd. And DEF Ltd. Has entered into
contractual arrangements with all the
investees of PQR Ltd. That in case they are successful in developing the medicine then they will
transfer the patent and distribution rights for that medicine to DEF Ltd. At less then market price.
This arrangement is explained in following diagram:
PQR Ltd. Fellow Subsidiaries DEF Ltd.
Contractual
arrangements
Investment in equity
shares of pharmaceutical
Determine whether PQR Ltd. Can be classified as investment entity?
Solution:
PQR Ltd. And DEF Ltd. Are part of same group. Further, DEF Ltd. Have exclusive right to
acquire the patent and distributions rights from the investees of PQR Ltd. And that too at less
than the market price. Hence, the related party of PQR Ltd. Is in position to obtain benefits
other than capital appreciation and investment income from the investees that are not available

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
to other parties unrelated to the investee. Accordingly, PQR Ltd. Cannot be classified as
investment entity.
Illustration 23
HTF Ltd. Was formed by T Ltd. To invest in technology start-up companies for capital appreciation.
T Ltd. Holds a 70 percent interest in HTF Ltd. And controls HTF Ltd. The other 30 percent
ownership interest in HTF Ltd. Is owned by 10 unrelated investors. T Ltd. Holds options to acquire
investments held by HTF Ltd., at their fair value, which would be exercised if the technology
developed by the investees would benefit the operations of T Ltd. No plans for exiting the
investments have been identified by HTF Ltd. HTF Ltd. Is managed by an investment adviser that
acts as agent for the investors in HTF Ltd.
Determine whether HTF Ltd. Is an investment entity or not.
Solution:
Even though HTF Ltd.’s business purpose is investing for capital appreciation and it provides
investment management services to its investors, HTF Ltd. Is not an investment entity because
of the following arrangements and circumstances:
(a) T Ltd., the parent of HTF Ltd. Holds options to acquire investments in investees held by
HTF Ltd. If the assets developed by the investees would benefit the operations of T Ltd. This
provides a benefit in addition to capital appreciation or investment income; and
(b) the investment plans of HTF Ltd. Do not include exit strategies for its investments, which
are equity investments. The options held by T Ltd. Are not controlled by HTF Ltd. And do
not constitute an exit strategy.
MTP APRAIL 2019
Question 1
A parent purchased an 80% interest in a subsidiary for Rs. 1,60,000 on 1 April 20X1 when the fair value of the
subsidiary’s net assets was Rs. 1,75,000. Goodwill of Rs. 20,000 arose on consolidation under the partial goodwill
method. An impairment of goodwill of Rs. 8,000 was charged in the consolidated financial statements to 31 March
20X3. No other impairment charges have been recorded. The parent sold its investment in the subsidiary on 31
March 20X4 for Rs. 2,00,000. The book value of the subsidiary’s net assets in the consolidated financial statements on
the date of the sale was Rs. 2,25,000 (not including goodwill of Rs. 12,000). When the subsidiary met the criteria to
be classified as held for sale under Ind AS 105, no write down was required because the expected fair value less cost to sell
(of 100% of the subsidiary) was greater than the carrying value.
The parent carried the investment in the subsidiary at cost, as permitted by Ind AS 27.
Calculate gain or loss on disposal of subsidiary in parent’s separate and consolidated financial statements as on
31st March 20X4. Or
Bright Ltd. acquired 30% of East India Ltd. shares for Rs. 2,00,000 on 01-06-20X1. By such an acquisition Bright can
exercise significant influence over East India Ltd. During the financial year ending on 31-03-20X1 East India earned
profits Rs. 80,000 and declared a dividend of Rs. 50,000 on 12-08-20X1. East India reported earnings of Rs. 3,00,000 for
the financial year endingon 31-03-20X2 and declared dividends of Rs. 60,000 on 12-06-20X2.
Calculate the carrying amount of investment in:
(i) Separate financial statements of Bright Ltd. as on 31-03-20X2;
(ii) Consolidated financial statements of Bright Ltd.; as on 31-03-20X2;
(iii) What will be the carrying amount as on 30-06-20X2 in consolidated financial statements?₹ (6 Marks)
Solution
The parent’s separate statement of profit and loss for 20X3-20X4 would show a gain on the sale of investment of Rs.
40,000 calculated as follow:
Rs. ‘000
Sale proceeds 200
Less: Cost of investment in subsidiary (160)
Gain on sale in parent’s account 40

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
However, the group’s statement of profit & loss for 20X3-20X4 would show a gain on the sale of subsidiary
of Rs. 8,000 calculated as follows: Rs.’000
Sale proceeds 200
Less: share of net assets at date of disposal (Rs. 2,25,000 X 80%) (180)
Goodwill on consolidation at date of sale (W.N 1) (12) (192)
Gain on sale in the group’s account 8
Working Note
The goodwill on consolidation (assuming partial goodwill method) is calculated as follows:
Rs.’000
Fair value of consideration at the date of acquisition 160
Non- controlling interest measured at proportionate share of the
acquiree’s identifiable net assets (1,75,000 X 20%) 35
Less: fair value of net assets of subsidiary at date of acquisition (175) (140)
Goodwill arising on consolidation 20
Impairment at 31 March 20X3 (8)
Goodwill at 31 March 20X4 12
(i) Carrying amount of investment in Separate Financial Statement of Bright Ltd.as on 31.03.20X2
Rs.
Amount paid for investment in Associate (on 1.06.20X1) 2,00,000
Less: Pre-acquisition dividend (Rs. 50,000 x 30%) (15,000)
Carrying amount as on 31.3.20X2 as per AS 13 1,85,000
(ii) Carrying amount of investment in Consolidated Financial Statements of Bright Ltd. as on 31.3.20X2 as per
AS 23
Rs.
Carrying amount as per separate financial statements 1,85,000
Add: Proportionate share of profit of investee as per equity
method (30% of Rs. 3,00,000 for 10 months) 75,000
Carrying amount as on 31.3.20X2 2,60,000
(iii) Carrying amount of investment in Consolidated Financial Statement of Bright Ltd. as on 30.6.20X2 as per AS 23
Rs.
Less: Dividend received (Rs. 60,000 x 30% x 10/12) (15,000)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
CONSOLIDATION PROCEDURE FOR SUBSIDIARIES
Illustration 1: Determination of goodwill
A Limited acquires 80% of B Limited by paying cash consideration of ₹ 120 crore. The fair value of
non- controlling interest on the date of acquisition is ₹ 30 crore. The value of subsidiary’s
identifiable net assets as per Ind AS 103 is ₹ 130 crore. Determine the value of goodwill and pass
the journal entry.
Solution:
The amount of non-controlling interest can be measured as per
i) Fair value method or
ii) Proportionate share method (i.e., proportionate share in the net identifiable assets of
the acquiree). The value of goodwill will be different under both the methods. The
goodwill is calculated as per both the methods below:
Fair value method ₹ crore
Fair value of consideration transferred 120
Fair value of non-controlling interest 30
150
Value of subsidiary’s identifiable net assets as per Ind AS 103 (130)
Goodwill 20
Proportionate share method ₹ crore
Proportional share of non-controlling interest in the net identifiable 26
assets of acquiree (130 x 20%)
146
Goodwill 16
Journal entries
Fair value method ₹ crore
Dr. Cr.
Net identifiable assets Dr. 130
Goodwill Dr. 20
To Cash 120
Proportionate share method ₹ crore
Dr. Cr.
Goodwill Dr. 16
To Cash 120
Illustration 2: Determination of goodwill
Ram Ltd. Acquires 60% of Raja Ltd. By paying cash consideration of ₹ 750 lakh (including control
premium). The fair value of non-controlling interest on the date of acquisition is ₹ 480 lakh. The
value of subsidiary’s identifiable net assets as per Ind AS 103 is ₹ 1,000 lakh. Determine thevalue of
goodwill and pass the journal entry.
Solution:
The amount of non-controlling interest can be measures wither as per i) Fair value method or ii)
Proportionate share method (i.e., proportionate share in the net identifiable assets of the
acquiree). The value of goodwill will be different under both the methods. The goodwill is
calculated as per both the methods below:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Fair value method ₹ lakh
1,230
Value of subsidiary’s identifiable net assets as per Ind AS 103 (1,000)
Goodwill 230
Proportionate share method ₹ lakh

Proportional share of non-controlling interest in the net
Identifiable assets of acquiree (1,000 x 40%) 400
1,150
Value of subsidiary’s identifiable net assets as per Ind AS 103 (1,000)
Goodwill 150
Journal entries
Fair value method ₹lakh
Dr. Cr.
Net identifiable assets Dr. 1,000
Goodwill Dr. 230
To Cash 750
Proportionate share method ₹lakh
Dr. Cr.
Net identifiable assets Dr.
1,000
Goodwill Dr.
150
To Cash 750
Illustration 3: Determination of gain on bargain purchase
X Ltd. Acquires 80% of Y Ltd. By paying cash consideration of ₹ 400 lakh. The fair value of non-
controlling interest on the date of acquisition is ₹ 100 lakh. The value of subsidiary’s identifiable
net assets as per Ind AS 103 is ₹ 520 lakh. Determine the value of gain on bargain purchase and
pass the journal entry.
Solution:
The amount of non-controlling interest can be measures wither as per i) Fair value method or ii)
Proportionate share method (i.e., proportionate share in the net identifiable assets of the
acquiree). The value of gain on bargain purchase will be different under both the methods. The
gain is calculated as per both the methods below:
500
Gain on bargain purchase (20)
Proportionate share method ₹ akh
Proportional share of non-controlling interest in the net identifiable assets of acquiree (520 x 20%) 104
504
Gain on bargain purchase (16)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Journal entries
Dr. Cr.
To Cash 400
To Gain on bargain purchase* 20
Proportionate share method ₹ lakh

Dr. Cr.
To Cash 400
To Gain on bargain purchase* 16
* Gain on bargain purchase is either recognised in OCI or is recognised directly in equity as a
capital reserve.
Illustration 4: Determination of goodwill when there is no non-controlling interest
M Ltd. Acquires 100% of N Ltd. By paying cash consideration of ₹ 100 lakh. The value of
subsidiary’sidentifiable net assets as per Ind AS 103 is ₹ 80 lakh. Determine the value of goodwill.
Solution:
The value of goodwill is calculated as follows:
Determination of goodwill ₹ lakh
Goodwill 20
Illustration 5: Step acquisition
RS Ltd. Holds 30% stake in PQ Ltd. This investment in PQ Ltd. Is accounted as an investment in
associate in accordance with Ind AS 28 and the carrying value of such investment in ₹ 100 lakh.
RS Ltd. Purchases the remaining 70% stake for a cash consideration of ₹ 700 lakh. The fair value
of previously held 30% stake is measured to be ₹ 300 lakh on the date of acquisition of 70% stake.
The value of PQ Ltd.’s identifiable net assets as per Ind AS 103 on that date is ₹ 800 lakh. How
should RS Ltd. Account for the business combination?
Solution:
The amount of goodwill is calculated as follows:
Determination of goodwill ₹ lakh
Fair value of previously held equity interest 300
1,000
Goodwill 200
RS Ltd. Should record the difference between the fair value of previously held equity interest in
the subsidiary and the carrying value of that interest in the profit or loss i.e., ₹ 200 lakh (300 – 100)
should be recognised in profit or loss.
Journal entries
Dr. Cr.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Goodwill Dr. 200
To Cash 700
To Investment in associate 100
To Gain on fair valuation of previously held equity interest 200
Illustration 6: Uniform accounting policies
PQR Ltd. Is the subsidiary company of MNC Ltd. In the individual financial statements prepared in
accordance with Ind AS, PQR Ltd. Has adopted Straight-line method (SLM) of depreciation and
MNC Ltd. Has adopted Written-down value method (WDV) for depreciating its property, plant and
equipment. As per Ind AS 110, Consolidated Financial Statements, a parent shall prepare
consolidated financial statements using uniform accounting policies for like transactions and other
events in similar circumstances.
How will these property, plant and equipment be depreciated in the consolidated financial
statements of MNC Ltd. Prepared as per lnd AS?
Solution:
As per paragraph 60 and 61 of Ind AS 16, ‘Property, Plant and Equipment’, a change in the
method of depreciation shall be accounted for as a change in an accounting estimate as per
lnd AS 8 ‘Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors’.
Therefore, the selection of the method of depreciation is an accounting estimate and not an
accounting policy.
The entity should select the method that most closely reflects the expected pattern of
consumption of the future economic benefits embodied in the asset. That method should be
applied consistently from period to period unless there is a change in the expected pattern of
consumption of those future economic benefits in separate financial statements as well as
Therefore, there can be different methods of estimating depreciation for property, plant and
equipment, if their expected pattern of consumption is different. The method once selected in
theindividual financial statements of the subsidiary should not be changed while preparing the
Accordingly, in the given case, the property, plant and equipment of PQR Ltd. (subsidiary
company) may be depreciated using straight line method and property, plant and equipment
of parent company (MNC Ltd.) may be depreciated using written down value method, if such
method closely reflects the expected pattern of consumption of future economic benefits
embodied in the respective assets.
Illustration 7: Uniform accounting policies
H Limited has a subsidiary, S Limited and an associate, A Limited. The three companies are
engaged indifferent lines of business.
These companies are using the following cost formulas for their valuation in accordance with Ind AS
2‘Inventories’.
Name of the Company Cost formula used
H Limited FIFO
S Limited, A Limited Weighted average cost
Whether H Limited is required to value inventories of S Limited and A Limited also using FIFO
formula inpreparing its consolidated financial statements?
Solution:
Paragraph 19 of Ind AS 110 states that a parent shall prepare consolidated financial
statements using uniform accounting policies for like transactions and other events in similar
circumstances.
Paragraph B87 of Ind AS 110 states that if a member of the group uses accounting policies
other than those adopted in the consolidated financial statements for like transactions and
events in similar circumstances, appropriate adjustments are made to that group member’s

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
financial statements in preparing the consolidated financial statements to ensure conformity
with the group’s accounting policies.
Lt may be noted that the above-mentioned paragraphs require an entity to apply uniform
accounting policies “for like transactions and events in similar circumstances”. If any member
of the group follows a different accounting policy for like transactions and events in similar
circumstances, appropriate adjustments are to be made in preparing consolidated financial
statements.
Paragraph 5 of Ind AS 8 defines accounting policies as “the specific principles, bases,
conventions, rules and practices applied by an entity in preparing and presenting financial
statements.”
Ind AS 2 requires inventories to be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
Paragraph 25 of Ind AS 2 states that the cost of inventories shall be assigned by using FIFO or
weighted average cost formula. An entity shall use the same cost formula for all inventories
having a similar nature and use to the entity. For inventories with a different nature or use,
different cost formulas may be justified.
Elaborating on the requirements of paragraph 25, paragraph 26 of Ind AS 2 illustrates that
inventory used in one operating segment may have a use to the entity different from the
same type of inventories used in another operating segment. However, a difference in
geographical location of inventories (or in the respective tax rules), by itself, is not sufficient to
justify the use of different cost formulas.
Paragraph 36(a) of Ind AS 2 requires disclosure of “the accounting policies adopted in
measuring inventories, including the cost formula used”. Thus, as per Ind AS 2, the cost
formula applied in valuing inventories is also an accounting policy.
As mentioned earlier, as per Ind AS 2, different cost formulas may be justified for inventories of
a different nature or use. Thus, if inventories of S Limited and A Limited differ in nature or use
from inventories of H Limited, then use of cost formula (weighted average cost) different from
that applied in respect of inventories of H Limited (FIFO) in consolidated financial statements
may be justified. In other words, in such a case, no adjustment needs to be made to align the
cost formula applied by S Limited and A Limited to cost formula applied by H Limited.
Illustration 8: Different reporting dates
How should assets and liabilities be classified into current or non-current in consolidated financial
statements when parent and subsidiary have different reporting dates?
Solution:
Paragraphs B92 and B93 of Ind AS 110 require subsidiaries with reporting period end different
from parent, to provide additional information or details of significant transactions or events if it
is impracticable to provide additional information to enable the parent entity to consolidate such
financial information at group’s reporting period end.
The appropriate classification of the assets and liabilities as current or non-current in the
consolidated financial statements has to be determined by reference to the reporting period end of
the group. Accordingly, when a subsidiary’s financial statements are for a different reporting period
end, it is necessary to review the subsidiary’s balance sheet to ensure that items are correctly
classified as current or non-current as at the end of the group’s reporting period.
For example, a subsidiary with the financial year end of 31st December, 20X1 has a payable
outstanding that is due for payment on 1st January, 20X3, and has accordingly classified it as
non- current in its balance sheet. The financial year end of the parent’s consolidated financial
statements is 31st March 20X2. Due to the time lag, the subsidiary’s payable falls due within
12 months from the end of the parent’s reporting period.
Accordingly, in this case, the payable should be classified as a current liability in the
consolidated financial statements of the parent because the amount is repayable within nine
months of the end of the parent’s reporting period.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 9: Different reporting dates
A Limited, an Indian Company has a foreign subsidiary, B Inc. Subsidiary B Inc. has taken a long-
term loan from a foreign bank, which is repayable after the year 20X9. However, during the year
ended 31st March, 20X2, it breached one of the conditions of the loan, as a consequence of which
the loan became repayable on demand on the reporting date. Subsequent to year end but before
the approval of the financial statements, B Inc. rectified the breach and the bank agreed not to
demand repayment and to let the loan run for its remaining period to maturity as per the original
loan terms. While preparing its standalone financial statements as per IFRS, B Inc. has classified
this loan as a current liability in accordance with IAS 1‘Presentation of Financial Statements’.
Whether A limited is required to classify such loan as current while preparing its consolidated
financial statement under Ind AS?
Solution:
As per paragraph 74 of Ind AS 1, where there is a breach of a material provision of a long-
term loan arrangement on or before the end of the reporting period with the effect that the
liability becomes payable on demand on the reporting date, the entity does not classify the
liability as current, if the lender agreed, after the reporting period and before the approval of
the financial statements for issue, not to demand payment as a consequence of the breach.
The above position under Ind AS 1 differs from the corresponding position under IAS 1. As per
paragraph 74 of IAS 1, when an entity breaches a provision of a long-term loan arrangement on or
before the end of the reporting period with the effect that the liability becomes payable on demand,
it classifies the liability as current, even if the lender agreed, after the reporting period and before
the recognized on of the financial statements for issue, not to demand payment as a consequence
of the breach. An entity classifies the liability as current because, at the end of the reporting period,
it does not have an unconditional right to defer its settlement for at least twelve months after those
dates.
Accordingly, the loan liability recognized as current liability by B Inc. in its standalone financial
statements prepared as per IFRS, should be aligned as per Ind AS in the consolidated
financial statements of A Limited and should be classified as non-current in the consolidated
financial statements of A Limited in accordance with lnd AS 1.
Illustration 10: Dividend proposed by subsidiary
XYZ Ltd. Purchased 80% shares of ABC Ltd. On 1st April, 20X1 for ₹ 1,40,000. The issued capital of
ABC Ltd., on 1st April, 20X1 was ₹ 1,00,000 and the balance in the Statement of Profit and Loss was ₹
60,000.
For the year ending on 31st March, 20X2 ABC Ltd. Has earned a profit of ₹ 20,000 and later on it
declared and paid a dividend of ₹ 30,000.
Assume, the fair value of non-controlling interest is same as the fair value on a per-share basis of
the purchased interest#. All net assets are identifiable net assets, there are no non-identifiable
assets. The fair value of identifiable net assets is ₹ 1,50,000.
Show by an entry how the dividend should be recorded in the books of XYZ Ltd. Whenever it is
receivedafter approval in the ensuing annual general meeting.
What is the amount of non-controlling interest as on 1st April, 20X1 (using Fair value Method) and
31st March, 20X2? Also pass a journal entry on the acquisition date.
(This assumption is only for illustration purpose. However, in practical scenarios the fair value of
NCI willbe different than the fair value of the controlling interest.)
Solution:
XYZ Ltd.’s share of dividend ₹ 30,000 x 80% = ₹ 24,000.
₹
Dr. 24,000 Cr.
Bank Dr.
To Profit & Loss A/c 24,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Calculation of Non- controlling interest and Journal Entry
NCI on 1st April 20X1 = 20% of the fair value on a pre-share basis of the purchased interest.
= 20% x ₹ 1,75,000 (W.N.1) = ₹35,000
The journal entry recorded on the acquisition date for the 80% interest acquired is as follows:
₹
Identifiable net assets Dr. Dr. 1,50,000 Cr.
Goodwill (Balancing Figure) Dr. 25,000
To Cash 1,40,000
To NCI 35,000
Working Note 1
Fair value on a per-share basis of the purchased interest / Fair Value of Identifiable net
assets
= consideration transferred x 100/80 = 1,40,000 x 100/80 = ₹ 1,75,000
NCI on 31st March 20X2 = NCI on 31st March 20X1 + Share of NCI in Profits of 20X1- 20X2
= 35,000 + (20,000 X 20%) = ₹ 39,000
Note: Dividend as per Ind AS will be recognized only when approval by the shareholder is
received in the annual general meeting.
From the facts given in the above illustration, calculate the amount of non-controlling interest as on 1st
April, 20X1 (Using NCI’s proportionate share method) and 31st March, 20X2. Also pass a journal
entry on the acquisition date.
Solution:
NCI on 1st April 20X1 = 20% of the fair value on identifiable assets.
= 20% x ₹ 1,50,000 = ₹30,000
₹
Dr. Cr.
To Cash 1,40,000
To NCI 30,000
NCI on 31st March 20X2 = NCI on 31st March 20X1 + Share of NCI in Profits of 20X1- 20X2
= 30,000 + (20,000 X 20%) = ₹ 34,000
Note: Dividend as per Ind AS will be recognized only when approval by the shareholder is
received in the annual general meeting.
The facts are same as in the above illustration except that the fair value of net identifiable asset is ₹
1,60,000. Calculate NCI and Pass Journal Entry on the acquisition date. Note: Use fair value method
for 31st March 20X1.
Solution:
Calculation of Non- controlling interest and Journal Entry
NCI on 1st April 20X1 = 20% of the fair value on a pre-share basis of the purchased interest.
= 20% x ₹ 1,75,000 (W.N.1) = ₹35,000
₹
Dr. Cr.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
To Cash 1,40,000
To NCI 35,000
Working Note 1
Fair value on a per-share basis of the purchased interest / Fair Value of Identifiable net assets
= consideration transferred x 100/80 = 1,40,000 x 100/80 = ₹ 1,75,000
NCI on 31st March 20X2 = NCI on 31st March 20X1 + Share of NCI in Profits of 20X1- 20X2 = 35,000
+ (20,000 x 20%) = ₹ 39,000
Note: Dividend as per Ind AS will be recognized only when approval by the shareholder
isreceived
The facts are same as in the above illustration except that the fair value of net identifiable asset is ₹
1,60,000. Calculate NCI and Pass Journal Entry on the acquisition date. Use NCI’s proportionate
share method for 31st March 20X1.
Solution:
NCI on 1st April 20X1 = 20% of the fair value on identifiable assets. = 20% x ₹ 1,60,000 =
₹32,000The journal entry recorded on the acquisition date for the 80% interest acquired
is as follows:
₹
Dr. Cr.
To Cash 1,40,000
To NCI 32,000
st st
NCI on 31 March 20X2 = NCI on 31 March 20X1 + Share of NCI in Profits of 20X1- 20X2
= 32,000 + (20,000 X 20%) = ₹ 36,000
Note: Dividend as per Ind AS will be recognized only when approval by the shareholder
is received.
Illustration 14: Elimination of intra-group profit on sale of assets by a subsidiary to its
parent A parent owns 60% of a subsidiary. The subsidiary sells some inventory to the parent for ₹
35,000 and makes a profit of ₹ 15,000 on the sale. The inventory is in the parent’s balance sheet at
the year end.
Examine the treatment of intra-group transaction and pass the necessary journal entry.
Solution:
The parent must eliminate 100% of the unrealized profit on consolidation. The inventory will,
therefore, be carried in the group’s balance sheet at ₹ 20,000 (₹ 35,000 - ₹ 15,000). The consolidated
income statement will show a corresponding reduction in profit of ₹ 15,000.
₹’ 000
Dr. Cr.
Consolidated revenue Dr. 35
To Cost of sales 20
To Inventory 15
The reduction of group profit of ₹ 15,000 is allocated between the parent company and non-
controllinginterest in the ratio of their interests 60% and 40%.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 15: Elimination of intra-group profit on sale of assets by a parent to its
subsidiary
In the above illustration, assume that it is the parent that makes the sale. The parent owns 60% of a
subsidiary. The parent sells some inventory to the subsidiary for ₹ 35,000 and makes a profit of ₹
15,000. On the sale the inventory is in the subsidiary’s balance sheet at the year end. Examine the
treatment of intra-group transaction and pass the necessary journal entry.
Solution:
The parent must eliminate 100% of the unrealized profit on consolidation. The inventory will,
therefore, be carried in the group’s balance sheet at ₹ 20,000 (₹ 35,000 - ₹ 15,000). The
consolidated income statement will show a corresponding reduction in profit of ₹ 15,000.
The double entry on consolidation is as follows:
₹’ 000
Dr. Cr.
To Cost of sales 20
To Inventory 15
In this case, since it is the parent that has made the sale, the reduction in profit of ₹ 15,000 is
allocated entirely to the parent company.
Illustration 16: Inventories of subsidiary out of purchases from the parent
A Ltd, a parent company sold goods costing ₹ ‘200 lakh to its 80% subsidiary B Ltd. At ₹ 240 lakh.
50% of these goods are lying at its stock. B Ltd. Has measured this inventory at cost i.e., at ₹ 120
lakh. Show the necessary adjustment in the consolidated financial statements (CFS). Assume 30%
tax rate.
Solution:
A Ltd. shall reduce the inventories of ₹ 120 lakh of B Ltd., by ₹ 20 lakh in CFS. This will increase
expenses and reduce consolidated profit by ₹ 20 lakh. Lt shall also create deferred tax asset of ₹ 6
lakh since accounting base of inventories (₹ 100 lakh) is lower than its tax base (₹ 120 lakh).
Illustration 17: Inventories of parent out of purchases from the subsidiary
Ram Ltd., a parent company purchased goods costing ₹ 100 lakh from its 80% subsidiary Shyam
Ltd. At ₹ 120 lakh. 50% of these goods are lying at the godown. Ram Ltd. Has measured this
inventory at cost i.e., at ₹ 60 lakh. Show the necessary adjustment in the consolidated financial
statements (CFS). Assume 30% tax rate.
Solution:
Ram Ltd. shall reduce the inventories of ₹ 60 lakh of Shyam Ltd., by ₹ 10 lakh in CFS This will
increase expenses and reduce consolidated profit by ₹ 10 lakh. Lt shall also create deferred tax
assetof ₹ 3 lakh since accounting base of inventories (₹ 50 lakh) is lower than its tax base (₹ 60 lakh).
Illustration 18: Property, plant and equipment (PPE) sold by parent to subsidiary
A Ltd. (which is involved in the business of selling capital equipment) a parent company sold a
capital equipment costing ₹ 100 lakh to its 80% subsidiary B Ltd. At ₹ 120 lakh. The capital
equipment is recorded as PPE by B Ltd. The useful life of the PPE on the date of transfer was 10
years. Show the necessary adjustment in the consolidated financial statements (CFS)
Solution:
A Ltd. shall reduce the value of PPE of ₹ 120 lakh of B Ltd., by ₹ 20 lakh in CFS This will increase
expenses and reduce consolidated profit by ₹ 20 lakh. Further, A Ltd. should also reduce the
depreciation charge of B Ltd. to the extent of value of PPE reduced as above. Hence, A Ltd. should
reduce the depreciation by ₹ 2 lakh (₹ 20 lakh ÷ 10 years). Further, the sales and cost of goods sold
recorded by parent A Ltd. shall also be eliminated. The double entry on consolidation is as follows:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
₹’ lakh
Dr. Cr.
To Cost of sales 100
To PPE 18
To Depreciation 2
Illustration 19: Attribution of profit / loss to non-controlling interest
A Ltd. Acquired 70% equity shares of B Ltd. On 1.4.20X1 at cost of ₹ 10,00,000 when B Ltd. Had
an equity share capital of ₹ 10,00,000 and other equity of ₹ 80,000. In the four consecutive years
B Ltd. Fared badly and suffered losses of ₹ 2,50,000, ₹ 4,00,000, ₹ 5,00,000 and ₹ 1,20,000
respectively. Thereafter in 20X5-20X6, B Ltd. Experienced turnaround and registered an annual
profit of ₹ 50,000. In the next two years i.e., 20X6-20X7 and 20X7-20X8, B Ltd. Recorded annual
profits of ₹ 1,00,000, and ₹ 1,50,000 respectively.Show the non- controlling interests and goodwill
at the end of each year for the purpose of consolidation. Assume that the assets are at fair value.
Solution:₹
Year Profit / Non-controlling Additional Goodwill
(Loss) interest (30%) consolidatedP&L
(Dr.) / Cr.
At the time of 3,24,000 (W.N.) 2,44,000(W.N.)
acquisition in 20X1
20X1-20X2 (2,50,000) (75,000) (1,75,000) 2,44,000
2,49,000
20X2-20X3 (4,00,000) (1,20,000) (2,80,000) 2,44,000
1,29,000
20X3-20X4 (5,00,00) (1,50,000) (3,50,000) 2,44,000
(21,000)
20X4-20X5 (1,20,000) (36,000) (84,000) 2,44,000
(57,000)
20X5-20X6 50,000 15,000 35,000 2,44,000
(42,000)
20X6-20X7 1,00,000 30,000 70,000 2,44,000
(12,000)
20X7-20X8 1,50,000 45,000 1,05,000 2,44,000
33,000
Working note:
Calculation of non-controlling interest: ₹
Share capital 10,00,000
Other equity 80,000
Total 10,80,000
NCI (30% x 10,80,000) 3,24,000
NCI is measured at NCI’s proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net
assets.(Considering the carrying amount of share capital & other equity to be
fair value)
Calculation of Goodwill: ₹
Consideration 10,00,000
Non-controlling interest 3,24,000
Less: Net Assets (10,80,000)
Goodwill 2,44,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 20: Non-controlling interest and goodwill
From the following data, determine in each case:
1) Non-controlling interest at the date of acquisition (using proportionate share method) and at the
date of consolidation
2) Goodwill or Gain on bargain purchase.
Amount of holding company’s share of profit in the consolidated Balance Sheet assuming holding
company’s own retained earnings to be ₹ 2,00,000 in each case
Case Subsidiary % ofshares Cost Date of Acquisition Consolidation date
Company owned 1.04.20X1 31.03.20X2
Share Retained Share Retained
Capital earnings Capital earnings
[A] [B] [C] [D]
Case 1 A 90% 1,40,000 1,00,000 50,000 1,00,000 70,000
Case 2 B 85% 1,04,000 1,00,000 30,000 1,00,000 20,000
Case 3 C 80% 56,000 50,000 20,000 50,000 20,000
Case 4 D 100% 1,00,000 50,000 40,000 50,000 56,000
The company has adopted an accounting policy to measure non-controlling interest at NCI’s
proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets. It may be assumed that the fair value
of acquiree’s net identifiable assets is equal to their book values.
Solution:
(1) Non-controlling Interest = the equity in a subsidiary not attributable, directly or indirectly,
to a parent. Equity is the residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting all its
liabilities i.e. in this given case Share Capital + Balance in Statement of Profit & Loss
(Assuming it to be the net aggregate value of identifiable assets in accordance with Ind AS)
% shares Non-controlling interest Non-controlling interest as
ownedby NCI as at the date of at the dateof consolidation
[E] acquisition [E] X [A + B] [E] X [C + D]
Case 1 [100-90] 10% 15,000 17,000
Case 2 [100-85] 15% 19,500 18,000
Case 3 [100-80] 20% 14,000 14,000
Case 4 [100-100] Nil Nil Nil
(2) Calculation of Goodwill or Gain on bargain purchase
Consideration Non- Net Goodwill [G] Gain on bargain
[G] controlling Identifiable + [H] – [I] Purchase [I]–
interest [H] assets [G] – [H]
[A] + [B] = [I]
Case 1 1,40,000 15,000 1,50,000 5,000 -
Case 2 1,04,000 19,500 1,30,000 - 6,500
Case 3 56,000 14,000 70,000 Nil Nil
Case 4 1,00,000 0 90,000 10,000 -
(3) On 31.03.20X2 in each case the following amount shall be added or deducted
from the balanceof holding Co.’s Retained earnings.
% Share Retained Retained Retained Amount to be
Holding earnings as on earnings as on earningspost- added/(deducted) from
[K] 31.03.20X1 [L] consolidation acquisition holding’s Retained
Date [M] [N] = [M] – [L] earnings [O] = [K] X [N]
1 90% 50,000 70,000 20,000 18,000
2 85% 30,000 20,000 (10,000) (8,500)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
3 80% 20,000 20,000 Nil Nil
4 100% 40,000 56,000 16,000 16,000
Illustration 21: Sale of 20% interest in a wholly- owned subsidiary
Entity P sells a 20% interest in a wholly owned subsidiary to outside investors for ₹ 100 lakh in cash.
The carrying value of the subsidiary’s net assets is ₹ 300 lakh, including goodwill of ₹ 65 lakh from
the subsidiary’s initial acquisition. Pass journal entries to record the transaction.
Solution:
The accounting entry recorded on the disposition date for the 20% interest sold as follows:
₹ lakh
Dr. Cr.
Cash Dr. 100
To Non-controlling interest (20% x 300 lakh) 60
To Other Equity (Gain on sale of interest in subsidiary) 40
As per para B96 of Ind AS 110, where proportion of the equity of NCI changes, then group
shall adjust controlling and non-controlling interest and any difference between amount by
which NCI (60 Iakh) is adjusted and fair value of consideration received (100 lakh) to be
attributed to parent in other equity ie. 40 lakhs.
Illustration 22: Acquisition of additional stake in a subsidiary
Entity A acquired 60% of entity B two years ago for ₹ 6,000. At that time, entity B’s fair value was ₹
10,000. Lt had net assets with a fair value of ₹ 6,000 (which is assumed same as book value).
Goodwill of ₹ 2,400 was recorded (being ₹ 6,000 – (60% x ₹ 6,000). On 1 October 20X0, entity A
acquires a further 20% interest in entity B, taking its holding to 80%. At that time the fair value of
entity B is ₹ 20,000 and entity A pays ₹ 4,000 for the 20% interest. At the time of the purchase the
fair value of entity B’s net assets is ₹ 12,000 and the carrying amount of the non- controlling
interest is ₹ 4,000.
Pass journal entries to record the transaction.
Solution:
The accounting entry recorded for the purpose of the non- controlling interest is as follows:
₹
Dr. Cr.
Non-controlling interest (4,000 ÷ 40 x 20) Dr. 2,000
Other Equity (Loss on acquisition of interest in 2,000
subsidiary) Dr.
To Cash 4,000
which NCI (₹ 2,000) is adjusted and fair value of consideration received (₹ 4,000) to be attributed to
parentin other equity i.e. ₹2,000.
Note: This illustration mentions two types of fair values:
 Fair value of Entity B, and
 Fair value of net assets of Entity B
It should be borne in mind that the two fair values are different concepts. The former is used
only for the purpose of determining the consideration to be paid for purchase of equity interests.
It can be seen that for the initial stake purchase, Entity A paid 60% of the “fair valueof Entity
B” i.e., 60% of ₹ 10,000 = ₹ 6,000. Further, for the second purchase transaction, Entity A paid
20% of the “fair value of Entity B” i.e., 20% of ₹20,000 = ₹4,000.
The latter i.e., fair value of net assets of Entity B is used for the purpose of accounting. It can
be seen that the goodwill arising on acquisition of Entity B is determined as difference between

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
consideration paid i.e., ₹ 6,000 and Entity A’s share in fair value of net assets of Entity B on date of
acquisition i.e., 60% of ₹ 6,000 = ₹ 6,000 minus ₹ 3,600 = ₹ 2,400. The fair value of net assets afterthe
date of acquisition (i.e., ₹ 12,000 in this illustration) is not relevant for accounting purposes.
A Ltd. Acquired 10% additional shares of its 70% subsidiary. The following relevant information is
available in respect of the change in non-controlling interest on the basis of Balance Sheet finalized
as on 1.4.20X0:
₹ in thousand
Separate financial statements As on 31.3.20X0
Investment in subsidiary (70% interest) – at cost 14,000
Purchase price for additional 10% interest 2,600
Consolidated financial statements
Non-controlling interests (30%) 6,600
Consolidated profit & loss account balance 2,000
Goodwill 600
The reporting date of the subsidiary and the parent is 31 March 20X0. Prepare note showing
adjustment for change of non-controlling interest. Should goodwill be adjusted for the change?
Solution:
The following accounting entry is passed:
₹ ‘000
Dr. Cr.
Non-controlling interest (6,600 ÷ 30 x 10) Dr 2,200
Other Equity (Loss on acquisition of interest in subsidiary) Dr 400
To Cash 2,600
which NCI (₹ 22,00,000) is adjusted and fair value of consideration received (₹ 26,00,000) to be
attributedto parent in other equity i.e. ₹ 4,00,000.
Consolidated goodwill is not adjusted.
A Ltd. Acquired 70% shares of B Ltd. On 1.4.20X0 when the fair value of net assets of B Ltd. Was ₹
200 lakh. During 20X0-20X1, B Ltd. Made profit of ₹ 100 lakh. Individual and consolidated balance
sheets as on 31.3.20X1 are as follows:
₹ lakh
A B Group
Assets
Goodwill 10
PPE 627 200 827
Financial assets:
Investments 150
Cash 200 30 230
Other current assets 23 70 93
1,000 300 1160
Equity and liability
Share capital 200 100 200
Other equity 800 200 870
Non-controlling interest 90
1,000 300 1160

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
A Ltd. Acquired another 10% stake in B Ltd. On 1.4.20X1 at ₹ 32 lakh. The proportionate carrying
amount of the non-controlling interest is ₹ 30 lakh. Show the individual and consolidated balance
sheet of the group immediately after the change in non-controlling interest
Solution:
₹ lakh
A B Workings Group
Assets
Goodwill 10
PPE 627 200 827
Financial assets:
Investments (150+32) 182
Cash* (200-32) 168 30 (200+30)-32) 198
Other current assets 23 70 93
1,000 300 1,128
Equity and liability
Share capital 200 100 200
Other equity 800 200 870-2 868
Non-controlling interest 90-30 60
1,000 300 1,128
*Cash has been adjusted through Individual Balance Sheet.
Journal entry
₹ lakh
Dr. Cr.
Non-controlling interest (90 ÷ 30 x 10) Dr. 30
Other Equity (Loss on acquisition of interest in subsidiary) Dr. 2
To Cash 32
Illustration 25: Reduction in interest in subsidiary
Amla Ltd. Purchased a 100% subsidiary for ₹ 10,00,000 at the end of 20X1 when the fair value of
the subsidiary Lal Ltd.’s net asset was ₹ 8,00, 000.
The parent sold 40% of its investment in the subsidiary in March 20X4 to outside investors for ₹
9,00,000. The parent still maintains a 60% controlling interest in the subsidiary. The carrying value
of the subsidiary’s net assets is ₹ 18,00,000 (including net assets of ₹ 16,00,000 & goodwill of ₹
2,00,000).
Calculate gain / loss on sale of interest in subsidiary as on 31st March 20X4.
Solution:
As per Ind AS 110, a change in ownership that does not result in a loss of control is equity
transaction. The identifiable net assets (including goodwill) remain unchanged and any
difference between the amount by which the non-controlling interest is recorded (including the
non- controlling interest portion of goodwill) and a fair value of the consideration received is
recognized directly in equity and attributed to the controlling interest. For disposals that do not
result in the loss of control, the change in the non-controlling interest is recorded at its
proportionate interest of the carrying value of the subsidiary.
Gain on the sale of the investment of ₹ 5,00,000 in parent’s separate financial statements
calculated as follows:
₹’ 000
Sale proceeds 900
Less: Cost of investment in subsidiary (10,00,000 x 40%) (400)
Gain on sale in the parent’s separate financial statements 500

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
As discussed above, the group’s consolidated income statement for 31st March 20X4 would
show no gain on the sale of the interest in the subsidiary. Instead, the difference between the
fair value of the consideration received and the amount by which the non-controlling interest is
recorded is recognized directly in equity.
₹’ 000
Sale proceeds 900
Less: Recognition of non-controlling interest (18,00,000 x 40%) (720)
Credit to other equity 180
The entry recognized in the consolidated accounts under Ind AS 110 is:
₹’ 000
Dr. Cr.
Cash Dr. 900
The difference between the gain in the parent’s income statement and the increase reported in the
group’s consolidated equity is ₹ 3,20,000. This difference represents the share of post- acquisition
profits retained in the subsidiary ₹ 3,20,000 [(that is, 18,00,000 – 10,00,000) x 40%] that have been
reported in the group’s income statement up to the date of sale.
Illustration 26: Reduction in interest in subsidiary
Entity A sells 30% interest in its wholly-owned subsidiary to outside investors in an arm’s length
transaction for ₹ 500 crore in cash and retains a 70% controlling interest in the subsidiary. At the
time of the sale, the carrying value of the subsidiary’s net assets in the consolidated financial
statements of Entity A is ₹ 1,300 crore, additionally, there is a goodwill of ₹ 200 crore that arose
on the subsidiary’s acquisition. Entity A initially accounted for NCI representing present
ownership interests in the subsidiary at fair value and it recognises subsequent changes in NCI in
the subsidiary at NCI’s proportionate share in aggregate of net identifiable assets and associated
goodwill. How should Entity A account for the transaction?
Solution:
As per paragraph 23 of Ind AS 110, changes in a parent’s ownership interest in a subsidiary
that do not result in the parent losing control of the subsidiary are equity transactions (i.e.
transactions with owners in their capacity as owners). Thus, changes in ownership interest that
do not result in loss of control do not impact goodwill associated with the subsidiary or the
Paragraph B96 of Ind AS 110 states that when the proportion of the equity held by non-
controlling interests’ changes, an entity shall adjust the carrying amounts of the controlling and
non-controlling interests to reflect the changes in their relative interests in the subsidiary. The
entity shall recognise directly in equity any difference between the amount by which the non-
controlling interests are adjusted and the fair value of the consideration paid or received, and
attribute it to the owners of the parent.
Thus, at the time of sale of 30% of its equity interest, consolidated financial statements include
an amount of ₹ 1,500 crore in respect of the subsidiary. Accordingly, in the present case, the
accounting entry on the date of sale of the 30% interest would be as follows:
₹ in crore
Dr. Cr.
Cash Dr. 900
To Non-controlling interest (1,500 x 30%) 450
Illustration 27: Treatment of goodwill and non-controlling interest where a parent holds an
indirect interest in a subsidiary
A parent company (entity A) has an 80% owned subsidiary (entity B). Entity B makes an acquisition

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
for cash of a third company (entity C), which it then wholly owns. Goodwill of ₹ 1,00,000 arises on
theacquisition of entity C.
How should that goodwill be reflected in consolidated financial statement of entity A? Should it be
reflected as 100% of the goodwill with 20% then being allocated to the non- controlling interest, or 80%
of thegoodwill that arises?
Solution:
Assuming that entity B prepares consolidated financial statements, 100% of the goodwill would
be recognized on the acquisition of entity C in those financial statements. Entity A should
reflect 100% of goodwill and allocate 20% to the non- controlling interest in its consolidated
financial statements. This is because the non-controlling interest is a party to the transaction
and the goodwill forms part of the net assets of the sub group (in this case, the sub group
being the group headed by entity B).
Illustration 28: Preparation of consolidated financial statements
Given below are the financial statements of P Ltd and Q Ltd as on 31.3.20X1:
Balance Sheets (₹ in Lakhs)
P Ltd. Q Ltd.
Assets
Non-current assets
Property Plant Equipment 1,07,000 44,000
Financial Assets:
Non-Current Investments 5,000 1,000
Loans 10,000
Current Assets
Inventories 20,000 10,000
Financial Assets:
Trade Receivables 8,000 10,000
Cash and Cash Equivalents 38,000 1,000
Total Assets 1,88,000 66,000
Shareholders Fund
Share Capital 20,000 10,000
Other equity 1,20,000 40,000
Non-Current Liabilities
Long term liabilities 30,000 10,000
Deferred tax liabilities 5,000 1,000
Long term provisions 5,000 1,000
Current Liabilities
Trade Payables 6,000 2,000
Short term Provisions 2,000 2,000
Total Equity & Liabilities 1,88,000 66,000
Notes to Financial Statements P Ltd. Q Ltd
Reserve & Surplus
General Reserve 1,00,000 30,000
Retained earnings 20,000 10,000
1,20,000 40,000
Inventories

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Raw Material 10,000 5,000
Finished Goods 10,000 5,000
20,000 10,000
(₹ in Lakhs)
Statement of Profit and Loss
For the year ended on 31st March, 20X2
Notes P Ltd. Q Ltd.
i. Statement of Profit and Loss for the year ended on 31st March 20X2
Sales 1 2,00,000 80,000
Other Income 2 3,000
Total Revenue 2,03,000 80,000
Expenses
Raw Material Consumed 3 1,10,000 48,000
Change in inventories finished stock 4 (5,000) (3,000)
Employee benefit expenses 30,000 10,000
Finance Costs 5 2,700 1,000
Depreciation 7,000 4,000
Other Expenses 6 10,350 6,040
Total Expenses 1,55,050 66,040
Profit Before Tax 47,950 13,960
Tax Expense:
Current Tax 11 15,000 4,000
Deferred Tax 2,000 1,000
17,000 5,000
Profit after Tax 30,950 8,960
ii. Statement of Other Comprehensive Income
Fair Value gain on investment in subsidiary 8 1,000 0
Fair Value gain on other non-current investments* 8 500 250
1,500 250
* Note: Statement of Other Comprehensive Income shall present items that will not be
reclassified to profit or loss’ and ‘items that will be reclassified to profit and loss’. However,
such bifurcations had not been made above.
Statement of changes in Equity For theyear ended in 31 March 20X2
P Ltd. Share General Profit & Fair Value Total
Capital Reserve Loss Reserve
Balance as on 1.4.20X1 20,000 1,00,000 20,000 1,40,000
Dividend for the year 20X1- (8,000) (8,000)
20X2
Dividend distribution tax (1,350) (1,350)
Dividend received from 1,680 1,680
subsidiary
Profit for the year 20X1-20X2 30,950 30,950
Fair value gain on investment in 1,000 1,000
subsidiary See Note 7
Fair value gain on other non- 500 500
current investments in
Transfer to reserve 20,000 (20,000)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Balance as on 31.3.20X2 20,000 1,20,000 23,280 1,500 1,64,780
Q Ltd.
Balance as on 1.4.20X1 10,000 30,000 10,000 50,000
Dividend for the year 20X1- (2,400) (2,400)
20X2
Dividend distribution tax (400) (400)
Profit for the year 20X1-20X2 8,960 8,960
Fair value gain on other non- 250 250
Current investments in
Transfer to reserve 5,000 (5,000)
Balance as on 31.3.20X2 10,000 35,000 11,160 250 56,410
Balance Sheet as on 31st March, 20X2 Note P Ltd Q Ltd.

Assets
Non-current assets
Property Plant Equipment 7 1,17,000 45,000
Financial Assets:
Non-Current Investments 8 42,500 1,250
Long Term Loans 10,000
Current Assets
Financial Assets:
Cash and Cash Equivalents
(See Statement of Cash Flows) 930 4,200
Total Assets 2,15,430 73,450
Other equity (See Statement of changes in Equity) 1,44,780 46,410
1,64,780 56,410
Borrowings 30,000 10,000
Deferred tax liabilities 7,000 2,000
Long term provisions 9 4,600 930
41,600 12,930
Current Liabilities
Short term Provisions 10 1,050 110
9,050 4,110
Total Liabilities 50,650 17,040
Total Equity & Liabilities 2,15,430 73,450
Statement of Cash Flows

For the year ended on 31 March 20X2
P. Ltd. Q. Ltd

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
i. Cash Flows from operating activities
Profit after Tax 30,950 8,960
Add Back:
Current Tax 15,000 4,000
Deferred Tax 2,000 1,000
Depreciation 7,000 4,000
Finance Costs 2,700 1,000
Change In Provisions (1,350) (1,960)
Reversal of Interest Income (1000) 0
Working Capital Adjustments
Inventories (15,000) (5,000)
Trade Receivables (2,000) 2,000
Less: Advance Tax (15,000) (4,000)

25,300 12,000
ii. Cash flows from investment activities
Purchase of Property Plant Equipment (17,000) (5,000)
Acquisition of subsidiary (36,000) 0
Interest Income 1,000
Dividend Income 1,680
(50,320) (5,000)
iii. Cash Flow from financing activities
Dividend Payment (8,000) (2,400)
Dividend distribution tax (1,350) (400)
Interest payment (2,700) (1,000)
(12,050) (3,800)
Net Changes in Cash Flows (I + ii + iii) (37,070) 3,200
Balance of Cash and Cash Equivalents as on 1.4.20X1 38,000 1,000
Balance of Cash and Cash Equivalents as on 31.3.20X2 930 4,200
Notes P Ltd. Q Ltd.
Note 1 – Sales
Sales to Q Ltd. 20,000
Other Sales 1,80,000 80,000
2,00,000 80,000
Note 2 – Other Income
Interest from Q Ltd. 1,000
Royalty from Q Ltd. 2,000
3,000
Note 3 – Raw Material Consumed
Opening Stock 10,000 5,000
Purchases from P Ltd. 20,000
Other Purchases 1,20,000 30,000
Closing Stock 20,000 7,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
1,10,000 48,000
Note 4 – Change in inventories of finished stock
Opening Stock 10,000 5,000
Closing Stock 15,000 8,000
(5,000) (3,000)
Note 5 – Finance Costs
Interest 2,700
Interest to P Ltd.
1000
2,700
1000
Note 6 – Other Expenses
Short Term provisions 50 10
Royalty to P Ltd. 2,000
Others 10,000 4,000
Acquisition Expenses 200
10,350 6,040
Note 7 – Property Plant Equipment
New Purchases 17,000 5,000
Note 8 – Fair value of non-current investments
Investments in subsidiary 37,000
1,250
Other Investments 5,500
42,500 1,250
Fair Value Gain
Investments in subsidiary 1,000 0
Other investments 500 250
1,500 250
Note 9 – Long term provisions
Balance as on 1.4.20X1 5,000 1,000
Transfer to short term provisions (500) (100)
New Provision 100 30
Balance as on 31.3.20X2 4,600 930
Note 10 – Short term provisions
Balance as on 1.4.20X1 2,000 2,000
Transfer from long term provisions 500 100
Payment (1,500) (2,000)
New 50 10
Balance as on 31.3.20X2 1,050 110
Note 11 – Provisions for Tax & Advance Tax
Tax Provision 15,000 4,000
Less: Advance Tax 15,000 4,000
0 0

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
On 1.4.20X1, P Ltd. Acquired 70% of equity shares (700 lakhs out of 1,000 lakhs shares) of Q
Ltd. At ₹36,000 lakhs.
The company has adopted an accounting policy to measure Non-controlling interest at fair value
(quoted market price) applying Ind AS 103. Accordingly, the company computed full goodwill on the
dateof acquisition. Shares of both the companies are of face value ₹ 10 each. Market price per share of
Q Ltd. As on 1.4.20X1 is ₹ 55. Entire long-term borrowings of Q Ltd. Is from P Ltd. The fair value of
net identifiableassets is at ₹ 50,000 lakhs.
P Ltd. Has decided to account for investment in subsidiary at fair value through other
comprehensive income as per Ind AS 27. Other non-current investments are classified as financial
assets at fair value other comprehensive income by irrevocable choice as per Ind AS 109. There is
no tax capital gains.
The group has paid dividend for the year 20X0-20X1 and transferred to reserve out of profit for
20X1-20X2 as follows: (₹ in
lakhs)
P Ltd.Q Ltd.
Share of Non- Total
Dividend for the year 20X1-20X2 P Ltd. controlling
interest
Dividend 8,000 1,680 720 2,400
Dividend distribution tax 1,350 280 120 400
9,350 1,960 840 2,800
Transfer to reserve out of profit for the year 20X1-20X2 20,000
Trade receivables of P Ltd, include ₹ 3,000 Lakhs due from Q Ltd. Based on the above financial
statements for theyear ended on 31 March, 20X2 and information given, prepare Consolidated
Financial Statements.
Solution:
Consolidated Financial Statement of P. Ltd. Group (₹ in lakhs)
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income Forthe year ended on 31 March, 20X2
Notes P Ltd Q Ltd. Workings Group
i. Statement of Profit and loss
Sales 1 2,00,000 80,000 2,00,000+80,000-20,000 2,60,000
Other Income 2 3,000 0 3,000-3,000 0
Total Revenue 2,03,000 80,000 2,60,000
Expenses
Raw materials consumed 3 1,10,000 48,000 1,10,000+48,000-20,000 1,38,000
Change in inventoriesfinished 4 -5000 -3000 (-5,000-3,000) -8,000
stock
Employee benefit expenses 30,000 10,000 30,000+10,000 40,000
Finance Costs 5 2,700 1,000 2,700+1,000-1,000 2,700
Depreciation 7,000 4,000 7,000+4,000 11,000
Other expenses 6 10,350 6,040 10,350+6,040-2,000 14,390
Total Expenses 1,55,050 66,040 1,98,090
Profit Before Tax 47,950 13,960 61,910
Tax Expense:
Current Tax 15,000 4,000 15,000 + 4,000 19,000
Deferred Tax 2,000 1,000 2,000 + 1,000 3,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
17,000 5,000 22,000
Profit after Tax 30,950 8,960 39,910
Profit attributable to:
Parent 37,222
Non-controlling interest 2,688
ii. Statement of other
comprehensive income
Fair value gain on investment 8 1,000 0 1,000+0-1,000 0
in subsidiary
Fair value gain on othernon- 8 500 250 500+250 750
current investments
1,500 250 750
Other comprehensive
income attributable to:
Parent 675
Non-controlling interests 75
Consolidated Statement of changes in EquityFor the year ended on 31 March 20X2

Share General Retained Fair Total Non- Group
Capital Reserve Earnings Value Controlling Total
Reserve Interest
Balance as on 20,000 1,00,000 20,000 1,40,000 16,500 1,56,500
1.4.20X1
Dividend for the (8,000) (8,000) (8,000)
year 20X0-20X1
Dividend (1,350) (1,350) (1,350)
distribution tax
Dividend 1,680 1,680 1,680
received from
subsidiary
Profit for the year 37,222 37,222 2,688 39,910
20X1-20X2
Fair Value gain on
investment in
subsidiary
Fair value gain on 675 675 75 750
other non-current
investments
Transfer to 20,000 (20,000) 0 0
reserve
Dividend from (1,680) (1,680) (720) (2,400)
subsidiary
Dividend
distribution taxof (280) (120) (400)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
subsidiary (280)
Balance as on 20,000 675
31.3.20X2 1,68,267 18,423 1,86,690
1,20,000
27,592
Dividend and dividend distribution tax paid by the subsidiary is deducted from profit and non-
controlling interest.
Note: As per the response to Issue 1 given in ITFG bulletin 9, in consolidated financial
statements of parent company, the dividend income earned by parent company from
subsidiary company and dividend recorded by subsidiary company in its equity will both get
eliminated as a result of consolidation adjustments. DDT paid by subsidiary company outside
the consolidated Group i.e., to the tax authorities should be charged as expense in the
consolidated statement of Profit and Loss of holding company.
If DDT paid by the subsidiary is allowed as a set off against the DDT liability of its parent (as
per the tax laws). Then the amount of such DDT should be recognised in the consolidated
statement of changes in equity of parent company.
Consolidated Balance Sheet As on 31 March 20X2
(Amount in ₹ Lakhs)
P Ltd. Q Ltd. Workings Group
Assets
Non-Current Assets
Fixed Assets
Property Plant Equipment 1,17,000 45,000 1,17,000+45,000 1,62,000
Goodwill 2,500
Financial Assets:
Non-current investments 40,820 1,250 5,500+1,250 6,750
Long Term loans 10,000 0 10,000+0-10,000 0
1,67,820 46,250 1,71,250
Current Assets
Inventories 35,000 15,000 35,000+15,000 50,000
Financial Assets:
Trade Receivables 10,000 8,000 10,000+8,000-3,000 15,000
Cash and Cash Equivalents 930 4,200 930+4,200 5,130
45,930 27,200 70,130
Total Assets 2,13,750 73,450 2,41,380
Share Capital 20,000 10,000 SOCE 20,000
Other Equity 1,43,100 46,410 SOCE 1,48,267
Non-controlling interest SOCE 18,423
Non-current liabilities 1,63,100 56,410 1,86,690

Financial Liabilities:
Borrowings
30,000 10,000 30,000+10,000- 30,000
Deferred tax liabilities 10,000
Long Term provisions 7,000 2,000 7000+2000 9,000
4,600 930 4,600+930 5,530

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Current Liabilities 41,600 12,930 44,530
Short term Provisions 1,050 110 8,000+4,000-3,000 9,000
9,050 4,110 1,050+110 1,160
Total Liabilities 50,650 17,040 10,160
Total Equity & Liabilities 2,13,750 73,450 54,690
2,41,380
For the year ended on 31 March 20X2
P Ltd. Q Ltd. Workings Group
i. Cash flows from operating activities
Profit after Tax 30,950 8,960 39,910
Add: Back
Current Tax 15,000 4,000 15,000+4,000 19,000
Deferred Tax 2,000 1,000 2,000+1,000 3,000
Depreciation 7,000 4,000 7,000+4,000 11,000
Finance Costs 2,700 1,000 2,700+1,000-1,000 2,700
Change in provisions (1,350) (1,960) (1,350)-1960 (3,310)
Reversal of interest income (1000) 0 (1,000)+0+1,000 0
Working capital adjustments
Inventories (15,000) (5,000) 30,000-50,000 -20,000
Trade Receivables (2,000) 2,000 18,000-15,000 3,000
Trade Payables 2,000 2,000 8,000-9,000 1,000
40,300 16,000 56,300
Less: Advance Tax (15,000) (4,000) 15,000+4,000 (19,000)
25,300 12,000 37,300
ii. Cash flows from investment

activities
Purchase of Property Plant (17,000) (5,000) (17,000)-5,000 (22,000)
Equipment
Acquisition of subsidiary (36,000) 0 (36,000) + 0 (36,000)
Interest Income 1,000 1,000-1,000 0
Dividend Income 1,680 1,680-1680 0
(50,320) (5,000) (58,000)
iii. Cash flow from financing activities
Dividend Payment (8,000) (2,400) (8,000)-2,400+1,680 (8,720)
Dividend Distribution Tax (1,350) (400) (1,350)-400 (1,750)
Interest payment (2,700) (1,000) (2,700)-1,000+1,000 (2,700)
(12,050) (3,800) (13,170)
Net Changes in Cash Flows (37,070) 3,200 (33,870)
(I + ii+ iii)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Balance of Cash and Cash
Equivalents as on 1.4.20X1 38,000 1,000 38,000+1,000 39,000
Balance of Cash and Cash
Equivalents as on 31.3.20X2 930 4,200 5,130
While preparing Consolidated Statement of Cash flows also intra-group transactions are
eliminated.
Illustration 29: Chain holding (NOV 2018)
Prepare the consolidated Balance Sheet as on 31st March, 20X2 of a group of companies
comprising P Limited, S Limited and SS Limited. Their balance sheets on that date are given below:
₹ in lakhs
P Ltd. S Ltd. SS Ltd.
Assets
Non-Current Assets
Investment:
32 lakh shares in S Ltd. 340
24 lakh shares in SS Ltd. 280
Current Assets
Financial Assets
Trade Receivables 260 100 220
Bills Receivables 72 - 30
Cash in hand and at Bank 228 40 40
1440 850 640
Shareholder’s Equity
Share Capital (₹ 10 per share) 600 400 320
Other Equity
Reserves 180 100 80
Retained earnings 160 50 60
Current Liabilities
Trade Payables 470 230 180
Bills Payable
P Ltd. 70
SS Ltd. 30 - -
1440 850 640
The following additional information is available:
(i) P Ltd. Holds 80% shares in S Ltd. And S Ltd. Holds 75% shares in SS Ltd. Their holdings
wereacquired on 30th September, 20X1.
(ii) The business activities of all the companies are not seasonal in nature and therefore, it can
beassumed that profits are earned evenly throughout the year.
(iii) On 1st April, 20X1 the following balances stood in the books of S Ltd. And SS Ltd.
₹ in Lakhs
S Limited SS Limited
Reverse 80 60
Retained Earnings 20 30

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
₹ 10 lakhs included in the inventory figure of S ltd, is inventory which has been purchased from
SS Ltd at cost plus 25%.
The parent company has adopted an accounting policy to measure non-controlling interest at fair
value (quoted market price) applying Ind AS 103. Assume market prices of S Ltd and SS Ltd are
the same as respective face values.
Solution:
Consolidated Balance Sheet of the Group as on 31st March, 20X2
Particulars Note No. ₹ in lakh
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Current assets
(a) Inventory 2 338
(b) Financial assets
Trade receivable 3 580
Bills receivable 4 2
Cash and cash equipment 5 308
Total assets 2,208
EQUITY & LIABILITIES
Equity attributable to owners of parent
Share Capital 600
Other Equity
Reserve (W.N.5) 194
Retained Earnings (W.N.5) 179.8
Capital Reserve (W.N.3) 188
Non-controlling interests (W.N.4) 166.2
Total equity 1328
LIABILITIES
Non-current liabilities Nil
Current liabilities
(a) Financial Liabilities
(i) Trade payables 6 880
Total liabilities 880
Total equity and liabilities 2,208
Notes to Accounts (₹ in
lakh)
1. Property Plant & Equipment
P Ltd. 320
S Ltd. 360
SS Ltd. 300 980
2. Inventories
P Ltd. 220
S Ltd. (70-2) 68
SS Ltd. 50 338
3. Trade Receivable
P Ltd. 260
S Ltd. 100
SS Ltd. 220 580

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
4. Bills Receivable
P Ltd. (72-70) 2
S Ltd. (30-30) - 2
5. Cash & Cash equivalents
P Ltd. 228
S Ltd. 40
SS Ltd. 40 308
6. Trade Payables
P Ltd. 470
S Ltd. 230
SS Ltd. 180 880
Working Notes:
1. Analysis of Reserves and Surplus (₹ in lakh)
S SS
Ltd. Ltd.
Reserves as on 31.3.20X1 80 60
Increase during the year 20X1-20X2 20 20
Increase for the half year till 30.9.20X1 10 10
Balance as on 30.9.20X1 (A) 90 70
Total balance as on 31.2.20X2 100 80
Post-acquisition balance 10 10
Retained Earnings as on 31.3.20X1 20 30

Increase during the year 20X1-20X2 30 30
Increase for the half year till 30.9.20X1 15 15
Balance as on 30.0.20X1 (B) 35 45
Total balance as on 31.3.20X2 50 60
Post-acquisition balance 15 15
Less: Unrealised Gain on inventories (10 ÷ 100 x 25) - (2)
Post-acquisition balance for CFS 15 13
Total balance on the acquisition date ie.30.9.20X1 (A+B) 125 115
2. Calculation of Effective Interest of P Ltd. in SS Ltd.
Acquisition by P Ltd. In S Ltd. = 80%
Acquisition by S Ltd. In SS Ltd. = 75%
Acquisition by Group in SS Ltd. (80% x 75%) = 60%
Non-controlling Interest = 40%
3. Calculation of Goodwill / Capital Reserve on the acquisition
S Ltd. SS Ltd.
Investment or consideration 340 (280 x 80%)
Add: NCI at Fair value(400 x 224
20%) 80
(320 x 40%) - 128
420 352
(400+125) (125) (320+125)
Less: Identifiable net assets (Share Capital + Increase in
(435)
the Reservesand Surplus till acquisition date)
Capital Reserve 105 83
Total Capital Reserve (105 + 83) 188

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
4. Calculation of Non-controlling Interest
S Ltd. SS Ltd.
At Fair Value (See Note 3) 80 128
Add: Post Acquisition Reserves (See Note 1) (10 x 20%) 2 (10 x 40%) 4
Add: Post Acquisition Retained Earnings (See Note 1) (15 x 20%) 3 (13 x 40%)
5.2
Less: NCI share of investment in SS Ltd. (280 x 20%) -
(56)*
29 137.2
Total (29 + 137.2) 166.2
*Note: The Non-controlling interest in S Ltd. Will take its proportion in SS Ltd. So theyhave
to bear their proportion in the investment by S Ltd. (in SS Ltd.) also.
5. Calculation of Consolidated Other Equity
Reserves Retained Earnings
P Ltd. 180 160
Add: Share in S Ltd. (10 x 80%) 8 (15 x 80%) 12
Add: Share in SS Ltd. (10 x 60%) 6 (13 x 60%) 7.8
194 179.8
Note: It is assumed date the sale of goods by SS Ltd. Is done after acquisition of shares by
SLtd. Alternatively, it may be assumed that the sale has either been done before acquisition of
shares by S Ltd. In SS Ltd. Or sale has been throughout the year. Accordingly, the treatment
for unrealized gain may vary.
Illustration 30: Subsidiary issues shares to a third party and parent loses control
In March 20X1 a group had a 60% interest in subsidiary with share capital of 50,000 ordinary shares.
The carrying amount of goodwill is ₹ 20,000 at March 20X1 calculated using the partial goodwill
method. On 31 March 20X1, an option held by the minority shareholders exercised the option to
subscribe for a further 25,000 ordinary shares in the subsidiary at ₹ 12 per share, raising ₹ 3,00,000.
The net assets of the subsidiary in the consolidated balance sheet prior to the option’s exercise were ₹
4,50,000, excluding goodwill. Calculate gain or loss on loss of interest in subsidiary due to option
exercised by minority shareholder.
Solution:
Shareholdings
Before After
No % No %
Group 30,000 60 30,000 40
Other party 20,000 40 45,000 60
50,000 100 75,000 100
Net assets ₹’ 000 % ₹’ 000 %
Group’s share 270 60 300 40
Other party’s share 180 40 450 60
450 100 750 100
Calculation of group gain on deemed disposal ₹’ 000

Fair value of 40% interest retained (₹ 12 x 30,000)** 360
Less: Net assets derecognized (450)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Non-controlling interest derecognized 180
Goodwill (20)
Gain on deemed disposal 70
** Note: For simplicity, it has been assumed the fair value per share is equal to the subscription
price. As control of the subsidiary is lost, the retained interest is recognized at its fair value at the
date control is lost. The resulting remeasurement gain is recognized in profit and loss.
Illustration 31: Calculation of gain on outright sale of subsidiary
A parent purchased 80% interest in a subsidiary for ₹ 1,60,000 on 1 April 20X1 when the fair value
of the subsidiary’s net assets was ₹ 1,75,000. Goodwill of ₹ 20,000 arose on consolidation under
the partial goodwill method. An impairment of goodwill of ₹ 8,000 was charged in the consolidated
financial statements for year ended 31 March 20X3. No other impairment charges have been
recorded. The parent sold its investment in the subsidiary on 31 March 20X4 for ₹ 2,00,000. The
book value of the subsidiary’s net assets in the consolidated financial statements on the date of the
sale was ₹ 2,25,000 (not including goodwill of ₹ 12,000). When the subsidiary met the criteria to
be classified as held for sale under Ind AS 105, no write off was required because the expected fair
value less cost to sell (of 100% of the subsidiary) was greater than the carrying value.
The parent carried the investment in the subsidiary in its separate financial statements at cost, as
permittedby Ind AS 27.
Calculate gain or loss on disposal of subsidiary in parent’s separate and consolidated financial
statements ason 31st March 20X4.
Solution:
The parent’s separate statement of profit and loss for 20X3-20X4 would show a gain on the sale
of investment of ₹ 40,000 calculated as follow:
₹’ 000
Sales proceeds 200
Less: Cost of investment in subsidiary (160)
Gain on sale in parent’s account 40
However, the group’s statement of profit & loss for 20X3-20X4 would show a gain on the sale of
subsidiary of ₹ 8,000 calculated as follows:
₹’ 000
Sales proceeds 200
Less: Share of net assets at date of disposal (₹ 2,25,000 X 80%)Goodwill (180)
on consolidation at date of sale (W.N.) (12) (192)
Gain on sale in group’s account 8
Working note
The goodwill on consolidation (assuming partial goodwill method) is calculated as follows:
₹’ 000
Fair value of consideration at the date of acquisition 160
Non- controlling interest measured at proportionate share of the 35
acquiree’s identifiable net assets (1,75,000 X 20%)
(175) (140)
Less: Fair value of net assets of subsidiary at date of acquisition
Goodwill arising on consolidation 20
Impairment at 31 March 20X3 (8)
Goodwill at 31 March 20X4 12
Illustration 32: Partial disposal when subsidiary becomes an associate
AT Ltd. Purchased a 100% subsidiary for ₹ 50,00,000 on 31st March 20X1 when the fair value of
the net assets of BT Ltd. Was ₹ 40,00,000. Therefore, goodwill is ₹ 10,00,000. AT Ltd. Sold

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
60% of its investment in BT Ltd. On 31st March 20X3 for ₹ 67,50,000, leaving the AT Ltd. With
40% and significant influence. At the date of disposal, the carrying value of net assets of BT Ltd.
Excluding goodwill is ₹ 80,00,000. Assume the fair value of the investment in associate BT Ltd.
Retained is proportionate to the fair value of the 60% sold, that is ₹ 45,00 000.
Calculate gain or loss on sale of proportion of BT Ltd. In AT Ltd.’s separate and consolidated
financial statements as on 31st March 20X3.
Solution:
AT Ltd.’s standalone statement for profit or loss of 20X2-20X3 would show a gain on the sale
ofinvestment of a ₹ 37,50,000 calculated as follows:
₹’ lakh
Sales proceeds 67.5
Less: Cost of investment in subsidiary (₹ 50,00,000 * 60%) (30.0)
Gain on sale in parent’s account 37.5
In the consolidated financial statements, the group will calculate the gain or loss on disposal
differently. The carrying amount of all of the assets including goodwill is derecognized when
control is lost. This is compared to the proceeds received and the fair value of the investment
retained.
The gain on the disposal will, therefore, be calculated as follows:
₹’ lakh
Sales proceeds 67.5
Fair value of 40%interest retained 45.0
112.5
Less: Net assets disposed, including goodwill (80,00,000+10,00,000) (90.0)
Gain on sale in the group’s financial statements 22.5
The gain on loss of control would be recorded in consolidated statement of profit and loss.
The gain or loss includes the gain of ₹ 13,50,000 [₹ 67,50,000 – (₹ 90,00,000 x 60%)] on the portion
sold. However, it also includes a gain on remeasurement of the 40% retained interest of₹
9,00,000 (₹ 36,00,000* to ₹ 45,00,000). The entity will need to disclose the portion of the gain that is
attributable to remeasuring any remaining interest to fair value, that is, ₹ 9,00,000.
* 90,00,000 x 40%= 36,00,000
Illustration 33: Partial disposal when 10% investment in former subsidiary is retained
The facts of this illustration are same per the above Illustration, except the group AT Ltd. Disposes
of a 90% interest for ₹ 85,50,000 leaving the AT Ltd. With a 10% investment. The fair value of the
remaining interest is ₹ 9,50,000 (assumed for simplicity to be pro rata to the fair value of the 90%
sold)
Calculate gain or loss on sale of proportion of BT Ltd. In AT Ltd.’s separate and consolidated
financial statements as on 31st March 20X3.
Solution:
The parent’s AT Ltd. income statement in its separate financial statements for 20X2-20X3
wouldshow a gain on the sale of the investment of ₹ 40,50,000 calculated as follows:
₹’ lakh
Sales proceeds 85.5
Less: Cost of investment in subsidiary (₹ 50,00,000 * 90%) (45.0)
Gain on sale in parent’s account 40.5
In the consolidated financial statements, all of the assets, including goodwill are derecognized when
control is lost. This is compared to the proceeds received and the fair value of the investment retained.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
₹’ lakh
Sales proceeds 85.5
Fair value of 10%interest retained 9.5
95.0
Less: Net assets disposed, including goodwill (80,00,000 +10,00,000) (90.0)
Gain on sale in the group’s financial statements 5.0
The gain on loss of control would be recorded in profit or loss. The gain or loss includes the
gainof ₹ 4,50,000 related to the 90% portion sold [₹ 85,50,000 – (₹ 90,00,000 x 90%)] as well as₹ 50,000
related to the remeasurement of fair value of 10% retained interest (₹9,00,000 to ₹9,50,000).
Illustration 34: Loss control of a subsidiary in two transactions
MN Ltd. was holding 80% stake in UV Ltd. Now, MN Ltd. has disposed of the entire stake in UV
Ltd. in two different transactions as follows:
 Transaction 1: Sale of 25% stake for a cash consideration of ₹ 2,50,000
 Transaction 2: Sale of 55% stake for a cash consideration of ₹ 5,50,000
Both the transactions have happened within a period of one month. In accordance with the guidance
given in Ind AS 110, both the transactions have to be accounted as a single transaction.
The net assets of UV Ltd. and non-controlling interest on the date of both the transactions was ₹ 9,00,000
and ₹
1,80,000 respectively (assuming there were no earnings between the period of two transactions). How MN
Ltd. should account the transaction?
Solution:
MN Ltd. will account for the transaction as follows:
₹
Recognise:
Fair value of consideration (2,50,000 + 5,50,000) 8,00,000
Derecognise:
Net assets of UV Ltd. (9,00,000)
Non-controlling interest 1,80,000 (7,20,000)
Gain to be recorded in profit or loss 80,000
If MN Ltd. loses control over UV Ltd. on the date of transaction 1, then the above gain is
recorded on the date of transaction 1 and MN Ltd. will stop consolidating UV Ltd. from that
date. The consideration of ₹ 5,50,000 receivable in transaction 2 will be shown as consideration
receivable.
If MN Ltd. loses control over UV Ltd. on the date of transaction 2, then the above gain is
recordedon the date of transaction 2 and MN Ltd. will stop consolidating UV Ltd. from that date.
The consideration of ₹2,50,000 received in transaction 1 will be shown as advance consideration
received.
Illustration 35: An entity ceases to be an investment entity
A Limited ceased to be in investment entity from 1st April 20X1 on which date it was holding 80% of
B Limited. The carrying value of such investment in B Limited (which was measured at fair value
through profit or loss) was ₹ 4,00,000. The fair value of non-controlling interest on the date of
change in status was
₹ 1,00,000. The value of subsidiary's identifiable net assets as per Ind AS 103 was ₹ 4,50,000 on
the date of change in status. Determine the value of goodwill and pass the journal entry on the date
of change in status f investment entity. (Assume that non-controlling interest is measured at fair
value method)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Goodwill calculation: ₹
Deemed consideration (i.e. fair value of subsidiary on the date of change in 4,00,000
status)
Fair value of non-controlling interest 1,00,000
5,00,000
Value of subsidiary's identifiable net assets as per Ind AS 103 (4,50,000)
Goodwill 50,000
Journal entry ₹
Dr. Cr.
Net identifiable assets Dr. 4,50,000
Goodwill Dr. 50,000
To Investment in B Limited (on date of change in status) 4,00,000
To Non-controlling interest 1,00,000
Illustration 36: An entity becomes an investment entity
CD Ltd. purchased a 100% subsidiary for ₹ 20,00,000 on 31st March 20X1 when the fair value of
the net assets of KL Ltd. was ₹ 16,00,000. Therefore, goodwill was ₹ 4,00,000. CD Ltd. becomes
an investment entity on 31st March 20X3 when the carrying value of its investment in KL Ltd.
(measured atfair value through profit or loss) was ₹ 25,00,000. At the date of change in status, the
carrying value of net assets of KL Ltd. excluding goodwill was ₹ 19,00,000.
Calculate gain or loss with respect to investment in KL Ltd. on the date of change in investment
entitystatus of CD Ltd.
Solution:
The gain on the disposal will be calculated as follows:
₹
Fair value of retained interest (100%) 25,00,000
Less: Net assets disposed, including goodwill (19,00,000 + 4,00,000) (23,00,000)
Gain on the date of change in investment entity status of CD Ltd. 2,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 111–JOINT ARRANGEMENTS
Illustration 1: Joint control
ABC Ltd. and DEF Ltd. have entered into a contractual arrangement to manufacture a product
and sell that in retail market. As per the terms of the arrangement, decisions about the relevant
activities require consent of both the parties. The parties share the returns of the arrangement
equally amongst them. Whether the arrangement can be treated as joint arrangement?
Solution:
The arrangement is a joint arrangement since both the parties are bound by the contractual
arrangement and the decisions about relevant activities require unanimous consent of both the
parties.
Illustration 2: Implicit joint control
PQR Ltd. and XYZ Ltd. established an arrangement in which each has 50% of the voting rights and
the contractual arrangement between them specifies that at least 51% of the voting rights are required to
make decisions about the relevant activities. Whether the arrangement can be treated as joint
arrangement?
Solution:
In this case, the parties have implicitly agreed that they have joint control of the arrangement
becausedecisions about the relevant activities cannot be made without both parties agreeing.
Illustration 3: Implicit joint control
A Ltd., B Ltd. and C Ltd. established an arrangement whereby A Ltd. has 50% of the voting rights in the
arrangement, B Ltd. has 30% and C has 20%. The contractual arrangement between A Ltd., B Ltd.
and C Ltd. specifies that at least 75% of the voting rights are required to make decisions about the
relevant activities of the arrangement. Whether the arrangement can be treated as joint arrangement?
Solution:
In this case, even though A can block any decision, it does not control the arrangement because
it needs the agreement of B. The terms of their contractual arrangement requiring at least 75%
of the voting rights to make decisions about the relevant activities imply that A Ltd. and B Ltd.
have joint control of the arrangement because decisions about the relevant activities of the
arrangement cannotbe made without both A Ltd. and B Ltd. agreeing.
Illustration 4: Explicit joint control
An arrangement has three parties: X Ltd. has 50% of the voting rights in the arrangement and Y
Ltd. and Z Ltd. each have 25%. The contractual arrangement between them specifies that at least
75% of the voting rights are required to make decisions about the relevant activities of the
arrangement. Whether the arrangement can be treated as joint arrangement?
Solution:
In this case, even though X Ltd. can block any decision, it does not control the arrangement
because it needs the agreement of either Y Ltd. or Z Ltd. In this question, X Ltd., Y Ltd. and Z
Ltd. collectively control the arrangement. However, there is more than one combination of
parties that can agree to reach 75% of the voting rights (i.e. either X Ltd. and Y Ltd. or X Ltd.
and Z Ltd.). In such a situation, to be a joint arrangement the contractual arrangement
between the parties would need to specify which combination of the parties is required to
agree unanimously to decisions about the relevant activities of the arrangement.
Illustration 5: Explicit joint control
An arrangement has A Ltd. and B Ltd. each having 35% of the voting rights in the arrangement with
the remaining 30% being widely dispersed. Decisions about the relevant activities require approval
by a majority of the voting rights. Whether the arrangement can be treated as joint arrangement?
Solution:
A Ltd. and B Ltd. have joint control of the arrangement only if the contractual arrangement
specifies that decisions about the relevant activities of the arrangement require both A Ltd. and
B Ltd. agreeing.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 6: Joint control through board representation
Electronics Ltd. is established by two investors R Ltd. and S Ltd. The investors are holding 60%
and 40%of the voting power of the investee respectively.
As per the articles of association of Electronics Ltd., both the investors have right to appoint 2
directors each on the board of Electronics Ltd. The directors appointed by each investor will act in
accordance with the directions of the investor who has appointed such director. Further, articles of
association provides that the decision about relevant activities of the entity will be taken by board of
directors through simple majority.
Solution:
The decisions about relevant activities are required to be taken by majority of board of directors.
Hence, out of the 4 directors, at least 3 directors need to agree to pass any decision.
Accordingly, the directors appointed by any one investor cannot take the decisions
independently without the consent of at least one director appointed by other investor. Hence,
Electronics Ltd. is jointly controlled by both the investors. R Ltd. holding majority of the voting
rights is not relevant in this case since the voting rights do not given power over the relevant
activities of the investee.
Illustration 7: Chairman with casting vote
MN Software Ltd. is established by two investors M Ltd. and N Ltd. Both the investors are
holding 50% ofthe voting power each of the investee.
As per the articles of association of MN Software Ltd., both the investors have right to appoint 2
directors each on the board of the company. The directors appointed by each investor will act in
accordance with the directions of the investor who has appointed such director. The decision about
relevant activities of the entitywill be taken by board of directors through simple majority. Articles of
association also provides that M Ltd. has right to appoint the chairman of the board who will have
right of a casting vote in case of a deadlock situation.
Determine whether MN Software Ltd. is jointly controlled by both the investors.
Solution:
Accordingly, the directors appointed by any one investor cannot take the decisions
independently without the consent of at least one director appointed by other investor.
However, the chairman of the board has right for a casting vote in case of a deadlock in the
board. Hence, M Ltd. has the ability to take decisions related to relevant activities through 2
votes by directors and 1 casting vote by chairman of the board. Therefore, M Ltd. individually
has power over MN Software Ltd. and there is no joint control.
Illustration 8: Equal voting rights but no joint control
ABC Ltd. is established by two investors AB Ltd. and BC Ltd. Each investor is holding 50% of the
voting power of the investee.
As per the articles of association of ABC Ltd., AB Ltd. and BC Ltd. have right to appoint 3 directors
and 2 directors respectively on the board of ABC Ltd. The directors appointed by each investor will
act in accordance with the directions of the investor who has appointed such director. Further,
articles of association provides that the decision about relevant activities of the entity will be taken
by board ofdirectors through simple majority.
Determine whether ABC Ltd. is jointly controlled by both the investors.
Solution:
Accordingly, the directors appointed by AB Ltd. can take the decisions independently without
the consent of any of the directors appointed by BC Ltd. Hence, ABC Ltd. is not jointly
controlled by both the investors. Equal voting rights held by both the investors is not relevant in
this case since the voting rights do not given power over the relevant activities of the investee.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 9: Joint control over specific asset
X Ltd. and Y Ltd. entered into a contractual arrangement to buy a piece of land to construct
residential units on the said land and sell to customers.
As per the arrangement, the land will be further divided into three equal parts. Out of the three parts,
both the parties will be responsible to construct residential units on one part each by taking decision
about relevant activities independently and they will entitled for the returns generated from their
own part of land. The third part of the land will be jointing managed by both the parties requiring
unanimous consent of both the parties for all the decision making.
Determine whether the arrangement is a joint arrangement or not.
Solution:
The two parts of the land which are required to be managed by both the parties independently
on their own would not fall within the definition of a joint arrangement. However, the third part
of the land which is required to be managed by both the parties with unanimous decision
making would meet the definition of a joint arrangement.
Illustration 10: Multiple relevant activities directed by different investors
Entity R and entity S established a new entity RS Ltd. to construct a national highway and operate
the same for a period of 30 years as per the contract given by government authorities.
As per the articles of association of RS Ltd, the construction of the highway will be done by
entity R and all the decisions related to construction will be taken by entity R independently. After
the construction is over, entity S will operate the highway for the period of 30 years and all the
decisions related to operating of highway will be taken by entity S independently. However,
decisions related to funding and capital structure of RS Ltd. will be taken by both the parties with
unanimous consent.
Determine whether RS Ltd. is a joint arrangement between entity R and entity S?
Solution:
In this case, the investors should evaluate which of the decisions about relevant activities can
most significantly affect the returns of RS Ltd. If the decisions related to construction of
highway or operating the highway can affect the returns of the RS Ltd. most significantly then
the investor directing those decision has power over RS Ltd. and there is no joint arrangement.
However, if the decisions related to funding and capital structure can affect the returns of the
RS Ltd. most significantly then RS Ltd. is a joint arrangement between entity R and entity S.
Illustration 11: Informal agreement for sharing of control
An entity has four investors A, B, C and D holding 10%, 20%, 30% and 40% voting power
respectively. The articles of association requires decisions about relevant activities to be taken by
majority voting rights. However, investor A, B and C have informally agreed to vote together. This
informal agreement has been effective in recent meetings of the investors to take decisions about
relevant activities. Whether A, B and C have joint control over the entity?
Solution:
In this case, three investors have informally agreed to make unanimous decisions. These three
investors together also have majority voting rights in the entity. Hence, investor A, B and C
have joint control over the entity. The agreement between investor A, B and C need not be
formally documented as long as there is evidence of its existence in recent meetings of the
investors.
Illustration 12: Party with protective rights
D Ltd., E Ltd. and F Ltd. have established a new entity DEF Ltd. As per the arrangement,
unanimous consent of all three parties is required only with respect to decisions related to change
of name of the entity, amendment to constitutional documents of the entity to enter into a new
business, change in the registered office of the entity, etc. Decisions about other relevant activities
require consent of only D Ltd. and E Ltd. Whether F Ltd. is a party with joint control of the
arrangement?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Consent of F Ltd. is required only with respect to the fundamental changes in DEF Ltd. Hence
these are protective rights. The decisions about relevant activities are taken by D Ltd. and ELtd.
Hence, F Ltd. is not a party with joint control of the arrangement.
Illustration 13: Resolution of disputes without unanimous consent
Entity A and Entity B established a contractual arrangement whereby the decision related to
relevant activities are required to be taken by unanimous consent of both the parties. However, in
case of any dispute with any vendor or customer of the arrangement, entity A has right to take
necessary decisions for the resolution of disputes including decisions of going for the arbitration or
filing a suit in court of law. Whether the arrangement is a joint arrangement?
Solution:
The arrangement is a joint arrangement since the contractual arrangement requires decisions
about relevant activities to be taken by unanimous consent of both the parties. The right
available with entity A to take decisions for resolution of disputes will not prevent the
arrangement from being a joint arrangement.
Illustration 14: Joint operation
P Ltd. and Q Ltd. are two construction entities and they have entered into a contractual
arrangement to jointly construct a metro rail project.
The construction of metro rail project involves various activities such as construction of
infrastructure (like metro station, control room, pillars at the centre of the road, etc.) for the metro,
laying of the tracks, acquiring of the coaches of the metro, etc. The total length of the metro line to
be constructed is 50 kms. As per the arrangement, both the parties are responsible to construct 25
kms each. Each party is required to incur its own cost, use its own assets, incur the liability and
has right to the revenue from their own part of the work.
Determine whether the arrangement is a joint operation or not?
Solution:
The arrangement is a joint operation since the arrangement is not structured through a separate
vehicle and each party has rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities relating to their
own part of work in the joint arrangement.
Illustration 15: Joint operation by sharing an asset
RS Ltd. and MN Ltd. entered into a contractual arrangement to run a business of providing cars of
hire. The cars will be owned by both the parties jointly. The expenses to run the car (like driver
salary, petrol, maintenance, insurance, etc.) and revenues from the business will be shared
between both the parties as agreed in the contractual arrangement. Determine whether the
arrangement is a joint operation or not?
Solution:
The arrangement is a joint operation since the arrangement is not structured through a separate
vehicle.
Illustration 16: Legal form indicates the arrangement to be a joint venture
Entity X and Entity Y are engaged in the business of Engineering, Procurement and
Construction (EPC) for its customers. Both the parties have jointly won a contract from a
customer for executing an EPC contract and for that the parties have established a new entity XY
Ltd. The contract will be executed through XY Ltd.
All the assets required for the execution of the contract will be acquired and liabilities relating to the
execution will be incurred by XY Ltd. in its own name. Entity X and entity Y will have share in the
net profits of XY Ltd. in the ratio of their shareholding i.e. 50% each. Assuming that the
arrangement meets the definition of a joint arrangement, determine whether the joint arrangement
is a joint operation or a joint venture?
Solution:
The legal form of the separate vehicle is a company. The legal form of the separate vehicle causes
the separate vehicle to be considered in its own right. Hence, it indicates that the arrangement is a

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
joint venture. In this case, the parties should further evaluate the terms of contractual
arrangements andother relevant facts and circumstance to conclude whether the arrangement is
a joint venture or a joint operation.
Illustration 17: Legal form indicates the arrangement to be a joint operation
Two entities have established a partnership firm with each party having 50% share in the net profits
of the firm. Assuming that the arrangement meets the definition of a joint arrangement, determine
whether the joint arrangement is a joint operation or a joint venture?
Solution:
In this case, the parties to the arrangement should evaluate whether the legal form creates
separation between the partners and the partnership firm. If the parties conclude that they have
rights in the assets and obligations for the liabilities relating to the partnership firm then this would
be a joint operation. If the assessment of legal form of the partnership firm indicates that the firm is
a joint operation then there is no need to evaluate any other factors and it is concluded that the
partnership firm is a joint operation.
Illustration 18: Assessing the terms of the contractual arrangement
Continuing with the illustration 16 above, assume that Entity X and Entity Y have entered into a
separate agreement whereby they have agreed that each party has an interest in the assets of the
XY Ltd. and each party is liable for the liabilities of XY Ltd. in a specified proportion. Determine
whether the joint arrangement is a joint operation or a joint venture?
Solution:
In this case, the terms of the separate agreement may cause the arrangement to be a joint
operation.
Illustration 19: Assessing other facts and circumstances
Two parties structure a joint arrangement in an incorporated entity i.e. Entity A in which each party
has a 50% ownership interest. The purpose of the arrangement is to manufacture materials
required by the parties for their own, individual manufacturing processes. The arrangement
ensures that the parties operate the facility that produces the materials to the quantity and quality
specifications of the parties. The legal form of Entity A (an incorporated entity) through which the
activities are conducted initially indicates that the assets and liabilities held in Entity A are the
assets and liabilities of Entity A. The contractual arrangement between the parties does not specify
that the parties have rights to the assets or obligations for the liabilities of Entity A. There are following
other relevant facts and circumstances applicable in this case:
 The parties agreed to purchase all the output produced by Entity A in a ratio of 50:50. Entity A
cannot sell any of the output to third parties, unless this is approved by the two parties to the
arrangement. Because the purpose of the arrangement is to provide the parties with output they
require, such sales to third parties are expected to be uncommon and not material.
 The price of the output sold to the parties is set by both parties at a level that is designed to cover
the costs of production and administrative expenses incurred by Entity A. On the basis of this
operating model, the arrangement is intended to operate at a break-even level.
Based on the above fact pattern, determine whether the arrangement is a joint operation or a joint
venture?
Solution:
The legal form of Entity A and the terms of the contractual arrangement indicate that the
arrangement is a joint venture. However, the other relevant facts and circumstances mentioned
above indicates that:
 the obligation of the parties to purchase all the output produced by Entity A reflects the
exclusive dependence of Entity A upon the parties for the generation of cash flows and, thus,
the parties have an obligation to fund the settlement of the liabilities of Entity A.
 the fact that the parties have rights to all the output produced by Entity A means that the
parties are consuming, and therefore have rights to, all the economic benefits of the assets of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Entity A.
These facts and circumstances indicate that the arrangement is a joint operation. The
conclusion about the classification of the joint arrangement in these circumstances would not
change if, instead of the parties using their share of the output themselves in a subsequent
manufacturing process, the parties sold their share of the output to third parties.
If the parties changed the terms of the contractual arrangement so that the arrangement was
able to sell output to third parties, this would result in Entity A assuming demand, inventory
and credit risks. In that scenario, such a change in the facts and circumstances would require
reassessment of the classification of the joint arrangement. Such facts and circumstances
would indicate that the arrangement is a joint venture.
Illustration 20: Multiple joint arrangements under single framework agreement
AB Ltd. and CD Ltd. have entered into a framework agreement to manufacture and distribute a
new product i.e., Product X. The two activities to be performed as per the framework agreement are
i) Manufacture of Product X and ii) Distribution of Product X. The manufacturing of the product will
not be done through a separate vehicle. The parties will purchase the necessary machinery in their
joint name. For the distribution of the product, the parties have established a new entity ABCD Ltd.
All the goods manufactured will be sold to ABCD Ltd. as per price mutually agreed by the parties.
Then ABCD Ltd. will do the marketing and distribution of the product. Both the parties will have
joint control over ABCD Ltd.
The legal form of ABCD Ltd. causes it to be considered in its own right (ie the assets and
liabilities held in ACD Ltd. are the assets and liabilities of ABC Ltd. and not the assets and
liabilities of the parties). Further, the contractual arrangement and other relevant facts and
circumstances also do not indicate otherwise.
Determine whether various arrangements under the framework agreement are joint operation or
jointventure?
Solution:
The manufacturing of Product X is not done through a separate vehicle and the assets used to
manufacture the product are jointly owned by both the parties. Hence, the manufacturing
activity isa joint operation.
The distribution of Product X is done through a separate vehicle i.e., ABCD Ltd. Further,
AB Ltd. and CD Ltd. do not have rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities,
relating to ABCD Ltd. Hence ABCD Ltd. is a joint venture.
Illustration 21: Accounting of interest in joint operation
P and Q form a joint arrangement PQ using a separate vehicle. P and Q each own 50% of the
capital of PQ. However, the contractual terms of the joint arrangement states that P has the rights
to all of Machinery and the obligation to pay Bank Loan in PQ. P and Q have rights to all other
assets in PQ and obligations for all other liabilities in PQ in proportion to their share of capital (i.e.
50% each). PQ’s balance sheet is as follows:
Balance Sheet
Liabilities ₹ Assets ₹
Capital 1,50,000 Machinery 2,50,000
Bank Loan 75,000 Cash 50,000
Other Loan 75,000
3,00,000 3,00,000
How should P record in its financial statements its rights and obligations in PQ?
Solution:
Under Ind AS 111, P should record the following in its financial statements, to account for its
rightsin the assets of PQ and its obligations for the liabilities of PQ.
Machinery 2,50,000
Cash 25,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Capital 75,000
Bank Loan 75,000
Other Loan 37,500
Illustration 22: Accounting of interest in joint operation
AB Ltd. and BC Ltd. have established a joint arrangement through a separate vehicle PQR. The
legal form of the separate vehicle does not confer separation between the parties and the separate
vehicle itself. Thus, both the parties have rights to the assets and obligations for the liabilities of PQR.
As neither the contractual terms nor the other facts and circumstances indicate otherwise, it is
concluded that the arrangement is a joint operation and not a joint venture.
Both the parties own 50% each of the equity interest in PQR. However, the contractual terms of the
joint arrangement state that AB Ltd. has the rights to all of Building No. 1 owned by PQR and the
obligation to pay all of the debt owned by PQR to a lender XYZ. AB Ltd. and BC Ltd. have
rights to all other assets of PQR and obligations for all other liabilities of PQR in proportion of their
equity interests (i.e. 50% each)
PQR’s balance sheet is as follows:
Balance sheet
Liabilities ₹ Assets ₹
Debt owed to XYZ 240 Cash 40
Employee benefit plan obligation 100 Building 1 240
Equity 140 Building 2 200
480 480
How should AB Ltd. record in its financial statements its rights and obligations in PQR?
Solution:
Under Ind AS 111, AB Ltd. should record the following in its financial statements, to account
for itsrights in the assets of PQR and its obligations for the liabilities of PQR.
Assets
Cash 20
Building 1 * 240
Building 2 100
Liabilities
Debt (third party) ^ 240
Employee benefit plan obligation 50
Equity 70
* Since AB Ltd. has the rights to all of Building No. 1, it records the amount in its entirety.
^ AB Ltd. has obligation for the debt owed by PQR to XYZ in its entirety
Illustration 23: Accounting for sales or contributions of assets to a joint operation
A Ltd. is one of the parties to a joint operation holding 60% interest in a joint operation and the
balance 40% interest is held by another joint operator. A Ltd. has contributed an asset held by it
to the joint operation for the activities to be conducted in joint operation. The carrying value of the
asset sold was ₹ 100 and the asset was actually sold for ₹ 80 i.e. at a loss of ₹ 20. How should A
Ltd. account for the sale of asset to joint operation in its books?
Solution:
A Ltd. should record the loss on the transaction only to the extent of other party’s interest in thejoint
operation.
The total loss on the transaction is ₹ 20. Hence, A Ltd. shall record loss on sale of asset to the
extent of ₹ 8 (₹ 20 x 40%) which is the loss pertaining to the interest of other party to the joint

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
operation. Theloss of ₹ 12 (₹ 20 - ₹ 8) shall not be recognised as that is unrealised loss.
Further, while accounting its interest in the joint operation, A Ltd. shall record its share in thatasset
at value of ₹ 60 [A Ltd. share of asset ₹ 48 (₹ 80 x 60%) plus unrealised loss of ₹ 12].
The journal entry for the transaction would be as follows:
Bank Dr. ₹ 32
Loss on sale Dr. ₹8
To Asset ₹ 40
Illustration 24: Accounting for purchases of assets from a joint operation
A Ltd. is one of the parties to a joint operation holding 60% interest in the joint operation and the
balance 40% interest is held by another joint operator. A Ltd. has purchased an asset from the joint
operation. The carrying value of the asset in the books of joint operation was ₹ 100 and the asset
was actually purchased for ₹ 80 i.e. at a loss of ₹ 20. How should A Ltd. account for the purchase of
asset from joint operation in its books?
Solution:
A Ltd. should not record its share of the loss until the asset is resold to a third party.
The joint operation has sold the asset at ₹ 80 by incurring a loss of ₹ 20. Hence, A Ltd. shall
record the asset at ₹ 92 [Purchase price ₹ 80 + A Ltd.’s share in loss ₹ 12 (₹ 20 x 60%)].
Further, while accounting its interest in the joint operation, A Ltd. shall not record any share in
theloss incurred in sale transaction by the joint operation.
The journal entry for the transaction would be as follows:
Asset Dr. ₹ 32
To Bank ₹ 32

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 28–INVESTMENT IN ASSOCIATES & JOINTVENTURES
Illustration 1: Significant influence
E Ltd. holds 25% of the voting power of an investee. The balance 75% of the voting power is held
by three other investors each holding 25%.
The decisions about the financing and operating policies of the investee are taken by investors
holding majority of the voting power. Since, the other three investors together hold majority voting
power, they generally take the decisions without taking the consent of E Ltd. Even if E Ltd.
proposes any changes to the financing and operating policies of the investee, the other three
investors do not vote in favour of those changes. So, in effect the suggestions of E Ltd. are not
considered while taking decisions related to financing and operating policies.
Determine whether E Ltd. has significant influence over the investee?
Solution:
Since E Ltd. is holding more than 20% of the voting power of the investee, it indicates that E
Ltd. might have significant over the investee. However, the other investors in the investee
prevent E Ltd. from participating in the financing and operating policy decisions of the investee.
Hence, in thiscase, E Ltd. is not in a position to have significant influence over the investee.
Illustration 2
Kuku Ltd. holds 12% of the voting shares in Boho Ltd. Boho Ltd.'s board comprise of eight members
and two of these members are appointed by Kuku Ltd. Each board member has one vote at
meeting. is Boho Ltd an associate of Kuku Ltd?
Solution:
Boho Ltd is an associate of Kuku Ltd as significant influence is demonstrated by the presence
of directors on the board and the relative voting rights at meetings.
It is presumed that entity has significant influence where it holds 20% or more of the voting
power of the investee, but it is not necessary to have 20% representation on the board to
demonstrate significant influence, as this will depend on all the facts and circumstances. One
board member may represent significant influence even if that board member has less than
20% of the voting power. But for significant influence to exist it would be necessary to show
based on specific facts and circumstances that this is the case, as significant influence would
not be presumed.
Illustration 3: Participation in policy-making processes
M Ltd. holds 10% of the voting power an investee. The balance 90% voting power is held by nine
other investors each holding 10%.
The decisions about the relevant activities (except decision about taking borrowings) of the investee are
taken by the members holding majority of the voting power. The decisions about taking borrowings are
required to be taken by unanimous consent of all the investors. Further, decisions about taking borrowing
are not the decisions that most significantly affect the returns of the investee.
Determine whether M Ltd. has significant influence over the investee?
Solution:
In this case, though M Ltd. is holding less than 20% of the voting power of the investee, M
Ltd.’s consent is required to take decisions about taking borrowings which is one of the
relevant activities. Further, since the decisions about taking borrowing are not the decisions that
most significantly affect the returns of the investee, it cannot be said that all the investors have
joint control over the investee. Hence, it can be said that M Ltd. has significant influence over
the investee.
Illustration 4: Material transactions between the entity and its investee
RS Ltd. is an entity engaged in the business of pharmaceuticals. It has invested in the share capital
of an investee XY Ltd. and is holding 15% of XY Ltd.’s total voting power. XY Ltd. is engaged in the
business of producing packing materials for pharmaceutical entities. One of the incentives for RS
Ltd. to invest in XY Ltd. was the fact that XY Ltd. is engaged in the business of producing packing

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
materials which is also useful for RS Ltd. Since last many years, XY Ltd.’s almost 90% of the
output is procured by RS Ltd.
Determine whether RS Ltd. has significant influence over XY Ltd.?
Solution:
Since 90% of the output of XY Ltd. is procured by RS Ltd., XY Ltd. would be dependent on RS
Ltd. for the continuation of its business. Hence, even though RS Ltd. is holding only 15% of the
voting power of XY Ltd. it has significant influence over XY Ltd.
Illustration 5: Interchange of managerial personnel
Entity X and entity Y operate in the same industry, but in different geographical regions. Entity X
acquires a 10% shareholding in entity Y as a part of a strategic agreement. A new production
process is key to serve a fundamental change in the strategic direction of entity Y. The terms of
agreement provide for entity Y to start a new production process under the supervision of two
managers from entity X. The managers seconded from entity X, one of whom is on entity X's board,
will oversee the selection and recruitment of new staff, the purchase of new equipment, the training
of the workforce and the negotiation of new purchase contracts for raw materials. The two
managers will report directly to entity Y's board and as well as to entity X. Analyse.
Solution:
The secondment of the board member and a senior manager from entity X to entity Y gives
entity X a range of power over a new production process and may evidence that entity X has
significant influence over entity Y. This assessment takes into the account what are the key
financial and operating policies of entity Y and the influence this gives entity X over those
policies.
Illustration 6: Provision of essential technical information
R Ltd. is a tyre manufacturing entity. The entity has entered into a technology transfer agreement
with another entity Y Ltd. which is also involved in the business of tyre manufacturing. R Ltd. is an
established entity in this business whereas Y Ltd. is a relatively new entity.
As per the agreement, R Ltd. has granted to Y Ltd. a license to use its the technical information and
know- how which are related to the processes for the manufacture of tyres. Y Ltd. is dependent on
the technical information and know-how supplied by R Ltd. because of its lack of expertise and
experience in this business. Further, R Ltd. has also invested in 10% of the equity share capital of Y
Ltd.
Determine whether R Ltd. has significant influence over Y Ltd.?
Solution:
Y Ltd. obtains essential technical information for the running of its business from R Ltd. Hence
R Ltd. has significant influence over Y Ltd. despite of holding only 10% of the equity share
capital of Y Ltd.
An entity which is currently holding 10% of the voting power of an entity has an option of purchase
additional 15% voting power of the investee from other investors. However, the entity currently
does not have financial ability to purchase additional 15% voting power of the investee. Determine
whether the entity has significant influence over the investee?
Solution:
Considering the potential voting rights, the entity can have more than 20% of the voting
power ofthe investee and hence it is presumed that the entity has significant influence over the
investee. The fact that the entity does not have financial ability to purchase such additional
voting power is not considered in such assessment (It should be noted that under Ind AS 110,
potential voting rights which an entity cannot exercise because of its financial ability are not
considered as substantive and hence not factored in the assessment. However, under Ind AS
28, there is no such requirement given. Hence the potential voting rights, even if they are not
substantive as per Ind AS 110, are included in the assessment of significant influence.)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 8: Accounting entries related investment in associate / joint venture
On the first day of a financial year, A Ltd. invested in the equity share capital of B Ltd. at a cost of ₹
1,00,000 to acquire 25% share in the voting power of B Ltd. A Ltd. has concluded that B Ltd. is
an associate of A Ltd. At the end of the year, B Ltd. earned profit of ₹ 10,000 and other
comprehensive income of ₹ 2,000. In that year, B Ltd. also declared dividend to the extent of ₹
4,000. Pass necessary entries in the books of A Ltd. to account for the investment in associate.
Solution:
Following entries would be passed in the books of A Ltd.:
1) Initial entry to record investment done in associate
Investment in B Ltd. A/c Dr. 1,00,000
2) Recording of share in the profit of the associate

Investment in B Ltd. A/c Dr . 2,500
To Share in profit of investee (P&L) 2,500
[A Ltd. share in profit would be ₹ 2,500 (₹ 10,000 x 25%)]
3) Recording of share in the other comprehensive income (OCI) of the associate
Investment in B Ltd. A/c Dr. 500
To Share in OCI of investee (OCI) 500
[A Ltd. share in OCI would be ₹ 500 (₹ 2,000 x 25%)]
4) Recording of dividend distributed by associate
Dividend income A/c (P&L) Dr. 1,000
To Investment in B Ltd. A/c 1,000
[A Ltd. share in dividend would be ₹ 1,000 (₹ 4,000 x 25%)]
Illustration 9: Exemption from applying equity method
MNO Ltd. holds 15% of the voting power of DEF Ltd. PQR Mutual Fund (which is a subsidiary of
MNO Ltd.) also holds 10% voting power of DEF Ltd. Hence, MNO Ltd. holds total 25% voting
power of DEF Ltd. (15% held by own and 10% held by subsidiary) and accordingly has significant
influence over DEF Ltd. How should MNO Ltd. account for investment in DEF Ltd. in its
consolidated financial statements?
Solution:
The 15% interest which is held directly by MNO Ltd. should be measured as per equity method
of accounting. However, with respect to the 10% interest which is held through a mutual fund,
MNO Ltd. can avail the exemption from applying the equity method to that 10% interest and
instead measure that investment at fair value through profit or loss. To summarise, the total
interest of 25% in DEF Ltd. should be measured as follows:
 15% interest held directly by MNO Ltd.: Measure as per equity method of accounting
 10% interest held indirectly through a mutual fund: Measure as per equity method of
accounting or at fair value thorough profit or loss as per Ind AS 109
Illustration 10: Acquisition of interest in an associate
Blue Ltd. acquired 25% of the equity share capital of Green Ltd. on the first day of the financial year
for ₹ 1,25,000. As of that date, the carrying value of the net assets of Green Ltd. was ₹ 3,00,000
and the fair value was ₹ 4,00,000. The excess of fair value over the carrying value was
attributable to one of the buildings owned by Green Ltd. having a remaining useful life of 20 years.
Green Ltd. earned profit of ₹ 40,000 and other comprehensive income of ₹ 10,000 during the year.
Calculate the goodwill / capital reserve on the date of acquisition, Blue Ltd.’s share in the profit and
other comprehensive income for the year and closing balance of investment at the end of the year.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
(1) Goodwill / capital reserve on the date of acquisition
The cost of the investment is higher than the net fair value of the investee’s identifiable assets
andliabilities. Hence there is goodwill. Amount of goodwill is calculated as follows
₹
Cost of acquisition of investment 1,25,000
Blue Ltd.’s share in fair value of net assets of Green Ltd. on the date of acquisition (1,00,000)
(4,00,000 *25%)
Goodwill 25,000
Above goodwill will be recorded as part of carrying amount of the investment.
(1) Share in profit and other comprehensive income of Gren Ltd.
₹
Share in profit of Green Ltd. (40,000 x 25%) 10,000
Adjustment for depreciation based on fair value (1,00,000 ÷ 20) x 25% 1,250
Share in profit after adjustment 8,750
Share in other comprehensive income (10,000 x 25%) 2,500
(2) Closing balance of investment at the end of the year
₹
Cost of acquisition of investment (including goodwill of ₹ 25,000) 1,25,000
Share in profit after adjustments 8,750
Share in other comprehensive income 2,500
Closing balance of investment 1,36,250
Illustration 11: Cumulative preference shares issued by associate or joint venture
KL Ltd. has invested in 50% voting power of a joint venture MN Ltd. MN Ltd. has also issued 10%
cumulative preference shares to other investors worth ₹ 10,00,000. During the year, MN Ltd.
earned profit of ₹ 4,00,000. Also, MN Ltd. has not declared any dividend on the preference shares
for current year. Calculate KL Ltd.’s share in the net profit of MN Ltd. for the year.
Solution:
If an associate or a joint venture has outstanding cumulative preference shares that are held
by parties other than the entity and are classified as equity, the entity should compute its share
of profit or loss after adjusting for dividend on such shares, whether or not the dividends have
been declared.
In current case, KL Ltd.’s share in net profit of MN Ltd. would be as follows.
Profit of MN Ltd. for the year 4,00,000
Dividend on cumulative preference shares (10,00,000*10%) (1,00,000)
Net profit attributable to the holders of equity share 3,00,000
KL Ltd.’s 50% share in net profit of MN Ltd. 1,50,000
Illustration 12: Share in the consolidated financial statements of associate
Entity A holds a 20% equity interest in Entity B (as associate) that in turn has a 100% equity
interest in Entity C. Entity B recognised net assets relating to Entity C of ₹ 1,000 in its consolidated
financial statements. Entity B sells 20% of its interest in Entity C to a third party (a non-controlling
shareholder) for ₹ 300 and recognises this transaction as an equity transaction in accordance with
paragraph 23 of Ind AS 110, resultingin a credit in Entity B’s equity of ₹ 100.
The financial statements of Entity A and Entity B are summarised as follows before and after the
transaction:
Before A’s consolidated financial statements

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Assets Total Liabilities Total
Investment in B 200 Equity 200
Total 200 Total 200
B’s consolidated financial statements
Assets Total Liabilities Total
Assets (from C) 1,000 Equity 1,000
Total 1,000 Total 1,000
The financial statements of B after the transaction are summarised below:
After B’s consolidated financial statements
Assets ₹ Liabilities ₹
Assets (from C) 1,000 Equity 1,000
Cash 300 Equity transaction with non-controlling interest 100
Equity attributable to owners 1100
Non-controlling interest 200
Total 1300 Total 1300

Although Entity A did not participate in the transaction, Entity A's share of net assets in Entity B
increased as a result of the sale of B's 20% interest in C. Effectively, A's share in B's net assets is
now ₹ 220 (20% of ₹ 1,100) i.e., ₹ 20 in addition to its previous share.
How is an equity transaction that is recognised in the financial statements of Entity B reflected in
the consolidated financial statements of Entity A that uses the equity method to account for its
investment in Entity B?
Solution:
The change of interest in the net assets / equity of the associate as a result of the investee's
equity transaction is reflected in the investor's financial statements as 'share of other changes
in equity of investee' (in the statement of changes in equity) instead of gain in Statement of
profit and loss, since itreflects the post-acquisition change in the net assets of the investee and
also faithfully reflects the investor's share of the associate's transaction as presented in the
associate's consolidated financial statements.
Thus, in the given case, Entity A recognises ₹ 20 as change in other equity instead of in
statement of profit and loss and maintains the same classification as of its associate, Entity B,
i.e., a direct credit to equity as in its consolidated financial statements.
Illustration 13: Upstream and downstream transaction between an entity and its
associate Scenario A
M Ltd. has invested in 40% share capital of N Ltd. and hence N Ltd. is an associate of M Ltd.
During the year, N Ltd. sold inventory to M Ltd. for a value of ₹ 10,00,000. This included profit of
10% on the transaction price i.e. profit of ₹ 1,00,000. Out the above inventory, M Ltd. sold
inventory of ₹ 6,00,000 to outside customers. Hence, the inventory of ₹ 4,00,000 purchased from N
Ltd. is still lying with M Ltd. Determine the unrealised profit to be eliminated on above transaction.
Scenario B
Assume the same facts as per Scenario A except that the inventory is sold by M Ltd. to N Ltd.
instead of N Ltd. selling to M Ltd. Determine the unrealised profit to be eliminated on above
transaction.
Solution:
Scenario A
Firstly, as part of its equity method accounting for investment in N Ltd., M Ltd. will pass this
journalentry:
Investment in N Ltd. Dr. 40,000
To Share in profit of N Ltd. 40,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Out of the inventory of ₹ 10,00,000, M Ltd. has sold inventory worth ₹ 6,00,000 to outside customers.
Hence, the profit of ₹ 60,000 (6,00,000 *10% profit margin) on such inventory is realised. However,
the inventory worth ₹ 4,00,000 is still held by M Ltd. which consists profit of ₹ 40,000 (4,00,000*10%).
Hence, M Ltd.’s share in such profit i.e., ₹ 16,000 (40,000*40%) is considered as unrealised.
Accordingly, after recording of share in total profit of N Ltd., M Ltd. should pass following
adjustment entry to reverse the unrealised profit margin:
Share in profit of N Ltd. Dr. 16,000
To Inventory 16,000
In subsequent period, when this inventory of ₹ 4,00,000 is sold by N Ltd. to an outside customer
then the above profit margin of ₹ 16,000 will be treated as realised and hence the above entry will
be reversed in that period.
[Note: in the separate financial statements of M Ltd., inventory is carried at ₹ 4,00,000 whereas in its
consolidated financial statements, inventory is carried at ₹ 3,84,000 (due to elimination entry above
in respect of unrealized profit). In the subsequent period, when the inventory is sold, Inventory
Account is credited by ₹ 4,00,000 whereas for the purpose of consolidated financial statements, it
should have been credited by only ₹ 3,84,000. The difference is adjusted by debiting back ₹ 16,000
to the Inventory Account and a corresponding recognition of share in profit of associate.]
Scenario B
Out of the inventory of ₹ 10,00,000, N Ltd. has sold inventory worth ₹ 6,00,000 to outside customers.
Hence, the profit of ₹ 60,000 (6,00,000 x 10% profit margin) on such inventory is realised. However,
the inventory worth ₹ 4,00,000 is still held by N Ltd. which consists profit of ₹ 40,000 (4,00,000*10%).
Out of this profit of ₹ 40,000, profit to the extent of other investor’s interest in the investee istreated
as realised profit i.e., ₹ 24,000 (40,000*60%) is treated as realised profit. Balance profit of ₹16,000
(40,000*40%) is considered as unrealised. Hence, M Ltd. should pass following adjustment entry to
reverse the unrealised profit:
Sales Dr. 160,000
To Cost of material consumed 144,000
To Investment in N Ltd. 16,000
In subsequent period, when this inventory of ₹ 4,00,000 is sold by N Ltd. to an outside customer
then the above profit margin of ₹ 16,000 will be treated as realised and hence the above entry will
be reversed in that period.
Illustration 14: Impairment loss on downstream and upstream transaction between an
entity and itsjoint venture
Scenario A
X Ltd. has invested in a joint venture Y Ltd. by holding 50% of its equity share capital. During
the year, XLtd. sold an asset to Y Ltd. at its market value of ₹ 8,00,000. The asset’s carrying
value in X Ltd.’s books was ₹ 10,00,000. Determine how should X Ltd. account for the sale
transaction in its books.
Scenario B
Assume the same facts as per Scenario A except that the asset is sold by Y Ltd. to X Ltd.
Instead of X Ltd.selling to Y Ltd. Determine how should X Ltd. account for the above transaction
in its books.
Solution:
Scenario A
X Ltd. should record full loss of ₹ 2,00,000 (10,00,000 – 8,00,000) in its books as that would
represent the impairment loss because the market value has actually declined. This loss
would have been recorded even if X Ltd. would have first impaired the asset and then sold
to Y Ltd. at zero profit / loss. Following entry should be passed in the books of X Ltd.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Bank A/c Dr. 8,00,000
Loss on sale of asset Dr. 2,00,000
To Asset 10,00,000
Scenario B
X Ltd. should record loss to the extent of its share in Y Ltd. Hence, X Ltd.’s share in loss
i.e.₹ 1,00,000 [(10,00,000 – 8,00,000) x 50%] should be recorded by X Ltd. in its books.
The loss should be recorded since the market value of the asset has actually declined and
this would represent impairment. This loss would have been recorded even if Y Ltd. would
have first recorded an impairment loss of ₹ 2,00,000 and then sold to X Ltd. at zero profit /
loss. Following entry should be passed in the books of X Ltd.
Asset Dr. 8,00,000
Share in loss of YLtd . Dr. 1,00,000
To Bank 8,00,000
To Investment in Y Ltd. 1,00,000
Illustration 15: Loss making associate and long-term interests
An entity has following three type interests in an associate:
Equity shares: 25% of the equity shares to which equity method of accounting is applied
Preference shares: Non-cumulative preference shares that form part of net investment in the
associate. Such preference shares are measured at fair value as per Ind AS 109.
Long-term loan: The loan carrying interest of 10% p.a. The interest income is received at the
end of each year. The long-term loan is accounted as per amortised cost as per Ind AS 109. This
loan also forms part of net investment in the associate.
At the start of year 1, the carrying value of each of the above interests is as follows:
Equity shares – ₹ 10,00,000
Preference shares – ₹ 5,00,000
Long-term loan – ₹ 3,00,000
Following table summarises the changes in the fair value of preference shares as per Ind AS 109,
impairment loss on long-term loan as per Ind AS 109 and entity’s share in profit / loss of associate
for year 1-5.
nd of Increase / (Decrease) in fair value of Impairment loss / (reversal) Entity’s share in
Year preference shares as per Ind AS 109 on long-term loan as per Ind profit
AS 109 / (loss) of associate
1 (50,000) (50,000) (16,00,000)
2 (50,000) - (2,00,000)
3 1,00,000 50,000 -
4 50,000 - 10,00,000
5 30,000 - 10,00,000
Throughout year 1 to 5, there has been no objective evidence of impairment in the net investment in
the associate. The entity does not have any legal or constructive obligation to share the losses of
the associate beyond its interest in the associate.
Based on above, determine the closing balance of each of the above interests at the end of each
year.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Year 1
Below table summarises the closing balance of each of the interest at the end of year 1:
Type of Opening Adjustmen Balance Share in Closing
balance at the after applying balance at
interest t asper Ind profit / (loss)
start of the Ind the end of the
year
AS 109 AS 109
of associate year
(A) (B) I = (A+B) (D) I=
(C+D)
Equity 10,00,000 NA 10,00,000 (10,00,000) -
shares
Preference 5,00,000 (50,000) 4,50,000 (4,50,000) -
shares
Long-term 3,00,000 (50,000) 2,50,000 (1,50,000) 1,00,000
loan
Total 18,00,000 (1,00,000) 17,00,000 (16,00,000) 1,00,000
The entire loss of ₹ 16,00,000 is recognised. Hence, there is no unrecognised loss at the end of
year 1.
Year 2
Type of Opening Adjustment Balance Share in Closing balance
interest balance atthe asper Ind AS after applying profit atthe end of the
start of the year Ind AS 109 / (loss) of year
109
associate
(A) (A) (B) I = (A+B) (D) I=
(C+D)
Equity - NA - - -
shares
Preference - (50,000) (50,000) 50,000 * -
shares
Long-term 1,00,000 1,00,000 1,00,000
loan
Total 1,00,000 (1,00,000) 17,00,000 (50,000)
* Recognition of changes in fair value as per Ind AS 109 has resulted in the carrying amount of
Preference shares being negative ₹ 50,000. Consequently, the entity shall reverse a portion of the
associate’s losses previously allocated to Preference shares.
Out of the total loss of ₹ 2,00,000 for the year, loss of only ₹ 50,000 is recognized. Hence, there
isrecognized loss to the extent of ₹ 1,50,000 at the end of year 2.
Year 3
Type of Opening Adjustment as alance after Share in profit Closing
interest balance at the per Ind AS applying Ind /(loss) of associate balance atthe
start of the year 109 AS 109 end of
the year
(A) (B) I = (A+B) (D) I = (C+D)
Equity - NA - - -
shares
Preference - 1,00,000 1,00,000 (1,00,000) -
shares

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Long-term - 50,000 50,000 (50,000) -
loan
Total - 1,50,000 1,50,000 (1,50,000) -
The share in profit / loss for the year is nil. However, there was previously unrecognised loss of
₹ 1,50,000 which is allocated in current year. After recognising the above loss, there is no
unrecognized loss at the end of year 3.
Year 4
Type of Opening Adjustment Balance after Share in profit / Closing
interest balance at the asper Ind applying (loss) of balanceatthe
start of the year AS 109 ind AS 109 associate end of theyear
(A) (B) I = (A+B) (D) I = (C+D)
Equity - NA - 2,00,000 2,00,000
shares
Preference - 50,000 50,000 5,00,000 5,50,000
shares
Long-term - - - 3,00,000 3,00,000
loan
Total - 50,000 50,000 10,00,000 10,50,000
The entity’s share in profit of associate for the year is ₹ 10,00,000. The entity shall allocate such
profit to each of the instruments in order of their seniority in liquidation. The entity should limit
the amount of profit to be allocated to preference shares and long-term loan to the extent of
losses previously allocated to them. Hence, the entity has allocated ₹ 5,00,000 to preference shares
and ₹ 3,00,000 to long-term debt.
There is no unrecognised loss at the end of year 4.
Year 5
Type of Opening balance Adjustment Balance after Share in Closing
interest at the start of the as per Ind applying Ind profit / balance at the
year AS 109 AS 109 (loss) of end of the
associate year
(A) (B) I = (A+B) (D) I = (C+D)
Equity 2,00,000 NA 2,00,000 10,00,000 12,00,000
shares
Preference 5,50,000 30,000 5,80,000 - 5,80,000
shares
Long-term 3,00,000 - 3,00,000 - 3,00,000
loan
Total 10,50,000 30,000 10,80,000 10,00,000 20,80,000
The entity’s share in profit of associate for the year is ₹ 10,00,000. The entire profit is allocated to
equity shares since there is no loss previously allocated to either preference shares or long-term
loan. There is no recognized loss at the end of year 5.
Year 1 to 5
The interest accrual on long-term loan would be done in each year at 10% p.a. This will be done
without taking into account any adjustment done in the carrying value of long-term loan as per
IndAS 28. Hence, the entity will accrue interest of ₹ 30,000 (3,00,000 x 10%) in each year.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 16: Recording in profit or loss of the gain / loss on discontinuation of equity method
CD Ltd. held 50% of the voting power of RS Ltd. which is a joint venture of CD Ltd. The carrying
value of the investment in RS Ltd. is ₹ 1,00,000. Now out of the 50% stake, CD Ltd. has sold 20%
stake in RS Ltd. to a third party for a consideration of ₹ 80,000. The fair value of the retained 30%
interest is ₹ 1,20,000. Determine how much gain / loss should be recorded in profit or loss of CDLtd.
Solution:
CD Ltd. Shall record in profit or loss difference between below:
the fair value of any retained interest (i.e., ₹ 1,20,000) and any proceeds from disposing ofa
part interest in the joint venture (i.e., ₹ 80,000); and
the carrying amount of the investment at the date the equity method was discontinued (i.e., ₹
1,00,000).
Hence, CD Ltd. Shall record gain of ₹ 1,00,000 in profit or loss.
Illustration 17: Investment in joint venture held for sale
Ram Ltd. holds 50% of the equity share capital of Shyam Ltd. The balance 50% equity share
capital is held by another investor. Ram Ltd. has joint control over Shyam Ltd. and it is a joint
venture of Ram Ltd., accounted using equity method. Now Ram Ltd. is planning to sell 10% of the
equity share capital of Shyam Ltd. to a third party. Such 10% investment meets the criteria of an
asset held for sale and has been measured and disclosed accordingly. Now determine how should
Ram Ltd. account 40% interest retained in Shyam Ltd.
Solution:
Till the time 10% stake is sold, Ram Ltd. shall account for the retained interest of 40% as per equity
method. After the sale of 10% investment, if Ram Ltd. still has joint control over Shyam Ltd. (e.g.
through contractual arrangement) then it shall continue to measure that investment using equity
method. However, if Ram Ltd. is not going to have joint control over Shyam Ltd. post the disposal
of10% investment then retained investment of 40% shall be accounted as per Ind AS 109.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 27– SEPARATE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Illustration 1: Reorganisation of the group structure
Following is the existing and proposed group structure of an original parent A Ltd.
Existing structure Proposed structure

Owners Owners
100%
100%
New Co.
Company A
100%
Company A 100% 100%
100%
100% Company B
Company C
Company B Company C
As per the above structure, the Owners of Company A will transfer all their shareholding in
Company A to New Co. In exchange of such shares, New Co. will issue its equity shares to the
Owners. New Co. will issue the shares to the owners in the same ratio of their existing holding in
Company A so that they have same absolute and relative interests in the net assets of the group
immediately before and after the reorganisation. The assets and liabilities of the group immediately
before the and after the proposed restructuring will also be the same.
The cost of the investment in Company A in the books of the Owners is ₹ 10 lakh. Total equity of
Company A (i.e. equity share capital and other equity attributable to the owners) as per its separate
financial statements on the date of proposed restructuring is ₹ 15 lakh.
After the proposed restructuring, New Co. wants to record its investment in Company A at cost.
Determine how it should measure the cost of investment in Company A?
Solution:
In current case, New Co. should measure the cost of investment in Company A at
the carrying amount of its share of the equity items shown in the separate financial statements of
Company A at the date of the restructuring because:
a) New Co. obtains control of Company A by issuing equity instruments to the Owners
in exchange for their existing equity instruments of Company A;
b) the assets and liabilities of the group immediately before and the proposed
restructuring will be same; and
c) the Owners will have the same absolute and relative interests in the net assets of the
groupimmediately before and after the proposed restructuring.
Hence, New Co. will measure the cost of investment in Company A at ₹15 lakh

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 1
X Limited was holding 100% of the equity share capital of Y Limited and Y Limited was treated as a subsidiary
by X Limited. Now, Y Limited issues convertible preference shares to Z Limited. As per the issue document of
convertible preference shares, Z Limited also gets the rights to participate in the relevant activities of Y Limited
whereby Z Limited’s consent is also necessary to pass any decision by the equity shareholder of Y Limited (i.e. X
Limited). Determine how should X Limited account for its investment in Y Limited in its consolidated financial
statements after the issue of convertible preference shares by Y Limited to Z Limited?
SOLUTION
As per the issue document of convertible preference shares, unanimous consent of both X Limited and Z Limited are
required to pass any decision about the relevant activities of Y Limited. Hence, Y Limited is jointly controlled by X
Limited and Z Limited and thereby, YLimited becomes a joint arrangement between X Limited and Z Limited.
Y Limited is structured through a separate vehicle. The legal form of Y Limited, terms of the contractual arrangement
or other facts and circumstances do not give X Limited and Z Limited rights to the assets, and obligations for the
liabilities, relating to Y Limited. Hence, Y Limited is a joint venture between X Limited and Z Limited.
When the convertible preference shares are issued to Z Limited, X Limited losses control over Y Limited. Hence X
Limited should derecognise the assets and liabilities of Y Limited from its consolidated financial statements. 100%
equity shares in Y Limited is still held by X Limited. Hence such investment would be accounted at fair value on
the date of loss ofcontrol by X Limited. The difference between the fair value of 100% equity shares retained inY
Limited and the carrying value of assets and liabilities of Y Limited derecognised is recognised in profit or loss
of X Limited. After the loss of control, the investment in Y Limitedis accounted as per equity method of accounting
by X Limited whereby the investment valuein Y Limited will be adjusted for the change in the X Limited’s share
of the net assets Y Limited post the date of loss of control. Also, the difference between the fair value of
investment in Y Limited and fair value of net identifiable assets of Y Limited shall be goodwillor capital reserve.
Question 2
M Limited holds 90% interest in subsidiary N Limited. N Limited holds 25% interest in an associate O Limited. As
at 31 March 20X1, the net assets of O Limited was 300 lakhs including profit of ₹ 40 lakhs for the year ended
31 March 20X1. Calculate howthe investment in O Limited will be accounted in the consolidated financial statements
of M Limited?
SOLUTION
Since N Limited is a subsidiary of M Limited, the consolidated financial statements of M Limited will include 100%
amounts of the consolidated financial statements of N Limited (including investment in O Limited accounted for using
equity method). Accordingly, the investment in O Limited will be accounted as follows in the consolidated financial
statementsof M Limited:
₹’ lakh
Investment in O Limited (300 x 25%) 75
Share in profit of O Limited
Attributable to M Limited (40 x 25% x 90%) 9
Attributable to Non-controlling interest of N Limited (50 x 25% x10%) 1 10
Question 3
AB Limited holds 30% interest in an associate which it has acquired for a cost of ₹ 300 lakhs. On the date of
acquisition of that stake, the fair value of net assets of the associate was ₹ 900 lakh. The value of goodwill on acquisition
was ₹ 30 lakhs. After the acquisition, AB Limited accounted for the investment in the associate as per equity method of
accounting and now the carrying value of such investment in the consolidated financial statements of AB Limited is ₹ 360
lakhs. The associate has now issued equity shares to some investors other than AB Limited for a consideration of ₹
800 lakhs. This has effectively reduced the holding of AB Limited to 20%. Determine how AB Limited should account
for such reduction in interestin the associate?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
SOLUTION
Because of the issue of shares by associate to other investors, AB Limited has effectivelysold 10% (30 – 20) of
its interest in the associate. The gain / loss on reduction in interest in associate in calculated as follows:
₹’ lakhs
AB Limited’s share in the consideration received by the associate for issueof 160
shares (800 x 20%) (1)
Less: Carrying value of interest sold (360 x 1/3)(2) (120)
Gain on reduction in interest in associate(3) 40
Notes:
(1) The share in the consideration received by associate on issue of shares (i.e., 160 lakhs) would be
recorded as part of investment in associate.
(2) The carrying amount of interest sold (i.e., 120 lakhs) will be derecognised, including proportionate
goodwill of ₹ 10 lakhs (30 * 1/3).
(3) Gain of ₹ 40 lakhs will be recorded in the profit or loss.
Question 4 (MTP MAR 2021)
DEF Ltd. acquired 100% ordinary shares of ₹ 100 each of XYZ Ltd. on 1st October 20X1. On March 31, 20X2 the
summarised Balance Sheets of the two companies were as given below:
DEF Ltd. XYZ Ltd.
Assets
Property Plant Equipment
Land & Buildings 15,00,000 18,00,000
Plant & Machinery 24,00,000 13,50,000
Investment in XYZ Ltd. 34,00,000 -
Inventory 12,00,000 3,64,000
Financial Assets
Trade Receivable 5,98,000 4,00,000
Cash 1,45,000 80,000
Total 92,43,000 39,94,000
Equity & Liabilities
Equity Capital (Shares of ₹ 100 each fully paid) 50,00,000 20,00,000
Other Equity
Other reserves 24,00,000 10,00,000
Retained Earnings 5,72,000 8,20,000
Bank Overdraft 8,00,000 -
Trade Payable 4,71,000 1,74,000
Total 92,43,000 39,94,000
st
The retained earnings of XYZ Ltd. showed a credit balance of ₹ 3,00,000 on 1 April 20X1 out of which a dividend of
10% was paid on 1st November; DEF Ltd. has recognised the dividend received to profit or loss account; Fair Value
of P&M as on 1st October 20X1 was ₹ 20,00,000. The rate of depreciation on plant & machinery is 10%.
Following are the increases on comparison of Fair value as per respective Ind AS with Book value as on 1st October
20X1 which are to be considered while consolidating the Balance Sheets.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Liabilities Amount Assets Amount
Trade Payables 1,00,000 Land & Buildings 10,00,000
Inventories 1,50,000
Notes:
I. It may be assumed that the inventory is still unsold on balance sheet date and the Trade
Payables are also not yet settled.
II. Also assume that the Other Reserves of both the companies as on 31st March 20X2are the same
as was on 1st April 20X1.
III. All fair value adjustments have not yet started impacting consolidated post-acquisition profits.
Prepare consolidated Balance Sheet as on March 31, 20X2.
SOLUTION
Consolidated Balance Sheet of DEF Ltd. and its subsidiary, XYZ Ltd. as on31st March, 20X2
Particulars Note No. ₹
I. Assets
(1) Non-current assets
(i) Property Plant & Equipment 1 86,00,000
(2) Current Assets
(i) Inventories 2 17,14,000
(ii) Financial Assets
(a) Trade Receivables 3 9,98,000
(b) Cash & Cash equivalents 4 2,25,000
Total Assets 1,15,37,000
II. Equity and Liabilities
(1) Equity
(i) Equity Share Capital 5 50,00,000
(ii) Other Equity 6 49,92,000
(2) Current Liabilities
(i) Financial Liabilities
(a) Trade Payables 7 7,45,000
(b) Short term borrowings 8 8,00,000
Total Equity & Liabilities 1,15,37,000
Notes to Accounts
₹
Land & Building 43,00,000
Plant & Machinery 43,00,000 86,00,000
2. Inventories
DEF Ltd. 12,00,000
XYZ Ltd. 5,14,000 17,14,000
3. Trade Receivables
DEF Ltd. 5,98,000
XYZ Ltd. 4,00,000 9,98,000
DEF Ltd. 1,45,000
XYZ Ltd. 80,000 2,25,000
7. Trade payable

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
DEF Ltd. 4,71,000
XYZ Ltd. 2,74,000 7,45,000
8. Shorter-term borrowings
Bank overdraft 8,00,000
Statement of Changes in Equity:
1. Equity share Capital
Balance at the beginningof the Changes in Equity share Balance at the end of
reporting period capital during the year the reporting period
50,00,000 0 50,00,000
2. Other Equity
Share Equity Reserves & Total
application component Surplus
money of compound Capital Retained Other
pending financial reserve Earnings Reserves
allotment instrument
Balance at the
beginning 0 24,00,000 24,00,000
Total
comprehensive
income for the
year 0 5,72,000 5,72,000
Dividends 0 (2,00,000) (2,00,000)
Total
comprehensive
Income
attributable to
parent 0 3,35,000 3,35,000
Gain on
Bargain
purchase 18,85,000 18,85,000
Balance at the
end of
reporting 18,85,000 7,07,000 24,00,000 49,92,000
period
It is assumed that there exists no clear evidence for classifying the acquisition of the subsidiary as a bargain
purchase and, hence, the bargain purchase gain has been recognized directly in capital reserve. If, however,
there exists such a clear evidence, the bargain purchase gain would be recognized in other comprehensive income
and then accumulated in capital reserve. In both the cases, closing balance of capital reserve will be 18,85,000.
Working Notes:
1. Adjustments of Fair Value
The Plant & Machinery of XYZ Ltd. would stand in the books at 14,25,000 on 1st October,
20X1, considering only six months’ depreciation on ₹ 15,00,000 total depreciation being ₹ 1,50,000. The
value put on the assets being ₹ 20,00,000 there is an appreciation to the extent of ₹ 5,75,000.
2. Acquisition date profits of XYZ Ltd. ₹
Reserves on 1.4. 20X1 10,00,000
Profit & Loss Account Balance on 1.4. 20X1 Profit for 20X2: Total 3,00,000
₹ 8,20,000 less ₹ 1,00,000 (3,00,000 – 2,00,000) i.e.
₹ 7,20,000; for 6 months i.e. up to 1.10.20X1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total Appreciation including machinery appreciation (10,00,000 3,60,000
1,50,000 + 5,75,000 – 1,00,000)
Share of DEF Ltd. 16,25,000
32,85,000
3. Post-acquisition profits of XYZ Ltd. ₹
Profit after 1.10. 20X1 [8,20,000-1,00,000]x 6/12 3,60,000
Less: 10% depreciation on ₹ 20,00,000 for 6 months less (25,000)
depreciation already charged for 2 half of 20X1-20X2 on
nd
₹ 15,00,000 (1,00,000-75,000)
Share of DEF Ltd. 3,35,000
4. Consolidated total comprehensive income ₹
DEF Ltd.
Retained earnings on 31.3.20X2 5,72,000
Less: Retained earnings as on 1.4.20X1 (0)
Profits for the year 20X1-20X2 5,72,000
Less: Elimination of intra-group dividend (2,00,000)
Adjusted profit for the year 3,72,000
XYZ Ltd.
Adjusted profit attributable to DEF Ltd. (W.N.3) 3,35,000
Consolidated profit or loss for the year 7,07,000
5. No Non-controlling Interest as 100% shares of XYZ Ltd. are held by DEF Ltd.
6. Gain on Bargain Purchase ₹
Amount paid for 20,000 34,00,000
sharesPar value of shares 20,00,000
DEF Ltd.’s share in acquisition date profits of XYZ 32,85,000 (52,85,000)
Ltd.Gain on Bargain Purchase 18,85,000
7. Value of Plant & Machinery ₹
DEF Ltd. 24,00,000
XYZ Ltd. 13,50,000
Add: Appreciation on 1.10. 20X1 5,75,000
19,25,000
Add: Depreciation for 2nd half charged on pre-
revalued value 75,000
Less: Depreciation on ₹ 20,00,000 for 6 (1,00,000) 19,00,000
months 43,00,000
8. Consolidated retained earnings ₹
DEF Ltd. XYZ Ltd. Total
As given 5,72,000 8,20,000 13,92,000
Consolidation Adjustments:
(i) Elimination of pre-acquisition 0 (6,60,000) (6,60,000)
element [3,00,000 + 3,60,000]
(ii) Elimination of intra-group dividend (2,00,000) 2,00,000 0
(iii) Impact of fair value adjustments 0 (25,000) (25,000)
Adjusted retained earnings consolidated 3,72,000 3,35,000 7,07,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Assumptions:
1. Investment in XYZ Ltd is carried at cost in the separate financial statements of DEFLtd.
2. Appreciation of ₹10 lakhs in land & buildings is entirely attributable to land elementonly.
3. Depreciation on plant and machinery is on WDV method.
4. Acquisition-date fair value adjustment to inventories of XYZ Ltd. existing at the balance sheet date
does not result in need for any write-down.
Question 5
Ram Ltd. acquired 60% ordinary shares of ₹ 100 each of Krishan Ltd. on 1st October 20X1. On March 31, 20X2 the
summarised Balance Sheets of the two companies were as given below:
Ram Ltd. Krishan Ltd.
Assets
Land & Buildings 3,00,000 3,60,000
Plant & Machinery 4,80,000 2,70,000
Investment in Krishan Ltd. 8,00,000 -
Inventory 2,40,000 72,800
Financial Assets
Trade Receivables 1,19,600 80,000
Cash 29,000 16,000
Total 19,68,600 7,98,800
Equity Capital (Shares of ₹ 100 each fully paid) 10,00,000 4,00,000
Other Equity
Other Reserves 6,00,000 2,00,000
Retained earnings 1,14,400 1,64,000
Bank Overdraft 1,60,000 -
Trade Payable 94,200 34,800
Total 19,68,600 7,98,800
The Retained earnings of Krishan Ltd. showed a credit balance of ₹ 60,000 on 1st April 20X1 out of which a
dividend of 10% was paid on 1st November; Ram Ltd. has credited the dividend received to its Retained earnings;
Fair Value of P&M as on 1st October 20X1 was ₹ 4,00,000; The rate of depreciation on plant & machinery is 10%.
Following are the increases on comparison of Fair value as per respective Ind AS with book value as on 1st October
20X1 which are to be considered while consolidating the Balance Sheets.
Liabilities Amount Assets Amount
Trade Payables 20,000 Land & Buildings 2,00,000
Inventories 30,000
Notes:
 It may be assumed that the inventory is still unsold on balance sheet date and theTrade Payables are
also not yet settled.
 Also assume that the Other Reserves as on 31st March 20X2 are the same as was on1st April 20X1.
Prepare consolidated Balance Sheet as on March 31, 20X2.
SOLUTION

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Consolidated Balance Sheet of Ram Ltd. and its subsidiary, Krishan Ltd.
as on 31st March, 20X2
I. Assets
1 17,20,000
(i) Property, Plant & Equipment
2 1,65,800
(ii) Goodwill
(2) Current Assets
(b) Cash & Cash equivalents 5 45,000
Total Assets 24,73,200
(1) Equity
(i) Equity Share Capital
(2) Non-controlling Interest (WN 5) 7 7,30,600
(3) Current Liabilities 4,33,600
Total Equity & Liabilities 24,73,200
Notes to accounts
₹
Property Plant & Equipment
Land & Building 8,60,000
Plant & Machinery 8,60,000 17,20,000
Goodwill 1,65,800
Inventories
Ram Ltd 2,40,000
Krishan Ltd. 1,02,800 3,42,800
Trade Receivables
Ram Ltd. 1,19,600
Krishan Ltd 80,000 1,99,600
Cash & Cash equivalents
Ram Ltd. 29,000
Krishan Ltd 16,000 45,000
Trade Payables
Ram Ltd. 94,200
Krishan Ltd 54,800 1,49,000
Short-term borrowings
Bank overdraft 1,60,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Balance at thebeginning of the Changes in Equity share Balance at the end of the
reporting period capital during the year reporting period
10,00,000 0 10,00,000
7. Other Equity
Share Equity Reserves & Surplus Total
application component Capital Retained Other
money reserve Earnings Reserves
Balance at the beginning of
the reporting period
0 6,00,000 6,00,000
Total
Comprehensive income for 0 1,14,400 1,14,400
the year
Dividends 0 (24,000) (24,000)
Total
comprehensive 0 40,200 40,200
income attributableto parent
Gain on Bargainpurchase 0 0
Balance at the endof reporting
period 1,30,600 6,00,000 7,30,600
Working Notes:
The Plant & Machinery of Krishan Ltd. would stand in the books at ₹ 2,85,000 on 1st October, 20X1,
considering only six months’ depreciation on ₹3,00,000 total depreciation being ₹ 30,000. The value put on the assets
being ₹ 4,00,000 there is an appreciation to the extent of ₹ 1,15,000.
2. Acquisition date profits of Krishan Ltd.
Reserves on 1.4. 20X1 2,00,000
Profit & Loss Account Balance on 1.4. 20X1Profit 60,000
for 20X1-20X2: Total (₹ 1,64,000 less
₹ 20,000) x 6/12 i.e. ₹ 72,000;
upto 1.10. 20X1 Total 72,000
Appreciation 3,25,000
6,57,000
Holding Co. Share (60%) 3,94,200
3. Post-acquisition profits of Krishan Ltd.
Profit after 1.10. 20X1 [1,64,000-20,000]x 6/12 72,000
Less: 10% depreciation on ₹ 4,00,000 for 6 months less
depreciation already charged for 2nd half of 20X1-20X2 on
₹ 3,00,000 (20,000-15,000) (5,000)
Total 67,000
Share of holding Co. (60%) 40,200
4. Non-controlling Interest
Par value of 1600 shares 160,000
Add: 2/5 Acquisition date profits (6,57,000 – 40,000)Add: 2/5 2,46,800
Post-acquisition profits [WN 4] 26,800

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
4,33,600
5. Goodwill:
Amount paid for 2,400 sharesPar 8,00,000
value of shares 2,40,000
Acquisition date profits share of Ram Ltd. 3,94,200 (6,34,200)
Goodwill 1,65,800
6. Value of Plant & Machinery:
Ram Ltd. 4,80,000
Krishan Ltd. 2,70,000
Add: appreciation on 1.10. 20X1 1,15,000
3,85,000
Add: Depreciation for 2nd half charged on pre-
revaluedvalue 15,000
Less: Depreciation on ₹ 4,00,000 for 6 months (20,000) 3,80,000
8,60,000
7. Profit & Loss account consolidated
Ram Ltd. (as given) 1,14,400
Less: Dividend (24,000) 90,400
Share of Ram Ltd. in post-acquisition profits 40,200
1,30,600
QUESTION 6
On 31 March 20X2, Blue Heavens Ltd. acquired 100% ordinary shares carrying voting rightsof Orange County Ltd.
for ₹ 6,000 lakh in cash and it controlled Orange County Ltd. from that date. The acquisition-date statements of financial
position of Blue Heavens Ltd. and Orange County Ltd. and the fair values of the assets and liabilities recognised on
Orange County Ltd. balance sheet were:
Blue Heavens Ltd. Orange County Ltd.
Carrying Amount Carrying Amount Fair Value(₹ inlakh)
(₹ in lakh) (₹ in lakh)
Assets
Non-current assets 3,300
Building and other PPE 7,000 3,000
Investment in Orange County Ltd. 6,000
Current assets 600
Cash 1,500 700
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Share capital 5,000 2,000
Current liabilities
150
Total liabilities and equity 15,500 4,450
Prepare the Consolidated Balance Sheet as on March 31, 20X2 of group of entities BlueHeavens Ltd. and Orange County Ltd.
SOLUTION
Blue Heavens Ltd. consolidated balance sheet at 31 March 20X2 will be calculated asfollows: (in lakhs)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Blue Orange Consolidation Consolidated Blue
Heavens Ltd. County Ltd. adjustments Heavens Ltd.
Carrying Carrying
amount amount
Assets
Non-current assets
Goodwill 1,300 (WN 1) 1,300
Buildings and other PPE 7,000 3,000 300 10,300
Financial Assets
Investment in OrangeCounty
Ltd. 6,000 (6,000)
Current assets
Inventories 700 500 100 1,300
Financial Assets
Cash 1,500 700 2,200
Total assets 15,500 4,450 15,650
Equity
Share capital 5,000 2,000 (2,000) 5,000
Other Equity 10,200 2,300 (2,300) 10,200
Trade payable 300 150 450
Total liabilities andequity 15,500 4,450 15,650
Consolidation involves:
 Adding the balance sheet of the parent and its subsidiary together line by line.
 Eliminating the carrying amount of the parent’s investment in the subsidiary (because it is replaced by the
goodwill and the fair value of the assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities acquired) and the pre-acquisition
equity of the subsidiary (because that equity was not earned or contributed by the group but is part of what was
purchased) and recognising the fair value adjustments together with the goodwill asset that arose on acquisition of
the subsidiary.
1. Working for goodwill: (₹ in lakhs)
Less: Acquisition date fair value of Orange County Ltd. net assets (4,700)
Goodwill 1,300
2. Working for the acquisition date fair value of Orange County Ltd. net assets:Acquisition date
fair value of acquiree (Orange County Ltd.) assets
Buildings and other PPE 3,300
Inventories 600
Cash 700
Less: fair value of trade payables (150)
Fair value of net assets acquired 4,700
QUESTION 7
The facts are the same as in Question 6 above. However, Blue Heavens Ltd. acquires only 75% of the ordinary
shares, to which voting rights are attached of Orange County Ltd. Blue Heavens Ltd. pays ₹ 4,500 lakhs for the
shares. Prepare the Consolidated Balance Sheet as on March 31, 20X2 of group of entities Blue Heavens Ltd. and
Orange County Ltd. Heavens Ltd. pays ₹ 4,500 lakhs for the shares. Prepare the Consolidated Balance Sheet as on

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
March 31, 20X2 of group of entities Blue Heavens Ltd. and Orange County Ltd.
SOLUTION
Blue Heavens Ltd.’s consolidated balance sheet at 31 March 20X2 will be calculated asfollows: (in lakhs)
Blue Heavens Ltd. Orange County Ltd. Consolidation Consolidated
adjustments BlueHeavens Ltd.
Carrying amount Carrying amount
Assets
Non-current assets
Goodwill 975 (WN 1) 975
Buildings and other PPE 7,000 3,000 300 10,300
Financial Assets
Investment in OrangeCounty 4,500 (4,500)
Ltd.
Current assets
Inventories Financial 700 500 100 1,300
Assets
Cash 3,000 700 3,700
Total assets 15,500 4,450 16,825
Equity
Share capital Other 5,000 2,000 (2,000) 5,000
Equity 10,200 2,300 (2,300) 10,200
1,175 1,175
Non-controlling interest
Current liabilities
Trade payables 300 150 450
Total liabilities and 15,500 4,450 16,825
equity
Note: In this question, Blue Heavens Ltd.’s (and consequently the group’s) cash balance is 1,500 lakh higher than
in Question above because, here Blue Heavens Ltd. paid ₹ 1,500 less to acquire Orange County Ltd. (i.e. ₹ 6,000 less
₹ 4,500).
1. Working for goodwill: (₹ in lakhs)
Non- controlling interest 1,175
Less: Acquisition date fair value of Orange County Ltd. net assets
(cal. as above) 4,700
Goodwill 975
(Goodwill recognized in the consolidated balance sheet relates solely to the acquirer’sproportion of the subsidiary;
it does not include the non-controlling interest’s share).
QUESTION 8
Facts are same as in Question 6 &7, Blue Heavens Ltd. acquires 75% of Orange County Ltd. Blue Heavens Ltd. pays ₹ 4,500
lakhs for the shares. At 31 March 20X3, i.e one yea after Blue Heavens Ltd. acquired Orange Countyd., Ltthe individual
statements of financial position and statements of comprehensive income of Blue Heavens Ltd. and Orange County Ltd. are:
Blue Heavens Ltd. Orange County Ltd
Carrying Amount (₹ in lakh) Carrying Amount (₹ in
lakh)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Assets
Non-current assets
PPE (Building and others) 6,500 2,750
Investment in Orange County Ltd. 4,500
11,000 2,750
Current assets
Inventories 800 550
Financial Asset - Trade receivables 380 300
Cash 4,170 1,420
5,350 2,270
Equity
Share capital 5,000 2,000
16,000 4,850
Current liabilities
Financial Liabilities-Trade payables 350 170
350 170
Total liabilities and equity 16,350 5,020
Statements of Profit and Loss for the year ended 31 March 20X3:
Blue Heavens Ltd Orange County Ltd.
Carrying Amount (₹ in lakh) Carrying Amount(₹ in lakh)
Revenue 3,000 1,900
Cost of sales (1,800) (1,000)
Administrative expenses (400) (350)
Profit for the year 800 550
Note: Blue Heavens Ltd. estimates that goodwill has impaired by 98. The fair value adjustment to buildings
and other PPE is in respect of a building; all buildings have an estimated remaining useful life of 20 years from
31 March 20X2 and estimated residual values of zero. Blue Heavens Ltd. uses the straight-line method for
depreciation of PPE. All the inventory held by Orange County Ltd. at 31 March 20X2 was sold during 20X3.
Prepare the Consolidated Balance Sheet as on March 31, 20X3 of group of entities Blue Heavens Ltd. and Orange
County Ltd.
SOLUTION
Alternative I for calculation of Non-controlling Interest:
The Non-controlling Interest proportion of Orange County Ltd. is 25%.
At 31 March 20X3, the NCI in the consolidated balance sheet would be calculated as:
₹ (lakh)
NCI at date of acquisition (31 March 20X2) (see solution to Question 7) 1,175
NCI’s share of profit for the year ended 31 March 20X3, being 25%
Of ₹ 435 lakh (being ₹ 550 profit of Orange County Ltd. as per
Orange County Ltd. financial statements less ₹ 100 group inventory
Fair value adjustment less ₹ 15 group depreciation on building
fair value adjustment)* 109
NCI as at 31 March 20X3 1,284
*In calculating the NCI’s share of profit for the year ended 31 March 20X3, no deduction is made for goodwill
amortization because, as explained above, the goodwill arising on consolidation relates solely to the acquirer’s
proportion of the subsidiary and does not include the non-controlling interest’s share.
Alternative II for calculation of Non-controlling Interest:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
As an alternative to the above three-step approach, at 31 March 20X3 the NCI in the consolidated balance sheet is
calculated as 25% (the NCI's proportion) of ₹ 5,135, which is 1,284. ₹ 5,135 is Orange County Ltd. net assets at
31 March 20X3 as shown in Orange County Ltd. balance sheet (₹ 4,850, being ₹ 5,020 assets less ₹ 170 liabilities)
plus the fair value adjustment to those assets as made in preparing the group balance sheet (₹ 285, being the fair
value adjustment in respect of Orange County Ltd. building, ₹ 300, less one year’s depreciation of that adjustment, ₹ 15).
Blue Heavens Ltd. consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended31 March 20X3 will
be computed as follows:
Blue Orange Consolidate Consolidated
Heavens Ltd. County Ltd. adjustments
Revenue 3,000 1,900 4,900
Cost of sales (1,800) (1,000) (100) (WN 1) (2,900)
Profit for the year 1,200 900 2,000
Administrative expenses
(400) (350) (113) (WN 2) (863)
Total comprehensiveincome
for the year 800 550 1,137
Total comprehensive income attributable to:
Owners of the parent (75%) 1,028
Non-controlling interest (25%) 1091,137
 Adding the statement of comprehensive income of the parent and its subsidiary together line by line
 Recognising the fair value adjustments and/ or amortisation thereof together with amortisation of the
goodwill asset that arose on acquisition of the subsidiary.
Blue Heavens Ltd. consolidated balance sheet at 31 March 20X3 will be computed as follows: (₹in lakh)
Blue Orange County Consolidation Consolidated
Heavens Ltd. Ltd. adjustments Blue Heavens Ltd.
Carrying amount Carrying amount
Assets
Non-current assets
Goodwill 975-98 (WN 3) 877
Buildings and other PPE 6,500 2,750 285 (WN 4) 9,535
Financial Assets
Investment in Entity B 4,500 (4,500)
Current assets
Inventories 800 550 1,350
Financial Assets
Cash 4,170 1420 5,590
Total assets 16,350 5,020 18,032
Equity and
liabilities
Equity
Share capital 5,000 2,000 (2,000) 5,000
Other Equity 11,000 2,850 (2,622) (WN 5) 11,2 28
Non-controlling interest 1,284 1,284
Current liabilities
Trade payables 350 170 520

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total liabilities
andequity 16,350 5,020 18,032
 Adding the balance sheet of the parent and its subsidiary together line by line.
 Eliminating the carrying amount of the parent’s investment in the subsidiary (because it is replaced by the
goodwill and the fair value of the assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities acquired) and the pre-acquisition
equity of the subsidiary (because that equity was not earned or contributed by the group but is part of what
was purchased), and recognising the fair value adjustments together with the goodwill asset that arose on
acquisition of the subsidiary as adjusted to reflect the first year post-acquisition
 Recognising the non-controlling interest in the net assets of Entity B.
Working Notes:
(1) Cost of sales adjustment:
₹ 100 = fair value adjustment in respect of inventories at 31 March 20X2.
(2) Administrative expenses adjustment:
₹ 113 = Impairment of goodwill ₹ 98 (WN 3) + additional depreciation on building ₹ 15(WN 4).
For simplicity it is assumed that all the goodwill impairment and the additional depreciation on buildings
(on account of fair value adjustment) is adjusted against administrative expenses.
(3) Working for goodwill:
Goodwill at the acquisition date, ₹ 975, less accumulated impairment, ₹ 98 = ₹ 877.
(4) Working for building consolidation adjustment:
The fair value adjustment at 31 March 20X2 in respect of Orange County Ltd. building was ₹ 300, that is, the carrying
amount at 31 March 20X2 was ₹ 300 lower than was recognized in the group’s consolidated balance sheet. The building is
being depreciated over 20 years from 31 March 20X2. Thus, at 31 March 20X3 the adjustment required on
consolidation to the balance sheet will be ₹ 285, being ₹ 300 × 19/20 years’ estimated useful life remaining. The
additional depreciation recognized in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income is ₹ 15 (being ₹ 300 x 1/20).
(5) Reserves adjustment:
₹ 2,300 adjustment at the acquisition date (Illustration 7)plus ₹ 98 (WN 3)
impairment of goodwill
plus ₹ 15 (WN 4) additional depreciation on building
plus ₹ 100 (WN 1) fair value adjustment in respect of inventories
plus ₹ 109 NCI’s share of Orange County Ltd. profit for the year (as included in the consolidated
statement of comprehensive income) = ₹ 2,622.
QUESTION 9
P Pvt. Ltd. has a number of wholly-owned subsidiaries including S Pvt. Ltd. at 31st March 20X2. P Pvt. Ltd.’s
consolidated balance sheet and the group carrying amount of S Pvt. Ltd.’s assets and liabilities (ie the amount included
in the consolidated balance sheet in respect of S Pvt. Ltd.’s assets and liabilities) at 31st March 20X2 are as
follows:
Particulars Consolidated Group carrying amountof S Pvt.
(₹ in millions) Ltd. asset and liabilities Ltd.(₹ in
millions)
Assets
Non-Current Assets
Goodwill 380 180
Buildings 3,240 1,340
Current Assets
Inventories 140 40
Trade Receivables 1,700 900
Cash 3,100 1000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total Assets 8,560 3,460
Equities & Liabilities
Equity
Share Capital 1600
Other Equity
Retained Earnings 4,260
Current liabilities
Trade Payables 2,700 900
Total Equity & Liabilities 8,560 900
Prepare consolidated Balance Sheet after disposal as on 31st March, 20X2 when P Pvt. Ltd. group sold 100% shares
of S Pvt. Ltd. to independent party for ₹ 3,000 millions.
SOLUTION
When 100% shares sold to independent party Consolidated Balance Sheet of P Pvt. Ltd. and its remaining
subsidiaries as on 31st March, 20X2
Particulars Note No. (₹ in millions)
I. Assets
(i) Property Plant & Equipment 1 1,900
(ii) Goodwill 2 200
(2) Current Assets
(i) Inventories 3 100
(a) Trade Receivables 4 800
Total Assets 8,100
(1) Equity
(i) Equity Share Capital 6 1,600
(ii) Other Equity 7 4,700
(2) Non-controlling Interest
(a) Trade Payables 8 1,800
Total Equity & Liabilities 8,100
Notes to accounts:
(₹ in millions)
Land & Building 3,240
Less: S Pvt. Ltd. (1,340) 1,900
2. Goodwill 380
Less: S Pvt. Ltd. (180) 200
3. Inventories
Group 140
Group 1,700

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Group (WN 2) 5,100 5,100
6. Trade Payables
Group 2,700
Less: S Pvt. Ltd. 900 1,800
Statement of changes in Equity:
Balance at the beginningof the Changes in Equity share Balance at the end of the
reporting period capital during the year reporting period
1600 0 1600
7. Other Equity
application component Capital Retained Securities
money reserve Earnings Premium
Balance at the 4,260 4,260
beginning
Total comprehensiveincome 0
for the year
Dividends 0
Total comprehensive income 0
attributable to parent
Gain on disposal ofS Pvt. 440 440
Ltd.
Balance at the endof 0 4,700 4,700
reporting period
Working Notes:
1. When sold, the carrying amount of all assets and liabilities attributable to S Pvt. Ltd.were
eliminated from the consolidated balance sheet.
2. Cash on hand (in millions):
Cash before disposal of S Pvt. Ltd. 3,100
Less: S Pvt. Ltd. Cash (1,000)
Add: Cash realized from disposal 3,000
Cash on Hand 5,100
3.Gain/ Loss on disposal of entity (in millions):
Proceeds from disposal 3,000
Less: Net assets of S Pvt. Ltd. (2,560)
Gain on disposal 440
4.Retained Earnings (in millions):
Retained Earnings before disposal 4,260
Add: Gain on disposal 440
Retained earnings after disposal 4,700
QUESTION 10 (MTP OCT 2018)

Reliance Ltd. has a number of wholly-owned subsidiaries including Reliance Jio Info comm Ltd. at 31st March
20X2.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Reliance Ltd.’s consolidated balance sheet and the group carrying amount of Reliance Jio Info comm Ltd. assets and
liabilities (i.e., the amount included in that consolidated balance sheet in respect of Reliance Jio Info comm Ltd.
assets and liabilities) at 31st March 20X2 areas follows:
Particulars Consolidated Group carrying amount
(₹ In ‘000) of Reliance JioInfo
comm Ltd. asset and
liabilities Ltd. (₹ In ‘000)
Assets
Non-current Assets
Goodwill 190 90
Buildings 1,620 670
Current Assets
Inventories 70 20
Financial Assets
Trade Receivables 850 450
Cash 1,550 500
Equity
Share Capital 800
Other Equity
Retained Earnings 2,130
2,930
Current liabilities
Trade Payables 1,350 450
Total Equity & Liabilities 4,280 450
Prepare consolidated Balance Sheet after disposal as on 31st March, 20X2 when Reliance Ltd. group sold 90%
shares of Reliance Jio Info comm Ltd. to independent party for ₹ 1000 thousand.
SOLUTION
When 90% shares sold to independent party Consolidated Balance Sheet of RelianceLtd. and
its remaining subsidiaries as on 31st March, 20X2
Particulars Note No. (₹ In ‘000)
I. Assets
(i) Property Plant & Equipment 1 950
(ii) Goodwill 2 100
(iii) Financial Assets
(a) Investments 3 128
(2) Current Assets
(i) Inventories 4
(b) Trade Receivables 5 400
(c) Cash & Cash equivalents 6 2050
3,678
Total Assets

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(1) Equity
(i) Equity Share Capital 7 800
(ii) Other Equity 8 1,978
(a) Trade Payables 9 900
Total Equity & Liabilities 3,678
Notes to accounts:
(₹ In ‘000)
Land & Building 1620
Less: Reliance Jio Infocomm Ltd. (670) 950
2. Goodwill 190
3. Investments
Investment in Reliance Jio Infocomm Ltd. (WN 2) 128 128
4. Inventories
Group 70
5. Trade Receivables 850

Group (450) 400
Less: Reliance Jio Infocomm Ltd.
6. Cash & Cash equivalents 2,050 2,050
Group (WN 3)
9. Trade Payables 1,350
Group 450 900
Less: Reliance Jio Infocomm Ltd.
Statement of changes in Equity:
Balance at the beginningof the Changes in Equity share Balance at the end of
reporting period capital during the year the reporting period
800 0 800
8. Other Equity
application component
Capital Retained Securities
money
reserve Earnings Premium
Balance at the 2,130 2,130
beginning
Total comprehensiveincome 0
for the year
Dividends 0
Total comprehensive 0

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Income attributable to
parent
Loss on disposal of (152) (152)
Reliance Jio
Infocomm Ltd.
Balance at the endof 0 1,978 1,978
reporting period
Working Notes:
1. When 90% being sold, the carrying amount of all assets and liabilities attributable to Reliance Jio
Infocomm Ltd. were eliminated from the consolidated balance sheet and further financial asset is
recognized for remaining 10%.
2. Carrying value of remaining investment (in ‘000):
Net Assets of Reliance Ltd. 1,280
Less: 90% disposal (1152)
Financial Asset 128
3. Cash on hand (in ‘000):
Cash before disposal of Reliance Jio Infocomm Ltd. 1,550
Less: Reliance Jio Infocomm Ltd. Cash (500)
Add: Cash realized from disposal 1,000
Cash on Hand 2,050
4. Gain/ Loss on disposal of entity (in ‘000):
Proceeds from disposal 1,000
Less: Proportionate (90%) Net assets of Reliance JioInfocomm
Ltd. (90% of 1,280) (1,152)
Loss on disposal (152)
5. Retained Earnings (in ‘000):
Retained Earnings before disposal 2,130
Less: Loss on disposal (152)
Retained earnings after disposal 1,978
QUESTION 11
Airtel Telecommunications Ltd. owns 100% share capital of Airtel Infrastructures Pvt. Ltd. On 1 April 20X1 Airtel
Telecommunications Ltd. acquired a building from Airtel Infrastructures Pvt. Ltd., for ₹ 11,00,000 that the group plans
to use it as its new headquarters office.
Airtel Infrastructures Pvt. Ltd. had purchased the building from a third party on 1 April 20X0for ₹ 10,25,000. At that time
the building was assessed to have a useful life of 21 years and a residual value of ₹ 5,00,000. On 1 April 20X1 the carrying
amount of the building was ₹ 10,00,000 in Airtel Infrastructures Pvt. Ltd.’s individual accounting records.
The estimated remaining useful life of the building measured from 1 April 20X1 is 20 yearsand the residual value
of the building is now estimated at ₹ 3,50,000. The method of depreciation is straight-line.
Pass necessary accounting entries in individual and consolidation situations
SOLUTION
Journal Entries in Airtel Infrastructures Pvt. Ltd.
1. Assets (Building) A/c Dr. 10,25,000
To Cash 10,25,000
2. Depreciation (P/L) A/c Dr. 25,000
To Asset (Building) 25,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
3. Cash A/c Dr. 11,00,000
To Asset (Building) 10,00,000
To Gain on sale of asset (P/L) 1,00,000
Journal Entries in Airtel Telecommunications Ltd.
Asset (Building) A/c Dr. 11,00,000
To Cash 11,00,000
Depreciation (P/L) A/c Dr. 37,500
To Assets (Building) 37,500
Journal entry for consolidation:
1. Gain on sale of asset (P/L) Dr. 1,00,000

To Asset (Building) A/c 1,00,000
2. Asset (Building) A/c Dr. 5,000 (WN 1)
To Consolidated P&L 5,000
Working Note:
To be depreciated on original value (10,00,000-3,50,000)/20 32,500
Depreciation charged (11,00,000-3,50,000)/20 37,500
Reversal of depreciation 5,000
Particulars Consolidat Individual Financial statements

ed financial Airtel Telecommunications Airtel Infrastructures
statements Ltd. Pvt. Ltd.
31st March 20X1 10,00,000 0 10,00,000
1st April 20X1 0 11,00,000 (10,00,000)
purchase sale
Depreciation (32,500) (37,500) 0
31st March 20X2 9,67,500 10,62,500 0
QUESTION 12
As at the beginning of its current financial year, AB Limited holds 90% equity interest in BC Limited. During the
financial year, AB Limited sells 70% of its equity interest in BC Limited to PQR Limited for a total consideration of ₹ 56
crore and consequently loses control of BC Limited. At the date of disposal, fair value of the 20% interest retained by AB
Limited is ₹ 16 crore and the net assets of BC Limited are carry valued at ₹ 60 crore.
These net assets include the following:
(a) Debt investments classified as fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) of ₹ 12 crore and
related FVOCI reserve of ₹ 6 crore.
(b) Net defined benefit liability of ₹ 6 crore that has resulted in a reserve relating to net measurement losses of
₹ 3 crore.
(c) Equity investments (considered not held for trading) of ₹ 10 crore for which irrevocable option of
recognising the changes in fair value in OCI has been availed and related FVOCI reserve of ₹ 4 crore.
(d) Net assets of a foreign operation of ₹ 20 crore and related foreign currency translation reserve of ₹8 crore.In
consolidated financial statements of AB Limited, 90% of the above reserves were included in equivalent equity reserve
balances, with the 10% attributable to the non-controlling interest included as part of the carrying amount of the non-
controlling interest.
What would be the accounting treatment on loss of control in the consolidated financial statements of AB Limited?
SOLUTION
Paragraph 25 of Ind AS 110 states that if a parent loses control of a subsidiary, the parent:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(a) derecognises the assets and liabilities of the former subsidiary from the consolidatedbalance sheet.
(b) recognises any investment retained in the former subsidiary at its fair value when control islost and subsequently
accounts for it and for any amounts owed by or to the former subsidiary in accordance with relevant Ind ASs.
That fair value shall be regarded as the fair value on initial recognition of a financial asset in accordance with Ind
AS 109 or, when appropriate, the cost on initial recognition of an investment in an associate or joint venture.
(c) recognises the gain or loss associated with the loss of control attributable to the former controlling interest.”
Paragraph B98(c) of Ind AS 110 states that on loss of control over a subsidiary, a parent shall reclassify to
profit or loss, or transfer directly to retained earnings if required by otherInd AS, the amounts recognized in other
comprehensive income in relation to the subsidiaryon the basis specified in paragraph B99.
As per paragraph B99, if a parent loses control of a subsidiary, the parent shall account for all amounts previously
recognized in other comprehensive income in relation to that subsidiary on the same basis as would be required if
the parent had directly disposed of the related assets or liabilities.
Therefore, if a gain or loss previously recognized in other comprehensive income would be reclassified to profit or
loss on the disposal of the related assets or liabilities, the parent shall reclassify the gain or loss from equity to profit
or loss (as a reclassification adjustment) when it loses control of the subsidiary. If a revaluation surplus previously
recognized in other comprehensive income would be transferred directly to retained earnings on the disposal of the
asset, the parent shall transfer the revaluation surplus directly to retained earnings when it loses control of the
subsidiary.
In view of the basis in its consolidated financial statements, AB Limited shall:
(a) re-classify the FVOCI reserve in respect of the debt investments of ₹ 5.4 crore (90% of
₹ 6 crore) attributable to the owners of the parent to the statement of profit or loss in accordance with
paragraph B5.7.1A of Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments which requires that the cumulative gains or
losses previously recognised in OCI shall be recycled to profit and loss upon derecognition of the
related financial asset. This is reflected in the gain on disposal. Remaining 10% (i.e., ₹ 0.6 crore)
relating to non-controlling interest (NCI) is included as part of the carrying amount of the non-
controlling interest that is derecognised in calculating the gain or loss on loss of control of the
subsidiary;
(b) transfer the reserve relating to the net measurement losses on the defined benefitliability of ₹ 2.7 crore
(90% of ₹ 3 crore) attributable to the owners of the parent within equity to retained earnings.It is not
reclassified to profit or loss. The remaining 10%(i.e., ₹ 0.3 crore) attributable to the NCI is included as
part of the carrying amount of NCI that is derecognised in calculating the gain or loss on loss of
control over the subsidiary. No amount is reclassified to profit or loss, nor is it transferred within
equity,in respect of the 10% attributable to the non-controlling interest.
(c) reclassify the cumulative gain on fair valuation of equity investment of ₹ 3.6 crore (90% of ₹ 4 crore)attributable
to the owners of the parent from OCI to retained earnings under equity as per paragraph B5.7.1 of
Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments, which provides that in case an entity has made an irrevocable
election to recognise the changes in the fair value of an investment in anequity instrument not held
for trading in OCI, it may subsequently transfer the cumulative amount of gains or loss within equity.
Remaining 10% (i.e., ₹ 0.4 crore) related to the NCI are der ecognised along
with the balance of NCI and not reclassified to profit and loss.
(d) reclassify the foreign currency translation reserve of ₹ 7.2 crore (90% × ₹ 8 crore) attributable to the owners
of the parent to statement of profit or loss as per paragraph 48 of Ind AS 21, The Effects of Changes in
Foreign Exchange Rates, which specifies that the cumulative amount of exchange differences relating
to the foreign operation, recognised in OCI, shall be reclassified from equity to profit or loss on the
disposal of foreign operation. This is reflected in the gain on disposal. Remaining 10% (i.e., ₹ 0.8 crore)
relating to the NCI is included as part of the carrying amount of the NCI that is derecognised in calculating
the gain or loss on the loss of control of subsidiary, but is not

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
reclassified to profit or loss in pursuance of paragraph 48B of Ind AS 21, which provides that the
cumulative exchange differences relating to that foreign operation attributed to NCI shall be
derecognised on disposal of the foreign operation, but shallnot be reclassified to profit or loss.
The impact of loss of control over BC Limited on the consolidated financial statements of AB Limited is
summarized below:
(₹ in crore)
Particular Amount Amount PL RE
(Dr) (Cr) Impact Impact
Gain/Loss on Disposal on Investments
Bank Dr. 56
Non-controlling interest (Derecognised) Dr. 6
Investment at FV (20% Retained) Dr. 16
To Gain on Disposal (PL) - balancing figure 18 18
To De-recognition of total net assets of 60
subsidiary
Reclassification of FVTOCI reserve on debt
instruments to profit or loss
FVTOCI reserve on debt instruments Dr. 5.4
(6 cr. x 90%)
To Profit and loss 5.4 5.4
Reclassification of net measurement loss
reserve to profit or loss
Retained Earnings Dr. 2.7 -2.7
To Net measurement loss reserve (FVTOCI)[(3 2.7
cr. x 90%)]
Reclassification of FVTOCI reserve on equity
instruments to retained earnings
FVTOCI reserve on equity instruments 3.6
(4 cr.x 90%) Dr.
To Retained earnings 3.6 3.6
Foreign currency translation reserve
reclassified to profit or loss
Foreign currency translation reserve (FVOCI) 7.2
[8 cr. x 90%] Dr.
To Profit and loss 7.2 7.2
Total 30.6 0.9

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
RTP/MTP/PAST PAPER QUESTIONS
RTP:MAY 2019
IND AS 110/ IND AS 28
Angel Ltd. has adopted Ind AS with a transition date of 1st April, 2017. Prior to Ind AS adoption, it
followed Accounting Standards notified under Companies (Accounting Standards) Rules, 2006
(hereinafter referred to as "IGAAP"). It has made investments in equity shares of Pharma Ltd., a
listed company engaged in the business of pharmaceuticals. The shareholding pattern of Pharma
Ltd. is given below:
Shareholders (refer Note 1) Percentage shareholding as on 1st April,
2017
Angel Ltd. 21%
Little Angel Ltd. (refer Note 2) 24%
Wealth Master Mutual Fund (refer Note 3) 3%
Individual public shareholders (refer Note 52%
4)
Notes:
(1) None of the shareholders have entered into any shareholders' agreement.
(2) Little Angel Ltd. is a subsidiary of Angel Ltd. (under Ind AS) in which Angel Ltd. holds 51%
voting power.
(3) Wealth Master Mutual Fund is not related party of either Little Angel Ltd. or Pharma Ltd.
(4) Individual public shareholders represent 17,455 individuals. None of the individual shareholders
hold more than 1% of voting power in Pharma Ltd. All commercial decisions of Pharma Ltd. are
taken by its directors who are appointed by a simple majority vote of the shareholders in the annual
general meetings ("AGM”). The following table shows the voting pattern of past AGMs of Pharma
Ltd.:
Shareholders AGM for the financial year
Angel Ltd. Attended and voted in Attended and voted in Attended and voted in
favour of all the favour of all the favour of all the
resolutions resolutions resolutions
Little Angel Ltd. Attended and voted as Attended and voted as Attended and voted as
per directions of Angel per directions of Angel per directions of Angel
Ltd Ltd Ltd
Wealth Master Mutual Attended and voted in Attended and voted in Attended and voted in
Fund favour of all the favour of all the favour of all the
resolutions except for resolutions except for resolutions except for
the reappointment of the reappointment of the reappointment of
the retiring directors the retiring directors the retiring directors
Individuals 7% of the individual 8% of the individual 6% of the individual
shareholders attended shareholders attended shareholders attended
the AGM. All the the AGM . All the the AGM . All the
individual individual individual
shareholders voted in shareholders voted in shareholders voted in
favour of all the favour of all the favour of all the
resolutions, except resolutions, except resolutions, except
that 50% of the that 50% of the that 50% of the
individual individual individual
Shareholders voted Shareholders voted Shareholders voted
against the resolution against the resolution against the resolution

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
to appoint the retiring to appoint the retiring to appoint the retiring
directors. directors directors.
Pharma Ltd. has obtained substantial long term borrowings from a bank. The loan is payable in 20
years from 1st April, 2017. As per the terms of the borrowing, following actions by Pharma Ltd. will
require prior approval of the bank:
• Payment of dividends to the shareholders in cash or kind;
• Buyback of its own equity shares;
• Issue of bonus equity shares;
• Amalgamation of Pharma Ltd. with any other entity; and
• Obtaining additional loans from any entity.
Recently, the Board of Directors of Pharma Ltd. proposed a dividend of ₹ 5 per share. However,
when the CFO of Pharma Ltd. approached the bank for obtaining their approval, the bank rejected
the proposal citing concerns over the short-term cash liquidity of Pharma Ltd. Having learned about
the developments, the Directors of Angel Ltd. along with the Directors of Little Angel Ltd.
approached the bank with a request to re-consider its decision. The Directors of Angel Ltd. and
Little Angel Ltd. urged the bank to approve a reduced dividend of at least ₹ 2 per share. However,
the bank categorically refused to approve any payout of dividend. Under IGAAP, Angel Ltd. has
classified Pharma Ltd. as its associate. As the CFO of Angel Ltd., you are required to comment on
the correct classification of Pharma Ltd. on transition to Ind AS.
SOLUTION
To determine whether Pharma Limited can be continued to be classified as an associate on
transition to lnd AS, we will have to determine whether Angel Limited controls Pharma Limited as
defined under Ind AS 110. An investor controls an investee if and only if the investor has all the
following:
(a) Power over investee
(b) Exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee
(c) Ability to use power over the investee to affect the amount of the investor's returns.
Since Angel Ltd. does not have majority voting rights in Pharma Ltd. we will have to determine
whether the existing voting rights of Angel Ltd. are sufficient to provide it power over Pharma Ltd.
Analysis of each of the three elements of the definition of control:
Elements / conditions Analysis
Power over investee Angel Limited along with its subsidiary Little Angel Limited
(hereinafter referred to as "the Angel group") does not have
majority voting rights in Pharma Limited. Therefore, in order to
determine whether Angel group have power over Pharma
Limited. we will need to analyse whether Angel group, by virtue
of its nonmajority voting power, have practical ability to
unilaterally direct the relevant activities of Pharma Limited. In
other words, we will need to analyse whether Angel group has
de facto power over Pharma Limited. Following is the analysis
of de facto power of Angel over Pharma Limited:
- The public shareholding of Pharma Limited (that is, 52%
represents thousands of shareholders none individually holding
material shareholding,
- The actual participation of Individual public shareholders in
the general meetings is minimal (that is, in the range of 6% to
8%). - Even the public shareholders who attend the meeting do
not consult with each other to vote.
- Therefore, as per guidance of Ind AS 110, the public

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
shareholders will not be able to outvote Angel group (who is
the largest shareholder group) in any general meeting.
Based on the above-mentioned analysis, we can conclude that
Angel group has de facto power over Pharma Limited
Exposure, or rights, to Angel group has exposure to variable returns from its
variable returns from its involvement with Pharma Limited by virtue of its equity stake.
involvement with the investee
Ability to use power over the Angel group has ability to use its power (in the capacity of a
investee to affect the amount principal and not an agent) to affect the amount of returns from
of the investor's returns Pharma Limited because it is in the position to appoint
directors of Pharma Limited who would take all the decisions
regarding relevant activities of Pharma Limited. Here, it is
worthwhile to evaluate whether certain rights held by the bank
would prevent Angel Limited's ability to use the power over
Pharma Limited to affect its returns. It is to be noted that, all
the rights held by the bank in relation to Pharma Limited are
protective in nature as they do not relate to the relevant
activities (that is, activities that significantly affect he Pharma
Limited's returns) of Pharma Limited.
As per lnd AS 110, protective rights are the rights designed to
protect the interest of the party holding those rights without
giving that party power over the entity to which those rights
relate.
Therefore, the protective rights held by the bank should not be
considered while evaluating whether or not Angel Group has
control over Pharma Limited
Conclusion: Since all the three elements of definition of control is present, it can be concluded that
Angel Limited has control over Pharma Limited.
Since it has been established that Angel Limited has control over Pharma Limited, upon transition
to lnd AS, Angel Limited shall classify Pharma Limited as its subsidiary
RTP : NOVEMBER, 2019
Ind AS 110
What will be the accounting treatment of dividend distribution tax in the consolidated financial statements in case of
partly-owned subsidiary in the following scenarios:
Scenario 1: H Limited (holding company) holds 12,000 equity shares in S Limited (Subsidiary of H Limited) with 60%
holding. Accordingly, S Limited is a partly -owned subsidiary of H Limited. During the year 20X1, S Limited paid a
dividend @ ₹ 10 per share and DDT @ 20% on it.
Should the share of H Limited in DDT paid by S Limited amounting to ₹ 24,000 (60% x ₹ 40,000) be charged as
expense in the consolidated profit and loss of H Limited?
Scenario 2 (A): Extending the situation given in scenario 1, H Limited also pays dividend of ₹ 300,000 to its
shareholders and DDT liability @ 20% thereon amounts to ₹ 60,000. As per the tax laws, DDT paid by S Ltd. of ₹ 24,000
is allowed as set off against the DDT liability of H Ltd., resulting in H Ltd. paying ₹ 36,000 (₹ 60,000 – ₹ 24,000) as DDT to
tax authorities.
Scenario 2(B)
If in (A) above, H Limited pays dividend amounting to ₹ 100,000 with DDT liability @ 20% amounting to ₹20,000.
Scenario (3):
Will the answer be different for the treatment of dividend distribution tax paid by associate in the consolidated
financial statement of investor, if as per tax laws t he DDT paid by associate is not allowed set-off against the DDT
liability of the investor?
SOLUTION
Scenario 1: Since H Limited is holding 12,000 shares it has received ₹ 1,20,000 as dividend from S Limited. In the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
consolidated financial statements of H Ltd., dividend income earned by H Ltd. and dividend recorded by S Ltd. in
its equity will both get eliminated as a result of consolidation adjustments. Dividend paid by S Ltd. to the 40% non-
controlling interest (NCI) shareholders will be recorded in the Statement of Changes in Equity as reduction of NCI
balance (as shares are classified as equity as per Ind AS 32).
DDT of ₹ 40,000 paid to tax authorities has two components- One ₹ 24,000 (related to H Limited’s shareholding and other
₹ 16,000 (40,000 x 40%) belong to non controlling interest (NCI) shareholders of S Limited). DDT of ₹ 16,000 (pertaining to
non-controlling interest (NCI) shareholders) will be recorded in the Statement of Changes in Equity along with dividend.
DDT of ₹ 24,000 paid outside the consolidated Group shall be charged as tax expense in the consolidated
statement of profit and loss of H Ltd.
In accordance with the above, in the given case, CFS of H limited will be as under:
Transactions H Ltd. S Ltd. Consol CFS H
Adjustments Ltd
Dividend Income (P&L) 120,000 - (120,000) -
Dividend (in Statement of - (200,000) 120,000 (80,000)
Changes in Equity by way of
reduction of NCI)
DDT (in Statement of Changes in - (40,000) 24,000 (16,000)
Equity by way of reduction of
NCI)
DDT (in Statement of P&L) - - (24,000) (24,000)
Scenario 2 (A): If DDT paid by the subsidiary S Ltd. is allowed as a set off against the DDT liability of its parent H
Ltd. (as per the tax laws), then the amount of such DDT should be recognised in the consolidated statement of
changes in equity of parent H Ltd.
In the given case, share of H Limited in DDT paid by S Limited is ₹ 24,000 and entire 24,000 was utilised by H Limited
while paying dividend to its own shareholders.
Accordingly, DDT of ₹ 76,000 (₹ 40,000 of DDT paid by S Ltd. (of which ₹16,000 is attributable to NCI) and ₹ 36,000of
DDT paid by H Ltd.) should be recognised in the consolidated statement of changes in equity of parent H Ltd. No
amount will be charged to consolidated statement of profit and loss. The basis for such accounting would be that due
to Parent H Ltd’s transaction of distributing dividend to its shareholders (atransaction recorded in Parent H Ltd’s
equity) and the related DDT set-off, this DDT paid by the subsidiary is effectively a tax on distribution of dividend to
the shareholders of the parent company.
Transactions H Ltd S Ltd Consol CFS H Ltd
Adjustments
Dividend (in Statement of (300,000) (200,000) 120,000 (380,000)*
Changes in Equity)
DDT (in Statement (36,000) (40,000) - (76,000)*
Changes in Equity)
*Dividend of ₹ 80,000 and DDT of ₹ 16,000 will be reflected as reduction from non- controlling interest.
Scenario 2(B): In the given case, share of H Limited in DDT paid by S Limited is ₹ 24,000 out of which only ₹
20,000 was utilised by H Limited while paying dividend by its own. Therefore, balance ₹ 4,000 should be charged in the
consolidated statement of profit and loss.
Transactions H Ltd S Ltd Consol CFS H Ltd
Adjustments
Dividend (in Statement ofChanges in Equity) (100,000) (200,000) 120,000 (180,000)*

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
DDT (in Statement ofChanges in Equity) - (40,000) 4,000 (36,000)*
DDT (in Statement ofP&L) - - (4000) (4000)
*Dividend of ₹ 80,000 and DDT of ₹ 16,000 will be reflected as reduction from non- controlling interest.
Scenario (3): Considering that as per tax laws, DDT paid by associate is not allowed set off against the DDT
liability of the investor, the investor’s share of DDT would be accounted by the investor company by crediting its
investment account in the associate and recording a corresponding debit adjustment towards its share of profit or
loss of the associate.
RTP MAY 2020
Ind AS 28
An entity P (parent) has two wholly-owned subsidiaries - X and Y, each of which has an ownership interest in an
'associate', entity Z. Subsidiary X is a venture capital organisation. Neither of the investments held in associate Z by
subsidiaries X and Y i s held for trading. Subsidiary X and Y account for their investment in associate Z at fair value
through profit or loss in accordance with Ind AS 109 and using the equity method in accordance with Ind AS 28
respectively. How should P account for the investment in associate Z in the following scenarios:
Scenario 1: Where both investments in the associate result in significant influence on a stand-alone basis - Subsidiary
X and Y ownership interest in associate Z is 25% and 20% respectively.
Scenario 2: When neither of the investments in the associate results in significant influence on a stand-alone basis,
but do provide the parent with significant influence on a combined basis - Subsidiary X and Y ownership interest in
associate Z is 10% each.
Scenario 3: When one of the investments in the associate results in significant influence on a stand-alone basis and
the other investment in the associate does not result in significant influence on a stand-alone basis - Subsidiary X
and Y ownership interest in associate Z is 30% and 10% respectively.
Assume there is significant influence if the entity has 20% or more voting rights.
SOLUTION
Paragraph 18 of Ind AS 28 states that, “when an investment in an associate or a joint venture is held by, or is held
indirectly through, an entity that is a venture capital organisation, or a mutual fund, unit trust and similar entities
including investment-linked insurance funds, the entity may elect to measure investments in those associates and joint
ventures at fair value through profit or loss in accordance with Ind AS 109. An entity shall make this election
separately for each associate or joint venture, at initial recognition of the associate or joint venture.”
Paragraph 19 of Ind AS 28 provides that, “‘when an entity has an investment i n an associate, a portion of which is held
indirectly through a venture capital organisation, or a mutual fund, unit trust and similar entities including investment-
linked insurance funds, the entity may elect to measure that portion of the investment in the associate at fair value
through profit or loss in accordance with Ind AS 109 regardless of whether the venture capital organisation has
significant influence over that portion of the investment.
If the entity makes that election, the entity shall apply the equity method to any remaining portion of its
investment in an associate that is not held through a venture capital organisation”.
Therefore, fair value exemption can be applied partially in such cases.
Scenario 1: Where both investments in the associate result in significant influence on a stand-alone basis.
Parent P
100 100%
Subsidiary X (VC) Subsidiary Y
25% 20%
Associate Z

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
In the present case, in accordance with paragraph 19 of Ind AS 28, P must follow equity method of accounting for
its 20% interest held by Y.
Under the partial use of fair value exemption, P may elect to measure the 25% interest held by X at fair value
through profit or loss.
Scenario 2: When neither of the investments in the associate results in significant influence on a stand-alone basis,
but do provide the parent with significant influence on a combined basis
Parent P
100% 100%
10% 10%
Inv Z
In the present case in accordance with the paragraph 19 of Ind AS 28, P must follow equity method of accounting for its
10% interest held by Y, even though Y would not have significant influence on a stand-alone basis.
Under the partial use of fair value exemption, P may elect to measure the 10% interest held by X at fair value
Scenario 3: When one of the investments in the associate results in significant influence on a stand-alone basis and
the other investment in the associate does not result in significant influence on a stand-alone basis
Parent P
100% 100%
30 10
Inv Z
In the present case, in accordance with paragraph 19 of Ind AS 28, P must follow equity method of accounting for its
10% interest held by Y, even though Y would not have significant influence on a stand-alone basis.
Under the partial use of fair value exemption, the P may elect to measure the 30% interest held by X at fair value
IND AS 110
QUESTION
Gamma Limited, a parent company, is engaged in manufacturing and retail activities. The group
holds investments in different entities as follows:
• Gamma Limited holds 100% Investment in G Limited and D Limited;
• G Limited and D Limited hold 60% and 40% in GD Limited respectively;
• Delta Limited is a 100% subsidiary of GD Limited Firstly, Gamma Limited wants you to suggest
whether GD Limited can avail the exemption from the preparation and presentation of consolidated

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
financial statements as per applicable Ind AS? Secondly, if all other facts remain the same as
above except that G Limited and D Limited are both owned by an Individual (say, Mr. X) instead of
Gamma Limited, then explain whether GD Limited can avail the exemption from the preparation and
presentation of consolidated financial statements.
SOLUTION
As per paragraph 4(a) of Ind AS 110, an entity that is a parent shall present consolidated financial
statements. This Ind AS applies to all entities, except as follows: A parent need not present
consolidated financial statements if it meets all the following conditions:
(i) it is a wholly-owned subsidiary or is a partially-owned subsidiary of another entity and all
its other owners, including those not otherwise entitled to vote, have been informed
about, and do not object to, the parent not presenting consolidated financial statements;
(ii) its debt or equity instruments are not traded in a public market (a domestic or foreign
stock exchange or an over-the-counter market, including local and regional markets);
(iii) it did not file, nor is it in the process of filing, its financial statements with a securities
commission or other regulatory organisation for the purpose of issuing any class of
instruments in a public market; and
(iv) its ultimate or any intermediate parent produces financial statements that are available
for public use and comply with Ind ASs, in which subsidiaries are consolidated or are
measured at fair value through profit or loss in accordance with this Ind AS.
In accordance with the above, it may be noted that as per paragraph 4(a)(i) above, a parent need
not present consolidated financial statements if it is a:
— wholly-owned subsidiary; or
— is a partially-owned subsidiary of another entity and all its other owners, including those not
otherwise entitled to vote, have been informed about, and do not object to, the parent not
presenting consolidated financial statements.
Although GD Limited is a partly-owned subsidiary of G Limited, it is the wholly-owned subsidiary of
Gamma Limited (and therefore satisfies the condition 4(a)(i) of Ind AS 110 without regard to the
relationship with its immediate owners, i.e. G Limited and D Limited). Thus, GD Limited being the
wholly owned subsidiary fulfils the conditions as mentioned under paragraph 4(a)(i) and is not
required to inform its other owner D Limited of its intention not to prepare the consolidated financial
statements.
Thus, in accordance with the above, GD Limited may take the exemption given under paragraph
4(a) of Ind AS 110 from presentation of consolidated financial statements. In Alternative Scenario,
where both G Limited and D Limited are owned by an individual Mr. X, then GD Limited is ultimately
wholly in control of Mr. X (i.e., an individual) and hence it cannot be considered as a wholly owned
subsidiary of an entity.
This is because Ind AS 110 makes use of the term ‘entity’ and the word 'entity’ includes a company
as well as any other form of entity. Since, Mr. X is an ‘individual’ and not an ‘entity’, therefore, GD
Limited cannot be considered as wholly owned subsidiary of an entity.
Therefore, in the given case, GD Limited is a partially-owned subsidiary of another entity.
Accordingly, in order to avail the exemption under paragraph 4(a), its other owner, D Limited should
be informed about and do not object to GD Limited not presenting consolidated financial statements.
Further, for the purpose of consolidation of G Limited and D Limited, GD Limited will be required to
provide relevant financial information as per Ind AS
IND AS 111
RTP MAY 2020
QUESTION
AB Limited and BC Limited establish a joint arrangement through a separate vehicle PQR, but the
legal form of the separate vehicle does not confer separation between the parties and the separate
vehicle itself. Thus, both the parties have rights to the assets and obligations for the liabilities of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
PQR. As neither the contractual terms nor the other facts and circumstances indicate otherwise, it is
concluded that the arrangement is a joint operation and not a joint venture.
Both the parties own 50% each of the equity interest in PQR. However, the contractual terms of the
joint arrangement state that AB Limited has the rights to all of Building No. 1 owned by PQR and
the obligation to pay all of the debt owed by PQR to a lender XYZ. AB Limited and BC Limited have
rights to all other assets in PQR, and obligations for all other liabilities of PQR in proportion of their
equity interests (i.e. 50% each).
PQR's summarized balance sheet is as follows: (Rs. in crore)
AMOUNT
Building 1 240
Building 2 200
Cash 40
Total Assets 480
Equity 140
Debt owed to XYZ 240
Employee benefit plan obligation 100
Total Liabilities 480
How would AB Limited present its interest in PQR in its financial statements?
SOLUTION
Paragraph 20 of Ind AS 111 states that “a joint operator shall recognise in relation to its interest in a
joint operation:
(a) its assets, including its share of any assets held jointly;
(b) its liabilities, including its share of any liabilities incurred jointly;
(c) its revenue from the sale of its share of the output arising from the joint operation;
(d) its share of the revenue from the sale of the output by the joint operation; and
(e) its expenses, including its share of any expenses incurred jointly.”
The rights and obligations, as specified in the contractual arrangement, that an entity has with
respect to the assets, liabilities, revenue and expenses relating to a joint operation might differ from
its ownership interest in the joint operation. Thus, a joint operator needs to recognise its interest in
the assets, liabilities, revenue and expenses of the joint operation on the basis (bases) specified in
the contractual arrangement, rather than in proportion of its ownership interest in the joint operation.
Thus, AB Limited would record the following in its financial statements, to account for its rights to
the assets of PQR and its obligations for the liabilities of PQR.
Rs. in crore
Assets
Cash 20
Building 1 240
Building 2 100
Liabilities
Debt owned to XYZ (third party)** 240
Employees benefit plan obligation 50
* Since AB Limited has the rights to all of Building No. 1, it records the amount in its entirety.
** AB Limited has obligation for the debt owed by PQR to XYZ in its entirety
RTP NOV 2020
Ind AS 28
QUESTION
On 1st April 2019, Investor Ltd. acquires 35% interest in another entity, XYZ Ltd. Investor Ltd.
determines that it is able to exercise significant influence over XYZ Ltd. Investor Ltd. has paid total consideration of
₹ 47,50,000 for acquisition of its interest in XYZ Ltd. At the date of acquisition, the book value of XYZ Ltd.’s net
assets was 90,00,000 and their fair value was ₹ 1,10,00,000. Investor Ltd. has determined that the difference of ₹

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
20,00,000 pertains to an item of property, plant and equipment (PPE) which has remaining useful life of 10 years.
During the year, XYZ Ltd. made a profit of ₹ 8,00,000. XYZ Ltd. paid a dividend of₹ 12,00,000 on 31st March,
2020. XYZ Ltd. also holds a long-term investment in equity securities. Under Ind AS, investment is classified as at
FVTOCI in accordance withInd AS 109 and XYZ Ltd. recognized an increase in value of investment by ₹ 2,00,000 inOCI
during the year. Ignore deferred tax implications, if any.Calculate the closing balance of Investor Ltd.’s
investment in XYZ Ltd. as at 31st March, 2020 as per the relevant Ind AS.
SOLUTION
Calculation of Investor Ltd.’s investment in XYZ Ltd. under equity method:
₹ ₹
Acquisition of investment in XYZ Ltd.
Share in book value of XYZ Ltd.’s net assets (35% of
₹ 90,00,000) 31,50,000
Share in fair valuation of XYZ Ltd.’s net assets [35% of
(₹ 1,10,00,000 – ₹ 90,00,000)] 7,00,000
Goodwill on investment in XYZ Ltd. (balancing figure) 9,00,000
Cost of investment 47,50,000
Profit during the year
Share in the profit reported by XYZ Ltd. (35% of
₹ 8,00,000) 2,80,000
Adjustment to reflect effect of fair valuation [35% of(₹
20,00,000/10 years)] (70,000)
Share of profit in XYZ Ltd. recognised in income byInvestor Ltd. 2,10,000

Long term equity investment
FVTOCI gain recognised in OCI (35% of ₹ 2,00,000) 70,000
Dividend received by Investor Ltd. during the year [35% of
₹ 12,00,000] (4,20,000)
Closing balance of Investor Ltd.’s investment in
XYZ Ltd. 46,10,000
IND AS 27
QUESTION
A company, AB Ltd. holds investments in subsidiaries and associates. In its separate financial statements, AB Ltd.
wants to elect to account its investments in subsidiaries at cost and the investments in associates as financial assets
at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL) in accordance with Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments. Whether AB Limited
can carry investments in subsidiaries at cost and investments in associates in accordance with Ind AS 109 in its
separate financial statements?
SOLUTION
Paragraph 10 of Ind AS 27, Separate Financial Statements inter-alia provides that, when an entity prepares separate
financial statements, it shall account for investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates either at cost, or in
accordance with Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments in its separate financial statements. Further, the entity shall apply
the same accounting for each category of investments.
It may be noted that although the ‘category’ is used in number of Standards, it is not defined in any of the Ind AS. It
seems that subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures would qualify as separate categories. Thus, the same accounting
policies are applied for each category of investments - i.e. each of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.
However, paragraph 10 of Ind AS 27 should not be read to mean that, in all circumstances, all investments in
associates are one ‘category’ of investment and all investments in joint ventures or an associate are one ‘category’ of
investment. These categories can be further divided into sub-categories provided the sub-category can be defined
clearly and objectively and results in information that is relevant and reliable. For example, an investment entity parent
can have investment entity subsidiary (at fair value through profit or loss) and non-investment entity subsidiary

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(whose main purpose is to provide services that relate to the investment entity's investment activities) as separate
categories in its separate financial statements. In the present case, investment in subsidiaries and associates are
considered to be different categories of investments. Further, Ind AS 27 requires to account for the investment in
subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates either at cost, or in accordance with Ind AS 109 for each category of
Investment. Thus, AB Limited can carry its investments in subsidiaries at cost and its investments in associates as
financial assets in accordance with Ind AS 109 in its separate financial statements.
RTP NOV 2018
QUESTION
On 1st April 2017 Alpha Ltd. commenced joint construction of a property with Gama Ltd. For this
purpose, an agreement has been entered into that provides for joint operation and ownership of the
property. All the ongoing expenditure, comprising maintenance plus borrowing costs, is to be
shared equally. The construction was completed on 30th September 2017 and utilisation of the
property started on 1st January 2018 at which time the estimated useful life of the same was
estimated to be 20 years. Total cost of the construction of the property was ₹ 40 crores. Besides
internal accruals, the cost was partly funded by way of loan of ₹ 10 crores taken on 1st January
2017. The loan carries interest at an annual rate of 10% with interest payable at the end of year on
31st December each year. The company has spent ₹ 4,00,000 on the maintenance of suchproperty.
The company has recorded the entire amount paid as investment in Joint Venture in the books of
accounts. Suggest the suitable accounting treatment of the above transaction as per applicable Ind
AS.
SOLUTION
As provided in Ind- AS 111 - Joint Arrangements - this is a joint arrangement because two or more
parties have joint control of the property under a contractual arrangement. The arrangement will be
regarded as a joint operation because Alpha Ltd. and Gama Ltd. have rights to the assets and
obligations for the liabilities of this joint arrangement. This means that the company and the other
investor will each recognise 50% of the cost of constructing the asset in property, plant and
equipment. The borrowing cost incurred on constructing the property should under the principles of
Ind AS 23 ‘Borrowing Costs’, be included as part of the cost of the asset for the period of
construction. In this case, the relevant borrowing cost to be included is ₹ 50,00,000 (₹ 10,00,00,000x
10% x 6/12). The total cost of the asset is ₹ 40,50,00,000 (₹ 40,00,00,000 + ₹ 50,00,000) ₹
20,25,00,000 crores is included in the property, plant and equipment of Alpha Ltd. and the same
amount in the property, plant and equipment of Gama Ltd. The depreciation charge for the year
ended 31 March 2018 will therefore be ₹ 1,01,25,000 (₹ 40,50,00,000 x 1/20 x 6/12) ₹ 50,62,500 will
be charged in the statement of profit or loss of the company and the same amount in the statement
of profit or loss of Gama Ltd. The other costs relating to the arrangement in the current year totalling
₹ 54,00,000 (finance cost for the second half year of ₹ 50,00,000 plus maintenance costs of ₹
4,00,000) will be charged to the statement of profit or loss of Alpha Ltd. and Gama Ltd. in equal
proportions- ₹ 27,00,000 each.
MTP OCT 2019
QUESTION
Tee Limited is carrying on the business of developing light weight and medium weight guns for the
Indian defence industry. Tee Limited acquired 48% of shares in Kay Limited, a company engaged in
advanced research in weapons. Tee Limited acquired shares in Kay Limited to substantiate their
position in the industry. The remaining 52% of shares are held by the key management personnel
of the Company Kay Limited. The Kay management consists of eleven people who are experts in
the fields of advanced weapons and the core of the Company. Tee Limited has the option to
purchase remaining 52% at any time by paying 6 times the market price of the share. But on
purchase of the shares it is highly possible that the key management personnel will leave the
company. (A) State whether Tee Limited has control over Kay Limited. (B) What will be your answer

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
if Tee Limited had 51% of shares in Kay Limited and Kay Limited can start the research,
development and production of weapon only with the stringent approval process of the defence
ministry of the Central Government.
SOLUTION
As per para 7 of Ind AS 110 / IFRS 10, an investor controls an investee if and only if the investor
has all the following:
1. Power over the investee Further, as per para 10 of the standard, an investor has power over an
investee when the investor has existing rights that give it the current ability to direct the relevant
activities, ie the activities that significantly affect the investee’s returns.
2. Exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee As per para 15 of
the standard, an investor is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the
investee when the investor’s returns from its involvement have the potential to vary as a result of
the investee’s performance.
3. The ability to use its power over the investee to affect the amount of the investor’s returns.
An investor is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee
when the investor’s returns from its involvement have the potential to vary as a result of the
investee’s performance. The investor’s returns can be only positive, only negative or both positive
and negative. Based on the above guidance, following can be concluded:
(a) Tee limited has acquired 48% in Kay Limited. The purpose of acquiring the shares by Tee
limited in it is to substantiate their position in the industry. Kay Limited is a specialist entity that is
engaged in advanced research in weapons. Acquiring Kay Limited will help Tee limited to gain
access to their research which would complement Tee limited’s operations and business of
developing light weight and medium weight guns. The key management personnel who holds 52%
shares of Kay Limited are key for running Kay Limited’s business of advanced research and will
help Tee limited to acquire the market through ground breaking advanced researches of Kay
Limited. In case of acquisition of 52% stake of Kay Limited, the key management personnel may
leave the organisation and in such a situation Tee limited will not enjoy any economic benefit or
infact will lose the benefit of unique technical knowledge of those 11 experts. Hence, Tee limited
would not be able to use its power over Kay Limited to affect the amount of its returns which is one
of the essential criteria to assess the control, so there is no control of Tee limited on Kay Limited.
(b) Even though Tee limited has acquired 51% stake in Kay Limited yet it does not have power
over Kay Limited as it would not be able to exercise its existing rights that give it the current ability
to direct the relevant activities, ie the activities that significantly affect the investee’s returns. In other
words, the relevant activity of Kay Limited is advance research in weapons which will help Tee
limited to substantiate their position. However, the research, development and production will start
only after stringent approval process of the defence ministry of the Central Government. Thus,
regulations prevent Tee limited to direct the relevant activity of Kay Limited which ultimately lead to
prevent Tee Limited to have control.
MTP MAR 2018
QUESTION
The following information relates to the results of the parent and subsidiary (jointly) and the
investment in associate and joint venture: (All figures are in rupees)
Summarised Balance Sheet as at 31.3.20X1
Holding and subsidiary Associate Joint Venture
Called up equity shares of ₹ 1 100000 40000 10000
each 40000 - -
General reserve 37000 27000 83000
Profit and loss account 20000 - -

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Minority Interes
Current Liabilities 20000 32000 6000
Trade payables -Creditors 19000 11000 11000
Provision for tax 236000 110000 110000
Assets
Non-current assets 195000 74000 41000
Fixed assets- Tangible assets
Investments: 15000
8,000 shares in Associate 5000
5,000 shares in Joint Venture 210000 36000 69000
Current assets 236000 110000 110000
Details of Profit and Loss account for the year ended 31.3.20X1
Holding and subsidiary Associate Joint Venture
Retained profit for the year 15000 11000 23000
Add: Retained profit brought 22000 16000 60000
forward
Retained profit carried forward 37000 27000 83000
You are given the following additional information:
(a) The parent company purchased its investment in the associate two years ago when the balance
on the profit and loss account was ₹ 17,000. There are no signs of impairment of the goodwill.
(b) The parent company entered into a joint venture to access a luc rative market in the former East
Germany. It set up a company two years ago and has 50 per cent of the voting rights of the
company set up for this joint venture.
Prepare the consolidated balance sheet for the Group as per relevant Accounting Standards for the
year ended 31.3.20X1.
SOLUTION
Consolidated Balance Sheet as on 31.3.20X1
I. Equity and Liabilities
(1) Shareholder's Funds
(a) Share Capital 1 1,00,000
(b) Reserves and Surplus 2 1,20,700
(2) Minority Interest 20,000
(b)Short-Term-Provisions 4 4,24,500
Total 2,88,200
II. Assets
(a) Fixed assets 5 2,15,500
Tangible assets 6 17,200
(b) Non-current investment
(2) Current assets 7 55,500
2,88,200
Notes to Account
Rs
1. Share Capital

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Called up equity shares of ₹ 1 each 100000
2. Reserves and Surplus
General Reserve 40000
Profit and Loss A/c (W.N.3) 80700 120700
3. Trade Payables
Holding & Subsidiary 20000
Joint Venture (50%) 3000 23000
4. Short term provisions
Provisions for Tax
Joint Venture (50%) 5500 24500
5. Tangibles Assets
Joint Venture (50%) 20500 215500
6. Non-current investment
Investment in Associate (W.N.4)
7. Current Asset
Joint Venture (50%) 34500 55500
Working Notes:
1. Analysis of Profit & Loss of Associate / Joint Venture
PRE-ACQUISITION POST-ACQUISITION
Profit as on 31.3.20X1 27,000 16000 11000
Share of Associate company (20%) 3200 2200
Analysis of Profit and Loss of Joint Venture NIL 83000
Share of Joint Venture (50%) 41500
2. Calculation of Goodwill/Capital Reserve
ASSOCIATE JOINT VENTURE
Investment 15000 5000
Less: Nominal Value 8000 5000
Capital Profit 3200 (11200) - (5000)
Goodwill 3800 NIL
3. Calculation of Consolidated Profit and Loss Account

Profit and Loss Account of Holding & Subsidiary 37000
Add: Share of Associate (W.N.1) 2200
Joint Venture (W.N.1) 41500
80700
4. Calculation of Investment in Associate
Goodwill (W.N.2) 3800
Net worth 11200
Cost 15000
Add: Share of Revenue Profit 2200
17200
Note: Out of ₹ 17,000 existed at the time of acquisition, only ₹ 16,000 (Opening Balance) is
continuing in the books of the associate. Therefore, ₹ 16,000 is taken as capital profit assuming thatit
is a part of that ₹ 17,000 existed at the time of acquisition

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
PAST YEAR QUESTIONS
NOV 2020
QUESTION
Entity H holds a 20% equity interest in Entity S (an associate) that in turn has a 100% equity
interest in Entity T. Entity S recognised net assets relating to Entity T of ₹ 10,000 in its consolidated
financial statements. Entity S sells 20% of its interest in Entity T to a third party (a non-controlling
shareholder) for ₹ 3,000 and recognises this transaction as an equity transaction in accordance with
the provisions of Ind AS 110, resulting in a credit in Entity S's equity of ₹ 1,000. The financial
statements of Entity H and Entity S are summarised as follows before and after the transaction:
Before
H's consolidated financial statements
Assets (₹) Liabilities (₹)
Investment in S 2,000 Equity 2,000
S's consolidated financial statements
Assets (from T) 10,000 Equity 10,000
The financial statements of S after the transaction are summarised below
After
S's consolidated financial statements
Assets (from T) 10,000 Equity 10,000
Cash 3000 Equity transaction
Impact with non- 1000
controlling interest
Equity attributable to
owners 11000
Non-controlling 2000
interest
Total 13000 Total 13000
Although Entity H did not participate in the transaction, Entity H's share of net assets in Entity S
increased as a result of the sale of S's 20% interest in T. Effectively, H's share in S's net assets is
now ₹ 2,200 (20% of ₹ 11,000) i.e., ₹ 200 in addition to its previous share. How this equity
transaction that is recognised in the financial statements of Entity S reflected in the consolidated
financial statements of Entity H that uses the equity method to account for its investment in Entity S?
SOLUTION
Ind AS 28 defines the equity method as “a method of accounting whereby the investment is initially
recognised at cost and adjusted thereafter for the post -acquisition change in the investor’s share of
the investee’s net assets. The investor’s profit or lo ss includes its share of the investee’s profit or
loss and the investor’s other comprehensive income includes its share of the investee’s other
comprehensive income.”
Ind AS 28, states, inter alia, that when an associate or joint venture has subsidiaries, associates or
joint ventures, the profit or loss, other comprehensive income, and net assets taken into account in
applying the equity method are those recognised in the associate’s or joint venture’s financial
statements (including the associate’s or joint venture’s share of the profit or loss, other
comprehensive income and net assets of its associates and joint ventures), after any adjustments
necessary to give effect to uniform accounting policies.
The change of interest in the net assets / equity of the associate as a result of the investee’s equity

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
transaction is reflected in the investor’s financial statements as ‘share of other changes in equity of
investee’ (in the statement of changes in equity) instead of gain in Statement of profit and loss,
since it reflects the post-acquisition change in the net assets of the investee as per the provisions of
Ind AS 28 and also faithfully reflects the investor’s share of the associate’s transaction as presented
in the associate’s consolidated financial statements. Thus, in the given case, Entity H recognises ₹
200 as change in other equity instead of in statement of profit and loss and maintains the same
classification as of its associate, Entity S, i.e., a direct credit to equity as in its consolidated financial
statements.
MAY 2019 (MTP OCT 2020)
IND AS 110
QUESTION
Summarised Balance Sheets of PN Ltd. and SR Ltd. as on 31st March, 2018 were given as below:
(Amount in ₹)
Particulars PN Ltd. SR Ltd
Assets
Land & building 4,68,000 5,61,600
Plant & Machinery 7,48,800 4,21,200
Investment in SR Ltd. 12,48,000 -
Inventories 3,74,400 1,13,600
Trade Receivables 1,86,500 1,24,800
Cash & Cash equivalents 45,200 24,900
TOTAL 30,70,900 12,46,100
Equity Share Capital (Shares of ₹ 100 each fully paid) 15,60,000 6,24,000
Other Reserves 9,36,000 3,12,000
Retained Earnings 1,78,400 2,55,800
Trade Payables 1,46,900 34,300
Short-term borrowings 2,49,600 20,000
Total Equity & Liabilities 30,70,900 12,46,100
(i) PN Ltd. acquired 70% equity shares of ₹ 100 each of SR Ltd. on 1st October, 2017.
(ii) The Retained Earnings of SR Ltd. showed a credit balance of ₹ 93,600 on 1st April,
2017 out of which a dividend of 12% was paid on 15th December, 2017.
(iii) PN Ltd. has credited the dividend received to its Retained Earnings.
(iv) Fair value of Plant & Machinery of SR Ltd. as on 1st October, 2017 was ₹ 6,24,000. The
rate of depreciation on Plant & Machinery was 10% p.a.
(v) Following are the increases on comparison of Fair Value as per respective Ind AS with
book value as on 1st October, 2017 of SR Ltd. which are to be considered while
consolidating the Balance Sheets:
(a) Land & Buildings ₹ 3,12,000
(b) Inventories ₹ 46,800
(c) Trade Payables ₹ 31,200.
(vi) The inventory is still unsold on Balance Sheet date and the Trade Payables are not yet
settled.
(vii) Other Reserves as on 31st March, 2018 are the same as was on 1st April, 2017.
(viii) The business activities of both the company are not seasonal in nature and therefore, it
can be assumed that profits are earned evenly throughout the year.
Prepare the Consolidated Balance Sheet as on 31st March, 2018 of the group of entities PN
Ltd. and SR Ltd. as per Ind AS.
SOLUTION
Consolidated Balance Sheet of PN Ltd. and its subsidiary SR Ltd. as on 31st March, 2018

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Particulars Note No ₹
I. Assets
(i) Property, Plant & Equipment 1 26,83,200
(ii) Goodwill 2 89,402
(2) Current Assets
(1) Equity
(i) Equity Share Capital 6 15,60,000
(2) Non-controlling Interest (W.N.3) 5,07,300
Total Equity & Liabilities 36,88,802
Notes to accounts
1. Property, Plant & Equipment

Land & Building (4,68,000 + 5,61,600 + 3,12,000) 13,41,600
Plant & Machinery (W.N.5) 13,41,600 26,83,200
2. Goodwill 89,402
3. Inventories
PN Ltd. 3,74,400
SR Ltd. (1,13,600 +46,800) 1,60,400 5,34,800
5. PN Ltd. 1,86,500
SR Ltd. 1,24,800 3,11,300
PN Ltd. 45,200
SR Ltd. 24,900 70,100
9 Trade Payables
PN Ltd. 1,46,900
SR Ltd. (34,300 + 31,200) 65,500 2,12,400
Short-term borrowings
PN Ltd. 2,49,600
SR Ltd. 20,000 2,69,600
Balance at the beginning Changes in Equity share Balance at the end of the
of the reporting period ₹ capital during the year ₹ reporting period ₹
15,60,000 0 15,60,000
7. Other Equity
application component Capital Retained Other

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
money of compound reserve Earnings Reserves
pending financial
allotment instrument
Balance at the
beginning 0 936000 936000
Total
comprehensive
income for the year
0 178000 178000
Dividends 0 (52416) (52416)
Total
comprehensive
Income
attributable to parent
0 77518 77518
Gain onBargain
purchase
0 0
Balance at the end
ofreporting
period 203502 936000 1139502
Working Notes:
The Plant & Machinery of SR Ltd. would stand in the books at ₹ 4,44,600 on 1 st October, 2017,
considering only six months’ depreciation on ₹
(4, 21, 200 / 90% )= 4,68,000;
total depreciation being ₹ 4,68,000 ×10% × 6/12 = 23,400
The value put on the assets being ₹ 6,24,000 there is an appreciation to the extent of ₹
1,79,400.
Acquisition date profits of SR Ltd.
Reserves on 1.4.2017 3,12,000
Profit& Loss Account Balance on 1.4.2017 93,600
Profit for 2017-2018: Total [₹ 2,55,800-(93,600-74,880)]x 6/12 i.e. ₹ 1,18,540
1,18,540 upto 1.10.2017
Total Appreciation 5,07,000*
Total 10,31,140
Holding Co. Share (70%) 7,21,798
*Appreciation = Land & Building ₹ 3,12,000 + Inventories ₹ 46,800 + Plant & Machinery ₹ 1,79,400
– Trade Payables ₹ 31,200 = ₹ 5,07,000
2. Post-acquisition profits of SR Ltd.
Profit after 1.10.2017 [2,55,800 - (93,600-74,880)] x 6/12 1,18,540
Less: 10% depreciation on ₹ 6,24,000 for 6 months less depreciation
already charged for 2nd half of 2017-2018 on ₹ 4,68,800 (ie 31,200 - (7,800)
23,400)
Total 1,10,740
Share of holding Co. (70%) 77,518
Share of NCI (30%) 33,222

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Par value of 1872 shares 1,87,200
Add: 30% Acquisition date profits [(10,31,140 – 74,880) x 30%] 30% Post- 2,86,878
acquisition profits [W.N.2] 33,222
5,07,300
4. Goodwill
Amount paid for 4,368 shares 12,48,000
Less : Par value of shares 4,36,800
Acquisition date profits-share of PN Ltd. 7,21,798 (11,58,598)
Goodwill 89,402
5. Value of Plant & Machinery:
PN Ltd. 4,21,200 7,48,800
SR Ltd. 1,79,400
Add: Appreciation on 1.10.2017 6,00,600
Add: Depreciation for 2nd half charged on 23,400
pre- revalued value
Less: Depreciation on ₹ 6,24,000 for 6 months (31,200) 5,92,800
13,41,600
6. Consolidated Profit & Loss account ₹
PN Ltd. (as given) 1,78,400
Less: Dividend (52,416) 1,25,984
Share of PN Ltd. in post-acquisition profits (W.N.2) 77,518
2,03,502
Note: Alternatively, the solution can be done on Net Assets approach on the date of acquisition. In
such a situation, answer in substance will be same. However, presentation of working notes will be
as below:
1. Net assets of SR Ltd. on the date of acquisition
Share Capital 6,24,000
Reserves on 1.4.2017 3,12,000
Profit & Loss Account Balance on 1.4.2017 93,600
Profit for 2017-2018: Total [₹ 2,55,800-(93,600-74,880)] x 6/12 i.e. ₹ 1,18,540
1,18,540 upto 1.10.2017 5,07,000*
Total Appreciation 16,55,140
Total Holding Co. Share (70%) 11,58,598
Non-controlling Interest (30%) 4,96,542
*Appreciation = Land and Building ₹ 3,12,000 + Inventories ₹ 46,800+ Plant & Machinery ₹
1,79,400 – Trade Payables ₹ 31,200 = ₹ 5,07,000
30% Share in net assets of SR Ltd on 1st October, 2017 4,96,542
30% Post-acquisition profits [WN 2] 33,222
Less: Dividend received (30% x 12% x 6,24,000) (22,464)
5,07,300
4. Goodwill
Amount paid for 4,368 shares 12,48,000
Acquisition date profits share of PN Ltd. (11,58,598)
Goodwill 89,402
JAN 2021
QUESTION
On 1st April 2017, A Limited acquired 80% of the share capital of S Limited. On acquisition date
the share capital and reserves of S Ltd. stood at ₹ 5,00,000 and ₹ 1,25,000 respectively. A
Limited paid initial cash consideration of ₹ 10,00,000. Additionally, A Limited issued 2,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
equity shares with a nominal value of ₹ 1 per share at current market value of ₹ 1.80 per share.
It was also agreed that A Limited would pay a further sum of ₹ 5,00,000 after three years. A
Limited's cost of capital is 10%. The appropriate discount factor for ₹ 1 @ 10% receivable at
the end of
1 st year: 0.91
2 nd year: 0.83
3rd year: 0.75
The shares and deferred consideration have not yet been recorded by A limited. Below are the
Balance Sheet of A Limited and S Limited as at 31st March, 2019:
A Limited (₹ S Limited (₹
000) 000)
Non-current assets:
Property, plant & equipment 5500 1500
Investment in S Limited at cost 1000
Current assets:
Inventory 550 100
Receivables 400 200
Cash 200 50
7650 1850
Equity:
Share capital 2000 500
Retained earnings 1400 300
3400 800
Non-current liabilities 3000 400
7650 1850
Further information:
(i) On the date of acquisition the fair values of S Limited's plant exceeded its book value by
₹ 2,00,000. The plant had a remaining useful life of five years at this date;
(ii) The consolidated goodwill has been impaired by ₹ 2,58,000; and
(iii) The A Limited Group, values the non-controlling interest using the fair value method. At
the date of acquisition, the fair value of the 20% non-controlling interest was ₹ 3,80,000.
You are required to prepare Consolidated Balance Sheet of A Limited as at 31st March, 2019.
(Notes to Account on Consolidated Balance Sheet is not required).
SOLUTION
Consolidated Balance Sheet of A Ltd. and its subsidiary, S Ltd. as at 31st March,
2019
Particulars ₹ in 000s
I. Assets
(i) Property Plant & Equipment (W.N.4) 7120
(ii) Intangible asset – Goodwill (W.N.3) 1032
(2) Current Assets
(i) Inventories (550 + 100) 650
(a) Trade Receivables (400 + 200) 600
(b) Cash & Cash equivalents (200 + 50) 250
Total Assets 9652

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(1) Equity
(i) Equity Share Capital (2,000 + 200) 2200
(ii) Other Equity 1190.85
(a) Retained Earnings (W.N.6) 160
(b) Securities Premium 347.40
(2) Non-Controlling Interest (W.N.5) 3400
(3) Non-Current Liabilities (3,000 + 400) 2353.75
(4) Current Liabilities (W.N.8)
Notes:
1. Since the question required not to prepare Notes to Account, the column of Note to Accounts had
not been drawn.
2. It is assumed that shares were issued during the year 2018-2019 and entries are yet to be made.
Working Notes:
1. Calculation of purchase consideration at the acquisition date i.e. 1 st April, 2017
₹ in 000s
Payment made by A Ltd. to S Ltd.
Cash 1000
Equity shares (2,00,000 shares x ₹ 1.80) 360
Present value of deferred consideration (₹ 5,00,000 x 0.75) 375
Total consideration 1735
2. Calculation of net assets i.e. net worth at the acquisition date i.e. 1 st April, 2017
₹ in 000s
Share capital of S Ltd. 500
Reserves of S Ltd. 125
Fair value increase on Property, Plant and Equipment 200
Net worth on acquisition date 825
3. Calculation of Goodwill at the acquisition date i.e. 1st April, 2017 and 31st March, 2019
₹ in 000s
Purchase consideration (W.N.1) 1735
Non-controlling interest at fair value (as given in the question) 380
2115
Less: Net worth (W.N.2) (825)
Goodwill as on 1st April 2017 1290
Less: Impairment (as given in the question) 258
Goodwill as on 31st March 2019 1032
4. Calculation of Property, Plant and Equipment as on 31st March 2019
₹ in 000s
A Ltd 5500
S Ltd 1500
Add: Net fair value gain not recorded yet 200
Less: Depreciation [(200/5) x 2] 120 1620
(80.00) 7120
5. Calculation of Post-acquisition gain (after adjustment of impairment on goodwill) and value of
NCI as on 31st March 201
₹ in
000s

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Acquisition date balance 380 NIL
Closing balance of Retained Earnings 300.00
Less: Pre-acquisition balance (125.00)
Post-acquisition gain 175.00
Less: Additional Depreciation on PPE [(200/5) x 2] (80.00)
Share in post-acquisition gain 95.00 19 76
51.60 (206.40)
347.40 (130.40)
6. Consolidated Retained Earnings as on 31st March 2019
₹ in 000s
A Ltd 1400
Add: Share of post-acquisition loss of S Ltd. (W.N.5) (130.4)
Less: Finance cost on deferred consideration (37.5 + 41.25) (78.75)
(W.N.7)
Retained Earnings as on 31st March 2019 1190.85
7. Calculation of value of deferred consideration as on 31st March 2019
₹ in 000s
Value of deferred consideration as on 1st April 2017 (W.N.1) 375
Add: Finance cost for the year 2017-2018 (375 x 10% 37.5
412.5
Add: Finance cost for the year 2018-2019 (412.50 x 10% 41.25
Deferred consideration as on 31st March 2019 453.75
8. Calculation of current Liability as on 31st March 2019
₹ in 000s
A Ltd 1250
S Ltd 650
Deferred consideration as on 31st March 2019 (W.N.7) 453.75
Current Liability as on 31st March 2019 2353.75

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 21 - THE EFFECTS OF CHANGES IN FOREIGN EXCHANGE RATES
Illustration 1
Future Ltd. sells a revitalising energy drink that is sold throughout the world. Sales of the energy drink
comprise over 90% of the revenue of Future Ltd. For convenience and consistency in pricing, sales of the
energy drink are denominated in USD. All financing activities of Future Ltd. are in its local currency (L$),
although the company holds some USD cash reserves. Almost all of the costs incurred by Future Ltd. are
denominated in L$. What is the functional currency of Future Ltd.?
Solution
The functional currency of Future Ltd. is L$ looking at the primary indicators. The facts presented
indicate that the currency that mainly influence the cost of producing the energy drink is the L$. As
stated in the fact pattern, pricing of the product in USD is done for convenience and consistency
purposes; there is no indication that the sales price is influenced by the USD.
Illustration 2
Small India Private Limited (Small), a subsidiary of Big Inc., takes orders from Indian customers for Big
Inc’s merchandise and then bills and collects for the sale of the merchandise in Rupees. Small alsohas
a local warehouse in India to facilitate timely delivery and ensures that it remits to its parent all cash flows
that it generates as the operations of Small are primarily financed by Big Inc. Big Inc is based out of US
and has its functional currency as USD. What is Small’s functional currency?
Solution
Small, although based in India with its cash flows generated in India, is essentially a “pass through
company” established by its parent. Small is totally reliant on Big Inc. for financing and goods to be
sold, despite the fact that goods are sold within India and in INR. Therefore, Small is not a self-
contained entity in India, rather an entity that is dependent on its parent.
Due to this dependence of Small on its parent company, it can be said that the primary economic
environment for Small is that of US and thus, its functional currency should also be USD.
Hence all the transactions of Small which are denominated in any currency other than USD should
be recorded in USD at the spot rate and any changes in the exchange rate would result in an
exchange gain or loss to be taken to the statement of profit or loss.
Illustration 3
A is an Oman based company having a foreign operation, B, in India. The foreign operation was primarily
set up to execute a construction project in India. The functional currency of A is OMR.
78% of entity B ’s finances have been raised in USD by way of contribution from A. B’s bank accounts
are maintained in USD as well as INR. Cash flows generated by B are transferred to A on a monthly
basis in USD in respect of repayment of finance received from A.
Revenues of B are in USD. Its competitors are globally based. Tendering for the construction project
happened in USD.
B incurs 70% of the cost in INR and remaining 30% costs in USD. Since B is located in India can it
can presume its functional currency to be INR?
Solution
No, B cannot presume INR to be its functional currency on the basis of its location. It needs to
consider various factors listed in Ind AS for determination of functional currency.
Primary indicators:
1. the currency that mainly influences
a) sales prices for its goods and services. This will often be the currency in which sales prices are
denominated and settled; and of the country whose competitive forces and regulations mainly
determine the sales prices of its goods and services.
b) labour, material and other costs of providing goods and services. This will often be thecurrency
in which these costs are denominated and settled.
2. Other factors that may provide supporting evidence to determine an entity’s functional currency
are (Secondary indicators):
a) the currency in which funds from financing activities (i.e., issuing debt and equity instruments)
are generated; and
b) the currency in which receipts from operating activities are usually retained.
3. If an entity is a foreign operation, additional factors set out in Ind AS 21 should be considered to
determine whether its functional currency is the same as that of the reporting entity of which it is a
subsidiary, branch, associate or joint venture:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
1. Whether the activities of foreign operations are carried out as an extension of that reporting
entity, rather than being carried out with a significant degree of autonomy;
2. Whether the transactions with the reporting entity are a high or a low proportion of the
foreign operation’s activities;
3. Whether cash flows from the activities of the foreign operations directly affect the cash
flows of the reporting entity and are readily available for remittance to it.
4. Whether cash flows from the activities of the foreign operation are sufficient to service existing
and normally expected debt obligation without funds being made available by the reporting entity.
On the basis of additional factors mentioned in point 3 above, B cannot be said to have functional
currency same as that of A Ltd.
Hence primary and secondary indicators should be used for the determination of functionalcurrency of
B giving priority to primary indicators. The analysis is given below:
 Its significant revenues and competitive forces are in USD.
 Its significant portion of cost is incurred in INR. Only 30% costs are in USD.
 78% of its finances have been raised in USD.
 It retains its operating cash flows partially in USD and partially in INR.
Keeping these factors in view, USD should be considered as the functional currency of B.
S Ltd is a company based out of India which got listed on Bombay Stock Exchange in the financial year
ended 31st March, 20X1. Since then the company’s operations have increased considerably. The
company was engaged in the business of trading of motor cycles. The company only deals in imported
Motor cycles. These motor cycles are imported from US.
After importing the motor cycles, these are sold across India through its various distribution channels. The
company had only private customers earlier but the company also started corporate tie-up and increased
its customer base to corporates also. The purchase of the motor cycles are in USD because the
vendor(s) from whom these motor cycles are purchased those are all located in US.
All other operating expenses of the company are incurred in India only because of its location and they
generally happen to be in INR
Currently, its customers are both corporate and private in the ratio of 70:30 approximately. The USD
denominated prices of motor cycles in India are different from those in other countries.
The company is also expecting that in the coming years, its customers base will increase significantly in
India and the current proportion may also change.
Currently, the invoices are raised to the corporate customers in USD for the purpose of hedging. However,
private customers don’t accept the same arrangement and hence invoices are raised to them in INR.
What would be the functional currency of this company?
Solution
The functional currency of S Ltd is INR.
Following factors need to be considered for determination of functional currency:
Primary indicators
1. the currency that mainly influences
a) sales prices for its goods and services. This will often be the currency in which sales prices are
denominated and settled; and of the country whose competitive forces and regulations mainly
determine the sales prices of its goods and services.
b) labour, material and other costs of providing goods and services. This will often be the
currency in which these costs are denominated and settled.
2. Other factors that may provide supporting evidence to determine an entity’s functional currency
are (Secondary indicators):
a) the currency in which funds from financing activities (i.e., issuing debt and equity instruments)
are generated; and
b) the currency in which receipts from operating activities are usually retained.
Primary and secondary indicators should be used for the determination of functional currency of S Ltd.
giving priority to primary indicators.
The analysis is given below:
Ind AS 21 gives greater emphasis to the currency of the economy that determines the pricing of
transactions, as opposed to the currency in which transactions are denominated.
Sales prices for motor cycles are mainly influenced by the competitive forces and regulations in India.
The market for motor cycles depends on the economic situation in India and the company is in

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
competition with importers of other motor cycle brands.
Even though 70% of the revenue of the company is denominated in USD, Indian economic conditions
are the main factors affecting the prices. This is evidenced by the fact that USD denominated sales
prices in India are different from USD denominated sales prices for the same motor cycles in other
countries.
Management is able to determine the functional currency because the revenue is clearly influenced by
the Indian economic environment and expenses are mixed.
On the basis of above analysis, INR should be considered as the functional currency of the company
Illustration 5
Functional currency of parent P is EURO while the functional currency of its subsidiary S is USD. P sells
inventory to S and a transaction for the same was made for USD 300 during the year. At the year end,
a balance of the same amount is outstanding as receivable from S. It has been observed that such balance
amount has been continuing as receivable from S year on year and even though the payments in respect of
these balances are expected to be received in the foreseeable future but if we look at the year- end thenwe
see this balance as outstanding every year.
In addition to the trading balances between P and S, P has lent an amount of USD 500 to S that isnot
expected to be repaid in the foreseeable future. Should the exchange difference, if any, be recognised inthe
profit and loss?
Solution
The exchange gain or loss will arise in the books of accounts of P in respect of its trading balance with
S and the same should be recognised in profit or loss. This being a balance for in the nature of trade
receivable for P, it would not be considered as its net investment in a foreign operation (i.e., S).
The amount lent by P should be regarded as its net investment in S (i.e. foreign operation). Thus,
the exchange gain or loss incurred by P on the USD 500 loan should be recognised in profit or loss in
P’s separate financial statements and in other comprehensive income in its consolidated financial
statements.
Illustration 6
Modifying the above illustration, suppose that for tax reasons, the ‘permanent’ funding (i.e., loan amount)
extended to S is made via another entity in the group, T, rather than from P directly. That is, on the
directions of P, T gives the loan to S. T is also a subsidiary of P. Where should the exchange
difference, if any, be recognised?
Solution
Parent P
100%
100%
Subsidiary T Subsidiary S
Loan
Any exchange difference in respect of the loan is recognized in other comprehensive income in the
consolidated financial statements because from the group’s point of view the funding relates to an
investment in a foreign operation. This is the case irrespective of the currency in which the loan is
denominated. So, if the loan is denominated in T’s functional currency, and this is different from that of
S, then exchange differences still should be recognised in other comprehensive income in the
Illustration 7
The functional and presentation currency of parent P is USD while the functional currency of its subsidiary S
is EURO. P sold goods having a value of USD 100 to S when the exchange rate was USD 1 = Euro 2.
At year-end, the amount is still due, and the exchange rate is USD 1 = Euro 2.2. How should the
exchange difference, if any, be accounted for in the consolidated financial statements?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
At year-end, S should restate its accounts payable to EURO 220, recognising a loss of Euro 20 in its
profit or loss. Thus, in the books of S, the balance payable to P will appear at EURO 220 while in the
books of P the balance receivable from S will be USD 100.
For consolidation purposes, the assets and liabilities of S will be translated to USD at the closing rate.
At the time of consolidation, USD 100 which will get eliminated against the receivable in the books of
P but the exchange loss of EURO 20 recorded in the subsidiary’s statement of profit or loss has
no equivalent gain in the parent’s financial statements. Therefore, exchange loss of EURO 20 will
remain in the consolidated statement of profit or loss.
The reason for this is that the intra-group balance represents a commitment to translate Euro into
USD and this is similar to holding a foreign currency asset in the books of the parent company.
i.e. the subsidiary would be required to buy USD to settle the obligation to the parent, so the
Group has an exposure to foreign currency risk.
Illustration 8
M Ltd is engaged in the business of manufacturing of bottles for pharmaceutical companies and non-
pharmaceutical companies. It has a wholly owned subsidiary, G Ltd, which is engaged in the business of
pharmaceuticals. G Ltd purchases the pharmaceutical bottles from its parent company. The demand of G
Ltd is very high and the operations of M Ltd are very large and hence to cater to its shortfall, G Ltd also
purchases the bottles from other companies. Purchases are made at the competitive prices.
M Ltd sold pharmaceuticals bottles to G Ltd for Euro 12 lacs on 1st February, 20X1. The cost of these
bottles was ₹ 830 lacs in the books of M Ltd at the time of sale. At the year-end i.e., 31st March,
20X1, all these bottles were lying as closing stock with G Ltd.
Euro is the functional currency of G Ltd. while Indian Rupee is the functional currency of M Ltd. Following
additional information is available:
Exchange rate on 1st February, 20X1 1 Euro = ₹ 83
st
Exchange rate on 31 March, 20X1 1 Euro = ₹ 85
Provide the accounting treatment for the above in books of M Ltd. and G Ltd. Also show its impact on
consolidated financial statements. Support your answer by Journal entries, wherever necessary, in the
books of M Ltd.
Solution
Accounting treatment in the books of M Ltd (Functional Currency INR)
M Ltd will recognize sales of ₹ 996 lacs (12 lacs Euro x 83) Profit on sale of inventory = 996 lacs
– 830 lacs = ₹ 166 lacs.
On balance sheet date receivable from G Ltd. will be translated at closing rate i.e., 1 Euro = ₹ 85.
Therefore, unrealised forex gain will be recorded in stand-alone profit and loss of ₹ 24 lacs. (i.e. (85 -
83) x 12 Lacs)
Journal Entries
₹ (in Lacs) ₹ (in Lacs)
G Ltd. A/c Dr. 996
To Sales 996
(Being revenue recorded on initial recognition)
G Ltd. A/c Dr. 24
To Foreign exchange difference (unrealised) 24
(Being foreign exchange difference recorded at year end)
Accounting treatment in the books of G Ltd (Functional currency EURO)
G Ltd will recognize inventory on 1st February, 20X1 of Euro 12 lacs which will also be its
closing stock at year end.
Accounting treatment in the consolidated financial statements
Receivable and payable in respect of above mentioned sale / purchase between M Ltd and GLtd
will get eliminated.
The closing stock of G Ltd will be recorded at lower of cost or NRV.
Euro (inlacs) Rate ₹ (in lacs)
Cost 12 83 996
NRV (Assumed Same) 12 85 1020
Therefore, no write off is required.
The amount of closing stock includes two components–
 Cost of inventory for ₹ 830 lacs; and
 Profit element of ₹ 166 lacs; and

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
At the time of consolidation, the two elements amounting to ₹ 166 lacs will be eliminated from the
closing stock.
Journal Entry
₹ (in Lacs) ₹ (in Lacs)
Consolidated P&L A/c Dr. 166
To Inventory 166
(Being profit element of intragroup transaction eliminated)
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE

Question 1: -
Parent P acquired 90 percent of subsidiary S some years ago. P now sells its entire investment in S for ₹
1,500 lakhs. The net assets of S are 1,000 and the NCI in S is ₹ 100lakhs. The cumulative exchange
differences that have arisen during P’s ownership are gains of ₹ 200 lakhs, resulting in P’s foreign currency
translation reserve in respect of S having a credit balance of ₹180 lakhs, while the cumulative amount of
exchange differences that have been attributed to the NCI is ₹20 lakhs
Calculate P’s gain on disposal in its consolidated financial statements.
Solution: -
P’s gain on disposal in its consolidated financial statements would be calculated in the following manner:
(₹ in Lakhs)
Sale proceeds 1,500
Net assets of S (1,000)
NCI derecognised 100
Foreign currency translation reserve 180
Gain on disposal 780
Question 2:
Entity A, whose functional currency is ₹, has a foreign operation, Entity B, with a Euro functional currency.
Entity B issues to A perpetual debt (i.e. it has no maturity) denominated in euros with an annual interest
rate of 6 per cent. The perpetual debt has no issuer call option or holder put option. Thus, contractually it
is just an infinite stream of interest payments in Euros.
In A's consolidated financial statements, can the perpetual debt be considered, in accordance with Ind AS
21.15, a monetary item "for which settlement is neither planned nor likely to occur in the foreseeable future"
(i.e. part of A's net investment in B), with the exchange gains and losses on the perpetual debt therefore
being recorded in equity?
Solution: -
Yes, as per Ind AS 21 net investment in a foreign operation is the amount of the reporting entity’s
interest in the net assets of that operation.
As per para 15 of Ind AS 21, an entity may have a monetary item that is receivable from or payable to
a foreign operation. An item for which settlement is neither planned nor likely to occur in the
foreseeable future is, in substance, a part of the entity’s net investment in that foreign operation.
Such monetary items may include long-term receivables or loans. They do not include trade
receivables or trade payables.
Analysis on the basis of above mentioned guidance.
Through the origination of the perpetual debt, A has made a permanent investment in B. The interest
payments are treated as interest receivable by A and interest payable by B, not as repayment of the
principal debt. Hence, the fact that the interest payments are perpetual does not mean that
settlement is planned or likely to occur. The perpetual debt can be considered part of A's net
investment in B.
In accordance with para 15 of Ind AS 21, the foreign exchange gains and losses should be recordedin
equity at the consolidated level because settlement of that perpetual debt is neither planned nor likely
to occur.
Question 3:
Infotech Global Ltd. has a functional currency of USD and needs to translate its financial statements intothe
functional and presentation currency of Infotech Inc. (L$).
The following balances appear in the books of Infotech Global Ltd. at the year-end prior to translation:
USD L$
Property, plant and equipment 50,000
Receivables 9,35,000
Total assets 9,85,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Issued capital 50,000 30,055
Opening retained earnings 28,000 15,274
Profit & Loss A/c (Profit for the year) 20,000
Accounts payable 8,40,000
Accrued liabilities 47,000
Total equity and liabilities 9,85,000
Translate the above balances of Infotech Global Ltd. into L$ ready for consolidation by Infotech Inc. (Share
capital and opening retained earnings have been pre-populated.)
Prepare a working of the cumulative balance of the foreign currency translation reserve. Additional
information:
Relevant exchange rates are:
Rate at beginning of the year L$ 1 = USD 1.22Average rate for the year L$ 1 = USD 1.175 Rate at endof
the year L$ 1 = USD 1.13
Solution:
Translation of the balances for the purpose of consolidation
USD Rate L$
Property, plant and equipment 50,000 1.13 44,248
Receivables 9,35,000 1.13 8,27,434
Total assets 9,85,000 8,71,682
Issued capital 50,000 — 30,055
Opening retained earnings 28,000 — 15,274
Profit for the year 20,000 1.175 17,021
Accounts payable 8,40,000 1.13 7,43,363
Accrued liabilities 47,000 1.13 41,593
Total equity and liabilities USD 9,85,000 8,47,306
Foreign Currency Translation Reserve (Refer WN-1) 24,376
Total equity and liabilities L$ 8,71,682
Working Note
1 Cumulative balance of the FCTR
Particulars Actual translatedamount in L$ Amount (Refer WN-2) Difference
A B B-A
Issued capital 30,055 44,248 14,193
Opening retained earnings 15,274 24,779 9,505
Profit for the year 17,021 17,699 678
62,350 86,726 24,376
2 Translated amount if the same conversion rate is applied to following items as applied on
other items
Translated amount
Issued capital 50,000 1.13 44,248
Opening retained earnings 28,000 1.13 24,779
98,000 86,726
Question 4: -
On 30th January, 20X1, A Ltd. purchased a machinery for $ 5,000 from USA supplier on credit basis. A
Ltd.’s functional currency is Rupees. The exchange rate on the date of transaction is 1 $ = ₹ 60. The
fair value of the machinery determined on 31st March, 20X1 is $ 5,500. The exchange rate on 31st March,
20X1 is 1$ = ₹ 65. The payment to overseas supplier done on 31st March 20X2 and the exchange rate
on 31st March 20X2 is 1$ = ₹ 67. The fair value of the machinery remain unchanged forthe year ended
on 31st March 20X2. Prepare the Journal entries for the year ended on 31st March 20X1 and year
20X2 according to Ind AS 21. Tax rate is 30%
Solution: -
Journal Entries
(It is assumed that the revaluation method is followed in respect of Plant & Machinery) Purchase
of Machinery on credit basis on 30th January 20X1:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
₹ ₹
Machinery A/c (5,000 x $ 60) Dr. 3,00,000
To Trade Receivables 3,00,000
(Initial transaction will be recorded at exchange rate on thedate of transaction)
Exchange difference arising on translating monetary item on 31st March 20X1:
₹ ₹
Profit & Loss A/c [(5,000 x $ 65) – (5,000 x $ 60)] Dr. 25,000
To Trade Receivables 20,000
Machinery A/c Dr. 30,000
To Revaluation Surplus (OCI) 30,000
[Being Machinery revalued to USD 5,500; (₹ 60 x (USD 5,500 - USD
5,000)]
Machinery A/c Dr. 27,500
To Revaluation Surplus (OCI) 27,500
(Being Machinery measured at the exchange 31- rate on
03-20X1 [USD 5,500 x (₹65 - ₹60)]
Revaluation Surplus (OCI) Dr. 17,250
To Deferred Tax Liability 17,250
(DTL created @ of 30% of the total OCI amount)
Exchange difference arising on translating monetary item and settlement of creditors on
31st March 20X2:
₹ ₹
Trade Receivables A/c (5,000 x $65) Dr. 3,25,000
Profit & loss A/c [(5,000 x ($ 67 -$ 65)] Dr. 10,000
Machinery A/c [(5,500 x ($ 67 - $ 65)) Dr. 11,000
To Profit & loss A/c 11,000
Question 5: -
On 1st January, 2018, P Ltd. purchased a machine for $ 2 lakhs. The functional currency of P Ltd. is
Rupees. At that date the exchange rate was $1= ₹68. P Ltd. is not required to pay for this purchase until
30th June, 2018. Rupees strengthened against the $ in the three months following purchase and by
31st March, 2018 the exchange rate was $1 = ₹ 65. CFO of P Ltd. feels that these exchange fluctuations
wouldn’t affect the financial statements because P Ltd. has an asset and a liability denominated in rupees.
which was initially the same amount. He also feels that P Ltd. depreciates this machine over four years so
the future year-end amounts won’t be the same.
Examine the impact of this transaction on the financial statements of P Ltd. for the year ended 31st March,
2018 as per Ind AS.
Solution: -
As per Ind AS 21 ‘The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates’ the asset and liability would initially
be recognised at the rate of exchange in force at the transaction date ie 1st January, 2018.
Therefore, the amount initially recognised would be ₹ 1,36,00,000 ($ 2,00 000 x ₹ 68).
The liability is a monetary item so it is retranslated using the rate of exchange in force at 31st
March, 2018. This makes the closing liability of ₹ 1,30,00,000 ($ 2,00,000 x ₹ 65).
The loss on re-translation of ₹ 6,00,000 (₹ 1,36,00,000 – ₹ 1,30,00,000) is recognised in the Statement of
profit or loss.
The machine is a non-monetary asset carried at historical cost. Therefore, it continues to be translated
using the rate of ₹68 to $ 1.
Depreciation of ₹ 8,50,000 (₹ 1,36,00,000 x ¼ x 3/12) would be charged to profit or loss for the year
ended 31st March, 2018.
The closing balance in property, plant and equipment would be ₹ 1,27,50,000 (₹ 1,36,00,000 – ₹
8,50,000). This would be shown as a non-current asset in the statement of financial position.
Question 6: - (RTP May 19)
Supplier, A Ltd., enters into a contract with a customer, B Ltd., on 1st January, 2018 to deliver goods in exchange for
total consideration of USD 50 million and receives an upfront payment of USD 20 millionon this date. The functional
currency of the supplier is INR. The goods are delivered and revenue is recognised on 31st March, 2018. USD 30
million is received on 1st April, 2018 in full and final settlement of the purchase consideration.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
State the date of transaction for advance consideration and recognition of revenue. Also state the amount
of revenue in INR to be recognized on the date of recognition of revenue. The exchange rates on 1st
January, 2018 and 31st March, 2018 are ₹ 72 per USD and ₹ 75 per USD respectively.
Solution: -
This is the case of Revenue recognised at a single point in time with multiple payments. As per the
guidance given in Appendix B to Ind AS 21:
A Ltd. will recognise a non-monetary contract liability amounting ₹ 1,440 million, by translating USD
20 million at the exchange rate on 1st January, 2018 ie ₹72 per USD.
A Ltd. will recognise revenue at 31st March, 2018 (that is, the date on which it transfers the goods to
the customer).
A Ltd. determines that the date of the transaction for the revenue relating to the advance
consideration of USD 20 million is 1st January, 2018. Applying paragraph 22 of Ind AS 21, A Ltd.
determines that the date of the transaction for the remainder of the revenue as 31st March, 2018.
On 31st March, 2018, A Ltd. will:
derecognise the non-monetary contract liability of USD 20 million and recognise USD 20
million of revenue using the exchange rate as at 1st January, 2018 i.e., ₹ 72 per USD; and
recognise revenue and a receivable for the remaining USD 30 million, using the exchange rate
on 31st March, 2018 ie ₹75 per USD.
the receivable of USD 30 million is a monetary item, so it should be translated using the closing
rate until the receivable is settled.
MTP: OCTOBER, 2018
Question 1:
ABC Ltd. works out translation gain/loss over the years on its investment in foreign subsidiary 2014-15: Rs. 2 lakhs, 2015-16:
Rs. 4 lakhs, 2016-17: Rs. 3 lakhs. The foreign subsidiary is sold on 30th June 2017. The translation gain on sale of such
investment as on that date is Rs. 2lakhs. Assuming that deferred tax effect is computed @ 30%. How should the company
present the translation gain/loss, deferred taxation and reclassification adjustment in the Profit and loss, other comprehensive
income, equity and liabilities? (6 Marks)
Solution:
Statement of Profit andloss Equity Liabilities
Profit & loss Other-comprehensive income Equity Liabilities
2014-15
Translation Gain 2.00
Less: Deferred Tax Expenses (0.60)
1.40
Translation Reserve 1.40
Deferred tax liabilities 0.60
2015-16
Translation Gain 2.00
Less: Deferred Tax Expenses (0.60)
1.40
2016-17
Translation loss (1.00)
Less: Deferred Tax Expenses 0.30
(0.70)
2017-18
Translation loss (1.00)
Less: Deferred Tax Expenses 0.30
(0.70)
Reclassification adjustment

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
credited to P&L 1.40
Current Tax (0.60)
Adjustment of deferred tax0.60
liabilities
RTP: N o v e m b e r , 2019
Question:3
Global Limited, an Indian company acquired on 30th September, 20X1 70% of the sare capital of Mark
Limited, an entity registered as company in Germany. The functional currency of Global Limited is
Rupees and its financial year end is 31st March, 20X2.
The fair value of the net assets of Mark Limited was 23 million EURO and the purchaseconsideration paid
is 17.5 million EURO on 30th September, 20X1.
The exchange rates as at 30th September, 20X1 was ₹ 82 / EURO and at 31st March, 20X2 was
₹84 / EURO.
What is the value at which the goodwill has to be recognised in the financial statements of Global Limited
as on 31st March, 20X2?
Mark Limited sold goods costing 2.4 million EURO to Global Limited for 4.2 million EURO during the year
ended 31st March, 20X2. The exchange rate on the date of purchase by Global Limited was
₹ 83 / EURO and on 31st March, 20X2 was ₹ 84 / EURO. The entire goods purchased from Mark
Limited are unsold as on 31st March, 20X2. Determine the unrealised profit to be eliminated in the
preparation of consolidated financial statements.
Solution:
(i) Para 47 of Ind AS 21 requires that goodwill arose on business combination shall be expressed in
the functional currency of the foreign operation and shall be translated at the closing rate in
accordance with paragraphs 39 and 42. In this case the amount of goodwill will be as follows:
Net identifiable asset Dr. 23 million
Goodwill (bal. fig.) Dr. 1.4 million
To Bank 17.5 million
To NCI (23 x 30%) 6.9 million
Thus, goodwill on reporting date would be 1.4 million EURO x ₹84 = ₹ 117.6 million
(ii)
Particulars EURO in million
Sale price of Inventory 4.20
Unrealised Profit [a] 1.80
Exchange rate as on date of purchase of Inventory [b] ₹ 83 / Euro
Unrealized profit to be eliminated [a x b] ₹149.40 million
As per para 39 of Ind AS 21 “income and expenses for each statement of profit and loss presented
(i.e., including comparatives) shall be translated at exchange rates at the dates of the transactions”.
In the given case, purchase of inventory is an expense item shown in the statement profit and loss
account. Hence, the exchange rate on the date of purchase of inventory is taken for calculation of
unrealized profit which is to be eliminated on the event of consolidation.
RTP: M A Y , 2020
Question:4
On 1st April, 20X1, Makers Ltd. raised a long-term loan from foreign investors. The investors subscribed for 6 million Foreign
Currency (FCY) loan notes at par. It incurred incremental issue costs of FCY 2,00,000. Interest of FCY 6,00,000 is payable
annually on 31st March, starting from 31st March, 20X2. The loan is repayable in FCY on 31st March, 20X7 at a premium and
the effective annual interest rate implicit in the loan is 12%. The appropriate measurement basis for this loan is amortised cost.
Relevant exchange rates are as follows:
- 1st April, 20X1 - FCY 1 = ₹ 2.50.
- 31st March, 20X2 – FCY 1 = ₹ 2.75.
- Average rate for the year ended 31st Match, 20X2 – FCY 1 = ₹ 2.42.The functional currency of the group is Indian Rupee.
What would be the appropriate accounting treatment for the foreign currency loan in the books of Makers Ltd. for the FY 20X1- 20X2?
Calculate the initial measurement amount for the loan, finance cost for the year, closing balance and exchange gain / loss.
Solution:
Initial carrying amount of loan in books
Loan amount received = 60,00,000 FCY
Less: Incremental issue costs = (2,00,000 FCY)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
58,00,000 FCY
Ind AS 21, “The Effect of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates” states that foreign currency transactions are initially
recorded at the rate of exchange in force when the transaction was first recognized.
Loan to be converted in INR = 58,00,000 FCY x ₹ 2.50/FCY = ₹ 1,45,00,000
Therefore, the loan would initially be recorded at ₹ 1,45,00,000.
Calculation of amortized cost of loan (in FCY) at the year end:
Period Opening Financial Liability Interest @ 12% Cash Flow(FCY) Closing Financial Liability
(FCY) A (FCY) B C (FCY)A+B-C
20X1-20X2 58,00,000 6,96,000 6,00,000 58,96,000
The finance cost in FCY is 6,96,000
The finance cost would be recorded at an average rate for the period since it accrues over a period of time. Hence, the finance cost
for FY 20X1-20X2 in INR is ₹ 16,84,320 (6,96,000 FCY x ₹ 2.42 / FCY) The actual payment of interest would be
recorded at 6,00,000 x 2.75 = INR 16,50,000
The loan balance is a monetary item so it is translated at the rate of exchange at the reporting date. So the closing loan
balance in INR is 58,96,000 FCY x INR 2.75 / FCY = ₹ 1,62,14,000
The exchange differences that are created by this treatment are recognized in profit and loss. In this case, the exchange
difference is
₹ [1,62,14,000 - (1,45,00,000 + 16,84,320 – 16,50,000)] = ₹ 16,79,680.
This exchange difference is taken to profit and loss.
RTP: M A Y , 2018
Question:5
On 30th January, 20X1, A Ltd. purchased a machinery for $5,000 from USA supplier on credit basis. A’s
Ltd. functional currency is the Rupee. The exchange rate on the date of transaction is 1$= ₹ 60. The fair
value of the machinery determined on 31st March, 20X1 is $ 5,500. The exchange rate on 31st March,
20X1 is 1$= ₹ 65. The payment to overseas supplier done on 31st March 20X2 and the exchange
rate on 31st March 20X2 is 1$= ₹ 67. The fair value of the machinery remain unchanged for the year ended
on 31 st March 20X2. Prepare the Journal entries for the year ended on 31st March 20X1 and year 20X2
according to Ind AS 21.
Solution:
Journal Entries
Purchase of Machinery on credit basis on 30th January 20X1:
₹ ₹
Machinery A/c (5,000 x $ 60) Dr. 3,00,000
To Creditors 3,00,000
(Initial transaction will be recorded at exchange rate on the date of
transaction)
Exchange difference arising on translating monetary item on 31st March 20X1:
₹ ₹
Machinery A/c [(5,500 x $ 65) – (5,000 x $ 60)] Dr. 57,500
To Profit & loss a/c (Exchange Profit & Loss) 57,500
Profit & Loss A/c [(5,000 x $ 65) – (5,000 x $ 60)] Dr. 25,000
To Creditors 20,000
Exchange difference arising on translating monetary item and settlement of creditors on
31st March 20X2:
₹ ₹
Creditors A/c (5,000 x $65) Dr. 3,25,000
Profit & loss A/c [(5,000 x ($ 67 -$ 65)] Dr. 10,000
Machinery A/c [(5,500*($ 67-$ 65)) Dr. 11,000
To Profit & loss A/c 11,000
Question:
On 1st January, 2018, P Ltd. purchased a machine for $ 2 lakhs. The functional currency of P Ltd. is
Rupees. At that date the exchange rate was $1= ₹ 68. P Ltd. is not required to pay for this purchase until
30th June, 2018. Rupees strengthened against the $ in the three months following purchase and by 31st
March, 2018 the exchange rate was
$1 = ₹ 65. CFO of P Ltd. feels that these exchange fluctuations wouldn’t affect the financial statements

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
because P Ltd. has an asset and a liability denominated in rupees. which was initially the same amount. He
also feels that P Ltd. depreciates this machine over four years so the future year-end amounts won’t be the
same.
Examine the impact of this transaction on the financial statements of P Ltd. for the year ended 31st March,
2018 as per Ind AS.
Solution:
As per Ind AS 21 ‘The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates’ the asset and liability would initially be
recognised at the rate of exchange in force at the transaction date ie 1st January, 2018. Therefore, the amount initially
recognised would be ₹ 1,36,00,000 ($ 2,00 000 x ₹68).
The liability is a monetary item so it is retranslated using the rate of exchange in force at 31st March, 2018. This makes
the closing liability of ₹ 1,30,00,000 ($ 2,00,000 x ₹ 65).
The loss on re-translation of ₹ 6,00,000 (₹ 1,36,00,000 – ₹ 1,30,00,000) is recognised in the Statement of profit orloss.
The machine is a non-monetary asset carried at historical cost. Therefore, it continues to be translated using the rate of
₹68 to $ 1.
Depreciation of ₹ 8,50,000 (₹ 1,36,00,000 x ¼ x 3/12) would be charged to profit or loss for the year ended 31st March,
2018.
The closing balance in property, plant and equipment would be ₹ 1,27,50,000 (₹ 1,36,00,000 – ₹
1,30,00,000). This would be shown as a non-current asset in the statement of financial position.
RTP NOV 2020
QUESTION
An Indian entity, whose functional currency is rupees, purchases USD dominated bond at its fair value of
USD 1,000. The bond carries stated interest @ 4.7% p.a. on its face value. The said interest is received at
the year end. The bond has maturity period of 5 years and is redeemable at its face value of USD 1,250.
The fair value of the bond at the end of year 1 is USD 1,060. The exchange rate on the date of transaction
and at the end of year 1 are USD 1 = ` 40 and USD 1 = ` 45, respectively. The weighted average exchange
rate for the year is 1 USD = ` 42. The entity has determined that it is holding the bond as part of an
investment portfolio whose objective is met both by holding the asset to collect contractual cash flows and
selling the asset. The purchased USD bond is to be classified under the FVTOCI category. The bond
results in effective interest rate (EIR) of 10% p.a
SOLUTION
Computation of amounts to be recognized in the P&L and OCI
USD Exchange rate Rs
Cost of the bond 1000 40 40000
Interest accrued @ 10% p.a 100 42 4200
Interest received (USD 1,250 x 4.7%) (59) 45 (2655)
Amortized cost at year-end 1041 45 46845
Fair value at year end 1060 45 47700
Interest income to be recognized in P & L 4200
Exchange gain on the principal amount [1,000 x (45-40)] 5000
Exchange gain on interest accrual [100 x (45 - 42)] 300
Total exchange gain/loss to be recognized in P&L 5300
Fair value gain to be recognized in OCI [45 x (1,060 - 1,041)] 855
Journal entry to recognize gain/loss
Bond (` 47,700 – ` 40,000) Dr. 7700
Bank (Interest received) Dr. 2655
To Interest Income (P & L) 4200
To Exchange gain (P & L) 5300
To OCI (fair value gain) 855
XYZ Global Ltd. has a functional currency of USD and needs to translate its financial statements into
the functional and presentation currency of XYZ Info. (Euro).
The following is the statement of financial position of XYZ Global Ltd. prior to translation :
USD Euro
Receivables 9,00,000
Total assets 9,60,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Profit for the year 22,000
Accounts payable 8,15,000
Accrued liabilities 58,000
Additional information:
Relevant exchange rates are:
Rate at the beginning of the year - Euro 1 = USD 1.25
Average rate for the year - Euro 1 = USD 1.20 Rate at the end of the year - Euro 1 = USD 1.15 .You
are required to :
(i) Translate the statement of financial position of XYZ Global Ltd. into Euro which is ready for
consolidation by XYZ Info. (Share capital and opening retained earnings have been pre- calculated.
(ii) Prepare a working of the cumulative balance of the foreign currency translation reserve as per relevant
Ind AS.
SOLUTION:
Translation of the financial statements
USD Rate/Euro Euro
a b a/b
Property, plant and equipment 60,000 1.15 52,174
Receivables 9,00,000 1.15 7,82,609
Total assets 9,60,000 8,34,783
Accounts payable 8,15,000 1.15 7,08,696
Accrued liabilities 58,000 1.15 50,435
Total equity and liabilities 9,60,000 8,17,464
Foreign Currency Translation Reserve (FCTR) (Refer the
below working) 17,319
Working of the cumulative balance of the FCTR
Particulars Actual translated Amount (b) Difference translated atclosing
amount in Euro (a) rate of USD 1.15 / EURO(b-a)
Issued capital 25,000 34,783* 9,783
Opening retained earnings 15,000 21,739** 6,739
Profit for the year 18,333 19,130*** 797
58,333 … 75,652 17,319
What is the functional currency of an entity?
What are the primary and secondary factors that influence determination of functional currency? (4 Marks)
SOLUTION:
Functional currency is the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates. In this regard, the
primary economic environment will normally be the one in which it primarily generates and expends cash i.e. it operates.
The functional currency is normally the currency of the country in which the entity is located. It might, however, be a
different currency.
The following are the factors that influence determination of an appropriate functional currency
1. Primary indicators:
(a) the currency:
i. that mainly influences sales prices for its goods and services. This will often be the currency in which sales
prices are denominated and settled; and
ii. of the country whose competitive forces and regulations mainly determine the sales prices of its goods and
services.
iii. the currency that mainly influences labour, material and other costs of providing goods and services. This will
often be the currency in which these costs are denominated and settled.
2. Secondary indicators: Other factors that may provide supporting evidence to determine an entity’s functional
currency are-
(a) the currency in which funds from financing activities (i.e. issuing debt and equity instruments) are generated; and
(b) the currency in which receipts from operating activities are usually retained

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 2 INVENTORIES
Illustration 1
As per Ind AS 2, inventories include ‘materials and supplies awaiting use in the production process’.
Whether packing material and publicity material are covered by the term ‘materials and supplies awaiting
use in the production process’.
Solution:
While the primary packing material may be included within the scope of the term ‘materials and
supplies awaiting use in the production process’ but the secondary packing material and publicity
material cannot be so included, as these are selling costs which are required to be excluded as per
Ind AS 2. For this purpose, the primary packing material is one which is essential to bring an item of
inventory to its saleable condition, for example, bottles, cans etc., in case of food and beverages
industry. Other packing material required for transporting and forwarding the material will normally be
in the nature of secondary packing material
Illustration 2
ABC Ltd. buys goods from an overseas supplier. It has recently taken delivery of 1,000 units of component
X. The quoted price of component X was ₹ 1,200 per unit but ABC Ltd. has negotiated a trade discount of
5% due tothe size of the order.
The supplier offers an early settlement discount of 2% for payment within 30 days and ABC Ltd.
intends to achieve this.
Import duties (basic custom duties) of ₹ 60 per unit must be paid before the goods are released through
custom. Once the goods are released through customs, ABC Ltd. must pay a delivery cost of ₹ 5,000 to
have the components taken to its warehouse. Calculate the cost of inventory.
Solution:
Purchase price (1,000 x 1,200 x 95%) 11,40,000
Import duties (1,000 x 60) 60,000
Delivery cost 5,000
Cost of inventory 12,05,000
Note: The intention to take settlement discount is irrelevant
Illustration 3: Normal production capacity
A business plans for production overheads of ₹ 10,00,000 per annum. The normal level of production is
1,00,000 units per annum. Due to supply difficulties the business was only able to make 75,000 units in
the current year. Other costs per unit were ₹ 126. Calculate the per unit cost and amount of overhead to
be expensed during the year.
Solution
Calculation of cost per unit: ₹
Other costs 126
Production overhead (10,00,000/1,00,000 units) 10
Unit cost 136
Overhead to be expensed: ₹
Total production overhead 10,00,000
The amount absorbed into inventory is (75,000 x10) (7,50,000)
The amount not absorbed into inventory 2,50,000
₹ 2,50,000 that has not been included in inventory is expensed during the year i.e., recognised in the
Illustration 4: Conversion costs
ABC Ltd. manufactures control units for air conditioning systems. Each control unit requires the
following:
1 component X at a cost of ₹ 1,205 each
1 component Y at a cost of ₹ 800 each Sundry raw materials at a cost of ₹ 150 each
The company faces the following monthly expenses:
Factory rent ₹ 16,500Energy cost ₹ 7,500
Selling and administrative costs ₹ 10,000
Each unit takes two hours to assemble. Production workers are paid ₹ 300 per hour.
Production overheads are absorbed into units of production using an hourly rate. The normal level of
production per month is 1,000 hours.
Determine the cost of inventory.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
The cost of a single control unit: ₹
Materials:
Component X 1,205
Component Y 800
Sundry raw materials 150
2,155
Labour (2 hours x 300) 600
Illustration 5: Conversion costs
A dealer has purchased 1,000 cars costing ₹ 2,80,000 each on deferred payment basis as ₹ 25,000 per
monthper car to be paid in 12 equal instalments.
At year end 31 March 20X1, twenty cars are in stock. What would be the cost of goods sold, finance
cost and inventory carrying amount?
Solution
Deferred payment price (25,000 x 12) 3,00,000
Less: Cash price 2,80,000
Interest expense 20,000
Cost of inventory 20 cars x 2,80,000 56,00,000
Finance cost 1,000 cars x 20,000 2,00,00,000
Cost of goods sold 980 cars x 2,80,000 27,44,00,000
Illustration 6: Cost of Inventory
Venus Trading Company purchases cars from several countries and sells them to Asian countries.
During thecurrent year, this company has incurred following expenses:
1 - Trade discounts on purchase
2 - Handling costs relating to imports
3 Salaries of accounting department
4 - Sales commission paid to sales agents
5 - After sales warranty costs
6 - Import duties
7 - Costs of purchases (based on supplier’s invoices)
8 -Freight expense
9 - Insurance of purchases
10 - Brokerage commission paid to indenting agents
Evaluate which costs are allowed by Ind AS 2 for inclusion in the cost of inventory in the books of Venus.
Solution
Items number 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 are allowed by Ind AS 2 for the calculation of cost of inventories.
Salaries of accounts department, sales commission, and after sale warranty costs are not considered
to be the cost of inventory. Therefore, they are not allowed by Ind AS 2 for inclusion in cost of
inventory and are expensed off in the profit and loss account
Illustration 7
As per Ind AS 2, selling costs are excluded from the cost of inventories and are required to be recognised
as an expense in the period in which these are incurred. Whether the distribution costs would now be
included in the cost of inventories under Ind AS 2.
Solution
Selling and distribution costs are generally used as single term because both are related, as selling
costs are incurred to effect the sale and the distribution costs are incurred by the seller to complete a
sale transaction by making the goods available to the buyer from the point of sale to the point at which
the buyer takes possession. Since these costs are not related to bringing the goods to their present
location and condition, the same are not included in the cost of inventories. Accordingly, though the
word ‘distribution costs’ is not specifically mentioned in Ind AS 2, these costs would continue to be
excluded from the cost of inventories.
Illustration 8 (MTP Oct 18)
In a manufacturing process of Mars Ltd, one by-product BP emerges besides two main products MP1 and
MP2 apart from scrap. Details of cost of production process are here under
Item Unit Amount Output Closing Stock31.3.20X1
Raw material 14,500 1,50,000 MP 1-5,000 units 250
Wages - 90,000 MP II - 4,000 units 100

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Fixed overhead - 65,000 BP- 2,000 units
Variable overhead - 50,000
Average market price of MP1 and MP2 is ₹ 60 per unit and ₹ 50 per unit respectively, by-product is
sold @ ₹ 20 per unit. There is a profit of ₹ 5,000 on sale of by-product after incurring separate processing
charges of ₹8,000 and packing charges of ₹ 2,000, ₹ 5,000 was realised from sale of scrap.
Calculate the value of closing stock of MP1 and MP2 as on 31.3.20X1.
Solution
As per Ind AS 2 ‘Inventories’, most by-products as well as scrap or waste materials, by their nature,
are immaterial. They are often measured at net realizable value and this value is deducted from the
cost of the main product.
1) Calculation of NRV of By-product BP
Selling price of by-product 2,000 units 40,000
Less: Separate processing charges ofby- product BP x 20per unit
Packing charges (8,000)
(2,000)
Net realizable value of by-product BP 30,000
2) Calculation of cost of conversion for allocation between joint products MP1 andMP2
Raw material 1,50,000
Wages 90,000
Fixed overhead 65,000
Variable overhead 50,000
Less: NRV of by-product BP (See calculation 1) 30,000
Sale value of scrap 5,000 (35,000)
Joint cost to be allocated between MP1 and MP2 3,20,000
3) Determination of “basis for allocation” and allocation of joint cost to MP1 and MP2
MP I MP 2
Output in units (a) 5,000 4,000
Sales price per unit (b) 60 50
Sales value (a x b) 3,00,000 2,00,000
Ratio of allocation 3 2
Joint cost of ₹3,20,000 allocated in the ratio of 3:2 (c) 1,92,000 1,28,000
Cost per unit [c/a] 38.4 32
4) Determination of value of closing stock of MP1 and MP2
Particulars MP I MP 2
Closing stock in units 250 units 100 units
Cost per unit 38.4 32
Value of closing stock 9,600 3,200
Illustration 9 : Measurement techniques of Cost
Mars Fashions is a new luxury retail company located in Lajpat Nagar, New Delhi. Kindly advise the
accountant of the company on the necessary accounting treatment for the following items:
a. One of Company’s product lines is beauty products, particularly cosmetics such as lipsticks, moisturizers
and compact make-up kits. The company sells hundreds of different brands of these products. Each
product is quite similar, is purchased at similar prices and has a short lifecycle before a new similar
product is introduced. The point of sale and inventory system is not yet fully functioning in this
department. The sales manager of the cosmetic department is unsure of the cost of each product but is
confident of the selling price and has reliably informed you that the Company, on average, make a gross
margin of 65% on each line.
b. Mars Fashions also sells handbags. The Company manufactures their own handbags as they wish to be
assured of the quality and craftsmanship which goes into each handbag. The handbags are manufactured in
India in the head office factory which has made handbags for the last fifty years. Normally, Mars
manufactures 100,000 handbags a year in their handbag division which uses 15% of the space and
overheads of the head office factory. The division employs ten people and is seen as being an efficient
division within the overall company. In accordance with Ind AS 2, explain how the items referred to in a)
and b) should be measured.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
a) The retail method can be used for measuring inventories of the beauty products. The cost of the
inventory is determined by taking the selling price of the cosmetics and reducing it by the gross margin of
65% to arrive at the cost.
b) The handbags can be measured using standard cost especially if the results approximate cost.
Giventhat the company has the information reliably on hand in relation to direct materials, direct labour,
direct expenses and overheads, it would be the best method to use to arrive at the cost of inventories.
Illustration 10
Whether an entity can use different cost formulae for inventories held at different geographical locations
having similar nature and use to it.
Solution
Paragraph 25 of Ind AS 2 prescribes that the cost of inventories, other than the items of inventories
which are not ordinarily interchangeable as dealt with in paragraph 23, shall be assigned by using the
first-in, first-out (FIFO) or weighted average cost formula. An entity shall use the same cost formula for
all inventories having similar nature and use to it. In this case, since the inventories held at different
geographical location are of similar nature and use to the entity, different cost formula cannot be used
for inventory valuation purposes.
Illustration 11
Mercury Ltd. uses a periodic inventory system. The following information relates to 20X1-20X2.
Date Particular Unit Cost p.u. Total Cost
April Inventory 200 10 2,000
May Purchases 50 11 550
September Purchases 400 12 4,800
February Purchases 350 14 4,900
Total 1,000 12,250
Physical inventory at 31.3.20X2 400 units. Calculate ending inventory value and cost of sales using:
(a) FIFO
(b) Weighted Average
Solution
FIFO inventory 31.3.20X2 350 @14 = 4,900
50 @ 12 = 600
5,500
Cost of Sales 12,250-5,500 = 6,750
Weighted average cost per item Weighted averageinventory 12,250/1000 = 12.25
at 31.3.20X2Cost of sales 20X1-20X2 400 x 12.25 = 4,900
12,250-4,900 = 7,350
Illustration 12
Whether the following costs should be considered while determining the Net Realisable Value (NRV) of the
inventories?
(a) Costs of completion of work-in-progress;
(b) Trade discounts expected to be allowed on sale; and
(c) Cash discounts expected to be allowed for prompt payment
Solution
Ind AS 2 defines Net Realisable Value as the “estimated selling price in the ordinary course of
business less the estimated costs of completion and the estimated costs necessary to make the sale.”
Costs of completion of work-in-progress are incurred to convert the work-in progress into finished
goods. Since these costs are in the nature of completion costs, in accordance with the abovedefinition,
the same should be deducted from the estimated selling price to determine the NRV ofwork-in-
progress.
The Guidance Note on Terms Used in Financial Statements defines Trade Discount as “A reduction
granted by a supplier from the list price of goods or services on business considerations other than for
prompt payment”.
Trade discount is allowed either expressly through an agreement or through prevalent commercial
practices in the terms of the trade and the same is adjusted in arriving at the selling price. Accordingly,
the trade discount expected to be allowed should be deducted to determine the estimated selling price.
The Guidance Note on Terms Used in Financial Statements defines Cash Discount as “A reduction

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
granted by a supplier from the invoiced price in consideration of immediate payment or payment within
a stipulated period.”
These types of costs are incurred to recover the sale proceeds immediately or before the end of the
specified period or credit period allowed to the customer. In other words, these costs are not incurred
to make the sale, therefore, the same should not be considered while determining NRV.
Illustration 13
ABC Ltd. manufactures and sells paper envelopes. The stock of envelopes was included in the closing
inventory as of 31st March, 20X1, at a cost of ₹ 50 per pack. During the final audit, the auditors noted that
the subsequent sale price for the inventory at 15th April, 20X1, was ₹ 40 per pack. Furthermore, enquiry
revealsthat during the physical stock take, a water leakage has created damages to the paper and the
glue.
Accordingly, in the following week, ABC Ltd. has spent a total of ₹ 15 per pack for repairing and reapplying
glue to the envelopes.
Calculate the net realizable value and inventory write-down (loss) amount.
Solution
The net realisable value is the expected sale price ₹ 40, less cost incurred to bring the goods to its
saleble condition ie ₹ 15.
Thus, NRV of envelopes pack = ₹ 40 – ₹ 15 = ₹ 25 per pack
The loss (inventory write-down) per pack is the difference between cost and net realizable value =
₹ 50 – ₹ 25= ₹ 25 per pack.
Illustration 14
At the end of its financial year, Company P has 100 units of inventory on hand recorded at a
carrying amount of ₹ 10 per unit. The current market price is ₹ 8 per unit at which these units can be
sold. Company P has a firm sales contract with Company Q to sell 60 units at ₹ 11 per unit, which
cannot be settled net. Estimated incremental selling cost is ₹ 1 per unit.
Determine Net Realisable Value (NRV) of the inventory of Company P.
Solution
While performing NRV test, the NRV of 60 units that will be sold to Company Q is ₹ 10 per unit(i.e.,
11-1) NRV of the remaining 40 units is ₹ 7 per unit (i.e., 8-1).
Therefore, Company P will write down those remaining 40 units by ₹ 120 (i.e., 40 x 3).
Total cost of inventory would be
Goods to be sold to Company Q 60 units x ₹ 10 ₹ 600
Remaining goods 40unit x ₹ 7 ₹ 280
₹ 880
Illustration 15
A business has four items of inventory. A count of the inventory has established that the amounts of
inventorycurrently held, at cost, are as follows:
Cost Estimated Sales price Selling costs
Inventory item A1 8,000 7,800 500
Inventory item A2 14,000 18,000 200
Inventory item B1 16,000 17,000 200
Inventory item C1 6,000 7,500 150
Determine the value of closing inventory in the financial statements of a business.
Solution
The value of closing inventory in the financial statements:
Item of Cost NRV (Estimated Sales Measurement base Value
inventory price- Selling costs) (lower of cost orNRV)
A1 8,000 (7,800 – 500) 7,300 NRV 7,300
A2 14,000 (18,000 – 200) 17,800 Cost 14,000
B1 16,000 (17,000 – 200) 16,800 Cost 16,000
C1 6,000 (7,500 – 150) 7,350 Cost 6,000
Value of Inventory 43,300
Illustration 16
Particulars Kg. ₹
Opening Inventory: Finished Goods 1,000 25,000
Raw Materials 1,100 11,000
Purchases 10,000 1,00,000
Labour 76,500

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Overheads (Fixed) 75,000
Sales 10,000 2,80,000
Closing Inventory: Raw Materials 900
Finished Goods 1200
The expected production for the year was 15,000 kg of the finished product. Due to fall in market demand the
sales price for the finished goods was ₹ 20 per kg and the replacement cost for the raw material was ₹ 9.50
per kg onthe closing day. You are required to calculate the closing inventory as on that date.
Solution
Calculation of cost for closing inventory
Particulars ₹
Cost of Purchase (10,200 x 10) 1,02,000
Direct Labour 76,500
Fixed Overhead 75,000 x 10,200 51,000
15,000
Cost of Production 2,29,500
Cost of closing inventory per unit (2,29,500/10,200) ₹ 22.50
Net Realisable Value per unit ₹ 20.00
Since net realisable value is less than cost, closing inventory will be valued at ₹ 20. As NRV of thefinished
goods is less than its cost, relevant raw materials will be valued at replacement cost i.e.,
₹9.50.
Therefore, value of closing inventory: Finished Goods(1,200 x 20) ₹ 24,000
Raw Materials (900 x 9.50) ₹ 8,550
₹ 32,550
Illustration 17
Sun Pharma Limited, a renowned company in the field of pharmaceuticals has the following four items in
inventory: The Cost and Net realizable value is given as follows:
Item Cost Net Realisable Value
A 2,000 1,900
B 5,000 5,100
C 4,400 4,550
D 3,200 2,990
Total 14,600 14,540
Determine the value of Inventories:
a. On an item-by-item basis
b. On a group basis
Solution
Inventories shall be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
Item by item basis:
A 1,900
B 5,000
C 4,400
D 2,990
14,290
Group basis 14,540
Production overhead [(16,500 + 7,500/1,000 hours) x 2 hours] 48
2,803
Note: The selling and administrative costs are not part of the cost of inventory.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
UA Ltd. purchased raw material @ ₹ 400 per kg. Company does not sell raw material but uses in
production of finished goods. The finished goods in which raw material is used are expected to be sold at
below cost. At the end of the accounting year, company is having 10,000 kg of raw material in inventory. As
the company never sells the raw material, it does not know the selling price of raw material and hence cannot
calculate the realizable value of the raw material for valuation of inventories at the end of the year. However,
replacement cost of raw material is ₹300 per kg. How will you value the inventory of raw material?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
As per Ind AS 2 “Inventories”, materials and other supplies held for use in the production of
inventories are not written down below cost if the finished products in which they will be incorporated
are expected to be sold at or above cost. However, when there has been a decline in the price of
materials and it is estimated that the cost of the finished products will exceed net realizable value, the
materials are written down to net realizable value. In such circumstances, the replacement cost of the
materials may be the best available measure of their net realizable value. Therefore, in this case, UA
Ltd. will value the inventory of raw material at ₹ 30,00,000 (10,000 kg. @ ₹300 per kg.)
Question 02
Sun Ltd. has fabricated special equipment (solar power panel) during 20X1-20X2 as per drawing and
design supplied by the customer. However, due to a liquidity crunch, the customer has requested the
company for postponement in delivery schedule and requested the company to withhold the delivery of finished
goods products and discontinue the production of balance items.
As a result of the above, the details of customer balance and the goods held by the company as work-in-
progress and finished goods as on 31.3.20X3 are as follows:
Solar power panel (WIP) ₹85 lakhs
Solar power panel (finished products) ₹55 lakhs
Sundry Debtor (solar power panel) ₹65 lakhs
The petition for winding up against the customer has been filed during 20X2-20X3 by Sun Ltd. Comment
with explanation on provision to be made of ₹ 205 lakh included in Sundry Debtors, Finished goods and
work-in- progress in the financial statement of 20X2-20X3.
Solution:
From the fact given in the question it is obvious that Sun Ltd. is a manufacturer of solar power panel.
As per Ind AS 2 ‘Inventories’, inventories are assets (a) held for sale in the ordinary course of
business; (b) in the process of production for such sale; or (c) in the form of materials or supplies to be
consumed in the production process or in the rendering of services. Therefore, solar power panel held
in its stock will be considered as its inventory. Further, as per the standard, inventory at the end of the
year is to be valued at lower of cost or NRV.
As the customer has postponed the delivery schedule due to liquidity crunch the entire cost incurred
for solar power panel which were to be supplied has been shown in Inventory. The solar power panel
are in the possession of the Company which can be sold in the market. Hence company should value
such inventory as per principle laid down in Ind AS 2 i.e., lower of Cost or NRV. Though, the goods
were produced as per specifications of buyer the Company should determine the NRV of these goods
in the market and value the goods accordingly. Change in value of such solar power panel should be
provided for in the books. In the absence of the NRV of WIP and Finished product given in the
question, assuming that cost is lower, the company shall value its inventory as per Ind AS 2 for ₹ 140
lakhs [i.e., solar power panel (WIP) ₹ 85 lakhs + solar power panel (finished products) ₹55 lakhs].
Alternatively, if it is assumed that there is no buyer for such fabricated solar power panel, then the
NRV will be Nil. In such a case, full value of finished goods and WIP will be provided for in the books.
As regards Sundry Debtors balance, since the Company has filed a petition for winding up
Question 03 (RTP May 18)
On 31 March 20X1, the inventory of ABC includes spare parts which it had been supplying to a
number of different customers for some years. The cost of the spare parts was ₹ 10 million and based
on retail prices at 31 March 20X1, the expected selling price of the spare parts is ₹ 12 million. On 15
April 20X1, due to market fluctuations, expected selling price of the spare parts in stock reduced to ₹ 8
million. The estimated selling expense required to make the sales would ₹ 0.5 million. Financial
statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 20th April 20X1.
As at 31st March 20X2, Directors noted that such inventory is still unsold and lying in the warehouse of
the company. Directors believe that inventory is in a saleable condition and active marketing would
result in an immediate sale. Since the market conditions have improved, estimated selling price of
inventory is ₹ 11 million and estimated selling expenses are same ₹0.5 million.
What will be the value inventory at the following dates:
(a) 31st March 20X1
(b) 31st March 20X2
Solution:
As per Ind AS 2 ‘Inventories’, inventory is measured at lower of ‘cost’ or ‘net realisable value’. Further,
as per Ind AS 10: ‘Events after Balance Sheet Date’, decline in net realisable value below cost
provides additional evidence of events occurring at the balance sheet date and hence shall be

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
considered as ‘adjusting events’.
a) In the given case, for valuation of inventory as on 31 March 20X1, cost of inventory would be ₹10
million and net realisable value would be ₹ 7.5 million (i.e., Expected selling price ₹ 8 million- estimated
selling expenses ₹ 0.5 million). Accordingly, inventory shall be measured at ₹ 7.5 million i.e., lower
of cost and net realisable value. Therefore, inventory write down of ₹ 2.5 million wouldbe recorded in
income statement of that year.
b) As per para 33 of Ind AS 2, a new assessment is made of net realizable value in each subsequent
period. It Inter alia states that if there is increase in net realizable value because of changed
economic circumstances, the amount of write down is reversed so that new carrying amount is
the lower of the cost and the revised net realizable value. Accordingly, as at 31 March 20X2, again
inventory would be valued at cost or net realisable value whichever is lower. In the present case,
cost is ₹ 10 million and net realisable value would be ₹ 10.5 million (i.e., expected selling price ₹ 11
million – estimated selling expense ₹ 0.5 million). Accordingly, inventory would be recorded at ₹ 10
million and inventory write down carried out in previous year for ₹ 2.5 million shall be reversed.
Question 04 (RTP May 20)
The following is relevant information for an entity:
 Full capacity is 10,000 labour hours in a year.
 Normal capacity is 7,500 labour hours in a year.
 Actual labour hours for current period are 6,500 hours.
 Total fixed production overhead is ₹1,500.
 Total variable production overhead is ₹2,600.
 Total opening inventory is 2,500 units.
 Total units produced in a year are 6,500 units.
 Total units sold in a year are 6,700 units.
 The cost of inventories is assigned by using FIFO cost formula.
How overhead costs are to be allocated to cost of goods sold and closing inventory?
Solution:
Hours taken to produce 1 unit = 6,500 hours / 6,500 units = 1 hour per unit.
Fixed production overhead absorption rate:
= Fixed production overhead / labour hours for normal capacity
= ₹ 1,500 / 7,500
= ₹0.2 per hour
Management should allocate fixed overhead costs to units produced at a rate of ₹0.2 per hour.
Therefore, fixed production overhead allocated to 6,500 units produced during the year (one unit perhour)
= 6,500 units x1 hour x ₹0.2 = ₹1,300.
The remaining fixed overhead incurred during the year of ₹ 200 (₹ 1500 – ₹ 1300) that remains
unallocated is recognised as an expense.
The amount of fixed overhead allocated to inventory is not increased as a result of low productionby
using normal capacity to allocate fixed overhead.
Variable production overhead absorption rate:
= Variable production overhead/actual hours for current period
= ₹ 2,600 / 6,500 hours
= ₹0.4 per hour
Management should allocate variable overhead costs to units produced at a rate of ₹ 0.4 per hour.
The above rate results in the allocation of all variable overheads to units produced during the year.
Closing inventory = Opening inventory + Units produced during year – Units sold during year
= 2,500 + 6,500 – 6,700 = 2,300 units .
As each unit has taken one hour to produce (6,500 hours / 6,500 units produced), total fixed and
variable production overhead recognised as part of cost of inventory:
= Number of units of closing inventory x Number of hours to produce each unit x (Fixed production
overhead absorption rate + Variable production overhead absorption rate)
= 2,300 units x 1 hour x (₹0.2 + ₹0.4) = ₹ 1,380
The remaining ₹ 2,720 [(₹ 1,500 + ₹ 2,600) – ₹ 1,380] is recognised as an expense s in the income
statement as follows:
Absorbed in cost of goods sold (FIFO basis) (6,500 – 2,300) = 4,200 x ₹0.6 2,520
Unabsorbed fixed overheads, not included in the cost of goods sold 200
Total 2,720

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Question 05
Sharp Trading Inc. purchases motorcycles from various countries and exports them to Europe. Sharp
Trading has incurred these expenses during 20X1:
(a) Cost of purchases (based on vendors’ invoices) 5,00,000
(b) Trade discounts on purchases 10,000
(c) Import duties 200
(d) Freight and insurance on purchases 250
(e) Other handling costs relating to imports 100
(f) Salaries of accounting department 15,000
(g) Brokerage commission payable to indenting agents for arranging imports 300
(h) Sales commission payable to sales agents 150
(i) After-sales warranty costs 600
Sharp Trading Inc. is seeking your advice as if which of the above item is to be included in the cost of
inventoryand wants you to calculate cost of inventory as per Ind AS 2.
Solution: Items (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), and (g) are permitted to be included in the cost of inventory since
these elements contribute to cost of purchase, cost of conversion and other costs incurred in bringing the
inventories to their present location and condition, as per Ind AS 2 . Statement showing cost of
inventory
₹
Cost of purchases (based on vendors’ invoices) 5,00,000
Trade discounts on purchases (10,000)
Import duties 200
Freight and insurance on purchases 250
Other handling costs relating to imports 100
Brokerage commission payable to indenting agents for 300
arranging imports
Cost of inventory under Ind AS 2 4,90,850
Note: Salaries of accounting department, sales commission, and after-sales warranty costs are not
considered as part of cost of inventory under Ind AS 2.
MTP.RTP. PAST PAPER
MTP APRIL 2019
Question 2
On 5th April, 20X2, fire damaged a consignment of inventory at one of the Jupiter’s Ltd.’s warehouse. This inventory had been
manufactured prior to 31st March 20X2 costing Rs. 8 lakhs. The net realisable value of the inventory prior to the
damage was estimated at Rs. 9.60 lakhs. Because of the damage caused to the consignment of inventory, the company was
required to spend an additional amount of Rs. 2 lakhs on repairing and re- packaging of the inventory. The inventory was
sold on 15th May, 20X2 for proceeds of Rs. 9 lakhs.
The accountant of Jupiter Ltd. treats this event as an adjusting event and adjusted this event of causing the damage to the inventory
in its financial statement and accordingly re-measures the inventories as follows:Rs. lakhs
Cost 8.00
Net realisable value (9.6 -2) 7.60
Inventories (lower of cost and net realisable value) 7.60
Analyse whether the above accounting treatment made by the accountant in regard to financial year ending on 31.0.20X2 is in
compliance of the Ind AS. If not, advise the correct treatment along with working for the same. (8 Marks)
Solution
The above treatment needs to be examined in the light of the provisions given in Ind AS 10 ‘Events after the Reporting
Period’ and Ind AS 2 ‘Inventories’.
Para 3 of Ind AS 10 ‘Events after the Reporting Period’ defines “Events after the reporting period are those events,
favourable and unfavourable, that occur between the end of the reporting period and the date when the financial statements
are approved by the Board of Directors in case of a company, and, by the corresponding approving authority in case of
any other entity for issue. Two types of events can be identified:
a. those that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the reporting period (adjusting events after the
reporting period); and
b. those that are indicative of conditions that arose after the reporting period (non- adjusting events after the
reporting bperiod).
Further, paragraph 10 of Ind AS 10 states that:
“An entity shall not adjust the amounts recognised in its financial statements to reflect non-adjusting events after the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
reporting period”.
Further, paragraph 6 of Ind AS 2 defines:
“Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less the estimated costs of
completion and the estimated costs necessary to make the sale”.
“Inventories shall be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value”.
Accountant of Jupiter Ltd. has re-measured the inventories after adjusting the event in its financial statement which is
not correct and nor in accordance with provision of Ind AS 2 and Ind AS 10. Accordingly, the event causing the
damage to the inventory occurred after the reporting date and as per the principles laid down under Ind AS 10 ‘Events After
the Reporting Date’ is a non-adjusting event as it does not affect conditions at the reporting date. Non-adjusting events
are not recognised in the financial statements, but are disclosed where their effect is material.
Therefore, as per the provisions of Ind AS 2 and Ind AS 10, the consignment of inventories shall be recorded in the
Balance Sheet at a value of Rs. 8 lakhs calculated below: Rs.’ lakhs
Cost 8.00
Net realisable value 9.60
MTP APRIL 2021
QUESTION
State the major changes in Ind AS 2 vis-a-vis AS 2 in respect of the following namely:
i. Machinery Spares
ii. Subsequent assessment of Net Realisable value
iii. Cost Formulae
SOLUTION
The major changes in Ind AS 2 vis-à-vis AS 2 with respect to following are as follows:
(i) Machinery Spares: AS 2 explains that inventories do not include spare parts, servicing equipment and
standby equipment which meet the definition of property, plant and equipment as per AS 10, Property,
Plant and Equipment. Such items are accounted for in accordance with AS 10. Ind AS 2 does not contain
specific explanation in respect of such spares as this aspect is covered under Ind AS 16.
(ii) Subsequent Assessment of Net Realisable Value (NRV): Ind AS 2 provides detailed guidance in case of
subsequent assessment of net realisable value. It also deals with the reversal of the write-down of
inventories to net realisable value to the extent of the amount of original write-down, and the recognition
and disclosure thereof in the financial statements. AS 2 does not deal with such reversal.
(iii) Cost Formulae: AS 2 specifically provides that the formula used in determining the cost of an item of
inventory should reflect the fairest possible approximation to the cost incurred in bringing the items of
inventory to their present location and condition whereas Ind AS 2 does not specifically state so and
requires the use of consistent cost formulas for all inventories having a similar nature and use to the entity.
RTP: M A Y , 2021
Question
On 1 January 20X1 an entity accepted an order for 7,000 custom-made corporate gifts. On 3 January 20X1 the entity
purchased raw materials to be consumed in the production process for ₹ 5,50,000, including ₹ 50,000 refundable purchase
taxes. The purchase price was funded by raising a loan of ₹ 5,55,000 (including ₹ 5,000 loan-raising fees). The loan is
secured by the inventories.
During January 20X1 the entity designed the corporate gifts for the customer.Design costs included:
 cost of external designer = ₹ 7,000; and
 labour = ₹ 3,000.
During February 20X1 the entity’s production team developed the manufacturing technique and made further
modifications necessary to bring the inventories to the conditions specified in the agreement. The following costs were
incurred in the testing phase:
 materials, net of ₹ 3,000 recovered from the sale of the scrapped output = ₹ 21,000;
 labour = ₹ 11,000; and
 depreciation of plant used to perform the modifications = ₹ 5,000.
During February 20X1 the entity incurred the following additional costs in manufacturing the customised corporate gifts:
 consumable stores = ₹ 55,000;
 labour = ₹ 65,000; and
 depreciation of plant used to manufacture the customised corporate gifts =₹ 15,000.
The customised corporate gifts were ready for sale on 1 March 20X1. No abnormal wastage occurred in the
development and manufacture of the corporate gifts.
Compute the cost of the inventory? Substantiate your answer with appropriate reasons and calculations, wherever required.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
1. Statement showing computation of inventory cost
Particulars Amount(₹) Remarks
Costs of purchase 5,00,000 Purchase price of raw material [purchase price (₹ 5,50,000)less
refundable purchase taxes (₹ 50,000)]
Loan-raising fee – Included in the measurement of the liability
Costs of purchase 55,000 Purchase price of consumable stores
Costs of conversion 65,000 Direct costs—labour
Production overheads 15,000 Fixed costs—depreciation
Production overheads 10,000 Product design costs and labour cost for specific
customer
Other costs 37,000 Refer working note
Borrowing costs – Recognised as an expense in profit or loss
Total cost of inventories 6,82,000
Working Note:
Costs of testing product designed for specific customer: ₹ 21,000 material (i.e., net of the ₹ 3,000 recovered from the sale of
the scrapped output) + ₹ 11,000 labour + ₹ 5,000 depreciation.
RTP NOV 2020
QUESTION
A company normally produced 1,00,000 units of a high precision equipment each year over past several
years. In the current year, due to lack of demand and competition, it produced only 50,000 units. Further
information is as follows:
Material = ₹ 200 per unit;
Labour = ₹ 100 per unit;
Variable manufacturing overhead = ₹ 100 per unit;
Fixed factory production overhead = ₹ 1,00,00,000;
Fixed factory selling overhead = ₹ 50,00,000;
Variable factory selling overhead = ₹ 150 per unit.
Calculate the value of inventory per unit in accordance with Ind AS 2. What will be the treatment of fixed
manufacturing overhead?
SOLUTION
Calculation of Inventory value per unit as per Ind AS 2:
Particulars Value per unit ( ₹)
Raw material 200
Labour 100
Variable manufacturing overhead 100
Fixed production overhead (1,00,00,000/1,00,000) 100
500
Fixed overheads are absorbed based on normally capacity level, i.e.; 1,00,000 units, rather than on the
basis of actual production, i.e.; 50,000 units. Therefore, fixed manufacturing overhead on 50,000 units, will
be absorbed as inventory value. The remaining fixed manufacturing overhead ₹ 50,00,000 (1,00,00,000 -
50,00,000) will be charged to P&L.
Note: Selling costs are excluded from the cost of inventories and recognised as expense in the period in
which they are incurred.
XYZ Limited has a plant with the normal capacity to produce 10,00,000 units of a product per annum and the expected fixed
overhead is ₹ 30,00,000, Fixed overhead, therefore based on normal capacity is ₹ 3 per unit.
Determine Fixed overhead as per Ind AS 2 'Inventories' if
(a)Actual production is 7,50,000 units.
(b) Actual production is 15,00,000 units.
SOLUTION:
(a) Actual production is 7,50,000 units: Fixed overhead is not going to change with the change in output and will
remain constant at ₹ 30,00,000, therefore, overheads on actual basis is ₹ 4 per unit (30,00,000 / 7,50,000). Hence, by valuing inventory at
₹ 4 each for fixed overhead purpose, it will be overvalued and the losses of ₹ 7,50,000 will also be included in closing
inventory leading to a higher gross profit then actually earned.
Therefore, it is advisable to include fixed overhead per unit on normal capacity to actual production (7,50,000 x 3)
₹ 22,50,000 and balance ₹ 7,50,000 shall be transferred to Profit & Loss Account.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(b) Actual production is 15,00,000 units: Fixed overhead is not going to change with the change in output and will
remain constant at ₹ 30,00,000, therefore, overheads on actual basis is ₹ 2 (30,00,000 / 15,00,000). Hence by valuing
inventory at ₹ 3 each for fixed overhead purpose, we will be adding the element of cost to inventory which actually
has not been incurred. At ₹ 3 per unit, total fixed overhead comes to ₹ 45,00,000 whereas, actual fixed overhead
expense is only ₹ 30,00,000. Therefore, it is advisable to include fixed overhead on actual basis (15,00,000 x 2) ₹
30,00,000.
Note:
Various issues related to the applicability of Ind AS / implementation under Companies (Indian Accounting Standards)
Rules, 2015, are being raised by preparers, users and other stakeholders. Although many clarifications have been issued by
way of ITFG Bulletins or EAC Opinion, still issues are arising on account of varying interpretations on several of its
guidance. Therefore, alternate answers may be possible for the above questions based on standards, depending
upon the view taken.
Sophia Ltd. has fabricated special equipment (Inverter panel) during the financial year 2018-2019 as per
drawing and design supplied by the customer. However, due to a liquidity crunch, the customer has
requested the company for postponement in delivery schedule and requested the company to withhold the
delivery of finished products and discontinue the production of balance items.
As a result of the above, the details of customer balance and the goods held by the company as work-in-
progressand finished goods as on 31 March 2020 are as follows:
Inverter panel (WIP) ₹ 255 lakhs
Inverter panel (Finished goods) ₹ 165 lakhs
Sundry Debtor (Inverter panel) ₹ 195 lakhs
The petition for winding up against the customer has been filed during the financial year 2019-2020 by Sophia
Ltd.You are required to Comment with explanation on provision to be made for ₹ 615 lakh included in
Sundry Debtors, Finished goods and Work-in-Progress in the financial statement for the financial year
2019-2020.
SOLUTION:
Sophia Ltd. is a manufacturer of inverter panel. As per Ind AS 2 ‘Inventories’, inventories are assets (a)
held for sale in the ordinary course of business; (b) in the process of production for such sale; or (c) in
the form of materials or supplies to be consumed in the production process or in the rendering of
services. Therefore, inverter panel held in its stock will be considered as its inventory. Further, as per
the standard, inventory at the end of the year is to be valued at lower of cost or NRV.As the customer
has postponed the delivery schedule due to liquidity crunch the entire cost incurred for inverter panel
which were to be supplied has been shown in Inventory. The inverter panel are in the possession of
the Company which can be sold in the market. Hence company should value such inventory as per
principle laid down in Ind AS 2 i.e., lower of Cost or NRV. Though, the goods were produced as per
specifications of the buyer the Company should determine the NRV of these goods in the market and
value the goods accordingly. Change in value of such inverter panel should be provided for in the
books.
In the absence of the NRV of WIP and Finished product given in the question, assuming that cost is
lower, the company shall value its inventory as per Ind AS 2 at ₹ 420 lakhs [i.e inverter panel (WIP) ₹ 255
lakhs + inverter panel (finished products) ₹165 lakhs].Alternatively, if it is assumed that there is no buyer
for such fabricated inverter panel, then the NRV will be Nil. In such a case, full value of finished goods and
WIP will be provided for in the books.As regards balance of Sundry Debtors, since the Company has filed
a petition for winding up against the customer in 2019-2020, it is probable that amount is not recoverable
from the party. Hence, the provision for doubtful debts for ₹ 195 lakhs shall be made in the books against
the amount of debtors.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 40 - INVESTMENT PROPERTY
Illustration 1
X Limited owns a building which is used to earn rentals. The building has a carrying amount of ₹
50,00,000. X Limited recently replaced interior walls of the building and the cost of new interior walls is ₹
5,00,000. The original walls have a carrying amount of ₹ 1,00,000. How X Limited should account for
the above costs?
Solution
Under the recognition principle, an entity recognises in the carrying amount of an investment property
the cost of replacing part of an existing investment property at the time that cost is incurred if the
recognition criteria are met and the carrying amount of those parts that are replaced is derecognised.
So, X Limited should add the cost of new walls and remove the carrying amount of old walls. The
new carrying amount of the building = ₹50,00,000 + ₹5,00,000 – ₹1,00,000 = ₹54,00,000.
Illustration 2
Netravati Ltd. purchased a commercial office space as an Investment Property, in the Global Trade Centre
Commercial Complex, for ₹ 5 crores. However, for purchasing the same, the Company had to obtain
membership of the Global Trade Centre Commercial Complex Association by paying ₹ 6,25,000 as a one-
time joining fee. Netravati Ltd. wants to write off the one-time joining fees paid as an expense under
Membership and Subscription Charges and value the investment property at ₹ 5 crores.
Advise:
Would you answer change if the office space was purchased with the intention of using it as an
administrative centre of the company?
Solution
Cost of Investment Property
As per Ind AS 40, the cost of a purchased investment property comprises its purchase price and any
directly attributable expenditure (e.g., professional fees for legal services, property transfer taxes and
other transaction costs). Accordingly, on initial recognition, the one-time joining fee of ₹ 6,25,000
should be added to the purchase price. Therefore, the investment property should be measured at ₹
5,06,25,000 (i.e., cost of the commercial office space + one-time joining fee). Writing off the amount
of ₹ 6,25,000 to the P&L is not appropriate.
Use as Administrative Office
If the property is used as an administrative centre, it is not an investment property, but rather an
‘owner occupied property’. Hence, Ind AS 16 will be applicable.
Even under Ind AS 16, all direct costs relating to the acquisition of the asset should be added to the
purchase price. Hence, cost of the asset under Ind AS 16 would be ₹ 5,06,25,000.
Illustration 3
X Limited purchased a building for ₹ 30,00,000 on 1st May, 20X1 with an intention to earn rentals.
The purchase price was funded by a loan, interest on which is payable @ 5%. Property transfer taxes and
direct legal costs of ₹ 1,00,000 and ₹ 20,000 respectively were incurred in acquiring the building. X Limited
redeveloped the building into retail shops for rent under operating leases to independent third parties.
Expenditures on redevelopment were:
(a) ₹ 2,00,000 planning permission.
(b) ₹ 7,00,000 construction costs (including ₹ 40,000 refundable purchase taxes).
What is the cost of the Building as per Ind AS 40?
Solution
As per Ind AS 40, the cost of a purchased investment property comprises its purchase price and any
directly attributable expenditure (e.g., professional fees for legal services, property transfer taxes and
other transaction costs).
Accordingly, cost of the building is arrived at as under:
Particulars Amount in ₹ Total ₹
Purchase price 30,00,000
Add: Property transfer taxes 1,00,000
Direct legal costs 20,000
Fee for planning permission 2,00,000
Construction costs 7,00,000
Less: Refundable purchase taxes 40,000 6,60,000
Cost of the Building as per Ind AS 40 39,80,000
Note: The building does not qualify the substantial period criteria for redevelopment of property.
Hence, borrowing cost of loan fund has not been capitalised.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 4
X Limited purchased a land worth of ₹ 1,00,00,000. It has option either to pay full amount at the time of
purchases or pay for it over two years for a total cost of ₹ 1,20,00,000. What should be the cost of the
building under both the payment methods?
Solution:
Using either payment method, the cost will be ₹ 1,00,00,000. If the second payment option is used, ₹20,00,000
will be treated as interest expenses over the credit period of 2 years.
Illustration 5
Moon Ltd has purchased a building on 1st April, 20X1 at a cost of ₹ 10 million. The building was used
as a factory by the Moon Ltd and was measured under cost model. The expected useful life of the
building is estimated to be 10 years. Due to decline in demand of the product, the Company does not need
the factory anymore and has rented out the building to a third party from1st April, 20X5. On this date the
fair value of the building is ₹ 8 million. Moon ltd uses cost model for accounting of its investment property.
Solution
(₹ Million)
Carrying amount of the building after depreciation of 4 years 6
(10-10/10 x 4).
The company has applied cost model under Ind AS 16 till now.
There is no impairment as the fair value is greater than the carrying amount of building.
Revaluation Surplus credited to Other Comprehensive Income ---
(not applicable since cost model is used under Ind AS 16)
Building initially recognised as Investment Property 6
(Cost model Ind AS 40)
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
On 1st April, 20X1 an entity acquired an investment property (building) for ₹ 40,00,000. Management
estimates the useful life of the building as 20 years measured from the date of acquisition. The residual value of
the building is ₹ 2,00,000. Management believes that the straight-line depreciation method reflects the pattern in
which it expects to consume the building’s future economic benefits. What is the carrying amountof
the building on 31st March, 20X2?
Solution:
Cost of the asset is ₹ 40,00,000.
Depreciable amount = Cost less Residual value = ₹ (40,00,000 - 2,00,000) = ₹ 38,00,000
Depreciation for the year = Depreciable amount/useful life
= ₹ 38,00,000/20 = ₹ 1,90,000.
Carrying amount = Cost less accumulated depreciation
= ₹ (40,00,000 - 1,90,000) = ₹ 38,10,000.
Question 02:
X Limited has an investment property (building) which is carried in Balance Sheet on 31st March, 20X1
at ₹ 15,00,000. During the year X Limited has stopped letting out the building and used it as its office
premise. On 31st March, 20X1, management estimates the recoverable amount of the building as ₹
10,00,000 and its remaining useful life as 20 years and residual value is nil. How should X Limited
account for the above investment property as on 31st March, 20X1?
Solution:
At 31st March, 20X1, X Limited must transfer the property from investment property to property, plant
and equipment since there is a change in use of the said building.
The transfer should be made at its carrying amount i.e., ₹ 15,00,000.
Since recoverable amount of the property as on 31st March, 20X1 is ₹ 10,00,000, impairment loss
₹ 5,00,000 should be recognised in the Statement of Profit and Loss. So, the carrying amount of Investment
property at 31st March,20X1 would be ₹ 10,00,000.
The entity must disclose the reclassification.
From April, 20X1, X Limited will depreciate the building over its remaining useful life of 20years.
Question 03:
In financial year 20X1-20X2, X Limited incurred the following expenditure in acquiring property consisting
of 6 identical houses each with separate legal title including the land on which it is built.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The expenditure incurred on various dates is given below:
On 1st April, 20X1 - Purchase cost of the property ₹ 1,80,00,000.
st
On 1 April, 20X1 – Non-refundable transfer taxes ₹ 20,00,000 (not included in the purchase cost). On
2nd April, 20X1- Legal cost related to property acquisition ₹ 5,00,000.
On 6th April, 20X1- Advertisement campaign to attract tenants ₹ 3,00,000.
On 8th April, 20X1 - Opening ceremony function for starting business ₹ 1,50,000.
Throughout 20X1-20X2, incurred ₹1,00,000 towards day-to-day repair maintenance and other
administrative expenses.
X Limited uses one of the six houses for office and accommodation of its few staffs. The other five houses
are rented to various independent third parties.
How X Limited will account for all the above-mentioned expenses in the books of account?
Solution:
The cost of the property = ₹ (1,80,00,000 + 20,00,000 + 5,00,000) = ₹ 2,05,00,000.
Since five houses out of six are being rented, so 5/6th of the property cost will be accounted for as an
investment property and 1/6th of the property cost will be accounted for as owner- occupied property.
Cost of the investment property = ₹ 2,05,00,000 x 5/6 = ₹ 1,70,83,333
Cost of the owner-occupied property = ₹ (2,05,00,000 - 1,70,83,333) = ₹ 34,16,667.
All other costs, i.e., advertisement expenses, ceremony expenses and repair maintenance expenses
will be expensed off as and when incurred.
Question 04:
X Ltd. is engaged in the construction industry and prepares its financial statements up to 31st March
each year. On 1st April, 20X1, X Ltd. purchased a large property (consisting of land) for ₹ 2,00,00,000
and immediately began to lease the property to Y Ltd. on an operating lease. Annual rentals were ₹
20,00,000. On 31st March, 20X5, the fair value of the property was ₹ 2,60,00,000. Under the terms of the
lease, Y Ltd. was able to cancel the lease by giving six months’ notice in writing to X Ltd. Y Ltd. gave this
notice on 31st March, 20X5 and vacated the property on 30th September, 20X5. On 30th September,
20X5, the fair value of the property was ₹ 2,90,00,000. On 1st October, 20X5, X Ltd. immediately began
to convert the property into ten separate flats of equal size which X Ltd. intended to sell in the ordinary
course of its business. X Ltd. spent a total of ₹ 60,00,000 on this conversion project between 30th
September, 20X5 to 31st March, 20X6. The project was incomplete at 31st March, 20X6 and the directors
of X Ltd. estimate that they need to spend a further ₹ 40,00,000 to complete the project, after which each
flat could be sold for ₹ 50,00,000. Examine and show how the three events would be reported in the
financial statements of X Ltd. for the year ended 31st March, 20X6 as per Ind AS.
Solution:
From 1st April, 20X1, the property would be regarded as an investment property since it is being held
for its investment potential rather than being owner occupied or developed for sale.
The property would be measured under the cost model. This means it will be measured at ₹ 2,00,00,000
at each year end.
On 30th September, 20X5, the property ceases to be an investment property. X Ltd. begins to
develop it for sale as flats.
As per para 59 of Ind AS 40, transfers between investment property, owner-occupied property and
inventories do not change the carrying amount of the property transferred and they do not change the
cost of that property for measurement or disclosure purposes. Hence, the carrying value of the
reclassified property will be ₹ 2,00,00,000.
Since the lease of the property is an operating lease, rental income of ₹10,00,000 (₹ 20,00,000 x
6/12) would be recognised in P/L for the year ended 31st March, 20X6.
The additional costs of ₹ 60,00,000 for developing the flats which were incurred up to and including 31st
March, 20X6 would be added to the ‘cost’ of inventory to give a closing cost of ₹ 2,60,00,000.
The total selling price of the flats is expected to be ₹ 5,00,00,000 (10 x ₹ 50,00,000). Since the further costs
to develop the flats total ₹ 40,00,000, their net realisable value is ₹ 4,60,00,000 (₹ 5,00,00,000 – ₹
40,00,000), so the flats will be measured at a cost of ₹ 2,60,00,000.
The flats will be shown in inventory as a current asset.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Question 05: (RTP Mar 21)
Shaurya Limited owns a Building A which is specifically used for the purpose of earning rentals. The
Company has not been using the building A or any of its facilities for its own use for a long time. The
company is also exploring the opportunities to sell the building if it gets the reasonable amount in
consideration.
Following information is relevant for Building A for the year ending 31st March, 20X2:
Building A was purchased 5 years ago at the cost of ₹ 10 crores and building life is estimatedto be
20 years. The company follows straight line method for depreciation.
During the year, the company has invested in another Building B with the purpose to hold it for
capital appreciation. The property was purchased on 1st April, 20X1 at the cost of ₹ 2 crores. Expected life of
the building is 40 years. As usual, the company follows straight line method of depreciation.
Further, during the year 20X1-20X2 the company earned/incurred following direct operating
expenditure relating to Building A and Building B:
Rental income from Building A = ₹ 75 lakhs
Rental income from Building B = ₹ 25 lakhs
Sales promotion expenses = ₹ 5 lakhs
Fees & Taxes = ₹ 1 lakhs
Ground rent = ₹ 2.5 lakhs
Repairs & Maintenance = ₹ 1.5 lakhs
Legal & Professional = ₹ 2 lakhs
Commission and brokerage = ₹ 1 lakhs
The company does not have any restrictions and contractual obligations against Property - A
and B. For complying with the requirements of Ind AS, the management sought an independent report
from the specialists so as to ascertain the fair value of buildings A and
B. The independent valuer has valued the fair value of property as per the valuation model
recommended by International valuation standards committee. Fair value has been computed by the
method by streamlining present value of future cash flows namely, discounted cash flow method.
The other key inputs for valuation are as follows:
The estimated rent per month per square feet for the period is expected to be in the range of ₹ 50
- ₹ 60. And it is further expected to grow at the rate of 10 percent per annum for each of 3 years. Theweighted
discount rate used is 12% to 13%.
Assume that the fair value of properties based on discounted cash flow method is measuredat ₹
10.50 crores. The treatment of fair value of properties is to be given in the financials as per the
requirements of Indian accounting standards.
What would be the treatment of Building A and Building B in the balance sheet of Shaurya Limited?
Provide detailed disclosures and computations in line with relevant Indian accounting standards. Treat
it as if you are preparing a separate note or schedule, of the given assets in the balance sheet.
Solution:
Investment property is held to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both. Ind AS 40 shall be
applied in the recognition, measurement and disclosure of investment property. An investment
property shall be measured initially at its cost. After initial recognition, an entity shall measure all of its
investment properties in accordance with Ind AS 16’s requirements for cost model.
The measurement and disclosure of Investment property as per Ind AS 40 in the balance sheet would be
depicted as follows:
INVESTMENT PROPERTIES:
Particulars Period ended 31st March, 20X2(₹ in crores)
Gross Amount:
Opening balance (A) 10.00
Additions during the year (B) 2.00
Closing balance (C) = (A) + (B) 12.00
Depreciation:
Opening balance (D) 2.50
Depreciation during the year (E) (0.5 + 0.05) 0.55
Closing balance (F) = (D) + (E) 3.05
Net balance (C) - (F) 8.95

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The changes in the carrying value of investment properties for the year ended31st March, 20X2 are
as follows:
Amount recognised in Profit and Loss with respect to Investment Properties
Particulars Period ending31st March,20X2(₹ in crores)
Rental income from investment properties (0.75 + 0.25) 1.00
Less: Direct operating expenses generating from rental (0.13)
income (5+1+2.5+1.5+2+1)
Profit from investment properties before depreciation and 0.87
indirect expenses
Less: Depreciation (0.55)
Profits from earnings from investment profits before 0.32
indirect expenses
Disclosure Note on Investment Properties acquired by the entity
The investment properties consist Property A and Property B. As at March 31, 20X2, the fair value of
the properties is ₹ 10.50 crores. The valuation is performed by independent valuers, who are
specialists in valuing investment properties. A valuation model as recommended by International
Valuation Standards Committee has been applied. The Company considers factors like management
intention, terms of rental agreements, area leased out, life of the assets etc. to determine
classification of assets as investment properties.
The Company has no restrictions on the realisability of its investment properties and no contractual
obligations to purchase, construct or develop investment properties or for repairs, maintenance and
enhancements.
Description of valuation techniques used and key inputs to valuation on investment properties:
Valuation technique Significant unobservable inputs Range (Weightedaverage)
Discounted cash flowEstimated rental value per sq. ft. per month -₹ 50 to₹ 60
(DCF) method
- Rent growth per annum -10% every 3 years
- Discount rate -12% to 13%
RTP/MTP/PAST QUESTIONS
RTP MAY 2021
X Ltd owned a land property whose future use was not determined as at 31 March 20X1. How should the
property be classified in the books of X Ltd as at31 March 20X1?
During June 20X1, X Ltd commenced construction of office building on it for own use. Presuming that the construction of
the office building will still be in progress as at 31 March 20X2
(a) How should the land property be classified by X Ltd in its financial statements as at 31 March 20X2?
(b) Will there be a change in the carrying amount of the property resulting from any change in use of the
investment property?
(c) Whether the change in classification to, or from, investment properties is a change in accounting policy to be
accounted for in accordance with Ind AS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors?
(d) Would your answer to (a) above be different if there were to be a management intention to commence
construction of an office building for own use; however, no construction activity was planned by 31 March
20X2?
SOLUTION
As per paragraph 8(b) of Ind AS 40, any land held for currently undetermined future use, should be classified as an investment
property. Hence, in this case, the land would be regarded as held for capital appreciation. Hence the land property should be
classified by X Ltd as investment property in the financial statements as at 31 March 20X1.
As per Para 57 of the Standard, an entity can change the classification of any property to, and from, an investment property
when and only when evidenced by a change in use.A change occurs when the property meets or ceases to meet the definition
of investment property and there is evidence of the change in use. Mere management’s intention for use of the property does
not provide evidence of a change in use.
(a) Since X Ltd has commenced construction of office building on it for own use, the property should be
reclassified from investment property to owner occupied as at 31 March 20X2.
(b) As per Para 59, transfers between investment property, owner occupied and inventories do not change
the carrying amount of the property transferred and they do not change the cost of the property for
measurement or disclosure purposes.
(c) No. The change in classification to, or from, investment properties is due to changein use of the property.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
No retrospective application is required and prior period’s financial statements need not be re-stated.
(d) Mere management intentions for use of the property do not evidence change in use. Since X Ltd has no
plans to commence construction of the office building during 20X1-20X2, the property should continue to
be classified as an investment property by X Ltd in its financial statements as at 31 March 20X2.
MTP MARCH 2018
A Ltd. owns three properties which are shown in its financial statements as ‘Property, Plant and Equipment’.
All three properties were purchased on April 1, 20X1. The details of purchase price and market values of
the properties are given as follows: ₹
Particulars Property 1 Property 2 Property 3
Factory Building Factory Building Let-out Building
Purchase price 500 200 300
Market value as on 550 220 330
31.03.20X2
Useful Life 10 Years 10 Years 10 Years
Subsequent Cost Model Revaluation Model Revaluation Model
Measurement
Property 1 and 2 are used by A Ltd. as factory building whilst property 3 is let-out to a non-related party at a
market rent. A Ltd. does not depreciate any of the properties on the basis that the fair values are exceeding
their carrying amount and recognise the difference between purchase price and fair value in Statement of
Profit and Loss. Evaluate whether the accounting policies adopted by A Ltd. in relation to these properties,
on various accounting aspects, are in accordance with Ind AS or not. If not, advise the correct treatment
along with the workings for the same in all the cases.
SOLUTION:
(i) For classification of assets Para 6 of Ind AS 16 ‘Property, Plant and Equipment’ inter alia, states
that
Property, plant and equipment are tangible items are held for use in the production or supply of goods or
services, for rental to others, or for administrative purposes. As per para 6 of Ind AS 40 ‘Investment
property’, Investment property is property held to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both, rather than
for use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes; or sale in the
ordinary course of business. According, to the facts given in the questions, since Property 1 and 2 are used
as factory buildings, their classification as PPE is correct. However, Property 3 is held to earn rentals;
hence, it should be classified as Investment Property. Thus, its classification as PPE is not correct.
Property ‘3’ shall be presented as separate line item as Investment Property as per Ind AS 1.
(ii) For valuation of assets Paragraph 29 of Ind AS 16 states that an entity shall choose either the cost
model or the revaluation model as its accounting policy and shall apply that policy to an entire class of
property, plant and equipment. Also, paragraph 36 of Ind AS 16 states that If an item of property, plant and
equipment is revalued, the entire class of property, plant and equipment to which that asset belongs shall
be revalued. However, for investment property, paragraph 30 of Ind AS 40 states that an entity shall adopt
as its accounting policy the cost model to all of its investment property”. Also, paragraph 79 (e) of Ind AS 40
inter alia requires that an entity shall disclose the fair value of investment property. Since property 1 and 2
is used as factory building, they should be classified under same category or class i.e. ‘factory building’.
Therefore, both the properties should be valued either at cost model or revaluation model. Hence, the
valuation model adopted by A Ltd. is not consistent and correct as per Ind AS 16. In respect to property ‘3’
being classified as Investment Property, there is no alternative of revaluation model i.e. only cost model is
permitted for subsequent measurement. However, A Ltd. is required to disclose the fair value of the
investment property in the Notes to Accounts.
(iii) For changes in value on account of revaluation and treatment thereof Paragraph 39 of Ind AS 16
states that if an asset’s carrying amount is increased as a result of a revaluation, the increase shall be
recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in equity under the heading ‘revaluation
surplus’. However, the increase shall be recognised in profit or loss to the extent that it reverses a
revaluation decrease of the same asset previously recognised in profit or loss. Accordingly, the revaluation
gain shall be recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in equity under the heading of
revaluation surplus.
(iv) For treatment of depreciation Paragraph 52 of Ind AS 16 states that Depreciation is recognised even
if
the fair value of the asset exceeds its carrying amount, as long as the asset’s residual value does not

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
exceed its carrying amount. Accordingly, A Ltd. is required to depreciate these properties irrespective of
that their fair value exceeds the carrying amount.
(v) Rectified presentation in the balance sheet As per the provisions of Ind AS 1, Ind AS 16 and Ind AS 40,
the presentation of these three properties in the balance sheet should be as follows:
Case 1: If A Ltd. has applied the Cost Model to an entire class of property, plant and equipment.
Balance Sheet extracts as at 31st March 20X2
Assets
Non-Current Assets
Property‘1’ 450
Property‘2’ 180 630
Investment Property
Property ‘3’ (Fair value being 330 lakhs) (Cost = 300-30) 270
Case 2: If A Ltd. has applied the Revaluation Model to an entire class of property, plant and equipment
Balance Sheet extracts as at 31st March 20X2
Assets
Non-Current Assets
Property‘1’ 550
Investment Properties
Other Equity
Revaluation Reserve*
Property‘1’ (550-450) 100
Property‘2 (220-180) 40 140
*The revaluation reserve should be routed through Other Comprehensive Income (OCI) (subsequently not
reclassified to Profit and Loss) in the Statement of Profit and Loss and shown as a separate column in
Statement of Changes in Equity.
PAST QUESTION PAPER
NOV 2020 (JAN2021)
Question:
On 1st April 2019, an entity purchased an office block (building) for ₹ 50,00,000 and paid a non-refundable property transfer
tax and direct legal cost of ₹ 2,50,000 and ₹ 50,000 respectively while acquiring the building.
During 2019, the entity redeveloped the building into two-story building. Expenditureson re-development were:
 ₹ 1,00,000 Building plan approval;
 ₹ 10,00,000 construction costs (including ₹ 60,000 refundable purchase taxes); and
 ₹ 40,000 due to abnormal wastage of material and labour.
When the re-development of the building was completed on 1st October 2019, the entity rents out Ground Floor of the building
to its subsidiary under an operating lease in return for rental payment. The subsidiary uses the building as a retail outlet for
its products. The entity kept first floor for its own administration and maintenance staff usage. Equal value can be attributed
to each floor.
How will the entity account for all the above mentioned expenses in the books of account?
Also, discuss how the above building will be shown in Consolidated financial state ment of the entity as a group and in its
separate financial statements as per relevant Ind AS.
SOLUTION
In accordance with Ind AS 16, all costs required to bring an asset to its present location and condition for its intended use
should be capitalised. Therefore, the initial purchase price of the building would be:
Purchase amount 50,00,000
Non-refundable property tax 2,50,000
Direct legal cost 50,000
53,00,000
Expenditures on redevelopment:
Building plan approval 1,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Construction costs (10,00,000 – 60,000) 9,40,000
Total amount to be capitalised at 1st October 2019 63,40,000
Treatment of abnormal wastage of material and labour:
As per Ind AS 16, the cost of abnormal amounts of wasted material, labour, or other resources incurred in self-constructing
an asset is not included in the cost of the asset. It will be charged to Profit and Loss in the year it is incurred. Hence,
abnormal wastage of ₹ 40,000 will be expensed off in Profit & Loss in the financial year 2019 -2020.
Accounting of property- Building
When the property is used as an administrative centre, it is not an investment property, rather it is an ‘owner occupied
property’. Hence, Ind AS 16 will be applicable.
When the property (land and/or buildings) is held to earn rentals or for capital appreciation (or both), it is an Investment
property. Ind AS 40 prescribes the cost model for accounting of such investment property.
Since equal value can be attributed to each floor, Ground Floor of the building will be considered as Investment Property and
accounted as per Ind AS 40 and First Floor would be considered as Property, Plant and Equipment and accounted as per Ind
AS 16.
Cost of each floor = ₹ 63,40,000 / 2 = ₹ 31,70,000
As on 1st October 2019, the carrying value of building vis-à-vis its classification would be as follows:
(i) In Separate Financial Statements: The Ground Floor of the building will be classified as investment property for ₹
31,70,000, as it is property held to earn rentals. While First Floor of the building will be classified as item of property, plant
and equipment for ₹ 31,70,000.
(ii) In Consolidated Financial Statements: The consolidated financial statements present the parent and its subsidiary as
a single entity. The consolidated entity uses the building for the supply of goods. Therefore, the leased-out property to a
subsidiary does not qualify as investment property in the consolidated financial statements. Hence, the whole building will be
classified as an item of Property, Plant and Equipment for ₹ 63,40,000.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 105 - NON-CURRENT ASSETS HELD FOR SALE & DISCOUNTED OPERATIONS
Illustration 1 - Measurement prior to classification as held for sale
Entity ABC owns an item of property and it was stated at the following amounts in its last
financialstatements:
31st March, 20X1 ₹
Cost 12,00,000
Depreciation (6,00,000)
Net book value 6,00,000
The asset is depreciated at an annual rate of 10% i.e. ₹ 1,20,000 p.a.
Entity ABC closes its books as on 31st March each year. During July, 20X2, entity ABC decides to sell
the asset and on 1st August it meets the conditions to be classified as held for sale. Analyse.
Solution
At 31st July, entity ABC should ensure that the asset is measured in accordance with Ind AS 16. It
should be depreciated by further ₹ 40,000 (₹ 1,20,000 x 4/12) and should be carried at ₹5,60,000before itis
measured in accordance with Ind AS 105.
Note: From the date the asset is classified as held for sale no further depreciation will be charged.
Illustration 2
S Ltd purchased a property for ₹ 6,00,000 on 1st April, 20X1. The useful life of the property is15 years.
On 31st March, 20X3, S Ltd classified the property as held for sale. The impairment testing provides the
estimated recoverable amount of ₹ 4,70,000.
The fair value less cost to sell on 31st March, 20X3 was ₹ 4,60,000. On 31st March, 20X4 management
changed the plan, as property no longer met the criteria of held for sale. The recoverable amount as at 31st
March, 20X4 is ₹ 5,00,000.
Provide the accounting treatment of events for the year ending 31st March, 20X3 and 31st March,
20X4 and value the property at the end of 20X3 and 20X4.
Solution
(a) Value of property immediately before the classification as held for sale as per Ind AS 16 as on
31st March, 20X3
Purchase Price 6,00,000
Less: Accumulated Depreciation 80,000 (for two years)
Less: Impairment loss 50,000 (5,20,000-4,70,000)
Carrying Amount 4,70,000
On initial classification as held for sale on 31st March, 20X3, the value will be lower of:
Carrying amount after impairment ₹ 4,70,000
Fair Value less Cost to sell ₹ 4,60,000
On 31st March, 20X3 non-current asset classified as held for sale will be recorded at ₹ 4,60,000. Depreciation
of ₹ 40,000 and Impairment Loss of ₹ 60,000 (50,000 +10,000) is charged in profit or lossfor the year
ended 31st March, 20X3.
(b) On 31st March, 20X4, held for sale property is reclassified as criteria doesn’t met. The valuewill be
lower of:
Carrying amount immediately before classification on 31 st March, 20X3 4,70,000
Less: Depreciation based on 13 years balance life (₹ 36,154)
Carrying amount had the asset is not classified as held for sale 4,33,846
Recoverable Amount 5,00,000
Property will be valued at ₹ 4,33,846 on 31st March, 20X4
Adjustment to the carrying amount of ₹26,154 (₹4,60,000 - 4,33,846) is charged to the profit or loss.
Illustration 3
Identify whether each of the following scenarios gives rise to a discontinued operation and/or
classification of assets as held for sale:
S. No Particulars Discontinued Assets held for
operation Yes/No Sale Yes/No
1 MNO disposes of a component of the entity by selling the
underlying assets. The sales transaction is incomplete at
the reporting date.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
2 PQR has ceased activities that meet the definition of a
discontinued operation without selling any assets.
3 STU ceases activities and has already completed the saleof
the underlying assets at the reporting date.
4 VWX will sell or has sold assets that are within the scope of
Ind AS 105, but does not discontinue any of its operations.
Solution
Discontinued operations and assets held for sale
S. Particulars Discontinued Assets heldfor
No operation Yes/No sale Yes/No
1 MNO disposes of a component of the entity by selling the Yes Yes
underlying assets. The sales transaction is incomplete at the
reporting date.
2 PQR has ceased activities that meet the definition of a Yes No
discontinued operation withou selling any assets.
3 STU ceases activities and has already completed the sale of Yes No
the underlying assets at the reporting date.
4 VWX will sell or has sold assets that are withinthe scope of No Yes
Ind AS 105, but does no discontinue any of its operations.
Illustration 4
Sun Ltd is a retailer of takeaway food like burger and pizzas. It decides to sell one of its outlets located
in Chandani Chowk in New Delhi. The company will continue to run 200 other outlets in New Delhi.
All Ind AS 105 criteria for held for sale classification were first met at 1st October, 20X1. The outlet will be
sold in June, 20X2.
Management believes that outlet is a discontinued operation and wants to present the results of outlet as
'discontinued operations'. Analysis
Solution
The Chandani Chowk outlet is a disposal group; it is not a discontinued operation as it is only one
outlet. It is not a major line of business or geographical area, nor a subsidiary acquired with a view
to resale.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
On February 28, 20X1, Entity X becomes committed to a plan to sell a property. However, it plans
certain renovations to increase its value prior to selling it. The renovations are expected to be
completed within a short span of time i.e., 2 months.
Can the property be classified as held for sale at the reporting date i.e. 31st March, 20X1?
Solution:
The property cannot be classified as held for sale at the balance sheet date as it is not available for
sale immediately in its present condition. Although the renovations are expected to be completed
within a short span 2 months, this fact is not relevant for classification. The delay in the timing of the
transfer of the property imposed by the Entity X demonstrates that the property is not available for
immediate sale.
However, if the PPE meets the criteria for held for sale by 30th April, 20X1 (i.e., 2 months from February
28, 20X1) and the accounts are not authorised by that date, then necessary disclosures need to be
given in the financial statements.
Question 02:
On 1st March, 20X1, entity R decides to sell one of its factories. An agent is appointed and the factory
is actively marketed. As on 31st March, 20X1, it is expected that the factory will be sold by 28th February,
20X2. However, in May 20X1, the market price of the factory deteriorated. Entity R believed that the
market will recover and thus did not reduce the price of the factory. The company’s accounts are
authorised for issue on 26th June, 20X1. Should the factory be shown as held for sale as on 31st
March, 20X1?
Solution:
In this example, the factory ceases to meet the definition of held for sale post the balance sheet date but
before the financial statements are authorised for issue, as it is not actively marketed at a reasonable price.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
But, since the market conditions deteriorated post the balance sheet date, the asset will be classified as
held for sale as at 31st March, 20X1.
Question 03:
On 1st June, 20X1, entity X plans to sell a group of assets and liabilities, which is classified as a
disposal group. On 31st July, 20X1, the Board of Directors approves and becomes committed to the
plan to sell the manufacturing unit by entering into a firm purchase commitment with entity Y. However,
since the manufacturing unit is regulated, the approval from the regulator is needed for sale. The
approval from the regulator is customary and highly probable to be received by 30th November, 20X1
and the sale is expected to be completed by 31st March, 20X2. Entity X follows December year end.
The assets and liabilities attributable to this manufacturing unit are as under: (Amount in ₹)
Particulars Carrying value as on 31 st Carrying value as on
December,20X0 st
31 July,20X1
Goodwill 500 500
Plant and Machinery 1,000 900
Building 2,000 1,850
Debtors 850 1,050
Inventory 700 400
Creditors (300) (250)
Loans (2,000) (1,850)
2,750 2,600
The fair value of the manufacturing unit as on 31st December, 20X0 is ₹ 2,000 and as on31st July,
20X1 is ₹ 1,850. The cost to sell is ₹ 100 on both these dates. The disposal group is not sold at the
period end i.e., 31st December, 20X1. The fair value as on 31st December, 20X1is lower than the
carrying value of the disposal group as on that date.
Required:
1. Assess whether the manufacturing unit can be classified as held for sale and reasonsthere for.
If yes, that which date?
2. The measurement of the manufacturing unit as on the date of classification as held for sale.
3. The measurement of the manufacturing unit as at the end of the year.
Solution:
Assessing whether the manufacturing unit can be classified as held for sale
The manufacturing unit can be classified as held for sale due to the following reasons:
(a) The disposal group is available for immediate sale and in its present condition. The regulatory
approval is customary and it is expected to be received in one year. The date at which the
disposal group must be classified as held for sale is 31st July, 20X1, i.e., the date at which
management becomes committed to the plan.
(b) The sale is highly probable as the appropriate level of management i.e., board of directors in
this case have approved the plan.
(c) A firm purchase agreement has been entered with the buyer.
(d) The sale is expected to be complete by 31st March, 20X2, i.e., within one year from the date of
classification.
Measurement of the manufacturing unit as on the date of classification as held for sale
Following steps need to be followed:
Step 1: Immediately before the initial classification of the asset (or disposal group) as held for sale, the
carrying amounts of the asset (or all the assets and liabilities in the group) shall be measured in
accordance with applicable Ind AS.
This has been done and the carrying value of the disposal group as on 31st July, 20X1 is determined at
₹ 2,600. The difference between the carrying value as on 31st December, 20X0 and 31st July, 20X1 is
accounted for as per the relevant Ind AS.
Step 2: An entity shall measure a non-current asset (or disposal group) classified as held for sale
atthe lower of its carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell.
The fair value less cost to sell of the disposal group as on 31st July, 20X1 is ₹ 1,750 (i.e.,1,850-100).
This is lower than the carrying value of ₹ 2,600. Thus, an impairment loss needs to be recognised and
allocated first towards goodwill and thereafter pro-rata between assets of the disposal group which
are within the scope of Ind AS 105 based on their carrying value. Thus, the assets will be measured as
under:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Particulars Carrying value ason31st Impairment Carrying value as
December,20X0 on 31st July,20X1
Goodwill 500 (500) -
Plant and Machinery 900 (115) 785
Building 1,850 (235) 1,615
Debtors 1,050 - 1,050
Inventory 400 - 400
Creditors (250) - (250)
Loans (1,850) - (1,850)
2,600 (850) 1,750
Measurement of the manufacturing unit as on the date of classification as at the year end
The measurement as at the year-end shall be on similar lines as done above.
The assets and liabilities in the disposal group not within the scope of this Standard are measured as
per the respective Standards.
The fair value less cost to sell of the disposal group as a whole is calculated. This fair value less cost
to sell as at the year-end shall be compared with the carrying value as at the date of classification as
held for sale. It is provided that the fair value as on the year end is less than the carrying amount as
on that date – thus the impairment loss shall be allocated in the same way between the assets of the
disposal group falling within the scope of this standard as shown above.
Question 04: (RTP May 18)
Following is the extract of the consolidated financial statements of A Ltd. for the year ended on:
Asset/ (liability) Carrying amount as on
31stMarch, 20X1(In ₹ ‘000)
Attributed goodwill 200
Financial asset measured at fair value through othercomprehensive income 300
Property, plant & equipment 1100
Current assets – inventory, receivables and cash balances 600
Non-current liabilities – provisions (300)
Total 2,250
On 15th September 20X1, Entity A decided to sell the business. It noted that the business meets the
condition of disposal group classified as held for sale on that date in accordance with Ind AS 105.
However, it does not meet the conditions to be classified as discontinued operations in accordance
with that standard.
The disposal group is stated at the following amounts immediately prior to reclassification as heldfor
sale.
Asset/ (liability) Carrying amount as on 15th
September20X1 (In ₹ ‘000)
Attributed goodwill 200
Financial asset measured at fair value through othercomprehensive income 360
Property, plant & equipment 1,020
Current assets – inventory, receivables and cashbalances 520
Non-current liabilities – provisions (250)
Total 2,160
Entity A proposed to sell the disposal group at ₹ 19,00,000. It estimates that the costs to sell will be
₹ 70,000. This cost consists of professional fee to be paid to external lawyers and accountants.
As at 31st March 20X2, there has been no change to the plan to sell the disposal group and entity
A still expects to sell it within one year of initial classification. Mr. X, an accountant of Entity A
remeasured the following assets/ liabilities in accordance with respective standards as on 31st March
20X2:
Available for sale: (In ₹ ‘000)
Financial assets 410

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Deferred tax assets 230
Current assets- Inventory, receivables and cash 400
balances
Non- current liabilities- provisions 250
The disposal group has not been trading well and its fair value less costs to sell has fallen to ₹
16,50,000.
Required:
What would be the value of all assets/ labilities within the disposal group as on the following dates in
accordance with Ind AS 105?
(a) 15 September, 20X1 and
(b) 31st March, 20X2
Solution:
(a) As at 15 September, 20X1
The disposal group should be measured at ₹ 18,30,000 (19,00,000-70,000). The impairment write downof
₹ 3,30,000 (₹ 21,60,000 – ₹ 18,30,000) should be recorded within profit from continuing operations.
The impairment of ₹ 3,30,000 should be allocated to the carrying values of the appropriate non-current
assets.
Asset/(liability) Carrying value as at Impairment Revised carrying value
15 September,20X1 as per IND AS 105
Attributed goodwill 200 (200) -
Intangible assets 930 (62) 868
Financial asset measured at fairvalue 360 - 360
through other comprehensiveincome
Property, plant & equipment 1,020 (68) 952
Deferred tax asset 250 - 250
Current assets – inventory, 520 - 520
receivables and cash balances
Current liabilities (870) - (870)
Non-current liabilities – provisions (250) - (250)
Total 2,160 (330) 1,830
The impairment loss is allocated first to goodwill and then pro rata to the other assets of the disposal
group within Ind AS 105 measurement scope. Following assets are not in the measurement scope of
the standard- financial asset measured at other comprehensive income, the deferred tax asset or the
current assets. In addition, the impairment allocation can only be made against assets and is not
allocated to liabilities.
(b) As on 31 March, 20X2:
All of the assets and liabilities, outside the scope of measurement under Ind AS 105, are remeasured in
accordance with the relevant standards. The assets that are remeasured in this case under the relevant
standards are the financial asset measured at fair value through other comprehensive income (Ind AS
109), the deferred tax asset (Ind AS 12), the current assets and liabilities (various standards) and the
non-current liabilities (Ind AS 37).
Asset/ (liability) Carrying amount Change in Impairment Revised
as on 15 value to 31 st carryingvalue
September, 20X1 March 20X2 as per Ind
AS105
Attributed goodwill - - - -
Intangible assets 868 - (29) 839
Financial asset measured at fair
value through other
comprehensive income 360 50 - 410
Property, plant &equipment 952 - (31) 921
Deferred tax asset 250 (20) - 230
Current assets – inventory, 520 - 400
receivables and cash balances (120)
Current liabilities (870) (30) - (900)
Non-current liabilities –provisions

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(250) - - (250)
Total 1,830 (120) (60) 1,650
Question 05: (RTP May 19)
CK Ltd. prepares the financial statement under Ind AS for the quarter year ended 30th June, 20X1.
During the 3 months ended 30th June, 20X1 following events occurred:
On 1st April, 20X1, the Company has decided to sell one of its divisions as a going concern following
a recent change in its geographical focus. The proposed sale would involve the buyer acquiring the
non-monetary assets (including goodwill) of the division, with the Company collecting any outstanding
trade receivables relating to the division and settling any current liabilities.
On 1st April, 20X1, the carrying amount of the assets of the division were as follows:
- Purchased Goodwill – ₹ 60,000
- Property, Plant & Equipment (average remaining estimated useful life two years) - ₹ 20,00,000
- Inventories - ₹ 10,00,000
From 1st April, 20X1, the Company has started to actively market the division and has received
number of serious enquiries. On 1st April, 20X1 the directors estimated that they would receive Rs.
32,00,000 from the sale of the division. Since 1st April, 20X1, market condition has improved and as
on 1st August, 20X1 the Company received and accepted a firm offer to purchase the division for
₹33,00,000.
The sale is expected to be completed on 30th September, 20X1 and ₹ 33,00,000 can be assumed to be
a reasonable estimate of the value of the division as on 30th June, 20X1. During the period from 1st
April to 30th June inventories of the division costing ₹ 8,00,000 were sold for ₹ 12,00,000. At 30th June,
20X1, the total cost of the inventories of the division was ₹ 9,00,000. All of these inventories have an
estimated net realisable value that is in excess of their cost.
The Company has approached you to suggest how the proposed sale of the division will be reported
in the interim financial statements for the quarter ended 30th June, 20X1 giving relevant explanations.
Solution:
The decision to offer the division for sale on 1st April, 20X1 means that from that date the division has
been classified as held for sale. The division available for immediate sale, is being activelymarketed at
a reasonable price and the sale is expected to be completed within one year.
The consequence of this classification is that the assets of the division will be measured at the lower
of their existing carrying amounts and their fair value less cost to sell. Here the division shall be
measured at their existing carrying amount i.e., ₹ 30,60,000 since it is less than the fair value less cost
to sell ₹32,00,000.
The increase in expected selling price will not be accounted for since earlier there was no impairment
to division held for sale.
The assets of the division need to be presented separately from other assets in the balance sheet. Their
major classes should be separately disclosed either on the face of the balance sheet or in the notes.
The Property, Plant and Equipment shall not be depreciated after 1st April, 20X1 so its carrying value
at 30th June, 20X1 will be ₹ 20,00,000 only. The inventories of the division will be shownat
₹9,00,000.
The division will be regarded as discontinued operation for the quarter ended 30th
June, 20X1. It represents a separate line of business and is held for sale at the year end.
The Statement of Profit and Loss should disclose, as a single amount, the post-tax profit or loss ofthe
division on classification as held for sale.
Further, as per Ind AS 33, EPS will also be disclosed separately for the discontinued operation.
Question 06:
Identify which of the following is a disposal group at 31 March 20X1:
(1) On 21 March 20X1, XYZ announced the Board’s intention to sell its shares in a subsidiary
company, Alpha, contingent upon the approval of Alpha’s shareholders. It seems unlikely that
approval will be granted in the near future and no specific potential buyer has been identified.
(2) PQR has entered into a contract to sell the entire delivery fleet of vehicles operated from its
warehouse to a competitor, ABC, on 14 March 20X1. The assets will be transferred on 28 April 20X1
from which date the Group will outsource its delivery activities to another company,LMN.
(3) On 16 January 20X1, DEF’s management and shareholders approved a plan to sell its retail
business in Mumbai and a consultant is hired to manage the sale. As at 31 March 20X1 heads of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
agreement had been signed although due diligence and the negotiation of final terms are still in process.
The transaction is expected to be completed in April 20X1.
Solution:
Presented as held for sale
(2) PQR’s fleet is classified as held for sale because it constitutes a group of assets to be sold in
their present condition and the sale is highly probable at the reporting date (as a contract has been
entered into).
(3) DEF’s sale of its retail business will not be completed until the final terms (e.g., of purchase
price) are agreed. However, the business is ready for immediate sale and the sale is highly probable
unless other evidence after the reporting date but before the financial statements are approved for
issue, comes to light to indicate the contrary.
Not presented as held for sale
(1) XYZ’s shares in Alpha are not available for an immediate sale as shareholders’ approval is
required. Also no specific potential buyer has been identified. In taking this fact into consideration for
the assessment of whether the sale is highly probable, it is clearly not highly probable.
MTP APRIL 2018
Question 1
A Ltd. is to sell a non-current asset, being a piece of land. The piece of land has been contaminated and will require the
entity to carry out Rs. 100,000 of work in order to rectify the contamination. If the land was not contaminated, it could be sold for
Rs. 300,000. Withthe contamination, it is worth only Rs. 200,000. The work that is needed to rectify the contamination will
extend the period of sale by one year from the date the land is first marketed for sale.
Required:
In the following situations, examine with suitable reasons whether land can be classified as held for sale in accordance
with Ind AS 105: Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations
Situation 1 The land is marketed for Rs. 300,000 and A Ltd. was not aware of the contamination till the time a firm purchase
commitment was signed with a purchaser. The purchaser found the contamination through a survey. The purchaser signed
the firm purchase commitment on condition that the contamination damage will be rectified.
Situation 2 A Ltd. marketed the land for Rs. 300,000, knowing about the contamination when the proposal to sale the
land went in the market. However, A Ltd. marketed it with an agreement that it would carry out the rectification work
within few months from signing the firm purchase commitment.
Situation 3A Ltd. knew about the contamination prior to float the proposal to sell the landand markets it for Rs. 200,000 with no
obligation on itself to rectify or fix the contamination. (8 Marks)
Solution
Situation 1
As far as the entity was aware, the land was marketed and available for immediate sale in its present condition at a
reasonable price. The event extending the one-year period was imposed by the buyer after the firm purchase
commitment was received and the entity is taking steps to address it. The land qualifies as held for sale and
continues to do so after it is required to carry out the rectification work.
Situation 2
The land is not available for immediate sale in its present condition when it is first marketed. It is being marketed at a
price that involves further work to the land. It cannot be classified as held for sale when it is first marketed. It also
cannot be classified as held for sale when a purchase commitment is received, because even then it is not for sale in its
present condition and no conditions have been unexpectedly imposed. The
land will not be classified as held for sale until the rectification work is actually carried out.
Situation 3
The land in this case is available for immediate sale in its present condition and it would qualify to be classified as held for sales
since it is being marketed at reasonable price.
PB Limited purchased a plastic bottle manufacturing plant for ₹ 24 lakh on 1st April, 2015. The useful life of
the plant is 8 years. On 30th September, 2017, PB Limited temporarily stops using the manufacturing plant
because demand has declined. However, the plant is maintained in a workable condition and it will be used
in future when demand picks up.
The accountant of PB Limited decided to treat the plant as held for sale until the demand picks up and
accordingly measures the plant at lower of carrying amount and fair value less cost to sell. The
accountant has also stopped charging depreciation for rest of the period considering the plant as

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
held for sale. The fair value less cost to sell on 30th September, 2017 and 31st March, 2018 was ₹13.5
lakh and ₹ 12 lakh respectively.
The accountant has made the following working:
Carrying amount on initial classification as held for sale ₹ ₹
Purchase price of Plant 24,00,000
Less: Accumulated Depreciation [(₹ 24,00,000/8) x2.5 years] 7,50,000 16,50,000
Fair value less cost to sell as on 31st March, 2017 12,00,000
The value lower of the above two 12,00,000
st
Balance Sheet extracts as on 31 March, 2018
Particulars ₹
Assets
Current Assets
Other Current Assets
Assets classified as held for sale 12,00,000
Required:
Analyze whether the above accounting treatment is in compliance with the Ind AS. If not,advise the correct
treatment showing necessary workings. (8 Marks)
SOLUTION:
As per Ind AS 105 ‘Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations’, an entity shall
classify a non-current asset as held for sale if its carrying amount will be recovered principally through
a sale transaction rather than through continuing use.
For asset to be classified as held for sale, it must be available for immediate sale in its present condition
subject only to terms that are usual and customary for sales of such assets and its sale must be highly
probable. In such a situation, an asset cannot be classified as a non-current asset held for sale, if the
entity intends to sell it in a distant future.
For the sale to be highly probable, the appropriate level of management must be committed to a plan
to sell the asset, and an active programme to locate a buyer and complete the plan must have been
initiated. Further, the asset must be actively marketed for sale at a price that is reasonable in relation to
its current fair value. In addition, the sale should be expected to qualify for recognition as a completed
sale within one year from the date of classification and actions required to complete the plan should
indicate that it is unlikely that significant changes to the plan will be made or that the plan will be
withdrawn.
Further Ind AS 105 also states that an entity shall not classify as held for sale a non-current asset that is
to be abandoned. This is because its carrying amount will be recovered principally through continuing
use.
An entity shall not account for a non-current asset that has been temporarily taken out of use as if it
had been abandoned.
In addition to Ind AS 105, Ind AS 16 states that depreciation does not cease when the asset becomes
idle or is retired from active use unless the asset is fully depreciated.
The Accountant of PB Ltd. has treated the plant as held for sale and measured it at the fair value less
cost to sell. Also, the depreciation has not been charged thereon since the date of classification as
held for sale which is not correct and not in accordance with Ind AS 105 and Ind AS 16.
Accordingly, the manufacturing plant should neither be treated as abandoned asset nor as held for
sale because its carrying amount will be principally recovered through continuous use. PB Ltd. shall
not stop charging depreciation or treat the plant as held for sale because its carrying amount will be
recovered principally through continuing use to the end of their economic life.
The working of the same for presenting in the balance sheet will be as follows:
Calculation of carrying amount as on 31stMarch, 2018 ₹
Purchase Price of Plant 24,00,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation (24,00,000/ 8 years) x 3 (9,00,000)
years
Carrying amount before impairment 15,00,000
Less: Impairment loss (Refer Working Note) (3,00,000)
Revised carrying amount after impairment 12,00,000
Balance Sheet extracts as on 31stMarch 2018
Assets
Non-Current Assets
Property,Plantand Equipment 12,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Working Note:
Fair value less cost to sell of the Plant = ₹ 12,00,000
Value in Use (not given) or = Nil (since plant has temporarily not been used for
manufacturing due to decline in demand)
Recoverable amount = higher of above i.e., ₹ 12,00,000 Impairment loss = Carrying amount –
Recoverable amount Impairment loss = ₹15,00,000 - ₹12,00,000= ₹ 3,00,000.
On June 1, 2018, entity D Limited plans to sell a group of assets and liabilities, which is classified as a disposal group. On July
31, 2018, the Board of Directors approved and committed to the plan to sell the manufacturing unit by entering into a firm
purchase commitment with entity G Limited.
However, since the manufacturing unit is regulated, the approval from the regulator is needed for sale. The approval from the
regulator is customary and highly probable to be received by November 30, 2018 and the sale is expected to be completed
by 31st March, 2019. Entity D Limited follows December year end. The assets and liabilities attributable to this manufacturing unit are
as under:
Particulars Carrying value as on31st December, 2017 Carrying value as on31st July, 2018
Goodwill 1,000 1,000
Plant and Machinery 2,000 1,800
Building 4,000 3,700
Debtors 1,700 2,100
Inventory 1,400 800
Creditors (600) (500)
Loans (4,000) (3,700)
Net 5,500 5,200
The fair value of the manufacturing unit as on December 31, 2017 is ₹ 4,000 lakh and as on July 31, 2018 is ₹ 3,700 lakh. The
cost to sell is ₹ 200 lakh on both these dates. The disposal group is not sold at, the period end i.e., December 31, 2018. The fair value
as on31st December, 2018 is lower than the carrying value of the disposal group as on that date.
Required:
(i) Assess whether the manufacturing unit can be classified as held for sale and reasons thereof. If yes, then at which date?
(ii) The measurement of the manufacturing unit as on the date of classification as held for sale.
(iii) The measurement of the manufacturing unit as at the end of the year. (10 Marks)
SOLUTION:
(i) Assessment of manufacturing unit whether to be classified as held for sale
The manufacturing unit can be classified as held for sale due to the following reasons:
(a) The disposal group is available for immediate sale and in its present condition. The regulatory approval is
customary and it is expected to be received in one year. The date at which the disposal group is classified as held for
sale will be 31st July, 2018, i.e. the date at which management becomes committed to the plan.
(b) The sale is highly probable as the appropriate level of management i.e., board of directors in this case have approved
the plan.
(c) A firm purchase agreement has been entered with the buyer.
(d) The sale is expected to be complete by 31st March, 2019, i.e., within one year from the date of classification.
(ii) Measurement of the manufacturing unit as on the date of classification as held for sale
Following steps need to be followed:
Step 1: Immediately before the initial classification of the asset (or disposal group) as held for sale, the carrying amounts of
the asset (or all the assets and liabilities in the group) shall be measured in accordance with applicable Ind AS.
This has been done and the carrying value of the disposal group as on 31st July, 2018is determined at ₹ 5,200 lakh. The
difference between the carrying value as on 31st December, 2017 and 31st July, 2018 is accounted for as per Ind AS 36.
Step 2: An entity shall measure a non-current asset (or disposal group) classified asheld for sale at the lower of its carrying
amount and fair value less costs to sell.
The fair value less cost to sell of the disposal group as on 31 st July,2018 is ₹ 3,500 lakh (i.e., ₹ 3,700 lakh - ₹ 200 lakh). This is lower
than the carrying value of ₹ 5,200 lakh. Thus, an impairment loss needs to be recognised and allocated first towards goodwill
and thereafter pro-rata between assets of the disposal group which are within the scope of Ind AS 105 based on their
carrying value.
Thus, the assets will be measured as under: (₹ in lakh)
Particulars Carrying value – Impairment Carrying value asper Ind AS
31st July, 2018 105 – 31st July, 2018
Goodwill 1,000 (1,000) (Refer WN) -1,571

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Plant and Machinery 1,800 (229) (Refer WN)
Building 3,700 (471) 3,229
Debtors 2,100 - 2,100
Inventory 800 - 800
Creditors Loans (500) - (500)
(3,700) -(1,700) (3,700)
5,200 3,500
Working Note:
Allocation of impairment loss to Plant and Machinery and Building
After adjustment of impairment loss of ₹ 1,000 lakh from the full value of goodwill, the balance ₹ 700 lakh (₹ 1,700 lakh – ₹
1,000 lakh) is allocated to plant and machinery and building on proportionate basis. Plant and machinery – ₹ 700 lakh x ₹
1,800 lakh / ₹5,500 lakh = ₹ 230 lakh (rounded off) Building –
₹ 700 lakh x ₹ 3,700 lakh / ₹ 5,500 lakh = ₹ 470 lakh (rounded off)
(iii) Measurement of the manufacturing unit as on the date of classification as at theyear end
The measurement as at the year-end shall be on similar lines as done above.
The assets and liabilities in the disposal group not within the scope of this Standard are measured as per the respective
standards.
The fair value less cost to sell of the disposal group as a whole is calculated. This fair value less cost to sell as at the
year- end shall be compared with the carrying value as at the date of classification as held for sale. It is provided that the fair
value as on the year end is less than the carrying amount as on that date – thus the impairment loss shall be allocated
in the sameway between the assets of the disposal group falling within the scope of this standard as shown above.
Measurement of the manufacturing unit as on the date of classification as at the year- end shall be on similar lines as done
above.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 23 - BORROWING COST
Illustration 1
A company deals in production of dairy products. It prepares and sells various milk products like ghee,
butter and cheese. The company borrowed funds from bank for manufacturing operation. The cheese takes
substantial longer period to get ready for sale.
State whether borrowing costs incurred to finance the production of inventories (cheese) that have a long
production period, be capitalised?
Solution
Ind AS 23 does not require the capitalisation of borrowing costs for inventories that are manufactured
in large quantities on a repetitive basis. However, interest capitalisation is permitted as long as the
production cycle takes a ‘substantial period of time’, as with cheese.
Illustration 2
A company is in the process of developing computer software. The asset has been qualified for recognition
purposes. However, the development of computer software will take substantial period of time to complete.
1. Can computer software be termed as a ‘qualifying asset’ under Ind AS 23?
2. Is management intention considered when assessing whether an asset is a qualifying asset?
Solution
1. Yes. An intangible asset that takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its intended
use or sale is a ‘qualifying asset’. This would be the case for an internally generated
computer software in the development phase when it takes a ‘substantial period of time’ to
complete.
2. Yes. Management should assess whether an asset, at the date of acquisition, is ‘ready for its
intended use or sale’. The asset might be a qualifying asset, depending on how management
intends to use it. For example, when an acquired asset can only be used in combination with a
larger group of fixed assets or was acquired specifically for the construction of one specific
qualifying asset, the assessment of whether the acquired asset is a qualifying asset is
madeon a combined basis.
Illustration 3
A telecom company has acquired a 3G license. The licence could be sold or licensed to a third party.
However, management intends to use it to operate a wireless network. Development of the network starts
when the license is acquired.
Should borrowing costs on the acquisition of the 3G license be capitalised until the network is readyfor its
intended use?
Solution
Yes. The license has been exclusively acquired to operate the wireless network. The fact that the
icense can be used or licensed to a third party is irrelevant. The acquisition of the license is thefirst
step in a wider investment project (developing the network). It is part of the network investment,which
meets the definition of a qualifying asset under Ind AS 23.
Illustration 4
A real estate company has incurred expenses for the acquisition of a permit allowing the constructionof a
building. It has also acquired equipment that will be used for the construction of various buildings.
Can borrowing costs on the acquisition of the permit and the equipment be capitalised until the construction of
the building is complete?
Solution
With respect to Permit
Yes, since permit is specific to one building. It is the first step in a wider investment project. It is part of
the construction cost of the building, which meets the definition of a qualifying asset.
With respect to Equipment
No, since the equipment will be used for other construction projects. It is ready for its ‘intended use’at the
acquisition date. Hence, it does not meet the definition of a qualifying asset.
Illustration 5
ABC Ltd. has taken a loan of USD 20,000 on 1st April, 20X1 for constructing a plant at an interestrate
of 5% per annum payable on annual basis.
On 1st April, 20X1, the exchange rate between the currencies i.e. USD vs Rupees was ₹ 45 per USD.
The exchange rate on the reporting date i.e. 31st March, 20X2 is ₹ 48 per USD.
The corresponding amount could have been borrowed by ABC Ltd from State bank of India in local currency
at an interest rate of 11% per annum as on 1st April, 20X1.
Compute the borrowing cost to be capitalized for the construction of plant by ABC Ltd. for the period

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
ending 31st March, 20X2.
Solution
In the above situation, the borrowing cost needs to determine for interest cost on such foreign
currency loan and eligible exchange loss difference if any.
(a) Interest on foreign currency loan for the period:USD 20,000 x 5% = USD 1,000 Converted in
₹: USD 1,000 x ₹48/USD = ₹48,000 . Increase in liability due to change in exchange
difference: USD 20,000 x (48 - 45) = ₹60,000
(b) Interest that would have resulted if the loan was taken in Indian Currency:
USD 20,000 x ₹ 45/USD x 11% = ₹ 99,000
(c) Difference between interest on foreign currency borrowing and local currency borrowing:
₹99,000 - 48,000 = ₹51,000
Hence, out of exchange loss of ₹ 60,000 on principal amount of foreign currency loan, only exchange
loss to the extent of ₹51,000 is considered as borrowing costs.
Total borrowing cost to be capitalized is as under:
(a) Interest cost of borrowing ₹48,000
(b) Exchange difference to the extent considered to be an adjustment to Interest cost ₹ 51,000
₹ 99,000
The exchange difference of ₹ 51,000 has been capitalized as borrowing cost and the remaining
₹9,000 will be expensed off in the Statement of Profit and loss.
Illustration 6
Alpha Ltd. on 1st April, 20X1 borrowed 9% ₹ 30,00,000 to finance the construction of two qualifying assets.
Construction started on 1st April, 20X1. The loan facility was availed on 1st April, 20X1 and was utilized as
follows with remaining funds invested temporarily at 7%.
Factory Building Office Building
st
1 April, 20X1 5,00,000 10,00,000
st
1 October, 20X1 5,00,000 10,00,000
Calculate the cost of the asset and the borrowing cost to be capitalized.
Solution:
Particulars Factory Building Office Building
Borrowing Costs (10,00,000 x 9%) 90,000 (20,00,000 x 9%) 1,80,000
Less: Investment Income (5,00,000 x 7% x6/12) (17,500) (10,00,000x7% x 6/12) (35,000)
72,500 1,45,000
Cost of the asset:
Expenditure incurred 10,00,000 20,00,000
Borrowing Costs 72,500 1,45,000
Total 10,72,500 21,45,000
Illustration 7
On 1st April, 20X1, A Ltd. took a 8% loan of ₹ 50,00,000 for construction of building A which is repayable
after 6 years i.e., on 31st March 20X7. The construction of building was completed on 31st March
20X3. A Ltd. started constructing a new building B in the year 20X3-20X4, for which he used his existing
borrowings. He has outstanding general-purpose loan of ₹ 25,00,000, interest on which is payable @ 9%
and ₹ 15,00,000, interest on which is payable @ 7%.
Is the specific borrowing transferred to the general borrowings pool once the respective qualifying asset is
completed? Why
Solution
Yes. If specific borrowings were not repaid once the relevant qualifying asset was completed, they
become general borrowings for as long as they are outstanding.
The borrowing costs that are directly attributable to obtaining qualifying assets are those borrowing
costs that would have been avoided if the expenditure on the qualifying asset had not been made. If
cash was not spent on other qualifying assets, it could be directed to repay this specific loan. Thus,
borrowing costs could be avoided (that is, they are directly attributable to other qualifying assets).
When general borrowings are used for qualifying assets, Ind AS 23 requires that, borrowing costs
eligible for capitalisation is calculated by applying a capitalisation rate to the expenditures on
qualifying assets.
The amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation is always limited to the amount of actual
borrowing costs incurred during the period.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 8
Beta Ltd had the following loans in place at the end of 31st March, 20X2:
(Amounts in ₹ 000s)
Loan 1st April, 20X1 31st March, 20X2
18% Bank Loan 1,000 1,000
16% Term Loan 3,000 3,000
14% Debentures - 2,000
14% debenture was issued to fund the construction of Office building on 1st July, 20X1 but the development
activities has yet to be started.
On 1st April, 20X1, Beta ltd began the construction of a Plant being qualifying asset using the existing
borrowings. Expenditure drawn down for the construction was: ₹ 500,000 on 1st April, 20X1 and ₹
2,500,000 on 1st January, 20X2.
Calculate the borrowing cost that can be capitalised for the plant.
Solution
Capitalisation rate for above illustration could also be calculated with the following approach by
assigning weights to the borrowings:
Particulars Loan Weighted average(a) Interest rate(b) Capitalisation rate
(a*b)
18%Bank Loan 1,000 25% 18% 4.5%
16% Term Loan 3,000 75% 16% 12%
Total 4,000 100% 16.5%
Answer in both the approaches would be same as can be seen from above solutions.
Illustration 9: Commencement Date
X Ltd is commencing a new construction project, which is to be financed by borrowing. The key dates
are as follows:
1. 15th May,20X1: Loan interest relating to the project starts to be incurred
2. 2nd June,20X1: Technical site planning commences
3. 19th June,20X1: Expenditure on the project started to be incurred
4. 18th July, 20X1: Construction work commences.
Solution
1. In the above case, the three conditions to be tested for commencement date would be:
Borrowing cost has been incurred on: 15th May, 20X1
2. Expenditure has been incurred for the asset on: 19th June, 20X1
3. Activities necessary to prepare asset for its intended use or sale: 2nd June, 20X1
4. Commencement date would be the date when the above three conditions would be
satisfied in all i.e. 19th June, 20X1
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
Marine Transport Limited ordered 3 ships for its fleet on 1st April, 20X0. It pays a down payment of
25% of the contract value of each of the ship out of long-term borrowings from a scheduled bank. The
delivery has to commence from the financial year 20X7. On 1st March, 20X2, the ship builder informs
that it has commenced production of one ship. There is no progress on other 2 ships. Marine
Transport Limited prepares its financial statements on financial year basis.
Is it permissible for Marine Transport Limited to capitalise any borrowing costs for the financial year
ended 31st March, 20X1 or 31st March, 20X2?
Solution:
As per paragraph 5 of Ind AS 23, a qualifying asset is an asset that necessarily takes a substantial period
of time to get ready for its intended use or sale.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
As per paragraph 17 of Ind AS 23, an entity shall begin capitalising borrowing costs as part ofthe
cost of a qualifying asset on the commencement date. The commencement date for capitalisation is
the date when the entity first meets all of the following conditions:
(a) It incurs expenditures for the asset.
(b) It incurs borrowing costs.
(c) It undertakes activities that are necessary to prepare the asset for its intended use or sale.
The ship is a qualifying asset as it takes substantial period of time for its construction. Thus, the related
borrowing costs should be capitalised.
Marine Transport Limited borrows funds and incurs expenditures in the form of down payment on 1st April,
20X0. Thus, condition (a) and (b) are met. However, condition (c) is met only on 1st March, 20X2, and that
too only with respect to one ship. Thus, there is no capitalisation of borrowing costs during the financial
year ended 31st March, 20X1. Even during the financial year ended 31st March, 20X2, borrowing costs
relating to the ‘one’ ship whose construction had commenced from 1st March, 20X2 will be capitalised from
1st March, 20X2 to 31st March, 20X2. All other borrowing costs are expensed.
Question 02
X Limited has a treasury department that arranges funds for all the requirements of the Company
including funds for working capital and expansion programs. During the year ended 31st March, 20X2,
the Company commenced the construction of a qualifying asset and incurred the following expenses:
Date Amount (₹)
st
1 July, 20X1 2,50,000
st
1 December, 20X1 3,00,000
The details of borrowings and interest thereon are as under:
Particulars Average Balance (₹) Interest (₹)
Long term loan @ 10% 10,00,000 1,00,000
Working capital loan 5,00,000 65,000
15,00,000 1,65,000
Compute the borrowing costs that need to be capitalised.
Solution:
The capitalisation rate is calculated as below:
Total borrowing costs / Weighted average total borrowings: 1,65,000/15,00,000 = 11%.
Interest to be capitalised is calculated as under:
— On ₹2,50,000 @ 11% p.a. for 9 months = ₹20,625
— On ₹3,00,000 @ 11% p.a. for 4 months = ₹11,000 Total
interest capitalised for year ended 31 March 2002 is ₹31,625
Question 03( MTP MAR 2021)
An entity constructs a new head office building commencing on 1st September 20X1, which continues till 31st
December 20X1. Directly attributable expenditure at the beginning of the month on this asset are ₹ 100,000
in September 20X1 and ₹ 250,000 in each of the months of October to December 20X1.
The entity has not taken any specific borrowings to finance the construction of the asset but has
incurred finance costs on its general borrowings during the construction period. During the year, the entity
had issued 10% debentures with a face value of ₹ 20 lacs and had an overdraft of ₹ 500,000, which increased to
₹ 750,000 in December 20X1. Interest was paid on the overdraft at 15% until 1 October 20X1, then the rate
was increased to 16%.
Calculate the capitalization rate for computation of borrowing cost in accordance with Ind AS 23
‘Borrowing Costs’.
Solution:
Since the entity has only general borrowing hence first step will be to compute the capitalisation rate.
The capitalisation rate of the general borrowings of the entity during the period of construction is
Finance cost on ₹20 lacs 10% debentures during September – December20X1 ₹ 66,667
Interest @ 15% on overdraft of ₹5,00,000 in September 20X1 ₹ 6,250
Interest @ 16% on overdraft of ₹5,00,000 in October and November 20X1 ₹ 13,333
Interest @ 16% on overdraft of ₹750,000 in December 20X1 ₹ 10,000
Total finance costs in September – December 20X1 ₹ 96,250
Weighted average borrowings during period
= (20,00,000 × 4) + (500,000 × 3) + (750,000 ×1) = ₹25,62,500
4

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Capitalisation rate = Total finance costs during the construction period / Weighted average
borrowings during the construction period= 96,250 / 25,62,500 = 3.756%
Question 04:
K Ltd. began construction of a new building at an estimated cost of ₹ 7 lakh on 1st April, 20X1. To finance
construction of the building it obtained a specific loan of ₹ 2 lakh from a financial institution at an interest
rate of 9% per annum.
The company’s other outstanding loans were:
Amount Rate of Interest per annum
₹ 7,00,000 12%
₹ 9,00,000 11%
The expenditure incurred on the construction was:
April, 20X1 ₹ 1,50,000
August, 20X1 ₹ 2,00,000
October, 20X1 ₹ 3,50,000
January, 20X2 ₹ 1,00,000
The construction of building was completed by 31st January, 20X2. Following the provisions of Ind AS
23 ‘Borrowing Costs’, calculate the amount of interest to be capitalized and pass necessary journal entry for
capitalizing the cost and borrowing cost in respect of the building as on 31st January, 20X2.
(i) Calculation of capitalization rate on borrowings other than specific borrowings
Amount of loan (₹) Rate of interest Amount of interest (₹)
7,00,000 12% = 84,000
9,00,000 11% = 99,000
16,00,000 1,83,000
Weighted average rate of interest(1,83,000/16,00,000) x 100 = 11.4375%
(ii) Computation of borrowing cost to be capitalized for specific borrowings and
general
borrowings based on weighted average accumulated expenses
Date of incurrence of Amount Financedthrough Calculation ₹
expenditure spent
1st April, 20X1 1,50,000 Specific borrowing 1,50,000 x 9% x 10/12 11,250
1st August, 20X1 2,00,000 Specific borrowing 50,000 x 9% x 10/12 3,750
General borrowing 1,50,000 x 11.4375% x6/12 8,578.125
st
1 October, 20X1 3,50,000 General borrowing 3,50,000 x 11.4375% x4/12 13,343.75
st
1 January, 20X2 1,00,000 General borrowing 1,00,000 x 11.4375% x1/12 953.125
37,875
Note: Since construction of building started on 1st April, 20X1, it is presumed that all the later
expenditures on construction of building had been incurred at the beginning of the respective month.
(iii) Total expenses to be capitalized for building
₹
Cost of building ₹(1,50,000 + 2,00,000 + 3,50,000 + 1,00,000) 8,00,000
Add: Amount of interest to be capitalized 37,875
8,37,875
Journal Entry
Date Particulars ₹ ₹
31.1.20X2 Building account Dr. 8,37,875
To Bank account 8,00,0000
To Interest payable (borrowing cost) 37,875
(Being expenditure incurred on-construction-of building
and borrowing cost thereon capitalized)
Note: In the above journal entry, it is assumed that interest amount will be paid at the year end.
Hence, entry for interest payable has been passed on 31.1.20X2.
Alternatively, following journal entry may be passed if interest is paid on the date of capitalization:
31.1.20X2 Building account Dr. 8,37,875

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(Being expenditure incurred on construction of
Building and borrowing cost thereon capitalized)
Question 05: (MTP Oct 20 / RTP Nov 19)
On 1st April, 20X1, entity A contracted for the construction of a building for ₹ 22,00,000. The land
under the building is regarded as a separate asset and is not part of the qualifying assets. The
building was completed at the end of March, 20X2, and during the period the following payments were
made to the contractor:
Payment date Amount (₹ ’000)
st
1 April, 20X1 200
30th June, 20X1 600
31st December, 20X1 1,200
st
31 March, 20X2 200
Total 2,200
Entity A’s borrowings at its year end of 31st March, 20X2 were as follows:
a. 10%, 4-year note with simple interest payable annually, which relates specifically to the
project; debt outstanding on 31st March, 20X2 amounted to ₹ 7,00,000. Interest of ₹65,000
was incurred on these borrowings during the year, and interest income of ₹ 20,000 was
earned on these funds while they were held in anticipation of payments.
b. 12.5% 10-year note with simple interest payable annually; debt outstanding at 1st April,
20X1 amounted to ₹1,000,000 and remained unchanged during the year; and
c. 10% 10-year note with simple interest payable annually; debt outstanding at 1st April, 20X1
amounted to ₹1,500,000 and remained unchanged during the year.
What amount of the borrowing costs can be capitalized at year end as per relevant Ind AS?
Solution:
As per Ind AS 23, when an entity borrows funds specifically for the purpose of obtaining a qualifying
asset, the entity should determine the amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation as the
actual borrowing costs incurred on that borrowing during the period lessany investment income on
the temporary investment of those borrowings.
The amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalization, in cases where the funds are borrowed
generally, should be determined based on the capitalisation rate and expenditure incurred in obtaining
a qualifying asset. The costs incurred should first be allocated to the specific borrowings.
Analysis of expenditure:
Date Expenditure(₹ ’000) Amount allocated in general Weighted for period
borrowings (₹ ’000) outstanding (₹ ’000)
1st April 20X1 200 0 0
30th June 20X1 600 100* 100 × 9/12 = 75
st
31 Dec 20X1 1,200 1,200 1,200 × 3/12 = 300
st
31 March 20X2 200 200 200 × 0/12 = 0
Total 2,200 375
*Specific borrowings of ₹ 7,00,000 fully utilized on 1st April & on 30th June to the extent of₹ 5,00,000 hence
remaining expenditure of ₹ 1,00,000 allocated to general borrowings.
The capitalisation rate relating to general borrowings should be the weighted average of the borrowing
costs applicable to the entity’s borrowings that are outstanding during the period, other than
borrowings made specifically for the purpose of obtaining a qualifying asset.
Capitalisation rate = (10,00,000 x 12.5%) + (15,00,000 x 10%) = 11%
10,00,000 + 15,00,000
Borrowing cost to be capitalized: Amount
(₹ )
On specific loan 65,000
On General borrowing (3,75,000 × 11%) 41,250
Total 1,06,250
Less: interest income on specific borrowings (20,000)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Amount eligible for capitalization 86,250
Therefore, the borrowing costs to be capitalized are ₹ 86,250.
Question 06:
In a group with Parent Company “P” there are 3 subsidiaries with following business:
“A” – Real Estate Company “B” – Construction Company“C” – Finance Company
 Parent Company has no operating activities of its own but performs management functions for its
subsidiaries.
 Financing activities and cash management in the group are coordinated centrally.
 Finance Company is a vehicle used by the group solely for raising finance.
 All entities in the group prepare Ind AS financial statements.
The following information is relevant for the current reporting period 20X1-20X2:
Real Estate Company
 Borrowings of ₹ 10,00,000 with an interest rate of 7% p.a.
 Expenditures on qualifying assets during the period amounted to ₹ 15,40,000.
 All construction works were performed by Construction Company. Amounts invoiced to Real
Estate Company included 10% profit margin.
Construction Company
 No borrowings during the period.
 Financed ₹ 10,00,000 of expenditures on qualifying assets using its own cash resources.
Finance Company
Raised ₹ 20,00,000 at 7% p.a. externally and issued a loan to Parent Company for generalcorporate
purposes at the rate of 8%.
Parent Company
 Used loan from Finance Company to acquire a new subsidiary.
 No qualifying assets apart from those in Real Estate Company and Construction Company.
 Parent Company did not issue any loans to other entities during the period.
What is the amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation in the financial statements ofeach of
the four entities for the current reporting period 20X1-20X2?
Solution:
Following is the treatment as per Ind AS 23:
Finance Company
No expenditure on qualifying assets have been incurred, so Finance Company cannot capitalise
anything.
Real Estate Company
Total interest costs in the financial statements of Real Estate Company is ₹ 70,000. Expenditures on
qualifying assets exceed total borrowings, so the total amount of interest can be capitalised.
Construction Company
No interest expense has been incurred, so Construction Company cannot capitalise anything.
Consolidated financial statements of Parent Company:
Total general borrowings of the group: ₹ 10,00,000 + ₹ 20,00,000 = ₹ 30,00,000
Although Parent Company used proceeds from loan to acquire a subsidiary, this loan cannot be
excluded from the pool of general borrowings.
Total interest expenditures for the group = ₹ 30,00,000 x 7% = ₹ 2,10,000
Total expenditures on qualifying assets for the group are added up. Profit margin charged by
Construction Company to Real Estate Company is eliminated:
Real Estate Company – ₹ 15,40,000/1.1 = ₹ 14,00,000, Construction Co – ₹ 10,00,000
Total consolidated expenditures on qualifying assets: ₹ (14,00,000 + 10,00,000) = ₹ 24,00,000
Capitalisation rate = 7%
Borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation = ₹ 24,00,000 x 7% = ₹ 1,68,000
Total interest expenditures of the group are higher than borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation
calculated based on the actual expenditures incurred on the qualifying assets.
Therefore, only ₹1,68,000 can be capitalised.
MTP.RTP PAST PAPER
RTP MAY 2021
QUESTION
How will you capitalise the interest when qualifying assets are funded by borrowings in the nature of bonds
that are issued at discount? Y Ltd. issued at the start of year 1, 10% (interest paid annually and having
maturity period of 4 years) bonds with a face value of ` 2,00,000 at a discount of 10% to finance a qualifying
asset which is ready for intended use at the end of year 2. Compute the amount of borrowing costs to be

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
capitalized if the company amortizes discount using Effective Interest Rate method by applying 13.39% p.a.
of EIR.
SOLUTION
Capitalisation Method
As per the Standard, borrowing costs may include interest expense calculated using the effective interest
method. Further, capitalisation of borrowing cost should cease where substantially all the activities
necessary to prepare the qualifying asset for its intended use or sale are complete.
Thus, only that portion of the amortized discount should be capitalised as part of the cost of a qualifying
asset which relates to the period during which acquisition, construction or production of the asset takes
place.
Capitalisation of Interest
Hence based on the above explanation the amount of borrowing cost of year 1 & 2 are to be capitalised
and the borrowing cost relating to year 3 & 4 should be expensed.
Quantum of Borrowing
The value of the bond to Y Ltd. is the transaction price ie ` 1,80,000 (2,00,000 – 20,000) Therefore, Y Ltd
will recognize the borrowing at ` 1,80,000.
Computation of the amount of Borrowing Cost to be Capitalised
Y Ltd will capitalise the interest (borrowing cost) using the effective interest rate of 13.39% for two years as
the qualifying asset is ready for intended use at the end of the year 2, the details of which are as follows:
Year Opening Borrowing Interest expense @ 13.39% to be Total Interest Closing
capitalised paid Borrowing
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) = (3) – (4)
1 1,80,000 24102 2,04,102 20,000 1,84,102
2 1,84,102 24651 2,08,753 20,000 1,88,753
48753
Accordingly, borrowing cost of ` 48,753 will be capitalized to the cost of qualifying asset
RTP: APRIL , 2019
Question 3
ABC Ltd. has taken a loan of USD 20,000 on April 1, 20X1 for constructing a plant at an interest rate of 5% per annum
payable on annual basis.
On April 1, 20X1, the exchange rate between the currencies i.e USD vs Rupees was Rs. 45 per USD. The exchange
rate on the reporting date i.e March 31, 20X2 is Rs. 48 per USD.
The corresponding amount could have been borrowed by ABC Ltd. from State bank of India in local currency at an interest rate of
11% per annum as on April 1, 20X1.
Compute the borrowing cost to be capitalized for the construction of plant by ABC Ltd. (8 Marks)
Solution
In the above situation, the Borrowing cost needs to determine for interest cost on suchforeign currency loan and eligible
exchange loss difference if any.
(a) Interest on Foreign currency loan for the period:USD 20,000 x 5% = USD 1,000
Converted in Rs.: USD 1,000 x Rs. 48/USD = Rs. 48,000
Increase in liability due to change in exchange difference: USD 20,000 x (48 - 45) = Rs. 60,000
(b) Interest that would have resulted if the loan was taken in Indian Currency:
USD 20,000 x Rs. 45/USD x 11% = Rs. 99,000
(c) Difference between Interest on Foreign Currency borrowing and local Currency borrowing:
Rs. 99,000 - 48,000 = Rs. 51,000
Hence, out of Exchange loss of Rs. 60,000 on principal amount of foreign currency loan,only exchange loss to the extent of
Rs. 51,000 is considered as borrowing costs.Total borrowing cost to be capitalized is as under :
(a) Interest cost on borrowing Rs. 48,000
(b) Exchange difference to the extent considered to be
an adjustment to Interest cost Rs. 51,000
Rs. 99,000
The exchange difference of Rs. 51,000 has been capitalized as borrowing cost and the remaining Rs. 9,000 will be expensed off
in the Statement of Profit and loss.
RTP: M A Y , 2018
Question:4
An entity constructs a new head office building commencing on 1st September 20X1, which continues till
31st December 20X1. Directly attributable expenditure at the beginning of the month on this asset are ₹
100,000 in September 20X1 and ₹ 250,000 in each of the months of October to December 20X1.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The entity has not taken any specific borrowings to finance the construction of the asset, but has incurred
finance costs on its general borrowings during the construction period. During the year, the entity had
issued 10% debentures with a face value of ₹ 20 lacs and had an overdraft of ₹ 500,000, which increased to
₹ 750,000 in December 20X1. Interest was paid on the overdraft at 15% until 1 October 20X1, then the rate
was increased to 16%.Calculate the capitalization rate for computation of borrowing cost in
accordance with Ind AS 23 ‘Borrowing Costs’.
Solution:
Since the entity has only general borrowing hence first step will be to compute the capitalisation rate.
The capitalisation rate of the general borrowings of the entity during the period of construction is
Finance cost on ₹ 20 lacs 10% debentures during ₹66,667
September –December 20X1
Interest @ 15% on overdraft of ₹5,00,000 in September 20X1 ₹6,250
Interest @ 16% on overdraft of ₹ 5,00,000 in October and ₹13,333
November20X1
Interest @ 16% on overdraft of ₹750,000 in December 20X1 ₹10,000
Total finance costs in September – December 20X1 ₹96,250
Weighted average borrowings during period= (20,00,000× 4) + (500,000× 3) + (750,000×1) = ₹25,62,500
4
Capitalisation rate = Total finance costs during the construction period / Weighted averageborrowings
during the construction period = 96,250 / 25,62,500 = 3.756%
Question:5
K Ltd. began construction of a new building at an estimated cost of ₹ 7 lakh on 1st April, 2017. To
finance construction of the building it obtained a specific loan of ₹ 2 lakh from a financial institution at an
interest rate of 9% per annum.The company’s other outstanding loans were:
Amount Rate of Interest per annum
₹ 7,00,000 12%
₹ 9,00,000 11%
The expenditure incurred on the construction was:
April, 2017 ₹ 1,50,000
August, 2017 ₹ 2,00,000
October, 2017 ₹ 3,50,000
January, 2018 ₹ 1,00,000
st
The construction of building was completed by 31 January, 2018. Following the provisions of Ind AS 23
‘Borrowing Costs’, calculate the amount of interest to be capitalized and pass necessary journal entry for
capitalizing the cost and borrowing cost in respect of the building as on 31st January, 2018.
Solution:
(i) Calculation of capitalization rate on borrowings other than specific borrowings
Amount of loan (₹) Rate of interest Amount of interest (₹)
7,00,000 12% = 84,000
9,00,000 11% = 99,000
16,00,000 1,83,000
Weighted average rate of interest = 11.4375%
(1,83,000/16,00,000) x 100
(ii) Computation of borrowing cost to be capitalized for specific borrowings and general borrowings
based on weighted average accumulated expenses
Date of Incurrence Amount spent Financed through Calculation ₹
of expenditure
1st April, 2017 1,50,000 Specific borrowing 1,50,000 x 9% x 10/12 11,250
st
1 August, 2017 2,00,000 Specific borrowing 50,000 x 9% x 10/12 3,750
General borrowing 1,50,000 x 11.4375% x 6/12 8,578.125
1st October, 2017 3,50,000 General borrowing 3,50,000 x 11.4375% x 4/12 13,343.75
st
1 January, 2018 1,00,000 General borrowing 1,00,000 x 11.4375% x 1/12 953.125

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
37,875
Note: Since construction of building started on 1st April, 2017, it is presumed that all the later expenditures on construction of
building had been incurred at the beginning of the respective month.
(i) Total expenses to be capitalized for building
₹
Cost of building ₹ (1,50,000 + 2,00,000 + 3,50,000 + 8,00,000
1,00,000)
Add: Amount of interest to be capitalized 37,875
8,37,875
Journal Entry
31.1.2018 Building account Dr. 8,37,875
To Interest payable (borrowing cost)
(Being expenditure incurred on construction of 37,875
building and borrowing cost thereoncapitalized)
ernatively, following journal entry may be passed if interest is paid on the date of capitalization:
Note: In the above journal entry, it is assumed that interest amount will be paid atthe year end. Hence,
entry for interest payable has been passed on 31.1.2018.
31.1.2018 Building account Dr 8,37,875
To Bank account . 8,37,875
(Being expenditure incurred on construction of building and
borrowingcost thereon capitalized)
MTP APR 2021

QUESTION
ABC Bank gave loans to a customer – Target Ltd. that carry fixed interest rate @ 10% per annum for a 5
year term and 12% per annum for a 3 year term. Additionally, the bank charges processing fees @1% of
the principal amount borrowed. Target Ltd borrowed loans as follows: - 10 lacs for a term of 5 years - 8 lacs
for a term of 3 years. Compute the fair value upon initial recognition of the loan in books of Target Ltd. and
how will loan processing fee be accounted?
SOLUTION
The loans from ABC Bank carry interest @ 10% and 12% for 5-year term and 3-year term respectively.
Additionally, there is a processing fee payable @ 1% on the principal amount on date of transaction. It is
assumed that ABC Bank charges all customers in a similar manner and hence this is representative of the
market rate of interest. Amortised cost is computed by discounting all future cash flows at market rate of
interest. Further, any transaction fees that are an integral part of the transaction are adjusted in the
effective interest rate and recognised over the term of the instrument.
Hence loan processing fees shall be reduced from the principal amount to arrive the value on day 1 upon
initial recognition.
Fair value (5-year term loan) = 10,00,000 – 10,000 (1% x 10,00,000) = 9,90,000
Fair value (3-year term loan) = 8,00,000 – 8,000 (1% x 8,00,000) = 7,92,000. Now, effective interest rate
shall be higher than the interest rate of 10% and 12% on 5-year loan and 3-year loan respectively, so that
the processing fees gets recognised as interest over the respective term of loans.
MTP MAR 2018
QUESTION
On 1 January 20X0, Preet Ltd. issues 10 year bonds for ` 10,00,000, bearing interest at 10% (payable
annually on 31st December each year). The bonds are redeemable on 31 December 20X9 for ` 10,00,000.
No costs or fees are incurred. The effective interest rate is 10%. On 1 January 20X5 (i.e. after 5 years)
Preet Ltd. and the bondholders agree to a modification in accordance with which:
 the term is extended to 31 December 20Y1;
 interest payments are reduced to 5% p.a.;
 the bonds are redeemable on 31 December 20Y1 for ` 15,00,000; and
 legal and other fees of ` 1,00,000 are incurred. Preet Ltd. determines that the market interest rate on 1
January 20X5 for borrowings on similar terms is 11%. Analyse whether the extinguishment accounting will

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
apply or not as per Ind AS. If yes, determine the fair value of the modified liability and compute the gain or
loss on modification.
SOLUTION
The repayment schedule for the original debt till the date of renegotiation is as below:
Date / year ended Opening balance Interest accrual Cash flows Closing balance
1 January 20X0 10,00,000 10,00,000
31 December 20X0 10,00,000 1,00,000 (1,00,000) 10,00,000
31 December 20X1 10,00,000 1,00,000 (1,00,000) 10,00,000
31 December 20X2 10,00,000 1,00,000 (1,00,000) 10,00,000
31 December 20X3 10,00,000 1,00,000 (1,00,000) 10,00,000
31 December 20X4 10,00,000 1,00,000 (1,00,000) 10,00,000
On 1 January 20X5, the discounted present value of the remaining cash flows of the original financial
liability is ` 10,00,000. On this date, Preet Ltd. will compute the present value of:
 cash flows under the new terms – i.e. ` 15,00,000 payable on 31 December 20Y1 and ` 50,000 payable
for each of the 7 years ending 31 December 20Y1.
 any fee paid (net of any fee received) – i.e. ` 1,00,000
using the original effective interest rate of 10%.
The total of these amounts to ` 11,13,158 (Refer Working Note). This differs from the discounted present
value of the remaining cash flows of the original financial liability by 11.32% i.e. by more than 10%. Hence,
extinguishment accounting applies.
The next step is to estimate the fair value of the modified liability. This is determined as the present value of
the future cash flows (interest and principal), using an interest rate of 11% (the market rate at which Preet
Ltd. could issue new bonds with similar terms). The estimated fair value on this basis is ` 958,097 (Refer
Working Note). A gain or loss on modification is then determined as:
Gain (loss) = carrying value of existing liability - fair value of modified liability - fees and costs incurred i.e. `
10,00,000 – ` 9,58,097 – ` 1,00,000 = Loss of ` 58,097
Working Note:
Year Discount factor @ 10% Discount factor @ 11%
1 0.9090901 0.900901
2 0.826446 0.811622
3 0.751315 0.731191
4 0.683013 0.658731
5 0.620921 0.593451
6 0.564474 0.534641
7 0.513158 0.481658
Annuity 4.868418 4.712195
AMOUNT DISC FACTOR @10% Present value DISC FACTOR @11% Present value
15,00,000 0.513158 769737 0.481658 722487
1,00,000 100000
50,000 For 7 Years 4.868418 243421 4.712195 235610
11,13,158 958097
PV of original cash (10,00,000)
flows @ original EIR
Difference 1,13,158
Difference(%) 11.32%
An entity constructs a new office building commencing on 1st September, 2018, which continues till 31st December, 2018 (and
is expected to go beyond a year). Directly attributable expenditure at the beginning of the month on this asset are ₹ 2
lakh in September 2018 and ₹ 4 lakh in each of the months of October to December 2018.
The entity has not taken any specific borrowings to finance the construction of the building but has incurred finance costs on its
general borrowings during the construction period. During the year, the entity had issued 9% debentures with a face value of ₹ 30
lakh and had an overdraft of ₹ 4 lakh, which increased to ₹ 8 lakh in December 2018. Interest was paid on the overdraft at 12%
until 1st October, 2018 and then the rate was increased to 15%.
Calculate the capitalization rate for computation of borrowing cost in accordance with Ind AS 'Borrowing Cost'. (8 Marks)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
SOLUTION:
Calculation of capitalization rate on borrowings other than specific borrowings
Nature of general Period of outstanding Amount of loan (₹) Rate of interest p.a. Weighted average amount of interest
borrowings balance (₹)
a b c d = [(b x c) x (a/12)]
9% Debentures 12 months 30,00,000 9% 2,70,000
Bank overdraft 9 months 4,00,000 12% 36,000
2 months 4,00,000 15% 10,000
1 month 8,00,000 15% 10,000
46,00,000 3,26,000
Weighted average cost of borrowings
= {30,00,000 x(12/12)} + {4,00,000 x (11/12)} + {8,00,000 x (1/12)}
= 34,33,334
Capitalisation rate = (Weighted average amount of interest / Weighted average of general borrowings) x 100
= (3,26,000 / 34,33,334) x 100 = 9.50% p.a.

Fghhz UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 24 - RELATED PARTY DISCLOSURES
Illustration 1: Associates and subsidiaries
Entity P Limited has a controlling interest in subsidiaries SA Limited and SB Limited and SC Limited. SC Limited is
a subsidiary of SB Limited. P Limited also has significant influence over associates A1 Limited and A2 Limited.
Subsidiary SC Limited has significant influence over associate A3 Limited. Examine related party relationships of
various entities.
Solution
SA SB
ASSOCIATE
SC A3
In Separate Financial Statements of P Limited, SA Limited, SB Limited, SC Limited,A1 Limited, A2 Limited and
A3 Limited are all related parties.
In the Individual Financial Statements of SA Limited, P Limited, SB Limited, SC Limited, A1 Limited, A2 Limited and
In the Individual Financial Statements of SB Limited, P Limited, SA Limited, SC Limited, A1 Limited, A2 Limited and
In the Individual Financial Statements of SC Limited, P Limited, SA Limited, SB Limited, A1 Limited, A2 Limited and
In the Individual Financial Statements of associates A1 Limited A2 Limited and A3 Limited; P Limited, SA Limited,
SB Limited and SC Limited are related parties.
A1 Limited, A2 Limited and A3 Limited are not related to each other.
For Parent’s consolidated financial statements, A1 Limited, A2 Limited and A3 Limited are related to the Group
Illustration 2: Key management personnel
Mr. X has a 100% investment in A Limited. He is also a member of the key management personnel (KMP) of C
Limited. B Limited has a 100% investment in C Limited.
Required
Examine related party relationships from the perspective of C Limited for A Limited.
a) Examine related party relationships from the perspective of C Limited for A Limited if Mr. X is a KMP of B Limited and
not C Limited.
b) Will the outcome in (a) & (b) would be different if Mr. X has joint control over A Limited?
c) Will the outcome in (a) & (b) would be different if Mr. X has significant influence over A Limited?
Solution
(a) A Limited is related to C Limited because Mr. X controls A Limited and is a member of KMP of C Limited. will
be related

(b) Still A Limited will be related to C Limited.
( c ) No, Still A Limited will be related to C Limited.
(d) Yes, A Ltd. is not controlled by Mr. X. Therefore, despite Mr. X being KMP of C Ltd., A Ltd., having significant
influence of Mr. X, will not be considered as related party of C Limited.
Illustration 3 : Person as investor

Mr. X has an investment in A Limited and B Limited.
Required
(a) Examine when can related party relationship be established
(b) from the perspective of A Limited’s financial statements:
(c) from the perspective of B Limited’s financial statements:
Will A Limited and B Limited be related parties if Mr. X has only significant influence over both A Limited and BLimited
Solution
(a) If Mr. X controls or jointly controls A Limited, B Limited is related to A Limited when Mr. X has control, joint
control or significant influence over Entity B.
(b) If Mr. X controls or jointly controls A Limited, A Limited is related to Entity B when Mr. X has control,joint
control or significant influence over Entity B.
(c) No, A Ltd. & B Ltd., will not be considered as related party since no direct or indirect control is exercised on
each other in any of the manner.
Illustration 4 : Partial exemption for government related entities
Government G directly controls Entity 1 and Entity 2. It indirectly controls Entity A and Entity B through Entity 1, and Entity
C and Entity D through Entity 2. Person X is a member of the key management personnel in Entity 1.
Examine the entity to whom the exemption for disclosure to be given and for transaction with whom.
Solution
For Entity A’s financial statements, the exemption of Ind AS 24 applies to:
(a) transactions with Government G; and
(b) transactions with Entities 1 and 2 and Entities B, C and D. However, that exemption does not apply to
transactions with Person X.
Govt. G
Key Managementpersonnel
Mr. X

Illustration 5
Power Limited is a producer of electricity. Transmission Limited regularly purchases electricity from Power Limited. Power
Limited whose financial year ends on March 31, 20X2, acquired100% shareholding of Transmission Limited on July 15,
20X1. However, the entire shareholding is disposed of on March 21, 20X2. Power Limited and Transmission Limited
had transactions when Transmission Limited was a subsidiary of Power Limited and also in the period when it was not a
subsidiary of Power Limited.
For which period, related party disclosure should Power Limited make in its financial statements for the year ended March 31,
20X2 with respect to transactions with Transmission Limited.
Solution
Power Limited should in its financial statements for the year ended March 31, 20X2 make related party
disclosures for the period from July 15, 20X1 to March 21, 20X2 when Transmission Limited was its
subsidiary.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
Mr. X is a domestic partner of Ms. Y. Mr. X has an investment in A Limited and Ms. Y has an investment in B
Limited.
Required
(a) Examine when can a related party relationship is established, from the perspective of A Limited’s financial
statements:
(b) Examine when can related party relationship is established, from the perspective of B Limited’s financial
statements:
(c) Will A Limited and B Limited be related parties if Mr. X has only significant influence over A Limited and Ms.
Y also has significant influence over B Limited:
Solution:
(a) If Mr. X controls or jointly controls A Limited, B Limited is related to A Limited when Ms. Y has control, joint
control or significant influence over B Limited.
(b) If Mr. X controls or jointly controls A Limited, A Limited is related to B Limited when Ms. Y has control, joint
control or significant influence over B Limited.
(c) No, Significant influence does not lead to direct/indirect control between A Ltd & B Ltd
DOMESTIC PARTNER
Mr X Ms Y
INVESTMENT INVESTMENT
ENTITY A ENTITY B
Question 02:
A Limited has both (i) joint control over B Limited and (ii) joint control or significant influence over C LimitedRequired
(c) Examine related party relationship from the perspective of C Limited’s financial statements.
(d) Examine related party relationship from the perspective of B Limited’s financial statements.
Solution:
1. C Limited is related to B Limited
1. B Limited is related to C Limited.
Question03:
ABC Ltd. is a long-standing customer of XYZ Ltd. Mrs. P whose husband is a director in XYZ Ltd. purchased a
controlling interest in entity ABC Ltd. on 1st June, 20X1. Sales of products from XYZ Ltd. to ABC Ltd. inthe
two-month period from 1st April 20X1 to 31st May 20X1 totalled ₹8,00,000. Following the share purchase by
Mrs. P,XYZ Ltd. began to supply the products at a discount of 20% to their normal selling price and allowed ABC
Ltd. three months’ credit (previously ABC Ltd. was only allowed one month’s credit, XYZ Ltd.’s normal credit
policy). Sales of products from XYZ Ltd. to ABC Ltd. in the ten- month period from 1st June 20X1 to 31st March
20X2 totalled ₹60,00,000. On 31st March 20X2, the trade receivables of XYZ Ltd. included ₹18,00,000 in

respect of amounts owing by ABC Ltd.
Analyse and show (where possible by quantifying amounts) how the above event would be reported in the financial
statements of XYZ Ltd. for the year ended 31st March 20X2 as per Ind AS. You are required to mention the
disclosure requirements as well.
Solution:
XYZ Ltd. would include the total revenue of ₹68,00,000 (₹60,00,000 + ₹8,00,000) from ABC Ltd. received /
receivable in the year ended 31st March 20X2 within its revenue and show ₹18,00,000 within trade receivables at 31st
March 20X2.
Mrs. P would be regarded as a related party of XYZ Ltd. because she is a close family member of one ofthe
key management personnel of XYZ Ltd.
From 1st June 20X1, ABC Ltd. would also be regarded as a related party of XYZ Ltd. because from thatdate
ABC Ltd. is an entity controlled by another related party.
Because ABC Ltd. is a related party with whom XYZ Ltd. has transactions, then XYZ Ltd. should disclose:
The nature of the related party relationship.
The revenue of ₹60,00,000 from ABC Ltd. since 1st June 20X1.The
outstanding balance of ₹18,00,000 at 31st March 20X2.
In the current circumstances it may well be necessary for XYZ Ltd. to also disclose the favourable terms under
which the transactions are carried out.
Question 04:
Mr. Atul is an independent director of a company X Ltd. He plays a vital role in the Management of X Ltd.and
contributes in major decision-making process of the organisation. X Ltd. pays sitting fee of ₹2,00,000 to him for every
Board of Directors’ (BOD) meeting he attends. Throughout the year, X Ltd. had 5 such meetings which was attended
by Mr. Atul.
Similarly, a non-executive director, Mr. Naveen also attended 5 BOD meetings and charged ₹1,50,000 per
meeting. The Accountant of X Ltd. believes that they being not the employees of the organisation, their fee
should not be disclosed as per related party transaction in accordance with Ind AS 24.
Examine whether the sitting fee paid to independent director and non-executive director is required to be disclosed in the
financial statements prepared as per Ind AS?
Solution:
As per paragraph 9 of Ind AS 24, Related Party Disclosures, “Key management personnel are those persons
having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the entity, directly or indirectly,
including any director (whether executive or otherwise) of that entity.”
Accordingly, key management personnel (KMP) includes any director of the entity who are having authority and
responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the entity. Hence, independent director Mr. Atul and
non-executive director Mr. Naveen are covered under the definition of KMP in accordance with Ind AS.
Also, as per paragraph 7 and 9 of Ind AS 19, ‘Employee Benefits’, an employee may provide services to an entity on
a full-time, part-time, permanent, casual or temporary basis. For the purpose of the Standard, Employees include
directors and other management personnel. Independent directors are not employee of the company and this para
requires rewording.
Therefore, contention of the accountant is wrong that they are not employees of X Ltd.
Paragraph 17 of Ind AS requires disclosure about employee benefits for key management personnel. Therefore, an
entity shall disclose key management personnel compensation in total i.e., disclosure of directors’ fee of
(₹10,00,000 + ₹7,50,000) ₹17,50,000 is to be made as employee’s benefits (under various categories).
Since short-term employee benefits are expected to be settled wholly before twelve months after the end of the annual
reporting period in which the employees render the related services, the sitting fee paid to directors will fall under it (as
per Ind AS 19) and is required to be disclosed in accordance with the paragraph 17 of Ind AS 24.
Question 05:
Mr. X, is the financial controller of ABC Ltd., a listed entity which prepares consolidated financial statements in
accordance with Ind AS. Mr. X has recently produced the final draft of the financial statements of ABC Ltd. forthe
year ended 31st March, 20X2 to the managing director Mr. Y for approval. Mr. Y, who is not an accountant,
had raised following query from Mr. X after going through the draft financial statements:
One of the notes to the financial statements gives details of purchases made by ABC Ltd. from PQR Ltd.
during the period 20X1-20X2. Mr. Y owns 100% of the shares in PQR Ltd. However, he feels that there is no
requirement for any disclosure to be made in ABC Ltd.’s financial statements since the transaction is carriedout on
normal commercial terms and is totally insignificant to ABC Ltd., as it represents less than 1% of ABC Ltd.’s
purchases.
Provide answers to the query raised by the Managing Director Mr. Y as per Ind AS.

Solution:
Ongoing through the queries raised by the Managing Director Mr. Y, the financial controller Mr. X explained the notes
and reasons for their disclosures as follows:
Related parties are generally characterised by the presence of control or influence between the two parties.
Ind AS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’ identifies related parties as, inter alia, key management personnel and
companies controlled by key management personnel. On this basis, PQR Ltd. is a related party of ABC Ltd.
The transaction is required to be disclosed in the financial statements of ABC Ltd. since Mr. Y is Key
Management personnel of ABC Ltd. Also at the same time, it owns 100% shares of PQR Ltd. ie. he controls PQR
Ltd. This implies that PQR Ltd. is a related party of ABC Ltd.
Where transactions occur with related parties, Ind AS 24 requires that details of the transactions are disclosed in
Notes to the financial statements. This is required even if the transactions are carried out on an arm’s lengthbasis.
Transactions with related parties are material by their nature, so the fact that the transaction may be numerically
insignificant to ABC Ltd. does not affect the need for disclosure.
Question06:
Uttar Pradesh State Government holds 60% shares in PQR Limited and 55% shares in ABC Limited. PQR
Limited has two subsidiaries namely P Limited and Q Limited. ABC Limited has two subsidiaries namely A
Limited and B Limited. Mr. KM is one of the Key management personnel in PQR Limited. ·
 Determine the entity to whom exemption from disclosure of related party transactions is to be given. Also
examine the transactions and with whom such exemption applies.
 What are the disclosure requirements for the entity which has availed the exemption?
Solution:
(a) As per para 18 of Ind AS 24, ‘Related Party Disclosures’, if an entity had related party transactions during the
periods covered by the financial statements, it shall disclose the nature of the related party relationship as well as
information about those transactions and outstanding balances, including commitments, necessary for users to
understand the potential effect of the relationship on the financial statements.
However, as per para 25 of the standard a reporting entity is exempt from the disclosure requirements in relation
to related party transactions and outstanding balances, including commitments, with:
• a government that has control or joint control of, or significant influence over, the reporting entity; and
• another entity that is a related party because the same government has control or joint control of, or
significant influence over, both the reporting entity and the other entity
According to the above paras, for Entity P’s financial statements, the exemption in paragraph 25 applies to:
(i) transactions with Government Uttar Pradesh State Government; and
(ii) transactions with Entities PQR and ABC and Entities Q, A and B.
Similar exemptions are available to Entities PQR, ABC, Q, A and B, with the transactions with UP State
Government and other entities controlled directly or indirectly by UP State Government. However, that exemption
does not apply to transactions with Mr. KM. Hence, the transactions with Mr. KM needs to be disclosed under related
party transactions.
(b) It shall disclose the following about the transactions and related outstanding balances referred to in
paragraph 25:
1. the name of the government and the nature of its relationship with the reporting entity (ie control, joint control or
significant influence);
2. the following information in sufficient detail to enable users of the entity’s financial statements to understand the
effect of related party transactions on its financial statements:
(i) the nature and amount of each individually significant transaction; and
(ii) for other transactions that are collectively, but not individually, significant, a qualitative or quantitative indication of
their extent.
Question 07:
S Ltd., a wholly owned subsidiary of P Ltd is the sole distributor of electricity to consumers in a specified
geographical area. A manufacturing facility of P Ltd is located in the said geographical area and,
accordingly, P Ltd is also a consumer of electricity supplied by S Ltd. The electricity tariffs for the
geographical area are determined by an independent rate-setting authority and are applicable to all consumers of SLtd,
including P Ltd. Whether the above transaction is required to be disclosed as a related party transaction
as per Ind AS 24, Related Party Disclosures in the financial statements of S Ltd.?
Solution: -
As per paragraph 9(b) (i) of Ind AS 24, each parent, subsidiary and fellow subsidiary in a group’ is related to the other
members of the group. Thus, in the case under discussion, P Ltd is a related party of S Ltd from the perspective of
financial statements of S Ltd.
Paragraph 11 of Ind AS 24 states as follows:

“In the context of this Standard, the following are not related parties:
(a) two entities simply because they have a director or other member of management personnel in common or
because a member of key management personnel of one entity has significant influence over the other entity.
(b) two joint venturers simply because they share joint control of a joint venture.
(c) (i) providers of finance,(ii) trade unions, (iii) public utilities, and (iv) departments and agencies of a
government that does not control, jointly control or significantly influence the reporting entity, simply by virtue of
their normal dealings with an entity (even though they may affect the freedom of action of an entity or participate in its
decision-making process).
(d) a customer, supplier, franchisor, distributor or general agent with whom an entity transacts a significant volume
of business, simply by virtue of the resulting economic dependence.”
Being engaged in distribution of electricity, S Ltd is a public utility. Had the only relationship between S Ltd and P Ltd
been that of a supplier and a consumer of electricity, P Ltd would not have been regarded as a related party of S Ltd.
However, as per the facts of the given case, this is not the only relationship between S Ltd and P Ltd. Apart from being
a supplier of electricity to P Ltd., S Ltd is also a subsidiary of P Ltd; this is a relationship that is covered within
the related party relationships to which the disclosure requirements of the standard apply. In view of the above, the
supply of electricity by S Ltd to P Ltd is a related party transaction that attracts the disclosure requirements
contained in paragraph 18 and other relevant requirements of the standard. This is notwithstanding the fact that P Ltd is
charged the electricity tariffs determined by an independent rate-setting authority (i.e., the terms of supply to P Ltd
are at par with those applicable to other consumers)
Ind AS 24 does not exempt an entity from disclosing related party transactions merely because they have been
carried out on an arm’s length basis.
MTP.RTP PAST PAPER
MTP: OCTOBER, 2020
Question 01:
ABC Ltd. is a long-standing customer of XYZ Ltd. Mrs. P whose husband is a director in XYZ Ltd.
purchased a controlling interest in entity ABC Ltd. on 1 June 2019. Sales of products from XYZ Ltd. to
ABC Ltd. in the two-month period from 1 April 2019 to 31 May 2019 totalled ₹8,00,000. Following the
share purchase by Mrs. P, XYZ Ltd. began to supply the products at a discount of 20% to their normal
selling price and allowed ABC Ltd. three months’ credit (previously ABC Ltd. was only allowed one
month’s credit, XYZ Ltd.’s normal credit policy). Sales of products from XYZ Ltd. to ABC Ltd. in
the ten-month period from 1 June 2019 to
31 March 2020 totalled ₹60,00,000. On 31 March 2020, the trade receivables of XYZ Ltd. included
₹18,00,000 in respect of amounts owing by ABC Ltd.
Analyse and show (where possible by quantifying amounts) how the above event would be reported in
the financial statements of XYZ Ltd. for the year ended 31 March 2020 as per IndAS. You are required
to mention the disclosure requirements as well. (5 Marks)
Solution:
XYZ Ltd. would include the total revenue of ₹68,00,000 (₹60,00,000 + ₹8,00,000) from ABC Ltd. received / receivable in the year
ended 31st March 2020 within its revenue and show ₹18,00,000 within trade receivables at 31 March 2020.
Mrs. P would be regarded as a related party of XYZ Ltd. because she is a close family member of one of the key
management personnel of XYZ Ltd.
From 1st June 2019, ABC Ltd. would also be regarded as a related party of XYZ Ltd. Because from that date ABC Ltd. is an
entity controlled by another related party.
Since ABC Ltd. is a related party with whom XYZ Ltd. has transactions, XYZ Ltd. should disclose:
The nature of the related party relationship.
– The revenue of ₹60,00,000 from ABC Ltd. since 1st June 2019.
– The outstanding balance of ₹18,00,000 at 31st March 2020.
In the current circumstances it may well be necessary for XYZ Ltd. to also disclose the favourable terms
under which the transactions are carried out.
MTP: MARCH, 2019
Question 02:
An Indian company has a parent company outside India. Parent company negotiates software
licenses with end vendor and based on number of licences, parent company get its reimbursement
from Indian company. Say, license cost of Rs. 12 Lac is charged for calendar year of 2018. Parent
company generates is invoice in February'18. Indian company accounts full invoice in February'18 and
then for Indian financial year, accounts Reimbursement expense of Rs. 3.00 Lac during FY 1718 (for
licencing cost relating to period January'18 to March'18) and Prepaid expenses of Rs. 9 Lac for
licensing cost reimbursement relating to April'18 to December'18. Prepaid expense is subsequently
reversed and expense of Rs. 9 Lac is accounted for in FY 18-19.

What amount should be disclosed at Related party transaction? (4 Marks)
Solution:
Paragraph 9 of Ind AS 24 Related Party Disclosures defines Related Party Transactions asunder:
“A related party transaction is a transfer of resources, services or obligations between a reporting entity and a related party, regardless of
whether a price is charged.”
Paragraph 6 of Ind AS 24 states as under:
“6 A related party relationship could have an effect on the profit or loss and financial position ofan entity…”
In the given case, there is a transfer of resources to the extent of Rs.12 lac from the company to the parent towards software
license. Of this transfer of resources, the company has consumed the benefits relating to Rs.3 lac of software license cost which is recognise in
profit or loss. The benefits relating to Rs.9 lac of software license cost will be consumed in the next reporting period and therefore is
recognised in balance sheet as prepaid expenses.
Paragraph 18 of Ind AS 24 states as under:
“18 If an entity has had related party transactions during the periods covered by the financial statements, it shall
disclose the nature of the related party relationship as well as information about those transactions and outstanding balances,
including commitments necessary for users to understand the potential effect of the relationship of the financial statements.
At a minimum, disclosures shall include:
a. The amount of the transactions;
b. The amount of outstanding balances, including commitments, and;
I. Their terms and conditions, including whether they are secured, and the nature of the consideration to beprovided in
settlement; and
II. Details of any guarantees given or received;
c. Provisions for doubtful debts related to the amount of outstanding balances; and
d. The expense recognised during the period in respect of bad and doubtful debts due fromrelated parties.”
Therefore, the company has to disclose:
1. The amount of transaction with the parent of Rs.12 lac towards software license;
2. Outstanding balance of Rs.9 lac presented as prepaid expense along with the terms and conditions and state
that the same will be settled in the next reporting period by receipt of software licensing services.
3. The amount of Rs.3 lac recognised as software license expense in profit or loss for the benefits consumed during the
period to make it understandable to users.
Paragraph 113 of Ind AS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements states as under:
“113 An entity shall present notes in a systematic manner. An entity shall cross-reference each line items in the balance sheet
and in the statement of profit and loss, and in the statement of changes in equity and of cash flows to any related information in the
notes.”
Therefore, the company shall cross-reference the software license expense recognised in profit or loss and prepaid expenses
recognised in balance sheet to the notes disclosing related party transactions.
MTP: AUGUST, 2018
Question:3
Mr. X has a 100% investment in A Ltd. He is also a member of the key management personnel (KMP) of B Ltd. B Ltd
has a 100% investment in C Ltd.
Examine related party relationship of A Ltd., as per Ind AS 24, in the financial statements of C Ltd.
(4 Marks)
Solution:
Para 9 of Ind AS 24 defines the term “key management personnel” as persons having authority and
responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the entity directly or indirectly,
including any director (whether executive or not). Further, significant influence is the power to
participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of the investee but is not control or joint
control of those policies.
Therefore, a key management personnel (KMP) has significant influence over the entity. Accordingly,
Mr. X has significant influence over B Ltd. since he is a key management personnel of B Ltd.
Now, para 9(vii) of the standard states that an entity is related to a reporting entity if the person
identified in para 9(a) (i) (here KMP ie. Mr. X) has significant influence over the entity or is a member
of the key management personnel of the entity (or of a parent of the entity)”

Therefore, if C Ltd. is a reporting entity, A Ltd. is related to C Ltd. because a key management
personnel of parent B Limited has control over A Limited. Therefore, the relationship of C Ltd. and A
Ltd. will be “Entities controlled by key management personnel of the Parent Entity”.
MTP APRIL 2018

Question 4
Huge Ltd. has a controlling interest in Subsidiaries P, Q and R and has significant influence over Associates A and B.
Subsidiary R has significant influence over Associate C.
Determine the related party relationship, as per Ind AS 24, of the entities referred in the question in the followingfinancial
statements:
(i) In consolidated financial statements of Huge Ltd.
(i) In individual financial statements of Huge Ltd.
(i) In individual financial statements of Subsidiary P
(iv) In individual financial statements of Subsidiary Q
(v) In individual financial statements of Subsidiary R
(vi) In individual financial statements of Associates A, B and C (10 Marks)
Solution
Huge Ltd.
Associate B
Subsidiary P
Subsidiary Q
Subsidiary 3
Associate A
Associate 3
As per para 9 (b) (i) and (ii) of Ind AS 24,

“An entity is related to a reporting entity if any of the following conditions applies:
(i) The entity and the reporting entity are members of the same group (which meansthat each parent, subsidiary and
fellow subsidiary is related to the others).
(ii) One entity is an associate or joint venture of the other entity (or an associate or joint venture of a member of a group of
which the other entity is a member).”
Accordingly,
(i) For Huge Ltd.’s consolidated financial statements- Associates A, B and C arerelated to the Group.
(ii) For Huge Ltd.’s separate financial statements- Subsidiaries P, Q and C andAssociates A, B and C are
related parties
(iii) For Subsidiary P’s financial statements- Parent, Subsidiaries Q and R andAssociates A, B and C are
relatedparties.
(iv) For Subsidiary Q’s separate financial statements- Parent, Subsidiaries P and R and Associates A, B and C

are related parties.
(v) For Subsidiary R’s financial statements- Parent, Subsidiaries P and Q andAssociates A, B and C are
related parties.
(vi) For the financial statements of Associates A, B and C- Parent and Subsidiaries.
Question:5
Uttar Pradesh State Government holds 60% shares in PQR Limited and 55% shares in ABC Limited.
PQR Limited has two subsidiaries namely P Limited and Q Limited. ABC Limited has two subsidiaries
namely A Limited and B Limited. Mr. KM is one of the Key management personnel in PQR Limited. ·
a) Determine the entity to whom exemption from disclosure of related party transactions is to
be given. Also examine the transactions and with whom such exemption applies.
b) What are the disclosure requirements for the entity which has availed the exemption?
Solution:
(a) As per para 18 of Ind AS 24, ‘Related Party Disclosures’, if an entity had related party
transactions during the periods covered by the financial statements, it shall disclose the nature of the
related party relationship as well as information about those transactions and outstanding balances,
including commitments, necessary for users to understand the potential effect of the relationship on
the financial statements.
However, as per para 25 of the standard a reporting entity is exempt from the disclosure
requirements in relation to related party transactions and outstanding balances, including
commitments, with:
i. a government that has control or joint control of, or significant influence over, the reporting
entity; and
ii. another entity that is a related party because the same government has control or joint control
of, or significant influence over, both the reporting entity and the other entity
According to the above paras, for Entity P’s financial statements, the exemption in paragraph 25applies to:
i. transactions with Government Uttar Pradesh State Government; and
ii. transactions with Entities PQR and ABC and Entities Q, A and B.
Similar exemptions are available to Entities PQR, ABC, Q, A and B, with the transactions with UP
State Government and other entities controlled directly or indirectly by UP State Government.
However, that exemption does not apply to transactions with Mr. KM. Hence, the transactions with Mr.
KM needs to be disclosed under related party transactions.
B) It shall disclose the following about the transactions and related outstanding balances referred to
in paragraph 25:
a) the name of the government and the nature of its relationship with the reporting entity (ie
control, joint control or significant influence);
b) the following information in sufficient detail to enable users of the entity’s financial statements
to understand the effect of related party transactions on its financial statements:
i. the nature and amount of each individually significant transaction; and
ii. for other transactions that are collectively, but not individually, significant, a qualitative or
quantitative indication of their extent.
RTP: M A Y , 2018
Question:6
Mr. Atul is an independent director of a company X Ltd. He plays a vital role in the Management of X Ltd. and contributes
in major decision-making process of the organisation. X Ltd. pays sitting fee of ₹2,00,000 to him for every Board of Directors’ (BOD)
meeting he attends. Throughout the year, X Ltd. had 5 such meetings which was attended by Mr. Atul. Similarly, a non-
executive director, Mr. Naveen also attended 5 BOD meetings and charged ₹1,50,000 per meeting. The Accountant of X Ltd.
believes that they being not the employees of the organisation, their feeshould not be disclosed as per related party transaction
Examine whether the sitting fee paid to independent director and non-executive director is required to be disclosed in the
financial statements prepared as per Ind AS?
Solution:
As per paragraph 9 of Ind AS 24, Related Party Disclosures, “Key management personnel are those persons having
authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the entity, directly or indirectly, including any
director (whether executive or otherwise) of that entity.”
Accordingly, key management personnel (KMP) includes any director of the entity who are having authority and responsibility
for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the entity. Hence, independent director Mr. Atul and non-executive director
Mr. Naveen are covered under the definition of KMP in accordance with Ind AS.

Also, as per paragraph 7 and 9 of Ind AS 19, ‘Employee Benefits’, an employee may provide services to an entity on a full-
time, part-time, permanent, casual or temporary basis. For the purpose of the Standard, Employees include directors and
other management personnel.
Therefore, contention of the accountant is wrong that they are not employees of X Ltd.
Paragraph 17 of Ind AS requires disclosure about employee benefits for key management personnel. Therefore,an entity
shall disclose key management personnel compensation in total i.e., disclosure of directors’ fee of (₹10,00,000 + ₹7,50,000)
₹17,50,000 is to be made as employees benefits (under various categories).
Since short-term employee benefits are expected to be settled wholly before twelve months after the end of the annual
reporting period in which the employees render the related services, the sitting fee paid to directors will fall under it (as per Ind
AS 19) and is required to be disclosed in accordance with the paragraph 17 of Ind AS 24.
Question:7
purchased a controlling interest in entity ABC Ltd. on 1st June, 2017. Sales of products from XYZ Ltd. to
ABC Ltd. in the two-month period from 1st April 2017 to 31st May 2017 totalled ₹8,00,000. Following the
shares purchased by Mrs. P, XYZ Ltd. began to supply the products at a discount of 20% to their normal
selling price and allowed ABC Ltd. three months’ credit (previously ABC Ltd. was only allowed one month’s
credit, XYZ Ltd.’s normal credit policy). Sales of products from XYZ Ltd. to ABC Ltd. in the ten-month
period from 1st June 2017 to 31st March 2017 totalled ₹60,00,000. On 31st March 2018, the trade receivablesof
XYZ Ltd. included ₹18,00,000 in respect of amounts owing by ABC Ltd.
Analyse and show how the above event would be reported in the financial statements of XYZ Ltd. for the
year ended 31 March 2018 and mention the disclosure requirements also as per Ind AS.
Solution:
XYZ Ltd. would include the total revenue of ₹68,00,000 (₹60,00,000 + ₹8,00,000) from ABC Ltd. received / receivable in the year
ended 31st March 2018 within its revenue and show ₹18,00,000 within trade receivables at 31st March 2018.
From 1st June 2017, ABC Ltd. would also be regarded as a related party of XYZ Ltd. because from that date ABC Ltd. is an
entity controlled by another related party.
Because ABC Ltd. is a related party with whom XYZ Ltd. has transactions, then XYZ Ltd. should disclose:
– The nature of the related party relationship.
– The revenue of ₹60,00,000 from ABC Ltd. since 1st June 2017.
– The outstanding balance of ₹18,00,000 at 31st March 2018.
In the current circumstances it may well be necessary for XYZ Ltd. to also disclose the favourable terms under which the
transactions are carried out.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 116 - LEASES
Illustration 1 - Short-term lease
Scenario A:
A lessee enters into a lease with a nine-month non-cancellable term with an option to extend the lease for four
months. The lease does not have a purchase option. At the lease commencement date, the lessee is reasonably
certain to exercise the extension option because the monthly lease payments during the extension period are
significantly below market rates. Whether the lessee can take a short-term exemption in accordance with Ind AS
116?
Scenario B:
Assume the same facts as Scenario A except, at the lease commencement date, the lessee is not reasonably
certain to exercise the extension option because the monthly lease payments during the optional extension
period are at what the lessee expects to be market rates and there are no other factors that would make exercise
of the renewal option reasonably certain. Will your answer be different in this case?
Solution:
Scenario A:
As the lessee is reasonably certain to exercise the extension option (Refer section 3.2 lease term), the
lease term is greater than 12 months (i.e., 13 months). Therefore, the lessee will not account for the lease
as a short-term lease.
Scenario B:
In this case, the lease term is less than 12 months, i.e., nine months. Thus, the lessee may account for
the said lease under the short-term lease exemption, i.e., it recognises lease payments as an expenseon
either a straight-line basis over the lease term or another systematic basis.
Illustration 2 - Asset implicitly specified in a contract
Customer XYZ enters into a ten-year contract with Supplier ABC for the use of rolling stock specifically
designed for Customer XYZ.
The rolling stock is designed to transport materials used in Customer XYZ’s production process and is not
suitable for use by other customers. The rolling stock is not explicitly specified in the contract but, Supplier
ABC owns only one rolling stock that is suitable for Customer XYZ’s use. If the rolling stock does not
operateproperly, the contract requires Supplier ABC to repair or replace the rolling stock. Whether there
is an identified asset?
Solution:
Yes, the said rolling stock is an identified asset. Though the rolling stock is not explicitly specified in
the contract (e.g., by serial number), it is implicitly specified because Supplier ABC must use it to
fulfil the contract
Illustration 3 (Asset implicitly specified in a contract):
Customer XYZ enters into a ten-year contract with Supplier ABC for the use of a car. The specification of
the car is specified in the contract (i.e., brand, type, colour, options, etc.). At inception of the contract, the
car is not yet built.
Whether there is an identified asset?
Solution:
Yes, the said car is an identified asset. Though the car cannot be identified at inception of the
contract, it is implicitly specified at the time the same will be made available to Customer XYZ.
Illustration 4 - Substantive Substitution Rights
Scenario A:
An electronic data storage provider (supplier) provides services through a centralised data centre that
involve the use of a specified server (Server No. 10). The supplier maintains many identical servers in a
single accessible location and determines, at inception of the contract, that it is permitted to and can easily
substitute another server without the customer’s consent throughout the period of use.
Further, the supplier would benefit economically from substituting an alternative asset, because doing this
would allow the supplier to optimise the performance of its network at only a nominal cost. In addition, the
supplier has made clear that it has negotiated this right of substitution as an important right in the
arrangement, and the substitution right affected the pricing of the arrangement.
Whether the substitution rights are substantive and whether there is an identified asset?
Scenario B:
Assume the same facts as in Scenario A except that Server No. 10 is customised, and the supplier does
not have the practical ability to substitute the customised asset throughout the period of use. Additionally, it is
unclear whether the supplier would benefit economically from sourcing a similar alternative asset.
Whether the substitution rights are substantive and whether there is an identified asset?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
Scenario A:
The customer does not have the right to use an identified asset because, at the inception of the
contract, the supplier has the practical ability to substitute the server and would benefit economically
from such a substitution. Thus, there is no identified asset.
However, if the customer could not readily determine whether the supplier had a substantive
substitution right (for e.g., there is insufficient transparency into the supplier’s operations), the
customer would presume the substitution right is not substantive and conclude that there is an
identified asset.
Scenario B:
The substitution right is not substantive, and Server No. 10 would be an identified asset because the
supplier does not have the practical ability to substitute the asset and there is no evidenceof economic
benefit to the supplier for substituting the asset. In this case, neither of the conditions of a substitution
right is met (whereas both the conditions must be met for the supplier to have a substantive
substitution right). Therefore, Server No 10 will be considered as an identified asset.
Illustration 5 (Identified Asset – Physically Distinct):
Customer XYZ enters into a 15-year contract with Supplier ABC for the right to use five fibres within a fibre
optic cable between Mumbai and Pune. The contract identifies five of the cable’s 25 fibres for use by
Customer XYZ. The five fibres are dedicated solely to Customer XYZ’s data for the duration of the
contract term. Assume that Supplier ABC does not have a substantive substitution right.
Whether there is an identified asset?
Solution:
Yes, the said five fibres are identified assets because they are physically distinct and explicitly specified
in the contract.
Illustration 6 (Identified Asset – Not Physically Distinct):
Scenario A:
Customer XYZ enters into a ten-year contract with Supplier ABC for the right to transport oil from India to
Bangladesh through Supplier ABC’s pipeline. The contract provides that Customer XYZ will have the
right to use of 95% of the pipeline’s capacity throughout the term of the arrangement. Whether there is
an identified asset?
Scenario B:
Assume the same facts as in Scenario A, except that Customer XYZ has the right to use 65% of the
pipeline’s capacity throughout the term of the arrangement.Whether there is an identified asset?
Solution:
Scenario A:
Yes, the capacity portion of the pipeline is an identified asset. While 95% of the pipeline’s capacity is
not physically distinct from the remaining capacity of the pipeline, it represents substantially all of the
capacity of the entire pipeline and thereby provides Customer XYZ with the right to obtain substantially
all of the economic benefits from use of the pipeline.
Scenario B:
No, the capacity portion of the pipeline is NOT an identified asset. Since 65% of the pipeline’s
capacity is less than substantially all of the capacity of the pipeline, Customer XYZ does not have the
right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the pipeline.
Illustration 7 (Right to use for a portion of the term of contract):
ABC Ltd enters into a contract with XYZ Ltd, which grants ABC Ltd exclusive rights to use a specific grain
storage facility over a five-year period in the months of May and June. During these months, ABC Ltd has
the right to decide which crops are placed in storage and when to remove them. XYZ Ltd provides the loading
and unloading services for the warehouse activities. During the other ten months each year, XYZ Ltd
has the right to determine how the warehouse will be used.
Which party has the right to control the use of the identified asset during the period of use?
Solution:
In the above case, ABC Ltd has the right to control the use of the identified asset during the period of use
because they have the power to determine how the warehouse will be used during the contractually defined
usage periods. The analysis should focus on the rights and economics of the use of the warehouse for
the specified usage periods (May and June). During the period of use, ABC Ltd has the rights to
determine how much of a crop to place in storage, and the timing of placing and removing it from
storage. These rights are more significant to the economics of the use of the asset than the loading and
unloading services performed by XYZ Ltd during the same period. ABC Ltd receives all of the economic
benefit from use of the asset during those specified time periods. Therefore, contract contains a lease for
the specified period of term.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 8 (Right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits):
Company MNO enters into a 15-year contract with Power Company PQR to purchase all of the electricity
produced by a new solar farm. PQR owns the solar farm and will receive tax credits relating to the
construction and ownership of the solar farm, and MNO will receive renewable energy credits that accrue
from use of the solar farm.). Who has the right to substantial benefits from the solar farm?
Solution: Company MNO has the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of
thesolar farm over the 15-year period because it obtains:
 the electricity produced by the farm over the lease term — i.e., the primary product fromuse of
the asset; and
 the renewable energy credits — i.e., the by-product from use of the asset.
Although PQR receives economic benefits from the solar farm in the form of tax credits, these economic
benefits relate to the ownership of the solar farm. The tax credits do not relate to use of the solar
farm and therefore are not considered in this assessment.
Illustration 9 - Right to direct the use of an asset
Customer X enters into a contract with Supplier Y to use a vehicle for a five-year period. The vehicle is
identified in the contract. Supplier Y cannot substitute another vehicle unless the specified vehicle is not
operational (for e.g., if it breaks down). Under the contract:
• Customer X operates the vehicle (i.e., drives the vehicle) or directs others to operate the vehicle (for e.g.,
hires a driver).
• Customer X decides how to use the vehicle (within contractual limitations). For example, throughout the
period of use, Customer X decides where the vehicle goes, as well as when or whether it is used and
what it is used for. Customer X can also change these decisions throughout the period of use.
• Supplier Y prohibits certain uses of the vehicle (for e.g., moving it overseas) and modifications to the
vehicle to protect its interest in the asset.
Whether Customer X has the right to direct the use of the vehicle throughout the period of lease?
Solution:
Yes, Customer X has the right to direct the use of the identified vehicle throughout the period of use
because it has the right to change how the vehicle is used, when or whether the vehicle is used,
where the vehicle goes and what the vehicle is used for.
Supplier Y’s limits on certain uses for the vehicle and modifications to it are considered protective
rights that define the scope of Customer X’s use of the asset, but do not affect the assessment of
whether Customer X directs the use of the asset
Entity A contracts with Supplier H to manufacture parts in a facility. Entity A designed the facility and
provided its specifications. Supplier H owns the facility and the land. Entity A specifies how many parts it
needs and when it needs the parts to be available. Supplier H operates the machinery and makes all
operating decisions including how and when the parts are to be produced, as long as it meets the contractual
requirements to deliver the specified number on the specified date. Assuming supplier H cannot substitute the
facility and hence is an identified asset.
Which party has the right to control the use of the identified asset (i.e., equipment) during the period ofuse?
Solution:
Entity A does not direct the use of the asset that most significantly drives the economic benefits
because Supplier H determines how and when the equipment is operated once the contract is signed.
Therefore, Supplier H has the right to control the use of the identified asset during the period of use.
Although Entity A stipulates the product to be provided and has input into the initial decisions
regarding the use of the asset through its involvement in the design of the asset, it does not have
decision making rights over how and for what purpose the asset will be used over the asset during the
period of use. This arrangement is a supply agreement, not a lease.
Entity L enters into a five—year contract with Company A, a ship owner, for the use of an identified ship.
Entity L decides whether and what cargo will be transported, and when and to which ports the ship will sail
throughout the period of use, subject to restrictions specified in the contract. These restrictions prevent EntityL
from sailing the ship into waters at a high risk of piracy or carrying explosive materials as cargo. Company A
operates and maintains the ship, and is responsible for safe passage.
Who has the right to direct the use of the ship during the period of use?
Solution:
Entity L has the right to direct the use of the ship. The contractual restrictions are protective rights. In
the scope of its right of use, Entity L determines how and for what purpose the ship is used throughout

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
the five — year period because it decides whether, where and when the ship sails, as well as the
cargo that it will transport. Entity L has the right to change these decisions throughout the period of
use. Therefore, the contract contains a lease.
Illustration 12 - Identifying and separating lease components
Scenario A:
A lessee enters a lease of an excavator and the related accessories (for e.g., excavator attachments) that are
used for mining purposes. The lessee is a local mining company that intends to use the excavator at a
copper mine. How many lease and non-lease components are there?
Scenario B:
Assume the same facts as in Scenario A, except that the contract also conveys the right to use an
additional loading truck. This loading truck could be deployed by the lessee for other uses (for e.g., to
transport iron ores at another mine).
Solution:
Scenario A:
The lessee would be unable to benefit from the use of the excavator without also using the accessories.
Therefore, the excavator is dependent upon the accessories. Thus, from the perspective of the lessee,
the contract contains one lease component.
Scenario B:
The lessee can benefit from the loading truck on its own or together with other readily available
resources because the loading truck could be deployed for other uses independent of the excavator.
The lessee can also benefit from the use of the excavator on its own or together with other readily
available resources.
Thus, from the perspective of the lessee, the contract contains two lease components, viz.,a lease
of the excavator (together with the accessories) and a lease of the loading truck.
Illustration 13 - Identifying different components in the contract
Entity L rents an office building from Landlord M for a term of 10 years. The rental contract stipulates that
the office is fully furnished and has a newly installed and tailored HVAC system. It also requires Landlord M
to perform all common area maintenance (CAM) during the term of the arrangement. Entity L makes single
monthly rental payment and does not pay for the maintenance separately. The office building has a useful life
of 40 years and the HVAC system and office furniture each has a life of 15 years.
What are the units of account in the lease?
Solution:
There are three components in the arrangement – the building assets (office building and HVAC), the
office furniture, and the maintenance agreement.
The office building and HVAC system are one lease component because they cannot function
independently of each other. The HVAC system was designed and tailored specifically to be
integrated into the office building and cannot be removed and used in another building without
incurring substantial costs. These building assets are a lease component because they are identified
assets for which Entity L directs the use.
The office furniture functions independently and can be used on its own. It is also a lease component
because it is a group of distinct assets for which Entity L directs the use.
The maintenance agreement is a non-lease component because it is a contract for service and not for the
use of a specified asset
Illustration 14 - Activities which are not components of a lease contract
Scenario A:
A lessee enters into a five-year lease of equipment, with fixed annual payments of ₹ 10,000. The contract
contains fixed annual payments as follows: ₹ 8,000 for rent, ₹ 1,500 for maintenance and ₹ 500 of
administrative tasks. How the consideration would be allocated?
Scenario B:
Assume the fact pattern as in scenario A except that, in addition, the contract requires the lesseeto pay
for the restoration of the equipment to its original condition. How the consideration would be allocated?
Solution:
Scenario A:
The contract contains two components, viz., a lease component (lease of equipment) and a non- lease
component (maintenance). The amount paid for administrative tasks does not transfer a good or
service to the lessee.
Assuming that the lessee does not elect to use the practical expedient as per para 15 of Ind AS
116, both the lessee and the lessor account for the lease of equipment and maintenance components
separately and the administration charge is included in the total consideration to be allocated between

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
those components. Therefore, the total consideration in the contract of₹ 50,000 will be allocated to the
lease component (equipment) and the non-lease component (maintenance).
Scenario B:
The contract still contains two components, viz., a lease component (lease of equipment) and a non-
lease component (maintenance). Similar to the amount paid for administrative tasks, the restoration
does not transfer a good or service to the lessee as it is only performed at the end of the lease term.
Therefore, the total consideration in the contract of ₹ 50,000 will be allocated to the lease component
(equipment) and the non-lease component (maintenance)
Illustration 15 - Allocating contract consideration to lease and non-lease components – Lessees
A lessee enters into a lease of an equipment. The contract stipulates the lessor will perform maintenance of the
leased equipment and receive consideration for that maintenance service. The contract includes the following
fixed prices for the lease and non-lease component:
Lease ₹ 80,000
Maintenance ₹ 10,000
Total ₹ 90,000
Assume the stand-alone prices cannot be readily observed, so the lessee makes estimates, maximising the use
of observable information, of the lease and non-lease components, as follows:
Lease ₹ 85,000
Maintenance ₹ 15,000
Total ₹ 1,00,000
In the given scenario, assuming lessee has not opted the practical expedient, how will the lessee
allocate the consideration to lease and non-lease component?
Solution:
The stand-alone price for the lease component represents 85% (i.e., ₹ 85,000 / ₹ 1,00,000) of total
estimated stand-alone prices. The lessee allocates the consideration in the contract (i.e., ₹ 90,000),
as follows:
Lease * ₹ 76,500
Maintenance ** ₹ 13,500
Total ₹ 90,000
* ₹ 90,000 x 85% ** ₹ 90,000 x 15%
Illustration 16 - Determining the lease term Scenario A:
Entity ABC enters into a lease for equipment that includes a non-cancellable term of six years anda two-
year fixed-priced renewal option with future lease payments that are intended to approximate market rates at
lease inception. There are no termination penalties or other factors indicating that Entity ABC is reasonably
certain to exercise the renewal option. What is the lease term?
Scenario B:
Entity XYZ enters into a lease for a building that includes a non-cancellable term of eight yearsand a two-
year, market-priced renewal option. Before it takes possession of the building, Entity XYZ pays for
leasehold improvements. The leasehold improvements are expected to have significant value at the end of eight
years, and that value can only be realised through continued occupancy of the leased property. What is the
lease term?
Scenario C:
Entity PQR enters into a lease for an identified retail space in a shopping centre. The retail space will be
available to Entity PQR for only the months of October, November and December during a non- cancellable
term of seven years. The lessor agrees to provide the same retail space for each of the seven years. What is
thelease term?
Solution:
Scenario A:
At the lease commencement date, the lease term is six years (being the non-cancellable period). The
renewal period of two years is not taken into consideration since it is mentioned that Entity ABC is not
reasonably certain to exercise the option.
Scenario B:
At the lease commencement, Entity XYZ determines that it is reasonably certain to exercise the
renewal option because it would suffer a significant economic penalty if it abandoned the leasehold
improvements at the end of the initial non-cancellable period of eight years. Thus, at the lease
commencement, Entity XYZ concludes that the lease term is ten years (being eight years of non-
cancellable period plus the renewal period of two years where the lessee is reasonably certain to
exercise the option).
Scenario C:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
At the lease commencement date, the lease term is 21 months (three months per year over the seven
annual periods as specified in the contract), i.e., the period over which Entity PQR controls the right to
use the underlying asset.
Illustration 17 - Re-assessment of exercise of lease extension option
Retailer M enters into a five-year lease for a building floor, followed by two successive five-year renewal options.
On the commencement date, Retailer M is not reasonably certain to exercise the extension option. At the
endof third year, Retailer M extended to include another floor from year 4 due to a business acquisition. For
this purpose, the lessee concludes a separate seven-year lease for an additional floor in the building
already leased. Is Retailer M required to reassess the lease term in this case?
Solution:
Ind AS 116 requires a lessee to reassess the lease term if there is change in business decision of the
company which is directly relevant to exercising or not exercising an option to renew / extend the
lease. In the given case, the Retailer M at the end of third year has extended to include another floorin
the same building on account of acquiring another company. As Retailer M has entered into fresh
lease of another floor for a seven-year term, it is reasonably certain to exercise the renewal option of
original lease for a further five-year term. Hence Retailer M will have to reassess the lease term atthe
end of third year.
Illustration 18 - Re-assessment of non-cancellable period of lease
Company N has taken 10 vehicles on lease for an initial period of 5 years with an extension option at the
option of the lessee for a further period of 5 years at the same rental amount. The remaining useful life of the
vehicles as on the commencement date of the lease is 15 years. Company N has determined at the
commencement date that it is reasonably certain to exercise the extension option and hence it has taken a
period of 10 years for the lease. At the end of 4th year, there is an announcement by the government that all the
cars of this particular model have to be discontinued from the road within 1 year due to the change in the
pollution norms in the country. Will the lease term be reassessed in this case?
Solution:
In the given case, as per Ind AS 116, the announcement by the government to discontinue the use of
the underlying asset will prohibit the lessee from exercising the extension option that was already
included in the non-cancellable period by Company N and hence, Company N will reassess the non-
cancellable period to exclude the extension option of 5 years.
Illustration 19 - Determining the fixed payments
Entity M and Lessor A enter into a 10-year lease of an office building for fixed annual lease payments of ₹
200,000. Per the terms of the lease agreement, annual fixed lease payments comprise ₹ 170,000 for rent and ₹
30,000 for real estate taxes. What are the fixed lease payments for purposes of classifying the lease?
Solution:
The fixed lease payments are ₹ 2,00,000. Although real estate taxes are explicitly stated in the lease
contract, they do not represent a separate non-lease component as they do not provide a separate
good or service. The right to use the office building is the only component. The annual lease payments
of ₹ 2,00,000 represent payments related to that single lease component.
Illustration 20 - In substance fixed lease payments
Entity Q enters into a seven-year lease for a piece of machinery. The contract sets out the lease payments
asfollows.
– If Q uses the machinery within a given month, then an amount of 2,000 accrues for that month.
– If Q does not use the machinery within a given month, then an amount of 1,000 accrues for that
month. What is considered as lease payment in this case?
Solution:
Q considers the contract and notes that although the lease payments contain variability based on
usage, and there is a realistic possibility that Q may not use the machinery in some months, a monthly
payment of 1,000 is unavoidable. Accordingly, this is an in-substance fixed payment, andis included in
the measurement of the lease liability
Illustration 21 - In-substance fixed lease payment
Entity P enters into a five-year lease for office space with Entity Q. The initial base rent is ₹ 1 lakh per
month. Rents increase by the greater of 1% of Entity P’s generated sales or 2% of the previous rental rate
oneach anniversary of the lease commencement date. What are the lease payments for purposes of measuring
leaseliability?
Solution:
In the given case, the lease payments for purposes of classifying the lease are the fixed monthly
payments of ₹ 1 lakh plus the minimum annual increase of 2% of the previous rental rate. Entity P is
required to pay no less than a 2% increase regardless of the level of sales activity; therefore, this
minimum level of increase is in substance fixed lease payment.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 22 - In substance fixed lease payments
Company N leases a production line. The lease payments depend on the number of operating hours of the
production line – i.e., N has to pay ₹ 1,000 per hour of use. The annual minimum payment is ₹ 10,00,000.
Theexpected usage per year is 1,500 hours
Solution:
The lease contains in substance fixed payments of ₹ 10,00,000 per year, which are included in the initial
measurement of the lease liability. The additional ₹ 5,00,000 that Company N expectsto pay per year
are variable payments that do not depend on an index or a rate but usage.
Illustration 23 - Variable lease payments that depend on an index or rate
An entity enters into a 10-year lease of property. The lease payment for the first year is ₹ 1,000. The
lease payments are linked to the consumer price index (CPI), i.e., not a floating interest rate. The CPI at the
beginning of the first year is 100. Lease payments are updated at the end of every second year. At the
end of year one, the CPI is 105. At the end of year two, the CPI is 108. What should be included in lease payments?
Solution:
At the lease commencement date, the lease payments are ₹ 1,000 per year for 10 years. The entity
does not take into consideration the potential future changes in the index. At the end of year one, the
payments have not changed and hence, the liability is not updated.
At the end of year two, when the lease payments change, the entity updates the remaining eight lease
payments to ₹ 1,080 per year (i.e., ₹ 1,000 / 100 x 108).
Illustration 24 - Variable lease payments that do not depend on an index or rate
Entity XYZ is a medical equipment manufacturer and a supplier of the related consumables. Customer
ABC operates a medical centre. Under the agreement entered into by both parties, Entity XYZ grants
Customer ABC the right to use a medical laboratory machine at no cost and Customer ABC purchases
consumables foruse in the equipment from Entity XYZ at ₹ 100 each.
The consumables can only be used for that equipment and Customer ABC cannot use other consumables as
substitutes. There is no minimum purchase amount required in the contract.
Based on its historical experience, Customer ABC estimates that it is highly likely to purchase at least 8,000
units of consumables annually. Customer ABC has appropriately assessed that the arrangement contains a
lease of medical equipment. There are no residual value guarantees or other forms of consideration included in
the contract. Whether these payments affect the calculation of lease liability and ROU Asset?
How does Entity XYZ and Customer ABC wouldallocate these lease payments?
Solution:
There are two components in the arrangement, viz., a lease of equipment and the purchase of
consumables.
Even though Customer ABC may believe that it is highly unlikely to purchase lesser than 8,000 unitsof
consumables every year, in this example, there are no lease payments for purposes of initial
measurement (for Entity XYZ and Customer ABC) and lease classification (for Entity XYZ).
Entity XYZ and Customer ABC would allocate the payments associated with the future payments to
the lease and consumables component of the contract (assuming Customer ABC does not elect to
combine lease and non-lease components for this class of asset).
If Customer ABC elects the practical expedient not to separate the associated non-lease component
from the lease component and instead accounts for the lease component and the non- lease
component as a single lease component, the future payments for the consumables will still constitute
genuine variability. Hence there will also be no lease payments for purposes of initial measurement.
Illustration 25 - Variable lease payments
Entity A enters into a five-year lease of an office building. The lease payments are ₹ 5,00,000 per year and
the contract includes an additional water charge calculated as ₹ 0.50 per litre consumed. Payments are due at
the end of year. Entity A elects to apply the practical expedient to combine lease and non-lease components
Solution:
As stated above, payments are due at the end of the year. Entity A elects to apply the practical
expedient not to separate lease and non-lease components.
At the commencement date, Entity A measures the lease liability as the present value of the fixed
lease payments (i.e., five annual payments of 5,00,000). Although Entity A has elected to apply the
practical expedient to combine non-lease components (i.e., water charges) with the lease component,
Entity A excludes the non-lease component from its lease liability because they are variable payments
that depend on usage. That is, the nature of the costs does not become fixed just because Entity A
has elected not to separate them from the fixed lease payments. Entity A recognises the payments for
water – as a variable lease payment – in profit or loss when they are incurred.
In contrast, if B does not elect to apply the practical expedient to combine lease and non-lease

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
components, then it recognises the payments for water – as an operating expense – in profit or loss
when they are incurred.
Illustration 26 - Residual value guarantee included in lease payments
An entity (a lessee) enters into a lease and guarantees that the lessor will realise ₹ 20,000 from selling the asset
to another party at the end of the lease. At lease commencement, based on the lessee’s estimate of the residual
value of the underlying asset, the lessee determines that it expects that it will owe ₹ 8,000 at theend of
the lease. Whether the lessee should include the said payment of ₹ 8,000 as a lease payment?
Solution:
The lessee should include the amount of ₹ 8,000 as a lease payment because it is expected that it
will owe the same to the lessor under the residual value guarantee.
Illustration 27: Initial measurement of lease liability
Entity L enters into a lease for 10 years, with a single lease payment payable at the beginning of each year.
The initial lease payment is ₹ 100,000. Lease payments will increase by the rate of LIBOR each year. At
the date of commencement of the lease, LIBOR is 2 per cent.
Assume that the interest rate implicit in the lease is 5 per cent. How lease liability is initially measured?
Solution:
In the given case, the lease payments depend on a rate (i.e., LIBOR) and hence is included in
measuring lease liability, as per Ind AS 116, the lease payments should initially be measured using
the rate (i.e., LlBOR) as at the commencement date. LIBOR at that date is 2 per cent; therefore, in
measuring the lease liability, it is assumed that each year the payments will increase by 2 per cent, as
follows:
Year Lease Payment Discount factor @5% PV of lease payments
1 1,00,000 1 100,000
2 1,02,000 0.952 97,102
3 1,04,040 0.907 94,364
4 1,06,121 0.864 91,689
5 1,08,243 0.823 89,084
6 1,10,408 0.784 86,560
7 1,12,616 0.746 84,012
8 1,14,869 0.711 81,672
9 1,17,166 0.677 79,321
10 1,19,509 0.645 77,083
8,80,887
Therefore, the lease liability is initially measured at ₹ 8,80,887
Illustration 28: Measuring right-of-use asset
Entity Y and Entity Z execute a 12-year lease of a railcar with the following terms on1January, 20X1:
 The lease commencement date is 1 February 20X1.
 Entity Y must pay Entity Z the first monthly rental payment of ₹ 10,000 upon execution of the lease.
 Entity Z will pay Entity Y ₹ 50,000 cash incentive to enter into the lease payable upon lease execution.
Entity Y incurred ₹ 1,000 of initial direct costs, which are payable on 1 February 20X1. Entity Y calculated
the initial lease liability as the present value of the lease payments discounted using its incremental
borrowing rate because the rate implicit in the lease could not be readily determined; the initial lease liability is
₹ 8,50,000.
How would Lessee Company measure and record this lease?
Solution:
Entity Y would calculate the right-of-use asset as follows:
Initial measurement of lease liability 8,50,000
Lease payments made to Entity Z at or before the commencement date 10,000
Lease incentives received from Entity Z (50,000)
Initial direct cost 1,000
Initial measurement of right-of-use asset 8,11,000
Illustration 29 - Dismantling costs to be included in initial measurement of ROU Asset Company
H leases an aircraft for a period of 5 years. The aircraft must undergo a planned check after every 100,000
flight hours. At the end of the lease, company H must have a check performed (or refund the costs to the
lessor), irrespective of the actual number of flight hours. What are the lease payments for purposes of
calculating ROU asset?
Solution:
In the given case, the legal requirement to perform a check after every 1,00,000 flight hours does not
directly lead to an obligation as it depends on future circumstances. However, as the check must be

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
carried out at the end of the lease irrespective of the actual number of flight hours gives rise to an
obligation.
As a result, company H has to recognize a provision for the costs of the final check (“present value of
the expected cost”) at the beginning of the lease term. At the same time, these costs must be included
in the cost of the right-of-use (ROU) asset pursuant to para 24 (d) of Ind AS 116.
Illustration 30 - Lessee Accounting
Entity ABC (lessee) enters into a three-year lease of equipment. Entity ABC agrees to make the following
annual payments at the end of each year:
₹ 20,000 in year one
₹ 30,000 in year two
₹ 50,000 in year three.
For simplicity purposes, there are no other elements to the lease payments (like purchase options, lease
incentives from the lessor or initial direct costs). Assumed a discount rate of 12% (which is Entity ABC’s
incremental borrowing rate because the interest rate implicit in the lease cannot be readily determined). Entity
ABC depreciates the ROU Asset on a straight-line basis over the lease term.
How would Entity ABC would account for the said lease under Ind AS 116?
Solution:
At the commencement date, Entity ABC would initially recognise ROU Asset and the corresponding
Lease Liability of ₹ 77,364 which is calculated as follows:
Year Payments (Cash flows) Discounting Factor@12% Discounted Cash flows /
Present Value
1 20,000 0.8929 17,858
2 30,000 0.7972 23,916
3 50,000 0.7118 35,590
1,00,000 77,364
Then, the next step would be to prepare a schedule for Lease Liability and ROU Asset as follows:
Lease Liability
Year Opening balance Interest Expense Payments Closing balance
1 77,364 9,284 (20,000) 66,648
2 66,648 7,998 (30,000) 44,646
3 44,646 5,354* (50,000) -
* Difference of ₹ 4 is due to approximation.
ROU Asset (assuming no lease incentives, no initial direct costs, etc.):
Year Opening balance Depreciation Closing balance
1 77,364 (25,788) 51,576
2 51,576 (25,788) 25,788
3 25,788 (25,788) -
At lease commencement, Entity ABC would recognise the Lease Liability and the corresponding
ROU Asset as follows:
ROU Asset Dr. 77,364
To Lease Liability 77,364
To initially recognise the Lease Liability and the corresponding ROU Asset
The following journal entries would be recorded in the first year:
Interest Expense Dr. 9,284
To record interest expense and accrete the lease liability using the effective interest method (₹ 77,364 x
12%)
Depreciation Expense Dr. 25,788

To ROU Asset 25,788
To record interest expense and accrete the lease liability using the straight- line method (₹ 77,364/
3years)
Lease Liability Dr. 20,000
To Cash / Bank 20,000
To record lease payment

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Following is the summary of the said lease contract’s accounting (assuming no changes due to
reassessment):
Particulars Initially Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
Cash lease payments 20,000 30,000 50,000
Lease Expense Recognised:
Interest Expense 9,284 7,998 5,354
Depreciation Expense 25,788 25,788 25,788
Total Periodic Expense 35,072 33,786 31,142
Balance Sheet:
ROU Asset 77,364 51,576 25,788 -
Lease Liability (77,364) (66,648) (44,646) -
Illustration 31 - Subsequent measurement using cost model (MTP MAY 2020)
Company EFG enters into a property lease with Entity H. The initial term of the lease is 10 years with a 5-
year renewal option. The economic life of the property is 40 years and the fair value of the leased property is ₹
50 Lacs. Company EFG has an option to purchase the property at the end of the lease term for ₹ 30 lacs.
The first annual payment is ₹ 5 lacs with an increase of 3% every year thereafter. The implicit rate of
interest is9.04%. Entity H gives Company EFG an incentive of ₹ 2 lacs (payable at the beginning of year 2),
which is tobe used for normal tenant improvement.
Company EFG is reasonably certain to exercise that purchase option. How would EFG measure the right-
of-use asset and lease liability over the lease term?
Solution:
As per Ind AS 116, Company EFG would first calculate the lease liability as the present value of the
annual lease payments, less the lease incentive paid in year 2, plus the exercise price of the purchase
option using the rate implicit in the lease of approximately 9.04%.
PV of lease payments, less lease incentive (W.N. 1) ₹ 37,39,648
PV of purchase option at end of lease term (W.N. 2) ₹ 12,60,000
Total lease liability ₹ 49,99,648 or ₹ 50,00,000 (approx.)
The right-of-use asset is equal to the lease liability because there is no adjustment required for initial
direct costs incurred by Company EFG, lease payments made at or before the lease commencement
date, or lease incentives received prior to the lease commencement date.
Entity EFG would record the following journal entry on the lease commencement date.
Right-of-use Asset Dr. ₹ 50,00,000
To Lease Liability ₹ 50,00,000
To record ROU asset and lease liability at the commencement date.
Since the purchase option is reasonably certain to be exercised, EFG would amortize the right-of- use
asset over the economic life of the underlying asset (40 years). Annual amortization expense would be
₹ 1,25,000 (₹ 50,00,000 / 40 years)
Interest expense on the lease liability would be calculated as shown in the following table. This table
includes all expected cash flows during the lease term, including the lease incentive paid by Entity H
and Company EFG’s purchase option.
Year Payment Principal paid at the Interest Interest Lease Liability (endof
beginningOf the year paid expense the year
a b= a-c c = (d of pvs. d = [(e of pvs. e = (e of pvs. Year+d – a)
Year) year- a) x 9.04%]
Commence 50,00,000
ment
Year 1 5,00,000 5,00,000 - 4,06,800 49,06,800
Year 2 3,15,000* (91,800) 4,06,800 4,15,099 50,06,899
Year 3 5,30,450 1,15,351 4,15,099 4,04,671 48,81,120
Year 4 5,46,364 1,41,693 4,04,671 3,91,862 47,26,618
Year 5 5,62,754 1,70,892 3,91,862 3,76,413 45,40,277
Year 6 5,79,637 2,03,224 3,76,413 3,58,042 43,18,682
Year 7 5,97,026 2,38,984 3,58,042 3,36,438 40,58,094
Year 8 6,14,937 2,78,499 3,36,438 3,11,261 37,54,418
Year 9 6,33,385 3,22,124 3,11,261 2,82,141 34,03,174
Year 10 6,52,387 3,70,246 2,82,141 2,49,213* 30,00,000
Year 10 30,00,000 27,50,787 2,49,213* - -
Total 85,31,940 50,00,000 35,31,940 35,31,940

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
*(5,00,000 + increased by 3% - lease incentive paid amounting to 2,00,000)
Although the lease was for 10 years, the asset had an economic life of 40 years. When Company EFG
exercises its purchase option at the end of the 10-year lease, it would have fully extinguished its lease
liability but continue depreciating the asset over the remaining useful life.
Working Notes
1. Calculating PV of lease payments, less lease incentive:
Year Lease Payment(A) Present value factor @ 9.04%(B) Present value of Lease payments
(A*B=C)
Year 1 5,00,000 1 5,00,000
Year 2 3,15,000 0.92 2,89,800
Year 3 5,30,450 0.84 4,45,578
Year 4 5,46,364 0.77 4,20,700
Year 5 5,62,754 0.71 3,99,555
Year 6 5,79,637 0.65 3,76,764
Year 7 5,97,026 0.59 3,52,245
Year 8 6,14,937 0.55 3,38,215
Year 9 6,33,385 0.50 3,16,693
Year 10 6,52,387 0.46 3,00,098
Total 37,39,648
2. Calculating PV of purchase option at end of lease term:
Year Payment on purchase Present value factor@ 9.04% Present value of purchase
option(A) (B) option(A*B=C)
Year 10 30,00,000 0.42 12,60,000
Total 12,60,000
The discount rate for year 10 is different in the above calculations because in the earlier one its
beginning of year 10 and in the later one its end of the year 10.
Illustration 32- Remeasurement of a lease with variable lease payments
Entity W entered into a contract for lease of retail store with Entity J on January 01/01/20X1. The initial term
of the lease is 5 years with a renewal option of further 3 years. The annual payments for initial term and
renewal term is ₹ 100,000 and ₹ 110,000 respectively. The annual lease payment will increase based on the
annual increase in the CPI at the end of the preceding year. For example, the payment due on
01/01/20X2 will be based on the CPI available at 31/12/20X1.
Entity W’s incremental borrowing rate at the lease inception date and as at 01/01/20X4 is 5% and 6%
respectively and the CPI at lease commencement date and as at 01/01/20X4 is 120 and 125 respectively.
At the lease commencement date, Entity W did not have a significant economic incentive to exercise the
renewal option. In the first quarter of 20X4, Entity W installed unique lease improvements into the retail
store with an estimated five-year economic life. Entity W determined that it would only recover the cost of
the improvements if it exercises the renewal option, creating a significant economic incentive to extend.
Is Entity W required to remeasure the lease in the first quarter of 20X4?
Solution:
Since Entity W is now reasonably certain that it will exercise its renewal option, it is required to
remeasure the
lease in the first quarter of 20X4.
The following table summarizes information pertinent to the lease remeasurement.
Remeasured lease term 5 years; 2 years remaining in the initial term
plus 3 years in the renewal period
Entity W’s incremental borrowing rate on the 6%
remeasurement date
CPI available on the remeasurement date 125
Right-of-use of asset immediately before the ₹ 1,81,840 (Refer note 1)
remeasurement
Lease liability immediately before the ₹ 1,95,244 (Refer note 1)
remeasurement
To remeasure the lease liability, Entity W would first calculate the present value of the future lease
payments for the new lease term (using the updated discount rate of 6%). The following table showsthe
present value of the future lease payments based on an updated CPI of 125. Since the initial lease
payments were based on a CPI of 120, the CPI has increased by 4.167% approx. As a result, Entity W
would increase the future lease payments by 4%. As shown in the table, there vised lease liability is ₹
4,91,376.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Year 4 5 6 7 8 Total
Lease payment 1,04,167 1,04,167 1,14,583 1,14,583 1,14,583 5,52,083
Discount 1 0.943 0.890 0.840 0.792
Present value 1,04,000 98,230 1,01,979 96,250 90,750 4,91,376
To calculate the adjustment to the lease liability, Entity W would compare the recalculated and original
lease liability balances on the remeasurement date.
Revised lease liability 4,91,376
Original lease liability (1,95,244)
2,96,132
Entity W would record the following journal entry to adjust the lease liability.
ROU Asset Dr. 2,96,132
To Lease liability 2,96,132
Being lease liability and ROU asset adjusted on account of remeasurement.
Working Notes:
1 Calculation of ROU asset before the date of remeasurement
Year Lease Payment (A) Present valuefactor @ Present value of lease
beginning 5% (B) payments (A x B=C)
1 1,00,000 1.000 1,00,000
2 1,00,000 0.952 95,200
3 1,00,000 0.907 90,700
4 1,00,000 0.864 86,400
5 1,00,000 0.823 82,300
Lease liability as at commencement date 4,54,600
2 Calculation of Lease Liability and ROU asset at each year end
Year Lease Liability ROU asset
Initial Lease Interest Closing Initial Depreciation Closing
value payments expense @ 5% balance Value for 5 years balance
1 4,54,600 1,00,000 17,730 3,72,330 4,54,600 90,920 3,63,680
2 3,72,330 1,00,000 13,617 2,85,947 3,63,680 90,920 2,72,760
3 2,85,947 1,00,000 9,297 1,95,244 2,72,760 90,920 1,81,840
4 1,95,244 1,81,840
Illustration 33 - Modification that is a separate lease
Lessee enters into a 10-year lease for 2,000 square metres of office space. At the beginning of Year 6,
Lessee and Lessor agree to amend the original lease for the remaining five years to include an additional 3,000
square metres of office space in the same building. The additional space is made available for use by Lessee
at the end of the second quarter of Year 6. The increase in total consideration for the lease is
commensurate with the current market rate for the new 3,000 square metres of office space, adjusted for
the discount that Lessee receives reflecting that Lessor does not incur costs that it would otherwise have
incurredif leasing the same space to a new tenant (for example, marketing costs).
How should the said modification be accounted for?
Solution:
Lessee accounts for the modification as a separate lease, separate from the original 10-year lease
because the modification grants Lessee an additional right to use an underlying asset, and the increase
in consideration for the lease is commensurate with the stand-alone price of the additional right-of-use
adjusted to reflect the circumstances of the contract. In this example, the additional underlying asset is the
new 3,000 square metres of office space. Accordingly, at the commencement date of the new lease (at
the end of the second quarter of Year 6), Lessee recognises a ROU Assetand a lease liability relating
to the lease of the additional 3,000 square metres of office space. Lessee does not make any
adjustments to the accounting for the original lease of 2,000 square metres of office space as a result
of this modification.
Illustration 34 - Modification that increases the scope of the lease by extending the contractual
lease term
Lessee enters into a 10-year lease for 5,000 square metres of office space. The annual lease payments are
₹ 1,00,000 payable at the end of each year. The interest rate implicit in the lease cannot be readily
determined. Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate at the commencement date is 6% p.a. At the beginning of
Year 7, Lessee and Lessor agree to amend the original lease by extending the contractual lease term by
four years. The annual lease payments are unchanged (i.e., ₹ 1,00,000 payable at the end of each year from
Year 7 to Year 14). Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate at the beginning of Year 7 is 7% p.a.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
At the effective date of the modification (at the beginning of Year 7), Lessee remeasures thelease
liability based on:
(a) An eight-year remaining lease term
(b) Annual payments of ₹ 1,00,000 and
(c) Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate of 7% p.a.
The modified lease liability equals ₹ 5,97,100 (W.N.1). The lease liability immediately before the
modification (including the recognition of the interest expense until the end of Year 6) is ₹ 3,46,355
(W.N.3). Lessee recognises the difference between the carrying amount of the modified lease liability
and the carrying amount of the lease liability immediately before the modification (i.e., ₹ 2,50,745) (W.N.4)
as an adjustment to the ROU Asset.
Working Notes:
1. Calculation of modified lease liability:
Year Lease Payment Present value factor@7% Present value of lease
(A) (B) payments (A*B=C)
7 100,000 0.935 93,500
8 100,000 0.873 87,300
9 100,000 0.816 81,600
10 100,000 0.763 76,300
11 100,000 0.713 71,300
12 100,000 0.666 66,600
13 100,000 0.623 62,300
14 100,000 0.582 58,200
Modified lease liability 5,97,100
2. Calculation of Lease liability as at commencement date:
1 100,000 0.943 94,300
2 100,000 0.890 89,000
3 100,000 0.840 84,000
4 100,000 0.792 79,200
5 100,000 0.747 74,700
6 100,000 0.705 70,500
7 100,000 0.665 66,500
8 100,000 0.627 62,700
9 100,000 0.592 59,200
10 100,000 0.558 55,800
Lease liability as at modification date 7,35,900
3. Calculation of Lease liability immediately before modification date:
Year Opening lease Interest @ 6% Lease payments(C) Closing liability
liability (A) (B) = [A x 6%] (D) = [A+B-C]
1 7,35,900 44,154 100,000 6,80,054
2 6,80,054 40,803 100,000 6,20,857
3 6,20,857 37,251 100,000 5,58,108
4 5,58,108 33,486 100,000 4,91,594
5 4,91,594 29,496 100,000 4,21,090
6 4,21,090 25,265 100,000 3,46,355
4. Adjustment to ROU asset:
Modified Lease liability 5,97,100
Original Lease liability as at modification date (3,46,355)
Adjustment to ROU asset 2,50,745
The ROU asset will be increased by ₹ 2,50,745 on the date of modification.
Illustration 35 - Modification that decreases the scope of the lease
₹ 50,000 payable at the end of each year. The interest rate implicit in the lease cannot be readilydetermined.
Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate at the commencement date is 6% p.a. At the beginning of Year 6,
Lessee and Lessor agree to amend the original lease to reduce the space to only 2,500 square metres of
the original space starting from the end of the first quarter of Year 6. The annual fixed lease payments (from
Year 6 to Year 10) are ₹ 30,000. Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate at the beginning of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Year 6 is 5% p.a.
Solution:
In the given case, Lessee calculates the ROU asset and the lease liabilities before modification as
follows:
Lease Liability ROU asset
Year Initial value Lease Interest Closing Initial Value Depreciation Closing balance
payments expense@6% balance
a b c = a x 6% d = a-b +c e f g
1 3,67,950* 50,000 22,077 3,40,027 3,67,950 36,795 3,31,155
2 3,40,027 50,000 20,402 3,10,429 3,31,155 36,795 2,94,360
3 3,10,429 50,000 18,626 2,79,055 2,94,360 36,795 2,57,565
4 2,79,055 50,000 16,743 2,45,798 2,57,565 36,795 2,20,770
5 2,45,798 50,000 14,748 2,10,546 2,20,770 36,795 1,83,975
6 2,10,546 1,83,975
*(refer note 1)
At the effective date of the modification (at the beginning of Year 6), Lessee remeasures the lease
liability based on:
(a) a five-year remaining lease term,
(b) annual payments of ₹ 30,000 and
Year Lease Payment(A) Present valuefactor @ 5% (B) Present value of lease
payments (A x B = C)
6 30,000 0.952 28,560
7 30,000 0.907 27,210
8 30,000 0.864 25,920
9 30,000 0.823 24,690
10 30,000 0.784 23,520
Total 1,29,900
Lessee determines the proportionate decrease in the carrying amount of the ROU Asset on the basis
of the remaining ROU Asset (i.e., 2,500 square metres corresponding to 50% of the original ROU
Asset).
50% of the pre-modification ROU Asset (₹ 1,83,975) is ₹ 91,987.50. 50% of the pre-modification lease
liability (₹ 2,10,546) is ₹ 1,05,273.
Consequently, Lessee reduces the carrying amount of the ROU Asset by ₹ 91,987.50 and the carrying
amount of the lease liability by ₹ 1,05,273. Lessee recognises the difference between the decrease in
the lease liability and the decrease in the ROU Asset (₹ 1,05,273 – ₹ 91,987.50 = ₹ 13,285.50) as a gain
in profit or loss at the effective date of the modification (at the beginning of Year 6).
Lessee recognises the difference between the remaining lease liability of ₹ 1,05,273 and the modified lease
liability of ₹ 1,29,900 (which equals ₹ 24,627) as an adjustment to the ROU Asset reflecting the change in
the consideration paid for the lease and the revised discount rate.
Working Note:
Calculation of Initial value of ROU asset and lease liability:
Year Lease Payment(A) Present value factor @6%(B) Present value of lease payments
(A x B = C)
1 50,000 0.943 47,150
2 50,000 0.890 44,500
3 50,000 0.840 42,000
4 50,000 0.792 39,600
5 50,000 0.747 37,350
6 50,000 0.705 35,250
7 50,000 0.665 33,250
8 50,000 0.627 31,350
9 50,000 0.592 29,600
10 50,000 0.558 27,900
3,67,950
Illustration 36 - Modification that is a change in consideration only
Lessee enters into a 10-year lease for 5,000 square metres of office space. At the beginning of Year 6,
Lessee and Lessor agree to amend the original lease for the remaining five years to reduce the lease payments

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
from ₹ 1,00,000 per year to ₹ 95,000 per year. The interest rate implicit in the lease cannot be readily
determined. Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate at the commencement date is 6% p.a. Lessee’s
incremental borrowing rate at the beginning of Year 6 is 7% p.a. The annual lease payments are payable at
the end of each year.
Solution:
In the given case, Lessee calculates the ROU asset and the lease liabilities before modificationas
follows:
Year Opening leaseliability Interest @ 6% Lease payments (C) Closing liability
(A) (B) = [A x 6%] (D) = [A+B-C]
1 7,35,900 44,154 100,000 6,80,054
2 6,80,054 40,803 100,000 6,20,857
3 6,20,857 37,251 100,000 5,58,108
4 5,58,108 33,486 100,000 4,91,594
5 4,91,594 29,496 100,000 4,21,090
6 4,21,090
liability based on:
(b) annual payments of ₹ 95,000, and
Year LeasePayments(A) Present value @7% (B) Present value of lease
1 95,000 0.935 88,825
2 95,000 0.873 82,935
3 95,000 0.816 77,520
4 95,000 0.763 72,485
5 95,000 0.713 67,735
3,89,500
Lessee recognises the difference between the carrying amount of the modified liability (₹ 3,89,500)
and the lease liability immediately before the modification (₹ 4,21,090) of ₹ 31,590 as an adjustment to
the ROU Asset.
Working Note: Calculation of Initial value of ROU asset and lease liability:
Year Lease Present value factor@ 6% Present value of lease
Payment(A) (B) payments (A x B = C)
1 1,00,000 0.943 94,300
2 1,00,000 0.890 89,000
3 1,00,000 0.840 84,000
4 1,00,000 0.792 79,200
5 1,00,000 0.747 74,700
6 1,00,000 0.705 70,500
7 1,00,000 0.665 66,500
8 1,00,000 0.627 62,700
9 1,00,000 0.592 59,200
10 1,00,000 0.558 55,800
Lease liability as at commencement date 7,35,900
Illustration 37 - Modification that both increases and decreases the scope of the lease
₹ 1,00,000 payable at the end of each year. The interest rate implicit in the lease cannot be readily
determined.Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate at the commencement date is 6% p.a.
At the beginning of Year 6, Lessee and Lessor agree to amend the original lease to:
(a) include an additional 1,500 square metres of space in the same building starting from the beginning of
Year 6 and
(b) reduce the lease term from 10 years to eight years. The annual fixed payment for the 3,500 square
metres is ₹ 1,50,000 payable at the end of each year (from Year 6 to Year 8). Lessee’s incremental
borrowing rate at the beginning of Year 6 is 7% p.a.
The consideration for the increase in scope of 1,500 square metres of space is not commensurate with the
stand-alone price for that increase adjusted to reflect the circumstances of the contract. Consequently, Lessee
does not account for the increase in scope that adds the right to use an additional 1,500 square metres of space

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
as a separate lease.
Solution:
The pre-modification ROU Asset and the pre-modification lease liability in relation to the lease are as
follows:
Lease liability ROU Asset
Year Opening Interest Lease Closing Opening Depreciation Closing
balance Expense@ 6% payment balance balance charge balance
1 7,35,900* 44,154 (1,00,000) 6,80,054 7,35,900 (73,590) 6,62,310
2 6,80,054 40,803 (1,00,000) 6,20,857 6,62,310 (73,590) 5,88,720
3 6,20,857 37,251 (1,00,000) 5,58,108 5,88,720 (73,590) 5,15,130
4 5,58,108 33,486 (1,00,000) 4,91,594 5,15,130 (73,590) 4,41,540
5 4,91,594 29,496 (1,00,000) 4,21,090 4,41,540 (73,590) 3,67,950
6 4,21,090 3,67,950
*Refer Note 4.
liability on the basis of:
(a) A three-year remaining lease term (ie. till 8th year),
(b) Annual payments of ₹ 150,000 and
Year Lease Payments (A) Present value @7% (B) Present value of
leasepayments (A x B = C)
1 1,50,000 0.935 1,40,250
2 1,50,000 0.873 1,30,950
3 1,50,000 0.816 1,22,400
Modified lease liability 3,93,600
The modified liability equals ₹ 3,93,600, of which (a) ₹ 1,31,200 relates to the increase of ₹ 50,000 in
the annual lease payments from Year 6 to Year 8 and (refer note 1) (b) ₹ 2,62,400 relates to the remaining
three annual lease payments of ₹ 1,00,000 from Year 6 to Year 8 with reduction of lease term
(Refer Note 3)
Decrease in the lease term:
At the effective date of the modification (at the beginning of Year 6), the pre-modification ROU Asset is
₹ 3,67,950. Lessee determines the proportionate decrease in the carrying amount of the ROU Asset
based on the remaining ROU Asset for the original 2,000 square metres of office space (i.e., a
remaining three-year lease term rather than the original five-year lease term). The remaining ROU
Asset for the original 2,000 square metres of office space is ₹ 2,20,770 [i.e., ₹ (3,67,950 / 5) x 3
years].
At the effective date of the modification (at the beginning of Year 6), the pre-modification lease liability
is ₹ 4,21,090. The remaining lease liability for the original 2,000 square metres of office space is ₹
2,67,300 (i.e., present value of three annual lease payments of ₹ 1,00,000, discounted at the original
discount rate of 6% p.a.) (refer note 2).
Consequently, Lessee reduces the carrying amount of the ROU Asset by ₹ 1,47,180 (₹ 3,67,950 – ₹
2,20,770), and the carrying amount of the lease liability by ₹ 1,53,790 (₹ 4,21,090 – ₹ 2,67,300).
Lessee recognises the difference between the decrease in the lease liability and the decrease in the
ROU Asset (₹ 1,53,790 – ₹ 1,47,180 = ₹ 6,610) as a gain in profit or loss at the effective date of the
modification (at the beginning of Year 6).
Lease Liability Dr. 1,53,790
To ROU Asset 1,47,180
To Gain 6,610
At the effective date of the modification (at the beginning of Year 6), Lessee recognises the effect of
the remeasurement of the remaining lease liability reflecting the revised discount rate of 7% p.a., which is
₹ 4,900 (₹ 2,67,300 – ₹ 2,62,400*), as an adjustment to the ROU Asset.
*(Refer note 3)
Lease Liability Dr. 4,900
To ROU Asset 4,900
Increase in the leased space:
At the commencement date of the lease for the additional 1,500 square metres of space (at the
beginning of Year 6), Lessee recognises the increase in the lease liability related to the increasein
leased space of ₹ 1,31,200 (i.e., present value of three annual lease payments of ₹ 50,000, discounted at
the revised interest rate of 7% p.a.) as an adjustment to the ROU Asset.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
To Lease Liability 1,31,200
The modified ROU Asset and the modified lease liability in relation to the modified lease are asfollows:
Lease liability ROU Asset
Opening Interest Expense Lease Closing Opening Depreciation Closing
Year balance @ 7% payment balance balance charge balance
6 3,93,600 27,552 (1,50,0 2,71,152 3,47,070** (1,15,690) 2,31,380
00)
7 2,71,152 18,981 (1,50,00 1,40,133 2,31,380 (1,15,690) 1,15,690
0)
8 1,40,133 9,867* (1,50,00 - 1,15,690 (1,15,690) -
0)
*Difference is due to approximation.
**Refer Note 5
Working Notes:
1 Calculation of lease liability on increased consideration:
Year Lease Payments (A) Present value @7% (B) Present value of lease
1 50,000 0.935 46,750
2 50,000 0.873 43,650
3 50,000 0.816 40,800
Modifiedleaseliability 1,31,200
2 Calculation of remaining lease liability for the original contract of 2000 square meters at
Original discount rate:
Year Lease Payments Present value factor Present value of lease payments
(A) @6%(B) (A x B = C)
1 1,00,000 0.943 94,300
2 1,00,000 0.890 89,000
3 1,00,000 0.840 84,000
Remaining lease liability 2,67,300
3 Calculation of remaining lease liability for the original contract of 2000 squaremeters at
revised discount rate:
Year Lease Payments (A) Present value factor@7%(B) Present value of leasepayments
(A x B = C)
1 1,00,000 0.935 93,500
2 1,00,000 0.873 87,300
3 1,00,000 0.816 81,600
Remaining lease liability 2,62,400
4 Calculation of Initial value of ROU asset and lease liability:
Year Lease Payment(A) Present value factor@6%(B) Present value of lease payments
(A x B = C)
1 100,000 0.943 94,300
2 100,000 0.890 89,000
3 100,000 0.840 84,000
4 100,000 0.792 79,200
5 100,000 0.747 74,700
6 100,000 0.705 70,500
7 100,000 0.665 66,500
8 100,000 0.627 62,700
9 100,000 0.592 59,200
10 100,000 0.558 55,800
5 Calculation of opening balance of Modified ROU Asset at the beginning of 6th year:
The remaining ROU Asset for the original 2,000 square metres of office spaceafter
decrease in term 2,20,770
Less: Adjustment for increase in interest rate from 6% to 7% (4,900)
Add: Adjustment for increase in leased space 1,31,200
3,47,070

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 38 - Lessor accounting for a finance lease dealer-lessor case
A Lessor enters into a 10-year lease of equipment with Lessee. The equipment is not specialised in
natureand is expected to have alternative use to Lessor at the end of the 10-year lease term. Under the lease:
 Lessor receives annual lease payments of ₹ 15,000, payable at the end of the year
 Lessor expects the residual value of the equipment to be ₹ 50,000 at the end of the 10-year
leaseterm
 Lessee provides a residual value guarantee that protects Lessor from the first ₹ 30,000 of loss for
a sale at a price below the estimated residual value at the end of the lease term (i.e.,₹ 50,000)
 The equipment has an estimated remaining economic life of 15 years, a carrying amount of ₹
1,00,000 and a fair value of ₹ 1,11,000
 The lease does not transfer ownership of the underlying asset to Lessee at the end of the
leaseterm or contain an option to purchase the underlying asset
 The interest rate implicit in the lease is 10.078%.
How should the Lessor account for the same in its books of accounts?
Solution:
Lessor shall classify the lease as a FINANCE LEASE because the sum of the present value of lease
payments amounts to substantially all of the fair value of the underlying asset.
At lease commencement, Lessor accounts for the finance lease, as follows:
Net investment in the lease ₹ 1,11,000 (a)
Cost of goods sold ₹ 92,340 (b)
Revenue ₹ 1,03,340(c)
Property held for lease ₹ 1,00,000(d)
To record the net investment in the finance lease and derecognise the underlying asset.
(a) The net investment in the lease consists of:
(1) the present value of 10 annual payments of ₹ 15,000 plus the guaranteed residual value of
₹ 30,000, both discounted at the interest rate implicit in the lease, which equals ₹ 1,03,340 (i.e.,
the lease payment) (Refer note 1) AND the present value of unguaranteed residual asset of
₹ 20,000, which equals ₹ 7,660 (Refer note 2)
Note: that the net investment in the lease is subject to the same considerations as other assets in
classificationas current or non-current assets in a classified balance sheet.
(b) Cost of goods sold is the carrying amount of the equipment of ₹ 1,00,000 (less) the present
value of the unguaranteed residual asset of ₹ 7,660.
(c) Revenue equals the lease receivable.
(d) The carrying amount of the underlying asset.
At lease commencement, Lessor recognises selling profit of ₹ 11,000 which is calculated as = lease
payment of ₹ 1,03,340 – [carrying amount of the asset (₹ 1,00,000) – net of any unguaranteed residual
asset (₹ 7,660) ie which equals ₹ 92,340]
Year 1 Journal entry for a finance lease
Cash ₹ 15,000(e)
Net investment in the lease ₹ 3,813(f)
Interest income ₹ 11,187(g)
(e) Receipt of annual lease payments at the end of the year.
(f) Reduction of the net investment in the lease for lease payments received of ₹ 15,000, net of
interest income of ₹ 11,187
(g) Interest income is the amount that produces a constant periodic discount rate on the remaining
balance of the net investment in the lease. Please refer the computation below:
(h) The following table summarises the interest income from this lease and the related amortisation
of the net investment over the lease term:
Year Annual Rental Annual Interest Income(h) Net investment at the
Payment end Of the year
Initial net investment - - 1,11,000
1 15,000 11,187 1,07,187
2 15,000 10,802 1,02,989
3 15,000 10,379 98,368
4 15,000 9,914 93,282
5 15,000 9,401 87,683
6 15,000 8,837 81,520
7 15,000 8,216 74,736

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
8 15,000 7,532 67,268
9 15,000 6,779 59,047
10 15,000 5,953 50,000(i)
(i) Interest income equals 10.078% of the net investment in the lease at the beginning of each year.
For e.g., Year 1 annual interest income is calculated as ₹ 1,11,000 (initial net investment) x 10.078%. The
estimated residual value of the equipment at the end of the lease term.
Working Notes:
1 Calculation of net investment in lease:
Year Lease Payment(A) Present value factor @ Present value of lease
10.078% (B) payments(Ax B = C)
1 15,000 0.908 13,620
2 15,000 0.825 12,375
3 15,000 0.750 11,250
4 15,000 0.681 10,215
5 15,000 0.619 9,285
6 15,000 0.562 8,430
7 15,000 0.511 7,665
8 15,000 0.464 6,960
9 15,000 0.421 6,315
10 15,000 0.383 5,745
10 30,000 0.383 11,480*
1,03,340
*Figure has been rounded off for equalization of journal entry.
2 Calculation of present value of unguaranteed residual asset
Year Lease Payment(A) Present value factor @ Present value of lease
10.078% (B) payments(A x B = C)
10 20,000 0.383 7,660
Illustration 39- Deferral of lease payments not a lease modification
Lessor L leases retail space to Lessee Z and classifies the lease as an operating lease. The lease includes
fixedlease payments of ₹ 10,000 per month.
Due to the COVID-19 pandemic, L and Z agree on a rent concession that allows Z to pay no renting the
period from July, 2020 to September 2020 but to pay rent of 20,000 per month in the period from January
2021 to March 2021. There are no other changes to the lease.
How this will be accounted for by lessor?
Solution:
L determines that the reduction in lease payments in July 2020 to September 2020 and the proportional
increase in January 2021 to March 2021 does not result in an overall change in the consideration for the
lease.
L does not account for the change as a lease modification. L continues to recognise operating lease
income on a straight-line basis, which is representative of the pattern in which Z’s benefit from use of
the underlying asset is diminished
Illustration 40 - Unamortised lease incentive: Lease modification
Lessor M enters into a 10-year lease of office space with Lessee K, which commences on 1 April2015.
The rental payments are 15,000 per month, payable in arrears. M classifies the lease as an operating lease. M
reimburses K’s relocation costs of K of 600,000, which M accounts for as a lease incentive. The lease
incentive is recognised as a reduction in rental income over the lease term using the same basis as for the
lease income – in this case, on a straight- line basis over 10 years.
On 1 April 2020, during the COVID-19 pandemic, M agrees to waive K’s rental payments for May, June
andJuly 2020.
This decrease in consideration is not included in the original terms and conditions of the lease and is
therefore a lease modification.
Solution:
M accounts for this modification as a new operating lease from its effective date – i.e. 1 April 2020. M
recognises the impact of the waiver on a straight-line basis over the five-year term of the new lease. M
also takes into account the carrying amount of the unamortised lease incentive on 1 April 2020 of ₹
3,00,000. M amortises this balance on a straight-line basis over the five-year term of the new lease.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 41 - Modification that is not a separate lease and lease would have been classified as
an operating lease
Lessor L enters into an eight-year lease of 40 lorries with Lessee M that commences on 1 January 2018.
The lease term approximates the lorries’ economic life and no other features indicate that the lease transfer or
does not transfer substantially all of the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of the lorries. Assuming
that substantially all of the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of the lorries are transferred, L classifies the
lease as a finance lease.
During the COVID-19 pandemic, M’s business has contracted. In June 2020, L and M amend the contract
so that it now terminates on 31 December 2020.
Early termination was not part of the original terms and conditions of the lease and this is therefore a lease
modification. The modification does not grant M an additional right to use the underlying assets and
therefore cannot be accounted for as a separate lease.
Solution:
L determines that, had the modified terms been effective at the inception date, the lease term would
not have been for the major part of the lorries’ economic life. Furthermore, there are no otherindicators
that the lease would have transferred substantially all of the risks and rewards incidental to ownership
of the lorries. Therefore, the lease would have been classified as an operating lease.
In June 2020, L accounts for the modified lease as a new operating lease. The lessor L:
a) De-recognises the finance lease receivable and recognises the underlying assets in its
statement of financial position according to the nature of the underlying asset – i.e., as
property, plant and equipment in this case; and
b) measures the aggregate carrying amount of the underlying assets as the amount of the net
investment in the lease immediately before the effective date of the lease modification.
Illustration 42 - Classification of a sublease in case of an Intermediate Lessor
Entity ABC (original lessee/intermediate lessor) leases a building for five years. The building has an
economic life of 40 years. Entity ABC subleases the building for four years.
How should the said sublease be classified by Entity ABC?
Solution:
The sublease is classified with reference to the ‘ROU Asset’ in the head lease (and NOT the
‘underlying building’ of the head lease). Hence, when assessing the useful life criterion, the
sublease term of four years is compared with five-year ROU Asset in the head lease (NOT compared
with 40-year economic life of the building) and accordingly may result in the sublease being classified
as a finance lease.
Illustration 43 - Intermediate Lessor – Where the sublease is classified as a ‘Finance Lease’
Head lease:
An intermediate lessor enters into a five-year lease for 10,000 square metres of office space (the head
lease)with Entity XYZ (the head lessor).
Sublease:
At the beginning of Year 3, the intermediate lessor subleases the 10,000 square metres of office space for the
remaining lease term i.e three years of the head lease to a sub-lessee.
How should the said sublease be classified and accounted for by the Intermediate Lessor?
Solution:
The intermediate lessor classifies the sublease by reference to the ROU Asset arising from the head lease
(i.e., in this case, comparing the three-year sublease with the five-year ROU Asset in the head lease).
The intermediate lessor classifies the sublease as a finance lease, having considered the requirements of
Ind AS 116 (i.e., one of the criteria of ‘useful life’ for a lease to be classified as a finance lease).
When the intermediate lessor enters into a sublease, the intermediate lessor:
(i) derecognises the ROU asset relating to the head lease that it transfers to the sublease and
recognises the net investment in the sublease;
(ii) recognises any difference between the ROU asset and the net investment in the sublease in
profit or loss; AND
(iii) retains the lease liability relating to the head lease in its balance sheet, which represents the
lease payments owed to the head lessor.
During the term of the sublease, the intermediate lessor recognises both
- finance income on the sublease AND
- interest expense on the head lease.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 44 - Intermediate Lessor – Where the sublease is classified as a ‘Operating Lease’
Head lease:
An intermediate lessor enters into a five-year lease for 10,000 square metres of office space (the head
lease) with Entity XYZ (the head lessor).
Sublease:
At the commencement of the head lease, the intermediate lessor subleases the 10,000 square metres of office
space for two years to a sub-lessee.
How should the said sublease be classified and accounted for by the Intermediate Lessor?
Solution:
The intermediate lessor classifies the sublease by reference to the ROU Asset arising from the head
lease (i.e., in this case, comparing the two-year sublease with the five-year ROU Asset in the head
lease). The intermediate lessor classifies the sublease as an operating lease, havingconsidered the
requirements of Ind AS 116 (i.e., one of the criteria of ‘useful life’ for a lease to be classified as a
finance lease and since, it is not satisfied, classified the same as an operating lease). When the
intermediate lessor enters into the sublease, the intermediate lessor retains:
• the lease liability AND the ROU asset both relating to the head lease in its balance sheet.
During the term of the sublease, the intermediate lessor:
(a) recognises a depreciation charge for the ROU asset and interest on the lease liability;AND
(b) recognises lease income from the sublease.
Sub-lessee Accounting:
A sub-lessee accounts for its lease in the same manner as any other lease (i.e., as a new lease
subject to Ind AS 116’s recognition and measurement provisions).
Illustration 45 - Sale and leaseback transaction
An entity (Seller-lessee) sells a building to another entity (Buyer-lessor) for cash of ₹ 30,00,000. Immediately
before the transaction, the building is carried at a cost of ₹ 15,00,000. At the same time, Seller-lessee
entersinto a contract with Buyer-lessor for the right to use the building for 20 years, with annual payments
of ₹ 2,00,000 payable at the end of each year.
The terms and conditions of the transaction are such that the transfer of the building by Seller- lessee satisfies
the requirements for determining when a performance obligation is satisfied in Ind AS 115 Revenue from
Contracts with Customers.
The fair value of the building at the date of sale is ₹ 27,00,000. Initial direct costs, if any, are to be ignored.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is 12% p.a., which is readily determinable by Seller-lessee.
Buyer-lessor classifies the lease of the building as an operating lease.
How should the said transaction be accounted by the Seller-lessee and the Buyer-lessor?
Solution:
Considering facts of the case, Seller-lessee and buyer-lessor account for the transaction as a sale and
lease back.
Firstly, since the consideration for the sale of the building is not at fair value, Seller- lessee and Buyer
- lessor make adjustments to measure the sale proceeds at fair value. Thus, the amount of theexcess
sale price of ₹ 3,00,000 (as calculated below) is recognised as additional financing provided by Buyer-
lessor to Seller-lessee.
Sale Price: 30,00,000
Less: Fair Value (at the date of sale): (27,00,000)
Additional financing provided by Buyer-lessor to Seller-lessee 3,00,000
Next step would be to calculate the present value of the annual payments which amounts to ₹
14,94,000 (calculated considering 20 payments of ₹ 2,00,000 each, discounted at 12% p.a.) of which ₹
3,00,000 relates to the additional financing (as calculated above) and balance ₹ 11,94,000 relates to
the lease — corresponding to 20 annual payments of ₹ 40,164 and ₹ 1,59,836, respectively (refer
calculations below).
Proportion of annual lease payments:
Present value of lease payments (as calculated above)(A) 14,94,000
Additional financing provided (as calculated above) (B) 3,00,000
Relating to the Additional financing provided (C) = (E x B / A) 40,160
Relating to the Lease (D) = (E – C) 1,59,840
Annual payments (at the end of each year) (E) 2,00,000
Seller-Lessee:
At the commencement date, Seller-lessee measures the ROU asset arising from the leaseback of the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
building at the proportion of the previous carrying amount of the building that relatesto the right-of- use
retained by Seller-lessee, calculated as follows:
Carrying Amount (A) 15,00,000
Fair Value (at the date of sale) (B) 27,00,000
Discounted lease payments for the 20-year ROU asset(C) 11,94,000
ROU Asset [(A / B) x C] 6,63,333
Seller-lessee recognises only the amount of the gain that relates to the rights transferred to Buyer-lessor,
Fair Value (at the date of sale) (A) 27,00,000
Carrying Amount (B) 15,00,000
Gain on sale of building (D) = (A - B) 12,00,000
Relating to the right to use the building retained by Seller-lessee (E) = [(D / A)x C] 5,30,667
Relating to the rights transferred to Buyer-lessor (D - E) 6,69,333
At the commencement date, Seller-lessee accounts for the transaction, as follows:
Cash Dr. 30,00,000
To Building 15,00,000
To Financial Liability 14,94,000
To Gain on rights transferred 6,69,333
Buyer-Lessor:
At the commencement date, Buyer-lessor accounts for the transaction, as follows:
Building Dr. 27,00,000
Financial Asset (20 payments of ₹ 40,160 discounted @ 12% p.a.)(approx.) 3,00,000
Dr.
To Cash 30,00,000
After the commencement date, Buyer-lessor accounts for the lease by treating ₹ 1,59,840 of the annual
payments of ₹ 2,00,000 as lease payments. The remaining ₹ 40,160 of annual payments received from
Seller-lessee are accounted for as:
(a) payments received to settle the financial asset of ₹ 3,00,000 AND
(b) interest revenue.
Illustration 46 - Transition Approaches
A retailer (lessee) entered into 3-year lease of retail space beginning at 1 April 2017 with three annual lease
payments of ₹ 2,00,000 due on 31 March 2018, 2019 and 2020, respectively. The lease is classified as an
operating lease under Ind AS 17. The retailer initially applies Ind AS 116 for the first time in the annual
period beginning at 1 April 2019. The incremental borrowing rate at the date of the initial application (i.e., 1 April
2019) is 10% p.a. and at the commencement of the lease (i.e., 1 April 2017) was 12% p.a. The ROU asset
is subject to straight-line depreciation over the lease term. Assume that no practical expedients are elected,
the lessee did not incurinitial direct costs, there were no lease incentives and there were no requirements
for the lessee to dismantle and remove the underlying asset, restore the site on which it is located or
restore the underlying asset to the condition under the terms and conditions of the lease. What would be the
impact for the lessee using all the following transition approaches: Full Retrospective Approach
Modified Retrospective Approach
- Alternative 1
- Alternative 2
Solution:
Full Retrospective Approach:
Under the full retrospective approach, the lease liability and the ROU asset are measured on the
commencement date (i.e., 1 April 2017 in this case) using the incremental borrowing rate at lease
commencement date (i.e., 12% p.a. in this case). The lease liability is accounted for by the interest
method subsequently and the ROU asset is subject to depreciation on the straight-line basis over
the lease term of three years. Let us first calculate the Lease Liability and ROU Asset as follows:
Year Payments Present Value Factor Discounted Cash flows
(Cashflows) @12% / Present Value

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
31 Mar 2018 2,00,000 0.8929 1,78,580
31 Mar 2019 2,00,000 0.7972 1,59,440
31 Mar 2020 2,00,000 0.7118 1,42,360
6,00,000 4,80,380
Lease Liability Schedule:
Year Opening Interest Expense@ 12% Payments Closing
31Mar2018 4,80,380 57,646 (2,00,000) 3,38,026
31 Mar 2019 3,38,026 40,563 (2,00,000) 1,78,589
31 Mar 2020 1,78,589 21,411* (2,00,000) -
ROU Asset Schedule:
Year Opening Depreciation Closing
31 Mar 2018 4,80,380 (1,60,126) 3,20,254
31 Mar 2019 3,20,254 (1,60,127) 1,60,127
31 Mar 2020 1,60,127 (1,60,127) -
The following table shows account balances under this method beginning at lease commencement:
Date ROU Lease Interest Depreciation Retained
Asset Liability Expense Expense Earnings
01 Apr 2017 4,80,380 4,80,380 - - -
31 Mar 2018 3,20,254 3,38,026 - - -
01 Apr 2018 3,20,254 3,38,026 (17,772)
31 Mar 2019 1,60,127 1,78,589 40,563 1,60,127 -
01 Apr 2019 1,60,127 1,78,589 - - -
31 Mar 2020 - - 21,411 1,60,127 -
Ind AS 116 is applicable for the financial year beginning from 1st April 2019. Hence, 2019- 20 is the
first year of adoption and using Full retrospective method the comparative for 2018-19 needs to be
restated and 1st April 2018 (i.e the opening of the comparative) is taken as transition date for adoption
of this standard. At adoption, the lessee would record the ROU asset and lease liability at the 1 April
2018 by taking values from the above table, with the difference between the ROU asset and lease
liability going to retained earnings as of 1 April 2018 (assuming that only the 2018-19 financial
information is included as comparatives).
Retained Earnings Dr. 17,772
To initially recognise the lease-related asset and liability as of 1 April 2018.
The following journal entries would be recorded during 2018-2019
To record interest expense and accrete the lease liability using the interest method.
Depreciation expense Dr. 1,65,787

To record depreciation expense on the ROU asset.

To Cash 2,00,000
To record lease payment.
Note 1:
Calculation of Present value of lease payments as at commencement date i.e., 01/04/2017
Year Payments Discounting Factor@10% Discounted Cash
(Cash flows) flows / Present Value
31 Mar 2018 2,00,000 0.9091 1,81,820
31 Mar 2019 2,00,000 0.8264 1,65,280
31 Mar 2020 2,00,000 0.7513 1,50,260

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
6,00,000 4,97,360
Year Opening Interest Expense@ 10% Payments Closing
31 Mar2018 4,97,360 49,736 (2,00,000) 3,47,096
31 Mar 2019 3,47,096 34,710 (2,00,000) 1,81,806
31 Mar 2020 1,81,806 18,194* (2,00,000) -
Calculation of ROU asset as at transition date i.e., April 01, 2019
31 Mar 2018 4,97,360 (1,65,786) 3,31,574
31 Mar 2019 3,31,574 (1,65,787) 1,65,787
31 Mar 2020 1,65,787 (1,65,787) -
Modified Retrospective Approach (Alternative 2):
Under the modified retrospective approach (Alternative 2), the lease liability is also measured based
on the remaining lease payments (i.e., from the date of transition to the lease end date, viz., 01
April 2019 to 31 March 2020 in this case) discounted using the incremental borrowing rate asof the date
of initial application being 01 April 2019 (i.e., 10% p.a. in this case). The carrying amount of the ROU
asset is an amount equal to the carrying amount of the lease liability on the date of initial application
as there are no prepayments or accrual items and hence, no impact on retained earnings as on the
transition date.
Let us first calculate the Lease Liability and ROU Asset as follows:
Year Payments (Cashflows) Discounting Factor @ 10% Discounted Cash flows /
Present Value
31 Mar 2020 2,00,000 0.9091 1,81,820
2,00,000 1,81,820
Year Opening Interest Expense Payments Closing
31 Mar 2020 1,81,820 18,182 (2,00,000) -
ROU Asset Schedule:
31 Mar 2020 1,81,820 (1,81,820) -
The following table shows account balances under this method beginning at lease commencement:
Date ROU Asset Lease Interest Depreciation RetainedEarnings
Liability Expense Expense
01 Apr 2019 1,81,820 1,81,820 - - -
31 Mar2020 - - 18,182 1,81,820 -
At adoption, the lessee would record the ROU asset and lease liability at the 1 April 2019 by taking
values from the above table and there will be no impact on retained earnings on the transition date
being 1 April 2019 since under this alternative, ROU Asset is equal to the Lease Liability.
To initially recognise the lease-related asset and liability as of 1 April 2019.
The following journal entries would be recorded during 2019-20:
To record interest expense and accrete the lease liability using the interest method.
Depreciation expense Dr. 1,81,820
To record depreciation expense on the ROU asset.

To Cash 2,00,000
To record lease payment.
A summary of the lease contract’s accounting (assuming there are no changes due to reassessments)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
is, as follows:
Particulars Full Retrospective Modified Retrospective Modified Retrospective
Approach Approach (Alternative 1) Approach (Alternative 2)
Opening balance sheet impact as on 1 April 2019:
ROU Asset 1,60,126 1,65,787 1,81,820
Lease Liability 1,78,589 1,81,806 1,81,820
Period ended 31 March 2020 activity:
Cash lease payments 2,00,000 2,00,000 2,00,000
Lease payments recognised:
Interest expense 21,411 18,194 18,182
Depreciation expense 1,60,127 1,65,787 1,81,820
Total periodic expense 1,81,538 1,83,981 2,00,002
Illustration 47 Revised consideration is substantially the same as or less than the original
consideration
Retailer Q leases a store in a large retail mall. The rent payable is ₹ 1,00,000 per month. As a resultof the
COVID-19 pandemic, Q agrees with the lessor to defer the rent originally due in the months April, 2020 to
June, 2020.
As part of this agreement, the rent for the period January, 2021 to March 2021 will be increased by ₹
1,10,000 per month, which compensates the lessor for the deferred rent as adjusted for the time value of
money.
Whether the rent deferral is eligible for the practical expedient if the other conditions are met?
Solution:
The rent deferral satisfies the criteria to apply the practical expedient because:
(1) It is a rent concession occurring as a direct consequence of the pandemic;
(2) Increase in rentals during January, 2021 to March 2021 compensates for the time value ofmoney;
(3) Rent deferral reduces lease payments originally due on or before 30 June 2021; and
(4) There is no substantive change to other terms and conditions of the lease. Hence, Q
considers applying the practical expedient.
Illustration 48 - Consider only payments that were originally due on or before 30 June, 2021
Lessee P operates a chain of restaurants and leases several outlets. As a result of COVID-19 pandemic, P
agrees a rent deferral with the lessor.
Under the terms of the rent deferral, rent originally due in the period July 2020 to December 2020 will be
added to the rent due in the period July 2021 to December 2021.
Whether the rent deferral is eligible for the practical expedient if the other conditions are met?
Solution:
The rent deferral satisfies the criteria to apply the practical expedient because:
(1) It is a rent concession occurring as a direct consequence of the pandemic;
(2) Recovery of rentals during July, 2021 to December, 2021 is substantially the same as, or
less than, the consideration for the lease immediately preceding the change;
(3) Rent deferral reduces lease payments originally due on or before 30 June 2021; and
(4) There is no substantive change to other terms and conditions of the lease.
Therefore, P concludes that the rent deferral meets the ‘payments due’ eligibility criterion.
Illustration 49 - Reduction in rent payments that extends beyond 30 June 2021
Lessee T leases office buildings from a lessor. As a result of the COVID-19 pandemic, in September 2020,
T agrees a rent concession with the lessor, under which the monthly rent will be reduced by 50% per month
forthe 12 months commencing 1 October 2020.
Whether the rent deferral is eligible for the practical expedient if the other conditionsare met?
Solution:
The rent deferral does not satisfies the criteria to apply the practical expedient because out of the
listed eligibility criteria given in para 46B of Ind AS 116, rent deferral reduces lease payments starting
from October, 2020 and reduction will continue till September, 2021 which is beyond 30 June 2021.
Therefore, T is not permitted to apply the practical expedient.
Illustration 50- Deferral of rent payments by extending the lease term
A lessee is granted a rent concession by the lessor whereby the lease payments for the period April 2020
to June 2020 are deferred. Three months are added to the end of the lease term at the same monthlyrent,
and the lessee repays the deferred rent during those additional months. The rent concession is a direct
consequence of COVID-19.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Whether the rent deferral is eligible for the practical expedient?
Solution:
The lessee considers applying the practical expedient. In considering whether this rentconcession is
eligible for the practical expedient, the lessee notes the following.
Firstly, the revised consideration in the lease is substantially the same as the original – i.e. the
condition in paragraph 46B(a) of Ind AS 116 is met.
Secondly, the rent concession only reduces lease payments originally due in 2020 – i.e.before 30 June
2021 – so the condition in paragraph 46B (b) of Ind AS 116 is met.
Thirdly, there is a change in the lease term – an extension by three months.
There is no explicit guidance on what is considered ‘substantive’. Judgement will need to be applied,
considering both qualitative and quantitative factors. The lessee assesses that three- month extension
at the end of the lease term with substantially the same lease payments, would not constitute a
substantive change.
Hence, the condition in paragraph 46B (c) of Ind AS 116 is met. Since, the rent concession is a direct
consequence of COVID-19 and all three conditions in paragraph 46B of Ind AS 116 are met, the lessee
concludes that the rent concession is eligible for application of practical expedient.
Illustration 51- Forgiveness of lease payments
Lessee Z entered into a lease contract with Lessor L to lease 1,500 sqm of retail space for five
years. The lease commenced on 1 April 2018 and the rental payments are 100,000 payable quarterly in
advance on
1 April, 1 July, 1 October and 1 January. Z’s incremental borrowing rate at commencement of the lease is
5% (assume that the interest rate implicit in the lease cannot be readily determined). There are no initial
direct costs, lease incentives or dismantling costs.
Z’s business is severely impacted by the COVID-19 pandemic and L and Z negotiate a rent concession. On
1 June 2020, L agrees to provide Z with an unconditional rent concession that allows Z to forego payment
of its rent due on 1 July – i.e. L forgives Z the rent payment of 100,000 due on 1 July.
What will be the accounting treatment in the books of lessee for rent concessions assuming that it is eligible
for practical expedient?
Solution:
Z determines that the rent concession is eligible for the practical expedient.
Applying the practical expedient, Z should account for the forgiveness of rent as a negative variable
lease payment. The rent concession is unconditional, so the event that triggers the variable lease
payment is the agreement between Z and L for the rent concession on 1 June 2020.
Therefore, Z accounts for the rent concession as a negative variable lease payment on 1 June.
Assuming that there are no other changes to the lease, Z continues to use the retail space and the
right-of-use asset is not impaired. The lease accounting entries will be as follows:
• recognise the rent concession as a variable lease payment in profit or loss (i.e., record a debit to
the lease liability and a corresponding credit in the income statement); and
• continue to accrue interest on the lease liability at the unchanged incremental borrowing rate
of 5% (i.e. record a debit to interest expense and a corresponding credit to the lease liability).
After accounting for the impact of the rent concession, Z’s lease liability represents the present value
of all future lease payments owing to L, discounted at the unchanged incremental borrowing rate. Z
has effectively derecognised the portion of the lease liability that has been extinguished by the
forgiveness of the quarterly lease payment due on 1 July 2020.
In addition, Z continues to depreciate the carrying amount of the right-of-use asset, which is
unchanged as a result of the rent concession.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
A lessee enters into a ten-year contract with a lessor (freight carrier) to transport a specified quantity of goods.
Lessor uses rail wagons of a particular specification, and has a large poolof similar rail wagons that can be
used to fulfil the requirements of the contract. The rail wagons and engines are stored at lessor’s premises
when they are not being used to transport goods. Costs associated with substituting the rail wagons are
minimal for lessor.
Whether the lessor has substantive substitutions rights and whether the arrangement contains a lease?
Solution:
In this case, the rail wagons are stored at lessor’s premises and it has a large pool of similar rail
wagons and substitution costs to be incurred are minimal. Thus, the lessor has the practical ability to

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
substitute the asset. If at any point, the same become economically beneficial for the lessor to
substitute the wagons, he can do so and hence, the lessor’s substitution rights are substantive and the
arrangement does not contain a lease.
Question 02:
Customer M enters into a 20-year contract with Energy Supplier S to install, operate and maintain a solar
plant for M’s energy supply. M designed the solar plant before it was constructed – M hired experts in solar
energy to assist in determining the location of the plant and the engineering of the equipment to be used. M
has the exclusive right to receive and the obligation to take any energy produced. Whether it can be
established that M is having the right to control the use of identified asset?
Solution:
In this case, the nature of the solar plant is such that all of the decisions about how and for what
purpose the asset is used are predetermined because:
– the type of output (i.e., energy) and the production location are predetermined in the
agreement; and
– when, whether and how much energy is produced is influenced by the sunlight and the design
of the solar plant.
Because M designed the solar plant and thereby predetermined any decisions about how and for what
purpose it is used, M is considered to have the right to direct the use. Although regular maintenance of
the solar plant may increase the efficiency of the solar panels, it does not give the supplier the right to
direct how and for what purpose the solar plant is used. Hence, M is having a right to control the use
of asset.
Question 03:
A Customer enters into a ten-year contract with a Company (a ship owner) for the use of an identified ship.
Customer decides whether and what cargo will be transported, and when and to which ports the ship will sail
throughout the period of use, subject to restrictions specified in the contract. These restrictions prevent the
company from sailing the ship into waters at a high risk of piracy or carrying explosive materials. The
company operates and maintains the ship, and is responsible for safe passage.
Does the customer have the right to direct how and for what purpose the ship is to be used throughout the
period of use and whether the arrangement contains a lease?
Solution:
The customer has the right to direct the use of the ship because the contractual restrictions are merely
protective rights that protect the company’s investment in the ship and its personnel. In the scope of
its right of use, the customer determines how and for what purpose the ship is used throughout the
ten-year period because it decides whether, where and when the ship sails, as well as the cargo that
it will transport.
The customer has the right to change these decisions throughout the period of use and hence, the
contract contains a lease.
Question 04:
A Lessee enters into a ten-year lease contract with a Lessor to use an equipment. The contract includes
maintenance services (as provided by lessor). The Lessor obtains its own insurance for the equipment.
Annual payments are ₹ 10,000 (₹ 1,000 relate to maintenance services and ₹ 500 to insurance costs).
The Lessee is able to determine that similar maintenance services and insurance costs are offered by
third parties for ₹ 2,000 and ₹ 500 a year, respectively. The Lessee is unable to find an observable
stand-alone rental amount for a similar equipment because none is leased without related
maintenance services provided by the lessor.
How would the Lessee allocate the consideration to the lease component?
Solution:
The observable stand-alone price for maintenance services is ₹ 2,000. There is no observable stand-
alone price for the lease. Further, the insurance cost does not transfer a good or service to the lessee
and therefore, it is not a separate lease component.
Thus, the Lessee allocates ₹ 8,000 (₹ 10,000 – ₹ 2,000) to the lease component.
Question 05:
A Lessee enters into a non-cancellable lease contract with a Lessor to lease a building. Initially, the lease is
for five years, and the lessee has the option to extend the lease by another five years at the same rental.
To determine the lease term, the lessee considers the following factors:
 Market rentals for a comparable building in the same area are expected to increase by 10% over the ten-
year period covered by the lease. At inception of the lease, lease rentals are in accordance with
current market rents.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
 The lessee intends to stay in business in the same area for at least 20 years.
 The location of the building is ideal for relationships with suppliers and customers. What should be the
lease term for lease accounting under Ind AS 116?
Solution:
After considering all the stated factors, the lessee concludes that it has a significant economic incentive
to extend the lease.
Thus, for the purpose of lease accounting under Ind AS 116, the lessee uses a lease term of ten
years.
Question 06:
A Lessee enters into a lease of a five-year-old machine. The non-cancellable lease term is 15 years.The
lessee has the option to extend the lease after the initial 15-year period for optional periods of 12 months
each at market rents.
To determine the lease term, the lessee considers the following factors:
 The machine is to be used in manufacturing parts for a type of plane that the lessee expects will
remain popular with customers until development and testing of an improved model are completed in
approximately 15 years.
 The cost to install the machine in lessee’s manufacturing facility is significant.
 The non-cancellable term of lessee’s manufacturing facility lease ends in 19 years, and thelessee has
an option to renew that lease for another twelve years.
 Lessee does not expect to be able to use the machine in its manufacturing process for other types of
planes without significant modifications.
 The total remaining life of the machine is 30 years.
Solution:
The lessee notes that the terms for the optional renewal provide no economic incentive and the costto
install is significant. The lessee has no incentive to make significant modifications to the machine after
the initial 15-year period. Therefore, the lessee does not expect to have a business purpose for using
the machine after the non-cancellable lease term of 15 years.
Thus, the lessee concludes that the lease term consists of the 15-year non-cancellable period only.
Question 07:
A Lessee enters into a lease of a five-year-old machine. The non-cancellable lease term is 15 years. The
lessee has the option to extend the lease after the initial 15-year period for optional periods of 12 months each
at market rents. To determine the lease term, the lessee considers the following factors:
 The machine is to be used in manufacturing parts for a type of plane that the lessee expects will
remain popular with customers until development and testing of an improved model are completed in
approximately 15 years.
 The cost to install the machine in lessee’s manufacturing facility is significant.
 The non-cancellable term of lessee’s manufacturing facility lease ends in 19 years, and thelessee has
an option to renew that lease for another twelve years.
 Lessee does not expect to be able to use the machine in its manufacturing process for other types of
planes without significant modifications.
 The total remaining life of the machine is 30 years.
Solution:
The said lease contains in-substance fixed payments of ₹ 2,00,00,000 per year, which are included in
the initial measurement of the lease liability under Ind AS 116.
However, the additional ₹ 2,00,00,000 that the company expects to pay per year are variable payments
that do not depend on an index or rate and, thus, are not included in the initial measurement of the
lease liability but, are expensed when the over-use occurs.
RTP, MTP, TEST PAPERS
MTP: OCTOBER, 2019
Question 01:
X Ltd. sold JCB Machine having WDV of Rs. 50 Lakhs to Y Ltd. for Rs. 60 Lakhs and the same JCB was
leased back by Y Ltd. to X Ltd. The lease is operating lease. Comment according to relevant Ind AS if:
(a) Sale price of Rs. 60 Lakhs is equal to fair value.
(b) Fair value is Rs. 50 Lakhs and sale price is Rs. 45 Lakhs.
(c) Fair value is Rs. 55 Lakhs and sale price Rs. 62 Lakhs.
(d) Fair value is Rs. 45 Lakhs and sale price is Rs. 48 Lakhs. (5 Marks)
Solution:
As per Ind AS 17, Leases:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(a) Since sale price is equal to fair value, profit of Rs. 10 lakhs (i.e., Rs. 60 lakhs – Rs. 50 lakhs) is to be
recognised as income immediately.
(b) Assuming, the loss is not compensated by future lease payments at below market price, the loss of Rs. 5 lakhs (i.e.,
Rs. 50 lakhs – Rs. 45 lakhs) should be recognised immediately in the profit and loss account. In case, the loss is
compensated by future lease payments at below market price, then the loss of Rs. 5 lakhs should be deferred and
amortised in proportion to the lease payments over the period for which the asset is expected to be used.
(c) Profit of Rs. 7 lakhs (i.e., Rs. 62 lakhs – Rs. 55 lakhs) should be deferred and amortised over the period for
which the asset is expected to be used. Profit of Rs. 5 lakhs (i.e., Rs. 55 lakhs – Rs. 50 lakhs) should be
recognised immediately.
(d) Rs. 3 lakhs (i.e., Rs. 48 lakhs – Rs. 45 lakhs) should be deferred and amortised over the period for which the asset is
expected to be used. Loss of Rs. 5 lakhs (i.e., Rs. 50 lakhs – Rs. 45 lakhs) should be recognised immediately in the
profit and loss account.
RTP: M A Y , 2019
Question 2:
The building, if purchased outright, would have a useful economic life of 50 years. The lease term, which
would commence on 1 January 2019, is for 30 years. D Ltd would pay 40% of the asset's value up front. At
the end of each of the 30 years, there is also an annual rental payment due. This is equivalent to 6% of the
asset's value as at 1 January 2019 or a contingent rent, if higher, at the year end. Legal title at the end of
the lease remains with the lessor, but D Ltd can continue to lease the asset indefinitely at a rental that is
substantially below its market value. If D Ltd cancels the lease, it must make a payment to the lessor to recover
their remaining investment.
As per Ind AS 17 Leases, should the lease be classified as an operating lease or a finance lease?
Solution:
A finance lease is a lease where the risks and rewards of ownership transfer from the lessor to the
lessee.
Key indications that a lease is a finance lease are:
 The lease transfers ownership of the asset to the lessee by the end of the lease term.
 The lease term is for the major part of the asset's economic life.
 At the inception of the lease, the present value of the minimum lease payments amounts to at
least substantially all of the fair value of the leased asset.
 If the lessee can cancel the lease, the lessor's losses are borne by the lessee.
 The lessee has the ability to lease the asset for a secondary period at a rent that is substantially
lower than market rent.
The lease term is only for 60% (30 years/50 years) of the asset's useful life. Legal title also does not pass
at the end of the lease. These factors suggest that the lease is an operating lease. However, D Ltd
can continue to lease the asset at the end of the lease term for a value that is substantially below
market value. This suggests that D Ltd will benefit from building over its useful life and is therefore an
indication of a finance lease. D Ltd is also unable to cancel the lease without paying the lessor. This is
an indication that the lessor is guaranteed to recoup their investment and therefore that they have
relinquished the risks of ownership: It also seems likely that the present value of the minimum lease
payments will be substantially all of the asset's fair value. Contingent rentals should be excluded from
minimum lease payments - the impact of the potential rental increase should be ignored as this is
contingent upon a future event. The minimum lease payments (ignoring discounting) equate to 40% of
the fair value, payable upfront, and then another 180% (30 years x 6%) of the fair value over the lease
term. Therefore, this again suggests that the lease is a finance lease.
The fact that there is a contingent rental can be suggestive of an operating or a finance lease. This
must be examined more closely to see whether it suggests a transfer of the risks and rewards of
ownership. “In this particular case, an increase in the value of the building will mean that the lessor
receives greater payments from the lessee. However, a decrease in the value of the building will mean
that the rent is fixed at 6% of the fair value at inception. This appears to be guaranteeing the lessor
their required return on the investment, suggesting that the risks of ownership have been transferred to the
lessee.
All things considered, it appears that the lease is a finance lease.
RTP NOV 2018
QUESTION
A Ltd. prepares its financial statements for the period ending on 31st March each year. The financial
statements for the year ended 2017-2018 is under preparation. The following events are relevant to these
financial statements: On 1st April, 2016, A Ltd. purchased an asset for ₹ 20,00,000. The estimated useful
life of the asset was 10 years, with an estimated residual value of zero. A Ltd. immediately leased the asset

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
to B Ltd. The lease term was 10 years and the annual rental, payable in advance by B Ltd., was ₹
27,87,000. A Ltd. incurred direct costs of ₹ 2,00,000 in arranging the lease. The lease contained no early
termination clauses and responsibility for repairs and maintenance of the asset rest with B Ltd. for the
duration of the lease. The annual rate of interest implicit in the lease is 8%. At an annual discount rate of
8% the present value of ₹ 1 receivable at the start of years 1–10 is ₹ 7·247. Examine and show how the
above event would be reported in the financial statements of A Ltd.. for the year ended 31 st March, 2018
as per Ind AS.
SOLUTION
All numbers in ₹ in 000. The lease of the asset by A Ltd. to B Ltd. would be regarded as a finance lease
because the risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred to B Ltd. Evidence of this includes the
lease is for the whole of the life of the asset and B Ltd. being responsible for repairs and maintenance. As
per para 36 of Ind AS 17, since the lease is a finance lease and A Ltd. is the lessor, A Ltd. will recognise a
financial asset ie. as a receivable at an amount equal to the ‘net investment in finance leases’. The amount
recognised will be the present value of the minimum lease payments which will be 20,197.39 ie. 2,787 x
7.247. The impact of the lease on the financial statements for the year ended 31 st March, 2018 can best
be seen by preparing a profile of the net investment in the lease for the first three years of the lease and
shown below:
Year to 31 st March Opening Balance Finance income Rental Closing Balance
2017 20197.39 1615.79 (2,787) 19026.18
2018 18806 1522.09 (2,787) 17761.27
2019 17301 1420.90 (2,787) 16395.17
During the year ended 31 st March, 2018, A Ltd. will recognise income from finance leases of 1,522.09.
The net investment on 31 st March, 2018 will be 17,761.27.
Of the closing net investment of 17,761.27, current asset will be shown for 2,787 and 14,974.27 as a non-
current asset
RTP: M A Y , 2021
Question 3:
Entity X is an Indian entity whose functional currency is Indian Rupee. It has taken a plant on lease from Entity Y for 5 years to
use in its manufacturing process for which it has to pay annual rentals in arrears of USD 10,000 every year. On the
commencement date, exchange rate was USD = ₹ 68. The average rate for Year 1 was ₹ 69 and at the end of year 1, the exchange rate
was ₹ 70. The incremental borrowing rate of Entity X on commencement of the lease for a USD borrowing was 5% p.a.
How will entity X measure the right of use (ROU) asset and lease liability in initially and at the end of Year 1?
Solution:
On initial measurement, Entity X will measure the lease liability and ROU asset as under:
Year Lease Payments Present Valuefactor @ Present Value of Conversion rate INR value
(USD) 5% Lease Payment (spot rate)
1 10,000 0.952 9,520 68 6,47,360
2 10,000 0.907 9,070 68 6,16,760
3 10,000 0.864 8,640 68 5,87,520
4 10,000 0.823 8,230 68 5,59,640
5 10,000 0.784 7,840 68 5,33,120
Total 43,300 29,44,400
As per Ind AS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates, monetary assets and liabilities are restated at
each reporting date at the closing rate and the difference due to foreign exchange movement is recognised in profit and loss
whereas non- monetary assets and liabilities carried measured in terms of historical cost in foreign currency are not restated.
Accordingly, the ROU asset in the given case being a non-monetary asset measured in terms of historical cost in
foreign currency will not be restated but the lease liability being a monetary liability will be restated at each reporting
date with the resultant difference being taken to profit and loss.
At the end of Year 1, the lease liability will be measured in terms of USD as under: Lease Liability:
Year Initial Value (USD) (a) Lease Payment(b) Interest @ 5% (c) = (a x 5%) Closing Value (USD)
(d = a + c - b)
1 43,300 10,000 2,165 35,465
Interest at the rate of 5% will be accounted for in profit and loss at average rate of ₹ 69 (i.e., USD 2,165 x 69) = ₹
1,49,385.
Interest Expense Dr. 1,49,385
To Lease liability 1,49,385
Lease payment would be accounted for at the reporting date exchange rate, i.e. ₹ 70 at the end of year 1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Lease liability Dr. 7,00,000
To Cash 7,00,000
As per the guidance above under Ind AS 21, the lease liability will be restated using the reporting date exchange rate
i.e., ₹ 70 at the end of Year 1. Accordingly, the lease liability will be measured at ₹ 24,82,550 (35,465 x ₹ 70) with the
corresponding impact due to exchange rate movement of ₹ 88,765 (24,82,550 – (29,44,400 + 1,49,385 – 700,000) taken to
profit and loss.
At the end of year 1, the ROU asset will be measured as under:
Year Opening Balance (₹) Depreciation (₹) Closing Balance (₹)
1 29,44,400 5,88,880 23,55,520
MTP APR 2021
QUESTION
Buildings Limited entered into a 10-year lease for 6,000 square meter of office space. The annual lease
payments are Rs. 60,000 payable at the end of each year. The interest rate implicit in the lease cannot be
readily determined. Buildings Limited's incremental borrowing rate at the commencement date is 8% p.a.
At the beginning of 6th year, Buildings Limited and lessor agree to amend the original lease to reduce the
space to only 3,000 square meters of the original space starting from the end of the first quarter of year 6.
The annual fixed lease payments (from year 6 to year 10) are Rs. 35,000. Buildings Limited's incremental
borrowing rate at the beginning of year 6 is 6% p.a. The CFO of the Company has requested your
suggestion on how to account for the modification in the lease of office space? Prepare the detailed
working for the modification.
SOLUTION
In the given case, Lessee calculates the ROU asset and the lease liabilities before modification as follows:
Lease Liability ROU asset
Year Initial value Lease Interest Closing Initial Value Depreciation Closing balance
payments expense@8% balance
a b c = a x 8% d = a-b +c e f g
1 402600* 60,000 32208 374808 402600 40260 362350
2 3,74,808 60,000 29985 344793 362340 40260 322080
3 344793 60,000 27583 312376 322080 40260 281820
4 312376 60,000 24990 277366 281820 40260 241560
5 277366 60,000 22189 239555 241560 40260 201300
6 239555 201300
* Initial value of ROU asset and lease liability = Annual lease payment x annuity factor @ 8% = 60,000 x
6.71 = Rs. 4,02,600
At the effective date of the modification (at the beginning of Year 6), Lessee remeasures the lease liability
based on:
(b) annual payments of Rs. 35,000 and
(c) Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate of 6% p.a. Present value of modified lease = Annual lease
payment x annuity factor @ 6% = 35,000 x 4.212 = 1,47,420 Lessee determines the proportionate
decrease in the carrying amount of the ROU Asset on the basis of the remaining ROU Asset (i.e., 3,000
square metres corresponding to 50% of the original ROU Asset). 50% of the pre-modification ROU Asset
(Rs. 2,01,300) is Rs. 1,00,650 50% of the pre-modification lease liability (Rs. 2,39,555) is Rs. 1,19,777.50.
Consequently, Lessee reduces the carrying amount of the ROU Asset by Rs. 1,00,650 and the carrying
amount of the lease liability by Rs. 1,19,777.50. Lessee recognises the difference between the decrease
in the lease liability and the decrease in the ROU Asset (Rs. 1,19,777.50 – Rs. 1,00,650 = Rs. 19,127.50)
as a gain in profit or loss at the effective date of the modification (at the beginning of Year 6).
Lessee recognises the difference between the remaining lease liability of Rs. 1,19,777.50 and the
modified lease liability of Rs. 1,47,420 (which equals Rs. 27,642.50) as an adjustment to the ROU Asset
reflecting the change in the consideration paid for the lease and the revised discount rate.
Venus Ltd. (Seller-lessee) sells a building to Mars Ltd. (Buyer-lessor) for cash of ₹ 28,00,000.
Immediately before the transaction, the building is carried at a cost of ₹ 13,00,000. At the same time,
Seller- lessee enters into a contract with Buyer-lessor for the right to use the building for 20 years, with an
annual payment of ₹ 2,00,000 payable at the end of each year.
The terms and conditions of the transaction are such that the transfer of the building by Seller-lessee

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
satisfies the requirements for determining when a performance obligation is satisfied in accordance with Ind
AS 115 "Revenue from Contracts with Customers".
The fair value of the building at the date of sale is ₹ 25,00,000. Initial direct costs, if any, are to be ignored.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is 12% p.a., which is readily determinable by Seller-lessee. Present
Value (PV) of annual payments (20 payments of ₹ 2,00,000 each discounted @ 12%) is ₹ 14,94,000.
Buyer-lessor classifies the lease of the building as an operating lease. How should the said transaction be
accounted by Venus Ltd.? (8 Marks)
SOLUTION:
Considering facts of the case, Venus Ltd. (seller-lessee) and Mars Ltd. (buyer-lessor) account for the
transaction as a sale and leaseback.
Firstly, since the consideration for the sale of the building is not at fair value, Seller-lessee and Buyer -
lessor make adjustments to measure the sale proceeds at fair value. Thus, the amount of the excess
sale price of ₹ 3,00,000 (as calculated below) is recognised as additional financing provided by Buyer-
lessor to Seller-lessee.
Sale Price: 28,00,000
Less: Fair Value (at the date of sale): (25,00,000)
Additional financing provided by Buyer-lessor to Seller-lessee 3,00,000
The present value of the annual payments is ₹14,94,000 (as given in the question).
Out of this ₹ 14,94,000, ₹ 3,00,000 relates to the additional financing (as calculated above) and balance
₹11,94,000 relates to the lease.
Accounting by Venus Ltd. (seller-lessee):
At the commencement date, Seller-lessee measures the ROU asset arising from the leaseback of the
building at the proportion of the previous carrying amount of the building that relates to the right-of-
use retained by Seller-lessee, calculated as follows:
Carrying Amount (A) 13,00,000
Fair Value (at the date of sale) (B) 25,00,000
ROU Asset [(A / B) x C] 6,20,880
Seller-lessee recognises only the amount of the gain that relates to the rights transferred to Buyer-
lessor, calculated as follows:
Fair Value (at the date of sale) (A) 25,00,000
Carrying Amount (B) 13,00,000
Discounted lease payments for the 20-year ROU asset (C) 11,94,000
Gain on sale of building (D) = (A - B) 12,00,000
Relating to the right to use the building retained by Seller-lessee (E)=[(D/A) x C] 5,73,120
Relating to the rights transferred to Buyer-lessor (D - E) 6,26,880
At the commencement date, Seller-lessee accounts for the transaction, as follows:
Bank / Cash A/c Dr. 28,00,000
ROU Asset A/c Dr. 6,20,880
To Building 13,00,000
To Financial Liability 14,94,000
To Gain on rights transferred 6,26,880
JAN 2021
QUESTION
Coups Limited availed a machine on lease from Ferrari Limited. The terms and conditions of the Lease are
as under:
Lease period is 3 years, machine costing ₹ 8,00,000.
- Machine has expected useful life of 5 years.
- Machine reverts back to Ferrari Limited on termination of lease.
- The unguaranteed residual value is estimated at ₹ 50,000 at the end of 3rd year.
- 3 equal annual installments are made at the end of each year. - Implicit Interest Rate (IRR) = 10%.
- Present value of ₹ 1 due at the end of 3 rd year at 10% rate of interest is 0.7513.
- Present value of annuity of ₹ 1 due at the end of 3rd year at 10% IRR is 2.4868.
You are required to ascertain whether it is a Finance Lease or Operating Lease and also calculate
Unearned Finance Income with the relevant context to relevant Ind AS.
SOLUTION
It is assumed that the fair value of the machine on lease is equivalent to the cost of the machine.
(i) A lease is classified as a finance lease if it transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to
ownership of an underlying asset. A lease is classified as an operating lease if it does not transfer

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of an underlying asset.
(ii) Computation of annual lease payment to the lessor
Cost of equipment / fair value 800000

Unguaranteed residual value 50000
Present value of residual value after third year @ 10% (50,000 x 0.7513) 37565
Fair value to be recovered from lease payments (8,00,000 – 37,565)
Present value of annuity for three years is 2.4868 762435
Annual lease payment = 7,62,435 / 2.4868 306593
The present value of lease payment i.e., ₹ 7,62,435 is more than 95% of the fair market value i.e., ₹
8,00,000. The present value of minimum lease payments substantially covers the initial fair value of the
leased asset and lease term (i.e. 3 years) covers the major part of the life of asset (i.e. 5 years). Therefore,
it constitutes a finance lease
(ii) Computation of Unearned Finance Income
Total lease payments (₹ 3,06,593 x 3) 919799
Add: Unguaranteed residual value 50000
Gross investment in the lease 969799
Less: Present value of investment (lease payments and residual value) (37,565 + (800000)
7,62,435)
Unearned finance income 169779
MAY 2018
QUESTION
The following facts are given for the Sky Ltd:
 A Lease which is non-cancellable was initiated on 1st April 2014 for equipment with an expected useful
life of five years.
Three payments are due to the 'Lessor' of an amount of ₹ 1,02,000 per year beginning 31st March 2015.
Included in the lease payments is a sum of ₹ 2,000 to be paid annually by the 'Lessee' for insurance.
The 'Lessee' guarantees ₹ 20,000 residual value on 31st March 2017 to the Lessor.
Irrespective of the ₹ 20,000 residual value guarantee, the leased asset is expected to have only ₹ 2,000
residual value to the lessee at the end of the lease term.
The Lessee company depreciates similar equipment that it owns on a straight line basis.
The fair value of the equipment at 1st April 2014 is ₹ 2,64,000.
The Lessor's implicit rate is 10%. This fact is known to the Lessee company.
As per the provisions of Ind AS 17 ‘Leases’ –
(i) How should Lessee Company classify and record the lease transaction at its inception on 1st April 2014?
Indicate journal entry also.
(ii) What are the journal entries the Lessee is required to make to record the lease payments and the
interest, insurance and depreciation expenses on 31st March 2015 through 31st March 2017?
(iii)What entry should the Lessee make on 31st March 2017 to record the guaranteed residual value
payment (assuming estimated residual value of ₹ 2,000) and to clear the lease related accounts from the
lessee’s books?
(iv)What would be the Current and Non-current classification in the books of Lessee in the first year?
(Discount factor: 2015: 0.909; 2016: 0.826; 2017: 0.751)
SOLUTION
The Lessee company should record the asset as a finance lease since the risk and reward is transferred.
Lessee has guaranteed to the lessor, the residual value of ₹ 20,000, in spite of the fact that the estimated
residual value of the asset will be ₹ 2,000. Further the lease payments substantially cover the fair value of
leased asset as per calculation given below.
Calculation of Present value of Minimum Lease Payments (MLP) at implicit rate of 10%
Year Discount Factor Minimum Lease Present Value of MLP
payments (see note
below)
Annual Lease Rentals
31st March, 2015 0.909 100000 90,900
31st March, 2016 0.826 100000 82,600
31st March, 2017 0.751 100000 75,100
Guaranteed Residual Value
31st March, 2017 0.751 20000 15,020
TOTAL 2,63,620
Note: The contingent rent, taxes, insurance, maintenance expenses etc. if paid by the lessee to the lessor,

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
then it does not form part of the minimum lease payments and will be expensed when incurred. Insurance
expense is a kind of reimbursement from lessee to lessor. Hence in the above case, for calculation of
present value of minimum lease payments only lease rental of ₹ 1,00,000 has been considered.
At the time of initial recognition, the lessee will recognise the leasehold asset at lower of below:
Present value of MLP 2,63,620
Fair value of leased asset 2,64,000
Hence, leasehold asset will be recognised at 2,63,620
Accounting entry for initial recognition would be :
Leasehold equipment Dr. 2,63,620
To Leasehold obligation 2,63,620
Lease rentals should split between principal portion of leasehold obligation and finance costs as follows:
YEAR Opening Payments Finance costs Reduction in Closing
balance @ 10% liability obligation
(a) (b) (a) x 10% = (c) (b)-(c)=(d) (a)-(d) = (e)
1 st April, 2014 - 263620
31st March, 2015 263620 100000 26362 73638 189982
31st March, 2016 189982 100000 18998 81002 108980
31st March, 2017 108980 100000 11020* 88980 20000
* Difference is due to approximation.
In the books of Lessee Journal Entries (at the time of subsequent measurement)
31st March 2015 Insurance Expenses Dr. 2,000
Leasehold obligation Dr. 73,638
Interest Expenses Dr. 26,362
Depreciation Dr. 87,207
To Cash 1,02,000
To Accumulated Depreciation 87,207
Leasehold obligation Dr. 81002
Interest Expenses Dr. 18998
Depreciation Dr. 87207
To Cash 1,02,000
Leasehold obligation Dr. 88980
Interest Expenses Dr. 11020
Depreciation Dr. 87,207
To Cash 1,02,000
(III) Entries at the end of lease period
Leasehold Obligation Account Dr. 20,000
Accumulated Depreciation Account Dr. 2,61,620
To Cash Account 18,000
To Leasehold Equipment Account 2,63,620
(iv) The Current and Non-current Classification at the end of year 1 in the books of Lessee
Balance Sheet (An extract)
ASSETS
Non-current Asset
Leasehold Asset
Gross Block 263620
(87207)
Accumulated Depreciation
LIABILITIES
Non-current Liability
Leasehold Obligation (payable after 12 months from the reporting date) 108980
Current Liability Leasehold Obligation (payable within 12 months from the 81002
reporting date)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 10 - EVENTS AFTER THE REPORTING PERIOD
Illustration 01
What is the date of approval for issue of the financial statements prepared for the reporting period from
1st April, 20X1 to 31st March, 20X2, in a situation where following dates are available? Completion of
preparation of financial statements 28th May, 20X2 Board reviews and approves it for issue 19th June,
20X2
Available to shareholders 1st July, 20X2
Annual General Meeting 15th September, 20X2
Filed with regulatory authority 16th October, 20X2
Will your answer differ if the entity is a partnership firm?
Solution
As per Ind AS 10 the date of approval for issue of financial statements is the date on which the
financial statements are approved by the Board of Directors in case of a company, and, by the
corresponding approving authority in case of any other entity. Accordingly, in the instant case, the date
of approval is the date on which the financial statements are approved by the Board of Directors of the
company, i.e., 19th June, 20X2.
If the entity is a partnership firm, the date of approval will be the date when the relevant approving
authority of such entity approves the financial statements for issue i.e., the date when the partner(s) of
the firm approve(s) the financial statements.
Illustration 0 2
ABC Ltd. prepared interim financial report for the quarter ending 30th June, 20X1. The interim financial
report was approved for issue by the Board of Directors on 15th July, 20X1. Whether events occurring
between end of the interim financial report and date of approval by Board of Directors, i.e., events between
1st July, 20X1 and 15th July, 20X1 that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the
interim reporting period shall be adjusted in the interim financial report ending 30th June, 20X1?
Solution
Paragraph 3 of Ind AS 10, inter alia, defines ‘Events after the reporting period’ as those events,
favourable and unfavourable, that occur between the end of the reporting period and the date when
the financial statements are approved by the Board of Directors in case of a company, and, by the
corresponding approving authority in case of any other entity for issue.
What is reporting period has not been dealt with in Ind AS 10. Absence of any specific guidance
regarding reporting period implies that any term for which reporting is done by preparing financial
statements is the reporting period for the purpose of Ind AS 10. Accordingly, financial reporting
done for interim period by preparing either complete set of financial statements or by preparing
condensed financial statements will be treated as reporting period for the purpose of Ind AS 10.
Paragraph 2 of Ind AS 34, inter alia, provides that each financial report, annual or interim, is evaluated
on its own for conformity with Ind AS. Further, paragraph 19 of Ind AS 34, provides that an interim
financial report shall not be described as complying with Ind AS unless it complies with all of the
requirements of Ind AS.
In accordance with the above, an entity describing that its interim financial report is in compliance with
Ind AS, has to comply with all the Ind AS including Ind AS 10.
In order to comply with the requirements of Ind AS 10, each interim financial report should be adjusted
for the adjusting events occurring between end of the interim financial report and the date of
approval by Board of Directors. Therefore, in the instant case, events occurring between 1st July,
20X1 and 15th July, 20X1 that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the interim
reporting period should be adjusted in the interim financial report ending 30th June, 20X1.
Illustration 3
The Board of Directors of ABC Ltd. approved the financial statements for the reporting period 20X1-20X2
for issue on 15th June, 20X2. The management of ABC Ltd. discovered a major fraud and decided to
reopen the books of account. The financial statements were subsequently approved by the Board of
Directors on 30th June, 20X2. What is the date of approval for issue as per Ind AS 10 in the given case?
Solution
As per paragraph 3 of Ind AS 10, the – date of approval is the date on which the financial statements
are approved by the Board of Directors in case of a company, and by the corresponding approving
authority in case of any other entity for issue. In the given case, there are two dates of approval by
Board of Directors. The financial statements were reopened for further adjustments subsequent to

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
initial approval. The date of approval should be taken as the date on which financial statements are
finally approved by the Board of Directors. Therefore, in the given case, the date of approval for issue
as per Ind AS 10 should be considered as30th June, 20X2.
Illustration 4
A case is going on between ABC Ltd., and GST department on claiming some exemption for the year
20X1- 20X2. The court has issued the order on 15th April, 20X2 and rejected the claim of the company.
Accordingly, the company is liable to pay the additional tax. The financial statements of the company for the
year 20X1 -20X2 have been approved on 15th May, 20X2. Should the company account for such
tax in the year 20X1-20X2 or should it account for the same in the year 20X2-20X?
Solution
An event after the reporting period is an adjusting event, if it provides evidence of a condition existing
at the end of the reporting period. Here, this condition is satisfied. Court order received after the
reporting period (but before the financial statements are approved) provides the evidence of the
liability existing at the end of the reporting period. Therefore, the event will be considered as an
adjusting event and, accordingly, the amounts will be adjusted in financial statements for 20X1-20X2.
Illustration 5
While preparing its financial statements for the year ended 31 st March, 20X1, XYZ Ltd. made a general
provision for bad debts @ 5% of its debtors. In the last week of February, 20X1 a debtor for Rs. 2 lakhs
had suffered heavy loss due to an earthquake; the loss was not covered by any insurance policy.
Considering the event of earthquake, XYZ Ltd. made a provision @ 50% of the amount receivable from that
debtor apart from the general provision of 5% on remaining debtors. In April, 20X1 the debtor became
bankrupt. Can XYZ Ltd. provide for the full loss arising out of insolvency of the debtor in the financial
statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X1?
Would the answer be different if earthquake had taken place after 31st March, 20X1, and therefore, XYZ
Ltd. did not make any specific provision in context that debtor and made only general provision for bad
debts @ 5% on total debtors?
Solution
As per the definition of ‘Events after the Reporting Period’ and paragraph 8 of Ind AS 10, Events after
the Reporting Period, financial statements should be adjusted for events occurring after the reporting
period that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the reporting period. In the instant
case, the earthquake took place in February 20X1 (i.e., before the end of the reporting period).
Therefore, the condition exists at the end of the reporting date though the debtor is declared insolvent
after the reporting period. Accordingly, full provision for bad debt amounting to ₹ 2 lakhs should be
made to cover the loss arising due to the bankruptcy of the debtor in the financial statements for the
year ended 31st March, 20X1. In this case, assuming that the financial statements are approved by
the approving authority after April, 20X1, XYZ Ltd should provide for the remaining amount as a
consequence of declaration of this debtor as bankrupt.
In case, the earthquake had taken place after the end of the reporting period, i.e., after 31st March,
20X1, and XYZ Ltd. had not made any specific provision for the debtor who was declared bankrupt
later on, since the earthquake occurred after the end of the reporting period no condition existed at the
end of the reporting period. The company had made only general provision for bad debts in the
ordinary business course –without taking cognizance of the catastrophic situation of an earthquake.
Accordingly, bankruptcy of the debtor in this case is a non-adjusting event.
As per para 21 of Ind AS 10, if non-adjusting events after the reporting period are material, their non-
disclosure could influence the economic decisions that users make based on the financial statements.
Accordingly, an entity shall disclose the following for each material category of non-adjusting event
after the reporting period:
(a) the nature of the event; and
(b) an estimate of its financial effect, or a statement that such an estimate cannot be made.”
If the amount of bad debt is considered to be material, the nature of this non-adjusting event, i.e.,
event of bankruptcy of the debtor should be disclosed along with the estimated financial effect of the
same in the financial statements.
Illustration 6
A company has inventory of 100 finished cars on 31st March, 20X2, which are having a cost of ₹ 4,00,000
each. On 30th April, 20X2, as per the new government rules, higher road tax and penalties are to be paid
by the buyers for such cars (which were already expected to come) and hence the selling price of a car has
come down and the demand for such cars has dropped drastically. The selling price has come down to ₹
3,00,000 each. The financial statements of the company for the year 20X1-20X2 are not yet approved.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Should the company value its stock at ₹ 4,00,000 each or should its value at ₹ 3,00,000 each? Ignore
estimated costs necessary to make the sale.
Solution
Events after the reporting period provide the evidence about the net realisable value of the cars at the
end of the reporting period and, therefore, the amount of ₹ 3,00,000 should be considered for the
valuation of stock.
Illustration 7
ABC Ltd. has purchased a new machinery during the year 20X1-20X2. The asset was finally installed
and made ready for use on 15th March, 20X2. However, the company involved in installation and
training, which was also the supplier, has not yet submitted the final bills for the same.
The supplier company sent the bills on 10th April, 20X2, when the financial statements were not yet
approved. Should the company adjust the amount of capitalisation in the year 20X1-20X2 or in the year
20X2-20X3?
Solution
As per the provisions of the contract, the cost of installation and training of new machine is an integral
part of the cost of asset purchased. Therefore, even if the details are available after reporting period,
they provide proof about the circumstances that existed at the end of reporting period. Therefore, the
cost of installation and training will be considered for capitalisation in the year 20X1-20X2.
Illustration 8 (RTP May 19)
Company XYZ Ltd. was formed to secure the tenders floated by a telecom company for publication of
telephone directories. It bagged the tender for publishing directories for Pune circle for 5 years. It has made a
profit in 20X1- 20X2, 20X2-20X3, 20X3-20X4 and 20X4-20X5. It bid in tenders for publication of directories
for other circles – Nagpur, Nashik, Mumbai, Hyderabad but as per the results declared on 23rd April, 20X5,
the company failed to bag any of these. Its only activity till date is publication of Pune directory. The contract
for publication of directories for Pune will expire on 31st December 20X5. The financial statements for the
F.Y. 20X4-20X5 have been approved by the Board of Directors on 10th July, 20X5. Whether it is
appropriateto prepare financial statements on going concern basis?
Solution
With regard to going concern basis to be followed for preparation of financial statements, paras14 &
15 of Ind AS 10 states that - An entity shall not prepare its financial statements on a going concern
basis if management determines after the reporting period either that it intends to liquidate the entity
or to cease trading, or that it has no realistic alternative but to do so.
Deterioration in operating results and financial position after the reporting period may indicate a need
to consider whether the going concern assumption is still appropriate. If the going concern assumption
is no longer appropriate, the effect is so pervasive that this Standard requires a fundamental change
in the basis of accounting, rather than an adjustment to the amounts recognised within the original
basis of accounting.
In accordance with the above, an entity needs to change the basis of accounting if the effect of
deterioration in operating results and financial position is so pervasive that management determines
after the reporting period either that it intends to liquidate the entity or to cease trading, or that it has
no realistic alternative but to do so.
In the instant case, since contract is expiring on 31st December 20X5 and it is confirmed on 23rd April,
20X5, (i.e., after the end of the reporting period and before the approval of the financial statements),
that no further contact is secured, it implies that the entity’s operations are expected to come to an end
by 31st December 20X5. Accordingly, if entity’s operations are expected to come to an end, the entity
needs to make a judgement as to whether it has any realistic possibility to continue or not. In case, the
entity determines that it has no realistic alternative of continuing the business, preparation of financial
statements for 20X4-20X5 and thereafter ongoing concern basis may not be appropriate.
Illustration 9 (RTP NOV 2020)
In the plant of PQR Ltd., there was a fire on 10th May, 20X1 in which the entire plant was damaged
and the loss of ₹ 40,00,000 is estimated. The claim with the insurance company has been filed and a
recovery of ₹ 27,00,000 is expected.
The financial statements for the year ending 31st March, 20X1 were approved by the Board of Directors on
12th June, 20X1. Show how should it be disclosed?
Solution
In the instant case, since fire took place after the end of the reporting period, it is a non- adjusting
event. However, in accordance with paragraph 21 of Ind AS 10, disclosures regarding material non-
adjusting event should be made in the financial statements, i.e., the nature of the event and the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
expected financial effect of the same.
With regard to going concern basis followed for preparation of financial statements, the company
needs to determine whether it is appropriate to prepare the financial statements on going concern
basis, since there is only one plant which has been damaged due to fire. If the effect of deterioration in
operating results and financial position is so pervasive that management determines after the
reporting period either that it intends to liquidate the entity or to cease trading, or that it has no realistic
alternative but to do so, preparation of financial statements for the F.Y.20X0-20X1 on going concern
assumption may not be appropriate. In that case, the financial statements may have to be prepared
on a basis other than going concern.
However, if the going concern assumption is considered to be appropriate even after the fire, no
adjustment is required in the financial statements for the year ending 31st March, 20X1.
Illustration 10
ABC Ltd. declares the dividend on 15th July, 20X2 as the results of year 20X1-20X2 as well as Q1
ending 30th June, 20X2 are better than expected. The financial statements of the company are approved
on 20th July, 20X2 for the financial year ending 31st March, 20X2. Will the dividend be accounted for
in the financial year 20X2-20X3 or will it be accounted for in the year 20X1-20X2?
Solution
The dividend is declared in the year 20X2-20X3. Therefore, the obligation towards dividend did not
exist at the end date of reporting period i.e., on 31st March, 20X2. Therefore, it will be accounted for in
the year 20X2-20X3 and not in 20X1-20X2, even if financial statements for 20X1- 20X2 were
approved after the declaration of dividend. It will, however, be disclosed in the notes in the financial
statements for the year 20X1-20X2 in accordance with Ind AS 1.
Illustration 11
What would be the treatment for dividends declared to redeemable preference shareholders after the
reporting period but before the financial statements are approved for issue for the year 20X1-20X2. Whether
Ind AS 10 prescribes any accounting treatment for such dividends?
Solution
Paragraph 12 of Ind AS 10 prescribes accounting treatment for dividends declared to holders of equity
instruments. If an entity declares dividends to holders of equity instruments (as defined in Ind AS 32,
Financial Instruments: Presentations) after the reporting period, the entity shall not recognise those
dividends as a liability at the end of the reporting period.
However, Ind AS 10 does not prescribe accounting treatment for dividends declared to redeemable
preference shareholders. As per the principles of Ind AS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation, a
preference share that provides for mandatory redemption by the issuer for a fixed or determinable
amount at a fixed or determinable future date, or gives the holder the right to require the issuer to
redeem the instrument at or after a particular date for a fixed or determinable amount, is a financial
liability. Thus, dividend payments to such preference shares are recognised as expense in the same
way as interest on a bond. Since interest will be charged on time basis, the requirements of Ind AS 10
regarding date of declaration of dividend is not relevant for its recognition.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
ABC Ltd., has announced its interim results for Quarter 1, ending 30th June, 20X2 on 5th July, 20X2.
However, till that time the AGM for the year 20X1-20X2 was not held. The financial statements for
20X1-20X2 were approved by the board of directors on 15th July, 20X2. What will be the ‘after the
reporting period’ as per the definition given in Ind AS 10?
Solution:
As per Ind AS 10, even if partial information has already been published, the reporting period willbe
considered as the period between the end of reporting period and the date of approval of financial
statements. In the above case, the financial statements for the year 20X1-20X2 were approved on
15th July, 20X2. Therefore, for the purposes of Ind AS 10, ‘after the reporting period’ would be the
period between 31st March, 20X2 and 15th July, 20X2.
Question 02:
ABC Ltd. is in a legal suit with the GST department. The company gets a court order in its favour on
15th April, 20X2, which resulted into reducing the tax liability as on 31st March, 20X2. The financial
statements for 20X1-20X2 were approved by the board of directors on 15th May, 20X2. The
management has not considered the effect of the transaction as the event is favourable to the
company. The company’s view is that favourable events after the reporting period should not be

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
considered as it would hamper the realisation concept of accounting. Comment on the company’s
views in the light of Ind AS 10.
Solution:
As per Ind AS 10, even favourable events need to be considered. What is important is whether a
condition exists as at the end of the reporting period and there is evidence for the same.
Question 03:
ABC Ltd. is trading in laptops. On 31st March, 20X2, the company has 50 laptops which were
purchased at ₹ 45,000 each. The company has considered the same price for calculation of closing
inventory valuation. On 15th April, 20X2, advanced version of same series of laptops is introduced in
the market. Therefore, the price of the current laptop’s crashes to ₹ 35,000 each. The financial
statements for 20X1-20X2 were approved by the board of directors on 15th May, 20X2. The
company does not want to value the stock at ₹ 35,000 less estimated costs necessary to make the
sale as the event of reduction in selling price took place after 31st March, 20X2 and the reduced prices
were not applicable as on 31st March, 20X2. Comment on the company’s views.
Solution:
As per Ind AS 10, the decrease in the net realisable value of the stock after reporting period should
normally be considered as an adjusting event.
Question 04:
XY Ltd had taken a large-sized civil construction contract, for a public sector undertaking,valued at ₹
200 Crores. Execution of the project started during 20X1-20X2, and continued in the next financial year
also. During the course of execution of the work on 29th May, 20X2, the company found while raising
the foundation work that it had met a rocky surface and cost of contract would go up by an extra ₹
50 crore, which would not be recoverable from the Contractee as per the terms of the contract. The
Company’s financial year ended on 31st March, 20X2, and the financial statements were considered
and approved by the Board of Directors on 15th June, 20X2. How will you treat the above in the
financial statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X2?
Solution:
In the instant case, the execution of work started during the F.Y. 20 X1-20X2 and the rocky surface
was there at the end of the reporting period, though the existence of rocky surface is confirmed after
the end of the reporting period as a result of which it became evident that the cost may escalate by ₹
50 Crores. In accordance with the definition of ‘Events after the Reporting Period’, since the rocky
surface was there, the condition was existing at the end of the reporting period, therefore, it is an
adjusting event. The cost of the project and profit should be accounted for accordingly.
Question 05:
A Ltd. was required to pay penalty for a breach in the performance of a contract. A Ltd. believed that
the penalty was payable at a lower amount than the amount demanded by the other party. A Ltd.
created provision for the penalty but also approached the arbitrator with a submission that the case
may be dismissed with costs. A Ltd. prepared the financial statements for the year 20X1-20X2, which
were approved in July 20X2. The arbitrator, in June 20X2, awarded the casein favour of A Ltd. As a
result of the award of the arbitrator, the provision earlier made by A Ltd. was required to be reduced.
The arbitrator also decided that cost of the case should be borne by the other party. Now, whether A
Ltd. is required to remeasure its provision and what would be the accounting treatment of the cost that
will be recovered by A Ltd., which has already been charged to the Statement of Profit and Loss as
an expense for the year 20X1-20X2?
Solution:
In the instant case, A Ltd. approached the arbitrator before the end of the reporting period, who
decided the award after the end of the reporting period but before approval of the financial statements
for issue. Accordingly, the conditions were existing at the end of the reporting date because A Ltd. had
approached the arbitrator before the end of the reporting period whose outcome has been confirmed
by the award of the arbitrator. Therefore, it is an adjusting event.
Accordingly, the measurement of the provision is required to be adjusted for the event occurring after
the reporting period. As far as the recovery of the cost by A Ltd. from the other party is concerned, this
right to recover was a contingent asset as at the end of the reporting period.
As per para 35 of Ind AS 37, contingent assets are assessed continually to ensure that developments
are appropriately reflected in the financial statements. If it has become virtually certain that an inflow of
economic benefits will arise, the asset and the related income are recognised in the financial
statements of the period in which the change occurs. If an inflow of economic benefits has become
probable, an entity discloses the contingent asset.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
On the basis of the above, a contingent asset should be recognised in the financial statements of the
period in which the realisation of asset and the related income becomes virtually certain. In the instant
case, the recovery of cost became certain when the arbitrator decided the award during F.Y. 20X2-
20X3.
Accordingly, the recovery of cost should be recognised in the financial year 20 X2-20X3.
Question 06:
A company manufacturing and supplying process control equipment is entitled to duty drawback if it
exceeds its turnover above a specified limit. To claim duty drawback, the company needs to file
application within 15 days of meeting the specified turnover. If application is not filed within stipulated
time, the Department has discretionary power of giving duty draw back credit. For the year 20X1-20X2,
the company has exceeded the specified limit of turnover by the end of the reporting period but the
application for duty drawback is filed on 20th April, 20X2, which is after the stipulated time of 15 days
of meeting the turnover condition.
Duty drawback has been credited by the Department on 28th June, 20X2 and financial statements
have been approved by the Board of Directors of the company on 26th July, 20X2. Whether duty
drawback credit should be treated as an adjusting event?
Solution:
In the instant case, the condition of exceeding the specified turnover was met at the end of the
reporting period and the company was entitled for the duty draw back but the application for the
same has been filed after the stipulated time. Therefore, credit of duty drawback is discretionaryin the
hands of the Department. Accordingly, the duty drawback credit is a contingent asset as at the end
of the reporting period, which may be realised if the Department credits the same.
As per para 35 of Ind AS 37, contingent assets are assessed continually to ensure that developments
are appropriately reflected in the financial statements. If it has become virtually certain that an inflow of
economic benefits will arise, the asset and the related income are recognised in the financial
statements of the period in which the change occurs. If an inflow of economic benefits has become
probable, an entity discloses the contingent asset.
In accordance with the above, the duty drawback credit which was contingent asset for the F.Y. 20X1-
20X2 should be recognised as asset and related income should be recognized in the reporting period in
which the change occurs. i.e., in the period in which realisation becomes virtually certain, i.e.,
F.Y. 20X2-20X3.
Question 07:
XYZ Ltd. sells goods to its customer with a promise to give discount of 5% on list price of the goods
provided that the payments are received from customer within 15 days. XYZ Ltd. sold goods of ₹ 5 lakhs
to ABC Ltd. between 17th March, 20X2 and 31st March, 20X2. ABC Ltd. paid the dues by15th April,
20X2 with respect to sales made between 17th March, 20X2 and 31st March, 20X2. Financial
statements were approved for issue by Board of Directors on 31st May, 20X2.
State whether discount will be adjusted from the sales at the end of the reporting period.
Solution:
As per Ind AS 115, if the consideration promised in a contract includes a variable amount, an entity
shall estimate the amount of consideration to which the entity will be entitled in exchange for
transferring the promised goods or services to a customer.
In the instant case, the condition that sales have been made exists at the end of the reporting period
and the receipt of payment with 15 days time after the end of the reporting period and before the
approval of the financial statements confirms that the discount is to be provided on those sales.
Therefore, it is an adjusting event. Accordingly, XYZ Ltd. should adjust the sales made to ABC Ltd.
with respect to discount of 5% on the list price of the goods.
Question 08:
Whether the fraud related to 20X1-20X2 discovered after the end of the reporting period but before the
date of approval of financial statements for 20X3-20X4 is an adjusting event?
Solution:
In the instant case, the fraud is discovered after the end of the reporting period of 20 X3-20X4, which
related to F.Y. 20X1-20X2. Since the fraud has taken place before the end of the reporting period,
the condition was existing which has been confirmed by the detection of the same after the end of the
reporting period but before the approval of financial statements. Therefore, it is an adjusting event.
Moreover, Ind AS 10 in paragraph 9, specifically provides that the discovery of fraud or error after the end
of the reporting period, that shows that financial statements are incorrect, is an adjusting event. Such a
discovery of fraud should be accounted for in accordance with Ind AS 8, if it meets the definition of prior
period error.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Question 09:
X Ltd. was having investment in form of equity shares in another company as at the end of the
reporting period, i.e., 31st March, 20X2. After the end of the reporting period but before the approval
of the financial statements it has been found that value of investment was fraudulently inflated by
committing a computation error. Whether such event should be adjusted in the financial statements for
the year 20X1-20X2?
Solution:
Since it has been detected that a fraud has been made by committing an intentional error and as a
result of the same financial statements present an incorrect picture, which has been detected after the
end of the reporting period but before the approval of the financial statements. The same is an
adjusting event. Accordingly, the value of investments in the financial statements should be adjusted
for the fraudulent error in computation of value of investments.
Question 10: (RTP Nov 19)
ABC Ltd. received a demand notice on 15th June, 20X2 for an additional amount of ₹ 28,00,000 from
the Excise Department on account of higher excise duty levied by the Excise Department compared to
the rate at which the company was creating provision and depositing the same in respect of
transactions related to financial year 20X1-20X2. The financial statements for the year 20X1-20X2 are
approved on 10th August, 20X2. In July, 20X2, the company has appealed against the demand of ₹
28,00,000 and the company has expected that the demand would be settled at ₹ 15,00,000 only.
Show how the above event will have a bearing on the financial statements for the year 20 X1-20X2.
Whether these events are adjusting or non-adjusting events and explain the treatment accordingly.
Solution:
Ind AS 10 defines “Events after the Reporting Period‟ as follows:
Events after the reporting period are those events, favourable and unfavourable, that occur between
the end of the reporting period and the date when the financial statements are approved by the Board
of Directors in case of a company, and, by the corresponding approving authority in caseof any other
entity for issue. Two types of events can be identified:
(a) those that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the reporting period
(adjusting events after the reporting period); and
(b) those that are indicative of conditions that arose after the reporting period (non-adjusting events
after the reporting period)
In the instant case, the demand notice has been received on 15 th June, 20X2, which is between the
end of the reporting period and the date of approval of financial statements. Therefore, it is an event
after the reporting period. This demand for additional amount has been raised because of higher rate
of excise duty levied by the Excise Department in respect of goods already manufactured during the
reporting period. Accordingly, condition exists on 31st March, 20X2, as the goods have been
manufactured during the reporting period on which additional excise duty has been levied and this
event has been confirmed by the receipt of demand notice. Therefore, it is an adjusting event.
In accordance with the principles of Ind AS 37, the company should make a provision in the financial
statements for the year 20X1-20X2, at best estimate of the expenditure to be incurred, i.e., ₹15,00,000.
MTP.RTP.PAST PAPER
MTP: OCTOBER, 2020
Question 01:
purchased a controlling interest in entity ABC Ltd. on 1June 2019. Sales of products from XYZ Ltd. to
ABC Ltd. in the two-month period from 1 April 2019 to 31 May 2019 totalled ₹ 8,00,000. Following the
share purchase by Mrs. P, XYZ Ltd. began to supply the products at a discount of 20% to their normal
selling price and allowed ABC Ltd. three months’ credit (previously ABC Ltd. was only allowed one
month’s credit, XYZ Ltd.’s normal credit policy). Sales of products from XYZ Ltd. to ABC Ltd. in the ten-
month period from 1 June 2019 to 31 March 2020 totalled ₹ 60,00,000. On 31 March 2020, the trade
receivables of XYZ Ltd. Included ₹18,00,000 in respect of amounts owing by ABC Ltd.
Analyse and show (where possible by quantifying amounts) how the above event would be reported in
the financial statements of XYZ Ltd. for the year ended 31 March 2020 as per Ind AS. You are
required to mention the disclosure requirements as well. (5 Marks)
Solution:
XYZ Ltd. would include the total revenue of ₹ 68,00,000 (₹ 60,00,000 + ₹ 8,00,000) from ABC Ltd. received /
receivable in the year ended 31st March 2020 within its revenue and show ₹ 18,00,000 within trade receivables at
31 March 2020.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
From 1st June 2019, ABC Ltd. would also be regarded as a related party of XYZ Ltd. because from thatdate ABC Ltd.
is an entity controlled by another related party.
Since ABC Ltd. is a related party with whom XYZ Ltd. has transactions, XYZ Ltd. should disclose:
– The nature of the related party relationship.
– The revenue of ₹ 60,00,000 from ABC Ltd. since 1st June 2019.
– The outstanding balance of ₹ 18,00,000 at 31st March 2020.
In the current circumstances it may well be necessary for XYZ Ltd. to also disclose the favourable terms under
which the transactions are carried out.
RTP MAY 2018
QUESTION
Mac Ltd. purchased goods on credit from Toy Ltd. for ` 580 lakhs for export. The export order was
cancelled. Mac Ltd. decided to sell the same goods in the local market with a price discount. Toy Ltd. was
requested to offer a price discount of ` 10%. Toy Ltd.
wants to adjust the sales figure to the extent of the discount requested by Mac Ltd. Discuss whether such a
treatment in the books of Toy Ltd. is justified as per the provisions of the relevant Ind AS. Also, Toy Ltd.
entered into a sale deed for its Land on 15th March, 20X1. But registration was done with the registrar on
20th April, 20X1. But before registration, is it possible to recognize the sale and the gain at the balance
sheet date? Give reasons in support of your answer.
SOLUTION
Toy Ltd. had sold goods to Mac Ltd on credit worth for ` 580 lakhs and the sale was completed in all
respects. Mac Ltd.'s decision to sell the same in the domestic market at a discount does not affect the
amount recorded as sales by Toy Ltd. The price discount of 10% offered by Toy Ltd. after request of Mac
Ltd. was not in the nature of a discount given during the ordinary course of trade because otherwise the
same would have been given at the time of sale itself. However, there appears to be an uncertainty relating
to the collectability of the debt, which has arisen subsequent to sale. Therefore, it would be appropriate to
make a separate provision to reflect the uncertainty relating to collectability rather than to adjust the amount
of revenue originally recorded. Hence such discount should be charged to the Statement of Profit and Loss
and not shown as deduction from the sales figure. With respect to sale of land, both sale and gain on sale
of land earned by Toy Ltd. shall be recognized in the books at the balance sheet date. In substance, the
land was transferred with significant risk & rewards of ownership to the buyer before the balance sheet date
and what was pending was merely a formality to register the deed. The registration post the balance sheet
date only confirms the condition of sale at the b alance sheet date as per Ind AS 10 “Events after the
Reporting Period.”
QUESTION 01: (NOVEMBER 2019) (MTP MAR 2021)
Discuss with reasons whether these events are in nature of adjusting or non-adjusting and the treatment needed in light of accounting
standard Ind AS 10.
(i) Moon Ltd. won an arbitration award on 25th April, 2019 for ₹ 1 crore. From the arbitration proceeding, it was
evident that the Company is most likely to win the arbitration award. The directors approved the financial statements for
the year ending 31.03.2019 on 1st May, 2019. The management did not consider the effect of the above transaction in
Financial Year 2018-2019, as it was favourable to the Company and the award came after the end of the financial year.
(ii) Zoom Ltd. has a trading business of Mobile telephones. The Company has purchased 1000 mobiles phones at ₹ 5,000 each on
15th March, 2019. The manufacturers of phone had announced the release of the new version on 1st March, 2019 but had not
announced the price. Zoom Ltd. has valued inventory at cost of ₹ 5,000 each at the year ending 31st March, 2019.
Due to arrival of new advance version of Mobile Phone on 8 th April, 2019, the selling prices of the mobile stocks remaining with
Company was dropped at ₹ 4,000 each.
The financial statements of the company valued mobile phones @ ₹ 5,000 each and not at the value @ ₹ 4,000 less expenses on
sales, as the price reduction in selling price was affected after 31.03.2019.
(iii) There as an old due from a debtor amounting to ₹ 15 lakh against whom insolvency proceedings was instituted prior to the
financial year ending 31 st March, 2019. The debtor was declared insolvent on 15th April, 2019.
(iv) Assume that subsequent to the year end and before the financial statements are approved, Company’s management
announces that it will restructure the operation of the company. Management plans to make significant redundancies and to close a
few divisions of company’s business; however, there is no formal plan yet. Should management recognise a provision in the books,
if the company decides subsequent to end of the accounting year to restructure its operations? (8 Marks)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
SOLUTION:
As per Ind AS 10, the treatment of stated issues would be as under:
(i) Adjusting event: It is an adjusting event as it is the settlement after the reporting period of a court case that
confirms that the entity had a present obligation at the end of the reporting period. Even though winning of award is
favorable to the company, it should be accounted in its books as receivable since it is an adjusting event.
(ii) Adjusting event: The sale of inventories after the reporting period may give evidence about their net realizable value
at the end of the reporting period, hence it is an adjusting event as per Ind AS 10. Zoom Limited should value its
inventory at ₹ 40,00,000. Hence, appropriate provision must be made for ₹ 15 lakh.
(iii) Adjusting event: As per Ind AS 10, the receipt of information after the reporting period indicating that an asset was
impaired at the end of the reporting period, or that the amount of a previously recognised impairment loss for that asset
needs to be adjusted.The bankruptcy of a customer that occurs after the reporting period usually confirms that the customer
was credit- impaired at the end of the reporting period.
(iv) Non – adjusting event: Announcing or commencing the implementation of a major restructuring after
reporting period is a non- adjusting event as per Ind AS 10. Though this is a non- adjusting event occurred after the reporting
period, yet it would result in disclosure of the event in the financial statements, if restructuring is material.
This would not require provision since as per Ind AS 37, decision to restructure was not taken before or on the reporting
date. Hence, it does not give rise to a constructive obligation at the end of the reporting period to create a
provision.
JAN 2021
QUESTION
H Ltd. constructed a warehouse at a cost of ` 10 lakhs in 2015. It first became available for use by H Ltd.
on 1 st January 2016. On 29th January 2020, H Ltd. discovered that its warehouse was damaged. During
early February 2020, an investigation revealed that the damage was due to a structural fault in the
construction of the warehouse. The fault became apparent when the warehouse building leaked severely
after heavy rainfall in the week ended 27th January 2020. The discovery of the fault is an indication of
impairment. So, H Ltd. was required to estimate the recoverable amount of its warehouse at 31st
December 2019. This estimate was ` 6,00,000. Furthermore, H Ltd. reassessed the useful life of its
warehouse at 20 years from the date that it was ready for use. Before discovering the fault, H Ltd. had
depreciated the warehouse on the straight-line method to a nil residual value over its estimated 30-year
useful life.
Seepage of rain water through the crack in the warehouse caused damage to inventory worth about `
1,00,000 (cost price) and became un-saleable. The entire damaged inventory was on hand as at 31st
December, 2019. H Ltd. has not insured against any of the losses.
It accounts for all its property, plant and equipment under the cost model. H Ltd.’s annual financial
statements for the year ended 31st December, 2019 were approved for issue by the Board of Directors on
28th February, 2020. You are required to :
(i) Prepare accounting entries to record the effects of the events after the end of the reporting
period in the accounting records of H Ltd. for the year ended 31st December, 2019. Kindly
ignore tax impact;
(ii) Discuss disclosure requirement in above case as per relevant Ind AS; and
(iii) Will your answer be different if there was no structural fault and damage to the warehouse had
been caused by an event that occurred after 31st December, 2019?
SOLUTION
(i) Journal Entries on 31st December 2019
Depreciation expense A/c (W.N.1) Dr. 19,608
To Warehouse or Accumulated depreciation A/c 19,608
(Being additional depreciation expense recognised for
the year ended 31st December 2019 arising from the
reassessment of the useful life of the warehouse)
Impairment loss A/c (W.N.2) Dr. 2,47,059
To Warehouse or Accumulated depreciation A/c 2,47,059
(Being impairment loss recognised due to discovery of
structural fault in the construction of warehouse at 31st
December 2019)
(ii) (a) The damage to warehouse is an adjusting event (occurred after the end of the year 2019) for
the reporting period 2019, since it provides evidence that the structural fault existed at the end of
the reporting period. It is an adjusting event, in spite of the fact that fault has been discovered
after the reporting date. The effects of the damage to the warehouse are recognised in the year
2019 reporting period. Prior periods will not be adjusted because those financial statements were
prepared in good faith (eg regarding estimate of useful life, assessment of impairment indicators

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
etc) and had not affected the financials of prior years.
(b) Damage of inventory due to seepage of rainwater ` 1,00,000 occurred during the year 2020.
It is a non-adjusting event after the end of the 2019 reporting period since the inventory was in
good condition at 31st December 2019. Hence, no accounting has been done for it in the year
2019. H Ltd. must disclose the nature of the event (i.e. rain-damage to inventories) and an
estimate of the financial effect (i.e. ` 1,00,000 loss) in the notes to its 31st December 2019
annual financial statements.
(iii) If the damage to the warehouse had been caused by an event that occurred after 31st December 2019
and was not due to structural fault, then it would be considered as a non-adjusting event after the end of the
reporting period 2019 as the warehouse would have been in a good condition at 31st December 2019
Working Notes:
1. Calculation of additional depreciation to be charged in the year 2019
Original depreciation as per SLM already charged during the year 2019
= ` 10,00,000/ 30 years = ` 33,333.
Carrying value at the end of 2018 = 10,00,000 – (` 33,333 x 3 years) = ` 9,00,000
Revised depreciation = 9,00,000 / 17 years = ` 52,941
Additional depreciation to be recognised in the books in the year 2019
= ` 52,941 – ` 33,333 = ` 19,608
2. Calculation of impairment loss in the year 2019
Carrying value after charging depreciation for the year 2019
= ` 9,00,000 – ` 52,941 = ` 8,47,059
Recoverable value of the warehouse = ` 6,00,000
Impairment loss = Carrying value - Recoverable value = ` 8,47,059 - ` 6,00,000 = ` 2,47,059

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 8 - ACCOUNTING POLICIES, CHANGES IN ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND ERRORS
Illustration 1
Can an entity voluntarily change one or more of its accounting policies?
Solution:
A change in an accounting policy can be made only if the change is required or
permittedby Ind AS 8.
As per para 14 of Ind AS 8, an entity shall change an accounting policy only if the change:
(a) is required by an Ind AS; or
(b) results in the financial statements providing reliable and more relevant information about
the effects of transactions, other events or conditions on the entity’s financial position, financial
performance or cash flows.
Para 15 of the standard states that the users of financial statements need to be able to
compare the financial statements of an entity over time to identify trends in its financial
position, financial performance and cash flows. Therefore, the same accounting policies are
applied within each period and from one period to the next unless a change in accounting
policy meets one of the above criteria.
Paragraph 14(b) lays down two requirements that must be complied with in order to make a
voluntary change in an accounting policy. First, the information resulting from application of the
changed (i.e., the new) accounting policy must be reliable. Second, the changed accounting
policy must result in ―more relevant information being presented in the financial statements.
Whether a changed accounting policy results in reliable and more relevant financial
information is a matter of assessment in the particular facts and circumstances of each case. In
order to ensure that such an assessment is made judiciously (such that a voluntary change in an
accounting policy does not effectively become a matter of free choice), paragraph 29 of Ind AS 8
requires an entity making a voluntary change in an accounting policy to disclose, inter alia, the
reasons why applying the new accounting policy provides reliable and more relevant
information.
Illustration 2
Entity ABC acquired a building for its administrative purposes and presented the same as
property, plant and equipment (PPE) in the financial year 20 X1-20X2. During the financial year
20X2-20X3, it relocated the office to a new building and leased the said building to a third party.
Following the change in the usage of the building, Entity ABC reclassified it from PPE to
investment property in the financialyear 20X2-20X3. Should Entity ABC account for the change
as a change in accounting policy?
Solution
Paragraph 16(a) of Ind AS 8 provides that the application of an accounting policy for
transactions, other events or conditions that differ in substance from those previously
occurring are not changes in accounting policies
As per Ind AS 16, ‗property, plant and equipment are tangible items that:
(a) are held for use in the production or supply of goods or services, for rental to
others,or for administrative purposes; and
(b) are expected to be used during more than one period.
As per Ind AS 40, “investment property” is property (land or a building—or part of a
building—or both) held (by the owner or by the lessee as a right-of-use asset) to earn
rentals or forcapital appreciation or both, rather than for:
i. use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes;
or
ii. sale in the ordinary course of business.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
As per the above definitions, whether a building is an item of property, plant and equipment
(PPE) or an investment property for an entity depends on the purpose for which it is held
by the entity. It is thus possible that due to a change in the purpose for which it is held, a
building that was previously classified as an item of property, plant and equipment may
warrant reclassification as an investment property, or vice versa. Whether a building is in the
nature of PPE or investment property is determined by applying the definitions of these
terms from the perspective of that entity. Thus, the classification of a building as an item
of property, plant and equipment or as an investment property is not a matter of an
accounting policy choice.
Accordingly, a change in classification of a building from property, plant and equipment to
investment property due to change in the purpose for which it is held by the entity is not a
change in an accounting policy.
Illustration 3
Whether change in functional currency of an entity represents a change in accounting policy?
Solution
Paragraph 16(a) of Ind AS 8 provides that the application of an accounting policy for
transactions, other events or conditions that differ in substance from those previously
occurring are not changes in accounting policies.
As per Ind AS 21, “functional currency’ is the currency of the primary economic environment in
which the entity operates.
Paragraphs 9-12 of Ind AS 21 list factors to be considered by an entity in determining its
functional currency. It is recognised that there may be cases where the functional currency is not
obvious. In such cases, Ind AS 21 requires the management to use its judgement to
determine the functional currency that most faithfully represents the economic effects of the
underlying transactions, events and conditions.
Paragraph 13 of Ind AS 21 specifically notes that an entity’s functional currency reflects the
underlying transactions, events and conditions that are relevant to it. Accordingly, once
determined, the functional currency is not changed unless there is a change in those
underlying transactions, events and conditions. Thus, functional currency of an entity is not a
matter of an accounting policy choice.
In view of the above, a change in functional currency of an entity does not represent a change
in accounting policy and Ind AS 8, therefore, does not apply to such a change. Ind AS 21
requires that when there is a change in an entity’s functional currency, the entity shall apply
the translation procedures applicable to the new functional currency prospectively from the
date of the change.
Illustration 4
An entity developed one of its accounting policies by considering a pronouncement of an
overseas national standard-setting body in accordance with Ind AS 8. Would it be permissible for
the entity to change the said policy to reflect a subsequent amendment in that pronouncement?
Solution
In the absence of an Ind AS that specifically applies to a transaction, other event or condition,
management may apply an accounting policy from the most recent pronouncements of
International Accounting Standards Board and in absence thereof those of the other standard
- setting bodies that use a similar conceptual framework to develop accounting standards. If,
following an amendment of such a pronouncement, the entity chooses to change an
accounting policy, that change is accounted for and disclosed as a voluntary change in
accounting policy. As such a change is a voluntary change in accounting policy, it can be
made only if it results in information that is reliable and more relevant (and does not conflict

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
with the sources in Ind AS 8).
Illustration 5
Whether an entity can change its accounting policy of subsequent measurement of property, plant
andequipment (PPE) from revaluation model to cost model?
Solution
Paragraph 29 of Ind AS 16 provides that an entity shall choose either the cost model or the
revaluation model as its accounting policy for subsequent measurement of an entire class of
PPE.
A change from revaluation model to cost model for a class of PPE can be made only if it
meets the condition specified in Ind AS 8 paragraph 14(b) i.e., the change results in the
financial statements providing reliable and more relevant information to the users of financial
statements. For example, unlisted entity planning IPO may change its accounting policy from
revaluation model to cost model for some or all classes of PPE to align the entity’s accounting
policy with that of listed markets participants within that industry so as to enhance the
comparability of its financial statements with those of other listed market participants within
the industry. Such a change – from revaluation model to cost model is not expected to be
frequent.
Where the change in accounting policy from revaluation model to cost model is considered
permissible in accordance with Ind AS 8 paragraph 14(b), it shall be accounted for
retrospectively, in accordance with Ind AS 8.
Illustration 6
Whether an entity is required to disclose the impact of any new Ind AS which is issued but not yet
effective in its financial statements as per Ind AS 8?
Solution
Paragraph 30 of Ind AS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors,
states as follows:
When an entity has not applied a new Ind AS that has been issued but is not yet effective,
theentity shall disclose:
(a) this fact; and
(b) known or reasonably estimable information relevant to assessing the possible impact
that application of the new Ind AS will have on the entity’s financial statements in the
periodof initial application.
Accordingly, it may be noted that an entity is required to disclose the impact of Ind AS which
has been issued but is not yet effective.
Illustration 7
Whether a change in inventory cost formula is a change in accounting policy or a change in accounting
estimate?
Solution
As per Ind AS 8, accounting policies are the specific principles, bases, conventions, rules and
practices applied by an entity in preparing and presenting financial statements. Further,
paragraph 36(a) of Ind AS 2, “Inventories”, specifically requires disclosure of cost formula used
as a part of disclosure of accounting policies adopted in measurement of inventories.
Accordingly, a change in cost formula is a change in accounting policy.
Illustration 8
An entity has presented certain material liabilities as non-current in its financial statements for
periods up to 31st March, 20X1. While preparing annual financial statements for the year ended
31st March, 20X2, management discovers that these liabilities should have been classified as
current. The management intends to restate the comparative amounts for the prior period

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
presented (i.e., as at 31st March, 20X1). Wouldthis reclassification of liabilities from non-current to
current in the comparative amounts be considered to be correction of an error under Ind AS 8?
Would the entity need to present a third balance sheet?
Solution
As per paragraph 41 of Ind AS 8, errors can arise in respect of the recognition, measurement,
presentation or disclosure of elements of financial statements. Financial statements do not
comply with Ind AS if they contain either material errors or immaterial errors made
intentionally to achieve a particular presentation of an entity‘s financial position, financial
performance or cash flows. Potential current period errors discovered in that period are
corrected before the financial statements are approved for issue. However, material errors are
sometimes not discovered until a subsequent period, and these prior period errors are
corrected in the comparative information presented in the financial statements for that
subsequent period.
In accordance with the above, the reclassification of liabilities from non-current to current
would be considered as correction of an error under Ind AS 8. Accordingly, in the financial
statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X2, the comparative amounts as at 31st March, 20X1
would be restated to reflect the correct classification.
Ind AS 1 requires an entity to present a third balance sheet as at the beginning of the preceding
period in addition to the minimum comparative financial statements, if, inter alia, it makes a
retrospective restatement of items in its financial statements and the restatement has a material
effect on the information in the balance sheet at the beginning of the preceding period.
Accordingly, the entity should present a third balance sheet as at the beginning of the
preceding period, i.e., as at 1st April, 20X0 in addition to the comparatives for the financial year
20X0-20X1.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
A carpet retail outlet sells and fits carpets to the general public. It recognizes revenue when the
carpet is fitted, which on an average is six weeks after the purchase of the carpet.
It then decides to sub-contract the fitting of carpets to self-employed fitters. It now recognizes
revenue at the point-of-sale of the carpet.
Whether this change in recognising the revenue is a change in accounting policy as per the
provision of IndAS 8?
Solution:
This is not a change in accounting policy as the carpet retailer has changed the way that the
carpets are fitted.
Therefore, there would be no need to retrospectively change prior period figures for revenue
recognized.
Question 02:
When is an entity required to present a third balance sheet as at the beginning of the preceding period?
Solution:
As per paragraph 40A of Ind AS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements, an entity shall
present a third balance sheet as at the beginning of the preceding period in addition to the
minimum comparative financial statements required by paragraph 38A of the standard if:
 it applies an accounting policy retrospectively, makes a retrospective restatement of
items in its financial statements or reclassifies items in its financial statements; and
 the retrospective application, retrospective restatement or the reclassification has a
material effect on the information in the balance sheet at the beginning of the preceding
period

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Question 03:
During 20X2, Delta Ltd., changed its accounting policy for depreciating property, plant and
equipment, so as to apply much more fully a components approach, whilst at the same time adopting
the revaluation model.
In years before 20X2, Delta Ltd.‘s asset records were not sufficiently detailed to apply a components
approach fully. At the end of 20X1, management commissioned an engineering survey, which
provided information on the components held and their fair values, useful lives, estimated residual
values and depreciable amounts at the beginning of 20X2. However, the survey did not provide a
sufficient basis for reliably estimating the cost of those components that had not previously been
accounted for separately, and the existing records before the survey did not permit this
information to be reconstructed.
Delta Ltd.‘s management considered how to account for each of the two aspects of the accounting
change. They determined that it was not practicable to account for the change to a fuller
components approach retrospectively, or to account for that change prospectively from any earlier
date than the start of 20X2. Also, the change from a cost model to a revaluation model is required
to be accounted for prospectively. Therefore, management concluded that it should apply Delta
Ltd.‘s new policy prospectively from the start of 20X2.
(i) Delta Ltd.‘s tax rate is 30%
(ii) Property, plant and equipment at the end of 20X1:
Cost ₹ 25,000
Depreciation ₹ 14,000
Net book value ₹ 11,000
(iii) Prospective depreciation expense for 20X2 (old basis) ₹ 1,500
(iv) Some results of the engineering survey:
Valuation ₹ 17,000
Estimated residual value ₹ 3,000
Average remaining asset life 7 years
Depreciation expense on existing property, plant and equipment for 20X2 (new basis) ₹ 2,000
You are required to prepare relevant note for disclosure in accordance with Ind AS 8.
Solution:
Extract from the notes
From the start of 20X2, Delta Ltd., changed its accounting policy for depreciating property,
plant and equipment, so as to apply much more fully a components approach, whilst at the
same time adopting the revaluation model. Management takes the view that this policy
provides reliable and more relevant information because it deals more accurately with the
components of property, plant and equipment and is based on up-to-date values. The policy
has been applied prospectively from the start of 20X2 because it was not practicable to
estimate the effects of applying the policy either retrospectively, or prospectively from any
earlier date. Accordingly, the adoption of the new policy has no effect on prior years. The effect
on the current year is to increase the carrying amount of property, plant and equipment at the
start of the year by ₹ 6,000; increase the opening deferred tax provision by ₹ 1,800; create a
revaluation surplus at the start of the year of ₹ 4,200; increase depreciation expense by ₹ 500;
and reduce tax expense by ₹ 150.
Question 04:
Is change in the depreciation method for an item of property, plant and equipment a change in
accounting policy or a change in accounting estimate?
Solution:
As Paragraphs 60 and 61 of Ind AS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment, the depreciation

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
method used shall reflect the pattern in which the asset’s future economic benefits are
expected to be consumed by the entity. The depreciation method applied to an asset shall be
reviewed at least at each financial year-end and, if there has been a significant change in the
expected pattern of consumption of the future economic benefits embodied in the asset, the
method shall be changed to reflect the changed pattern. Such a change is accounted for as a
change in anaccounting estimate in accordance with Ind AS 8.
As per the above, depreciation method for a depreciable asset has to reflect the expected
pattern of consumption of future economic benefits embodied in the asset. Determination of
depreciation method involves an accounting estimate and thus depreciation method is not a
matter of an accounting policy.
Accordingly, Ind AS 16 requires a change in depreciation method to be accounted for as a
changein an accounting estimate, i.e., prospectively.
Question 05:( MTP APR 2021)
An entity charged off certain expenses as finance costs in its financial statements for the year
ended 31st March, 20X1. While preparing annual financial statements for the year ended 31st
March, 20X2, management discovered that these expenses should have been classified as other
expenses instead of finance costs. The error occurred because the management inadvertently
misinterpreted certain facts. The entity intends to restate the comparative amounts for the prior
period presented in which the error occurred (i.e ., year ended 31st March, 20X1). Would this
reclassification of expenses from finance costs to other expenses in the comparative amounts will
be considered as correction of an error under Ind AS 8? Would the entity need to present a third
balance sheet?
Solution:
complywith Ind AS if they contain either material errors or immaterial errors made intentionally
to achieve a particular presentation of an entity’s financial position, financial performance or
cash flows. Potential current period errors discovered in that period are corrected before the
financial statements are approved for issue. However, material errors are sometimes not
discovered until a subsequent period, and these prior period errors are corrected in the
comparative information presented in the financial statements for that subsequent period.
In accordance with the above, the reclassification of expenses from finance costs to other expenses
would be considered as correction of an error under Ind AS 8. Accordingly, in the financial
statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X2, the comparative amounts for the year ended
31st March, 20X1 would be restated to reflect the correct classification.
Ind AS 1 requires an entity to present a third balance sheet as at the beginning of the preceding
period in addition to the minimum comparative financial statements if, inter alia, it makes a
retrospective restatement of items in its financial statements and the restatement has a
material effect on the information in the balance sheet at the beginning of the preceding
period.
In the given case, the retrospective restatement of relevant items in statement of profit and loss
has no effect on the information in the balance sheet at the beginning of the preceding period
(1st April, 20X0). Therefore, the entity is not required to present a third balance sheet.
Question 06:
While preparing the annual financial statements for the year ended 31 st March, 20X3, an entity
discovers that a provision for constructive obligation for payment of bonus to selected employees in
corporate office (material in amount) which was required to be recognised in the annual financial

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X1 was not recognised due to oversight of facts. The
bonus was paid during the financial year ended 31 st March, 20X2 and was recognised as an
expense in the annual financial statements for the said year. Would this situation require
retrospective restatement of comparatives considering that the error was material?
Solution:
complywith Ind AS if they contain either material errors or immaterial errors made intentionally
to achieve a particular presentation of an entity’s financial position, financial performance or
cash flows. Potential current period errors discovered in that period are corrected before the
financial statements are approved for issue. However, material errors are sometimes not
discovered until a subsequent period, and these prior period errors are corrected in the
comparative information presented in the financial statements for that subsequent period.
As per paragraph 40A of Ind AS 1, an entity shall present a third balance sheet as at the
beginningof the preceding period in addition to the minimum comparative financial statements
if, inter alia, it makes a retrospective restatement of items in its financial statements and the
retrospective restatement has a material effect on the information in the balance sheet at the
beginning of the preceding period.
In the given case, expenses for the year ended 31st March, 20X1 and liabilities as at 31st
March, 20X1 were understated because of non-recognition of bonus expense and related
provision. Expenses for the year ended 31st March, 20X2, on the other hand, were overstated
to the same extent because of recognition of the aforesaid bonus as expense for the year. To
correct the above errors in the annual financial statements for the year ended 31st March,
20X3, the entity should:
(a) restate the comparative amounts (i.e., those for the year ended 31 st March, 20X2) in
the statement of profit and loss; and
(b) present a third balance sheet as at the beginning of the preceding period (i.e., as at 1st
April, 20X1) wherein it should recognise the provision for bonus and restate the retained
earnings.
Question 07:
While preparing interim financial statements for the half-year ended 30th September, 20X1, an
entity notes that there has been an under-accrual of certain expenses in the interim financial
statements for the first quarter ended 30th June, 20X1. The amount of under accrual is assessed to
be material in the context of interim financial statements. However, it is expected that the amount
would be immaterial in the context of the annual financial statements. The management is of the
view that there is no need to correct the error in the interim financial statements considering that the
amount is expected to be immaterial from the point of view of the annual financial statements.
Whether the management’s view is acceptable?
Solution:
Paragraph 41 of Ind AS 8, inter alia, states that financial statements do not comply with Ind AS
if they contain either material errors or immaterial errors made intentionally to achieve a
particular presentation of an entity’s financial position, financial performance or cash flows.
As regards the assessment of materiality of an item in preparing interim financial statements,
paragraph 25 of Ind AS 34, Interim Financial Statements, states as follows:
While judgement is always required in assessing materiality, this Standard bases the
recognition and disclosure decision on data for the interim period by itself for reasons of
understandability of the interim figures. Thus, for example, unusual items, changes in

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
accounting policies or estimates, and errors are recognised and disclosed on the basis of
materiality in relation to interim period data to avoid misleading inferences that might result
from non-disclosure. The overriding goal is to ensure that an interim financial report includes all
information that is relevant to understanding an entity’s financial position and performance
during the interim period.
As per the above, while materiality judgements always involve a degree of subjectivity, the
overriding goal is to ensure that an interim financial report includes all the information that is
relevant to an understanding of the financial position and performance of the entity during the
interim period. It is therefore not appropriate to base quantitative assessments of materiality on
projected annual figures when evaluating errors in interim financial statements.
Accordingly, the management is required to correct the error in the interim financial statements
since it is assessed to be material in relation to interim period data.
Question 08:
ABC Ltd has an investment property with an original cost of ₹ 1,00,000 which it inadvertently
omitted to depreciate in previous financial statements. The property was acquired on 1st April,
20X1. The property has a useful life of 10 years and is depreciated using straight line method.
Estimated residual value at the end of 10 year is Nil.
How should the error be corrected in the financial statements for the year ended 31st March,20X4,
assuming the impact of the same is considered material? For simplicity, ignore tax effects.
Solution:
The error shall be corrected by retrospectively restating the figures for financial year 20X2-20X3
and also by presenting a third balance sheet as at April 1, 20X2 which is the beginning of the
earliest period presented in the financial statements.
Question 09: (MTP Oct 18/RTP May 19)
ABC Ltd. changed its method adopted for inventory valuation in the year 20 X2-20X3. Prior to the
change, inventory was valued using the first in first out method (FIFO). However, it was felt that
in order to match current practice and to make the financial statements more relevant and reliable, a
weighted average valuation model would be more appropriate.
The effect of the change in the method of valuation of inventory was as follows:
 31st March, 20X1 - Increase of ₹ 10 million
Profit or loss under the FIFO valuation model are as follows:
20X2-20X3 20X1-20X2
Revenue 324 296
Cost of goods sold (173) (164)
Gross profit 151 132
Expenses (83) (74)
Profit 68 58
Retained earnings at 31st March, 20X1 were ₹ 423 million.
Present the change in accounting policy in the profit or loss and produce an extract of the
statement of changes in equity in accordance with Ind AS 8.
Solution:
Profit or loss under weighted average valuation method is as follows:
20X2-20X3 20X1-20X2 (Restated)
Revenue 324 296
Cost of goods sold (168) (159)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Gross profit 156 137
Expenses (83) (74)
Profit 73 63
Statement of changes in Equity (extract)

Retained earnings Retained earnings (Original)
At 1st April, 20X1 423 423
Change in inventory valuation policy 10 -
At 1st April, 20X1 (Restated) 433 -
Profit for the year 20X1-20X2 63 58
At 31st March, 20X2 496 481
Profit for the 20X2-20X3 73 68
st
At 31 March, 20X3 569 549
MTP/RTP/ PASTPAPER
MTP: M A Y , 2020
Question 01:
During the year ended 31st March, 20X2, Blue Ocean group changed its accounting policy for depreciating property, plant and
equipment, so as to apply components approach fully, whilst at the same time adopting the revaluation model.
In years before 20X1-20X2, Blue Ocean group’s asset records were not sufficiently detailed to apply components
approach fully. At the end of 31st March, 20X1, management commissioned an engineering survey, which provided
information on the components held and their fair values, useful lives, estimated residual values and depreciable amounts
at the beginning of 20X1- 20X2.
The results are shown as under:
Property, plant and equipment at the end of 31st March, 20X1
Rs.
Cost 25,000
Depreciation (14,000)
Net book value 11,000
Depreciation expense for 20X1-20X2 (on old basis) 1,500
Some results of the engineering survey:
Valuation 17,000
Estimated residual value 3,000
Average remaining asset life (years) 7
However, the survey did not provide a sufficient basis for reliably estimating the cost of those components that had
not previously been accounted for separately, and the existing records before the survey did not permit this
information to be reconstructed.
The board of directors considered how to account for each of the two aspects of the accounting change. They determined
that it was not practicable to account for the change to a fuller components approach retrospectively, or to account for
that change prospectively from any earlier date than the start of 20X1-20X2.
Also, the change from a cost model to a revaluation model is required to be accounted for prospectively. Therefore,
management concluded that it should apply Blue Ocean group’s new policy prospectively from the start of 20X1-
20X2.Blue Ocean group’s tax rate is 30 per cent.
Compute the impact of change in accounting policy related to change in carrying amount of Property, Plant &
Equipment under revaluation method and impact on taxes based on the basis of information provided. Show the
impact of each item affected on financial statements by the analysis of stated issue. (6 Marks)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
As per Ind AS 8 ‘Accounting Policies, Accounting Estimates and Errors, prospective application of a change in
accounting policy has to be done since retrospective application is not practicable.
Property, plant and equipment at the end of 31st March, 20X2:
As per the engineering survey: (Rs.)
Valuation of PPE 17,000
Estimated residual value 3,000
Average remaining asset life (years) 7
Depreciation expense on existing property, plant and equipment
for 20X1-20X2 (new basis) (17,000 – 3,000)/7 2,000
From the start of 20X1-20X2, Blue Ocean group changed its accounting policy for depreciating property, plant
and equipment, so as to apply components approach, whilst at the same time adopting the revaluation
model. Management takes the view that this policy provides reliable and more relevant information because it
deals more accurately with the components of property, plant and equipment and is based on up-to-date
values.
The policy has been applied prospectively from the start of the year 20X1-20X2 because it was not practicable
to estimate the effects of applying the policy either retrospectively or prospectively from any earlier date.
Accordingly, the adoption of the new policy has no effect on prior years.
The impact on the financial statements for 20X1-20X2 would be as under:
Particulars Rs.
Increase the carrying amount of property, plant and equipment at the start ofthe year (17,000-11,000) 6,000
Increase the opening deferred tax provision (6,000 x 30%) 1,800
Create a revaluation surplus at the start of the year (6,000 – 1,800) 4,200
Increase depreciation expense by (Rs.2,000 – Rs.1,500) 500
Reduce tax expense on depreciation (30%) 150
RTP: NOVEMBER,2019(MTP MAR 2021)
Question:4
During 20X4-X5, Cheery Limited discovered that some products that had been sold during 20X3-
X4 were incorrectly included in inventory at 31st March, 20X4 at ₹6,500.
Cheery Limited’s accounting records for 20X4-X5 show sales of ₹ 104,000, cost of goods sold of ₹
86,500 (including ₹ 6,500 for the error in opening inventory), and income taxes of ₹5,250.
In 20X3-X4, Cheery Limited reported: ₹
Sales 73,500
Cost of goods sold (53,500)
Profit before income taxes 20,000
Income taxes (6,000)
Profit 14,000
Basic and diluted EPS 2.8
The 20X3-X4 opening retained earnings was ₹ 20,000 and closing retained earnings was ₹ 34,000.
Cheery Limited’s income tax rate was 30% for 20X4-X5 and 20X3-X4. It had no other income or
expenses.
Cheery Limited had ₹ 50,000 (5,000 shares of ₹ 10 each) of share capital throughout, and no other
components of equity except for retained earnings.
State how the above will be treated /accounted in Cheery Limited’s Statement of profit and loss,
statement of changes in equity and in notes wherever required for current period and earlier
period(s) as per relevant Ind AS.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Cheery Limited
Extract from the Statement of profit and loss
20X4-X5 (₹) 20X3-X4 (Restated) (₹)
Sales 1,04,000 73,500
Cost of goods sold (80,000) (60,000)
Profit before income taxes 24,000 13,500
Income taxes (7,200) (4,050)
Profit 16,800 9,450
Basic and diluted EPS 3.36 1.89
Cheery Limited Statement of Changes in Equity
Sharecapital Retainedearnings Total
Balance at 31st March, 20X3 50,000 20,000 70,000
Profit for the year ended 31st March, 9,450 9,450
20X4 as restated
Profit for the year ended 31st March, 20X5 16,800 16,800
Extract from the Notes
Some products that had been sold in 20X3-X4 were incorrectly included in inventory at 31st
March, 20X4 at ₹ 6,500. The financial statements of 20X3-X4 have been restated to correct
this error. The effect of the restatement on those financial statements is summarized below:
Effect on 20X3-X4
(Increase) in cost of goods sold (6,500)
Decrease in income tax expenses 1,950
(Decrease) in profit (4,550)
(Decrease) in basic and diluted EPS (0.91)
(Decrease) in inventory (6,500)
Decrease in income tax payable 1,950
(Decrease) in equity (4,550)
There is no effect on the balance sheet at the beginning of the preceding period i.e., 1st April,
20X3.
RTP: M A Y , 2020
Question:5
While preparing the financial statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X3, Alpha Limited has observed two
issues in the previous year Ind AS financial statements (i.e. 31st March, 20X2) which are as follows:
Issue 1:The company had presented certain material liabilities as non-current in its financial statements for periods
as on 31st March, 20X2. While preparing annual financial statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X3,
management discovers that these liabilities should have been classified as current. The management intends to restate the
comparative amounts for the prior period presented (i.e., as at 31st March, 20X2).
Issue 2:The company had charged off certain expenses as finance costs in the year ended31st March, 20X2. While
preparing annual financial statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X3, it was discovered that these expenses

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
should have been classified as other expenses instead of finance costs. The error occurred because the management
inadvertently misinterpreted certain facts. The entity intends to restate the comparative amounts for the prior period
presented in which the error occurred (i.e., year ended 31st March, 20X2).
What is your analysis and recommendation in respect of the issues noted with the previously presented set of
financial statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X2?
Solution:
As per paragraph 41 of Ind AS 8 ‘Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors’, errors
can arise in respect of the recognition, measurement, presentation or disclosure of elements of financial
statements. Financial statements do not comply with Ind AS if they contain either material errors or immaterial
errors made intentionally to achieve a particular presentation of an entity’s financial position, financial performance or
cash flows. Potential current period errors discovered in that period are corrected before the financial statements are
approved for issue. However, material errors are sometimes not discovered until a subsequent period, and these
prior perioderrors are corrected in the comparative information presented in the financial statements for that subsequent period.
Accordingly, the stated issues in question are to dealt as under:
Issue 1
In accordance with para 41, the reclassification of liabilities from non-current to current would be considered as
correction of an error under Ind AS 8. Accordingly, in the financial statements for the year ended March 31,
20X3, the comparative amounts as at 31 March 20X2 would be restated to reflect the correct classification. Ind
AS 1 requires an entity to present a third balance sheet as at the beginning of the preceding period in addition
to the minimum comparative financial statements, if, inter alia, it makes a retrospective restatement of items
in its financial statements and the restatement has a material effect on the information in the balance sheet at
the beginning of the preceding period. Accordingly, the entity should present a third balance sheet as at the
beginning of the preceding period, i.e., as at 1 April 20X1 in addition to the comparatives for the financial
year 20X1- 20X2.
Issue 2
In accordance with para 41, the reclassification of expenses from finance costs to other expenses would
be considered as correction of an error under Ind AS 8. Accordingly, in the financial statements for the year
ended 31 March, 20X3, the comparative amounts for the year ended 31 March 20X2 would be restated to
reflect the correct classification.
Ind AS 1 requires an entity to present a third balance sheet as at the beginning of the preceding period in
addition to the minimum comparative financial statements if, inter alia, it makes a retrospective restatement of
items in its financial statements and the restatement has a material effect on the information in the balance
sheet at the beginning of the preceding period.
In the given case, the retrospective restatement of relevant items in statement of profit and loss has no effect on
the information in the balance sheet at the beginning of the preceding period (1 April 20X1). Therefore, the entity
is notrequired to present a third balance sheet.
RTP: M A Y , 2021
Question:6
In 20X3-20X4, after the entity’s 31 March 20X3 annual financial statements were approved for issue, a latent defect in
the composition of a new product manufactured by the entity was discovered (that is, a defect that could not be discovered
by reasonable or customary inspection). As a result of the latent defect the entity incurred ₹100,000 in unanticipated costs
for fulfilling its warranty obligation in respect of sales made before 31 March 20X3. An additional ₹20,000 was
incurred to rectify the latent defect in products sold during 20X3-20X4 before the defect was detected and the production
process rectified, ₹5,000 of which relates to items of inventory at 31 March 20X3. The defective inventory was reported at
cost ₹ 15,000 in the 20X2-20X3 financial statements when its selling price less costs to complete and sell was estimated
at ₹18,000. The accounting estimates made in preparing the 31 March 20X3 financial statements were appropriately
made using all reliable information that the entity could reasonably be expected to have been obtained and taken into
account in the preparation and presentation of those financial statements.
Analyse the above situation in accordance with relevant Ind AS.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Ind AS 8 is applied in selecting and applying accounting policies, and accounting for changes in accounting policies, changes in accounting
estimates and corrections of prior period errors.
A change in accounting estimate is an adjustment of the carrying amount of an asset or a liability, or the amount of the periodic consumption of
an asset. This change in accounting estimate is an outcome of the assessment of the present status of, and expected future benefits and
obligations associated with, assets and liabilities. Changes in accounting estimates result from new information or new developments
and, accordingly, are not corrections of errors.
Further, the effect of change in an accounting estimate, shall be recognised prospectively by including it in profit or loss in: (a) the period of
the change, if the change affects that period only; or (b) the period of the change and future periods, if the change affect that.
Prior period errors are omissions from, and misstatements in, the entity’s financial statements for one or more prior periods arising from
a failure to use, or misuse of, reliable information that:
(a) was available when financial statements for those periods were approved for issue; and
(b) could reasonably be expected to have been obtained and taken into account in the preparation and presentation of those financial statements.
Such errors include the effects of mathematical mistakes, mistakes in applying accounting policies, oversights or
misinterpretations of facts, and fraud.
On the basis of above provisions, the given situation would be dealt as follows:
The defect was neither known nor reasonably possible to detect at 31 March 20X3 or before the financial statements were approved for issue,
so understatement of the warranty provision ₹1,00,000 and overstatement of inventory ₹2,000 (Note 1) in the 31 March 20X3 financial statements are not a
prior period error.
The effects of the latent defect that relate to the entity’s financial position at 31 March 20X3 are changes in accounting
estimates.
In preparing its financial statements for 31 March 20X3, the entity made the warranty provision and inventory valuation appropriately using all
reliable information that the entity could reasonably be expected to have obtained and had taken into account the same in the preparation and
presentation of those financial statements.
Consequently, the additional costs are expensed in calculating profit or loss for 20X3-20X4.
Working Note:
Inventory is measured at the lower of cost (ie ₹ 15,000) and fair value less costs to complete and sell (ie ₹ 18,000 originally estimated minus
₹ 5,000 costs to rectify latent defect) = ₹ 13,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 113 - FAIR VALUE MEASURMENT
Illustration 1
Discount Rate assessment to measure present value:
Investment 1 is a contractual right to receive ₹ 800 in 1 year. There is an established market for
comparable assets, and information about those assets, including price information, is available.
Of those comparable assets:
a. Investment 2 is a contractual right to receive ₹ 1,200 in 1 year and has a market
price of ₹1,083.
b. Investment 3 is a contractual right to receive ₹ 700 in 2 years and has a market price of
₹ 566. All three assets are comparable with respect to risk (that is, dispersion of possible
payoffs and credit). You are required to measure the fair value of Asset 1 basis above
information.
Solution
On the basis of the timing of the contractual payments to be received for Investment 1
relative to the timing for Investment 2 and Investment 3 (that is, one year for Investment 2
versus two years for Investment 3), Investment 2 is deemed more comparable to Investment 1.
Using the contractual payment to be received for Investment 1 (₹ 800) and the 1-year market rate
derived from Investment 2, the fair value of Investment 1 is calculated as under:
Investment 2 Fair Value ₹ 1,083

Contractual Cash flows in 1 year ₹ 1,200
IRR = ₹1,083 x (1 + r) = ₹1,200
= (1 + r) = (₹1,200 / ₹1,083) = 1.108
r = 1.108 – 1 = 0.108 or 10.8%
Value of Investment 1 = ₹800 / 1.108 = ₹722
Alternatively, in the absence of available market information for Investment 2, the one-year
market rate could be derived from Investment 3 using the build-up approach. In that case, the
2- year market rate indicated by Investment 3 would be adjusted to a 1-year market rate using
the term structure of the risk-free yield curve. Additional information and analysis might be
required to determine whether the risk premiums for one-year and two-year assets are the
same. If it is determined that the risk premiums for one-year and two-year assets are not the
same, the two-year market rate of return would be further adjusted for that effect.
Question 01:
An asset is sold in 2 different active markets at different prices. An entity enters into transactions
in both markets and can access the price in those markets for the asset at the measurement date.
In Market A:
The price that would be received is ₹ 26, transaction costs in that market are ₹ 3 and the costs
to transport the asset to that market are ₹2.
In Market B:
The price that would be received is ₹ 25, transaction costs in that market are ₹ 1 and the
coststo transport the asset to that market are ₹2.
You are required to calculate:
(i) The fair value of the asset, if market A is the principal market, and
(i) The fair value of the asset, if none of the markets is principal market.
Solution:
(i) If Market A is the principal market
If Market A is the principal market for the asset (i.e., the market with the greatest volume and
level of activity for the asset), the fair value of the asset would be measured using the price that
would be received in that market, after taking into account transport costs.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Fair Value will be
Price receivable 26
Less: Transportation cost (2)
Fair value of the asset 24
(ii) If neither of the market is the principal market
If neither of the market is the principal market for the asset, the fair value of the asset
would be measured using the price in the most advantageous market. The most
advantageous market is the market that maximises the amount that would be receivedto
sell the asset, after taking into account transaction costs and transport costs (i.e., the net
amount that would be received in the respective markets).
Market A Market B
Price receivable 26 25
Less: Transaction cost (3) (1)
Less: Transportation cost (2) (2)
Fair value of the asset 21 22
Since the entity would maximise the net amount that would be received for the asset in
Market B i.e. ₹ 22, the fair value of the asset would be measured using the price in MarketB.
Fair value
Price receivable 25
Question 02:
Company J acquires land in a business combination. The land is currently developed for
industrial use as a factory site. Although the land’s current use is presumed to be its highest
and best use unless market or other factors suggest a different use, Company J considers the
fact that nearby sites have recently been developed for residential use as high-rise apartment
buildings.
On the basis of that development and recent zoning and other changes to facilitate that
development, Company J determines that the land currently used as a factory site could be
developed as a residential site (e.g., for high-rise apartment buildings) and that market
participants would take into account the potential to develop the site for residential use when
pricing the land.
Determine the highest and best use of the land.
Solution:
The highest and best use of the land is determined by comparing the following:
 The value of the land as currently developed for industrial use (i.e., an assumption that
the land would be used in combination with other assets, such as the factory, or with other
assets and liabilities); and
 The value of the land as a vacant site for residential use, taking into account the costs of
demolishing the factory and other costs necessary to convert the land to a vacant site. The
value under this use would take into account risks and uncertainties about whether the
entity would be able to convert the asset to the alternative use (i.e., an assumption that
 the land would be used by market participants on a stand-alone basis).
 The highest and best use of the land would be determined on the basis of the higher of
these values. In situations involving real estate appraisal, the determination of highest and
best use might take into account factors relating to the factory operations (e.g., the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
factory’s operating cash flows) and its assets and liabilities (e.g., the factory’s working
capital).
Question 03:
ABC Ltd. acquired 5% equity shares of XYZ Ltd. for ₹ 10 crore in the year 20X1-X2. The
company is in process of preparing the financial statements for the year 20X2-X3 and is
assessing the fair value at subsequent measurement of the investment made in XYZ Ltd.
Based on the observable input, the ABC Ltd. identified a similar nature of transaction in which
PQR Ltd. acquired 20% equity shares in XYZ Ltd. for ₹ 60 crore. The price of such transaction
was determined on the basis of Comparable Companies Method (CCM)- Enterprise Value (EV)
/ EBITDA which was 8. For the current year, the EBITDA of XYZ Ltd. is ₹ 40 crore. At the time
of acquisition, the valuation was determined after considering 5% of liquidity discount and 5%
of non-controlling stake discount. What will be the fair value of ABC Ltd.’s investment in XYZ
Ltd. as on the balance sheet date?
Solution:
Determination of Enterprise Value of XYZ Ltd.
Particulars ₹ in crore
EBITDA as on the measurement date 40
EV/EBITDA multiple as on the date of valuation 8
Enterprise value of XYZ Ltd. 320
Determination of subsequent measurement of XYZ Ltd.

Enterprise Value of XYZ Ltd. 320
ABC Ltd.’s share based on percentage of holding (5% of 320) 16
Less: Liquidity discount & non-controlling stake discount (5%+5%=10%) (1.6)
Fair value of ABC Ltd.‘s investment in XYZ Ltd. 14.4
Question 04:
UK Ltd. is in the process of acquisition of shares of PT Ltd. as part of business reorganization
plan. The projected free cash flow of PT Ltd. for the next 5 years are as follows: (₹ in
crore)
Particulars Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
Cash flows 187.1 187.6 121.8 269 278.8
Terminal Value 3,965
The weightage average cost of capital of PT Ltd. is 11%. The total debt as on measurement date is
₹ 1,465 crore and the surplus cash & cash equivalent is ₹ 106.14 crore.
The total numbers of shares of PT Ltd. as on the measurement date is 8,52,84,223 shares.
Determine value per share of PT Ltd. as per Income Approach.
Solution:
Determination of equity value of PT Ltd. (₹in crore)
Particulars Year 1 Year 2 Year 3Year 4 Year 5
Cash flows 187.1 187.6 121.8 269 278.8
Terminal Value 3,965
Discount rate 0.9009 0.8116 0.7312 0.6587 0.5935
Free Cash Flow availableto the firm 168.56 152.26 89.06 177.19 2,518.69

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total of all years 3,105.76
Less: Debt (1,465)
Add: Cash & Cash equivalent 106.14
Equity Value of PT Ltd. 1,746.90
No. of Shares 85,284,223.0
Per Share Value 204.83
Question 05:
You are a senior consultant of your firm and are in process of determining the valuation of KK
Ltd. You have determined the valuation of the company by two approaches i.e., Market
Approach and Income approach and selected the highest as the final value. However, based
upon the discussion with your partner you have been requested to assign equal weights to
both the approaches and determine a fair
value of shares of KK Ltd. The details of the KK Ltd. Are as follows:
Valuation as per Market Approach 5268.2
Valuation as per Income Approach 3235.2
Debt obligation as on Measurement date 1465.9
Surplus cash & cash equivalent 106.14
Fair value of surplus assets and Liabilities 312.4
Number of shares of KK Ltd. 8,52,84,223 shares
Determine the Equity value of KK Ltd. as on the measurement date on the basis of above
details.
Solution:
Equity Valuation of KK Ltd.
Particulars Weights (₹ in crore)
As per Market Approach 50 5268.2
As per Income Approach 50 3235.2
Enterprise Valuation based on weights (5268.2 x 50%) +(3235.2 x 50%) 4,251.7
Less: Debt obligation as on measurement date (1465.9)
Add: Surplus cash & cash equivalent 106.14
Add: Fair value of surplus assets and liabilities 312.40
Enterprise value of KK Ltd. 3204.33
No. of shares 85,284,223
Value per share 375.72
Question 06: (RTP Nov 19)
Comment on the following by quoting references from appropriate Ind AS.
1. DS Limited holds some vacant land for which the use is not yet determined. the land is
situated in a prominent area of the city where lot of commercial complexes are coming
up and there is no legal restriction to convert the land into a commercial land.
The company is not interested in developing the land to a commercial complex as it is
not its business objective. Currently the land has been let out as a parking lot for the
commercial complexes around.
The Company has classified the above property as investment property. It has
approached you, an expert in valuation, to obtain fair value of the land for the purpose

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
of disclosure under Ind AS. On what basis will the land be fair valued under Ind AS?
2. DS Limited holds equity shares of a private company. In order to determine the fair
value' of the shares, the company used discounted cash flow method as there were no
similar shares available in the market.
Under which level of fair value hierarchy will the above inputs be classified?
What will be your answer if the quoted price of similar companies were available and
can be used for fair valuation of the shares?
Solution:
(i) As per Ind AS 113, a fair value measurement of a non-financial asset takes into account a
market participant’s ability to generate economic benefits by using the asset in its highest
and best use or by selling it to another market participant that would use the asset in its
highest and best use.
The highest and best use of a non-financial asset takes into account the use of the asset thatis
physically possible, legally permissible and financially feasible, as follows:
a) A use that is physically possibly takes into account the physical characteristics of the
asset that market participants would take into account when pricing the asset (eg the
location or size of a property).
b) A use that is legally permissible takes into account any legal restrictions on the use
of the asset that market participants would take into account when pricing the asset
(e.g., the zoning regulations applicable to a property).
c) A use that is financially feasible takes into account whether a use of the asset that is
physically possible and legally permissible generates adequate income or cash flows
(taking into account the costs of converting the asset to that use) to produce an investment
return that market participants would require from an investment in that asset put to that
use.
Highest and best use is determined from the perspective of market participants, even if the
entity intends a different use. However, an entity’s current use of a non-financial asset is
presumed to be its highest and best use unless market or other factors suggest that a different
use by market participants would maximise the value of the asset.
To protect its competitive position, or for other reasons, an entity may intend not to use an
acquired non-financial asset actively or it may intend not to use the asset according to its
highest and best use. Nevertheless, the entity shall measure the fair value of a non-financial
asset assuming its highest and best use by market participants.
In the given case, the highest best possible use of the land is to develop a commercial
complex. Although developing a business complex is against the business objective of the
entity, it does not affect the basis of fair valuation as Ind AS 113 does not consider an entity
specific restriction for measuring the fair value.
Also, its current use as a parking lot is not the highest best use as the land has the potential of
being used for building a commercial complex.
Therefore, the fair value of the land is the price that would be received when sold to a market
participant who is interested in developing a commercial complex.
(ii) As per Ind AS 113, unobservable inputs shall be used to measure fair value to the extent
that relevant observable inputs are not available, thereby allowing for situations in which
there is little, if any, market activity for the asset or liability at the measurement date. The
unobservable inputs shall reflect the assumptions that market participants would use when
pricing the asset or liability, including assumptions about risk.
In the given case, DS Limited adopted discounted cash flow method, commonly used
technique to value shares, to fair value the shares of the private company as there were no
similar shares traded in the market. Hence, it falls under Level 3 of fair value hierarchy.
Level 2 inputs include the following:
(a) quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(b) quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in markets that are not active.
(c) inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset or liability.
If an entity can access quoted price in active markets for identical assets or liabilities of similar
companies which can be used for fair valuation of the shares without any adjustment, at the
measurement date, then it will be considered as observable input and would be considered as
Level 2 inputs.
MTP: AUGUST, 2018
Question 1:
An asset is sold in 2 different active markets (a market in which transaction for the asset or liability takes place with
sufficient frequency and volume to provide pricing information on an ongoing basis) at different prices.
An entity enters into transactions in both markets and can access the price in those markets for the asset at the
measurement date.
In Market A:
The sale price of the asset is Rs. 26, transaction cost is Rs. 3 and the cost to transport the asset to Market A is Rs. 2 (i.e.,
the net amount that would be received is Rs. 21).
In Market B:
The sale price of the asset is Rs. 25, transaction cost is Re. 1 and the cost to transport the asset to Market B is Rs.
2 (i.e., the net amount that would be received is Rs. 22).
Determine the fair value of the asset by supporting your answer with proper reason. (4 Marks)
Solution:
If Market A is the principal market for the sale of asset (i.e., the market with the greatest
volume andlevel of activity for the asset), the fair value of the asset would be measured using
the price that would be received in that market, after taking into account transport cost of Rs.
24. The price in the principal (or most advantageous) market used to measure the fair value of
the asset or liability shall not be adjusted for transaction costs.
If neither market is the principal market for the sale of asset, the fair value of the asset wouldbe
measured using the price in the most advantageous market. The most advantageous market is
the market that maximises the amount that would be received by selling the asset, after taking
into account transport cost (i.e., the net amount that would be received in the respective markets).
Since the entity would maximise the net amount that would be received for the asset in
Market B, the fair value of the asset would be measured using the price in that market ie. sale
of asset Rs. 25 less transport cost Rs. 2, resulting in a fair value measurement of Rs. 23.
An asset is sold in 2 different active markets at different prices. An entity enters into transactions in
both markets and can access the price in those markets for the asset at the measurement date.
In Market A:
The price that would be received is ₹ 78, transaction costs in that market are ₹ 9 and the costs to
transport the asset to that market are ₹ 6.
In Market B:
The price that would be received is ₹ 75, transaction costs in that market are ₹ 3 and the costs to
transport theasset to that market are ₹ 6.
You are required to calculate:
(i) The fair value of the asset, if market A is the principal market, and
(ii) The fair value of the asset, if none of the markets is principal market. (5 Marks)
SOLUTION:
If neither of the market is the principal market
If neither of the market is the principal market for the asset, the fair value of the asset would be
measured using the price in the most advantageous market. The most advantageous market is
the market that maximises the amount that would be received to sell the asset, after taking into

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
account transaction costs and transport costs (i.e., the net amount that would be received in
the respective markets).
Determination of most advantageous market:
Market A (₹) Market B (₹)
Price receivable 78 75
Less: Transaction cost (9) (3)
Less: Transportation cost (6) (6)
Fair value of the asset 63 66
Since the entity would maximise the net amount that would be received for the asset in Market
B i.e. ₹66, the fair value of the asset would be measured using the price in Market B.
Fair value of the asset will be
₹
Price receivable 75
An asset is sold in two different active markets at different prices. Manor Ltd. enters into transactions in both markets and
can access the price in those markets for the asset at the measurement date.
In Mumbai market, the price that would be received is ₹ 290, transaction costs in that market are ₹ 40 and the costs to
transport the asset to that market are ₹ 30. Thus, the net amount that would be received is ₹ 220.
In Kolkata market the price that would be received is ₹ 280, transaction costs in that market are ₹ 20 and the costs to transport the
asset to that market are ₹ 30. Thus, the net amount that would be received in Kolkata market is ₹ 230.
(i) What should be the fair value of the asset if Mumbai Market is the principal market? What should be fair
value if none of the markets is principle market?
(ii) It the net realization after expenses is more in export market, say ₹ 280, but Government allows only 15% of
the production to be exported out of India. Discuss what would be fair value in such case. (8 Marks)
SOLUTION:
(i) (a) If Mumbai Market is the principal market
If Mumbai Market is the principal market for the asset (i.e., the market with the greatest volume and level of
activity for the asset), the fair value of the asset would be measured using the price that would be received in
that market, after taking into account transportation costs.
Fair value will be
.₹
Price receivable 290
(b) If neither of the market is the principal market
If neither of the market is the principal market for the asset, the fair value of the asset would be measured using the
price in the most advantageous market. The most advantageous market is the market that maximises the amount
that would be received to sell the asset, after taking into account transaction costs and transportation costs (i.e.,
the net amount that would be received in the respective markets).
₹ ₹
Mumbai Market Kolkata Market
Fair value of the asset as per the question 220 230

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Since the entity would maximise the net amount that would be received for the asset in Kolkata Market i.e.₹ 230,
the fair value of the asset would be measured using the price in Kolkata Market.
Fair value in such a case would be
₹
Price receivable 280
(ii) Export prices are more than the prices in the principal market and it would give highest return comparing to the
domestic market. Therefore, the export market would be considered as most advantageous market. But
since the Government has capped the export, maximum upto 15% of total output, maximum sale
activities are being done at domestic market only i.e., 85%. Since the highest level of activities with highest
volume is being done at domestic market, principal market for asset would be domestic market. Therefore, the
prices received in domestic market would be used for fair valuation of assets.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 37 - PROVISIONS, CONTINGENT LIABILITIES AND CONTINGENT ASSETS
Illustration 1
ABC Limited is an automobile component manufacturer. The automobile manufacturer has specified a
delivery schedule, non-adherence to which will entail a penalty. As on 31st March, 20X1, the reporting
date, the manufacturer has a delivery scheduled for June 20X2. However, the manufacturer is aware
that he will not be able to meet the delivery schedule in June 20X2.
Determine whether the entity has a present obligation as at 31st March, 20X1, requiring recognition of
provision.
Solution
In this case, there is no present obligation arising out of a past event as the goods are scheduled for
delivery in June 20X2 and there is no delay as at 31st March, 20X1. Hence, there is no present
obligationto pay the penalty in the current year. Therefore, there is no present obligation to recognise
the provision.
Illustration 2
X Shipping Ltd. is required by law to overhaul its shipping fleet once in every 3 years. The company’s
finance team was of the view that recognising the costs only when paid would prevent matching of revenue
earned all the time with certain costs of large amounts which are incurred occasional. Thereby, it has
formulated an accounting policy of providing in its books of account for the future cost of maintenance
(overhauls, annual inspection etc.) by calculating a rate per hours sailed on sea and accumulating a
provision over time. The provision is adjusted when the expenditure is actually incurred. Is the accounting
policy of X Shipping Ltd. correct?
Solution
A provision is made for a present obligation arising out of a past event. Even a legal requirement to
overhaul does not make the cost of overhaul a liability, because no obligation exists to overhaul the
ships independently of the company’s future actions - the company could avoid the future expenditure
by its future actions for example by selling the ships. So, there is no present obligation.
As per the standard, financial statements deal with the financial position of an entity at the end of its
reporting period and not its possible position in the future. Therefore, no provision is recognised for
costs that need to be incurred to operate in the future. The only liabilities recognised in an entity’s
balance sheet are those that exist at the end of the reporting period.
Therefore, the accounting policy of X Shipping Ltd. is not correct. The company should adopt the
component approach in Ind AS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment, for accounting for the refurbishment
cost.
Illustration 3
X Chemical Ltd. is operating in the vicinity of a river since 20 years. A community living near X
Chemical Ltd. claims that its operations has caused contamination of drinking water. X Chemical Ltd. has
received notice from the governmental environmental agency that official investigations will be made into
claims of pollution caused by the entity. If it is found that X Chemical Ltd. has caused contamination,
then penalties and fine would be levied on it. X Chemical Ltd. believes that it has implemented all
environmental safety measures to an extent that it is unlikely to cause pollution. Management is not sure
whether it has all the information about the entire 20 years. Therefore, neither management nor external
experts are able to assess X Chemical Ltd.’s responsibility until the investigation has completed.
In such situation, how should management of X Chemical Ltd. account for a liability?
Solution
As per the standard, in the present case, the available evidence does not support a conclusion that a
present obligation exists. However, there is a possible obligation which exists and will be confirmed
upon completion of investigations. Therefore, management should disclose the contingent liability for
potential penalties and fines that may be imposed if contamination is proved.
Illustration 4
X Ltd. has entered into an agreement with its selling agent Y, in accordance with which X Ltd. has to pay
a base percentage of commission on export sales and an additional commission is to be paid if the export
incentives are received. As per the accounting policy of X Ltd., it recognises export incentives when
actually realised, on account of the uncertainty in realising such incentives. Export incentives have not been
received for the year 20X1-20X2, however X Ltd. is hopeful of receiving the export incentives in the year
20X2- 20X3. In the financial statements for 20X1-20X2, should X Ltd. provide for both base commission
and additionalcommission?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
So far as the base percentage of sales commission is concerned, it is a present obligation arising out
of past events. The obligating event takes place when the sales are made and also since commission
is based on percentage of sale, reliable estimation can also be made. Therefore, the base percentage
of sales commission should be provided.
However, in respect of additional commission, it is to be paid when the export incentives are
recognised and export incentives are recognised only when it is received. Therefore, the obligating
event will arise only when export incentives are received. Hence, no provision for additional
commission is to be made in financial year 20X1-20X2. The expectation of X Ltd. to receive the export
incentives in next year would not make any difference as on 31 March 20X2
Illustration 5
X Sugars Ltd. has entered into a sale contract of ₹ 3,00,00,000 with Y Chocolates Ltd. for the supply of
sugar during 20X1-20X2. As per the contract the delivery is to be made within 2 months from the date of
contract. In case of failure to deliver within the schedule, X Sugars Ltd. has to pay a compensation of ₹
30,00,000 toY Chocolates Ltd.
During the transit, the vehicle carrying the sugar met accident and X Sugar Ltd. lost the entire consignment.
It is, however covered by an insurance policy. According to the report of the surveyor, the amount is
collectible, subject to the deductible clause [i.e., 15% of the claim] in the insurance policy. The cost of
goods lost was ₹ 2,50,00,000.
Before the financial year end, X Sugars Ltd. received informal information from the insurance company
that their claim had been processed and the payment had been dispatched for 85% of the claim amount.
Meanwhile Y Chocolates Ltd. has made demand of ₹ 30,00,000 since the goods were not delivered on
time.
What provision or disclosure would X Ltd. need to make at year end?
Solution
As per the standard, where an inflow of economic benefits is probable, an entity should disclose a brief
description of the nature of the contingent assets at the end of the reporting period, and, where
practicable, an estimate of their financial effect, measured using the principles set out in Ind AS 37.
So, X Sugars Ltd. would need to disclose the contingent asset of ₹ 2,12,50,000 (₹ 2,50,00,000 x 85%)at
the end of the financial year 20X1-20X2.
It would also need to make a provision of ₹ 30,00,000 towards the claim of Y Chocolates Ltd.
Illustration 6
An entity sells goods with a warranty under which customers are covered for the cost of repairs of any
manufacturing defects that become apparent within the first six months after purchase. If minor defects
were detected in all products sold, repair costs of ₹ 1 million would result. If major defects were detected in
all products sold, repair costs of ₹ 4 million would result. The entity’s past experience and future
expectations indicate that, for the coming year, 75% of the goods sold will have no defects, 20% of the
goods sold will have minor defects and 5% of the goods sold will have major defects. In accordance with
the standard, an entity assesses the probability of an outflow for the warranty obligations as a whole.
Solution
The expected value of the cost of repairs is:
(75% of nil) + (20% of 1m) + (5% of 4m) = ₹4,00,000
Illustration 7
X Solar Power Ltd., a power company, has a present obligation to dismantle its plant after 35 years of
useful life. X Solar Power Ltd. cannot cancel this obligation or transfer to third party. X Solar Power Ltd. has
estimated the total cost of dismantling at ₹ 50,00,000, the present value of which is ₹ 30,00,000. Based on
the facts and circumstances, X Solar Power Ltd. considers the risk factor of 5% i.e., the risk that the actual
outflows would be more from the expected present value. How should X Solar Power Ltd. account for the
obligation?
Solution
The obligation should be measured at the present value of outflows i.e., ₹ 30,00,000. Further a risk
adjustment of 5% i.e., ₹1,50,000 (₹30,00,000 x 5%) would be made.
So, the liability will be recognised at = ₹ 30,00,000 + ₹1,50,000 = ₹ 31,50,000.
Illustration 8
ABC Ltd. has an obligation to restore the seabed for the damage it has caused in the past. It has to pay ₹
10,00,000 cash on 31st March 20X3 relating to this liability. ABC Ltd.’s management considers that 5% is
an appropriate discount rate. The time value of money is considered to be material.
Calculate the amount to be provided for at 31st March 20X1 for the costs of restoring the seabed.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
Discounting factor of 5% for 2nd year as on 31st March 20X1 = (1/1.05)2 = 0.907 The present value
of the provision as on 31st March 20X1 is = ₹10,00,000 x 0.907 = ₹ 9,07,000
The amount of increase in the provision resulting from unwinding of discounting to reflect the passage
of time should be included as an element of borrowing cost in determining the profit or loss for the year.
The provision should be initially recognised at ₹ 9,07,000 which is the present value of ₹ 10,00,000
discounted at 5% for two years. At the end of year 1 i.e., 31st March 20X2, the provision increases to ₹
9,52,350, and the difference of ₹ 45,350 is recognised as borrowing cost. Similarly, for the year ending
31st March 20X3, the provision will increase to 10,00,000 and the increase being recognised as
borrowing cost. Consequently, at the end of year 2 the amount of provision will be equal to the
amount due, i.e., ₹10,00,000.
Note: There may be some difference in amount due to approximation (limiting discounting factor to 3
place decimal), which can be overcome either by full scale calculation or adjustment at the end.
Illustration 9
X Chemicals Ltd. engaged in the chemical industry causes environmental damage by dumping waste in the
river near its factory. It does not clean up because there is no environmental legislation requiring cleaning
up and X Chemicals Ltd. is causing damage for last 40 years. As at 31 March, 20X2, the State Legislature
has passed a path breaking legislation requiring all polluting factories to clean-up the river water already
contaminated. The formal Gazette notification of the law is pending. How should X Chemicals Ltd. deal
with this situation?
Solution
The obligating event is the contamination of water and because of the virtually certainty of legislation
requiring cleaning up, an outflow of resources is certain. It is possible to arrive at best estimated cost
for the cleanup activity. So, a provision should be recognised in the books of X Chemicals Ltd. for
20X1- 20X2.
Illustration 10
X Beauty Solutions Ltd. is selling cosmetic products under its brand name ‘B’, but it is getting its product
manufactured from Y Ltd. It has an understanding (enforceable agreement) with Y Ltd. that if the company
becomes liable for any damage claims, due to any injury or harm to the customer of the cosmetic products,
30% will be reimbursed to it by Y Ltd. During the financial year 20X1-20X2, a claim of ₹ 30,00,000
becomes payable to customers by X Beauty Solutions Ltd. How should X Beauty Solutions Ltd. account
for the claim that becomes payable?
Solution
Since the understanding results in an enforceable agreement, the reimbursement of ₹ 9,00,000 (₹
30,00,000 x 30%) shall be recognised as a reimbursement right and provision will be recognised for ₹
30,00,000. The reimbursement right shall be treated as a separate asset and shall not be offset with the
provision. In the statement of profit and loss, the expense may be presented as ₹ 21,00,000 after
offsetting the reimbursement right.
Illustration 11
X Telecom Ltd. has income tax litigation pending before appellate authorities. Legal advisor’s opinion is
that X Telecom Ltd. will lose the case and estimated that liability of ₹ 1,00,00,000 may arise in two years.
The liability is recognised on a discounted basis. The discount rate at which the liability has been
discounted is 10% and it is assumed that discount rate does not change over the period of 2 years.
How should X Telecom Ltd. calculate the amount of borrowing cost?
Solution
The discount factor of 10% for 2 years is 0.826. X Telecom Ltd. will initially recognise provision for
₹82,60,000 (₹1,00,00,000 x 0.826).
The discount factor of 10% at the end of year 1 is 0.909. At the end of year 1, provision amountwould be
₹90,90,000 (₹1,00,00,000 x 0.909).
As per the standard, the difference between the two present values i.e., ₹ 8,30,000 (90,90,000-
82,60,000) is recognised as a borrowing cost in year 1.
At the end of the Year 2, the liability would be ₹ 1,00,00,000.
The difference between the two present values i.e., ₹ 9,10,000 (₹ 1,00,00,000 - ₹ 90,90,000) isrecognised
as borrowing cost in year 2.
Illustration 12
X Packaging Ltd. has two segments, packaging division and paper division. In March 20X1, the board of
directors approved and announced a formal plan to sell the paper division in June 20X1. Operating

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
losses of the paper division are estimated to be approximately ₹ 50,00,000 during the period from April 1,
20X1 to the expected date of disposal. Management of X Packaging Ltd. wants to include the future
operating loss of ₹ 50,00,000 in a provision for restructuring in the financial statements for the period
ended March 31, 20X1. Can X Packaging Ltd. include these operating losses in a provision for
restructuring?
Solution
Standard states that provision should not be made for future operating losses. Since Ind AS 37
prohibits the recognition of future operating losses, so X Packaging Ltd. should not include these
future operating losses in a provision for restructuring even though these losses relate to the disposal
group.
Illustration 13
X Metals Ltd. had entered into a non-cancellable contract with Y Ltd. to purchase 10,000 units of raw
material at ₹ 50 per unit at a contract price of ₹ 5,00,000. As per the terms of contract, X Metals Ltd. would
have to pay ₹ 60,000 to exit the said contract. X Metals Ltd. has discontinued manufacturing the product
that would use the said raw material. For that X Metals Ltd. has identified a third party to whom it can sell
the said raw material at ₹ 45 per unit.
How should X Metals Ltd. account for this transaction in its books of account in respect of the above
contract?
Solution
These circumstances do indicate an onerous contract. The only benefit to be derived from the
purchase contract costing ₹ 5,00,000 are the proceeds from the sale contact, which are ₹ 4,50,000.
Therefore, a provision should be made for the onerous element of ₹ 50,000, being the lower of cost of
fulfilling the contract and the penal cost of cancellation of ₹60,000.
Illustration 14
X Cements Ltd. has three manufacturing units situated in three different states of India. The board of
directors of X Cements Ltd., in their meeting held on January 10, 20X1, decided to close down its
operations in one particular state on account of environmental reasons. A detailed formal plan for shutting
down the above unit was also formalised and agreed by the board of directors in that meeting, which
specifies the approximate number of employees who will be compensated and expenditure expected to be
incurred. Date of implementation of plan has also been mentioned. Meetings were also held with customers,
suppliers, and workers to communicate the features of the formal plan to close down the operations in the
said state, and representatives of all interested parties were present in those meetings. Do the actions of
the board of directors create a constructive obligation that needs a provision for restructuring?
Solution
As per Ind AS 37, the conditions prescribed are:
(a) there should be detailed formal plan of restructuring;
(b) which should have raised valid expectations in the minds of those affected that the entity would
carry out the restructuring by announcing the main features of its plans to restructure.
The board of directors did discuss and formalise a formal plan of winding up the operation in the
above said state. This plan was communicated to the parties affected and created a valid expectation
in their minds that X Cements Ltd. would go ahead with its plans to close down operations in that state.
Thus, there is a constructive obligation that needs to be provided at year- end.
Illustration 15 : Warranties
A manufacturer gives warranties at the time of sale to purchasers of its three product lines. Under the
terms of the warranty, the manufacturer undertakes to repair or replace items that fail to perform
satisfactorily for two years from the date of sale. At the end of the reporting period, a provision of ₹ 60,000
has been recognised. The provision has not been discounted as the effect of discounting is not material.
Draft the Note.
Solution
A provision of ₹ 60,000 has been recognised for expected warranty claims on products sold during
the last three financial years. It is expected that the majority of this expenditure will be incurred in
the next financial year, and all will be incurred within two years after the reporting period.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
X Ltd. is operating in the telecom industry. During the Financial Year 20X1-20X2, the Income Tax
authorities sent a scrutiny assessment notice under Section 143(2) of the Income-tax Act, 1961, in
respect to return filed under Section 139 of this Act for Previous Year 20X0-20X1 (Assessment Year
20X1-20X2) and initiated assessment proceedings on account of a deduction claimed by the
company which in the view of the authorities was inadmissible.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
During the financial year 20X1-20X2 itself, the assessment proceedings were completed and the
assessing officer did not allow the deduction and raised a demand of ₹ 1,00,00,000 against the company.
The company contested such levy and filed an appeal with the Appellate authority. At the end of the
financial year 20X1-20X2, the appeal had not been heard. The company is not confidentwhether that the
company would win the appeal. However, the company was advised by its legal counsel that on a
similar matter, two appellate authorities of different jurisdictions had given conflicting judgements, one
in favour of the assesse and one against the assesse. The legal counsel further stated it had more than
50% chance of winning the appeal. Please advise how the company should account for these
transactions in the financial year 20X1-20X2.
Solution:
Ind AS 37 provides that in rare cases it not clear whether there is a present obligation, for example, in
a lawsuit, it may be disputed either whether certain events have occurred or whether those events
result in a present obligation. In such a case, an entity should determine whether a present obligation
exits at the end of the reporting period by taking account of all available evidence, for example, the
opinion of experts.
In the present case, the company is not confident that whether it would win the appeal. By taking into
account the opinion of the legal counsel, it is not sure that whether the company would win the appeal.
On the basis of such evidence, it is more likely than not that a present obligation exists at the end of
the reporting period. Therefore, the entity should recognise a provision. The company should provide
for a liability of ₹1,00,00,000.
Question 02:
An entity is a telecom operator. Laying of cables across the world is a requirement to enable the
entity to run its business. Cables are also laid under the sea and contracts are entered into for the
same. By virtue of laws of the countries through which the cable passes, the entity is required to
restore the sea bed at the end of the contract period. What is the nature of obligation that the entity
has in such a case?
Solution:
Paragraph 14 of Ind AS 37 states that a provision shall be recognised when:
 an entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event;
 it is probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle
the obligation; and
 a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation. If these conditions are not
met,no provision shall be recognised.
Further, with regard to past event paragraph 17 of Ind AS 37 states that a past event that
leads to a present obligation is called an obligating event. For an event to be an obligating event, it is
necessary that the entity has no realistic alternative to settling the obligation created by the event.
This is the case only:
(a) where the settlement of the obligation can be enforced by law; or
(b) in the case of a constructive obligation, where the event (which may be an action of the entity)
creates valid expectations in other parties that the entity will discharge the obligation.”
On the basis of the above, provision should be recognised as soon as the obligating event takes place
because the entity is under legal obligation to restore the sea bed, provided the other recognition
criteria stated in paragraph 14 reproduced above are met. Moreover, the amount of the provision
would depend on the extent of the obligation arising from the obligating event. In the instant case, an
obligating event is the laying of cables under the sea. To the extent the cables have been laid down
under the sea, a legal obligation has arisen and to that extent provision for restoration of sea bed
should be recognised.
Question 03:
Entity A is a dealer in washing machines. Entity A offers to its customers a scheme whereby it states
that after a period of 3 years, the entity offers to buy back the washing machine at a fixed price which
is expected to be less than the fair value of the machine at the end of three years. The credit
emanating therefrom will be required to be used by the customer for buying a new washing machine,
i.e., new washing machine will be sold at a discounted price. Past experience indicates that customers
generally opt for this scheme. At the time of sale of the first washing machine should entity A
recognise any provision in this regard?
Solution:
Paragraph 14 of Ind AS 37 states “A provision shall be recognised when:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
 it is probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to
settle the obligation; and
 a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation. If these conditions are notmet,
no provision shall be recognised.”
In the instant case, assuming that the entity recognises the entire revenue on the sale of first washing
machine, a provision for expected cost of meeting the obligation of selling the second machine at
discounted price should be recognised because sale of first washing machine is the past event.
Moreover, past experience indicates that customers generally opt for this scheme, therefore, probability
of outflow of resources is more likely than not. Since it is a normal practice which the entity follows,
reliable estimate of the amount of meeting the obligation can also be made.
Question 04:
U Ltd. is a large conglomerate with a number of subsidiaries. It is preparing consolidated financial
statements as on 31st March 20X2 as per the notified Ind AS. The financial statements are due to be
approved for issue on 15th May 20X2. Following are a few transactions that have taken place in some
of its subsidiaries during the year:
G Ltd. is a wholly owned subsidiary of U Ltd. engaged in management consultancy services. On
st
31 January 20X2, the board of directors of U Ltd. decided to discontinue the business of G Ltd.
from 30th April 20X2. They made a public announcement of their decision on 15th February 20X2.
G Ltd. does not have many assets or liabilities and it is estimated that the outstanding trade
receivables and payables would be settled by 31st May 20X2. U Ltd. would collect any amounts still
owed by G Ltd.’s customers after 31st May 20X2. They have offered the employees of G Ltd.
termination payments or alternative employment opportunities.
Following are some of the details relating to G Ltd.:
On the date of public announcement, it is estimated by G Ltd. that it would have to pay ₹ 540 lakhs as
termination payments to employees and the costs for relocation of employees who would remain with
the Group would be ₹ 60 lakhs. The actual termination payments totaling to ₹ 520 lakhs were made in
full on 15th May 20X2. As per latest estimates made on 15th May 20X2, the total relocation cost is
₹63 lakhs.
G Ltd. had taken a property on operating lease, which was expiring on 31st March 20X6. The
present value of the future lease rentals (using an appropriate discount rate) is ₹ 430 lakhs. On 15th
May 20X2, G Ltd. made a payment to the lessor of ₹ 410 lakhs in return for early termination of the lease.
The loss after tax of G Ltd. for the year ended 31st March 20X2 was ₹ 400 lakhs. G Ltd. made further
operating losses totaling ₹60 lakhs till 30th April 20X2.
What are the provisions that the Company is required to make as per lnd AS 37?
Solution:
A discontinued operation is one that is discontinued in the period or classified as held for sale at the
year end. The operations of G Ltd were discontinued on 30th April 20X2 and therefore, would be
treated as discontinued operation for the year ending 31st March 20X3. It does not meet the criteria
for held for sale since the company is terminating its business and does not hold these for sale.
As per para 72 of Ind AS 37 ‘Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets’, restructuring
includes sale or termination of a line of business. A constructive obligation to restructure arises when:
 an entity has a detailed formal plan for the restructuring
 has raised a valid expectation in those affected that it will carry out the restructuring by starting to
implement that plan or announcing its main features to those affected by it.
The Board of directors of U Ltd have decided to terminate the operations of G Ltd. from 30th April
20X2. They have made a formal announcement on 15th February 20X2, thus creating a valid
expectation that the termination will be implemented. This creates a constructive obligation on the
company and requires provisions for restructuring.
A restructuring provision includes only the direct expenditures arising from the restructuring that are
necessarily entailed by the restructuring and are not associated with the ongoing activities of the entity.
The termination payments fulfil the above condition. As per Ind AS 10 ‘Events after Reporting Date’,
events that provide additional evidence of conditions existing at the reporting date should be
reflected in the financial statements. Therefore, the company should make a provision for ₹ 520 lakhs

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
in this respect.
The relocation costs relate to the future conduct of the business and are not liabilities for restructuring
at the end of the reporting period. Hence, these would be recognised on the same basis as if they
arose independently of a restructuring.
The operating lease would be regarded as an onerous contract. A provision would be made at the
lower of the cost of fulfilling it and any compensation or penalties arising from failure to fulfil it. Hence,
a provision shall be made for ₹410 lakhs.
Further operating losses relate to future events and do not form a part of the closure provision.
Therefore, the total provision required = ₹ 520 lakhs + ₹ 410 lakhs = ₹ 930 lakhs
Question 05:
A company manufacturing and supplying process control equipment is entitled to duty draw back if
it exceeds its turnover above a specified limit. To claim duty drawback, the company needs to file
application within 15 days of meeting the specified turnover. If application is not filed within stipulated
time, the Department has discretionary power of giving duty draw back credit. For the year 20X1-
20X2 the company has exceeded the specified limit of turnover by the end of the reporting period.
However, duty drawback can be claimed on filing of application within the stipulated time or on
discretion of the Department if filing of application is late. The applicationfor duty drawback is filed
on April 20, 20X2, which is after the stipulated time of 15 days of meeting the turnover condition.
Duty drawback has been credited by the Department on June 28, 20X2 and financial statements
have been approved by the Board of Directors of the company on July 26, 20X2. What would be the
treatment of duty drawback credit as per the given information?
Solution:
In the instant case, the condition of exceeding the specified turnover was met at the end of the
reporting period and the company was entitled for the duty drawback. However, the application forthe
same has been filed after the stipulated time. Therefore, credit of duty drawback was discretionary in
the hands of the Department. Since the claim was to be accrued only after filing of application, its
accrual will be considered in the year 20X2-20X3 only.
Accordingly, the duty drawback credit is a contingent asset as at the end of the reporting period 20X1-
20X2, which will be realised when the Department credits the same.
As per para 35 of Ind AS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets, contingent
assets are assessed continually to ensure that developments are appropriately reflected in the
financial statements. If it has become virtually certain that an inflow of economic benefits will arise, the
asset and the related income are recognised in the financial statements of the period in which the
change occurs. If an inflow of economic benefits has become probable, an entity discloses the
contingent asset.
In accordance with the above, the duty drawback credit which was contingent asset for the F.Y. 20X1-
20X2 should be recognised as asset and related income should be recognized in the reporting period in
which the change occurs. i.e., in the period in which realisation becomes virtually certain, i.e.,
F.Y. 20X2-20X3.
Question 06:
Entity XYZ entered into a contract to supply 1000 television sets for ₹ 2 million. An increase in the
cost of inputs has resulted into an increase in the cost of sales to ₹ 2.5 million. The penalty for non-
performance of the contract is expected to be ₹ 0.25 million. Is the contract onerous and how much
provision in this regard is required?
Solution:
Ind AS 37 “Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets” defines an onerous contract as a
contract in which the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the contract exceed the
economic benefits expected to be received under it.
Paragraph 68 of Ind AS 37 states that the unavoidable costs under a contract reflect the least net
cost of exiting from the contract, which is the lower of the cost of fulfilling it and any compensation or
penalties arising from failure to fulfill it.
In the instant case, cost of fulfilling the contract is ₹ 0.5 million (₹ 2.5 million – ₹ 2 million) and cost of
exiting from the contract by paying penalty is ₹0.25 million.
In accordance with the above reproduced paragraph, it is an onerous contract as cost of meeting the
contract exceeds the economic benefits.
Therefore, the provision should be recognised at the best estimate of the unavoidable cost, which is
lower of the cost of fulfilling it and any compensation or penalties arising from failure to fulfill it, i.e., at

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
₹0.25 million (lower of ₹0.25 million and ₹0.5 million).
Question 07:
Marico has an obligation to restore environmental damage in the area surrounding its factory. Expert
advice indicates that the restoration will be carried out in two distinct phases; the first phase requiring
expenditure of ₹ 2 million to remove the contaminated soil from the area and the second phase,
commencing three years later from the end of first phase, to replant the area with suitable trees and
vegetation. The estimated cost of replanting is ₹ 3.5 million. Marico uses a cost of capital (before
taxation) of 10% and the expenditure, when incurred, will attract tax relief at the company’s marginal
tax rate of 30%. Marico has not recognised any provision for such costs in the past and today’s date is
31 March 20X2. The first phase of the clean up will commence in a few months time and will be
completed on 31 March 20X3 when the first payment of ₹ 2 million will be made. Phase 2 costs will be
paid three years later from the end of first phase. Calculate the amount to be provided at 31 March
20X2 for the restoration costs.
Solution: -
Year Cash Flow 10% Discount factor Present Value
20X2-20X3 20,00,000 0.909 18,18,000
20X5-20X6 35,00,000 0.683 23,90,500
Provision required at 31 March 20X2 42,08,500
The provision is calculated using the pre-tax costs and a pre-tax cost of capital. The fact that the
eventual payment will attract tax relief will be reflected in the recognition of a deferred tax asset for the
deductible temporary difference (assuming that the recognition criteria for deferred tax assets are met.)
MTP.RTP. PAST PAPER
MTP: OCTOBER, 2020
Question 01:
An entity engaged in automobile sector has assessed the impact of COVID-19 outbreak on its future
viability of business model. Senior Management has identified the need for restructuring some of its
business activities and retrenching its employees in many areas. Senior Management is drawing up a
plan for the consideration of the Board of Directors in their meeting scheduled in May 2020, which is
subsequent to the reporting date of the current financial year i.e. 31 March 2020. Can the entity
recognise provisions for restructuring costs in the financial statements of the current year i.e. 2019-
2020? (4 Marks)
Solution:
In accordance with paragraph 72 of Ind AS 37, ‘Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets’, a constructive
obligation to restructure arises only when an entity has detailed formal plan for restructuring identifying the business or
part of business concerned; the principal locations affected; the location, function, and approximate number of
employees who will be compensated for terminating their services; the expenditures that will be undertaken; and
when the plan will be implemented; and has raised a valid expectation in those affected that it will carry out the
restructuring by starting to implement that plan or announcing its main features to those affected by it.
Further, paragraph 75 of Ind AS 37 provides that a management or board decision to restructure taken before the end of the
reporting period does not give rise to a constructive obligation at the end of the reporting period unless the entity has,
before the end of the reporting period
(a) started to implement the restructuring plan; or
(b) announced the main features of the restructuring plan to those affected by it in a sufficiently specific manner to
raise a valid expectation in them that the entity will carry out the restructuring.
In the given case, since COVID-19 pandemic impact started during March 2020, it is likely that the senior
management started drawing up the plan for restructuring some of its business activities after the end of the reporting
period, i.e., 2019-2020. If that be so, as per Ind AS 37, the management decisions subsequent to reporting date do
not give rise to constructive obligation as of reporting date and no provision is required for restructuring costs
as at31 March 2020.
In this regard, paragraph 75 of Ind AS 37 provides that if an entity starts to implement a restructuring plan, or
announces its main features to those affected, only after the reporting period, disclosure is required under Ind AS 10,
Events after the Reporting Period, if the restructuring is material and non-disclosure could influence the economic
decisions that users make on the basis of the financial statements.
MTP: MARCH, 2019
Question 02:
During the year, QA Ltd. delivered manufactured products to customer K. The products were faulty
and on 1st October, 2016 customer K commenced legal action against the Company claiming

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
damages in respect of losses due to the supply of faulty product. Upon investigating the matter, QA
Ltd. discovered that the products were faulty due to defective raw material procured from supplier
F. Therefore, on 1st December, 2016, the Company commenced legal action against F claiming
damages in respect of the supply of defective raw materials.
QA Ltd. has estimated that it's probability of success of both legal actions, the action of K against QA
Ltd. and action of QA Ltd. against F, is very high.
On 1st October, 2016, QA Ltd. has estimated that the damages it would have to pay K would be Rs. 5
crores. This estimate was revised to Rs. 5.2 crores as on 31st March, 2017 and Rs. 5.25 crores as at
15th May, 2017. This case was eventually settled on 1st June, 2017, when the Company paid
damages of Rs. 5.3 crores to K.
On 1st December, 2016, QA Ltd. had estimated that it would receive damages of Rs. 3.5 crores from
F. This estimate was revised to Rs. 3.6 crores as at 31st March, 2017 and Rs. 3.7 crores as on 15th May,
2017. This case was eventually settled on 1st June, 2017 when F paid Rs. 3.75 crores to QA Ltd. QA Ltd.
had, in its financial statements for the year ended 31 st March, 2017, provided Rs. 3.6 crores as the
financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 26th April, 2017.
(i) Whether the Company is required to make provision for the claim from customer K as per
applicableInd AS? If yes, please give the rationale for the same.
(ii) If the answer to (a) above is yes, what is the entry to be passed in the books of account as on31st
March, 2017? Give brief reasoning for your choice.
(A) Statement of Profit and Loss A/c Dr. Rs. 5.2 crores
To Current Liability A/c Rs. 5.2 crores
(B) Statement of Profit and Loss A/c Dr. Rs. 5.3 crores
To Non-Current Liability A/c Rs. 5.3 crores
(C) Statement of Profit and Loss A/c Dr. Rs. 5.25 crores
To Current Liability A/c Rs. 5.25 crores
(iii) What will the accounting treatment of the action of QA Ltd. against supplier F as per applicable
Ind AS? (6Marks)
Solution:
(i) Yes, QA Ltd. is required to make provision for the claim from customer K as per Ind AS 37 since the claim is apresent
obligation as a result of delivery of faulty goods manufactured. Also, it is probable that an outflow of resources embodying
economic benefits will be required to settle the obligations. Further, a reliable estimate of Rs.
5.2 crore can be made of the amount of the obligation while preparing the financial statements as on 31st March, 2017.
(ii) Option (A) :
Statement of Profit and Loss A/c Dr. Rs. 5.2 crore
To Current Liability A/c Rs. 5.2 crore
(iii) As per para 31 of Ind AS 37, QA Ltd. shall not recognise a contingent asset. Here the probability
of success of legal action is very high but there is no concrete evidence which makes the inflow virtually certain. Hence,
it will be considered as contingent asset only and shall not be recognized.
Question:3
a. A manufacturer gives warranties at the time of sale to purchasers of its product. Under the terms of
the contract for sale, the manufacturer undertakes to remedy, by repair orreplacement, manufacturing
defects that become apparent within three years from the date of sale. As this is the first year that the
warranty has been available, there is no data from the firm to indicate whether there will be claim
under the warranties. However, industry research suggests that it is likely that such claims will be
forthcoming. Should the manufacturer recognize a provision in accordance with the requirements of
Ind AS 37. Why or why not?
b. Assume that the firm has not been operating its warranty for five years, and reliable data exists to
suggest the following:
I. If minor defects occur in all products sold, repair costs of ₹ 20,00,000 would result.
II. If major defects are detected in all products, costs of ₹ 50,00,000 would result.
III. The manufacturer’s past experience and future expectations indicate that each year 80% of the
goods sold will have no defects. 15% of the goods sold will have minor defects, and 5% of the
goods sold will have major defects.
Calculate the expected value of the cost of repairs in accordance with the requirements of Ind AS 37, if
any. Ignore both income tax and the effect of discounting.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
For a provision to be recognized, Para 14 of Ind AS 37 requires that:
1. an entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event;
2. it is probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will required to settle the
obligation, and
3. a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.
Here, the manufacturer has a present legal obligation. The obligation event is the sale of the product
with a warranty.
Ind AS 37 outlines that the future sacrifice of economic benefits is probable when it is morelikely than
less likely that the future sacrifice of economic benefits will required. The probability that settlement will
be required will be determined by considering the class of obligation (warranties) as a whole. In
accordance with para 24 of Ind AS 37, it is more likely than less likely that a future sacrifice of
economic benefits will be required to settle the class of obligations as a whole.
If a reliable estimate can be made the provision can be measured reliably. Past data can provide
reliable measures, even if the data is not firm specific but rather industry based. Ind AS 37 notes that
only in extremely rare cases, a reliable measure of a provision cannot be obtained. Difficulty in
estimating the amount of a provision under conditions of significant uncertainty does not justify non-
recognition of the provision.
Here, the manufacturer should recognize a provision based on the best estimate of the consideration
required to settle the present obligation as at the reporting date.
(b) The expected value of cost of repairs in accordance with Ind AS 37 is:
(80% x nil) + (15% x ₹ 20,00,000) + (5% x ₹ 50,00,000) = 3,00,000 + 2,50,000 = 5,50,000
Question:4
A company manufacturing and supplying process control equipment is entitled to duty draw back if it exceeds its turnover above a
specified limit. To claim duty drawback, the company needs to file application within 15 days of meeting the specified turnover.
If application is not filed within stipulated time, the Department has discretionary power of giving duty draw back credit. For the
year 20X1-20X2 the company has exceeded the specified limit of turnover by the end of the reporting period. However, duty
drawback can be claimed on filing of application within the stipulated time or on discretion of the Department if filing of
application is late. The application for duty drawback is filed on April 20, 20X2, which is after the stipulated time of 15 days of
meeting the turnover condition. Duty drawback has been credited by the Department on June 28, 20X2 and financial statements
have been approved by the Board of Directors of the company on July 26, 20X2. What would be the treatment of duty
drawback credit as per the given information?
Solution:
In the instant case, the condition of exceeding the specified turnover was met at the end of the reporting period and the
company was entitled for the duty drawback. However, the application for the same has been filed after the stipulated time.
Therefore, credit of duty drawback was discretionary in the hands of the Department. Since the claim was to be accrued only
after filing of application, its accrual will be considered in the year 20X2-20X3 only.
Accordingly, the duty drawback credit is a contingent asset as at the end of the reporting period 20X1-20X2, which will
be realised when the Department credits the same.
As per para 35 of Ind AS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets, contingent assets are assessed
continually to ensure that developments are appropriately reflected in the financial statements. If it has become virtually
certain that an inflow of economic benefits will arise, the asset and the related income are recognised in the financial
statements of the period in which the change occurs. If an inflow of economic benefits has become probable, an
entity discloses the contingent asset.
In accordance with the above, the duty drawback credit which was contingent asset for the F.Y. 20X1 -20X2 should be
recognised as asset and related income should be recognized in the reporting period in which the change occurs. i.e., in
the period in which realisation becomes virtually certain, i.e., F.Y. 20X2 - 20X3.
RTP:MAY,2020
Question:5
Entity XYZ entered into a contract to supply 1000 television sets for ₹ 2 million. An increase in the cost of inputs has
resulted into an increase in the cost of sales to ₹ 2.5 million. The penalty for non- performance of the contract is expected to
be ₹ 0.25 million. Is the contract onerous and how much provision in this regard is required?
Solution:
Ind AS 37 “Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets” defines an onerous contract as “a contract in which
the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the contract exceed the economic benefits expected to be received
under it”.
Paragraph 68 of Ind AS 37 states that “the unavoidable costs under a contract reflect the least net cost of exiting from the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
contract, which is the lower of the cost of fulfilling it and any compensation or penalties arising from failure to
fulfill it”.
In the instant case, cost of fulfilling the contract is ₹ 0.5 million (₹ 2.5 million – ₹ 2 million) and cost of exiting from the
contract by paying penalty is ₹0.25 million.
In accordance with the above reproduced paragraph, it is an onerous contract as cost of meeting the contract exceeds
the economic benefits.
Therefore, the provision should be recognised at the best estimate of the unavoidable cost, which is lower of the cost of fulfilling
it and any compensation or penalties arising from failure to fulfill it, i.e., at ₹ 0.25 million (lower of ₹ 0.25 million and ₹ 0.5 million).
RTP MAY 2021
QUESTION 6
A manufacturer gives warranties to the purchasers of its goods. Under the terms of the warranty, the
manufacturer undertakes to make good, by repair or replacement, manufacturing defects that become
apparent within three years from the date of sale to the purchasers. On 30 April 20X1, a manufacturing
defect was detected in the goods manufactured by the entity between 1 March 20X1 and 30 April 20X1. At
31 March 20X1 (the entity’s reporting date), the entity held approximately one week’s sales in inventories.
The entity’s financial statements for the year ended 31 March 20X1 have not yet been finalised. Three
separate categories of goods require separate consideration:
Category 1—defective goods sold on or before 31 March 20X1
Category 2—defective goods held on 31 March 20X1
Category 3—defective goods manufactured in 20X1-20X2 State the accounting treatment of the above
categories in accordance with relevant Ind AS.
SOLUTION
Category 1—defective goods sold on or before 31 March 20X1
If customer has the option to purchase warranty separately, the warranty is a distinct service because the
entity promises to provide the service to the customer in addition to the product that has the functionality
described in the contract. In that case, entity shall account for the promised warranty as a performance
obligation and allocate a portion of the transaction price to that performance obligation. If a customer does
not have the option to purchase a warranty separately, an entity shall account for the warranty in
accordance with Ind AS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets, unless it provides the
customer with a service in addition to the assurance that the product complies with agreed-upon
specifications. If that is the case, then, the promised service is a performance obligation. Entity shall
allocate the transaction price to the product and the service. If an entity promises both an assurance-type
warranty and a service-type warranty but cannot reasonably account for them separately, the entity shall
account for both of the warranties together as a single performance obligation. A law that requires an entity
to pay compensation if its products cause harm or damage does not give rise to a performance obligation.
The entity shall account for such obligations in accordance with Ind AS 37.
Category 2—defective goods held on 31 March 20X1
At 31 March 20X1, the entity did not have a present obligation to make good the unsold defective goods
that it held in inventories. Accordingly, at 31 March 20X1 the entity should not recognise a provision in
respect of the defective inventories. For this category, the detection of the manufacturing defect in April
20X1 is an adjusting event after the end of the reporting period as per Ind AS 10, Events after the End of
the Reporting Period. It provides evidence of a manufacturing defect in inventories held at 31 March 20X1.
Category 3—defective goods manufactured in 20X1-20X2
At 31 March 20X1 the entity did not have a present obligation to make good any defective goods that it
might manufacture in the future. Accordingly, at 31 March 20X1 the entity should not recognise a provision
in respect of the defective goods manufactured in 20X1-20X2. For this category, the detection of the
manufacturing defect in April 20X1 is a non-adjusting event after the end of the reporting period as per Ind
AS 10, Events After the End of the Reporting Period.
RTP NOV 2020
QUESTION
ABC Pvt. Ltd., recruited a player. As per the terms of the contract, the player is prohibited from playing for
any other entity for coming 5 years and have to in the employment with the company and cannot leave the
entity without mutual agreement. The price the entity paid to acquire this right is derived from the skills and
fame of the said player. The entity uses and develops the player through participation in matches. State
whether the cost incurred to obtain the right regarding the player can be recognised as an intangible asset
as per Ind AS 38?
SOLUTION
As per Ind AS 38, for an item to be recognised as an intangible asset, it must m eet the definition of an
intangible asset, i.e., identifiability, control over a resource and existence of future economic benefits and
also recognition criteria. With regard to establishment of control, paragraph 13 of Ind AS 38 states that an

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
entity controls an asset if the entity has the power to obtain the future economic benefits flowing from the
underlying resource and to restrict the access of others to those benefits. The capacity of an entity to
control the future economic benefits from an intangible asset would normally stem from legal rights that are
enforceable in a court of law. In the absence of legal rights, it is more difficult to demonstrate control.
However, legal enforceability of a right is not a necessary condition for control because an entity may be
able to control the future economic benefits in some other way.
Further, paragraph 15 of Ind AS 38 provides that an entity may have a team of skilled staff and may be able
to identify incremental staff skills leading to future economic benefits from training. The entity may also
expect that the staff will continue to make their skills available to the entity. However, an entity usually has
insufficient control over the expected future economic benefits arising from a team of skilled staff and from
training for these items to meet the definition of an intangible asset. For a similar reason, specific
management or technical talent is unlikely to meet the definition of an intangible asset, unless it is protected
by legal rights to use it and to obtain the future economic benefits expected from it, and it also meets the
other parts of the definition.
Since the right in the instant case is contractual, identifiability criterion is satisfied. Based on the facts
provided in the given case, the player is prohibited from playing in other teams by the terms of the contract
which legally binds the player to stay with ABC Ltd for 5 years.
Accordingly, in the given case, the company would be able to demonstrate control. Future economic
benefits are expected to arise from use of the player in matches. Further, cost of obtaining rights is also
reliably measurable. Hence, it can recognise the costs incurred to obtain the right regarding the player as
an intangible asset. However, careful assessment of relevant facts and circumstances of each case is
required to be made.
Sun Limited has entered into a binding agreement with Moon Limited to buy a custom- made machine for ₹
4,00,000. At the end of 2017-18, before delivery of the machine, Sun Limited had to change its method of
production. The new method will not require the machine ordered which is to be scrapped after delivery. The
expected scrap value is nil. Given that the asset is yet to be delivered, should any liability be recognized for
the potential loss? If so, give reasons for the same, the amount of liability as well as the accounting entry.
(4 Marks)
SOLUTION:
As per Ind AS 37, Executory contracts are contracts under which
 neither party has performed any of its obligations; or
 both parties have partially performed their obligations to an equal extent.
The contract entered by Sun Ltd. is an executory contract, since the delivery has not yet taken place.Ind
AS 37 is applied to executory contracts only if they are onerous.
Ind AS 37 defines an onerous contract as a contract in which the unavoidable costs of meeting the
obligations under the contract exceed the economic benefits expected to be received under it.
As per the facts given in the question, Sun Ltd. will not require the machine ordered. However, since it
is a binding agreement, the entity cannot exit / cancel the agreement. Further, Sun Ltd. has to scrap
themachine after delivery at nil scrap value.
These circumstances do indicate that the agreement/contract is an onerous contract. Therefore, a
provision should be made for the onerous element of ₹ 4,00,000 ie the full cost of the machine.
₹ ₹
Onerous Contract Provision Expense A/c Dr. 4,00,000
To Provision for Onerous Contract Liability A/c 4,00,000
(Being asset to be received due to binding agreement recognized)
Dr. 4,00,000
Profit and Loss Account (Loss due to onerous contract)
To Onerous Contract Provision Expense A/c 4,00,000
(Being loss due to onerous contract recognized and asset derecognsied)
QUESTION
Deluxe bike manufactured by Zed Limited is sold with an extended warranty of 2 years for ₹ 87,300 while an
identical Deluxe bike without the extended warranty is sold in the market for ₹ 80,000 and equivalent
warranty is given in the market for ₹ 10,000. How should Zed Limited recognize and measure revenue in the
books on the sale of the bikes and warranty?
SOLUTION
Zed Ltd. has sold two products viz Deluxe bike and the extended warranty.
Revenue earned on sale of each product should be recognised separately.
Calculation of Revenue attributable to both the components:
Total fair value of Deluxe bike and extended warranty (80,000+10,000) ₹ 90,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Less: Sale price of the Deluxe bike with extended warranty (₹ 87,300)
Discount ₹ 2,700
Discount and revenue attributable to each component of the transaction:
Proportionate discount attributable to sale of Deluxe bike ₹ 2,400
(2,700 x 80,000 / 90,000)
Revenue from sale of Deluxe bike (80,000 – 2,400) 77,600
Proportionate discount attributable to extended warranty ₹ 300
(2,700 x 10,000 / 90,000)
Revenue from extended warranty (10,000 - 300) 9,700
Revenue in respect of sale of Deluxe bike of ₹ 77,600 should be recognised immediately and revenue from
warranty of ₹ 9,700 should be recognised over the period of warranty ie. 2 years.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
INDEX (PART 2)
SL NO. CHAPTER NAME PAGE NO.

1 IND AS 36 Impairment of Assets (1-33)
2 IND AS 19 Employee Benefits (34-59)
3 IND AS 33 Earning Per Share (60-79)
4 IND AS 7 Statement of Cash flows (80-99)
5 IND AS 12 Income Taxes (100-129)
6 IND AS 102 Share Based Payment (130-149)
7 IND AS 108 Operating Sagments (150-161)
8 IND AS 34 Interim Financial Reporting (162-169)
9 IND AS 115 Revenue from Contracts with Customers (170-220)
10 IND AS 20 Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance (221-228)
11 IND AS 41 Agriculture (229-237)
12 Analysis of Financial Statemets (238-264)
13 IND AS 1 Presentaion of Financial Statements (265-280)
14 Framework for Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements (281-282)
15 IND AS 101 First-time Adoption of IND AS (283-318)
16 Corporate Socilal Responsibility (319-326)
17 Integrated Reporting (327-330)
CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 36 - IMPAIRMENT OF ASSETS
Illustration 1
The carrying value of a building in the books of Sun Ltd. as at 31st March, 20X1 is ₹ 300 lakh. As
on that date the value in use is ₹ 250 lakh and fair value less cost of disposal is ₹ 238 lakh.
Calculate the Recoverable Amount.
Solution
Recoverable Amount: Higher of Fair Value less Costs of disposal and Value in UseFair
Value less costs of disposal: ₹ 250 lakh
Value in Use : ₹ 238 lakh
Therefore, Recoverable value will be ₹ 250 lakh
Illustration 2
Saturn India Ltd is reviewing one of its business segments for impairment. The carrying value of its
net assets is 40 million. Management has produced two computations for the value-in-use of the
business segment. The first value of ₹ 36 million excludes the benefit to be derived from a future
reorganization, but the second value of ₹ 44 million includes the benefits to be derived from the
future reorganization. There is not an active market for the sale of the business segments.
Whether the business segment needs to be Impaired?
Solution
The benefit of the future reorganization should not be taken into account in calculating value-
in- use. Therefore, the net assets of the business segment will be impaired by ₹ 4 million
because the value- in-use of ₹ 36 million is lower than the carrying value of ₹ 40 million. The
value-in-use can be used as the recoverable amount as there is no active market for the sale
of the business segment.
Illustration 3
Mars Ltd. gives the following estimates of cash flows relating to property, plant and equipment on
31st March, 20X4. The discount rate is 15%
Year Cash Flow(₹ in lakh)
20X4-20X5 2,000
20X5-20X6 3,000
20X6-20X7 3,000
20X7-20X8 4,000
20X8-20X9 2,000
st
Residual Value at 31 March, 20X9 500
Property, plant & equipment was purchased on 1st April, 20X1 for ₹ 20,000 lakh
Useful Life was 8 Years
Residual Value estimated at the end of 8 years ₹ 500 lakh
Fair value less cost to disposal ₹ 10,000 lakh
Calculate impairment loss, if any on the property, plant and equipment. Also calculate the revised
carrying amount and revised depreciation of property, plant and equipment.
Solution
(a) Calculation of Carrying Amount on 31st March, 20X4 (₹ in lakh)
Particular Amount
st
Original Cost on 1 April, 20X1 20,000
20,000 - 500 ×3
Less: Depreciatio (7,313)
n
8
Carrying Amount 12,687

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(b) Calculation of Value in Use
Year Cash Flows P.V. Amount
20X4-20X5 2,000 .870 1,740
20X5-20X6 3,000 .756 2,268
20X6-20X7 3,000 .658 1,974
20X7-20X8 4,000 .572 2,288
20X8-20X9 (including residual value) 2,500 .497 1,243
Total 9,513
(c) Calculation of Recoverable Amount
Particular Amount
Value in Use 9,513
Fair value less costs of disposal 10,000
Recoverable Amount 10,000
(d) Calculation of Impairment Loss
Carrying Amount – Recoverable Amount12,687 – 10,000 = 2,687
(e) Calculation of Revised Carrying Amount
Particular Amount
Carrying Amount 12,687
Less: Impairment Loss (2,687)
Revised Carrying Amount 10,000
(f) Calculation of Revised Depreciation
Revised Carrying Amount Residual Value
Remaining Life
10,000 – 500 =1,900
5
Illustration 4: Impairment Loss
Jupiter Ltd, a leading manufacturer of steel is having a furnace, which is carried in the balance
sheet on 31st March, 20X1 at ₹ 250 lakh. As at that date the value in use and fair value is ₹ 200
lakh. The cost of disposal is ₹ 13 lakh.
Calculate the Impairment Loss to be recognised in the books of the Company?
Solution
Calculation of Impairment Loss:
Calculation of Impairment Loss ₹ in lakh
Recoverable Amount = 200
Higher of ,
Fair Value less Cost of Disposal (200 -13) 187
Or
Value in Use 200
Impairment Loss = Carrying Amount – Recoverable Amount 50
= 250 – 200
An impairment loss shall be recognised immediately in profit or loss, unless the asset is
carried at revalued amount in accordance with another Standard (for example, in accordance
with the revaluation model in Ind AS 16).
Any impairment loss of a revalued asset shall be treated as a revaluation decrease in
accordance with that other Standard. Impairment loss on a revalued asset is recognised in
other comprehensive income to the extent that the impairment loss does not exceed the
amount in the revaluation surplus for that same asset. Such an impairment loss on a revalued
asset reduces the revaluation surplus for that asset.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
When the amount estimated for an impairment loss is greater than the carrying amount of the
asset to which it relates, an entity shall recognise a liability if, and only if, that is required by
another Standard.
After the recognition of an impairment loss, the depreciation (amortisation) charge for the
assetis adjusted in future periods to allocate the asset’s revised carrying amount, less its residual
value (if any), on a systematic basis over its remaining useful life.
If an impairment loss is recognised, any related deferred tax assets or liabilities are determined
inaccordance with Ind AS 12 by comparing the revised carrying amount of the asset with its tax
base.
Illustration 5
Mercury Ltd. has an identifiable asset with a carrying amount of ₹ 1,000. Its recoverable amount is
₹ 650. The tax rate is 30% and the tax base of the asset is ₹ 800. Impairment losses are not
deductible for tax purposes. What would be the impact of impairment loss on related deferred tax
asset / liability against therevised carrying amount of asset?
Solution
The effect of impairment loss is as follows:
Identifiable assets before Impairment Identifiable assets
impairment loss loss after impairmentloss
₹ ₹ ₹
Carrying amount 1,000 (350) 650
Tax Base 800 - 800
Taxable(deductible) 200 (350) (150)
temporary difference
Deferred tax liability 60 (105) (45)
(asset)at 30%
In accordance with Ind AS 12, the entity recognises the deferred tax asset to the extent that it is
probable that taxable profit will be available against which the deductible temporary difference
can be utilised.
Illustration 6
A company operates a mine in a country where legislation requires that the owner must restore the
site on completion of its mining operations. The cost of restoration includes the replacement of the
overburden, which must be removed before mining operations commence. A provision for the costs
to replace the overburden was recognised as soon as the overburden was removed. The amount
provided was recognised as part of the cost of the mine and is being depreciated over the mine’s
useful life. The carrying amount ofthe provision for restoration costs is ₹ 500, which is equal to the
present value of the restoration costs.
The entity is testing the mine for impairment. The cash-generating unit for the mine is the mine as a
whole. The entity has received various offers to buy the mine at a price of around ₹ 800. This price
reflects the fact that the buyer will assume the obligation to restore the overburden. Disposal costs
for the mine are negligible. The value in use of the mine is approximately ₹ 1,200, excluding
restoration costs. The carrying amount of the mine is ₹ 1,000. How the impairment loss is to be
accounted for?
Solution
The cash-generating unit’s fair value less costs of disposal is ₹ 800. This amount considers
restoration costs that have already been provided for. As a consequence, the value in use for the
cash-generating unit is determined after consideration of the restoration costs and is estimated
tobe ₹ 700 (₹ 1,200 less ₹ 500). The carrying amount of the cash-generating unit is ₹ 500,
which is the carrying amount of the mine (₹ 1,000) less the carrying amount of the provision for
restoration costs (₹ 500). Therefore, the recoverable amount of the cash- generating unit exceeds

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
its carrying amount. Thus, there is no impairment loss.
Illustration 7:
Entity A acquires Entity B for ₹ 50 million, of which ₹ 35 million is the fair value of the
identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed. The acquisition of B Ltd. is to be
integrated into two of Entity A’s CGUs with the net assets being allocated as follows:
₹ in million
CGU 1 CGU 2 Total
Fair value of acquired identifiable tangible and 25 10 35
intangible assets
In addition to the net assets acquired that are assigned to CGU 2, the acquiring entity expects
CGU 2 to benefit from certain synergies related to the acquisition (e.g. CGU 2 is expected to
realise higher sales of its products because of access to the acquired entity’s distribution
channels). There is no synergistic goodwill attributable to other CGUs
Entity A allocated the purchase consideration of the acquired business to CGU 1 and CGU
2 as ₹ 33 million and ₹ 17 million respectively. Determine the allocation of goodwill to each
CGU?
Solution:
If goodwill is allocated to the CGUs based on the difference between the purchase
consideration and the fair value of net assets acquired i.e., direct method, the allocation would
be as follows: (All figures are ₹ in million, unless otherwise specified)
CGU 1 CGU 2 Total
Allocation of Purchase consideration 33 17 50
Less: Acquired identifiable tangible and intangible assets (25) (10) (35)
Goodwill assigned to CGUs 8 7 15
Illustration 8
Earth Infra Ltd has two cash-generating units, A and B. There is no goodwill within the units’
carrying values. The carrying values of the CGUs are CGU A for ₹ 20 million and CGU B for
₹ 30 million. The company has an office building which it is using as an office headquarter and has
not been included in the above values and can be allocated to the units on the basis of their carrying
values. Theoffice building has a carrying value of ₹ 10 million. The recoverable amounts are based on
value-in-use of ₹ 18 million for CGU A and ₹ 38 million for CGU B.
Determine whether the carrying values of CGU A and B are impaired.
Solution
The office building is a corporate asset which needs to be allocated to CGU A and B on a
reasonable and consistent basis:
A B Total
Carrying value of CGUs 20 30 50
Allocation of office building 4 6 10
(Office building is allocated in
ratio of Carrying value of CGU’s)
Carrying value of CGU after
Allocation of corporate asset 24 36 60
Recoverable Amount 18 38 56
Impairment Loss 6 -
The impairment loss will be allocated on the basis of 4/24 against the building (₹ 1 million)
and20/24 against the other assets (₹ 5 million).
Illustration 9
A machine has suffered physical damage but is still working, although not as well as before it was
damaged. The machine’s fair value less costs of disposal is less than its carrying amount. The

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
machine does not generate independent cash inflows. The smallest identifiable group of assets that
includes the machine and generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows
from other assets is the production line to which the machine belongs. The recoverable amount of
the production line shows that the production line taken as a whole is not impaired.
Assumption 1: budgets/forecasts approved by management reflect no commitment of management
to replace the machine.
Assumption 2: budgets/forecasts approved by management reflect a commitment of management
to replace the machine and sell it in the near future. Cash flows from continuing use of the machine
until its disposal are estimated to be negligible.
How to account for the impairment loss of machine in above scenarios?
Solution
1. The recoverable amount of the machine alone cannot be estimated because the
machine’s value in use:
a) may differ from its fair value less costs of disposal; and
b) can be determined only for the cash-generating unit to which the machine belongs (the
production line).
The production line is not impaired. Therefore, no impairment loss is recognised for themachine.
Nevertheless, the entity may need to reassess the depreciation period or the depreciation
method for the machine. Perhaps a shorter depreciation period or a faster depreciation method
is required to reflect the expected remaining useful life of the machine or the pattern in which
economic benefits are expected to be consumed by the entity.
2. The machine’s value in use can be estimated to be close to its fair value less costs of disposal.
Therefore, the recoverable amount of the machine can be determined and no consideration is
given to the cash-generating unit to which the machine belongs (i.e., the production line).
Because the machine’s fair value less costs of disposal is less than its carrying amount, an
impairment loss is recognised for the machine.
After the allocation procedures have been applied, a liability is recognised for any remaining
amount of an impairment loss for a cash-generating unit if, and only if, that is required by
another Indian Accounting Standard.
Illustration 10: Reversal of Impairment Loss
On 1st April 20X1, Venus Ltd acquired 100% of Saturn Ltd for ₹ 4,00,000. The fair value of the net
identifiable assets of Saturn Ltd was ₹ 3,20,000 and goodwill was ₹ 80,000. Saturn Ltd is in coal
mining business. On 31st March, 20X3, the government has cancelled licenses given to it in few
states.
As a result Saturn’s Ltd revenue is estimated to get reduce by 30%. The adverse change in market
place and regulatory conditions is an indicator of impairment. As a result, Venus Ltd has to estimate
the recoverable amount of goodwill and net assets of Saturn Ltd on31st March, 20X3.
Venus Ltd uses straight line depreciation. The useful life of Saturn’s Ltd assets is estimated to be
20 years with no residual value. No independent cash inflows can be identified to any individual
assets. So the entire operation of Saturn Ltd is to be treated as a CGU. Due to the regulatory
entangle it is not possible todetermine the selling price of Saturn Ltd as a CGU. Its value in use is
estimated by the management at ₹ 2,12,000.
Suppose by 31st March, 20X5 the government reinstates the licenses of Saturn Ltd. The
management expects a favourable change in net cash flows. This is an indicator that an impairment
loss may have reversed. The recoverable amount of Saturn’s Ltd net asset is re- estimated. The
value in use is expected tobe ₹ 3,04,000 and fair value less cost to disposal is expected to be ₹
2,90,000.
Calculate the impairment loss, if any. Also show the accounting treatment for reversal of impairment

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
loss and the subsequent depreciation thereon.
Solution
Since the fair value less costs of disposal is not determinable the recoverable amount of
the CGU is its value in use. The carrying amount of the assets of the CGU on 31st March, 20X3 is
as follows:
Calculation of Impairment loss
Goodwill Other assets Total
Historical Cost 80,000 3,20,000 4,00,000
Accumulated Depreciation (3,20,000/20) x 2 - (32,000) (32,000)
Carrying Amount 80,000 2,88,000 3,68,000
Impairment Loss (80,000) (76,000) (1,56,000)
Revised Carrying Amount
Impairment Loss = Carrying Amount – Recoverable Amount (₹ 3,68,000 - ₹ 2,12,000) = ₹
1,56,000 is charged in statement of profit and loss for the period ending 31st
March,20X3 as impairment loss.
Impairment loss is allocated first to goodwill ₹ 80,000 and remaining loss of ₹ 76,000 (₹
1,56,000 – ₹ 80,000) is allocated to the other assets.
Reversal of Impairment loss
Reversal of impairment loss is recognised subject to:-
 The impairment loss on goodwill cannot be reversed.
 The increased carrying amount of an asset after reversal of an impairment loss not to
exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined had no impairment loss
been recognised in prior years.
Calculation of carrying amount of identifiable assets had no impairment loss is
recognized
₹
Historical Cost 3,20,000
Accumulated Depreciation for 4 years (3,20,000/20) x 4 (64,000)
st
Carrying amount had no impairment loss is recognised on 31 March, 20X5 2,56,000
Carrying amount of other assets after recognition of impairment loss
₹
Carrying amount on 31st March, 20X3 2,12,000
Accumulated Depreciation for 2 years (2,12,000/18) x 2 [ rounded off tonearest
thousand for ease of calculation] (24,000)
st
Carrying amount on 31 March, 20X5 1,88,000
The impairment loss recognised previously can be reversed only to the extent of lower of re-
estimated recoverable amount is ₹ 2,56,000 (higher of fair value less costs of disposal ₹
2,90,000 and value in use ₹ 3,04,000)
Impairment loss reversal will be ₹ 68,000 i.e. (₹ 2,56,000 – ₹ 1,88,000). This amount is
recognised as income in the statement of profit and loss for the year ended 31st March,
20X5.
The carrying amount of other assets at 31st March, 20X5 after reversal of impairment
loss will be ₹ 2,56,000
From 1st April, 20X5 the depreciation charge will be ₹ 16,000 i.e. (₹ 2,56,000/16)
Illustration 11 - NCI measurement and Goodwill impairment
A Ltd acquires 80% shares of a subsidiary B Ltd. for ₹ 3,200 thousand. At the date of
acquisition, B Ltd.’s identifiable net assets is ₹ 3,000 thousand. A elects to measure NCI at

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
proportionate shareof net identifiable assets. It recognizes
₹ in thousand
Purchase Consideration 3,200
NCI (3,000 x 20%) 600
3,800
Less: Net Assets (3,000)
Goodwill 800
At the end of next financial year, B Ltd.’s carrying amount is reduced to ₹ 2,700 thousand
(excluding goodwill).
Recoverable amount of B Ltd.’s assets is
Case (i) ₹ 2,000 thousand, Case (ii) ₹ 2,800 thousand
Calculate impairment loss allocable to Parent and NCI in both the cases.
Solution
Case (i) ₹ in thousand
Particulars Goodwill Other Asset Total
Carrying amount 800 2,700 3,500
Unrecognised NCI (notional) [(800 / 80%) x20%] 200 - 200
Notional Total 1,000 2,700 3,700
Recoverable amount - - 2,000
Total Impairment loss - - (1,700)
Impairment loss recognised in CFS (800) (700) (1,500)
Carrying amount after impairment - 2,000 2,000
Impairment loss on: Parent NCI

Goodwill (800) -
Other assets (560) (140)
Total (1,360) (140)
Case (ii)
Particulars Goodwill Other Asset Total
Unrecognised NCI (notional) (800 / 80% x 20%) 200 - 200
Notional Total 1,000 2,700 3,700
Recoverable amount - - 2,800
Total Impairment loss - - (900)
Impairment loss recognised in CFS (900 x80%) (720) - (720)
Carrying amount after impairment (800 – 720) 80 2,700 2,780
Impairment loss on: Parent NCI
Goodwill (720) -
Other assets - -
Total (720) -
It is to be noted that since an entity measures NCI at its proportionate interest in the net
identifiable assets of a subsidiary at the acquisition date, rather than at fair value, goodwill
attributable to NCI is not recognised in the parent’s consolidated financial statements and so the
impairment loss on such goodwill not recognised.
Illustration 12
From the following details of an asset, find out:
(a) Impairment loss and its treatment.
(b) Current year depreciation for the year end. Particuars of assets:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Cost of asset ₹ 56 lakh
Useful life 10 years
Salvage value Nil
Carrying value at the beginning of the year ₹ 27.30 lakh
Remaining useful life 3 years
Recoverable amount at the beginning of the year ₹ 12 lakh
Upward revaluation done in last year ₹ 14 lakh
Solution
Impairment loss
Impairment loss = Carrying amount of the asset – Recoverable amount
= ₹ 27.30 lakh – ₹ 12 lakh
= ₹ 15.30 lakh
Treatment of impairment loss
As per Ind AS 36, impairment loss (whether of an individual asset of a CGU) is recognised in
the following manner:
(a) Impairment loss of a revalued asset: It is recognised in other comprehensive income to the
extent that the impairment loss does not exceed the amount held in the revaluation
surplus for that same asset. The balance, if any, is recognised as an expense in the
(b) Impairment loss of other assets: Impairment loss of any other asset should be recognised
as an expense in the statement of profit and loss.
Since, the asset in question has been revalued upwards, the impairment loss will be adjusted
first against the revaluation surplus of ₹ 14 lakh. The balance amount of ₹ 1.30lakh will be
recognised as an expense in the profit and loss account.
Current year depreciation ₹
Revised carrying amount (after recognising impairment loss) 12lakh
Remaining useful life 3 years
Salvage value Nil
Annual depreciation (12/3) ₹ 4 lakh
Illustration 13
Venus Ltd. has an asset, which is carried in the Balance Sheet on 31st March, 20X1 at ₹ 500
lakh. As at that date the value in use is ₹ 400 lakh and the fair value less costs to sells is ₹ 375
lakh.
From the above data:
(a) Calculate impairment loss.
(b) Prepare journal entries for adjustment of impairment loss.
Solution
According to Ind AS 36, Impairment of Assets, impairment loss is the excess of ‘Carrying
amount of the asset’ over ‘Recoverable Amount’.
In the present case, the impairment loss can be computed in the following manner:
Step 1: Fair value less costs to sell: ₹ 375 lakh
Step 2: Value in use: ₹ 400 lakh
Step 3: Recoverable amount, i.e., higher of ‘fair value less costs to sell’ & ‘value in use’.
Thus, recoverable amount is ₹ 400 lakh
Step 4: Carrying amount of the asset ₹ 500 lakh
Step 5: Impairment loss, i.e., excess of amount computed in step 4 over amount computed
in Step 3. ₹ 100 lakh (being the difference between ₹ 500 lakh and ₹ 400 lakh).
According to Ind AS 36, an impairment loss should be recognised as an expense in the
statement of profit and loss immediately, unless the asset is carried at revalued amount in

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
accordance with another Accounting Standard. Assuming, that the asset is not carried at
revalued amount, the impairment loss of ₹ 100 lakh will be charged to Profit & Loss Account.
Journal Entries
Date Particulars Dr. Amt. Cr. Amt.
₹ in
lakh
31.3.20X1 Impairment Loss A/c Dr. 100
To Assets A/c 100
31.3.20X1 (Being impairment loss on an asset recognised) 100
To Impairment Loss A/c
(Being impairment loss transferred to statement of 100
profit and loss)
Illustration 14
A publisher owns 150 magazine titles of which 70 were purchased and 80 were self-created. The
price paid for a purchased magazine title is recognised as an intangible asset. The costs of creating
magazine titles and maintaining the existing titles are recognised as an expense when incurred.
Cash inflows from direct sales and advertising are identifiable for each magazine title. Titles are
managed by customer segments. The level of advertising income for a magazine title depends on
the range of titles in the customer segment to which the magazine title relates. Management has a
policy to abandon old titles before the end of their economic lives and replace them immediately with
new titles for the same customer segment. What is the cash-generating unit for an individual
magazine title?
Solution
It is likely that the recoverable amount of an individual magazine title can be assessed. Even
though the level of advertising income for a title is influenced, to a certain extent, by the other
titles in the customer segment, cash inflows from direct sales and advertising are identifiable for
each title. In addition, although titles are managed by customer segments, decisions to
abandon titles are made on an individual title basis. Therefore, it is likely that individual
magazine titles generate cash inflows that are largely independent of each other and that each
magazine title isa separate cash-generating unit.
Illustration 15
A mining entity owns a private railway to support its mining activities. The private railway could
be sold only for scrap value and it does not generate cash inflows that are largely independent of
the cash inflows from the other assets of the mine. Should the entity determine the recoverable
amount for the private railway or for the mining business as a whole?
Solution
It is not possible to estimate the recoverable amount of the private railway because its value in
use cannot be determined and is probably different from scrap value. Therefore, the entity
estimates the recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit to which the private railway
belongs, i.e., the mine as a whole.
Illustration 16
A bus company provides services under contract with a municipality that requires minimum service
on each of seven separate routes. Assets devoted to each route and the cash flows from each
route can be identified separately. One of the routes operates at a significant loss. Should the
company determine the recoverable amount for an individual asset or for a cash generating unit?
Solution
Because the entity does not have the option to curtail any one bus route, the lowest level of
identifiable cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or
groups of assets is the cash inflows generated by the seven routes together. The cash-

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
generating unit for each route is the bus company as a whole.
Illustration 17
A significant raw material used for plant Y’s final production is an intermediate product bought
from plant X of the same entity. X’s products are sold to Y at a transfer price that passes all
margins to X. 80% of Y’s final production is sold to customers outside of the entity.
60% of X’s final production is sold to Y and the remaining 40% is sold to customers outside
of theentity. For each of the following cases, what are the cash-generating units for X and Y?
(a) If X could sell the products it sells to Y in an active market and internal transfer prices are
higher than market prices, what are the cash-generating units for X and Y?
(b) If there is no active market for the products X sells to Y, what are the cash-generating units
for X and Y?
Solution
(a) Cash-generating unit for X: X could sell its products in an active market and, so,
generate cash inflows that would be largely independent of the cash inflows from Y.
Therefore, it is likely that X is a separate cash-generating unit, although part of its
production is used by Y.
Cash-generating unit for Y: It is likely that Y is also a separate cash-generating unit. Y
sells 80% of its products to customers outside of the entity. Therefore, its cash inflows
can be regarded as largely independent.
Effect of internal transfer pricing: Internal transfer prices do not reflect market prices
for X’s output. Therefore, in determining value in use of both X and Y, the entity adjusts
financial budgets/forecasts to reflect management’s best estimate of future prices that could
be achieved in arm’s length transactions for those of X’s products that are used internally.
(b) Cash-generating units for X and Y: It is likely that the recoverable amount of each
plant cannot be assessed independently of the recoverable amount of the other plant
because:
(i) the majority of X’s production is used internally and could not be sold in an active
market. So, cash inflows of X depend on demand for Y’s products. Therefore, X cannot
be considered to generate cash inflows that are largely independent of those of Y.
(ii) the two plants are managed together.
As a consequence, it is likely that X and Y together are the smallest group of assets that
generates cash inflows that are largely independent.
Illustration 18
XYZ Limited produces a single product and owns plants 1, 2 and 3. Each plant is located in a
different country. Plant 1 produces a component that is assembled in either Plant 2 or Plant 3. The
combined capacity of Plant 2 and Plant 3 is not fully utilised. XYZ Limited’s products are sold
worldwide from either Plant 2 or Plant 3, e.g., Plant 2’s production can be sold in Plant 3’s country if
the products can be delivered faster from Plant 2 than from Plant 3. Utilisation levels of Plant 2 and
Plant 3 depend on the allocation of sales between the two sites. If there is no active market for
Plant 1’s products, what are the cash-generating units for Plant 1, Plant 2 and Plant 3?
Solution
It is likely that the recoverable amount of each plant cannot be assessed independently
because:
(a) There is no active market for Plant 1’s products. Therefore, Plant 1’s cash inflows depend
on sales of the final product by Plant 2 and Plant 3.
(b) Although there is an active market for the products assembled by Plant 2 and Plant 3,
cash inflows for Plant 2 and Plant 3 depend on the allocation of production across the two
sites. It is unlikely that the future cash inflows for Plant 2 and Plant 3 can be determined
individually.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
As a consequence, it is likely that Plant 1, Plant 2 and Plant 3 together (i.e., XYZ Limited as a
whole) are the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely
independent.
Illustration 19
Goodwill had previously been allocated to cash-generating unit A. The goodwill allocated to A
cannot be identified or associated with an asset group at a level lower than A, except arbitrarily. A is
to be divided and integrated into three other cash-generating units, B, C and D. How the goodwill
should be reallocated to B, C and D?
Solution
Since goodwill allocated to A cannot be non-arbitrarily identified or associated with an asset
group at a level lower than A, it is reallocated to units B, C and D on the basis of the relative
values of the three portions of A before those portions are integrated with B, C and D.
Illustration 20
XYZ Limited has a cash-generating unit ‘Plant A’ as on 1st April, 20X1 having a carrying
amount of ₹ 1,000 crore. Plant A was acquired under a business combination and goodwill of ₹ 200
crore was allocated to it. It is depreciated on straight line basis. Plant A has a useful life of 10 years
with no residual value. On 31st March, 20X2, Plant A has a recoverable amount of ₹ 600 crore.
Calculate the impairment loss on Plant A. Also, prescribe its allocation as per Ind AS 36.
Solution
Particulars Goodwill Identifiable assets Total
(₹ in crore) (₹in crore) (₹ in crore)
Historical cost 200 1,000 1,200
Depreciation (20X1-20X2) - (100) (100)
Carrying amount 200 900 1,100
Since, the recoverable amount is ₹ 600 crore, there is an impairment loss of ₹ 500 crore. The
impairment loss of ₹ 500 crore should be allocated to goodwill first, and then to the other
identifiable assets, i.e., ₹ 200 crore to goodwill and ₹ 300 crore to identifiable assets of
Plant A.
(₹ in crore)
Particulars Goodwill Identifiable Total
assets
Impairment loss (200) (300) (500)
Carrying amount after impairment loss - 600 600
Illustration 21 (MTP: October, 2018) (MTP APRIL 2018)
Sun Ltd is an entity with various subsidiaries. The entity closes its books of account at every year
ended on 31st March. On 1st July, 20X1, Sun Ltd acquired an 80% interest in Pluto Ltd. Details
of the acquisition were as follows:
– Sun ltd acquired 800,000 shares in Pluto Ltd by issuing two equity shares for every five
acquired. The fair value of Sun Ltd’s share on 1st July, 20X1 was ₹ 4 per share and the fair
value of a Pluto’s share was ₹ 1.40 per share. The costs of issue were 5% per share.
– Sun Ltd incurred further legal and professional costs of ₹ 100,000 that directly related to the
acquisition.
– The fair values of the identifiable net assets of Pluto Ltd at 1st July, 20X1 were measured at₹
1.3 million. Sun Ltd initially measured the non-controlling interest in Pluto Ltd at fair value.
They used the market value of a Pluto Ltd share for this purpose. No impairment of goodwill
arising on the acquisition of Pluto Ltd was required at 31st March, 20X2 or 20X3.
Pluto Ltd comprises three cash generating units A, B and C. When Pluto Ltd was acquired the
directorsof Sun Ltd estimated that the goodwill arising on acquisition could reasonably be allocated

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
to units A:B:C on a 2:2:1 basis. The carrying values of the assets in these cash generating units
and their recoverable amounts are as follows:
Unit Carrying value (before goodwill allocation) Recoverable amount
₹ ’000 ₹ ’000
A 600 740
B 550 650
C 450 400
Required:
(i) Compute the carrying value of the goodwill arising on acquisition of Pluto Ltd in the
consolidated Balance Sheet of Sun ltd at 31st March, 20X4 following the impairment
review.
(ii) Compute the total impairment loss arising as a result of the impairment review, identifying
how much of this loss would be allocated to the non-controlling interests in Pluto ltd.
Solution
1. Computation of goodwill on acquisition
Particular Amount(₹ ‘000)
Cost of investment (8,00,000 x 2/5 x ₹ 4) 1,280
Fair value of non-controlling interest (2,00,000 x ₹ 1·4) 280
Fair value of identifiable net assets at date of acquisition (1,300)
So goodwill equals 260
Acquisition costs are not included as part of the fair value of the consideration given under Ind
AS 103, Business Combination.
2. Calculation of impairment loss
Unit Carrying value Recoverable Impairment Loss
Amount
Before Allocation of After
Allocation goodwill (2:2:1) Allocation
A 600 104 704 740 Nil
B 550 104 654 650 4
C 400* 52 452 400 52
* After writing down assets in the individual CGU to recoverable amount.
3. Calculation of closing goodwill
Goodwill arising on acquisition (W1) 260
Impairment loss (W2) (56)
So closing goodwill equals 204
4. Calculation of overall impairment loss
on goodwill (W3) 56
on assets in unit C (450 – 400) 50
So total loss equals 106
₹ 21.2 (20%) of the above is allocated to the NCI with the balance allocated to the
shareholdersof Sun ltd.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
Apex Ltd. is engaged in manufacturing of steel utensils. It owns a building for its headquarters. The
building used to be fully occupied for internal use. However, recently the company has undertaken a
massivedownsizing exercise as a result of which 1/3rd of the building became vacant. This vacant
portion has nowbeen given for on lease for 6 years. Determine the CGU of the building.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
CGU of the building is Apex Ltd. as a whole as the primary purpose of the building is to
serve as a corporate asset.
Question02:
ABC Ltd. has three cash-generating units: A, B and C, the carrying amounts of which as
on31stMarch, 20X1 are as follows:
(₹ in crore) Remaining
Cash-generating units Carrying amount useful life
A 500 10
B 750 20
C 1,100 20
ABC Ltd. also has two corporate assets having a remaining useful life of 20 years.
(₹ in crore)
Corporate asset Carrying amount Remarks
X 600 The carrying amount of X can be allocated
on areasonable basis (i.e., pro rata basis)
to the individual cash-generating units.
Y 200 The carrying amount of Y cannot be allocated
on a reasonable basis to the individual cash-
generating units.
st
Recoverable amount as on 31 March, 20X1 is as follows:
Cash-generating units Recoverable amount (₹ in crore)
A 600
B 900
C 1,400
ABC Ltd. 3,200
Calculate the impairment loss, if any. Ignore decimals.
Solution:
Allocation of corporate assets
The carrying amount of X is allocated to the carrying amount of each individual cash-
generating unit. A weighted allocation basis is used because the estimated remaining useful life
of A’s cash- generating unit is 10 years, whereas the estimated remaining useful lives of B and
C’s cash- generating units are 20 years.
(₹ in crore)
Particulars A B C Total
Carrying amount 500 750 1,100 2,350
Useful life 10 years 20 years 20 years —
Weight based on useful life 1 2 2 —
Carrying amount (after assigning
weight) 500 1,500 2,200 4,200
Pro-rata allocation of X 12% 36% 52% 100%
(500/4,200) (1,500/4,200) (2,200/4,200)
Allocation of carrying amount of X 72 216 312 600
Carrying amount (after allocation 572 966 1,412 2,950
of X)
Calculation of impairment loss
Step I: Impairment losses for individual cash-generating units and its allocation
(a) Impairment loss of each cash-generating units

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(₹ in crore)
Particulars A B C
Carrying amount 572 966 1,412
(after allocation of X)
600 900 1400
Recoverable amount
Impairment loss 28 66 12
(b) Allocation of the impairment loss
(₹ in crore)
Allocation to B C
X 15 (66 x 216/966) 3 (12 x 312/1,412)
Other assets in
cash- generating units 51 (66 x 750/966) 9 (12 x 1,100/1,412)
Impairment loss 66 12
Step II: Impairment losses for the larger cash-generating unit, i.e., ABC Ltd. as a whole
(₹ in crore)
Particulars A B C X Y ABC Ltd.
Carrying amount 500 750 1,100 600 200 3,150
Impairment loss (Step I) - (51) (9) (18) - (78)
Carrying amount (after Step I) 500 699 1,091 582 200 3,072
Recoverable amount 3,200
Impairment loss for the ‘larger’ cash-generating unit Nil
Question03:
Parent acquires an 80% ownership interest in Subsidiary for ₹ 2,100 on 1st April, 20X1. At that date,
Subsidiary’s net identifiable assets have a fair value of ₹ 1,500. Parent chooses to measure the
non- controlling interests as the proportionate interest of Subsidiary’s net identifiable assets. The
assets of Subsidiary together are the smallest group of assets that generate cash inflows that are largely
independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets. Since other cash-generating
units of Parent are expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination, the goodwill of ₹ 500
related to those synergies has been allocated to other cash-generating units within Parent. On 31st
March, 20X2, Parent determines that the recoverable amount of cash-generating unit Subsidiary is ₹
1,000. The carrying amount of the net assets of Subsidiary, excluding goodwill, is ₹ 1,350. Allocate
the impairment loss on 31st March, 20X2.
Solution:
Non-controlling interests is measured as the proportionate interest of Subsidiary’s net
identifiable assets, i.e., ₹ 300 (20% of ₹ 1,500). Goodwill is the difference between the
aggregate of the consideration transferred and the amount of the non-controlling interests (₹
2,100 + ₹ 300) and the net identifiable assets (₹ 1,500), i.e., ₹ 900.
Since, the assets of Subsidiary together are the smallest group of assets that generate cash
inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets,
therefore, Subsidiary is a cash-generating unit. Since other cash-generating units of Parent are
expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination, the goodwill of ₹ 500 related to
those synergies has been allocated to other cash-generating units within Parent. Because the cash-
generating unit comprising Subsidiary includes goodwill within its carrying amount, it should be
tested for impairment annually, or more frequently if there is an indication that it may be
impaired.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Testing Subsidiary (cash-generating unit) for impairment
Goodwill attributable to non-controlling interests is included in Subsidiary’s recoverable amount
of ₹ 1,000 but has not been recognised in Parent’s consolidated financial statements.
Therefore, the carrying amount of Subsidiary should be grossed up to include goodwill
attributable to the non-controlling interests, before being compared with the recoverable
amount of ₹ 1,000. Goodwill attributable to Parent’s 80% interest in Subsidiary at the
acquisition date is ₹ 400 after allocating ₹ 500 to other cash-generating units within Parent.
Therefore, goodwill attributable to the 20% non-controlling interests in Subsidiary at the
acquisition date is ₹ 100.
Testing subsidiary for impairment on 31st March, 20X2
On 31st March, 20X2 Goodwill of Net identifiable Total
subsidiary(₹) Assets (₹) (₹)
Unrecognised non-controlling interests 100 - 100
Adjusted carrying amount 500 1,350 1,850
Impairment loss 850
Allocating the impairment loss
The impairment loss of ₹ 850 should be allocated to the assets in the unit by first reducing the
carrying amount of goodwill.
Therefore, ₹ 500 of the ₹ 850 impairment loss for the unit is allocated to the goodwill. If the
partially-owned subsidiary is itself a cash-generating unit, the goodwill impairment loss should
be allocated to the controlling and non-controlling interests on the same basis as that on which
profit or loss is allocated. In this case, profit or loss is allocated on the basis of relative
ownership interests. Because the goodwill is recognised only to the extent of Parent’s 80%
ownership interest in Subsidiary, Parent recognises only 80% of that goodwill impairment loss
(i.e., ₹ 400).
The remaining impairment loss of ₹ 350 is recognised by reducing the carrying amounts
of Subsidiary’s identifiable assets.
Allocation of the impairment loss for Subsidiary on 31st March, 20X2
On 31st March, 20X2 Goodwill of Net identifiable Total (₹)
subsidiary (₹) assets (₹)
Impairment loss (400) (350) (750)
Carrying amount after - 1,000 1,000
impairment loss
Question04:
A Ltd. purchased a machinery of ₹ 100 crore on 1st April, 20X1. The machinery has a useful life
of 5 years. It has nil residual value. A Ltd. adopts straight line method of depreciation for
depreciating the machinery. Following information has been provided as on 31st March, 20X2:
Financial year Estimated future cash flows(₹ in crore)
20X2-20X3 15
20X3-20X4 30
20X4-20X5 40
20X5-20X6 10
Discount rate applicable : 10%
st
Fair value less costs to sell as on 31 March, 20X2 : ₹ 70 crore
Calculate the impairment loss, if any.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Value in use of the machinery as on 31st March, 20X2 can be calculated as follows:
Financial year Estimated cash Present value Present value
flows (₹ in crore) factor @ 10%
20X2-20X3 15 0.9091 13.64
20X3-20X4 30 0.8264 24.79
20X4-20X5 40 0.7513 30.05
20X5-20X6 10 0.6830 6.83
75.31
The recoverable amount of the machinery is ₹ 75.31 crore (higher of value in use
of ₹ 75.31 crore and fair value less costs to sell of ₹ 70 crore). Carrying amount of the
machinery is ₹ 80 crore (after providing for one year depreciation @ ₹ 20 crore). Therefore, the
impairment loss of ₹ 4.69 crore should be provided in the books.
Question 05:
Assuming in the above question, as on 31st March, 20X3, there is no change in the estimated
future cash flows and discount rate. Fair value less costs to sell as on 31st March, 20X3 is ₹ 40
crore. How should it be dealt with under Ind AS 36?
Solution:
Value in use of the machinery as on March 31,20X3 can be calculated as follows:
Financial year Estimated cash Present value Present
flows (₹ in crore) factor@ 10% value
20X3-20X4 30 0.9091 27.27
20X4-20X5 40 0.8264 33.06
20X5-20X6 10 0.7513 7.51
67.84
The recoverable amount of the machinery is ₹ 67.84 crore (higher of value in use
of ₹ 67.84 crore and fair value less costs to sell of ₹ 40 crore). Carrying amount of the machinery
at the end of the year 20X2 is ₹ 56.48 crore (after providing for two years depreciation (100- 20-
4.69)- 18.83).
However, as per paragraph 116 of Ind AS 36, an impairment loss is not reversed just
because of the passage of time (sometimes called the ‘unwinding’ of the discount), even if the
recoverable amount of the asset becomes higher than its carrying amount. Therefore, the
impairment loss of ₹ 4.69 crore should not be reversed.
Question06:
A Ltd. purchased an asset of ₹ 100 lakh on 1st April, 20X0. It has useful life of 4 years with no
residual value. Recoverable amount of the asset is as follows:
As on Recoverable amount
31st March, 20X1 ₹ 60 lakh
₹ 40 lakh
31st March, 20X2 ₹ 28 lakh
31st March, 20X3
Calculate the amount of impairment loss or its reversal, if any, on 31st March, 20X1,31st March,
20X2 and 31st March, 20X3.
Solution:
As on 31st March, 20X1
Carrying amount of the asset (opening balance) ₹ 100 lakh
Depreciation (₹ 100 lakh /4 years) ₹ 25 lakh
Carrying amount of the asset (closing balance) ₹ 75 lakh

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Recoverable amount (given) ₹ 60 lakh
Therefore, an impairment loss of ₹ 15 lakh should be recognised as on 31st March, 20X1.
Depreciation for subsequent years should be charged on the carrying amount of the asset
(after providing for impairment loss), i.e., ₹ 60 lakh.
Depreciation (₹ 60 lakh /3 years) ₹ 20 lakh
Therefore, no impairment loss should be recognised as on 31st March, 20X2.
Depreciation (₹ 40 lakh / 2 years) ₹ 20 lakh
Recoverable amount (given) ₹ 28 lakh
Since, the recoverable amount of the asset exceeds the carrying amount of the asset by
₹ 8 lakh, impairment loss recognised earlier should be reversed. However, reversal of an
impairmentloss should not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined (net of
amortisation or depreciation) had no impairment loss been recognised for the asset in prior years.
Carrying amount as on 31st March, 20X3 had no impairment loss being recognised would
have been ₹ 25 lakh. Therefore, the reversal of an impairment loss of ₹ 5 lakh should be done
as on 31st March, 20X3.
Question07:
On 31st March, 20X1, XYZ Ltd. makes following estimate of cash flows for one of its asset
located inUSA:
Year Cash flows
20X1-20X2 US $ 80
20X2-20X3 US $ 100
20X3-20X4 US $ 20
Following information has been provided:
Particulars India USA
Applicable discount rate 15% 10%
Exchange rates are as follows:
As on Exchange rate
st
31 March, 20X1 ₹ 45/US $
As on Expected Exchange rate

31st March, 20X2 ₹ 48/US $
₹ 51/US $
31st March, 20X3
₹ 55/US $
31st March, 20X4
Calculate value in use as on 31st March, 20X1.
Solution:
Year Cash flows Present value Discounted cash
(US $) factor @ 10% flows (US $)
20X1-20X2 80 0.9091 72.73
20X2-20X3 100 0.8264 82.64

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
20X3-20X4 20 0.7513 15.03
Total Discounted cash flows in US $ 170.40
Exchange rate as on 31st March, 20X1, i.e., date of calculating value in use ₹ 45/US
$Value in use as on 31st March, 20X1 ₹ 7,668
Question08:
Cash flow is ₹ 100, ₹ 200 or ₹ 300 with probabilities of 10%, 60% and 30%, respectively. Calculate
expected cash flows.
Solution:
Cash flow Probability Expected cash flow
100 10% 10
200 60% 120
300 30% 90
Total 220
The expected cash flow is ₹ 220.
Question09:
Cash flow of ₹ 1,000 may be received in one year, two years or three years with probabilities of
10%, 60% and 30%, respectively. Calculate expected cash flows assuming applicable discount rate
of 5%, 5.25% and 5.5% in year 1, 2 and 3, respectively.
Solution:
Years Cash P.V.F. Present Probability Expected
flow value cash flow
1 1,000 0.95238 952.38 10% 95.24
2 1,000 0.90273 902.73 60% 541.64
3 1,000 0.85161 851.61 30% 255.48
Total 892.36
The expected present value is ₹ 892.36.
Question10:
Calculate expected cash flows in each of the following cases:
(a) the estimated amount falls somewhere between ₹ 50 and ₹ 250, but no amount in therange is
more likely than any other amount.
(b) the estimated amount falls somewhere between ₹ 50 and ₹ 250, and the most likely amount is ₹
100. However, the probabilities attached to each amount are unknown.
(c) the estimated amount will be ₹ 50 (10 per cent probability), ₹ 250 (30 per cent probability),or ₹
100 (60 per cent probability).
Solution:
(a) the estimated expected cash flow is ₹ 150 [(50 + 250)/2].
(b) the estimated expected cash flow is ₹ 133.33 [(50 + 100 + 250)/3].
(c) the estimated expected cash flow is ₹ 140 [(50 × 0.10) + (250 × 0.30) + (100 × 0.60)].
Question11: (RTP:May,2019)
Elia limited is a manufacturing company which deals in to manufacturing of cold drinks and
beverages. It is having various plants across India. There is a Machinery A in the Baroda plant
which is used for the purpose of bottling. There is one more machinery which is Machinery B
clubbed with Machinery A. Machinery A can individually have an output and also sold independently
in the open market. Machinery B cannot be sold in isolation and without clubbing with Machine A it
cannot produce output as well. The Company considers this group of assets as a Cash Generating
Unit and an Inventory amounting to ₹ 2 Lakh and Goodwill amounting to ₹ 1.50 Lakhs is included in
such CGU.
Machinery A was purchased on 1st April 2013 for ₹ 10 Lakhs and residual value is ₹ 50
thousands. Machinery B was purchased on 1st April, 2015 for ₹ 5 Lakhs with no residual value. The

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
useful life of both Machine A and B is 10 years. The Company expects following cash flows in the
next 5 years pertaining to Machinery A. The incremental borrowing rate of the company is 10%.
Year Cash Flows from Machinery A
1 1,50,000
2 1,00,000
3 1,00,000
4 1,50,000
5 1,00,000 (excluding Residual Value)
Total 6,00,000
On 31st March, 2018, the professional valuers have estimated that the current market value of
Machinery A is ₹ 7 lakhs. The valuation fee was ₹ 1 lakh. There is a need to dismantle the
machinery before delivering it to the buyer. Dismantling cost is ₹ 1.50 lakhs. Specialised
packagingcost would be ₹ 25 thousand and legal fees would be ₹ 75 thousand.
The Inventory has been valued in accordance with Ind AS 2. The recoverable value of
CGU is ₹ 10 Lakh as on 31st March, 2018. In the next year, the company has done the
assessment of recoverability of the CGU and found that the value of such CGU is ₹ 11 Lakhs
ie on 31st March, 2019. The Recoverable value of Machine A is ₹ 4,50,000 and combined
Machine A and B is ₹ 7,60,000 as on 31st March, 2019.
Required:
a) Compute the impairment loss on CGU and carrying value of each asset after charging
impairment loss for the year ending 31st March, 2018 by providing all the relevant working
notes to arrive at such calculation.
b) Compute the prospective depreciation for the year 2018-2019 on the above assets.
c) Compute the carrying value of CGU as at 31st March, 2019.
Solution:
(a) Computation of impairment loss and carrying value of each of the asset in CGU after
impairment loss
(i) Calculation of carrying value of Machinery A and B before impairment
Machinery A
Cost (A) ₹ 10,00,000
Residual Value ₹ 50,000
Useful life already elapsed 5 years
Yearly depreciation (B) ₹ 95,000
WDV as at 31st March, 2018 [A- (B x 5)] ₹ 5,25,000
Machinery B
Cost (C) ₹ 5,00,000
Residual Value -
Useful life already elapsed 3 years
Yearly depreciation (D) ₹ 50,000
WDV as at 31st March, 2018 [C- (D x 3)] ₹ 3,50,000
(ii) Calculation of Value-in-use of Machinery A
Period Cash Flows (₹ ) PVF PV
1 1,50,000 0.909 1,36,350
2 1,00,000 0.826 82,600
3 1,00,000 0.751 75,100
4 1,50,000 0.683 1,02,450

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
5 1,00,000 0.621 62,100
5 50,000 0.621 31,050
Value in use 4,89,650
(iii) Calculation of Fair Value less cost of disposal of Machinery A
₹
Fair Value 7,00,000
Less: Dismantling cost (1,50,000)
Packaging cost (25,000)
Legal Fees (75,000)
Fair value less cost of disposal 4,50,000
(iv) Calculation of Impairment loss on Machinery A
₹
Carrying Value 5,25,000
Less: Recoverable Value ie higher of Value-in-use
and Fair value less cost of disposal 4,89,650
Impairment Loss 35,350
(v) Calculation of Impairment loss of CGU
1. First goodwill will be impaired fully and then the remaining impairment loss of ₹ 75,000
will be allocated to Machinery A and B.
2. If we allocate remaining impairment loss to Machinery A and B on pro-rata basis, it
would come to ₹ 45,000 on Machinery A. However, the impairment loss of Machinery
A cannot exceed ₹ 35,350. Hence, impairment to CGU will be as follows:
Carrying value beforeImpairment loss Carrying value after
impairmentloss impairmentloss
₹ ₹ ₹
Machinery A 5,25,000 35,350 4,89,650
Machinery B 3,50,000 39,650* 3,10,350
Inventory 2,00,000 - 2,00,000
Goodwill 1,50,000 1,50,000 -
Total 12,25,000 2,25,000 10,00,000
* Balancing figure.
(b) Carrying value after adjustment of depreciation
₹
Machinery A [4,89,650 – {(4,89,650-50,000)/5}] 4,01,720
Machinery B [3,10,350 – (3,10,350/7)] 2,66,014
Inventory 2,00,000
Goodwill -
Total 8,67,734
(c) Calculation of carrying value of CGU as on 31st March, 2019
The revised value of CGU is ₹ 11 Lakh. However, impaired goodwill cannot be reversed.
Further, the individual assets cannot be increased by lower of recoverable value or Carrying
Value as if the assets were never impaired.
Accordingly, the carrying value as on 31st March, 2019 assuming that the impairment loss had
never incurred, will be:
CarryingValue Recoverable Value Final CV as at
31st Mar 2019
Machinery A 4,30,000 4,50,000 4,30,000
Machinery B 3,00,000 (7,60,000 – 4,50,000) 3,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
3,10,000
Inventory 2,00,000 2,00,000 2,00,000
Goodwill -
Total 9,30,000 9,60,000 9,30,000
Hence the impairment loss to be reversed will be limited to ₹ 62,266 only (₹9,30,000 –
₹8,67,734).
Question12: (RTP: November,2019) (MTP MAR 2021)
E Ltd. owns a machine used in the manufacture of steering wheels, which are sold directly to
major car manufacturers.
- The machine was purchased on 1st April, 20X1 at a cost of ₹ 5,00,000 through a vendor
financing arrangement on which interest is being charged at the rate of 10% per annum.
- During the year ended 31st March, 20X3, E Ltd. sold 10,000 steering wheels at a selling
price of ₹ 190 per wheel.
- The most recent financial budget approved by E Ltd.’s management, covering the period 1st
April, 20X3 – 31st March, 20X8, including that the company expects to sell each steering
wheel for ₹ 200 during 20X3-20X4, the price rising in later years in line with a forecast
inflation of 3% per annum.
- During the year ended 31st March, 20X4, E Ltd. expects to sell 10,000 steering wheels.
The number is forecast to increase by 5% each year until 31st March, 20X8.
- E Ltd. estimates that each steering wheel costs ₹ 160 to manufacture, which includes ₹
110 variable costs, ₹ 30 share of fixed overheads and ₹ 20 transport costs.
- Costs are expected to rise by 1% during 20X4-20X5, and then by 2% per annum until
31st March, 20X8.
- During 20X5-20X6, the machine will be subject to regular maintenance costing
₹50,000.
- In 20X3-20X4, E Ltd. expects to invest in new technology costing ₹ 1,00,000. This
technology will reduce the variable costs of manufacturing each steering wheel from ₹ 110
to ₹ 100 and the share of fixed overheads from ₹ 30 to ₹ 15 (subject to the availability of
technology, which is still under development).
- E Ltd. is depreciating the machine using the straight line method over the machine’s 10
year estimated useful life. The current estimate (based on similar assets that have reached the
end of their useful lives) of the disposal proceeds from selling the machine is ₹ 80 000 net
of disposal costs. E Ltd. expects to dispose of the machine at the end of March, 20X8.
- E Ltd. has determined a pre-tax discount rate of 8%, which reflects the market’s assessment
of the time value of money and the risks associated with this asset.
Assume a tax rate of 30%. What is the value in use of the machine in accordance with Ind AS
36?
Solution:
Calculation of the value in use of the machine owned by E Ltd. includes the projected cash
inflow (i.e. sales income) from the continued use of the machine and projected cash outflows
that are necessarily incurred to generate those cash inflows (i.e cost of goods sold).
Additionally, projected cash inflows include ₹ 80,000 from the disposal of the asset in March,
20X8. Cash outflows include routing capital expenditures of ₹ 50,000 in 20X5-20X6
As per Ind AS 36, estimates of future cash flows shall not include:
- Cash inflows from receivables
- Cash outflows from payables
- Cash inflows or outflows expected to arise from future restructuring to which an
entity is not yet committed

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
- Cash inflows or outflows expected to arise from improving or enhancing the
asset’s performance
- Cash inflows or outflows from financing activities
- Income tax receipts or payments.
Hence in this case, cash flows do not include financing interest (i.e. 10%), tax (i.e. 30%) and
capital expenditures to which E Ltd. has not yet committed (i.e. ₹ 1,00,000). They also do not
include any savings in cash outflows from these capital expenditure, as required by Ind AS
36.
The cash flows (inflows and outflows) are presented below in nominal terms. They include an
increase of 3% per annum to the forecast price per unit (B), in line with forecast inflation. The
cashflows are discounted by applying a discount rate (8%) that is also adjusted for inflation.
Note: Figures are calculated on full scale and then rounded off to the nearest absolute value.
Year ended 20X3-20X4 20X4-20X5 20X5-20X6 20X6-20X7 20X7-20X8 Value
in use
Quantity (A) 10,000 10,500 11,025 11,576 12,155

Price per unit (B) 200 206 212 219 225
Estimated cash 20,00,000 21,63,000 23,37,300 25,35,144 27,34,875
inflows(C=A x B)
Misc. cash inflow 80 000
disposal proceeds (D)
Total estimated cash 20,00,000 21,63,000 23,37,300 25,35,144 28,14,875
inflows (E=C+D)
Cost per unit (F) 160 162 165 168 171
Estimated cash (16,00,000)(17,01,000)(18,19,125) (19,44,768) (20,78,505)
outflows (G = A x F)
Misc. cash outflow: (50,000)
maintenance costs (H)
Total estimated cash (16,00,000)(17,01,000)(18,69,125) (19,44,768) (20,78,505)
outflows (I=G+H)
Net cash flows(J=E-I) 4,00,000 4,62,000 4,68,175 5,90,376 7,36,370
Discount factor 8% (K) 0.9259 0.8573 0.7938 0.7350 0.6806
Discounted future cash 3,70,360 3,96,073 3,71,637 4,33,926 5,01,173 ₹20,73,169
flows (L=J x K)
Question13: (MTP: October, 2020) (RTP: May,2020)

PQR Ltd. is the company which has performed well in the past but one of its major assets, an item
of equipment, suffered a significant and unexpected deterioration in performance. Management expects
to use the machine for a further four years after 31st March 20X6, but at a reduced level. The
equipment will be scrapped after four years. The financial accountant for PQR Ltd. has produced a
set of cash-flow projections for the equipment for the next four years, ranging from optimistic to
pessimistic. CFO thought that the projections were too conservative, and he intended to use the
highest figures each year. These were as follows:
₹ ʼ000
Year ended 31st March 20X7 276

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Year ended 31st March 20Y0 114
The above cash inflows should be assumed to occur on the last day of each financial year. The pre-
tax discount rate is 9%. The machine could have been sold at 31st March 20X6 for₹ 6,00,000 and
related selling expenses in this regard could have been ₹ 96,000. The machine had been
revalued previously, and at 31st March 20X6 an amount of ₹ 36,000 was held in revaluation
surplus in respect of the asset. The carrying value of the asset at 31st March 20X6 was ₹
6,60,000. The Indian government has indicated that it may compensate the company for any loss in
value of the assets up to its recoverable amount.
Calculate impairment loss, if any and revised depreciation of asset. Also suggest how Impairment
loss, if any would be set off and how compensation from government be accounted for?
Solution:
Carrying amount of asset on 31st March 20X6= ₹ 6,60,000
Calculation of Value in Use:
Year ended Cash flow ₹ Discount factor @ 9% Amount ₹
st
31 March, 20X7 2,76,000 0.9174 2,53,202
31st March, 20X8 1,92,000 0.8417 1,61,606
31st March, 20X9 1,20,000 0.7722 92,664
31st March, 20Y0 1,14,000 0.7084 80,758
Total (Value in Use) 5,88,230
Calculation of Recoverable amount:
Value in use 5,88,230
Fair value less costs of disposal (6,00,000 – 96,000) 5,04,000
Recoverable amount 5,88,230
(Higher of value in use and fair value less costs of disposal)
Calculation of Impairment loss:
Carrying amount 6,60,000
Less: Recoverable amount (5,88,230)
Impairment loss 71,770
Calculation of Revised carrying amount:
Carrying amount 6,60,000
Less: Impairment loss (71,770)
Revised carrying amount 5,88,230
Calculation of Revised Depreciation:
Revised carrying amount – Residual value
Remaining life = (5,88,230 - 0) / 4 = ₹ 1,47,058 per annum
Set off of Impairment loss:
Treatment of Government compensation:
Any compensation by government would be accounted for as such when it becomes
receivable. At this time, the government has only stated that it may reimburse the company
and therefore credit should not be taken for any potential government receipt.
Question14:
On 1 January Year 1, Entity Q purchased a machine costing ₹ 2,40,000 with an estimated useful
life of 20 years and an estimated zero residual value. Depreciation is computed on straight-line basis.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The assethad been re-valued on 1 January Year 3 to ₹ 2,50,000, but with no change in useful life
at that date. On 1 January Year 4 an impairment review showed the machine’s recoverable amount
to be ₹ 1,00,000 and its estimated remaining useful life to be 10 years.
Calculate:
a) The carrying amount of the machine on 31 December Year 2 and the revaluation surplus
arising on 1 January Year 3.
b) The carrying amount of the machine on 31 December Year 3 (immediately before theimpairment).
c) The impairment loss recognised in the year to 31 December Year 4 and its treatmentthereon
d) The depreciation charge in the year to 31 December Year 4.
Note: During the course of utilization of machine, the company did not opt to transfer part of the
revaluation surplus to retained earnings.
Solution:
(a) Calculation of Carrying amount of machine at the end of Year 2
Cost of machine 2,40,000
Accumulated depreciation for 2 years [2 years × (2,40,000 ÷ 20)] (24,000)
Carrying amount of the machine at the end of Year 2 2,16,000
(b) Calculation of carrying amount of the machine on 31 December Year 3
Carrying amount at the beginning of Year 3 2,16,000
Revaluation done at the beginning of Year 3 2,50,000
Revaluation surplus 34,000
(c) Calculation of Impairment loss at the end of Year 4
When machine is revalued on 1 January Year 3, depreciation is charged on the revalued
amountover its remaining expected useful life.
Valuation at 1 January (re-valued amount) 2,50,000
Accumulated depreciation in Year 3 (2,50,000 / 18) (13,889)
Carrying amount of the asset at the end of Year 3 2,36,111
On 1 January Year 4, recoverable amount of the machine 1,00,000
Impairment loss (2,36,111 – 1,00,000) 1,36,111
The remaining impairment loss of ₹ 1,02,111 (1,36,111 – 34,000) is recognised in the Statement
ofProfit and Loss for the Year 4.
(d) Calculation of depreciation charge in the Year 4
Carrying value of the machine at the beginning of Year 4 ₹ 1,00,000
Estimated remaining useful life 10 years
Depreciation charge is (₹ 1,00,000 / 10 years) ₹ 10,000
MTP: March, 2019
Question 01:
X Ltd. purchased a Property, Plant and Equipment four years ago for Rs. 150 lakhs and
depreciates it at 10% p.a. on straight line method. At the end of the fourth year, it has revalued the
asset at Rs. 75 lakhs and has written off the loss on revaluation to the profit and loss account.
However, on the date of revaluation, the market price is Rs. 67.50 lakhs and expected disposal
costs are Rs. 3 lakhs. What willbe the treatment in respect of impairment loss on the basis that fair
value for revaluation purpose is determined by market value and the value in use is estimated at
Rs. 60 lakhs? (5 Marks)
Solution:
Treatment of Impairment Loss
As per para 57 of AS 28 “Impairment of assets”, if the recoverable amount (higher of net selling price and its
value in use) of an asset is less than its carrying amount, the carrying amount of the asset should be

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
reduced to its recoverable amount. In the given case, net selling price is Rs. 64.50 lakhs (Rs. 67.50 lakhs – Rs.
3 lakhs) and value in use is Rs. 60 lakhs. Therefore, recoverable amount will be Rs. 64.50 lakhs. Impairment
loss will be calculated as Rs. 10.50 lakhs [Rs. 75 lakhs (Carrying Amount after revaluation - Refer Working
Note) less Rs. 64.50 lakhs (Recoverable Amount)].
Thus, impairment loss of Rs.10.50 lakhs should be recognised as an expense in the Statement of Profit and Loss
immediately since there was downward revaluation of asset which was already charged to Statement of Profit
and Loss.
Working Note:
Calculation of carrying amount of the Property, Plant and Equipment at the end of the fourth year on
Revaluation
(Rs. in lakhs)
Purchase price of a Property, Plant and Equipment 150.00
Less: Depreciation for four years [(150 lakhs / 10 years) x 4 years] (60.00)
Carrying value at the end of fourth year 90.00
Less: Downward revaluation charged to profit and loss account (15.00)
Revalued carrying amount 75.00
MTP: August, 2018 (MAY 2019)
Question 2:
Great Ltd., acquired a machine on 1st April, 2012 for Rs. 7 crore that had an estimated useful life of 7 years. The machine is
depreciated on straight line basis and does not carry any residual value. On 1st April, 2016, the carrying value
of the machine was reassessed at Rs. 5.10 crore and the surplus arising out of the revaluation being credited to
revaluation reserve. For the year ended March 2018, conditions indicating an impairment of the machine existed and the
amount recoverable ascertained to be only Rs. 79 lakhs.
Calculate the loss on impairment of the machine and show how this loss is to be treated in the books of Great Ltd. Great
Ltd., had followed the policy of writing down the revaluation surplus by the increased charge of depreciation resulting from
the revaluation.(10 Marks)
Solution:
Statement Showing Impairment Loss
(Rs. in crores)
Carrying amount of the machine as on 1 April, 2012 st 7.00
Depreciation for 4 years i.e. 2012-2013 to 2015-2016( 7 * 4 years/7 years) (4.00)
Carrying amount as on 31.03.2016 3.00

Add: Upward Revaluation (credited to Revaluation Reserve account) 2.10
5.10
Carrying amount of the machine as on 1st April 2016 (revalued)
(3.40)
Less: Depreciation for 2 years i.e. 2016-2017 & 2017-2018 (5.10 *2y/3y)
1.70
Carrying amount as on 31.03.2018Less:
(0.79)
Recoverable amount Impairment loss
0.91
Less: Balance in revaluation reserve as on 31.03.2018:
Balance in revaluation reserve as on 31.03.2016 2.10
Less: Enhanced depreciation met from revaluation reserve
2016-2017 &2017-2018 = [(1.70 – 1.00) x 2 years] (1.40) (0.70)
Impairment loss set off against revaluation reserve balance as per para58
of AS 28 “Impairment of Assets”
Impairment Loss to be debited to profit and loss account 0.21
RTP:May,2018 (MTP APR 19)
Question 3:
Himalaya Ltd. which is in a business of manufacturing and export of its product. Sometimes, back
in 20X4, the Government put restriction on export of goods exported by Himalaya Ltd. and due to

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
that restriction Himalaya Ltd. impaired its assets. Himalaya Ltd. acquired identifiable assets worth of
₹ 4,000 lakhs for ₹ 6,000 lakh at the end of the year 20X0. The difference is treated as goodwill.
The useful life of identifiable assets is 15 years and depreciated on straight line basis. When
Government put the restriction at the end of 20X4, the company recognised the impairment loss by
determining the recoverable amount of assets for ₹ 2,720 lakh. In 20X6 Government lifted the
restriction imposed on the export and due to this favourable change, Himalaya Ltd. re-estimate
recoverable amount, which was estimated at ₹ 3,420 lakh.
Required:
 Calculation and allocation of impairment loss in 20X4.
 Reversal of impairment loss and its allocation as per AS 28 in 20X6.
Solution:
(i) Calculation and allocation of impairment loss in 20X4 (Amount in ₹ lakhs)
Goodwill Identifiableassets Total
Historical cost 2,000 4,000 6,000
Accumulated depreciation/amortisation (4 yrs.) (1,600) (1,067) (2,667)
Carrying amount before impairment 400 2,933 3,333
Impairment loss* (400) (213) (613)
Carrying amount after impairment loss 0 2,720 2,720
* Notes:
1. As per para 87 of AS 28, an impairment loss should be allocated to reduce the carrying
amount of the assets of the unit in the following order:
(a) first, to goodwill allocated to the cash-generating unit (if any); and
(b) then, to the other assets of the unit on a pro-rata basis based on the carrying
amount of each asset in the unit.
Hence, first goodwill is impaired at full value and then identifiable assets are impaired to
arriveat recoverable value.
2. Since the goodwill has arisen on acquisition of assets, AS 14 comes into the picture. As
per para 19 of AS 14, goodwill shall amortise over a period not exceeding five years
unless a somewhat longer period can be justified. Therefore, the amortization period
of goodwill is considered as 5 years.
(ii) Carrying amount of the assets at the end of 20X6 (Amount in ₹ lakhs)
End of 20X6 Goodwill Identifiable Total
assets
Carrying amount in 20X6 0 2,225 2,225
Add: Reversal of impairment loss (W.N.2) - 175 175
Carrying amount after reversal of impairment loss - 2,400 2,400
Working Note:
1. Calculation of depreciation after impairment till 20X6 and reversal of impairment
lossin 20X6
(Amount in ₹lakhs)
Goodwill Identifiable Total
assets
Carrying amount after impairment loss in20X4 0 2,720 2,720
Additional depreciation (i.e. (2,720/11) x 2) – (495) (495)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Excess of recoverable amount over carrying amount 1,195
Note: It is assumed that the restriction by the Government has been lifted at the end of the
year 20X6.
2. Determination of the amount to be impaired by calculating depreciated historical
costof the identifiable assets without impairment at the end of 20 X6
(Amount in ₹ lakhs)
End of 20X6 Identifiable assets
Historical cost 4,000
Accumulated depreciation (266.67 x 6 years) = (1,600)
Depreciated historical cost 2,400
Carrying amount (in W.N. 1) 2,225
Amount of reversal of impairment loss 175
Notes:
1. As per para 107 of AS 28, in allocating a reversal of an impairment loss for a cash-
generating unit, the carrying amount of an asset should not be increased above the lower
of:
(a) its recoverable amount (if determinable); and
(b) the carrying amount that would have been determined (net of amortisation or
depreciation) had no impairment loss been recognised for the asset in prior accounting
periods.
Hence impairment loss reversal is restricted to ₹175 lakhs only.
The reversal of impairment loss took place in the 6th year. However, goodwill is amortised in 5
years. Therefore, there would be no balance in the goodwill account in the 6th year even
without impairment loss. Hence in W.N. 2 above there is no column for recalculation ofgoodwill.
RTP: May , 2021
Question 4:
On 31 March 20X1, Vision Ltd acquired 80% of the equity shares of Mission Ltd for ₹ 190 million. The fair values
of the net assets of Mission Ltd that were included in the consolidated statement of financial position of Vision Ltd at
31 March 20X1 were ₹ 200 million. It is the Group’s policy to value the non-controlling interest in subsidiaries at the
date of acquisition at its proportionate share of the fair value of the subsidiaries’ identifiable net assets.
On 31 March 20X4, Vision Ltd carried out its annual review of the goodwill on consolidation of Mission Ltd and
found evidence of impairment. No impairment had been evident when the reviews were carried out at 31
March 20X2 and31 March 20X3. The review involved allocating the assets of Mission Ltd into three cash- generating
units and computing the value in use of each unit. The carrying values of the individual units before any impairment
adjustments aregiven below:
Unit A ₹ in million Unit B ₹ in million Unit C ₹inmillion
Intangible assets 30 10 -
Current Assets 60 30 40
Total 170 90 100
Value in use of unit 180 66 104
It was not possible to meaningfully allocate the goodwill on consolidation to the individual cash generating units but all the
other net assets of Mission Ltd are allocated in the table shown above.
The intangible assets of Mission Ltd have no ascertainable market value but all the current assets have a market value
that is at least equal to their carrying value. The value in use of Mission Ltd as a single cash-generating unit on
31 March 20X4 is ₹ 350 million.
Discuss and compute the accounting treatment of impairment of goodwill as per Ind AS 36?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
The goodwill on consolidation of Mission Ltd that is recognized in the consolidated balance sheet of Vision Ltd is ₹
30 million (₹ 190 million – 80% x ₹ 200 million). This can only be reviewed for impairment as part of the cash
generating units to which it relates. Since here the goodwill cannot be meaningfully allocated to the units, the
impairment review is in two parts.
Units A and C have values in use that are more than their carrying values. However, the value in use of Unit B
is less than its carrying amount. This means that the assets of unit B are impaired by ₹ 24 million (₹ 90 million – ₹ 66
million). This impairment loss will be charged to the statement of profit and loss.
Assets of Unit B will be written down on a pro-rata basis as shown in the table below:
(₹ in million)
Asset Impact on carrying value
Existing Impairment Revised
Intangible assets 10 (4) 6
Property, plant and equipment 50 (20) 30
Current assets 30 Nil* 30
Total 90 (24) 66
* The current assets are not impaired because they are expected to realize at least their carrying value when
disposed of.
Following this review, the three units plus the goodwill are reviewed together i.e. treating Mission Limited as
single cash generating Unit. The impact of this is shown in the following table, given that the recoverable
amount of the business as a whole is ₹ 350 million: (₹ in million)
Component Impact of impairment review on carrying value
Existing Impairment Revised
Goodwill (see note below) 37.50 (23.50) 14.00
Unit A 170.00 Nil 170.00
Unit B (revised) 66.00 Nil 66.00
Unit C 100.00 Nil 100.00
Total 373.50 (23.50) 350.00
Note: As per Appendix C of Ind AS 36, given that the subsidiary is 80% owned the goodwill must first be
grossed up to reflect a notional 100% investment. Therefore, the goodwill will be grossed up to ₹ 37.50 million (₹ 30
million x 100/80).
The impairment loss of ₹ 23.50 million is all allocated to goodwill, leaving the carrying values of the individual
units of the business as shown in the table immediately above.
The table shows that the notional goodwill that relates to a 100% interest is written down by ₹ 23.50 million to ₹
14.00 million. However, in the consolidated financial statements the goodwill that is recognized is based on an 80%
interest so the loss that is actually recognized is ₹ 18.80 million (₹ 23.50 million x 80%) and the closing consolidated
goodwill figure is ₹ 11.20 million (₹ 14.00 million x 80%) or (₹ 30 million – ₹ 18.80 million).
XYZ Limited has three cash-generating units - X, Y and Z, the carrying amounts of which as on 31st
March,2018 are as follows:
Cash Generating Carrying Amount (₹ in lakh) Remaining useful life in years
Units
X 800 20
Y 1000 10
Z 1200 20
XYZ Limited also has corporate assets having a remaining useful life of 20 years as given below:
Corporate Carrying Remarks

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Assets amount(₹ in lakh)
AU 800 The carrying amount of AU can be allocated on a
reasonablebasis to the individual cash generating units.
BU 400 The carrying amount of BU cannot be
allocated on a reasonable basis to the individual
cash-generating units.
Recoverable amounts as on 31st March, 2018 are as follows:
Cash-generating units Recoverable amount (₹ in lakh)
X 1000
Y 1200
Z 1400
XYZ Limited 3900
Calculate the impairment loss if any of XYZ Ltd. Ignore decimals. (10 Marks)
SOLUTION:
(i) Allocation of corporate assets to CGU
The carrying amount of AU is allocated to the carrying amount of each individual cash-
generating unit. A weighted allocation basis is used because the estimated remaining useful
life of Y’s cash-generating unit is 10 years, whereas the estimated remaining useful lives of X
and Z’s cash-generating units are 20 years.
(₹in lakh)
Particulars X Y Z Total
(a) Carrying amount 800 1000 1,200 3,000
(b) Useful life 20 years 10 years 20 years
(c) Weight based on useful life 2 1 2
(d) Carrying amount (after 1,600 1,000 2,400 5,000
assigning weight) (a x c)
(e) Pro-rata allocation of AU 32% 20% 48% 100%

(1,600/5,000) (1,000/5,000) (2,400/5,000)
(f) Allocation of carrying 256 160 384 800
amount ofAU (32: 20: 48)
(g) Carrying amount (after 1,056 1,160 1,584 3,800
allocation ofAU) (a+f)
(i) Calculation of impairment loss
Step 1: Impairment losses for individual cash-generating units and its allocation
• Impairment loss of each cash-generating units
(₹in lakh)
Particulars X Y Z
Carrying amount (after allocation of AU) 1,056 1,160 1,584
Recoverable amount 1,000 1,200 1,400
Impairment loss 56 Nil 184
• Allocation of the impairment loss (after rounding off)
(₹in lakh)
Allocation to X Z
AU 14 (56x256/1,056) 45 (184x384/1,584)
Other assets in cash-generating units 42 (56x800/1056) 139 (184x1,200/ 1,584)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Step 2: Impairment loss for the larger cash-generating unit, i.e., XYZ Ltd. as awhole
(₹in lakh)
Particulars X Y Z AU BU XYZ Ltd.
Carrying amount 800 1,000 1,200 800 400 4,200
Impairment loss (Step I) (42) - (139) (59)* - (240)
Carrying amount (after Step I) 758 1,000 1,061 741 400 3,960
Impairment loss for the ‘larger’ cash-generating unit 60
*₹14 lakh + ₹45 lakh = ₹59 lakh.
Pacific Ocean Railway Ltd. has three Cash Generating units namely Train, Railway station and
Railway tracks,the carrying amounts of which as on 31 March 2020 are as follows:
Cash Generating units Carrying amount Remaining useful life
(₹ in crore)
Train 1,500 10
Railway station 2,250 20
Railway tracks 3,300 20
Pacific Ocean Railway Ltd. also has two Corporate Assets having a remaining useful life of 20
years.
(₹ in crore)
Corporate Carrying Remarks
Assets amount
Land 1,800 The carrying amount of Land can be allocated on a
reasonable basis (i.e., pro rata basis) to the individual cash
generating units.
Buildings 600 The carrying amount of Buildings cannot be allocated on a
reasonable basis to the individual cash-generating units.
Recoverable amount as on 31 March 2020 is as follows:
Cash Generating units Recoverable Amount (₹ in crore)
Train 1,800
Railway station 2,700
Railway tracks 4,200
Company as a whole 9,600
Calculate the impairment loss, if any. Ignore decimals.(8 Marks)
SOLUTION:
Allocation of corporate assets
The carrying amount of land is allocated to the carrying amount of each individual cash
generating unit.A weighted allocation basis is used because the estimated remaining useful life
of Train’s cash- generating unit is 10 years, whereas the estimated remaining useful lives of
Railway station and Railway track’s cash-generating units are 20 years.
(₹in crore)
Particulars Train Railway station Railway tracks Total
Carrying amount (a) 1,500 2,250 3,300 7,050
Useful life 10 years 20 years 20 years -
Weight based on useful life 1 2 2 -
Carrying amount 1,500 4,500 6,600 12,600
(after assigning weight)
Pro-rata allocation of Land 12% (1,500/12,600) 36%(4,500/12,600) 52%(6,600/12,60) 100%

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Allocation of carrying
amount of Land(b) 216 648 936 1,800
Carrying amount (after 1,716 2,898 4,236 8,850
allocation of Land) (a+b)
Calculation of impairment loss
Step I: Impairment losses for individual cash-generating units and its allocation:
(a) Impairment loss of each cash-generating units
(₹in crore)
Particulars Train Railwaystation Railwaytracks
Carrying amount (after allocation of land) 1,716 2,898 4,236
Recoverable amount 1,800 2,700 4,200
Impairment loss - 198 36
(b) Allocation of the impairment loss
(₹in crore)
Allocation to Railway station Railway
tracks
Land 44 [198 x (648 /2,898)] 8 [36 x (936 /4,236)]
Other assets in cash- [198 x 2,250 /2,898)] [36x (3,300/4,236)]
generating units 154 28
Step II: Impairment losses for the larger cash-generating unit, i.e., Pacific Ocean Railway Ltd.
as a whole
(₹ in crore)
Particulars Train Railway Railwaytracks Land Building Pacific Ocean
station Railway Ltd.
Carrying amount 1,500 2,250 3,300 1,800 600 9,450
Impairment loss - (154) (28) (52) - (234)
(Step I)
Carrying amount 1,500 2,096 3,272 1,748 600 9,216
(after Step I)
Impairment loss for the ‘larger’ cash-generating unit Nil
NOV 2018
QUESTION
A machine was acquired by ABC Ltd. 15 years ago at a cost of ₹ 20 crore. Its accumulated
depreciation as at 31st March, 2018 was ₹ 16.60 crore. Depreciation estimated for the financial
year 2018-19 is ₹ 1 crore. Estimated Net Selling Price of the machine as on 31st March, 2018 was
₹ 1.20 crore, which is expected to decline by 20 per cent by the end of the next financial year.
Its value in use has been computed at ₹ 1.40 crore as on 1st April, 2018, which is expected to
decrease by 30 per cent by the end of the financial year. Assuming that other conditions of relevant
Accounting Standard for applicability of the impairment are satisfied:
(i) What should be the carrying amount of this machine as at 31st March, 2019?
(ii) How much will be the amount of write off (impairment loss) for the financial year ended
31st March, 2019?
(iii) If the machine had been revalued ten years ago and the current revaluation reserves
against this plant were to be ₹ 48 lakh, how would you answer to questions (i) and (ii)
above?
(iv) If the value in use was zero and the company was required to incur a cost of ₹ 8 lakh to

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
dispose of the plant, what would be your response to questions (i) and (ii) above
SOLUTION
As per the requirement of the question, the following solution has been drawn on the basis of AS 28
(₹ in crore)
(i) Carrying amount of plant (before impairment) as on 31st March, 2019 2.4
Carrying amount of plant (after impairment) as on 31st March, 2019 0.98
(ii) Amount of impairment loss for the financial year ended 31st March, 1.42
2019 (2.4 Cr.- 0.98 Cr)
(iii) If the plant had been revalued ten years ago
Debit to revaluation reserve 0.48
Amount charged to profit and loss (1.42 - 0.48) 0.94
(iv) If Value in use was zero
Value in use (a) Nil
Net selling price (b) (0.08)
Recoverable amount [higher of (a) and (b)] Nil
Carrying amount (closing book value) Nil
Amount of write off (impairment loss) (₹ 2.4 Cr – Nil) 2.4
Entire book value of plant will be written off and charged to profit and
loss account.
Working Notes:
(1) Calculation of Closing Book Value, as at 31st March, 2019
(₹ in crore)
Opening book value as on 1.4.2018 (₹20 crore -16.60 crore) 3.40
Less: Depreciation for financial year 2018–2019 (1.00)
Closing book value as on 31.3.2019 (before impairment) 2.40
(2) Calculation of Estimated Net Selling Price on 31 st March, 2019
(₹ in crore)
Estimated net selling price as on 1.4.2018 1.20
Less: Estimated decrease during the year (20% of ₹ 1.20 Cr.) (0.24)
Estimated net selling price as on 31.3.2019 0.96
3. Calculation of Estimated Value in Use of Plant on 31st March, 2019
(4) Recoverable amount as on 31.3.2019 is equal to higher of Net selling price and value in use
(₹ in crore)
Estimated value in use as on 1.4.2018 1.40
Less: Estimated decrease during the year (30% of ₹ 1.40 Cr.) (0.42)
Estimated value in use as on 31.3.2019 0.98
(₹ in crore)
Net selling price 0.96
Value in use 0.98
Recoverable amount 0.98
Impairment Loss [Carrying amount – Recoverable amount ie. (2.40 Cr. – 0.98 Cr)] 1.42
Revised carrying amount on 31.3.2019 is equal to Recoverable amount (after 0.98
impairment)
Note: Since question requires computation of Impairment Loss on 31.3.2019, hence impairment
probability on 31.3.2018 has been ignored. However, since there is impairment probability at the
beginning of the year as well, one may calculate the carrying amount at the beginning of the year after
impairment and then calculate the impairment possibilities at the end of the year. Accordingly the
solution will be as follows:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(₹ in crore)
Carrying amount before impairment on 1.4.2018 (20 - 16.60) 3.40
Recoverable amount ie. higher of NSP (1.20 cr) and Value in use (1.40 cr) 1.40
Impairment loss 2.00
Revised carrying amount after impairment as on 1.4.2018 1.40
Less: Depreciation for 2018-2019 (as given in the question) (1.00)
Carrying amount as on 31.3.2019 0.40
Recoverable amount as on 31.3.2019 (Refer W.N. 2, 3 and 4 above) 0.98
Impairment Loss as on 31.3.2019 (since carrying amount is less than recoverable NiL
amount)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 19 -EMPLOYEE BENEFITS
Illustration 1: Vested Accumulating Benefits

Mr. Rajan is working for Infotech Ltd. Consider the following particulars:
Annual salary of Mr. Rajan = ₹ 30,00,000
Total working days in 20X0-X1 = 300 days
Leaves allowed in 20X0-X1 as per company policy = 10 days
Leaves utilized by Mr. Rajan in 20X0-X1 = 8 days
The unutilized leaves are settled by way of payment and accordingly, carry forward of such leaves
to thesubsequent period is not allowed.
Compute the total employee benefit expense for Infotech Ltd. in respect of 20X0-X1.
Solution
Mr Rajan is entitled to a salary of ₹ 30,00,000 for 300 total working days. Thus,
per day salary works out to ₹ 30,00,000 ÷ 300 days = Rs. 10,000 per day
In the year 20X0-20X1, Mr. Rajan availed 8 out of 10 leaves allowed by the company.
Accordingly,leaves unutilized = 10 – 8 = 2 days
In line with the company policy, Infotech Ltd. will pay Mr. Rajan for the unutilized leave.
Thus, total expense for 20X0-20X1 = ₹ 30,00,000 + (2 days unutilized leaves x ₹ 10,000 per day) =
₹ 30,20,000.
Illustration 2: Non-Vested Accumulating Benefits (MTP APR 2021)
Mr. Niranjan is working for Infotech Ltd. Consider the following particulars:
Year Year
20X0-20X1 20X1-20X2
Annual salary ₹ 30,00,000 ₹ 30,00,000
No. of working days during the year 300 days 300 days
Leave allowed 10 days 10 days
Leave taken 7 days 13 days
Leave unutilized carried forward to next year 3 days NIL
Based on past experience, Infotech Ltd. assumes that Mr. Niranjan will avail the unutilized leaves of
3 days of 20X0-20X1 in 20X1-20X2.
Infotech Ltd. contends that it will record ₹ 30,00,000 as employee benefits expense in each of the
years 20X0-20X1 and 20X1-20X2, stating that the leaves will, in any case, be utilized by 20X1-
20X2.
Comment on the accounting treatment proposed to be followed by Infotech Ltd. Also pass journal
entries for both the years.
Solution
Particulars Year 20X0-20X1 Year 20X1 20X2
Annual Salary ₹ 30,00,000 ₹ 30,00,000
No. of working days (A) 300 days 300 days
Leaves Allowed 10 days 10 days
Leaves Taken (B) 7 days 13 days
Therefore, No. of days worked (A – B) 293 days 287 days
Expense proposed to be recognized by Infotech Ltd. ₹ 30,00,000 ₹ 30,00,000
Based on the evaluation above, Mr. Niranjan has worked for 6 days more (293 days –287days) in
20X0-X1 as compared to 20X1-20X2.
Since he has worked more in 20X0-20X1 as compared to 20X1-20X2, the accrual concept
requires that the expenditure to be recognized in 20X0-20X1 should be more as compared to
20X1- 20X2.
Thus, if Infotech Ltd. recognizes the same expenditure of ₹ 30,00,000 for each year, it would be
in violation of the accrual concept.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The expenditure to be recognized will be as under:
Particulars Year 20X0-20X1 Year 20X1-20X2
Annual salary (A) ₹ 30,00,000 ₹ 30,00,000
No. of working days (B) 300 days 300 days
Salary cost per day (A ÷ B) ₹10,000 per day ₹ 10,000 per day
No. of days worked (from above) 293 days 287 days
Expense to be recognised: In 20X0-20X1:
₹ 30,00,000 + [₹ 10,000 per day x 3 days(leaves ₹ 30,30,000
unutilized expected to be utilized subsequently)]
In 20X1-20X2: ₹ 30,00,000 – [₹ 10,000 per day – 3
days(excess leave utilized in 20X1-20X2)] ₹ 29,70,000
Journal Entry for 20X0-20X1
Employee Benefits Expense Account Dr. 30,30,000
To Bank Account 30,00,000
To Provision for Leave Encashment 30,000
Provision for Leave Encashment Account Dr. 30,000
Illustration 3: Non-Vested Accumulating Benefits
Assume same information as in Illustration 2.
Based on past experience, Infotech Ltd. assumes that Mr. Niranjan will avail the unutilized leaves of
2 days of 20X0-20X1 subsequently. However, in 20X1-20X2, Mr. Niranjan availed in actual all 3
days of brought forward leave. Compute the expense to be recognised in 20X0-20X1 and 20X1-
20X2. Also pass journal entries for both theyears.
Solution
The expenditure to be recognized will be as under:
Particulars Year 20X0-20X1 Year 20X1-20X2
Annual salary (A) ₹ 30,00,000 ₹ 30,00,000
No. of working days (B) 300 days 300 days
Salary cost per day (A ÷ B) ₹10,000 per day ₹ 10,000 per day
No. of days worked (from above) 293 days 287 days
Expense to be recognised: In 20X0-20X1:
₹ 30,00,000 + [₹ 10,000 per day x 2 days (leaves
unutilized expected to be utilized subsequently)] ₹ 30,20,000
In 20X1-20X2: ₹ 30,00,000 – [₹ 10,000 per day x 3
days (excess leave utilized in 20X1- 20X2)] + ₹ 10,000
(additional expense due to change in accounting ₹ 29,80,000
estimate)
The additional ₹ 10,000 booked as an expense in 20X1-20X2 represents a change in
accounting estimate (i.e., as against the entity’s estimation that 2 days of unutilized leave
would be utilized subsequently, actually 3 days were utilized subsequently), for which a
prospective effect needs to be given, in line with Para 36 of Ind AS 8 Accounting Policies,
Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors.
To Provision for Leave Encashment 20,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Provision for Leave Encashment Account Dr. 20,000
Illustration 4:
Sunderam Pvt. Ltd. has a head count of 100 employees in 20X0-20X1. As per the employee policy,
the employees are entitled to:
 30 casual leaves out of which 10 casual leaves may be carried forward to the next year; and
 10 sick leaves out of which 2 sick leaves may be carried forward as paid leave.
st
At 31 March, 20X1, the average unused entitlement is 5 days per employee for casual leaves
and1 day per employee for sick leave. On an average, it is found that the number of such
employees who would be claiming casual leaves would be 30 and 10 employees who would claim
sick leaves.
Compute the liability to be recognised in respect of sick leaves and casual leaves by the entity at the
end of the financial year 20X0-20X1.
Solution
Type of Leave Leaves Average No. of Liability (F = D x E)
leave(A) Entitlement c/f leaves Employee
(B) permissible Unutilized s(E)
(C) (D)
Casual Leave 30 days 10 days 5 days 30 150 days salary
Sick Leave 10 days 2 days 1 days 10 10 days salary
The entity will recognise liability in the books equal to 150 (30 x 5) days of paid casual leaves
and 10 (10 x 1) days of paid sick leaves.
Illustration 5
An entity has 100 employees, who are each entitled to ten working days of paid sick leave for each
year. Unused sick leave may be carried forward for one financial year. Sick leave is taken first out
of the current year’s entitlement and then out of any balance brought forward from the previous year
(a LIFO basis).
At 31 March 20X1, the average unused entitlement is two days per employee. Based on past
experience, the management expects that only 20% of the employees will use 1 day from their
carried forward leave. Salary per day is ₹ 2,500.
Compute the expenses in respect of the short-term compensated absences, if they are assumed to be
(a) vested short-term compensated absences, and
(b) (b) non-vested short-term compensated absences.
Solution:
Vested short-term compensated absences:
Employee Benefit Expense = 100 Employees x 2 Days x ₹ 2,500 = ₹ 5,00,000
Non-vested short-term compensated absences:
Employee Benefit Expense = 100 Employees x 20% x 1 Days x ₹ 2,500 = ₹ 50,000
Illustration 6
Acer Ltd. has 350 employees (same as a year ago). The average staff attrition rates observed
during past 10 -years represents 6% per annum. Acer Ltd. provides the following benefits to all its
employees:
Paid vacation - 10 days per year regardless of date of hiring. Compensation for paid vacation is
100% of employee's salary and unused vacation can be carried forward for 1 year. As of 31st
March, 20X1, unused vacation carried forward was 3 days per employee, average salary was ₹ 15,000
per day and accrued expense for unused vacation in 20X0-20X1 was ₹ 65,00,000. During 20X1-
20X2, employees took 9 days of vacation in average. Salary increase in 20X1-20X2 was 10%.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
How would Acer Ltd. recognize liabilities and expenses for these benefits as of 31st March,
20X2?. Pass the journal entry to show the accounting treatment.
Solution
Paid Vacation:
Step 1: Calculation of Unused Vacation in man-days as on 31st March, 20X2:
A. No. of Employees in service for the whole year (94%):
Particulars Man-days
st
Unused vacation as on 31 March, 20X1 3 days per employee
Entitlement to vacation for 20X1-20X2 10 days per employee
Average vacation availed in 20X1-20X2 (9) days per employee
Unused vacation as on 31st March, 20X2 4 days per employee
(Being unused leaves of 20X1-20X2 on FIFO basis)
Total Unused vacation as on 31st March, 20X2 - (A) 1,316 man-days
(350 employees x 94% x 4 days per employee)
B. Newcomers (6%):
Particulars Man-days
Entitlement to vacation for 20X1-20X2 10 days per employee
Average vacation availed in 20X1-20X2 (9) days per employee
st
Unused vacation as on 31 March, 20X2 1 day per employee
(Being unused leaves of 20X1-20X2 on FIFO basis)
Total Unused vacation as on 31st March, 20X2 - (B) 21 man-days
(350 employees x 6% x 1 day per employee)
Total unused vacation as on 31st March, 20X2 (A + B) 1,337 man-days
Step 2: Calculation of average salary per day:
Average salary per day as on 31st March, 20X1 15,000
Salary increase in 20X1-20X2 10%
st
Average salary per day as on 31 March, 20X2 16,500
Step 3: Calculation of provision for unused paid vacation:
Calculation of provision for unused paid vacation 20X1-20X2: 2,20,60,500
(1,337 man-days x ₹ 16,500)
Provision for unused paid vacation 20X0-20X1 65,00,000
Step 4: Accounting treatment
Provision for 20X1-20X2
Employee Benefits Expenses A/c Dr. 2,20,60,500
To Provision for Leave Encashment 2,20,60,500
Settlement of Liability of 20X0-20X1
Provision for Leave Encashment A/c Dr. 65,00,000
To Cash / Bank 65,00,000
Illustration 7
Laxmi Mills is a profit-making entity and has reported profit of ₹ 200 crore in the financial year 20X1-
20X2. According to its profit–sharing plan, it distributes and pays 5% as its portion of profit to its
employees if theycomplete 1 year with the organisation.
Under this plan, an entity is under an obligation to pay if the employees complete a specified period
with the organisation. Laxmi Mills has estimated that due to staff turnover in the organisation, the
estimated pay-outwould be around 4.5%.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Compute the liability and expense of the company under this plan.
Solution:
The company shall recognize a liability and an expense of an amount of ₹ 9 crores for the financial
year 20X1-20X2 (i.e., 4.5% of ₹ 200 crores).
Illustration 8
Acer Ltd. has 350 employees (same as a year ago). The average staff attrition rates as observed
during past 10 years represents 6% per annum. Acer provides the following benefits to all its
employees:
Annual bonus - during past 10 years.
Acer paid bonus to all employees who were in service during the entire financial year. Bonus was
paid in June following the financial year-end. Amount of bonus for 20X1-20X2 paid in June 20X2
represented ₹ 1,25,000 per employee. Acer Ltd. used to increase amount of bonus based on official
inflation rate which is 8.5% for 20X2-20X3, although there was no legal obligation to increase the
bonus by such inflation rate.
How would Acer Ltd. recognize liabilities and expenses for these employee benefits as on 31st
March,20X3? Pass the journal entry to show the accounting treatment.
Solution:
Bonus paid for 20X1-20X2 1,25,000 per employee
Bonus for 20X2-20X3 - increased by inflation of 8.5%: [1,25,000 x 1,35,625 per employee
(100% + 8.5%)]
No. of employees in staff during the whole year [350 x (100- 329 employees
6%)]
Provision for Bonus for 20X2-20X3 4,46,20,625
Accounting Treatment:
Provision for Bonus for 20X2-20X3
Employee Benefits Expenses A/c Dr. 4,46,20,625
To Provision for Bonus 20X2-20X3 4,46,20,625
Note: It is given that the company is under no legal obligation to increase the bonus by the official
inflation rate. However, the company has been increasing the bonus by the inflation rate over the
past years. This has given rise to a constructive obligation for Acer Ltd. Informal practices, such as
these, give rise to a constructive obligation where the entity has no realistic alternative but to pay
employee benefits. Accordingly, provision is made for the amount considering the inflation rate.
Illustration 9
A company pays each employee a lump-sum one-time benefit upon retirement. This benefit is
computed based on the employee's years in service in the company and the final salary prior to
retirement. To cover its liabilities from this remuneration, the company contributes 3% of annual
gross salaries to the fund. Would this obligation represent a defined contribution plan or a defined
benefit plan and why?
Solution
Defined benefit plan.
Reason: Although the Company pays contributions to the fund to cover its liabilities, amount of
remuneration is determined in advance and Company will have to carry the risk in case the
fund's assets are not sufficient to cover remuneration in full.
Illustration 10
In accordance with applicable legislation, company contributes 12% and employees 12% of annual
gross salaries to the provident and pension fund. Upon retirement, the employees will get the
accumulated balancethat is calculated based on employee's years of service and his average salary
for past 15 years before retirement. The pension will be paid out of the state fund assets and the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
company has no further obligation except to make contributions. Would this obligation represent a
defined contribution plan or a defined benefit plan?
Solution
Defined contribution plan.
Reason: Although employee's pension is determined in advance by the formula (and thus
employees neither carry actuarial nor investment risks), Company's liability is limited to
contributions to the fund. In this case, as pension will be paid out of the state fund, it is a
state fund which carries all the risks.
Illustration 11
Acer Ltd. provides lump-sum remuneration upon retirement to its employees. Remuneration is paid
out of the fund to which Acer Ltd. contributes 12% of annual gross salaries. Contributions are made
twice a year i.e., in November of the related financial year and in June after the financial year-end.
Total annual gross salaries for 20X0-X1 amounted to ₹ 50 crores. Contribution made by Acer Ltd.
in November 20X0 was ₹ 2.8 crores. Remuneration depends on the number of employee's service
and amount of cash in the fund at retirement date (Acer Ltd. has no further obligations except for
contributions).
How should this transaction appear in the financial statements of Acer Ltd. as of 31 March20X1?
Solution
1. Calculation of accrual for contributions in 20X0-20X1:
Annual gross salaries in 20X0-20X1: 50.00 crores
Amount of total contributions for 20X0-20X1 (12%): 6.00 crores
Contributions already made in November 20X0: 2.80 crores
Accrual (₹ 6 crores - ₹ 2.8 crores) 3.20 crores
2. Accounting Treatment:
Employee Benefits Expenses Account Dr. 6.00 crores
To Bank Account 2.80 crores
To Contribution Payable 3.20 crores
The contribution of ₹ 6 crores will be debited to the statement profit and loss. The contribution
payable of ₹ 3.20 crores will appear as a liability as at 31st March, 20X1
Illustration 12
Dinkar Ltd., a large IT company, accounts for gratuity on payment basis, and supports such
accounting policy by making the following disclosure in the Financial Statements:
“Due to high labour turnover, a large degree of uncertainty is involved in estimating the liability of
gratuity. Accordingly, the management opines that as the estimates of the uncertainty would
confuse the readers by complicating the financial statements, such liability would be recorded on
payment basis.”
The management opines that by making the above disclosures, the company is complying with the
requirements of all the Ind AS, as a disclosure to the effect of the above is given. The management
is also willing to specifically highlight the above aspect by making it conspicuous in the financial
statements.
Is the contention of management correct as per the provisions of Ind AS?
Solution:
Gratuity represents a payment being made to an employee upon retirement / resignation from
the organization. The amount is determined in accordance with the provisions of the Gratuity
Act, 1972, which applies to Dinkar Ltd. Since the amount is determined pursuant to a formula
laid down under the statue, the gratuity payable represents a Defined Benefit Plan that is to be
paid to the employees, with the actuarial risk and investment risk both belonging to the
employer. Thus, Dinkar Ltd. must comply with Ind AS 19 and provide for the gratuity on an
annual basis.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
In estimating the liability for gratuity, there would be several assumptions involved such as
mortality rate, staff attrition rate, salary at the time of retirement / resignation, discount rate
etc., all of which have to be considered by Dinkar Ltd. The complexity involved in this exercise
does not provide Dinkar Ltd. with an excuse to avoid accrual accounting.
Dinkar Ltd. has stated that it would be willing to make a disclosure to the effect of the
departurefrom Ind AS 10 requirements. In terms of Para 19 of Ind AS 1, departure is permitted in
extremely rare circumstances wherein the management concludes that compliance with an Ind
AS requirement would be so misleading that it would conflict with the objective of the Financial
Statements set out in the Framework.
In the given case, compliance with Ind AS would not be a conflict, as the compliance with Ind
AS 19 would ensure that the accrual assumption laid down in the Framework is complied with.
Further, a disclosure cannot be a remedy for non-compliance. Therefore, the company have to
state that the Ind AS have not been complied with by the company in the preparation and
presentation of its Financial Statements.
Hence, the company will have to suitably modify the financial statements considering the
materiality and pervasiveness of the non-compliance.
Illustration 13
How will the following information be presented in the Balance Sheet of Udyog Ltd.?
Particulars ₹ in lakhs
PV of Defined Benefit Obligations 3,500
Fair Value of Plan Assets 3,332
Solution:
Less: Fair Value of Plan Assets (3,332)
Deficit, to be treated as Net Defined Benefit Liability under Non-current
Liabilities as Provisions in the Balance Sheet 168
Illustration 14
How will the following information be presented in the Balance Sheet of Udyog Ltd.?
Fair Value of Plan Assets 2,975
Asset Ceiling 175
Solution
Less: Fair Value of Plan Assets (2,975)
Surplus, to be treated as Net Defined Benefit Asset, 225
Asset Ceiling as per Ind AS 19 175
Least of above is Surplus to be treated as Net Defined Benefit Asset 175
under Balance Sheet
Illustration 15
AJ Ltd is engaged in the business of trading of chemicals having a net worth of ₹ 150 crores.
The company’s profitability is good and hence the company has introduced various benefits for
its employees to keep them motivated and to ensure that they stay with the organization. The
company is an associate of RJ Ltd which is listed on Bombay Stock Exchange in India.
The company initially did not have any HR function but over the last 2 years, the management

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
set up that function and now HR department takes care of all the benefits related to the
employees and how they can be structured in a manner beneficial to both the employees and
the objectives of the company.
One of the employee benefits involves a lump sum payment to employee on termination of
service and that is equal to 1 percent of final salary for each year of service. Consider the salary in
year 1 is ₹ 10,000 and is assumed to increase at 7 per cent (compound) each year.
Taking a discount rate at 10 per cent per year, you are required to show
(a) benefits attributed (year on year) and
(b) the obligation in respect of this benefit (year on year)
For and employee who is expected to leave at the end of year 5 Following assumptions may be
taken to solve this:
 There are no changes in actuarial assumptions.
 No additional adjustments are needed to reflect the probability that the employee may
leave the entity at an earlier or later date.
Solution:
(a) Computation of benefit attributed to prior years and current year: Amount in
Year 1 2 3 4 5
Benefit attributed to:
- Prior years - 131 262 393 524
- Current year (Refer W.N.1) 131 131 131 131 131
Total (i.e., current and prior years) 131 262 393 524 655
(b) Computation of the obligation for an employee who is expected to leave at
the endof year 5 (taking discount rate of 10% p.a.) Amount in ₹
Year 1 2 3 4 5
Opening obligation (A) - 89 196 324 475
Interest at 10% (B = A X 10%) - 9 20 32 47
Current service cost (C) (Refer WN 2) 89 98 108 119 131
Closing obligation D = (A+B+C) 89 196 324 475 653
Figures have been rounded off in the above table.
Working Notes:
1. A lump sum benefit is payable on termination of service and equal to 1 per cent of final
salaryfor each year of service. The salary in year 1 is ₹ 10,000 and is assumed to increase
at 7 per cent (compound) each year.
The year-on-year salary would be as follows: Amount in ₹
Year 1 2 3 4 5
Salary 10,000 10,700 11,449 12,250 13,108
(10,000 x 107%) (10,700 x 107%) (11,449 x 107%) (12,250 x 107%)
Accordingly, for the purpose of above-mentioned e02ssmployee benefit, 1% of final salary to
beconsidered for each year of service would be ₹ 131.
2. Computation of current service cost: Amount in ₹
Year 1 2 3 4 5
1% salary at the end of year 5 - - - - 131
PV factor at the end of each 0.683 0.751 0.826 0.909 1.000
yearto be considered at 10%
p.a. (E)
PV at the end of each year 89 (31x E) 98(131x E) 108(131xE) 119(131x E) 131(131xE)
Accordingly, for the purpose of above-mentioned employee benefit, 1% of final salary to be
considered for each year of service would be ₹ 131

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 16
A plan pays a benefit of ₹ 150 for each year of service. The benefits vest after ten-years of service.
Compute the benefit to be attributed each year?
Solution:
1. A benefit of ₹ 150 is attributed to each year.
2. In each of the first ten years, the current service cost and the present value of the
obligation reflect the probability that the employee may not complete ten years of service. This
is because the benefits vest at a future date (i.e., after ten years of service).
Illustration 17
A plan pays a benefit of ₹ 150 for each year of service, excluding service before the age of 25. The
benefits vest immediately. Compute the benefit to be attributed each year?
Solution:
1. No benefit is attributed to the service before the age of 25 because service before that
date does not lead to benefits (conditional or unconditional).
2. A benefit of ₹ 150 is attributed to each subsequent year. There is no requirement to reflect
anyprobability of completion as the benefits vest immediately.
Illustration 18
Amra Pvt. Ltd. has a plan for its employees where it has decided to pay a lump-sum benefit
of ₹ 2,000 that will vest after ten years of service. However, that plan will provide no further benefit
for subsequent service.
Compute the benefit attributed for 10 years of service and for the period of service after 10 years?
Solution:
1. In this case, as per the company’s plan, a benefit of ₹ 200 (₹ 2,000 ÷ 10 years) is attributed to
eachof the first 10 years.
2. The current service cost in each of the first ten years reflects the probability that the
employee may not complete ten years of service. This is because the benefits vest at a
future date (i.e.,after ten years of service).
No benefit is attributed to subsequent years.
Illustration 19
Sanat Pvt. Ltd. has a plan for the employees where employees are entitled to a benefit of 5% of final
salary for each year of service before the age of 55. Compute the benefit attributed up to 55 years
and after 55?
Solution:
Benefit of 5% of estimated final salary is attributed to each year up to the age of 55. This is the date
when further service by the employee will lead to no material amount of further benefits under the
plan. No benefit is attributed to service after that age.
Illustration 20
A post-employment medical plan reimburses 40 percent of an employee’s post-employment
medical costs if the employee leaves after more than ten and less than twenty years of service and
50 percent of those costs if the employee leaves after twenty or more years of service. How will the
benefit be attributed to the years ofservice?
Solution:
1. Under the Plan's Benefit Formula, the entity should attribute 4% of the present value of the
expected medical costs (40% ÷ 10 years) to each of the first ten years, and 1% (10% ÷ 10 years)
to each of the second ten years.
2. For employees expected to leave within 10 years, no benefit is attributed.
3. The Current Service Cost in each year reflects the probability that the employee may
not complete the necessary period of service to earn part or all of the benefits.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 21
A post-employment medical plan reimburses 10 percent of an employee’s post-employment
medical costs if the employee leaves after more than ten and less than twenty years of service
and 50 per cent of those costs if the employee leaves after twenty or more years of service.
How will the benefit be attributed to the years of service?
Solution
1. Service in later years will lead to a materially higher level of benefit than in earlier year. So,
for employees expected to leave after 20 or more years, the entity should attribute benefit on a
straight-line basis under Para 71. Service beyond 20 years will lead to no material amount of
further benefits. So, the benefit attributed to each of the first 20 years will be 2.5% of the
Present Value of the Expected Medical Costs (50% ÷ 20 years).
2. For employees expected to leave between 10 and 20 years, the benefit attributed to
each of the first 10 years is 1% (10% ÷ 10 years) of the Present Value of the expected medical
costs. For these employees, no benefit is attributed to service between the end of the tenth year
and the estimated date of leaving.
3. For employees expected to leave within ten years, no benefit is attributed.
4. The Current Service Cost in each year reflects the probability that the employee may not
complete the necessary period of service to earn part or all of the benefits.
Illustration 22
AKJ Ltd is a listed company engaged in the business of manufacturing of electronic equipment.
The company has various branch offices spread out across India and has 1,000 employees.
As per the statutory requirements, gratuity shall be payable to an employee on the termination of
hisemployment after he has rendered continuous service for not less than five years -
(a) on his superannuation, or
(b) on his retirement or resignation, or
(c) on his death or disablement due to accident or disease.
The completion of continuous service of five years shall not be necessary where the termination of
theemployment of any employee is due to death or disablement.
The amount payable is determined by a formula linked to number of years of service and last
drawn salary.The amount payable to an employee shall not exceed ₹ 10,00,000.
Compute the amount of employee benefit, if any, attributed to each year of service.
Solution:
The amount of gratuity would be attributed to each year of service and calculated as follows:
Number of employees not likely to fulfil the eligibility criteria will be ignored.
Other employees will be grouped according to period of service they are expected to render
taking into account:
 mortality rate,
 disablement and
 resignation after 5 years.
Gratuity payable will be calculated in accordance with the formula prescribed in the governing
statute based on the period of service and the salary at the time of termination of employment,
assuming promotion, salary increases etc.
For those employees for whom the amount payable as per the formula does not exceed ₹
10,00,000, over the expected period of service, the amount payable will be divided by the
expected period of service and the resulting amount will be attributed to each year of the
expected period of service, including the period before the stipulated period of 5 years.
In case of the remaining employees, the amount as per the formula exceeds ₹ 10,00,000 over the
expected period of service of 10 years (say), and the amount of the threshold of ₹ 10,00,000 is
reached at the end of 8 years (assumed) i.e., ₹ 1,25,000 (₹ 10,00,000 ÷ 8 years) is attributed to

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
each of the first 8 years. In this case, no benefit is attributed to subsequent two years. This
is because service beyond 8 years will lead to no material amount of further benefits.
Illustration 23
Pratap Ltd. belongs to the ship-building industry. The company reviewed an Actuarial Valuation for
the first time for its pension scheme which revealed a surplus of ₹ 60 lakhs. It wants to spread the
same over the next 2 years by reducing the annual contribution to ₹ 20 lakhs instead of ₹ 50 lakhs.
The average remaining life of the employees is estimated to be 6 years. Advise the Company in
line with Ind AS 19.
Solution
1. Recognition: As per Ind AS 19, any Actuarial Gains and Losses should be recognized
as a remeasurement of the Net Defined Benefit Liability / (Asset) in "Other
Comprehensive Income".
2. Measurement and Presentation: In the given case, the amount of surplus from
Pension Scheme of ₹ 60 lakhs is an Actuarial Gain and should be recognized as a "re-
measurement" in "Other Comprehensive Income", and not to be adjusted from the
amountof annual contribution in future years.
3. Disclosure: The change relating to Actuarial Valuation for the Pension Scheme
requires disclosure under Ind AS 8. Disclosures required by Ind AS 19 should also be
made in the financial statements.
Illustration 24 (MTP: OCTOBER, 2019)
RKA Private Ltd is an old company established in 19XX. The company started with a very
small capital base and today it is one of the leading companies in India in its industry. The company
has an annual turnover of ₹ 11,000 crores and planning to get listed in the next year.
The company has a large employee base. The company provided a defined benefit plan to its
employees. Following is the information relating to the balances of the fund’s assets and liabilities
as at 1st April, 20X1 and 31st March, 20X2. ₹ in lacs
Particulars st
1 April, 20X1 31 March,20X2
st
Present value of benefit obligation 1,400 1,580

Fair value of plan assets 1,140 1,275
st
For the financial year ended 31 March, 20X2, service cost was ₹ 55 lacs. The company made a
contributionof an amount of ₹ 111 lacs to the plan. No benefits were paid during the year.
Consider a discount rate of 8%. You are required to -
(a) Compute the balance(s) of the company to be included its balance sheet as on 31st
March, 20X2 and amounts to be recognized in the statement of profit and loss and other comprehensive
income for the year ended 31st March, 20X2.
(b) Give the journal entries in respect of amount(s) to be recognized.
Solution:
(a) Extract of the Balance Sheet of RKA Private Ltd as at 31st March, 20X2
₹ in lacs
Closing net defined liability (1,580 – 1,275) lacs 305
Extract of the Statement of Profit or Loss of RKA Private Ltd for the year ended 31stMarch, 20X2
Particulars ₹ in lacs
Service cost 55
Net interest (Refer W.N.1) 21
Profit or loss 76
Other comprehensive income:
Remeasurements (Refer W.N.2) 80

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total 156
(b) Journal entries in the books of RKA Private Ltd
Particulars ₹ in lacs ₹ in lacs
Profit & Loss Dr. 76
Other comprehensive income Dr. 80
To Cash (Contribution) 111
To Net defined benefit liability (Refer WN 3) 45
Working Notes:
1. Computation of Net interest taken to the Statement of Profit or Loss
= Discount rate x Opening net defined benefit liability
= 8% x (1,400 – 1,140) lacs
= 8% x 260 lacs = 21 lacs (Rounded off to nearest lacs)
2. Computation of Remeasurements
Defined Benefit Obligation Account
Particulars ₹ in lacs Particulars ₹ in lacs
To balance c/d 1,580 By balance b/d (given) 1,400
(given) (closing balance) (opening balance)
By Current Service Cost (given) 55
By Interest on Opening Liability 112
(1,400 x 8%)
By Actuarial loss (bal. figure) 13
1,580 1,580
OR
Statement to calculate Actuarial gain or loss on defined benefit liability:
Opening balance of liability 1,400
Current service cost 55
Interest on opening liability (1,400 x 8%) 112
Actuarial loss (Bal. fig) 13
Closing balance of liability 1,580
Plan Assets Account
Particulars ₹ in lacs Particulars ₹ in lacs
To balance b/d (given) 1,140 By balance c/d(given)(closing 1,275
(openingbalance) balance)
To Bank Account 111
(contribution for the year)
To Surplus / Actual Return (bal. 24
figure)
1,275 1,275
OR
Statement to calculate Actual return on plan assets:
Opening balance of asset 1,140
Cash contribution 111
Actual return (Bal. fig) 24
Closing balance of asset 1,275
Net interest on opening balance of plan asset = ₹ 91 lacs (i.e., ₹ 1,140 lacs x 8%) (Rounded offto
nearest lacs)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Hence there is a decrease in plan assets due to remeasurement for which computation is as
follows:
Actual Return – Net interest on opening plan asset = ₹ 24 lacs – ₹ 91 lacs = ₹ 67 lacs.Net
remeasurement would be computed as follows:
Actuarial loss on liability + Loss on return= ₹ 13 lacs + ₹ 67 lacs = ₹ 80 lacs.
3. Computation of increase/ decrease in net defined benefit liability:
Opening net liability (₹ 1,400 lacs – ₹ 1,140 lacs) 260
Closing net liability ₹ 1,580 lacs – ₹ 1,275 lacs) 305
Increase in liability 45
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
An entity has 100 employees, who are each entitled to five working days of paid sick leaves for
each year. Unused sick leave may be carried forward for one calendar year. Sick leave is taken first
out of the current year's entitlement and then out of any balance brought forward from the previous
year (LIFO basis).
At 31st March, 20X1, the average unused entitlement is two days per employee. The entity expects,
on the basis of experience that is expected to continue, that 92 employees will take no more than
five days of paid sick leaves in 20X1-20X2 and that the remaining eight employees will take an
average of six and a half days each.
The entity expects that it will pay an additional twelve days of sick pay as a result of the unused
entitlement that has accumulated at 31st March, 20X1 (one and a half days each, for eight
employees). Would the entity require to recognize any liability in respect of leaves?
Solution:
At 31st March, 20X1, the average unused entitlement is two days per employee. The entity
expects, on the basis of experience that is expected to continue, that 92 employees will take no
more than five days of paid sick leaves in 20X1-20X2 and that the remaining eight employees
will take an average of six and a half days each.
The entity expects that it will pay an additional twelve days of sick pay as a result of the
unused entitlement that has accumulated at 31st March, 20X1 (one and a half days each, for
eight employees).
Therefore, the entity would recognize a liability equal to twelve days of sick pay.
Question 02:
A plan provides a monthly pension of 0.3% of final salary for each year of service. The pension is
payable fromthe age of 65. What is the current service cost?
Solution:
Benefit equal to the present value, at the expected retirement date, of a monthly pension of
0.3% of the estimated final salary payable from the expected retirement date until the expected
date of death is attributed to each year of service. The current service cost is the present value
of that benefit.
The present value of the defined benefit obligation is the present value of monthly pension
payments of 0.3% of final salary, multiplied by the number of years of service up to the end of
the reporting period. The current service cost and the present value of the defined benefit
obligation are discounted because pension payments begin at the age of 65.
Question 03:
A plan pays a benefit of ₹ 140 for each year of service, excluding service before the age of 25. The
benefits vest immediately. Compute the benefit to be attributed before the age of 25 and after 25?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
No benefit is attributed to service before the age of 25 because service before that date does
not lead to benefits (conditional or unconditional). A benefit of ₹ 140 is attributed to each
subsequent year.
Question 04:
B Pvt. Ltd. has a post-employment medical plan which will reimburse 20% of an employee’s post-
employment medical costs if the employee leaves after more than ten and less than twenty years of
service and 50% of those costs if the employee leaves after twenty or more years of service. How
would you measure the benefit to be attributed for the employee service for the last 20 years, 10
and 20 years and within 10 years?
Solution:
As per Ind AS 19, the benefit will be attributed till the period the employee service will lead to
no material amount of benefits. And service in later years will lead to a materially higher level
of benefit than in earlier years. Therefore, for employees expected to leave after twenty or more
years, the entity would attribute benefit on a straight-line basis. Service beyond twenty years
will lead to no material amount of further benefits. Therefore, the benefit attributed to each of
the first twenty years is 2.5% (i.e., 50% divided by 20) of the present value of the expected
medical costs.
For employees expected to leave between ten and twenty years, the benefit attributed to each
of the first ten years is 2% (20 % divided by 10) of the present value of the expected medical
costs. For these employees, no benefit is attributed to service between the end of the tenth year
and the estimated date of leaving.
For employees expected to leave within ten years, no benefit is attributed.
Question 05:
Cisca Pvt. Ltd. has a headcount of around 1,000 employees in the organisation in 20X0-20X1. As
per the company’s policy, the employees are given 35 days of privilege leaves (PL), 15 days of
sick leaves (SL)and 10 days of casual leaves. Out of the total PL and sick leaves, 10 PL leaves and 5
sick leaves can be carried forward to next year. On the basis of past trends, it has been noted that
200 employees will take 5 days of PLand 2 days of SL and 800 employees will avail 10 days of
PL and 5 days of SL.
Also, the company has been incurring profits since 20XX. It has decided in 20X0-20X1 to
distribute profits to its employees @ 4% during the year. However, due to the employee turnover in
the organisation, the expected pay-out of the Cisca Pvt. Ltd. is expected to be around 3.5%. The
profits earned during 20X0-20X1is ₹ 2,000 crores.
Cisca Pvt. Ltd. has a post-employment benefit plan also available which is in the nature of defined
contribution plan where contribution to the fund amounts to ₹ 100 crores which will fall due within 12
months from the end of accounting period.
The company has paid ₹ 20 crores to its employees in 20X0-20X1.
What would be the treatment of the short-term compensating absences, profit-sharing plan and the
definedcontribution plan in the books of Cisca Pvt. Ltd?
Solution:
1. Cisca Pvt. Ltd. will recognise a liability in its books to the extent of 5 days of PL for 200
employees and 10 days of PL for remaining 800 employees and 2 days of SL for 200
employees and 5 days of SL for remaining 800 employees in its books as an unused
entitlement that has accumulated in 20X0-20X1 as short-term compensated absences.
2. Cisca Pvt. Ltd. will recognise ₹ 70 crores (2,000 x 3.5%) as a liability and expense in its
booksof account.
3. When an employee has rendered service to an entity during a period, the entity shall
recognise the contribution payable to a defined contribution plan in exchange for that service.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Under Ind AS 19, the amount of ₹ 80 crores will be recognised as a liability (accrued expense), after
deducting any contribution already paid (100-20) and an expense in the statement of profit andloss.
However, if the contribution already paid would have exceeded the contribution due for service
before the end of the reporting period, an entity shall recognise that excess asan asset (prepaid
expense).
It can also be seen that the contributions are payable within 12 months from the end of the
year in which the employees render the related service, they will not be discounted. However,
where contributions to a defined contribution plan do not fall due wholly within twelve months
after the end of the period in which the employees render the related service, they shall be
discounted using the discount rate.
Question 06: -
OPQ Ltd is a listed company having its corporate office at Nagpur. The company has a branch
office at Chennai. The company has been operating in Indian market for the last 10 years.
The company operates a pension plan that provides a pension of 2.5% of the final salary for each year
ofservice. The benefits become vested after seven years of service.
On 1st April, 20X8, the company increased the pension to 3% of the final salary for each year of
service starting from 1st April, 20X1. On the date of the improvement, the present value of the
additional benefits for service from 1st April, 20X1 to 1 April 20X8 was as follows:
 Employees with more than seven years’ service on 1 January 20X8 – ₹ 2,75,000
 Employees with less than 7 years of service – ₹ 2,21,000 (average 4 years to go). What
would be theaccounting treatment in this case?
Solution:
OPQ Ltd increased the pension to 3% of the final salary for each year of service starting from
1stApril, 20X1 to 1st April, 20X8.
The company would recognize the total amount of ₹ 4,96,000 (i.e., ₹ 2,75,000 + ₹2,21,000)
immediately, as for the purpose of recognition it does not make any difference asto whether the
benefits are already vested or not.
Question 07:
SA Pvt Ltd is engaged in the business of retail having 100 retail outlets across Northern and
Southern India. The company’s head office is located at Chennai.
SA Pvt Ltd is a subsidiary of SAG Ltd. SAG Ltd is listed on the National Stock Exchange in India.
Following information is available for SA Pvt Ltd:
Plan Assets
At 1st April, 20X1, the fair value of plan assets was ₹ 10,000.
Contribution to the plan assets done on 31st March, 20X2 – ₹ 3,000
Amount paid on 31st March,20X2 – ₹ 300
At 31st March, 20X2, the fair value of plan assets was ₹ 14,700
Actual return on plan assets – ₹2,000
Defined Benefit Obligation
At 1st April, 20X1, present value of the defined benefit obligation was ₹ 12,000.
At 31st March, 20X2, present value of the defined benefit obligation was ₹ 15,500.
Actuarial losses on the obligation for the year ended 31st March, 20X2 were ₹ 100.
Current Service Cost – ₹ 2,500
Benefit paid – ₹ 300
Discount rate used to calculate defined benefit liability - 10%.
As per Ind AS 19, please suggest if there is any amount based on the above-mentioned information that
would be taken to other comprehensive income (with workings). Also compute net interest on the net

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
defined benefit liability (asset).
Solution:
As per Ind AS 19, net remeasurement of ₹ 900 would be recognized in other comprehensive
income.
Computation of Net remeasurement
= Remeasurement – Actuarial loss
= ₹ 1000 (Refer WN - 1) – ₹ 100 (Given in the question) = ₹ 900.Computation
of net interest expense
Defined benefit liability as at 1 April 20X1 (A)(Given in the question) 12,000
Fair value of plan asset as at 1 April 20X1 (B) (Given in the question) (10,000)
Net defined benefit liability (A - B) 2,000
Net interest expense (as it is net liability) (Refer note given below) 200
Note: Net interest expense would be computed on net defined benefit liability using discount
rateof 10% given in the question-
= Net defined benefit liability x Discount rate
= 2,000 x 10% = ₹ 200.
Working Note:
Computation of amount of remeasurement
Actual return on plan asset for the year ended 31 March 20X2 (C)(Given in 2,000
the question)
Less: Interest income on ₹ 10,000 held for 12 months at 10% (D) (1,000)
Remeasurement (E = C - D) 1,000
Question 08: (RTP: November ,2018) (RTP: NOVEMBER ,2019)
A Ltd. prepares its financial statements to 31st March each year. It operates a defined benefit
retirement benefits plan on behalf of current and former employees. A Ltd. receives advice from
actuaries regarding contribution levels and overall liabilities of the plan to pay benefits. On 1st April,
20X1, the actuaries advised that the present value of the defined benefit obligation was ₹
6,00,00,000. On the same date, the fair value of the assets of the defined benefit plan was ₹
5,20,00,000. On 1st April, 20X1, the annual market yield on government bonds was 5%. During the
year ended 31st March, 20X2, A Ltd. made contributions of ₹ 70,00,000 into the plan and the plan
paid out benefits of ₹ 42,00,000 to retired members. Both these payments were made on 31st March,
20X2.
The actuaries advised that the current service cost for the year ended 31st March, 20X2 was ₹
62,00,000. On28th February, 20X2, the rules of the plan were amended with retrospective effect. These
amendments meant that the present value of the defined benefit obligation was increased by ₹
15,00,000 from that date.
During the year ended 31st March, 20X2, A Ltd. was in negotiation with employee representatives
regarding planned redundancies. The negotiations were completed shortly before the year end and
redundancy packages were agreed. The impact of these redundancies was to reduce the present
value of the defined benefit obligation by ₹ 80,00,000. Before 31st March, 20X2, A Ltd. made
payments of ₹ 75,00,000 to the employees affected by the redundancies in compensation for the
curtailment of their benefits. These payments were made out of the assets of the retirement benefits
plan.
On 31st March, 20X2, the actuaries advised that the present value of the defined benefit obligation
was ₹ 6,80,00,000. On the same date, the fair value of the assets of the defined benefit plan were ₹

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
5,60,00,000.
Examine and present how the above event would be reported in the financial statements of A
Ltd. forthe year ended 31st March, 20X2 as per Ind AS.
Solution:
All figures are ₹ in ’000.
On 31st March, 20X2, A Ltd. will report a net pension liability in the statement of financial position.
The amount of the liability will be 12,000 (68,000 – 56,000).
For the year ended 31st March, 20X2, A Ltd. will report the current service cost as an operating
cost in the statement of profit or loss. The amount reported will be 6,200. The same treatment
applies tothe past service cost of 1,500.
For the year ended 31st March, 20X2, A Ltd. will report a finance cost in profit or loss based on
the net pension liability at the start of the year of 8,000 (60,000 – 52,000). The amount of the
finance cost will be 400 (8,000 x 5%).
The redundancy programme represents the partial settlement of the curtailment of a defined benefit
obligation. The gain on settlement of 500 (8,000 – 7,500) will be reported in the statement of
profitor loss.
Other movements in the net pension liability will be reported as remeasurement gains or losses
in other comprehensive income.
For the year ended 31st March, 20X2, the remeasurement loss will be 3,400 (Refer W. N.).
Working Note:
Remeasurement of gain or loss
₹ in ’000
Liability at the start of the year (60,000 – 52,000) 8,000
Current service cost 6,200
Past service cost 1,500
Net finance cost 400
Gain on settlement (500)
Contributions to plan (7,000)
Remeasurement loss (balancing figure) 3,400
Liability at the end of the year (68,000 – 56,000) 12,000
Question 09: (MTP: October, 2020) (RTP: May,2020) (MTP MAY 2020)
On 1 April 20X1, the fair value of the assets of XYZ Ltdʼs defined benefit plan were valued at ₹
20,40,000 and the present value of the defined obligation was ₹ 21,25,000. On 31st
March,20X2 the plan received contributions from XYZ Ltd amounting to ₹ 4,25,000 and paid out
benefits of ₹ 2,55,000. The current service cost for the financial year ending 31 March 20X2 is ₹
5,10,000. An interest rate of 5% is to be applied to the plan assets and obligations. The fair value of
the planʼs assets at 31 March 20X2 was ₹ 23,80,000, and the present value of the defined benefit
obligation was ₹ 27,20,000. Provide a reconciliationfrom the opening balance to the closing balance
for Plan assets and Defined benefit obligation. Also show how much amount should be recognised in
the statement of profit and loss, other comprehensive income and balance sheet?
Solution:
Reconciliation of Plan assets and Defined benefit obligation
Plan Assets ₹ Defined benefit
Obligation ₹
Fair value/present value as at 1st April 20X1 20,40,000 21,25,000
Interest @ 5% 1,02,000 1,06,250
Current service cost 5,10,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Contributions received 4,25,000 -
Benefits paid (2,55,000) (2,55,000)
Return on gain (assets) (balancing figure) 68,000 -
Actuarial Loss (balancing figure) - 2,33,750
Closing balance as at March 31,20X2 23,80,000 27,20,000
In the Statement of Profit and loss, the following will be recognised:
₹
Net interest on net defined liability (₹ 1,06,250 – ₹ 1,02,000) 4,250
Defined benefit re-measurements recognised in Other Comprehensive Income: ₹
Loss on defined benefit obligation (2,33,750)
Gain on plan assets 68,000
(1,65,750)
In the Balance sheet, the following will be recognised : ₹
Net defined liability (₹ 27,20,000 – ₹ 23,80,000) 3,40,000
MTP: MARCH, 2019
Question 01:
QA company has a scheme for payment of settlement allowance to retiring employees. Under the
scheme, retiring employees are entitled to reimbursement of certain travel expenses for class they are
entitled to as per company rule and to a lump-sum payment to cover expenses on food and stay
during the travel. Alternatively, employees can claim a lump sum amount equal to one month pay
last drawn.
However, since the administrative office of the Company was in the same premises and to avoid
and logistic inconvenience, the Company on the same day has taken the same premises on the lease
and the annual rental for 10 years is as follows:
Year 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th
Rent in Rs. crores 1.00 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00
The lease agreement is for the period of 10 years, however the same is cancellable after initial period of
5-years. The Company as on date is expected to utilise the premises for entire period of 10 years.
As per market survey, rentals for a similar property for a similar period is expected to beRs.
8.00crores for the first five years and Rs. 11 crores for the next five years.
The Company wants you to suggest the accounting treatment of the above lease transaction as per
applicable Ind AS. (8 Marks)
Solution:
First of all, one has to decide whether the sale and leaseback transaction results in an operating or finance
lease. To determine whether the lease arrangement is an operating lease or a finance lease, paragraph 10 of
Ind AS 17 provides certain examples (that individually or in combination would normally lead to a lease being
classified as a finance lease) which can be analysed as below:
(a) the lease transfers ownership of the asset to the lessee by the end of the lease term - Not fulfilled, as the
ownership is not transferred to QA Ltd. at the end of the lease.
(b) the lessee has the option to purchase the asset after completion of the agreement – Not fulfilled, as QA Ltd.
doesn’t have an option to purchase the property at the end of the lease.
(c) the lease term is for the major part of the economic life of the asset even if title is not transferred – Not fulfilled,
as the lease is for 10 years whereas the useful life of the Property is 40 years.
(d) at the inception of the lease the present value of the minimum lease payments amounts to at least
substantially all of the fair value of the leased asset - Cannot be determined since the interest rate implicit in the
lease is not given in the question. Since the rentals in absolute value is also not equal to fair value of the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
property, its fair value will definitely will be less.
(e) the leased assets are of such a specialised nature that only the lessee can use them without major modifications
- Not fulfilled, as the asset is not specialised in nature.
Conclusion: Based on the evaluation above, Sale and leaseback transaction will result in an operating lease.
Suggested Accounting Treatment
When sale and leaseback transaction results in an operating lease, para 61 of Ind AS 17 will apply which inter
alia states that if the sale price of sale and leaseback transaction is below fair value, any profit or loss shall be
recognized immediately except that, if the loss is compensated for by future lease payments at below
market price. If the loss is compensated for by future lease payments at below market price, the
difference between carrying value and the sale price shall be deferred and amortised in proportion to the
lease payments over theperiod for which the asset is expected to be used.
Here the market rentals are expected to be Rs. 8 crores for first 5 years and Rs. 11 crores while the lease
rentals fixed as per the agreement is Rs. 6.4 crore for first 5 years and Rs. 9 crores for next five years. This
implies that the loss in sale price is compensated for by future lease payments at below market price.
Accordingly, the difference between carrying value and the sale price i.e., Rs. 2 crores (carrying value Rs. 50
crore – sale price Rs. 48 crore) shall be deferred and amortised in proportion to the lease payments over the
period for which the asset is expected to be used.
Alternatively, the difference between carrying value and the sale price i.e., Rs. 2 crores (carrying value Rs. 50 crore –
sale price Rs. 48 crore) shall be considered as prepayment which will compensated by the reduced rentals for the
whole lease term. The amount will be considered as pre-payment.
The total lease rentals over the whole term are Rs. 15.4 crore (sum of annual rental from 1 to 10 years)
Rental expenses of Rs. 1.54 crore (15.4 cr x 1/10) will be recognized in profit or loss for the year ended 31st March, 2017.
A proportion of the apparent loss on sale will be recognized in profit or loss for the year ended 31st March, 2017
The amount recognized will be Rs. 0.13 crore [Rs. 2 crore x (1/15.4)]
The closing pre-payment will be Rs. 1.33 crore (2 – 0.13 + 1 (rent paid) – 1.54 (rent charged).
MTP: OCTOBER, 2018
Question 2:
An employee Roshan has joined a company XYZ Ltd. in the year 2018. The annual emoluments of Roshan as decided is
Rs. 14,90,210. The company also has a policy of giving a lump sum payment of 25% of the last drawn annual salary of
the employee for each completed year of service if the employee retires after completing minimum 5 years of service.
The salary of the Roshanis expected to grow @ 10% per annum.
The company has inducted Roshan in the beginning of the year and it is expected that he will complete the minimum
five-year term before retiring.
What is the amount the company should charge in its Profit and Loss account every year as cost for the
Defined Benefit obligation? Also calculate the current service cost and the interest cost to be charged per year
assuming a discount rate of 8%.
(P.V factor for 8% - 0.735, 0.794, 0.857, 0.926, 1) (8 Marks)
Solution:
Calculation of Defined Benefit Obligation
Expected last drawn salary = Rs. 14,90,210 x 110% x 110% x 110% x 110% x 110%
= Rs. 24,00,000
Defined Benefit Obligation (DBO) = Rs. 24,00,000 x 25% x 5 = Rs. 30,00,000
Amount of Rs. 6,00,000 will be charged to Profit and Loss Account of the company every year
as cost for Defined Benefit Obligation.
Calculation of Current Service Cost
Year Equal apportioned amount of DBO Discounting @8% PV Current service cost
[i.e., Rs.30,00,000/5 years] factor (Present Value)
a b c d=bxc

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
1 6,00,000 0.735 (4 Years) 4,41,000
2 6,00,000 0.794 (3 Years) 4,76,400
3 6,00,000 0.857 (2 Years) 5,14,200
4 6,00,000 0.926 (1 Year) 5,55,600
5 6,00,000 1 (0 Year) 6,00,000
Calculation of Interest Cost to be charged per year

Year Opening balance Interest cost Current Closing balance
servicecost
a b c = b x 8% d e=b+c+d
1 0 0 4,41,000 4,41,000
2 4,41,000 35,280 4,76,400 9,52,680
3 9,52,680 76,214 5,14,200 15,43,094
4 15,43,094 1,23,447 5,55,600 22,22,141
5 22,22,141 1,77,859* 6,00,000 30,00,000
*Due to approximations used in calculation, this figure is adjusted accordingly.
MTP APR 2018 (MTP OCT 2018)
QUESTION
From the following details, compute according to Lev and Schwartz (1971) model, the total value of
human resources of the employee groups skilled and unskilled.
Skilled unskilled.
(i) Annual average earning of an employee till the retirement Rs. 50,000 Rs. 30,000
age
(ii) Age of retirement 65 years 62 years
(iii) Discount rate 15% 15%
(iv) No. of employees in the group 20 25
(v) Average age 62 years 60 years
SOLUTION
According to Lev and Schwartz, the value of human capital embodied in a person of age is the
present value of his remaining future earnings from employment. Their valuation model for a
discrete income stream is given by the following formula:
Rs. 32,875.81 + Rs. 37,807.18 + Rs. 43,478.26 = Rs. 1,14,161.25


UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total value of skilled employees is Rs. 1, 14,161.25 × 20 = Rs. 22,83,225
= Rs. 22,684.31 + Rs. 26,086.96 = Rs. 48,771.27

Total value of the unskilled employees = Rs. 48,771.27× 25 = RS. 12,19,282
Total value of human resources (skilled and unskilled) = Rs. 22,83,225 + Rs. 12,19,282 = Rs.
35,02,507.
MTP APR 2018
QUESTION
RS Ltd. discontinues a business segment. Under the agreement with employee’s union, the
employees of the discontinued segment will earn no further benefit. This is a curtailment without
settlement, because employees will continue to receive benefits for services rendered before
discontinuance of the business segment. Curtailment reduces the gross obligation for various
reasons including change in actuarial assumptions made before curtailment. If the benefits are
determined based on the last pay drawn by employees, the gross obligation reduces after the
curtailment because the last pay earlier assumed is no longer valid. RS Ltd. estimates the share of
unamortized service cost that relates to the part of the obligation at Rs. 18 (10% of Rs. 180).
Calculate the gain from curtailment and liability after curtailment to be recognised in the balance
sheet of RS Ltd. on the basis of given information:
(i) Immediately before the curtailment, gross obligation is estimated at Rs. 6,000 based on
current actuarial assumption.
(ii) The fair value of plan assets on the date is estimated at Rs. 5,100.
(iii) The unamortized past service cost is Rs. 180.
(iv) Curtailment reduces the obligation by Rs. 600, which is 10% of the gross obligation
SOLUTION
Gain from curtailment is estimated as under:
Rs
Reduction in gross obligation 600
Less: Proportion of unamortised past service cost (18)
Gain from curtailment 582
The liability to be recognised after curtailment in the balance sheet is estimated as under:
Reduced gross obligation (90% of ₹ 6,000) 5400
Less: Fair value of plan assets (5100)
300
Less: Unamortised past service cost (90% of ₹ 180) 162
Liability to be recognised in the balance sheet (138)
MTP MARCH 2018 (MAY 2019)
Question 3
Entity A has undertaken various transactions in the financial year ended March 31, 20X1.
Identifyand present the transactions in the financial statements as per Ind AS 1. ₹
Remeasurement of defined benefit plans 2,57,000
Changes in revaluation surplus 1,25,000
Gains and losses arising from translating the monetary assets in 75,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
foreign currency
Gains and losses arising from translating the financial 65,000
statements of a foreign operation
Gains and losses from investments in equity instruments 1,00,000
designated at fair value through other comprehensive income
Income tax expense 35,000
Share based payments cost 3,35,000
Solution
Items impacting the Statement of Profit and Loss for the year ended 31st March, 20X1(₹)
Gains and losses arising from translating the monetary assets in 75,000
Foreign currency
Items impacting the other comprehensive income for the year ended 31st March, 20X1 (₹)
Gains and losses arising from translating the financial 65,000
statements of a foreign operation
Gains and losses from investments in equity instruments 1,00,000
designated at fair valuethrough other comprehensive income
MTP MAR 2018
QUESTION
Following information is provided in respect of A Ltd. as on 31st March, 20X1
(₹ in lakh)
Turnover (including discounts and returns worth ₹ 35 lakh) 2,500
Plant and machinery (net) 785
Depreciation on plant and machinery 132
Debtors 205
Dividend to ordinary shareholders 85
Creditors 180
Stock (net) of all raw materials, WIP, finished goods
Opening stock 180
Closing stock 240
Raw material purchased 714
Cash at bank 98
Printing and stationery 24
Auditor’s remuneration 15
Retained profit (opening balance) 998
Retained profit for the year 445
Transfer to reserve 120
Rent paid 172
Other expenses 88
Ordinary share capital (₹ 100 each) 1700
Interest on borrowings 40
Income tax for the year 280
Wages and salaries 352
Employees state insurance 32
Provident fund contribution 26

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(i) Prepare Value Added Statement and its application for the period 31.3.20X1.
(ii) Compute Value Added per Employee (If 87 employees work in Pradeep Ltd.)
(iii) Compute Average Earnings per Employee (If 87 employees work in Pradeep Ltd.)
SOLUTION
i) Value Added Statement of A Ltd. for the period ended on 31.3.20X1
( in lakhs)
Sales (net) (2,500 – 35) 2,465
Less: Cost of Bought in Materials and Services:
Raw material consumed (180 + 714 – 240) 654
Printing and stationary 24
Auditors’ remuneration 15
Rent paid 172
Other expenses 88 (953)
Value added by manufacturing and trading activities 1,512
Application of Value Added
(₹ in lakh) (₹ in lakh) %
To Pay Employees:
Wages and salaries 352
Employees state insurance 32
Provident fund contribution 26 410 27.12
To Pay Government:
Income-tax 280 18.52
To Pay Providers of Capital:
Interest on borrowings 40
Dividend 85 125 8.27
To Provide for maintenance and expansion of
the company:
Depreciation 132
Transfer to reserve 120
Retained profit 445 697 46.09
1512 100
(ii) Value Added Per Employee = Value Added/ No. of Employees = 1,512 \ 87 = 17.38
(iii) Average Earnings Per Employee =
Average Earnings of Employee / No. of Employees = 410/87 = 4.71
RTP: M A Y , 2019
Question 1:
ABC Limited operates a defined benefit plan which provides to the employees covered under the
plan a pension benefit which is equal to 0.75% final salary for each year of completed service. An
employee needs to complete minimum of five years’ service for becoming eligible to the benefit. On
1st April, 2015, the entity improves the pension benefit to 1% of final salary for each year of service,
including prior years.The presentvalue of the defined benefit obligation is therefore, increased by ₹
80 million. Given below is the composition of this amount:
Employees with more than 5 years’ of service at 1st April,2015 ₹ 60 million
st
Employees with less than 5 years’ of service at 1 April,2015 ₹ 20 million
The employees in the second category have completed average 2 and half years of service. Hence,
they need to complete another two and half year of service until vesting.
Comment on the treatment of ₹ 80 million of the defined benefit obligation in the financial statements
both asper AS 15 and Ind AS 19.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Under AS 15, a past service cost of ₹ 60 million needs to be recognized immediately, as those
benefits are already vested. The remaining ₹ 20 million cost is recognized on a straight-line
basis over the vesting period, i.e., period to two and half years commencing from 1st April,
2015.
Under Ind AS 19, the entire past service cost of ₹ 80 million needs to be recognized and
charged in profit or loss immediately. ABC Ltd. cannot defer any part of this cost.
RTP: M A Y , 2021
Question 2:
At 1 April, 20X0, the fair value of the Plan Assets was ₹ 10,00,000. The Plan paid benefits of ₹ 1,90,000 and
received contributions of ₹ 4,90,000 on 30 September, 20X0. The company computes the Fair Value of
Plan Assets to be ₹ 15,00,000 as on 31 March, 20X1 and the Present Value of the Defined Benefit Obligation
to amount to ₹ 14,79,200 on the same date. Actuarial losses on defined benefit obligation were ₹ 6,000.
Compounding happens half-yearly. The normal interest rate for 6 months period is 10%, while the effective interest
rate for 12 months period is based on the following data:
At 1 April, 20X0, the company made the following estimates based on market prices at that date:
Particulars %
Interest and Dividend Income, after tax payable by the fund 9.25
Add: Realized and Unrealized Gains on Plan Assets (after tax) 2.00
Less: Administration Costs (1.00)
Expected Rate of Return 10.25
Determine actual return and expected return on plan asset. Also compute amount to be recognized in ‘Other
Comprehensive Income’ in this case.
Solution:
Computation of Expected Return on Plan Assets
Particulars ₹
Return on ₹ 10,00,000 for 20X0-20X1 at 10.25% = ₹ 10,00,000 x10.25% 1,02,500
Add: Return on ₹ 3,00,000 for 6 months at 10% Normal Rate = [3,00,000
(Inflow ₹ 4,90,000 less Payments ₹ 1,90,000) x 10% x 6/12)] 15,000
Expected Return on Plan Assets 1,17,500
Computation of Actual Return on Plan Assets
Particulars ₹
Fair Value of Plan Assets at the year-end – 31 March 20X1 15,00,000
Less: Fair Value of Plan Assets at the beginning – 1 April 20X0 (10,00,000)
Less: Contributions received during the year 20X0-20X1 (4,90,000)
Add: Benefits paid during the year 20X0-20X1 1,90,000
Actual Return on Plan Assets 2,00,000
Computation of Net Actuarial Gain
Particulars ₹
Actual Return on Plan Assets 2,00,000
Less: Expected Return on Plan Assets (1,17,500)
Actuarial Gain on Plan Assets 82,500
Less: Actuarial Loss on Defined Benefit Obligation (given) (6,000)
Net Actuarial Gain to be recognized in ‘Other Comprehensive Income’ 76,500
In 2017-18, Diana Ltd. has around 3,000 employees in the company. As per the company policy,
the employees are given 30 days of Privilege Leave (PL), 12 days of Sick Leave (SL) and 12 days

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
of Casual Leave. Out of the total PL and SL, 10 PL and 5 SL can be carried forward to next year.
On the basis of past trends, it has been noted that 1,000 employees will take 5 days of PL and 2
days of SL and 2,000 employees will avail 10 as PL and 5 as SL. Also, the company has been
incurring profits since incorporation. It has been decided in 2017-18 to distribute profits to its
employees @ 8% during the year. However, due to the employee turnover in the organisation, the
expected pay-out of the Diana Ltd. is to be around 7%. The profits earned during 2017-18 is ₹
12,000 lakh.
Diana Ltd. also has a post-employment benefit plan available which is in the nature of defined
contribution plan where contribution to this fund amounts to ₹ 500 lakh which will fall due within
12 months from the end of accounting period. The company has paid ₹ 120 lakh to its
employees in 2017-18.
What is the treatment for the short-term compensating absences, profit-sharing plan and the
defined contribution plan by Diana Ltd. as per the provisions of relevant Ind AS? (5 Marks)
SOLUTION:
(i) For short term compensating expenses:
Diana. Ltd. will recognise a liability in its books to the extent of 5 days of PL for 1,000
employees and 10 days of PL for remaining 2,000 employees and 2 days of SL for 1,000
employees and 5 days of SL for remaining 2,000 employees in its books as an unused
entitlement that has accumulated in 2017-2018.
(ii) For profit sharing plan:
Diana Ltd. will recognise ₹ 840 lakh (12,000 x 7%) as a liability and expense it in books of accounts.
(iii) For defined contribution plan:
When an employee has rendered service to an entity during a period, the entity shall recognise
the contribution payable to a defined contribution plan in exchange for that service:
(a) Under Ind AS 19, the amount of ₹ 380 lakh (500-120) may be recognised as a liability
(accrued expense), after deducting contribution already paid. However, if the contribution already
paid would have exceeded the contribution due for service before the end of the reporting period,
an entity shall recognise that excess as an asset (prepaid expense); and
(b) Also, ₹ 380 lakh will be recognised as an expense in this case study which will be
disclosed as an expense in the statement of profit and loss.
Diamond Pvt. Ltd, has a headcount of around 1,000 employees in the organisation in financial year
2019-2020. As per the company's policy, the employees are given 35 days of privilege leave (PL),
15 days of sick leave (SL) and 10 days of casual leave. Out of the total PL and sick leave, 10 PL
leave and 5 sick leave can be carried forward to next year. On the basis of past trends, it has
been noted that 200 employees will take 5 days of P Land 2 days of SL and 800 employees will
avail 10 days of PL and 5 days of SL.
Also, the company has been earning profits since 2010. It has decided in financial year 2019-2020
to distribute profits to its employees @ 4% during the year. However, due to the employee turnover
in the organisation, the expected pay-out of the Diamond Pvt. Ltd. is expected to be around 3.5%.
The profits earned during the financial year 2019-2020 are ₹ 4,000 crores.
Diamond Pvt. Ltd. has a post-employment benefit plan which is in the nature of defined contribution
plan where contribution to the fund amounts to ₹ 200 crores which will fall due within 12 months
from the end of accounting period.
The company has paid ₹ 40 crores to this plan in financial year 2019-2020.
What would be the treatment of the short-term compensating absences, profit-sharing plan and the
defined contribution plan in the books of Diamond Pvt. Ltd.? (6 Marks)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
SOLUTION:
(i) Treatment of short-term compensating absences:
Diamond Pvt. Ltd. will recognise a liability in its books to the extent of 5 days of PL for 200
employees and 10 days of PL for remaining 800 employees and 2 days of SL for 200
employees and 5 days of SL for remaining 800 employees in its books as an unused
entitlement that has accumulated in 2019-2020 as short-term compensated absences.
(ii) Treatment of profit-sharing plan:
Diamond Pvt. Ltd. will recognise ₹ 140 crores (4,000 x 3.5%) as a liability and expense in its booksof
account.
(iii) Treatment of defined contribution plan:
When an employee has rendered service to an entity during a period, the entity shall recognise
the contribute on payable to a defined contribution plan in exchange for that service.
Under Ind AS 19, the amount of ₹ 160 crores (200-40) will be recognised as a liability (accrued
expense), after deducting any contribution already paid i.e., ₹ 40 crores (with contribution of ₹ 200
crores to the plan)and an expense in the statement of profit and loss.
It can also be seen that the contributions are payable within 12 months from the end of the year
in which the employees render the related service; hence, they will not be discounted.
NOV 2018
QUESTION
Sun Shine India Limited has a capital base of ₹ 150 Lakh and has earned profits to the tune of ₹ 17
lakh. The Return on Investment (ROI) of the particular industry to which the company belongs is
14%. If the services of a particular executive are acquired by the company, it is expected that the
profit will increase by ₹ 3 lakh over and above the target profit. Determine the amount of maximum
bid price for that particular executive and the maximum salary that could be offered to him.
SOLUTION
Capital Base = ₹ 1,50,00,000
Actual Profit = ₹ 17,00,000
Target Profit @ 14% = ₹ 21,00,000
Expected Profit on employing the particular executive
= ₹ 21,00,000 + ₹ 3,00,000 = ₹ 24,00,000
Additional Profit = Expected Profit – Actual Profit = ₹ 24,00,000 – ₹ 17,00,000 = ₹ 7,00,000Maximum
bid price = Additional Profit / Rate of Return on Investment
= (7,00,000/14%) ×100 = 50,00,000 ₹
Maximum salary that can be offered = 14% of ₹ 50,00,000 i.e., ₹ 7,00,000
Maximum salary can be offered to that particular executive upto the amount of additional profit i.e.,
₹ 7,00,000.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 33 - EARNING PER SHARE
Illustration 1
ABC Ltd. issues 9% preference shares of fair value of ₹ 10 each on 1.4.20X1. Total value of the
issue is ₹ 10,00,000. The shares are issued for a period of 5 years and would be redeemed at
the end of 5th year. The shares are to be redeemed at ₹ 11 each.
At the end of the year 3, i.e., on 31.3.20X4, company finds that it has earned good returns than
expected overlast three years and can make the redemption of preference shares early. To compensate
the shareholders for two years of dividend which they need to forego, company decided to redeem
the shares at ₹ 12 each instead of original agreement of ₹ 11. Comment on the impact of early
conversion of preference shares ata premium on earnings for the year 20X3- 20X4 attributable to
ordinary equity holders of ABC Ltd. for basic EPS. Ignore the EIR impact in the solution and
answer on the basis of Ind AS 33 only.
Solution
In the given situation, ₹ 1 per share is the excess payment made by the company amountingto
₹ 1,00,000 in all.
The amount of ₹ 1,00,000 will be deducted from the earnings of the year 20X3-20X4 while
calculating the basic EPS of year 20X3-20X4.
Illustration 2
An entity has following preference shares in issue at the end of 20X4:
5% redeemable, non-cumulative preference shares: These shares are classified as liabilities.
During the year, a dividend was paid on the 5% preference shares – ₹ 100,000.
Increasing-rate, cumulative, non-redeemable preference shares issued at a discount
in 20X0, with a cumulative dividend rate from 20X5 of 10%: The shares were issued at a
discount to compensate the holders, because dividend payments will not commence until 20X5.
The accrual for the discount in the current year, calculated using the effective interest method
amounted to, say, ₹ 18,000. These shares are classified as equity – ₹ 200,000.
8% non-redeemable, non-cumulative preference shares: At the beginning of the year, the
entity had ₹ 100,000 8% preference shares outstanding but, at 30 June 20X4, it repurchased ₹
50,000 of these at a discount of ₹ 1,000 – ₹ 50,000.
7% cumulative, convertible preference shares (converted in the year): These shares
were classified as equity, until their conversion into ordinary shares at the beginning of the year.
No dividend was accrued in respect of the year, although the previous year’s dividend was paid
immediately prior to conversion. To induce conversion, the terms of conversion of the 7%
convertible preference shares were also amended, and the revised terms entitled the preference
shareholders to an additional 100 ordinary shares on conversion with a fair value of ₹ 300 – Nil.
The profit after tax for the year 20X4 is ₹ 150,000. Determine the adjustments for the
purpose of calculating EPS.
Solution
Adjustments for the purpose of calculating EPS are made as follows:
Particulars Amount(₹) Amount(₹)
Profit after tax 150,000
Amortisation of discount on issue of increasing-rate (18,000)
preference
shares (Refer Note 1)
Discount on repurchase of 8% preference shares (Refer Note 2) 1,000 (17,000)
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders for basic EPS 1,33,000
(Refer Note 3-5)
Notes:
1. The original discount on issue of the increasing-rate preference shares is treated as

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
amortised to retained earnings and treated as preference dividends for EPS purposes and
adjusted against profit attributable to the ordinary equity holders. There is no adjustment in
respect of dividend, because these do not commence until 20X5. Instead, the finance cost is
represented by the amortisation of the discount in the dividend-free period. In future
years, the accrual for the dividend of ₹ 20,000 will be deducted from profits.
2. The discount on repurchase of the 8% preference shares has been credited to equity so
should be added to profit.
3. The dividend on the 5% preference shares has been charged to the income statement,
because the preference shares are treated as liabilities, so no adjustment is required for it
from the profit.
4. No accrual for the dividend on the 8% preference shares is required, because they are
non- cumulative. If a dividend had been declared for the year, it would have been deducted
from profit for the purpose of calculating basic EPS, because the shares are treated as
equity and the dividend would have been charged to equity in the financial statements.
The 7% preference shares were converted at the beginning of the year, so there is no
adjustment in respect of the 7% preference shares, because no dividend accrued in respect of
the year. The payment of the previous year’s cumulative dividend is ignored for EPS purposes,
because it will have been adjusted for in the prior year. Similarly, the excess of the fair value of
additional ordinary shares issued on conversion of the convertible preference shares over the
fair value of the ordinary shares to which the shareholders would have been entitled under the
original conversion terms would already have been deducted from profit attributable to the
ordinary shareholders, and no further adjustment is required.
It may be noted that as per Sections 53 and 55 of the Companies Act, 2013, a company
cannot issue shares at discount or any irredeemable preference shares. However, the above
illustration has been given only to explain the concept given in Ind AS.
Illustration 3
Following is the data for company XYZ in respect of number of equity shares during the financial
year20X1-20X2. Find out the number of shares for the purpose of calculation of basic EPS as
S.No. Date Particulars No of shares
1 1-Apr-20X1 Opening balance of outstanding equity shares 100,000
2 15-Jun-20X1 Issue of equity shares 75,000
3 8-Nov-20X1 Conversion of convertible preference shares in Equity 50,000
4 22-Feb-20X2 Buy back of shares (20,000)
5 31-Mar-20X2 Closing balance of outstanding equity shares 205,000
Solution
The closing balance of the outstanding shares is 2,05,000 by a normal addition and subtraction.
But as per weighted average concept, one need to find out for how many days each type of
shares was actually held during the year.
The shares which were there on 1st April 20X1, were held for the whole year. Therefore,
weighted average number of such shares will be given by the formula:
No of shares x no of days the shares were held during the year / 365
= 1,00,000 x 365 / 365 = 1,00,000
But the shares which were issued on 15th June 20X1, were held for only 290 days.
Therefore, the weighted average number of shares will be 75,000 x 290 / 365 = 59,589.
Following the above formula, the weighted average number of shares for calculation of EPS for
the year 20X1-20X2 will be as follows:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Sr. Date Particulars No of No of days Weighted
No. shares shares were average no of
outstanding shares
1 1-Apr-20X1 Opening balance of
outstanding equity shares 1,00,000 365 1,00,000
2 15-Jun-20X1 Issue of equity shares 75,000 290 59,589
3 8-Nov-20X1 Conversion of convertible
preference shares in
Equity 50,000 144 19,726
4 22-Feb-20X2 Buy back of shares (20,000) (38)* (2,082)
5 31-Mar- Closing balance of
20X2 outstanding equity shares 2,05,000 1,77,233
* These shares had already been considered in the shares issued. The same has been
deducted assuming that the bought back shares have been extinguished immediately.
Illustration 4
On 31 March, 20X2, the issued share capital of a company consisted of ₹ 100,000,000 in ordinary
shares of ₹ 25 each and ₹ 500,000 in 10% cumulative non-redeemable preference shares
(classified as equity) of Re 1 each. On 1 October, 20X2, the company issued 1,000,000 ordinary
shares fully paid by way of capitalisation of reserves in the proportion 1:4 for the year ended 31
March, 20X3.
Profit for 20X1-20X2 and 20X2-20X3 is ₹ 450,000 and ₹ 550,000 respectively. Calculate the
basic EPS for 20X1-20X2 and 20X2-20X3.
Solution
20X2-20X3 (₹’000) 20X1-20X2 (₹’000)
Calculation of earnings
Profit for the year 550 450
Less: Preference shares dividend (50) (50)
Earnings (A) 500 400
No. of shares in ₹000 No. of shares in₹000

Number of ordinary shares
Shares in issue for full year 4,000 4,000
Capitalisation issue at 1 October 20X2 1,000 1,000
Number of shares (B) 5,000 5,000
Earnings per ordinary share (A/B) 10 Paise 8 Paise*
*The comparative EPS for 20X1-20X2 can alternatively be calculated by adjusting the
previously disclosed EPS in 20X1-20X2 (in this example, 10 Paise) by the following factor:
Number of shares before the bonus issue/ Number of shares after the bonus issue
*Adjusted EPS for 20X1-20X2 10 Paise x (4,000/ 5,000) = 8 Paise
Illustration 5
X Ltd.
1 January 1,000,000 shares in issue
28 February issued 200000 shares at fair value
31 August Bonus issue 1 shares for 3 shares held
30 November issued 250,000 shares at fair value
Calculate the number of shares which be used in the basic EPT calculation. Consider reporting
data asDecember end.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
Period Calculations Weighted average number of shares
1 January - 28 February 1,000,000 × 2 / 12 × 4 / 3 222,222
1 March - 31 August 1,200,000 × 6 / 12 × 4 / 3 800,000
1 September - 30 November 1,600,000 × 3 / 12 400,000
1 December - 31 December 1,850,000 × 1 / 12 154,167
1,576,389
Illustration 6
At 31 December 20X1, the issued share capital of a company consisted of 1.8 million ordinary
shares of ₹ 10 each, fully paid. The profits for the year ended 31 December 20X1 and 20X2
amounted to ₹ 630,000 and ₹ 875,000 respectively. On 31 March 20X2, the company made a
rights issue on a 1 for 4 basis at ₹ 30. The market price of the shares immediately before the rights
issue was ₹ 60. Calculate EPS.
Solution
Calculation of theoretical ex rights price:
Number of shares ₹
Initial holding 4 Market Value (4 x 60) 240
Rights taken up 1 Cost (1 x 30) 30
New holding 5 Theoretical price 270
Theoretical ex rights price = 270/5 = ₹ 54Calculation of bonus element
The bonus element of the rights issue is given by the fraction:
Market price before rights issue/Theoretical ex-rights price =60 / 54 = 10/9
This corresponds to a bonus issue of 1 for 9. The bonus ratio will usually be greater than 1
(that is, the market price of the shares immediately prior to the exercise of rights is greater than the
theoretical ex-rights price). If the ratio is less than 1, it might indicate that the market price has
fallen significantly during the rights period, which was not anticipated when the rights issue was
announced. In this situation, the rights issue should be treated as an issue of shares for cash at full
market price.
It can be demonstrated, using the figures in the illustration, that a rights issue of 1 for 4 at ₹ 30
is equivalent to a bonus issue of 1 for 9 combined with an issue of shares at full market price of
₹ 54 per share. Consider an individual shareholder holding 180 shares:
Number ofshares Value ₹
(in ₹000s) (in million)
Original holding 1,800 Value at ₹60 per share 108.00
Rights shares (1:4) 450 Value at ₹30 per share 13.50
Holding after rights issue 2,250 Value at ₹54 per share 121.50
The additional 450 thousand rights shares at ₹30 can be shown to be equivalent to a bonus
issue of 1 for 9 on the original holding, followed by an issue of 1:8 at full market price of ₹54
following the bonus issue, as follows:
Number of Value ₹
shares (in million)
(in ₹000s)
Original holding 1,800 Value at ₹60 per share 108.00
Bonus issue of 1 for 9 200 Value Nil nil
2000 Value at ₹ 54 per share 108.00
Issue of 1 for 8 at full price (450-200) 250 Value at ₹ 54 per share 13.50
Total holding 2250 Value at ₹54 per share 121.50
The shareholder is therefore indifferent as to whether the entity makes a rights issue of 1
for 4 at ₹ 30 per share, or a combination of a bonus issue of 1 for 9 followed by a rights issue

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
of 1 for 8 at full market price of ₹ 54 per share.
Having calculated the bonus ratio, the ratio should be applied to adjust the number of shares in
issue before the rights issue, both for the current year and for the previous year. Therefore, the
weighted average number of shares in issue for the current and the previous period, adjusted
for the bonus element, would be:
Weighted average number of shares:
20X2 20X1
No of actual shares in issue before rights 1,800,000 1,800,000
Correction for bonus issue (1:9) 200,000 200,000
Deemed no of shares in issue before right issue 2,000,000 2,000,000
(1.8 million x 10/9 for the whole year)
The no of shares after the rights issue would be = 1.8 million x 5/4 = 2,250,000
Therefore, the weighted average number of shares would be
2.0 million for the whole year 2,000,000
1.8 million x 10/9 x 3/12 (before rights issue) 500,000 -
2.25 million x 9/12 (after rights issue) 1,687,500 -
Weighted average number 2,187,500 2,000,000
20X2 20X1
Calculation of earnings (as previously stated)
Profits for the year ₹ 875,000 ₹ 630,000
Weighted average number 2,187,500 1,800,000
Basic EPS 40p 35p
Basic EPS for 20X1 (as restated)
=31.50p
₹ 630,000 / 2,000,000
In practice, the restated EPS for 20X1 can also be calculated by adjusting the EPS figure of the
previous year by the reciprocal of the bonus element factor: * 35p x 9/10 = 31.50 p
Illustration 7
Entity A has in issue 25,000 4% debentures with a nominal value of Re 1. The debentures are
convertible to ordinary shares at a rate of 1:1 at any time until 20X9. The entity’s management
receives a bonus based on 1% of profit before tax.
Entity A’s results for 20X2 showed a profit before tax of ₹ 80,000 and a profit after tax of ₹ 64,000
(for simplicity, a tax rate of 20% is assumed in this question).
Calculate Earnings for the purpose of diluted EPS.
Solution
For the purpose of calculating diluted EPS, the earnings should be adjusted for the reduction in
the interest charge that would occur if the debentures were converted, and for the increase in
themanagement bonus payment that would arise from the increased profit.
Amount (₹)
Profit after tax 64,000
Add: Reduction in interest cost (25,000 × 4%) (Refer Note) 1,000
Less: Tax expense (1,000 × 20%) (200)
Less: Increase in management bonus (1,000 × 1%) (10)
Add: Tax benefit (10 × 20%) 2
Earnings for the purpose of diluted EPS 64,792
Note: For simplicity, this illustration does not classify the components of the convertible
debenture as liabilities and equity, as required by Ind AS 32.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
ABC Ltd. has 1,000,000 ₹ 1 ordinary shares and 1,000 ₹ 100 10% convertible bonds (issued at par),
each convertible into 20 ordinary shares on demand, all of which have been in issue for the whole
of the reporting period.
ABC Ltd.’s share price is ₹ 4.50 per share and earnings for the period are ₹ 500,000. The tax rate
applicable tothe entity is 21%.
Calculate basic EPS, earnings per incremental share for the convertible bonds and diluted EPS.
Solution
Basic EPS is ₹ 0.50 per share (ie 500,000/1,000,000)
The earnings per incremental share for the convertible bonds is calculated as follows:
Earnings effect = No. of bonds x nominal value x interest cost x (1 – applicable tax rate)
= 1,000 x 100 x 10% x (1- 0.21) = ₹ 7,900.
Incremental shares calculation
Assume all bonds are converted to shares, even though this converts ₹ 100 worth of bonds
into 20 shares worth only ₹ 90 and is therefore not economically rational.
This gives 1000 x 20 = 20,000 additional shares.
Earnings per incremental share = ₹ 7,900 / 20,000 = ₹ 0.395
Diluted EPS = (₹ 500,000 + ₹ 7,900) / (1,000,000 + 20,000) = ₹ 0.498 per share.
Illustration 9
At 30 June 20X1, the issued share capital of an entity consisted of 1,500,000 ordinary shares of
₹ 1 each. On 1 October 20X1, the entity issued ₹ 1,250,000 of 8% convertible loan stock for cash
at par. Each ₹ 100 nominal of the loan stock may be converted, at any time during the years ended
20X6 to 20X9,into the number of ordinary shares set out below:
30 June 20X6: 135 ordinary shares;
30 June 20X7: 130 ordinary shares;
30 June 20X8: 125 ordinary shares; and
30 June 20X9: 120 ordinary shares.
If the loan stocks are not converted by 20X9, they would be redeemed at par.
This illustration assumes that the written equity conversion option is accounted for as a derivative
liability and marked to market through profit or loss. The change in the options’ fair value reported in
20X2 and 20X3 amounted to losses of ₹ 2,500 and ₹ 2,650 respectively. It is assumed that there
are no tax consequences arising from these losses.
The profit before interest, fair value movements and taxation for the year ended 30 June 20X2
and 20X3 amounted to ₹ 825,000 and ₹ 895,000 respectively and relate wholly to continuing
operations. The rate oftax for both periods is 33%.
Calculate Basic and Diluted EPS
Solution
20X3 20X2
Trading results ₹ ₹
A. Profit before interest, fair value movements and tax 895,000 825,000
B. Interest on 8% convertible loan stock (20X2: 9/12 × ₹100,000) (100,000) (75,000)
C. Change in fair value of embedded option (2,650) (2,500)
Profit before tax 792,350 747,500
Taxation @ 33% on (A-B) (262,350) (247,500)
Profit after tax 530,000 500,000
Calculation of basic EPS
Number of equity shares outstanding 1,500,000 1,500,000
Earnings ₹ 530,000 ₹ 500,000
Basic EPS 35 paise 33 paise
Calculation of diluted EPS
Test whether convertibles are dilutive:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The saving in after-tax earnings, resulting from the conversion of ₹ 100 nominal of loan stock,
amounts to ₹ 100 × 8% × 67% + ₹ 2,650/12,500 = ₹ 5.36 + ₹ 0.21 = ₹ 5.57.
There will then be 135 extra shares in issue.
Therefore, the incremental EPS is 4 paise (i.e., ₹ 5.57/135). As this incremental EPS is less than
the basic EPS at the continuing level, it will have the effect of reducing the basic EPS of 35
paise.Hence the convertibles are dilutive.
20X3 20X2
Adjusted earnings ₹ ₹
Profit for basic EPS 530,000 500,000
Add: Interest and other charges on earnings 102,650 77,500
Saved as a result of the conversion (100,000 + 2,650) (75000+ 2500)
Less: Tax relief thereon (33,000) (24,750)
Adjusted earnings for equity 599,650 552,750
Adjusted number of shares
From the conversion terms, it is clear that the maximum number of shares issuable on
conversion of ₹ 1,250,000 loan stock after the end of the financial year would be at the rate of 135
shares per ₹ 100 nominal (that is, 1,687,500 shares).
20X3 20X2
Number of equity shares for basic EPS 1,500,000 1,500,000
Maximum conversion at date of issue 1,687,500 ×9/12 1,265,625
Maximum conversion after balance sheet date 1,687,500 –
Adjusted shares 3,187,500 2,765,625
Adjusted earnings for equity ₹ 599,650 ₹ 552,750
Diluted EPS (approx.) 19 paise 20 paise
Illustration 10
At 31 December 20X7 and 20X8, the issued share capital of an entity consisted of 4,000,000 ordinary shares of ₹
25 each. The entity has granted options that give holders the right to subscribe for ordinary shares between
20Y6 and 20Y9 at ₹ 70 per share. Options outstanding at 31 December 20X7 and 20X8 were 630,000. There were no
grants, exercises or lapses of options during the year. The profit after tax, attributable to ordinary equity holders for
the years ended 31
December 20X7 and 20X8, amounted to ₹ 500,000 and ₹ 600,000 respectively (wholly relating to continuing
operations).
Average market price of share:
Year ended 31 December 20X7 = ₹ 120
Year ended 31 December 20X8 = ₹ 160
Calculate basic and diluted EPS.
Solution
20X8 20X7
Calculation of basic EPS
Profit after tax ₹ 600,000 ₹ 500,000
Number of share 4,000,000 4,000,000
Basic EPS (approx.) 15 paise 13 paise.
Calculation of diluted EPS
Adjusted number of shares

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Number of shares under option:
Issued at full market price:
(630,000 × 70) ÷ 120 367,500
(630,000 × 70) ÷ 160 275,625
Issued at nil consideration — dilutive 354,375 262,500
Total number of shares under option 630,000 630,000
Number of equity shares for basic EPS 4,000,000 4,000,000
Number of dilutive shares under option 354,375 262,500
Adjusted number of shares (A) 4,354,375 4,262,500
Profit after tax (B) ₹ 600,000 ₹ 500,000
Diluted EPS (B/A) 14 paise 12 paise
Note: If options had been granted or exercised during the period, the number of ‘nil consideration’ shares in respect
of these options would be included in the diluted EPS calculation on a weighted average basis for the period
prior to exercise.
Illustration 11- Effects of share options on diluted earnings per share
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent entity for year 20X1 1,200,000
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during year 20X1 500,000 shares
Average market price of one ordinary share during year 20X1 ₹ 20.00
Weighted average number of shares under option during year 20X1 100,000 shares
Exercise price for shares under option during year 20X1 ₹ 15.00
Solution
Calculation of earnings per share
Earnings Shares Per share
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of
the parent entity for year 20X1 ₹ 1,200,000
Weighted average shares outstanding during year
20X1 500,000
Basic earnings per share ₹ 2.40
Weighted average number of shares under option 100,000
Weighted average number of shares that would
have been issued at average market price:
(100,000 × ₹ 15.00) ÷ ₹ 20.00 Refer Note (75,000)
Diluted earnings per share ₹ 1,200,000 525,000 ₹ 2.29
Note: Earnings have not increased because the total number of shares has increased only
by the number of shares (25,000) deemed to have been issued for no consideration.
Illustration 12- Contingently issuable shares
Ordinary shares outstanding during 20X1 1,000,000 (there were no options, warrants or
convertible instruments outstanding during the
period)
An agreement related to a recent business combination provides for the issue of additional ordinary
sharesbased on the following conditions:
5,000 additional ordinary shares for each new retail
site opened during 20X1
1,000 additional ordinary shares for each ₹ 1,000
of consolidated profit in excess of ₹ 2,000,000 for

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
the year ended 31 December 20X1
Retail sites opened during the year: one on 1 May 20X1
one on 1 September 20X1
Consolidated year-to-date profit ₹ 1,100,000 as of 31 March 20X1
attributable to ordinary equity holders ₹ 2,300,000 as of 30 June 20X1
of the parent entity: ₹ 1,900,000 as of 30 September 20X1
(including a ₹ 450,000 loss from a discontinued
operation) ₹ 2,900,000 as of 31 December 20X1
Solution
Basic earnings per share
First quarter Secondquarter Third quarter Fourth quarter Full year
Numerator (₹) 1,100,000 1,200,000 (400,000) 1,000,000 2,900,000
Denominator:
Ordinary shares 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000
outstanding
Retail site – 3,3336 6,6677 10,000 5,0008
contingency
Earnings contingency9 – – – – –
Total shares 1,000,000 1,003,333 1,006,667 1,010,000 1,005,000
Basic earnings per 1.10 1.20 (0.40) 0.99 2.89
share (₹)
6 5,000 shares × 2/3
7 5,000 shares + (5,000 shares × 1/3)
8 (5,000 shares × 8/12) + (5,000 shares × 4/12)
9 The earnings contingency has no effect on basic earnings per share because it is
not certain that the condition is satisfied until the end of the contingency period. The effect is
negligible for the fourthquarter and full-year calculations because it is not certain that the
condition is met until the last day of the period.
Diluted earnings per share
First quarter Second quarter Third quarter Fourthquarter Full year
Numerator (₹) 1,100,000 1,200,000 (400,000) 1,000,000 2,900,000

Denominator:
Ordinary shares 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000
outstanding
Retail site – 5,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
contingency
Earnings –10 300,00011 –12 900,00013 900,000
contingency
Total shares 1,000,000 1,305,000 1,010,000 1,910,000 1,910,000
Diluted earnings 1.10 0.92 (0.40)14 0.52 1.52
pershare (₹)
10 Company A does not have year-to-date profit exceeding ₹ 2,000,000 at 31
March 20X1. The Standard does not permit projecting future earnings levels and including the
related contingent shares.
11 [(₹ 2,300,000 – ₹ 2,000,000) ÷ 1,000] × 1,000 shares = 300,000 shares.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
12 Year-to-date profit is less than ₹ 2,000,000.
13 [(₹ 2,900,000 – ₹ 2,000,000) ÷ 1,000] × 1,000 shares = 900,000 shares.
14 Because the loss during the third quarter is attributable to a loss from a
discontinued operation, the anti-dilution rules do not apply. The control number (i.e., profit or
loss from, continuing operations attributable to the equity holders of the parent entity) ispositive.
Accordingly, the effect of potential ordinary shares is included in the calculation of diluted
earnings per share.
Illustration 13
Assume the following facts for Company XY:
- Income from continuing operations: INR 30,00,000
- Loss from discontinued operations: (INR 36,00,000)
- Net loss: (INR 6,00,000)
- Weighted average Number of shares outstanding 10,00,000
- Incremental common shares outstanding relating to stock options 2,00,000
a) You are required to calculate the basic and diluted EPS for Company XY from the
aboveinformation.
b) Assume, if in above case, Loss from continued operations is ₹ 10,00,000 andincome
from discontinued operations is ₹ 36,00,000 calculate the diluted EPS.
Solution:
(a) Step 1:
Basic EPS = Profit for the year / Weighted average Number of shares outstanding
Basic EPS (Continued Operations) = Profit from continued operations / Weighted
average Number of shares outstanding
= ₹ 30,00,000 / 10,00,000 = ₹ 3.00
Basic Loss per share (Discontinued operations) = Loss from discontinued
operations /Weighted average Number of shares outstanding
= ₹ (36,00,000) / 10,00,000 = (₹ 3.60)
Overall Basic Loss per share = (₹ 6,00,000) / 10,00,000 = ₹ (0.60) (i)
Step 2: Calculation of Diluted EPS
Diluted EPS =Profit for the year / Adjusted Weighted average Number of shares
outstanding
EPS (Continued Operations) = Profit from continued operations / Adjusted
Weighted averageNumber of shares outstanding
= ₹ 30,00,000 / 12,00,000 = ₹ 2.50
Loss per share (Discontinued operations) = Loss from discontinued operations / Adjusted
weighted average number of shares outstanding
= ₹ (36,00,000) / 12,00,000 = (₹ 3.00)
Overall Diluted Loss per share = ₹ 6,00,000 / 12,00,000 = ₹ (0.50) (ii)
The income from continuing operations is the control number, there is a dilution in basic
EPS for income from continuing operations (reduction of EPS from ₹ 3.00 to ₹ 2.50). Therefore,
even though there is an anti-dilution [Loss per share reduced from ₹ 0.60 (i) to ₹
0.50 (ii) above], diluted loss per share of ₹ 0.50 is reported.
(b) In case of loss from continuing operations, the potential shares are excluded since
including those shares would result into anti-dilution effect on the control number (loss from
continuing operations). Therefore, the diluted EPS will be calculated as under:
Diluted EPS = Profit for the year / Adjusted weighted average number of shares outstanding
Overall Profit = Loss from continuing operations + Gain from discontinued operations
= ₹ (10,00,000) + ₹ 36,00,000
= ₹ 26,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Weighted average number of shares outstanding = 10,00,000 Diluted EPS = ₹ 2.60
The dilutive effect of the potential common shares on EPS for income from discontinued
operations and net income would not be reported because of the loss from continuing
operations.
Illustration 14 (RTP:MAY ,2019) (MTP:OCTOBER, 2020)
An entity issues 2,000 convertible bonds at the beginning of Year 1. The bonds have a three-year
term and are issued at par with a face value of ₹ 1,000 per bond, giving total proceeds of ₹
2,000,000. Interest is payable annually in arrears at a nominal annual interest rate of 6 per cent.
Each bond is convertible at any time up to maturity into 250 ordinary shares. The entity has an
option to settle the principal amount of the convertible bonds in ordinary shares or in cash.
When the bonds are issued, the prevailing market interest rate for similar debt without a
conversion option is 9 per cent. At the issue date, the market price of one ordinary share is ₹ 3.
Income tax is ignored.
Calculate basic and diluted EPS when
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent entity Year 1 1,000,000
Ordinary shares outstanding 1,200,000
Convertible bonds outstanding 2,000
Solution
Allocation of proceeds of the bond issue:
Liability component (Refer Note 1) 1,848,122
Equity component 151,878
2,000,000
The liability and equity components would be determined in accordance with Ind AS 32. These
amounts are recognised as the initial carrying amounts of the liability and equity components.
The amount assigned to the issuer conversion option equity element is an addition to equity
and is not adjusted.
Basic earnings per share Year 1:
₹1,000,000
1,200,000 =₹ 0.83 per ordinary share
Diluted earnings per share Year 1:
It is presumed that the issuer will settle the contract by the issue of ordinary shares. The dilutive
effect is therefore calculated in accordance with the Standard.
₹1,000,000 + ₹1,66,331 = ₹ 0.69 per ordinary share
1,200,000 + 5,00,000
Notes:
1. This represents the present value of the principal and interest discounted at 9% – ₹
2,000,000 payable at the end of three years; ₹ 120,000 payable annually in arrears for three years.
2. Profit is adjusted for the accretion of ₹ 166,331 (₹ 1,848,122 x 9%) of the liability because
of the passage of time. However, it is assumed that interest @ 6% for the year has already been
adjusted. 500,000 ordinary shares = 250 ordinary shares x 2,000 convertible bonds
Illustration 15
An entity has two classes of shares in issue:
5,000 non-convertible preference shares
10,000 ordinary shares
The preference shares are entitled to a fixed dividend of ₹ 5 per share before any dividends are
paid on the ordinary shares. Ordinary dividends are then paid in which the preference shareholders
do not participate. Each preference share then participates in any additional ordinary dividend

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
above ₹ 2 at a rate of 50% of any additional dividend payable on an ordinary share.
The entity’s profit for the year is ₹ 100,000, and dividends of ₹ 2 per share are declared on the
ordinary shares.
Compute the allocation of earnings for the purpose of calculation of Basic EPS when an entity has
ordinary shares & participating equity instruments that are not convertible into ordinary shares.
Solution
The calculation of basic EPS is as follows:
₹ ₹
Profit 100,000
Less: Dividends payable for the period:
Preference (5,000 × ₹ 5) 25,000
Ordinary (10,000 × ₹ 2) 20,000 (45,000)
Undistributed earnings 55,000
Allocation of undistributed earnings:
Allocation per ordinary share = A
Allocation per preference share = B where B = 50% of A (A × 10,000) + (50% × A × 5,000)
= ₹55,000
A = 55,000 / (10,000 + 2,500) = ₹ 4.4
B = 50% of A
B = ₹ 2.2
Dividend per share are: Preference shares Ordinary shares
₹ per share ₹ per share
Distributed earnings 5.00 2.00
Undistributed earnings 2.20 4.40
Totals 7.20 6.40
Proof: (5,000 × ₹ 7.2) + (10,000 × ₹ 6.4) = ₹100,000
Illustration 16
(This illustration does not illustrate the classification of the components of convertible financial
instrumentsas liabilities and equity or the classification of related interest and dividends as
expenses and equity as required by Ind AS 32).
Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent entity ₹ 100,000
Ordinary shares outstanding 10,000
Non-convertible preference shares 6,000
Non-cumulative annual dividend on preference shares (before any ₹ 5.50 per share
dividend is paid on ordinary shares)
After ordinary shares have been paid a dividend of ₹ 2.10 per share, the preference shares
participate in any additional dividends on a 20:80 ratio with ordinary shares.
Compute the allocation of earnings for the purpose of calculation of Basic EPS when an entity has
ordinary shares & participating equity instruments that are not convertible into ordinary shares.
Solution
Dividends on preference shares paid (6000 x ₹ 5.50 per share) ₹ 33,000
Dividends on ordinary shares paid (10,000 x ₹ 2.10 per share) ₹ 21,000
Basic earnings per share is calculated as follows: ₹ ₹

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent entity 100,000
Less: Dividend paid:
Preference 33,000
Ordinary 21,000 (54,000)
Undistributed earnings 46,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Allocation of undistributed earnings:
Allocation per ordinary share = A
Allocation per preference share = B; B = 1/4 A
(A x 10,000) + (1/4 x A x 6,000) = ₹ 46,000
A = ₹ 46,000 ÷ (10,000 + 1,500)
A = ₹ 4.00
B = 1/4 A
Dividend per share:
Preference shares Ordinary shares
Distributed earnings ₹ 5.50 ₹ 2.10
Undistributed earnings ₹ 1.00 ₹ 4.00
Totals ₹ 6.50 ₹ 6.10
Illustration 17
An entity issues 100,000 ordinary shares of Re 1 each for a consideration of ₹ 2.50 per share.
Cash of ₹ 1.75 per share was received by the balance sheet date. The partly paid shares are entitled
to participatein dividends for the period in proportion to the amount paid.
Calculate number of shares for calculation of Basic EPS
Solution
The number of ordinary share equivalents that would be included in the basic EPS
calculationon a weighted basis is as follows:
(100,000 × ₹ 1.75) / ₹ 2.50 = 70,000 shares.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
ABC Ltd 1 January 20X1 Shares in issue 1,000,00
31 March 20X1 (a) Rights issue 1 for 5 at 90 paise
(b) Fair value of shares ₹ 1 (cum-rights price)
Calculate the number of shares for use in the EPS calculation for the calendar year.
Solution
Rights issue bonus fraction
Shares ₹ per share ₹
Cum-rights 5 1 5.0
Rights 1 0.9 0.9
Ex-rights 6 5.9
Theoretical ex-rights price (5.9 / 6) = 0.9833
Bonus fraction = Cum-rights price / Theoretical ex-rights price = 1/0.9833
Number of shares
1 January - 31 March (1,000,000 × 3/12 × 1/.9833) 254,237
1 April - 31 December (1,200,000 × 9/12) 900,000
1,154,24
Question 02:
1 January Shares in issue 1,000,000
5% Convertible bonds ₹ 100,000
(terms of conversion 120 ordinary shares for ₹ 100)
31 March Holders of ₹ 25,000 bonds converted to ordinary shares.
Profit for the year ended 31 December ₹ 200,000
Tax rate 30%.
Calculate basic and diluted EPS. Ignore the need to split the convertible bonds into liability and
equityelements.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution: -
Number of shares Profit ₹
Profit 200,000
Outstanding shares 1,000,000
New shares on conversion (weighted average)
9/12 × ₹ 25,000 / 100 × 120 22,500 -
Figures for basic EPS 1,022,500 200,000
Basic EPS is (₹ 200,000 / 1,022,500) = 0.196 per share
Dilution adjustments
Unconverted shares ₹ 75,000 / 100 × 120 90,000
Interest: ₹ 75,000 × 5% × 0.7 2,625
Converted shares pre conversion adjustment
3/12 × ₹ 25,000 / 100 × 120 7,500
Interest: [3/12 × ₹ 25,000 × 5% × 0.7] 219
1,120,000 202,844
Diluted EPS is (₹ 202,844 / 1,120,000) = 0.181
Question 03: -
1 January Shares in issue 1,000,000
Profit for the year ended 31 December ₹ 100,000
Average fair value during period ₹8
The company has in issue 200,000 options to purchase equal ordinary shares
Exercise price ₹6
Calculate the diluted EPS for the period.
Solution:
Diluted EPS
Number of Shares Profit (₹) EPS
Basic 1,000,000 100,000 0.10
Dilution (Refer W.N.) 50,000 – –
1,050,000 100,000 0.095
Working Notes:
Proceeds of issue (200,000 × ₹ 6) = 1,200,000
Number that would have been issued at Fair value (1,200,000 / ₹ 8) = 150,000
Number actually issued 200,000
Number for “free” (200,000 – 150,000) 50,000
Question 04:
Calculate Basic EPS for period ending 20X0, 20X1 and 20X2, when
20X0 20X1 20X2
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of theparent ₹ 1,100 ₹ 1,500 ₹ 1,800
entity
Shares outstanding before rights issue 500 shares

Rights issue One new share for each five outstanding shares
Exercise price ₹ 5.00
Date of rights issue 1 January 20X1
Last date to exercise rights 1 March 20X1
Market price of one ordinary share ₹ 11.00
immediately before exercise on 1 March20X1:
Reporting date 31st December

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution: -
Calculation of theoretical ex-rights value per share
Fair value of all outstanding shares before the exercise of rights + total amount received from
exercise of rights
Number of shares outstanding before exercise + number of shares issued in the exercise
(₹11.00 × 500 shares) + (₹5.00 × 100 shares)
500 shares + 100 shares
Theoretical ex-rights value per share = ₹10.00
Calculation of adjustment factor
Fair value per share before exercise of rights ₹ 11.00 = 1.10

Theoretical ex-rights value per share ₹ 10.00
Calculation of basic earnings per share
20X0 20X1 20X2
20X0 Basic EPS as originally reported: ₹1,100 / 500 shares ₹ 2.20
20X0 Basic EPS restated for rights: ₹1,100 / (500 shares x 1.1) ₹ 2.00
20X1 Basic EPS including effects of rights issue: ₹ 2.54
{₹1,500 / [(500 x 1.1 x 2/12) + (600x10/12)]}
20X2 Basic EPS: ₹ 1,800 / 600 shares ₹3.00
Question 05: (mtp apr 2019)
Calculate Subsidiary’s and Group’s Basic EPS and Diluted, when EPS
Parent:
Profit attributable to ordinary equityholders ₹ 12,000 (excluding any earnings of, or dividends
of the parent entity paid by, the subsidiary)
Instruments of subsidiary owned by the 800 ordinary shares
parent
30 warrants exercisable to purchase ordinary shares
of subsidiary
300 convertible preference shares
Subsidiary:
Profit ₹ 5,400
Warrants 150, exercisable to purchase ordinary shares of
the subsidiary
Exercise price ₹ 10
Average market price of one ordinary ₹ 20
share
Convertible preference shares 400, each convertible into one ordinary share
Dividends on preference shares ₹ 1 per share
No inter-company eliminations or adjustments were necessary except for dividends.
Ignore income taxes. Also, ignore classification of the components of convertible financial
instruments as liabilities and equity or the classification of related interest and dividends as
expenses and equity as required by Ind AS 32.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Subsidiary’s earnings per share
Basic EPS ₹ 5.00 calculated: ₹ 5,400 (a) – ₹400 (b)
1000(C)
Diluted EPS ₹ 3.66 calculated: ₹ 5,400 (d)
(1000+75e+400(f))
Notes:
(a) Subsidiary's profit attributable to ordinary equity holders.
(b) Dividends paid by subsidiary on convertible preference shares.
(c) Subsidiary's ordinary shares outstanding.
(d) Subsidiary's profit attributable to ordinary equity holders (₹ 5,000) increased by ₹ 400
preference dividends for the purpose of calculating diluted earnings per share.
(e) Incremental shares from warrants, calculated: [(₹ 20 – ₹ 10) ÷ ₹ 20] × 150.
(f) Subsidiary's ordinary shares assumed outstanding from conversion of convertible
preference shares, calculated: 400 convertible preference shares × conversion factor of
1.
Consolidated earnings per share
Basic EPS ₹ 1.63 calculated: ₹ 12,000(a) + ₹ 4,300(b)
10,000(c)
Diluted EPS ₹ 1.61 calculated: ₹ 12,000 + ₹ 2,928(d) + ₹ 55(e) + ₹ 1,098(f)
10,000
a) Parent's profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent entity.
b) Portion of subsidiary's profit to be included in consolidated basic earnings per share,
calculated: (800 × ₹ 5.00) + (300 × Re 1.00).
c) Parent's ordinary shares outstanding.
d) Parent's proportionate interest in subsidiary's earnings attributable to ordinary shares,
calculated: (800 ÷ 1,000) × (1,000 shares × ₹ 3.66 per share).
e) Parent's proportionate interest in subsidiary's earnings attributable to warrants, calculated:
(30 ÷ 150) × (75 incremental shares × ₹ 3.66 per share).
f) Parent's proportionate interest in subsidiary's earnings attributable to convertible preference
shares, calculated: (300 ÷ 400) × (400 shares from conversion × ₹ 3.66 per share).
MTP.RTP.PAST PAPER
MTP: OCTOBER, 2019
Question:1
i. Mittal Motors Limited is preparing financials for the year ended March 31, 20 X2. The
Company had some queries in preparation of certain data that is required to be presented in
the financials. As the retainer of the Company, please advise the company for the following
issues:
ii. Mittal Motors has issued 10,00,000 numbers of 9% cumulative preference shares. The
Company has arrears of Rs. 15 crores of preference dividend as on March 31, 20X2, it
includes current year arrears of Rs. 1.75 crores. The Company did not declare any dividend
for equity shareholders as well as for preference shareholders. that is the amount of dividend to
be reduced from profit or loss for the year for calculating basic Earnings Per Share?
iii. Further Mittal Motors has also issued certain convertible debentures, which are outstanding
as at the year end. For the purpose of computation of weighted average number of shares
(to arrive at diluted EPS) when should the dilutive potential shares should be deemed to have
been Converted into shares?
(A) At the start of the period.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(B) The date of issue of the potential shares
(C) At the start of the period or, if later, the date of the issue of the potential shares
(D) At the end of the period.
Solution:
I. As per para 14 (b) of Ind AS 33 “Earnings per share”, “The after-tax amount of preference
dividends that is deducted from profit or loss is the after-tax amount of the preference dividends for
cumulative preference shares required for the period, whether or not the dividends have been
declared. The amount of preference dividends for the period does not include the amount of any
preference dividends for cumulative preference shares paid or declared during the current period in
respect of previous periods”.
In the given case, the amount of preference dividends Rs.1.75 crores declared for the year ended
March 31, 20X2 (i.e., the current period) is to be deducted from profit or loss for calculating EPS.
II. As per para 36 of Ind AS 33 “Earnings per share’, “For the purpose of calculating diluted earnings per
share, the number of ordinary shares shall be the weighted average number of ordinary shares plus
the weighted average number of ordinary shares that would be issued on the conversion of all the
dilutive potential ordinary shares into ordinary shares. Dilutive potential ordinary shares shall be
deemed to have been converted into ordinary shares at the beginning of the period or, if later, the
date of the issue of the potential ordinary shares”.
RTP: M A Y ,2020 (MTP APR 2021)
Question:2
CAB Limited is in the process of preparation of the consolidated financial statements of the group for the year ending 31st
March, 20X3 and the extract of the same is as follows:
Particulars Attributable to CAB Limited Non-controlling interest Total (₹ in ₹000)
Profit for the year 39,000 3,000 42,000
Other Comprehensive Income 5,000 Nil 5,000
Total Comprehensive Income 44,000 3,000 47,000
The long-term finance of the company comprises of the following:
I. 20,00,00,000 equity shares at the beginning of the year and the company has issued 5,00,00,000 shares on 1st
July, 20X2 at full market value.
II. 8,00,00,000 irredeemable preference shares. These shares were in issue for the whole of the year ended 31st
March, 20X3. The dividend on these preference shares is discretionary.
₹ 18 crores of 6% convertible debentures issued on 1st April, 20X1 and repayable on 31st March, 20X5 at par.
Interest is payable annually. As an alternative to repayment at par, the holder on maturity can elect to exchange their
convertible debentures for 10 crores ordinary shares in the company. On 1st April, 20X1, the prevailing market interest
rate for four- year convertible debentures which had no right of conversion was 8%. Using an annual discount rate of
8%, the present value of ₹ 1 payable in four years is 0.74 and the cumulative present value of ₹ 1 payable at the end of
years one to four is 3.31.
Compute the following:
1. the finance cost of convertible debentures and its closing balance as on31st March, 20X3 to be presented
in the consolidated financial statements.
2. the basic and diluted earnings per share for the year ended 31 st March, 20X3.Assume that income tax is applicable to
CAB Limited and its subsidiaries at 25%.
Solution:
Calculation of the liability and equity components on 6% Convertible debentures:
Present value of principal payable at the end of 4th year (₹ 1,80,000 thousand x 0.74) = ₹ 1,33,200 thousandPresent
value of interest payable annually for 4 years ( ₹ 1,80,000 thousand x 6% x 3.31) = ₹ 35,748 thousand
Total liability component = ₹ 1,68,948 thousand

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Therefore, equity component = ₹ 1,80,000 thousand – ₹ 1,68,948 thousand = ₹ 11,052thousand
Calculation of finance cost and closing balance of 6% convertible debentures
Year Opening balance Finance cost Interest paid Closing balance
₹ in ’000 @ 8% ₹ in ’000 @ 6% ₹ in ’000 ₹ in ’000
a b = a x 8% c d=a+b-c
31.3.20X2 1,68,948 13,515.84 10,800 1,71,663.84
31.3.20X3 1,71,663.84 13,733.11 10,800 1,74,596.95
Finance cost of convertible debentures for the year ended 31.3. 20X3 is ₹ 13,733.11thousand and closing balanceas
on 31.3. 20X3 is ₹ 1,74,596.95 thousand.
Calculation of Basic EPS ₹ in ’000
Less: Dividend on preference shares (80,000 thousand x ₹ 0.05) (4,000)
Profit attributable to equity shareholders 35,000
Weighted average number of shares = 20,00,00,000 + {5,00,00,000 x (9/12) = 23,75,00,000 shares or 2,37,500 thousand
shares
Basic EPS = ₹ 35,000 thousand / 2,37,500 thousand shares
= ₹ 0.147
Calculation of Diluted EPS ₹ in ’000
Less: Dividend on preference shares (80,000 x 0.05) (4,000)
35,000
Add: Finance cost (as given in the above table) 13,733.11
Less: Tax @ 25% 10,299.83
(3,433.28) 45,299.83
Weighted average number of shares = 20,00,00,000 + {5,00,00,000 x (9/12)} + 10,00,00,000
= 33,75,00,000 shares or 3,37,500 thousand shares
Diluted EPS = ₹ 45,299.83 thousand / 3,37,500 thousand shares = ₹ 0.134
RTP: M A Y , 2018
Question:3
P Ltd. is a subsidiary company of ABC Ltd. It preparing both Separate financial statement (SFS)
and consolidated financial statements (CFS) for the year ending on 31st March, 20XI. It has net
profit after tax of ₹ 20,00,000 as per SFS & ₹ 16,00,000 as per CFS. Share capital of P Ltd. is
2,00,000 shares of ₹ 10 each. ABC Ltd. has acquired 80% shares of P Ltd. Accountant of P Ltd.
had calculated following Basic EPS for its SFS:
Calculation of Basic EPS in its SFS
Net Profit after tax ₹ 16,00,000
Number of equity shares attributable to Parent company ABC Ltd. (2,00,000 1,60,000 shares
x80%)
Basic EPS ₹ 10 per share
Examine the correctness of the above presentation of Basic EPS.
Solution:
As per paragraph 4 of Ind AS 33 “Earnings per Share”, when an entity presents both
consolidated financial statements and separate financial statements prepared in accordance
with Ind AS 110, Consolidated Financial Statements, and Ind AS 27, Separate Financial
Statements, respectively, the disclosures required by this Standard shall be presented both in
the consolidated financial statements and separate financial statements. In consolidated
financial statements such disclosures shall be based on consolidated information and in
separate financial statements such disclosures shall be based on information given in separate
financial statements. An entity shall not present in consolidated financial statements,

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
earnings per share based on the information given in separate financial statements and shall
not present in separate financial statements, earnings per share based on the information
given in consolidated financial statements.
Also, paragraph 9 of the standard states that an entity shall calculate basic earnings per share
amounts for profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent entity and, if
presented, profit or loss from continuing operations attributable to those equity holders.
Further, paragraph A1 of Appendix A of Ind AS 33 states that for the purpose of calculating
earnings per share based on the consolidated financial statements, profit or loss attributable to
the parent entity refers to profit or loss of the consolidated entity after adjusting for non-
controlling Interests.
Therefore. the requirements of paragraph 9 of Ind AS 33 have been provided in the context of
calculating EPS in the consolidated financial statements of an entity.
The accountants of P Ltd. had followed this for calculation of Basic EPS in its SFS. As per
ITFG Bulletin 11, for SFS analogy may be drawn from paragraph 9 of Ind AS 33 that in case of
separate financial statements, the parent entity mentioned in paragraph 9 will imply the legal
entity of which separate financial statements are being prepared and accordingly, when an
entity presents EPS in its separate financial statements, then the same shall be calculated
based on the profit or loss attributable to its equity shareholders.
Hence, the presentation of Basic EPS by the Accountant of P Ltd. on the basis of consolidated
financial statements in its separate financial statements is not correct. The correct presentation
of Basic EPS would be as follows:
Calculation of Basic EPS of P Ltd. in SFS
Net Profit after tax Rs. 20,00,000
No. of share issued 2,00,000 shares
Basic EPS Rs. 10 per share
The following information is available relating to Space India Limited for the Financial Year 2019-2020.
Net profit attributable to equity shareholders ₹ 90,000
Number of equity shares outstanding 16,000
Average fair value of one equity share during the year ₹ 90
Potential Ordinary Shares:
Options 900 options with exercise price of ₹ 75
Convertible Preference Shares 7,500 shares entitled to a cumulative dividend of
₹ 9 per share. Each preference share is convertible into
2equity shares.
Applicable corporate dividend tax 8%
10% Convertible Debentures of ₹ 10,00,000 and each debenture is convertible into 4
₹ 100 each equity shares
Tax rate 25%
You are required to compute Basic and Diluted EPS of the company for the Financial Year 2019-
2020. (8 Marks)
SOLUTION:
(i) Basic Earnings per share
Year ended31.3.2020
Net profit attributable to equity shareholders (A) ₹90,000
Number of equity shares outstanding (B) 16,000
Earnings per share (A/B) ₹5.625

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(ii) Diluted earnings per share
Options are most dilutive as their earnings per incremental share is nil. Hence, for the
purpose of computation of diluted earnings per share, options will be considered first. 10%
convertible debentures being second most dilutive will be considered next and thereafter
convertible preference shares will be considered (as per W.N.).
Net profit No. of Net Profit
attributable to equity equity attributable per
shareholders shares share
Net profit attributable to equity 90,000 16,000 5.625
shareholders
Options 150
90,000 16,150 5.572 Dilutive
10% Convertible debentures 75,000 40,000
1,65,000 56,150 2.939 Dilutive
Convertible Preference Shares 72,900 15,000
2,37,900 71,150 3.344 Anti-Dilutive
Since diluted earnings per share is increased when taking the convertible preference shares
into account (₹ 2.939 to ₹ 3.344), the convertible preference shares are anti- dilutive and are
ignored in the calculation of diluted earnings per share for the year ended 31 March 2020.
Therefore, diluted earnings per share for the year ended 31 March 2020 is ₹2.939.
Working Note:
Calculation of incremental earnings per share and allocation of rank
Increase in Increase in Earnings per Rank
earnings (1) number of equity incremental
shares (2) share(3) = (1) ÷ (2)
Options
Increase in earnings Nil
No. of incremental shares issued for
no consideration [900 x (90-75)/90]
150 Nil 1
Convertible Preference Shares
Increase in net profit attributable to 72,900
equity
shareholders as adjusted by
attributable
dividend tax
[(₹ 9 x 7,500) + 8% (₹ 9 x 7,500)]
No. of incremental shares (2 x 7,500) 15,000 4.86 3
10% Convertible Debentures
Increase in net profit [(₹10,00,000 x 75,000
10% x (1 – 0.25)]
No. of incremental shares (10,000 x 4) 40,000 1.875 2
Note: Grossing up of preference share dividend has been ignored here. At present dividend
distribution tax has been abolished. However, the question has been solved on the basis of the
information given in the question.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 7 - STATEMENT OF CASH FLOW
Illustration 1
Company has provided the following information regarding the various assets held by company on 31st
March20X1. Find out, which of the following items will be part of cash and cash equivalents for the purpose
of preparation of cash flow statement as per the guidance provided in Ind AS 7:
Sr. No. Name of the Security Additional Information
1. Fixed deposit with SBI 12%, 3 years maturity on 1st January 20X4
2. Fixed deposit with HDFC 10%, original term was for 2 years, but due for
maturity on 30th June 20X1
3. Redeemable Preference shares inABC Acquired on 31st January 20X1 and the redemption
ltd is due on 30th April 20X1
4. Cash balances at various banks All branches of all banks in India
5. Cash balances at various banks All international branches of Indian banks
6. Cash balances at various banks Branches of foreign banks outside India
7. Bank overdraft of SBI Fort branch Temporary overdraft, which is payable on demand
8. Treasury Bills 90 days maturity
Solution:
Sr. No. Name of the Security Decision
1. Fixed deposit with SBI Not to be considered – long term
2. Fixed deposit with HDFC Exclude as original maturity is not less than 90 days
from the date of acquisition
3. Redeemable Preference shares Include as due within 90 days from the date of
in ABC Ltd. acquisition
4. Cash balances at various banks Include
7. Bank overdraft of SBI Fort Include (Assumed as integral part of an entity's cash
branch management)
8. Treasury Bills Include
Illustration 2 (RTP:MAY,2021)
From the following transactions, identify which transactions will be qualified for the calculation ofoperating
cash flows, if company is into the business of trading of mobile phones.
Sr. No. Nature of Transaction
1 Receipt from sale of mobile phones
2 Purchases of mobile phones from various companies
3 Employees expenses paid
4 Advertisement expenses paid
5 Credit sales of mobile
6 Miscellaneous charges received from customers for repairs of mobiles
7 Loss due to decrease in market value of the closing stock of old mobile phones
8 Payment to suppliers of mobile phones
9 Depreciation on furniture of sales showrooms
10 Interest paid on cash credit facility of the bank
11 Profit on sale of old computers and printers, in exchange of new laptop and printer
12 Advance received from customers
13 Sales Tax and excise duty paid
Solution:
Sr. No. Nature of Transaction Included / Excluded with reason
1 Receipt from sale of mobile phones Include – main revenue generating activity
2 Purchases of mobile phones from Include- expenses related to main operations
various companies of business
3 Employees expenses paid Include- expenses related to main operations
of business
4 Advertisement expenses paid Include- expenses related to main operations
of business
5 Credit sales of mobile Do not include – Credit transaction will not be
included in cash flow (receipts from
customers will be included)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
6 Misc. charges received from Include – supplementary revenue
customers for repairs of mobiles generatingactivity
7 Loss due to decrease in market value Do not include - Non cash transaction
of the closing stock of old mobile
phones
8 Payment to suppliers of mobile Include – cash outflow related to main
phones operations of business
9 Depreciation on furniture of sales Do not include – non cash item
showrooms
10 Interest paid to cash credit facility of Do not include – cost of finance
the bank
11 Profit on sale of old computers and Do not include – non cash item
printers, in exchange of new laptop
and printer
12 Advance received from customers Include – Related to operations of business
13 Sales tax and excise duty paid Include – related to operations of business
Illustration 3
From the following transactions taken from a private sector bank operating in India, identify which
transactions will be classified as operating and which would be classified as Investing activity.
11 Implementation of upgraded banking software
12 Purchase of shares in 100% subsidiary for opening a branch in Abu Dhabi
13 New cars purchased from Honda dealer, in exchange of old cars and remaining amount
paid in cash
14 Provident fund paid for the employees
15 Issued employee stock options
When a contract is accounted for as a hedge of an identifiable position the cash flows of the
contract are classified in the same manner as the cash flows of the
S. No Nature of transaction paid
1 Interest received on loans
2 Interest paid on Deposits
3 Deposits accepted
4 Loans given to customers
5 Loans repaid by the customers
6 Deposits repaid
7 Commission received
8 Lease rentals paid for various branches
9 Service tax paid
10 Furniture purchased for new branches
Solution
Sr. Nature of transaction paid Operating / Investing / Not to be considered
No.
1 Interest received on loans Operating – Main revenue generating activity
2 Interest paid on Deposits Operating – Main expenses of operations
3 Deposits accepted Operating – in case of financial institutes
4 Loans given to customers Operating – in case of financial institutes
5 Loans repaid by the customers Operating – in case of financial institutes
6 Deposits repaid Operating – in case of financial institutes
7 Commission received Operating – Main revenue generating activity
8 Lease rentals paid for various branches Operating – Main expenses of operations
9 Service tax paid Operating – Main expenses of operations
10 Furniture for new branches Investing – Assets purchased
11 Implementation of upgraded banking Investing – Purchased for long term purpose
software

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
12 Purchase of shares in 100% subsidiary for Investing – strategic investment
opening a branch in Abu Dhabi
13 New cars purchased from Honda dealer, Investing - for cash payment
inexchange of old cars and cash payment
14 Provident fund paid for the employees Operating
15 Issued employee stock options Not to be considered. No cash flow
Illustration 4
From the following transactions taken from a parent company having multiple businesses and multiple
segments, identify which transactions will be classified as Operating, Investing and Financing:
Sr. No Nature of transaction
1 Issued preference shares
2 Purchased the shares of 100% subsidiary company
3 Dividend received from shares of subsidiaries
4 Dividend received from other companies
5 Bonus shares issued
6 Purchased license for manufacturing of special drugs
7 Royalty received from the goods patented by the company
8 Rent received from the let out building (letting out is not main business)
9 Interest received from loans and advances given
10 Dividend paid
11 Interest paid on security deposits
12 Purchased goodwill
13 Acquired the assets of a company by issue of equity shares (not parting any cash)
14 Interim dividends paid
15 Dissolved the 100% subsidiary and received the amount in final settlement
Solution
Sr No. Nature of transaction Operating / Investing /Financing
/Not to be considered
1 Issued preference shares Financing
2 Purchased the shares of 100% subsidiary Investing
company
3 Dividend received from shares of subsidiaries Investing
4 Dividend received from other companies Investing
5 Bonus shares issued No cash flow
6 Purchased license for manufacturing of special Investing
drugs
7 Royalty received from the goods patented by Operating
the company
8 Rent received from the let out building (letting Investing
out is not main business)
9 Interest received from loans and advances Investing
given
10 Dividend paid Financing
11 Interest paid on security deposits Financing
12 Purchased goodwill Investing
13 Acquired the assets of a company by issue of Not to be considered
equity shares (not parting any cash)
14 Interim dividends paid Financing
15 Dissolved the 100% subsidiary and received Investing
the amount in final settlement
Illustration 5
An entity has entered into a factoring arrangement and received money from the factor. Examine the said
transaction and state how should it be presented in the statement of cash flows?
Solution
Under factoring arrangement, it needs to be assessed whether the arrangement is recourse or non-
recourse.
Recourse factoring:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The cash received is classified as a financing cash inflow as the entity continues to recognize the
receivables and the amount received from the factor is indeed a liability, The substance of the
arrangement is financing, as the entity retains substantially all of the risk and rewards of the factored
receivables.
When the cash is collected by the factor, the liability and the receivables are de-recognized. It is
acceptable for this to be disclosed as a non-cash transaction, because the settlement of the liability
and the factored receivables does not result in cash flows. The net impact of these transactions onthe
cash flow statement is to present a cash inflow from financing, but there is no operating cash flowfrom
the original sale to the entity’s customers.
Non-recourse factoring:
Where an entity de-recognises the factored receivables and receives cash from the factor, the cash
receipt is classified as an operating cash inflow. This is because the entity has received cash in
exchange for receivables that arose from its operating activities.
Illustration 6
Find out the cash from operations by direct method and indirect method from the following information:
Operating statement of ABC Ltd. for the year ended 31.3.20X2
Particulars ₹
Sales 5,00,000.00
Less: Cost of goods sold 3,50,000.00
Administration & Selling Overheads 55,000.00
Depreciation 7,000.00
Interest Paid 3,000.00
Loss on sale of asset 2,000.00
Profit before tax 83,000.00
Tax (30,000.00 )
Profit After tax 53,000.00
Balance Sheet as on 31st March
20X2 20X1
Assets
Non-current Assets
Property, Plant and Equipment 75,000.00 65,000.00
Investment 12,000.00 10,000.00
Current Assets
Inventories 12,000.00 13,000.00
Trade receivables 10,000.00 7,000.00
Cash and cash equivalents 6,000.00 5,000.00
Total 1,15,000.00 1,00,000.00
Shareholders’ Funds 50,000.00
60,000.00
Non-current Liabilities 33,000.00 35,000.00
Current Liabilities
Trade Payables 12,000.00 8,000.00
Payables for Expenses 10,000.00 7,000.00
Total 1,15,000.00 1,00,000.00
Solution
Cash flow from Operations by Direct Method
Particulars ₹ See Note
Cash Sales 4,97,000.00 1
Less: Cash Purchases 3,45,000.00 2
Overheads 52,000.00 3
Interest - Financing
Depreciation - Non cash item
Loss on sale of asset - Investing item
Cash profit 100,000.00
Less: Tax (30,000.00)
Cash profit after tax 70,000.00

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Note No 1 - Cash Receipts from Sales and Trade receivables
Particulars ₹
Sales 5,00,000.00
Add: Opening Trade receivables 7,000.00
Less: Closing Trade receivables (10,000.00)
Cash Receipts 4,97,000.00
Note No 2:- Payment to Trade Payables for Purchases

Particulars ₹
Cost of goods sold 3,50,000.00
Closing inventories 12,000.00
Less: Opening inventories (13,000.00)
Purchases 3,49,000.00
Add: Opening Trade Payables 8,000.00
Less: Closing Trade Payables (12,000.00)
Payment to creditors 3,45,000.00
Particulars ₹
Overheads 55,000.00
Add: Opening payables 7,000.00
Less: Closing payables (10,000.00)
Payment for Overheads 52,000.00
Cash flow from Operations by Indirect Method
Indirect Method ₹
Profit After Tax 53,000.00
Add/(Less): Depreciation 7,000.00
Loss on Asset 2,000.00
Interest paid 3,000.00
Decrease in Inventory 1,000.00
Increase in Trade Receivables (3,000.00)
Increase in Trade Payables 4,000.00
Increase in Payables for expenses 3,000.00
Total 70,000.00
Note: Cash flow derived from operations ₹ 70,000 is same in both Direct Method and Indirect Method.
Illustration 7
A firm invests in a five-year bond of another company with a face value of ₹ 10,00,000 by paying ₹
5,00,000.
The effective rate is 15%. The firm recognises proportionate interest income in its income statement
throughout the period of bond.
Based on the above information answer the following question:
(a) How the interest income will be treated in cash flow statement during the period of bond?
(b) On maturity, whether the receipt of ₹ 10,00,000 should be split between interest income and
receipts from investment activity.
Solution:
Interest income will be treated as income over the period of bond in the income statement. However,
there will be no cash flow in these years because no cash has been received. On maturity, receipt of ₹
10,00,000 will be classified as investment activity with a bifurcation of interest income& money
received on redemption of bond.
Illustration 8
X Limited has paid an advance tax amounting to ₹ 5,30,000 during the current year. Out of the above
paid tax, ₹ 30,000 is paid for tax on long term capital gains.
Under which activity the above said tax be classified in the cash flow statements of X Limited?
Solution
Cash flows arising from taxes on income should be classified as cash flows from operating activities
unless they can be specifically identified with financing and investing activities. In the case of X
Limited, the tax amount of ₹ 30,000 is specifically related with investing activities. ₹ 5,00,000 to be
shown under operating activities. ₹ 30,000 to be shown under investing activities.
Illustration 9
X Limited acquires fixed asset of ₹10,00,000 from Y Limited by accepting the liabilities of ₹ 8,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
of Y Limited and balance amount it paid in cash. How X Limited will treat all those items in its cash
flow statements?
Solution:
Investing and financing transactions that do not require the use of cash and cash equivalents shallbe
excluded from a statement of cash flows. X Limited should classify cash payment of ₹ 2,00,000 under
investing activities. The non-cash transactions – liabilities and asset should be disclosed in the notes
to the financial statements.
Illustration 10
An entity has bank balance in foreign currency aggregating to USD 100 (equivalent to ₹ 4,500) at the
beginning of the year. Presuming no other transaction taking place, the entity reported a profit before tax of
₹ 100 on account of exchange gain on the bank balance in foreign currency at the end of the year. What
would be the closing cash and cash equivalents as per the balance sheet?
Solution
For the purpose of statement of cash flows, the entity shall present the following:
Amount (₹)
Profit before tax 100
Less: Unrealised exchange gain (100)
Cash flow from operating activities Nil
Cash flow from investing activities Nil
Cash flow from financing activities Nil
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents during the year Nil
Add: Opening balance of cash and cash equivalents 4,500
Cash and cash equivalents as at the year-end 4,500
Reconciliation of cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents as per statement of cash flows 4,500
Add: Unrealised gain on cash and cash equivalents 100
Cash and cash equivalents as per the balance sheet 4,600
If any changes in the policies take place, that will be dealt with as per the provisions of Ind AS 8.
Illustration 11
Following is the balance sheet of Kuber Limited for the year ended 31 March, 20X2 (₹ in lacs)
20X2 20X1
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 13,000 12,500
Intangible assets 50 30
Other financial assets 145 170
Deferred Tax Asset (net) 855 750
Other non-current assets 800 770
Total non-current assets 14,850 14,220
Current assets
Financial assets
Investments 2,300 2,500
Other current assets 195 85
Total current assets 2,715 3,045
Equity
Equity share capital 300 300
Total equity 12,300 8,300
Liabilities
Long-term borrowings 2,000 5,000
Other non-current liabilities 2,740 3,615

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total non-current liabilities 4,740 8,615
Current liabilities
Bank overdraft 75 60
Other current liabilities 300 200
Total current liabilities 525 350
Total liabilities 5,265 8,965
Total equity and liabilities 17,565 17,265
Additional Information:
(1) Profit after tax for the year ended March 31, 20X2 - ₹ 4,450 lacs
(2) Interim dividend paid during the year - ₹ 450 lacs
(3) Depreciation and amortisation charged in the statement of profit and loss during the current yearare as
under
(a) Property, Plant and Equipment - ₹ 500 lacs
(b) Intangible Assets - ₹ 20 lacs
(4) During the year ended March 31, 20X2 two machineries were sold for ₹ 70 lacs. The carrying
amount of these machineries as on March 31, 20X2 is ₹ 60 lacs.
(5) Income taxes paid during the year ₹ 105 lacs
(6) Other non-current / current assets and liabilities are related to operations of Kuber Ltd. And do
not contain any element of financing and investing activities.
Using the above information of Kuber Limited, construct a statement of cash flows under indirect method.
Solution
₹ in lacs
Cash flows from Operating Activities
Net Profit after Tax 4,450
Add: Tax Paid 105
4,555
Add: Depreciation & Amortisation (500 + 20) 520
Less: Gain on Sale of Machine (70-60) (10)
Less: Increase in Deferred Tax Asset (855-750) (105)
4,960
Change in operating assets and liabilities
Add: Decrease in financial asset (170 - 145) 25
Less: Increase in other non-current asset (800 - 770) (30)
Less: Increase in other current asset (195 - 85) (110)
Less: Decrease in other non-current liabilities (3,615 – (875)
2,740)
Add: Increase in other current liabilities (300 - 200) 100
Add: Increase in trade payables (150-90) 60
4,130
Less: Income Tax (105)
Cash generated from Operating Activities 4,025
Cash flows from Investing Activities
Sale of Machinery 70
Purchase of Machinery [13,000-(12,500 – 500-60)] (1,060)
Purchase of Intangible Asset [50-(30-20)] (40)
Sale of Financial asset - Investment (2,500 – 2,300) 200
Cash outflow from Investing Activities (830)
Cash flows from Financing Activities
Dividend Paid (450)
Long term borrowings paid (5,000 – 2,000) (3,000)
Cash outflow from Financing Activities (3,450)
Net Cash outflow from all the activities (255)
Opening cash and cash equivalents (460 – 60) 400
Closing cash and cash equivalents (220 – 75) 145
Illustration 12
The relevant extracts of consolidated financial statements of A Ltd. are provided below: Consolidated

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
For the year ended (₹ in Lac)
31st March 20X2 31st March 20X1
Assets
Non-Current Assets
Investment in Associate 800 -
Financial Assets 2,150 1,800
Current Assets
Cash and Cash Equivalents 4,650 3,550
Liabilities
Current Liabilities
Extracts from Consolidated Statement of Profit and Loss for the year ended 31st March
Particulars 20X2
Amount (₹ in Lac)
Revenue 12,380
Cost of Goods Sold (9,860)
Gross Profit 2,520
Other Income
300
Operating Expenses (450)
Other expenses (540)
Interest expenses (110)
Share of Profit of Associate
120
Profit before Tax 1,840
The below information is relevant for A Ltd.
1. A Ltd had spent ₹ 30 Lac on renovation of a building. A Ltd charged the entire renovation cost
to profit and loss account.
2. On 1st April 20X1, A Ltd acquired 100% shares in S Ltd, for cash of ₹ 300 Lac. Fair value of the
assets acquired and liabilities assumed under the acquisition are as under:
Property, Plant and Equipment 140 Lac
Inventories 60 Lac
Trade Receivables 30 Lac
Cash and Cash Equivalents 20 Lac
Less: Trade Payables (50 Lac)
Net Assets on acquisition 200 Lac
3. A Ltd.’s property, plant and equipment comprise the following:
Carrying amount on 1st April 20X1 4,650 Lac
Addition (at cost) including assets in S Ltd. 800 Lac
Revaluation Surplus 80 Lac
Disposal (Sale) of Assets (490 Lac)
Depreciation for the year (290 Lac)
Carrying Amount on 31st March 20X2 4,750 Lac
A Ltd constructed a machine that is qualifying asset and incurred construction costs of ₹40 Lac that has
been charged to other expenses. Of the interest cost of ₹110 lac charged to profit or loss statement, ₹10
Lac includes interest cost on specific borrowings that need to be capitalized. Property, plant and
equipment was sold at 630 Lac. Gain on disposal is adjusted against operating expenses.
4. A Ltd. purchased 30% interest in an Associate (G Ltd) for cash on 1st April 20X1. The associate
reported profit after tax of ₹ 400 Lac and paid a dividend of ₹ 100 Lac for the year.
5. Impairment test was conducted on 31st March 20X2. The following were impaired as under:
Goodwill impairment loss: ₹ 265 Lac
Intangible Assets impairment loss ₹ 900
The goodwill impairment relates to 100% subsidiaries. Assume that interest cost is all paid in cash.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
You are required to determine cash generated from operations for group reporting purposes for
the year ended 31st March 20X2.
Solution
Extracts of Statement of Cash Flows for the year ended 31 st March 20X2
Cash Flows from Operating Activities Amount in ₹ Lacs
Profit before tax (W.N.1) 1,920
Less: Profit on Sale of PPE (630 - 490) (140)
Add back: Depreciation 290
Impairment of Goodwill 265
Impairment of Intangible Assets 900
Less: Share of Profits of Associate (400 x30%) (120)
Add: Interest expense [110 – 10] 100
Working Capital Changes (W.N.2):
Add: Decrease in Trade Receivables 580
Add: Decrease in Inventories 410
Less: Decrease in Trade Payables (2,110)
Cash generated from operations 2,095
Working Notes:
1. Profit before tax Amount in ₹ Lacs
Reported profit as per Profit or Loss Statement 1,840
Add back: Renovation costs charged as expense 30
Construction costs charged as expense 40
Borrowing costs to be capitalized 10
Revised Profit before tax 1,920
2. Changes in Trade Receivables Amount in ₹ Lacs
Opening Balance 1,800
Add: Receivables of S Ltd. 30
1,830
Less: Closing Balance (1,250)
580
3. Changes in Inventories Amount in Lacs
1,960
410
4. Changes in Trade Payables Amount in ₹ Lacs
3,660
2,110
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
Use the following data of ABC Ltd. to construct a statement of cash flows using the direct and
indirect methods: (Amount in ₹)
20X2 20X1
Cash 4,000 14,000
Accounts Receivable 25,000 32,500
Prepaid Insurance 5,000 7,000
Inventory 37,000 34,000
Fixed Assets 3,16,000 2,70,000
Accumulated Depreciation (45,000) (30,000)
Total Assets 3,42,000 3,27,500
Accounts Payable 18,000 16,000
Wages Payable 4,000 7,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Debentures 1,73,000 1,60,000
Equity Shares 88,000 84,000
Retained Earnings 59,000 60,500
Total Liabilities & Equity 3,42,000 3,27,500
20X2
Sales 2,00,000
Cost of Goods Sold (1,23,000)
Insurance Expense (11,000)
Wages (50,000)
Net Profit 1,000
During the financial year 20X2 company ABC Ltd. declared and paid dividend of ₹ 2,500. During
20X2, ABC Ltd. paid ₹ 46,000 in cash to acquire new fixed assets. The accounts payable was used
only for inventory. No debt was retired during 20X2.
Solution:
A. DIRECT METHOD
Cash flows from operating activities 20X2
Cash received from customers 2,07,500
Cash paid for inventory (1,24,000)
Cash paid for insurance (9,000)
Cash paid for wages (53,000)
Net cash flow from operating activities 21,500
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of fixed assets (46,000)
Cash flows from financing activities
Dividend paid (2,500)
Proceeds from issuance of debentures 13,000
Proceeds from issue of equity 4,000
Net cash flows from financing activities 14,500
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents (10,000)
Opening Cash Balance 14,000
Closing Cash Balance 4,000
B. INDIRECT METHOD
Cash flows from operating activities 20X2
Net Profit 1,000
Adjustments for Depreciation 15,000
16,000
Decrease in accounts receivable 7,500
Decrease in prepaid insurance 2,000
Increase in inventory (3,000)
Increase in accounts payable 2,000
Decrease in wages payable (3,000)
Net cash flow from operating activities 21,500
Purchase of fixed assets (46,000)
Dividend paid (2,500)
Proceeds from issue of debentures 13,000
Proceeds from issue of equity 4,000
Net cash flows from financing activities 14,500
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents (10,000)
Opening Cash Balance 14,000
Closing Cash Balance 4,000
Working Notes:
Fixed Assets Account
Particulars Amount (₹) Particulars Amount (₹)
To Balance b/d 2,70,000 By Balance c/d 3,16,000
To Cash (Purchase of Fixed
Assets) 46,000
3,16,000 3,16,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Inventory Account
To Balance b/d 34,000 By Cost of goods sold 1,23,000
To Creditors account (credit 2,000 By Balance c/d 37,000
purchase)
To Purchase (Bal. Figure) 1,24,000
1,60,000 1,60,000
Accounts Payable Account
To Balance c/d 18,000 By Balance b/d 16,000
By Inventory Account 2,000
(credit purchase)
18,000 (Bal. Fig.) 18,000
Equity Share Capital Account
To Balance c/d 88,000 By Balance b/d 84,000
By Bank account 4,000
(Proceed from equityshare
issued)
88,000 88,000
Question 02:
From the following summary cash account of XYZ Ltd, prepare cash flow statement for the year ended
March 31, 20X1 in accordance with Ind AS 7 using direct method.
Summary of Bank Account for the year ended March 31, 20X1
₹ ‘000 ₹ ‘000
Balance on 1.4.20X0 50 Payment to creditors 2,000
Issue of Equity Shares 300 Purchase of Fixed Assets 200
Receipts from customers 2,800 Overhead Expenses 200
Sale of Fixed Assets 100 Payroll 100
Tax Payment 250
Dividend 50
Repayment of Bank loan 300
Balance on 31.3.20X1 150
3,250 3,250
Solution:
XYZ Ltd.
Cash Flow Statement for the year ended March 31, 20X1 (Using the Direct Method)
Cash flows from operating activities ₹ 000 ₹ 000
Cash receipts from customers 2,800
Cash payments to suppliers (2,000)
Cash paid to employees (100)
Cash payments for overheads (200)
Cash generated from operations 500
Income tax paid (250)
Net cash from operating activities 250
Cash flow from investing activities
Payments for purchase of fixed assets (200)
Proceeds from sale of fixed assets 100
Net cash used in investing activities (100)
Proceeds from issuance of equity shares 300
Bank loan repaid (300)
Dividend paid (50)
Net cash used in financing activities (50)
Net increase in cash 100
Cash at the beginning of the period 50
Cash at end of the period 150

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Question 03:
Z Ltd. has no foreign currency cash flow for the year 20X1. It holds some deposit in a bank in the
USA. The balances as on 31.12.20X1 and 31.12.20X2 were US$ 100,000 and US$ 102,000
respectively. The exchange rate on December 31, 20 X1 was US$1 = ₹ 45. The same on 31.12.20X2
was US$1 = ₹ 50. The increase in the balance was on account of interest credited on 31.12.20X2.
Thus, the deposit was reported at ₹ 45,00,000 in the balance sheet as on December 31, 20X1. It was
reported at ₹ 51,00,000 in the balance sheet as on 31.12.20X2. How these transactions should be
presented in cash flow for the year ended 31.12.20X2 as per Ind AS 7?
Solution:
The profit and loss account was credited by ₹ 1,00,000 (US $ 2000 × ₹ 50) towards interest income. It was
credited by the exchange difference of US$ 100,000 × (₹ 50 - ₹ 45) that is, ₹ 500,000. In preparing the
cash flow statement, ₹ 500,000, the exchange difference, should be deducted from the net profit
before taxes. However, in order to reconcile the opening balance of the cash and cash equivalents with its
closing balance, the exchange difference ₹ 500,000, should be added to the opening balance in note to
cash flow statement.
Cash flows arising from transactions in a foreign currency shall be recorded in Z Ltd.‘s functional currency
by applying to the foreign currency amount the exchange rate between the functional currency and the
foreign currency at the date of the cash flow.
Question 04: (RTP MAY 2018)
Company A acquires 70% of the equity stake in Company B on July 20, 20X1. The consideration paid
for this transaction is as below:
(a) Cash consideration of ₹ 15,00,000
(b) 200,000 equity shares having face of ₹ 10 and fair value of ₹ 15 per share.
On the date of acquisition, Company B has cash and cash equivalent balance of ₹2,50,000 in its
books of account. On October 10, 20X2, Company A further acquires 10% stake in Company B for
cash consideration of ₹ 8,00,000.
Advise how the above transactions will be disclosed/presented in the statement of cash flows as per
Ind AS 7.
Solution:
As per para 39 of Ind AS 7, the aggregate cash flows arising from obtaining control of subsidiary
shall be presented separately and classified as investing activities.
As per para 42 of Ind AS 7, the aggregate amount of the cash paid or received as consideration for
obtaining subsidiaries is reported in the statement of cash flows net of cash and cash equivalents
acquired or disposed of as part of such transactions, events or changes in circumstances.
Further, investing and financing transactions that do not require the use of cash or cash equivalents
shall be excluded from a statement of cash flows. Such transactions shall be disclosed elsewhere in
the financial statements in a way that provides all the relevant information about these investing and
financing activities.
As per para 42A of Ind AS 7, cash flows arising from changes in ownership interests in a subsidiary
that do not result in a loss of control shall be classified as cash flows from financing activities, unless
the subsidiary is held by an investment entity, as defined in Ind AS 110, and is required to be
measured at fair value through profit or loss. Such transactions are accounted for as equity transactions
and accordingly, the resulting cash flows are classified in the same way as other transactions with
owners.
Considering the above, for the financial year ended March 31, 20X2 total consideration of ₹ 15,00,000
less ₹ 250,000 will be shown under investing activities as “Acquisition of the subsidiary (net of cash
acquired).”
There will not be any impact of issuance of equity shares as consideration in the cash flow statement
however a proper disclosure shall be given elsewhere in the financial statements in a way that
provides all the relevant information about the issuance of equity shares for non - cash consideration.
Further, in the statement of cash flows for the year ended March 31, 20X3, cash consideration paid for
the acquisition of additional 10% stake in Company B will be shown under financing activities.
Question 05: (RTP:MAY,2020)
Entity A acquired a subsidiary, Entity B, during the year. Summarised information from the
Consolidated Statement of Profit and Loss and Balance Sheet is provided, together with some
supplementary information.
Consolidated Statement of Profit and Loss
Amount (₹)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Revenue 3,80,000
Cost of sales (2,20,000)
Gross profit 1,60,000
Other operating expenses (56,000)
Interest cost (4,000)
Profit before taxation 70,000
Taxation (15,000)
Profit after taxation 55,000
Consolidated balance sheet
20X2 20X1
Assets Amount(₹) Amount(₹)
Cash and cash equivalents 8,000 5,000
Property, plant and equipment 1,60,000 80,000
Goodwill 18,000 —
Total assets 2,70,000 1,70,000
Liabilities
Income tax payable 12,000 11,000
Long term debt 1,00,000 64,000
Total liabilities 1,80,000 1,35,000
Shareholders’ equity 90,000 35,000
Total liabilities and shareholders’ 2,70,000 1,70,000
Other information
All of the shares of entity B were acquired for ₹ 74,000 in cash. The fair values of assetsacquired
and liabilities assumed were:
Inventories 4,000
Trade receivables 8,000
Cash 2,000
Trade payables (32,000)
Long term debt (36,000)
Goodwill 18,000
Cash consideration paid 74,000
Prepare the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows for the year 20X2, as per Ind AS 7.
Solution:
This information will be incorporated into the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows as follows:
Statement of Cash Flows for the year ended 20X2 (extract)
Amount (₹) Amount (₹)
Cash flows from operating activities
Adjustments for non-cash items:
Depreciation 30,000
Decrease in inventories (W.N. 1) 9,000
Decrease in trade receivables (W.N. 2) 4,000
Decrease in trade payables (W.N. 3) (24,000)
Interest paid to be included in financing activities 4,000
Taxation (11,000 + 15,000 – 12,000) (14,000)
Net cash generated from operating activities 79,000
Cash paid to acquire subsidiary (74,000 – 2,000) (72,000)
Net cash outflow from investing activities (72,000)
Interest paid (4,000)
Net cash outflow from financing activities (4,000)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Increase in cash and cash equivalents during the year 3,000
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year 5,000
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 8,000
Working Notes:1.
Calculation of change in inventory during the year ₹
Total inventories of the Group at the end of the year 30,000
Inventories acquired during the year from subsidiary (4,000)
26,000
Opening inventories 35,000
Decrease in inventories 9,000
2.
Calculation of change in Trade Receivables during the year ₹
Total trade receivables of the Group at the end of the year 54,000
Trade receivables acquired during the year from subsidiary (8,000)
46,000
Opening trade receivables 50,000
Decrease in trade receivables 4,000
3.
Calculation of change in Trade Payables during the year ₹
Trade payables at the end of the year 68,000
Trade payables of the subsidiary assumed during the year (32,000)
36,000
Opening trade payables 60,000
Decrease in trade payables 24,000
RTP/MTP/PAST PAPERS
RTP: M A Y , 2019
Question 1:
Z Ltd. has no foreign currency cash flow for the year 2017. It holds some deposit in a bank in
the USA. The balances as on 31.12.2017 and 31.12.2018 were US$ 100,000 and
US$ 102,000 respectively. The exchange rate on December 31, 2017 was US$1 = ₹ 45.
The same on 31.12.2018 was US$1 = ₹ 50. The increase in the balance was on account
of interest credited on 31.12.2018. Thus, the deposit was reported at ₹ 45,00,000 in the
balance sheet as on December 31, 2017. It was reported at ₹ 51,00,000 in the balance sheet
as on 31.12.2018. How these transactions should be presented in cash flow for the year
ended 31.12.2018 as per Ind AS 7?
Solution:
The profit and loss account was credited by ₹ 1,00,000 (US$ 2000 × ₹ 50) towards interest income.
It was credited by the exchange difference of US$ 100,000 × (₹ 50 - ₹45) that is, ₹ 500,000. In
preparing the cash flow statement, ₹ 500,000, the exchange difference, should be deducted from
the ‘net profit before taxes, and extraordinary item’. However, in order to reconcile the opening
balance of the cash and cash equivalents with its closing balance, the exchange difference ₹
500,000, should be added to the opening balance in note to cash flow statement.
Cash flows arising from transactions in a foreign currency shall be recorded in Z Ltd.’s
functional currency by applying to the foreign currency amount the exchange rate between
the functional currency and the foreign currency at the date of the cash flow.
Question 2:
Following is the balance sheet of Kuber Limited for the year ended 31st March, 20X2 (₹in lacs)
20X2 20X1
ASSETS
Non-current Assets
Intangible assets 50 30
Other financial assets 145 170
Deferred tax asset (net) 855 750

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Other non-current assets 800 770
Current assets
Financial assets
Investments 2,300 2,500
Other current assets 195 85
Equity
Equity share capital 300 300
Liabilities
Long-term borrowings 2,000 5,000
Other non-current liabilities 2,740 3,615
Current liabilities
Bank Overdraft 75 60
Total current liabilities 525 350
Total Equity and Liabilities 17,565 17,265
(1) Profit after tax for the year ended 31st March, 20X2- ₹4,450 lacs
(2) Interim Dividend paid during the year - ₹450 lacs
(3) Depreciation and amortisation charged in the statement of profit and loss during thecurrent
year are as under
a) Property, Plant and Equipment - ₹500 lacs
b) Intangible Assets - ₹20 lacs
(4) During the year ended 31st March, 20X2 two machineries were sold for ₹ 10 lacs. The carrying
amount of these machineries as on 31st March, 20X2 is ₹60 lacs.
(5) Income taxes paid during the year ₹105 lacs
Using the above information of Kuber Limited, construct a statement of cash flows under indirect
method. Other non-current / current assets and liabilities are related to operations of Kuber Ltd. and
do not contain any element of financing and investing activities.
Solution:
₹in lacs
Cash flows from Operating Activities
Net Profit after Tax 4,450
Add: Tax Paid 105
4,555
Add: Depreciation & Amortisation (500 + 20) 520
Less: Gain on Sale of Machine (70-60) (10)
Less: Increase in Deferred Tax Asset (855-750) (105)
4,960
Change in operating assets and liabilities
Add: Decrease in financial asset (170 - 145) 2
5
Less: Increase in other non-current asset (800 - 770) (30)
Less: Increase in other current asset (195 - 85) (110)
Less: Decrease in other non-current liabilities (3,615 – 2,740) (875)
Add: Increase in other current liabilities (300 - 200) 100
Add: Increase in trade payables (150-90) 60

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
4,130
Less: Income Tax (105)
Cash generated from Operating Activities 4,025
Cash flows from Investing Activities
Sale of Machinery 70
Purchase of Machinery [13,000-(12,500 – 500-60)] (1,060)
Purchase of Intangible Asset [50-(30-20)] (40)
Sale of Financial asset - Investment (2,500 – 2,300) 200
Cash outflow from Investing Activities (830)
Cash flows from Financing Activities
Dividend Paid (450)
Long term borrowings paid (5,000 – 2,000) (3,000)
Cash outflow from Financing Activities (3,450)
Net Cash outflow from all the activities (255)
Opening cash and cash equivalents (460 – 60) 400
Closing cash and cash equivalents (220 – 75) 145
RTP NOV 2020 (MTP MAR 21)

QUESTION 3
During the financial year 2019-2020, Akola Limited have paid various taxes & reproduced the below
mentioned records for your perusal:
- Capital gain tax of ₹ 20 crore on sale of office premises at a sale consideration of ₹ 100 crore.
- Income Tax of ₹ 3 crore on Business profits amounting ₹ 30 crore (assume entire business profit as cash
profit).
- Dividend Distribution Tax of ₹ 2 crore on payment of dividend amounting ₹ 20 crore to its shareholders.
- Income tax Refund of ₹ 1.5 crore (Refund on taxes paid in earlier periods for business profits). You need
to determine the net cash flow from operating activities, investing activities and financing activities of Akola
Limited as per relevant Ind AS.
SOLUTION
Para 36 of Ind AS 7 inter alia states that when it is practicable to identify the tax cash flow with an individual
transaction that gives rise to cash flows that are classified as investing or financing activities the tax cash
flow is classified as an investing or financing activity as appropriate. When tax cash flows are allocated over
more than one class of activity, the total amount of taxes paid is disclosed.
Accordingly, the transactions are analysed as follows:
Particulars Amount (in crore) Activity
Sale Consideration 100 Investing Activity
Capital Gain Tax (20) Investing Activity
Business profits 30 Operating Activity
Tax on Business profits (3) Operating Activity
Dividend Payment (20) Financing Activity
Dividend Distribution Tax (2) Financing Activity
Income Tax Refund 1.5 Operating Activity
Total Cash flow 86.5
Activity wise Amount (in crore)

Operating Activity 28.5
Investing Activity 80
Financing Activity (22)
Total 86.5
MTP: OCTOBER, 2019 (MTP APRIL 2018)

Question 01:
A Ltd., whose functional currency is Indian Rupee, had a balance of cash and cash equivalents of Rs.
2,00,000, but there are no trade receivables or trade payables balances as on 1st April, 20X1. During the
year 20X1-20X2, the entity entered into the following foreign currency transactions:
 A Ltd. purchased goods for resale from Europe for €2,00,000 when the exchange rate was €1 = Rs.
50. This balance is still unpaid at 31st March, 20X2 when the exchange rate is €1 = Rs. 45. An
exchange gain on retranslation of the trade payable of Rs. 5,00,000 is recorded in profit or loss.
 A Ltd. sold the goods to an American client for $ 1,50,000 when the exchange rate was $1 =Rs.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
40. This amount was settled when the exchange rate was $1 = Rs. 42. A further exchange gain
regarding the trade receivable is recorded in the statement of profit or loss.
 A Ltd. also borrowed €1,00,000 under a long-term loan agreement when the exchange rate was
€1 = Rs. 50 and immediately converted it to Rs. 50,00,000. The loan was retranslated at 31st March,
20X2 @ Rs. 45, with a further exchange gain recorded in the statement of profit or loss.
 A Ltd. therefore records a cumulative exchange gain of Rs. 18,00,000 (10,00,000 + 3,00,000 +
5,00,000) in arriving at its profit for the year.
 In addition, A Ltd. records a gross profit of Rs. 10,00,000 (Rs. 60,00,000 – Rs.50,00,000) on the
sale of the goods.
 Ignore taxation.
How cash flows arising from the above transactions would be reported in the statement of cash flows of
A Ltd. under indirect method? (6 Marks)
Solution:
Statement of cash flows
Particulars Amount (Rs.)
Profit before taxation (10,00,000 + 18,00,000) 28,00,000
Adjustment for unrealised exchange gains/losses:
Foreign exchange gain on long term loan
[€ 2,00,000 x Rs. (50 – 45)] (10,00,000)
Decrease in trade payables
[1,00,000 x Rs. (50 – 45)] (5,00,000)
Operating Cash flow before working capital changes 13,00,000
Changes in working capital (Due to increase in trade
payables) 50,00,000
Net cash inflow from operating activities 63,00,000
Cash inflow from financing activity 50,00,000
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 1,13,00,000
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of theperiod 2,00,000
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period 1,15,00,000
NOVEMBER 2020
QUESTION 1
Entity A acquired a subsidiary, Entity B, during the year. Summarised information from the
Consolidated Statement of Profit and Loss and Balance Sheet is provided, together with some
supplementary information.
Consolidated Statement of Profit and Loss
Amount (₹)
Revenue 1,90,000
Cost of sales (1,10,000)
Gross profit 80,000
Other operating expenses (28,000)
Interest cost (2,000)
Taxation (7,500)
Consolidated balance sheet
2020 2019
Assets Amount(₹) Amount(₹)

Cash and cash equivalents 4,000 2,500
Goodwill 9,000 —

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total assets 1,35,000 85,000
Liabilities
Income tax payable 6,000 6,500
Long term debt 50,000 32,000
Shareholders’ equity 45,000 17,500
Total liabilities and shareholders’ 1,35,000 85,000
Other information
All of the shares of entity B were acquired for ₹ 37,000 in cash. The fair values of assetsacquired
and liabilities assumed were:
Inventories 2,000
Cash 1,000
Trade payables (16,000)
Long term debt (18,000)
Goodwill 9,000
Cash consideration paid 37,000
Prepare the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows for the year 20X2, as per Ind AS 7.
Solution:
This information will be incorporated into the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows as follows:
Statement of Cash Flows for the year ended 20X2 (extract)
Amount (₹) Amount (₹)
Depreciation 15,000
Decrease in inventories (W.N. 1) 4,500
Decrease in trade receivables (W.N. 2) 2,000
Decrease in trade payables (W.N. 3) (12,000)
Interest paid to be included in financing activities 2,000
Taxation (5,500 + 7,500 – 6,000) (7,000)
Net cash generated from operating activities 39,500
Cash paid to acquire subsidiary (37,000 – 1,000) (36,000)
Net cash outflow from investing activities (36,000)
Interest paid (2,000)
Net cash outflow from financing activities (2,000)
Increase in cash and cash equivalents during the year 1,500
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year 2,500
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 4,000
Working Notes:1.
Calculation of change in inventory during the year ₹
Total inventories of the Group at the end of the year 15,000
Inventories acquired during the year from subsidiary (2,000)
13,000
Opening inventories 17,500
Decrease in inventories 4,500
2.
Calculation of change in Trade Receivables during the year ₹
Total trade receivables of the Group at the end of the year 27,000
Trade receivables acquired during the year from subsidiary (4,000)
23,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Opening trade receivables 25,000
Decrease in trade receivables 2,000
3.
Calculation of change in Trade Payables during the year ₹
Trade payables at the end of the year 34,000
Trade payables of the subsidiary assumed during the year (16,000)
18,000
Opening trade payables 30,000
Decrease in trade payables 12,000
4.
Calculation of change in Property, plant and equipment (PPE) during the year
Total PPE balance of the Group at the end of the year ₹ 80,000
Less: PPE of the subsidiary acquired during the year (55,000)
25,000
Add: Depreciation 15,000
Closing balance of PPE(before depreciation) 40,000
Opening balance of PPE 40,000
Net change in PPE Nil
5.
Calculation of change in Long term debt during the year
₹ Total long-term debt of the Group at the end of the year 50,000
Less: Long term debt of the subsidiary assumed during the year (18,000)
32,000
Opening balance of long-term debt 32,000
Net change in long term debt Nil
6.
Calculation of change in Shareholders’ equity during the year
Opening balance 17,500
Profit during the year ₹ 27,500
45,000
Closing balance 45,000
Net change in shareholders’ equity Nil
JANUARY 2021
QUESTION 2
Z Ltd. (India) has an overseas branch in USA. It has a bank account having balance of USD 7,000 as on
1st April 2019. During the financial year 2019-2020, Z Ltd. acquired computers for its USA office for USD
280 which was paid on same date. There is no other transaction reported in USA or India.
Exchange rates between INR and USD during the financial year 2019-2020 were:
Date USD 1 to INR
1 st April 2019 70.00
30th November 2019 71.00 (Date of purchase of computer)
31st March 2020 71.50
Average for 2019-2020 70.5
Please prepare the extract of Cash Flow Statement for the year ended 31st March 2020 as per the relevant
Ind AS and also show the foreign exchange profitability from these transactions for the financial year 2019-
2020?
SOLUTION
In the books of Z Ltd.
Statement of Cash Flows for the year ended 31st March 2020

Net Profit (Refer Working Note) 10,360
Foreign Exchange Gain (10,360)
Net cash outflow from operating activities 0
Acquisition of Property, Plant and Equipment (19,880)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Net cash outflow from Investing activities (19,880)
Cash flows from financing activities 0
Net change in cash and cash equivalents (19,880)
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year i.e., 1 st April 2019 4,90,000
Foreign Exchange difference
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year i.e., 31st March 2020 10,360
4,80,480
Working Note:
Computation of Foreign Exchange Gain
Bank Account USD Date USD Exchange Rate
Opening balance 1.4.2019 7,000 70.00 4,90,000
Less: Purchase of Computer 30.11.2019 280 71.00 19,880
Closing balance calculated 6,720 4,70,120
Closing balance (at year end spot rate) 31.3.2020 6,720 71.50 4,80,480
Foreign Exchange Gain credited to Profit
and Loss account 10,360

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 12 - INCOME TAX

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 12 - INCOME TAX
Illustration 1
The directors of H wish to recognise a material deferred tax asset in relation to ₹ 250 Cr of unused
trading losses which have accumulated as at 31st March 20X1. H has budgeted profits for ₹ 80 Cr
for the year ended 31st March 20X2. The directors have forecast that profits will grow by 20% each
year thereafter. However, the improvement in trading results may occur after the next couple of
years to come at the position of breakeven. The market is currently depressed and sales orders are
at a lower level for the first quarter of 20X2 than they were for the same period in any of the previous
five years. H operates under a tax jurisdiction which allows for trading losses to be only carried
forward for a maximum of two years.
Analyse whether a deferred tax asset can be recognized in the financial statements of H for the
year ended31st March 20X1?
Solution
In relation to unused trading losses, the carrying amount is zero since the losses have not yet been
recognised in the financial statements of H. A potential deferred tax asset does arise but the
determination of the tax base is more problematic.
The tax base of an asset is the amount which will be deductible against taxable economic
benefits from recovering the carrying amount of the asset. Where recovery of an asset will
have no tax consequences, the tax base is equal to the carrying amount. H operates under a
tax jurisdiction which only allows losses to be carried forward for two years. The maximum the
tax base could be is therefore equal to the amount of unused losses for years 20X0 and 20X1
since these only are available to be deducted from future profits. The tax base though needs to
be restricted to the extent that there is a probability of sufficient future profits to offset the
trading losses. The directors of H should base their forecast of the future profitability on
reasonable and supportable assumptions. There appears to be evidence that this is not the
case.
H has accumulated trading losses and there is little evidence that there will be an improvement
in trading results within the next couple of years. The market is depressed and sales orders for
the first quarter of 20X2 are below levels in any of the previous five years.
The forecast profitability for 20X2 and subsequent growth rate therefore appear to be
unrealistically optimistic.
Given that losses can only be carried forward for a maximum of two years, it is unlikely that any
deferred tax asset should be recognised.
Hence, the contention of directors to recognized deferred tax assets in relation to ₹250 crores is not
correct.
Illustration 2
On 1st April 20X1, S Ltd. leased a machine over a 5-year period. The present value of lease liability
is ₹ 120 Cr (discount rate of 8%) and is recognized as lease liability and corresponding Right of Use
(RoU) Asset on the same date. The RoU Asset is depreciated under straight line method over the 5
years. The annual lease rentals are ₹ 30 Cr payable starting 31st March 20X2. The tax law permits
tax deduction on the basis of payment of rent. Assuming tax rate of 30%, you are required to
explain the deferred tax consequences for the above transaction for the year ended 31st March
20X2.
Solution
A temporary difference effectively arises between the value of the machine for accounting
purposes and the amount of lease liability, since the rent payment is eligible for tax deduction.
Tax base of the machine is nil as the amount is not eligible for deduction for tax purposes.
Tax base of the lease liability is nil as it is measured at carrying amount less any future

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
tax-deductible amount
Recognition of deferred tax on 31st March 20X2:

Carrying amount in balance sheet
RoU Asset (120 Cr – 24 Cr (Depreciation)) ₹ 96.00 Dr

Lease Liability (120 Cr + 9.60 Cr (120 Cr x 8%) - 30 Cr) ₹ 99.60 Cr
Net Amount ₹ 3.60 Cr
Tax Base ₹ 0.00 Cr
Temporary Difference (deductible) ₹ 3.60 Cr
Deferred Tax asset to be recognized (₹3.60 Cr x 30%) ₹ 1.08 Cr
Illustration 3
On 1 April 20X1, A Ltd. acquired 12 Cr shares (representing 80% stake) in B Ltd. by means of a
cash payment of ₹ 25 Cr. It is the group policy to value the non-controlling interest in subsidiaries at
the date of acquisition at fair value. The market value of an equity share in B Ltd. at 1 April 20X1
can be used for this purpose. On 1 April 20X1, the market value of a B Ltd. share was ₹ 2.00 On 1
April 20X1, the individual financial statements of B Ltd. showed the net assets at ₹ 23 Cr.
The directors of A Ltd. carried out a fair value exercise to measure the identifiable assets and
liabilitiesof B Ltd. at 1 April 20X1. The following matters emerged:
– Property having a carrying value of ₹ 15 Cr at 1 April 20X1 had an estimated market
value of ₹ 18 Cr at that date.
– Plant and equipment having a carrying value of ₹ 1 Cr at 1 April 20X1 had an estimated
market value of ₹ 13 Cr at that date.
– Inventory in the books of B Ltd. is shown at a cost of ₹ 2.50 Cr. The fair value of the
inventory on the acquisition date is ₹ 3 Cr.
The fair value adjustments have not been reflected in the individual financial statements of BLtd.
In the consolidated financial statements, the fair value adjustments will be regarded as temporary
differences for the purposes of computing deferred tax. The rate of deferred tax to apply to
temporary differences is 20%.
Calculate the deferred tax impact on above and calculate the goodwill arising on acquisition of B
Ltd.
Solution
Purchase Consideration: ₹ 25 Cr
Non-Controlling Interest [{(12 Cr x (20% / 80%)} x ₹2 per share] ₹6 Cr
Computation of Net Assets of B Ltd.
As per books ₹23.00 Cr
Add: Fair value differences not recognized in books of B Ltd.:
Property (18 Cr – 15 Cr) ₹ 3.00 Cr
Plant and Equipment (13 Cr – 11 Cr) ₹ 2.00 Cr
Inventory (3 Cr – 2.5 Cr) ₹ 0.50 Cr
₹ 28.5 Cr
Less: Deferred tax liability on fair value difference @ 20%
[(3 Cr + 2 Cr + 0.50 Cr) x 20%] (₹1.10 Cr)
Total Net Assets at Fair Value ₹27.40 Cr
Computation of Goodwill:
Purchase Consideration ₹ 25.00 Cr
Add: Non-Controlling Interest ₹ 6.00 Cr
₹ 31.00 Cr
Less: Net Assets at Fair Value (₹27.40 Cr)
Goodwill on acquisition date 3.60 cr

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Illustration 4
On 1st April 20X1, P Ltd. had granted 1 Cr share options worth ₹ 4 Cr subject to a two-year vesting
period. The income tax law permits a tax deduction at the exercise date of the intrinsic value of the
options. The intrinsic value of the options at 31st March 20X2 was ₹ 1.60 Cr and at 31st March
20X3 was ₹ 4.60 Cr. The increase in the fair value of the options on 31st March 20X3 was not
foreseeable at 31st March 20X2. The options were exercised at 31st March 20X3.
Give the accounting for the above transaction for deferred tax for period ending 31st March,
20X2and 31st March, 20X3. Assume that there are sufficient taxable profits available in future
against any deferred tax assets. Tax rate of 30% is applicable to P Ltd.
Solution:
On 31st March 20X2:
The tax benefit is calculated as under:
Carrying amount of Share based payment ₹ 0.00 Cr
Tax Base of Share based payment (₹ 1.60 Cr x ½) ₹ 0.80 Cr
Temporary Difference (Carrying amount – tax base) ₹ 0.80 Cr

Deferred Tax Asset recognized (Temporary Difference x Tax rate)
(0.80 Cr x 30%) ₹ 0.24 Cr
Journal Entry for above:
Deferred Tax Asset Dr. ₹ 0.24 Cr
To Tax Expense ₹ 0.24 Cr
(Being DTA recognized on equity option)
On 31st March 20X3:
The options have been exercised and a current tax benefit will be available to the entity on the
basis of intrinsic value of ₹ 4.60 Cr. Initially recognized deferred tax asset will no longer be
required.
The accounting entry will be done as under:
Tax Expense Dr ₹ 0.24 Cr
To Deferred Tax Asset ₹ 0.24 Cr
(Being DTA reversed on the exercise of the option)
A’s Ltd. profit before tax according to Ind AS for Year 20X1-20X2 is ₹ 100 thousand and taxable
profit for year 20X1-20X2 is ₹ 104 thousand. The difference between these amounts arose as follows:
1. On 1st February, 20X2, it acquired a machine for ₹ 120 thousand. Depreciation is charged on the
machine on a monthly basis for accounting purpose. Under the tax law, the machine will be
depreciated for 6 months. The machine’s useful life is 10 years according to Ind AS as well as for
tax purposes. In the year 20X1-20X2, expenses of ₹ 8 thousand were incurred for charitable
donations. These are not deductible for tax purposes. Prepare necessary entries as at 31st March
20X2, taking current and deferred tax into account. The tax rate is 25%. Also prepare the tax
reconciliation in absolute numbers as well as the tax rate reconciliation.
Solution
Current tax= Taxable profit x Tax rate = ₹104 thousand x 25% = ₹26 thousand.
Computation of Taxable Profit:
₹in thousand
Accounting profit 100
Add: Donation not deductible 8
Less: Excess Depreciation (6-2) (4)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total Taxable profit 104
₹ in thousand ₹ in thousand
Profit & loss A/c Dr. 26
To Current Tax 26
Deferred tax:
Machine’s carrying amount according to Ind AS is ₹ 118 thousand (₹ 120 thousand – ₹ 2 thousand)
Machine’s carrying amount for taxation purpose = ₹ 114 thousand (₹ 120 thousand – ₹6 thousand)
Deferred Tax Liability = ₹4 thousand x 25%
₹ in thousand
Profit & loss A/c Dr. 1
To Deferred Tax Liability
1
Tax reconciliation in absolute numbers:
₹ in thousand
Profit before tax according to Ind AS 100
Applicable tax rate @ 25%
Tax 25
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes (₹ 8 thousand x 25%) 2
Tax expense (Current and deferred) 27
Tax rate reconciliation
Applicable tax rate 25%
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 2%
Average effective tax rate 27%
Illustration 6
An entity has a deductible temporary difference of ₹ 50,000. It has no taxable temporary differences
against which it can be offset. The entity is also not anticipating any future profits. However, it can
implement a tax planning strategy which can generate profits up to ₹ 60,000. The cost of
implementing this tax planning strategy is ₹ 12,000. The tax rate is 30%. Compute the deferred tax
asset that should be recognised.
Solution
The entity should recognise a deferred tax asset of ₹ 14,400 @ 30% of ₹ 48,000 (₹ 60,000
– 12,000). The balance deferred tax asset of ₹ 600 @ 30% on ₹ 2,000 (₹ 50,000 – ₹ 48,000) shall remain
unrecognised.
Illustration 7
A Limited recognises interest income in its books on accrual basis. However, for income tax
purposes the method is ‘cash basis”. On December 31, 20X1, it has interest receivable of ₹ 0,000
and the tax rate was 25%. On 28th February, 20X2, the finance bill is introduced in the legislation
that changes the tax rate to 30%. The finance bill is enacted as Act on 21st May, 20X2. Discuss
the treatment of deferred tax in case the reporting date of A Limited’s financial statement is 31st
December, 20X1 and these are approved for issued on 31st May, 20X2.
Solution
The difference of ₹ 10,000 between the carrying value of interest receivable of ₹ 10,000 and its
taxbase of NIL is a taxable temporary difference.
A Limited has to recognise a deferred tax liability of ₹ 2,500 (₹ 10,000 x 25%) in its financial
statements for the reporting period ended on December 31, 20X1.
It will not recognise the deferred tax liability @ 30% because as on December 31, 20X1, this tax
rate was neither substantively enacted or enacted on the reporting date. However, if the effect

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
of this change is material, A Limited should disclose this difference in its financial statements.
Illustration 8
A Ltd prepares financial statements to 31 March each year. The rate of income tax applicable
to A Ltd is 20%. The following information relates to transactions, assets and liabilities of A Ltd
during the year ended 31 March 20X2:
(i) A Ltd has a 40% shareholding in L Ltd. A Ltd purchased this shareholding for ₹ 45 Cr. The
shareholdinggives A Ltd significant influence over L Ltd but not control and therefore A Ltd. accounts
for its interest in L Ltd using the equity method. The equity method carrying value of A Ltd’s
investment in L Ltd was ₹ 70 Cr on 31 March 20X1 and ₹ 75 Cr on 31 March 20X2. In the tax
jurisdiction in which A Ltd operates, profits recognised under the equity method are taxed if and
when they are distributed as a dividend or the relevant investment is disposed of.
(ii) A Ltd. measures its head office building using the revaluation model. The building is revalued
every year on 31 March. On 31 March 20X1, carrying value of the building (after revaluation) was ₹
40 Cr and its tax base was ₹ 22 Cr. During the year ended 31 March 20X2, A Ltd charged
depreciation in its statement of profit or loss of ₹ 2 Cr and claimed a tax deduction for tax
depreciation of ₹ 1.25 Cr. On 31 March 20X2, the building was revalued to ₹ 45 Cr. In the tax
jurisdiction in which A Ltd operates, revaluation of property, plant and equipment does not affect
taxable income at the time of revaluation.
Basis the above information, you are required to compute:
(a) The deferred tax liability of A Ltd at 31 March 20X2
(b) The charge or credit to both profit or loss and other comprehensive income relating to deferred
tax for the year ended 31 March 20X2
Solution:
(A) Deferred Tax Liability as at 31st March 20X2Investment in L Ltd:
Carrying Amount = ₹75 Cr
Tax base = ₹45 Cr (Purchase cost)
Temporary Difference = ₹30 Cr
Since carrying amount is higher than the tax base, the temporary difference is recognized as a
taxable temporary difference. Using the tax rate of 20%, a deferred tax liability of ₹ 6 Cr is
recognized:
Head office building
Carrying Amount = ₹ 45 Cr (Revalued amount on 31st of March 20X2)
Tax base = ₹ 20.75 Cr (22 Cr – 1.25 Cr)
Temporary Difference = ₹ 24.25 Cr
Since carrying amount is higher than the tax base, the temporary difference is recognized as a
taxable temporary difference. Using the tax rate of 20%, a deferred tax liability of ₹ 4.85 Cr is created.
Total Deferred Tax Liability ₹ 6 Cr + ₹ 4.85 Cr = ₹ 10.85 Cr
(B) Charge to Statement of Profit or Loss for the year ended 31st March 20X2:
Investment in LLtd.
Particulars Carrying Tax Base Temporary
amount Difference
Opening Balance (1st April 20X1) ₹ 70 Cr ₹ 45 Cr ₹ 25 Cr
Closing Balance (31st March 20X2) ₹ 75 Cr ₹ 45 Cr ₹ 30 Cr
Net Change ₹ 5 Cr
Increase in Deferred Tax Liability (20% tax rate) ₹ 1 Cr
Considering the increase in the value of investment arising through Statement of Profit or Loss,

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
the accounting for the increase in deferred tax liability is made as under:
Tax expense (Profit or Loss Statement) Dr ₹ 1 Cr
To Deferred Tax Liability ₹ 1 Cr
(Being increase in deferred tax liability recognized)
Head Office Building:
The deferred tax liability at 31 March 20X1 is ₹ 3.6 Cr (20% x {₹ 40 Cr – ₹ 22 Cr}).
At 31 March 20X2, prior to revaluation, the carrying amount of the property is ₹ 38 Cr and its
tax base is ₹ 20.75 Cr (₹ 22 Cr – ₹ 1.25 Cr). The deferred tax liability at this point is ₹ 3.45 Cr (20%x
{₹ 38 Cr – ₹ 20.75 Cr}).
The reduction in this liability is ₹ 0.15 Cr (₹ 3.6 Cr – ₹ 3.45 Cr). This would be credited to income
taxexpense in arriving at profit or loss.
Post revaluation, the carrying value of the building becomes ₹ 45 Cr and the tax base stays the
same. Therefore, the new deferred tax liability is ₹ 4.85 Cr (20% x (₹ 45 Cr – ₹ 20.75 Cr)). The
increase in the deferred tax liability of ₹ 1.4 Cr (₹ 4.85 Cr – ₹ 3.45 Cr) is charged to other
Illustration 9
K Ltd prepares consolidated financial statements to 31st March each year. During the year ended
31st March 20X2, K Ltd entered into the following transactions:
(a) On 1st April 20X1, K Ltd purchased an equity investment for ₹ 2,00,000. The investment was
designated as fair value through other comprehensive income. On 31st March 20X2, the fair value of the
investment was ₹ 2,40,000. In the tax jurisdiction in which K Ltd operates, unrealised gains and
losses arising on the revaluation of investments of this nature are not taxable unless the investment
is sold. K Ltd has nointention of selling the investment in the foreseeable future.
(b) On 1st August 20X1, K Ltd sold products to A Ltd, a wholly owned subsidiary operating in
the same tax jurisdiction as K Ltd, for ₹ 80,000. The goods had cost to K Ltd for ₹ 64,000. By 31st
March 20X2, A Ltd had sold 40% of these goods, selling the remaining during next year.
(c) On 31st October 20X1, K Ltd received ₹ 2,00,000 from a customer. This payment was in
respect of services to be provided by K Ltd from 1st November 20X1 to 31st July 20X2. K Ltd
recognised revenue of ₹ 1,20,000 in respect of this transaction in the year ended 31st March 20X2
and will recognise the remainder in the year ended 31st March 20X3. Under the tax jurisdiction in
which K Ltd operates, ₹ 2,00,000 received on 31st October 20X1 was included in the taxable profits
of K Ltd for the year ended31st March 20X2.
Explain and show how the tax consequences (current and deferred) of the three transactions would
be reported in its statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended
31st March 20X2. Assume tax rate to be 25%.
Solution:
(a) Because the unrealised gain on revaluation of the equity investment is not taxable until
sold, there are no current tax consequences. The tax base of the investment is ₹ 2,00,000. The
revaluation creates a taxable temporary difference of ₹40,000 (₹2,40,000 – ₹2,00,000).
This creates a deferred tax liability of ₹ 10,000 (₹ 40,000 x 25%). The liability would be non-
current. The fact that there is no intention to dispose of the investment does not affect the
accounting treatment. Because the unrealised gain is reported in other comprehensive income,
the related deferred tax expense is also reported in other comprehensive income.
(b) When K Ltd sold the products to A Ltd, K Ltd would have generated a taxable profit of
₹ 16,000 (₹80,000 – ₹64,000). This would have created a current tax liability for K Ltd and the group
of ₹ 4,000 (₹ 16,000 x 25%). This liability would be shown as a current liability and charged as an
expense in arriving at profit or loss for the period.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
In the consolidated financial statements, the carrying value of the unsold inventory would be
₹ 38,400 (₹ 64,000 x 60%). The tax base of the unsold inventory would be ₹ 48,000(₹ 80,000 x
60%). In the consolidated financial statements, there would be a deductible temporary
difference of ₹ 9,600 (₹ 38,400 – ₹ 48,000) and a potential deferred tax asset of ₹ 2,400 (₹ 9,600 x
25%). This would be recognised as a deferred tax asset since A Ltd is expected to generate
sufficient taxable profits against which to utilise the deductible temporary difference. The
resulting credit would reduce consolidated deferred tax expensein arriving at profit or loss.
(c) The receipt of revenue in advance on 1st October 20X1 would create a current tax
liability of ₹ 50,000 (₹ 200,000 x 25%) as at 31st March 20X2. The carrying value of the revenue
received in advance at 31st March 20X2 is ₹ 80,000 (₹ 200,000 – ₹ 120,000). Its tax base is nil. The
deductible temporary difference of ₹ 80,000 would create a deferred tax asset of ₹ 20,000 (₹ 80,000
x 25%). The asset can be recognised because K Ltd has sufficient taxable profits against which to
utilise the deductible temporary difference.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 1: -
An asset which cost ₹ 150 has a carrying amount of ₹ 100. Cumulative depreciation for tax
purposes is ₹ 90 and the tax rate is 25%. Calculate the tax base and the corresponding deferred tax
or liability, if any.
Solution: -
The tax base of the asset is ₹ 60 (cost of ₹ 150 less cumulative tax depreciation of ₹ 90). To recover
the carrying amount of ₹ 100, the entity must earn taxable income of ₹ 100, but will only be able
to deduct tax depreciation of ₹60. Consequently, the entity will pay income taxes of ₹ 10(₹ 40 at
25%) when it recovers the carrying amount of the asset. The difference between thecarrying amount
of ₹ 100 and the tax base of ₹ 60 is a taxable temporary difference of ₹ 40. Therefore, the entity
recognises a deferred tax liability of ₹ 10 (₹ 40 at 25%) representing the income taxes that itwill pay
when it recovers the carrying amount of the asset.
Question 2: -
On 1st April 20X1, ABC Ltd acquired 100% shares of XYZ Ltd for ₹ 4,373 crore. By 31st March,
20X5, XYZ Ltd had made profits of ₹ 5 crore, which remain undistributed. Based on the tax
legislation in India, the tax base investment in XYZ Ltd is its original cost. Assume the dividend
distribution tax rate applicable is 15%. Show deferred tax treatment.
Solution: -
A taxable temporary difference of ₹ 5 therefore exists between the carrying value of the investment
in XYZ at the reporting date of ₹ 4,378 (₹ 4,373 + ₹ 5) and its tax base of ₹ 4,373. Since a parent,by
definition, controls a subsidiary, it will be able to control the reversal of this temporary difference, for
example - through control of the dividend policy of the subsidiary. Therefore, deferred tax onsuch
temporary difference is generally not provided unless it is probable that the temporary will reverse in
the foreseeable future
Question 3: -
ABC Ltd. acquired 50% of the shares in PQR Ltd. on 1st January, 20X1 for ₹1000 crore. By
31st March, 20X5 PQR Ltd. had made profits of ₹ 50 crore (ABC Ltd.'s share), which remained
undistributed. Based on the tax legislation in India, the tax base of the investment in PQR Ltd. is its
original cost. Assume the dividend distribution tax rate applicable is 15%. Show deferred tax
treatment.
Solution: -
A taxable temporary difference of ₹ 50 therefore exists between the carrying value of the
investment in PQR at the reporting date of ₹ 1,050 (₹ 1,000 + ₹ 50) and its tax base of ₹

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
1,000. As ABC Ltd. does not completely control PQR Ltd. it is not in a position to control the
dividend policy of PQR Ltd. As a result, it cannot control the reversal of this temporary
difference and deferred tax is provided on temporary differences arising on investments in joint
venture (50 x 15%).
Question 4: - A company had purchased an asset at ₹ 1,00,000. Estimated useful life of the
asset is 5 years and depreciation rate is 20% SLM. Depreciation rate for tax purposes is 25% SLM.
The operating profit is ₹ 1,00,000 for all the 5 years. Tax rate is 30% for the next 5 years. Calculate
the Book Value as per financial and tax purposes and then DTL.
Solution: - Calculation of the Book Value as per financial and tax purposes.
Financial Accounting: ₹ 000’s
Year 1 2 3 4 5
Gross Block 100 100 100 100 100
Accumulated Depreciation 20 40 60 80 100
Carrying Amount 80 60 40 20 0
Tax Accounting: ₹ 000’s
Year 1 2 3 4 5
Gross Block 100 100 100 100 100
Accumulated Depreciation 25 50 75 100 100
Calculation of DTL: ₹ 000’s
Year 1 2 3 4 5
Tax Base 75 50 25 0 0
Difference 5 10 15 20 0
Deferred Tax Liability (Difference x 30%) 1.5 3 4.5 6 0
Question 5:
A Ltd. acquired B Ltd. The following assets and liabilities are acquired in a business combination:
Fair Value Carrying Temporary Difference
amount
Plant and Equipment 250 260 (10)
Inventory 120 125 (5)
Debtors 200 210 (10)
570 595 (25)
9% Debentures (100) (100)
470 495
Consideration paid 500 500
Goodwill 30 5 (25)
Calculate Deferred Tax Asset.
Solution: -
In this case there is a Deferred Tax Asset as the Tax base of assets acquired is higher by
25,000. DTA would be ₹7,500 (25,000 x 30%)
Journal entry:
Plant and equipment Dr 250
Inventory Dr 120
Debtors Dr 200
Goodwill Dr 22.5 (30- 7.5)
DTA Dr 7.5
To 9% Debentures 100
To Bank 500

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Question 6: -
B Limited is a newly incorporated entity. Its first financial period ends on 31st March, 20X1. As
on the said date, the following temporary differences exist:
• Taxable temporary differences relating to accelerated depreciation of ₹ 9,000. These are
expected to reverse equally over next 3 years.
• Deductible temporary differences of ₹ 4,000 expected to reverse equally over next 4years. It
is expected that B Limited will continue to make losses for next 5 years. Tax rate is 30%.
Losses can be carried forward but not backwards.
Discuss the treatment of deferred tax as on 31st March, 20X1.
Solution: -
The year-wise anticipated reversal of temporary differences is as under:
Particulars Year ending Year endingYear Year
on 31st on 31s endingon ending
March,20X2 March,20X3 31st on 31st
March,20X4 March,
20X5
Reversal of taxable temporary
Difference relating to accelerated
depreciation over next 3 years (₹
9,000/3) 3,000 3,000 3,000 Nil
Reversal of deductible temporary
difference relating to preliminary
expenses over next 4 years 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
(₹4,000/4)
B Limited will recognise a deferred tax liability of ₹ 2,700 on taxable temporary difference
relatingto accelerated depreciation of ₹9,000 @ 30%.
However, it will limit and recognise a deferred tax asset on reversal of deductible temporary
difference relating to preliminary expenses reversing up to year ending 31st March, 20X4
amountingto ₹ 900 (₹ 3,000 @ 30%). No deferred tax asset shall be recognized for the reversal of
deductible
temporary difference for the year ending on 31st March, 20X5 as there are no taxable temporary
differences. Further, the outlook is also a loss. However, if there are tax planning opportunities
that could be identified for the year ending on 31st March, 20X5 deferred tax asset on the
remainderof ₹ 1,000 (₹ 4,000 – ₹ 3,000) of deductible temporary difference could be recognised atthe
30% tax rate.
Question 7: -
X Ltd. prepares consolidated financial statements to 31st March each year. During the year
ended 31st March 2018, the following events affected the tax position of the group:
(i) Y Ltd., a wholly owned subsidiary of X Ltd., made a loss adjusted for tax purposes
of ₹ 30,00,000. Y Ltd. is unable to utilise this loss against previous tax liabilities. Income- tax
Act does not allow Y Ltd. to transfer the tax loss to other group companies. However, it allows
Y Ltd. to carry the loss forward and utilise it against company’s future taxable profits. The
directors of X Ltd. do not consider that Y Ltd. will make taxable profits in the foreseeable future.
(ii) Just before 31st March, 2018, X Ltd. committed itself to closing a division after the year
end, making a number of employees redundant. Therefore, X Ltd. recognised a provision for
closure costs of ₹ 20,00,000 in its statement of financial position as at 31st March, 2018. Income-

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
tax Act allows tax deductions for closure costs only when the closure actually takes place. In
the year ended 31st March 2019, X Ltd. expects to make taxable profits which are well in
excess of ₹ 20,00,000. On 31st March, 2018, X Ltd. had taxable temporary differences fromother
sources which were greater than ₹20,00,000.
(iii) During the year ended 31st March, 2017, X Ltd. capitalised development costs which
satisfied the criteria in paragraph 57 of Ind AS 38 ‘Intangible Assets’. The total amount
capitalised was ₹16,00,000. The development project began to generate economic benefits for
X Ltd. from 1st January, 2018. The directors of X Ltd. estimated that the project would
generate economic benefits for five years from that date. The development expenditure was
fully deductible against taxable profits for the year ended 31st March, 2018.
(iv) On 1st April, 2017, X Ltd. borrowed ₹ 1,00,00,000. The cost to X Ltd. of arranging the
borrowingwas ₹ 2,00,000 and this cost qualified for a tax deduction on 1st April, 2017. The
loan wasfor a three-year period. No interest was payable on the loan but the amount repayable
on 31st March, 2020 will be ₹ 1,30,43,800. This equates to an effective annual interest rate of
10%. As per the Income-tax Act, a further tax deduction of ₹ 30,43,800 will be claimable when
the loan is repaid on 31st March, 2020.
Explain and show how each of these events would affect the deferred tax assets / liabilities in
the consolidated balance sheet of X Ltd. group at 31st March, 2018 as per Ind AS. Assume the
rate of corporate income tax is 20%.
Solution: -
(i) The tax loss creates a potential deferred tax asset for the group since its carrying value is
nil and its tax base is ₹30,00,000.
However, no deferred tax asset can be recognised because there is no prospect of being
able to reduce tax liabilities in the foreseeable future as no taxable profits are anticipated.
(ii) The provision creates a potential deferred tax asset for the group since its carrying value
is ₹20,00,000 and its tax base is nil.
This deferred tax asset can be recognised because X Ltd. is expected to generate taxable
profits in excess of ₹20,00,000 in the year to 31st March, 2019.
The amount of the deferred tax asset will be ₹4,00,000 (₹20,00,000 x 20%).
This asset will be presented as a deduction from the deferred tax liabilities caused by the
(larger)taxable temporary differences.
(iii) The development costs have a carrying value of ₹ 15,20,000 (₹ 16,00,000 –
(₹16,00,000x 1/5 x 3/12)).
The tax base of the development costs is nil since the relevant tax deduction has already
been claimed.
The deferred tax liability will be ₹3,04,000 (₹15,20,000 x 20%). All deferred tax liabilities are
shown as non-current.
(iv) The carrying value of the loan at 31st March, 2018 is ₹ 1,07,80,000 (₹ 1,00,00,000 –
₹2,00,000 + (₹98,00,000 x 10%)).
The tax base of the loan is ₹1,00,00,000.
This creates a deductible temporary difference of ₹ 7,80,000 (₹ 1,07,80,000 – ₹1,00,00,000)
and a potential deferred tax asset of ₹1,56,000 (₹7,80,000 x 20%).
Due to the availability of taxable profits next year (see part (ii) above), this asset can be
recognised as a deduction from deferred tax liabilities.
Question 8: - (RTP:MAY,2019)
PQR Ltd., a manufacturing company, prepares consolidated financial statements to 31st March
each year. During the year ended 31st March, 2018, the following events affected the tax

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
position of the group:
 QPR Ltd., a wholly owned subsidiary of PQR Ltd., incurred a loss adjusted for tax
purposes of ₹ 30,00,000. QPR Ltd. is unable to utilise this loss against previous tax liabilities.
Income-tax Act does not allow QPR Ltd. to transfer the tax loss to other group companies.
However, it allows QPR Ltd. to carry the loss forward and utilise it against company’s future
taxable profits. The directors of PQR Ltd. do not consider that QPR Ltd. will make taxable
profits in the foreseeable future.
 During the year ended 31st March, 2018, PQR Ltd. capitalised development costs which
satisfied the criteria as per Ind AS 38 ‘Intangible Assets’. The total amount capitalised was ₹
16,00,000. The development project began to generate economic benefits for PQR Ltd.
from 1st January,2018. The directors of PQR Ltd. estimated that the project would generate
economic benefits for five years from that date. The development expenditure was fully
deductible against taxable profits for the year ended 31st March, 2018.
 On 1st April, 2017, PQR Ltd. borrowed ₹ 1,00,00,000. The cost to PQR Ltd. of arranging the
borrowing was ₹ 2,00,000 and this cost qualified for a tax deduction on 1st April 2017. The
loan was for a three-year period. No interest was payable on the loan but the amount
repayable on 31st March 2020 will be ₹ 1,30,43,800. This equates to an effective annual
interest rate of 10%.As per the Income-tax Act, a further tax deduction of ₹ 30,43,800 will be
claimable when the loan is repaid on 31st March, 2020.
Explain and show how each of these events would affect the deferred tax assets / liabilities in
the consolidated balance sheet of PQR Ltd. group at 31st March, 2018 as per Ind AS. The rate
of corporate income tax is 30%.
Solution: -
Impact on consolidated balance sheet of PQR Ltd. group at 31st March, 2018
• The tax loss creates a potential deferred tax asset for the PQR Ltd. group since its
carrying value is nil and its tax base is ₹ 30,00,000. However, no deferred tax asset can
be recognised because there is no prospect of being able to reduce tax liabilities in the
foreseeable future as no taxable profits are anticipated.
• The development costs have a carrying value of ₹ 15,20,000 (₹ 16,00,000 – (₹16,00,000 x
1/5 x 3/12)). The tax base of the development costs is nil since the relevant tax deduction
has already been claimed. The deferred tax liability will be ₹ 4,56,000 (₹15,20,000 x 30%).
All deferred tax liabilities are shown as non-current.
• The carrying value of the loan at 31st March, 2018 is ₹ 1,07,80,000 (₹ 1,00,00,000 – ₹ 200,000 +
(₹ 98,00,000 x 10%)). The tax base of the loan is 1,00,00,000. This creates a deductible
temporary difference of ₹ 7,80,000 and a potential deferred tax asset of ₹2,34,000(₹7,80,000 x
30%).
Question 9: - (RTP: NOVEMBER ,2019)
An entity is finalising its financial statements for the year ended 31st March, 20X2. Before 31st
March, 20X2, the government announced that the tax rate was to be amended from 40 per
cent to 45 per cent of taxable profit from 30th June, 20X2.
The legislation to amend the tax rate has not yet been approved by the legislature. However,
the government has a significant majority and it is usual, in the tax jurisdiction concerned, to
regard an announcement of a change in the tax rate as having the substantive effect of actual
enactment (i.e., itis substantively enacted).
After performing the income tax calculations at the rate of 40 per cent, the entity has the
following deferred tax asset and deferred tax liability balances:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Deferred tax asset ₹ 80,000
Deferred tax liability ₹ 60,000
Of the deferred tax asset balance, ₹ 28,000 related to a temporary difference. This deferred tax
asset had previously been recognised in OCI and accumulated in equity as a revaluation surplus.
The entity reviewed the carrying amount of the asset in accordance with para 56 of Ind AS 12
and determined that it was probable that sufficient taxable profit to allow utilisation of the
deferred tax asset would be available in the future.
Show the revised amount of Deferred tax asset & Deferred tax liability and present the necessary
journal entries.
Solution: -
Calculation of Deductible temporary differences:
Deferred tax asset = ₹80,000
Existing tax rate = 40%
Deductible temporary differences = 80,000/40%
= ₹2,00,000
Calculation of Taxable temporary differences:
Deferred tax liability = ₹60,000
Existing tax rate = 40%
Deductible temporary differences = 60,000 / 40%
= ₹1,50,000
Of the total deferred tax asset balance of ₹ 80,000, ₹ 28,000 is recognized in OCI Hence, Deferred
tax asset balance of Profit & Loss is ₹ 80,000 - ₹ 28,000 = ₹ 52,000 Deductible temporary difference
recognized in Profit & Loss is ₹1,30,000 (52,000 / 40%) Deductible temporary difference
recognized in OCI is ₹70,000 (28,000 / 40%)
The adjusted balances of the deferred tax accounts under the new tax rate are:
Deferred tax asset ₹
Previously credited to OCI-equity ₹70,000 x 0.45 31,500
Previously recognised as Income ₹ 1,30,000 x 0.45 58,500
90,000
Deferred tax liability
Previously recognized as expense ₹ 1,50,000 x 0.45 67,500
The net adjustment to deferred tax expense is a reduction of ₹ 2,500. Of this amount, ₹ 3,500 is
recognised in OCl and ₹1,000 is charged to P&L.
The amounts are calculated as follows:
Carrying Carrying Increase (decrease)in
amount at amount at40% deferred tax
45% expense
Deferred tax assets
Previously credited to OCI-equity 31,500 28,000 (3,500)
Previously recognised as Income 58,500 52,000 (6,500)
90,000 80,000 (10,000)
Deferred tax liability
Previously recognized as expense 67,500 60,000 7,500
Net adjustment (2,500)
An alternative method of calculation is: ₹

DTA shown in OCI ₹ 70,000 x (0.45 - 0.40) 3,500
DTA shown in Profit or Loss ₹ 1,30,000 x (0.45-0.40) 6,500
DTL shown in Profit or Loss ₹ 1,50,000 x (0.45 -0.40) 7,500

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Journal Entries
₹ ₹
Deferred tax asset 3,500
OCI –revaluation surplus 3,500
Deferred tax asset 6,500
Deferred tax expense 6,500
Deferred tax expense 7,500
Deferred tax liability 7,500
Alternatively, a combined journal entry may be passed as follows:
₹ ₹
Deferred tax asset Dr. 10,000
Deferred tax expense Dr. 1,000
To OCI –revaluation surplus 3,500
To Deferred tax liability 7,500
MTP: MARCH, 2019
Question 01:
QA Ltd. is in the process of computation of the deferred taxes as per applicable Ind AS and
wants guidance on the tax treatment for the following:
(i) QA Ltd. does not have taxable income as per the applicable tax laws, but pays 'Minimum
Alternate Tax’ (MAT) based on its books profits. The tax paid under MAT can be carried
forward for the next 10 years and as per the Company's projections submitted to its
bankers, it is in a position to get credit for the same by the end of eighth year. The
Company is recognising the MAT credit as a current asset under IGAAP. The amount of
MAT credit as on 31st March, 2016 is Rs. 8.5 crores and as on 31st March, 2017 is Rs.
9.75 crores;
(ii) The Company measures its head office property using the revaluation model. The property
is revalued every year as on 31st March. On 31st March, 2016, the carrying value of the
property (after revaluation) was Rs. 40 crores whereas its tax base was Rs. 22 crores.
During the year ended 31st March, 2017, the Company charged depreciation in its
Statement of Profit and Loss of Rs. 2 crores and claimed a tax deduction for tax
depreciation of Rs. 1.25 crores. On 31st March, 2017, the property was revalued to Rs.45
crores. As per the tax laws, the revaluation of Property, Plant & Equipment does not affect
taxable income at the time of revaluation.
The Company has no other temporary differences other than those indicated above. The
Company wants you to compute the deferred tax liability as on 31st March, 2017 and the
charge/credit to the Statement of Profit and Loss and/or Other Comprehensive Income for the
same. Consider the tax rate at 20%. (10 Marks)
Solution:
Computation of Deferred Tax Liability
(i) MAT credit as on 31st December of Rs. 9.75 crore will be presented in the Balance Sheet as Deferred
taxasset. DTA in the current year will be Rs. 1.25 crore (Rs. 9.75 crore – Rs. 8.50 crore)
(ii) (a) In case defer tax is created only on account of depreciation
Carrying Value as Tax Taxable/ Total Credit to
value per tax bas (deductible) Deferred tax P&L during
without records e temporary liability/ the year
revaluation difference (asset)@20%

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
A b c d E= b-d F = e x20% g
31st March, 2016 22 crores 22 crores 22 crores nil nil nil
Less: Depreciation for the year (2 crore) (1.25
2016-17 crore)
Carrying value as on 31 st 20 crores 20.75 20.75 (0.75 crore) DTA DTA
March, 2017 crore crore (0.15 crore) (0.15 crore)
(b) Computation of tax effect taking into account the revalued figures and adjusting impact of tax effect on
account
of difference in depreciation
S. Carrying Value Tax Taxable /Total Credit to Charged to
No. value as per base (deductible) Deferred tax P&L OCI during the
after tax temporary liability/ during year
revaluation records difference (asset) @20% the year
a b c d E= b-d F = e x20% g h
I 31st March,2016 40 crores 22 22 18 crores DTL 3.6 - DTL 3.6
crore crores crore crore
IV Revalued again 45 crores 20.75 20.75 24.25 crore DTL 4.85 DTA DTL 5 crore
on 31.3.2017 (It Crore crore crore (0.15 (Refer Note
(22- crore)
is assumed that below) [5
1.25) (Refer
revaluation has DTL (B/F) –
table
been done after 0.15 DTA =
(a)above)
taking into 4.85 DTL]
consideration the
impact of
depreciation for
the
current year)
V Additional DTL 1.25 DTA DTL (1.40
DTL/DTA crore (0.15 crore) (Refer
required during the crore) Note below)
year (IV-I) (Refer
table (a))
Note:
As per para 65 of Ind AS 12, when an asset is revalued for tax purposes and that revaluation is related to an
accounting revaluation of an earlier period, or to one that is expected to be carried out in a future period, the tax
effects on account of revaluation of asset and the adjustment of the tax base are recognised in other comprehensive
income in the periods in which they occur.
Here, it is important to understand that only the tax effects on account of revaluation of asset and the adjustment of the
tax base are recognised in other comprehensive income. However, tax effects on account of depreciation of
asset and the adjustment of the tax base are recognized in profit and loss.
Accordingly, first of all the tax effect has been calculated assuming that there is no revaluation (Refer Table (a) above)
[Since the information for the carrying value before revaluation has not been mentioned, it is assumed to be equal to the
carrying amount as per the tax records]. Later the DTA arrived due to difference in depreciation is adjusted with the
DTL created due to revaluation. DTA of Rs. 0.15 crore on account of depreciation will be charged to Profit and Loss and
DTL of Rs. 1.40 crore will be charged to OCI. Net effect in the year 31.3.2017 will be DTL 1.25 crore (DTL 1.4 crore-
DTA 0.15 crore) [Refer Table (b) above.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
MTP: AUGUST, 2018
Question 2:
QA Ltd. is in the process of computation of the deferred taxes as per applicable Ind AS. QA Ltd. had acquired 40%
shares in GK Ltd. for an aggregate amount of Rs. 45 crores. The shareholding gives QA Ltd. significant influence
over GK Ltd. but not control and therefore the said interest in GK Ltd. is accounted using the equity method.
Under the equity method, the carrying value of investment in GK Ltd. was Rs. 70 crores on 31st March, 2017
and Rs. 75 crores as on31st March, 2018. As per the applicable tax laws, profits recognised under the equity method
are taxedif and when they are distributed as dividend or the relevant investment is disposed of.
QA Ltd. wants you to compute the deferred tax liability as on 31st March, 2018 and the charge to the Statement of
Profit for the same. Consider the tax rate at 20%.
Solution:
DT Value as Tax base Taxable Total deferred ChargedtoP/L
Carrying Temporary Tax liability Duringtheyear
value per tax
records differences @ 20%
a b c d E= b-d F = e x 20% g
31st March,2017 70 crores 45 crores 45 crores 25 5 crores 5 crores
crores
31st March,2018 75 crores 45 crores 45 crores 30 6 crores 1 crore
crores (6 crore – 5
crore)
RTP: NOVEMBER ,2019
Question 3:
Jeevan India Limited is in the business of development of smart city. For development of smart city,
Jeevan India Limited allots its land to customer on 99 years of lease. The customer is required to pay
lease premiumat the time of execution of lease deed and lease rent on annual basis over a period
of 99 years.
The lease premium amount is the market value of land and lease rent is nominal amount say ₹ 1 per
square metre per year. The lease premium is non-refundable. As per the lease terms, on completion
of 99 years, the lease is renewable at mutual consent of lessor and lessee.
How would income in respect of lease premium collected by Jeevan India Limited (which is the
market value of land and is not refundable) at the time of execution of lease deed be recognised as
per Ind AS, if forsubsequent years, only nominal lease rent is collected.
Solution:
Paragraph 5 of Ind AS 115 scopes out revenue arising from lease agreements. Principles
enunciated under Ind AS 17, Leases would be applicable for revenue arising from leasing
agreements.
Recognition of income in respect of lease would depend on its classification as per IndAS 17,
Leases.
If the lease of land is an operating lease, then it will be accounted for as given below:
- Lessors shall present assets subject to operating leases in their balance sheet according to the
nature of the asset.
- Lease income from operating leases shall be recognised in income on a straight- line basis
over the lease term, unless either:
(a) another systematic basis is more representative of the time pattern in which use
benefit derived from the leased asset is diminished, even if the payments to the
lessors are not on that basis; or
(b) the payments to the lessor are structured to increase in line with expected general
inflation to compensate for the lessor’s expected inflationary cost increases. If

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
payments to the lessor vary according to factors other than inflation, then this
condition is not met.
The long lease term may be an indication that the lease is classified as a finance lease.
If it is a finance lease then lessor Jeevan India Ltd. shall recognise assets held under a
finance lease in their balance sheets and present them as a receivable at an amount equal to
thenet investment in the lease. The recognition of finance income shall be based on a pattern
reflecting a constant periodic rate of return on the lessor’s net investment in the finance
lease.
Nominal lease rent collected every year will also be accounted every year on accrual basis.
RTP:MAY,2021
Question 4:
The entity has an identifiable asset ASSOTA with a carrying amount of ₹ 10,00,000. Its recoverable amount is ₹ 6,50,000. The
tax base of ASSOTA is ₹ 8,00,000 and the tax rate is 30%. Impairment losses are not tax deductible. Entity expects to
continue to earn profits in future.
For the identifiable asset ASSOTA, what would be the impact on the deferred tax asset/ liability at the end of the
period?
Solution:
As per Ind AS 36, the revised carrying amount of asset ASSOTA would be ₹6,50,000. The tax base of asset
ASSOTA is given as ₹8,00,000.
Carrying base of asset = ₹6,50,000
Tax base of asset = ₹8,00,000
Since tax base is greater than carrying base of asset, so deferred tax asset would be created on the temporary
difference of ₹1,50,000 (₹8,00,000 – ₹6,50,000) at the given tax rate of 30%.
Hence, Deferred tax asset for the asset ASSOTA would be ₹1,50,000 x 30% = ₹45,000.
RTP: NOV 2020
QUESTION 5
On 1 January 2020, entity H acquired 100% share capital of entity S for ₹15,00,000. The book
values and the fair values of the identifiable assets and liabilities of entity S at the date of
acquisition are set out below, together with their tax bases in entity S’s tax jurisdictions. Any
goodwill arising on the acquisition is not deductible for tax purposes. The tax rates in entity H’s and
entity S’s jurisdictions are 30% and 40% respectively
Acquisitions Book values ₹’000 Tax base ₹’000 Fair values
₹’000
Land and buildings 600 500 700
Property, plant and equipment 250 200 270
Inventory 100 100 80
Accounts receivable 150 150 150
Accounts payable (160) (160) (160)
Retirement benefit obligations (100) - (100)
You are required to calculate the deferred tax arising on acquisition of Entity S. Also calculate the
Goodwill arising on acquisition.
SOLUTION
Calculation of Net assets acquired (excluding the effect of deferred tax liability):
Net assets acquired Tax base ₹’000 Fair values ₹’000
Land and buildings 500 700
Inventory 100 80
Accounts receivable 150 150

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Accounts payable (160) (160)
Retirement benefit obligations - (100)
Net assets before deferred tax liability 920 1070
Calculation of deferred tax arising on acquisition of entity S and goodwill
Fair values of S’s identifiable assets and 1,070
liabilities (excluding deferred tax)
Less: Tax base (920)
Temporary difference arising on acquisition 150
Net deferred tax liability arising on 60
acquisition of entity S (₹150,000 @ 40%)
Purchase consideration 1,500
Less: Fair values of entity S’s identifiable
1,070
assets and liabilities (excluding deferred tax)
Deferred tax liability (1,010)
(60)
Goodwill arising on acquisition 490
Note: Since, the tax base of the goodwill is nil, taxable temporary difference of ₹4,90,000 arises on
goodwill. However, no deferred tax is recognised on the goodwill. The deferred tax on other
temporary differences arising on acquisition is provided at 40% and not 30%, because taxes will be
payable or recoverable in entity S’s tax jurisdictions when the temporary differences will be
reversed.
RTP NOV 2018
QUESTION
X Ltd. prepares consolidated financial statements to 31st March each year. During the year ended
31st March 2018, the following events affected the tax position of the group:
(i) Y Ltd., a wholly owned subsidiary of X Ltd., made a loss adjusted for tax purposes of ₹
30,00,000. Y Ltd. is unable to utilise this loss against previous tax liabilities. Income-tax Act
does not allow Y Ltd. to transfer the tax loss to other group companies. However, it allows Y
Ltd. to carry the loss forward and utilise it against company’s future taxable profits. The
directors of X Ltd. do not consider that Y Ltd. will make taxable profits in the foreseeable
future.
(ii) Just before 31st March, 2018, X Ltd. committed itself to closing a division after the year end,
making a number of employees redundant. Therefore X Ltd. recognised a provision for
closure costs of ₹ 20,00,000 in its statement of financial position as at 31st March, 2018.
Income-tax Act allows tax deductions for closure costs only when the closure actually takes
place. In the year ended 31 March 2019, X Ltd. expects to make taxable profits which are
well in excess of ₹ 20,00,000. On 31st March, 2018, X Ltd. had taxable temporary
differences from other sources which were greater than ₹ 20,00,000
(iii) During the year ended 31 March 2017, X Ltd. capitalised development costs which satisfied
the criteria in paragraph 57 of Ind AS 38 ‘Intangible Assets’. The total amount capitalised
was ₹ 16,00,000. The development project began to generate economic benefits for X Ltd.
from 1st January 2018. The directors of X Ltd. estimated that the project would generate
economic benefits for five years from that date. The development expenditure was fully
deductible against taxable profits for the year ended 31 March 2018.
(iv) On 1 April 2017, X Ltd. borrowed ₹ 1,00,00,000. The cost to X Ltd. of arranging the
borrowing was ₹ 2,00,000 and this cost qualified for a tax deduction on 1 April 2017. The
loan was for a three-year period. No interest was payable on the loan but the amount
repayable on 31 March 2020 will be ₹ 1,30,43,800. This equates to an effective annual
interest rate of 10%. As per the Income-tax Act, a further tax deduction of ₹ 30,43,800 will

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
be claimable when the loan is repaid on 31st March, 2020. Explain and show how each of
these events would affect the deferred tax assets / liabilities in the consolidated balance
sheet of X Ltd. group at 31 March, 2018 as per Ind AS. Assume the rate of corporate income
tax is 20%
SOLUTION
(i) The tax loss creates a potential deferred tax asset for the group since its carrying value is nil
and its tax base is ₹ 30,00,000. However, no deferred tax asset can be recognised because
there is no prospect of being able to reduce tax liabilities in the foreseeable future as no
taxable profits are anticipated.
(ii) The provision creates a potential deferred tax asset for the group since its carrying value is
₹ 20,00,000 and its tax base is nil. This deferred tax asset can be recognised because X Ltd.
is expected to generate taxable profits in excess of ₹ 20,00,000 in the year to 31st March,
2019. The amount of the deferred tax asset will be ₹ 4,00,000 (₹ 20,00,000 x 20%). This
asset will be presented as a deduction from the deferred tax liabilities caused by the (larger)
taxable temporary differences.
(iii) The development costs have a carrying value of ₹ 15,20,000 (₹ 16,00,000 – (₹ 16,00,000 x1/5
x 3/12)). The tax base of the development costs is nil since the relevant tax deduction has
already been claimed. The deferred tax liability will be ₹ 3,04,000 (₹ 15,20,000 x 20%). All
deferred tax liabilities are shown as non-current.
(iv) The carrying value of the loan at 31st March, 2018 is ₹ 1,07,80,000 (₹ 1,00,00,000 – ₹
2,00,000 + (₹ 98,00,000 x 10%)). The tax base of the loan is ₹ 1,00,00,000. This creates a
deductible temporary difference of ₹ 7,80,000 (₹ 1,07,80,000 – ₹ 1,00,00,000) and a
potential deferred tax asset of ₹ 1,56,000 (₹ 7,80,000 x 20%).
Due to the availability of taxable profits next year (see part (ii) above), this asset can be
recognised as a deduction from deferred tax liabilities.
Parent Limited, prepares consolidated financial statements of the group on 31 March every year.
During the year ended 31 March 2020, the following events affected the tax position of the group:
(i) S Limited, a wholly owned subsidiary of Parent Limited, incurred a loss of ₹ 20,00,000 which is
adjustable from future taxable profits of the company for tax purposes. S Limited is unable to
utilize this loss against previous tax liabilities. Income Tax Act does not allow S Limited to transfer
the tax loss to other group companies. However, it allows S Limited to carry forward the loss and
utilize it against company's future taxable profits. The directors of Parent Limited estimate that S
Limited will not make any taxable profits in the foreseeable future.
(ii) On 1 April 2019, Parent Limited borrowed ₹ 50,00,000. The cost incurred by Parent Limited for
arranging the borrowing was ₹ 1,00,000 on the said date and this expenditure is qualified for
deduction under the Income Tax Act for the accounting year 2019-2020. The loan was given for a
three-year period. As per agreement, no principal or interest was payable on the loan during the tenure
of loan but the amount repayable on 31 March 2022 will be by way of a bullet payment of ₹
65,21,900. Asper Parent Limited, this equates to an effective annual interest rate of 10% on loan.
As per the Income-tax Act, a further expense of ₹ 15,21,900 will be claimable from taxable income till
the loan is repaid on 31 March 2022.
The rate of corporate income tax to be assumed @ 20%.
Explain and show how each of these events would affect the deferred tax assets/liabilities in the
consolidated balance sheet of Parent Limited as at31 March 2020 as per applicable Ind AS.
You are also required to examine whether the effective rate of interest arrived at by Parent Limited for the
loan of ₹ 50,00,000 is in accordance with applicable Ind AS or not? (6 Marks)
SOLUTION:
(i) The tax loss creates a potential deferred tax asset for the group since its carrying value is nil and

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
its tax base is ₹20,00,000.
However, no deferred tax asset can be recognised because there is no prospect of being able to
reducetax liabilities in the foreseeable future as no taxable profits are anticipated.
(ii) The carrying value of the loan at 31 March 2020 is ₹ 53,90,000 (₹ 50,00,000 – ₹ 1,00,000 + (₹49,00,000 x 10%)).
The tax base of the loan is ₹50,00,000.
This creates a deductible temporary difference of ₹ 3,90,000 (₹ 53,90,000 – ₹ 50,00,000) and a potential
deferred tax asset of ₹78,000 (₹3,90,000 x 20%).
If there are prospects of availability of taxable profits in future, deferred tax asset can be recognised.
Amortisation Table for verification of effective rate of interest
Year Opening balance (₹) (A) Interest @ 10% (₹) (B) Closing balance (₹) (A) + (B)
1 (50,00,000 – 1,00,000) 49,00,000 4,90,000 53,90,000
2 53,90,000 5,39,000 59,29,000
3 59,29,000 5,92,900 65,21,900
Since the closing balance calculated as per the above table on the basis of 10% matches with the
bullet payment of ₹ 65,21,900, it assures that 10% rate of interest taken as effective rate of interest
is correct and is in accordance with Ind AS 109. It considers the impact of cost of borrowing
adjusted from the loan amount at initial recognition
QUESTION 2 (JANUARY 2021)
C Ltd. acquired D Ltd. The following assets and liabilities are acquired in a business combination:
Fair Value Carrying amount Temporary Difference
Plant and Equipment 500 510 (10)
Inventory 130 150 (20)
Debtors 200 210 (10)
Loans and advances 80 85 (5)
910 955 (45)
9% Debentures (200) (200)
710 755
Consideration paid 760 760
Goodwill 50 5 (45)
Calculate Deferred Tax Asset.
Solution: -
In this case there is a Deferred Tax Asset as the Tax base of assets acquired is higher by
25,000. DTA would be ₹7,500 (25,000 x 30%)
Journal entry: (‘000)
Plant and equipment Dr 500
Inventory Dr 130
Debtors Dr 200
Loans and advances Dr 80
Goodwill Dr 38.75 (50- 11.25)
DTA Dr 11.25
To 9% Debentures 200
To Bank 760

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
INDAS 102-SHARE BASED PAYMENT
Illustration 1-Equity Settled Shared Based Payment- Service conditions
ABC Limited granted to its employees, share options with a fair value of ₹5,00,000 on 1st April, 20X0,
if they remain in the organization up to 31st March, 20X3. On 31st March, 20X1, ABC Limited
expects only 91% of the employees to remain in the employment. On 31st March, 20X2, company
expects only 89% of the employees to remain in the employment. However, only 82% of the employees
remained in the organisation at the end of March, 20X3 and all of them exercised their options. Pass the
Journal entries?
Solution:
Period Proportion Fair value To be vested Cumulative Expenses
expenses
a b C d= b x c x a e = d-previous period d
Period 1 1/3 5,00,000 91% 1,51,667 1,51,667
Period 2 2/3 5,00,000 89% 2,96,667 1,45,000
Period 3 3/3 5,00,000 82% 4,10,000 1,13,333
4,10,000
Journal Entries
31st March, 20X1
Employee benefits expenses Dr. 1,51,667
To Share based payment reserve (equity) 1,51,667
(1/3 of expected vested equity instruments value)
31st March, 20X2
(2/3 of expected vested equity instruments value)
31st March, 20X3
(Final vested equity instruments value)
Share based payment reserve (equity) Dr. 4,10,000
To Share Capital 4,10,000
(re-allocated and issued shares)
Illustration 2 - Cash Settled Shared Based Payment-Service conditions
XYZ issued 10,000 Share Appreciation Rights (SARs) that vest immediately to its employees on 1st April,
20X0. The SARs will be settled in cash. Using an option pricing model, at that date it is estimated that the
fair value of a SAR is ₹ 95. SAR can be exercised any time up to 31st March, 20X3. At the end of period
on 31st March, 20X1 it is expected that 95% of total employees will exercise the option, 92% of total
employees will exercise the option at the end of next year and finally 89% were exercised at the end of the
Fair value of SAR ₹

31st March, 20X1 112
3rd year. Fair Values at the end of each period have been given below:
Pass the Journal entries?

Solution
Period Fair value To be vested Cumulative Expense
a b c= a x b x 10,000 d= c-prev. period c
Start 95 100% 9,50,000 9,50,000
Period 1 112 95% 10,64,000 1,14,000
Period 2 109 92% 10,02,800 (61,200)
Period 3 114 89% 10,14,600 11,800
10,14,600

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Journal Entries
st
1 April, 20X0
To Share based payment liability
(Fair value of the SAR recognized) 9,50,000
31st March, 20X1
To Share based payment liability (Fair
value of the SAR re-measured) 1,14,000
31st March, 20X2
Share based payment liability Dr. 61,200
To Employee benefits expenses
(Fair value of the SAR re-measured & reversed) 61,200
31st March,-20X3
Employee benefits expenses Dr. 11,800
value of the SAR recognized) 11,800
Share based payment liabilityTo Dr. 10,14,600
Cash
(Settlement of SAR) 10,14,600
Illustration 3 - Share-based payment with cash alternative
On 1st January, 20X1, ABC limited gives options to its key management personnel (employees) to take
either cash equivalent to 1,000 shares or 1,500 shares. The minimum service requirement is 2 years and
shares being taken must be kept for 3 years.
Fair values of the shares are as follows: ₹
Share alternative fair value (with restrictions) 102
Grant date fair value on 1st January, 20X1 113
st
Fair value on 31 December, 20X1 120
st
Fair Value on 31 December, 20X2 132
The employees exercise their cash option at the end of 20X2. Pass the journal entries.
Solution
1st January, 31st December,20X1 31st December20X2 ₹
20X1 ₹
Equity alternative (1,500 x 102) 1,53,000
Cash alternative (1,000 x 113) 1,13,000
Equity option (1,53,000 - 1,13,000) 40,000
Cash Option (cumulative) (using (1,000 x 120 x ½)
period end fair value) 60,000 1,32,000
Equity Option (cumulative) (40,000 x ½) 20,000 40,000
Expense for the period
Equity option 20,000 20,000
Cash Option 60,000 72,000
Total 80,000 92,000
Journal Entries
31st December, 20X1 ₹
To Share based payment reserve (equity)*To 20,000
Share based payment liability 60,000
(Recognition of Equity option and cash settlementoption)
31st December, 20X2
To Share based payment reserve (equity)* 20,000
To Share based payment liability 72,000
(Recognition of Equity option and cash settlement option)
Share based payment liability Dr. 1,32,000
To Bank/ Cash 1,32,000
(Settlement in cash)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
*The equity component recognized (₹ 40,000) shall remain within equity. By electing to receive cash
on settlement, the employees forfeited the right to receive equity instruments. However, ABC Limited
may transfer the share-based payment reserve within equity, i.e., a transfer from one component of
equity to another.
Illustration 4-Share-based payment - Purchase of goods
Indian Inc. issued 995 shares in exchange for purchase of an office building. The title was transferred
in the name of Indian Inc. on February, 20X1 and shares were issued. Fair value of the office building
was ₹ 2,00,000 and face value of each share of Indian Inc was ₹ 100.
Pass the journal entries?
Solution
1st February, 20X1 ₹
Office Building Dr. 2,00,000
To Share capital (995 x 100) 99,500
To Securities premium (balance) 1,00,500
(Recognition of equity option and cash settlement option)
Illustration 5-Share-based payment – Services
Reliance limited hired a maintenance company for its oil fields. The services will be settled by issuing
1,000 shares of Reliance. Period for which the service is to be provided is 1st April, 20X1 to 1st July,
20X1 and fair value of the service was estimated using market value of similar contracts for ₹ 1,00,000.
Nominal value per share is ₹ 10.
Record the transactions?
Solution:
Fair value of services 1,00,000
Number of months 3
Monthly expense 33,333.33
Journal Entries
th
30 April, 20X1 ₹
Repair & Maintenance Dr. 33,333.33
To Share based payment reserve (equity) 33,333.33
(Recognition of Equity settled SBP using fair value of services rendered)
31st May, 20X1
30th June, 20X1
1st July, 20X1
Share based payment reserve (equity) Dr 1,00,000
To Equity Shares (1000 x 10) 10,000
To Securities premium (balancing figure) 90,000
llustration 6 - Share-based payment - Cash & equity alternatives (MTP APR 2018)
Tata Industries issued share-based option to one of its key management personal which can be exercised
either in cash or equity and it has following features:
Option I Period ₹
No of cash settled shares 74,000
Service condition 3 years
Option II
No of equity settled shares of face value of ₹ 100 each 90,000
Conditions:
Service
3 years
Restriction to sell 2 years
Fair values
Equity price with a restriction of sale for 2 years 115
Fair value at grant date 135
Fair value 20X0 138
20X1 140
20X2 147

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Pass the journal entries
Solution:
Fair value of Equity option components:
Fair value of a share with restrictive clause ₹115
Number of shares 90,000
Fair value (90,000 x 115) A ₹1,03,50,000
Fair value of a share at the date of grant ₹135
Number of cash settled shares 74,000
Fair value (74,000 x 135) B ₹99,90,000
Fair value of equity component in compound instrument (A-B) ₹3,60,000
Journal Entries
31/12/20X0 ₹
Employee benefit expenses Dr. 35,24,000
To Share based payment reserve (equity)
1,20,000
(3,60,000/3)
To Share based payment liability (138 x 74,000) /3
34,04,000
31/12/20X1
(3,60,000/3) 35,02,667
(140 x 74,000) 2/3 - 34,04,000
31/12/20X2
To Share based payment reserve (equity
1,20,000
(3,60,000/3)
(147 x 74,000) 3/3 - (34,04,000 + 35,02,667) 39,71,333
Upon cash alternative chosen
Share based payment liability (147 x 74,000) Dr. 1,08,78,000
To Bank/ Cash 1,08,78,000
(Being settlement made in cash)
To Retained Earnings 3,60,000
(Being transfer of equity from one account to anotherone)
Illustration 7 - Equity Settled – Non market conditions (MTP: APRIL / March ,2019 / MARCH 2018)
Ankita Holding Inc. grants 100 shares to each of its 500 employees on 1st January, 20X1. The employees
should remain in service during the vesting period. The shares will vest at the end of the
First year if the company’s earnings increase by 12%;
Second year if the company’s earnings increase by more than 20% over the two-year period;
Third year if the entity’s earnings increase by more than 22% over the three-year period.
The fair value per share at the grant date is ₹ 122. In 20X1, earnings increased by 10%, and 29 employees
left the organisation. The company expects that the shares will vest at the end of the year 20X2. The
company also expects that additional 31 employees will leave the organisation in the year 20X2 and that
440 employees will receive their shares at the end of the year 20X2. At the end of 20X2, company's
earnings increased by 18%. Therefore, the shares did not vest. Only 29 employees left the organization
during 20X2. Company believes that additional 23 employees will leave in 20X3 and earnings will further
increase so that the performance target will be achieved in 20X3. At the end of the year 20X3, only 21
employees have left the organization. Assume that the company’s earnings increased to desired level and
the performance target has been met.
Determine the expense for each year and pass appropriate journal entries?
Solution:
Since the earnings of the entity is non-market related, hence it will not be considered in fair value
calculation of the shares given. However, the same will be considered while calculating number of shares
to be vested.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Workings:
20X1 20X2 20X3
Total employees 500 500 500
Employees left (Actual) (29) (58) (79)
Employees expected to leave in the next year (31) (23) -
Year end – No of employees 440 419 421
Shares per employee 100 100 100
Fair value of share at grant date 122 122 122
Vesting period 1/2 2/3 3/3
Expenses-20X1 (Note 1) 26,84,000
Note 1:
Expense for 20X1 =Number of employees x Shares per employee x Fair value of share xProportionate
vesting period
= 440 x 100 x 122 X ½ = 26,84,000
Note 2:
Expense for 20X2 =(Number of employees x Shares per employee x Fair value of share xProportionate
vesting period) – Expense recognized in year 20X1
= (419 x 100 x 122 x 2/3) – 26,84,000 = 7,23,867
Note 3:
Expense for 20X3 = (No of employees x Shares per employee x Fair value of share x Proportionate
vesting period) – Expense recognized in year 20X1 and 20X2
= (421 x 100 x 122 x 3/3) – (26,84,000 + 7,23,867) = 17,28,333.
Journal Entries
31st December, 20X1
(Equity settled shared based payment expected vesting amount)
31st December, 20X2
Employee benefits expense Dr. 7,23,867
31st December, 20X3
(Share capital Issued)
Illustration 8 - Equity Settled – Non market conditions (Reversals)
ACC limited granted 10,000 share options to one of its managers. In order to get the options, the manager
has to work for next 3 years in the organization and reduce the cost of production by 10% over the next 3
years.
Fair value of the option at grant date was ₹ 95
Cost reduction achieved-
Year 1 12% Achieved
Year 2 8% Not expected to vest in
future
Year 3 10% Achieved
How the expenses would be recorded?
Solution
It is a non-market related condition. Hence the target to achieve cost reduction would be taken while
estimating the number of options to be vested.
Year Options Fair value FV of the options vested
Year 1 10,000 95 1/3 3,16,667
Year 2 10,000 95 0 (3,16,667)
Year 3 10,000 95 3/3 9,50,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The condition to achieve 10% cost reduction each was not fulfilled in the year 2 and there was no
expectation to vest this non-market condition in future as well and hence earlier expense amount was
reversed in year 2. Since in the year 3 the non-market condition was again met, hence all such
expense will be charged to Profit and Loss.
Illustration 9 - Equity Settled – Market based conditions
Apple Limited has granted 10,000 share options to one of its directors for which he must work for next 3
years and the price of the share should increase by 20% over next 3 years.
The share price has moved as per below details -
Year 1 22%
Year 2 19%
Year 3 25%
At the grant date, the fair value of the option was ₹ 120.How should we recognize the transaction?
Solution
The share price movement is a market-based vesting condition hence its expectations are taken into
consideration while calculating the fair value of the option. Even if the required market condition as
required is not fulfilled, there is no requirement to reverse the expense previously booked. Irrespective
of the outcome of the market prices (as it is already taken care of in the fair value of the option), each
period an amount of (120 x 10,000)/3 = ₹4,00,000 will be charged to profit and loss.
Illustration 10 – Modifications – Equity-settled share based payment
Marathon Inc. issued 150 share options to each of its 1,000 employees subject to the service condition of 3
years. Fair value of the option given was calculated at ₹ 129. Below are the details and activities related to
the SBP plan-
Year 1: 35 employees left and further 60 employees are expected to leave Share options re-priced (as MV
of shares has fallen) as the FV fell to ₹ 50. After the re-pricing they are now worth ₹ 80, hence expense is
expected to increase by ₹ 30.
Year 2: 30 employees left and further 36 employees are expected to leave
Year 3: 39 employees left
How the modification/ re-pricing will be accounted?
Solution
The re-pricing has been done at the end of year 1, and hence the increased expense would bespread
over next 2 years equally.
Total increased value due to modification is ₹30 (1/2 weight each years)
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3

Number of employees 1,000 1,000 1,000
Employee left (35) (65) 104
Expected to leave (60) (36)
Net employees 905 899 896
Options per employee 150 150 150
Fair value of the option 129 129 129
Period weight 1/3 2/3 3/3
Modification 30 30
Expense (original) 58,37,250 57,59,850 57,40,500
Modification Nil 20,22,750 20,09,250
(899x150x30x1/2) (896x150x30x2/2)- 20,22,750)
Illustration 11 - Cancellation- Equity Settled Share based payment
Anara Fertilisers Limited issued 2000 share options to its 10 directors for an exercise price of ₹ 100.The
directors are required to stay with the company for next 3 years.
Fair value of the option estimated ₹ 130
Expected number of directors to vest the option 8
During the year 2, there was a crisis in the company and Management decided to cancel the scheme
immediately. It was estimated further as below-
Fair value of option at the time of cancellation was ₹ 90
Market price of the share at the cancellation date was ₹ 99
There was a compensation which was paid to directors and only 9 directors were currently in employment.
At thetime of cancellation of such scheme, it was agreed to pay an amount of ₹ 95 per option to each of 9
directors. How the cancellation would be recorded?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
Year 1 Year 2
A)
Expected directors to vest 8 9
Fair value of option 130 130
Number of options 2,000 2,000
Total 20,80,000 23,40,000
Expense weightage 1/3 Full, as it is cancelled
Expense for the year 6,93,333 16,46,667 Remaining amount since cancelled
B) Cancellation compensation
Number of directors 9
Amount agreed to pay 95
Number of options/ director 2,000
Compensation amount (9 x 95 x 2,000) Also refer working notes 1and 2 7,10,000
Working Notes:
1. Amount to be deducted from Equity
Number of directors 9
Fair value of opton (at the date of cancellation) 90
Number of options / director 2,000
Total 16,20,000
2. Amount transferred to Profit and Loss
Total cancellation compensation 17,10,000
Less: To deduct from Equity (16,20,000)
Balance transferred to Profit and Loss 90,000
Illustration 12 (RTP: M a y , 2019)
A parent grants 200 share options to each of 100 employees of its subsidiary, conditional upon the
completion of two years‘ service with the subsidiary. The fair value of the share options on grant date is ₹30 each
. At grant date, the subsidiary estimates that 80 percent of the employees will complete the two-
year service period. This estimate does not change during the vesting period. At the end of the vesting period,
81 employees complete the required two years of service. The parent does not require the
subsidiary to pay for the shares needed tosettle the grant of share options.
Pass the necessary journal entries for giving effect to the above arrangement.
Solution:
As required by paragraph B53 of the Ind AS 102, over the two-year vesting period, the subsidiary
measures the services received from the employees in accordance, the requirements applicable to equity-
settled share-based payment transactions as given in paragraph 43B. Thus, the subsidiary
measures the services received from the employees on the basis of the fair value of the share
options at grant date. An increase in equity is recognised as a contribution from the parent in the
separate or individual financial statements of the subsidiary. The journal entries recorded by the
subsidiary for each of the two years are as follows:
Year 1 Rs. Rs.
Remuneration expense Dr. 2,40,000
(200 x 100 employees x Rs. 30 x 80% x ½)
To Equity (Contribution from the parent) 2,40,000
Year 2
Remuneration expense Dr. 2,46,000
[(200 x 81 employees x Rs. 30) – 2,40,000]
To Equity (Contribution from the parent) 2,46,000
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
An entity issued 100 shares each to its 1,000 employees subject to service condition of next 2 years. Grant
date fair value of the share is ₹ 195 each. There is an expectation 97% of the employees will remain in
service at the end of 1st year. However, at the end of 2nd year the expected employees to remain in service
would be 91% of the total employees. Calculate expense for the year 1 & 2?
Solution:
Year end % Vest Expense (current period)
FIRST 97% 100 x 1,000 x 195 x 97% x 1/2 = 94,57,500
SECOND 91% 100 x 1,000 x 195 x 91% x 2/2 – 94,57,500 = 82,87,500

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Question 02:
An entity issued 50 shares each to its 170 employees subject to service condition of next 2 years. The
settlement is to be made in cash. Grant date fair value of the share is ₹ 85 each, however, the fair value as
at end of 1st year, 2nd year were ₹ 80 & ₹ 90 respectively. Calculate expense for years 1 and 2?
Solution:
Year end Vest Expense (current period)
FIRST 1/2 50 x 170 x 80 x 1/2 = 3,40,000
SECOND 2/2 50 x 170 x 90 x 2/2 – 3,40,000 = 4,25,000
 Liability will be re-measured at each reporting date.
 Fair value at the end of the year will be used.
Question 03: (RTP: M a y , 2021)
Company P is a holding company for company B. A group share-based payment is being organized in which
Parentissues its own equity-shares for the employees of company B. The details are as below –
Number of employees of company B 100
Grant date fair value of share ₹87
Number of shares to each employee granted Vesting conditions 25
Immediately
Pass the journal entry in the books of company P & company B?
Solution:
Books of Company P
Investment in Company B Dr. ₹2,17,500
To Equity (Issue of Shares) ₹2,17,500
Books of Company B
Expense Dr. ₹2,17,500
To Capital contribution from Parent P ₹2,17,500
Question 04:
Entity X acquired entity Y in a business combination as per Ind AS 103. There is an existing share-based
plan in entity Y with a vesting condition for 3 years in which 2 years have already lapsed at the date of such
business acquisition. Entity X agrees to replace the existing award for the employees of combined entity.
The details are as below –
Acquisition date fair value of share-based payment plan ₹ 300
Number of years to vest after acquisition 1 year
Fair Value of award which replaces existing plan ₹400
Calculate the share-based payment values as per Ind AS 102?
Solution:
Pre-acquisition period =2
Post-acquisition period =1
Total fair value at acquisition date = ₹300
Value to be recorded as per business combination under Ind AS 103 = ₹300/3 x 2 = ₹200
Value to be recorded as per Ind AS 102 (A) = ₹300/3 x 1 = ₹100
Fair value of the replacement of such award = ₹400
Difference from acquisition date fair value (B) = ₹400 – ₹300
= ₹100
Total value to be accounted over vesting period as per Ind AS 102 = A + B
=₹100+₹100=₹200
Question 05:
An entity P issues share-based payment plan to its employees based on the below details:
Number of employees 100
Fair value at grant date ₹25
Market condition Share price to reach at ₹30
Service condition To remain in service until market condition is fulfilled
Expected completion of market condition 4 years
Define expenses related to such share-based payment plan in each year subject to the below scenarios-
a) Market condition if fulfilled in year 3, or
b) Market condition is fulfilled in year 5.
Solution:
Market conditions are required to be considered while calculating fair value at grant date. However,
service conditions will be considered as per the expected vesting right to be exercised by the
employees and would be re-estimated during vesting period. However, if the market related

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
condition is fulfilled before it is expected then all remaining expenses would immediately be charged
off. If market related condition takes longer than the expected period then original expected period will
be followed.
a) Market condition is fulfilled in year 3:
Year 1 2,500/4 = 625
Year 2 2,500/4 = 625
Year 3 2,500-625-625=1,250
Year 4 NIL
b) Market condition is fulfilled in year 5:
Year 1 2,500/4 = 625
Year 2 2,500/4 = 625
Year 3 2,500/4 = 625
Year 4 2,500/4 = 625
Year 5 NIL
Question 06:
Entity X grants 10 shares each to its 1000 employees on the conditions as mentioned below-
- To remain in service & entity‘s profit after tax (PAT) shall reach to ₹100 million.
- It is expected that PAT should reach to ₹100 million by the end of 3 years.
- Fair value at grant date is ₹100.
- Employees expected for vesting right by 1st year 97%, then it revises to 95% by 2nd year
and finally to 93% by 3rd year. Calculate expenses for next 3 years in respect of share-based
payment?
Solution:
Entity‘s PAT is one of the non-market related condition and hence would be included while making an
expectation of vesting shares and there is no requirement to make any changes in the non- market
condition whether this is fulfilled or not because it has already been considered in the expectation of
vesting rights at the end of each year .
Year -1 1,000 x 10 x 100 x 97% x1/3 = 3,23,333
Year-2 1,000 x 10 x 100 x 95% x 2/3 - 3,23,333 = 3,10,000
Year -3 1,000 x 10 x 100 x 93% x 3/3 - 6,33,333 = 2,96,667
Question 07: (MTP AUG 2018)
At 1st January, 20X0, Ambani Limited grants its CEO an option to take either cash amount equivalent to
800 shares or 990 shares. The minimum service requirement is 2 years. There is a condition to keep the
shares for 3 years if shares are opted.
Fair values of the shares ₹
Share alternative fair value (with restrictions) 212
Grant date fair value on 1st January, 20X0 213
st
st
The key management exercises his cash option at the end of 20X2. Pass journal entries
Solution:
1st January,20X0 31st December,20X0 31st December,20X1
Equity alternative (990 x 212) 2,09,880

Cash alternative (800 x 213) 1,70,400
Equity option (2,09,880 – 1,70,400) 39,480
Cash Option (cumulative) (using
period end fair value) 88,000 1,85,600
Equity Option (cumulative) 19,740 39,480
Expense for the period
Equity option 19,740 19,740
Cash Option 88,000 97,600
Total 1,07,740 1,17,340
Journal Entries
st
31 December, 20X0 ₹
To Share based payment reserve (equity) 19,740

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
31st December, 20X1
To Share based payment reserve (equity) 19,740
To Bank/ Cash 1,85,600
(Settlement in cash)
Question 08: (MTP: O c t o b e r , 2018)
MINDA issued 11,000 share appreciation rights (SARs) that vest immediately to its employees on 1st
April, 20X0. The SARs will be settled in cash. Using an option pricing model, at that date it is estimated that
the fair value of a SAR is ₹ 100. SAR can be exercised any time until 31st March, 20X3. It is
expected that out ofthe total employees, 94% at the end of period on 31st March, 20X1, 91% at the end of
next year will exercise the option. Finally, when these were vested i.e. at the end of the 3rd year, only
85% of the total employees exercised the option.
st
31 March, 20X1 132
Pass the Journal entries?
Solution:
Start 100 100% 11,00,000 11,00,000
Period 1 132 94% 13,64,880 2,64,880
Period 2 139 91% 13,91,390 26,510
Period 3 141 85% 13,18,350 (73,040)
13,18,350
Journal Entries
1st April, 20X0
To Share based payment liability 11,00,000
(Fair value of the SAR recognised)
31st March, 20X1

(Fair value of the SAR re-measured)
31st March, 20X2
31st March, 20X3

To Employee benefits expenses 73,040
(Fair value of the SAR reversed)
To Cash 13,18,350
(Settlement of SAR)
Question 09: (RTP:November,2018)

P Ltd. granted 400 stock appreciation rights (SAR) each to 75 employees on 1st April 20X1with a fair
value ₹ 200. The terms of the award require the employee to provide service for four years in order to earn the
award.The fair value of each SAR at each reporting date is as follows:
31st March 20X2 ₹210

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
What would be the difference if at the end of the second year of service (i.e. at 31st March 20X3), PLtd.
modifies the terms of the award to require only three years of service?
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of P Ltd (without modification of service period of stock appreciation
rights) (₹ in lakhs)
31.03.20X2 Profit and Loss account Dr. 15.75
To Liability against SARs 15.75
(Being expenses liability for stock appreciation rights recognised)
To Liability for SARs 17.25
Journal entries in the books of P Ltd (with modification of service period of stock appreciation rights)
(₹ in lakhs)
(Being expenses liability for stock appreciation rights
recognised)
recognised)
recognised)
Notes:
Calculation of expenses for issue of stock appreciation rights without modification of service period
For the year ended 31st March 20X2
= ₹210 x 400 awards x 75 employees x 1 year /4 years of service
= ₹15,75,000
= ₹ 220 x 400 awards x 75 employees x 2 years /4 years of service - ₹ 15,75,000previous recognised
= ₹33,00,000 - ₹15,75,000 = ₹17,25,000
= ₹ 215 x 400 awards x 75 employees x 3 years/4 years of service - ₹ 33,00,000previously recognised
= ₹48,37,500 - ₹33,00,000 = ₹15,37,500
For the year ended 31st March, 20X5
= ₹ 218 x 400 awards x 75 employees x 4 years / 4 years of service – ₹ 48,37,500previously recognised
= ₹65,40,000 – ₹48,37,500 = ₹17,02,500
Calculation of expenses for issue of stock appreciation rights with modification of service period
= ₹210 x 400 awards x 75 employees x 1 year / 4 years of service = ₹15,75,000
= ₹ 220 x 400 awards x 75 employees x 2 years / 3 years of service - ₹ 15,75,000previous recognised
= ₹44,00,000 - ₹15,75,000 = ₹28,25,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
= ₹ 215 x 400 awards x 75 employees x 3 years/ 3 years of service - ₹ 44,00,000previous recognised
= ₹64,50,000 - ₹44,00,000 = ₹20,50,000.
Question 10: (MTP:March,2019) (RTP:November,2019)
QA Ltd. had on 1st April, 20X1 granted 1,000 share options each to 2,000 employees. The options are due
to vest on 31st March, 20X4 provided the employee remains in employment till 31st March, 20X4.
On 1st April, 20X1, the Directors of Company estimated that 1,800 employees would qualify for the
option on 31st March, 20X4. This estimate was amended to 1,850 employees on 31st March, 20X2 and
further amended to 1,840 employees on 31 st March, 20X3.
On 1st April, 20X1, the fair value of an option was ₹ 1.20. The fair value increased to ₹ 1.30 as on
31st March, 20X2 but due to challenging business conditions, the fair value declined thereafter. In
September, 20X2, when the fair value of an option was ₹ 0.90, the Directors repriced the option and this
caused the fair value to increase to ₹ 1.05. Trading conditions improved in the second half of the year and
by 31st March, 20X3 the fair value of an option was ₹ 1.25. QA Ltd. decided that additional cost
incurred due to repricing of the options on 30th September, 20X2 should be spread over the remaining
vesting period from 30th September, 20X2 to 31st March, 20X4.
The Company has requested you to suggest the suitable accounting treatment for these transaction as on
31st March, 20X3.
Solution:
Paragraph 27 of Ind AS 102 requires the entity to recognise the effects of repricing that increase the
total fair value of the share-based payment arrangement or are otherwise beneficial to the employee.
If the repricing increases the fair value of the equity instruments granted paragraph B 43(a) of
Appendix B requires the entity to include the incremental fair value granted (ie the difference between
the fair value of the repriced equity instrument and that of the original equity instrument, both
estimated as at the date of the modification) in the measurement of the amount recognised for
services received as consideration for the equity instruments granted.
If the repricing occurs during the vesting period, the incremental fair value granted is included in the
measurement of the amount recognised for services received over the period from the repricing date
until the date when the repriced equity instruments vest, in addition to the amount based on the grant
date fair value of the original equity instruments, which is recognised over the remainder of the original
vesting period.
Accordingly, the amounts recognised in years 1 and 2 are as follows:
Year Calculation Compensation Cumulative
expense for period compensation
expense
₹ ₹
1 [1,850 employees x 1,000 options x ₹1.20] x 1/3 7,40,000 7,40,000
2 (1,840 employees x 1,000 options x [(₹1.20 x 8,24,000 15,64,000
2/ ) + {(₹1.05 - 0.90) x 0.5/1.5}] – 7,40,000
3
Note: Year 3 calculations have not been provided as it was not required in the question.
Question 11:
A parent, Company P, grants 30 shares to 100 employees each of its subsidiary, Company S, on
conditionthat the employees remain employed by Company S for three years. Assume that at the outset,
and at the end of Years 1 and 2, it is expected that all the will remain employed for all the three years. At
the end of Year 3, none of the employees has left. The fair value of the shares on grant date is ₹ 5 per
share.
Company S agrees to reimburse Company P over the term of the arrangement for 75 percent of the
final expense recognised by Company S. What would be the accounting treatment in the books of
Company P and Company S?
Solution:
Company S expects to recognise an expense totaling ₹ 15,000 (30 shares x 100 employees x ₹ 5 per share)
and, therefore, expects the total reimbursement to be ₹ 11,250 (₹ 15,000 x 75%). Company S therefore
reimburses Company P ₹ 3,750 (₹ 11,250 x 1/3) each year.
Accounting by Company S
In each of Years 1 to 3, Company S recognises an expense in profit or loss, the cash paid to
Company P,and the balance of the capital contribution it has received from Company P.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Journal Entry ₹
To Cash/Bank 3,750
To Equity (Contribution from the parent) 1,250
(To recognise the share-based payment expense and partial
reimbursement to parent)
Accounting by Company P
In each of Years 1 to 3, Company P recognises an increase in equity for the instruments being
granted, the cash reimbursed by Company S, and the balance as investment for the capital
contributionit has made to Company S.
Journal Entry ₹
Investment in Company S Dr. 1,250
Cash/Bank Dr. 3,750
To Equity 5,000
(To recognise the grant of equity instruments to employees of subsidiary
less partial reimbursement from subsidiary)
Question 12: (MTP/RTP : M a y , 2020)
An entity which follows its financial year as per the calendar year grants 1,000 share appreciation rights
(SARs) to each of its 40 management employees as on 1 st January 20X5.The SARs provide the
employees with the right to receive (at the date when the rights are exercised) cash equal to the
appreciation in the entity‘s share price since the grant date. All of the rights vest on 31st December 20X6;
and they can be exercised during 20X7 and 20X8. Management estimates that, at grant date, the fair value
of each SAR is ₹ 11; and it estimates that overall 10% of the employees will leave during the two-year
period. The fair values of the SARs at each year end are shown below:
Year Fair value at year end
31 December 20X5 12
31 December 20X6 8
31 December 20X7 13
31 December 20X8 12
10% of employees left before the end of 20X6. On 31st December 20X7 (when the intrinsic value of
each SAR was ₹ 10), six employees exercised their options; and the remaining 30 employees exercised
their options at the end of 20X8 (when the intrinsic value of each SAR was equal to the fair value of ₹12).
How much expense and liability is to be recognized at the end of each year? Pass Journal entries.
Solution:
The amount recognized as an expense in each year and as a liability at each year end) is as follows:
Year Expense ₹ Liability ₹ Calculation of Liability
31 December 20X5 2,16,000 2,16,000 = 36 x 1,000 x 12 x ½
31 December 20X6 72,000 2,88,000 = 36 x 1,000 x 8
31 December 20X7 1,62,000* 3,90,000 = 30 x 1,000 x 13
31 December 20X8 (30,000)** 0 Liability extinguished
* Expense comprises an increase in the liability of ₹ 102,000 and cash paid to those exercising their SARs
of ₹60,000 (6 x 1,000 x 10).
** Difference of opening liability (₹ 3,90,000) and actual liability paid [₹ 3,60,000 (30 x 1,000 x 12)] is
recognised to Profit and loss ie ₹30,000.
Journal Entries
31 December 20X5
To Share based payment liability(Fair 2,16,000
value of the SAR recognized)
31 December 20X6
31 December 20X7
To Share based payment liability(Fair 1,62,000
value of the SAR recognized)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Share based payment liabilityTo Dr. 60,000
Cash 60,000
(Settlement of SAR)
31 December 20X8
To Employee benefits expenses 30,000
(Fair value of the SAR recognized)
To Cash 3,60,000
(Settlement of SAR)
Note: Last two entries can be combined.
RTP / MTP / PAST QUESTIONS
MTP APR 2021
QUESTION 1
New Age Technology Limited has entered into following Share Based payment transactions:
(i) On 1st April, 20X1, New Age Technology Limited decided to grant share options to its
employees. The scheme was approved by the employees on 30th June, 20X1. New Age
Technology Limited determined the fair value of the share options to be the value of the equity
shares on 1st April, 20X1.
(ii) (ii) On 1st April, 20X1, New Age Technology Limited entered into a contract to purchase IT
equipment from Bombay Software Limited and agreed that the contract will be settled by issuing
equity instruments of New Age Technology Limited. New Age Technology Limited received the
IT equipment on 30th July, 20X1. The share-based payment transaction was measured based
on the fair value of 'the equity instruments as on 1st April, 20X1.
(iii) On 1st April, 20X1, New Age Technology Limited decided to grant the share options to its
employees. The scheme was approved by the employees on 30th June, 20X1. The issue of the
share options was however subject to the same being approved by the shareholders in a
general meeting. The scheme was approved in the general meeting held on 30th September,
20X1. The fair value of the equity instruments for measuring the sharebased payment
transaction was taken on 30th September, 20X1.
Identify the grant date and measurement date in all the 3 cases of Share based payment transactions
entered into by New Age Technology Limited, supported by appropriate rationale for the determination?
SOLUTION
Ind AS 102 defines grant date and measurement dates as follows:
(a) Grant date: The date at which the entity and another party (including an employee) agree to a share-
based payment arrangement, being when the entity and the counterparty have a shared understanding of
the terms and conditions of the arrangement. At grant date the entity confers on the counterparty the right
to cash, other assets, or equity instruments of the entity, provided the specified vesting conditions, if any,
are met. If that agreement is subject to an approval process (for example, by shareholders), grant date is
the date when that approval is obtained.
(b) Measurement date: The date at which the fair value of the equity instruments granted is measured for
the purposes of this Ind AS. For transactions with employees and others providing similar services, the
measurement date is grant date. For transactions with parties other than employees (and those providing
similar services), the measurement date is the date the entity obtains the goods or the counterparty renders
service.
Applying the above definitions in the given scenarios following would be the conclusion based on the
assumption that the approvals have been received prospectively:
Scenario Grant date Measurement date Base for grant date Base for
measurement date
(i) 30th June, 30th June, 20X1 The date on which the For employees,
20X1 scheme was approved by the measurement
the employees date is grant date
(ii) 1 st April, 20X1 30th July, 20X1 The date when the entity The date when the
and the counterparty entity obtains the
entered a contract and goods from the
agreed for settlement by counterparty
equity instruments
(iii) 30th 30th September, The date when the approval For employees,
September, 20X1 by shareholders was the measurement
20X1 obtained date is grant date

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
ABC Limited issued 20,000 Share Appreciation Rights (SARs) that vest immediately to its employees on 1st April 2015.
The SARs will be settled in cash. At that date it is estimated using an option pricing model, that the fair value of a SAR is ₹ 95.
SAR can be exercised any time up to 31st March 2018. At the end of 31st March 2016 it is expected that 95% of total employees will
exercise the option, 92 % of total employees will exercise the option at the end of next year and finally 89 % will be vested only at the
end of the 3rd year. Fair values at the end of each period have been given below:
31 March, 2016
st 110
31st March, 2017 107
31st March, 2018 112
Discuss the applicability of Cash Settled Share based payments under the relevant Ind AS and pass the journal entries.
(10 Marks)
SOLUTION:
Applicability of cash settled share-based payment transactions
For cash-settled share-based payment transactions, the entity shall measure the goods or services acquired and the liability
incurred at the fair value of the liability.
1. When vesting conditions are attached to the share-based payment plans
The recognition of such share-based payment plans should be done by recognizing fair value of the liability at the time of
goods/ services received and not at the date of grant.
2. When no vesting period / condition is attached or to be fulfilled
Cash settled share-based payment can be recognized in full at initial recognition itself.
Until the liability is settled, the entity shall remeasure the fair value of the liability at the end of each reporting period date
and difference in fair value will be charged to profit or loss for the period as employee benefit expenses.
At the date of settlement, the liability is paid in cash based on the fair value on the date of settlement.
Calculation of expenses recognized during the year on account of change in the fair value of SARs
Period Fair value To be vested Cumulative expenses
a b c = a x b x 20,000 d= c-of current period
previousperiod
1 April, 2015
st 95 100% 19,00,000 19,00,000
31st March, 2016 110 95% 20,90,000 1,90,000
31st March, 2017 107 92% 19,68,800 (1,21,200)
31st March, 2018 112 89% 19,93,600 24,800
19,93,600
Journal Entries
Date
1st April, Employee benefits expenses Dr. 19,00,000
2015 To Share based payment liability 19,00,000
(Fair value of the SAR recognized initially)
31st March,2016 Employee benefits expenses Dr. 1,90,000
To Share based payment liability (Fair 1,90,000
value of the SAR re-measured)
31st March,2017 Share based payment liability Dr. 1,21,200
To Employee benefits expenses 1,21,200
(Fair value of the SAR re-measured & reversed)
31st March,2018 Employee benefits expenses Dr. 24,800
(Fair value of the SAR remeasured & recognized)
Share based payment liabilityTo Dr. 19,93,600
Cash 19,93,600
(Settlement of SARs in cash)
Golden Era Limited grants 200 shares to each of its 400 employees on 1st January, 2016. The employee
should remain in service during the vesting period so as to be eligible. The shares will vest at the end of the
1st year - If the company's earnings increase by 12%.
2nd year - If the company's earnings increase by more than 20% over the two year
period.3rd year - If the company's earnings increase by more than 20% over the three year
period.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The fair value per share (non-market related) at the grant date is ₹ 61. In 2016, earnings increased by 10%
and 22 employees left the company. The company expects that earnings will continue at a similar rate
in 2017 and expect that the shares will vest at the end of the year 2017. The company also expects
that additional 18 employees will leave the organization in the year 2017 and that 360 employees will
receive their shares at the end of the year 2017. At the end of 2017 company's earnings increased by
18% (over the 2 years period). Therefore, the shares did not vest. Only 16 employees left the
organization during 2017.
The company believes that additional 14 employees will leave in 2020 and earnings will further increase so
that the performance target will be achieved in 2018. At the end of the year 2018, only 9 employees
have left the organization. Assume that the company's earnings increased to desired level and the
performance target has been met.
You are required to determine the expense as per Ind AS for each year (assumed as financial year) and
pass appropriate journal entries. (8 Marks)
SOLUTION:
calculation of the shares given. However, the same will be considered while calculating number of
shares to be vested.
Calculation of yearly expenses to be charged:
2016 2017 2018
(a) Total employees 400 400 400
(b) Employees left (Actual) (22) (38)* (47)**
(c) Employees expected to leave in the next year
(18) (14) -
(d) Year end – No of employees (a-b-c) 360 348 353
(e) Shares per employee 200 200 200
(f) Fair value of a share at the grant date 61 61 61
Conditional increase in earnings 12% 20% 20%
Actual increase in earnings 10% 18% 20%
(g) Vesting period 1/2 2/3 3/3
(h) Expenses (Refer Working Notes) 21,96,000 6,34,400 14,76,200
*22 + 16 = 38
** 22 +16 + 9 = 47
Journal Entries
31st March, 2016 : ₹ ₹
Employee benefits expenses A/c Dr. 5,49,000
To Share based payment reserve (equity) A/c 5,49,000
(Equity settled shared based payment based on conditional vesting period)
Profit and Loss A/c Dr. 5,49,000
To Employee benefits expenses A/c 5,49,000
(Employee benefits expenses transferred to Profit and Loss A/c)
31st March, 2017 :
(Equity settled shared based payment based on conditional expected vesting period)
31st March, 2018 :
(Equity settled shared based payment based on conditional expected
vesting period)
31st March, 2019 :
(Equity settled shared based payment based on conditional expected vesting period)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Share based payment reserve (equity) (353 x 200 x 61) Dr. 43,06,600
(Share capital Issued)
Working Notes:
1. Expense for 2016 (Jan to Dec)
= No. of employees x Shares per employee x Fair value of share x Proportionate vesting
period = 360 x 200 x 61 X ½ = 21,96,000
Expense recognized in the financial year 2015-2016= 21,96,000 x 3/12 = 5,49,000
= No of employees x Shares per employee x Fair value of share x Proportionate vesting
period) – Expense recognized in year 2016
= [(348 x 200 x 61) x 2/3] – 21,96,000
= 6,34,400
Expense recognized in the financial year 2016-2017= (21,96,000 x 9/12) + (6,34,400x 3/12)
= 16,47,000 + 1,58,600 = 18,05,600
= (No of employees x Shares per employee x Fair value of share x Proportionate
vesting period) – Expense recognized in year 2016 and 2017
= [(353 x 200 x 61) x 3/3] – (21,96,000 + 6,34,400)
= 14,76,200
Expense recognized in the financial year 2017-2018= (6,34,400 x 9/12) + (14,76,200 x3/12)
=4,75,800 + 3,69,050 = 8,44,850
4. Expense recognized in the financial year 2018-2019=(14,76,200x9/12)= 11,07,150
Beetel Holding Inc. grants 100 shares to each of its 300 employees on 1st January, 2015. The employees
should remain in service during the vesting period. The shares will vest at the end of the
First year if the company's earnings increase by 13%
Second year if the company's earnings increased by more than 21% over the two -year period
Third year if the entity's earning increased by more than 23% over the three-year period.
The fair value per share at the grant date is ₹ 125.
In 2015, earnings increased by 9% and 20 employees left the organization. The company expects that
earnings will continue at a similar rate in 2016 and expects that the shares will vest at the end of the
year 2016. The company also expects that additional 30 employees will leave the organization in the
year 2016 and that 250 employees will receive their shares at the end of the year 2016.
At the end of 2016, company's earnings increased by 19%. Therefore, the shares did not vest. Only 20
employees left the organization during 2016. Company believes that additional 25 employees will
leavein 2017 and earnings will further increase so that the performance target will be achieved in 2017.
At the end of the year 2017, only 22 employees have left the organization. Assume that the company's
earnings increased to desired level and the performance target has been met. Determine the expense for
each year and pass appropriate journal entries. (8 Marks)
SOLUTION:
calculation of the shares given. However, the same will be considered while calculating number of
shares to be vested.
Determination of expenses for each year:
2015 2016 2017
a Total employees 300 300 300
b Cumulative- Employees left (Actual) (20) (40) (62)
c Employees expected to leave in the
Next year (30) (25) -
Year end – No of employees 250 235 238
d Shares per employee 100 100 100
e
Fair value of a share at grant date 125 125 125
f
Vesting period 1/2 2/3 3/3

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
g Cumulative expenses (d x e x f x g) 15,62,500 19,58,333 29,75,000
h Expenses to be recognised (h-h ofprevious 3,95,833 10,16,667
i year)
Journal Entries
31st December, 2015 ₹
(Equity settled shared based payment expected vesting amount) 15,62,500
31st December, 2016
(Equity settled shared based payment expected vesting amount) 3,95,833
31st December, 2017
Share based payment reserve (equity) Dr.
To Share Capital 29,75,000 2,97,5,000
(Share capital issued)
ABC Limited granted 500 stock appreciation rights (SAR) each to 80 employees on1st April, 2017 with a fair value ₹ 100
each. The terms of the award require the employee to provide service for four years to earn the award. The SARs are expected to
be settled in cash and it is expected that 100% of the employees will exercise the option. The fair value of each SAR at each
reporting date is as follows:
31st March, 2018 ₹ 110
31st March, 2019 ₹ 120
31 March, 2020
st ₹ 115
31st March, 2021 ₹ 130
Please present the journal entries in the books of ABC Limited over the entire life of the grants.
What would be the difference if at the end of the second year of service (i.e. at31st March, 2019), ABC Limited modifies the
terms of the award to require only three years of total service? Please present with the revised journal entries. Answer on the basis
of relevant Ind AS. (8 Marks)
SOLUTION:
Number of SARs = 80 Employees x 500 SARs = 40,000 SARs
1. When the term of the awards is 4 years of service
Period Fair value To be Cumulative Expense in proportion to Cumulative expenses
vested the award earned recognized
a b c = 40,000 d = [{(c / no. of total years) e
xaxb x yearscompleted} – e of
pvs year]
1st April,2017 100 100% 40,00,000 - -
31st March,2018 110 100% 44,00,000 11,00,000 11,00,000
31st March,2019 120 100% 48,00,000 13,00,000 24,00,000
31st March,2020 115 100% 46,00,000 10,50,000 34,50,000
31st March,2021 130 100% 52,00,000 17,50,000 52,00,000
Journal Entries
31st March, 2018
Employee benefits expenses/Profit and Loss A/c Dr. 11,00,000
11,00,000
(Fair value of SARs has been recognised)
31st March, 2019
(Fair value of SARs has been re-measured)
31st March, 2020
10,50,000
(Fair value of SARs has been recognized)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
31st March, 2021
Employee benefits expenses A/c Dr. 17,50,000
17,50,000
value of SARs has been recognized)
2. When the term of the awards is modified to 3 years of service instead of 4 years of service
Period Fair value %age of Cumulative Expense in proportion to the Cumulative
vesting c = 40,000 awardearned expenses
a B x a x b d = [{(c / no. of total years) x recognized
years completed} – e of pvs year] E
1st April,2017 100 100% 40,00,000 - -
31st March,2018 110 100% 44,00,000 11,00,000 11,00,000
31 March,2019
st 120 100% 48,00,000 21,00,000 32,00,000
31st March,2020 115 100% 46,00,000 14,00,000 46,00,000
Journal Entries
31 March, 2018
st

11,00,000
(Fair value of SARs has been recognised)
31st March, 2019
21,00,000
(Fair value of SARs has been re-measured)
31st March, 2020
14,00,000
(Fair value of SARs has been recognized)
Nest Ltd. issued 10,000 Share Appreciation Rights (SARs) that vest immediately to its employees on 1 April
2017. The SARs will be settled in cash. Using an option pricing model, at that date it is estimated that the
fair value of a SAR is ₹ 100. SAR can be exercised any time until 31 March 2020. It is expected that out
of the total employees, 94% at the end of period on 31 March 2018, 91% at the end of next year will exercise
the option.
Finally, when these were vested i.e. at the end of the 3rd year, only 85% of the total employees exercised
the option.
31 March 2018 132
31 March 2019 139
31 March 2020 141
You are required to pass the Journal entries to show the effect of the above transaction. (5 Marks)
SOLUTION:
(a) Table showing amount of expense to be charged each year
a b c= a x b x 10,000 d = c-prev. period c
1 April 2017 100 100% 10,00,000 10,00,000
31 March 2018 132 94% 12,40,800 2,40,800
31 March 2019 139 91% 12,64,900 24,100
31 March 2020 141 85% 11,98,500 (66,400)
11,98,500
Journal Entries
1 April 2017
Employee benefits expenses 10,00,000
Dr.
(Fair value of the SAR recognized)
31 March 2018
Employee benefits expenses
Dr. 2,40,800

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
31 March 2019
Employee benefits expenses
Dr. 24,100
(Fair value of the SAR re-measured) 24,100
31 March 2020
Share based payment liability
Dr. 66,400
To Employee benefits expenses
66,400
(Fair value of the SAR remeasured and reversed)
To Cash/Bank
11,98,500
(Settlement of SAR)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 108 - OPERATING SEGMENTS
Illustration 1
ABC Ltd. manufactures and sells healthcare products, and food and grocery products. Three products
namely A, B & C are manufactured. Product A is classified as healthcare product and product B & C are
classified as food and grocery products. Products B & C are similar products. Discrete financial information
is available for each manufacturing locations and for the selling activity of each product. There are two-line
managers responsible for manufacturing activities of products A, B & C. Manager X manages product A
and Manager B manages products B & C. The operating results of health care products (product A)
and food and grocery products (products B & C) are regularly reviewed by the CODM. Identify reportable
segments of ABC Ltd.
Solution
In this situation both the healthcare, and food and grocery product line meet the criteria for operating
segments set out above. Therefore, it is likely that ABC Ltd.‟ s operating segments would be classified as
being (i) healthcare and (ii) food and grocery segments.
Not every part of an entity is necessarily an operating segment or part of an operating segment. For
example, a corporate headquarters or some functional departments may not earn revenues or may
earn revenues that are only incidental to the activities of the entity and would not be operating
segments. For the purposes of Ind AS 108, an entity‟ s post-employment benefit plans are not operating
segments.
Illustration 2
The CEO along with other Board members do a review of financial information about various business
segments and take decisions on the basis of discrete information available for these segments and are correctly
identified as Chief Operating Decision Maker (CODM). Review of only revenue information is done for
decision making about those segments by the CODM. As per CODM, many segments require
minimal costs due to centralization of costs. Whether review of only the revenue related information is
sufficient for these segments to be considered as operating segments for the purposes of Ind AS 108
‘Operating Segments’?
Solution
Many entities would be considering the decision making for segments on the basis of revenue growth
– especially the ones aggressively trying to build a market share. Common examples would be
businesses into technology sector or those creating or launching new products from time to time. For
them, the decision making for different regional segments would need revenue growth and related
information for further investment decision.
The logic given by the CODM is that since many segments require minimal costs (due to centralization
of costs), therefore, revenue-only data is a fair representation of the operating results.
In the above case, review of the information that is based only on revenue data may be appropriate to
consider that the segment meets the definition of an operating segment.
Illustration 3
X Ltd. is engaged in the manufacture and sale of two distinct type of products A & B. X Ltd. supplies the
product in the domestic market in India as well as in Singapore. There are two regional managers
responsible for manufacturing activities of product A & B worldwide and also two other managers
responsible for different geographical areas. For internal reporting purposes, X Ltd. provides information
product-wise and as per the geographical location of the company. The CODM regularly reviews the
operating results of both sets of components. How should X Ltd. identify its operating segments?
Solution
In this situation, both the geographical sales areas and product areas may meet the criteria for
operating segment. However, in such situation, it is more difficult to determine clearly which set of
components should be identified as the entity‟s operating segments. In such situation the entity should
determine which set of components constitutes the operating segments by reference to the core
principle. The core principle is that the entity should disclose information to enable users of its
financial statements to evaluate the nature and financial effects of the business activities in which it
engages and the economic environments in which it operates. The entity should also assess whether
the identified operating segments could realistically represent the level at which the CODM is
assessing performance and allocating resources.
Therefore, X Ltd. should consider all the above factors and apply judgement to determine which
component should be disclosed as operating segment.
Illustration 4
CODM of XY Ltd. receives and reviews multiple sets of information when assessing the businesses’ overall
performance to take a decision on resources allocation. It receives the information as under:
- Level 1 Report: Summary report for all 4 regions

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
- Level 2 Report: Summary report for 20 Sub-regions within those regions
- Level 3 Report: Detailed report for 50 Branches within the sub-regions
What factors and level should be considered for determining an operating segment?
Solution
- We need to consider multiple factors (including but not limited to below):
- The process that CODM may use to assess the performance (Key Financial Matrix, KPIs,
Ratio etc.);
- Identify the segment managers and their responsibility areas;
- The process of budgeting for resource allocations.
Illustration 5
XY Ltd. has operations in France, Italy, Germany, UK and India. It wishes to apply aggregation criteriaon
geographical basis.
How will the aggregation criteria apply for reporting segments in the given scenario?
Solution
XY Ltd. needs to assess and prove that each country possesses the same economic characteristics.
Factors including exchange control regulations, currency risks and economic conditions are required
to be considered.
Considering above factors, it may be possible to aggregate the results of France, Italy and
Germany (falling within EU region) and results of UK and India may be separately reported (no
aggregation is permitted).
Illustration 6
X Ltd. is engaged in the business of manufacturing and selling papers. Varieties of paper like adhesive
paper, anti-rust paper, antique paper, art paper etc., are manufactured and sold by X Ltd. Should X Ltd.
classify these papers into different segments?
Solution
Two or more operating segments may be aggregated into a single operating segment if the segments
have similar economic characteristics, and the segments are similar with respect to various factors like
nature of the product and production process, type of customers, method of distribution and
regulatory requirement.
T Ltd is engaged in transport sector, running a fleet of buses at different routes. T Ltd has identified 3
operating segments:
- Segment 1: Local Route
- Segment 2: Inter-city Route
- Segment 3: Contract Hiring
The characteristics of each segment are as under:
Segment 1: The local transport authority awards the contract to ply the buses at different routes for
passengers. These contracts are awarded following a competitive tender process; the ticket price paid by
passengers are controlled by the local transport authority. T Ltd would charge the local transport authority
on a per kilometer basis.
Segment 2: T Ltd operates buses from one city to another, prices are set by T Ltd on the basis of services
provided (Deluxe, Luxury or Superior).
Segment 3: T Ltd also leases buses to schools under a long-term arrangement.
While Segment 1 has been showing significant decline in profitability, Segment 2 is performing well in
respect of higher revenues and improved margins. The management of the company is not sure why is
the segment information relevant for users when they should only be concerned about the returns from
overall business. They would like to aggregate the Segment 1 and Segment 2 for reporting under
‘Operating Segment’
Required:
Whether it is appropriate to aggregate Segments 1 and 2 with reference to Ind AS 108 ‘Operating
Segments’? and
Discuss, in the above context, whether disclosure of segment information is relevant to an investor’s
appraisal of financial statements?
Solution
Ind AS 108 „Operating Segments’ requires operating segments to be aggregated to present a reportable
segment if the segments have similar economic characteristics, and the segments are similar in each of
the following aggregation criteria:
(a) The nature of the products and services
(b) The nature of the production process

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(c) The type or class of customer for their products and services
(d) The methods used to distribute their products or provide their services
(e) If applicable, the nature of the regulatory environment
While the products and services are similar, the customers for those products and services are
different.
In Segment 1, the decision to award the contract is in the hands of the local authority, which also sets
prices and pays for the services. The company is not exposed to passenger revenue risk, since a
contract is awarded by competitive tender.
On the other hand, in the inter-city segment, the customer determines whether a bus route is
economically viable by choosing whether or not to buy tickets. T Ltd sets the ticket prices but will be
affected by customer behavior or feedback. T Ltd is exposed to passenger revenue-risk, as it sets
prices which customers may or may not choose to pay.
Operating Segment provides information that makes the financial statements more useful to investors.
In making the investment decisions, investors and creditors consider the returns they are likely to
make on their investment. This requires assessment of the amount, timing and uncertainty of the future
cash flows of T Ltd as well as of management's stewardship of T Ltd‟ s resources. How management
derives profit is therefore relevant information to an investor.
Inappropriately aggregating segments reduces the usefulness of segment disclosures to investors. Ind
AS 108 requires information to be disclosed that is not readily available elsewhere in the financial
statements, therefore it provides additional information which aids an investor's understanding of how
the business operates and is managed.
In T Ltd.‟s case, if the segments are aggregated, then the increased profits in segment 2 will hide the
decreased profits in segment 1. However, the fact that profits have sharply declined in segment 1
would be of interest to investors as it may suggest that future cash flows from this segment are at risk.
Illustration 8
X Ltd. has identified the following business components.
Segment Revenue (₹) Profit (₹) Assets (₹)
External Internal
Pharma 97,00,000 Nil 20,00,000 55,00,000
FMCG Nil 4,00,000 2,50,000 25,00,000
Ayurveda Others 3,00,000 Nil 2,00,000 4,00,000
Total for the entity 8,00,000 41,00,000 5,50,000 6,00,000
1,08,00,000 45,00,000 30,00,000 90,00,000
Which of the segments would be reportable as per the criteria prescribed in Ind AS108?
Solution
Quantitative thresholds are calculated below:
Segments Pharma FMCG Ayurveda Others
% Segment sales to total sales 63.40 2.61 1.96 32.03
% Segment profit to total profits 66.67 8.33 6.67 18.33
% Segment assets to total assets 61.11 27.78 4.44 6.67
Segment Pharma would separately reportable since they meet all three size criteria, though any one
criteria is required. FMCG segment does not satisfy the revenue and profit test but does satisfy the
asset test. So, it would be separately reportable. Ayurveda segment does not meet any threshold. It
may not be classified as reportable segment.
An entity may combine information about operating segments that do not meet the quantitative thresholds
with information about other operating segments that do not meet the quantitative thresholds to produce a
reportable segment only if the operating segments have similar economic characteristics and share a
majority of the aggregation criteria.
If the total external revenue reported by operating segments constitutes less than 75% of the entity‟s
revenue, additional operating segments should be identified as reportable segments (even if they do not
meet the criteria) until at least 75% of the entity‟s revenue is included in reportable segments.
Note
External revenue of reportable segments must be ≥ 75% of total external revenue of the entity.
Operating segments that do not meet any of the quantitative thresholds may be considered reportable,
and separately disclosed, if information about the segment is useful to users.
Illustration 9
An entity has branches in different parts of the country – catering to different customers and selling local
made products (a product of one region is not sold in any other region). No region or product contributes more

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
than 5% to total revenue of the entity.
Discuss how many segments are reportable?
Solution
Under the quantitative threshold, external revenue of reportable segments must be ≥ 75% of total
external revenue of the entity. Considering above case, minimum 15 operating segments need to be
reportable (75% [threshold] / 5% {revenue}).
Illustration 10
GH Ltd. has four distinct operating segments. The management of GH is concerned as it is unsure on how
common costs be reasonably allocated to different operating segments. They intend to allocate management
charges, interest costs of internal funding, cost of management of properties and pension costs.
Whether such costs need to conform to the accounting policies as used to prepare the financial statements?
Solution
Ind AS 108 does not prescribe any specific basis but suggests that a reasonable basis to be used in
allocation of common costs. Here, it may not be reasonable to allocate management chargesto most
profitable segment. However, it may be reasonable to charge interest costs of internal funding on the
basis of actual usage over time, even if majority of funds are used for running a loss- making segment.
A reasonable manner of allocation of above costs could be:
Management Charges: These may be allocated based on Net Assets invested or Revenue earned by
the segments. It needs to be understood if there is an operating segment which is yet to earn revenue,
it would fail to have any costs being allocated.
Interest costs: As mentioned above, these may be allocated on the basis of actual usage and time.
Cost of management of properties: Based on value of property used at each segment.
Pension costs: Based on salary expenses of each segment.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01: (MTP MAR 2018)
X Ltd. has identified 4 operating segments for which revenue data is given below:
External Revenue (₹) Internal Revenue (₹) Total (₹)
Segment A 30,00,000 Nil 30,00,000
Segment B 6,50,000 Nil 6,50,000
Segment C 8,50,000 1,00,000 9,50,000
Segment D 5,00,000 49,00,000 54,00,000
Total Revenue 50,00,000 50,00,000 1,00,00,000
Segment C is a new business unit and management expect this segment to make a significant
contribution to external revenue in coming years.
Which of the segments would be reportable under the criteria identified in Ind AS 108?
Solution:
Threshold amount is ₹10,00,000 (₹1,00,00,000 × 10%).
Segment A exceeds the quantitative threshold (₹ 30,00,000 > ₹ 10,00,000) and hence reportablesegment.
Segment D exceeds the quantitative threshold (₹ 54,00,000 > ₹ 10,00,000) and hence reportablesegment.
Segment B & C do not meet the quantitative threshold amount and may not be classified as
reportable segment.
However, the total external revenue generated by these two segments A & D represent only 70% [(₹
35,00,000 / 50,00,000) x 100] of the entity‟s total external revenue. If the total external revenue reported by
operating segments constitutes less than 75% of the entity total external revenue, additional operating
segments should be identified as reportable segments until at least 75% of the revenue is included in
reportable segments.
In case of X Ltd., it is given that Segment C is a new business unit and management expect this
segment to make a significant contribution to external revenue in coming years. In accordance with
the requirement of Ind AS 108, X Ltd. designates this start-up segment C asa reportable segment,
making the total external revenue attributable to reportable segments 87% [(₹43,50,000/ 50,00,000) x
100] of total entity revenues.
In this situation, Segments A, C and D will be reportable segments and Segment B will be shown as
other segment.
Alternatively, segment B can be considered as a reportable segment as well as it meets the definition of
operating segment. If Segment B is considered as reportable segment:
External revenue reported: ₹30,00,000 + ₹6,50,000 + ₹5,00,000 = ₹41,50,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
% of Total External Revenue = ₹41,50,000 / ₹50,00,000 = 83%
Accordingly, Segments A, B and D will be reportable segments and Segment C will be shown as other
segment.
Question 02:
X Ltd. is operating in coating industry. Its business segments comprise Coating and Others
(consisting of chemicals, polymers and related activities). Certain information for financial year 20X1-
20X2 is given below: (₹ in lakhs)
Segments External Revenue GST Other operating Result Asset Liabilities
(including GST) income
Coating 2,00,000 5,000 40,000 10,000 50,000 30,000
Others 70,000 3,000 15,000 4,000 30,000 10,000
1. Unallocated income net of expenses is ₹ 30,00,00,000
2. Interest and bank charges is ₹ 20,00,00,000
3. Income tax expenses is ₹ 20,00,00,000 (current tax ₹ 19,50,00,000 and deferred tax ₹
50,00,000)
4. Unallocated Investments are ₹ 1,00,00,00,000 and other assets are ₹ 1,00,00,00,000.
5. Unallocated liabilities, Reserves & surplus and share capital are ₹ 2,00,00,00,000, ₹
3,00,00,00,000 & ₹ 1,00,00,00,000 respectively.
6. Depreciation amounts for coating & others are ₹ 10,00,00,000 and ₹ 3,00,00,000
respectively.
7. Capital expenditure for coating and others are ₹ 50,00,00,000 and ₹ 20,00,00,000respectively.
8. Revenue from outside India is ₹ 6,20,00,00,000 and segment asset outside India
₹ 1,00,00,00,000.
Based on the above information, how X Ltd. would disclose information about reportable segment
revenue, profit or loss, assets and liabilities for financial year 20X1- 20X2?
Solution:
Segment information
(A) Information about operating segment
(1) the company‟s operating segments comprise:
Coatings: consisting of decorative, automotive, industrial paints and related activities.
Others: consisting of chemicals, polymers and related activities.
(2) Segment revenues, results and other information. (₹ in Lakhs)
Revenue Coating Others Total
1. External Revenue (gross) 2,00,000 70,000 2,70,000
GST (5,000) (3,000) (8,000)
Total Revenue (net) 1,95,000 67,000 2,62,000
Other operating income 40,000 15,000 55,000
Total Revenue 2,35,000 82,000 3,17,000
2. Results
Segment results 10,000 4,000 14,000
Unallocated income (net of unallocated 3,000
expenses)
Profit from operation before interest, 17,000
taxation and exceptional items
Interest and bank charges (2,000)
Profit before exceptional items 15,000
Exceptional items Nil
Income Taxes (1,950)
-Current taxes
-Deferred taxes (50)
3. Other Information
(a) Assets
Segment Assets 50,000 30,000 80,000
Investments 10,000
Unallocated assets 10,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(b) Liabilities/Shareholder’s funds
Segment liabilities 30,000 10,000 40,000
Unallocated liabilities 20,000
Share capital 10,000
Reserves and surplus 30,000
Total liabilities/shareholder’s funds 1,00,000
(c) Others
Capital Expenditure (5,000) (2,000)
Depreciation (1,000) (300)
Geographical Information (₹ in lakhs)
India(₹) OutsideIndia Total(₹)
Revenue 2,00,000 62,000 2,62,000
Segment assets 90,000 10,000 1,00,000
Capital expenditure 7,000 7,000
Notes:
(i) The operating segments have been identified in line with the Ind AS 108, taking into account the
nature of product, organisation structure, economic environment and internal reporting system.
(ii) Segment revenue, results, assets and liabilities include the respective amounts identifiable to
each of the segments. Unallocable assets include unallocable fixed assets and other current
assets. Unallocable liabilities include unallocable current liabilities and net deferred tax liability.
(iii) Corresponding figures for previous year have not been provided. However, in practical scenario
the corresponding figures would need to be given.
Question 03:
An entity uses the weighted average cost formula to assign costs to inventories and cost of goods
sold for financial reporting purposes, but the reports provided to the chief operating decision maker
use the First-In, First-Out (FIFO) method for evaluating the performance of segment operations.
Which cost formula should be used for Ind AS 108 disclosure purposes?
Solution:
The entity should use First-In, First-Out (FIFO) method for its Ind AS 108 disclosures, even though it
uses the weighted average cost formula for measuring inventories for inclusion in its financial
statements. Where chief operating decision maker uses only one measure of segment asset, same
measure should be used to report segment information. Accordingly, in the given case, the method
used in preparing the financial information for the chief operating decision maker should be used for
reporting under Ind AS 108.
However, reconciliation between the segment results and results as per financial statements needs to
be given by the entity in its segment report.
Question 04:
ABC Limited has 5 operating segments namely A, B, C, D and E. The profit/ loss of respective
Segment Profit/(Loss) (₹in crore)

A 780
B 1,500
C (2,300)
D (4,500)
E 6,000
Total 1,480
segments for the year ended March 31, 20X1 are as follows:
Based on the quantitative thresholds, which of the above segments A to E would be considered as
reportable segments for the year ending March 31, 20X1?
Solution:
With regard to quantitative thresholds to determine reportable segment relevant in context of instant
case, paragraph 13(b) of Ind AS 108 may be noted which provides as follows:
“The absolute amount of its reported profit or loss is 10 per cent or more of the greater, in absolute
amount, of (i) the combined reported profit of all operating segments that did not report a loss and
(ii) the combined reported loss of all operating segments that reported aloss.”
In compliance with Ind AS 108, the segment profit/loss of respective segment will be compared with
the greater of the following:
(i) All segments in profit, i.e., A, B and E – Total profit ₹ 8,280 crores.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(ii) All segments in loss, i.e., C and D – Total loss ₹ 6,800 crores.Greater of the above – ₹8,280 crores.
Based on the above, reportable segments will be determined as follows:
Segment Profit/(Loss) As absolute % of ₹ 8,280 Reportable segment
(₹ in crore) crore
A 780 9% No
B 1,500 18% Yes
C (2,300) 28% Yes
D (4,500) 54% Yes
E 6,000 72% Yes
Total 1,480
Hence B, C, D, E are reportable segments.
RTP.MTP. PAST PAPER
MTP MARCH 2018
Question 1
X Ltd. has identified 4 operating segments for which revenue data is given below:
External Sale (₹) Internal Sale(₹) Total (₹)
Segment A 30,00,000 Nil 30,00,000
Segment B 6,50,000 Nil 6,50,000
Segment C 8,50,000 1,00,000 9,50,000
Segment D 5,00,000 49,00,000 54,00,000
Total Sales 50,00,000 50,00,000 1,00,00,000
Segment C is a new business unit and management expect this segment to make a significant
Which of the segments would be reportable under the criteria identified in Ind AS 108? (8 Marks)
Solution
Threshold amount is ₹ 10,00,000 (₹ 1,00,00,000 × 10%).
Segment A exceeds the quantitative threshold (₹ 30,00,000 > ₹ 10,00,000) and hence reportable segment.
Segment D exceeds the quantitative threshold (₹ 54,00,000 > ₹ 10,00,000) and hence reportable segment.
Segment B & C do not meet the quantitative threshold amount and may not be classified as reportable
segment.
However, the total external revenue generated by these two segments A & D represent only 70% (₹
35,000/50,000 x 100) of the entity’s total external revenue. If the total external revenue reported by
operating segments constitutes less than 75% of the entity total external revenue, additional operating
segments should be identified as reportable segments until at least 75% of the revenue is
included in reportable segments.
In case of X Ltd., it is given that Segment C is a new business unit and management expect this
segment to make a significant contribution to external revenue in coming years. In accordance with
the requirement of Ind AS 108, X Ltd. designates this start -up segment C as a reportable segment,
making the total external revenue attributable to reportable segments 87% (₹ 43,50,000/ 50,00,000 x 100)
of total entity revenues.
RTP: MAY, 2019
Question:2
An entity uses the weighted average cost formula to assign costs to inventories and cost of goods sold for
financial reporting purposes, but the reports provided to the chief operating decision maker use the First-In,
First-Out (FIFO) method for evaluating the performance of segment operations. Which cost formula should
be used for Ind AS 108 disclosure purposes?
Solution:
The entity should use First-In, First-Out (FIFO) method for its Ind AS 108 disclosures, even though it
uses the weighted average cost formula for measuring inventories for inclusion in its financial
statements. Where chief operating decision maker uses only one measure of segment asset, same
measure should be used to report segment information. Accordingly, in the given case, the method
used in preparing the financial information for the chief operating decision maker should be used for
reporting under Ind AS 108.
However, reconciliation between the segment results and results as per financial statements needs to
be given by the entity in its segment report.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
RTP: MAY, 2020
Question:3
ABC Limited has 5 operating segments namely A, B, C, D and E. The profit/ loss of respective segments for the year
ended March 31, 20X1 are as follows:
Segment Profit/(Loss) (₹ in crore)
A 780
B 1,500
C (2,300)
D (4,500)
E 6,000
Total 1,480
Based on the quantitative thresholds, which of the above segments A to E would be considered as reportable segments for the year
ending March 31, 20X1?
Solution:
With regard to quantitative thresholds to determine reportable segment relevant in context of instant case,
paragraph 13(b) of Ind AS 108 may be noted which provides as follows:
“The absolute amount of its reported profit or loss is 10 per cent or more of the greater, in absolute amount, of (i) the combined
reported profit of all operating segments that did not report a loss and (ii) the combined reported loss of all operating
segments that reported a loss.”
In compliance with Ind AS 108, the segment profit/loss of respective segment will be compared with the greater of the
following:
(i) All segments in profit, i.e., A, B and E – Total profit ₹ 8,280 crores.
(ii) All segments in loss, i.e., C and D – Total loss ₹ 6,800 crores. Greater of the above – ₹ 8,280 crores. Based on
the above, reportable segments will be determined as follows:
Segment Profit/(Loss) (₹ incrore) As absolute % of Reportable segment
₹ 8,280 crore
A 780 9% No
B 1,500 18% Yes
C (2,300) 28% Yes
D (4,500) 54% Yes
E 6,000 72% Yes
Total 1,480
Hence B, C, D, E are reportable segments.
MTP APR 2018
QUESTION
A Ltd. is a cash rich company. It has its business running across the country which as per AS 17
constitutes geographical segments. The company has also got substantial investments. The company has
provided its segmental report for its primary segment and secondary geographical segments and the
extract of its Note on Investment from its draft financial statements for the year ending 31st March 2018:
Primary segment report
Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Total
Segment Revenue 2655 2121 1264 6040
Segment Results 504 1111 114 1729
Unallocable Costs
Interest Income 403
Finance Costs (120)
Others (50)
Net Profit Before Tax 1962
Segmental report for its secondary geographical segments All figures are Rs. in crores
Segment Revenue Segment Results
Delhi 1962 2522
Mumbai 1691 1241
Chennai 2030 1255
Others(Refer additional information) 1082 1022
Total 6765 6040
Note on Investment
Investment in Rs. in crores
Mutual Funds - Liquid Funds 500
Mutual Funds – ETF 20

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
X Ltd. a wholly owned subsidiary 100
A Foundation – 100% 20
Time Deposit 20
Total 660
1. Segment Assets in ‘Others’ category comprises of Rs. 744 crores held for a new project yet to
commence operations in Kolkata.
2. Tax expenses are not considered in above segment reporting as the management is of the opinion that
taxes are not a part of operating cost.
3. Mutual funds are valued at MTM basis as of year-end. These were initially invested for Rs. 300 crore for
liquid funds and Rs. 25 crore for ETFs respectively.
4. The Foundation has a clause in its deed that in the event of liquidation, the net assets of the trust shall
be transferred to another trust with similar objects. Analyse the extracts given above and Identify the errors
and misstatements in the segment reports / Note on Investment and also prepare the rectified Note to
Accounts on Investment in accordance with the Accounting Standards.
SOLUTION
1. Geographical segment reporting: The category ‘others’ in the secondary geographical segment
report represents 16% of the total geographical segment assets. Para 48 of AS 17 inter alia requires
to disclose the total carrying amount of segment assets by geographic allocation of assets, for each
geographical segment whose segment assets are 10 per cent or more of the total assets of all
geographical segments’.
Hence to comply with AS 17 disclosures, the management has to further breakdown the ‘others’
category and identify reportable geographies. Kolkata segment assets is 10.997% of total
geographical assets i.e. [(744 / 6,765) x 100]. Therefore, Kolkata segment will be considered as the
reportable geographical segment. The revised secondary segmental reporting will be as follows:
Segment Revenue Segment Results
Delhi 1962 2522
Mumbai 1691 1241
Chennai 2030 1255
Others(Refer additional information) 1082 1022
Total 6765 6040
Besides above, the same para also mandates to disclose ‘the total cost incurred during the period to
acquire segment assets that are expected to be used during more than one period (tangible and intangible
fixed assets) by geographical location of assets, for each geographical segment whose segment assets are
10 per cent or more of the total assets of all segments’. Hence, the management has to show the addition
to segment assets in a separate table; and if there are no additions during the year, the same has to be
stated as ‘Nil’ for the year
2. Primary Business Segment Report: The management’s interpretation of presenting ‘Net profit before
taxes’ is incorrect. The standard requires allocating expenses to each segment to the possible extent, and
unallocated costs to be shown separately. In this case, tax expense will be added as an unallocable cost.
3. Notes to Accounts on Investment
Refer Note No. Rs. in crore
Non-current Investment (at cost)
X Ltd., a wholly owned subsidiary 100
A Foundation 1 20
Total Non-current Investment (A) 120
Current Investment 2 325
Total Current Investment (B) 325
Total (A+B) 445
In accordance with Para 35 (d) of AS 13, a note should be given that there exists a significant restriction on
the realisability of investments or the remittance of income and proceeds of disposal. Accordingly, the note
is prepared as follows:
Note 1: The Company has a 100% stake holding in A Foundation. There exists a significant restriction on
the realisability of investments due to the clause in the constitution deed of the Foundation that in the event
of liquidation, the net assets of the trust shall be transferred to another trust with similar objects.
Note 2: Para 31 of AS 13 states – ‘Investment classified as current investment should be carried in the
financial statements at the lower of cost and fair value determined either on an individual investment basis
or by category of investment, but not on an overall (or global) basis’. Assuming that the MTM values
provided represent the fair value, accordingly investments in mutual funds are treated as follows:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Investment in Mutual Funds Rs. in crore
Mutual Funds - Liquid Funds (MTM) 300
Mutual Funds – ETFs 25
TOTAL 325
Note 3: Time deposit will be a part of cash and cash equivalents.
Seeds Ltd. is operating in oil industry. Its business segments comprise crushing and refining. Certain information for
financial year 2017-18 is given below: (₹ in lakh)
Segments External Sale Tax Other Operating Income Result Assets Liabilities
Crushing 1,00,000 2,500 20,000 5,000 25,000 15,000
Refining 35,000 1,500 7,500 2,000 15,000 5,000
Additional Information: (₹ in lakh)

 Unallocated revenue net of expenses is ₹ 1,500.
 Interest and bank charges is ₹ 1,000
 Income-tax expense is ₹ 1,000 (current tax ₹ 975 and deferred tax ₹ 25)
 Investments ₹ 5,000 and unallocated assets ₹ 5,000
 Unallocated liabilities, Reserves & Surplus and Share capital are ₹ 10,000;₹ 15,000 and ₹ 5,000
respectively.
 Depreciation amounts for crushing and refining are ₹ 500 and ₹ 150 respectively.
 Capital expenditure for crushing and refining are ₹ 2,500 and ₹ 1,000 respectively.
 Revenue from outside India is ₹ 15,000 and segment assets outside India ₹ 5,000.
Based on the above information, how Seeds Ltd. would disclose information about reportable segment revenue, profit or loss,
assets and liabilities for financial year 2017-18? (10 Marks)
SOLUTION:
(1) Segment revenues, results and other information (₹ in lakh)
Revenue Coating Others Total
1. External sales (gross) 1,00,000 35,000 1,35,000
Tax (2,500) (1,500) (4,000)
External sales (net) 97,500 33,500 1,31,000
Other operating income 20,000 7,500 27,500
Total Revenue 1,17,500 41,000 1,58,500
2. Results
Segment results 5,000 2,000 7,000
Unallocated income (net of unallocated expenses) 1,500
Profit from operation before interest, taxation and 8,500
exceptionalitems
Interest and bank charges (1,000)
Profit before exceptional items 7,500
Exceptional items Nil
Less: Income Taxes (975)
Current taxes (25)
Deferred taxes 6,500
Profit after taxation
3. Other Information
Segment Assets 25,000 15,000 40,000
Investments 5,000
Unallocated assets 5,000
Total Assets 50,000
Liabilities/Shareholder’s funds
Segment liabilities 15,000 5,000 20,000
Unallocated liabilities 10,000
Share capital 5,000
Reserves and surplus 15,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total liabilities / shareholder’s funds 50,000
Others
Capital Expenditure 2,500 1,000 3,500
Depreciation 500 150 650
(2) Geographical Information
(₹ in
lakh)
India Outside India Total
Revenue 1,43,500 15,000 1,58,500
Segment assets 35,000 5,000 40,00
0
Capital expenditure 3,500 - 3,500
Note: Segment revenue, results, assets and liabilities include the respective amounts identifiable to each of the
segments.

John Limited has identified four segments for which revenue data is given as per below:
External Sale (₹) Internal Sale (₹) Total(₹)
Segment A 4,00,000 Nil 4,00,000
Segment B 80,000 Nil 80,000
Segment C 90,000 20,000 1,10,000
Segment D 70,000 6,20,000 6,90,000
Total sales 6,40,000 6,40,000 12,80,000
The following additional information is available with respect to John Limited:
Segment C is a high growing business and management expects that this segment to make a significant
Discuss, which of the segments would be reportable under the threshold criteria identified in Ind AS 108
and why?
SOLUTION:
Threshold amount of 10% of total revenue is ₹ 1,28,000 (₹12,80,000 × 10%).
Segment A exceeds the quantitative threshold (₹ 4,00,000 > ₹ 1,28,000) and hence is a reportable segment.
Segment D exceeds the quantitative threshold (₹ 6,90,000 > ₹ 1,28,000) and hence is a reportable segment.
Segment B & C do not meet the quantitative threshold amount and may not be classified as
reportable
However, the total external revenue generated by these two segments A & D represent only 73.44% (₹
4,70,000 / 6,40,000 x 100) of the entity’s total external revenue. If the total external revenue reported by
operating segments constitutes less than 75% of the entity’s total external revenue, additional operating
segments should be identified as reportable segments until at least 75% of the revenue is included in
reportable segments.
In case of John Limited, it is given that Segment C is a high growing business and management
expects this segment to make a significant contribution to external revenue in coming years. In
accordance with the requirement of Ind AS 108, John Limited may designate segment C as a
reportable segment, making the total external revenue attributable to reportable segments be 87.5% (₹
5,60,000/ 6,40,000 x 100) of total entity’s external revenue.
In this situation, Segments A, C and D will be reportable segments and Segment B will be shown as
other segment.
Alternatively, Segment B may be considered as a reportable segment instead of Segment C, based
onthe choice of John Ltd. ‘s management, if it meets the definition of operating segment.
If Segment B is considered as reportable segment, external revenue reported will be
₹4,00,000 + ₹80,000 + ₹70,000 = ₹5,50,000
% of Total External Revenue = ₹5,50,000 / ₹6,40,000 = 85.94%
Segments A, B and D will be reportable segments and Segment C will be shown as other segment.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
JAN 2021
QUESTION 3
Heavy Goods Ltd. has 6 operating segments namely L-Q (below). The total revenues (internal and
external), profits or losses and assets are set out below: (In ₹)
Segment Inter-Segment Sales External Sales Profit/ Loss Total Assets
L 4200 12300 3000 37500
M 3500 7750 1500 23250
N 1000 3500 (1500) 15750
O 0 5250 (750) 10500
P 500 5500 900 10500
Q 1200 1050 600 5250
10400 35350 3750 102750
Heavy Goods Ltd. needs to determine how many reportable segments it has. You are required to advice
Heavy Goods Ltd. as per the criteria defined in Ind AS 108.
SOLUTION
As per paragraph 13 of Ind AS 108, an entity shall report separately information about an operating
segment that meets any of the following quantitative thresholds:
(a) Its reported revenue, including both sales to external customers and inter-segment sales or transfers, is
10 per cent or more of the combined revenue, internal and external, of all operating segments. Combined
total sales of all the segment = ₹ 10,400 + ₹ 35,350 = ₹ 45,750. 10% thresholds = 45,750 x 10% = 4,575.
(b) The absolute amount of its reported profit or loss is 10 per cent or more of the greater, in absolute
amount, of
(i) the combined reported profit of all operating segments that did not report a loss and
(ii) the combined reported loss of all operating segments that reported a loss.
In the given situation, combined reported profit = ₹ 6,000 and combined reported loss (₹ 2,250).Hence,
for 10% thresholds ₹ 6,000 will be considered. 10% thresholds = ₹ 6,000 x 10% = ₹ 600
(c) Its assets are 10 per cent or more of the combined assets of all operating segments.
Combined total assets of all the segment = ₹ 1,02,750
10% thresholds = ₹ 1,02,750 x 10% = 10,275
Accordingly, quantitative thresholds are calculated below: (IN %)
Segments L M N O P Q Reportable segments
% segment sales to total sales 36.66 24.59 9.84 11.48 13.11 4.92 L, M,O,P
% segment profit to total profits 50 25 25 12.5 15 10 L,M,N,O,P,Q
% segment assets to total assets 36.50 22.63 15.33 10.22 10.22 5.11 L,M,N,O,P
Segments L, M, O and P clearly satisfy the revenue and assets tests and they are separate reportable
segments. Segments N does not satisfy the revenue test, but it does satisfy the asset test and it is a
reportable segment. Segment Q does not satisfy the revenue or the assets test but is does satisfy the
profits test. Therefore, Segment Q is also a reportable segment.
Hence, all segments i.e; L, M, N, O, P and Q are reportable segments

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 34 INTERIM FINANCIAL REPORTING
Illustration 1
Company A has reported ₹ 60,000 as pre-tax profit in first quarter and expects a loss of ₹ 15,000
each in the subsequent quarter ₹ It has a corporate tax slab of 20 percent on the first ₹ 20,000 of
annual earnings and 40 per cent on all additional earnings. Calculate the amount of tax to be
shown in each quarter.
Solution
Amount of income tax expense reported in each quarter would be as below:
Expected total Income = ₹ 15,000 [60,000 - (15,000 x 3)]Expected
tax as per slabs = 15,000x 20% = ₹3,000
Average Annual Income tax rate = 3,000 / 15,000 = 20%
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Profit/ (Loss) before tax 60,000 (15,000) (15,000) (15,000)
Tax charge / (credit) 12,000 (3,000) (3,000) (3,000)
Illustration 2
ABC Ltd. presents interim financial report quarterly. On 1.4.20X1, ABC Ltd. has carried
forward loss of ₹ 600 lakhs for income-tax purpose for which deferred tax asset has not been
recognized. ABC Ltd. earns ₹ 900 lakhs in each quarter ending on 30.6.20X1, 30.9.20X1,
31.12.20X1 and 31.3.20X2 excluding the carried forward loss. Income-tax rate is expected to be
40%. Calculate the amount of tax expense to be reported in each quarter.
Solution
Amount of income tax expense reported in each quarter would be as below:
The estimated payment of the annual tax on earnings for the current year:
₹3,000* x 40 / 100 = ₹1,200 lakhs.
*(3,600 lakhs - ₹600 lakhs) = ₹3,000 lakhs
Average annual effective tax rate = (1,200 /3,600) ×100 = 33.33% Tax
expense to be shown in each quarter = 900 x 33.33% = ₹ 300 lakhs
Illustration 3
Innovative Corporation Private Limited (or “ICPL”) is dealing in seasonal product and the sales
pattern of the product, quarter wise is as under during the financial year 20X1-20X2:
Qtr. I Qtr. II Qtr. III Qtr. IV
Ending 30 June Ending 30September Ending 31 December Ending 31 March
10% 10% 60% 20%
For the first quarter ending on 30 June, 20X1, ICPL has provided the following information:
Particulars Amounts (in crore)
Sales 70
Employee’s benefits expenses 25
Administrative and other expenses 12
Finance cost 4
ICPL while preparing interim financial report for first quarter wants to defer ₹ 16 crores expenditure
to third quarter on the argument that third quarter is having more sales therefore third quarter
should be debited by more expenditure. Considering the seasonal nature of business and that the
expenditures are uniform throughout all quarter.
Calculate the result of first quarter as per Ind AS 34 and comment on the company’s view.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
Result of the first quarter ending 30 June
Particulars Amounts (in crore)
Sales 70
Total Revenue (A) 70
Less: Employee’s benefits expenses (25)
Administrative and other expenses (12)
Finance cost (4)
Total Expense (B) (41)
Profit (A-B) 29
Note- As per Ind AS 34, the income and expense should be recognized when they are earned
and incurred respectively. Seasonal incomes will be recognized when they occur. Therefore,
the argument of ICPL is not correct considering the principles of Ind AS 34.
Illustration 4
Fixed production overheads for the financial year is ₹ 10,000. Normal expected production for the
year, after considering planned maintenance and normal breakdown, also considering the future
demand of the product is 2,000 MT. It is considered that there are no quarterly / seasonal variations.
Therefore, the normal expected production for each quarter is 500 MT and the fixed production
overheads for the quarter are ₹ 2,500.
Actual production achieved Quantity (In MT)
First quarter 400
Second quarter 600
Third quarter 500
Fourth quarter 400
Total 1,900
Presuming that there are no quarterly / seasonal variation, calculate the allocation of fixed
production overheads for all the four quarters as per Ind AS 34 read with Ind AS 2.
Solution
If it is considered that there is no quarterly / seasonal variation, therefore normal expected
production for each quarter is 500 MT and fixed production overheads for the quarter are
₹2,500.
Fixed production overhead to be allocated per unit of production in every quarter will be ₹ 5
perMT (Fixed overheads / Normal production).
Quarters Allocations
First Quarter Actual fixed production overheads = ₹2,500
Fixed production overheads based on the allocation rate of ₹ 5 per unitallocatedto
actual production = ₹5 x 400 = ₹2,000
Unallocated fixed production overheads to be charged as expense asper Ind
AS 2 and consequently as per Ind AS 34 = ₹500
Second  Actual fixed production overheads on year-to-date basis = ₹5,000
Quarter  Fixed production overheads to be absorbed on year-to-date basis = 1000 x
₹5 = ₹5,000
 Earlier, ₹ 500 was not allocated to production in the 1st quarter. To give
effect to the entire ₹ 5,000 to be allocated in the second quarter, as per Ind
AS 34, ₹ 500 are reversed by way of a credit to the statement of profit and

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
loss of the 2nd quarter.
Third Quarter  Actual production overheads on year-to-date basis = ₹ 7,500
 Fixed production overheads to be allocated on year-to-date basis =1,500x
5 = ₹7,500
 There is no under or over recovery of allocated overheads. Hence, no
further action is required.
Fourth  Actual fixed production overheads on year-to-date basis= ₹ 10,000
Quarter  Fixed production overheads to be allocated on year-to-date basis 1,900 x5
₹9,500
 ₹ 500, i.e., [₹ 2,500 – (₹ 5 x 400)] unallocated fixed production overheadsin the
4th quarter, are to be expensed off as per the principles of Ind AS 2 and
Ind AS 34 by way of a charge to the statement of profit and loss.
 Unallocated productions overheads for the year ₹ 500 (i.e ₹ 10,000-
₹ 9,500) are expensed in the Statement of profit and loss as perInd AS 2.
The cumulative result of all the quarters would also result in unallocated overheads of ₹ 500, thus,
meeting the requirements of Ind AS 34 that the quarterly results should not affect the
measurement of the annual results.
Illustration 5 (MTP APR 2021)
ABC Limited manufactures automobile parts. ABC Limited has shown a net profit of ₹
20,00,000 for the third quarter of 20X
(i) Following adjustments are made while computing the net profit:
(ii) Bad debts of ₹ 1,00,000 incurred during the quarter. 50% of the bad debts have been deferred
to the next quarter.
(iii) Additional depreciation of ₹ 4,50,000 resulting from the change in the method of
depreciation.
(iv) Exceptional loss of ₹ 28,000 incurred during the third quarter. 50% of exceptional loss have
been deferred to next quarter.
(v) ₹ 5,00,000 expenditure on account of administrative expenses pertaining to the third
quarter is deferred on the argument that the fourth quarter will have more sales; therefore fourth quarter
should be debited by higher expenditure. The expenditures are uniform throughout all quarters.
Ascertain the correct net profit to be shown in the Interim Financial Report of third quarter to be
presented to the Board of Directors.
Solution
In the instant case, the quarterly net profit has not been correctly stated. As per Ind AS 34, Interim
Financial Reporting, the quarterly net profit should be adjusted and restated as follows:
(i) The treatment of bad debts is not correct as the expenses incurred during an interim
reporting period should be recognised in the same period. Accordingly, ₹ 50,000 should be
deductedfrom ₹20,00,000.
(ii) Recognising additional depreciation of ₹ 4,50,000 in the same quarter is correct and is
in tune with Ind AS 34.
(iii) Treatment of exceptional loss is not as per the principles of Ind AS 34, as the entire
amount of ₹ 28,000 incurred during the third quarter should be recognized in the same quarter.
Hence ₹ 14,000 which was deferred should be deducted from the profits of third quarter only.
(iv) As per Ind AS 34 the income and expense should be recognised when they are
earned and incurred respectively. As per para 39 of Ind AS 34, the costs should be anticipated
or deferred only when:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(i) it is appropriate to anticipate or defer that type of cost at the end of the financial
year,and
(ii) costs are incurred unevenly during the financial year of an enterprise.
Therefore, the treatment done relating to deferment of ₹ 5,00,000 is not correct as
expenditures are uniform throughout all quarters.
Thus, considering the above, the correct net profits to be shown in Interim Financial Report of the
third quarter shall be ₹14,36,000 (₹20,00,000 -₹50,000 - ₹14,000 - ₹5,00,000).
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE

Question 01:
Company A expects to earn ₹ 15,000 pre-tax profit each quarter and has a corporate tax slab
of 20 percent on the first ₹ 20,000 of annual earnings and 40 per cent on all additional earnings.
Actual earnings match expectations. Calculate the amount of income tax to be shown in
each quarter.
Solution:
The following table shows the amount of income tax expense that is reported in each quarter:
Expected Total Income = 15,000 x 4 = ₹60,000
Expected Tax as per slabs = 20,000 x 20% + 40,000 x 40% = ₹20,000
Average Annual Income tax rate = 20,000/60,000 x 100 = 33.33%
Amount (₹)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Profit before tax 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000
Tax expense 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000
Question 02: (MAY 2019)
Narayan Ltd. provides you the following information and asks you to calculate the tax expense
for each quarter, assuming that there is no difference between the estimated taxable income
and the estimated accounting income:
Estimated Gross Annual Income 33,00,000
(Inclusive of Estimated Capital Gains of ₹8,00,000)
Estimated Income of Quarter I is ₹ 7,00,000, Quarter II is ₹ 8,00,000, Quarter III (including
Estimated Capital Gains of ₹8,00,000) is ₹12,00,000 and Quarter IV is ₹6,00,000.
Tax Rates: On Capital Gains 12%
On Other Income: First ₹5,00,000 30%
Balance Income· 40%
Solution:
As per para 30(c) of Ind AS 34 ‘Interim Financial Reporting’, income tax expense is recognised
in each interim period based on the best estimate of the weighted average annual income tax
rate expected for the full financial year.
If different income tax rates apply to different categories of income (such as capital gains or
income earned in particular industries) to the extent practicable, a separate rate is applied to
each individual category of interim period pre-tax income.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
₹
Estimated annual income exclusive of estimated capital gain (33,00,000 – 8,00,000)
(A) 25,00,000
Tax expense on other income:
30% on ₹5,00,000 1,50,000
40% on remaining ₹20,00,000 8,00,000
(B) 9,50,000
Weighted average annual income tax rate = B = 9,50,000 = 38%
A 25,00,000
Tax expense to be recognised in each of the quarterly reports
₹
Quarter I - ₹ 7,00,000 x 38% 2,66,000
Quarter II - ₹ 8,00,000 x 38% 3,04,000
Quarter III -₹ (12,00,000 - 8,00,000) x 38% 1,52,000
₹ 8,00,000 x 12% 96,000 2,48,000
Quarter IV - ₹ 6,00,000 x 38% 2,28,000
10,46,000
Question 03: (RTP NOV 2019)
An entity reports quarterly, earns ₹ 1,50,000 pre-tax profit in the first quarter but expects to incur
losses of ₹ 50,000 in each of the three-remaining quarter. The entity operates in a jurisdiction in
which its estimated average annual income tax rate is 30%.
The management believes that since the entity has zero income for the year, its income -tax
expense for the year will be zero. State whether the management’s views are correct or not? If
not then calculate the tax expense for each quarter as well as for the year as per Ind AS34.
Solution:
As illustrated in para 30 (c) of Ind AS 34 ‘Interim financial reporting’, income tax expense is
recognised in each interim period based on the best estimate of the weighted average
annual income tax rate expected for the full financial year.
Accordingly, the management’s contention that since the net income for the year will be zero
no income tax expense shall be charged quarterly in the interim financial report, is not correct.
Since the effective tax rate or average annual income tax rate is already given in the question
as 30%, the income tax expense will be recognised in each interim quarter based on this rate
only. Thefollowing table shows the correct income tax expense to be reported each quarter in
accordance with Ind AS 34:
Period Pre-tax earnings (in ₹) Effective tax rate Tax expense (in ₹)
First Quarter 1,50,000 30% 45,000
Second Quarter (50,000) 30% (15,000)
Third Quarter (50,000) 30% (15,000)
Fourth Quarter (50,000) 30% (15,000)
Annual 0 0
Question 04:
Due to decline in market price in second quarter, Happy India Ltd. incurred an inventory loss.
The Market price is expected to return to previous levels by the end of the year. At the end of
year, the decline had not reversed. When should the loss be reported in interim statement of
profit and loss of Happy India Ltd.?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Loss should be recognised in the second quarter of the year.
RTP, MTP, PAST QUESTIONS
RTP NOV 2020
QUESTION 1
An entity’s accounting year ends is 31st December, but its tax year end is 31st March. The entity
publishes an interim financial report for each quarter of the year ended 31st December, 2019. The
entity’s profit before tax is steady at `10,000 each quarter, and the estimated effective tax rate is
25% for the year ended 31st March, 2019 and 30% for the year ended 31st March, 2020. How the
related tax charge would be calculated for the year 2019 and its quarters.
SOLUTION
Table showing computation of tax charge:
Quarter Quarter Quarter ending Quarter ending Year ending
ending 31st ending 30th 30th 31st December, 31st
March, 2019 June, 2019 September, 2019 December,
2019 2019
Profit before 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 40,000
tax
Tax charge (2,500) (3,000) (3,000) (3,000) (11,500)
7,500 7,000 7,000 7,000 28,500
Since an entity’s accounting year is not same as the tax year, more than one tax rate might apply
during the accounting year. Accordingly, the entity should apply the effective tax rate for each
interim period to the pre-tax result for that period.
MTP APR 2021
QUESTION
ABC Limited manufactures automobile parts. ABC Limited has shown a net profit of Rs. 20,00,000
for the third quarter of 20X1. Following adjustments are made while computing the net profit:
(i) Bad debts of Rs. 1,00,000 incurred during the quarter. 50% of the bad debts have been
deferred to the next quarter.
(ii) Additional depreciation of Rs. 4,50,000 resulting from the change in the method of
depreciation.
(iii) Exceptional loss of Rs. 28,000 incurred during the third quarter. 50% of exceptional loss
have been deferred to next quarter.
(iv) Rs. 5,00,000 expenditure on account of administrative expenses pertaining to the third
quarter is deferred on the argument that the fourth quarter will have more sales;
therefore fourth quarter should be debited by higher expenditure. The expenditures are
uniform throughout all quarters.
Analyze and ascertain the correct net profit to be shown in the Interim Financial Report of third
quarter to be presented to the Board of Directors.
SOLUTION
In the instant case, the quarterly net profit has not been correctly stated. As per Ind AS 34, Interim
Financial Reporting, the quarterly net profit should be adjusted and restated as follows:
(i) The treatment of bad debts is not correct as the expenses incurred during an interim
reporting period should be recognised in the same period. Accordingly, Rs. 50,000
should be deducted from Rs. 20,00,000.
(ii) Recognising additional depreciation of Rs. 4,50,000 in the same quarter is correct and
is in tune with Ind AS 34.
(iii) Treatment of exceptional loss is not as per the principles of Ind AS 34, as the entire
amount of Rs. 28,000 incurred during the third quarter should be recognized in the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
same quarter. Hence Rs. 14,000 which was deferred should be deducted from the
profits of third quarter only.
(iv) As per Ind AS 34 the income and expense should be recognised when they are earned
and incurred respectively. As per para 39 of Ind AS 34, the costs should be anticipated
or deferred only when:
(i) it is appropriate to anticipate or defer that type of cost at the end of the financial
year, and
(ii) costs are incurred unevenly during the financial year of an enterprise. Therefore,
the treatment done relating to deferment of Rs. 5,00,000 is not correct as
expenditures are uniform throughout all quarters. Thus, considering the above, the
correct net profits to be shown in Interim Financial Report of the third quarter shall be
Rs. 14,36,000 (Rs. 20,00,000 -Rs. 50,000 - Rs.14,000 - Rs. 5,00,000).
Navya Limited manufacturer of ceramic tiles has shown a net profit of ₹ 15,00,000 for the first
quarter of 2018-2019. Following adjustments were made while computing the net profit:
a) Bad debts of ₹ 1,64,000 incurred during the quarter. 75% of the bad debts have been deferred for
the next three quarters (25% for each quarter).
b) Sales promotion expenses of ₹ 5,00,000 incurred in the first quarter and 90% expenses
deferred to the next three quarters (30% for each quarter) on the basis that the sales in these quarters
will be high in comparison to first quarter.
c) Additional depreciation of ₹ 3,50,000 resulting from the change in the method of depreciation has
been taken into consideration.
d) Extra-ordinary loss of ₹ 1,36,000 incurred during the quarter has been fully recognized in
this quarter.
Discuss the treatment required under Ind AS 34 and ascertain the correct net profit to be shown in
the InterimFinancial report of first quarter to be presented to the Board of Directors.
(5 Marks)
SOLUTION:
As per Ind AS 34, Interim Financial Reporting, the quarterly net profit should be adjusted and
restated as follows:
(i) Bad debts of ₹ 1,64,000 have been incurred during current quarter. Out of this, the company
has deferred 75% i.e., ₹ 1,23,000 to the next 3 quarters. This treatment is not correct as the
expenses incurred during an interim reporting period should be recognised in the same period
unless conditions mentioned in Ind AS 34 are fulfilled. Accordingly, ₹ 1,23,000 should be deducted
from the net profit of the current quarter ₹ 15,00,000.
(ii) Deferment of sales promotion expenses of ₹ 4,50,000 is not correct. It should be charged in
the quarter in which the expenses have been incurred. Hence, it should be charged in the first
quarter only.
(iii) Recognising additional depreciation of ₹ 3,50,000 in the same quarter is correct and is in tune
with Ind AS 34.
(iv) The treatment of extra-ordinary loss of ₹ 1,36,000 being recognised in the same quarter is
correct.
Thus, considering the above, the correct net profits to be shown in Interim Financial Report of
the thirdquarter shall be ₹15,00,000 - ₹1,23,000 - ₹4,50,000 = ₹9,27,000.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Lal Ltd. provides you the following information for financial year 2019 -2020: Estimated Income for the
year ended 31 March 2020:
Gross Annual Income (inclusive of Estimated Capital Gains of ₹ 4,00,000) ₹ 16,50,000
Quarter I ₹ 3,50,000
Quarter II ₹ 4,00,000
Quarter III (including Estimated Capital Gains of ₹ 4,00,000) ₹ 6,00,000
Quarter IV ₹ 3,00,000
Tax Rates On Other Income First ₹ 2,50,000 20%
Balance Income 30%
On Capital Gains 12%
Calculate the tax expense for each quarter, assuming that there is no difference between the estimated
taxable income and the estimated accounting income. (6
Marks)
SOLUTION:
As per Ind AS 34 ‘Interim Financial Reporting’, income tax expense is recognised in each
interim period based on the best estimate of the weighted average annual income tax rate
expected for the full financial year.
If different income tax rates apply to different categories of income (such as capital gains or
income earned in particular industries) to the extent practicable, a separate rate is applied to
each individual category of interim period pre-tax income.
₹
Estimated annual income exclusive of estimated capital gain(16,50,000 – 4,00,000) 12,50,000
(A)
Tax expense on other income:
20% on ₹2,50,000 50,000
30% on remaining ₹10,00,000 3,00,000
(B) 3,50,000
Weighted average annual income tax rate = (B/A) 350000 = 28%
1250000
Tax expense to be recognised in each of the quarterly reports:
₹
Quarter I - ₹ 3,50,000 x 28% 98,000
Quarter II - ₹ 4,00,000 x 28% 1,12,000
Quarter III - ₹ (6,00,000 - 4,00,000) x 28% 56,000
₹ 4,00,000 x 12% 48,000 1,04,000
Quarter IV - ₹ 3,00,000 x 28% 84,000
3,98,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
IND AS 115 REVENUE FROM CONTRACTS WITH CUSTOMERS

Illustration 1
New way limited decides to enter a new market that is currently experiencing economic difficulty and expects that in
future economy will improve. New way enters into an arrangement with a customer in the new region for networking
products for promised consideration of ₹ 1,250,000. At contract inception, New way expects that it may not be able to collect
the full amount from the customer.
Determine how New way will recognise this transaction?
Solution:
Assuming the contract meets the other criteria covered within the scope of the model in Ind AS 115, New
way need to assesses whether collectability is probable.
In making this assessment, New way considers whether the customer has the ability and intent to pay the
estimated transaction price, which may be an amount less than the contract price.
Illustration 2
A gymnasium enters into a contract with a new member to provide access to its gym for a 12-month period at ₹ 4,500
per month. The member can cancel his or her membership without penalty after three months. Specify the contract
term.
Solution
The enforceable rights and obligations of this contract are for three months, and therefore the contract term is three
months.
Illustration 3:
Contractor P enters into a manufacturing contract to produce 100 specialised CCTV Cameras for Customer Q for a
fixed price of ₹ 1,000 per sensor. Customer Q can cancel the contract without a penalty after receiving 10 CCTV
Cameras. Specify the contract units.
Solution:
P determines that because there is no substantive compensation amount payable by Q on termination of
the contract – i.e., no termination penalty in the contract – it is akin to a contract to produce 10 CCTV Cameras
that gives Customer Q an option to purchase an additional 90 CCTV Cameras. Hence, contract is for 10 units.
Illustration 4
Manufacturer of airplanes for the air force negotiates a contract to design and manufacture new fighter planes for a
Kashmir air base. At the same meeting, the manufacturer enters into a separate contract to supply parts for existing
planes at other bases. Would these contracts be combined?
Solution:
Contracts were negotiated at the same time, but they appear to have separate commercial objectives.
Manufacturing and supply contracts are not dependent on one another, and the planes and the parts are not a
single performance obligation. Therefore, contracts for supply of fighter planes and supply of parts shall not be
combined and instead, they shall be accounted separately.
Illustration 5
Software Company S enters into a contract to license its customer relationship management software to Customer B.
Three days later, in a separate contract, S agrees to provide consulting services to significantly customise the licensed
software to function in B’s IT environment. B is unable to use the software until the customisation services are
complete. Would these contracts be combined?
Solution:
S determines that the two contracts should be combined because they were entered into at nearly the same time
with the same customer, and the goods or services in the contracts are a single performance obligation.
Illustration 6
Manufacturer M enters into a contract to manufacture and sell a cyber security system to Government-related
Entity P. One week later, in a separate contract, M enters into a contract to sell the same system to Government-
related Entity Q. Both entities are controlled by the same government. During the negotiations, M agrees to sell the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
systems at a deep discount if both P and Q purchases the security system. Should these contracts be combined
or separately accounted?
Solution:
M concludes that the said two contracts should be combined because, among other things, P is a related party
of Q, the contracts were entered into at nearly the same time and the contracts were negotiated as a single
commercial package, which is clearly evident from the fact that discount is being offered if both the
parties purchases the security system, thereby also making the consideration in one contract dependent
on the other contract.
Illustration 7:
An entity promises to sell 120 products to a customer for ₹ 120,000 (₹ 1,000 per product). The products are
transferred to the customer over a six-month period. The entity transfers control of each product at a point in
time. After the entity has transferred control of 60 products to the customer, the contract is modified to require
the delivery of an additional 30 products (a total of 150 identical products) to the customer at a price of ₹ 950 per
product which is the standalone selling price for such additional products at the time of placing this additional order.
The additional 30 products were not included in the initial contract. It is assumed that additional products are contracted
for a price that reflects the stand - alone selling price. Determine the accounting for the modified contract?
Solution:
When the contract is modified, the price of the contract modification for the additional 30 products is an
additional ₹ 28,500 or ₹ 950 per product. The pricing for the additional products reflects the stand-alone selling price of the
products at the time of the contract modification and the additional products are distinct from the original
products.
Accordingly, the contract modification for the additional 30 products is, in effect, a new and separate contract
for future products that does not affect the accounting for the existing contract and ₹ 950 per product for the 30
products in the new contract.
Illustration 8
On 1st April, 20X1, KLC Ltd. enters into a contract with Mr. K to provide
- A machine for ₹ 2.5 million
- One year of maintenance services for ₹ 55,000 per month
On 1st October, 20X1, KLC Ltd. and Mr. K agree to modify the contract to reduce the amount of services from ₹
55,000 per month to ₹45,000 per month.
Determine the effect of change in the contract?
Solution:
The next six months of services are distinct from the services provided in the first six months before modification
in contract,
Therefore, KLC Ltd. will account for the contract modification as if it were a termination of the existing contract and
creation of a new contract.
The consideration allocated to remaining performance obligation is ₹ 270,000, which is the sum of
• The consideration promised by the customer (including amounts already received from the customer) that
was included in the estimate of the transaction price and had not yet been recognized as revenue. This
amount is zero.
• The consideration promised as part of the contract modification i.e., ₹ 270,000.
Illustration 9
Growth Ltd enters into an arrangement with a customer for infrastructure outsourcing deal.
Based on its experience, Growth Ltd determines that customising the infrastructure will take approximately 200
hours in total to complete the project and charges ₹ 150 per hour.
After incurring 100 hours of time, Growth Ltd and the customer agree to change an aspect of the project and increases the estimate
of labour hours by 50 hours at the rate of ₹ 100 per hour.
Determine how contract modification will be accounted as per Ind AS 115?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Solution
Considering that the remaining goods or services are not distinct, the modification will be accounted for on a
cumulative catch-up basis, as given below:
Particulars Hours Rate (₹) Amount (₹)
Initial contract amount 200 150 30,000
Modification in contract 50 100S 5,000
Contract amount after modification 250 140* 35,000
Revenue to be recognised 100 140 14,000
Revenue already booked 100 150 15,000
Adjustment in revenue (1,000)
*35,000 / 250 = 140
Illustration 10: (MTP APR 2021)
A construction services company enters into a contract with a customer to build a water purification plant. The
company is responsible for all aspects of the plant including overall project management, engineering and design services,
site preparation, physical construction of the plant, procurement of pumps and equipment for measuring and testing
flow volumes and water quality, and the integration of all components.
Determine whether the company has a single or multiple performance obligations under the contract?
Solution
Determining whether a good or service represents a performance obligation on its own or is
required to be aggregated with other goods or services can have a significant impact on the timing
of revenue recognition. In order to determine how many performance obligations are present in the
contract, the company applies the guidance above. While the customer may be able to benefit from
each promised good or service on its own (or together with other readily available resources), they
do not appear to be separately identifiable within the context of the contract. That is, the promised
goods and services are subject to significant integration, and as a result will be treated as single
performance obligation. This is consistent with a view that the customer is primarily interested in
acquiring a single asset (a water purification plant) rather than a collection of related components
and services.
Illustration 11:
An entity provides broadband services to its customers along with voice call services.
Customer buys modem from the entity. However, customer can also get the connection from the
entity and modem from any other vendor. The installation activity requires limited effort and the cost
involved is almost insignificant. It has various plans where it provides either broadband services or
voice call service or both.
Are the performance obligations under the contract distinct?
Solution:
Entity promises to customer to provide
 Broadband Service
 Voice Call services
 Modem
Entity’s promise to provide goods and services is distinct if
 customer can benefit from the good or service either on its own or together with other resources that
are readily available to the customer, and
 entity’s promise to transfer the good or service to the customer is separately identifiable from other
promisesin the contract
For broadband and voice call services -
 Broadband and voice services are separately identifiable from other promises as company has
various plans to provide the two services separately. These two services are not dependant or
interrelated. Also, the customer can benefit on its own from the services received.
For sale of modem -

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
 Customer can either buy product from entity or third party. No significant customisation or modification is
required for selling product.
Based on the evaluation we can say that there are three separate performance obligation: -
 Broadband Service
 Voice Call services
 Modem
Illustration 12:
An entity enters into a contract to build a power plant for a customer. The entity will be responsible for the
overall management of the project including services to be provided like engineering, site clearance, foundation,
procurement, construction of the structure, piping and wiring, installation of equipment and finishing.
Determine how many performance obligations does the entity have?
Solution
Based on the discussion above it needs to be determined that the promised goods and services are capable of
being distinct as per the principles of Ind AS 115. That is, whether the customer can benefit from the goods
and services either on their own or together with other readily available resources. This is evidenced by the fact
that the entity, or competitors of the entity, regularly sells many of these goods and services separately to other
customers. In addition, the customer could generate economic benefit from the individual goods and services
by using, consuming, selling or holding those goods or services.
However, the goods and services are not distinct within the context of the contract. That is, the entity's promise
to transfer individual goods and services in the contract are not separately identifiable from other promises in
the contract. This is evidenced by the fact that the entity provides a significant service of putting together the
various inputs or goods and services into the power plant or the output for which the customer has contracted.
Since both the criteria has not met, the goods and services are not distinct. The entity accounts for all of the
goods and services in the contract as a single performance obligation.
Illustration 13
Could the series requirement apply to hotel management services where day to day activities vary, involve
employeemanagement, procurement, accounting, etc.?
Solution
The series guidance requires each distinct good or service to be “substantially the same.” Management
should evaluate this requirement based on the nature of its promise to customer. For example, a promise to
provide hotel management services for a specified contract term may meet the series criteria. This is because
the entity is providing the same service of “hotel management” each period, even though some on underlying
activities may vary each day. The underlying activities for e.g., reservation services, property maintenance
services are activities to fulfil the hotel management service rather than separate promises. The distinct
service within the series is each time increment of performing the service.
Illustration 14
Entity A, a specialty construction firm, enters into a contract with Entity B to design and construct a multi-level
shopping centre with a customer car parking facility located in sub-levels underneath the shopping centre. Entity B
solicited bids from multiple firms on both phases of the project — design and construction.
The design and construction of the shopping centre and parking facility involves multiple goods and services
from architectural consultation and engineering through procurement and installation of all of the materials. Several of
these goods and services could be considered separate performance obligations because Entity A frequently
sells the services, such as
architectural consulting and engineering services, as well as standalone construction services based on third party
design, separately. Entity A may require to continually alter the design of the shopping centre and parking
facility during construction as well as continually assess the propriety of the materials initially selected for the project.
Determine how many performance obligations does the entity A have?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Solution:
Entity A analyses that it will be required to continually alter the design of the shopping centre and parking
facility during construction as well as continually assess the propriety of the materials initially selected for
the project. Therefore, the design and construction phases are highly dependent on one another (i.e., the two
phases are highly interrelated). Entity A also determines that significant customisation and modification of
the design and construction services is required in order to fulfil the performance obligation under the
contract. As such, Entity A concludes that the design and construction services will be bundled and
accounted for as one performance obligation.
Illustration 15:
An entity, a software developer, enters into a contract with a customer to transfer a software license, perform
an installation service and provide unspecified software updates and technical support (online and telephone) for a two-
year period. The entity sells the license, installation service and technical support separately. The installation service
includes changing the web screen for each type of user (for example, marketing, inventory management and information
technology). The installation service is routinely performed by other entities and does not significantly modify the software.
The software remains functional without the updates and the technical support.
Solution
The entity assesses the goods and services promised to the customer to determine which goods and services
are distinct. The entity observes that the software is delivered before the other goods and services and
remains functional without the updates and the technical support. Thus, the entity concludes that the customer
can benefit from each of the goods and services either on their own or together with the other goods and
services that arereadily available.
The entity also considers the factors of Ind AS 115 and determines that the promise to transfer each
good and service to the customer is separately identifiable from each of the other promises. In particular, the
entity observes that the installation service does not significantly modify or customise the software itself and,
as such, the software and the installation service are separate outputs promised by the entity instead of
inputs used to produce a combined output.
On the basis of this assessment, the entity identifies four performance obligations in the contract for the
following goods or services:
 The software license
 An installation service
 Software updates
 Technical support
Illustration 16: Significant customisation
The promised goods and services are the same as in the above Illustration, except that the contract specifies that, as
part of the installation service, the software is to be substantially customised to add significant new functionality to enable
the software to interface with other customised software applications used by the customer. The customised
installation service can be provided by other entities.
Solution
are distinct. The entity observes that the terms of the contract result in a promise to provide a significant
service of integrating the licensed software into the existing software system by performing a customised
installation service as specified in the contract. In other words, the entity is using the license and the
customised installation service as inputs to produce the combined output (i.e., a functional and integrated
software system) specified in the contract. In addition, the software is significantly modified and customised by
the service. Although the customised installation service can be provided by other entities, the entity
determines that within the context of the contract, the promise to transfer the license is not separately

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
identifiable from the customised installation service and, therefore, the criterion on the basis of the
factors is not met. Thus, the software license and the customised installation service are not distinct.
The entity concludes that the software updates and technical support are distinct from the other promises in
the contract. This is because the customer can benefit from the updates and technical support either on
their own or together with the other goods and services that are readily available and because the promise to
transfer the softwareupdates and the technical support to the customer are separately identifiable from each of
the other promises.
On the basis of this assessment, the entity identifies three performance obligations in the contract for the
following goods or services:
a) customised installation service (that includes the software license);
b) software updates; and
c) technical support.
Illustration 17
Telco T Ltd. enters into a two-year contract for internet services with Customer C. C also buys a modem and a router
from T Ltd. and obtains title to the equipment. T Ltd. does not require customers to purchase its modems and
routers and will provide internet services to customers using other equipment that is compatible with T Ltd.’s network.
There is a secondary market in which modems and routers can be bought or sold for amounts greater than scrap
value.
Determine how many performance obligations does the entity T Ltd. have?
Solution
T Ltd. concludes that the modem and router are each distinct and that the arrangement includes three
performance obligations (the modem, the router and the internet services) based on the following evaluation:
Criterion 1: Capable of being distinct
 C can benefit from the modem and router on their own because they can be resold for more than scrap
value.
 C can benefit from the internet services in conjunction with readily available resources – i.e., either
the modem and router are already delivered at the time of contract set - up, they could be bought from
alternative retail vendors or the internet service could be used with different equipment.
Criterion 2: Distinct within the context of the contract
 T Ltd. does not provide a significant integration service.
 The modem, router and internet services do not modify or customise one another.
 C could benefit from the internet services using routers and modems that are not sold by T Ltd. Therefore, themodem,
router and internet services are not highly dependent on or highly inter-related with each other. Illustration 18:
V Ltd. grants Customer C a three-year license for anti-virus software. Under the contract, V Ltd. promises to provide
C with when-and-if-available updates to that software during the license period. The updates are critical to the continued use
of the anti- virus software.
Solution:
V Ltd. concludes that the licence and the updates are capable of being distinct because the anti - virus
software can still deliver its original functionality during the licence period without the updates. C can also
benefit from the updates together with the licence transferred when the contract is signed.
However, V Ltd. concludes that the licence and the updates are not separately identifiable because the
software and the service are inputs into a combined item in the contract − i.e. the nature of V Ltd.‘s
promise is to provide continuous anti-virus protection for the term of the contract. Therefore, V Ltd.
accounts for the licence and the updates as a single performance obligation.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Illustration 19:
Media Company P Ltd. offers magazine subscriptions to customers. When customers subscribe, they receive a printed copy
of the magazine each month and access to the magazine’s online content.
Solution:
P evaluates whether the promises to provide printed copies and online access are separate performance
obligations.P determines that the arrangement includes two performance obligations for the following reasons:
 The printed copies and online access are both capable of being distinct because the customer could use
them on their own.
 The printed copies and online access are distinct within the context of the contract because they are
different formats so they do not significantly customise or modify each other, nor is there any
transformative relationship into a single output.
Illustration 20-Implied promise to reseller’s customers
Software Company K Ltd. enters into a contract with reseller D, which then sells software products to end users. K
Ltd. has a customary business practice of providing free telephone support to end users without involving the reseller,
and both reseller and the customer expect K Ltd. to continue to provide this support.
Determine how many performance obligations does the entity K Ltd. have?
Solution:
In evaluating whether the telephone support is a separate performance obligation, K Ltd. Notes that the
promise to provide telephone support free of charge to end users is considered a service that meets
the definition of a performance obligation when control of the software product transfers to D. As a result,
K Ltd. accounts for thetelephone support as a separate performance obligation in the transaction with
D.
Illustration 21-Implied performance obligation
Carmaker N Ltd. has a historical practice of offering free maintenance services – e.g. oil changes and tyre rotation –
for two years to the end customers of dealers who buy its vehicles. However, the two years’ free maintenance is not
explicitly stated in the contract with its dealers, but it is typically stated in N’s advertisements for the vehicles.
Solution:
The maintenance is treated as a separate performance obligation in the sale of the vehicle to the dealer.
Revenuefrom the sale of the vehicle is recognised when control of the vehicle is transferred to the dealer.
Revenue from the maintenance services is recognised separately as and when the maintenance services are
provided to the retail customer.
Illustration 22
Entity sells gym memberships for ₹ 7,500 per year to 100 customers, with an option to renew at a discount in 2nd and
3rd years at ₹ 6,000 per year. Entity estimates an annual attrition rate of 50% each year.
Determine the amount of revenue to be recognised in the first year and the amount of contract liability against
the
Solution
Allocated price per unit (year) is calculated as follows:
Total estimated memberships are 175 members (Year 1 = 100; Year 2 = 50; Year 3 = 25) = 175
Total consideration is ₹ 12,00,000 {(100 x 7,500) + (50 x 6,000) + (25 x 6,000)} Allocated price per membership is ₹ 6,857
approx. (12,00,000 / 175)
Basis on above, it is to be noted that although entity has collected ₹ 7,500 but revenue can be recognised at ₹ 6,857 approx. per
membership and remaining ₹ 643 should be recorded as contract liability against option given to customer for
renewing their membership at discount.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Illustration 23
An entity enters into a contract for the sale of Product A for ₹ 1,000. As part of the contract, the entity gives the
customer a 40% discount voucher for any future purchases up to ₹ 1,000 in the next 30 days. The entity intends
to offer a 10% discount on all sales during the next 30 days as part of a seasonal promotion. The 10% discount
cannot be used in addition to the 40% discount voucher.
The entity believes there is 80% likelihood that a customer will redeem the voucher and, on an average, a
customer will purchase ₹ 500 of additional products.
Determine how many performance obligations does the entity have and their stand-alone selling price and allocated
transaction price?
Solution
Since all customers will receive a 10% discount on purchases during the next 30 days, the only additional
discount that provides the customer with a material right is the incremental discount of 30% on the products
purchased. The entity accounts for the promise to provide the incremental discount as a separate
performance obligation in the contract for the sale of Product A.
The entity believes there is 80% likelihood that a customer will redeem the voucher and, on an average, a
customer will purchase ₹ 500 of additional products. Consequently, the entity’s estimated stand-alone selling
price of the discount voucher is ₹ 120 (₹ 500 average purchase price of additional products x 30% incremental
discount x 80% likelihood of exercising the option). The stand-alone selling prices of Product A and the
discount voucher and the resulting allocation of the ₹1,000 transaction price are as follows:
Performance obligations Stand-alone selling price
Product A ₹ 1000
Discount voucher ₹120
Total ₹ 1120
Performance obligations Allocated transaction price (to nearest ₹10)

Product A (₹1000 ÷ ₹1120 × ₹ 1000) ₹ 890
Discount voucher (₹120 ÷ ₹1120 × ₹1000) ₹110
Total ₹1000
The entity allocates ₹ 890 to Product A and recognises revenue for Product A when control transfers. The
entity allocates ₹ 110 to the discount voucher and recognises revenue for the voucher when the customer redeems it
for goods or services or when it expires.
Illustration 24
A cable company provides television services for a fixed rate fee of ₹ 800 per month for a period of 3 years. Cable
services is satisfied overtime because customer consumes and receives benefit from services as it is provided i.e.
customer generally benefits each day that they have access to cable service.
Determine how many performance obligations does the cable company have?
Solution:
Cable company determines that each increment of its services e.g., day or month, is a distinct performance
obligation because customer benefits from that period of services on its own. Additionally, each
increment of service is separately identifiable from those preceding and following it i.e., one service period
does not significantly affect, modify or customise another. Therefore, it can be concluded that its contract with
customer is a single performance obligation to provide three years of cable service because each of the
distinct increments of service is satisfied over time. Also, cable company uses the same measure of progress
to recognise revenue on its cable television service regardless of the contract’s time period.
Illustration 25
Manufacturer M enters into a 60-day consignment contract to ship 1,000 dresses to Retailer A’s stores. Retailer A is
obligated to pay Manufacturer M ₹ 20 per dress when the dress is sold to an end customer. During the
consignment period, Manufacturer M has the contractual right to require Retailer A to either return the dresses or

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
transfer them to another retailer. Manufacturer M is also required to accept the return of the inventory. State when
the control is transferred.
Solution:
Manufacturer M determines that control has not been transferred to Retailer A on delivery, for the following reasons:
(a) Retailer A does not have an unconditional obligation to pay for the dresses until they have been sold
to an end customer;
(b) Manufacturer M is able to require that the dresses be transferred to another retailer at any time before Retailer A
sells them to an end customer; and
(c) Manufacturer M is able to require the return of the dresses or transfer them to another retailer.
Manufacturer M determines that control of the dresses transfers when they are sold to an end customer i.e.
when Retailer A has an unconditional obligation to pay Manufacturer M and can no longer return or
otherwise transfer the dresses.
Manufacturer M recognises revenue as the dresses are sold to the end customer.
Illustration 26
An entity negotiates with major airlines to purchase tickets at reduced rates compared with the price of tickets
sold directly by the airlines to the public. The entity agrees to buy a specific number of tickets and will pay for
those tickets even if it is not able to resell them. The reduced rate paid by the entity for each ticket purchased is
negotiated and agreed in advance. The entity determines the prices at which the airline tickets will be sold to its
customers. The entity sells the tickets and collects the consideration from customers when the tickets are sold ;
therefore, there is no credit risk.
The entity also assists the customers in resolving complaints with the service provided by airlines. However, each
airline is responsible for fulfilling obligations associated with the ticket, including remedies to a customer for
dissatisfaction with the service.
Determine whether the entity is a principal or an agent.
Solution
To determine whether the entity’s performance obligation is to provide the specified goods or services itself (i.e.,
the entity is a principal) or to arrange for another party to provide those goods or services (i.e., the entity is an
agent), the entity considers the nature of its promise. The entity determines that its promise is to provide
the customerwith a ticket, which provides the right to fly on the specified flight or another flight if the specified
flight is changed or cancelled. The entity considers the following indicators for assessment as principal or
agent under the contract with the customers:
(a) the entity is primarily responsible for fulfilling the contract, which is providing the right to fly. However, the
entity is not responsible for providing the flight itself, which will be provided by the airline.
(b) the entity has inventory risk for the tickets because they are purchased before, they are sold to the
entity’s customers and the entity is exposed to any loss as a result of not being able to sell the tickets for
more thanthe entity’s cost.
(c) the entity has discretion in setting the sales prices for tickets to its customers.
The entity concludes that its promise is to provide a ticket (i.e., a right to fly) to the customer. On the basis
of the indicators, the entity concludes that it controls the ticket before it is transferred to the customer. Thus,
the entity concludes that it is a principal in the transaction and recognises revenue in the gross amount of
consideration to which it is entitled in exchange for the tickets transferred.
Illustration 27:
Company D Ltd. provides advertising services to customers. D Ltd. enters into a sub-contract with a multinational
online video sharing company, F Ltd. Under the sub-contract, F Ltd. places all of D Ltd.’s customers’ adverts.
D Ltd. notes the following:
– D Ltd. works directly with customers to understand their advertising needs before placing adverts.
– D Ltd. is responsible for ensuring that the advert meets the customer’s needs after the advert is placed.
– D Ltd. directs F Ltd. over which advert to place and when to place it.
– D Ltd. does not bear inventory risk because there is no minimum purchase requirement with F Ltd.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
– D Ltd. does not have discretion in setting the price because fees are charged based on F Ltd.’s scheduled
rates D is Principal or an agent?
Solution
D Ltd. is primarily responsible for fulfilling the promise to provide advertising services. Although F Ltd. delivers
the placement service, D Ltd. directly works with customers to ensure that the services are performed to
their requirements. Even though D Ltd. does not bear inventory risk and does not have discretion in setting the
price, it controls the advertising services before they are provided to the customer. Therefore, D Ltd. is a
principal in this case.
Illustration 28
Customer buy a new data connection from the telecom entity. It pays one-time registration and activation fees at the
time of purchase of new connection. The customer will be charged based on the usage of the data services of
the connection on monthly basis.
Are the performance obligations under the contract distinct?
Solution
By selling a new connection, the entity promises to supply data services to customer. Customer will not be
able to benefit from just buying a data card and data services from third party. The activity of registering and
activating connection is not a service to customer and therefore does not represent satisfaction of performance
obligation.
Entity’s obligation is to provide data service and hence activation is not a separate performance obligation.
Illustration 29: Estimating variable consideration
XYZ Limited enters into a contract with a customer to build a sophisticated machinery. The promise to transfer the
asset is a performance obligation that is satisfied over time. The promised consideration is ₹ 2.5 crore, but that amount
will be reduced or increased depending on the timing of completion of the asset. Specifically, for each day after 31 st March,
20X1 that the asset is incomplete, the promised consideration is reduced by ₹ 1 lakh. For each day before 31st
March, 20X1 that the asset is complete, the promised consideration increases by ₹ 1 lakh.
In addition, upon completion of the asset, a third party will inspect the asset and assign a rating based on metrics that
are defined in the contract. If the asset receives a specified rating, the entity will be entitled to an incentive bonus of ₹
15 lakh. Determine the transaction price.
Solution
In determining the transaction price, the entity prepares a separate estimate for each element of variable
consideration to which the entity will be entitled using the estimation methods described in paragraph 53 of Ind AS
115:
a) the entity decides to use the expected value method to estimate the variable consideration associated with
the daily penalty or incentive (i.e., ₹ 2.5 crore, plus or minus ₹ 1 lakh per day). This is because it is the method
that the entity expects to better predict the amount of consideration to which it will be entitled.
b) the entity decides to use the most likely amount to estimate the variable consideration associated
with the incentive bonus. This is because there are only two possible outcomes (₹ 15 lakh or ₹ Nil) and it is the method
that the entity expects to better predict the amount of consideration to which it will be entitled.
Illustration 30: Estimating variable consideration (MTP APR 2021)
AST Limited enters into a contract with a customer to build a manufacturing facility. The entity determines that the contract
contains one performance obligation satisfied over time.
Construction is scheduled to be completed by the end of the 36 th month for an agreed-upon price of ₹ 25 crore.
The entity has the opportunity to earn a performance bonus for early completion as follows:
 15 percent bonus of the contract price if completed by the 30th month (25% likelihood)
 10 percent bonus if completed by the 32nd month (40% likelihood)
 5 percent bonus if completed by the 34th month (15% likelihood)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
In addition to the potential performance bonus for early completion, AST Limited is entitled to a quality bonus of ₹
2 crore if a health and safety inspector assigns the facility a gold star rating as defined by the agency in the terms
of the contract. AST Limited concludes that it is 60% likely that it will receive the quality bonus.
Determine the transaction price
Solution
In determining the transaction price, AST Limited separately estimates variable consideration for each element
of variability i.e., the early completion bonus and the quality bonus.
AST Limited decides to use the expected value method to estimate the variable consideration associated with
the early completion bonus because there is a range of possible outcomes and the entity has experience
with a large number of similar contracts that provide a reasonable basis to predict future outcomes. Therefore,
the entity expects this method to best predict the amount of variable consideration associated with the
early completion bonus. AST’s best estimate of the early completion bonus is ₹ 2.13 crore, calculated as shown in the following table:
Bonus % Amount of bonus (₹ in crore) Probability Probability-weighted amount (₹ in crore)
15% 3.75 25% 0.9375
10% 2.50 40% 1.00
5% 1.25 15% 0.1875
0% - 20% -
2.125
AST Limited decides to use the most likely amount to estimate the variable consideration associated with
the potential quality bonus because there are only two possible outcomes (₹ 2 crore or ₹ Nil) and this method
would best predict the amount of consideration associated with the quality bonus. AST Limited believes the
most likely amount of the quality bonus is ₹ 2 crore.
Illustration 31: Volume discount incentive
HT Limited enters into a contract with a customer on 1st April, 20X1 to sell Product X for ₹ 1,000 per unit. If the
customer purchases more than 100 units of Product A in a financial year, the contract specifies that the
price per unit is retrospectively reduced to ₹ 900 per unit. Consequently, the consideration in the contract is
variable.
For the first quarter ended 30th June, 20X1, the entity sells 10 units of Product A to the customer. The entity
estimates that the customer's purchases will not exceed the 100-unit threshold required for the volume discount
in the financial year. HT Limited determines that it has significant experience with this product and with the
purchasing pattern of the customer. Thus, HT Limited concludes that it is highly probable that a significant reversal in
the cumulative amount of revenue recognised (i.e., ₹ 1,000 per unit) will not occur when the uncertainty is resolved (i.e.
when the total amount of purchases is known).
Further, in May, 20X1, the customer acquires another company and in the second quarter ended 30th September,
20X1 the entity sells an additional 50 units of Product A to the customer. In the light of the new fact, the entity
estimates that the customer's purchases will exceed the 100-unit threshold for the financial year and therefore
it will be required to retrospectively reduce the price per unit to ₹ 900.
Determine the amount of revenue to be recognise by HT Ltd. for the quarter ended 30th June, 20X1 and
30th September, 20X1
Solution
The entity recognises revenue of ₹ 10,000 (10 units × ₹ 1,000 per unit) for the quarter ended 30th June, 20X1. HT Limited
recognises revenue of ₹ 44,000 for the quarter ended 30th September, 20X1. That amount is calculated from ₹
45,000 for the sale of 500 units (50 units x ₹ 900 per unit) less the change in transaction price of ₹ 1,000 (10 units x ₹
100 price reduction) for the reduction of revenue relating to units sold for the quarter ended 30 th June, 20X1.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Illustration 32: Measurement of variable consideration
An entity has a fixed fee contract for ₹ 1 million to develop a product that meets specified performance criteria.
Estimated cost to complete the contract is ₹ 9,50,000. The entity will transfer control of the product over five years,
and the entity uses the cost-to-cost input method to measure progress on the contract. An incentive award is
available if the product meets the following weight criteria:
Weight (kg) Award % of fixed fee Incentive fee
951 or greater 0% —
701–950 10% ₹ 100,000
700 or less 25% ₹ 250,000
The entity has extensive experience creating products that meet the specific performance criteria. Based on its
experience, the entity has identified five engineering alternatives that will achieve the 10 percent incentive and two
that will achieve the 25 percent incentive. In this case, the entity determined that it has 95 percent confidence
that it will achieve the 10 percent incentive and 20 percent confidence that it will achieve the 25 percent
incentive.
Based on this analysis, the entity believes 10 percent to be the most likely amount when estimating the transaction
price. Therefore, the entity includes only the 10 percent award in the transaction price when calculating revenue because
the entity has concluded it is probable that a significant reversal in the amount of cumulative revenue recognized will
not occur when the uncertainty associated with the variable consideration is subsequently resolved due to its 95
percent confidence in achieving the 10 percent award.
The entity reassesses its production status quarterly to determine whether it is on track to meet the criteria for the incentive
award. At the end of the year four, it becomes apparent that this contract will fully achieve the weight-based criterion.
Therefore, the entity revises its estimate of variable consideration to include the entire 25 percent incentive fee in the year
four because, at this point, it is probable that a significant reversal in the amount of cumulative revenue recognized
will not occur when including the entire variable consideration in the transaction price.
Evaluate the impact of changes in variable consideration when cost incurred is as follows:
Year ₹
1 50,000
2 1,75,000
3 4,00,000
4 2,75,000
5 50,000
Solution
Note: For simplification purposes, the table calculates revenue for the year independently based on costs
incurred during the year divided by total expected costs, with the assumption that total expected costs do not
change.
Fixed consideration A 1,000,000
Estimated costs to B 950,000
complete*
Year 1 Year 2 Year3 Year 4 Year 5
Total estimated variable C 100,000 100,000 100,000 250,000 250,000
consideration
Fixed revenue D=A*H/B 52,632 184,211 421,530 289,474 52,632
Variable revenue E=C*H/B 5,263 18,421 42,105 72,368 13,158
Cumulative revenue F — — — 99,370 —
adjustment (See below)
Total revenue G=D+E+F 57,895 202,632 463,158 461,212 65,790
Costs H 50,000 175,000 400,000 275,000 50,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Operating profit I=G–H 7,895 27,632 63,158 186,212 15,790
Margin (rounded off) J=I/G 14% 14% 14% 40% 24%
* For simplicity, it is assumed there is no change to the estimated costs to complete throughout the
contract period.
* In practice, under the cost-to-cost measure of progress, total revenue for each period is determined by
multiplying the total transaction price (fixed and variable) by the ratio of cumulative cost incurred to total
estimated costs to complete, less revenue recognized to date.
Calculation of cumulative catch-up adjustment:
Updated variable consideration L 250,000
Percent complete in Year 4: (rounded off) M=N/O 95%
Cumulative costs through Year 4 N 900,000
Estimated costs to complete O 950,000
Cumulative variable revenue through Year 4: P 138,130
Cumulative catch-up adjustment F=L x M–P 99,370
Illustration 33 : Management fees subject to the constraint
On 1st April, 20X1, an entity enters into a contract with a client to provide asset management services for five
years. The entity receives a two per cent quarterly management fee based on the client's assets under management at the
end of each quarter. At 31st March, 20X2, the client's assets under management are ₹ 100 crore. In addition, the
entity receives a performance-based incentive fee of 20 per cent of the fund's return in excess of the return of an
observable market index over the five-year period. Consequently, both the management fee and the performance fee
in the contract are variable consideration. Analyse the revenue to be recognised on 31st March, 20X2.
Solution:
The entity accounts for the services as a single performance obligation because it is providing a series of
distinct services that are substantially the same and have the same pattern of transfer (the services transfer to
the customer over time and use the same method to measure progress —that is, a time-based measure of
progress).
The entity observes that the promised consideration is dependent on the market and thus is highly susceptible
to factors outside the entity's influence. In addition, the incentive fee has a large number and a broad range of
possible consideration amounts. The entity also observes that although it has experience with similar
contracts, that experience is of little predictive value in determining the future performance of the market.
Therefore, at contract inception, the entity cannot conclude that it is highly probable that a significant reversal in
the cumulative amount of revenue recognised would not occur if the entity included its estimate of the
management fee or the incentive fee in the transaction price.
At each reporting date, the entity updates its estimate of the transaction price. Consequently, at the end of
each quarter, the entity concludes that it can include in the transaction price the actual amount of the
quarterly management fee because the uncertainty is resolved. However, the entity concludes that it
cannot include its estimate of the incentive fee in the transaction price at those dates. This is because there
has not been a change in its assessment from contract inception —the variability of the fee based on the
market index indicates that the entity cannot conclude that it is highly probable that a significant reversal in
the cumulative amount of revenue recognised would not occur if the entity included its estimate of the
incentive fee in the transaction price.
At 31st March, 20X2, the client's assets under management are ₹ 100 crore. Therefore, the resulting quarterly
management fee and the transaction price is ₹ 2 crore.
At the end of each quarter, the entity allocates the quarterly management fee to the distinct services provided
during the quarter. This is because the fee relates specifically to the entity's efforts to transfer the services for
that quarter, which are distinct from the services provided in other quarters.
Consequently, the entity recognises ₹ 2 crore as revenue for the quarter ended 31st March, 20X2.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Illustration 34: Right of return
An entity enters into 1,000 contracts with customers. Each contract includes the sale of one product for ₹ 50 (1,000
total products × ₹ 50 = ₹ 50,000 total consideration). Cash is received when control of a product transfers. The
entity's customary business practice is to allow a customer to return any unused product within 30 days and
receive a full refund. The entity's cost of each product is ₹ 30.
The entity applies the requirements in Ind AS 115 to the portfolio of 1,000 contracts because it reasonably expects
that, in accordance with paragraph 4, the effects on the financial statements from applying these requirements to the
portfolio would not differ materially from applying the requirements to the individual contracts within the portfolio.
Since the contract allows a customer to return the products, the consideration received from the customer is variable.
To estimate the variable consideration to which the entity will be entitled, the entity decides to use the expected value
method (see paragraph 53(a) of Ind AS 115) because it is the method that the entity expects to better predict the
amount of consideration to which it will be entitled. Using the expected value method, the entity estimates that
970 products will not be returned.
The entity estimates that the costs of recovering the products will be immaterial and expects that the returned
products can be resold at a profit.
Determine the amount of revenue, refund liability and the asset to be recognised by the entity for the said contracts.
Solution:
The entity also considers the requirements in paragraphs 56–58 of Ind AS 115 on constraining estimates
of variable consideration to determine whether the estimated amount of variable consideration of ₹ 48,500 (₹ 50 ×
970 products not expected to be returned) can be included in the transaction price. The entity considers the factors
in paragraph 57 of Ind AS 115 and determines that although the returns are outside the entity's influence, it has
significant experience in estimating returns for this product and customer class. In addition, the uncertainty will
be resolved within a short time frame (ie the 30-day return period). Thus, the entity concludes that it is highly
probable that a significant reversal in the cumulative amount of revenue recognised (i.e., ₹ 48,500) will not occur
as the uncertainty is resolved (i.e., over the return period).
The entity estimates that the costs of recovering the products will be immaterial and expects that the returned
products can be resold at a profit.
Upon transfer of control of the 1,000 products, the entity does not recognise revenue for the 30 products that it
expects to be returned. Consequently, in accordance with paragraphs 55 and B21 of Ind AS 115, the
entity recognises the following:
(a) revenue of ₹ 48,500 (₹ 50 × 970 products not expected to be returned);
(b) a refund liability of ₹ 1,500 (₹ 50 refund × 30 products expected to be returned); and
(c) an asset of ₹ 900 (₹ 30 × 30 products for its right to recover products from customers on settling the refund liability).
Illustration 35: Warranty
An entity manufactures and sells computers that include an assurance-type warranty for the first90 days. The
entity offers an optional ‘extended coverage’ plan under which it will repair or replace any defective part for three years
from the expiration of the assurance-type warranty. Since the optional ‘extended coverage’ plan is sold separately, the
entity determines that the three years of extended coverage represent a separate performance obligation (i.e., a
service-type warranty). The total transaction price for the sale of a computer and the extended warranty is ₹ 36,000.
The entity determines that the stand-alone selling prices of the computer and the extended warranty are ₹ 32,000
and ₹ 4,000, respectively. The inventory value of the computer is ₹ 14,400. Furthermore, the entity estimates that,
based on its experience, it will incur ₹ 2,000 in costs to repair defects that arise within the 90-day coverage period
for the assurance-type warranty.
Pass required journal entries.
Solution:
The entity will record the following journal entries:
₹ ₹
Cash / Trade receivables Dr. 36,000
Warranty expense Dr. 2,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
To Accrued warranty costs (assurance-type warranty) 2,000
To Contract liability (service-type warranty) 4,000
To Revenue 32,000
(To record revenue and contract liabilities related to warranties)
Cost of goods sold Dr. 14,400
To Inventory 14,400
(To derecognise inventory and recognise cost of goods sold)
The entity derecognises the accrued warranty liability associated with the assurance-type warranty as
actual warranty costs are incurred during the first 90 days after the customer receives the computer. The entity
recognises the contract liability associated with the service-type warranty as revenue during the contract
warranty period and recognises the costs associated with providing the service-type warranty as they are
incurred. The entity had to determine whether the repair costs incurred are applied against the warranty reserve
already established for c laims that occur during the first 90 days or recognised as an expense as
incurred.
Illustration 36: Warranty
Entity sells 100 ultra-life batteries for ₹ 2,000 each and provides the customer with a five-year guarantee that the
batteries will withstand the elements and continue to perform to specifications. The entity, which normally provides a
one-year guarantee to customer purchasing ultra-life batteries, determines that years two through five represent a separate
performance obligation. The entity determines that ₹ 1,70,000 of the ₹ 2,00,000 transaction price should be allocated to
the batteries and ₹ 30,000 to the service warranty (based on estimated stand-alone selling prices and a relative selling
price allocation). The entity’s normal one- year warranty cost is ₹ 1 per battery. Pass required journal entries.
Solution
Cash/Receivables Dr. 2,00,000
To Revenue 1,70,000
To Contract liability (service warranty) 30,000
Warranty expense Dr. 10,000
To Accrued warranty costs (assurance warranty) 10,000
The entity will record the following journal entries:
Upon delivery of the batteries, the entity records the following entry:
The contract liability is recognised as revenue over the service warranty period (years 2 - 5). The costs of
providing the service warranty are recognised as incurred. The assurance warranty obligation is used /
derecognised as defective units are replaced / repaired during the initial year of the warranty. Upon
expiration of the assurancewarranty period, any remaining assurance warranty obligation is reversed.
Illustration 37: Financing component: significant or insignificant?
A commercial airplane component supplier enters into a contract with a customer for promised consideration of ₹
70,00,000. Based on an evaluation of the facts and circumstances, the supplier concluded that ₹ 1,40,000 represented an
insignificant financing component because of an advance payment received in excess of a year before the transfer of control
of the product.
State whether company needs to make any adjustment in determining the transaction price.
What if the advance payment was larger and received further in advance, such that the entity concluded that ₹ 14,00,000
represented the financing component based on an analysis of the facts and circumstances.
Solution
The entity may conclude that ₹ 1,40,000, or 2 percent of the contract price, is not significant, and the entity may not need
to adjust the consideration promised in determining the transaction price.
However, when the advance payment was larger and received further in advance, such that the entity may
conclude that ₹ 14,00,000 represents the financing component based on an analysis of the facts and circumstances.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
In such a case, the entity may conclude that ₹ 14,00,000, or 20 percent of the contract price, is significant, and
the entity should adjust the consideration promised in determining the transaction price.
Note: In this illustration, the entity’s conclusion that 2 percent of the transaction price was not significant and
20 percent was significant is a judgment based on the entity’s facts and circumstances. An entity may
reach a different conclusion based on its facts and circumstances.
Illustration 38: Accounting for significant financing component
NKT Limited sells a product to a customer for ₹ 1,21,000 that is payable 24 months after delivery. The customer
obtains control of the product at contract inception. The contract permits the customer to return the product within 90
days. The product is new and the entity has no relevant historical evidence of product returns or other available market
evidence.
The cash selling price of the product is ₹ 1,00,000 which represents the amount that the customer would pay upon
delivery for the same product sold under otherwise identical terms and conditions as at contract inception. The entity's
cost of the product is ₹ 80,000. The contract includes an implicit interest rate of 10 per cent (i.e. the interest rate
that over 24 months discounts the promised consideration of ₹ 1,21,000 to the cash selling price of ₹ 1,00,000).
Analyse the above transaction with respect to its financing component.
Solution:
The contract includes a significant financing component. This is evident from the difference between the
amount of promised consideration of ₹ 1,21,000 and the cash selling price of ₹ 1,00,000 at the date that the goods are
transferred to the customer.
The contract includes an implicit interest rate of 10 per cent (i.e., the interest rate that over 24
months discounts the promised consideration of ₹ 1,21,000 to the cash selling price of ₹ 1,00,000). The
entity evaluates the rate and concludes that it is commensurate with the rate that would be reflected in a
separate financing transaction between the entity and its customer at contract inception.
Until the entity receives the cash payment from the customer, interest revenue would be recognised
in accordance with Ind AS 109. In determining the effective interest rate in accordance with Ind AS 109,
the entitywould consider the remaining contractual term.
Illustration 39: Determining the discount rate
VT Limited enters into a contract with a customer to sell equipment. Control of the equipment transfers to the
customer when the contract is signed. The price stated in the contract is ₹ 1 crore plus a 10% contractual
rate of interest, payable in 60 monthly instalments of ₹ 212,470.
Determine the discounting rate and the transaction price when
Case A—Contractual discount rate reflects the rate in a separate financing transaction
Case B—Contractual discount rate does not reflect the rate in a separate financing transaction i.e., 14%.
Solution
Case A—Contractual discount rate reflects the rate in a separate financing transaction
In evaluating the discount rate in the contract that contains a significant financing component, VT Limited
observes that the 10% contractual rate of interest reflects the rate that would be used in a separate
financing transaction between the entity and its customer at contract inception (i.e., the contractual rate of
interest of 10% reflects the credit characteristics of the customer).
The market terms of the financing mean that the cash selling price of the equipment is ₹ 1 crore. This
amount is recognised as revenue and as a loan receivable when control of the equipment transfers to the
customer. The entity accounts for the receivable in accordance with Ind AS 109.
Case B—Contractual discount rate does not reflect the rate in a separate financing transaction
In evaluating the discount rate in the contract that contains a significant financing component, the entity
observes that the 10% contractual rate of interest is significantly lower than the 14% interest rate that would be
used in a separate financing transaction between the entity and its customer at contract inception (i.e., the
contractual rate of interest of 10% does not reflect the credit characteristics of the customer). This suggests
that the cash selling price is less than ₹ 1 crore.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
VT Limited determines the transaction price by adjusting the promised amount of consideration to reflect
the contractual payments using the 14% interest rate that reflects the credit characteristics of the
customer. Consequently, the entity determines that the transaction price is ₹ 9,131,346 (60 monthly payments
of ₹ 212,470 discounted at 14%). The entity recognises revenue and a loan receivable for that amount. The
entity accounts for the loan receivable in accordance with Ind AS 109.
Illustration 40: Advance payment and assessment of discount rate
ST Limited enters into a contract with a customer to sell an asset. Control of the asset will transfer to the customer in
two years (i.e., the performance obligation will be satisfied at a point in time). The contract includes two alternative
payment options:
1) Payment of ₹ 5,000 in two years when the customer obtains control of the asset or
2) Payment of ₹ 4,000 when the contract is signed. The customer elects to pay ₹ 4,000 when the contract is
signed.
ST Limited concludes that the contract contains a significant financing component because of the length of time
between when the customer pays for the asset and when the entity transfers the asset to the customer, as well as the
prevailing interest rates in the market.
The interest rate implicit in the transaction is 11.8 per cent, which is the interest rate necessary to make the two
alternative payment options economically equivalent. However, the entity determines that, the rate that should be
used in adjusting the promised consideration is 6%, which is the entity's incremental borrowing rate.
Pass journal entries showing how the entity would account for the significant financing component
Solution:
Journal Entries showing accounting for the significant financing component:
(a) Recognise a contract liability for the ₹ 4,000 payment received at contract inception:
Cash Dr. ₹ 4,000
To Contract liability ₹ 4,000
(b) During the two years from contract inception until the transfer of the asset, the entity adjusts the
promise amount of consideration and accretes the contract liability by recognising interest on ₹ 4,000 at 6% for two years:
Interest expense Dr ₹ 494*
To Contract liability ₹ 494
* ₹ 494 = ₹ 4,000 contract liability × (6% interest per year for two years).
(c) Recognise revenue for the transfer of the asset:
Contract liability Dr ₹ 4,494
To Revenue ₹ 4,494
Illustration 41: Withheld payments on a long-term contract
ABC Limited enters into a contract for the construction of a power plant that includes scheduled milestone payments
for the performance by ABC Limited throughout the contract term of three years. The performance obligation will be
satisfied over time and the milestone payments are scheduled to coincide with the expected performance by ABC
Limited. The contract provides that a specified percentage of each milestone payment is to be withheld as retention
money by the customer throughout the arrangement and paid to the entity only when the building is complete.
Analyse whether the contract contains any financing component.
Solution
ABC Limited concludes that the contract does not include a significant financing component since the
milestone payments coincide with its performance and the contract requires amounts to be retained for reasons
other than the provision of finance. The withholding of a specified percentage of each milestone payment is
intended to protect the customer from the contractor failing to adequately complete its obligations under thecontract.
Illustration 42: Advance payment
XYZ Limited, a personal computer (PC) manufacturer, enters into a contract with a customer to provide global PC
support and repair coverage for three years along with its PC. The customer purchases this support service at the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
time of buying the product. Consideration for the service is an additional ₹ 3,000. Customers electing to buy this
service must pay for it upfront (i.e., a monthly payment option is not available).
Analyse whether there is any significant financing component in the contract or not.
Solution
To determine whether there is a significant financing component in the contract, the entity considers the nature
of the service being offered and the purpose of the payment terms. The entity charges a single upfront
amount, not with the primary purpose of obtaining financing from the customer but, instead, to maximise
profitability, taking into consideration the risks associated with providing the service. Specifically, if
customers could pay monthly, they would be less likely to renew and the population of customers that
continue to use the support service in the later years may become smaller and less diverse over time
(i.e., customers that choose to renew historically are those that make greater use of the service, thereby
increasing the entity's costs). In addition, customers tend to use services more if they pay monthly rather than
making an upfront payment. Finally, the entity would incur higher administration costs such as the costs
related to administering renewals and collection of monthly payments.
In assessing whether or not the contract contains a significant financing component, XYZ Limited determines
that the payment terms were structured primarily for reasons other than the provision of finance to the
entity. XYZ Limited charges a single upfront amount for the services because other payment terms (such
as a monthly payment plan) would affect the nature of the risks it assumes to provide the service and may
make it uneconomical to provide the service. As a result of its analysis, XYZ Limited concludes that there is not
a significant financing component.
Illustration 43: Advance payment
A computer hardware vendor enters into a three-year arrangement with a customer to provide support services. For
customers with low credit ratings, the vendor requires the customer to pay for the entire arrangement in advance of the
provision of service. Other customers pay over time.
Solution
Due to this customer’s credit rating, the customer pays in advance for the three -year term. Because
there is no difference between the amount of promised consideration and the cash selling price (that is, the
customer does not receive a discount for paying in advance), the vendor requires payment in advance only to
protect against customer non-payment, and no other factors exist to suggest the arrangement contains a
financing, the vendor concludes this contract does not provide the customer or the entity with a significant
benefit of financing.
Illustration 44: Sales based royalty
A software vendor enters into a contract with a customer to provide a license solely in exchange for a sales-base royalty.
Solution
Although the payment will be made in arrears, because the total consideration varies based on the occurrence
or non- occurrence of a future event that is not within the control of the customer or the entity, the software
vendor concludes the contract does not provide the customer or the entity with a significant benefit of
financing.
Illustration 45: Payment in arrears
An EPC contractor enters into a two-year contract to develop customized machine for a customer. The contractor
concludes that the goods and services in this contract constitute a single performance obligation.
Based on the terms of the contract, the contractor determines that it transfers control over time, and recognizes
revenue based on an input method best reflecting the transfer of control to the customer. The customer agrees to
provide the contractor monthly progress payments, with the final 25 percent payment (holdback payment) due upon
contract completion. As a result of the holdback payment, there is a gap between when control transfers and when
consideration is received, creating a financing component. Analyse whether there is any significant financing component
in the contract or not.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Solution:
There is no difference between the amount of promised consideration and the cash selling price (that is,
the customer did not pay a premium for paying a portion of the consideration in arrears). The payment
terms included a holdback payment only to ensure successful completion of the project, and no other
factors exist to suggest the arrangement contains a financing. Hence, the contractor concludes this contract
does not provide the customer or the contractor with a significant benefit of financing.
Illustration 46: Payment in arrears
Company Z is a developer and manufacturer of defense systems that is primarily a Tier -II supplier of parts and
integrated systems to original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) in the commercial markets. Company Z enters into a
contract with Company X for the development and delivery of 5,000 highly technical, specialized missiles for
use in one of Company X’splatforms.
As a part of the contract, Company X has agreed to pay Company Z for their cost plus an award fee up to ₹ 100
crore. The consideration will be paid by the customer related to costs incurred near the time Company Z incurs suchcosts.
However, the ₹ 100 crore award fee is awarded upon successful completion of the development and test fire of a
missile to occur in 16 months from the time the contract is executed. The contract specifies Company Z will earn up to
₹ 100 crore based on Company X’s assessment of Company Z’s ability to develop and manufacture a missile that
achieves multiple factors, including final weight, velocity, and accuracy. Partial award fees may be awarded based on
a pre-determined scale based on their success.
Assume Company Z has assessed the contract under Ind AS 115 and determined the award fee represents variable
consideration. Based on their assessment, Company Z has estimated a total of ₹ 80 crore in the transaction price
related to the variable consideration pursuant to guidance within Ind AS 115. Further, the entity has concluded it
should recognize revenue over time for a single performance obligation using a cost-to-cost input method.
Solution:
Company Z will transfer control over time beginning shortly after the contract is executed, but will not receive
the cash consideration related to the award fee component from Company X for more than one year in the
future. Hence, Company Z should assess whether the award fee represents a significant financing
component.
The intention of the parties in negotiating the award fee due upon completion of the test fire, and based
on theresults of that test fire, was to provide incentive to Company Z to produce high functioning missiles that
achieved successful scoring from Company X. Therefore, it was determined the contract does not contain
a significant financing component, and Company Z should not adjust the transaction price.
As per Ind AS 115.63, as a practical expedient, an entity need not adjust the promised amount of
consideration for the effects of a significant financing component if the entity expects, at contract inception, that
the period between:
(a) when the entity transfers a promised good or service to a customer and
(b) when the customer pays for that good or service will be one year or less.
Illustration 47: Applying practical expedient
Company H enters into a two-year contract to develop customized software for Company C. Company H concludes
that the goods and services in this contract constitute a single performance obligation.
Based on the terms of the contract, Company H determines that it transfers control over time, and recognizes revenue
based on an input method best reflecting the transfer of control to Company C.
Company C agrees to provide Company H monthly progress payments. Based on the expectation of the
timing of costs to be incurred, Company H concludes that progress payments are being made such that the timing
between the transfer of control and payment is never expected to exceed one year.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Solution:
Company H concludes it will not need to further assess whether a significant financing component is present
and does not adjust the promised consideration in determining the transaction price, as they are applying the
practical expedient under Ind AS 115.
As per Ind AS 115.65, an entity shall present the effects of financing (interest revenue or interest expense)
separately from revenue from contracts with customers in the statement of profit and loss. Interest
revenue or interest expense is recognised only to the extent that a contract asset (or receivable) or a contract
liability is recognised in accounting for a contract with a customer.
Illustration 48: Entitlement to non-cash consideration
An entity enters into a contract with a customer to provide a weekly service for one year. The contract is
signed on 1st April, 20X1 and work begins immediately. The entity concludes that the service is a single
performance obligation. This is because the entity is providing a series of distinct services that are substantially the
same and have the same pattern of transfer (the services transfer to the customer over time and use the same
method to measure progress — that is, a time-based measure of progress).
In exchange for the service, the customer promises its 100 equity shares per week of service (a total of 5,200 shares
for the contract). The terms in the contract require that the shares must be paid upon the successful completion of
each week of service. How should the entity decide the transaction price?
Solution:
The entity measures its progress towards complete satisfaction of the performance obligation as each week of
service is complete. To determine the transaction price (and the amount of revenue to be recognised), the
entity has to measure the fair value of 100 shares that are received upon completion of each weekly service.
The entity shall not reflect any subsequent changes in the fair value of the shares received (or receivable)
in revenue.
Illustration 49: Fair value of non-cash consideration varies for reasons other than the form of the
consideration
RT Limited enters into a contract to build an office building for AT Limited over an 18 -month period. AT Limited
agrees to pay the construction entity ₹ 350 crore for the project. RT Limited will receive a bonus of 10 lakh equity
shares of AT Limited if it completes construction of the office building within one year. Assume a fair value of ₹ 100
per share at contract inception.
Determine the transaction price.
Solution
The ultimate value of any shares the entity might receive could change for two reasons:
• the entity earns or does not earn the shares and
• the fair value per share may change during the contract term.
When determining the transaction price, the entity would reflect changes in the number of shares to be
earned. However, the entity would not reflect changes in the fair value per share. Said another way, the
share price of ₹ 100 is used to value the potential bonus throughout the life of the contract.
As a result, if the entity earns the bonus, its revenue would be ₹ 350 crore plus10 lakh equity sharesat
₹ 100 per share for total consideration of ₹ 360 crore.
Illustration 50: Non-cash consideration - Free advertising
Production Company Y sells a television show to Television Company X. The consideration under the arrangement is
a fixed amount of ₹ 1,000 and 100 advertising slots. Y determines that the stand-alone selling price of the show would
be ₹ 1,500. Based on market rates, Y determines that the fair value of the advertising slots is ₹ 600.
Solution:
Y determines that the transaction price is ₹ 1,600, comprising of ₹ 1,000 fixed amount plus the fair value of the
advertising slots i.e., ₹600.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
If the fair value of the advertising slots could not be reasonably estimated, then the transaction price would be
₹ 1,500 i.e., Y would use the stand-alone selling price of the goods or services promised for the non-
cash consideration.
Illustration 51: Customer-provided goods or services
MS Limited is a manufacturer of cars. It has a supplier of steering systems – SK Limited. MS Limited
places an order of 10,000 steering systems on SK Limited. It also agrees to pay ₹ 25,000 per steering system
and contributes tooling to be used in SK’s production process.
The tooling has a fair value of ₹ 2 crore at contract inception. SK Limited determines that each steering system represents
a single performance obligation and that control of the steering system transfers to MS Limited upon delivery.
SK Limited may use the tooling for other projects and determines that it obtains control of the tooling.
Determine the transaction price?
Solution:
As a result, at contract inception, SK Limited includes the fair value of the tooling in the transaction price at contract
inception, which it determines to be ₹ 27 crore (₹ 25 crore for the steering systems and ₹ 2 crore for the tooling).
Illustration 52: Consideration payable to a customer
An entity that manufactures consumer goods enters into a one-year contract to sell goods to a customer that is
a large global chain of retail stores. The customer commits to buy at least ₹ 15 crore of products during
the year. The contract also requires the entity to make a non- refundable payment of ₹ 1.5 crore to the
customer at the inception of the contract. The ₹ 1.5 crore payment will compensate the customer for the changes it
needs to make to its shelving to accommodate the entity's products. The entity does not obtain control of any rights
to the customer's shelves.
Solution:
The entity considers the requirements in paragraphs 70 – 72 of Ind AS 115 and concludes that the payment to
the customer is not in exchange for a distinct good or service that transfers to the entity. This is because the
entity does not obtain control of any rights to the customer's shelves. Consequently, the entity determines that,
in accordance with paragraph 70 of Ind AS 115, the ₹ 1.5 crore payment is a reduction of the transaction price.
The entity applies the requirements in paragraph 72 of Ind AS 115 and concludes that the consideration
payable is accounted for as a reduction in the transaction price when the entity recognises revenue for the
transfer of the goods. Consequently, as the entity transfers goods to the customer, the entity reduces the
transaction price for each good by 10 per cent [(₹ 1.5 crore ÷ ₹ 15 crore) x 100]. Therefore, in the first month in
which the entity transfers goods to the customer, the entity recognises revenue of ₹ 1.125 crore (₹ 1.25 crore invoiced
amount less ₹ 0.125 crore of consideration payable to the customer).
Illustration 53: Credits to a new customer
Customer C is in the middle of a two-year contract with Telco B Ltd., its current wireless service provider, and
would be required to pay an early termination penalty if it terminated the contract today. If C cancels the existing
contract with B Ltd. and signs a two-year contract with Telco DLtd. for ₹ 800 per month, then D Ltd. promises at
contract inception to give C a one- time credit of ₹ 2,000 (referred to as a ‘port-in credit’). The amount of the port-in credit
does not depend on the volume of service subsequently purchased by C during the two-year contract.
Solution:
D Ltd. determines that it should account for the port-in credit as consideration payable to a customer.
This is because the credit will be applied against amounts owing to D Ltd. Since, D Ltd. does not receive
any distinct goods or services in exchange for this credit, it will account for it as a reduction in the transaction price ₹
17,200 [(₹ 800 x 24 month) – ₹ 2,000]. D Ltd. will recognise the reduction in the transaction price as the
promised goods or services are transferred.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Illustration 54: Allocation methodology
An entity enters into a contract with a customer to sell Products A, B and C in exchange for ₹ 10,000. The
entity will satisfy the performance obligations for each of the products at different points in time. The entity regularly
sells Product A separately and therefore the stand-alone selling price is directly observable. The stand-alone selling
prices of Products B and C are not directly observable.
Because the stand-alone selling prices for Products B and C are not directly observable, the entity must estimate
them. To estimate the stand-alone selling prices, the entity uses the adjusted market assessment approach for Product
B and the expected cost plus a margin approach for Product C. In making those estimates, the entity maximises the use
of observable inputs.
The entity estimates the stand-alone selling prices as follows:
Product Stand-alone selling price Method
Product A 5,000 Directly observable
Product B 2,500 Adjusted market assessment approach
Product C 7,500 Expected cost plus a margin approach
Total 15,000
Solution
Product Allocated transaction price (to nearest ₹100)
₹
Product A 3,300 (₹ 5,000 ÷ ₹15,000 × ₹10,000)
Product B 1,700 (₹ 2,500 ÷ ₹15,000 × ₹10,000)
Product C 5,000 (₹ 7,500 ÷ ₹15,000 × ₹10,000)
Total 10,000
The customer receives a discount for purchasing the bundle of goods because the sum of the stand-alone selling
prices (₹ 15,000) exceeds the promised consideration (₹ 10,000). The entity considers that there is no observable evidence about
the performance obligation to which the entire discount belongs. The discount is allocated proportionately
across Products A, B and C. The discount, and therefore the transaction price, is allocated as follows:
Illustration 55 : Allocating a discount
An entity regularly sells Products X, Y and Z individually, thereby establishing the following stand-alone selling prices:
Product Stand-alone selling price
₹
Product X 50,000
Product Y 25,000
Product Z 45,000
Total 1,20,000
In addition, the entity regularly sells Products Y and Z together for ₹ 50,000.
Case A—Allocating a discount to one or more performance obligations
The entity enters into a contract with a customer to sell Products X, Y and Z in exchange for ₹ 100,000. The
entity will satisfy the performance obligations for each of the products at different points in time; or Product Y and Z at
same point of time.Determine the allocation of transaction price to Product Y
Case B—Residual approach is appropriate
The entity enters into a contract with a customer to sell Products X, Y and Z as described in Case A. The contract
also includes a promise to transfer Product Alpha. Total consideration in the contract is ₹ 130,000. The stand-alone selling
price for Product Alpha is highly variable because the entity sells Product Alpha to different customers for a broad range of
amounts (₹ 15,000 – ₹ 45,000). Determine the stand-alone selling price of Products, X, Y, Z and Alpha using the
residual approach.
Case C—Residual approach is inappropriate
The same facts as in Case B apply to Case C except the transaction price is ₹ 1,05,000 instead of ₹ 130,000.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Solution:
Case A—Allocating a discount to one or more performance obligations
The contract includes a discount of ₹ 20,000 on the overall transaction, which would be allocated proportionately to
all three performance obligations when allocating the transaction price using the relative stand-alone selling price
method. However, because the entity regularly sells Products Y and Z together for ₹ 50,000 and Product X for
₹ 50,000, it has evidence that the entire discount should be allocated to the promises to transfer Products Y
and Z in accordance with paragraph 82 of Ind AS 115.If the entity transfers control of Products Y and Z at
the same point in time, then the entity could, as a practical matter, account for the transfer of those products as a
single performance obligation. That is, the entity could allocate ₹ 50,000 of the transaction price to the single
performance obligation and recognise revenue of ₹ 50,000 when Products Y and Z simultaneously transferto
the customer. If the contract requires the entity to transfer control of Products Y and Z at different points in
time, then the allocated amount of ₹ 50,000 is individually allocated to the promises to transfer Product Y (stand-
Product Allocated transaction price

₹
Product Y 17,857 (₹ 25,000 ÷ ₹ 70,000 total stand-alone selling price × ₹ 50,000)
Product Z 32,143 (₹ 45,000 ÷ ₹ 70,000 total stand-alone selling price × ₹ 50,000)
Total 50,000
alone selling price of ₹ 25,000) and Product Z (stand-alone selling price of ₹ 45,000) as follows:
Case B—Residual approach is appropriate

Before estimating the stand-alone selling price of Product Alpha using the residual approach, the entity determines
whether any discount should be allocated to the other performance obligations in the contract.
As in Case A, because the entity regularly sells Products Y and Z together for ₹ 50,000 and Product X for ₹
50,000, it has observable evidence that ₹ 100,000 should be allocated to those three products and a ₹ 20,000 discount
should be allocated to the promises to transfer Products Y and Z in accordance with paragraph 82 of Ind
AS 115.
Using the residual approach, the entity estimates the stand-alone selling price of Product Alpha to be ₹ 30,000
as follows:
Product Stand-alone selling price (₹) Method
Product X 50,000 Directly observable
Products Y and Z 50,000 Directly observable with discount
Product Alpha 30,000 Residual approach
Total 130,000
The entity observes that the resulting ₹ 30,000 allocated to Product Alpha is within the range of its observable selling prices
(₹ 15,000 – ₹45,000).
Case C—Residual approach is inappropriate
The same facts as in Case B apply to Case C except the transaction price is ₹ 105,000 instead of ₹ 130,000.
Consequently, the application of the residual approach would result in a stand-alone selling price of ₹ 5,000 for Product Alpha
(₹ 105,000 transaction price less ₹ 100,000 allocated to Products X, Y and Z).
The entity concludes that ₹ 5,000 would not faithfully depict the amount of consideration to which the entity
expectsto be entitled in exchange for satisfying its performance obligation to transfer Product Alpha, because ₹ 5,000 does
not approximate the stand-alone selling price of Product Alpha, which ranges from ₹15,000 – ₹45,000.
Consequently, the entity reviews its observable data, including sales and margin reports, to estimate the
stand- alone selling price of Product Alpha using another suitable method. The entity allocates the transaction
price of ₹ 1,05,000 to Products X, Y, Z and Alpha using the relative stand-alone selling prices of those
products in accordance with paragraphs 73–80 of Ind AS 115.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Illustration 56: Allocation of variable consideration (MTP: MARCH, 2019)
An entity enters into a contract with a customer for two intellectual property licences (Licences A and B), which the
entity determines to represent two performance obligations each satisfied at a point in time. The stand-alone selling
prices of Licenses A and B are ₹ 1,600,000 and ₹ 2,000,000, respectively. The entity transfers Licence B at
inception of the contract and transfers Licence A one month later.
Case A—Variable consideration allocated entirely to one performance obligation
The price stated in the contract for License A is a fixed amount of ₹ 1,600,000 and for Licence B the consideration is
three per cent of the customer's future sales of products that use Licence B. For purposes of allocation, the entity
estimates its sales- based royalties (i.e., the variable consideration) to be ₹ 2,000,000. Allocate the transaction price.
Case B—Variable consideration allocated on the basis of stand-alone selling prices
The price stated in the contract for License A is a fixed amount of ₹ 600,000 and for Licence B the consideration is
five per cent of the customer's future sales of products that use Licence B. The entity's estimate of the sales-based
royalties (i.e., the variable consideration) is ₹ 3,000,000. Here, Licence A is transferred 3 months later. The royalty
due from the customer’s first month of sale is ₹ 4,00,000.
Allocate the transaction price and determine the revenue to be recognised for each license and the contract liability, if any.
Solution
Case A—Variable consideration allocated entirely to one performance obligation
To allocate the transaction price, the entity considers the criteria in paragraph 85 and concludes that the
variable consideration (i.e., the sales-based royalties) should be allocated entirely to Licence B. The entity
concludes that the criteria are met for the following reasons:
(a) the variable payment relates specifically to an outcome from the performance obligation to transfer
Licence B (i.e., the customer's subsequent sales of products that use Licence B).
(b) allocating the expected royalty amounts of ₹ 2,000,000 entirely to License B is consistent with the allocation
objective in paragraph 73 of Ind AS 115. This is because the entity's estimate of the amount of sales-
based royalties (₹ 2,000,000) approximates the stand-alone selling price of License B and the fixed amount of
₹ 1,600,000 approximates the stand-alone selling price of License A. The entity allocates ₹ 1,600,000 to
License A. This is because, based on an assessment of the facts and circumstances relating to both
licenses, allocating to License B some of the fixed consideration in addition to all of the variable
consideration would not meet the allocation objective in paragraph 73 of Ind AS 115.
The entity transfers Licence B at inception of the contract and transfers Licence A one month later. Upon the
transfer of Licence B, the entity does not recognise revenue because the consideration allocated to Licence
B is in the form of a sales-based royalty. Therefore, the entity recognises revenue for the sales-based
royalty when those subsequent sales occur.
When Licence A is transferred, the entity recognises as revenue the ₹ 1,600,000 allocated to Licence A.
Case B—Variable consideration allocated on the basis of stand-alone selling prices
To allocate the transaction price, the entity applies the criteria in paragraph 85 of Ind AS 115 to determine
whether toallocate the variable consideration (i.e., the sales-based royalties) entirely to License B.
In applying the criteria, the entity concludes that even though the variable payments relate specifically to
an outcome from the performance obligation to transfer License B (i.e., the customer's subsequent sales of
products that use Licence B), allocating the variable consideration entirely to License B would be inconsistent
with the principle for allocating the transaction price. Allocating ₹ 600,000 to License A and ₹ 3,000,000 to
Licence B does not reflect a reasonable allocation of the transaction price on the basis of the stand-alone
selling prices of Licences A and B of
₹ 1,600,000 and ₹ 2,000,000, respectively. Consequently, the entity applies the general allocation requirements of Ind AS 115. The
entity allocates the transaction price of ₹ 600,000 to Licences A and B on the basis of relative stand-alone selling prices of ₹
1,600,000 and ₹ 2,000,000, respectively. The entity also allocates the consideration related to the sales- based
royalty on a relative stand-alone selling price basis. However, when an entity licenses intellectual property in
which the consideration is in the form of a sales-based royalty, the entity cannot recognise

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
revenue until the later of the following events: the subsequent sales occur or the performance obligation is
satisfied (or partially satisfied).
Licence B is transferred to the customer at the inception of the contract and Licence A is transferred three
months later. When Licence B is transferred, the entity recognises as revenue ₹ 333,333 [(₹ 2,000,000 ÷ ₹ 3,600,000) × ₹
600,000] allocated to Licence B. When License A is transferred, the entity recognises as revenue ₹ 266,667 [(₹ 1,600,000 ÷
₹ 3,600,000) × ₹ 600,000] allocated to Licence A.
In the first month, the royalty due from the customer's first month of sales is ₹ 400,000. Consequently,
the entity recognises as revenue ₹ 222,222 (₹ 2,000,000 ÷ ₹ 3,600,000 × ₹ 400,000) allocated to Licence B (which has
been transferred to the customer and is therefore a satisfied performance obligation). The entity recognises a
contract liability for the ₹ 177,778 (₹ 1,600,000 ÷ ₹ 3,600,000 × ₹ 400,000) allocated to Licence A. This is because although
the subsequent sale by the entity's customer has occurred, the performance obligation to which the royalty has
been allocated has not been satisfied.
Illustration 57: Allocating a change in transaction price
On 1st April, 20X0, a consultant enters into an arrangement to provide due diligence, valuation, and software
implementation services to a customer for ₹ 2 crore. The consultant can earn ₹ 20 lakh bonus if it completes the
software implementation by 30 th September, 20X0 or ₹ 10 lakh bonus if it completes the software implementation by
31st December, 20X0.
• The due diligence, valuation, and software implementation services are distinct and therefore are accounted for as
separate performance obligations. The consultant allocates the transaction price, disregarding the potential bonus, on a
relative stand-alone selling price basis as follows:
• Due diligence – ₹ 80 lakh
• Valuation – ₹ 20 lakh
• Software implementation – ₹ 1 crore
At contract inception, the consultant believes it will complete the software implementation by 30th January, 20X1.
After considering the factors in Ind AS 115, the consultant cannot conclude that a significant reversal in the
cumulative amount of revenue recognized would not occur when the uncertainty is resolved since the consultant
lacks experience in completing similar projects. As a result, the consultant does not include the amount of the early
completion bonus in its estimated transaction price at contract inception.
On 1st July, 20X0, the consultant notes that the project has progressed better than expected and believes that
implementation will be completed by 30th September, 20X0 based on a revised forecast. As a result, the consultant updates
its estimated transaction price to reflect a bonus of ₹ 20 lakh.
After reviewing its progress as of 1st July, 20X0, the consultant determines that it is 100 percent complete in
satisfying its performance obligations for due diligence and valuation and 60 percent complete in satisfying its performance
obligation for software implementation.
Solution:
On 1st July, 20X0, the consultant allocates the bonus of ₹ 20 lakh to the software implementation performance
obligation, for total consideration of ₹ 1.2 crore allocated to that performance obligation, and adjusts the cumulative
revenue to date for the software implementation services to 72 lakh (60 percent of ₹ 1.2 crore).
Illustration 58 : Discretionary credit
Telco G Ltd. grants a one-time credit of ₹ 50 to a customer in Month 14 of a two-year contract. The credit is
discretionary and is granted as a commercial gesture, not in response to prior service issues (often referred to as a
‘retention credit’). The contract includes a subsidised handset and a voice and data plan. G Ltd. does not regularly provide
these credits and therefore customers do not expect them to be granted.
How this will be accounted for under Ind AS 115?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Solution:
G Ltd. concludes that this is a change in the transaction price and not a variable consideration. Since, the
credit does not relate to a satisfied performance obligation, the change in transaction price resulting from the
credit is accounted for as a contract modification and recognised over the remaining term of the contract.
If, in this example, rather than providing a one-time credit, G Ltd. granted a discount of ₹ 5 per month for the
remaining contract term, then also G Ltd. would conclude that it was a change in the transaction price. It
would apply the contract modification guidance and recognise the credit over the remaining term of the
contract.
Illustration 59:
Minitek Ltd. is a payroll processing company. Minitek Ltd. enters into a contract to provide monthly payroll processing
services to ABC limited for one year. Determine how entity will recognise the revenue?
Solution:
• Payroll processing is a single performance obligation. On a monthly basis, as Minitek Ltd carries out
the payroll processing The customer, ie, ABC Limited simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits of
the entity‘s performance in processing each payroll transaction.
• Further, once the services have been performed for a particular month, in case of termination of the
agreement before maturity and contract is transferred to another entity, then such new entity will not need to
re-perform the services for expired months.
Therefore, it satisfies the first criterion, ie, services completed on a monthly basis are consumed by the
entity atthe same time and hence, revenue shall be recognised over the period of time.
For certain performance obligations, an entity may not be able to readily identify whether a
customer simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits from the entity's performance as the entity
performs. In such cases, a performance obligation is satisfied over time if an entity determines that another
entity would not need to substantially re-perform the work that the entity has completed to date if that other
entity were to fulfil the remaining performance obligation to the customer.
In making such determination, an entity shall make both of the following assumptions:
(a) disregard potential contractual restrictions or practical limitations that otherwise would prevent the entity
from transferring the remaining performance obligation to another entity; and
(b) presume that another entity fulfilling the remainder of the performance obligation would not have the
benefit of any work in progress.
Illustration 60
T&L Limited (‘T&L’) is a logistics company that provides inland and sea transportation services. A customer –
Horizon Limited (‘Horizon’) enters into a contract with T&L for transportation of its goods from India to Sri Lanka
through sea. The voyage is expected to take 20 days from Mumbai to Colombo. T&L is responsible for shipping the
goods from Mumbai port to Colombo port.
Whether T&L’s performance obligation is met over period of time?
Solution
T&L has a single performance to ship the goods from one port to another. The following factors are critical
for assessing how services performed by T&L are consumed by the customer –
• As the voyage is performed, the service undertaken by T&L is progressing, such that no other entity will
need to re-perform the service till so far as the voyage has been performed, if T&L was to deliver only part-way.
• The customer is directly benefitting from the performance of the voyage as & when it progresses.
Therefore, such performance obligation is said to be met over a period of time.
Illustration 61
AFS Ltd. is a risk advisory firm and enters into a contract with a company – WBC Ltd to provide audit services that
results in AFS issuing an audit opinion to the Company. The professional opinion relates to facts and
circumstances that are specific to the company. If the Company was to terminate the consulting contract for reasons
other than the entity's failure to perform as promised, the contract requires the Company to compensate the risk

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
advisory firm for its costs incurred plus a 15 per cent margin. The 15 per cent margin approximates the profit
margin that the entity earns from similar contracts.
Whether risk advisory firm’s performance obligation is met over period of time?
Solution
AFS has a single performance to provide an opinion on the professional audit services proposed to be
providedunder the contract with the customer. Evaluating the criterion for recognising revenue over a period of
time or at a point in time, Ind AS 115 requires one of the following criterions to be met –
 Criterion (a) – whether the customer simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits from
services provided by AFS: Company shall benefit only when the audit opinion is provided upon
completion. And in case the contract was to be terminated, any other firm engaged to perform similar
services will have to substantially re-perform.
Hence, this criterion is not met.
 Criterion (b) – An asset created that customer controls: This is service contract and no asset created,
over which customer acquires control.
 Criterion (c) – no alternate use to entity and right to seek payment:
 The services provided by AFS are specific to the company – WBC and do not have any alternate
use to AFS
 Further, AFS has a right to enforce payment if contract was early terminated, for reasons other
than AFS’s failure to perform. And the profit margin approximates what entity otherwise earns.
Therefore, criterion (c) is met and such performance obligation is said to be met over a period of time.
Illustration 62
Space Ltd. enters into an arrangement with a government agency for construction of a space satellite. Although
Space Ltd is in this business for building such satellites for various customers across the world, however the
specifications for each satellite may vary based on technology that is incorporated in the satellite. In the event of
termination, Company has right to enforce payment for work completed to date.
Evaluate if contract will qualify for satisfaction of performance obligation over a period of time.
Solution:
While evaluating the pattern of transfer of control to the customer, the Company shall evaluate conditions laid
in para 35 of Ind AS 115 as follows:
 Criterion (a) – whether the customer simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits: Customer can
benefit only when the satellite is fully constructed and no benefits are consumed as its constructed. Hence,
this criterion is not met.
 Criterion (b) – An asset created that customer controls: Per provided facts, the customer does not acquire
control of the asset as its created.
 The asset is being specifically created for the customer. The asset is customised to
customer’s requirements,such that any diversion for a different customer will require significant work.
Therefore, the asset has practical limitation in being put to alternate use.
 Further, Space Ltd. has a right to enforce payment if contract was early terminated, for reasons
other than Space Ltd.’s failure to perform.
Therefore, criterion (c) is met and such performance obligation is said to be met over a period of time.
Illustration 63
ABC enters into a contract with a customer to build an item of equipment. The customer pays 10% advance and then
80% in instalments of 10% each over the period of construction with balance 10% payable at the end of construction
period. The payments are non-refundable unless the company fails to perform as per the contract. Further, if the
customer terminates the contract, then entity is entitled to retain payments made. The company will have no further
right to compensation from the customer. Evaluate if contract will qualify for satisfaction of performance obligation over
a period of time.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Solution:
The Company shall evaluate conditions laid in para 35 of Ind AS 115 as follows:
 Criterion (a) – whether the customer simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits: Customer can benefit
only when the asset is fully constructed and no benefits are consumed as its constructed. Hence, this
criterion is not met.
 Criterion (b) – An asset created that customer controls: As per provided facts, the customer does not
acquire control of the asset as it is created.
 3 the event of early termination, Company has a right to retain any payments made by the
customer. However, such payments need not necessarily compensate the selling price of the partially
constructed asset, if the customer was to stop making payments.
Therefore, Company does not have a legally enforceable right to payment for work completed to date and the
criterion under para 35 is not satisfied. Thus, revenue cannot be recognised over a period of time.
Illustration 64: Measuring progress on straight line basis
An entity, an owner and manager of health clubs, enters into a contract with a customer for one year of access to any
of its health clubs. The customer has unlimited use of the health clubs and promises to pay CU100 per month. The
entity’s promise to the customer is to provide a service of making the health clubs available for the customer to use as
and when the customer wishes.
Evaluate if contract will qualify for satisfaction of performance obligation over a period of time. If yes, how should an
entity measure its progress of service provided?
Solution
The entity shall determine if revenue should be recognised over a period of time by evaluating the conditions
laid in para 35 of Ind AS 115.
Applying the first criterion of para 35 to establish if the customer simultaneously receives and consumes the
benefits, as the entity provides service – The health club provides access to services uniformly through the year.
The extent to which the customer uses the health clubs does not affect the amount of the remaining
goods and services to which the customer is entitled. The customer therefore simultaneously receives and
consumes the benefits of the entity's performance as it performs by making the health clubs available.
• Consequently, the entity's performance obligation is satisfied over time
• Once the pattern of satisfying performance obligation is defined, the Company then determines
how progress should be measured. The services are uniformly provided to the customer through the
year. Therefore, the best measure of progress is to recognise revenue on a straight-line basis over the year.
Illustration 65 : Uninstalled materials
On 1st January, 20X1, an entity contracts to renovate a building including the installation of new elevators. The
entity estimates the following with respect to the contract:
Transaction price 5,000,000
Expected costs:
(a) Elevators 1,500,000
(b) Other costs 2,500,000
Total 4,000,000
The entity purchases the elevators and they are delivered to the site six months before they will be installed. The
entity uses an input method based on cost to measure progress towards completion. The entity has incurred actual
other costs of 500,000 by 31st March, 20X1.
How will the Company recognize revenue, if performance obligation is met over a period of time?
Solution
Costs to be incurred comprise two major components – elevators and cost of construction service.
(a) The elevators are part of the overall construction project and are not a distinct performance obligation

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
(b) The cost of elevators is substantial to the overall project and are incurred well in advance.
(c) Upon delivery at site, customer acquires control of such elevators.
(d) And there is no modification done to the elevators, which the company only procures and delivers at
site. Nevertheless, as part of materials used in overall construction project, the company is a principal in
the transaction with the customer for such elevators also.
Therefore, applying the guidance on Input method –
- The measure of progress should be made based on percentage of costs incurred relative to the
totalbudgeted costs.
- The cost of elevators should be excluded when measuring such progress and revenue for such elevators should
be recognized to the extent of costs incurred.
The revenue to be recognized is measured as follows:
Transaction price 5,000,000
Costs incurred:
(a) Cost of elevators 1,500,000
(b) Other costs 500,000
Measure of progress: 500,000 / 2,500,000 = 20%
Revenue to be recognised:
(a) For costs incurred (other than elevators) Total attributable revenue = 3,500,000
% of work completed = 20% Revenue to be
recognised = 700,000
(b) Revenue for elevators 1,500,000 (equal to costs incurred)
Total revenue to be recognised 1,500,000 + 700,000 = 2,200,000
Therefore, for the year ended 31st March, 20X1, the Company shall recognize revenue of ₹ 2,200,000
on the project.
Illustration 66
An entity enters into a contract with a customer for the sale of a tangible asset on1st January, 20X1
for ₹ 1 million. The contract includes a call option that gives the entity the right to repurchase the asset for ₹
1.1 million on or before 31st December, 20X1. How would the entity account for this transaction?
Solution:
In the above case, where the entity has a right to call back the goods up to a certain date –
 The customer cannot be said to have acquired control, owing to the repurchase right with the seller
entity
 Since the original selling price (₹ 1 million) is lower than the repurchase price (₹ 1.1 million), this is construed to bea
financing arrangement and accounted as follows:
(a) Amount received shall be recognized as “liability’
(b) Difference between sale price and repurchase price to be recognized as “finance cost‘ and recognised
over the repurchase term.
Illustration 67
An entity enters into a contract with a customer for the sale of a tangible asset on1st January, 20X1
for ₹ 1,000,000. The contract includes a put option that gives the customer the right to sell the asset for ₹ 900,000
on or before 31st December, 20X1. The market price for such goods is expected to be ₹ 750,000
How would the entity account for this transaction?
Solution:
In the above case, where the entity has an obligation to buy back the goods up to a certain date –
 The entity shall evaluate if the customer has a significant economic incentive to return the goods.
Since the repurchase, price is significantly higher than market price, therefore, customer has a significant

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
economic incentive to return the goods. There are no other factors which entity may affect this assessment.
 Therefore, company determines that “control’ of goods is not transferred to the customer till 31st
December, 20X1, i.e., till the put option expires.
 Against payment of ₹ 1,000,000; the customer only has a right to use the asset and put it back to the entity for
₹ 900,000. Therefore, this will be accounted as a lease transaction in which difference between original selling price (i.e.,
₹ 1,000,000) and repurchase price (ie, ₹ 900,000) shall be recognized as lease income over the period of lease.
 At the end of repurchase term, ie, 31st December, 20X1, if the customer does not exercise such right,
then the control of goods would be passed to the customer at that time and revenue shall be recognized
for sale ofgoods for repurchase price (ie, ₹ 900,000).
Illustration 68
An entity enters into a contract with a customer on 1st April, 20X1 for the sale of a machine and spare
parts. The manufacturing lead time for the machine and spare parts is two years.
Upon completion of manufacturing, the entity demonstrates that the machine and spare parts meet the agreed-upon
specifications in the contract. The promises to transfer the machine and spare parts are distinct and result in two
performance obligations that each will be satisfied at a point in time. On 31st March, 20X3, the customer pays for the
machine and spare parts, but only takes physical possession of the machine. Although the customer inspects and
accepts the spare parts, the customer requests that the spare parts be stored at the entity's warehouse because of
its close proximity to the customer's factory. The customer has legal title to the spare parts and the parts can be
identified as belonging to the customer. Furthermore, the entity stores the spare parts in a separate section of its
warehouse and the parts are ready for immediate shipment at the customer's request. The entity expects to hold the
spare parts for two to four years and the entity does not have the ability to use the spare parts or direct them to
another customer.
How will the Company recognise revenue for sale of machine and spare parts? Is there any other performance
obligation attached to this sale of goods?
Solution
In the facts provided above, the entity has made sale of two goods – machine and space parts, whose
control is transferred at a point in time. Additionally, company agrees to hold the spare parts for the customer
for a period of 2-4 years, which is a separate performance obligation. Therefore, total transaction price shall be
divided amongst 3 performance obligations –
(i) Sale of machinery.
(ii) Sale of spare parts
(iii) Custodial services for storing spare parts.
Recognition of revenue for each of the three performance obligations shall occur as follows:
- Sale of machinery: Machine has been sold to the customer and physical possession as well as legal
title passed to the customer on 31st March, 20X3. Accordingly, revenue for sale of machinery shall be
recognised on 31st March, 20X3.
- Sale of spare parts: The customer has made payment for the spare parts and legal title has been
passed tospecifically identified goods, but such spares continue to be physically held by the entity. In this
regard, thecompany shall evaluate if revenue can be recognized on bill -n-hold basis if all below criteria are met:
a) the reason for the bill-and-hold The customer has specifically requested for
arrangement must be substantive (forentity to store goods in their warehouse,owing
example, the customer has requested the to close proximity to customer’s factory.
arrangement);
the product must be identified separately as The spare parts have been specificallyidentified
belonging to the customer; and inspected by the customer.
(c) the product currently must be ready for The spares are identified and segregated, therefore,
physical transfer to the customer; and read for delivery.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
(d) the entity cannot have the ability to use Spares have been segregated and cannot be
the product or to direct it to another customer redirected to any other customer.
Therefore, all conditions of bill-and-hold are met and hence, company can recognize revenue for sale of spare
parts on 31st March, 20X3.
Custodial services: Such services shall be given for a period of 2 to 4 years from 31st March, 20X3.
Where services are given uniformly and customer receives & consumes benefits simultaneously, revenue for
such service shall be recognized on a straight-line basis over a period of time.
Illustration 69
An entity, a music record label, licenses to a customer a 1975 recording of a classical symphony by a noted
orchestra. The customer, a consumer products company, has the right to use the recorded symphony in all
commercials, including television, radio and online advertisements for two years in Country A. In exchange for
providing the licence, the entity receives fixed consideration of ₹ 50,000 per month. The contract does not include any
other goods or services to be provided by the entity. Thecontract is non-cancellable.
Determine how the revenue will be recognised?
Solution
are distinct in accordance with paragraph 27 of Ind AS 115. The entity concludes that its only
performance obligation is to grant the licence. The entity does not have any contractual or implied
obligations to change the licensed recording. The licensed recording has significant stand-alone functionality
(i.e. the ability to be played) and, therefore, the ability of the customer to obtain the benefits of the recording
is not substantially derived from the entity‘s ongoing activities. The entity therefore determines that the contract
does not require, and the customer does not reasonably expect, the entity to undertake activities that
significantly affect the licensed recording. Consequently, the entity concludes that the nature of its promise in
transferring the licence is to provide the customer with a right to use the entity’s intellectual property as it
exists at the point in time that it is granted. Therefore, the promise to grant the licence is a performance
obligation satisfied at a point in time. The entity recognises all of the revenue at the point in time when the
customer can direct the use of, and obtain substantially all of the remaining benefits from, the licensed
intellectual property.
Illustration 70: Assessing the nature of a software licence with unspecified upgrades
Software Company X licenses its software application to Customer Y. Under the agreement, X will provide updates
or upgrades on a when-and-if-available basis; Y can choose whether to install them. Y expects that X will undertake no
other activities that will change the functionality of the software.
Determine the nature of license.
Solution:
Basis on the facts given in question it can be concluded that, although the updates and upgrades will
change the functionality of the software, they are not activities considered in determining the nature of the
entity‘s promise in granting the licence. The activities of X to provide updates or upgrades are not considered
because they transfer a promised good or service to Y – i.e., updates or upgrades are distinct from the
licence. Therefore, the software licence provides a right to use the IP that is satisfied at a point in
time.
Illustration 71: Assessing the nature of a film licence and the effect of marketing activities
Film Studio C grants a licence to Customer D to show a completed film. C plans to undertake significant marketing
activities that it expects will affect box office receipts for the film. The marketing activities will not change the
functionality of the film, but they could affect its value. Determine the nature of license.
Solution:
C would probably conclude that the licence provides a right to use its IP and, therefore, is transferred at a
pointin time. There is no expectation that C will undertake activities to change the form or functionality of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
the film. Because the IP has significant stand-alone functionality, C‘s marketing activities do not significantly
affect D‘s ability to obtain benefit from the film, nor do they affect the IP available to D.
Illustration 72 : Assessing the nature of a team name and logo
Sports Team D enters into a three-year agreement to license its team name and logo to Apparel Maker M. The licence
permits M to use the team name and logo on its products, including display products, and in its advertising or marketing
materials.
(i) Determine the nature of license in the above case.
(ii) Modifying above facts that, Sports Team D has not played games in many years and the licensor is Brand
Collector B, an entity that acquires IP such as old team or brand names and logos from defunct entities or those in
financial distress. B’s business model is to license the IP, or obtain settlements from entities that use the IP
without permission, without undertaking any ongoing activities to promote or support the IP
Would the answer be different in this situation?
Solution:
(i) The nature of D’s promise in this contract is to provide M with the right to access the sports
team’s IP and,accordingly, revenue from the licence will be recognised over time. In reaching this conclusion, D
considers all of the following facts:
- M reasonably expects D to continue to undertake activities that support and maintain the value of the team’s
name and logo by continuing to play games and field a competitive team throughout the licence period. These
activities significantly affect the IP’s ability to provide benefit to M because the value of the team’s name
and logo is substantially derived from, or dependent on, those ongoing activities.
- The activities directly expose M to positive or negative effects (i.e., whether D plays games and fields
a competitive team will have a direct effect on how successful M is in selling its products featuring the
team’s name and logo).
- D’s ongoing activities do not result in the transfer of a good or a service to M as they occur (i.e. the
team playing games does not transfer a good or service to M).
(ii) Based on B’s customary business practices, Apparel Maker M probably does not reasonably
expect B to undertake any activities to change the form of the IP or to support or maintain the IP.
Therefore, B would probably conclude that the nature of its promise is to provide M with a right to use its IP
as it exists at the pointin time at which the licence is granted.
Illustration 73:
Customer outsources its information technology data centre Term = 5 years plus two 1-yr renewal options Average customer
relationship is 7 years
Entity spends ₹ 400,000 designing and building the technology platform needed to accommodate outsourcing contract:
Design services ₹ 50,000
Hardware ₹ 140,000
Software ₹ 100,000
Migration and testing of data centre ₹ 110,000
TOTAL ₹ 400,000
Solution:
Design services ₹50,000 Assess under Ind AS 115. Any resulting asset would be
amortised over 7 years (i.e., include renewals)
Hardware ₹ 140,000 Account for asset under Ind AS 16
Software ₹ 100,000 Account for asset under Ind AS 38
Migration and testing of data centre ₹ 110,000 Assess under Ind AS 115. Any resulting asset would be
amortised over 7 years (i.e., include renewals)
TOTAL ₹ 400,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Illustration 74 : Amortisation
An entity enters into a service contract with a customer and incurs incremental costs to obtain the contract and costs to fulfil
the contract. These costs are capitalised as assets in accordance with Ind AS 115. The initial term of the contract is five
years but it can be renewed for subsequent one- year periods up to a maximum of 10 years. The average contract
term for similar contracts entered into by entity is seven years.Determine appropriate method of amortisation?
Solution:
The most appropriate amortisation period is likely to be seven years (i.e. the initial term of five years plus
two anticipated one year renewals) because that is the period over which the entity expects to provide services
under the contract to which the capitalised costs relate.
Illustration 75:
A Ltd. is in the business of the infrastructure and has two divisions under the same; (I) Toll Roads and (II) Wind
Power. The brief details of these business and underlying project details are as follows:
I. Bhilwara-Jabalpur Toll Project - The Company has commenced the construction of the project in the current
year and has incurred total expenses aggregating to ₹ 50 crore as on 31st December, 20X1. Under IGAAP, the
Company has 'recorded such expenses as Intangible Assets in the books of account. The brief details of the
Concession Agreement are as follows:
• Total Expenses estimated to be incurred on the project ₹ 100 crore;
• Fair Value of the construction services is ₹ 110 crore;
 Total Cash Flow guaranteed by the Government under the concession agreement is ₹ 200 crore;
 Finance revenue over the period of operation phase is ₹ 15 crore:
 Other income relates to the services provided during the operation phase.
II. Kolhapur- Nagpur Expressway - The Company has also entered into another concession agreement with
Government of Maharashtra in the current year. The construction cost for the said project will be ₹ 110 crore.
The fair value of such construction cost is approximately ₹ 200 crore. The said concession agreement is Toll
based project and the Company needs to collect the toll from the users of the expressway. Under IGAAP, UK Ltd.
has recorded the expenses incurred on the said project as an Intangible Asset.
(i) What would be the classification of Bhilwara - Jabalpur Toll Project as per applicable Ind AS?
Give brief reasoning for your choice.
(ii) What would be the classification of Kolhapur-Nagpur Expressway Toll Project as per applicable
Ind AS ? Give brief reasoning for your choice.
(iii) Also, suggest suitable accounting treatment for preparation of financial statements as per Ind AS for the
above 2 projects.
Solution:
(i) Here the operator has a contractual right to receive cash from the grantor. The grantor has
little, if any, discretion to avoid payment, usually because the agreement is enforceable by law. The
operator has an unconditional right to receive cash if the grantor contractually guarantees to pay the operator.
Hence, operator recognizes a financial asset to the extent it has a contractual right to receive cash.
(ii) Here the operator has a contractual right to charge users of the public services. A right to charge
users of the public service is not an unconditional right to receive cash because the amounts are contingent on
the extent that the public uses the service. Therefore, the operator shall recognise an intangible asset to
the extent it receives a right (a licence) to charge users of the public service.
(iii) Accounting treatment for preparation of financial statements
Bhilwara-Jabalpur Toll Project
Journal Entries (₹ in crore)
Particulars Dr. Cr.
During construction:
1 Financial asset A/c Dr. 110
To Construction revenue 110
[To recognise revenue relating to construction services, to be settled in case]

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
2 Cost of construction (profit or loss) Dr. 100
To Bank A/c (As and when incurred) 100
[To recognise costs relating to construction services]
During the operation phase:
3 Financial asset Dr. 15
To Finance revenue (As and when received or due to receive) 15
[To recognise interest income under the financial asset model]
4 Financial asset Dr. 75
To Revenue [(200-110) – 15] 75
[To recognise revenue relating to the operation phase]
5 Bank A/c Dr. 200
To Financial asset 200
[To recognise cash received from the grantor]
Kolhapur-Nagpur Expressway -Intangible asset Journal Entries (₹ in crore)
Particulars Dr. Cr.
During construction:
1 Cost of construction (profit or loss) Dr. 110
To Bank A/c (As and when incurred) 110
[To recognise costs relating to construction services]
2 Intangible asset Dr. 200
To Revenue 200
[To recognise revenue relating to construction services provided for non-cash
consideration]
During the operation phase:
3 Amortisation expense Dr. 200
To Intangible asset (accumulated amortisation) 200
[To recognise amortisation expense relating to the operation phase over the
period of operation]
4 Bank A/c Dr. ?
To Revenue ?
[To recognise revenue relating to the operation phase]
Note: Amount in entry 4 is kept blank as no information in this regard is given in the question.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
P TV released an advertisement in Deshabandhu, a vernacular daily. Instead of paying for the same, Q TV
allowed Deshabandhu a free advertisement spot, which was duly utilised by Deshabandu. How revenue for
these non-monetary transactions in the area of advertising will be recognised and measured?
Solution:
Paragraph 5(d) of Ind AS 115 excludes non-monetary exchanges between entities in the same line of business
to facilitate sales to customers or potential customers. For example, this Standard would not apply to a
contract between two oil companies that agree to an exchange of oil to fulfil demand from their
customers in different specified locations on a timely basis.
In industries with homogenous products, it is common for entities in the same line of business to exchange
products in order to sell them to customers or potential customers other than parties to exchange. The
current scenario, on the contrary, will be covered under Ind AS 115 since the same is exchange of
dissimilar goods or services because both of the entities deal in different mode of media, i.e., one is print
media and another is electronic media and both parties are acting as customers and suppliers for
each other.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Further, in the current scenario, it seems it is for consumption by the said parties and hence it does not fall
under paragraph 5(d). It may also be noted that, even if it was to facilitate sales to customers or potential
customers, it would not be scoped out since the parties are not in the same line of business.
As per paragraph 47 of Ind AS 115, ―An entity shall consider the terms of the contract and its customary
business practices to determine the transaction price. The transaction price is the amount of consideration to
which an entity expects to be entitled in exchange for transferring promised goods or services to a customer,
excluding amounts collected on behalf of third parties (for example, some sales taxes). The consideration
promised in a contract with a customer may include fixed amounts, variable amounts, or both‖.
Paragraph 66 of Ind AS 115 provides that to determine the transaction price for contracts in which a
customer promises consideration in a form other than cash, an entity shall measure the non-cash consideration (or
promise of non- cash consideration) at fair value.
In accordance with the above, Q TV and Deshabandhu should measure the revenue promised in the form of
non- cash consideration as per the above referred principles of Ind AS 115.
Question 02:
A Ltd. a telecommunication company, entered into an agreement with B Ltd. which is engaged in generation and
supply of power. The agreement provided that A Ltd. will provide 1,00,000 minutes of talk time to employees of B Ltd.
in exchange for getting power equivalent to 20,000 units. A Ltd. normally charges ₹ 0.50 per minute and B Ltd.
charges ₹ 2.5 per unit. How should revenue be measured in this case?
Solution:
Paragraph 5(d) of Ind AS 115 excludes non-monetary exchanges between entities in the same line of
business to facilitate sales to customers or potential customers. For example, this Standard would not apply to
a contract between two oil companies that agree to an exchange of oil to fulfil demand from their
customers in different specified locations on a timely basis.
However, the current scenario will be covered under Ind AS 115 since the same is exchange of dissimilar
goods or services.
As per paragraph 47 of Ind AS 115, ―an entity shall consider the terms of the contract and its customary
business practices to determine the transaction price. The transaction price is the amount of consideration to
which an entity expects to be entitled in exchange for transferring promised goods or services to a customer,
excluding amounts collected on behalf of third parties (for example, some sales taxes). The consideration
promised in a contract with a customer may include fixed amounts, variable amounts, or both‖.
Paragraph 66 of Ind AS 115 provides that to determine the transaction price for contracts in which a
customer promises consideration in a form other than cash, an entity shall measure the non-cash consideration
(or promise of noncash consideration) at fair value.
On the basis of the above, revenue recognised by A Ltd. will be the consideration in the form ofpower units
that it expects to be entitled for talk time sold, i.e., ₹ 50,000 (20,000 units x ₹ 2.5). The revenue recognised by B Ltd. will be
the consideration in the form of talk time that it expects to be entitled for the power units sold, i.e., ₹ 50,000
(1,00,000 minutes x ₹0.50).
Question 03:
Company X enters into an agreement on 1st January, 20X1 with a customer for renovation of hospital and install new
air- conditioners for total consideration of ₹ 50,00,000. The promised renovation service, including the installation of
new air- conditioners is a single performance obligation satisfied over time. Total expected costs are ₹ 40,00,000 including
₹ 10,00,000 for the air conditioners.
Company X determines that it acts as a principal in accordance with paragraphs B34-B38 of Ind AS 115 because it
obtains control of the air conditioners before they are transferred to the customer. The customer obtains control of the air
conditioners when they are delivered to the hospital premises.
Company X uses an input method based on costs incurred to measure its progress towards complete
satisfaction of the performance obligation.
As at 31st March, 20X1, other costs incurred excluding the air conditioners are ₹ 6,00,000.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Whether Company X should include cost of the air conditioners in measure of its progress of performance obligation?
How should revenue be recognised for the year ended March 20X1?
Solution:
Paragraph B19 of Ind AS 115 inter alia, states that, ―an entity shall exclude from an input method the effects
of any inputs that, in accordance with the objective of measuring progress in paragraph 39, do not depict
the entity‘s performance in transferring control of goods or services to the customer‖.
In accordance with the above, Company X assesses whether the costs incurred to procure the air conditioners
are proportionate to the entity’s progress in satisfying the performance obligation. The costs incurred to procure
the air conditioners (₹ 10,00,000) are significant relative to the total costs to completely satisfy the performance obligation (₹
40,00,000). Also, Company X is not involved in manufacturing or designing the air conditioners.
Company X concludes that including the costs to procure the air conditioners in the measure of progress
wouldoverstate the extent of the entity’s performance. Consequently, in accordance with paragraph B19 of Ind
AS 115, the entity adjusts its measure of progress to exclude the costs to procure the air conditioners from the
measure of costs incurred and from the transaction price. The entity recognises revenue for the transfer of the
air conditioners at an amount equal to the costs to procure the air conditioners (i.e., at a zero margin).
Company X assesses that as at March, 20X1, the performance is 20 per cent complete (i.e., ₹ 6,00,000 / ₹ 30,00,000).
Consequently, Company X recognises the following-
As at 31st March, 20X1
Amount in ₹
Revenue 18,00,000
Cost of goods sold 16,00,000
Profit 2,00,000
Revenue recognised is calculated as (20 per cent × ₹ 40,00,000) + ₹ 10,00,000.(₹
40,00,000 = ₹ 50,00,000 transaction price – ₹ 10,00,000 costs of air conditioners.)
Cost of goods sold is ₹ 6,00,000 of costs incurred + ₹ 10,00,000 costs of air conditioners.
Question 04: (RTP: NOVEMBER, 2019)
An entity G Ltd. enters into a contract with a customer P Ltd. for the sale of a machinery for ₹ 20,00,000. P Ltd.
intends to use the said machinery to start a food processing unit. The food processing industry is highly competitive
and P Ltd. has very little experience in the said industry.
P Ltd. pays a non-refundable deposit of ₹1,00,000 at inception of the contract and enters into a long-term financing
agreement with G Ltd. for the remaining 95 per cent of the agreed consideration which it intends to pay primarily from
income derived from its food processing unit as it lacks any other major source of income. The financing arrangement
is provided on a non- recourse basis, which means that if P Ltd. defaults, then G Ltd. can repossess the
machinery but cannot seek further compensation from P Ltd., even if the full value of the amount owed is not
recovered from the machinery. The cost of the machinery for G Ltd. Is ₹ 12,00,000. P Ltd. obtains control of the machinery at
contract inception.
When should G Ltd. recognise revenue from sale of machinery to P Ltd. in accordance with Ind AS 115?
Solution:
As per paragraph 9 of Ind AS 115, ―An entity shall account for a contract with a customer that is within
thescope of this Standard only when all of the following criteria are met:
(a) the parties to the contract have approved the contract (in writing, orally or in accordance with other
customarybusiness practices) and are committed to perform their respective obligations;
(b) the entity can identify each party’s rights regarding the goods or services to be transferred;
(c) the entity can identify the payment terms for the goods or services to be transferred;
(d) the contract has commercial substance (ie the risk, timing or amount of the entity’s future cash
flows is expected to change as a result of the contract); and
(e) it is probable that the entity will collect the consideration to which it will be entitled in exchange for the
goods or services that will be transferred to the customer. In evaluating whether collectability of an

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
amount of consideration is probable, an entity shall consider only the customer’s ability and intention to pay
that amount of consideration when it is due. The amount of consideration to which the entity will be
entitled may be less than the price stated in the contract if the consideration is variable because the entity may
offer the customer a price concession.
Paragraph 9(e) above, requires that for revenue to be recognised, it should be probable that the entity will
collect the consideration to which it will be entitled in exchange for the goods or services that will be
transferred to the customer. In the given case, it is not probable that G Ltd. will collect the consideration to
which it is entitled in exchange for the transfer of the machinery. P Ltd.’s ability to pay may be uncertain due to
the following reasons:
(a) P Ltd. intends to pay the remaining consideration (which has a significant balance) primarily from
income derived from its food processing unit (which is a business involving significant risk because of
high competition in the said industry and P Ltd.'s little experience);
(b) P Ltd. lacks sources of other income or assets that could be used to repay the balance consideration;
and
(c) P Ltd.'s liability is limited because the financing arrangement is provided on a non- recourse basis.
In accordance with the above, the criteria in paragraph 9 of Ind AS 115 are not met.
Further, para 15 states that when a contract with a customer does not meet the criteria in paragraph 9 and an
entity receives consideration from the customer, the entity shall recognise the consideration received as
revenue only when either of the following events has occurred:
(a) the entity has no remaining obligations to transfer goods or services to the customer and all, or
substantially all, of the consideration promised by the customer has been received by the entity and is non-
refundable; or
(b) the contract has been terminated and the consideration received from the customer is non-refundable.
Para 16 states that an entity shall recognise the consideration received from a customer as a liability until one
of the events in paragraph 15 occurs or until the criteria in paragraph 9 are subsequently met. Depending on
the facts and circumstances relating to the contract, the liability recognised represents the entity‘s obligation to either
transfer goods or services in the future or refund the consideration received. In either case, the liability shall be
measured at the amount of consideration received from the customer.
In accordance with the above, in the given case G Ltd. should account for the non-refundable deposit of ₹
1,00,000 payment as a deposit liability as none of the events described in paragraph 15 have occurred—that is,
neither the entity has received substantially all of the consideration nor it has terminated the contract.
Consequently, in accordance with paragraph 16, G Ltd. will continue to account for the initial deposit as well
as any future payments of principal and interest as a deposit liability until the criteria in paragraph 9 are
met (i.e. the entity is able to conclude that it is probable that the entity will collect the consideration) or one of
the events in paragraph 15 has occurred. Further, G Ltd. will continue to assess the contract in accordance with
paragraph 14 to determine whether the criteria in paragraph 9 are subsequently met or whether the events in
paragraph 15 of Ind AS 115 have occurred.
Question 05:
Entity I sell a piece of machinery to the customer for ₹ 2 million, payable in 90 days. Entity I is aware at contract
inception that the customer might not pay the full contract price. Entity I estimates that the customer will pay at least ₹
1.75 million, which is sufficient to cover entity I's cost of sales (₹ 1.5 million) and which entity I is willing to accept
because it wants to grow its presence in this market. Entity I have granted similar price concessions in comparable
contracts.
Entity I conclude that it is highly probable that it will collect ₹ 1.75 million, and such amount is not constrained under
the variable consideration guidance.
What is the transaction price in this arrangement?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Solution:
Entity I is likely to provide a price concession and accept an amount less than ₹ 2 million in exchange for
the machinery. The consideration is therefore variable. The transaction price in this arrangement is ₹ 1.75 million,as
this is the amount which entity I expects to receive after providing the concession and it is not
constrained under the variable consideration guidance. Entity I can also conclude that the collectability
threshold is met for ₹ 1.75 million and therefore contract exists.
Question 06:
On 1 January 20X8, entity J enters into a one-year contract with a customer to deliver water treatment chemicals.
The contract stipulates that the price per container will be adjusted retroactively once the customer reaches certain sales
volume, defined, as follows:
Price per container Cumulative sales volume
₹ 100 1 - 1,000,000 containers
₹ 90 1,000,001 - 3,000,000 containers 3,000,001 containers and
₹ 85 above
Volume is determined based on sales during the calendar year. There are no minimum purchase requirements. Entity J
estimates that the total sales volume for the year will be 2.8 million containers, based on its experience with
similar contracts and forecasted sales to the customer.
Entity J sells 700,000 containers to the customer during the first quarter ended 31st March 20X8 for a
contract price of ₹100 per container.
How should entity J determine the transaction price?
Solution:
The transaction price is ₹ 90 per container based on entity J's estimate of total sales volume for the year, since
the estimated cumulative sales volume of 2.8 million containers would result in a price per container of ₹ 90.Entity
J concludes that based on a transaction price of ₹ 90 per container, it is highly probable that a significant reversal in
the amount of cumulative revenue recognised will not occur when the uncertainty is resolved. Revenue is therefore
recognised at a selling price of ₹ 90 per container as each container is sold. Entity J will recognise a liability for cash
received in excess of the transaction price for the first 1 million containers sold at ₹ 100 per container(that is, ₹ 10 per
container) until the cumulative sales volume is reached for the next pricing tier and the price is retroactively reduced.
For the quarter ended 31st March, 20X8, entity J recognizes revenue of ₹ 63 million (700,000 containers x ₹ 90) and a liability of ₹ 7
million [700,000 containers x (₹ 100 - ₹ 90)].
Entity J will update its estimate of the total sales volume at each reporting date until the uncertainty is
resolved.
Question 07:
Entity K sells electric razors to retailers for C 50 per unit. A rebate coupon is included inside the electric razor
package that can be redeemed by the end consumers for C 10 per unit.
Entity K estimates that 20% to 25% of eligible rebates will be redeemed, based on its experience with similar
programmes and rebate redemption rates available in the market for similar programmes. Entity K concludes that the
transaction price should incorporate an assumption of 25% rebate redemption, as this is the amount for which it is
highly probable that a significant reversal of cumulative revenue will not occur if estimates of the rebates change.
How should entity K determine the transaction price?
Solution: -
Entity K records sales to the retailer at a transaction price of ₹ 47.50 (₹ 50 less 25% of ₹ 10). The difference between
the per unit cash selling price to the retailers and the transaction price is recorded as a liability for cash consideration
expected to be paid to the end customer. Entity K will update its estimate of therebate and the transaction
price at each reporting date if estimates of redemption rates change.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Question 08:
A manufacturer enters into a contract to sell goods to a retailer for ₹ 1,000. The manufacturer also offers price
protection, whereby it will reimburse the retailer for any difference between the sale price and the lowest price offered
to any customer during the following six months. This clause is consistent with other price protection clauses
offered in the past, and the manufacturer believes that it has experience which is predictive for this contract.
Management expects that it will offer a price decrease of 5% during the price protection period. Management
concludes that it is highly probable that a significant reversal of cumulative revenue will not occur if estimates change.
How should the manufacturer determine the transaction price?
Solution: -
The transaction price is ₹ 950, because the expected reimbursement is ₹ 50. The expected payment to the
retailer is reflected in the transaction price at contract inception, as that is the amount of consideration to
which the manufacturer expects to be entitled after the price protection. The manufacturer will recognise a
liability for the difference between the invoice price and the transaction price, as this represents the cash that it
expects to refund to the retailer. The manufacturer will update its estimate of expected reimbursement at each
reporting date until the uncertainty is resolved.
Question 09:
Electronics Manufacturer M sells 1,000 televisions to Retailer R for ₹ 50,00,000 (₹ 5,000 per television). M provides price
protection to R by agreeing to reimburse R for the difference between this price and the lowest price that it offers for that
television during the following six months. Based on M‘s extensive experience with similar arrangements, it estimates the
following outcomes.
Solution: -
After considering all relevant facts and circumstances, M determines that the expected value method provides
the best prediction of the amount of consideration to which it will be entitled. As a result, it estimates the
transaction price to be ₹ 4,800 per television – i.e. (₹ 5,000 x 70%) + (₹4,500 x 20%) + (₹4,000 x 10%).
Question10:
Construction Company C enters into a contract with Customer E to build an asset. Dependingon when the asset is
completed, C will receive either ₹ 1,10,000 or ₹ 1,30,000.
Outcome Consideration (₹) Probability
Project completes on time 1,30,000 90%
Project is delayed 1,10,000 10%
Solution: -
Because there are only two possible outcomes under the contract, C determines that using the most
likely amount provides the best prediction of the amount of consideration to which it will be entitled. C
estimates thetransaction price to be ₹ 1,30,000, which is the single most likely amount.
Question 11:
Franchisor Y Ltd. licenses the right to operate a store in a specified location to Franchisee F. The store bears Y Ltd.‘s
trade name and F will have a right to sell Y Ltd.‘s products for 10 years. F pays an up-front fixed fee. The
franchise contract also requires Y Ltd. to maintain the brand through product improvements, marketing campaigns etc.
Determine the nature of license.
Solution:
The licence provides F access to the IP as it exists at any point in time in the licence period. This is because:
- Y Ltd. is required to maintain the brand, which will significantly affect the IP by affecting F’s ability to
obtain benefit from the brand;
- any action by Y Ltd. may have a direct positive or negative effect on F; and
- these activities do not transfer a good or service to F.
Therefore, Y Ltd. recognises the up-front fee over the 10-year franchise period.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Question 01:MTP: October, 2020 (MTP: OCTOBER, 2019) (RTP: MAY, 2019) (10 Marks)
KK Ltd. runs a departmental store which awards 10 points for every purchase of ₹ 500 which can
be discounted by the customers for further shopping with the same merchant. Unutilised points
will lapseon expiry of two years from the date of credit. Value of each point is ₹ 0.50. During the
accounting period 2019-2020, the entity awarded 1,00,00,000 points to various customers of which
18,00,000 points remained undiscounted. The management expects only 80% will be discounted in
future of which normally 60-70% are redeemed during the next year.
The Company has approached your firm with the following queries and has asked you to suggest
the accounting treatment (Journal Entries) under the applicable Ind AS for these award points:
(a) How should the recognition be done for the sale of goods worth ₹ 10,00,000 on a
particular day?
(b) How should the redemption transaction be recorded in the year 2019-2020? The
Company has requested you to present the sale of goods and redemption as
independent transaction. Total sales of the entity is₹5,000 lakhs.
(c) How much of the deferred revenue should be recognized at the year-end (2019-2020)
because of the estimation that only 80% of the outstanding points will be
redeemed?
(d) In the next year 2020-2021, 60% of the outstanding points were discounted. Balance
40% of the outstanding points of 2019-2020 still remained outstanding. How much of
the deferred revenue should the merchant recognize in the year 2020-2021 and what
will be the amount of balance deferred revenue?
(e) How much revenue will the merchant recognized in the year 2021-2022, if
3,00,000 points areredeemed in the year 2021-2022?
Solution:
a) Points earned on ₹ 10,00,000 @ 10 points on every ₹ 500 = [(10,00,000 / 500) x 10] = 20,000 points. Value of points = 20,000
points x ₹ 0.5 each point = ₹ 10,000
Revenue recognized for sale of goods ₹ 9,90,099 [10,00,000 x (10,00,000/10,10,000)]
Revenue for points deferred ₹ 9,901 [10,00,000x (10,000/10,10,000)]
Journal Entry
₹ ₹
Bank A/c Dr. 10,00,000
To Sales A/c 9,90,099
To Liability under Customer Loyalty programme 9,901
(b) Points earned on ₹ 50,00,00,000 @ 10 points on every ₹ 500 = [(50,00,00,000/500) x 10] = 1,00,00,000 points.
Value of points = 1,00,00,000 points x ₹ 0.5 each point = ₹ 50,00,000
Revenue recognized for sale of goods = ₹ 49,50,49,505 [50,00,00,000 x (50,00,00,000/50,50,00,000)] Revenue for
points = ₹ 49,50,495 [50,00,00,000 x (50,00,000/ 50,50,00,000)]
Journal Entry in the year 2019
₹ ₹
Bank A/c Dr. 50,00,00,000
To Sales A/c 49,50,49,505
To Liability under Customer Loyalty programme 49,50,495
(On sale of Goods)
Liability under Customer Loyalty programme Dr. 42,11,002
To Sales A/c 42,11,002
(On re d e m p t i o n of (100 lakhs -18 lakhs) points)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Revenue for points to be recognized
Undiscounted points estimated to be recognized next year 18,00,000 x 80% = 14,40,000 points Total points to be redeemed within 2
years = [(1,00,00,000-18,00,000) + 14,40,000] = 96,40,000
Revenue to be recognised with respect to discounted point = 49,50,495 x (82,00,000/96,40,000) = 42,11,002
(a) Revenue to be deferred with respect to undiscounted point in 2019-2020 = 49,50,495 –
42,11,002 = 7,39,493
(b) In 2020-2021, KK Ltd. would recognize revenue for discounting of 60% of outstanding points as follows:
Outstanding points = 18,00,000 x 60% = 10,80,000 points
Total points discounted till date = 82,00,000 + 10,80,000 = 92,80,000 points
Revenue to be recognized in the year 2020-2021 = [{49,50,495 x (92,80,000 / 96,40,000)} 42,11,002] = ₹
5,54,620.
Liability under Customer Loyalty Programme Dr. ₹ 5,54,620
To Sales A/c ₹ 5,54,620
(On redemption of further 10,80,000 points)
The Liability under Customer Loyalty programme at the end of the year 2020-2021 will be
₹ 7,39,493 – ₹ 5,54,620 = ₹ 1,84,873.
(c) In the year 2021-2022, the merchant will recognize the balance revenue of ₹ 1,84,873 irrespective of the
points redeemed as this is the last year for redeeming the points. Journal entry will be as follows:
Liability under Customer Loyalty programme Dr. ₹1,84,873
To Sales A/c ₹ 1,84,873
(On redemption of balance points)
MTP: APRIL, 2019
Question 2
An entity enters into 1,000 contracts with customers. Each contract includes the sale of one product for Rs. 50 (1,000
total products × Rs. 50 = Rs. 50,000 total consideration). Cash is received when control of a product transfers. The
entity's customary business practice is to allow a customer to return any unused product within 30 days and receive a full
refund. The entity's cost of each product is Rs. 30.
The entity applies the requirements in Ind AS 115 to the portfolio of 1,000 contracts because it reasonably expects
that, in accordance with paragraph 4, the effects on the financial statements from applying these requirements to the
portfolio would not differ materially from applying the requirements to the individual contracts within the portfolio .
Since the contract allows a customer to return the products, the consideration received from the customer is variable.
To estimate the variable consideration to which the entity will be entitled, the entity decides to use the expected value
method (see paragraph 53(a) of Ind AS 115) because it is the method that the entity expects to better predict the amount
of consideration to which it will be entitled. Using the expected value method, the entity estimates that 970 products will
not be returned. The entity estimates that the costs of recovering the products will be immaterial and expects that
the returned products can be resold at a profit. Determine the amount of revenue, refund liability and the asset
to be recognised by the entity for the said contracts.
Solution
The entity also considers the requirements in paragraphs 56–58 of Ind AS 115 on constraining estimates of
variable consideration to determine whether the estimated amount of variable consideration of Rs. 48,500 (Rs. 50 × 970
products not expected to be returned) can be included in the transaction price. The entity considers the factors in
paragraph 57 of Ind AS 115 and determines that although the returns are outside the entity's influence, it has
significant experience in estimating returns for this product and customer class. In addition, the uncertainty will be
resolved within a short time frame (ie the 30-day return period). Thus, the entity concludes that it is highly probable that
a significant reversal in the cumulative amount of revenue recognised (i.e., Rs. 48,500) will not occur as the
uncertainty is resolved (i.e., over the return period).

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
The entity estimates that the costs of recovering the products will be immaterial and expects that the
returnedproducts can be resold at a profit.
Upon transfer of control of the 1,000 products, the entity does not recognise revenue for the 30 products
that it expects to be returned. Consequently, in accordance with paragraphs 55 and B21 of Ind AS 115,
the entity recognises the following:
(a) revenue of Rs. 48,500 (Rs. 50 × 970 products not expected to be returned);
(b) a refund liability of Rs. 1,500 (Rs. 50 refund × 30 products expected to be returned); and
(c) an asset of Rs. 900 (Rs. 30 × 30 products for its right to recover products from customers on
settling therefund liability).
MTP: OCTOBER, 2018
Question 03: (10 Marks)
The Company has sold certain items to a customer with after sale service for a period of two years from the date of such sale i.e. 1st
October, 2017 without any additional charges. The total amount payable by the customer is agreed as follows:
 Rs. 8,00,000, if paid by 31st January, 2018;
 Rs. 8,10,000, if paid by 28th February, 2018;
 Rs. 8,20,000, if paid by 31st March, 2018.
Based on past experience it is highly probable that the customer makes the payment before 28th February, 2018. The
standalone selling price of the product is Rs. 7,00,000 and two-years ’ services are offered to the customer at Rs.
1,40,000.
Answer the following:
(1) How many transactions are included in the above arrangement as per applicable Ind AS
(2) What is the amount of revenue to be considered for revenue recognition as per the applicable Ind AS?
(3) What is the amount of revenue to be recognised under Ind AS towards sale of product as per the terms of the
contract with the customer?
(4) What is the amount of revenue to be recognised under Ind AS towards sale of service as per the terms of the
contract with the customer?
(5) What is the portion of current and non-current liabilities to be presented in the financial statements as per Ind AS?
Solution:
Two transactions are included in the above arrangement as per applicable Ind AS ie. sale of item
includes following transactions:
(i) Selling price of item
(ii) Two-years’ after sale service
Revenue attributable to both the components is calculated as follows:
Total fair value of item and two years’ service period (7,00,000 + 1,40,000) 8,40,000
Less: Sale price of the item and two years’ service period (8,10,000)
Discount 30,000
Discount and revenue attributable to each component of the transaction:
Proportionate discount attributable to sale of item 25,000
(30,000 x 7,00,000 / 8,40,000)
Revenue from sale of item (7,00,000 – 25,000) 6,75,000
Proportionate discount attributable to two years’ service period 5,000
(30,000 x 1,40,000 / 8,40,000)
Revenue from two years’ service period (1,40,000 – 5,000) 1,35,000
Revenue in respect of sale of item should be recognised immediately and revenue from two
years’ service period should be recognised over the 2-year period on monthly basis i.e., on
31st March, 2017 revenue for two years’ service period will be Rs. 5,625 (Rs. 1,35,000/24 months)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Amount of two years’ service period due within 12 months from the reporting date =
(1,35,000 / 24 months) x 12 months = Rs. 67,500 (Current).
Amount of two years’ service period due after 12 months from the reporting date =
(1,35,000 / 24 months) x 11 months = Rs. 61,875 (Non-current).
RTP: MAY, 2020
Question 04:
(a) Entity I sells a piece of machinery to the customer for ₹ 2 million, payable in 90 days. Entity I is aware at contract
inception that the customer might not pay the full contract price. Entity I estimates that the customer will pay at least ₹ 1.75
million, which is sufficient to cover entity I's cost of sales (₹ 1.5 million) and which entity I is willing to accept because it
wants to grow its presence in this market. Entity I has granted similar price concessions in comparable contracts.
Entity I concludes that it is highly probable that it will collect ₹ 1.75 million, and such amount is not constrained under
the variable consideration guidance. What is the transaction price in this arrangement?
(b) On 1 January 20x8, entity J enters into a one-year contract with a customer to deliver water treatment
chemicals. The contract stipulates that the price per container will be adjusted retroactively once the customer
reaches certain sales volume, defined, as follows:
Price per container Cumulative sales volume
₹ 100 1 - 1,000,000 containers
₹ 90 1,000,001 - 3,000,000 containers3,000,001 containers and
₹ 85 above
Volume is determined based on sales during the calendar year. There are no minimum purchase requirements.
Entity J estimates that the total sales volume for the year will be 2.8 million containers, based on its experience with
similar contracts and forecasted sales to the customer.
Entity J sells 700,000 containers to the customer during the first quarter ended31 March 20X8 for a contract price
of ₹ 100 per container. How should entity J determine the transaction price?
( c ) Entity K sells electric razors to retailers for C 50 per unit. A rebate coupon is included inside the electric razor package
that can be redeemed by the end consumers for C 10 per unit.
Entity K estimates that 20% to 25% of eligible rebates will be redeemed, based on its experience with similar programmes
and rebate redemption rates available in the market for similar programmes. Entity K concludes that the transaction price
should incorporate an assumption of 25% rebate redemption, as this is the amount for which it is highly probable that a
significant reversal of cumulative revenue will not occur if estimates of the rebates change. How should entity K
determine the transaction price?
(d) A manufacturer enters into a contract to sell goods to a retailer for ₹ 1,000. The manufacturer also offers price
protection, whereby it will reimburse the retailer for any difference between the sale price and the lowest price offered to any
customer during the following six months. This clause is consistent with other price protection clauses offered in the
past, and the manufacturer believes that it has experience which is predictive for this contract.
Management expects that it will offer a price decrease of 5% during the price protection period. Management
concludes that it is highly probable that a significant reversal of cumulative revenue will not occur if estimates change.
How should the manufacturer determine the transaction price?
Solution:
(a) Entity I is likely to provide a price concession and accept an amount less than ₹ 2 million in
exchange for the machinery. The consideration is therefore variable. The transaction price in this
arrangement is ₹ 1.75 million, as this is the amount which entity I expects to receive after providing the
concession and it is not constrained under the variable consideration guidance. Entity I can also
conclude that the collectability threshold is met for ₹ 1.75 million and therefore contract exists.
(b) The transaction price is ₹ 90 per container based on entity J's estimate of total sales volume for the year, since the
estimated cumulative sales volume of 2.8 million containers would result in a price per container of ₹
90. Entity J concludes that based on a transaction price of ₹ 90 per container, it is highly probable that a
significant reversal in the amount of cumulative revenue recognised will not occur when the uncertainty
is resolved. Revenue is therefore recognised at a selling price of ₹ 90 per container as each container

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
is sold. Entity J will recognise a liability for cash received in excess of the transaction price for the
first 1 million containers sold at ₹ 100 per container (that is, ₹ 10 per container) until the cumulative sales
volume is reached for the next pricing tier and the price is retroactively reduced. For the quarter
ended 31st March, 20X8, entity J recognizes revenue of ₹ 63 million (700,000 containers x ₹ 90) and a
liability of ₹ 7 million [700,000 containers x (₹ 100 - ₹ 90)].
Entity J will update its estimate of the total sales volume at each reporting date until the uncertainty is
resolved.
(c) Entity K records sales to the retailer at a transaction price of ₹ 47.50 (₹ 50 less 25% of ₹ 10). The difference
between the per unit cash selling price to the retailers and the transaction price is recorded as a
liability for cash consideration expected to be paid to the end customer. Entity K will update its
estimate of the rebate and the transaction price at each reporting date if estimates of redemption
rates change.
(d) The transaction price is ₹ 950, because the expected reimbursement is ₹ 50. The expected payment to the
retailer is reflected in the transaction price at contract inception, as that is the amount of consideration
to which the manufacturer expects to be entitled after the price protection. The manufacturer will recognise
a liability for the difference between the invoice price and the transaction price, as this represents the
cash that it expects to refund to the retailer. The manufacturer will update its estimate of expected
reimbursement at each reporting date until the uncertainty is resolved.
RTP:MAY,2018
Question 05:
PQR Ltd. participated in a customer loyalty programme operated by a third party XYZ Ltd.
Under the programme, members earn points for purchases made in PQR’s stores.
The members can redeem the accumulated award points for goods supplied by the third party.
PQR Ltd. has granted points to its members on making purchases from its stores. However, the
obligation to supply the redeemed goods lies with XYZ Ltd. At the end of 31st March, 20X7,
PQR Ltd. X has granted award points with an estimated fair value of INR 40,000 and owes XYZ
Ltd. INR 34,000 i.e., goods redeemed were of INR 34,000.
What should be the classification of the expense (INR 34,000) for providing free third party goods
assuming that PQR Ltd. is collecting the consideration on its own account; whether it should be
 classified as changes in inventories of finished goods, stock in trade and WIP or
 classified as marketing expense or
 reduced from revenue?
Solution:
Paragraph 8 of Appendix B, Customer Loyalty Programmes of Ind AS 18, Revenue states
inter- alia that if the entity is collecting the consideration on its own account, it shall measure its
revenue as the gross consideration allocated to the award credits and recognise the revenue
when it fulfils its obligations in respect of the awards.”
Accordingly, since PQR Ltd. is acting as a principal, it shall recognise the revenue at gross
amount and the expense of providing free third-party goods will be included in the cost of
goods sold.
Therefore, PQR Ltd. shall recognise the revenue of INR 40,000 and INR 34,000 shall be
chargedto the Statement of Profit and Loss as cost of goods sold.
RTP:MAY,2021
Question 6:
A property sale contract includes the following:
(a) Common areas
(b) Construction services and building material
(c) Property management services
(d) Golf membership

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
(e) Car Park
(f) Land entitlement
Analyse whether the above items can be considered as separate performance obligations as per the requirements
of Ind AS 115?
Solution:
Paragraph 22 of Ind AS 115 provides that at contract inception, an entity evaluates the promised goods or
services to determine which goods or services (or bundle of goods or services) are distinct and therefore
constitute a performance obligation.
A performance obligation is a promise in a contract to transfer to the customer either:
 a good or service (or a bundle of goods or services) that is distinct; and
 series of distinct goods or services that are substantially the same and that have the same pattern of
transfer to the customer.
As per paragraph 27 of Ind AS 115, a good or service that is promised to a customer is distinct if
both of thefollowing criteria are met:
(a) the customer can benefit from the good or service either on its own or together with other resources
that arereadily available to the customer (i.e., the good or service is capable of being distinct); and
(b) the entity’s promise to transfer the good or service to the customer is separately identifiable from
other promises in the contract (i.e., the promise to transfer the good or service is distinct within the
context of the contract).
Each performance obligation is required to be accounted for separately.
Based on the above guidance, the following table discusses whether the common goods and services in
property sale contract should be considered as separate performance obligation or not:
Goods/Service Whether a separate Reason
Performance obligation (PO)
or not
Common Unlikely to be separateCommon areas are unlikely to be a separate performance
areas PO obligation because the interests received in common areas
are typically undivided interests that are not separable from
the property itself.
However, if the common areas were sold separately by
the developer, then they could be considered as a
separate performance obligation provided that it is distinct in the
context of the contract.
Constructio Unlikely to be separate Construction services and building materials can meet the
nservices PO first criterion as they are items that can be used in
and conjunction with other readily available goods or
building services.
material However, the developer would be considered to be
providing asignificant integration service as it is bringing together
all the separate elements to deliver a complete building.
Property Likely to be separate Property management services and golf membership are likely
management PO to be separate performance obligations as they may be used in
services and isolation or with the property already acquired, i.e.,
Golf management services can be used with the property. These
membership types of services are not significantly customised,
integrated with, or dependent on the property. This is
because there is no change in their function with or without
the property. Also, a property management service could
be undertaken by a third party.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Car park Analysis required Items such as car parks and land entitlements generally meet the
and Land first criterion – i.e., capable of being distinct – as the buyer
entitlement benefits from them on their own. Whether the second
criterion is met depends on the facts and circumstances.
For example, if the land entitlement can be sold separately
or pledged as security as a separate item, it may indicate
that it is not highly dependent on, or integrated with, other
rights received in the contract. In an apartment scenario,
the customer can receive an undivided interest in the land
on which the apartment block sits. This type of right is
generally considered as highly inter-related with the apartment
itself.*
* However, if title to the land is transferred to the buyer separately, for example in a single party
development – then the separately identifiable criterion may be met.
PS: Other facts and circumstances of each contract should also be carefully examined to determine performance
obligations.
MTP APR 2021
QUESTION
Entity AB Ltd. enters into a three-year service contract with a customer CD Ltd. for Rs. 4,50,000
(Rs.1,50,000 per year). The standalone selling price for one year of service at inception of the
contract is Rs.1,50,000 per year. AB Ltd. accounts for the contract as a series of distinct services.
At the beginning of the third year, the parties agree to modify the contract as follows:
(i) the fee for the third year is reduced to Rs.1,20,000; and
(ii) CD Ltd. agrees to extend the contract for another three years for Rs.3,00,000
(Rs.1,00,000 per year). The standalone selling price for one year of service at the time
of modification is Rs. 1,20,000. How should AB Ltd. account for the modification?
Analyze.
SOLUTION
Paragraph 20 of Ind AS 115, inter alia, states that, “An entity shall account for a contract
modification as a separate contract if both of the following conditions are present:
(a) the scope of the contract increases because of the addition of promised goods or services that
are distinct (in accordance with paragraphs 26–30); and
(b) the price of the contract increases by an amount of consideration that reflects the entity’s stand-
alone selling prices of the additional promised goods or services and any appropriate adjustments
to that price to reflect the circumstances of the particular contract. In accordance with the above, it
may be noted that a contract modification should be accounted for prospectively if the additional
promised goods or services are distinct and the pricing for those goods or services reflects their
stand-alone selling price. In the given case, even though the remaining services to be provided are
distinct, the modification should not be accounted for as a separate contract because the price of
the contract did not increase by an amount of consideration that reflects the standalone selling price
of the additional services. The modification would be accounted for, from the date of the
modification, as if the existing arrangement was terminated and a new contract created (i.e. on a
prospective basis) because the remaining services to be provided are distinct. AB Ltd. should
reallocate the remaining consideration to all of the remaining services to be provided (i.e. the
obligations remaining from the original contract and the new obligations ). AB Ltd. will recognise a
total of Rs.4,20,000 (Rs.1,20,000 + Rs.3,00,000) over the remaining four-year service period (one
year remaining under the original contract plus three additional years) or Rs.1,05,000 per year.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Orange Ltd. contracts to renovate a five-star hotel including the installation of new elevators on
01.10.2017. Orange Ltd. estimates the transaction price of ₹ 480 lakh. The expected cost of
elevators is ₹ 144 lakh and expected other costs is ₹ 240 lakh. Orange Ltd. purchases elevators
and they are delivered to the site six monthsbefore they will be installed. Orange Ltd. uses an input
method based on cost to measure progress towards completion. The entity has incurred actual
other costs of ₹ 48 lakh by 31.03.2018.
How much revenue will be recognised as per relevant Ind AS 115 for the year ended 31st March,
2018, if performance obligation is met over a period of time? (5 Marks)
SOLUTION:
Cost to be incurred comprises two major components – cost for elevators and cost of
construction service.
(a) The elevators are part of the overall construction project and are not a distinct performance
obligation
(b) The cost of elevators is substantial to the overall project and are incurred well in advance.
(c) Upon delivery at site, customer acquires control of such elevators.
(d) There is no modification done to the elevators, which the company only procures and
delivers at site. Nevertheless, as part of materials used in overall construction project, the
company is a principal in the transaction with the customer for such elevators also.
Therefore, applying the guidance on Input method –
 The measure of progress should be based on percentage of costs incurred relative
to the total budgeted costs.
 The cost of elevators should be excluded when measuring such progress and
revenue for such elevators should be recognized to the extent of costs incurred.
The revenue to be recognized is measured as follows:
Particulars Amount(₹ in lakh)
Transaction price 480
Costs incurred:
(a) Cost of elevators 144
(b) Other costs 48
Measure of progress 48 / 240 = 20%
Revenue to be recognised: (₹ in lakh)
(a) For costs incurred Total attributable revenue = 480 -144 = 336% of
(otherthan elevators) work completed = 20%
(b) Revenue for elevators Revenue to be recognised = 67.20
Total revenue to be (equal to costs incurred) 144 + 67.2 =
recognised 211.2
Therefore, for the year ended 31st March, 2018, the company shall recognize revenue of ₹
211.20 lakhs on the project.
Note: The above solution is given on the basis of Ind AS 115 irrespective of the financial year
mentioned in the question.
Nivaan Limited commenced work on two long-term contracts during the financial year ended on 31st March, 2019.
The first contract with A & Co. commences on 1st June, 2018 and had a total sales value of ₹ 40 lakh. It was
envisaged that the contract would run for two years and that the total expected costs would be ₹ 32 lakh. On 31st

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
March, 2019, Nivaan Limited revised its estimate of the total expected cost to ₹ 34 lakh on the basis of the additional
rectification cost of ₹ 2 lakh incurred on the contract during the current financial year. An independent surveyor has
estimated at 31st March, 2019 that the contract is 30% complete. Nivaan Limited has incurred costs up to 31st March,
2019 of ₹ 16 lakh and has received payments on account of ₹ 13 lakh.
The second contract with B & Co. commenced on 1st September, 2018 and was for18 months. The total sales value
of contract was ₹ 30 lakh and the total expected cost is ₹ 24 lakh. Payments on account already received were ₹ 9.50 lakh and
total costs incurred to date were ₹ 8 lakh. Nivaan Limited has insisted on a large deposit from B & Co. because the
companies had not traded together prior to the contract. The independent surveyor estimated that on 31st March, 2019
the contract was 20% complete.
The two contracts meet the requirement of Ind AS 115 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ to recognize
revenue over time as the performance obligations are satisfied over time.
The company also has several other contracts of between twelve and eighteen months in duration. Some of these contracts
fall into two accounting periods and were not completed as at 31st March, 2019. In absence of any financial date relating
to the other contracts, you are advised to ignore these other contracts while preparing the financial statements of the
company for the year ended 31st March, 2019.
Prepare financial statement extracts for Nivaan Limited in respect of the two construction contracts for the year
ending 31st March,2019. (12 Marks)
SOLUTION:
Extracts of Balance Sheet of Nivaan Ltd. as on 31st March, 2019
₹ in lakh
Current Assets
Contract Assets- Work-in-progress (Refer W.N. 3) 9.0
Current Liabilities
Contract Liabilities (Advance from customers) (Refer W.N. 2) 4.5
Extracts of Statement of Profit and Loss of Nivaan Ltd. as on 31 st March, 2019
₹ in lakh
Revenue from contracts (Refer W.N. 1) 18
Cost of Revenue (Refer W.N. 1) (15)
Net Profit on Contracts (Refer W.N. 1) 3
Working Notes:
1. Table showing calculation of total revenue, expenses and profit or loss on contract for the year
₹ in lakh
A & Co. B & Co. Total
Revenue from contracts (40 x 30%) = 12 (30 x 20%) = 6 18
Expenses due for the year (34* x 30%) = 10.2 (24 x 20%) = 4.8 15
Profit or loss on contract 1.8 1.2 3
*Note: Additional rectification cost of ₹ 2 lakh has been treated as normal cost. Hence total expected cost has
been considered as ₹ 34 lakh. Alternatively, in case this ₹ 2 lakh is treated as abnormal cost then expense due for the
year would be ₹ 11.6 lakh (ie 30% of ₹ 32 lakh plus ₹ 2 lakh). Accordingly, with respect to A & Co., the profit for the year
would be ₹ 0.4 lakh and work-in-progress recognised at the end of the year would be ₹ 4.4 lakh.
2. Calculation of amount due from / (to) customers ₹ in lakh
Billing based on revenue recognised in the books Payments 12 6 18
received from the customers (13) (9.5) (22.5)
Advance received from the customers 1 3.5 4.5

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
3. Work in Progress recognised as part of contract asset at the end of the year ₹ in lakh
Total actual cost incurred during the year 16 8 24
Less: Cost recognised in the books for the year (10.2) (4.8) (15)
31.3.2019
Work-in-progress recognised at the end of the year 5.8 3.2 9.0

ABC Limited supplies plastic buckets to wholesaler customers. As per the contract entered into
between ABC Limited and a customer for the financial year 2019 -2020, the price per plastic bucket
will decrease retrospectively as sales volume increases within the stipulated time of one year.
The price applicable for the entire sale will be based, on sales volume bracket during the year.
Price per unit (INR) Sales volume
90 0 - 10,000 units
80 10,001 - 35,000 units
70 35,001 units & above
All transactions are made in cash.
 Suggest how revenue is to be recognised in the books of accounts of ABC Limited as per
expected value method, considering a probability of 15%, 75% and 10% for sales volumes
of 9,000 units, 28,000 units and 36,000 units respectively. For workings, assume that ABC
Limited achieved the same number of units of sales to the customer during the year as
initially estimated under expected value method for the financial year 2019-2020.
 In case ABC Limited decides to measure revenue, based on most likely method instead of
expected value method, how will be the revenue recognised in the books of accounts of
ABC Limited based on above available information? For workings, assume that ABC
Limited achieved the same number of units of sales to the customer during the year as
initially estimated under most likely value method for the financial year 2019-2020.
 You are required to pass Journal entries in the books of ABC Limited if the revenue is
accounted for as per expected value method for financial year 2019-2020.
(14 Marks)
SOLUTION:
i. Determination of how revenue is to be recognised in the books of ABC Ltd. As per
expected value method
Calculation of probability weighted sales volume
Sales volume (units) Probability Probability-weighted sales volume (units)
9,000 15% 1,350
28,000 75% 21,000
36,000 10% 3,600
25,950
Calculation of probability weighted sales value
Sales volume(units) Sales price Probability Probability-weighted
perUnit (₹) salesvalue (₹)
9,000 90 15% 1,21,500
28,000 80 75% 16,80,000
36,000 70 10% 2,52,000
20,53,500
Average unit price= Probability weighted sales value/ Probability weighted sales volume
= 20,53,500 / 25,950 = ₹79.13 per unit

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Revenue is recognised at ₹ 79.13 for each unit sold. First 10,000 units sold will be booked at ₹ 90
per unit and liability is accrued for the difference price of ₹ 10.87 per unit (₹ 90 – ₹ 79.13), which will be
reversed upon subsequent sales of 15,950 units (as the question states that ABC Ltd. achieved
the same number of units of sales to the customer during the year as initially estimated under
the expected value method for the financial year 2019-2020). For, subsequent sale of 15,950 units,
contract liability is accrued at ₹0.87 (80 – 79.13) per unit and revenue will be deferred.
(ii) Determination of how revenue is to be recognised in the books of ABC Ltd. As per
most likely method
Note: It is assumed that the sales volume of 28,000 units given under the
expected valuemethod, with highest probability is the sales estimated under most likely
method too.
Transaction price will be: 28,000 units x ₹ 80 per unit = ₹ 22,40,000
Average unit price applicable = ₹80
First 10,000 units sold will be booked at ₹ 90 per unit and liability of ₹ 1,00,000 is accrued for the
difference price of ₹ 10 per unit (₹ 90 – ₹ 80), which will be reversed upon subsequent sales of 18,000
units(as question states that ABC Ltd. achieved the same number of units of sales to the customer
during the year as initially estimated under the most likely method for the financial year 2019-
2020).
Note: Alternatively, the question may be solved based on 25,950 units (as calculated under
expected value method assuming that the targets were met) as follows:
Transaction price will be : 25,950 units x ₹80 per unit = ₹20,76,000
Average unit price applicable = ₹80.
First 10,000 units sold will be booked at ₹ 90 per unit and liability is accrued for the difference
price of ₹ 10 per unit (₹90 – ₹80), which will be reversed upon subsequent sales of 15,950 units.
(iii) Journal Entries in the books of ABC Ltd.
(when revenue is accounted for as per expected value method for financial year 2019-2020)
₹ ₹
1 Bank A/c (10,000 x ₹90) Dr. 9,00,000
. To Revenue A/c (10,000 x ₹79.13)
To Liability (10,000 x ₹10.87) 7,91,300
(Revenue recognised on sale of first 10,000units) 1,08,700
2 Bank A/c [(25,950 x ₹80)- 9,00,000] Dr. 11,76,000
.
Liability A/c Dr. 86,124
To Revenue A/c (15,950 x ₹79.13) 12,62,124
(Revenue recognised on sale of remaining 15,950
units (25,950 - 10,000). Amount paid by the customer
will be the balance amount after adjusting the excess
paid earlier since,the customer falls now in second
slab)
3 Liability (1,08,700 – 86,124) Dr. 22,576
. To Revenue A/c [25,950 x (80-79.13)]
(On reversal of liability at the end of the financial year 22,576
2019-2020 i.e., after completion of stipulated time)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
:
Bank A/c (25,950 x ₹80) Dr. 20,76,000
To Revenue A/c (25,950 x ₹79.13) 20,53,424
To Liability (25,950 x ₹0.87) 22,576
(Revenue recognised on sale of 25,950 units)
Bank A/c (15,950 x ₹80) Dr. 12,76,000
To Revenue A/c (15,950 x ₹79.13) 12,62,124
To Liability 13,876
(Revenue recognised on sale of remaining15,950 units
(25,950 - 10,000))
Liability (1,08,700 + 13,876) Dr. 1,22,576
To Revenue A/c [25,950 x (80-79.13)] 22,576
To Bank 1,00,000
(On reversal of liability at the end of the financial year
2019-2020 i.e., after completion of stipulated time and
excess amount refunded)
An entity negotiates with major airlines to purchase tickets at reduced rates compared with the price of
tickets sold directly by the airlines to the public. The entity agrees to buy a specific number of tickets
and will pay for those tickets even if it is not able to resell them. The reduced rate paid by the entity
for each ticket purchased is negotiated and agreed in advance. The entity determines the prices at
which the airline tickets will be sold to its customers. The entity sells the tickets and collects the
consideration from customers when the tickets are sold; therefore, there is no credit risk to the
entity.
The entity also assists the customers in resolving complaints with the service provided by
airlines.
However, each airline is responsible for fulfilling obligations associated with the ticket, including
remedies to a customer for dissatisfaction with the service.
Determine whether the entity is a principal or an agent with suitable explanation in light with the
provisions given in the relevant standard. (4 Marks)
SOLUTION:
To determine whether the entity’s performance obligation is to provide the specified goods or services
itself (i.e., the entity is a principal) or to arrange for another party to provide those goods or
services (i.e., the entity is an agent), the entity considers the nature of its promise as per Ind AS 115.
The entity determines that its promise is to provide the customer with a ticket, which provides the
right to fly on the specified flight or another flight if the specified flight is changed or cancelled. The
entity considers the following indicators for assessment as principal or agent under the contract with
the customers:
(a) the entity is primarily responsible for fulfilling the contract, which is providing the
right to fly. However, the entity is not responsible for providing the flight itself, which will
be provided by the airline.
(b) the entity has inventory risk for the tickets because they are purchased before, they
are sold to the entity’s customers and the entity is exposed to any loss as a result
of not being able to sell the tickets for more than the entity’s cost.
(c) the entity has discretion in setting the sales prices for tickets to its customers.
The entity concludes that its promise is to provide a ticket (i.e., a right to fly) to the customer. On
the basis of the indicators, the entity concludes that it controls the ticket before it is transferred to the
customer. Thus, the entity concludes that it is a principal in the transaction and recognises revenue in
the gross amount of consideration to which it is entitled in exchange for the tickets transferred.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 20 - ACCOUNTING FOR GOVERNMENT GRANTS & DISCLOSURE OF GOVERNMNENTASSISTANCE
Illustration 1
Government gives a grant of ₹ 10,00,000 for past research of H1N1 vaccine to A Pharmaceuticals
Limited. There is no condition attached to the grant. Examine how the Government grant be recognised in
the books of A Pharmaceuticals Limited.
Solution
The entire grant should be recognised immediately in profit or loss.
Illustration 2
Government gives a grant of ₹ 10,00,000 for research and development of H1N1 vaccine to A
Pharmaceuticals Limited even though similar vaccines are available in the market but are expensive. The
entity has to ensure by developing a manufacturing process over a period of 2 years that the costs
come down by at least 40%. Examine how the Government grant be recognised assuming that A
Pharmaceuticals Limited has reasonable assurance that the conditions attached to the grant will be
complied with.
Solution
The entire grant should be recognised immediately as deferred income and charged to profit or loss
over a period of two years.
Illustration 3
A village of artisans in a district got devastated because of an earthquake. A Limited was operating in
that district and was providing employment to the artisans. The government gave a grant of ₹ 10,00,000
to A Limited so that 100 artisans are rehabilitated over a period of 3 years. Government releases ₹
2,00,000. Examine how the Government grant be realized.
Solution
A Limited will recognise ₹10,00,000 as government grant and set it up as a deferred income and will
recognise it in its profit or loss over the period of three years as per the principles enunciated in
IndAS20.
Once a government grant is recognised, any related contingent liability or contingent asset is treated
in accordance with Ind AS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
The manner in which a grant is received does not affect the accounting method to be adopted in
regard to the grant. Thus, a grant is accounted for in the same manner whether it is received in cash
or as a reduction of a liability to the government or in the form of a non- monetary asset.
Illustration 4
A Limited received from the government a loan of ₹ 50,00,000 @ 5% payable after 5 years in a bulleted
payment. The prevailing market rate of interest is 12%. Interest is payable regularly at the end of each
year. Calculate the amount of government grant and pass necessary journal entry. Also examine how
the Government grant be recognised.
Solution
The fair value of the loan is calculated at ₹ 37,38,328.
Year Opening Balance Interest calculated @ Interest paid @ 5% Closing Balance
12% on ₹ 50,00,000
+principal paid
(a)(b) (c) = (b) x 12% (d) (e) =(b) + (c) – (d)
1 37,38,328 4,48,600 2,50,000 39,36,928
2 39,36,928 4,72,431 2,50,000 41,59,359
3 41,59,359 4,99,123 2,50,000 44,08,482
4 44,08,482 5,29,018 2,50,000 46,87,500
5 46,87,500 5,62,500 52,50,000 Nil
A Limited will recognise ₹ 12,61,672 (₹ 50,00,000 – ₹ 37,38,328) as the government grant and will
make the following entry on receipt of loan:
Bank Account Dr. 50,00,000
To Deferred Income 12,61,672
To Loan Account 37,38,328
₹ 12,61,672 is to be recognised in profit or loss on a systematic basis over the periods in which A
Limited recognise as expenses the related costs for which the grant is intended to compensate. (see
Illustration 5 in this regard)
Illustration 5
Continuing with the facts given in the Illustration 4, state how the grant will be recognized in the statement
of profit or loss assuming:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(a) the loan is an immediate relief measure to rescue the enterprise
(b) the loan is a subsidy for staff training expenses, incurred equally, for a period of 4 years
(c) the loan is to finance a depreciable asset.
Solution
₹ 12,61,672 is to be recognised in profit or loss on a systematic basis over the periods in which A Ltd
recognised as expenses the related costs for which the grant is intended to compensate.
Assuming (a), the loan is an immediate relief measure to rescue the enterprise. ₹ 12,61,672 will be
recognised in profit or loss immediately.
Assuming (b), the loan is a subsidy for staff training expenses, incurred equally, for a period of 4 years.
₹12,61,672 will be recognised in profit or loss over a period of 4 years.
Assuming (c), the loan is to finance a depreciable asset. ₹ 12,61,672 will be recognised in profit or
loss on the same basis as depreciation.
Illustration 6
A Limited wants to establish a manufacturing unit in a backward area and requires 5 acres of land. The
government provides the land on a leasehold basis at a nominal value of ₹ 10,000 per acre. The fair
value of the land is ₹ 100,000 per acre. Calculate the amount of the Government grant to be recognized by
an entity.
Solution
A limited will recognise the land at fair value of ₹ 5,00,000 and ₹ 450,000 [(₹ 100,000 – ₹ 10,000) x 5)]as
government grant. This government grant should be presented in the balance sheet by setting up the
grant as deferred income.
Alternatively, the land may be recognised by A Ltd. at nominal value of ₹ 50,000 (₹10,000 x 5).
Illustration 7
A Limited establishes solar panels to supply solar electricity to its manufacturing plant. The cost of solar
panels is ₹ 1,00,00,000 with a useful life of 10 years. The depreciation is provided on straight line method
basis. The government gives ₹ 50,00,000 as a subsidy. Examine how the Government grant be realized.
Solution
A Limited will set up ₹ 50,00,000 as deferred income and will credit ₹ 5,00,000 equally to its statement of
profit and loss over next 10 years.
Alternatively, A Ltd. may deduct ₹ 50,00,000 from the cost of solar panel of ₹ 1,00,00,000.
Illustration 8
Continuing with the facts given in the Illustration 7 above, state how the same will be disclosed in the
Statement of cash flows.
Solution
A Limited will show ₹ 1,00,00,000 being acquisition of solar panels as outflow in investing activities. The
receipt of ₹ 50,00,000 from government will be shown as inflow under financing activities.
Illustration 9
A Ltd. received a government grant of ₹ 10,00,000 to defray expenses for environmental protection. Expected
environmental costs to be incurred is ₹ 3,00,000 per annum for the next 5 years. How should A Ltd. present
such grant related to income in its financial statements?
As per paragraph 29 of Ind AS 20, Grants related to income are presented as part of profit or loss,
either separately or under a general heading such as “Other income‟; alternatively, they are deducted
in reporting the related expense.
In accordance with the above, presentation of grants related to income under both the methods are as
follows:
Method 1: Credit in the statement of profit and loss
The entity can recognise the grant as income on a straight-line basis i.e., ₹ 2,00,000 per year in the
statement of profit and loss either separately or under the head “Other Income”.
The supporters of this method consider it inappropriate to present income and expense items on a net
basis and that “separation of the grant from the expense facilitates comparison with other expenses
not affected by a grant‟.
Method 2: As a deduction in reporting the related expense
Since the grant relates to environmental expenses incurred/to be incurred by the entity, it can present
the grant by reducing the grant amount every year from the related expense i.e., environmental
expense of ₹1,00,000 (i.e., net expense ₹3,00,000 – ₹2,00,000).
The supporters of this method are of the view that „the expenses might well not have been incurred by
the entity if the grant had not been available and presentation of the expense without offsetting the
grant may therefore be misleading‟.
The Standard regards both the methods as acceptable for the presentation of grants related to income.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
However, method 2 may be more appropriate when the company can relate the grant toa specific
expenditure.
The Standard also provides that disclosure of the grant may be necessary for a proper understanding
of the financial statements. Disclosure of the effect of the grants on any item of income or expense
which is required to be separately disclosed is usually appropriate.
Illustration 10
A Ltd. has received a grant of ₹ 10,00,00,000 in the year 20X1-20X2 from local government in the form
of subsidy for selling goods at lower price to lower income group population in a particular area for two
years. A Ltd. had accounted for the grant as income in the year 20X1-20X2. While accounting for the
grant in the year 20X1-20X2, A Ltd. was reasonably assured that all the conditions attached to the grant
will be complied with. However, in the year 20X5-20X6, it was found that A Ltd. has not complied with the
above condition and therefore notice of refund of grant has been served to it. A Ltd. has contested but
lost in court in 20X5-20X6 and now grant is fully repayable. How should A Ltd. reflect repayable grant in its
financial statements ending 20X5-20X6?
Note: It is being assumed that the accounting done in previous years was not incorrect andwas not in
error as per Ind AS 8.
Paragraph 32 of Ind AS 20, states that a Government grant that becomes repayable shall be
accounted for as a change in accounting estimate (see Ind AS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in
Accounting Estimates and Errors).
Repayment of a grant related to income shall be applied first against any unamortised deferred credit
recognised in respect of the grant. To the extent that the repayment exceeds any such deferred credit,
or when no deferred credit exists, the repayment shall be recognised immediately in profit or loss.
Repayment of a grant related to an asset shall be recognised by increasing the carrying amount of the
asset or reducing the deferred income balance by the amount repayable. The cumulative additional
depreciation that would have been recognised in profit or loss to date in the absence of the grant
shall be recognised immediately in profit or loss.
The following journal entries should be passed:
S.No. Particulars Nature of Account Dr./Cr. Amount (₹ in
crores)
(i) Repayment of Government Grant Expense (P/L) Dr. 10
To Grant repayable Balance sheet (Liability) 10
(Being recognition of repayment of grant in
statement of profit or loss)
(ii) Grant repayable Balance sheet (Liability) Dr. 10
To Bank Balance sheet (Asset) 10
(Being grant refunded)
Assuming that no deferred credit balance exists in the year 20 X5-20X6, therefore repayment
recognised in P&L.
It may also be noted that the standard also provides that circumstances giving rise to repayment of
a grant related to an asset may require consideration to be given to the possible impairment of the new
carrying amount of the asset.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
ABC Ltd. has received the following grants from the Government of Delhi for its newly started
pharmaceutical business:
● ₹20 lakhs received for immediate start-up of business without any condition.
● ₹ 50 lakhs received for research and development of drugs required for the treatment of
cardiovascular diseases with following conditions:
 That drug should be available to the public at 20% cheaper from currentmarket price;
and
 the drugs should be in accordance with quality prescribed by the World Health
Organisation [WHO].
● Two acres of land (fair Value: ₹ 10 Lakhs) received for set up plant.
● ₹ 2 lakhs received for purchase of machinery of ₹ 10 lakhs. Useful life of machinery is 5 years.
Depreciation on this machinery is to be charged on straight- line basis.
How should ABC Ltd. recognise the government grants in its books of accounts?
Solution:
ABC Ltd. should recognise the grants in the following manner:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
● ₹ 20 lakhs have been received for immediate start-up of business. This should be recognisedin
Statement of Profit and Loss immediately as there are no conditions attached to the grant.
● ₹ 50 lakhs should be recognised in profit or loss on a systematic basis over the periods which
the entity recognises as expense the related costs for which the grants are intended to compensate
provided that there is reasonable assurance that ABC Ltd. will comply with the conditions attached to
the grant.
● Land should be recognised at fair value of ₹ 10 lakhs and government grants should be
presented in the balance sheet by setting up the grant as deferred income. Alternatively, deduct the
amount of grant from the cost of the asset. In the given case, the land is granted at no cost. It will be
presented in the books at nominal value.
● ₹ 2 lakhs should be recognised as deferred income and will be transferred to profit and loss over
the useful life of the asset. In these cases, ₹ 40,000 [₹ 2 lakhs/5] should be credited to profit and loss
each year over period of 5 years. Alternatively, ₹ 2,00,000 will be deducted from the cost of the
asset and depreciation will be charged at ₹8,00,000 (₹10,00,000 – ₹2,00,000).
Question 02:( MTP AUG 2018)
A Limited received from the government a loan of ₹1,00,00,000 @ 5% payable after 5 years in a bulleted
payment. The prevailing market rate of interest is 12%. Interest is payable regularly at the end of each
year. Calculate the amount of government gran t and pass necessary journal entry. Also examine how the
Government grant be realized. Also state how the grant will be recognized in the statement of profit or loss
assuming that the loan is to finance a depreciable asset.
Solution:
The fair value of the loan is calculated at ₹ 74,76,656.
Year Opening Balancet calculated @ 12% Interest paid 5%on Closing Balance
₹ 1,00,00,000 +
principal paid
(a) (b) (c) = (b) x 12% (d) (e) =(b) + (c) – (d)
1 74,76,656 8,97,200 5,00,000 78,73,856
2 78,73,856 9,44,862 5,00,000 83,18,718
3 83,18,718 9,98,246 5,00,000 88,16,964
4 88,16,964 10,58,036 5,00,000 93,75,000
5 93,75,000 11,25,000 1,05,00,000 Nil
A Limited will recognise ₹ 25,23,344 (₹ 1,00,00,000 – ₹ 74,76,656) as the government grant and will makethe
following entry on receipt of loan:
Bank Account Dr. 1,00,00,000
To Deferred Income 25,23,344
To Loan Account 74,76,656
₹ 25,23,344 is to be recognised in profit or loss on a systematic basis over the periods in whichA
Limited recognised as expenses the related costs for which the grant is intended to compensate.
If the loan is to finance a depreciable asset. ₹ 25,23,344 will be recognised in profit or loss on the
same basis as depreciation.
Question 03:
MNC Ltd. has received grant in the nature of exemption of custom duty on capital goods with certain
conditions related to export of goods under Export Promotion Capital Goods (EPCG) scheme of
Government of India. Whether the same is a government grant under Ind AS 20, Government Grants and
Disclosure of Government Assistance? If yes, then how the same is to be accounted for if it is
(a) A Grant related to asset or
(b) A Grant related to income?
Solution:
Paragraph 3 of Ind AS 20 states that Government grants are assistance by government in theform
of transfers of resources to an entity in return for past or future compliance with certain conditions
relating to the operating activities of the entity. They exclude those forms of government assistance
which cannot reasonably have a value placed upon them and transactions with government which
cannot be distinguished from the normal trading transactions of the entity.
In accordance with the above, in the given case exemption of custom duty under EPCG scheme is a
government grant and should be accounted for as per the provisions of Ind AS20.
Ind AS 20 defines grant related to assets and grants related to income as follows:
“Grants related to asset are government grants whose primary condition is that an entity qualifying for
them should purchase, construct or otherwise acquire long-term assets. Subsidiary conditions may

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
also be attached restricting the type or location of the assets or the periods during which they are to be
acquired or held. Grants related to income are government grants other than those related to assets.”
Presentation of grants related to assets
Government grants related to assets, including non-monetary grants at fair value, shall be presented
in the balance sheet by setting up the grant as deferred income.
The grant set up as deferred income is recognised in profit or loss on a systematic basis over the
useful life of the asset. Alternatively, the amount of grant will be deducted from the cost of the asset
and depreciation will be charged on the reduced value of the asset.
Presentation of grants related to income
Grants related to income are presented as part of profit or loss, either separately or under a general
heading such as “Other income‟; alternatively, they are deducted in reporting the related expense.
Presentation
In the given case, based on the terms and conditions of the scheme, the grant received is to compensate
the import cost of assets subject to an export obligation as prescribed in the EPCG Scheme and does not
relate to purchase, construction or acquisition of a long-term asset. Hence it is a grant related to
income.
Accounting of such grant
It may be further noted that as per paragraph 12 of Ind AS 20, government grants shall be recognised
in profit or loss on a systematic basis over the periods in which the entity recognises as expenses
the related costs for which the grants are intended to compensate Grants related to income are
presented as part of profit or loss, over a period of six years, either separately or under a general
heading such as “Other income”. Alternatively, they are deducted in reporting the related expense.
Question 04:
ABC Ltd is a government company and is a first-time adopter of Ind AS. As per the previous GAAP,
the contributions received by ABC Ltd. From the government (which holds 100% shareholding in ABC
Ltd.) which is in the nature of promoters’ contribution have been recognised in capital reserve and
treated as part of shareholders’ funds in accordance with the provisions of AS 12, Accounting for
Government Grants. State whether the accounting treatment of the grants in the nature of promoters‟
contribution as per AS 12 is also permitted under Ind AS 20 Accounting for Government Grants and
Disclosure of Government Assistance.
Solution:
Paragraph 2 of Ind AS 20, “Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government
Assistance” inter alia states that the Standard does not deal with government participation in the
ownership of the entity.
Since ABC Ltd. is a government company, it implies that government has 100% shareholdingin the entity.
Accordingly, as per Ind AS 20, the entity needs to determine whether the payment is provided as a
shareholder contribution or as a government. Equity contributions will be recorded in equity while grants
will be shown in the Statement of Profit and Loss.
Where it is concluded that the contributions are in the nature of government grant, theentity shall apply the
principles of Ind AS 20 retrospectively as specified in Ind AS 101
First Time Adoption of Ind AS‟. Ind AS 20 requires all grants to be recognised as income on a systematic
basis over the periods in which the entity recognises as expenses the related costs for which the
grants are intended to compensate. Unlike AS 12, Ind AS 20 requires the grant to be classified as
either a capital or an income grant and does not permit recognition of government grants in the nature
of promoter’s contribution directly to shareholders‟ funds.
Question 05: (RTP MAY 2020) (MTP MAR 2021)
Rainbow Limited is carrying out various projects for which the company has either received
government financial assistance or is in the process of receiving the same. The company has received
two grants of ₹ 1,00,000 each, relating to the following ongoing research and development projects:
(i)The first grant relates to the “Clean River project” which involves research into the effect of various
chemicals waste from the industrial area in Madhya Pradesh. However, no major steps have been
completed by Rainbow limited to commence this research as at 31st march, 20X2.
(i)The second grant relates to the commercial development of a new equipment that can be used to
manufacture eco-friendly substitutes for existing plastic products. Rainbow Limited is confident about
the technical feasibility and financial viability of this new technology which will be available for sale in
the market by April 20X3.
In September 20X1, due to the floods near one of its factories, the entire production was lost and

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Rainbow Limited had to shut down the factory for a period of 3 months. The State Government
announced a compensation package for all the manufacturing entities affected due to the floods. As
per the scheme, Rainbow Limited is entitled to a compensation based on the average of previous
three months sales figure prior to the floods, for which the company is required to submit an
application form on or before 30th June, 20X2 with necessary figures. The financial statements of
Rainbow Limited are to be adopted on 31 st May, 20X2, by which date the claim form would not have
been filed with the State Government.
Suggest the accounting treatment of, if any, for the two grants received and the flood- related
compensation in the books of accounts of Rainbow Limited as on 31 st March, 20X2.
Solution:
Accounting treatment for:
1. First Grant
The first grant for „Clear River Project‟ involving research into effects of various chemicals waste
from the industrial area in Madhya Pradesh, seems to be unconditional as no details regarding its
refund has been mentioned. Even though the research has not been started nor any major steps
have been completed by Rainbow Limited to commence the research, yet the grant will be
recognised immediately in profit or loss for the year ended 31st March, 20X2.
Alternatively, in case, the grant is conditional as to expenditure on research, the grant will be
recognised in the books of Rainbow Limited over the year the expenditure is being incurred.
2. Second Grant
The second grant related to commercial development of a new equipment is a grant related to
depreciable asset. As per the information given in the question, the equipment will be available for
sale in the market from April, 20X3. Hence, by that time, grant relates to the construction of an asset
and should be initially recognised as deferred income.
The deferred income should be recognised as income on a systematic and rational basis over the
asset‟s useful life.
The entity should recognise a liability on the balance sheet for the years ending 31st March, 20X2
and 31st March, 20X3. Once the equipment starts being used in the manufacturing process, the
deferred grant income of ₹ 100,000 should be recognised over the asset’s useful life to compensate
for depreciation costs.
Alternatively, as per Ind AS 20, Rainbow Limited would also be permitted to offset the deferred income
of ₹ 100,000 against the cost of the equipment as on 1st April, 20X3.
3. For flood related compensation
Rainbow Limited will be able to submit an application form only after 31 st May, 20X2 ie in the year
20X2-20X3. Although flood happened in September, 20X1 and loss was incurred due to flood related
to the year 20X1-20X2, the entity should recognise the income from the government grant in the year
when the application form related to it is submitted and approved by the government for
compensation.
Since, in the year 20X1-20X2, the application form could not be submitted due to adoption of financials
with respect to sales figure before flood occurred, Rainbow Limited should not recognise the grant
income as it has not become receivable as on31st March,20X2.
Question 06:
An entity opens a new factory and receives a government grant of ₹ 15,000 in respect of capital equipment
costing ₹ 1,00,000. It depreciates all plant and machinery at 20% per annum on straight- line basis.
Show the statement of profit and loss and balance sheet extracts in respect of the grant for first year
under both the methods as per Ind AS 20.
Solution:
a) When grant is treated as deferred income
Statement of profit and loss – An extract
₹
Depreciation (₹ 1,00,000 x 20%) (20,000)
Government grant credit (W.N.1) 3,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Balance Sheet - An extract
₹
Non-current assets
Less: Accumulated depreciation (1,00,000 x 20%) (20,000) 80,000
????
Government grant [12,000 – 3,000 (current liability)] 9,000
Current liabilities
Government grant (15,000 x 20%) 3,000
????
Working Note:
1. Government grants deferred income account
₹ ₹
To Profit or loss 3,000 By Grant cash received 15,000
(15,000 × 20%)
To Balance c/f 12,000
15,000 15,000
2. When grant is deducted from cost of the asset
Statement of profit and loss – An extract
₹
Depreciation [(₹ 1,00,000 – 15,000) x 20%] (17,000)
Balance Sheet - An extract
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (1,00,000-15,000) 85,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation (17,000) 68,000
Question 07:
A company receives a cash grant of ₹ 30,000 on 31 March 20X1. The grant is towards the cost of
training young apprentices. Training programme is expected to last for 18 months starting from 1 April
20X1. Actual costs of the training incurred in 20X1-20X2 was ₹ 50,000 and in 20X2-20X3 ₹25,000.
State, how this grant should be accounted for?
Solution:
At 31st March 20X1 the grant would be recognised as a liability and presented in the balance sheet
as a split between current and non-current amounts. ₹ 20,000 [(12 months / 18 months) x 30,000] is
current and would be recognised in profit and loss for the year ended 31st March, 20X1. The
balance amount of ₹ 10,000 will be shown as non-current.
At the end of year 20X1-20X2, there would be a current balance of 10,000 (being the non- current
balance at the end of year 20X1-20X1 reclassified as current) in the balance sheet. This would be
recognised in profit in the year 20X2-20X3.Extracts from the financial statements are as follows:
Balance Sheet (extracts)
31 March 20X1 31 March 20X2 31 March 20X3
Current liabilities
Deferred income 20,000 10,000 -
Deferred income 10,000 - -
Statement of profit and loss (extracts)
31 March 20X2 31 March 20X3
Method 1
Other Income - Government grant received 20,000 10,000
Training costs (50,000) (25,000)
Method 2
Training costs (50,000 – 20,000) 30,000
Training costs (25,000 – 10,000) 15,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
QUESTION 01: (NOVEMBER 2018) (MTP OCT 2020) (5 Marks)
How will you recognize and present the grants received from the Government in the following cases as per Ind
AS 20?
(i) A Ltd. received one acre of land to setup a plant in backward area (fair value of land ₹ 12 lakh and
acquired value by Government is ₹ 8 Iakhs).
(ii) B Ltd. received an amount of loan for setting up a plant at concessional rate of interest from theGovernment.
(iii) D Ltd. received an amount of ₹ 25 lakh for immediate start-up of a business without any condition.
(iv) S Ltd. received ₹ 10 lakh for purchase of machinery costing ₹ 80 lakh. Useful life of machinery is 10years.
Depreciation on this machinery is to be charged on straight line basis.
(v) Government gives a grant of ₹ 25 lakh to U Limited for research and development of medicine for
breast cancer, even though similar medicines are available in the market but are expensive. The company is to
ensure by developing a manufacturing process over a period of two years so that the cost comes down at least
to 50%.
SOLUTION:
(i) The land and government grant should be recognized by A Ltd. at fair value of ₹ 12,00,000 andthis
government grant should be presented in the books as deferred income.
(ii) As per para 10A of Ind AS 20 ‘Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government
Assistance’, loan at concessional rates of interest is to be measured at fair value and recognised as per Ind
AS 109. Value of concession is the difference between the initial carrying value of the loan determined in
accordance with Ind AS 109, and the proceeds received. The benefit is accounted for as Government grant.
(iii) ₹ 25 lakh has been received by D Ltd. for immediate start-up of business. Since this grant is given to
provide immediate financial support to an entity, it should be recognised in the Statement of Profit and Loss
immediately with disclosure to ensure that its effect is clearly understood, as perpara 21 of Ind AS 20.
(iv) ₹ 10 lakh should be recognized by S Ltd. as deferred income and will be transferred to profit and loss
over the useful life of the asset. In this case, ₹ 1,00,000[₹ 10 lakh / 10 years] should be credited to profit and
loss each year over period of 10 years.
(v) As per para 12 of Ind AS 20, the entire grant of ₹ 25 lakh should be recognized immediately as
deferred income and charged to profit and loss over a period of two years based on the related costs for
which the grants are intended to compensate provided that there is reasonable assurance that U Ltd. will
comply with the conditions attached to the grant.
Mediquick Ltd. has received the following grants from the Central Government for its newly started
pharmaceutical business:
 ₹ 50 lakh received for immediate start-up of business without any condition.
 ₹ 70 lakh received for research and development of drugs required for the treatment of cardiovascular
diseases with following conditions:
- That drug should be available to the public at 20% cheaper from current market price and
- The drugs should be in accordance with quality prescribed by the Govt. Drug Controldepartment.
 Three acres of land (fair value: ₹ 20 lakh) received for set up of plant.
 ₹ 4 lakh received- for purchase of machinery of ₹10 lakh. Useful life of machinery is 4 years. Depreciation on
this machinery is to be charged on straight-line basis.
How should Mediquick Ltd. recognize the government grants in its books of accounts as per relevant Ind AS?
SOLUTION:
Mediquick Ltd. should recognise the grants in the following manner:
 ₹ 50 lakhs have been received for immediate start-up of business. This should be recognised in
the Statement of Profit and Loss immediately as there are no conditions attached to the grant.
 ₹ 70 lakhs should be recognised in profit or loss on a systematic basis over the periods in which
the entity recognises as expense the related costs for which the grants are intended to compensate.
However, for this compliance, there should be reasonable assurance that Mediquick Ltd. complies
with the conditions attached to the grant.
 Land should be recognised at fair value of ₹ 20 lakhs and government grants should be presented inthe
balance sheet by setting up the grant as deferred income. Alternatively, since the land is granted at no
cost, it may be presented in the book sat nominal value.
 ₹ 4 lakhs should be recognised as deferred income and will be transferred to profit and loss account over
the useful life of the asset. In these cases, ₹ 1,00,000 [₹ 4 lakhs/4 years] should be credited to profit and loss
account each year over the period of 4 years.
Alternatively, ₹ 4,00,000 will be deducted from the cost of the asset and depreciation will be charged at reduced
amount of ₹ 6,00,000 (₹ 10,00,000 – ₹ 4,00,000) i.e., ₹ 1,50,000 each year.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 41 - AGRICULTURE
Illustration 1
ABC Ltd grows vines, harvests the grapes and produces wine. Which of these activities are in the
scopeof Ind AS 41?
Solution
The grape vines are bearer plants that continually generate crops of grapes which are covered
by Ind AS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment.
When the entity harvests the grapes, their biological transformation ceases and they become
agricultural produce covered by Ind AS 41, Agriculture.
Wine involves a lengthy maturation period. This process is similar to the conversion of raw
materials to a finished product rather than biological transformation hence treated as inventory
inaccordance with Ind AS 2, Inventories.
Illustration 2 (MTP APR 2021)
A farmer owned a dairy herd, of three years old cattle as at 1st April, 20X1 with a fair value
of ₹ 13,750 and the number of cattle in the herd was 250.
The fair value of three-year cattle as at 31st March, 20X2 was ₹ 60 per cattle. The fair value of four
year cattle as at 31st March, 20X2 is ₹ 75 per cattle.
Calculate the measurement of group of cattle as at 31st March, 20X2 stating price and physical
change separately.
Solution
Fair value as at 1st April, 20X1 13,750
Increase due to Price change [250 x {60 - 1,250
(13,750/250)}]
Increase due to Physical change [250 x {75-60}] 3,750
Fair value as at 31st March, 20X2 18,750
Illustration 3
XYZ Ltd., on 1st December, 20X3, purchased 100 sheep from a market for ₹ 5,00,000. The
transaction cost of 2% on the market price of the sheep was incurred which was paid by the seller.
Sheep’s fair value increased from ₹ 500,000 to ₹ 600,000 on 31st March, 20X4. Transaction cost of
2% would have to be incurred by the sellerto get the sheep to the relevant market.
Determine the fair value on the date of purchase and the reporting date and pass necessary journal
entries there on.
Solution
The fair value less cost to sell of sheep’s on the date of purchase would be ₹ 4,90,000 (5,00,000-
10,000). Expense of ₹10,000 would be recognised in profit and loss.
On date of Purchase
Biological Asset 4,90,000

Loss on initial recognition 10,000
To Bank 5,00,000
(Being biological asset purchased)
On 31st March, 20X4 sheep would be measured at ₹ 5,88,000 as Biological Asset (6,00,000-
12,000) and gain of ₹98,000 (5,88,000 - 4,90,000) would be recognised in profit or loss.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
At the end of reporting period
Biological Asset Dr. 98,000
To Gain – Change in fair value 98,000
(Being change in fair value recognised at the end of reporting period)
Illustration 4
Moon Ltd prepares financial statements to 31st March, each year. On 1st April 20X1 the company
carried out the following transactions:
-- Purchased a land for ₹ 50 Lakhs.
-- Purchased 200 dairy cows (average age at 1st April, 20X1 two years) for ₹ 10 Lakhs.
-- Received a grant of ₹ 1 million towards the acquisition of the cows. This grant was non-
refundable.For the year ending 31st March, 20X2, the company has incurred following costs:
-- ₹ 6 Lakh to maintain the condition of the animals (food and protection).
-- ₹ 4 Lakh as breeding fee to a local farmer.
st
On 1 October, 20X1, 100 calves were born. There were no other changes in the number of
animals during the year ended 31st March, 20X2. As of 31st March, 20X2, Moon Ltd had
3,000 litres of unsold milk in inventory. The milk was sold shortly after the year end at
market prices.
Information regarding fair values is as follows:
Item Fair Value less cost to sell
1stApril, 20X1 1stOctober, 20X1 31st March, 20X2
₹ ₹ ₹
Land 50 Lakhs 60 Lakhs 70 Lakhs
New born calves 1,000 1,100 1,200
(per calf)
Six month old 1,100 1,200 1,300
calves (per calf)
Two year old 5,000 5,100 5,200
cows (per cow)
Three year old 5,200 5,300 5,500
cows (per cow)
Milk (per litre) 20 22 24
Prepare extracts from the Balance Sheet and Statement of Profit & Loss that would be reflected in
the financial statements of the entity for the year ended 31st March, 20X2.
Solution
Extract from the Statement of Profit & Loss
WN Amount
Income
Change in fair value of purchased dairy cow WN 2 1,00,000
Government Grant WN 3 10,00,000
Change in the fair value of newly born calves WN 4 1,30,000
Fair Value of Milk WN 5 72,000
Total Income 13,02,000
Expenses
Maintenance Costs WN 2 6,00,000
Breeding Fees WN 2 4,00,000
Total Expense (10,00,000)
Net Income 3,02,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Extracts from Balance Sheet
Property, Plant and Equipment:

Land WN 1 50,00,000
Biological assets other than bearer plants:
Dairy Cow WN 2 11,00,000
Calves WN 4 1,30,000
62,30,000
Inventory:
Milk WN 5 72,000
72,000
Working Notes:
1. Land: The purchase of the land is not covered by Ind AS 41. The relevant standard
which would apply to this transaction is Ind AS 16. Under this standard the land
would initially be recorded at cost and depreciated over its useful economic life. This
would usually be considered to be infinite in the case of land and so no depreciation
would be appropriate. Under Cost Model no recognition would be made for post-
acquisition changes in the value of land. The allowed alternative treatment under
Revaluation Model would permit the land to be revalued to market value with the
revaluation surplus taken to the other comprehensive income. We have followed
the Cost Model.
2. Dairy Cows: Under the ‘fair value model’ laid down in Ind AS 41 the mature cows
st
would be recognised in the Balance Sheet at 31 March, 20X2 at the fair value
of 200x ₹ 5,500 = ₹11,00,000.
Increase in price change 200 x (5,200-5,000) = 40,000
Increase in physical change 200 x (5,500-5,200) = 60,000
The total difference between the fair value of matured herd and its initial cost
(₹11,00,000
– ₹ 10,00,000 = a gain of ₹ 1,00,000) would be recognised in the profit and loss along
with the maintenance costs and breeding fee of ₹6,00,000 and ₹4,00,000 respectively.
3. Grant: Grand relating to agricultural activity is not subject to the normal
requirement of Ind AS 20. Under Ind AS 41 such grants are credited to income as
soon as they are unconditionally receivable rather than being recognised over the
useful economic life of the herd. Therefore, ₹10,00,000 would be credited to income
of the company.
4. Calves: They are a biological asset and the fair value model is applied. The
breeding fees are charged to income and an asset of 100 x ₹ 1,300 = ₹ 1,30,000
recognised in the Balancesheet and credited to Profit and loss.
5. Milk: This is agricultural produce and initially recognised on the same basis as
biological assets. Thus the milk would be valued at 3,000 x ₹24 = ₹72,000. This is
regarded as ‘cost’ for the future application of Ind AS 2 to the unsold milk.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 1: (RTP NOV 2018)
As at 31st March, 20X1, a plantation consists of 100 Pinus Radiata trees that were planted 10 years
earlier. The tree takes 30 years to mature, and will ultimately be processed into building material for
houses or furniture. The enterprise’s weighted average cost of capitalis 6% p.a.
Only mature trees have established fair values by reference to a quoted price in an active market.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The fairvalue (inclusive of current transport costs to get 100 logs to market) for a mature tree of the
same grade as in the plantation is:
As at 31st March, 20X1: 171 As at 31st March, 20X2: 165
Assume that there would be immaterial cash flow between now and point of harvest. The present
value factor of ₹1 @ 6% for
19th year = 0.331 20th year = 0.312. State the value of such plantation as on 31 st March, 20X1 and
20X2 and the gain or loss to be recognisedas per Ind AS.
SOLUTION:
As at 31st March, 20X1, the mature plantation would have been valued at 17,100 (171 x 100).
As at 31st March, 20X2, the mature plantation would have been valued at 16,500 (165 x 100).
Assuming immaterial cash flow between now and the point of harvest, the fair value (and
therefore the amount reported as an asset on the statement of financial position) of the
plantationis estimated as follows:
As at 31st March, 20X1: 17,100 x 0.312 = 5,335.20.
As at 31st March, 20X2: 16,500 x 0.331 = 5,461.50.
Gain or loss
The difference in fair value of the plantation between the two year end dates is 126.30 (5,461.50
– 5,335.20), which will be reported as a gain in the statement or profit or loss (regardless of the fact
that it has not yet been realised).
Question 02:
XY Ltd. is a farming entity where cows are milked on a daily basis. Milk is kept in cold storage
immediately after milking and sold to retail distributors on a weekly basis. On 1 April 20X1,XY
Ltd. ad a herd of 500 cows which were all three years old.
During the year, some of the cows became sick and on 30 September 20X1, 20 cows died. On 1
October 20X1, XY Ltd. purchased 20 replacement cows at the market for ₹ 21,000 each. These 20
cows were all one-year old when they were purchased.
On 31 March 20X2, XY Ltd. had 1,000 litres of milk in cold storage which had not been sold to retail
distributors. The market price of milk at 31 March 20X2 was ₹ 20 per litre. When selling the milk to
distributors, XY Ltd. incurs selling costs of ₹ 1 per litre. These amounts did not change during
March20X2 and are not expected to change during April 20X2.
Information relating to fair value and costs to sell is given below:
Date Fair value of a dairy cow (aged) Costs to sell a cow
1 year 1.5 years 3 years 4 years
st
1 April 20X1 20,000 22,000 27,000 25,000 1,000
1st October 20X1 21,000 23,000 28,000 26,000 1,000
31st March 20X2 21,500 23,500 29,000 26,500 1,100
You can assume that fair value of a 3.5 years old cow on 1st October 20X1 is ₹ 27,000.
Pass necessary journal entries of above transactions with respect to cows in the financial statements
of XY Ltd. for the year ended 31st March, 20X2? Also show the amount lying in inventory if any.
SOLUTION:
Journal Entries on 1st October, 20X1
Loss (on death of 20 cows) (Refer W.N.) Dr. 5,20,000

To Biological asset 5,20,000
(Loss booked on death of 20 cows)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Biological Asset (purchase of 20 new cows) (Refer W.N.) Dr. 4,00,000
To Bank 4,00,000
(Initial recognition of 20 new purchased cows at fair
valueless costs to sell)
Journal Entries on 31st March, 20X2
Loss on remeasurement of old cows Dr. 2,88,000
To Biological asset [(1,30,00,000 –5,20,000) – 2,88,000
1,21,92,000]
(Subsequent measurement of cows at fair value less costs
to sell)
Biological Asset (4,48,000 – 4,00,000) Dr. 48,000
To Gain on remeasurement of new cows 48,000
(Subsequent measurement of cows at fair value less costs
to sell)
Inventory (Milk) as at 31st March, 20X2 = ₹ 19,000 (1,000 x (20 – 1))
Working Note:
Calculation of Biological asset at various dates
Date Number Age Fair Cost to Net (₹ )Biological asset
Value(₹ ) Sell (₹ ) (₹ )
1st April 20X1 500 3 years 27,000 1,000 26,000 1,30,00,000
1st October 20X1 (20) 3.5 years 27,000 1,000 26,000 (5,20,000)
1st October 20X1 20 1 year 21,000 1,000 20,000 4,00,000
1,28,80,000
31st March 20X2 480 4 years 26,500 1,100 25,400 1,21,92,000
20 1.5 years 23,500 1,100 22,400 4,48,000
1,26,40,000
Question 03:
Company X purchased 100 goat at an auction for ₹ 1,00,000 on 30 September 20X1. Subsequent
transportation costs were ₹ 1,000 that is similar to the cost X would have to incur to sell the goat at
the auction. Additionally, there would be a 2% selling fee on the market price of the goat to be
incurred by the seller.
On 31 March 20X2, the market value of the goat in the most relevant market increases to ₹
1,10,000. Transportation costs of ₹ 1,000 would have to be incurred by the seller to get the goat to
the relevant market. An auctioneer’s fee of 2% on the market price of the goat would be payable
by the seller.
On 1 June 20X2, X sold 18 goat for ₹ 20,000 and incurred transportation charges of 150. In
addition, there was a 2% auctioneer’s fee on the market price of the goat paid by the seller.
On 15 September 20X2, the fair value of the remaining goat was ₹ 82,820. 42 goat were
slaughtered on that day, with a total slaughter cost of ₹ 4,200. The total market price of the carcasses
on that day was ₹48,300, and the expected transportation cost to sell the carcasses is ₹420. No
other costs are expected.
On 30 September 20X2, the market price of the remaining 40 goat was ₹ 44,800. The expected
transportation cost is ₹ 400. Also, there would be a 2% auctioneer’s fee on the market price of the goat
payable by the seller.
Pass Journal entries so as to provide the initial and subsequent measurement for all above transactions.
Interim reporting periods are of 30 September and 31 March and the company determines the fair values
on these dates for reporting.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Value of goat at initial recognition (30 September 20X1)
(All figures are in ₹)
Biological asset (goat) Dr. 97,000*
Loss on initial recognition Dr. 4,000
To Bank (Purchase and cost of transportation) 1,01,000
(Initial recognition of goat at fair value less coststo
sell)
*Fair value of goat = 1,00,000 – 1,000 – 2,000 (2% of 1,00,000) = 97,000
Subsequent measurement at 31 March 20X2 (All figures are in ₹)
Biological Assets (Goat ) Dr. 9,800
To Gain on Sale (Profit & Loss) 9,800
(Subsequent measurement of Goat at fair value less
costs to sell (1,06,800** – 97,000))
** Fair value of goat = 1,10,0000 – 1,000 – 2,200 (2% of 1,10,000) = 1,06,800
Sale of goat on 1 June 20X2 (All figures are in ₹ )
Biological Assets (Goat ) Dr. 226
To Gain on Sale (Profit & Loss) 226
(Subsequent re-measurement of 18 Goat at fair value
less costs to sell just prior to the point at which they
are
sold [19,450 - {(1,06,800/100) x 18}]
Cost to Sales Dr. 19,450
To Biological Assets (Goat ) 19,450
(Recording a cost of sales figure separately with a
corresponding reduction in the value of the biological
assets)
Bank Dr. 19,450
Selling expenses (150 + 400) Dr. 550
To Revenue 20,000
(Recognition of revenue from sale of goat )
September 20X2 (All figures are in ₹ )
Inventory (48,300 - 420) Dr. 47,880
Loss on remeasurement Dr. 1,176
To Biological Asset (Goat ) 44,856#
To Bank (Slaughtering cost) 4,200
(Transfer of goat to inventory)
#Note: 44,856 is calculated as the proportion of goat sold using the fair value (1,06,800+
226 –19,450) x 42/82)
Subsequent measurement of goat at 30 September 20X2 (All figures are in ₹ )
Loss on remeasurement Dr. 784
To Biological Asset (Goat ) 784
(Subsequent measurement of Goat at
fairvalue less costs to sell [43,504## –
{(1,06,800 + 226 – 19,450)– 44,856}]
##Fair value of goat = 44,800 – 400 – 896 (2% of 44,800) = 43,504

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
RTP/MTP/PAST PAPERS
MTP: OCTOBER, 2019
Question 01:
As at 31st March, 20X1, a plantation consists of 100 Pinus Radiata trees that were planted 10 years
earlier. The tree takes 30 years to mature, and will ultimately be processed into building material for
houses or furniture. The enterprise’s weighted average cost of capital is 6% p.a.
Only mature trees have established fair values by reference to a quoted price in an active
market. The fair value (inclusive of current transport costs to get 100 logs to market) for a
mature tree ofthe same grade as in the plantation is:
As at 31st March, 20X1: 171
As at 31st March, 20X2: 165
Assume that there would be immaterial cash flow between now and point of harvest. The
presentvalue factor of Rs. 1 @ 6% for 19th year = 0.33120th year = 0.312
State the value of such plantation as on 31st March, 20X1 and 20X2 and the gain or loss to be
recognised as per Ind AS. (6 Marks)
Solution:
As at 31st March, 20X1, the mature plantation would have been valued at 17,100 (171 x 100). As at 31stMarch,
20X2, the mature plantation would have been valued at 16,500 (165 x 100).
Assuming immaterial cash flow between now and the point of harvest, the fair value (and therefore the amount reported
as an asset on the statement of financial position) of the plantation is estimated as follows:
As at 31st March, 20X1: 17,100 x 0.312 = 5,335.20.
As at 31st March, 20X2: 16,500 x 0.331 = 5,461.50.
Gain or loss
The difference in fair value of the plantation between the two year end dates is 126.30 (5,461.50 – 5,335.20), which will
be reported as a gain in the statement or profit or loss (regardless of the fact that it has not yet been realised).
RTP:MAY,2021
Question:2
Analyse whether the following activities fall within the scope of Ind AS 41 with proper reasoning:
Managing animal-related recreational activities like Zoo
Fishing in the ocean
Fish farming
Development of living organisms such as cells, bacteria and viruses
Growing of plants to be used in the production of drugs
Purchase of 25 dogs for security purpose of the company’s premises
Solution:
Activity Whether in
the scope of Remarks
Ind AS 41?
Managing No Since the primary purpose is to show the animals to public for
animal related recreational purposes, there is no management of biological
recreational transformation but simply control of the number of animals. Hence it
activities like Zoo will not fall in the purview of considered in the definition of
agricultural activity.
Fishing in the No Fishing in ocean is harvesting biological assets from unmanaged
ocean sources. There is no management of biological transformation since
fish grow naturally in the ocean. Hence, it will not fall in the scope
of thedefinition of agricultural activity.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Fish farming Yes Managing the growth of fish and then harvest for sale is agricultural
activity within the scope of Ind AS 41 since there is
management of biological transformation of biological assets for sale
or additional biological assets.
Development Analysis The development of living organisms for research purposes does not
of living required qualify as agricultural activity, as those organisms are not being
organisms such developed for sale, or for conversion into agricultural produce or into
as cells, additional biological assets. Hence, development of such organisms
bacteria viruses for the said purposes does not fall under the scope of Ind AS 41.
However, if the organisms are being developed for sale or use in dairy
products, the activity will be considered as agricultural activity under the
scope of Ind AS 41.
Growing of Yes If an entity grows plants for using it in production of drugs, the
plantsto be activity will be agricultural activity. Hence it will come under the scope
used in the of Ind AS 41.
production
ofdrugs
Purchase of 25 No Ind AS 41 is applied to account for the biological assets when
they
dogs for security relate to agricultural activity.
purposes of Guard dogs for security purposes do not qualify as agricultural
thecompany’s activity, since they are not being kept for sale, or for conversion
premises into agricultural produce or into additional biological assets. Hence,
they are outside the scope of Ind AS 41.
RTP NOV 2020
QUESTION
Entity A purchased cattle at an auction on 30th June 2019
Purchase price at 30th June 2019 ` 1,00,000
Costs of transporting the cattle back to the entity’s farm ` 1,000
Sales price of the cattle at 31st March, 2020 ` 1,10,000
The company would have to incur similar transportation costs if it were to sell the cattle at auction,
in addition to an auctioneer’s fee of 2% of sales price.
The auctioneer charges 2% of the selling price, from both, the buyer as well as the seller. Calculate
the amount at which cattle is to be recognised in books on initial recognition and at year end 31st
March, 2020.
SOLUTION
Initial recognition of cattle
Fair value less costs to sell (`1,00,000 – `1,000 - `2,000) 97,000
Cash outflow (`1,00,000 + `1,000 + `2,000) 1,03,000
Loss on initial recognition 6,000
Cattle Measurement at year end
Fair value less costs to sell (`1,10,000 – 1,000 – (2% x 1,10,000)) 1,06,800

Arun Ltd. is an entity engaged in plantation and farming on a large scale and diversified across India. On 1st
April, 2018, the company has received a government grant for ₹ 20 lakh subject· to a condition that it will continue to
engage in plantation of eucalyptus tree for a coming period of five years.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The management has a reasonable assurance that the entity will comply with condition of engaging in the plantation of
eucalyptus trees for specified period of five years and accordingly it recognizes proportionate grant for ₹ 4 lakh in
Statement of Profit and Losses income following the principles laid down under Ind AS 20
Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance.
Required:
Evaluate whether the above accounting treatment made by the management is incompliance with the applicable Ind AS. Ifnot,
advise the correct treatment.(4 Marks)
SOLUTION:
Arun Ltd. is engaged in plantation and farming on a large scale. This implies that it has agriculture business.
Hence, Ind AS 41 will be applicable.
Further, the government grant has been given subject to a condition that it will continue to engage in plantation of
eucalyptustree for a coming period of five years. This implies that it is a conditional grant.
In the absence of the measurement base of biological asset, it is assumed that “Arun Ltd measures its Biological
Asset at fair value less cost to sell”:
(i) As per Ind AS 41, the government grant should be recognised in profit or loss when, and only
when, the conditions attaching to the government grant are met ie continuous plantation of
eucalyptus tree for coming period of 5 years. In this case, the grant shall not be recognised
in profit or loss until the five years have passed. The entity has recognised the grant in profit and
loss on proportionate basis, which is incorrect.
(ii) However, if the terms of the grant allow part of it to be retained according to the time elapsed,
the entity recognises that part in profit or loss as time passes. Accordingly, the entity can recognise
the proportionate grant for ₹ 4 lakh in the statement of Profit and Loss based on the terms of
the grant.
Alternatively, it may be assumed that Arun Ltd. measures its Biological Asset at its cost less any
accumulated depreciation and any accumulated impairment losses (as per para 30 of Ind AS 41):
In such a situation, principles of Ind AS 20 (with respect to conditional grant will apply). According to Ind
AS 20, the conditional grant should be recognised in the Statement of Profit and Loss over the periods and in
the proportions in which depreciation expense on those assets is recognised. Hence the proportionate
recognition of grant ₹ 4 lakh (20 lakh / 5) as income is correct since the entity has reasonable assurance that
the entity will comply with the conditions attached to the grant.
Note: In case eucalyptus tree is considered as bearer plant by Arun Ltd., then Ind AS 20 will be
applicable and not Ind AS 41.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Case Study 1
On 1st April, 20X1, Pluto Ltd. has advanced a loan for ₹ 10 lakhs to one of its employees for an
interest rate at 4% per annum (market rate 10%) which is repayable in 5 equal annual installments
along with interest at each year end. Employee is not required to give any specific performance
against this benefit.
The accountant of the company has recognised the staff loan in the balance sheet equivalent to the
amount disbursed i.e., ₹ 10 lakhs. The interest income for the period is recognised at the contracted
rate in the Statement of Profit and Loss by the company i.e., ₹ 40,000 (₹ 10 lakhs x 4%).
Analyse whether the above accounting treatment made by the accountant is in compliance with
the Ind AS. If not, advise the correct treatment along with working for the same.
Solution
The above treatment needs to be examined in the light of the provisions given in Ind AS
32 and Ind AS 109 on Financial Instruments’ and Ind AS 19 ‘Employee Benefits’.
Para 11 (c) (i) of Ind AS 32 ‘Financial Instruments: Presentation’ states that:
“A financial asset is any asset that is:
- a contractual right:
- to receive cash or….”
Further, paragraph 5.1.1 of Ind AS 109 states that:
“At initial recognition, an entity shall measure a financial asset or financial liability at its fair value”.
Further, paragraph 5.1.1 of Appendix B to Ind AS 109 states that:
“The fair value of a financial instrument at initial recognition is normally the transaction price (i.e.,
the fair value of the consideration given or received. However, if part of the consideration given
or received is for something other than the financial instrument, an entity shall measure the fair
value of the financial instrument. For example, the fair value of a long-term loan or receivable that
carries no interest can be measured as the present value of all future cash receipts discounted
using the prevailing market(s) of interest rate of similar instrument with a similar credit rating. Any
additional amount lent is an expense or reduction of income unless it qualifies for recognition as
some other type of asset”.
“After initial recognition, an entity shall measure a financial asset at:
(a) amortised cost;
(b) fair value through other comprehensive income; or
(c) fair value through profit or loss.
“Interest revenue shall be calculated by using the effective interest method. This shall be calculated
byapplying the effective interest rate to the gross carrying amount of a financial asset”
Paragraph 8 of Ind AS 19 states that:
“Employee Benefits are all forms of consideration given by an entity in exchange for service
rendered by employees or for the termination of employment”.
The Accountant of Pluto Ltd. has recognised the staff loan in the balance sheet at ₹ 10 lakhs
being the amount disbursed and ₹ 40,000 as interest income for the period is recognised at the
contracted rate in the statement of profit and loss which is not correct and not in accordance
with Ind AS 19, Ind AS 32 and Ind AS 109.
Accordingly, the staff advance being a financial asset shall be initially measured at the fair
value and subsequently at the amortised cost. The interest income is calculated by using the
effective interest method. The difference between the amount lent and fair value is charged as
Employee benefit expense in statement of profit and loss.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
a) Calculation of Fair Value of the Loan
Year Cash Inflow Discounting Factor (10%) Present Value
1 2,40,000 0.909 2,18,160
2 2,32,000 0.826 1,91,632
3 2,24,000 0.751 1,68,224
4 2,16,000 0.683 1,47,528
5 2,08,000 0.621 1,29,168
Total 8,54,712
Staff loan should be initially recorded at ₹ 8,54,712.
b) Employee Benefit Expense
Loan Amount – Fair Value of the loan = ₹10,00,000 – ₹8,54,712 = ₹1,45,288
₹ 1,45,288 shall be charged as Employee Benefit expense in Statement of Profit and Loss for the
year ended 31.03.20X2.
Amortisation table:
Year Opening balance of Staff Interest(10%) Repayment(c) Closing balance of
Advance (a) (b)= (a x 10%) Staff Advance
(d) = a + b -c
1 8,54,712 85,471 2,40,000 7,00,183
2 7,00,183 70,018 2,32,000 5,38,201
3 5,38,201 53,820 2,24,000 3,68,021
4 3,68,021 36,802 2,16,000 1,88,823
5 1,88,823 19,177(b.f.) 2,08,000 Nil
Balance Sheet extracts showing the presentation of staff loan as at 31st March, 20X2
Ind AS compliant Division II of Sch III needs to be referred for presentation requirement in
Balance Sheet on Ind AS.
Assets
Non-Current Assets
Financial Assets
(i) Loan 5,38,201
Current Assets
Financial Assets
(i) Loans (7,00,183 - 5,38,201) 1,61,982
Case Study 2
Pluto Ltd. has purchased a manufacturing plant for ₹ 6 lakhs on 1st April, 20X1. The useful life of
the plant is 10 years. On 30th September, 20X3, Pluto temporarily stops using the manufacturing
plant because demand has declined.
However, the plant is maintained in a workable condition and it will be used in future when
demand picks up.
The accountant of Pluto ltd. decided to treat the plant as held for sale until the demands picks up
and accordingly measures the plant at lower of carrying amount and fair value less cost to sell.
Also, the accountant has also stopped charging the depreciation for the rest of period considering the
plant as held for sale. The fair value less cost to sell on 30th September, 20X3 and 31st March,
20X4 was ₹ 4 lakhs and ₹ 3.5 lakhs respectively.
The accountant has performed the following working:
Carrying amount on initial classification as held for sale
Less: Accumulated dep (6,00,000/ 10 Years) x 2.5 years (1,50,000) 4,50,000
th
Fair Value less cost to sell as on 30 September, 20X3 4,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The value will be lower of the above two 4,00,000
Assets
Current Assets
Other Current Assets
Assets classified as held for sale 3,50,000
Analyse whether the above accounting treatment made by the accountant is in compliance with the
Ind AS. If not, advise the correct treatment along with the necessary workings.
Solution
The above treatment needs to be examined in the light of the provisions given in Ind AS 16
‘Property, Plant and Equipment’ and Ind AS 105 ‘Non-current Assets Held for Sale and
Discontinued Operations’.
Para 6 of Ind AS 105
‘Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations’ states that:
“An entity shall classify a non-current asset (or disposal group) as held for sale if its carrying
amount will be recovered principally through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use”.
“For this to be the case, the asset (or disposal group) must be available for immediate sale in its
present condition subject only to terms that are usual and customary for sales of such assets (or
disposal groups) and its sale must be highly probable. Thus, an asset (or disposal group) cannot be
classified as a non-current asset (or disposal group) held for sale, if the entity intends to sell it in
a distant future”.
“For the sale to be highly probable, the appropriate level of management must be committed to a
plan to sell the asset (or disposal group), and an active programme to locate a buyer and complete
the plan must have been initiated. Further, the asset (or disposal group) must be actively marketed
for sale at a price that is reasonable in relation to its current fair value. In addition, the sale should
be expected to qualify for recognition as a completed sale within one year from the date of
classification and actions required to complete the plan should indicate that it is unlikely that
significant changes to the plan will be made or that the plan will be withdrawn.”
“An entity shall not classify as held for sale a non-current asset (or disposal group) that is to be
abandoned. This is because its carrying amount will be recovered principally through continuing
use.”
“An entity shall not account for a non-current asset that has been temporarily taken out of use as
if it had been abandoned.”
“Depreciation does not cease when the asset becomes idle or is retired from active use unless
the asset is fully depreciated.”
Going by the guidance given above,
The Accountant of Pluto Ltd. has treated the plant as held for sale and measured it at the fair
value less cost to sell. Also, the depreciation has not been charged thereon since the date of
classification as held for sale which is not correct and not in accordance with Ind AS 105 and
Ind AS 16.
Accordingly, the manufacturing plant should neither be treated as abandoned asset nor as held
for sale because its carrying amount will be principally recovered through continuous use.
Pluto Ltd. shall not stop charging depreciation or treat the plant as held for sale because its
carrying amount will be recovered principally through continuing use to the end of their
economic life.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
The working of the same for presenting in the balance sheet is given as below:
Calculation of carrying amount as on 31st March, 20X4
Less: Accumulated depreciation (6,00,000/ 10 Years) x 3Years (1,80,000)
4,20,000
Less: Impairment loss (70,000)
3,50,000
st
Balance Sheet extracts as on 31 March, 20X4
Assets
Non-Current Assets
Property, Plant and Equipment 3,50,000
Working Note:
Fair value less cost to sell of the Plant = ₹3,50,000
Value in Use (not given) or = Nil (since plant has temporarily not been used for
manufacturing due to decline in demand)
Recoverable amount = higher of above i.e., ₹3,50,000
Impairment loss = Carrying amount – Recoverable amount
Impairment loss = ₹4,20,000 - ₹ 3,50,000 = ₹70,000.
Case Study 3
On 5th April, 20X2, fire damaged a consignment of inventory at one of the Jupiter’s Ltd.’s
warehouse. This inventory had been manufactured prior to 31st March, 20X2 costing ₹ 8 lakhs.
The net realisable value of the inventory prior to the damage was estimated at ₹ 9.60 lakhs.
Because of the damage caused to the consignment of inventory, the company was required to
spend an additional amount of ₹ 2 lakhs on repairing and re-packaging of the inventory. The
inventory was sold on 15th May, 20X2 for proceeds of ₹9 lakhs.
The accountant of Jupiter Ltd treats this event as an adjusting event and adjusted this event of
causing the damage to the inventory in its financial statement and accordingly re-measures the
inventories as follows:
( ₹ lakhs)
Cost 8.00
Net realisable value (9.6 -2) 7.60
Analyse whether the above accounting treatment made by the accountant in regard to financial year
ending on 31.0.20X2 is in compliance of the Ind AS. If not, advise the correct treatment along with
working for the same.
Solution
‘Events after the Reporting Period’ and Ind AS 2 ‘Inventories’.
Para 3 of Ind AS 10
‘Events after the Reporting Period’ defines “Events after the reporting period are those events,
favourable and unfavourable, that occur between the end of the reporting period and the date when
the financial statements are approved by the Board of Directors in case of a company, and, by the
corresponding approving authority in case of any other entity for issue. Two types of events can be
identified:
(a) those that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the reporting period
(b) those that are indicative of conditions that arose after the reporting period (non-adjusting
events after the reporting period).

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
“An entity shall not adjust the amounts recognised in its financial statements to reflect non-adjusting
events after the reporting period”.
Further, paragraph 6 of Ind AS 2 defines:
“Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less the
estimated costs of completion and the estimated costs necessary to make the sale”.
“Inventories shall be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value”.
Accountant of Jupiter Ltd. has re-measured the inventories after adjusting the event in its financial
statement which is not correct and nor in accordance with provision of Ind AS 2 and Ind AS 10.
Accordingly, the event causing the damage to the inventory occurred after the reporting date
and as per the principles laid down under Ind AS 10 ‘Events After the Reporting Date’ is a non-
adjusting event as it does not affect conditions at the reporting date. Non-adjusting events are
not recognised in the financial statements, but are disclosed where their effect is material.
Therefore, as per the provisions of Ind AS 2 and Ind AS 10, the consignment of inventories
shall be recorded in the Balance Sheet at a value of ₹8 Lakhs calculated below: ₹’ lakhs
Cost 8.00
Net realisable value 9.60
Case Study 4
On 1st April, 20X1, Sun Ltd. has acquired 100% shares of Earth Ltd. for ₹ 30 lakhs. Sun Ltd.
has 3 cash- generating units A, B and C with fair value of ₹ 12 lakhs, ₹ 8 lakhs and ₹ 4 lakhs
respectively. The company recognizes goodwill of Rs 6 lakhs that relates to CGU ‘C’ only.
During the financial year 20X2-20X3, the CFO of the company has a view that there is no
requirement of any impairment testing for any CGU since their recoverable amount is comparatively
higher than the carrying amount and believes there is no indicator of impairment.
Analyse whether the view adopted by the CFO of Sun Ltd is in compliance of the Ind AS. If not,
advise the correct treatment in accordance with relevant Ind AS
Solution
The above treatment needs to be examined in the light of the provisions given in Ind AS 36:
Impairment of Assets.
Para 9 of Ind AS 36
‘Impairment of Assets’ states that “An entity shall assess at the end of each reporting period whether
there is any indication that an asset may be impaired. If any such indication exists, the entity shall
estimate the recoverable amount of the asset.”
Further, paragraph 10(b) of Ind AS 36 states that:
“Irrespective of whether there is any indication of impairment, an entity shall also test goodwill
acquired in a business combination for impairment annually.”
Sun Ltd has not tested any CGU on account of not having any indication of impairment is
partially correct i.e., in respect of CGU A and B but not for CGU C. Hence, the treatment made
by the Company is not in accordance with Ind AS 36.
Accordingly, impairment testing in respect of CGU A and B are not required since there
are no indications of impairment. However, Sun Ltd shall test CGU ‘C’ irrespective of any
indication of impairment annually as the goodwill acquired on business combination is fully
allocated to CGU ‘C’.
Case Study 5 (RTP MAY 2021)
Deepak started a new company Softbharti Pvt. Ltd. with Iktara Ltd. wherein investment of 55% is
done by Iktara Ltd. and rest by Deepak. Voting powers are to be given as per the
proportionate share of capital contribution. The new company formed was the subsidiary of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Iktara Ltd. with two directors, and Deepak eventually becomes one of the directors of company.
A consultant was hired and he charged ₹ 30,000 for the incorporation of company and to do other
necessary statuary registrations. ₹ 30,000 is to be charged as an expense in the books after
incorporation of company. The company, Softbharti Pvt. Ltd. was incorporated on 1st April 20X1.
The financials of Iktara Ltd. are prepared as per Ind AS.
An accountant who was hired at the time of company’s incorporation, has prepared the draft
financials of Softbharti Pvt. Ltd. for the year ending 31st March, 20X2 as follows:
Statement of Profit and Loss:
Revenue from operations 10,00,000
Other Income 1,00,000
Total Revenue (a) 11,00,000
Expenses:
Purchase of stock in trade 5,00,000
(Increase)/Decrease in stock in trade (50,000)
Employee benefits expense 1,75,000
Depreciation 30,000
Other expenses 90,000
Total Expenses (b) 7,45,000
Profit before tax (c) = (a)-(b)
3,55,000
Current tax 1,06,500
Deferred tax 6,000
Total tax expense (d) 1,12,500
Profit for the year (e) = (c) – (d) 2,42,500
Balance Sheet
(1) Shareholders’ Funds
(a) Share Capital 1,00,000
(b) Reserves & Surplus 2,27,500
(2)Non-Current Liabilities
(a) Long Term Provisions 25,000
(b) Deferred tax liabilities 6,000
(a) Trade Payables 11,000
(b) Other Current Liabilities 45,000
(c) Short Term Provisions 1,06,500
TOTAL 5,21,000
ASSETS
(1) Non- Current Assets
(a) Property, plant and equipment (net) 1,00,000
(b) Long-term Loans and Advances 40,000
(c) Other Non-Current Assets 50,000
Current Assets
Current Investment 30,000
Inventories 80,000
Trade Receivables 55,000
Cash and Bank Balances 1,15,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Other Current Assets 51,000
TOTAL 5,21,000
Additional information of Softbharti Pvt Ltd.:
 Deferred tax liability of ₹ 6,000 is created due to following temporary difference:
Difference in depreciation amount as per Income tax and Accounting profit
 There is only one property, plant and equipment in the company, whose closing
balance as at 31st March, 20X2 is as follows:
Asset description As per Books As per Income tax
Property, plant and equipment ₹ 1,00,000 ₹80,000
 Pre incorporation expenses are deductible on straight line basis over the period of
fiveyears as per Income tax. However, the same are immediately expensed off in the books.
 Current tax is calculated at 30% on PBT - ₹ 3,55,000 without doing any adjustments
related to Income tax. The correct current tax after doing necessary adjustments of allowances
/ disallowances related to Income tax comes to ₹1,25,700.
 After the reporting period, the directors have recommended dividend of ₹ 15,000 for the
year ending 31st March, 20X2 which has been deducted from reserves and surplus. Dividend
payable of ₹ 15,000 has been grouped under ‘other current liabilities’ along with other financial
liabilities.
 There are ‘Government statuary dues’ amounting to ₹ 15,000 which are grouped
under‘other current liabilities’.
 The capital advances amounting to ₹ 50,000 are grouped under ‘Other non-current assets’.
 Other current assets of ₹ 51,000 comprise Interest receivable from trade receivables.
 Current investment of ₹ 30,000 is in shares of a company which was done with the purpose
of trading; current investment has been carried at cost in the financial statements. The fair value
of current investment in this case is ₹50,000 as at 31st March, 20X2.
 Actuarial gain on employee benefit measurements of ₹ 1,000 has been omitted in the
financials of Softbharti private limited for the year ending 31st March, 20X2.
The financial statements for financial year 20X1-20X2 have not been yet approved.
You are required to ascertain that whether the financial statements of Softbharti Pvt. Ltd. are
correctly presented as per the applicable financial reporting framework. If not, prepare the
revised financial statements of Softbharti Pvt. Ltd. after the careful analysis of mentioned facts
and information.
Solution
If Ind AS is applicable to any company, then Ind AS shall automatically be made applicable to
all the subsidiaries, holding companies, associated companies, and joint ventures of that
company, irrespective of individual qualification of set of standards on such companies. In the
given case it has been mentioned that the financials of Iktara Ltd. are prepared as per Ind AS.
Accordingly, the results of its subsidiary Softbharti Pvt. Ltd. should also have been prepared as
per Ind AS. However, the financials of Softbharti Pvt. Ltd. have been presented as per
accounting standards (AS).
Hence, it is necessary to revise the financial statements of the revised financial statements of
Softbharti Pvt. Ltd. as per Ind AS and Division II to Schedule III of the Companies Act, 2013
are as follows:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
STATEMENT OF PROFIT AND LOSS for the year ended 31st March, 20X2
Revenue from operations 10,00,000
Other Income (1,00,000 + 20,000) (refer note -1) 1,20,000
Total Revenue 11,20,000
Expenses:
Purchase of stock in trade 5,00,000
(Increase) / Decrease in stock in trade (50,000)
Employee benefits expense 1,75,000
Depreciation 30,000
Other expenses 90,000
Total Expenses 7,45,000
Profit before tax 3,75,000
Current tax 1,25,700
Deferred tax (W.N.1) 4,800
Total tax expense 1,30,500
Profit for the year (A) 2,44,500
OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
Items that will not be reclassified to Profit or Loss:
Remeasurements of net defined benefit plans 1,000
Tax liabilities relating to items that will not be reclassified to Profit or
Loss
Remeasurements of net defined benefit plans (tax) [1000 x 30%] (300)
Other Comprehensive Income for the period (B) 700
Total Comprehensive Income for the period (A+B) 2,45,200
st
BALANCE SHEET as at 31 March, 20X2
Particulars (₹)
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Financial assets
Other financial assets (Long-term loans and advances) 40,000
Other non-current assets (capital advances) (refer note-2) 50,000
Current assets
Inventories 80,000
Financial assets
Investments (30,000 + 20,000) (refer note -1) 50,000
Cash and cash equivalents/Bank 1,15,000
Other financial assets (Interest receivable from trade receivables) 51,000
TOTAL ASSETS 5,41,000
Equity
Equity share capital 1,00,000
Other equity 2,45,200
Provision (25,000 – 1,000) 24,000
Deferred tax liabilities (4800 + 300) 5,100
Current liabilities

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Trade payables 11,000
Other financial liabilities (Refer note 5) 15,000
Other current liabilities (Govt. statutory dues) (Refer note 3) 15,000
Current tax liabilities 1,25,700
TOTAL EQUITY AND LIABILITIES 5,41,000
STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
For the year ended 31st March, 20X2
A. EQUITY SHARE CAPITAL
Balance (₹)
As at 31st March, 20X1 -
Changes in equity share capital during the year 1,00,000
As at 31st March, 20X2 1,00,000
B. OTHER EQUITY
Reserves & Surplus
RetainedEarnings(₹)
st
As at 31 March, 20X1 -
Profit for the year 2,44,500
Other comprehensive income for the year 700
Total comprehensive income for the year 2,45,200
Less: Dividend on equity shares (refer note – 4) -
st
As at 31 March, 20X2 2,45,200
DISCLOSURE FORMING PART OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS:
Proposed dividend on equity shares is subject to the approval of the shareholders of the
company at the annual general meeting and not recognized as liability as at the Balance
Sheet date. (refer note 4)
Notes:
(i) Current investment are held for the purpose of trading. Hence, it is a financial asset
classified as FVTPL. Any gain in its fair value will be recognised through profit or loss. Hence,
₹ 20,000 (₹ 50,000 – ₹ 30,000) increase in fair value of financial asset will be recognised in profit
and loss. However, it will attract deferred tax liability on increased value (Refer W.N).
(ii) Assets for which the future economic benefit is the receipt of goods or services, rather
than the right to receive cash or another financial asset, are not financial assets.
(iii) Liabilities for which there is no contractual obligation to deliver cash or other financial
asset to another entity, are not financial liabilities.
(iv) As per Ind AS 10, ‘Events after the Reporting Period’, If dividends are declared after the
reporting period but before the financial statements are approved for issue, the dividends are
not recognized as a liability at the end of the reporting period because no obligation exists at
that time. Such dividends are disclosed in the notes in accordance with Ind AS 1,
Presentation of Financial Statements
(v) Other current financial liabilities:
(₹)
Balance of other current liabilities as per financial 45,000
statements
Less: Dividend declared for FY 20X1 – 20X2 (Note – 4) (15,000)
Reclassification of government statuary dues payable to‘other current
liabilities’ (15,000)
Closing balance 15,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Working Note:
Calculation of deferred tax on temporary differences as per Ind AS 12 for financial year 20X1 –
20X2
Item Carrying Tax base erence(₹) DTA / DTL@30%
amount (₹) (₹) (₹)
Property, Plant and 1,00,000 80,000 20,000 6,000-DTL
Equipment
Pre-incorporation expenses Nil 24,000 24,000 7,200-DTA
Current Investment 50,000 30,000 20,000 6,000-DTL
Net DTL 4,800-DTL
Case Study 6
Mumbai Challengers Ltd., a listed entity, is a sports organization owning several cricket and
hockey teams. The issues below pertain to the reporting period ending 31 March 20X2.
1. Owing to the proposed schedules of Indian Hockey League as well as Cricket Premier
Tournament, Mumbai Challengers Ltd. needs a new stadium to host the sporting events. This
stadium will form a part of the Property, Plant and Equipment of the company. Mumbai
Challengers Ltd. began the construction of the stadium on 1 December, 20X1. The
construction of the stadium was completed in 20X2-20X3. Costs directly related to the
construction amounted to ₹ 140 crores in December 20X1. Thereafter, ₹ 350 crores have been
incurred per month until the end of the financial year. The company has not taken any specific
borrowings to finance the construction of the stadium, although it has incurred finance costs on
its regular overdraft during the period, which were avoidable had the stadium not been
constructed. Mumbai Challengers Ltd. has calculated that the weighted average cost of the
borrowings for the period 1 December 20X1 to 31 March 20X2 amounted to 15% per annum
on an annualized basis. The company seeks advice on the treatment of borrowing costs in
its financial statements for the year ending 31 March 20X2.
2. Mumbai Challengers Ltd. acquires and sells players’ registrations on a regular
basis For a player to play for its team, Mumbai Challengers Ltd. must purchase registrations
for that player. These player registrations are contractual obligations between the playerand the
company. The costs of acquiring player registrations include transfer fees, leaguelevy fees, and
player agents’ fees incurred by the club.
At the end of each season, which happens to also be the reporting period end for Mumbai
Challengers Ltd., the club reviews its contracts with the players and makes decisions as to whether
they wish to sell/transfer any players’ registrations. The company actively markets these
registrations by circulating with other clubs a list of players’ registrations and their estimated
selling price. Players’ registrations are also sold during the season, often with performance
conditions attached. In some cases, it becomes clear that a player will not play for the club
again because of, for example, a player sustaining a career threatening injury or being
permanently removed from the playing squad for any other reason. The playing registrations of
certain players were sold after the year end, fortotal proceeds, net of associated costs, of ₹ 175
crores. These registrations had a net book value of ₹ 49 crores. Mumbai Challengers Ltd. seeks
your advice on the treatment of the acquisition, extension, review and sale of players’ registrations
in the circumstances outlined above.
3. Mumbai Challengers Ltd. measures its stadiums in accordance with the revaluation
model. An airline company has approached the directors offering ₹ 700 crores for the property
naming rights of all the stadiums for five years. Three directors are on the management boards of
both Mumbai Challengers Ltd. and the airline. Additionally, statutory legislations regulate the
financing of both the cricket and hockey clubs. These regulations prevent contributions to the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
capital from a related party which ‘increases equity without repayment in return’. Failure to adhere
to these legislations could lead to imposition of fines and withholding of prize money. Mumbai
Challengers Ltd. wants to know how to take account of the naming rights in the valuations of
the stadium and the potential implications of the financial regulations imposed by the
legislations.
Solution
(a) Borrowing Costs
As per Ind AS 23 Borrowing Costs, an entity shall capitalize borrowing costs that are directly
attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of a qualifying asset (i.e., an asset
that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its intended use or sale) as
partof the cost of that asset. The borrowing costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition,
construction or production of a qualifying asset are those borrowing costs that would have
been avoided if the expenditure on the qualifying asset had not been made. To the extent that
an entity borrows funds generally and uses them for the purpose of obtaining a qualifying asset,
the entity shall determine the amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalization by applying a
capitalization rate to the expenditures on that asset. The capitalization rate shall be the
weighted average of the borrowing costs applicable to all borrowings of the entity that are
outstanding during the period.
The capitalization rate of the borrowings of Mumbai Challengers Ltd. during the period of
construction is 15% per annum (as given in the question), and therefore, the total amount of
borrowing costs to be capitalized is the expenditures incurred on the asset multiplied by the
capitalization rate, which is as under:
Particulars ₹ in crores
Costs incurred in December 20X1: (₹ 140 crores x 15% x 4/12) 7.000
Costs incurred in January 20X2: (₹ 350 crores x 15% x 3/12) 13.125
Costs incurred in February 20X2: (₹ 350 crores x 15% x 2/12) 8.750
Costs incurred in March 20X2: (₹ 350 crores x 15% x 1/12) 4.375
Borrowing Costs to be capitalized in 20X1-X2 33.250
OR
Weighted average carrying amount of the stadium during 20X1-X2 is: ₹ (140 + 490 + 840 + 1,190)
crores/4 = ₹ 665 crores
Applying the weighted average rate of borrowings of 15% per annum, the borrowing cost to be
capitalized is computed as: ₹ 665 crores x (15% x 4/12) = ₹ 33.25 crores
(b) Players’ Registrations
Acquisition
As per Ind AS 38 Intangible Assets, an entity should recognize an intangible asset where it is
probable that the expected future economic benefits that are attributable to the asset will flow to
the entity and the cost of the asset can be measured reliably. Accordingly, the costs
associated with the acquisition of players’ registrations would need to be capitalized which
would be the amountof cash or cash equivalent paid or the fair value of other consideration
given to acquire such registrations. In line with Ind AS 38 Intangible Assets, costs would
include transfer fees, league levy fees, and player agents’ fees incurred by the club, along with
other directly attributable costs, if any. Amounts capitalized would be fully amortized over the
period covered by the player’s contract.
Sale of registrations
Player registrations would be classified as assets held for sale under Ind AS 105 Non-
Current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations when their carrying amount is expected
to be recovered principally through a sale transaction and a sale is considered to be highly
probable. To consider a sale to be ‘highly probable’, the assets (in this case, player registrations)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
should be actively marketed for sale at a price that is reasonable in relation to its current fair
value. In the given case, it would appear that the management is committed to a plan to sell
the registration, that the asset is available for immediate sale and that an active plan to
locate a buyer is already in place by circulating clubs. Ind AS 105 stipulates that it should be
unlikely that the plan to sell the registrations would be significantly changed or withdrawn. To fulfil
this requirement, it would be prudent if only those registrations are classified as held for sale
where unconditional offers have been received prior to the reporting date.
Once the conditions for classifying assets as held for sale in accordance with Ind AS 105
have been fulfilled, the player registrations would be stated at lower of carrying amount and
fair value less costs to sell, with the carrying amount stated in accordance with Ind AS 38 prior to
application of Ind AS 105, subjected to impairment, if any.
Profits and losses on sale of players’ registrations would be computed by deducting the
carrying amount of the players’ registrations from the fair value of the consideration receivable,
net of transactions costs. In case a portion of the consideration is receivable on the
occurrence of a future performance condition (i.e., contingent consideration), this amount
would be recognized in the Statement of Profit and Loss only when the conditions are met.
The players registrations disposed of, subsequent to the year end, for ₹ 175 crores, having a
corresponding book value of ₹ 49 crores would be disclosed as a non-adjusting event in
accordancewith Ind AS 10 Events after the Reporting Period.
Impairment review
Ind AS 36 Impairment of Assets requires companies to annually test their assets for impairment.
An asset is said to be impaired if the carrying amount of the asset exceeds its recoverable
amount. The recoverable amount is higher of the asset’s fair value less costs to sell and its
value in use (which is the present value of future cash flows expected to arise from the use of
the asset). In the given scenario, it is not easy to determine the value in use of any player in
isolation as that player cannot generate cash flows on his/her own unless via a sale transaction
or an insurance recovery. Whilst any individual player cannot really be separated from the
single cash-generating unit (CGU), being a cricket team or a hockey team in the instant case,
there may be certain instances where a player is taken out of the CGU when it becomes clear
that he/she will not play for the club again. If such circumstances arise, the carrying amount of
the player should be assessed against the best estimate of the player’s fair value less any
costs to sell and an impairment charge should be recognized in the profit or loss, which
reflects any loss arising.
(c) Valuation of stadiums
In terms of Ind AS 113 Fair Value Measurement, stadiums would be valued at the price which
would be received to sell the asset in an orderly transaction between market participants at
the measurement date (i.e., exit price). The price would be the one which maximizes the
value of the asset or the group of assets using the principle of the highest and best use. The
price would essentially use Level 2 inputs which are inputs other than quoted market prices
included within Level 1 which are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly.
Property naming rights present complications when valuing property. The status of the property
indicates its suitability for inviting sponsorship attached to its name. It has nothing to do with
the property itself but this can be worth a significant amount. Therefore, Mumbai ChallengersLtd.
could include the property naming rights in the valuation of the stadium and write it off over
three years.
Ind AS 24 Related Party Disclosures lists the criteria for two entities to be treated as related parties.
Such criteria include being members of the same group or where a person or a close member of
that person’s family is related to a reporting entity if that person has control or joint control over the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
reporting entity. Ind AS 24 deems that parties are not related simply because they have a
director or a key manager in common. In this case, there are three directors in common and in
the absence of any information to the contrary, it appears as though the entities are not related.
However, the regulator will need to establish whether the sponsorship deal is a related party
transaction for the purpose of the financial control provisions. There would need to be
demonstrated that the airline may be expected to influence, or be influenced by, the club or a
related party of the club. If the deal is deemed to be a related party transaction, the regulator
will evaluate whether the sponsorship is at fair value or not.
Case Study 7
(a) Neelanchal Gas Refinery Ltd. (hereinafter referred to as Neelanchal), a listed company, is
involved in the production and trading of natural gas and oil. Neelanchal jointly owns an
underground storage facility with another entity, Seemanchal Refineries Ltd. (hereinafter
referred to as Seemanchal). Both the companies are engaged in extraction of gas from
offshore gas fields, which they own and operate independently of each other. Neelanchal owns
60% of the underground facility and Seemanchal owns 40%. Both the companies have agreed
to share services and costs accordingly, with decisions relating to the storage facility requiring
unanimous agreement of the parties. The underground facility is pressurised so that the gas is
pushed out when extracted. When the gas pressure is reduced to a certain level, the remaining
gas is irrecoverable and remains in the underground storage facility until it is decommissioned.
As per the laws in force, the storage facility should be decommissioned at the end of its
useful life.
Neelanchal seeks your advice on the treatment of the agreement with Seemanchal as well as
the accounting for the irrecoverable gas.
(b) Neelanchal has entered into a ten-year contract with Uttaranchal Refineries Pvt. Ltd.
(hereinafter referred to as Uttaranchal) for purchase of natural gas. Neelanchal has paid an
advanceto Uttaranchal equivalent to the total quantity of gas contracted for ten years based on
the forecasted price of gas. This advanced amount carries interest at the rate of 12.5% per
annum, which is settled by Uttaranchal way of supply of extra gas. The contract requires
fixed quantities of gas to be supplied each month. Additionally, there is a price adjustment
mechanism in the contract whereby the difference between the forecasted price of gas and the
prevailing market price is settled in cash on a quarterly basis. If Uttaranchal does not deliver
the gas as agreed, Neelanchal has the right to claim compensation computed at the current
market price of the gas.
Neelanchal wants to account for the contract with Uttaranchal in accordance with Ind AS 109
Financial Instruments and seeks your inputs in this regard.
Solution
(a) Joint Arrangement
As per Ind AS 111 Joint Arrangements, a joint arrangement is an arrangement of which two or
more parties have joint control. Joint control is the contractually agreed sharing of control of an
arrangement, which exists only when decisions about the relevant activities require the
unanimous consent of the parties sharing control. The structure and form of the arrangement
determines the nature of the relationship. However, irrespective of the purpose, structure or
form of the arrangement, the classification of joint arrangements depends upon the parties’
rights and obligations arising from the arrangement. Accordingly, a joint arrangement could
be classified as a joint operation or as a joint venture. A joint arrangement which is NOT
structured through a separate vehicle is a joint operation. In such cases, the contractual
arrangement establishes the parties’ rights and obligations. A joint operator accounts for the
assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses relating to its involvement in a joint operation in

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
accordance with the relevant Ind AS. Based on the information provided, the arrangement with
Seemanchal Refineries Ltd. is a joint operation as no separate vehicle is formed and the
companies have agreed to share services and costs with decisions regarding the storage
facility requiring unanimous agreement of the parties. Neelanchal Gas Refinery Ltd. should
recognize its share of the asset as Property, Plant and Equipment.
As per Para 16 of Ind AS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment, the cost of an item of property,
plant and equipment comprises the initial estimate of the costs of dismantling and removingthe
item and restoring the site on which it is located. Ind AS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities
and Contingent Assets provides guidance on measuring decommissioning, restoration and
similar liabilities. Para 45 of Ind AS 37 provides that where the effect of the time value of
money is material, the amount of a provision shall be the present value of the expenditures
expected to be required to settle the obligation. Thus, costs incurred by an entity in respect of
obligations for dismantling, removing and restoring the site on which an item of property, plant
and equipment is situated are recognized and measured in accordance with Ind AS 16 and Ind
AS 37, with the journal entry being as under:
Property, Plant and Equipment Dr. xxx
To Provision for Dismantling, Removal and Restoration xxx
Neelanchal Gas Refinery Ltd. should recognize 60% of the cost of decommissioning of the
underground storage facility. However, in line Para 29 of Ind AS 37 where an entity is jointly
and severally liable for an obligation, the part of the obligation that is expected to be met
by other parties is treated as a contingent liability. Accordingly, Neelanchal Gas Refinery
Ltd. should also disclose 40% of the cost of decommissioning of the underground facility as a
contingent liability, should there arise future events that prevent Seemanchal Refineries Ltd.
from fulfilling its obligations under the arrangement.
As per Ind AS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment are tangible items that:
a) are held for use in the production or supply of goods or services, for rental to others, or for
administrative purposes; and
b) are expected to be used during more than one period.
Thus, Neelanchal Gas Refinery Ltd. should classify and account for its share of irrecoverable
gas as property, plant and equipment, as the irrecoverable gas is necessary for the storage
facility to perform its function. Therefore, the irrecoverable gas, being a part of the storage
facility, should be capitalized as a component of the storage facility asset, and should
be depreciated to its residual value over the life of the storage facility. However, if the gas is
recoverable in full upon decommissioning of the storage facility, then depreciation against the
irrecoverable gas component will be recorded only if the estimated residual value of the gas
decreases below cost during the life of the facility. Upon decommissioning of the storage
facility, when the cushion gas is extracted and sold, the sale of irrecoverable gas is accounted
as a disposal of an item of property, plant and equipment in accordance with Ind AS 16 and the
resulting gain or loss is recognized in the Statement of Profit and Loss. The natural gas in excess
of the irrecoverable gas which is injected into the facility would be treated as inventory in
accordance with Ind AS 2 Inventories.
(b) Contract with Uttaranchal Refineries Pvt. Ltd.
As per para 2.4 of Ind AS 109 Financial Instruments, this standard applies to those contracts
to buy or sell a non-financial item that can be settled net in cash or another financial
instrument, or by exchanging financial instruments, as if the contracts were financial
instruments, with the exception of contracts that were entered into and continue to be held for
the purpose of the receipt or delivery of a non-financial item in accordance with the entity’s
expected purchase, sale or usage requirements (i.e. own use contracts). This contract will

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
result in physical delivery of the commodity i.e., extra gas.
Para 2.5 of Ind AS 109 further provides that a contract to buy or sell a non-financial item
that can be settled net in cash or another financial instrument, or by exchanging financial
instruments, as if the contract was a financial instrument, may be irrevocably designated as
measured at fair value through profit or loss even if it was entered into for the purpose of the
receipt or delivery of a non-financial item in accordance with the entity’s expected purchase,
sale or usage requirements. This designation is available only at inception of the contract and
only if it eliminates or significantly reduces a recognition inconsistency (sometimes referred to
as an ‘accounting mismatch’) that would otherwise arise from not recognising that contract
because it is excluded from the scope of this Standard.
There are various ways in which a contract to buy or sell a non-financial item can be settled net
in cash or another financial instrument or by exchanging financial instruments. These include:
a) when the terms of the contract permit either party to settle it net in cash or another financial
instrument or by exchanging financial instruments;
 when the ability to settle net in cash or another financial instrument, or by exchanging
financial instruments, is not explicit in the terms of the contract, but the entity has a practice of
settling similar contracts net in cash or another financial instrument or by exchanging financial
instruments (whether with the counterparty, by entering into offsetting contracts or by selling the
contract before its exercise or lapse);
 when, for similar contracts, the entity has a practice of taking delivery of the underlying and
selling it within a short period after delivery for the purpose of generating a profit from short-
term fluctuations in price or dealer’s margin; and
 when the non-financial item that is the subject of the contract is readily convertible to cash.
A written option to buy or sell a non-financial item, such as a commodity, that can be
settled net in cash or another financial instrument, or by exchanging financial instruments, is
within the scope of Ind AS 109. Such a contract is accounted as a derivative. Such a contract
cannot be entered into for the purpose of the receipt or delivery of the non-financial item in
accordance with the entity’s expected purchase, sale or usage requirements. Judgment
would be required in this area as net settlements caused by unique events beyond management’s
control may not necessarily prevent the entity from applying the ‘own use’ exemption to all similar
contracts.
In the given case, the contract with Uttaranchal Refineries Pvt. Ltd. will result in physical
delivery of extra gas (which is a commodity and not cash, or a financial instrument) for theuse
of Neelanchal Gas Refinery Ltd. Accordingly, it appears that this contract would be an own use
contract falling outside the scope of Ind AS 109 and therefore, would be treated as an
executory contract. However, arguments could be placed that the contract is net settled due to
the penalty mechanism requiring Uttaranchal Refineries Pvt. Ltd. to compensate Neelanchal
Gas Refinery Ltd. at the current prevailing market price. Further, if natural gas is readily
convertible into cash at the location of delivery, the contract could be considered net settled.
Additionally, if there is volume flexibility, the contract could be regarded as a written option
which falls within the scope of Ind AS 109.
However, the contract will probably continue to be regarded as ‘own use’ as long as it has been
entered into and continues to be held for expected counterparties’ sale / usage requirements.
Additionally, the entity has not irrevocably designated the contract as measured at fair value
through profit or loss, thus emphasizing the ‘own use’ designation.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
Venus Ltd. is a multinational entity that owns three properties. All three properties were
purchased on 1st April, 20X1. The details of purchase price and market values of the
properties are given as follows:
Factory Factory Let-Out
Purchase price 15,000 10,000 12,000
Market value 31.03.20X2 16,000 11,000 13,500
Life 10 Years 10 Years 10 Years
Subsequent Measurement Cost Model Revaluation Model Revaluation Model
Property 1 and 2 are used by Venus Ltd. as factory building whilst property 3 is let-out to a
non- related party at a market rent. The management presents all three properties in balance
sheet as ‘property, plant and equipment’.
The Company does not depreciate any of the properties on the basis that the fair values are
exceeding their carrying amount and recognise the difference between purchase price and fair
value in Statement of Profit and Loss.
Required:
Analyse whether the accounting policies adopted by the Venus Ltd. in relation to these
propertiesis in accordance with Ind AS. If not, advise the correct treatment along with working
for the same.
Solution:
The above issue needs to be examined in the umbrella of the provisions given in Ind AS 1
‘Presentation of Financial Statements’, Ind AS 16 ‘Property, Plant and Equipment’ in relation to
property ‘1’ and ‘2’ and Ind AS 40 ‘Investment Property’ in relation to property ‘3’.
Property ‘1’ and ‘2’
Para 6 of Ind AS 16 ‘Property, Plant and Equipment’ defines:
“Property, plant and equipment are tangible items that:
(a) are held for use in the production or supply of goods or services, for rental to others, or for
administrative purposes; and
(b) are expected to be used during more than one period.”
“An entity shall choose either the cost model or the revaluation model as its accounting
policy and shall apply that policy to an entire class of property, plant and equipment”.
“If an item of property, plant and equipment is revalued, the entire class of property,
plant and equipment to which that asset belongs shall be revalued”.
“If an asset’s carrying amount is increased as a result of a revaluation, the increase shall be
recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in equity under the heading of
revaluation surplus. However, the increase shall be recognised in profit or loss to the extent that it
reverses a revaluation decrease of the same asset previously recognised in profit or loss”.
“Depreciation is recognised even if the fair value of the asset exceeds its carrying amount,
as long as the asset’s residual value does not exceed its carrying amount”.
Property ‘3’
Para 6 of Ind AS 40 ‘Investment property’ defines:
“Investment property is property (land or a building—or part of a building—or both) held
(by the owner or by the lessee under a finance lease) to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
both, rather than for:
a) use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes; or
b) sale in the ordinary course of business”.
“An entity shall adopt as its accounting policy the cost model to all of its investment property”.
Further, paragraph 79 (e) of Ind AS 40 requires that:
“An entity shall disclose the fair value of investment property”.
Further, paragraph 54 (2) of Ind AS 1
‘Presentation of Financial Statements’ requires that:
“As a minimum, the balance sheet shall include line items that present the following amounts:
a) property, plant and equipment;
b) investment property;
As per the facts given in the question, Venus Ltd. has
a) presented all three properties in balance sheet as ‘property, plant and equipment’;
b) applied different accounting policies to Property ‘1’ and ‘2’;
c) revaluation is charged in statement of profit and loss as profit; and
d) applied revaluation model to Property ‘3’ being classified as Investment Property.
This accounting treatment is neither correct nor in accordance with provision of Ind AS 1, Ind
AS 16 and Ind AS 40.
Accordingly, Venus Ltd. shall apply the same accounting policy (i.e., either revaluation or cost
model) to entire class of property being property ‘1’ and ‘2”. It also required to depreciate these
properties irrespective of that, their fair value exceeds the carrying amount. The revaluation
gain shall be recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in equity under the
heading of revaluation surplus.
There is no alternative of revaluation model in respect to property ‘3’ being classified as
Investment Property and only cost model is permitted for subsequent measurement. However,
Venus ltd. is required to disclose the fair value of the property in the Notes to Accounts. Also,
the property ‘3’ shall be presented as separate line item as Investment Property.
Therefore, as per the provisions of Ind AS 1, Ind AS 16 and Ind AS 40, the presentation of these
three properties in the balance sheet is as follows:
Case 1: Venus Ltd. has applied the Cost Model to an entire class of property, plant and
equipment.
Balance Sheet extracts as at 31st March, 20X2
Non-Current Assets
Property ‘1’ 13,500
Property ‘2’ 9,000 22,500
Case 2: Venus Ltd. has applied the Revaluation Model to an entire class of property, plant and
equipment.
Balance Sheet extracts as at 31st March, 20X2 ₹
Assets
Non-Current Assets
27,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
10,800
Investment PropertiesProperty ‘3’
Other Equity
Revaluation Reserve
4,500
The revaluation reserve should be routed through Other Comprehensive Income (subsequently
not reclassified to Profit and Loss) in Statement of Profit and Loss and Shown as a separate
column in Statement of Changes in Equity.
Question 02:
On 1st January, 20X2, Sun Ltd. was notified that a customer was taking legal action against
the company in respect of a financial losses incurred by the customer. Customer alleged that
thefinancial losses were caused due to supply of faulty products on 30th September, 20X1 by
the Company. Sun Ltd. defended the case but considered, based on the progress of the case
up to 31st March, 20X2, that there was a 75% probability they would have to pay damages
of ₹ 10 lakhs to the customer.
However, the accountant of Sun Ltd. has not recorded this transaction in its financial
statement as the case is not yet finally settled. The case was ultimately settled against the
company resultingin to payment of damages of ₹ 12 lakhs to the customer on 15th May, 20X2. The
financials have been authorized by the Board of Directors in its meeting held on 18th May, 20X2.
Analyse whether the above accounting treatment made by the accountant is in compliance of
Solution:
‘Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets’ and Ind AS 10 ‘Events After the
Reporting Period’.
Para 10 of Ind AS 37 ‘Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets’ defines:
“Provision is a liability of uncertain timing or amount.
Liability is a present obligation of the entity arising from past events, the settlement of which is
expected to result in an outflow from the entity of resources embodying economic benefits”.
Further, paragraph 14 of Ind AS 37, states:
“A provision shall be recognised when:
 it is probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle
the obligation; and
 a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation”.
Further, paragraph 36 of Ind AS 37, states:
“The amount recognised as a provision shall be the best estimate of the expenditure required to
settle the present obligation at the end of the reporting period”.
Further, paragraph 3 of Ind AS 10 ‘Events after the Reporting Period’ defines:
“Events after the reporting period are those events, favourable and unfavourable, that occur between
the end of the reporting period and the date when the financial statements are approved by the
Board of Directors in case of a company, and, by the corresponding approving authority in case of
any other entity for issue. Two types of events can be identified:
a) those that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the reporting period

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
b) those that are indicative of conditions that arose after the reporting period (non- adjusting
events after the reporting period).
“An entity shall adjust the amounts recognised in its financial statements to reflect adjusting
events after the reporting period.”
The Accountant of Sun Ltd. has not recognised the provision and accordingly not adjusted the
amounts recognised in its financial statements to reflect adjusting events after the reporting
period is not correct and nor in accordance with provision of Ind AS 37 and IndAS 10.
As per given facts, the potential payment of damages to the customer is an obligation arising
out of a past event which can be reliably estimated. Therefore, following the provision of Ind
AS 37 ‘Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets’ – a provision is required. The
provision should be for the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the obligation at
31st March, 20X2 which comes to ₹7.5 lakhs (₹10 lakhs x 75%).
Further, following the principles of Ind AS 10 ‘Events After the Reporting Period’ evidence of
the settlement amount is an adjusting event. Therefore, the amount of provision created shall
beincreased to ₹12 lakhs and accordingly be recognised as a current liability.
Question 03:
Mercury Ltd. is an entity engaged in plantation and farming on a large scale diversified across
India. On 1st April, 20X1, the company has received a government grant for ₹ 10 lakhs subject
to a condition that it will continue to engage in plantation of eucalyptus tree for a coming
period offive years. Eucalyptus trees are not considered as bearer plant in this case.
The management has a reasonable assurance that the entity will comply with condition of
engagingin the plantation of eucalyptus tree for specified period of five years and accordingly
it recognises proportionate grant for ₹ 2 lakhs in Statement of Profit and Loss as income
following the principles laid down under Ind AS 20 Accounting for Government Grants and
Disclosure of Government Assistance.
Analyse whether the above accounting treatment made by the management is in compliance
of the Ind AS. If not, advise the correct treatment along with working for the same.
Solution:
As per given facts, the company is engaged in plantation and farming. Hence Ind AS 41
Agriculture shall be applicable to this company.
The above facts need to be examined in the light of the provisions given in Ind AS 20
‘Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance’ and Ind AS 41
‘Agriculture’.
Para 2(d) of Ind AS 20 ‘Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government
Assistance’
states:
“This Standard does not deal with government grants covered by Ind AS 41, Agriculture”.
Further, paragraph 1 (c) of Ind AS 41 ‘Agriculture’, states:
“This Standard shall be applied to account for the government grants covered by paragraphs 34 and 35
whenthey relate to agricultural activity”.
Further, paragraph 1 (c) of Ind AS 41 ‘Agriculture’, states:
“If a government grant related to a biological asset measured at its fair value less costs to sell is
conditional, including when a government grant requires an entity not to engage in specified
agricultural activity, an entity shall recognise the government grant in profit or loss when, and only
when, the conditions attaching to the government grant are met”.
Understanding of the given facts, The Company has recognised the proportionate grant for ₹2

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
lakhs in Statement of Profit and Loss before the conditions attaching to government grant are
metwhich is not correct and nor in accordance with provision of Ind AS 41 ‘Agriculture’.
Accordingly, the accounting treatment of government grant received by the Mercury Ltd. is
governed by the provision of Ind AS 41 ‘Agriculture’ rather Ind AS 20 ‘Accounting for
Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance’.
Government grant for ₹ 10 lakhs shall be recognised in profit or loss when, and only when, the
conditions attaching to the government grant are met i.e., after the expiry of specified period of
five years of continuing engagement in the plantation of eucalyptus tree.
Balance Sheet extracts showing the presentation of Government Grant as on 31st March,
20X2
Liabilities
Non-Current liabilities
Other Non-Current LiabilitiesGovernment Grants 10,00,000
Question04: (MTP MAR 2021)
Mercury Ltd. has sold goods to Mars Ltd. at a consideration of ₹ 10 lakhs, the receipt of which
receivable in three equal installments of ₹ 3,33,333 over a two-year period (receipts on 1st April,
20X1, 31st March, 20X2 and 31st March, 20X3).
The company is offering a discount of 5 % (i.e., ₹ 50,000) if payment is made in full at the timeof
sale. The sale agreement reflects an implicit interest rate of 5.36% p.a.
The total consideration to be received from such sale is at ₹ 10 Lakhs and hence, the
management has recognised the revenue from sale of goods for ₹ 10 lakhs. Further, the
management is of the view that there is no difference in this aspect between Indian GAAP and
Ind AS.
Analyse whether the above accounting treatment made by the accountant is in compliance of
Solution:
The revenue from sale of goods shall be recognised at the fair value of the consideration
received or receivable. The fair value of the consideration is determined by discounting
allfuture receipts using an imputed rate of interest where the receipt is deferred beyond normal
credit terms. The difference between the fair value and the nominal amount of the
consideration is recognised as interest revenue.
The fair value of consideration (cash price equivalent) of the sale of goods is calculated as
follows: ₹
Year Consideration Present value Present value of
(Installment) factor consideration
Time of sale 3,33,333 - 3,33,333
End of 1st year 3,33,333 0.949 3,16,333
nd
End of 2 year 3,33,334 0.901 3,00,334
10,00,000 9,50,000
The Company that agrees for deferring the cash inflow from sale of goods will recognise
therevenue from sale of goods and finance income as follows:
Initial recognition of sale of goods ₹ ₹
Cash Dr. 3,33,333
Trade Receivable Dr. 6,16,667
To Sale 9,50,000
Recognition of interest expense and receipt of
second
installment

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Cash Dr. 3,33,333
To Interest Income 33,053
Recognition of interest expense and payment of final
installment
Cash Dr. 3,33,334
To Interest Income (Balancing figure) 16,947
Statement of Profit and Loss (extracts)
for the year ended 31st March, 20X2 and 31st March, 20X3
₹ As at 31st March, 20X2 As at 31st March, 20X3
Income
Sale of Goods 9,50,000 -
Other Income (Finance income) 33,053 16,947
Balance Sheet (extracts) as at 31st March, 20X2 and 31st March, 20X3
₹ As at 31st March, 20X2 As at 31st March, 20X3
Assets
Current Assets
Financial Assets
Trade Receivables 3,16,387 XXX
RTP/ MTP/PAST QUESTIONS

MTP: M A Y , 2020
Question 01:
Flying Airways Ltd is a company which manufactures aircraft parts and engines and sells them to large
multinational companies like Boeing and Airbus Industries.
On 1 April 20X1, the company began the construction of a new production line in its aircraft parts manufacturing
shed.
Costs relating to the production line are as follows:
Details AmountRs.’000
Costs of the basic materials (list price Rs.12.5 million less a 20% trade discount) 10,000
Recoverable goods and services taxes incurred not included in the purchase cost 1,000
Employment costs of the construction staff for the three months to 30 June 20X1 1,200
Other overheads directly related to the construction 900
Payments to external advisors relating to the construction 500
Expected dismantling and restoration costs 2,000
Additional Information
The construction staff was engaged in the production line, which took two months to make ready for use and
was brought into use on 31 May 20X1.
The other overheads were incurred in the two months period ended on 31 May 20X1. They included an
abnormal cost of Rs.3,00,000 caused by a major electrical fault.
The production line is expected to have a useful economic life of eight years. At the end of that time
Flying Airways Ltd is legally required to dismantle the plant in a specified manner and restore its location
to an acceptable standard. The amount of Rs.2 million mentioned above is the amount that is expected to be
incurred at the end of the useful life of the production line. The appropriate rate to use in any discounting
calculations is 5%. The present value of Re.1 payable in eight years at a discount rate of 5% is approximately
Re.0·68.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Four years after being brought into use, the production line will require a major overhaul to ensure that it
generates economic benefits for the second half of its useful life. The estimated cost of the overhaul, at
currentprices, is Rs.3 million.
The Company computes its depreciation charge on a monthly basis. No impairment of the plant had occurred
by31 March 20X2.
Analyze the accounting implications of costs related to production line to be recognized in the balance sheet
and profit and loss for the year ended 31 March, 20X2
Solution:
Statement showing cost of production line:
Particulars Amount
Rs.’000
Purchase cost 10,000
Goods and services tax – recoverable goods and services tax not included -
Employment costs during the period of getting the production line ready for use(1,200 800
x 2months / 3 months)
Other overheads – abnormal costs 600
Payment to external advisors – directly attributable cost 500
Dismantling costs – recognized at present value where an obligation exists(2,000 x 0.68) 1,360
Total 13,260
Carrying value of production line as on 31st March, 20X2:
Particulars Amount
Rs. ’000
Cost of Production line Less: Depreciation (W.N.1) 13,260
(1,694)
Net carrying value carried to Balance Sheet 11,566
Provision for dismantling cost:
Particulars Amount
Rs. ’000
Non-current liabilities 1,360
Add: Finance cost (WN3) 57
Net book value carried to Balance Sheet 1,417
Extract of Statement of Profit & Loss
Particulars Amount
Rs. ’000
Depreciation (W.N.1) 1,694
Finance cost (W.N.2) 57
Amounts carried to Statement of Profit & Loss 1,751
Extract of Balance Sheet
Assets
Non-current assets
Other liabilities
Provision for dismantling cost 1417

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Working Notes:
1. Calculation of depreciation charge
Particulars AmountRs.’000
In accordance with Ind AS 16 the asset is split into two depreciable components:
Out of the total capitalization amount of 13,260,
Depreciation for 3,000 with a useful economic life (UEL) of four years (3,000x ¼ x10/12). This i 625
related to a major overhaul to ensure that it generates economic benefits for the second half o
its useful life
For balance amount, depreciation for 10,260 with an useful economic life (UEL) of eightyears 1,069
will be : 10,260 x 1/8 x 10/12
Total (To Statement of Profit & Loss for the year ended 31st March 20X2) 1,694
2. Finance costs
Particulars Amount Rs. ’000
Unwinding of discount (Statement of Profit and Loss – finance cost) 57
1,360 x 5% x 10/12
To Statement of Profit & Loss for the year ended 31st March 20X2 57
MTP: MARCH, 2019
Question 02:
A company has a scheme for payment of settlement allowance to retiring employees. Under the
scheme, retiring employees are entitled to reimbursement of certain travel expenses for class
they are entitled to as per company rule and to a lump-sum payment to cover expenses on
food andstay during the travel. Alternatively, employees can claim a lump sum amount equal
to one month pay last drawn.
The company’s contentions in this matter are:
(i) Settlement allowance does not depend upon the length of service of employee. It is
restricted to employee’s eligibility under the Travel rule of the company or where option for
lump-sum payment is exercised, equal to the last pay drawn.
(ii) Since it is not related to the length of service of the employees, it is accounted for on
claimbasis.
State whether the contentions of the company are correct as per relevant Accounting Standard.
Give reasons in support of your answer. (5 Marks)
Solution:
The present case falls under the category of defined benefit scheme under Para 49 of AS 15 (Revised)
“Employee Benefits”. The said para encompasses cases where payment promised to be made to an employee at or near
retirement presents significant difficulties in the determination of periodic charge to the statement of profit and
loss. The contention of the Company that the settlement allowance will be accounted for on claim basis is
not correct even if company’s obligation under the scheme is uncertain and requires estimation. In estimating
the obligation, assumptions may need to be made regarding future conditions and events, which are
largely outside the company’s control. Thus,
(1) Settlement allowance payable by the company is a defined retirement benefit, covered by AS 15
(Revised).
(2) A provision should be made every year in the accounts for the accruing liability on account of settlement allowance. The
amount of provision should be calculated according to actuarial valuation.
(3) Where, however, the amount of provision so determined is not material, the company can follow some
other method of accounting for settlement allowances.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
MTP MARCH 2018
Question 3
A Ltd. owns three properties which are shown in its financial statements as ‘Property, Plant and
Equipment’. All three properties were purchased on April 1, 20X1. The details of purchase
priceand market values of the properties are given as follows: ₹ in lakhs
Factory Building Factory Building Let-out Building
Purchase price 500 200 300
Market value as on550 220 330
31.03.20X2
Useful Life 10 Years 10 Years 10Years
Subsequent Measurement Cost Model Revaluation Model Revaluation Model
Property 1 and 2 are used by A Ltd. as factory building whilst property 3 is let-out to a
non- related party at a market rent.
A Ltd. does not depreciate any of the properties on the basis that the fair values are exceeding
their carrying amount and recognise the difference between purchase price and fair value in
Statement of Profit and Loss.
(i) Evaluate whether the accounting policies adopted by A Ltd. in relation to these properties,
on various accounting aspects, are in accordance with Ind AS or not. If not, advise the correct
treatment along with the workings for the same in all the cases.
Solution
(i) For classification of assets
Para 6 of Ind AS 16 ‘Property, Plant and Equipment’ inter alia, states that Property, plant and
equipment are tangible items are held for use in the production or supply of goods or services,
for rental to others, or for administrative purposes.
As per para 6 of Ind AS 40 ‘Investment property’, Investment property is property held to earn
rentals or for capital appreciation or both, rather than for use in the production or supply of
goods or services or for administrative purposes; or sale in the ordinary course of business.
According, to the facts given in the questions, since Property 1 and 2 are used as factory
buildings, their classification as PPE is correct. However, Property 3 is held to earn rentals;
hence, it should be classified as Investment Property. Thus, its classification as PPE is not
correct. Property ‘3’ shall be presented as separate line item as Investment Property as per
Ind AS 1.
(ii) For valuation of assets
Paragraph 29 of Ind AS 16 states that an entity shall choose either the cost model or the
revaluation model as its accounting policy and shall apply that policy to an entire class of
property, plant and equipment. Also, paragraph 36 of Ind AS 16 states that If an item of
property, plant and equipmentis revalued, the entire class of property, plant and equipment to
which that asset belongs shall be revalued.
However, for investment property, paragraph 30 of Ind AS 40 states that an entity shall adopt
asits accounting policy the cost model to all of its investment property”.
Also, paragraph 79 (e) of Ind AS 40 inter alia requires that an entity shall disclose the fair value
of investment property.
Since property 1 and 2 is used as factory building, they should be classified under same
category or class i.e., ‘factory building’. Therefore, both the properties should be valued either
at cost model or revaluation model. Hence, the valuation model adopted by A Ltd.is not
consistent and correct as per Ind AS 16.
In respect to property ‘3’ being classified as Investment Property, there is no alternative of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
revaluationmodel i.e., only cost model is permitted for subsequent measurement. However, A
Ltd. is required to disclose the fair value of the investment property in the Notes to
Accounts.
(iii) For changes in value on account of revaluation and treatment there of
Paragraph 39 of Ind AS 16 states that if an asset’s carrying amount is increased as a result of
a revaluation, the increase shall be recognised in other comprehensive income and
accumulated in equity under the heading ‘revaluation surplus. However, the increase shall be
recognised in profit or loss to the extent that it reverses a revaluation decrease of the same
asset previously recognised in profit or loss. Accordingly, the revaluation gain shall be
recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in equity under the heading of
revaluation surplus.
(iv) For treatment of depreciation
Paragraph 52 of Ind AS 16 states that Depreciation is recognised even if the fair value of the
asset exceeds its carrying amount, as long as the asset’s residual value does not exceed its
carrying amount.
Accordingly, A Ltd. is required to depreciate these properties irrespective of that their fair value
exceeds the carrying amount.
(v) Rectified presentation in the balance sheet
As per the provisions of Ind AS 1, Ind AS 16 and Ind AS 40, the presentation of these three
properties in the balance sheet should be as follows:
Case 1: If A Ltd. has applied the Cost Model to an entire class of property, plant and
equipment.
Balance Sheet extracts as at 31st March 20X2 INR in lakhs
Assets
Non-Current Assets
Property ‘1’ 450
Property ‘2’ 180 630
Investment Property
Case 2: If A Ltd. has applied the Revaluation Model to an entire class of property, plant and
equipment.
Balance Sheet extracts as at 31st March 20X2 INR in lakhs
Assets
Non-Current Assets
Property, Plant and Equipment Property ‘1’ 550
Equity and LiabilitiesOther Equity Revaluation Reserve*
Property ‘1’ (550-450) 100
Property ‘2’ (220-180) 40 140
*The revaluation reserve should be routed through Other Comprehensive Income (OCI)
(subsequently not reclassified to Profit and Loss) in the Statement of Profit and Loss and
shown as a separate column in Statement of Changes in Equity.
RTP: NOVEMBER,2018
Question 4:
Mr. X, is the financial controller of ABC Ltd., a listed entity which prepares consolidated

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
financial statements in accordance with Ind AS. Mr. X has recently produced the final draft of
the financial statements of ABC Ltd. for the year ended 31st March, 2018 to the managing
director for approval. Mr. Y, who is not an accountant, had raised following queries from Mr. X
after going through the draft financial statements:
a) One of the notes to the financial statements gives details of purchases made by ABC Ltd.
from PQR Ltd. during the period. Mr. Y own 100% of the shares in PQR Ltd.. However, he
feels that there is no requirement for any disclosure to be made in ABC Ltd.’s financial
statements since the transaction is carried out on normal commercial terms and is totally
insignificant to ABC Ltd., as it represents less than 1% of ABC Ltd.’s purchases.
b) The notes to the financial statements say that plant and equipment is held under the ‘cost
model’. However, property which is owner occupied is revalued annually to fair value. Changes
in fair value are sometimes reported in profit or loss but usually in ‘other comprehensive
income’. Also, the amount of depreciation charged on plant and equipment as a percentage of
its carrying amount is much higher than for owner occupied property. Another note states that
property owned by ABC Ltd. but rent out to others is depreciated annually and not fair valued.
Mr. Y is of the opinion that there is no consistent treatment of PPE items in the accounts.
Elucidate how all these treatments comply with the relevant Ind AS.
c) In the year to March, 2018, ABC Ltd. spent considerable amount on designing a new
product. ABC Ltd. spent the six months from April, 2017 to September, 2017 researching into
the feasibility of the product. Mr. X charged these research costs to profit or loss. From
October, 2017, A Ltd. was confident that the product would be commercially successful and A
Ltd. is fully committed to finance its future development. A Ltd. spent remaining part of the year
in developing the product, which is expected to start from selling in the next few months. These
development costs have been recognised as intangible assets in the Balance Sheet. State
whether the treatment done by Mr. X is correct when all these research and development costs
are design costs. Justify your answer with reference to relevant Ind AS.
Provide answers to the queries raised by the managing director Mr. Y as per Ind AS.
Solution:
Ongoing through the queries raised by the Managing Director Mr. Y, the financial controller Mr. X explained the notes
and reasons for their disclosures as follows:
(a) Related parties are generally characterised by the presence of control or influence between the two
parties.
Ind AS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’ identifies related parties as, inter alia, key management personnel
and companies controlled by key management personnel. On this basis, PQR Ltd. is a related party of ABC
Ltd.
The transaction is required to be disclosed in the financial statements of ABC Ltd. since Mr. Y is Key
Management personnel of ABC Ltd. Also at the same time, it owns 100% shares of PQR Ltd. ie. he controls
PQR Ltd. This implies that PQR Ltd. is a related party of ABC Ltd.
Where transactions occur with related parties, Ind AS 24 requires that details of the transactions are disclosed in a
note to the financial statements. This is required even if the transactions are carried out on an arm’s length basis.
Transactions with related parties are material by their nature, so the fact that the transaction may be
numerically insignificant to ABC Ltd. does not affect the need for disclosure.
(b) The accounting treatment of the majority of tangible non-current assets is governed by Ind AS 16 ‘Property,
Plant and Equipment’. Ind AS 16 states that the accounting treatment of PPE is determined on a class-by-
class basis. For this purpose, property and plant would be regarded as separate classes. Ind AS 16 requires
that PPE is measured using either the cost model or the revaluation model. This model is applied on a class-by-
class basis and must be applied consistently within a class. Ind AS 16 states that when the revaluation model
applies, surpluses are recorded in other comprehensive income, unless they are cancelling out a deficit which
has previously been reported in profit or loss, in which case it is reported in profit or loss. Where the revaluation

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
results in a deficit, then such deficits are reported in profit or loss, unless they are cancelling out a surplus which
has previously been reported in other comprehensive income, in which case they are reported in other
According to Ind AS 16, all assets having a finite useful life should be depreciated over that life. Where
property is concerned, the only depreciable element of the property is the buildings element, since land
normally has an indefinite life. The estimated useful life of a building tends to be much longer than for
plant. These two reasons together explain why the depreciation charge of a property as a percentage of its
carrying amount tends to be much lower than for plant.
Properties which are held for investment purposes are not accounted for under Ind AS 16, but under Ind AS 40
‘Investment Property’. As per Ind AS 40, investment properties should be accounted for under a cost model.
ABC Ltd. had applied the cost model and thus our investment properties are treated differently from the wner-
occupied property which is annually to fair value.
(c ) As per Ind AS 38 ‘Intangible Assets’, the treatment of expenditure on intangible items depends on how it
arose. Internal expenditure on intangible items incurred during research phase cannot be recognised as an
asset. Once it can be demonstrated that a development project is likely to be technically feasible, commercially viable,
overall profitable and can be adequately resourced, then future expenditure on the project can be recognised as
an intangible asset. The difference in the treatment of expenditure up to 30th September, 2017 and
expenditure after that date is due to the recognition phase ie. research or development phase.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 1 - PRESENTATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Illustration 1
An entity prepares its financial statements that contain an explicit and unreserved statement of
compliance with Ind AS. However, the auditor’s report on those financial statements contains a
qualification because of disagreement on application of one Accounting Standard. In such case,
is it acceptable for the entity to make an explicit and unreserved statement of compliance with
Ind AS?
Solution.
Yes, it is possible for an entity to make an unreserved and explicit statement of compliance
with Ind AS, even though the auditor’s report contains a qualification because of disagreement
on application of Accounting Standard(s), as the preparation of financial statements is the
responsibility of the entity’s management and not the auditors. In case the management has a
bona fide reason to believe that it has complied with all Ind AS, it can make an explicit and
unreserved statement of compliance with Ind AS.
Illustration 2
Entity XYZ is a large manufacturer of plastic products for the local market. On 1st April,20X6 the
newly elected government unexpectedly abolished all import tariffs, including the 40 percent tariff
on all imported plastic products. Many other economic reforms implemented by the new
government contributed to the value of the country’s currency ₹ appreciating significantly
against most other currencies. The currency appreciation severely reduced the competitiveness of
the entity’s products.
Before 20X6 entity XYZ was profitable. However, because it was unable to compete with low
priced imports, entity XYZ went into losses. As at 31st March, 20X7, entity XYZ’s equity was ₹
1,000. During the second quarter of financial year ended 31 March 20X7, the management
restructured entity’s operations. That restructuring helped reduce losses for the third and fourth
quarters to ₹ 400 and ₹ 380, respectively. During the year ended 31 March, 20X7, entity XYZ
reported a loss of ₹ 4,000. In January 20X7, the local plastic industry and labor union lobbied
government to reinstate tariffs on plastic. On 15th March, 20X7, the government announced
that it would reintroduce limited plastic import tariffs at 10 percent in 20X8. However, it
emphasised that those tariffs would not be as protective as the tariffs enacted by the previous
government. In its latest economic forecast, the government predicts a stable currency
exchange rate in the short term with a gradual weakening of the jurisdiction’s currency in the
longer term.
Management of the entity XYZ undertook a going concern assessment at 31st March, 20X7.
Management projects / forecasts that imposition of a 10 per cent tariff on the import of plastic
products would, at current exchange rates, result in entity XYZ returning to profitability. How
should the management of entity XYZ disclose the information about the going concern
assessment in entity XYZ’s 31st March, 20X7 annual financial statements?
Solution
Going concern is a general feature to be considered while preparing the financial statements.
As per Ind AS 1, when preparing financial statements, management shall make an assessment
of an entity ‘s ability to continue as a going concern. An entity shall prepare financial
statements on a going concern basis unless management either intends to liquidate the entity or
to cease trading or has no realistic alternative but to do so. When management is aware, in
making its assessment, of material uncertainties related to events or conditions that may cast
significant doubt upon the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern, the entity shall disclose
those uncertainties. An entity is required to disclose the facts, if the financial statements are
not prepared on a going concern basis. Along with the reason, as to why the financial

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
statements are not prepared on a going concern basis.
While assessing the going concern assumption, an entity is required to take into consideration
all factors covering at least but not limited to 12 months from the end of reporting period.
On the basis of Ind AS 1 and the facts and circumstances of this case, the following disclosure is
appropriate:
Extracts from the notes to entity XYZ’s 31st March, 20X7 financial statements
Note 1: Basis of preparation
On the basis of management’s assessment at 31 March 20X7, the financial statements have
been prepared on the going concern basis. However, management’s assessment assumes that the
government will reintroduce limited plastic import tariffs and that the currency exchange rate will
remain constant. On 15 March 20X7, the government announced that limited import tariffs will
be imposed in 20X8.
However, the government emphasised that the tariff would not be as protective as the 40 percent tariff in effect
before 20X7.
Provided that does not strengthen, management projects / forecasts that a 10 percent tariff on all plastic products
would result in entity XYZ returning to profitability. As at 31st March, 20X7 entity XYZ had net assets of ` 1,000.
If import tariffs are not imposed and currency exchange rates remain unchanged, entity XYZ’s liabilities could
exceed its assets by the end of financial year 20X7-20X8. On the basis of their assessment of these factors,
management believes that entity XYZ is a going concern.
Illustration 3
Is offsetting of revenue against expenses, permissible in case of a company acting as an
agent and having sub-agents, where commission is paid to sub-agents from the commission
received as an agent?
Solution
On the basis of the guidance regarding off setting, net presentation in the given case would not
be appropriate, as it would not reflect substance of the transaction and would detract from
the ability of users to understand the transaction.
Accordingly, the commission received by the company as an agent is the gross revenue of the
company. The amount of commission paid by it to the sub-agent should be considered as an
expense and should not be offset against commission earned by it.
Illustration 4
A retail chain acquired a competitor in March, 20X1 and accounted for the business
combination under Ind AS 103 on a provisional basis in its 31st March, 20X1 annual financial
statements. The business combination accounting was finalised in 20X1-20X2 and the
provisional fair values were updated. As a result, the 20X0-20X1 comparatives were adjusted
in the 20X1-20X2 annual financial statements. Does the restatement require an opening
statement of financial position (that is, an additional statement of financial position) as of 1st
April, 20X0?
Solution
An additional statement of financial position is not required, because the acquisition had no
impact on the entity’s financial position at 1st April, 20X0.
Illustration 5
X Ltd. provides you the following information:
Raw material stock holding period :3 months
Work-in-progress holding period :1 month
Finished goods holding period : 5 months
Debtors collection period : 5 months
You are requested to compute the operating cycle of X Ltd.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
The operating cycle of X Ltd. will be computed as under:
Raw material stock holding period + Work-in-progress holding period + Finished goods holding
period + Debtor’s collection period = 3 + 1 + 5 + 5 = 14 months.
Illustration 6
Inventory or trade receivables of X Ltd. are normally realised in 15 months. How should X Ltd.
classify such inventory / trade receivables: current or non-current if these are expected to be
realised within 15 months?
Solution
These should be classified as current.
Illustration 7
B Ltd. produces aircrafts. The length of time between first purchasing raw materials to make
theaircrafts and the date the company completes the production and delivery is 9 months. The
company receives payment for the aircrafts 7 months after the delivery.
(a) What is the length of operating cycle?
(b) How should it treat its inventory and debtors?
Solution
1. The length of the operating cycle will be 16 months.
2. Assuming the inventory and debtors will be realised within normal operating cycle, i.e., 16
months, both the inventory as well as debtors should be classified as current.
Illustration 8
On 1st April, 20X3, Charming Ltd issued 100,000 ₹ 10 bonds for ₹ 1,000,000. On 1st April,
each year interest at the fixed rate of 8 percent per year is payable on outstanding capital
amount of the bonds (i.e., the first payment will be made on 1st April, 20X4). On 1st April
each year (i.e., from 1st April, 20X4), Charming Ltd has a contractual obligation to redeem
10,000 of the bonds at ₹ 10per bond. In its statement of financial position at 31st March, 20X4.
How should this be presented in the financial statements?
Solution
Charming Ltd must present ₹ 80,000 accrued interest and ₹ 1,00,000 current portion of the
non- current bond (i.e., the portion repayable on 1st April,20X4) as current liabilities. The ₹
9,00,000 due later than 12 months after the end of the reporting period is presented as a
non -current liability.
Illustration 9
X Ltd provides you the following information:
Raw material stock holding period : 3 months
Work-in-progress holding period : 1 month
Finished goods holding period :5 months
Debtors collection period :5 months
The trade payables of the Company are paid in 12.5 months. Should these be classified as
current ornon-current?
Solution
In this case, the operating cycle of X Ltd. is 14 months. Since the trade payables are expected to
be settled within the operating cycle i.e.,12.5 months, they should be classified as a current.
Illustration 10
Entity A has two different businesses, real estate and manufacturing of passenger vehicles.
With respect to the real estate business, the entity constructs residential apartments for
customers and the normal operating cycle is three to four years. With respect to the business
of manufacture of passenger vehicles, normal operating cycle is 15 months. Under such

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
circumstance where an entity has different operating cycles for different types of businesses,
how classification into current and non-current be made?
Solution
As per paragraph 66(a) of Ind AS 1, an asset should be classified as current if an entity
expects to realise the same, or intends to sell or consume it in its normal operating cycle.
Similarly, as per paragraph 69(a) of Ind AS 1, a liability should be classified as current if an
entity expects to settle the liability in its normal operating cycle. In this situation, where
businesses have different operating cycles, classification of asset/liability as current/non-
current would be in relation to the normal operating cycle that is relevant to that particular
asset / liability. It is advisable to disclose the normal operating cycles relevant to different
types of businesses for better understanding.
Illustration 11
An entity has placed certain deposits with various parties. How the following deposits should be
classified, i.e., current or non-current?
a) Electricity Deposit
b) Tender Deposit/Earnest Money Deposit [EMD]
c) GST Deposit paid under dispute or GST payment under dispute.
Solution
a. Electricity Deposit - At all points of time, the deposit is recoverable on demand, when the
connection is not required. However, practically, such electric connection is required as long
as the entity exists. Hence, from a commercial reality perspective, an entity does not expect
to realise the asset within twelve months from the end of the reporting period. Hence,
electricity deposit should be classified as a non-current asset.
b. Tender Deposit/Earnest Money Deposit [EMD] -Generally, tender deposit / EMD are paid for
participation in various bids. They normally become recoverable if the entity does not win
the bid. Bid dates are known at the time of tendering the deposit. But until the date of the
actual bid, one is not in a position to know if the entity is winning the bid or otherwise.
Accordingly, depending on the terms of the deposit if entity expects to realise the deposit within
a period of twelve months, it should be classified as current otherwise non-current.
c. GST Deposit paid under dispute or GST payment under dispute -Classification of GST
deposits paid to the Government authorities in the event of any legal dispute, which is under
protest would depend on the facts of the case and the expectation of the entity to realise the
same within a period of twelve months. In the case the entity expects these to be realised
within 12 months, it should classify such amounts paid as current else these should be
classified as non-current.
Illustration 12
Paragraph 69(a) of Ind AS 1 states “An entity shall classify a liability as current when it expects
to settle the liability in its normal operating cycle”. An entity develops tools for customers and
this normally takes a period of around 2 years for completion. The material is supplied by the
customer and hence the entity only renders a service. For this, the entity receives payment
upfront and credits the amount so received to “Income Received in Advance.” How should this
“Income Received in Advance” be classified, i.e., current or non- current?
Solution
Ind AS1 provides “Some current liabilities, such as trade payables and some accruals for
employee and other operating costs, are part of the working capital used in the entity’s normal
operating cycle. An entity classifies such operating items as current liabilities even if they are
due tobe settled more than twelve months after the reporting period.”
In accordance with the above, income received in advance would be classified as current
liability since it is a part of the working capital, which the entity expects to earn within its normal

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
operating cycle.
Illustration 13
An entity has taken a loan facility from a bank that is to be repaid within a period of 9 months
from the end of the reporting period. Prior to the end of the reporting period, the entity and the
bank enter into an arrangement, whereby the existing outstanding loan will, unconditionally,
roll into thenew facility which expires after a period of 5 years.
a. How should such loan be classified in the balance sheet of the entity?
b. Will the answer be different if the new facility is agreed upon after the end of the reporting
period?
c. Will the answer to (a) be different if the existing facility is from one bank and the new facility
is from another bank?
d. Will the answer to (a) be different if the new facility is not yet tied up with the existing bank,
but the entity has the potential to refinance the obligation?
Solution
a. The loan is not due for payment at the end of the reporting period. The entity and the bank
have agreed for the said roll over prior to the end of the reporting period for a period of
5years. Since the entity has an unconditional right to defer the settlement of the liability for
at least twelve months after the reporting period, the loan should be classified as non-
current.
b. Yes, the answer will be different if the arrangement for roll over is agreed upon after the
end of the reporting period, since assessment is required to be made based on terms of
the existing loan facility. As at the end of the reporting period, the entity does not have an
unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least twelve months after the
reporting period. Hence the loan is to be classified as current.
c. Yes, loan facility arranged with new bank cannot be treated as refinancing, as the loan
with the earlier bank would have to be settled which may coincide with loan facility
arranged with a new bank. In this case, loan has to be repaid within a period of 9 months
from the end of the reporting period, therefore, it will be classified as current liability.
d. Yes, the answer will be different and the loan should be classified as current. This is
because, as per paragraph 73 of Ind AS 1, when refinancing or rolling over the obligation
is not at the discretion of the entity (for example, there is no arrangement for refinancing),
the entity does not consider the potential to refinance the obligation and classifies the
obligation as current.
In December 20X1 an entity entered into a loan agreement with a bank. The loan is repayable
in three equal annual instalments starting from December 20X5. One of the loan covenants is
that an amount equivalent to the loan amount should be contributed by promoters by March 24
20X2, failing which the loan becomes payable on demand. As on March 24, 20X2, the entity
has not been able to get the promoter’s contribution. On March 25, 20X2, the entity
approached the bank and obtained a grace period up to June 30, 20X2 to get the promoter’s
contribution.
The bank cannot demand immediate repayment during the grace period. The annual reporting
period of the entity ends on March 31, 20X2.
(a) As on March 31, 20X2, how should the entity classify the loan?
(b) Assume that in anticipation that it may not be able to get the promoter’s contribution by
due date, in February 20X2, the entity approached the bank and got the compliance date
extended up to June 30, 20X2 for getting promoter’s contribution. In this case will the loan
classification as on March 31, 20X2 be different from (a) above?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution
(a) Paragraph 75 of Ind AS 1, inter alia, provides, “An entity classifies the liability as non-
current if the lender agreed by the end of the reporting period to provide a period of
grace ending at least twelve months after the reporting period, within which the entity
can rectify the breach and during which the lender cannot demand immediate
repayment.” In the present case, following the default, grace period within which an
entity can rectify the breach is less than twelve months after the reporting period. Hence
as on March 31, 20X2, the loan will be classified as current.
(b) Ind AS 1 deal with classification of liability as current or non-current in case of breach of
a loan covenant and does not deal with the classification in case of expectation of
breach. In this case, whether actual breach has taken place or not is to be assessed on
June 30, 20X2, i.e., after the reporting date. Consequently, in the absence of actual
breach of the loan covenant as on March 31, 20X2, the loan will retain its classification
as non-current.
Illustration 15
OMN Ltd has a subsidiary MN Ltd. OMN Ltd provides a loan to MN Ltd at 8% interest to be
paid annually. The loan is required to be paid whenever demanded back by OMN Ltd. How
should the loan be classified in the financial statements of OMN Ltd? Will it be any
different for MN Ltd?
Solution
The demand feature might be primarily a form of protection or a tax-driven feature of the loan.
Both parties might expect and intend that the loan will remain outstanding for the foreseeable
future. If so, the instrument is, in substance, long-term in nature, and accordingly, OMN Ltd
would classify the loan as a non-current asset.
However, OMN Ltd would classify the loan as a current asset if both the parties intend that it
will be repaid within 12 months of the reporting period.
MN Ltd would classify the loan as current because it does not have the right to defer
repayment for more than 12 months, regardless of the intentions of both the parties.
The classification of the instrument could affect initial recognition and subsequent
measurement. This might require the entity’s management to exercise judgement, which could
require disclosure under judgements and estimates.
Illustration 16
A Limited has prepared the following draft balance sheet as on 31st March 20X1: (₹ in crores)
Particulars 31 March,
st
31 March,
st
20X1 20X0
ASSETS
Cash 250 170
Cash equivalents 70 30
Non-controlling interest’s share of profit for the year 160 150
Dividend declared and paid by A Limited 90 70
Accounts receivable 2,300 1,800
Inventory at cost 1,500 1,650
Inventory at fair value less cost to complete and sell 180 130
Investment property 3,100 3,100
Property, plant and equipment (PPE) at cost 5,200 4,700
Total 12,850 11,800
₹ ₹
CLAIMS AGAINST ASSETS

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Long term debt (₹ 500 crores due on 1st January each 3,300 3,885
year)
Interest accrued on long term debt (due in less than 12 260 290
months)
Retained earnings at the beginning of the year 1,875 1,740
Profit for the year 1,200 830
Non-controlling interest 830 540
Accumulated depreciation on PPE 1,610 1,240
Provision for doubtful receivables 200 65
Accrued expenses 15 30
Warranty provision (for 12 months from the date of sale) 600 445
Environmental restoration provision (restoration expected in 765 640
20X6)
Provision for accrued leave (due within 12 months) 35 25
Dividend payable 150 230
Total 12,850 11,800
Prepare a consolidated balance sheet using current and non-current classification in
accordance with Ind AS 1. Assume operating cycle is 12 months.
Solution
A Limited
Consolidated Balance Sheet as at 31stMarch 20X1(₹in crores)
Particulars Note 31st March, 31st March,
20X1 20X0
ASSETS
Non-current assets
(a) Property, plant and equipment 1 3,590 3,460
(b) Investment property 3,100 3,100
Current assets
(a) Inventory 2 1,680 1,780
(b) Financial assets
(i) Trade and other receivables 3 2,100 1,735
(ii) Cash and cash equivalents 4 320 200
EQUITY & LIABILITIES
Equity attributable to owners of the parent
Share capital 1,050
Other Equity 1,130 2,350
5 2,825 540
Non-controlling interests 830
LIABILITIES
(a) Financial Liabilities Borrowings -
Long-term debt 6 2,800 3,385

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(b) Provisions 765 640
long-term provisions (environmental restoration)
Current liabilities
(a) Financial Liabilities 7 895 820
(i) Trade and other payables (Other than
micro enterprises and small enterprises)
(ii) Current portion of long-term debt
(iii) Interest accrued on long-term debt 8 500 500
(iv) Dividend payable 260 290
(b) Provisions 150 230
(i) Warranty provision 600 445
(ii) Other short-term provisions 35 25
Total current liabilities 2,440 2,310
Total equity and liabilities 10,790 10,275
Working Notes:
Particulars Basis Calculation Amount
₹ crores ₹ crores
Property, plant Property, plant and 5,200 – 1,610 3,590 (3,460)
and equipment equipment (PPE) at cost
less (4,700 – 1,240)
Accumulated (depreciation on
PPE
Inventory Inventory at cost add 1,500 + 180 1,680 (1,780)
Inventory at fair value less cost (1,650 + 130)
to complete and sell
Trade and Accounts receivable less 2,300 – 200 2,100 (1,735)
Other provision for doubtful
(1800-65)
receivables receivables
Cash and Cash and Cash 250 + 70 320
Cash equivalents (170+30) (200)
equivalents
Other Equity Retained earnings at the 1875+1200- 2825
Beginning of the year add 160-90
profit for the year less non- (1740+830-150-70) (2350)
controlling interest’s share of
profit for the year less
Dividend declared by A
Limited
Long-term debt Long-term debt less Due on 3,300-500 2,800
1stJanuary each year (3,885-500) (3,385)
Trade & other Trade payables add 880 + 15 895
payables Accrued expenses (790 + 30) (820)
Current portion of Due on 1st January each - 500
long – term portion year - (500)
Note: Figures in bracket represent the figures for comparative year.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
An entity manufactures passenger vehicles. The time between purchasing of underlying raw
materials to manufacture the passenger vehicles and the date the entity completes the
production and delivers to its customers is 11 months. Customers settle the dues after a
period of 8 months from the date of sale.
(a) Will the inventory and the trade receivables be current in nature?
(b) Assuming that the production time was say 15 months and the time lag between the date
of sale and collection from customers is 13 months, will the answer be different?
Solution:
Inventory and debtors need to be classified in accordance with the requirement of Ind AS 1,
which provides that an asset shall be classified as current if an entity expects to realise the
same, or intends to sell or consume it in its normal operating cycle.
(a) In this case, time lag between the purchase of inventory and its realisation into cash is 19
months [11 months + 8 months]. Both inventory and the debtors would be classified as current
if the entity expects to realise these assets in its normal operating cycle.
(b) No, the answer will be the same as the classification of debtors and inventory depends on
the expectation of the entity to realise the same in the normal operating cycle. In this case,
time lag between the purchase of inventory and its realization into cash is 28 months [15
months + 13 months]. Both inventory and debtors would be classified as current if the entity
expects to realise these assets in the normal operating cycle.
Question 02:
In December 2XX1 an entity entered into a loan agreement with a bank. The loan is repayable
in three equal annual instalments starting from December 2XX5. One of the loan covenants is
that an amount equivalent to the loan amount should be contributed by promoters by March 24
2XX2, failing which the loan becomes payable on demand. As on March 24, 2XX2, the entity
has not been able to get the promoter’s contribution. On March 25, 2XX2, the entity
approached the bank and obtained a grace period up to June 30, 2XX2 to get the promoter’s
contribution.
The bank cannot demand immediate repayment during the grace period. The annual reporting
period of the entity ends on March 31.
(a) As on March 31, 2XX2, how should the entity classify the loan?
(b) Assume that in anticipation that it may not be able to get the promoter’s contribution by
due date, in February 2XX2, the entity approached the bank and got the compliance date
extended up to June 30, 2XX2 for getting promoter ‘s contribution. In this case will the loan
classification ason March 31, 2XX2 be different from (a) above?
Solution:
(a) Ind AS 1, inter alia, provides, “An entity classifies the liability as non-current if the lender
agreed by the end of the reporting period to provide a period of grace ending at least
twelve months after the reporting period, within which the entity can rectify the breach
and during which the lender cannot demand immediate repayment.‖ In the present case,
following the default, grace period within which an entity can rectify the breach is less
than twelve months after the reporting period. Hence as on March 31, 2XX2, the loan
will be classified as current.
(b) Ind AS 1 deals with classification of liability as current or non-current in case of breach of
a loan covenant and does not deal with the classification in case of expectation of
breach. In this case, whether actual breach has taken place or not is to be assessed on
June 30, 2XX2, i.e., after the reporting date. Consequently, in the absence of actual

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
breach of the loan covenant as on March 31, 2XX2, the loan will retain its
classification as non-current.
Question 03: ( RTP MAY 2021)
Company A has taken a long-term loan from Company B. In the month of December 20X1,
there has been a breach of material provision of the arrangement. As a consequence of which
the loan becomes payable on demand on March 31, 20X2. In the month of May 20X2, the
Company started negotiation with the Company B for not to demand payment as a
consequence of the breach. The financial statements were approved for the issue in the month
of June 20X2. In the month of July 20X2, both the companies agreed that the payment will not
be demanded immediately as a consequence of breach of material provision.
Advise on the classification of the liability as current / non-current.
Solution:
As per para 74 of Ind AS 1 “Presentation of Financial Statements”, where there is a
breach of a material provision of a long-term loan arrangement on or before the end of the
reporting period with the effect that the liability becomes payable on demand on the reporting
date, the entity does not classify the liability as current, if the lender agreed, after the reporting
period and before the approval of the financial statements for issue, not to demand payment as
a consequence of the breach.
An entity classifies the liability as non-current if the lender agreed by the end of the reporting period
to provide a period of grace ending at least twelve months after the reporting period, within which
the entity can rectify the breach and during which the lender cannot demand immediate
repayment.
In the given case, Company B (the lender) agreed for not to demand payment but only after
the reporting date and the financial statements were approved for issuance. The financial
statements were approved for issuance in the month of June 20X2 and both companies
agreed for not to demandpayment in the month of July 20X2 although negotiation started in the
month of May 20X2 but could not agree before June 20X2 when financial statements were
approved for issuance.
Hence, the liability should be classified as current in the financial statement as at March 31, 20X2.
Question 04:
Entity A has undertaken various transactions in the financial year ended March 31, 20X1. Identify
and present the transactions in the financial statements as per Ind AS 1. ₹
Gains and losses arising from translating the monetary assets in foreign 75,000
currency
Gains and losses arising from translating the financial statements of a 65,000
foreign operation
Gains and losses from investments in equity instruments designated at fair 1,00,000
value through other comprehensive income
Solution:
Items impacting the Statement of Profit and Loss for the year ended 31 st March, 20X1 (₹)
Gains and losses arising from translating the monetary assets in foreign 75,000
currency

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
st
Items impacting the other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 March, 20X1 (₹)
Gains and losses arising from translating the financial statements of a
foreign operation 65,000
Gains and losses from investments in equity instruments designated at
Fair value through other comprehensive income 1,00,000
Question05:
XYZ Limited (the ‘Company’) is into the manufacturing of tractor parts and mainly
supplying components to the Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs). The Company does not
have any subsidiary, joint venture or associate company. During the preparation of financial
statements for theyear ended March 31,20X1, the accounts department is not sure about the
treatment/presentation of below mentioned matters. Accounts department approached you to
advice on the following matters. Evaluate the above matters with respect to preparation and
presentation of general-purposefinancial statement.
S. Matters
No.
(i) There are qualifications in the audit report of the Company with reference to two
Ind AS.
(ii) Is it mandatory to add the word “standalone” before each of the components of financial
Statements?
(iii) The Company is Indian Company and preparing and presenting its financial statements
in ₹. Is it necessary to write in the financial statements that the financial statements has
been presented in ₹?
(iv) The Company is having turnover of ₹ 180 crores. The Company wants to present the
absolute figures in the financial statements. Because for tax audit purpose, tax
related filings and other internal purposes, Company always need figures in absolute
amounts.
(v) The Company had sales transactions with 10 related party parties during previous
year. However, during current year, there are no transactions with 4 related parties
out of aforesaid 10 related parties. Hence, Company is of the view that it need not
disclose sales transactions with these 4 parties in related party disclosures because
with these parties there are no transactions during current
year.
Solution
(i) Yes, an entity whose financial statements comply with Ind AS shall make an explicit and
unreserved statement of such compliance in the notes. An entity shall not describe
financial statements as complying with Ind AS unless they comply with all the
requirements of Ind AS. (Refer Para 16 of Ind AS 1)
(ii) No, but need to disclose in the financial statement that these are individual financial
statement of the Company. (Refer Para 51(b) of Ind AS 1)
(iii) Yes, Para 51(d) of Ind AS 1 inter alia states that an entity shall display the
presentation currency, as defined in Ind AS 21 prominently, and repeat it when
necessary for the information presented to be understandable.
(iv) Yes, it is mandatory as per the requirements of Division II of Schedule III to
Companies Act, 2013).

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(v) No, as per Para 38 of Ind AS 1, except when Ind AS permit or require otherwise, an
entity shall present comparative information in respect of the preceding period for all
amounts reported in the current period’s financial statements. An entity shall
include comparative information for narrative and descriptive information if it is
relevant to understanding the current period’s financial statements.
Question 06:
A Company presents financial results for three years (i.e., one for current year and two
comparative years) internally for the purpose of management information every year in addition
to the general-purpose financial statements. The aforesaid financial results are presented
without furnishing the related notes because these are not required by the management for
internal purpose. During current year, management thought why not they should present third
year statement of profit and loss also in the general-purpose financial statements. I t will save
time and will be available easily whenevermanagement needs this in future.
With reference to above background, answer the following:
(i) Can management present the third statement of profit and loss as additional
comparative in the general-purpose financial statements?
(i) If management present third statement of profit and loss in the general-purpose financial
statement as comparative, is it necessary that this statement should be compliant of
Ind AS?
(i) Can management present third statement of profit and loss only as additional
comparative in the general-purpose financial statements without furnishing other
components (like balance sheet, statement of cash flows, statement of change in
equity) of financial statements?
Solution:
(i) Yes, as per Para 38C of Ind AS 1, an entity may present comparative information in
addition to the minimum comparative financial statements required by Ind AS, as long as
that information is prepared in accordance with Ind AS. This comparative information
may consist of one or more statements referred to in paragraph 10 but need not
comprise a complete set of financial statements. When this is the case, the entity shall
present related note information for those additional statements.
(ii) Yes, as per Para 38C of Ind AS 1, an entity may present comparative information in
addition to the minimum comparative financial statements required by Ind AS, as long
as that information is prepared in accordance with Ind AS.
(iii) Yes, as per Para 38C of Ind AS 1, an entity may present comparative information in
addition to the minimum comparative financial statements required by Ind AS, as long as
that information is prepared in accordance with Ind AS. This comparative information
may consist of one or more statements referred to in paragraph 10 but need not
comprise a complete set of financial statements. When this is the case, the entity shall
present related note information for those additional statements.
Question 07:
A Company while preparing the financial statements for Financial Year (FY) 20X1 -20X2,
erroneously booked excess revenue of ₹ 10 Crore. The total revenue reported in FY 20X1-
20X2 was ₹ 80 Crore. However, while preparing the financial statements for 20X2-20X3, it
discovered that excess revenue was booked in FY 20X1 -20X2 which it now wants to correct in
the financial statements. However, management of the Company is not sure whether it need to
present the third balance sheet as additional comparative.
With regard to the above background, answer the following:
a. Is it necessary to provide the third balance sheet at the beginning of the preceding period in

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
this case?
b. The Company wants to correct the error during FY 20X2 -20X3 by giving impact in the
figures ofcurrent year only. Is the contention of management, correct?
Solution:
1. No, as per Para 40A of Ind AS 1, an entity shall present a third balance sheet as at the
beginning of the preceding period in addition to the minimum comparative financial
statements required in paragraph 38A if:
a. it applies an accounting policy retrospectively, makes a retrospective restatement of
items in its financial statements or reclassifies items in its financial statements; and
b. the retrospective application, retrospective restatement or the reclassification has a
material effect on the information in the balance sheet at the beginning of the preceding period.
2. No, management need to correct the previous year figures to correct the error but need
not to furnish third balance sheet at the beginning of preceding period. (Refer Para 40A
of Ind AS1)
Question 08:
XYZ Limited (the ‘Company’) is into construction of turnkey projects and has assessed its
operating cycle to be 18 months. The Company has certain trade receivables and payables which
are receivable and payable within a period of twelve months from the reporting date, i.e., March
31, 20X2.
In addition to above there are following items/transactions which took place during financial
year 20X1-20X2.
S. Items/transactions
No.
(1) The Company has some trade receivables which are due after 15 months from the date of
balance sheet. So, the Company expects that the payment will be received within the
period of operating cycle.
(2) The Company has some trade payables which are due for payment after 14 months
from the date of balance sheet. These payables fall due within the period of operating
cycle. Though the Company does not expect that it will be able to pay these payable
within the operating cycle because the nature of business is such that generally
projects get delayed and payments from customers also gets delayed.
(3) The Company was awarded a contract of ₹ 100 Crore on March 31, 20X2. As per the
terms of the contract, the Company made a security deposit of 5% of the contrac
value with the customer, of ₹ 5 crore on March 31, 20X2. The contract is expected to
be completed in 18 months’ time. The aforesaid deposit will be refunded back after 6
months from the date of the completion of the contract.
(4) The Company has also given certain contracts to third parties and have received
security deposits from them of ₹ 2 Crore on March 31, 20X2 which are repayable on
completion of the contract but if contract is cancelled before the contract term of 18
months, then it becomes payable immediately. However, the Company does not
expect the cancellation of the contract.
Considering the above items/transactions answer the following:
i. The Company wants to present the trade receivable as current despite the fact that
these are receivables in 15 months’ time. Does the decision of presenting the same as
current is correct?
ii. The Company wants to present the trade payables as non-current despite the fact
that these are due within the operating cycle of the Company. Does the decision of
presenting the same as non-current is correct?

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
iii. Can the security deposit of ₹ 5 Crore made by the Company with the customers be
presented as current?
iv. Can the security deposit of ₹ 2 Crore taken by the Company from contractors be
presented as non-current?
Solution:
(i) Yes, but additionally the Company also need to disclose amounts that are receivable
within a period of 12 months and after 12 months from the reporting date. (Refer Para
60 and 61 of Ind AS 1)
(ii) No, the Company cannot disclose these payables as non-current and the Company also need
to disclose amounts that are payable within a period of 12 months and after 12 months from
the reporting date. (Refer Para 60 and 61 of Ind AS 1)
(iii) No, because the amount will be received after the operating cycle of the Company.
(Refer Para 66 of Ind AS 1)
(iv) No, because the amount may be required to be paid before completion of the contact
incase the contract is cancelled. (Refer Para 69 of Ind AS 1).
MTP/RTP/ PAST PAPER

RTP: NOVEMBER,2019
Question:1
An entity has taken a loan facility from a bank that is to be repaid within a period of 9 months
from the end of the reporting period. Prior to the end of the reporting period, the entity and
the bank enter into an arrangement, whereby the existing outstanding loan will,
unconditionally, roll into the new facility which expires after a period of 5 years.
(a) Should the loan be classified as current or non-current in the balance sheet of theentity?
(b) Will the answer be different if the new facility is agreed upon after the end of the reporting
period?
(c) Will the answer to (a) be different if the existing facility is from one bank and the new
facilityis from another bank?
(d) Will the answer to (a) be different if the new facility is not yet tied up with the existing
bank,but the entity has the potential to refinance the obligation?
Solution:
Para 69 of Ind AS 1 defines current liabilities as follows:
An entity shall classify a liability as current when:
i. it expects to settle the liability in its normal operating cycle;
ii. it holds the liability primarily for the purpose of trading;
iii. the liability is due to be settled within twelve months after the reporting period; or
iv. it does not have an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least
twelve months after the reporting period. Terms of a liability that could, at the option of
the counterparty, result in its settlement by the issue of equity instruments do not affect
its classification.
An entity shall classify all other liabilities as non-current.
Accordingly, following will be the classification of loan in the given scenarios:
a) The loan is not due for payment at the end of the reporting period. The entity and the
bank have agreed for the said roll over prior to the end of the reporting period for a period of
5 years. Since the entity has an unconditional right to defer the settlement of the liability for
at least twelve months after the reporting period, the loan should be classified as non-
current.
b) Yes, the answer will be different if the arrangement for roll over is agreed upon after

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
the end of the reporting period because as per paragraph 72 of Ind AS 1, “an entity
classifies its financial liabilities as current when they are due to be settled within twelve
months after the reporting period, even if: (a) the original term was for a period longer than
twelve months, and (b) an agreement to refinance, or to reschedule payments, on a long-
term basis is completed after the reporting period and before the financial statements are
approved for issue.” As at the end of the reporting period, the entity does not have an
unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least twelve months after the
reporting period. Hence the loan is to be classifiedas current.
c) Yes, loan facility arranged with new bank cannot be treated as refinancing, as the loan
with the earlier bank would have to be settled which may coincide with loan facility arranged
with a new bank. In this case, loan has to be repaid within a period of 9 months from the end
of the reporting period, therefore, it will be classified as current liability.
d) Yes, the answer will be different and the loan should be classified as current. This is
because, as per paragraph 73 of Ind AS 1, when refinancing or rolling over the obligation is
not at the discretion of the entity (for example, there is no arrangement for refinancing), the
entity does not consider the potential to refinance the obligation and classifies the obligation
as current.
RTP: MAY, 2021
Question:2
i. An entity has the following trial balance line items. How should these items be classified, i.e., current ornon-
current as per Ind AS 1?
ii. Receivables (viz., receivable under a contract of sale of goods in which an entity deals)
iii. Advance to suppliers
iv. Income tax receivables [other than deferred tax]
v. Insurance spares
Solution:
(i) As per paragraph 66(a) of Ind AS 1, an entity shall classify an asset as current when it expects
to realise the asset, or intends to sell or consume it, in its normal operating cycle.
Paragraph 68 provides the guidance that current assets include assets (such as inventories and trade
receivables) that are sold, consumed or realized as part of the normal operating cycle even when they are
not expected to be realised within twelve months after the reporting period.
In accordance with above, the receivables that are considered a part of the normal operating cycle will be
classified as current asset.
If the operating cycle exceeds twelve months, then additional disclosure as required by paragraph 61 of Ind
AS 1 is required to be given in the notes.
(ii) As discussed in point (a) above, advances to suppliers for goods and services would be classified in
accordance with normal operating cycle if it is given in relation to the goods or services in which the entity
normally deals. If the advances are considered a part the normal operating cycle, it would be classified
as a current asset. If the operating cycle exceeds twelve months, then additional disclosure as
required by paragraph 61 of Ind AS 1 is required to be given in the notes.
(iii)Classification of income tax receivables [other than deferred tax] will be driven by paragraph 66 (c) of
Ind AS 1, i.e., based on the expectation of the entity to realise the asset. If the receivable is expected to
be realised within twelve months after the reporting period, then it will be classified as current asset
else non-current asset.
(iv) Para 8 of Ind AS 16 states that items such as spare parts, stand-by equipment and servicing equipment are
recognised in accordance with this Ind AS when they meet the definition of property, plant and
equipment. Otherwise, such items are classified as inventory.
(v) Accordingly, the insurance spares that are treated as an item of property, plant and equipment would

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
normally be classified as non-current asset whereas insurance spares that are treated as inventory will be
classified as current asset if the entity expects to consume it in its normal operating cycle.
PAST YEAR QUESTIONS

JANUARY 2021
QUESTION 1
Entity A had obtained a long-term bank loan during January 2019, which is subject to certain financial
covenants. One of such covenants states that during the tenure of the loan, debt equity ratio of 65:35 is
to be maintained at all time. In case of breach of this covenant, the loan will be repayable immediately.
The loan agreement also states that these covenants will be assessed at the end of each quarter and
reported to the bank within a month from the end of each quarter. If the covenants are breached at this
time, the loan will be repayable immediately. The entity closes its annual accounts as on 31st March
every year. You are required to show how the loan will be classified as on 31st March 2020, if:
(i) At the financial year end, Entity A determines that it is not in breach of any of the covenants;
(ii) At the quarter ending 31st December 2019, Entity A's debt equity ratio became 75:25 and thus
breaches the covenant, however it obtains a waiver from the bank. The terms of the waiver
specify that if Entity A rectifies the breach within a period of 12 months from the reporting date
then the bank cannot demand repayment immediately on account of the breach during this
period. Entity A expects to rectify the breach by raising additional equity capital by means of a
rights issue to the existing shareholders and expects that the issue will be fully subscribed;
(iii) Considering the same facts as in (ii) above, except obtaining the waiver clause, what would be
your answer?
SOLUTION
Para 74 of Ind AS 1 ‘Presentation of Financial Statements’, states that where there is a breach of a
material provision of a long-term loan arrangement on or before the end of the reporting period with
the effect that the liability becomes payable on demand on the reporting date, the entity does not
classify the liability as current, if the lender agreed, after the reporting period and before the
approval of the financial statements for issue, not to demand payment as a consequence of the
breach.
However, an entity classifies the liability as non-current, if the lender agreed by the end of the
reporting period to provide a period of grace ending at least twelve months after the reporting period,
within which the entity can rectify the breach and during which the lender cannot demand
immediate repayment.
(i) The entity has obtained a long-term loan during January, 2019. Since repayment period of
the loan is not mentioned in the question, it is assumed that on 31st March 2020, the
repayment period of the loan is more than 12 months. Further, the entity has not breached
the covenants specified in the loan; therefore, as at 31st March, 2020, the loan will be
classified as ‘non-current liability.
(ii) In the second case, though there is a breach of covenant on 31st December, 2019 i.e.
before reporting date of 31st March, 2020, yet the bank had agreed to provide a period of
grace for twelve months from the reporting period, within which the entity A can rectify the
breach and during this period bank cannot demand immediate repayment. Also, entity A has
intention to rectify the breach. Thus, entity A will classify the liability of bank loan as non-
current liability in its books as at 31st March, 2020.
(iii) Since the covenant for the bank loan has been breached during the quarter ended 31st
December, 2019 and reported to the bank within one month from the end of the quarter i.e.
by 31st January, 2020, the bank loan becomes repayable immediately. Therefore, it will be
presented as current liability in the books of entity A as on 31st March, 2020.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
FRAMEWORK FOR PREPARATION AND PRESENTATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Illustration 1
Entity A sells goods to Mr. X on November, 20X1 and received payments on January 31, 20X2. The entity
follows December 31, 20X1 as its annual closing of financial statements. State how this business transaction
should be accounted.
Solution
The goods have been sold off in the month of November, 20X1 and the payment has been received in the year
20X2 whereas the Entity A follows calendar year annual closing. Now, assuming that all recognition criteria
(risk and rewards) has been met while selling off the goods in the month of November, 20X1, Entity A will
recognize the sale in the Income statement with corresponding effect in accounts receivables for the year
ending December 31, 20X1. This is called accrual accounting where the transaction is being recorded in the
same year when it meets other recognition criteria and not when actual cash has been received/ paid.
Now, it is clear to understand that had this sale not been shown in the financial statement ending December 31,
20X1, the sale would have been understated by the same amount. Hence it has been recorded in the same period
when the transaction has taken place and met recognition criteria as per applicable accounting standards.
Illustration 2
Entity A is having inventory amounting ₹ 100,000 in total with the details as below:
Spare parts ₹ 30,000
Finished goods ₹ 25,000
Work in progress ₹ 40,000
Tools ₹ 5,000
TOTAL ₹ 1,00,000
Materiality limit has been assessed ₹ 30,000 based on the management estimation pertaining to annual
profit basis. What should be the presentation requirement under the “Materiality” criteria?
Solution
Entity A has estimated its materiality limit of ₹ 30,000 which suggests that everything which is more thanthis
amount will be required to present separately, subject to its nature (nature means the components of
inventory in this example). Hence, Entity needs to show Inventory as below by way of notes to account –
Work in progress ₹ 40,000
Spare parts ₹ 30,000
Finished goods & tools ₹ 30,000
Total ₹ 1,00,000
Since, Work in progress and Spare parts are more than materiality limits, hence, they have been shown
separately based on its defined separate nature whereas finished goods & tools have amount lower than
materiality limits and same has been clubbed together.
Illustration 3
A legal case has been filed against A Ltd. However, expected outcome at the year-end cannot be evaluated.
What would be relevant information and what would be reliable in it?
Solution
It may be inappropriate for the entity to recognize the full amount of the claim in the balance sheet,
although it may be appropriate to disclose the amount and circumstances of the claim.
Illustration 4
An asset has been sold from A Ltd.to Mr.X and immediately after this transaction, Mr.X has leased out the
same to A Ltd. What would be the correct form to record the transaction using concept of “substance over form”?
Solution
The asset has been actually transferred to pass on legal title of the asset to Mr. X and convert that into a
lease asset. Hence, in substance, the economic benefit is still being enjoyed by A Ltd. In such
circumstances, the reporting of a sale would not represent faithfully the transaction entered into (if indeed
there was a transaction).

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
RTP/MTP/PAST QUESTION PAPERS
MTP MAR 2018
QUESTION
Explain Financial capital maintenance and Physical capital maintenance as per the Framework and
differentiate it
SOLUTION
A. Financial Capital maintenance
Under this concept, a profit is earned only if the financial amount of the net assets at the end of the
period exceeds the financial amount of net assets at the beginning of the period, after excluding any
distribution to, and contribution from, owners during the period.
B. Physical Capital maintenance
Under this conept, a profit is earned only if the physical productive or operating capability of the entity at
the the end of the period exceeds the physical productive capacity at the beginning of the period, after
excluding any distributions to, and contributions from, owners during the period.
Major differences between Physical Capital & Financial Capital
 The physical capital maintenance concept requires the adoption of the current cost basis as
measurement whereas financial capital maintenance concept does not require the use of a particular
basis of measuerment.
 Financial capital maintenance where capital is defined in terms of nominal monetary units, profit
represents the increase in nominal money capital over the period. When the concept of financial capital
maintenance is defined in terms of constant purchasing power units, profit represents the increase in
invested purchasing power over the period. Thus, only that part of the increase in the prices of assets
that exceeds the increase in the general level of prices is regarded as profit. Under the concept of
physical capital maintenance when capital is defined in terms of the physical productive capacity, profit
represents the increase in that capital over the period. All price changes affecting the assets and
liabilities of the entity are viewed as changes in the measurement of the physical productive capacity of
the entity; hence, they are treated as capital maintenance adjustments that are part of equity and not as
profit.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
IND AS 101 - FIRST TIME ADOPTION OF IND AS
Illustration 1
X Ltd. is required to adopt Ind AS from April 1, 20X1, with comparatives for one year, i.e., for
20X0- 20X1. What will be its date of transition?
Solution
The date of transition for X Ltd. will be April 1, 20X0 being the beginning of the earliest
comparative period presented. To explain it further, X Ltd. is required to adopt an Ind AS from
April 1, 20X1 (i.e., year 20X1-20X2), and it will give comparatives as per Ind AS for 20X0-20X1.
Accordingly, the beginning of the comparative period will be April 1, 20X0 which will be
considered as date of transition.
Illustration 2
Company B is a foreign subsidiary of Company A and has adopted IFRS as issued by IASB as
its primary GAAP for its local financial reporting purposes. Company B prepares its financial
statements as per Accounting Standards specified under Section 133 of the Companies Act, 2013
read with Rule 7 of the Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014 for the purpose of consolidation with
Company A. On transition of Company A to Ind-AS, what would be the previous GAAP of the
foreign subsidiary Company B for its financial statements prepared for consolidation with Company
A?
Solution
Ind AS 101 defines previous GAAP as the basis of accounting that a first -time adopter used for its
statutory reporting requirements in India (emphasis added) immediately before adopting Ind AS.
For instance, companies preparing their financial statements in accordance with the Accounting
Standards specified under Section 133 of the Companies Act, 2013 read with Rule 7 of the
Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014 shall consider those financial statements as previous GAAP
financial statements.
Accordingly, the previous GAAP of the foreign subsidiary for the purpose of consolidation
under Ind-AS with the parent company would be accounting standards specified under Section
133 of the Companies Act, 2013 read with Rule 7 of the Companies (Accounts) Rules, 2014
and not the IFRS as issued by the IASB since the first-time adoption has to be considered in
the context of India only.
Illustration 3
E Ltd. is required to first time adopt Indian Accounting Standards (Ind AS) from 1 April 20X1. The
management of E Ltd. has prepared its financial statements in accordance with Ind AS and an
explicit and unreserved statement of compliance with Ind AS has been given by the management.
However, the thereis a disagreement on application of one Ind AS between the management and the
auditor. Can such financial statements of E Ltd. be treated as first Ind AS financial statements?
Solution
Ind AS 101 defines first Ind AS financial statements as “The first annual financial statements in
which an entity adopts Indian Accounting Standards (Ind AS), by an explicit and unreserved
statement of compliance with Ind AS.” In accordance with the above definition, if an explicit
and unreserved statement of compliance with Ind AS has been given in the financial
statements, even if the auditor’s report contains a qualification because of disagreement on
application of Indian Accounting Standard(s), it would be considered that E Ltd. has done the
first-time adoption of Ind AS. In such a case, exemptions given under Ind AS 101 cannot be
availed again. If, however, the unreserved statement of compliance with Ind AS is not given in
the financial statements, such financial statements would not be considered to be first Ind AS
financial statements.
Illustration 4
Ind AS requires allocation of losses to the non-controlling interest, which may ultimately lead to a
debit balance in non-controlling interests, even if there is no contract with the non- controlling

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
interest holders tocontribute assets to the Company to fund the losses. Whether this adjustment is
required or permitted to bemade retrospectively?
Solution
In case an entity elects not to restate past business combinations, Ind AS 101 requires the
measurement of non-controlling interests (NCI) to follow from the measurement of other assets
and liabilities on transition to Ind AS. However, Ind AS 101 contains a mandatory exception
that prohibits retrospective allocation of accumulated profits between the owners of the parent
and the NCI. In case an entity elects not to restate past business combinations, the previous
GAAP carrying value of NCI is not changed other than for adjustments made (remeasurement
of the assets and liabilities subsequent to the business combination) as part of the transition to
Ind AS. As such, the carrying value of NCI in the opening Ind AS balance sheet cannot have a
deficit balance on account of recognition of the losses attributable to the non-controlling
interest, which was not recognised under the previous GAAP as part of NCI in the absence of
contract to contribute assets to fund such a deficit.
However, the NCI could have a deficit balance due to remeasurement of the assets and liabilities
subsequent to the business combination as part of the transition to Ind AS.
In case an entity restates past business combination, Ind AS 101 requires that the balance in NCI
as at the date of transition shall be determined retrospectively in accordance with Ind AS,
taking into account the impact of other elections made as part of the adoption of Ind AS.
As such, the NCI could have a deficit balance on account of losses attributable to the NCI, even
if there is no obligation on the holders of NCI to contribute assets to fund such a deficit.
Illustration 5
A Ltd. had made certain investments in B Ltd.’s convertible debt instruments. The conversion rights
are substantive rights and would provide A Ltd. with a control over B Ltd. A Ltd. has evaluated
that B Ltd. would be treated as its subsidiary under Ind AS and, hence, would require
consolidation in its Ind AS consolidated financial statements. B Ltd. was not considered as a
subsidiary, associate or a joint venture under previous GAAP. How should B Ltd. be consolidated
on transition to Ind AS assuming that A Ltd. has opted to avail the exemption from retrospective
restatement of past business combinations?
Solution
Ind AS 101 prescribes an optional exemption from retrospective restatement in relation to past
business combinations. Ind AS 101 prescribes that when the past business combinations are
not restated and a parent entity had not consolidated an entity as a subsidiary in accordance
with its previous GAAP (either because i t was not regarded as a subsidiary or no consolidated
financial statements were required under previous GAAP), then the subsidiary’s assets and
liabilities would be included in the parent’s opening consolidated financial statements at such
values as would appear in the subsidiary’s separate financial statements if the subsidiary were
to adopt the Ind AS as at the parent’s date of transition. For this purpose, the subsidiary’s
separate financial statements would be prepared as if it was a first-time adopter of Ind AS i.e.,
after applying the relevant first- time adoption mandatory exceptions and voluntary exemptions.
In other words, the parent will adjust the carrying amount of the subsidiary’s assets and
liabilities to the amounts that Ind AS would require in the subsidiary’s balance sheet.
The deemed cost of goodwill equals the difference at the date of transition between:
(a) the parent’s interest in those adjusted carrying amounts; and
(b) the cost in the parent’s separate financial statements of its investment in the subsidiary.
The measurement of non-controlling interest and deferred tax follows from the
measurement of other assets and liabilities.
It may be noted here that the above exemption is available only under those circumstances
where the parent, in accordance with the previous GAAP, has not presented consolidated
financial statements for the previous year; or where the consolidated financial statements were
prepared in accordance with the previous GAAP but the entity was not treated as a subsidiary,

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
associate or joint venture under the previous GAAP.
Illustration 6
A Ltd. has a subsidiary B Ltd. On first time adoption of Ind AS by B Ltd., it availed the optional
exemption of not restating its past business combinations. However, A Ltd. in its consolidated
financial statements has decided to restate all its past business combinations. Whether the amounts
recorded by subsidiary need to be adjusted while preparing the consolidated financial statements of
A Ltd. considering that A Ltd. does not avail the business combination exemption? Will the answer
be different if A Ltd. adopts Ind AS after B Ltd?
Solution
As per Ind AS 101: “A first-time adopter may elect not to apply Ind AS 103 retrospectively
to past business combinations (business combinations that occurred before the date of transition to
Ind AS). However, if a first-time adopter restates any business combination to comply with Ind
AS 103, it shall restate all later business combinations and shall also apply Ind AS 110 from
that same date.
For example, if a first-time adopter elects to restate a business combination that occurred on
30 June 20X0, it shall restate all business combinations that occurred between 30 June20X0
and the date of transition to Ind AS, and it shall also apply Ind AS 110 from 30 June 20X0.”
Based on the above, if A Ltd. restates past business combinations, it would have to be applied
to all business combinations of the group including those by subsidiary B Ltd. for the purpose
of Consolidated Financial Statements. Ind AS 101 states, “However, if an entity becomes a
first-time adopter later than its subsidiary (or associate or joint venture) the entity shall, in its
consolidated financial statements, measure the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary (or
associate or joint venture) at the same carrying amounts as in the financial statements of the
subsidiary (or associate or joint venture), after adjusting for consolidation and equity accounting
adjustments and for the effects of the business combination in which the entity acquired the
subsidiary.” Thus, in case where the parent adopts Ind AS later than the subsidiary (forexample,
if the parent is a non-banking financial company and the subsidiary is a trading or
manufacturing company) then it does not change the amounts already recognised by the
subsidiary.
Illustration 7
X Ltd. is a first-time adopter of Ind AS. The date of transition is April 1, 20X1. It has given 200
stock options to its employees. Out of these, 75 options have vested on November 30, 20X0 and
the remaining 125 will vest on November 30, 20 X1. What are the options available to X Ltd. at the
date of transition?
Solution
Ind AS 101 provides that a first-time adopter is encouraged, but not required, to apply Ind AS
102 on “Share-based Payment‟ to equity instruments that vested before the date oftransition to
IndAS.
However, if a first -time adopter elects to apply Ind AS 102 to such equity instruments, it may
do so only if the entity has disclosed publicly the fair value of those equity instruments,
determinedat the measurement date, as defined in Ind AS 102.
Illustration 8
X Ltd. is the holding company of Y Ltd. X Ltd. is required to adopt Ind AS from April 1, 20X1. X
Ltd. wants to avail the optional exemption of using the previous GAAP carrying values in respect of
its property, plant and equipment whereas Y Ltd. wants to use fair value of its property, plant and
equipment as its deemed cost on the date of transition. Examine whether X Ltd. can do so for its
consolidated financial statements. Also, examine whether different entities in a group can use
different basis for arriving at deemed cost for property, plant and equipment in their respective
standalone financial statements
Solution
Where there is no change in its functional currency on the date of transition to Ind AS, a first-

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
time adopter to Ind AS may elect to continue with the carrying value of all of its property, plant
and equipment as at the date of transition measured as per the previous GAAP and use that
as its deemed cost at the date of transition after making necessary adjustments. If a first-
time adopter chooses this option, then the option of applying this on selective basis to some of
the items of property, plant and equipment and using fair value for others is not available.
Nothing prevents different entities within a group to choose different basis for arriving at
deemed cost for the standalone financial statements. However, in Consolidated Financial
Statements, the entire group should be treated as one reporting entity. Accordingly, it will not
be permissible to use different basis for arriving at the deemed cost of property, plant and
equipment on the date of transition by different entities of the group for the purpose of
preparing Consolidated Financial Statements.
Illustration 9
For the purpose of deemed cost on the date of transition, an entity has the option of using the
carrying value as the deemed cost. In this context, suggest which carrying value is to be
considered as deemed cost: original cost or net book value? Also examine whether this would have
any impact on future depreciation charge?
Solution
For the purpose of deemed cost on the date of transition, if an entity uses the carrying
value as the deemed cost, then it should consider the net book value on the date of transition as
the deemed cost and not the original cost because carrying value here means net book value.
The future depreciation charge will be based on the net book value and the remaining useful
life on the date of transition. Further, as per the requirements of Ind AS 16, the depreciation
method, residual value and useful life need to be reviewed at least annually. As a result of this,
the depreciation charge may or may not be the same as the depreciation charge under the
previous GAAP.
Illustration 10
Is it possible for an entity to allocate cost as per the previous GAAP to a component based on its
fair value on the date of transition even when it does not have the component-wise historical cost?
Solution
Yes, an entity can allocate cost to a component based on its fair value on the date oftransition.
This is permissible even when the entity does not have component-wise historical cost.
Illustration 11
Revaluation under previous GAAP can be considered as deemed cost if the revaluation was, at
the date of the revaluation, broadly comparable to fair value or cost or depreciated cost of assets in
accordance with Ind AS, adjusted to reflect, e.g., changes in a general or specific price index. What
is the acceptable time gapof such revaluation from the date of transition? Can adjustments be made
to take effects of events subsequent to revaluation?
Solution
There are no specific guidelines in Ind AS 101 to indicate the acceptable time gap of such
revaluation from the date of transition. The management of an entity needs to exercise
judgement in this regard. However, generally, a period of 2 –3 years may be treated as an
acceptable time gap of such revaluation from the date of transition. In any case, adjustments
should be made to reflect the effect of material events subsequent to revaluation.
Illustration 12
Y Ltd. is a first-time adopter of Ind AS. The date of transition is April 1, 20X1. On the date of
transition, there is a long- term foreign currency monetary liability of ₹ 60 crores (US $ 10 million
converted at an exchange rate of US $ 1 = ₹ 21 60). The accumulated exchange difference on the
date of transition is nil since Y Ltd. was following AS 11 notified under the Companies (Accounting
Standards) Rules, 2006 and has not exercised the option provided in paragraph 46/46A of AS 11.
The Company wants to avail the option under paragraph 46A of AS 11 prospectively or

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
retrospectively on the date of transition to Ind AS. How should it account for the translation
differences in respect of this item under Ind AS 101?
Solution
Ind AS 101 provides that a first-time adopter may continue the policy adopted for accounting
for exchange differences arising from translation of long-term foreign currency monetary items
recognised in the financial statements for the period ending immediately before the beginning
of the first Ind AS financial reporting period as per the previous GAAP.
If the Company wants to avail the option prospectively
The Company cannot avail the exemption given in Ind AS 101 and cannot exercise option
under paragraph 46/46A of AS 11, prospectively, on the date of transition to Ind AS in respect
of long-term foreign currency monetary liability existing on the date of transition as the
company has not availed the option under paragraph 46/46A earlier. Therefore, the Company
need to recognise the exchange differences in accordance with the requirements of Ind AS 21,
The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates which requires all foreign exchange
differences to be recognised in profit or loss, except such foreign exchange differences which
areaccounted for as an adjustment to borrowing costs in accordance with Ind AS 23.
If the Company wants to avail the option retrospectively
The Company cannot avail the exemption given in Ind AS 101 and cannot exercise the option
under paragraph 46/46A of AS 11 retrospectively on the date of transition to Ind AS in
respect of long-term foreign currency monetary liability that existed on the date of transition
since the option is available only if it is in continuation of the accounting policy followed in
accordance with the previous GAAP. Y Ltd. has not been using the option provided in Para 46/
46A of AS 11, hence, it will not be permitted to use the option given in Ind AS 101 retrospectively.
Illustration 13
Y Ltd. is a first-time adopter of Ind AS. The date of transition is April 1, 20X5. On April 1, 20X1, it
obtained a 7-year US$ 1,00,000 loan. It has been exercising the option provided in Paragraph
46/46A of AS 11 and has been amortizing the exchange differences in respect of this loan over the
balance period of such loan. On the date of transition, the company wants to continue the same
accounting policy with regard to amortising of exchange differences. Whether the Company is
permitted to do so?
Solution
Ind AS 101 provides that a first-time adopter may continue the policy adopted for accounting
for exchange differences arising from translation of long-term foreign currency monetary items
of the first Ind AS financial reporting period as per the previous GAAP. In view of the above,
the Company can continue to follow the existing accounting policy of amortising the exchange
differences in respect of this loan over the balance period of such long- term liability.
Illustration 14
A Ltd. acquired B Ltd. in a business combination transaction. A Ltd. agreed to pay certain
contingent consideration (liability classified) to B Ltd. As part of its investment in its separate
financial statements, A Ltd. did not recognise the said contingent consideration (since it was not
considered probable). A Ltd. considered the previous GAAP carrying amounts of investment as its
deemed cost on first- time adoption. In that case, does the carrying amount of investment required
to be adjusted for this transaction?
Solution
In accordance with Ind AS 101, an entity has an option to treat the previous GAAP carrying
values, as at the date of transition, of investments in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures
as its deemed cost on transition to Ind AS. If such an exemption is adopted, then the carrying
values of such investments are not adjusted. Accordingly, any adjustments in relation to
recognition of contingent consideration on first time adoption shall be made in the statement of
profit and loss.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
On April 1, 20X1, Sigma Ltd. issued 30,000 6% convertible debentures of face value
of ₹ 100 per debenture at par. The debentures are redeemable at a premium of 10% on 31
March 20X5 or these may be converted into ordinary shares at the option of the holder. The interest
rate for equivalent debentures without conversion rights would have been 10%. The date of
transition to Ind AS is 1 April 20X3. Suggest how should Sigma Ltd. account for this compound
financial instrument on the date of transition. The present value of ₹ 1 receivable at the end of each
year based on discount rates of 6% and 10% can be taken as:
End of year 6% 10%
1 0.94 0.91
2 0.89 0.83
3 0.84 0.75
4 0.79 0.68
Solution
The carrying amount of the debenture on the date of transition under previous GAAP,
assuming that all interest accrued other than premium on redemption have been paid, will be ₹
31,20,000 [(30,000 x 100) + (30,000 x 100 x 10/100 x 2/5)]. The premium payable on redemption is
being recognised as borrowing costs as per para 4(b) of AS 16 ie under previous GAAP on
straight-line basis.
As per para D18 of Ind AS 101, Ind AS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation, requires an
entity to split a compound financial instrument at inception into separate liability and equity
components. If the liability component is no longer outstanding, retrospective application of Ind
AS 32 would involve separating two portions of equity. The first portion is recognised in
retained earnings and represents the cumulative interest accreted on the liability component.
The other portion represents the original equity component. However, in accordance with this
Ind AS, a first-time adopter need not separate these two portions if the liability component is no
longer outstanding at the date of transition to Ind AS.
In the present case, since the liability is outstanding on the date of transition, Sigma Ltd.
will need to split the convertible debentures into debt and equity portion on the date of
transition. Accordingly, we will first measure the liability component by discounting the
contractually determined stream of future cash flows (interest and principal) to present
value by using the discount rate of 10% p.a. (being the market interest rate for similar
debentures with no conversion option).
(₹)
Interest payments p.a. on each debenture 6
Present Value (PV) of interest payment for years 1 to 4 (6x3.17) 19.02
(Note1)
PV of principal repayment (including premium) 110x0.68 (Note 2) 74.80
Total liability component per debenture 93.82
Equity component per debenture (Balancing figure) 6.18
Face value of debentures 100.00
Total equity component for 30,000 debentures 1,85,400
Total debt amount (30,000 x 93.82) 28,14,600
Thus, on the date of initial recognition, the amount of ₹ 30,00,000 being the amount of
debentures will be split as under:
Debt ₹ 28,14,600
Equity ₹ 1,85,400
However, on the date of transition, unwinding of ₹ 28,14,600 will be done for two years as
follows:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Year Opening balance Finance cost @ 10% Interest paid Closing balance
1 28,14,600 2,81,460 1,80,000 29,16,060
2 29,16,060 2,91,606 1,80,000 30,27,666
Therefore, on transition date, Sigma Ltd. shall –
a. recognise the carrying amount of convertible debentures at ₹ 30,27,666;
b. recognise equity component of compound financial instrument of ₹ 1,85,400;
c. debit ₹ 93,066 to retained earnings being the difference between the previous GAAP amount of
₹ 31,20,000 and ₹ 30,27,666 and the equity component of compound financial instrument of
₹1,85,400; and
d. de-recognise the debenture liability in previous GAAP of ₹ 31,20,000.
Notes:
1. 3.17 is present value of annuity factor of ₹1 at a discount rate of 10% for 4 years.
2. On maturity, ₹ 110 will be paid (₹100 as principal payment + ₹10 as premium)
Illustration 16
H Ltd. has the following assets and liabilities as at March 31, 20 X1, prepared in accordance with
previous GAAP:
Particulars Notes Amount (₹)
Property, Plant & Equipment 1 1,34,50,000
Investments in S. Ltd. 2 48,00,000
Trade Receivables 2,00,000
Advances for purchase of inventory 50,00,000
Inventory 8,00,000
Cash 49,000
Total assets 2,42,99,000
VAT deferral loan 3 60,00,000
Creditors 30,00,000
Short term borrowing 8,00,000
Provisions 12,00,000
Total liabilities 1,10,00,000
Share capital 1,30,00,000
Reserves: 2,99,000
Cumulative translation difference 4 1,00,000
ESOP reserve 4 20,000
Retained earnings 1,79,000
Total equity 1,32,99,000
Total equity and liabilities 2,42,99,000
The following GAAP differences were identified by the Company on first-time adoption of Ind AS
with effect from April 1, 20X1:
1. In relation to property, plant and equipment, the following adjustments were identified:
 Property, plant and equipment comprise land held for capital appreciation purposes
costing
₹ 4,50,000 and was classified as investment property as per Ind AS 40.
 Exchange differences of ₹ 1,00,000 were capitalised to depreciable property, plant
and equipment on which accumulated depreciation of ₹ 40,000 was recognised.
 There were no asset retirement obligations.
 The management intends to adopt deemed cost exemption for using the previous GAAP
carrying values as deemed cost as at the date of transition for PPE and investment
property.
2. The Company had made an investment in S Ltd. (subsidiary of H Ltd.) for ₹ 48,00,000 that

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
carried a fair value of ₹ 68,00,000 as at the transition date. The Company intends to recognise
the investment at its fair value as at the date of transition.
3. Financial instruments:
 VAT deferral loan₹ 60,00,000:
The VAT deferral loan of ₹ 60,00,000 was obtained on March 31, 20X1, for setting up a business
in a backward region with a condition to create certain defined targets for employment of local
population of that region. The loan does not carry any interest and is repayable in full at the end of
5 years. In accordance with Ind AS 109, the discount factor on the loan is to be taken as 10%,
being the incremental borrowing rate. Accordingly, the fair value of the loan as at March 31, 20 X1,
is ₹ 37,25,528. The entity chooses to exercise the option given in paragraph B11 of Ind AS 101,
i.e., the entity chooses to apply the requirements of Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments and Ind
AS 20, Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance,
retrospectively as required information had been obtained at the time of initially accounting for
VAT deferral loan.
4. The retained earnings of the Company contained the following:
i. ESOP reserve of ₹ 20,000:
The Company had granted 1,000 options to employees out of which 800 have already vested. The
Company followed an intrinsic value method for recognition of ESOP charge and recognised ₹
12,000 towards the vested options and ₹ 8,000 over a period of time as ESOP charge and a
corresponding
reserve. If fair value method had been followed in accordance with Ind AS 102, the corresponding
charge would have been ₹ 15,000 and ₹ 9,000 for the vested and unvested shares respectively. The
Company intends to avail Ind AS 101 exemptions for share-based payments for not restating the
ESOP chargeas per previous GAAP for vested options.
Cumulative translation difference:
₹ 1,00,000 The Company had a non-integral foreign branch in accordance with AS 11 and had
recognised a balance of ₹ 1,00,000 as part of reserves. On first-time adoption of Ind AS, the
Company intends to avail Ind AS 101 exemptions of resetting the cumulative translation
difference to zero.
Prepare transition date Ind AS balance sheet of Company H showing adjustments to the values
of assets and liabilities.
Solution
Adjustments for opening balance sheet as per Ind AS 101
1. Property, Plant & Equipment: As the land held for capital appreciation purposes
qualifies as investment property, such investment property should be reclassified from property,
plant and equipment (PPE) to investment property and presented separately. As the Company
has adopted the previous GAAP carrying values as deemed cost, all items of PPE and
investment property should be carried at its previous GAAP carrying values. As such, the
past capitalised exchange differences require no adjustment in this case.
2. Investment in subsidiary: On first time adoption of Ind AS, a parent company has
an option to carry its investment in subsidiary at fair value as at the date of transition in its
separate financial statements. As such, the company can recognise such investment at a
value of ₹68,00,000.
3. Financial instruments: As the VAT deferral loan is a financial liability under Ind AS
109, that liability should be recognised at its present value discounted at an appropriate
discounting factor. Consequently, the VAT deferral loan should be recognised at ₹ 37,25,528
and the remaining ₹ 22,74,472 would be recognised as deferred government grant.
4. ESOPs: Ind AS 101 provides an exemption of not restating the accounting as per the
previous GAAP in accordance with Ind AS 102 for all options that have vested by the transition
date. Accordingly, out of 1000 ESOPs granted, the first-time adoption exemption is available
on 800 options that have already vested. As such, its accounting need not be restated.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
However, the 200 options that are not vested as at the transition date, need to be restated in
accordance with Ind AS 102. As such, the additional impact of ₹ 1,000 (i.e., 9,000 less 8,000)
would be recognised in the opening Ind AS balance sheet.
5. Cumulative translation difference: As per paragraph D12 of Ind AS 101, the first-time
adopter can avail an exemption regarding requirements of Ind AS 21 in context of cumulative
translation differences. If a first-time adopter uses this exemption the cumulative translation
differences for all foreign operation are deemed to be zero as at the transition date. In that case, the
balance is transferred to retained earnings. As such, the balance of ₹1,00,000 should be
transferred to retained earnings
6. Retained earnings:
Increase in fair value of investment in subsidiary (note 2) 20,00,000
Additional ESOP charge on unvested options (note 4) (1,000)
Transfer of cumulative translation difference balance to retained
earnings (note 5) 1,00,000
Increase in Retained Earnings 20,99,000
The transition date Ind AS Balance Sheet after the above adjustments in the carrying values
of assets and liabilities is as under:
Transition date Ind AS Balance Sheet of H Ltd. as at 1st April, 20X1
Particular Notes Previous GAAP Adjustments Ind AS GAAP
Non-Current Assets
Property, Plant &
Equipment 1 1,34,50,000 (4,50,000) 1,30,00,000
Investment property 1 0 4,50,000 4,50,000
Current Assets
Inventory 8,00,000 8,00,000
Financial Assets:
Investments in S Ltd: 2 48,00,000 20,00,000 68,00,000
Trade Receivables 2,00,000 2,00,000
Cash 49,000 49,000
Other current asset
(Advances for purchase of 50,00,000
inventory) 50,00,000
Total Assets 2,42,99,000 20,00,000 2,62,99,000
Share Capital 1,30,00,000 1,30,00,000
Other Equity:
Cumulative translation 5 1,00,000 (1,00,000) 0
difference
ESOP reserve 4 20,000 1,000 21,000
Retained Earnings 6 1,79,000 20,99,000 22,78,000
Total Equity 1,32,99,000 20,00,000 1,52,99,000
Non- Current Liabilities
VAT Deferral loan 3 60,00,000 (22,74,472) 37,25,528
Deferred Govt Revenue 3 0 22,74,472 22,74,472
Current Liability
Trade Payables 30,00,000 30,00,000
Short Term Borrowings 8,00,000 8,00,000
Provisions 12,00,000 12,00,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total Liabilities 1,10,00,000 1,10,00,000
Total Equity & Liabilities 2,42,99,000 20,00,000 2,62,99,000
Illustration 17 (MTP: OCTOBER, 2020)
Shaurya Limited is the company having its registered and corporate office at New Delhi.
60% of Shaurya Limited’s shares are held by the Government of India and rest by other investors.
This is the first time that Shaurya limited would be applying Ind AS for the preparation of its
financials for the current financial year 2019-2020. Following balance sheet is prepared as per
earlier GAAP as at the beginning of the preceding period along with the additional information:
Balance Sheet as at 31 March 2018 (All figures are in ’000, unless otherwise specified)
Particulars Amount
(1) Shareholders’ Funds
(a) Share Capital 10,00,000
(b) Reserves & Surplus 25,00,000
(2) Non-Current Liabilities
(a) Long Term Borrowings 4,50,000
(b) Long Term Provisions 3,50,000
(c) Deferred tax liabilities 3,50,000
(a) Trade Payables 22,00,000
(b) Other Current Liabilities 4,50,000
(c) Short Term Provisions 12,00,000
TOTAL 85,00,000
ASSETS
(1) Non-Current Assets
(a) Property, Plant & Equipment (net) 20,00,000
(b) Intangible assets 2,00,000
(c) Goodwill 1,00,000
(d) Non-current Investments 5,00,000
(e) Long Term Loans and Advances 1,50,000
(f) Other Non-Current Assets 2,00,000
(2) Current Assets
(a) Current Investments 18,00,000
(b) Inventories 12,50,000
(c) Trade Receivables 9,00,000
(d) Cash and Bank Balances 10,00,000
(e) Other Current Assets 4,00,000
TOTAL 85,00,000
Additional Information (All figures are in ’000) :
1. Other current liabilities include ₹ 3,90,000 liabilities to be paid in cash such as expense
payable, salary payable etc. and ₹ 60,000 are statutory government dues.
2. Long term loans and advances include ₹ 40,000 loan and the remaining amount consists
Advance to staff of ₹ 1,10,000.
3. Other non-current assets of ₹ 2,00,000 consists Capital advances to suppliers.
4. Other current assets include ₹ 3,50,000 current assets receivable in cash and Prepaid
expenses of ₹ 50,000. Short term provisions include Dividend payable of ₹ 2,00,000. The
dividend payable had been as a result of board meeting wherein the declaration of dividend for
financial year 2017-2018 was made. However, it is subject to approval of shareholders in the annual
general meeting. Chief financial officer of Shaurya Limited has also presented the following information
against corresponding relevant items in the balance sheet:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
a) Property, Plant & Equipment consists a class of assets as office buildings whose carrying
amount is ₹ 10,00,000. However, the fair value of said office building as on the date of transition is
estimated to be ₹ 15,00,000. Company wants to follow revaluation model as its accounting policy in
respect of its property, plant and equipment for the first annual Ind AS financial statements.
b) The fair value of Intangible assets as on the date of transition is estimated to be
₹ 2,50,000. However, the management is reluctant to incorporate the fair value changes in books
of account.
c) Shaurya Ltd. had acquired 80% shares in a company, Excel private limited few years ago
thereby acquiring the control upon it at that time. Shaurya Ltd. recognised goodwill as per erstwhile
accounting standards by accounting the excess of consideration paid over the net assets acquired
at the date of acquisition. Fair value exercise was not done at the time of acquisition.
d) Trade receivables include an amount of ₹ 20,000 as provision for doubtful debts measured in
accordance with previous GAAP. Now as per latest estimates using hind sights, the provision
needs to be revised to ₹ 25,000.
e) Company had given a loan of ₹ 1,00,000 to an entity for the term of 10 years six years ago.
Transaction costs were incurred separately for this loan. The loan carries an interest rate of 7%. The
principal amount is to be repaid in equal installments over the period of ten years at the year end.
Interest is also payable at each year end. The fair value of loan as on the date of transition is ₹
50,000 as against the carrying amount of loan which at present amounts to ₹ 40,000. However,
Ind AS 109 mandates to recognise the interest income as per effective interest method after the
adjustment of transaction costs. Management says it is tedious task in the given case to apply the
effective interest rate changes with retrospective effect and hence is reluctant to apply the same
retrospectively in its first- time adoption.
f) In the long-term borrowings, ₹ 4,50,000 of component is due towards the State Government.
Interest is payable on the government loan at 4%, however the prevailing rate in the market at
presentis 8%. The fair market value of loan stands at ₹ 4,20,000 as on the relevant date.
g) Under Previous GAAP, the mutual funds were measured at cost or market value, whichever
is lower. Under Ind AS, the Company has designated these investments at fair value through
profit or loss. The value of mutual funds as per previous GAAP is ₹ 2,00,000 as included in
‘current investment’. However, the fair value of mutual funds as on the date of transition is ₹
2,30,000.
h) Ignore separate calculation of deferred tax on above adjustments. Assume the net deferred tax
income to be ₹ 50,000 on account of Ind AS transition adjustments.
Requirements:
- Prepare transition date balance sheet of Shaurya Limited as per Indian Accounting Standards
- Show necessary explanation for each of the items presented by chief financial officer in the
form of notes, which may or may not require the adjustment as on the date of transition.
Solution: Transition date (opening) IND-AS
BALANCE SHEET of SHAURYA LIMITED
As at 1 April 2018
(All figures are in ‟000, unless otherwise specified)
Previous GAAP Transitional Ind Opening Ind AS
Particulars AS adjustments Balance Sheet
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 20,00,000 5,00,000 25,00,000
(Note 1)
Goodwill (Note 2) 1,00,000 - 1,00,000
Other Intangible assets (Note 3) 2,00,000 - 2,00,000
Financial assets:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Investment 5,00,000 - 5,00,000
Loans (Note 4) 40,000 10,000 50,000
Other financial assets 1,10,000 - 1,10,000
Other non-current assets 2,00,000 - 2,00,000
Current assets
Inventories 12,50,000 - 12,50,000
Financial assets
Investment (Note 5) 18,00,000 30,000 18,30,000
Trade receivables (Note 6) 9,00,000 - 9,00,000
Cash and cash equivalents/Bank 10,00,000 - 10,00,000
Other financial assets 3,50,000 - 3,50,000
Other current assets 50,000 - 50,000
TOTAL ASSETS 85,00,000 5,40,000 90,40,000
Equity
Equity share capital 10,00,000 - 10,00,000
Other equity 25,00,000 7,90,000 32,90,000
Borrowings (Note-7) 4,50,000 - 4,50,000
Provisions 3,50,000 - 3,50,000
Deferred tax liabilities (Net) 3,50,000 (50,000) 3,00,000
Current liabilities
Trade payables 22,00,000 - 22,00,000
Other financial liabilities 3,90,000 - 3,90,000
Other current liabilities 60,000 - 60,000
Provisions (Note-8) 12,00,000 (2,00,000) 10,00,000
TOTAL EQUITY AND 85,00,000 5,40,000 90,40,000
LIABILITIES
OTHER EQUITY
Retained Earnings (₹) Fair value reserve Total
As at 31 March, 2018 27,90,000 (W.N.1) 5,00,000 32,90,000
Working Note 1:
Retained earnings balance:
Balance as per Earlier GAAP 25,00,000
Transitional adjustment due to loan’s fair value 10,000
Transitional adjustment due to increase in mutual fund’s fair value 30,000
Transitional adjustment due to decrease in deferred tax liability 50,000
Transitional adjustment due to decrease in provisions (dividend) 2,00,000
Total 27,90,000
Disclosure forming part of financial statements:
Proposed dividend on equity shares is subject to the approval of the shareholders of the
company at the annual general meeting and should not recognized as liability as at the
Balance Sheet date.
Note 1: Property, plant & Equipment:
As per para D5 of Ind AS 101, an entity may elect to measure an item of property, plant and
equipment at the date of transition to Ind AS at its fair value and use that fair value as its

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
deemed cost at that date.
Para D7AA has to be applied for all items of property, plant and equipment. So, if D5
exemption is taken for buildings, Ind AS will have to be applied retrospectively for other assets
as well. Since, an entity elect to measure an item of property, plant and equipment at the date of
transition to Ind AS at its fair value and use that fair value as its deemed cost at that date, it is
assumed that the carrying amount of other assets based on retrospective application of Ind
AS is equal to their fair value of ₹10 lakhs.
Note 2: Goodwill:
Ind AS 103 mandatorily requires measuring the assets and liabilities of the acquire at its fair
value as on the date of acquisition. However, a first-time adopter may elect to not apply the
provisions of Ind AS 103 with retrospective effect that occurred prior to the date of transition
to Ind AS.
Hence company can continue to carry the goodwill in its books of account as per the
previousGAAP.
Note 3: Intangible assets:
Para D7 read with D6 of Ind AS 101 states that a first -time adopter may elect to use a
previous GAAP revaluation at, or before, the date of transition to Ind AS as deemed cost at the
date of the revaluation, if the revaluation was, at the date of the revaluation, broadly
comparable to:
a) Fair value; or
b) Cost or depreciated cost in accordance with Ind AS, adjusted to reflect, for example,
changes in a general or specific price index.
However, there is a requirement that Intangible assets must meet the definition and
recognitioncriteria as per Ind AS 38.
Hence, company can avail the exemption given in Ind AS 101 as on the date of transition to
use the carrying value as per previous GAAP.
Note 4: Loan:
Para B8C of Ind AS 101 states that if it is impracticable (as defined in Ind AS 8) for an entity
to apply retrospectively the effective interest method in Ind AS 109, the fair value of the
financial asset or the financial liability at the date of transition to Ind ASs shall be the new gross
carrying amount of that financial asset or the new amortised cost of that financial liability at the
date of transition to Ind AS.
Accordingly, ₹ 50,000 would be the gross carrying amount of loan and difference of ₹ 10,000 (₹
50,000 – ₹40,000) would be adjusted to retained earnings.
Note 5: Mutual Funds:
Para 29 of Ind AS 101 states that an entity is permitted to designate a previously recognised
financial asset as a financial asset measured at fair value through profit or loss in accordance
with paragraph D19A. The entity shall disclose the fair value of financial assets so designated
at the date of designation and their classification and carrying amount in the previous financial
statements.
D19A states that an entity may designate a financial asset as measured at fair value through
profit or loss in accordance with Ind AS 109 on the basis of the facts and circumstances that
exist at the date of transition to Ind AS.
Note 6: Trade receivables:
Para 14 of Ind AS 101 states that an entity’s estimates in accordance with Ind AS at the date of
transition to Ind AS shall be consistent with estimates made for the same date in accordance
with previous GAAP (after adjustments to reflect any difference in accounting policies), unless
there is objective evidence that those estimates were in error.
Para 15 of Ind AS 101 further states that an entity may receive information after the date of
transition to Ind AS about estimates that it had made under previous GAAP. In accordance
with paragraph 14, an entity shall treat the receipt of that information in the same way as non -

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
adjusting events after the reporting period in accordance with Ind AS 10, Events after the
Reporting Period.
The entity shall not reflect that new information in its opening Ind AS Balance Sheet (unless
the estimates need adjustment for any differences in accounting policies or there is objective
evidence that the estimates were in error). Instead, the entity shall reflect that new
information in profit or loss (or, if appropriate, other comprehensive income) for the yearended
31 March 2019.
Note 7: Government Grant:
Para 10A of Ind AS 20 states that the benefit of a government loan at a below-market rate of
interest is treated as a government grant. The loan shall be recognised and measured in
accordance with Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments. The benefit of the below-market rateof
interest shall be measured as the difference between the initial carrying value of the loan
determined in accordance with Ind AS 109, and the proceeds received. The benefit is
accounted for in accordance with this Standard.
However, Para B10 of Ind AS 101 states, a first-time adopter shall classify all government
loans received as a financial liability or an equity instrument in accordance with Ind AS 32,
Financial Instruments: Presentation. Except as permitted by paragraph B11, a first -time
adopter shall apply the requirements in Ind AS 109, Financial Instruments, and Ind AS 20,
Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance, prospectively to
government loans existing at the date of transition to Ind ASs and shall not recognise the
corresponding benefit of the government loan at a below-market rate of interest as a
government grant. Consequently, if a first-time adopter did not, under its previous GAAP,
recognise and measure a government loan at a below-market rate of interest on a basis
consistent with Ind AS requirements, it shall use its previous GAAP carrying amount of the loan
at the date of transition to Ind AS as the carrying amount of the loan in the opening Ind AS
Balance Sheet. An entity shall apply Ind AS 109 to the measurement of such loans after the
date of transition to Ind AS.
Note 8: Dividend
Dividend should be deducted from retained earnings during the year when it has been
declared and approved. Accordingly, the provision declared for preceding year should be
reversed (to rectify the wrong entry). Retained earnings would increase proportionately due to
such adjustment.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question 01:
Company A intends to restate its past business combinations with effect from 30 June 20 X0
(being a date prior to the transition date). If business combinations are restated, whether
certain other exemptions, such as the deemed cost exemption for property, plant and
equipment (PPE), can be adopted?
Solution:
Ind-AS 101 prescribes that an entity may elect to use one or more of the exemptions of the
Standard. As such, an entity may choose to adopt a combination of optional exemptions in
relation to the underlying account balances.
When the past business combinations after a particular date (30 June 20X0 in the given case)
are restated, it requires retrospective adjustments to the carrying amounts of acquiree’s assets
and liabilities on account of initial acquisition accounting of the acquiree’s net assets, the effects
of subsequent measurement of those net assets (including amortisation of non- current assets
that were recognised at its fair value), goodwill on consolidation and the consolidation
adjustments. Therefore, the goodwill and equity (including non-controlling interest (NCI))
cannot be computed by considering the deemed cost exemption for PPE. However, the entity
may adopt the deemed cost exemption for its property, plant and equipment other than those

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
acquired through business combinations.
Question 02:
X Ltd. was using cost model for its property, plant and equipment till March 31, 20 X2 under
previous GAAP. The Ind AS become applicable to the company for financial year
beginning April 1, 20X2. On April 1, 20X1, i.e., the date of its transition to Ind AS, it used fair
value as the deemed cost in respect of its property, plant and equipment. X Ltd. wants to follow
revaluation model as its accounting policy in respect of its property, plant and equipment for
thefirst annual Ind AS financial statements. Whether use of fair values as deemed cost on the
date of transition and use of revaluation model in the first annual Ind AS financial statements
would amount to a change in accounting policy?
Solution:
In the instant case, X Ltd. is using revaluation model for property, plant and equipment for the
first annual Ind AS financial statements and using fair value of property, plant and equipment
on the date of the transition, as deemed cost. Since the entity is using fair value at the
transition date as well as in the first Ind AS financial statements, there is no change in
accounting policy and mere use of the term “deemed cost‟ would not mean that there is
change in accounting policy.
Question 03:
Y Ltd. is a first- time adopter of Ind AS. The date of transition is April 1, 20X5. On April 1,
20X0, it obtained a 7-year US $ 1,00,000 loan. It has been exercising the option provided in
Paragraph 46/46A of AS 11 and has been amortising the exchange differences in respect of
this loan over the balance period of such loan. On the date of transition to Ind AS, Y Ltd.
wants to discontinue the accounting policy as per the previous GAAP and follow the
requirements of Ind AS 21 with respect to recognition of foreign exchange differences.
Whether the Company is permitted to do so?
Solution:
Ind AS 101 provides that a first-time adopter may continue the policy adopted for accounting for
exchange differences arising from translation of long-term foreign currency monetary items
of the first Ind AS financial reporting period as per the previous GAAP. Ind AS101 gives an
option to continue the existing accounting policy. Hence, Y Ltd. may opt for discontinuation of
accounting policy as per previous GAAP and follow the requirements of Ind AS 21. The
cumulative amount lying in the Foreign Currency Monetary Item Translation Difference
Account (FCMITDA) as per AS 11 should be de recognised by an adjustment against
retained earnings on the date of transition.
Question 04:
A company has chosen to elect the deemed cost exemption in accordance with Ind AS 101.
However, it does not wish to continue with its existing policy of capitalising exchange
fluctuation on long term foreign currency monetary items to property, plant and equipment i.e.,
it does not want to elect the exemption available as per Ind AS 101. In such a case, how would
the company be required to adjust the foreign exchange fluctuation already capitalised to the
cost of property, plant and equipment under previous GAAP?
Solution:
Ind AS 101 permits to continue with the carrying value for all of its property, plant and
equipment as per the previous GAAP and use that as deemed cost for the purposes of first-
time adoption of Ind AS. Accordingly, the carrying value of property, plant and equipment as
per previous GAAP as at the date of transition need not be adjusted for the exchange fluctuations
capitalized to property, plant and equipment. Separately, it allows a company to continue with its
existing policy for accounting for exchange differences arising from translation of long-term foreign
currency monetary items recognised in the financial statements for the period ending immediately
before the beginning of the first Ind AS financial reporting period as per the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
previous GAAP. Accordingly, given that Ind AS 101 provides these two choices independent of
each other, it may be possible for an entity to choose the deemed cost exemption for all of its
property, plant and equipment and not elect the exemption of continuing the previous GAAP
policy of capitalising exchange fluctuation to property, plant and equipment. In such a case, in
the given case, a harmonious interpretation of the two exemptions would require the company to
recognise the property, plant and equipment at the transition date at the previous GAAP
carrying value (without any adjustment for the exchanges differences capitalized under previous
GAAP) but for the purposes of the first (and all subsequent) Ind AS financial statements, foreign
exchange fluctuation on all long term foreign currency borrowings that arose after the transition
date would be recognised in the statement of profit and loss.
Question 05: (RTP:MAY,2019)
XYZ Pvt. Ltd. is a company registered under the Companies Act, 2013 following Accounting
Standards notified under Companies (Accounting Standards) Rules, 2006. The Company has
decided to voluntarily adopt Ind AS w.e.f 1st April, 20X2 with a transition date of 1st April, 20X1.
The Company has one Wholly Owned Subsidiary and one Joint Venture which are into
manufacturing of automobile spare parts.
The consolidated financial statements of the Company under Indian GAAP are as under:
Consolidated Financial Statements (₹ in Lakhs)
Particulars 31.03.20X2 31.03.20X1
Shareholder's Funds
Reserves & Surplus 16,547 16,597
Long Term Borrowings 1,000 1,000
Long Term Provisions 1,101 691
Other Long-Term Liabilities 5,202 5,904
Current Liabilities
Short Term Provisions 500 475
Total 42,208 41,075
Non-Current Assets
Property Plant & Equipment 21,488 22,288
Goodwill on Consolidation of subsidiary and JV 1,507 1,507
Investment Property 5,245 5,245
Long Term Loans & Advances 6,350 6,350
Current Assets
Investments · 1,263 3,763
Other Current Assets 1,554 104
Total 42,208 41,075
The Company has entered into a joint arrangement by acquiring 50% of the equity shares of
ABC Pvt. Ltd. Presently, the same has been accounted as per the proportionate consolidated
method. The proportionate share of assets and liabilities of ABC Pvt. Ltd. included in the
consolidated financial statement of XYZ Pvt. Ltd. is as under:
Particulars ₹ in Lakhs
Property, Plant & Equipment 1,200
Long Term Loans & Advances 405

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Trade Receivables 280
Other Current Assets 50
Trade Payables 75
Short Term Provisions 35
Solution:
As per paras D31AA and D31AB of Ind AS 101, when changing from proportionate
consolidation to the equity method, an entity shall recognise its investment in the joint venture
at transition date to Ind AS.
That initial investment shall be measured as the aggregate of the carrying amounts of the
assets and liabilities that the entity had previously proportionately consolidated, including any
goodwill arising from acquisition. If the goodwill previously belonged to a larger cash-
generating unit, or to a group of cash-generating units, the entity shall allocate goodwill to the
joint venture on the basis of the relative carrying amounts of the joint venture and the cash-
generating unit or group of cash-generating units to which it belonged. The balance of the
investment in joint venture at the date of transition to Ind AS, determined in accordance with
paragraph D31AA above is regarded as the deemed cost of the investment at initial recognition.
Accordingly, the deemed cost of the investment will be
Goodwill (Refer Note below) 119
Long Term Loans & Advances 405
Trade Receivables 280
Total Assets 2,054
Less: Trade Payables 75
Deemed cost of the investment in JV 1,944
Calculation of proportionate goodwill share of Joint Venture ie ABC Pvt. Ltd.
Goodwill 1,507
Long Term Loans & Advances 6,350
Trade Receivables 1,818
Total Assets 32,067
Less: Trade Payables 8,455
23,137
Note: Only those assets and liabilities have been taken into account for calculation of
proportionate goodwill share of Joint Venture‟, which were given in the question as
proportionate share of assets and liabilities of ABC Ltd. added to XYZ Ltd.‟ Proportionate
Goodwill of Joint Venture”
= [(Goodwill on consolidation of subsidiary and JV/Total relative net asset) x Net asset of
JV] = (1507 / 23,137) x 1825 = 119 (approx.)
Accordingly, the proportional share of assets and liabilities of Joint Venture will be removed
from the respective values assets and liabilities appearing in the balance sheet on 31.3.20X1
and Investment in JV will appear under non-current asset in the transition date balance sheet
as on 1.4.20X1.
Adjustments made in previous GAAP balance sheet to arrive at Transition date Ind AS Balance
Sheet

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Transition Date Ind AS Balance Sheet of XYZ Pvt. Ltd. as at 1st April, 20X1
Particulars Previous Ind AS Adjustment Ind AS GAAP
GAAP
Non-Current Assets
Property, Plant & Equipment 22,288 (1,200) 21,088
Investment Property 5,245 - 5,245
Intangible assets - Goodwill 1,507 (119) 1,388
on Consolidation
Financial Assets
Long Term Loans & Advances 6,350 (405) 5,945
Non- current investment in JV - 1,944 1,944
Current Assets
Financial Assets
Investments 3,763 - 3,763
Trade Receivables 1,818 (280) 1,538
Other Current Assets 104 (50) 54
Total 41,075 (110) 40,965
Equity
Share Capital 7,953 - 7,953
Other equity 16,597 - 16,597
Borrowings 1,000 1,000
Long -Term Provisions 691 691
Other Long -Term Liabilities 5,904 5,904
Current Liabilities
Trade Payables 8455 (75) 8380
Short Term Provisions 475 (35) 440
Total 41075 (110) 40965
Question 06: (RTP: N O V E M B E R , 2019)
Mathur India Private Limited has to present its first financials under Ind AS for the year ended
31st March, 20X3. The transition date is 1st April, 20X1.
The following adjustments were made upon transition to Ind AS:
(a) The Company opted to fair value its land as on the date on transition.
The fair value of the land as on 1st April, 20X1 was ₹ 10 crores. The carrying amount as on 1st
April, 20X1 under the existing GAAP was ₹4.5 crores.
(b) The Company has recognised a provision for proposed dividend of ₹ 60 lacs and related
dividend distribution tax of ₹ 18 lacs during the year ended 31st March, 20X1. It was written
back as on opening balance sheet date.
(c) The Company fair values its investments in equity shares on the date of transition. The
increase on account of fair valuation of shares is ₹75 lacs.
(d) The Company has an Equity Share Capital of ₹ 80 crores and Redeemable Preference
Share Capital of ₹25 crores.
(e) The reserves and surplus as on 1st April, 20X1 before transition to Ind AS was ₹ 95 crores
representing ₹ 40 crores of general reserve and ₹ 5 crores of capital reserve acquired out of
business combination and balance is surplus in the Retained Earnings.
(f) The company identified that the preference shares were in nature of financialliabilities.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
What is the balance of total equity (Equity and other equity) as on 1st April, 20X1 after transition
to Ind AS? Show reconciliation between total equity as per AS (Accounting Standards) and as
per Ind AS to be presented in the opening balance sheet as on 1st April, 20X1.
Ignore deferred tax impact.
Solution:
Computation of balance total equity as on 1st April, 20X1 after transition to Ind AS
₹ in crore
Share capital- Equity share Capital 80
Other Equity
General Reserve 40
Capital Reserve 5
Retained Earnings (95-5-40) 50
Add: Increase in value of land (10-4.5) 5.5
Add: De recognition of proposed dividend (0.6 +0.18) 0.78
Add: Increase in value of Investment 0.75 57.03 102.03
Balance total equity as on 1 st April, 20X1 after
Transition to Ind AS 182.03
Reconciliation between Total Equity as per AS and Ind AS to be presented in the opening
balance sheet as on 1st April, 20X1
₹in crore
Equity share capital 80
Redeemable Preference share capital 25
105
Reserves and Surplus 95
Total Equity as per AS 200
Adjustment due to reclassification
Preference share capital classified as financial liability (25)
Adjustment due to derecognition
Proposed Dividend not considered as liability as on 1st 0.78
April 20X1
Adjustment due to remeasurement
Increase in the value of Land due to remeasurement at 5.5
fair value
Increase in the value of investment due to remeasurement 0.75 6.25
at fair value
Equity as on 1st April, 20X1 after transition to Ind AS 182.03
Question 07: (RTP:M AY,2018)
ABC Ltd is a government company and is a first-time adopter of Ind AS. As per the previous
GAAP, the contributions received by ABC Ltd. from the government (which holds 100%
shareholding in ABC Ltd.) which is in the nature of promoters‟ contribution have been
recognised in capital reserve and treated as part of shareholders‟ funds in accordance with the
provisions of AS 12, Accounting for Government Grants.
State whether the accounting treatment of the grants in the nature of promoters‟ contribution as
per AS 12 is also permitted under Ind AS 20 Accounting for Government Grants and
Disclosure of Government Assistance. If not, then what will be the accounting treatment of
such grants recognised in capital reserve as per previous GAAP on the date of transition to Ind
AS.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Solution:
Paragraph 2 of Ind AS 20, “Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government
Assistance” inter alia states that the Standard does not deal with government participation in
theownership of the entity.
Since ABC Ltd. is a government company, it implies that government has 100% shareholding in
the entity. Accordingly, the entity needs to determine whether the paymentis provided as a
shareholder contribution or as a government. Equity contributions will be recorded in equity while
grants will be shown in the Statement of Profit and Loss.
Where it is concluded that the contributions are in the nature of government grant, the
entity shall apply the principles of Ind AS 20 retrospectively as specified in Ind AS 101
“First Time Adoption of Ind AS‟. Ind AS 20 requires all grants to be recognised as income on a
systematic basis over the periods in which the entity recognises as expenses the related
costs for which the grants are intended to compensate. Unlike AS 12, Ind AS 20 requires the
grant to be classified as either a capital or an income grant and does not permit recognition
of government grants in the nature of promoter’s contribution directly to shareholders‟ funds.
Where it is concluded that the contributions are in the nature of shareholder contributions and
are recognised in capital reserve under previous GAAP, the provisions of paragraph 10 of Ind AS
101 would be applied which states that except in certain cases, an entity shall in its opening Ind
AS Balance Sheet:
(a) recognise all assets and liabilities whose recognition is required by Ind AS;
(b) not recognise items as assets or liabilities if Ind AS do not permit such recognition;
(c) reclassify items that it recognised in accordance with previous GAAP as one type ofasset,
liability or component of equity, but are a different type of asset, liability or component of
equity in accordance with Ind AS; and
(d) apply Ind AS in measuring all recognised assets and liabilities.
Accordingly, as per the above requirements of paragraph 10(c) in the given case,
contributions recognised in the Capital Reserve should be transferred to appropriate category
under “Other Equity‟ at the date of transition to Ind AS.
RTP/MTP/PAST PAPERS
MTP OCT 2020
QUESTION 1
Following are the Financial Statements of Abraham Ltd.:
Balance Sheet
Particulars Note No. As at 31 March,2020 (₹ in lakh)

Shareholders’ funds
Share capital (shares of ₹10 each) 1,000
Reserves and surplus 1 2,400
Long term borrowings 2 5,700
Deferred tax liabilities 3 400
Current liabilities
Trade payables 300
Short-term provisions 300
Total 10,300
ASSETS

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Non-current assets
Deferred tax assets 3 700
Current assets
Inventories 1,500
Trade receivables 5 1,100
Cash and bank balances 2,000
Total 10,300
Statement of Profit & Loss
Particulars NoteNo. Year ended 31 March 2020
(₹ in lakh)
Revenue from operations 6,000
Expenses:
Employee benefit expense 1,200
Operating costs 3,199
Depreciation 450
Total expenses 4,849
Profit before tax 1,151
Tax expense 201
Profit after tax 950
Notes to Accounts:
Note 1: Reserves and surplus (₹ in lakh)
Capital reserve 500
Surplus from P & L
Opening balance 550
Additions 950 1,500
Reserve for foreseeable loss 400
Total 2,400
Note 2: Long-term borrowings
Term loan from bank 5,700
Total 5,700
Note 3: Deferred tax
Deferred tax liability 400
Total 300
Note 4: Other current liabilities
Unclaimed dividends 10
Billing in advance 150
Other current liabilities 40
Total 200
Note 5: Trade Receivables
Considered good (outstanding within 6 months) 1,065
Considered doubtful (due from past 1 year) 40
Provision for doubtful debts (5)
Total 1,100
(i) Share capital comprises of 100 lakh shares of ₹10 each.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(ii) Term Loan from bank for ₹ 5,700 lakh also includes interest accrued and due of 700lakhs
as on the reporting date.
(iii) Reserve for foreseeable loss is created against a service contract due within 6months.
(iv) Inventory should be valued at cost ₹1,500 lakh, NRV as on date is ₹1,200 lakh.
(v) A dividend of 10% was declared by the Board of directors of the company.
(vi) Accrued Interest income of ₹300 lakh is not booked in the books of the company.
(vii) Deferred taxes related to taxes on income are levied by the same governing taxlaws.
Identify and report the errors and misstatements in the above extracts and prepare corrected
Balance Sheet and Statement of Profit & Loss and where required the relevant notes to the
accounts with explanations thereof.
Solution:
Following adjustments /rectifications are required to be done
1. Reserve for foreseeable loss for ₹ 400 lakh, due within 6 months, should be a part of provisions. Hence,
it needs to be regrouped. If it was also part of previous year’s comparatives, a note should be added in the
notes to account on the regrouping done this year.
2. Interest accrued and due of ₹ 700 lakh on term loan will be a part of current liabilities. Thus, it should be
shown under the heading “Other Current Liabilities”.
3. As per Ind AS 2, inventories are measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value. The amount
of any write down of inventories to net realisable value is recognised as an expense in the period the write-
down occurs. Hence, the inventories should be valued at ₹ 1,200 lakh and write down of ₹ 300 lakh (₹ 1,500 lakh –
₹ 1,200 lakh) will be added to the operating cost of the entity.
4. In the absence of the declaration date of dividend in the question, it is presumed that the dividend
is declared after the reporting date. Hence, no adjustment for the same is made in the financial year 2019-2020.
However, a note will be given separately in this regard (not forming part of item of financial statements).
5. Accrued income will be shown in the Statement of Profit and Loss as ‘Other Income’ and as ‘Other
Current
Asset’ in the Balance Sheet.
6. Since the deferred tax liabilities and deferred tax assets relate to taxes on income levied by the
same governing taxation laws, these shall be set off, in accordance with Ind AS 12. The net DTA of ₹ 300 lakh will be
shown in the balance sheet.
7. As per Division II of Schedule III to the Companies Act, 2013, the Statement of Profit and Loss
should present the Earnings per Equity Share.
8. The presentation of the notes to ‘Trade Receivables’ will be modified as per the requirements
of Division II of Schedule III.
Balance Sheet of Abraham Ltd. For the year ended 31 March 2020
Note No. (₹ in lakh)
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Current assets
Inventories 1,200
Financial assets
Cash and cash equivalents 2,000
Others financial asset (accrued interest) 300
TOTAL 9,900
Equity
Equity share capital 3 1,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Other equity 4 2,000
Long-term borrowings 5 5,000
Current liabilities
Trade payables 300
Others 6 710
Short-term provisions (300 + 400) 7 700
TOTAL 9,900
Statement of Profit and Loss of Abraham Ltd.
For the year ended 31st March, 2020

Other income 300
Total income 6,300
Expenses
Operating costs 9 3,199
Change in inventories cost 300
Employee benefits expense 1,200
Depreciation 450
Tax expense (201)
Profit for the period 950
Earnings per equity share
Basic 9.5
Diluted 9.5
Number of equity shares (face value of ₹ 10 each) 100 lakh
Statement of Changes in Equity of Abraham Ltd.
For the year ended 31 March 2020
Equity Share Capital (₹ in lakh)
Balance at the beginning of the reporting Changes in Equity sharecapital Balance at the end of
period during the year the reporting period
1,000 0 1,000
Other Equity (₹ in lakh)
Particulars Reserves & Surplus Total
Capital reserve Retained Earnings
Balance at the beginning of the year 500* 550 1,050
Total comprehensive income for the year 950 950
Balance at the end of the year 500 1,500 2,000
Note: Capital reserve given in the Note 1 of the question is assumed to be brought forward fromthe
previous year. However, alternatively, if it may be assumed as created during the year.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
MTP APRIL 2018
Question 2
X Ltd. has a subsidiary Y Ltd. On first time adoption of Ind AS by Y Ltd., it availed the optional exemption of not
restating its past business combinations. However, X Ltd. in its consolidated financial statements has decided to
restate all its past business combinations.
Whether the amounts recorded by subsidiary need to be adjusted while preparing the consolidated financial
statements of X Ltd. considering that X Ltd. does not avail the business combination exemption?
Will the answer be different if X Ltd. adopts Ind AS after Y Ltd? (5 Marks)
Solution
As per para C1 of Appendix C of Ind AS 101, a first-time adopter may elect not to apply Ind AS 103 retrospectively
to past business combinations (business combinations that occurred before the date of transition to Ind AS).
However, if a first-time adopter restates any business combination to comply with Ind AS 103, it shall restate
all later business combinations and shall also apply Ind AS 110 from that same date.
Based on the above, if X Ltd. restates past business combinations, it would have to be applied to all business
combinations of the group including those by subsidiary Y Ltd. for the purpose of Consolidated Financial
Statements.
Para D17 of Appendix D of Ind AS 101 states that if an entity becomes a first-time adopter later than its subsidiary
the entity shall, in its consolidated financial statements, measure the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary at the
same carrying amounts as in the financial statements of the subsidiary, after adjusting for consolidation and
equity accounting adjustments and for the effects of the business combination in which the entity acquired the
subsidiary. Thus, in case where the parent adopts Ind AS later than the subsidiary then it does not change the
amounts alreadyrecognised by the subsidiary.
RTP: M A Y , 2021
Question:3
HIM Limited having net worth of ₹ 250 crores is required to adopt Ind AS from 1 April, 20X2 in accordance with
the Companies (Indian Accounting Standard) Rules 2015.
Rahul, the senior manager, of HIM Ltd. has identified following issues which need specific attention of CFO
so thatopening Ind AS balance sheet as on the date of transition can be prepared:
Issue 1 : As part of Property, Plant and Equipment, Company has elected to measure land at its fair value and
want to use this fair value as deemed cost on the date of transition. The carrying value of land as on the date of
transition was ₹ 5,00,000. The land was acquired for a consideration of ₹ 5,00,000. However, the fair value of land as
on the date of transitionwas ₹8,00,000.
Issue 2 : Under Ind AS, the Company has designated mutual funds as investments at fair value through profit or loss.
The value of mutual funds as per previous GAAP was ₹ 4,00,000 (at cost). However, the fair value of mutual funds as
on the date of transition was ₹5,00,000.
Issue 3 : Company had taken a loan from another entity. The loan carries an interest rate of 7% and it had incurred
certain transaction costs while obtaining the same. It was carried at cost on its initial recognition. The principal amount is
to be repaid in equal instalments over the period of loan. Interest is also payable at each year end. The fair value of loan as
on the date of transition is ₹ 1,80,000 as against the carrying amount of loan which at present equals ₹2,00,000.
Issue 4 : The company has declared dividend of ₹ 30,000 for last financial year. On the date of transition, the declared
dividend has already been deducted by the accountant from the company’s ‘Reserves & Surplus’ and the dividend
payable has been grouped under ‘Provisions’. The dividend was only declared by board of directors at that time andit was
not approved in the annual general meeting of shareholders. However, subsequently when the meeting was held it
was ratified by the shareholders.
Issue 5 : The company had acquired intangible assets as trademarks amounting to ₹ 2,50,000. The company
assumes to have indefinite life of these assets. The fair value of the intangible assets as on the date of transition was ₹
3,00,000. However, the company wants to carry the intangible assets at ₹2,50,000 only.
Issue 6 : After consideration of possible effects as per Ind AS, the deferred tax impact is computed as ₹ 25,000. This amount
will further increase the portion of deferred tax liability. There is no requirement to carry out the separate calculation of
deferred tax on account of Ind AS adjustments.
Management wants to know the impact of Ind AS in the financial statements of company for its general

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
understanding. Prepare Ind AS Impact Analysis Report (Extract) for HIM Limited for presentation to the management
wherein you are required to discuss the corresponding differences between Earlier IGAAP (AS) and Ind AS against
each identified issue for preparation of transition date balance sheet. Also pass journal entry for each issue.
Solution: Preliminary Impact Assessment on Transition to Ind AS in HIM Limited’s Financial Statements
Issue 1: Fair value as deemed cost for property plant and equipment:
Accounting Standards Ind AS Impact on Company’s
(Erstwhile IGAAP) financial statements
As per AS 10, Property,Ind AS 101 allows entity The company has decided to adopt fair
Plant value as deemed cost in this case. Since
and Equipment is recognised to elect to measure fair value exceeds book value, so the
at book value should be brought up to fair
cost less depreciation. Property, Plant and value. The resulting impact of fair
Equipment on the valuation of land ₹ 3,00,000 should be
transition date at its fair adjusted in other equity.
value or previous GAAP
carrying value (book
value) as deemed cost.
Journal Entry on the date of transition
Property Plant and Equipment Dr. 3,00,000
To Revaluation Surplus (OCI- Other Equity) 3,00,000
Issue 2: Fair valuation of Financial Assets:
Accounting Standards Ind AS Impact on Company’s financial
(Erstwhile IGAAP) statements
As per Accounting On transition, recorded at cost) are initially recognized at
Standard, investments Financial assets including fair value.
are measured at lower ofInvestments are measured at fairThe subsequent measurement of such assets
cost and fair value. values except for investments inare based on its categorization either Fair
subsidiaries, associates and JVs'Value through Profit & Loss (FVTPL) or
which are recorded at cost. FairValue through, Other
Comprehensive Income (FVTOCI) or at
Amortised Cost based on business
model assessment and contractual cash
flow characteristics.
Since investment in mutual fund are
designated at FVTPL, increase of ₹
1,00,000 in mutual funds fair value
would increase the value of
investments with corresponding
increase to Retained Earnings.
Investment in mutual funds Dr. 1,00,000
To Retained earnings 1,00,000
Issue 3: Borrowings - Processing fees/transaction cost:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
As per AS, such As per Ind AS, such expenditure Fair value as on the date of transition
expenditure is charged to is amortised over the period of the is ` 1,80,000 as against its book
Profit and loss account loan. value of 2,00,000. Accordingly, the
or capitalized as the Ind AS 101 states that if it is difference of ` 20,000 is adjusted
case may be impracticable for an entity to through retained earnings.
apply retrospectively the effective
interest method in Ind AS 109, the
fair value of the financial asset or
the financial liability at the date of
transition to Ind AS shall be the new
gross carrying amount of that
financial asset or the new amortised
cost of that financial liability.
Particulars Debit (`) Credit (`)
Borrowings / Loan payable Dr. 20,000
To Retained earnings 20,000
Issue 4: Proposed dividend:
Accounting Ind AS Impact on Company’s financial
Standards (Erstwhile statements
IGAAP)
As per AS, provision forAs per Ind AS, liability for proposed Since dividend should be deducted from
proposed divided is made in dividend Is recognised in the year in retained earnings during the year when it
the year when it has been which it has been declared and has been declared and approved.
declared and approved. Therefore, the provision declared for
approved. preceding year should be reversed (to
rectify the wrong entry). Retained
earnings would increase
proportionately due to such
adjustment
Provisions Dr. 30,000
To Retained earnings 30,000
Issue 5 : Intangible assets:
Accounting Standards Ind AS Impact on
(Erstwhile IGAAP) Company’s financial statements
The useful life of an intangible assetThe useful life of an intangible Consequently, there would be no
cannot be indefinite under IGAAPasset like brand/trademark can be impact as on the date of transition
principles. The Company amortisedindefinite. Not required to besince company intends to use the
brand/trademark on a straight-line amortised and only tested forcarrying amount instead of book
basis over maximum of 10 years as impairment. value at the date of transition.
per AS 26. Company can avail the exemption
given in Ind AS 101 as on the
date of transition to use the
carrying value as per previous
GAAP.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Issue 6: Deferred tax
As per AS, deferred taxes are As per Ind AS, deferred taxes are On date of transition to Ind AS,
accounted as per income accounted as per balance sheet deferred tax liability would be
statementapproach. approach. increased by `25,000.
Retained earnings Dr. 25,000
To Deferred tax liability 25,000
MTP APR 2021
QUESTION
Master Creator Private Limited (a subsidiary of listed company) is an Indian company to whom Ind
AS are applicable. Following draft balance sheet is prepared by the accountant for year ending 31st
March 20
Balance Sheet of Master Creator Private Limited as at 31st March, 20X2
Particulars
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Financial assets
Other financial assets (Security deposits) 4,62,500
Other non-current assets (capital advances) 17,33,480
Deferred tax assets 2,54,150
Current assets
Trade receivables 7,25,000
Financial assets
Investments 55,000
Other financial assets 2,17,370
Cash and cash equivalents 1,16,950
TOTAL ASSETS 1,27,00,000
Equity share capital 10,00,000
Other Equity 25,00,150
Deferred tax liability 4,74,850
Borrowings 64,00,000
Long term provisions 5,24,436
Current liabilities
Other financial liabilities 2,00,564
Trade payables 6,69,180
TOTAL EQUITY AND LIABILITIES 1,27,00,000
1. On 1st April 20X1, 8% convertible loan with a nominal value of Rs. 64,00,000 was issued by
the entity. It is redeemable on 31st March 20X5 also at par. Alternatively, it may be
converted into equity shares on the basis of 100 new shares for each Rs. 200 worth of loan.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
An equivalent loan without the conversion option would have carried interest at 10%.
Interest of Rs. 5,12,000 has already been paid and included as a finance cost. Present
Value (PV) rates are as follows:
Year End @ 8% @ 10%
1 0.93 0.91
2 0.86 0.83
3 0.79 0.75
4 0.73 0.68
2. After the reporting period, the board of directors have recommended dividend of Rs. 50,000
for the year ending 31st March, 20X1. However, the same has not been yet accounted by
the company in its financials.
3. ‘Other current financial liabilities’ consists of the following:
Wages payable 21,890
Salary payable 61,845
TDS payable 81,265
Interest accrued on trade payables 35,564
4. Property, Plant and Equipment consists following items:
Particulars Amount (Rs.) Remarks
Building 37,50,250 It is held for administration purposes
Land 15,48,150 It is held for capital appreciation
Vehicles 12,37,500 These are used as the conveyance for employees
Factory premises 20,01,600 The construction was started on 31st March 20X2 and
consequently no depreciation has been charged on it.
The construction activities will continue to happen, and it
will take 2 years to complete and be available for use.
5. The composition of ‘other current financial assets’ is as follows:
Interest accrued on bank deposits 57,720
Prepaid expenses 90,000
Royalty receivable from dealers 69,650
6. Current Investments consist of securities held for trading which are carried at fair value
through profit & loss. Investments were purchased on 1st January,20X2 at Rs.55,000 and
accordingly are shown at cost as at 31st March 20X2. The fair value of said investments as
on 31st March 20X2 is Rs.60,000.
7. Trade payables and Trade receivables are due within 12 months.
8. There has been no changes in equity share capital during the year.
9. Entity has the intention to set off a deferred tax asset against a deferred tax liability as they
relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the entity has a legally
enforceable right to set off taxes.
10. Other Equity consists retained earnings only. The opening balance of retained earnings was
Rs.21,25,975 as at 1st April 20X1.
11. No dividend has been actually paid by company during the year.
12. Assume that the deferred tax impact, if any on account of above adjustments is correctly
calculated in financials.
Being Finance & Accounts manager, you are required to identify the errors and misstatements if
any in the balance sheet of Master Creator Private Limited and prepare corrected balance sheet
with details on the face of the balance sheet i.e. no need to prepare notes to accounts, after
considering the additional information. Provide necessary explanations/workings for the treated
items, wherever necessary. (16 Marks)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
SOLUTION
(a) Balance Sheet of Master Creator Private Limited as at 31st March, 20X2
Particulars Working Note
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 1 49,87,750
Capital work-in-progress 2 20,01,600
investment Property 3 15,48,150
Financial assets
Other financial assets (Security deposits) 4,62,500
Other non-current assets (capital advances) 4 17,33,480
Current assets
Financial assets
Investments (55000+5000) 5 60,000
Trade receivables 6 7,25,000
Cash and cash equivalents 7 1,16,950
Other financial assets 8 2,17,370
Other current assets (Prepaid expenses) 8 90,000
TOTAL ASSETS 1,24,50,850
Equity share capital A 10,00,000
Other Equity B 28,44,606
8% Convertible loan 11 60,60,544
Long term provisions 5,24,436
Deferred tax liability 12 2,20,700
Current liabilities
Trade payables 13 6,69,180
Other financial liabilities 14 1,19,299
Other current liabilities(TDS PAYABLE) 15 81,625
TOTAL EQUITY AND LIABILITIES 1,24,50,850
Statement of changes in equity For the year ended 31st March, 20X2
A. Equity Share Capital
Balance (Rs.)
As at 31st March, 20X1 10,00,000
Changes in equity share capital during the year -
As at 31st March, 20X2 10,00,000
B. Other Equity
Retained Equity component of Total (Rs)
Earnings Compound Financial
(Rs.). Instrument (Rs.)
As at 31st March, 20X1 Total 21,25,975 - 21,25,975
comprehensive income for the year 2,93,671 - 2,93,671
(25,00,150 + 5,000 - 85,504-
21,25,975) Issue of compound - 4,24,960 4,24,960
financial instrument during the year

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
As at 31st March, 20X2 24,19,646 4,24,960 28,44,606
Disclosure forming part of Financial Statements:
Proposed dividend on equity shares is subject to the approval of the shareholders of the company
at the annual general meeting and not recognized as liability as at the Balance Sheet date. (Note 9)
Notes/ Workings: (for adjustments/ explanations)
1. Property, plant and equipment are tangible items that: (a) are held for use in the production
or supply of goods or services, for rental to others, or for administrative purposes; and (b)
are expected to be used during more than one period. Therefore, the items of PPE are
Buildings (Rs. 37,50,250) and Vehicles (Rs. 12,37,500), since those assets are held for
administrative purposes.
2. Property, plant and equipment which are not ready for intended use as on the date of
Balance Sheet are disclosed as “Capital work-in-progress”. It would be classified from PPE
to Capital work-in-progress.
3. Investment property is property (land or a building—or part of a building—or both) held (by
the owner or by the lessee as a right-of-use asset) to earn rentals or for capital appreciation
or both, rather than for:
(a) use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes; or
(b) sale in the ordinary course of business. Therefore, Land held for capital appreciation
should be classified as Investment property rather than PPE.
4. Assets for which the future economic benefit is the receipt of goods or services, rather than
the right to receive cash or another financial asset, are not financial assets.
5. Current investments here are held for the purpose of trading. Hence, it is a financial asset
classified as FVTPL. Any gain in its fair value will be recognised through profit or loss.
Hence, Rs. 5,000 (60,000 – 55,000) increase in fair value of financial asset will be
recognised in profit and loss.
6. A contractual right to receive cash or another financial asset from another entity is a
financial asset. Trade receivables is a financial asset in this case and hence should be
reclassified.
7. Cash is a financial asset. Hence it should be reclassified.
8. Other current financial assets:
Interest accrued on bank deposits 57,720
Royalty receivable from dealers 69,650
Total 1,27,370
Prepaid expenses does not result into receipt of any cash or financial asset. However, it results into
future goods or services. Hence, it is not a financial asset.
9. As per Ind AS 10, ‘Events after the Reporting Period’, If dividends are declared after the
reporting period but before the financial statements are approved for issue, the dividends
are not recognized as a liability at the end of the reporting period because no obligation
exists at that time. Such dividends are disclosed in the notes in accordance with Ind AS 1 ,
Presentation of Financial Statements.
10. ‘Other Equity’ cannot be shown under ‘Non-current liabilities’. Accordingly, it is reclassified
under ‘Equity’.
11. There are both ‘equity’ and ‘debt’ features in the instrument. An obligation to pay cash i.e.
interest at 8% per annum and a redemption amount will be treated as ‘financial liability’ while
option to convert the loan into equity shares is the equity element in the instrument.
Therefore, convertible loan is a compound financial instrument. Calculation of debt and
equity component and amount to be recognised in the books:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
S.No YEAR INT AMT DISCFACTOR AMOUNT
@8% @10%
YEAR 1 20X2 5,12,000 0.91 4,65,920
YEAR 2 20X3 5,12,000 0.83 4,24,960
YEAR 3 20X4 5,12,000 0.75 3,84,000
YEAR 4 20X5 69,12,000 0.68 47,00,160
AMOUNT TO BE RECOGNISED AS A 59,75,040
LIABILITY
INITIAL (64,00,000)
PROCEEDS
AMOUNT TO BE RECOGNISED AS A EQUITY 4,24,960
* In year 4, the loan note will be redeemed; therefore, the cash outflow would be Rs. 69,12,000 (Rs.
64,00,000 + Rs. 5,12,000).
Presentation in the Financial Statements:
In Statement of Profit and Loss for the year ended on 31 March 20X2
Finance cost to be recognised in the Statement of Profit and Loss Rs. 5,97,504
(59,75,040 x 10%)
Less: Already charged to the Statement of Profit and Loss (Rs.5,12,000)
Additional finance charge required to be recognised in the Statement of Rs. 85,504
Profit and Loss
In Balance Sheet as at 31 March 20X2
Equity
Other Equity (8% convertible loan) 4,24,960
Non-current liability Financial liability [8% convertible loan – [(59,75,040+ 60,60,544
5,97,504– 5,12,000)]
12. Since entity has the intention to set off deferred tax asset against deferred tax liability and
the entity has a legally enforceable right to set off taxes, hence their balance on net basis
should be shown as:
Deferred tax liability 4,74,850
Deferred tax asset (2,54,150)
Deferred tax liability (net) 2,20,700
13. A liability that is a contractual obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset to another
entity is a financial liability. Trade payables is a financial liability in this case.
14. ‘Other current financial liabilities’:
Wages payable 21,890
Salary payable 61,845
Interest accrued on trade payables 35,564
Total 1,19,299
15. Liabilities for which there is no contractual obligation to deliver cash or other financial asset
to another entity, are not financial liabilities. Hence, TDS payable should be reclassified from
‘Other current financial liabilities’ to ‘Other current liabilities’ since it is not a contractual
obligation.
MTP AUG 2018 (MAY 2019)
QUESTION
Following is the financial statements of Arish Ltd. prepared on the basis of Accounting Standards:
(Note all figures are in INR million)
Particulars Note No. As at 31 March,2020 (₹ in lakh)


UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Share capital (shares of ₹10 each) 1,000
Long term borrowings 2 5,555
Deferred tax liabilities 3 200
Current liabilities
Trade payables 300
Total 9,455
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Current assets
Inventories 1,000
Cash and bank balances 1,200
Total 9,455
Note 1: The Company has achieved a major breakthrough in its consultancy services in Middle East
following which it has entered into a contract of rendering services with Finland Inc for INR 6 billion
during the year. The termination clause of the contract is equivalent to INR 7 Million and is payable
in case transition time schedule is missed from 15th December 2022. The management however is
of the view that the liability cannot be treated as onerous.
Note 2: The Company is not able to assess the final liability for a particular tax assessment
pertaining to assessment year 2018-2019 wherein it has received a demand notice of INR 6 Million.
However, the company is contesting the same with CIT (Appeals) as on the reporting date.
Statement of Profit & Loss
Particulars NoteNo. Year ended 31 March 2020
(₹ in lakh)
Expenses:
Employee benefit expense 1,200
Depreciation 999
Tax expense (150)
Profit after tax 951
Notes to Accounts:
Note 1: Reserves and surplus (₹ in lakh)
Capital reserve 500
Surplus from P & L
Opening balance 49
Additions 951 1,000
Total 2,000

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Total 5,555
Note 3: Deferred tax
Deferred tax liability (200)
Total 300
Total 150
Note 5: Trade Receivables
Considered good (outstanding within 6 months) 1,065
Considered doubtful (due from past 1 year) 40
Provision for doubtful debts (5)
Total 1,100
(i) Share capital comprises of 100 million shares of ₹10 each.
(ii)Term Loan from bank for ₹ 5,555 million also includes interest accrued and due
of 555 million as on the reporting date.
(iii) Reserve for foreseeable loss is created against a service contract due within
6months.
(iv) Inventory should be valued at cost ₹1,500 lakh, NRV as on date is ₹1,200
lakh.
(v) A dividend of 10% was declared by the Board of directors of the company.
(vi) Accrued Interest income of ₹300 lakh is not booked in the books of the
company.
(vii) Deferred taxes related to taxes on income are levied by the same governing
taxlaws.
Identify and report the errors and misstatements in the above extracts and prepare corrected
Balance Sheet and Statement of Profit & Loss and where required the relevant notes to the
accounts with explanations thereof.
Solution:
Following adjustments /rectifications are required to be done
1. Reserve for foreseeable loss for ₹ 500 million , due within 6 months, should be a part of provisions.
Hence, it needs to be regrouped. If it was also part of previous year’s comparatives, a note should be
added in the notes to account on the regrouping done this year.
2. Interest accrued and due of ₹ 555 million on term loan will be a part of current liabilities. Thus, it should
be shown under the heading “Other Current Liabilities”.
3. Since the deferred tax liabilities and deferred tax assets relate to taxes on income levied by the
same governing taxation laws, these shall be set off, in accordance with Ind AS 12. The net DTA of ₹ 300 lakh will be
shown in the balance sheet.
4. The notes to trade receivables is incorrectly presented. The recommended notes would be as
below:
Trade receivables (Unsecured) consist of the following: INR in million
a) Over six months from the date they were due for payment
i. Considered good 0
ii. Considered doubtful 40

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Less: Provision for doubtful debts (5)
(A) 35
(b) Others
i. Considered good 1065
ii. Considered doubtful 0
Less: Provision for doubtful debts 0
(B) 1065
TOTAL 1100
5. It is common to have a termination clause in service contracts and having a termination clause
per se will not create a liability on the company. Para 14 to AS 29 states that a provision will be
recognized when:
(a) An enterprise has a present obligation as a result of a past event;
(b) It is probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to
settle the obligation; and
(c) A reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation. If these conditions are not
met, no provision should be recognized.
In the above case, there is nothing to show that there is a present obligation, and hence there is
no provision to be made. As per para 27 of AS 29, a contingent liability is recognized only where
the possibility of an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits is not remote. Since
there is no onerous liability as of date, the possibility of an outflow being remote, no contingent
liability arises. In fact, the management has wrongly worded ‘onerous liability’ in its notes to
accounts. Onerous liability arises only if the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligation under
the contract should exceed the economic benefits expected to be received under it, which
doesn’t seem to be the case as far as Arish Ltd. is concerned. Hence, this note shall be
eliminated.
6. The demand notice from the tax department that is under litigation is a clear instance of a
‘contingent liability’. Accordingly, the note should be revised as – ‘Contingent Liability- Demand
notice from income tax department pertaining to INR 6 Million, under contest with CIT (Appeals)
as on the reporting date.
7. The Statement to Profit and Loss needs to represent earnings per share, to be compliant with
AS 20
Revised extracts of the financial statements Balance Sheet
Equity share capital 1,000
Long-term borrowings 2 5,000
Current liabilities
Trade payables 300
TOTAL 9,255
ASSETS
Non - current assets
Fixed Assets 3 5655
Deferred Tax Assets 300
Current assets

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Inventories 1000
Cash and Cash Equivalents 1200
TOTAL 9255
Statement of Profit and Loss
For the year ended 31st March, 2020

Expenses
Employee benefits expense 1,200
Depreciation 999
Tax expense (150)
Profit for the period 951
Earnings per equity share
Basic 9.51
Diluted 9.51
Number of equity shares (face value of ₹ 10 each) 100 million
Revised Notes (wherever applicable):
Note on Reserves and Surplus (INR in
Million)
Capital reserve 500
Surplus from P & L
Opening balance 49
Additions 951 1,000
Total 2,000
Total 5,555
Interest on Term Loan 555
Total 705
MTP AUG 2018
QUESTION
What are the disclosures required in the Combined/Carved-out Financial Statements as described
in the Guidance Note on Combined and Carved-out Financial Statements?
SOLUTION
Disclosure is required in the notes to the combined / carve-out financial statements of the fact that
the information presented may not be representative of the position which may prevail after the
transaction. Similarly, the fact that resulting financial position may not be that which might have
existed if the carve-out business/combining businesses had been a stand-alone business should
also be disclosed. Comparatives are not necessarily required to be given for the combined/carve-

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
out financial statements. The following should also be disclosed in the combined/carve-out financial
statements:
(i) The purpose of preparation of combined/carve-out financial statements;
(ii) A list of combining businesses together with brief description of activities;
(iii)Statement of compliance with the applicable Accounting Standards;
(iv)The principal accounting policies followed in preparing the combined/carve-out financial
statements;
(v) The basis for allocation, critical assumptions, judgments, and estimates involved in the
preparation of combined/ carve-out financial statements;
(vi)Other disclosures as per the requirements of applicable Accounting Standards to the extent
relevant;
(vii) Where the accounting policies are not uniform in respect of the combining businesses,
disclosure of that fact along with the accounting framework followed;
(viii) Extent of balances (not having the characteristics of debt) treated as part of equity ;
(ix) The basis of pricing inter-group transfers and any change therein.
Growth Limited on 1st April, 2015 issued 50,000, 7% convertible debentures of face value of ₹ 100
per debenture at par. The debentures are redeemable at a premium of 10% on 31st March, 2020 or
these may be converted into ordinary shares at the option of the holder. The interest rate for equivalent
debentures without conversion rights would have been 10%. The date of transition to Ind AS is 1st
April, 2017.Suggest how Growth Limited should account for this compound financial instrument on
the date of transition. Also discuss Ind AS on 'Financial Instrument' presentation in the above
context. The present value of ₹ 1 receivable at the end of each year based on discount rates of 7%
and 10% can be taken as:
End of Year 1 2 3 4 5
7% 0.94 0.87 0.82 0.76 0.71
10% 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.68 0.62
SOLUTION:
Since the liability is outstanding on the date of Ind AS transition, Growth Ltd. is required to split
the convertible debentures into debt and equity portion on the date of transition. Accordingly,
first the liability component will be measured discounting the contractually determined stream
of future cash flows (interest and principal) to present value by using the discount rate of 10%
p.a. (being the marketinterest rate for similar debentures with no conversion option).
Calculation of Equity & Liability component on initial recognition
(₹)
Present Interest payments for 5 years on debentures by applying 13,26,500
annuity factor [(50,000 x 7% x 100) x 3.79]
PV of principal repayment (including premium) (50,000x110x0.62) 34,10,000
Total liability component 47,36,500
Total equity component (Balancing figure) 2,63,500
Total proceeds from issue of Debentures 50,00,000
Thus, on the date of transition, the amount of ₹50,00,000 being the amount of debentures will split as
under:
Debt ₹47,36,500

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
Illustration 1
ABC Ltd. is a company which is formed with charitable objects under Section 8 of the Companies
Act, 2013. As a result, the management of the company believes that as all the activities of the
company will be with the intent of charity, the CSR provisions are not applicable to ABC Ltd. as
these activities are activities in normal course of business.
Whether the provisions of CSR are applicable to ABC Ltd. provided it fulfils the criteria of
Section 135 of the Act?
Solution
Section 135 of the Companies Act is applicable to every company meeting the specified
criteria. As per section 2(20) of the Companies Act, ‘company’ means a company incorporated
under the Companies Act or under any other previous company law. This would imply that
companies set up for the purposes of CSR/public welfare are also required to comply with the
provisions of CSR.
Illustration 2 (MTP: OCTOBER,2019) (RTP:MAY,2019), (MTP MAY 2020) (MTP APR 2019)
ABC Ltd. is a company which has a net worth of ₹ 200 crore, it manufactures rubber parts for
automobiles. The sales of the company are affected due to low demand of its products.
Required financial details of the following financial years are as follows (₹ in crore)
March 31, 20X4 March 31, 20X3 March 31,20X2 March 31, 20X1
(Current year) projected
Net Profit 3.00 8.50 4.00 3.00
Sales (turnover) 850 950 900 800
Does ABC Ltd. has an obligation to form a CSR committee since the applicability criteria is
notsatisfied in the current financial year?
Solution
A company which meets the net worth, turnover or net profits criteria in immediate preceding
financial year will need to constitute a CSR Committee and comply with provisions of sections
135(2) to (5) read with the CSR Rules.
As per the criteria to constitute CSR committee -
1) Net worth greater than or equal to ₹ 500 Crore: This criterion is not satisfied.
2) Sales greater than or equal to ₹ 1000 Crore: This criterion is not satisfied.
3) Net profit greater than or equal to ₹ 5 crore: This criterion is satisfied in financial year ended
March 31, 20X3 i.e., immediate preceding financial year. Hence, the Company will be required
to form a CSR committee.
Illustration 3
ABC Ltd. manufactures consumable goods like bath soap, tooth brushes, soap cases etc. As part
of its CSR policy, it has decided that for every pack of these goods sold, ₹ 0.80 will go towards the
‘Save Trees Foundation’ which will qualify as a CSR spend as per Schedule VII. Consequently, at
the year end, the company sold 25,000 such packs and a total of ₹ 20,000 was recognised as CSR
expenditure. However, this amount was not paid to the Foundation at the end of the financial
year.
Will the amount of ₹ 20,000 qualify to be a CSR expenditure?
Solution
By earmarking the amount from such sale for CSR expenditure, the company cannot show it
as CSR expenditure. To qualify the amount to be CSR expenditure, it has to be spent. Hence,
₹ 20,000 will not be automatically considered as CSR expenditure until and unless it is
spent on CSR activities.
Illustration 4
Due to immense loss to Nepal in the recent earthquake, one FMCG Company undertakes various

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
commercial activities with considerable discounts and concessions at the related affected areas of
Nepal fora continuous period of 3 months after earthquake. In the Financial Statements for the year
20X1-X2, the Management has shown the expenditure incurred on such activity as expenditure
incurred to discharge Corporate Social Responsibility.
State whether the treatment done by the management of management is correct. Explain withreasons.
Solution
The statutory guidelines relating to CSR require the deployment of funds for the benefit of
the local area of the Company. Since Nepal is another country the expenditure done there i.e.
in Nepal shall not qualify to be accounted as CSR expenditure.
Further, it is presumed that the commercial activities performed at concessional rates are not
permissible as CSR activities. Therefore, the treatment done by the Management by showing the
expenditure incurred on such commercial activities in its financial statements as the expenditure
incurred on activities undertaken to discharge CSR, is not correct.
Illustration 5
ABC Ltd. is a company which is covered under the ambit of CSR rules. As part of its CSR
contribution an amount of ₹ 15,00,000 was spent as CSR expense towards the education of girl
child. The average net profit of the company for the past three years was ₹ 7 crore. As the
company incurred a CSR expensein excess of what is required by the rules, it decided to utilise
this expense as a carry forward to the next year and reduce next year’s CSR spend by ₹
1,00,000.
Can the excess expenditure towards CSR be carried forward to next financial year?
Solution
As per the current law of land, carry forward of excess amount over 2% of average profits,
will be allowed, if the company decides to adjust such excess against future obligation.
If the company decides not to carry forward such excess spend in full or in part, the same
tothe extent not carried forward is to be recognized as expense.
Illustration 6
After the havoc caused by flood in Jammu and Kashmir, a group of companies undertakes during
the period from October, 20X1 to December, 20X1 various commercial activities, with considerable
concessions/discounts, along the related affected areas. The management intends to highlight the
expenditure incurred on such activities as expenditure incurred on activities undertaken to discharge
corporate social responsibility, while publishing its financial statements for the year 20X1-20X2.
State whether the management’s intention is correct or not and why?
Solution
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Reporting is an information communiqué with respect to
discharge of social responsibilities of corporate entity. Through ‘CSR Report’ the corporate
enterprises disclose the manner in which they are discharging their social responsibilities. More
specifically, it is addressed to the public or society at large, although it can be squarely used by
other user groups also.
Section 135 of the Companies Act, 2013 mandated the companies fulfilling the criteria
mentioned in the said section to spend certain amount of their profit on activities as
specifiedin the Schedule VII to the Act. Companies not falling within that criteria can also spend on
CSR activities voluntarily. However, besides the requirements of constitution of a CSR
committee and a CSR policy, the corporate entities should also take care that expenditure
incurred for CSR should not be the expenditure incurred for the activities in the ordinary
course of business. If expenditure incurred is for the activities in the ordinary course of
business, then it will not be qualified as expenditure incurred on CSR activities.
Here, it is assumed that the commercial activities performed at concessional rates are the
activities done in the ordinary course of business of the companies. Therefore, the intention of the

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
management to highlight the expenditure incurred on such commercial activities in its financial
statements as the expenditure incurred on activities undertaken to discharge CSR, is not
correct.
Illustration 7
ABC Ltd. carries out CSR activities from rented premises in Pune. The rent paid for such premises
is disclosed as CSR expenditure and subsequently ABC Ltd. also claimed deduction of the same
under the Income-tax Act. Is this permissible?
Solution
CSR expenditure which is of the nature described under the section 30 to 36 of the Income-
tax Act shall be allowed as a deduction. Rent expenses can be claimed under section 30 of the
Act and hence it can be claimed as a deduction.
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
Question:1 –
A property is being constructed to operate CSR activities by a company. At the balance sheet
date, the cost of construction is treated as revenue expenditure. Are there any additional
disclosures required in the financials regarding this?
Solution:
General Instructions for Preparation of Statement of Profit and Loss under Schedule III to the
Companies Act, 2013, requires that in case of companies covered under Section 135, the
amount of expenditure incurred on ‘Corporate Social Responsibility Activities’ shall be
disclosed by way of a note to the statement of profit and loss. The note should also disclosethe
details with regard to the expenditure incurred in construction of a capital asset under a CSR
project.
Question:2 –
In the year 20X1, XYZ Ltd. falls within the purview of CSR provisions as per the Companies
Act, 2013 since its net profit for the financial year exceeded ₹ 5 crore. The company discharged
CSR obligations in the year 20X2. However, the net profit of the year 20X2 wasless than ₹ 5
crores. Also, it was also not satisfying the other two criteria of the section 135 for CSR
compliance. Therefore, the company stopped performing CSR activities from the year 20X3
onwards. Comment on the company’s accountability for CSR.
Solution:
Once a company has fulfilled the net worth / turnover / net profit criterion for one year it has
to fulfil its CSR obligations for the subsequent three financial years, even if it does not fulfil
any of these criteria in those years.
In the given case, XYZ Ltd. falls in the ambit of CSR obligations by fulfilling the criteria of net
profit exceeding ₹ 5 crores in the year 20X1. So it has to discharge its CSR obligations by
spending two percent of its average profit every year starting from 20X2 till 20X4. It cannot
stop spending on CSR activities as per the Act after 20X2.
MTP.RTP PAST PAPER
MTP: OCTOBER, 2018
Question:1
UK Ltd. has installed Wind Turbine Equipment at Rajasthan to generate electricity for which it has entered
into a Power Purchase Agreement (PPA) with the State Government. The terms of the PPA are as follows:
- The PPA is for an initial period of 3 years, renewable at mutual terms and conditions. The
Managementestimates the useful life of such project around 20 years.
- The price per unit is fixed for a period of one year and is renewed every year as per the State Government
policy.
- The Company's Management is of the view that the power generated by the project will be completely sold

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
to the State Government and not to any third party. However, there is no such restriction prescribed inthePPA.
- Currently the Company has classified the Wind Turbine Equipment as part of the Property, Plant &
Equipment and is charging depreciation on the same.
For the above PPA, which condition, as per the applicable Ind AS, is not relevant in determining whether
an arrangement is or contains a lease?
(A) Use of Specific Assets;
(B) Right to Operate the assets;
(C) Right to control the Physical access;
(D) Price is contractually fixed by the purchaser;
UK Ltd. also wants you to give your suggestion on the accounting of the above arrangement under
applicable Ind AS.
Solution:
As per paragraph 6 of Appendix C to Ind AS 17, “Determining whether an arrangement is, or
contains, a lease shall be based on the substance of the arrangement and requires an
assessment of whether:
(a) fulfilment of the arrangement is dependent on the use of a specific asset or assets (the
asset); and
(b) the arrangement conveys a right to use the asset.”
In the present case, the PPA with the State Government can be fulfilled by the use of the Wind
Turbine Equipment which is a specific asset. Accordingly, condition (a) above is satisfied.
With respect to condition (b), paragraph 9 of Appendix C to Ind AS 17 provides as below:
“An arrangement conveys the right to use the asset if the arrangement conveys to the purchaser
(lessee) the right to control the use of the underlying asset. The right to control the use of the
underlying asset is conveyed if any one of the following conditions is met:
(a) The purchaser has the ability or right to operate the asset or direct others to operate the
asset in a manner it determines while obtaining or controlling more than an insignificant
amount of the output or other utility of the asset.
(b) The purchaser has the ability or right to control physical access to the underlying asset
while obtaining or controlling more than an insignificant amount of the output or other utility of
the asset.
(c) Facts and circumstances indicate that it is remote that one or more parties other than the
purchaser will take more than an insignificant amount of the output or other utility that
will be produced or generated by the asset during the term of the arrangement, and the
price that the purchaser will pay for the output is neither contractually fixed per unit of output
nor equal to the current market price per unit of output as of the time of delivery of the
output.”
Accounting of the PPA with the State Government under applicable Ind AS:
Continuing the rationale to the above, in the present case, criteria (c) above is fulfilled since:
 The entire output of Wind Turbine Equipment is estimated to be consumed by the
purchaser i.e. the State Government
 The price paid by the State Government includes an element of revision in price every
year which makes the price for the output variable.
Accordingly, the PPA with the State Government contains an embedded lease arrangement.
Further to determine whether the lease arrangement is an operating lease or a finance lease,
paragraph 10 of Ind AS 17 provides certain examples (that individually or in combination would
normally lead to a lease being classified as a finance lease) which can be analysed as below:
(a) the lease transfers ownership of the asset to the lessee by the end of the lease term - Not
fulfilled, as the ownership is not transferred to the State Government.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
(b) the lessee has the option to purchase the asset after completion of the agreement - Not
fulfilled, as the State Government doesn’t have an option to purchase the Wind Turbine
Equipment after the completion of PPA.
(c) the lease term is for the major part of the economic life of the asset even if title is not transferred
- Not fulfilled, as the PPA is for 3 years whereas the useful life of the Wind Turbine Equipment
project is 20 years.
(d) at the inception of the lease the present value of the minimum lease payments amounts to
at least substantially all of the fair value of the leased asset – Cannot be determined since the
price per unit is not fixed for the entire tenure of the PPA. Definition of the ‘inception of the
lease’ (given in para 4 of Ind AS 17) inter alia states that in the case of a finance lease, the
amounts to be recognised at the commencement of the lease term are determined. This
implies that the given PPA is not a finance lease.
(e) the leased assets are of such a specialised nature that only the lessee can use them without
major modifications - Not fulfilled, as the asset is not specialised in nature.
Conclusion:
Based on the evaluation above, PPA with the State Government shall be accounted by UL Ltd.
as “Property, plant and equipment under an operating lease arrangement”.
MTP: AUGUST, 2018
Question:2
State whether any unspent amount of CSR expenditure (any shortfall in the amount that was expected to be spent
as per the provisions of the Companies Act on CSR activities) at the reporting date shall be provided for? Also
state in case the excess amount has been spent (i.e., more than what is required as per the provisions of the
Companies Act on CSR activities), can it be carry forward to set-off against future CSR expenditure.(5 Marks)
Solution:
(i) Treatment of any unspent amount of CSR expenditure
Since the expenditure on CSR activities is to be disclosed only in the Board’s Report, no
provision for the amount which is not spent, (i.e., any shortfall in the amount that was expected
to be spent as per the provisions of the Act on CSR activities and the amount actually spent
at the endof a reporting period) may be made in the financial statements.
The Act requires that if the specified amount is not spent by the company during the year, the
Directors’ Report should disclose the reasons for not spending the amount.
However, if a company has already undertaken certain CSR activity for which a liability has
been incurred by entering into a contractual obligation, then in accordance with the generally
accepted principles of accounting, a provision for the amount representing the extent to which
the CSR activity was completed during the year, needs to be recognised in the financial
statements.
(ii) Treatment of excess amount spent on CSR Activities
Since 2% of average net profits of immediately preceding three years is the minimum amount
which is required to be spent under section 135 (5) of the Act, the excess amount cannot be
carriedforward for set off against the CSR expenditure required to be spent in future.
RTP NOV 2020
QUESTION
In order to encourage companies and organisations to generously contribute to the Government’s
COVID-19 relief fund, taxation laws have been amended to reckon these contributions as
deductible for the financial year ending 31st March, 2020 even if the contributions are made after
the year end but within three months after year end. Government of India issued the notification on
31st March, 2020 by way of an Ordinance. Such contributions to COVID-19 funds are considered
for compliance with annual spends on corporate social responsibility (CSR) for the current
accounting year under the Companies Act, 2013. In this scenario, whether the contributions to
COVID-19 Relief Funds made subsequent to reporting date of the current accounting period can be

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
provided for as expenses of the current accounting period? Also show its impact on deferred tax, if
any.
SOLUTION
According to paragraph 14 of Ind AS 37, a provision shall be made if:
(a) an entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event;
(b) it is probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle
the obligation; and
(c) a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation. If these conditions are not met
as of reporting date, no provision shall be recognised for that financial year.
Government of India issued the notification on 31st March, 2020 by way of an Ordinance and hence,
it is most unlikely for any entity to have a present obligation on 31st March, 2020, for such a
commitment. As these conditions are not met as of reporting date of financial year 2019 - 2020, no
provision should be recognised in the financial statements for that financial year.
In the fact pattern given above, the accounting implications for the financial year 2019-2020 is as
follows: • Do not recognize expense / liability for the contribution to be made subsequent to the year
ended 31st March, 2020 as it does not meet the criteria of a present obligation as at the balance
sheet date. However, the expected spend may be explained in the notes to the accounts as the
same will also be considered in measurement of deferred tax liability.
• If the entity claims a deduction in the Income Tax return for the financial year 2019 - 2020 for that
contribution made subsequent to 31st March, 2020, recognise Deferred Tax Liability as there would
be a tax saving in financial year 2019 - 2020 for a spend incurred in subsequent year.
MTP APR 2018
QUESTION
Discuss whether any unspent amount of CSR expenditure is to be provided for?
ANSWER
Section 135 (5) of the Companies Act, 2013, requires that the Board of every eligible company,
“shall ensure that the company spends, in every financial year, at least 2% of the average net
profits of the company made during the three immediately preceding financial years, in pursuance
of its Corporate Social Responsibility Policy”. A proviso to this Section states that “if the company
fails to spend such amount, the Board shall, in its report specify the reasons for not spending the
amount”.
Further, Rule 8(1) of the Companies (Corporate Social Responsibility Policy) Rules, 2014,
prescribes that the Board Report of a company under these Rules shall include an Annual Report
on CSR, in the prescribed format.
The above provisions of the Act/Rules clearly lay down that the expenditure on CSR activities is to
be disclosed only in the Board’s Report in accordance with the Rules made thereunder.
In view of this, no provision for the amount which is not spent, (i.e., any shortfall in the amount that
was expected to be spent as per the provisions of the Act on CSR activities and the amount actually
spent at the end of a reporting period) may be made in the financial statements. The proviso to
section 135 (5) of the Act, makes it clear that if the specified amount is not spent by the company
during the year, the Directors’ Report should disclose the reasons for not spending the amount.
However, if a company has already undertaken certain CSR activity for which a liability has been
incurred by entering into a contractual obligation, then in accordance with the generally accepted
principles of accounting, a provision for the amount representing the extent to which the CSR
activity was completed during the year, needs to be recognised in the financial statements.
JAN 2021
QUESTION
Sun Shine Limited is a company which seems to be covered under the ambit of CSR rules. As part
of its CSR contribution an amount of ₹ 40,000 p.m. was spent by way of adoption of 2 families of

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
drought hit area. The average net profits of immediately preceding financial year was ₹ 1,80,00,000.
Please note that the company commenced its commercial activities only on the first day of the
immediately preceding financial year. The Accountant of the company says that CSR provisions are
not applicable to his company since it is one year old and in case if it is applicable he wants to carry
forward the excess amount spent on account of CSR activities to future years.
You are required to comment with the figures, whether the contention of the Accountant is correct in
context of CSR provisions?
SOLUTION
As per section 135 of the Companies Act 2013, every company having either
 net worth of ₹ 500 crore or more, or
 turnover of ₹ 1,000 crore or more or
 a net profit of ₹ 5 crore or more
during the immediately preceding financial year shall constitute a Corporate Social Responsibility
(CSR) Committee. In the given case, the average net profits of immediate preceding financial year
of Sun Shine Limited is ₹ 1,80,00,000 (i.e. ₹ 1.80 crore). Hence, net profit criteria is not met.
Company is covered under the ambit of CSR rules (assuming that net worth or turnover criteria is
met):
Since it is given in the question that the company seems to be covered under the ambit of CSR
rules, it is assumed that either the net worth of Sun Shine Limited might have exceeded ₹ 500 crore
or more, or turnover might have exceeded ₹ 1,000 crore or more during immediate preceding
financial year. Accordingly, CSR provisions are applicable to Sun Shine Limited irrespective of the
fact that the company is in second year of operations. If the company meets any one of the
thresholds in the immediately preceding previous year, then the contention of accountant is
incorrect that CSR provisions will not be applicable to the company as it is only one year old. The
accountant wants to carry forward the excess amount spent on account of CSR activities to future
years which is ₹ 1,20,000 [₹ 40,000 x 12 - (₹ 1,80,00,000 x 2%)]. However, there is no provision to
carry forward the excess CSR expenditure spent  in a particular year. Hence, here also the
contention of the accountant is incorrect. The excess expenditure made shall be considered as
voluntary made by the entity.
NOV 2018
QUESTION
Baby Limited manufactures consumable goods for infants like bath soap, cream, powder, oil etc. As
part of its CSR policy, it has decided that for every pack of these goods sold, ₹ 0.75 will go towards
the "Swachh Bharat Foundation" which will qualify as a CSR spend as per Schedule VII.
Consequently, at the year end, the company sold 40,000 such packs and a total of ₹ 30,000 was
recognized as CSR expenditure. However, this amount was not paid to the Foundation at the end of
the financial year. Will the amount of ₹ 30,000 qualify to be CSR expenditure?
SOLUTION
Baby Ltd. has earmarked 75 paise per pack to spend as CSR activities. However, only by
earmarking the amount from such sale for CSR expenditure, the company cannot show it as CSR
expenditure. To qualify the amount as CSR expenditure, it has to be spent. Hence, ₹ 30,000 will not
be automatically considered as CSR expenditure till the time it is spent on CSR activities i.e it is
deposited to ‘Swachh Bharat Foundation’.
MAY 2018
QUESTION
What are the provisions of section 135 of the Companies Act, 2013 regarding constitution of a
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Committee. Also explain the role of Corporate Social
Responsibility (CSR) Committee and Board. XYZ Limited is a company which has net worth of ₹
250 crore. It manufactures parts for automobiles. The sales of the company are affected due to low
demand of the products. The previous year’s financial state of company are as below:

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
March 31, 20X8 March 31, 20X7 March 31,20X6 March 31, 20X5
(Current year) projected
Net Profit 4.25 8.00 3.50 3.25
Sales (turnover) 500.00 900 400 350.00
Examine, whether the company has an obligation to form a CSR committee since the applicability
criteria is not satisfied in the current financial year. (8 Marks)
SOLUTION
A. As per section 135 of the Companies Act 2013
Every company having either
❖ net worth of ₹ 500 crore or more, or
❖ turnover of ₹ 1,000 crore or more or
❖ a net profit of ₹ 5 crore or more
during any financial year shall constitute a Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Committee
of the Board consisting of three or more directors (including at least one independent
director).
B. Role of Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Committee The CSR Committee shall—
(a) formulate and recommend to Board
a. a CSR Policy indicating the activities to be undertaken by the company as specified in
Schedule VII;
b. the amount of expenditure to be incurred on the above activities and
(b) monitor the CSR Policy of the company from time to time.
C. Role of Board
Board shall disclose-
(a) The composition of CSR Committee in its report
(b) Approve the recommended CSR Policy for the company
(c) Disclose the contents of such Policy in its report and place it on the company's website
(d) Ensure that the activities included in CSR Policy of the company are duly executed by
the company
(e) Ensure that the company spends, in every financial year, at least two percent of the
average net profits of the company made during the three immediately preceding financial
years by giving preference to the local area and areas around it where it operates
(f) In case the company fails to spend such amount, the Board shall specify the reasons for
not spending the amount.
D. In the given scenario
The MCA has clarified that ‘any financial year’ referred to under sub-section (1) of section
135 of the Act read with Rule 3(2) of Companies CSR Rule, 2014, implies ‘any of the three
preceding financial years’. A company which meets the ‘net worth’, ‘turnover’ or ‘net profits’
criteria in any of the preceding three financial years, but which does not meet the criteria in
the relevant financial year, is still required to constitute a CSR Committee and comply with
provisions of sections 135 of the Companies Act, 2013.
As per the criteria to constitute CSR committee –
1) Net worth greater than or equal to ₹ 500 Crore: This criterion is not satisfied.
2) Sales greater than or equal to ₹ 1000 Crore: This criterion is not satisfied.

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
INTEGRATED REPORTING
TEST YOUR KNOWLEDGE
QUESTION 1
State the categories defined in the International IR Framework for capitals. Comment whether an organisation
has to follow these categories rigidly.
SOLUTION:
Various categories of capital are:
 Financial
 Manufactured
 Intellectual
 Human
 Social and Relationship
 Natural
Organizations preparing an integrated report are not required to adopt this categorization or to structure their
report along the above lines of the capitals.
QUESTION 2
Can a Not-for Profit organisation do the Integrated Reporting as per the Framework?
SOLUTION
The Framework is written primarily in the context of private sector, for-profit companies of any size but it can also be
applied, adapted as necessary, by public sector and not-for-profit organizations.
QUESTION 3
Can an Integrated reporting be done in compliance to the requirements of the local laws to prepare a management
commentary or other reports?
SOLUTION
An integrated report may be prepared in response to existing compliance requirements. For example, an
organization may be required by local law to prepare a management commentary or other report that provides
context for its financial statements. If that report is also prepared in accordance with this Framework, it can be
considered an integrated report.If the report is required to include specified information beyond that required by
this Framework, the report can still be considered an integrated report if that other information does not obscure
the concise information required by this Framework.
RTP/MTP/ PAST PAPERS
MTP MAR 2021
QUESTION
Answer the following issues:
(i) State the categories defined in the International IR Framework for capitals. Comment whether
an organisation has to follow these categories rigidly.
(ii) Can a Not-for Profit organisation do the Integrated Reporting as per the Framework?
(iii) Can an Integrated reporting be done in compliance to the requirements of the local laws to
prepare a management commentary or other reports?
SOLUTION
(i) Various categories of capital are:
 Financial
 Manufactured
 Intellectual
 Human
 Social and Relationship
 Natural

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
Organizations preparing an integrated report are not required to adopt this categorization or to structure their
report along the above lines of the capitals.
(ii) The Framework is written primarily in the context of private sector, for-profit companies
of any size but it can also be applied, adapted as necessary, by public sector and not-
for-profit organizations.
(iii) An integrated report may be prepared in response to existing compliance requirements.
For example, an organization may be required by local law to prepare a management
commentary or other report that provides context for its financial statements. If that
report is also prepared in accordance with this Framework, it can be considered an
integrated report. If the report is required to include specified information beyond that
required by this Framework, the report can still be considered an integrated report if that
other information does not obscure the concise information required by this Framework.
MTP MAR 2018
QUESTION
What are the guiding principles for preparation and presentation of Integrated Report?
SOLUTION
The following Guiding Principles underpin the preparation and presentation of an integrated report,
informing the content of the report and how information is presented:
1. Strategic Focus and Future Orientation
An integrated report should provide insight into the organization’s strategy and how it relates
to the organization’s ability to create value and to its use of and effects on the capitals in
short, medium and long term period. The report should clearly show the linkages between
strategy, risks and opportunities, current performance, as well as future outlook and targets.
2. Connectivity of Information
An integrated report shows the connections between the different components:
 Organisation's business model
 External factors that affect the organisation
 Various resources and relationships on which the organisation and its performance are
dependent upon
3. Stakeholder Relationships
An integrated report should provide insight into nature and quality of the organization’s
relationships with its key stakeholders including how and to what extent the organization
understands, takes into account and responds to their legitimate needs and interests.
4. Materiality
A focus on materiality should assist in avoiding irrelevant and detailed information from
cluttering the report. The integrated report is a high-level, concise report that contains only
the most material matters and information affecting the organisation and its ability to create
value over time. Additional information can be placed in supporting reports.
5. Conciseness
An integrated report should be concise. It implies that the information should be accessible
through crisp presentation, the omission of immaterial information, and a logical easy-to-
follow structure.
6. Reliability and Completeness
An integrated report should include all material matters, both positive and negative, in a
balanced way and without material error. Integrated reporting requires that consideration is
given to both good and bad news and performance. Furthermore, both the increases and

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
reductions in the value of the important capitals should be reflected.
MTP MAR 2019
QUESTION
What is Integrated Reporting and what are its salient features?
SOLUTION
Principle Based Approach
The International Framework (the Framework) takes a principles-based approach. This Framework
identifies information to be included in an integrated report for use in assessing an organization’s
ability to create value; it does not set benchmarks for such things as the quality of an organization’s
strategy or the level of its performance. It intent to strike an appropriate balance between flexibility
and prescription that recognizes the wide variation in individual circumstances of different
organizations while enabling a suffici ent degree of comparability across organizations to meet
relevant information needs.
Targets the Private Sector or Profit Making Companies
This Framework is written primarily in the context of private sector, for-profit companies of any size
but it can also be applied, adapted as necessary, by public sector and not-for-profit organizations.
Identifiable Communication
An integrated report may be prepared in response to existing compliance requirements, and may be
either a standalone report or be included as a distinguishable, prominent and accessible part of
another report or communication. It should include, transitionally on a comply or explain basis, a
statement by those charged with governance accepting responsibility for the report. An integrated
report is intended to be more than a summary of information in other communications (e.g.,
financial statements, a sustainability report, analyst calls, or on a website); rather, it makes explicit
the connectivity of information to communicate how value is created over time.
Financial and Non-financial Items
The primary purpose of an integrated report is to explain to providers of financial capital how an
organization creates value over time. It, therefore, contains relevant information, both financial and
other.
Value Creation
Value created by an organization over time manifests itself in increases, decreases or
transformations of the capitals caused by the organization’s business activities and outputs. That
value has two interrelated aspects – value created for:
• The organization itself, which enables financial returns to the providers of financial capital
• Others (i.e., stakeholders and society at large)
JAN 2021
QUESTION
With respect to Integrated Reporting, state whether following statements are true or false with
reason for your answer:
(i) An integrated report is necessarily to be a stand-alone report;
(ii) The framework of Integrated reporting is written primarily for private companies;
(iii) A report prepared as required by local law containing a management commentary or
other report that provides context for its financial statements can serve the purpose of
Integrated reporting; and
(iv) An integrated report should include only positive material matters. (6 Marks)

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1
SOLUTION
(i) False. An integrated report may be prepared in response to existing compliance
requirements and may be either a standalone report or be included as a distinguishable,
prominent and accessible part of another report or communication.
(ii) True. The Framework is written primarily in the context of private sector, for-profit
companies of any size but it can also be applied, adapted as necessary, by public sector
and not-for-profit organizations.
(iii) True. If the report is required to include specified information beyond that required by
this Framework, the report can still be considered an integrated report if that other
information does not obscure the concise information required by this Framework.
(iv) False. An integrated report should include all material matters, both positive and
negative, in a balanced way and without material error. Both the increases and
reductions in the value of the important capital should be reflected. Where the
information is not perfectly accurate, estimates should be used and appropriate
processes should be in place to insure that the risk of material misstatement is reduced.

FR QB Black&White

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FR QB Black&White

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FR QB Black&White

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UAB 4560 74B5A69 9A1

dOWNLOAD mOBILE aPPLICATION:

JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION

Sl no. chaPter name Page no.

Sl no. chaPter name Page no.

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095)

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 1

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 2

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 3

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 4

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 5

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 6

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 7

Accumulated depreciation Dr. 55,000

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 8

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 9

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 10

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 11

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 12

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 13

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 14

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 15

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 16

PAST QUESTION PAPERS (WITH SOLUTION)

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 17

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 18

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 19

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 20

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 21

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 22

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 23

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 24

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 25

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 26

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 27

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 28

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 29

MOBILE APP : JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION (JAGATI DIGITAL EDUCATION)

CA PRATIK JAGATI (7002630110/9864047095) Page 30